83
USER GUIDE www.oncenter.com

On-Screen Takeoff Guide · Section 1 Introduction 3 About this Guide This guide is intended to be a compliment to On-Screen Takeoff software. The sections are presented in

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

USER GUIDE

wwwoncentercom

Table of Contents

SECTION 1 - INTRODUCTION 1 Welcome to On-Screen Takeoff2 About this Guide 3 Extrashelliphellip 4

Instruction Jargon4 Typographic Conventions 5

Help File 5 Contents Tab 6 Index Tab6 Search Tab 7

SECTION 2 - SETUP 8 Minimum System Requirements 9 Recommended Components 9 Compatible File Formats 9

Convert To TIF 10 Installing Your Digitizer 10 SECTION 3 - TOOLBARS AND MENUS 11 Toolbars 12

Viewing Toolbars 12 Moving Toolbars 13 Docking Toolbars 13 Hiding Toolbars13 Resizing Toolbars13 Customizing Toolbars 13

Menushellip 14 Filehellip14 Edit 14 View hellip15 Tools 15 Image 15 Help 15 Digitizer15

SECTION 4 - FEATURES 16 Start On-Screen Takeoff 17

Quick Start Video 18 On-ScreenTakeoff Environment 18

Image View 19 Takeoff View 19 Worksheet View20

Navigating On-Screen Takeoff 20

Auto Scrolling 20 Changing Pages 20 Hot Links 21

SECTION 5 - PROJECTS 22 Project Template Files 23

Saving a Project as a Template 23 Modifying a Template23

Opening an Existing Project 24 Creating a New Project24 Project Properties25 Adding Pages to Projects 25

Individual Electronic Plans 25 Group of Electronic Plans26 Paper Plans 26

Setting Up Drawing Template 27 Setting Takeoff Area 27 Setting Scale for Specific Pages28 Calculating Scale28 SECTION 6 - CONDITIONS AND TAKEOFF 29 Creating Conditions 30 Condition Attributes 31 Linear Conditions 31

General 31 Advanced 31

Area Conditions 32 General 32 Advanced 32

Count Conditions33 General 33 Advanced 33

Zone Conditions 33 Condition Notes 34 Condition Results 35 Copying Conditions 35 Editing Conditions 35 Deleting Conditions 36 Organizing Project Conditions 36

Creating Folders and Sub-Folders36 Copying Folders 36 Renaming Folders 36 Changing Condition Order 36

Drawing with Conditions37 Snap Angles 37

Drawing a Linear Object 37 Continuous Mode 38 Drawing a Curve 38

Drawing an Area Object 39 Grid Options 40 Grid Calculation 40 Backout Mode41

Drawing a Count Object 41 Drawing a Zone 41 Selecting Objects 42 Moving and Resizing Objects 42

Linear42 Area and Zone 42 Count 42

Layers 43 Default Layers 43 Creating Layers43 Assigning a Layers to a Condition44 View and Hide Layers44 Assigning Text to a Layers45

SECTION 7 - PRINTING AND EXPORTING 46 Print Setup 47 Printing Images 47 Printing Takeoff Lists and Worksheets 48 Print Preview 49 Exporting49

Using Copy Paste Feature49 Using Export Feature50 Exporting Worksheet to Excel 52 Exporting Takeoff to CVS52

SECTION 8 - ADVANCED FEATURES 53 Features to Use With Objects54

Roping Feature 54 Applying a Drop Run Count 55 Edit Drop Run Count 55 Adding Text in Image View55 Formatting Text 56

Object Properties 56 Linear Objects 56 Area Objects57 Count Objects57

Advanced Features of Conditions 57 The Round Feature 57

Pitch 57 Advanced Features of Project Properties58

Selecting Multiple Pages 58 Changing Image Assigned to a Drawing 59 Changing Image File Path59 Delete Page from Project Propertiesl 59

Advanced Features of Tool Options 60 Calculation Method60 Configuration Tab 60 Font Tab 61

Renaming the Current Page61 SECTION 9 - SAVING AND EXITING 62 Saving Your Project63

The Auto-Save Feature63 Exiting63 APPENDIX I - INSTALLING YOUR DIGITIZER 65 APPENDIX II - TOOLBAR ITEM DETAILS 67 APPENDIX III - LOADING PLANS FROM A DODGE CD 72 APPENDIX IV -USING THE PLAN VIEWER 73 APPENDIX V - FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS 75 INDEX 78

Section 1

1

Introduction

This section will

Help you become familiar with On-Screen Takeoff and the User Guide

Give Full Mode users information on how the product works with a digitizer

Section 1 Introduction

2

Welcome to On-Screen Takeoff This extraordinary software gives you bidding advantage in less time with greater accuracy by allowing you to perform complex takeoffs right on your computer screen

On-Screen Takeoff can be used with a digitizer and paper plans or a mouse and electronic plan files On-Screen Takeoff enables the user to create live drawings with resizable conditions linear conditions such as walls pipes and electrical lines area conditions such as floors and ceilings count conditions such as sprinkler heads corner beads doors and windows and zone conditions that assess quantities for any part of an area you specify As you record conditions using your plans the program provides reports on quantities and can recalculate instantly for any adjustment to the conditions of your project

New and experienced users will enjoy the power of this estimating system that is very easy to use As with all products from On Center Software this program works well for most construction trades and is ready to use the day you receive it So start bidding jobs more quickly and accurately today with On-Screen Takeoff This program is equipped with three modes View Mode allows the user to perform quick takeoffs view previously created files and drawing zoom to view plans better and print drawings (see Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer for more details) Lite Mode adds the use of zones Full Mode allows the user to perform more advanced takeoff options including layers and working with a digitizer The mode is referenced in the lower left corner of the program screen

If you currently have View or Lite Mode and are interested in performing more advanced takeoffs a

purchase request button has been provided on the main toolbar Clicking will take you to a webpage purchase form You can also call an On-Center Software Account Representative 1-800-880-8254 or visit us on the web at wwwoncentercom for more details

Section 1 Introduction

3

About this Guide This guide is intended to be a compliment to On-Screen Takeoff software The sections are presented in an order intended to help new users understand the software The User Guide provides detailed information about On-Screen Takeoff tools and commands It is designed to assist you in applying program features to your estimating projects Use it as a reference tool along with the online help system in your day to day work with On-Screen Takeoff

Table of Contents outlines the sections and topics covered in each section

Section 1 Introduction explains the user guide and helpful resources

Section 2 Setup lists system requirements and recommended components

Section 3 Toolbars and Menus explains the toolbars and menus used in On-Screen Takeoff

Section 4 Features gives you a tour of the On-Screen Takeoff environment and shows you how to navigate through your projects

Section 5 Projects leads you through your first time with the program or if yoursquore an old hand at On-Screen Takeoff reacquainting yourself with the software

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff shows you features of working with condition objects zones and backouts in the takeoff area

Section 7 Printing and Exporting explains the step-by-step of printing images and reports copying and pasting data from On-Screen Takeoff and exporting quantity results to an Excel spreadsheet

Section 8 Advanced Features discusses special and advanced features of On-Screen Takeoff conditions and options

Section 9 Saving and Exiting explains how to save projects and safely exit the program Appendixes gives you additional information on installing a digitizer toolbar item details loading files using the plan viewer and frequently asked questions Index provides key words or phrases the program application and references the page(s) in the user guide where they can be found

Section 1 Introduction

4

Extras Along the way yoursquoll encounter bits of information that make the User Guide not only more readable but more personal and relevant The signs and signals placed throughout the guide will better help you understand On-Screen Takeoff and On Center Software We think yoursquoll find these bits and pieces interesting Herersquos what to look for

NOTE

To make special notice of specific information

Caution Warning This symbol is there to insure that you are following the information to minimize risk

This symbol represents information that also appears on the Quick Start Video

In this manual some information is specific to using a digitizer The icon appears alongside this information (Must be in Full Mode to use a digitizer)

A reminder is there to keep the information in mind for future consideration

For Your Informationhellip

Instruction Jargon

In this guide click or double-click refers to clicking on the left mouse button A right-click clicking on the right mouse button will be specifically stated

Click the digitizer refers to clicking down once with the stylus pen

NOTE When using a digitizer a click or double-click refers to pressing the ball tip of the stylus pen right on the digitizer (usually in the takeoff area) A right-click can be accomplished by using the digitizer mouse template and the first button on the stylus pen See Appendix I Installing You Digitizer for more information

Drag and drop is holding down the left mouse button after clicking on an object You may simply drag the object to the desired location and release the mouse button

Section 1 Introduction

5

Typographic Conventions

The following are typographical conventions to be aware of when reading this guide

Menu items you are instructed to choose appear in a different typeface with the greater than (gt) symbol separating each menu level For example if you are instructed to select the Open command in the File menu it appears as File gt Open If you are instructed to select the Save As command from the File menu it appears as File gt Save As

Helpful hints or information about the topic are provided throughout the document They will be labeled lsquoNOTErsquo (all caps and bold font to catch your attention)

Several topics will have more detailed steps outlined in either another section of the user guide or in the Appendix They will always be referenced and italicized For example ldquoSee Editing Conditions for more informationrdquo

Help File In combination with this User Guide and the Quick Start video (Help gt Watch Quick Start Video) the Help File will also be a great resource for product information and application There are additional resources available on the website at wwwoncentercom or Help gt Visit our Website Follow these instructions to open the Help file

1 Select Help gt Help Topics

2 This will open the On-Screen Help File

Hide and Show Buttons

The Hide and Show buttons will either remove or display the Topics panel in the Help dialog

Back Button

The Back button takes you back to the last help page you viewed It will be available only if you have navigated through multiple pages in the help file

Print Button

Clicking will print the topic displayed This is helpful if the instructions to follow are long and you prefer to work on a full screen

Options Button

The Options button will allow you to pick from a list of commands to help you navigate the Help file

Section 1 Introduction

6

Contents Tab This tab provides a quick breakout of the Contents of the help file It should be used like the Table of Contents of a book Simply double-click on the book icon to open the chapter Then click the desired page icon to display the relevant information

Index Tab This tab allows you to locate a specifically indexed topic This should be used as you would a book index Begin typing a word in the index entry field and the system will automatically move within the list to the entries closest in spelling to your word(s) Begin typing the topic word to access it in the list quickly

Section 1 Introduction

7

Search Tab This tab works like a word find It allows you to search for any word contained in the Help file Type the

word you are looking for in the lsquoType in the keyword to findrsquo field Click A list of topics containing that word will appear Scroll through the list and double click on the topic you want displayed

Section 2

8

Setup

This section will

Let you know what system requirements you will need to have in place

Recommend components that work well with the software

Help Full Mode users install a digitizer

Section 2 Setup

9

Minimum System Requirements To use On-Screen Takeoff your computer must meet the following minimum system requirements

An IBM PC or 100 compatible computer with a Pentium II or faster Intel processor

Memory Requirements 200 MB of available hard-disk space and256 MB RAM (128 MB preferred)

Windows 2000 SP4 and Windows XP SP2 256 color video card Super VGA display card Mouse 15-inch monitor

While these are the minimum system requirements Windows places heavy demands on your systems resources The more available memory in your computer the faster and more efficient On-Screen Takeoff will operate

Recommended Components

For the best performance we recommend the following components

Pentium III or faster processor

512 or more of RAM

12X speed CD-ROM or better

17-inch monitor or dual monitors Graphic adapter with 128 MB or more VRAM Sound card and speakers installed

NOTE In order to utilize the Training Videos you must have a sound card and speakers installed

Compatible File Formats The resolution in electronic plans does not need to be more that 200 DPI (Dots per Inch) The preferred file format is a black and white TIF (Group4) On-Screen Takeoff recognizes image files with the following extensions

File Extensions View Mode Lite Mode Full Mode TIF X X X PDF X X X OSE X X X JPG X X X CPC X X X CAL X DGN X DWG X DXF X OSP X PLN X PLT X

Section 2 Setup

10

NOTE Use the following image types for best results

Convert to TIF

The converted files will be stored in a folder with the name of the current On-Screen Takeoff project Since the conversion can be very time consuming you should only select this option if you really intend to convert vector files to TIF

1 Select File gt Project Properties

2 In the Pages Field add your image See Section 5 Establishing Project Setting Adding Pages

3 Click

4 Then select the page with the drawing you wish to convert

5 Click

Installing Your Digitizer The following instructions are a quick start to installing your digitizer For more specific information please reference Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer at the end of this guide

Connecting Your Digitizer

Upon receiving your digitizer (either a GTCO or another brand) you will need to connect it to your computer

1 Lay the digitizer out flat

2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer

3 Plug in the power supply

4 Plug the interface cable into the digitizer

5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into the computer

NOTE On-Screen Takeoff is compatible with any tablet that is WinTab compatible

Digitizer options are only available in Full Mode If you are in View or Lite Mode and would like

to use this feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade

Section 3

11

Toolbars and Menus

This section will

Introduce the program toolbars

Familiarize you with On-Screen Take Offtrade Menu options

Section 3 Toolbars and Menus

12

Toolbars On-Screen Takeoff is equipped with several helpful toolbars for application efficiency See Appendix II Toolbar Item` Details for a detailed description of each toolbar item Individually the toolbars may be displayed moved docked reshaped or hidden from view You can also create costume toolbars to fit your needs

Main Toolbar

Tool Toolbar

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Takeoff Toolbar

Image Toolbar Viewing Toolbars Toolbars are displayed on the screen and will be consistent on each tab or page (Some toolbars or toolbar items will be in an inactive state if they donrsquot have a supporting element in the application)

1 Select View gt Toolbars and select the appropriate toolbar name

OR

2 Right-click on a toolbar region of the screen

3 Check the toolbars you want to display

Section 3 Toolbars and Menus

13

Moving Toolbars The toolbars may be positioned anywhere on the screen you wish This feature is provided to allow the flexibility for positioning the toolbars so they are out of your way yet handy for use

1 Click on an edge of the toolbar holding down the mouse button drag it to its new position

2 Release the mouse button to set it in place

NOTE If the toolbar is dropped anywhere other than a screen edge it will become free floating This feature is especially handy when using multiple monitors

Docking Toolbars The toolbars can be docked to any of the screen edges

1 Click on the title bar of an undocked toolbar

2 Drag the toolbar to any location on the screen

Hiding Toolbars

1 Select View gt Toolbars and select the toolbar you wish to remove from the screen

2 Right-click on the toolbar or dock bar areas

3 A floating toolbar can be closed by clicking on the in the upper right corner of the toolbar

Resizing Toolbars Only undocked (floating) toolbars may be resized

1 Position the mouse pointer over an edge

2 Click and drag

3 The toolbar can be resized as desired

Customizing the Toolbars You may rearrange or delete buttons within a toolbarrsquos display or you may move buttons from one toolbar to another If you find that you use a few tools over and over you may want to group them within a single toolbar for convenience On-Screen Takeoff gives you the flexibility to customize your takeoff environment

1 Select Tools gt Customize The Customize dialog will open

2 With the dialog open click on a toolbar button and drag buttons from one toolbar to another or a new location within the same toolbar

3 To add a button without altering another toolbar click on the Commands tab of the Customize dialog and drag the appropriate symbol from the Buttons section to a toolbar

4 To remove a button drag it to within the takeoff area of the application

Section 3 Toolbars and Menus

14

Menus

Section 3 Toolbars and Menus

15

Digitizer Menu

Section 4

16

Features

This section will

Show you how open On-Screen Takeoff

Describe the On-Screen Takeoff environment

Teach you how to navigate pages

Section 4 Features

17

Start On-Screen Takeoff

1 On your desktop double-click your On-Screen Takeoff icon

2 The application will open

OR

3 Left-click on the Start button on your computerrsquos toolbar

4 Scroll up to Programs gt On Center Software

5 Highlight On-Screen Takeoff and click On-Screen Takeoff will open On-Screen Takeoff opens to an untitled blank project The Image view of the screen will be a blank page

Two blank dock bars the Pan dock bar and the Takeoff dock bar appear at the left side of the screen Along the bottom the Status bar displays user status or context-sensitive messages as well as paper size and current zoom percentage of the plan sheet on screen The menu bar and several task specific toolbars are located at the top of the screen

NOTE All toolbars and dock bars may be accessed to view or hide through View gt Toolbars on the menu bar

Section 4 Features

18

Quick Start Video When On-Screen Takeoff opens you will be given an option to watch the Quick Start video (recommended) or start the program without watching the video

The 20 minute video will demonstrate key program functionality and allow you to view application instruction for enhanced learning

If you would like to watch the video click If you prefer to get started without

the video click If you have already viewed the video click the lsquoDo not show this message againrsquo box to prevent this dialog from appearing each time you open the program

NOTE If you decide later that you would like to watch the Quick Start video go to Help gt Watch

Quick Start Videos

On-Screen Takeoff Environment The On-Screen Takeoff environment acts like your drafting table allowing you to work on several sheets of plans at once and to reference at a glance the entire drawing and your position on that drawing while giving you the power of a computer to track analyze print and export your takeoff quantities and plans

The screen is bordered at the top by the Menu bar with pull-down menus and at the bottom by the Status bar which indicates current user status plan page size and current zoom percentage of page The largest portion of the application screen will be your takeoff area bounded on the left (by default) by two dock bars and on the top by several toolbars

In the takeoff area you may view your project plans (images) andor takeoff objects the takeoff list with quantities the worksheet or a legend of your condition list

The main window of On-Screen Takeoff has three tabs located at the bottom left allowing for quick change between Image Takeoff or Worksheet views Select the desired view option on the toolbar and it will automatically open on your screen

Section 4 Features

19

Image View

This view shows the plan file andor takeoff conditions drawn from your plans

Takeoff View This view displays the height if applicable and quantity breakdowns of your conditions according to result types indicated (eg linear feet square feet or count of items) for zones pages and the project as a whole It also displays notes per condition

Section 4 Features

20

Worksheet View This view displays the condition and quantity in units of measure specified in the first results field of the Results tab in the Condition dialog and allows the user to enter amounts for material labor and subcontractor takeoffs

NOTE When in the Worksheet view tab out the field then save This is keep all the values saved

Navigating On-Screen Takeoff

Auto Scrolling When creating linear areas or zones On-Screen Takeoff will automatically scroll the image view when necessary It will move as your mouse or digitizer moves beyond the edge of the current view

Changing Pages

1 Select View gt Next Page Previous Page or Go To Page (specify page number for the Go to Page option)

2 You may also select the corresponding arrows for these options from the Navigate Toolbar The

drop down arrow in the Page field will list the pages The and arrows will take you to the

previous or next page The and arrows will take you to the first or last page

OR

Section 4 Features

21

3 Or press Ctrl G for the Go To Page dialog

Hot Links Hot links allow you to move quickly from one drawing to the pertinent area of another drawing A hot link is handy when viewing enlarged areas of a page and needing the ability to jump back to a reference page

1 Select Tools gt Hot Link

OR

2 Click from the Tools Toolbar

3 Click on the page where you want to set the link The Hot Link dialog will open

4 Using the current page display on the Navigate Toolbar access the pull-down menu of pages by

clicking on the arrow at the right

5 Select the page for your link (You may also choose View gt Go to Page and select by page number)

6 Manipulate the view using the zoom tool and the scroll bars

7 Click

8 After joining a hot link to another page the hot link arrows in the Navigation Toolbar will become active

9 Move a hot link to another location on the page by clicking then click and drag the hot link image anywhere on the page

Section 5

22

Projects

This section will

Help you create settings important to your projects

Explain how On-Screen Takeoff works with your electronic or paper plans

Section 5 Projects

23

Project Template Files You can begin your project with a template Templates allow you to take advantage of conditions and settings used with previous projects

On-Screen Takeoff templates contain condition lists and established layer separations from previous projects you have created You may also use the sample templates provided with On-Screen Takeoff as a great starting point All aspects of the templates may be adjusted for a new project

1 Select File gt New and click the OK button

2 From the New dialog box choose the template that best fits your project

3 The conditions for this template will appear in the Takeoff Dock bar and the Project Properties dialog will open asking for further information

4 Use File gt Save or File gt Save As to rename and save your new project

Saving a Project as a Template File You can save your condition properties and layers as a template for future projects

1 Select File gt Save As

2 Enter a name for your template and select On-Screen Takeoff Template Files (tpo) from the Save As type field of the dialog (click on the down arrow to select)

3 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog Modifying a Template File Follow these steps to modify an existing template file if you need to change or add conditions andor layers

1 Select File gt Open

2 Navigate to your Projects directory

3 In the File Type drop-down select On-Screen Takeoff Template files (tpo)

4 Choose the On-Screen Takeoff template file you would like to modify and click the OK button

5 Make appropriate changes

6 Save and close file

The On-Screen Takeoff template files cannot save takeoff information

Section 5 Projects

24

Opening an Existing Project File 1 Select File gt Open

2 Navigate to the desired file location

3 Click the Open button

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask

you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Creating a New Project

1 Select File gt New

2 For a blank untitled project click

3 At this point the Project Properties dialog will pop-up for more information about your takeoff

NOTE The following are important to keep in mind when beginning a new project

At the start of your project fill out the Project Properties settings to establish the name for all printed output from your project set the default page size and scale for your plans number and names of different pages within the project and locations of electronic drawings

Scale settings can significantly affect quantity outcomes Be sure to set the scale for each page of drawings before beginning condition takeoffs

When using a digitizer remember to make a mark with a pen or pencil in the upper left and lower right corners of the first sheet of the paper plans to delineate the takeoff area for that sheet You can then set the takeoff area on On-Screen Takeoff using your marks

Save your project before you begin taking off any conditions On-Screen Takeoff will write a back-up file using the same file name

Remember the Undo feature If you make a mistake select Edit gt Undo and reverse the process step by step

Section 5 Projects

25

Project Properties

You can either set your Project Properties when you create a new takeoff or once your project file is saved under the appropriate name

1 Select File gt Project Properties the Project Properties dialog box will appear

2 Type in the name of your project to appear on printouts Use the backspace andor delete keys to edit the name as necessary

3 Press the Tab key to move to the Default Image Size option or click within the Image Size box You may click on the arrow at the right for the pull-down menu of page size options or you can use the down-arrow key on your keyboard to scroll through the list to the appropriate selection

4 Press the Tab key to move to the Default Scale option Select a scale by using the drop down arrow If your scale is metric you will need to click in the box next to Metric to convert to that measurement

5 Establish the number of pages for your project plans And load image files See Adding Pages to

Your Project

Adding Pages to Projects Individual Electronic Plans

1 Click on in the Project Properties dialog

2 In the Add Images dialog use the drop down arrow to navigate to the appropriate directory and folder containing your image

3 Select the file so that it displays in the File name field then click The file will display by name and path in the Image File field in Project Properties dialog

4 Click to accept and your project will automatically open

5 Save your project with the new settings by selecting File gt Save

Section 5 Projects

26

Electronic plans scanned from blueprints (as opposed to blue lines) will display as white lines on a black background and are difficult to read on your computer screen Select Image gt Invert and the colors will invert to black on white

You may have noticed the Page column in the Project Properties dialog Generally plan images occupy one page and 1 will be listed in the column indicating Page 1 of your plan file If you import a multi-page TIF a plan file containing more than one page of plans they will import as separate pages and each successive page will be indicated under the Page column as 1 2 3 etc of the plan file

Group of Electronic Plans You may add all the electronic plan files from a particular source (for example from a CD) by using the Auto Add feature

1 Click the button in the Project Properties dialog

2 Browse until you find the appropriate directory and folder containing your plan images

3 Click on any file displayed within your target folder so that the file name appears in the File name box of the Auto Add dialog

4 Click The image paths and file names will be recorded into the project properties arranged alphabetically

5 Click to accept your choices and your project will automatically open

6 Save your project with the new settings by selecting File gt Save

To load Dodge Plans into your Project Properties see Appendix IIi Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

Paper Plans On-Screen Takeoff makes it easy for Full Mode users to perform quantity takeoffs from paper plans using a digitizer

1 Add pages by clicking until you have the number of pages initially in the project

2 Name each page by clicking within the Title area and typing the name

3 Click to accept your choices and close the Project Properties dialog

4 Save your project with the new project properties settings by selecting File gt Save

Section 5 Projects

27

Setting Up a Drawing Template On-Screen Takeoff provides the convenience of using the same work surface for both digitizer and mouse to allow the user to draw conditions and then edit settings of the project or add or change conditions without breaking stride A mouse pad template included with the program defines the area of the digitizer in which use of the stylus or cursor will be recognized as mouse movement as opposed to drawing movement

1 Place your stylus on On-Screen Takeoff

2 Placing the template identifies the location mouse movements will be recognized by the program

Before placing the template the template must be applied to the digitizer surface This may have been done during the installation of your digitizer We suggest attaching the template to the lower right corner of the digitizer surface about one inch inside the grid area

3 Select Digitizer gt Place Template

4 Follow the instruction prompts on the screen clicking first on the target symbol at the left of the On-Screen Takeoff box on the template then on the target at the right

Setting Takeoff Area Before you can begin taking off a drawing you must define the drawing area on the digitizer This requires defining an area that will include all objects on each drawing of your plans As you add pages to your takeoff the same area of the digitizer will be active

1 Secure the plans to the digitizer with tape or a set of clamps

2 With a pen or a pencil mark the upper left corner and the lower right corner of the first page in your set of plans

3 Select Digitizer gt Set Takeoff Area

4 Click each mark with the stylus pen as prompted

5 Verify the active area of the digitizer by looking at the image size located in the lower right corner of your screen

If you close the program before the takeoff is complete you will need to reestablish the takeoff area before you can add additional condition quantities

Electronic plans appear on your computer screen eliminating the need to set a takeoff area You simply drag your mouse across the conditions you wish to takeoff The conditions will be highlighted and quantities will be totaled instantly Electronic plans are available through a variety of services For information contact an On Center Software account manager

Section 5 Projects

28

Setting Scale for Specific Pages You may set the scale in each page view separately This will override the default scale setting in Project Properties for that page Setting the correct scale for the drawing before taking off quantities ensures accurate calculations Be careful to check the scale for each drawing in your project before doing takeoffs

1 Display the page you want to set select Edit gt Set Scale

2 Use the drop down arrow to select a scale that will be applied to that page

3 Click

OR

4 Access the pull-down scale settings on the Navigate toolbar

NOTE As you draw objects notice that the drawn object is similar in width to the object on your plans If it is not the scale set may not be correct

Calculating Scale You may calculate scale according to a known measurement between two points either with a digitizer or on electronic plans

1 Select Edit gt Calculate Scale using Image or Edit gt Calculate Scale using Digitizer

2 Follow the instructions in the related Calculate Scale dialog box You will be asked to click on the first and second points then to enter the dimension for that distance

3 The scale will be recalculated for the displayed page and the Scale display on the Navigate toolbar will show the new scale

Section 6

29

Conditions and Takeoff

This section will Draw Conditions to Takeoff Plan Quantities

What Zones will do to help your takeoff process

Discuss the ins and outs of Takeoffs

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

30

Creating Conditions

If you are starting a new project from scratch you will need to create conditions to takeoff quantities such as floor areas wall lengths and corner bead counts If you are using a template you will have several pre-designed conditions already listed on the Takeoff dock bar However you may want to change the characteristics of some conditions or create additional conditions for a particular project

1 Right Click within the Takeoff dock bar Select New gt Condition

Or

2 From the Takeoff dock bar Click (if the buttons are not showing right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select Show Buttons from the pop-up menu) The New Condition dialog appears

3 Select the condition type (Linear Area Count or Zone) from the pull-down menu accessed by the

down arrow next to the Type option

4 Press Tab or use the mouse (or stylus) to move to Name and enter a name for your condition

5 Specify the desired condition attributes See Condition Attributes for more detail

6 Click for condition to apply

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

31

Condition Attributes Each condition type will have related attributes to select or specify within the General and Advanced tabs of the New Condition dialog Once a condition has been used to takeoff a quantity from your plans certain attributes cannot be changed

All conditions allow the user to specify color and fill pattern for the object drawn

Linear Conditions

General Specify width and height by feet and inches Specify pitch in inches up to the nearest thousandth of an inch if applicable

Advanced Specify rounding for object quantities and droprun default length for electrical or plumbing drops at the ends of lines Select Connect to have lines connect at the corners where one line of the condition ends and another begins (and indicate Tolerance for the featurersquos activation as distance between the ends of two lines) Choose Trim to have lines automatically trim to a line being crossed Choose Curve to draw a curved line

Follow these examples for inputting feet and inches For 7 feet 6 inches type 706 for 13 feet 7 inches type 1307 For 20 feet type 2000

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

32

Area Conditions

General If needed you can specify the thickness (in inches) andor pitch (in inches)

Advanced Specify rounding for object quantities Choose to display an adjustable grid within the area and indicate matrix cell dimensions

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

33

Count Conditions

General

Specify height and indicate the size (in inches) and shape (square circle triangle rectangle or opening) of the count object as it will appear on screen

Advanced Count conditions have advanced attributes These options are available for all shapes except for openings

Zone Conditions Zones allow you to subdivide condition quantities making it easier to modify and complete jobs in phases They can be used at the end of a takeoff to isolate a group of condition quantities that are in different areas of the takeoff

Zones can also be used to break a takeoff into multi-phases and can even be used to isolate quantities while a job is in progress to group the amount of work that has been completed to date They can be applied to one or multiple pages in your plans automatically calculating the takeoff quantities for each zoned area

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

34

The zone feature is only available in Lite and Full Mode If you are in View Mode and would like

to use this feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade

Condition Notes A Note tab is provided for comments regarding the condition These notes will display on the Takeoff List report and will import into Quick Bid

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

35

Condition Results The Results tab of the New Condition is based on condition type Initial settings default to linear feet (LF) for linear conditions square feet (SF) for area conditions and count of items (EA) for count conditions and zones The first of the results fields will display for the condition items in the Takeoff dock bar area All results will display in worksheets and Takeoff List reports as well as in an Excel spreadsheet after being exported

Copying Conditions You may use the condition attributes from a condition yoursquove already created for any future conditions of the same type

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Click the Copy button from the toolbar

OR

3 Right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select copy

4 A new condition will appear in the list with the same condition attributes as the previous condition but with the quantities zeroed

Editing Conditions Once you have copied a condition you might want to change several attributes You can also edit an existing condition to fit any updated needs

1 Highlight the desired condition on the Takeoff dock bar

2 Click the Change button

OR

3 Double-click on the condition you wish to edit to bring up the Change Condition dialog

NOTE The Change Condition dialog differs from the New Condition dialog only in that if takeoffs

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

36

have been performed in your project with this condition you will not be able to change the type of condition or certain properties under the advanced tab of the dialog box

Deleting Conditions 1 Click on the condition in the Takeoff Dock bar area

2 Click the Delete button on the toolbar

OR

3 Right-click and select Delete from the pop-up menu

All takeoff associated with the deleted condition will be deleted immediately and permanently

Organizing Project Conditions Within your project you can create folders andor sub-folders for different types of conditions You may even want to create a folder containing conditions with reset values

To get started organizing your conditions make sure you are viewing the condition tree (right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select Show Tree)

Creating Folders and Sub-Folders 1 Right-click in the Takeoff Dock bar area

2 Select New gt Folder from the pop-up menu

Copying Folders

1 Click on the folder and click Copy on the toolbar

2 All copied conditions within the new folder will have values reset to zero

Renaming Folders

1 Click on the folder

2 Right-click and select Rename from the pop-up menu

3 Enter a name for your folder and click the Enter button

Changing Condition Order

You may move conditions up or down in the condition list of the Takeoff dock bar to suit your project needs

1 Select the condition you would like to move by clicking to highlight it

NOTE When you are ready to move the highlighted conditions be sure that you start

moving using the last condition chosen That condition will have a highlighted boarder

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

37

2 Drag and drop any the condition from one place to another in the list You may also move a condition to another folder on the list in this way

Drawing with Conditions Snap Angles Set up snap angles to prevent lines from appearing jagged Snap angles are commonly set at 15deg and shift snap angles at 0deg

1 Go to Tools gt Options Options dialog appears

2 Under the General tab make the desired settings

3 Click to save the settings As they are drawn lines will snap to the set degree

Drawing a Linear Object 1 Select a condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff dock bar

2 Move the cursor into the Image takeoff area of the screen you will see the cursor display as crosshairs

3 Click and hold left mouse button then drag mouse to draw a line

4 Release mouse button to set line

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

38

5 Repeat steps for further lines

Continuous Mode This feature allows you to draw an object that has connected lines

1 Click the icon from the Takeoff toolbar

OR

2 Go to Tools gt Continuous Mode

3 Follow steps 1-3 from Draw a Linear Object

4 Click at each point of intersection The object will be connected

5 Double-click after making the final point to set the lines

Drawing a Curve To draw a curved line the Curve option must be checked under the Advanced tab of the Condition dialog

1 Click where you want to begin the curve and drag in a straight line to the position for the other endpoint of the curve

2 Click on the line to select it Handles in the shapes of small squares will appear at either end of

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

39

the line and in the center of the line

3 Move the cursor over the center handles until the cursor becomes a two-way arrow

4 Click and drag in the direction of the curve bending the line as you move the cursor Release to set the curve (The line you began with will disappear)

Draw a circle by drawing two curved lines connected

Drawing an Area Object Area conditions are drawn similarly to continuous mode lines You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete your area takeoff

NOTE When drawing an area do not intersect the perimeter or line of the object you are drawing

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

3 The area will be filled with the pattern set for that condition

NOTE The simulated circle will be good enough for you to be able to make a bid

To create a circular area click from point to point with very short distances in between points simulating a circlersquos perimeter Double-click after setting the last point to set the area

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

40

Grid Options Grids give you an added advantage when installing materials such as tiles Use this feature to get a count for how many tiles are needed for an area

1 Double-click on an area condition in the Takeoff dock bar to open its Condition dialog

2 Click on the Advanced tab to show its options

3 Check the box next to Grid by clicking in it

4 Indicate the dimensions of the cell matrix in inches (For example 200 x 400)

5 Under Results tab choose each (EA) for one of the results fields This will tabulate a number of grid cells (including partial grid cells) in area

6 Click to save your settings

7 Use the Move Grid and Rotate Grid features in the Tools menu to manipulate the grid as desired

Grid Calculation

1 Go to Tools gt Options menu

1 Specify if On-Screen Takeoff automatically should Calculate Grid Position

2 If AreaGrid Size is selected On-Screen Takeoff will calculate the number of items needed to fill the grid based on grid demintions

3 Click to accept and close the dialog

To move a line at any angle (regardless of default setting) press the Shift key while moving the mouse

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

41

Backout Mode This feature allows you to take out part of an area and deduct that amount of square footage

1 Select Tools gt Backout Mode

2 Outline the are you want backed out as you would when drawing a regular area object (see Drawing an Area Object)

3 The outlined area will clear and quantities will be recalculated

NOTE The perimeter of the backout area will be added to the LF quantity for that condition

Drawing a Count Object Square triangle rectangle and circle shaped count objects can easily be placed on images

1 Select the condition

2 Click in the location where you want the object to appear

3 To place an opening-shaped count item like a door or window you must click over an existing linear object such as a wall

4 On the Results tab you can change the height properties to give you the result you need

5 If Backout is checked on the advanced tab for each count opening the opening-shaped count item will back out a corresponding section of the linear object

Opening shaped count items are sized at 3rsquo0rdquo by default

Drawing a Zone Zones are drawn in the same way as area objects and may be any polygonal shape You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete the zone perimeter

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

42

Selecting Objects

1 Use the Select Tool to select objects

You can also select all objects that correspond to a condition

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Right-click and choose Select All

3 All objects with this condition will be highlighted with squares as an outline

Moving and Resizing Objects Linear

1 To move or resize a linear object click anywhere on the line to select it

2 To move the line position your pointer over the center handles When the mouse is positioned over the handles you will see a two-way arrow You will only be able to move the line in the direction of the arrows

3 Drag the line to a new position

4 Clicking and dragging the handles on the ends of the line will allow you to lengthen or shorten your line

Area and Zone

1 To move an area object or zone in its entirety click and drag it to its new position

2 Grabbing a handle at a corner or intersection of the object will allow you to adjust and change its perimeter

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

43

Count 1 To move a square circle rectangle or triangle shaped count object click and drag

2 Click and drag an opening shaped count object along the length of the linear object to the desired position then release

NOTE An opening shaped count object may not be moved from its associated linear condition object however it may be moved up and down the length of the linear object

Layers On-Screen Takeoff allows you to sort and separate your takeoff objects within the same job and on the same page On-Screen Takeoff gives you this flexibility through the use of layers

By assigning different conditions to different layers (for example differentiating between floors ceilings and walls) you can choose to view all layers or turn off certain layers to display and print the remaining groups of conditions only You may also remove the background image of electronic plans add text and hot link symbols or print only your condition takeoffs

Layers are only available in Full Mode If you are in View or Lite Mode and would like to use this

feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade Default Layers

On-Screen Takeoff begins every project with three default layers Image Annotation and Default The Image layer holds the electronic plan files you may have in your project The Annotation layer possesses all text notations highlighting and hot links in the project The Default layer will appear in the Condition dialog when creating or editing a condition (listed in the takeoff dock bar) Conditions are assigned to the Default layer unless otherwise specified by the user

Creating Layers To assign a condition to a layer other than the default layer you must first create additional layers for your project

1 Select View gt Layers to open the Layers dialog

2 Click An unnamed layer will be added

3 Click within the empty box and type a name for your layer (for example Wall)

4 New layers are added as active layers The adjacent box under the Show column will be checked

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

44

Assigning a Layer to a Condition 1 Open the Condition dialog box by creating a new condition or editing an existing condition

2 Under the General tab click on the down arrow in the Layer field to display optional layers

3 Select the desired layer for the condition Only the Default layer and layers you have added will be displayed

4 Click

View and Hide Layers

1 Select View gt Layers

2 Under the Show column check the box to view or remove the check (by clicking on it) to hide the specific layer

3 Click to accept and close the Layers dialog

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

45

Assigning Text to a Layer When adding text to an image On-Screen Takeoff has the capability to assign the text to a specified layer

1 Select the Text Tool

2 Click at the point you want to place your text

3 Type in your text using the Enter key for line breaks

4 Click the drop down arrow next to the Layer field and select the desired layer

Section 7

46

Printing and Exporting

This section will

Printing options and procedures

Exporting data by copying and pasting

Exporting quantity results to Excel spreadsheets

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

47

Print Setup On-Screen Takeoff allows the user to print the image takeoff list and worksheet

1 Select File gt Print Setup The Print Setup dialog will open

2 Select a printer or leave the default selection listed (change from the default printer displayed by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the field)

3 Indicate page size and printer tray option (Source) Access page size options by clicking on the

down arrow at the right of the field

4 Choose Portrait or Landscape orientation

5 Click to accept and close the dialog

Printing Images The image area can include the electronic plans the takeoff objects added text and hot links To print a subset of these (for example just the takeoffs without the plans or the added text and hot link symbols) hide layers that you do not want to print (see Section 6 View and Hide Layers) When you are printing your images every page will show the scale of the takeoff you are printing

1 Click on the Image tab to display the area of your project

2 Select File gt Print (or Ctrl + P)

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

48

3 Select the desired view (What to print) and the Image Range

4 Click The second Print dialog will open

5 Change settings accordingly or click if you accept the default settings

Printing Takeoff Lists and Worksheets In Takeoff Lists and Worksheets you may hide columns to print only certain results or adjust column widths to fit the report within the page size selected

1 In Takeoff List or Worksheet view move your cursor to the right side of the columnrsquos title bar the cursor will display as a two-way arrow

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

49

2 Click and drag to adjust the width of the column Holding the mouse button you may

slide the title bar under the title bar to its left to hide the column completely

3 Select File gt Print or press Ctrl + P to access the Print dialog

4 Indicate desired printer and choose the number of copies

5 Click to print and close the dialog

When printing the condition list we suggest printing in landscape

To reset to the default column widths double-click on the right border of a column heading will reset the column to its right (or previously to its right before being hidden)

Print Preview 1 Select File gt Print Preview

2 Use and to vary your view 3 If viewing an image choose current full or scale view to see how it displays

4 For printed outputs that cover more than one page use and to view adjacent pages or click on the down arrow next to Page field and select the page you want displayed

Exporting Using the CopyPaste Feature You may copy all the data or sections from the worksheet and the takeoff list view in On-Screen Takeoff and paste it into another application When pasting into Excel the cell layout will be maintained

1 Highlight the areas you wish to paste Click and hold the left mouse button down as you drag the cursor over the area to be selected then releasing the mouse button

OR

2 Select the entire takeoff list quickly click on the left On-Screen Takeoff column header and hold and drag the cursor across the remaining column headings

The number of pages for the view selected will display in the lower left-hand corner The zoom percentage that applies to the view will be displayed in the lower right-hand corner next to page size of the drawing

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

50

3 In the worksheet view you may highlight rows by clicking on the numbered buttons to the left of each row clicking and dragging across column headings or clicking and dragging over individual cells in the worksheet

Click anywhere in the appropriate view to deselect the area

4 Once your selection is highlighted you may select Edit gt Copy or Ctrl C from the keyboard 5 On your monitor switch to the application into which you want to paste your selection 6 Select Edit gt Paste in the new application or simply press Ctrl + V to paste

The colored keys for conditions cannot be pasted

Using the Export Feature You may export condition quantities to specified cell location within an Excel worksheet file Cell target locations are assigned in the Results tab of the condition dialogs on the Export line relating to each quantity measurement type

On-Screen Takeoff will export takeoff quantity results for up to three different quantity types that you specify For instance you may want to know the number of square feet in a ceiling area as well as the number of linear feet in its perimeter

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

51

1 Bring up the Condition dialog by double-clicking on a condition in the takeoff dock bar or by

selecting the condition and clicking

2 Click on the Results tab to access its fields The default quantities for the condition type will display

3 For each results field click on the arrow to access the pull-down menu and select the appropriate quantity (for example SF LF EA etchellip)

4 Have your Excel spreadsheet opened and saved in a file

5 Specify the Excel spreadsheet cell locations where you want the results to go

6 For a cell in the first sheet of your spreadsheet type in the cell address (eg a1) Case is not important

7 For a cell on a successive sheet of your spreadsheet type in sheet the number followed by a comma and the cell address without any spaces (eg sheet2a1) Case is not important

8 Click

9 Select File gt Export gt Condition Qty to Excel

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

52

10 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

11 Click to export On-Screen Takeoff results to specified cell locations in the Excel file When you return to the Excel application you will see the values have been added to the specified cell locations in your spreadsheet

12 Save your Excel file

Exporting Worksheet to Excel

1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 From On-Screen Takeoff Select File gt Export gt Worksheet to Excel

4 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

5 Click When you return to the Excel application you will see the values from the Worksheet Tab have been added to your spreadsheet

6 Save your Excel file

Exporting Takeoff to CVS 1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 Click the Takeoff Tab in the project you want to export the information

4 Select File gt Export gt Takeoff to CSV

5 Browse to the location of the CSV spreadsheet file click file to select it

6 Click the Save

NOTE CSV files can be opened in Excel Lotus Access etc One may consider this option more of a ldquodumprdquo into a file

The Excel application must be active (it may be minimized on the application bar) with the target spreadsheet open in the application Otherwise an error will occur with the export operation that will affect both the On-Screen Takeofftrade file and the Excel spreadsheet

Section 8

53

Advanced Features

This section will

Some special features of working with condition objects in the takeoff area

Details of advanced options for conditions

Advanced features of the Project Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

54

Features to Use with Objects Roping Feature You can move copy or delete using this feature Using the Select tool (the pointer) you may select several objects at once by clicking and dragging an outline around the objects then releasing the mouse button Roping may select either objects completely within the outlined area (inclusive) or objects both within and touched by the outlined area (touching) Specify your roping preference under Tools gt Options

1 Click and hold the mouse button at a point on the screen near the objects to be selected and drag to surround the objects with an outline

2 Release the mouse button The objects will be selected

3 You may now

Move the group around on the page by clicking within the group dragging the mouse and releasing the button to place the objects

Delete the group of objects by clicking the Delete key or

Copy and paste by pressing Ctrl C to copy the group then Ctrl V to paste it The pasted copy of the grouped objects will appear slightly offset from the original objects

Section 8 Advanced Features

55

Applying a DropRun Count

Use the droprun feature when calculating quantities to take into account the drop or run of a linear condition such as electrical lines or plumbing pipes Drop or run lengths may be added separately to any linear condition on screen while a default droprun length may be indicated for a condition as a whole

1 Select the desired linear condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff Dock bar

2 Click the Change button in the toolbar to open the Change Condition dialog

3 Click the Advanced tab to access the advanced options and click inside the DropRun check box

4 Enter a default length to be applied to all of this condition Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches) You can leave the length blank and manually enter drop run on each segment drawn

5 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog

Edit DropRun Count

1 With the related linear condition in the Takeoff Dock bar highlighted or with the pointer tool selected

2 click on the desired linear object in the image takeoff area The Count button will become active

3 Click on the Count button (alternatively select Tools gt Count) The default droprun amount will show in the pop-up Count dialog (Default length will be zero if droprun has not been selected in this conditionrsquos properties)

4 Type in the desired length Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches)

5 Click the OK button The additional amount will be reflected in the corresponding quantity The new DropRun count will apply only to the object edited

Adding Text in Image View

On-Screen Takeoff allows you to place text comments around your quantity takeoffs that may be printed along with plan images and objects Text is automatically placed within the Annotation Layer (that includes text and hot links)

1 To place text on the image select the Text Tool and click at the point you want to place your text opening a text box

2 Type in your information clicking Enter for line breaks

3 When you are finished click the OK button to exit the text box

4 To reposition text simply click on the text (with the Text Tool active) to select it

5 Move the cursor over the text the cursor will now display as a four-way arrow

6 Click and drag the mouse to position the text as desired

Section 8 Advanced Features

56

1 To edit existing text use the Text Tool to double-click on the text to open the editing box

2 Enter additional text or use the Backspace key to delete text as necessary

Formatting Text Once created you may format the font size type style and color of your text

1 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Font or click on the Font button in the Takeoff Toolbar

2 Select the desired features (color options are disabled) and click the OK button

3 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Color or click on the Color button in the Takeoff Toolbar The Color dialog will open

4 Click on a color in the Basic Color palette or create a color and add to the Custom Colors palette (Be sure to click on the color in the Custom Colors palette to select it)

5 Click the OK button

Object Properties

Linear Objects

Linear objects may be set to connect at corners

A linear object may be set to trim automatically when crossing another linear object (Check the trim option under the advanced tab of the Condition dialog)

When you move a connected linear object objects automatically move and resize connected lines accordingly (quantities are then recalculated)

This feature requires that the connected linear object be moved using the center handles (does not apply when resizing the line from the ends)

Objects constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

Objects are measured from centerline to centerline

Section 8 Advanced Features

57

Area Objects When drawing an area use your escape key to undo the last line drawn You may reverse your

drawing of an area using the escape key

The area will not fill with color and pattern until the user double-clicks after the last line is set

Lines drawn to delineate an area object constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

After selecting an area to move or adjust position the mouse in the center to move the entire area position the mouse at the sides or corners to adjust the perimeter

Count Objects

All count objects are quantified by the physical number of objects per page and reported as EA for the UOM The quantity for the current Image View is (displayed in the Condition List) and the total quantity in your project is displayed in the Takeoff View and Worksheet View)

Square circle rectangle and triangle shaped count objects do not displace or subtract from other object quantities when placed on top of them However on the Advanced Tab for the count condition a connect property can be set (this is a check box) so that when a count object of this shape is put on top of a Linear type takeoff object it will move with the linear if said linear is moved

An opened-shaped count object must be placed within a linear object Opening shaped count objects may also be measured by linear foot or linear yard (EA SF and SY are also options) Opening shaped count items default to a width of 3rsquo 0rdquo at the time of creation This size can be changed The small medium and large size are not options on this type of condition anymore Check Backout on the Advanced tab for each Count object back out the footage (or yardage) of opening-shaped count objects in which they are placed

NOTE In order to see this Backout functionality (in quantity) for SY or SF deductions at least one of the

results for the Linear(s) this object will be placed on must be set to SY or SF and the count object must have a height quantity

Advanced Features of Conditions The Round Feature Under the Advanced tab of the linear and area Condition dialogues you may specify quantity rounding (in inches) For linear objects rounding applies to each linear object drawn For area objects rounding will apply to each segment of the area perimeter adjusting the perimeter and area calculations For example With a linear condition entering 12 in the Round field will round up each related linear object to the nearest 12 inches or one foot With this setting two walls of 1 4 would each round to 2 0 totaling 4 0

NOTE In the Takeoff Dock bar condition list and in the On-Screen Takeoff reports quantities will be displayed in whole numbers rounded up to the nearest foot However calculations are based on true quantities without rounding unless the Round Feature is engaged

Pitch Pitch may apply either to linear or area conditions It is measured in rise per linear foot Entering 12 indicates a 12 rise per 12 of linear distance (a pitch of 12 over 12) or an angle of 45deg

Section 8 Advanced Features

58

Advanced Features of Project Properties Selecting Multiple Pages

1 Select a single page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry

2 Drag the cursor down the column of numbers to select consecutive pages

3 Click on the blank button at the top of this column to select all pages in the Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

59

Changing Image Assigned to a Drawing 1 Select the page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry 2 Click the Change Image button The Change Image dialog box will appear

3 Navigate to the desired file and select by clicking on it

4 Click the Open button The electronic file assigned to the page will have been changed to reflect the new file choice

Changing Image File Path 1 Select pages as described above

2 Choose Change Folder

3 In the Change Folder dialog navigate to the appropriate folder

4 Click the OK button The file path will have been changed for the selected page entries

Delete a Page from Project Properties 1 Select the page you want to delete by clicking on its associated number (in the gray box at the

left of the entry)

2 Choose Delete Page

All Takeoff on the page will be deleted immediately and permanently

Section 8 Advanced Features

60

Advanced Features of Tool Options

Calculation Method On-Screen Takeoff has built-in calculation options to allow for faster work and faster saves until your takeoff is complete Calculation options are found by selecting Tools gt Options then clicking on the Calculation tab

Calculation method can be set to Automatic Automatic except Grids and Manual Manual will allow the program to operate more quickly while Automatic or Automatic except Grids allows the user to see quantity changes as takeoffs are made

In any mode you may press F9 to recalculate quantities for the On-Screen Takeoff current totals

Configuration Tab

When the ldquoPage Label (A01)rdquo radial button is chosen On-Screen Takeoff puts the numbered label on all the pages of in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar If the Page Descriptionrdquo radial button is chosen then a description of what takeoff is on that specific page will be shown in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar

This section of the configuration tab gives you options on how you want to export your information When the ldquoFolderSubfolder Namesrdquo radial button is chosen than on your file that you are exporting to will have all the conditions folders and subfolders In the Delimiter box you can choose the symbol that is needed to separate the information you are exporting Some files need semicolons () or colons () to make sure the information comes exported in is separated it the appropriate places

Section 8 Advanced Features

61

In previous versions of On-Screen Takeoff there are views that users need to have in order for them to display their information By either choosing ldquoOST 1xrdquo or ldquoOST 2xrdquo it will let the program know you want your columns of information exported in that specific format

When you have the Confirm Deletions radial button of ldquoYesrdquo chosen than every time you delete anything you will get a dialog box confirming your intentions of deletion

While working with your takeoff you have a choice to either view the legend of your conditions or hide it Choose whichever radial button that suits your needs

For those who prefer to use the Enter key to navigate in dialog boxes this option is just for that

Font Tab The Font tab is designed for you to make your own look and feel for the application At the bottom of this tab it will show you sample of the fonts and colors you have chosen

Renaming the Current Page You may change the name of the current page in the takeoff area of On-Screen Takeoff by selecting Edit gt Rename Page

This opens the Name Page dialog and you may simply type in a new name and click the Enter button The new name for the file will be reflected on the title bar for the page and in Project Properties

You also may access the Rename Page function by right-clicking in the takeoff area while in Image View and selecting the option from the pop-up menu that appears

Section 9

62

Saving and Exiting

This section will

Explain how to save projects

Show you how to safely exit the program

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

63

Saving Your Project

1 Select File gt Save 2 If your project has not previously been saved a Save dialog box will open to allow you to name

the file and choose the directory and folder in which to save your file 3 Once saved File gt Save will simply save the current version of the file

OR

4 Select File gt Save As then type in a new name for the file and save to the desired file path

The Auto-save Feature With the Auto-save feature On-Screen Takeoff automatically backs up your open project You may choose to have more than one level of backup files The first backup copy will have the extension b00 and successive files will be b01 b02 and so on If you have designated four levels of backup files after the fourth backup copy has been created (b03) the next file will be saved over the file with extension b00 Further backup saves will then rotate through the four backup files in the same way

1 Select Tools gt Options 2 In the Auto-save area (under the General tab) select the frequency of backup file creation (in

minutes) and the number of levels for the feature 3 You also may disengage the feature by clicking in the check box to clear it

The Auto-save feature automatically saves backup copies to the directory of the current project If you are working from a write-protected area such as a CD-ROM On-Screen Takeoff will place backup files in the On-Screen Takeoff folder

Exiting When you are finished using On-Screen Takeoff it is very easy to exit Exiting is very important because of security reasons If someone were to use your computer they could enter the application and view and manipulate information

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

64

On-Screen Takeoff closes the open project when you open another or create a new project or when you exit the program

1 Select File gt Exit

OR

2 You also may click at the upper right-hand corner of the application to exit

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

65

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer When you get your digitizer from GTCO you will need to connect it to your computer Follow the instructions outlined below to do this

Note For rollup digitizers the metal bar must be oriented to the top or right hand side

Connecting the Digitizer 1 Lay the digitizer out flat 2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer 3 Plug in the power adapter 4 Plug the interface (IO) cable into the digitizer 5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into an open serial port on computer

Note GTCO Technical support phone number is 410-381-6688 The electronic manual (on diskette) from GTCO contains more detailed installation and operation instructions for the GTCO digitizer model you have

Installing other Digitizer Drivers If you are using a GTCO Digitizer you will need to install the GTCO TabletWorks Drivers

If you are using a Digitizer not supported by GTCO Tablet Works 10 please contact the manufacturer of your digitizer for assistance with installation

Installing GTCO TabletWorks Drivers 1 Insert the On Center CD into the CD-ROM drive The CD Startup screen will open 2 Click on Install Software 3 Select Additional Software and Drivers 4 Select Digitizer Driver 5 Follow the instructions for installing TabletWorks 10

Adhering the Template The template is a small plastic sticker used to enable mouse function when using the digitizer with On-Screen Takeoff Place your template on your digitizer We suggest placing it in the bottom right corner of the digitizer about one inch inside the takeoff area

Note You may either peel off the back of the template and use the adhesive surface or you can tape the template down

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

66

Testing the Digitizer Drivers Before running OST you may test the digitizer by moving the stylus around on the digitizer pad it should move the mouse cursor (if mouse emulation is enabled)

If the digitizer does not move the mouse cursor on the screen

The superset codes may need to be reset Reset the superset codes by touching on the border of the digitizer with the stylus The digitizer should beep several times

The digitizer may not be communicating with the computer Be sure the COM port selected is correct Be sure the COM port selected is correct If you are not able to get the digitizer to move the mouse cursor you need to call GTCO technical support for help

Note The Mouse Emulation is not required for On-Screen Takeoff to work properly It is used only for the Template functionality if the digitizer is moving the cursor the wrong direction (up instead of sideways or vice-versa)

Click the L-shaped arrow symbol on the digitizer with the stylus

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

67

Appendix II Toolbar Items Main Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

68

Tool Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

69

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

70

Navigate Toolbar (Continued)

Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

71

Takeoff Toolbar (Continued)

Image Toolbar

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

72

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

This section will detail how to load plans from a F W Dodge CD-ROM into an On-Screen Takeoff project file ready for takeoffs

Dodge files may be added to the Project Properties dialog However loading the files in that way will load the files by number rather than name description If you want to load one page only from your Dodge CD You will have to rename the page to display the name rather than number of the file

To load plan files from a Dodge CD so that the files load sequentially by file number but are displayed by name rather than by number within your project follow the instructions below

Opening a Dodge project from a CD-ROM 1 Insert the CD into the drive 2 Choose File gt Custom 3 Choose Dodge Plans Project (plansdat) as the file type 4 Select the appropriate file type by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the Files of type

field 5 In the Look in field access your drive paths by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the

field then

Navigate to your CD-ROM drive Open the data folder and Open the Projects folder

6 Select the desired project and open its folder 7 Open the plansdat file 8 All the images will come in sequenced correctly for that job along with the full descriptions

(names) of each page If there is not a plans folder in the project folder then plans do not exist for that project on the CD Opening the plansdat file will yield an empty project

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

73

Appendix IV Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer The On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer is a limited version of On Center Softwarersquos commercial takeoff software If your status bar located at the very bottom of the main window says View Mode in the lower left-hand corner then you are using the Plan Viewer You can use the plan viewer to

View CD-based amp converted CAD drawings

View a previously created OST file and associated drawings

Download electronic plans online

Navigate through drawings

Quickly Takeoff linearsareas and counts

Zoom in to view the plan better

Print drawings directly from the viewer

Viewing an On-Screen Takeoff Project File

1 To open an OST file that was previously created with of On-Screen Takeoff 2 Select File gt Open 3 An Open dialog will appear if you do not see the OST file you are looking for select the

Look In drop down arrow 4 A drop down menu will appear listing the various folders drives and mapped drives located

on your computer select the correct drive or folder location and continue to browse to the location of your OST file

5 When you see your OST file double-click it to open it 6 Any takeoff and drawings should appear on the Image tab view

If you do not see the drawings but do see the colored takeoff layer the drawings may

not be located in the same place they were originally saved at Go to File gt Project Properties and check the Image File path for each listed page If the image file path is pointing to a CD drive make sure the CD is inside the CR-ROM

Downloading Electronic Plans If your Online Plan Service provides a special file format (OSX) required to use this feature of our plan viewer you can immediately downloaded all electronic plans of a project directly from our viewer

Most Plan Room web sites will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff when a request to download plans is made Your particular Plan Room may differ in operation so please contact the provider directly with questions on using the site

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

74

When you request to download or open a project file from a Plan Room you will usually have the open to open or save an OSX file Choosing open will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff Alternately you may choose to save the file to a local hard drive After you have saved the file either double-click it to launch On-Screen Takeoff or open the OSX file using On-Screen Takeoff by clicking File then Open and locating the file on your hard drive You will need to change the file type to OSX

After the OSX file is opened you will see an additional tab appear in the Conditions List window called Pages

The Pages tab shows the hierarchy of your project Gray file icons represent pages that have not been downloaded and blue icons represents pages that have been downloaded

To download a page simply double-click the page icon

If you wish to select a group of pages to download you can use the Ctrl or Shift key to multiple select them then click the Download button

If you wish to download all pages at once click the Download All button

Downloaded pages will now appear in the Project Properties dialog in the same order in which they appear in the Pages tab

Creating Quick Takeoffs With On-Screen Takeoff you can create quick takeoffs to measure quantities even if you dont have the full version of our program However using the Quick Takeoff functionality shows you just a fraction of what the full version can do

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar is located at the top of the image view It has three buttons designated for three types of takeoffs Linear Area and Count The Quantity drop down list will show secondary quantities for Linears and Areas The Units drop down allows you to select how you want your quantities displayed Feet Inches Yards Millimeters and Meters

NOTE Every time change the type of takeoff you are performing (switching from Area to Linear for example) the previous quantities and takeoff objects will disappear They will also disappear when you changes pages

NOTE You can use the Dimension Tool to basically measure the distance between two points or linears The distance will display on the status bar at the bottom of the application

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

75

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions General

Where is On-Screen Takeoff installed on my computer

Typically it is installed in CProgram FilesOn-Screen Takeoff

In Explorer how do I recognize On-Screen Takeoff file types

On-Screen Takeoff data is stored in a single file per job lsquojob name OSTrsquo On-Screen Takeoff templates are stored as lsquotemplate nameTPOrsquo

Can only one project at a time be open

Yes For that reason opening another project automatically closes the project on screen You will be asked to save any changes

Is only one scale allowed per page What about on drawings that have multiple detail sections on a page and each of those drawings have different scales

Yes For pages with drawings of different scales copy the drawing to another project page and set the appropriate scale

I cannot perform backout on an area that is along a linear

As a workaround use the On-Screen Takeoff layers feature to help you with this issue Electronic Images

How do I start a project from drawings that have been scanned and written to a CD-ROM

Open a new project Select File gt Project Properties and select Auto Add Navigate to your CD and the appropriate folder and select any image file in that location Click Open All files in the location will load into your project Recommended that images are copied from CD to hard drive for performance

If I get a disk of drawings in AutoCAD format (R13 or R14) can I read them in On-Screen Takeoff

Yes On-Screen Takeoff now reads DWG DXF and many other format that are saved with AutoCAD

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

76

When I click on the all pages button what is supposed to happen Currently nothing seems to change when I click on that button

The All Pages button is used to apply the Darken and Enhance Plans feature to all pages in the project (as opposed to only the current page on screen)

Is there a way to deduct a large skylight from an area condition

Yes with the related area condition selected in the Takeoff Dock bar unselect the Backout button on the Takeoff Toolbar then draw the Backout area The area quantity will be deducted from the related condition object and the linear measurement of the Backout perimeter will be added

Digitizer Issues

How do I connect a Digitizer to the computer

See Appendix I Connecting a Digitizer

The Place Template menu choice is disabled

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or the digitizer or the digitzer drivers are not installed

It wonrsquot let me select the Set Takeoff Area menu choice

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or no job is open a digitizer is not installed or the drivers are not installed

The digitizer stylus is not moving the cursor or crosshairs

Click S-0-1 superset on the digitizer

How do I convert my old GTCO Digitizer to work with On- Screen Takeofftrade

Call GTCO and they may be able to reconfigure your digitizer to be compatible with On-Screen Takeoff

Printing Issues Which Printers work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible printers include On-Screen Takeoff Hewlett Packard Epson and Canon printers If you are having printer difficulties please contact support and specify the type of printer along with other pertinent information Contact support at wwwoncentercomsupport or email supportoncentercom

Which Plotters work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible Plotters include Hewlett Packard DesignJet plotters and the EnCAD Cadjet II If you are having plotter difficulties please contact support and specify the type of plotter concerned

ViewingDisplay I can no longer see my condition list How do I get it back

The toolbars and Dock bars can be turned on and off through the View gt Toolbars menu options

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

77

This is also accessible by right-clicking in the toolbar area and selecting (or deselecting) a toolbar listed

I cannot view my folders in the condition list

Right-click in the Takeoff Dock barcondition list area and select Show Tree to display your folders

My Status Bar reads Viewer Mode and I am unable to draw conditions

On-Screen Takeoff needs to be Authorized Or you need to purchase an upgrade Click the Perform Advanced Takeoff button on the main toolbar

I hid a Dock bar and when I selected to view it again it appeared alongside the other Dock

bar instead of stacked on top of it How do I fix it

Pick up the Dock bar by clicking on the bar at the top and continuing to hold down the mouse button drag the Dock bar over the other one It will resize and appear stacked with the other

When I open image files from a CD the images are all upside down How do I get them right

side up

To flip pages from top to bottom follow the steps below 1 Click the All Pages button on the Image Toolbar (All Pages is engaged when the button

is not clicked) 2 Click the Flip Horizontal button on the Image Toolbar 3 Click the All Pages button again to disengage

Templates How do I create a Template

Follow the steps below 1 Create a typical project 2 Choose File gt Save As 3 Choose On-Screen Takeoff Template Files as the file type to save 4 Name the file This will save all of the condition setups as well as the layers for the

project

How do I create a new project from a template

Follow the steps below 1 Choose File gt New 2 Select a template from those listed in the New dialog This will open a new project with

conditions and layers saved from a previous project but no pages or takeoff

78

INDEX

Area Conditions 32

Area Objects 57

Auto Scrolling 20

Auto-save 63

Backout Mode 41

Calculation Method 60

Conditions 29

Configuration 60

Contents Tab 6

Continuous Mode 38

Count Conditions 33

Count Objects 57

Digitizer 10 65 76

Docking Toolbars 13

Dodge CD 72

Drawing 27 37

DropRun Count 55

Environment 18

Exiting 63

Exporting 49

Features 16

Font 61

Frequently Asked Questions 75

Grid 40

Help File 5

Hiding Toolbars 13

Hot Links 21

Image 19 59

Image files 9

Image Toolbar 12 71

Images 75

Index Tab 6

Layers 43

Linear Conditions 31

Linear Objects 56

Main Toolbar 12 67

Menus 14

Moving Toolbars 13

Navigate Toolbar 12 69

Navigating 20

On-Screen Takeofftrade 2

Page 59 61

Pages 20 25 28

Plan Viewer 73

Plans 26

Printing 47 76

Project Properties 25

Projects 22

Quick Start Video 18

Resizing Toolbars 13

Roping 54

Saving 63

Scale 28

Search Tab 7

Selecting Objects 42

Setup 8

Start On-Screen Takeofftrade 17

System Requirements 9

Takeoff 19 27

Takeoff Toolbar 70 71

Takeoff Toolbar 12

Template Files 23

TIF (Group4) 9

Tool Toolbar 12 68

Toolbar 67

Toolbars 12

View Toolbar 12 69

Viewing Toolbars 12

Worksheet 20

Zone Conditions 33

Zoom Toolbar 12 69

  • On-Screen Takeoff Lite
  • Table of Contents
  • Section 1 - Introduction
  • Section 2 - Setup
  • Section 3 - Toolbars and Menus
  • Section 4 - Features
  • Section 5 - Projects
  • Section 6 - Conditions and Takeoff
  • Section 7 - Printing and Exporting
  • Section 8 - Advanced Features
  • Section 9 - Saving and Exiting
  • Appendix I - Installing Your Digitizer
  • Appendix II - Toolbar Items
  • Appendix III - Loading Plans from a Dodge CD
  • Appendix IV - Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer
  • Appendix V - Frequently Asked Questions
  • Index

Table of Contents

SECTION 1 - INTRODUCTION 1 Welcome to On-Screen Takeoff2 About this Guide 3 Extrashelliphellip 4

Instruction Jargon4 Typographic Conventions 5

Help File 5 Contents Tab 6 Index Tab6 Search Tab 7

SECTION 2 - SETUP 8 Minimum System Requirements 9 Recommended Components 9 Compatible File Formats 9

Convert To TIF 10 Installing Your Digitizer 10 SECTION 3 - TOOLBARS AND MENUS 11 Toolbars 12

Viewing Toolbars 12 Moving Toolbars 13 Docking Toolbars 13 Hiding Toolbars13 Resizing Toolbars13 Customizing Toolbars 13

Menushellip 14 Filehellip14 Edit 14 View hellip15 Tools 15 Image 15 Help 15 Digitizer15

SECTION 4 - FEATURES 16 Start On-Screen Takeoff 17

Quick Start Video 18 On-ScreenTakeoff Environment 18

Image View 19 Takeoff View 19 Worksheet View20

Navigating On-Screen Takeoff 20

Auto Scrolling 20 Changing Pages 20 Hot Links 21

SECTION 5 - PROJECTS 22 Project Template Files 23

Saving a Project as a Template 23 Modifying a Template23

Opening an Existing Project 24 Creating a New Project24 Project Properties25 Adding Pages to Projects 25

Individual Electronic Plans 25 Group of Electronic Plans26 Paper Plans 26

Setting Up Drawing Template 27 Setting Takeoff Area 27 Setting Scale for Specific Pages28 Calculating Scale28 SECTION 6 - CONDITIONS AND TAKEOFF 29 Creating Conditions 30 Condition Attributes 31 Linear Conditions 31

General 31 Advanced 31

Area Conditions 32 General 32 Advanced 32

Count Conditions33 General 33 Advanced 33

Zone Conditions 33 Condition Notes 34 Condition Results 35 Copying Conditions 35 Editing Conditions 35 Deleting Conditions 36 Organizing Project Conditions 36

Creating Folders and Sub-Folders36 Copying Folders 36 Renaming Folders 36 Changing Condition Order 36

Drawing with Conditions37 Snap Angles 37

Drawing a Linear Object 37 Continuous Mode 38 Drawing a Curve 38

Drawing an Area Object 39 Grid Options 40 Grid Calculation 40 Backout Mode41

Drawing a Count Object 41 Drawing a Zone 41 Selecting Objects 42 Moving and Resizing Objects 42

Linear42 Area and Zone 42 Count 42

Layers 43 Default Layers 43 Creating Layers43 Assigning a Layers to a Condition44 View and Hide Layers44 Assigning Text to a Layers45

SECTION 7 - PRINTING AND EXPORTING 46 Print Setup 47 Printing Images 47 Printing Takeoff Lists and Worksheets 48 Print Preview 49 Exporting49

Using Copy Paste Feature49 Using Export Feature50 Exporting Worksheet to Excel 52 Exporting Takeoff to CVS52

SECTION 8 - ADVANCED FEATURES 53 Features to Use With Objects54

Roping Feature 54 Applying a Drop Run Count 55 Edit Drop Run Count 55 Adding Text in Image View55 Formatting Text 56

Object Properties 56 Linear Objects 56 Area Objects57 Count Objects57

Advanced Features of Conditions 57 The Round Feature 57

Pitch 57 Advanced Features of Project Properties58

Selecting Multiple Pages 58 Changing Image Assigned to a Drawing 59 Changing Image File Path59 Delete Page from Project Propertiesl 59

Advanced Features of Tool Options 60 Calculation Method60 Configuration Tab 60 Font Tab 61

Renaming the Current Page61 SECTION 9 - SAVING AND EXITING 62 Saving Your Project63

The Auto-Save Feature63 Exiting63 APPENDIX I - INSTALLING YOUR DIGITIZER 65 APPENDIX II - TOOLBAR ITEM DETAILS 67 APPENDIX III - LOADING PLANS FROM A DODGE CD 72 APPENDIX IV -USING THE PLAN VIEWER 73 APPENDIX V - FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS 75 INDEX 78

Section 1

1

Introduction

This section will

Help you become familiar with On-Screen Takeoff and the User Guide

Give Full Mode users information on how the product works with a digitizer

Section 1 Introduction

2

Welcome to On-Screen Takeoff This extraordinary software gives you bidding advantage in less time with greater accuracy by allowing you to perform complex takeoffs right on your computer screen

On-Screen Takeoff can be used with a digitizer and paper plans or a mouse and electronic plan files On-Screen Takeoff enables the user to create live drawings with resizable conditions linear conditions such as walls pipes and electrical lines area conditions such as floors and ceilings count conditions such as sprinkler heads corner beads doors and windows and zone conditions that assess quantities for any part of an area you specify As you record conditions using your plans the program provides reports on quantities and can recalculate instantly for any adjustment to the conditions of your project

New and experienced users will enjoy the power of this estimating system that is very easy to use As with all products from On Center Software this program works well for most construction trades and is ready to use the day you receive it So start bidding jobs more quickly and accurately today with On-Screen Takeoff This program is equipped with three modes View Mode allows the user to perform quick takeoffs view previously created files and drawing zoom to view plans better and print drawings (see Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer for more details) Lite Mode adds the use of zones Full Mode allows the user to perform more advanced takeoff options including layers and working with a digitizer The mode is referenced in the lower left corner of the program screen

If you currently have View or Lite Mode and are interested in performing more advanced takeoffs a

purchase request button has been provided on the main toolbar Clicking will take you to a webpage purchase form You can also call an On-Center Software Account Representative 1-800-880-8254 or visit us on the web at wwwoncentercom for more details

Section 1 Introduction

3

About this Guide This guide is intended to be a compliment to On-Screen Takeoff software The sections are presented in an order intended to help new users understand the software The User Guide provides detailed information about On-Screen Takeoff tools and commands It is designed to assist you in applying program features to your estimating projects Use it as a reference tool along with the online help system in your day to day work with On-Screen Takeoff

Table of Contents outlines the sections and topics covered in each section

Section 1 Introduction explains the user guide and helpful resources

Section 2 Setup lists system requirements and recommended components

Section 3 Toolbars and Menus explains the toolbars and menus used in On-Screen Takeoff

Section 4 Features gives you a tour of the On-Screen Takeoff environment and shows you how to navigate through your projects

Section 5 Projects leads you through your first time with the program or if yoursquore an old hand at On-Screen Takeoff reacquainting yourself with the software

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff shows you features of working with condition objects zones and backouts in the takeoff area

Section 7 Printing and Exporting explains the step-by-step of printing images and reports copying and pasting data from On-Screen Takeoff and exporting quantity results to an Excel spreadsheet

Section 8 Advanced Features discusses special and advanced features of On-Screen Takeoff conditions and options

Section 9 Saving and Exiting explains how to save projects and safely exit the program Appendixes gives you additional information on installing a digitizer toolbar item details loading files using the plan viewer and frequently asked questions Index provides key words or phrases the program application and references the page(s) in the user guide where they can be found

Section 1 Introduction

4

Extras Along the way yoursquoll encounter bits of information that make the User Guide not only more readable but more personal and relevant The signs and signals placed throughout the guide will better help you understand On-Screen Takeoff and On Center Software We think yoursquoll find these bits and pieces interesting Herersquos what to look for

NOTE

To make special notice of specific information

Caution Warning This symbol is there to insure that you are following the information to minimize risk

This symbol represents information that also appears on the Quick Start Video

In this manual some information is specific to using a digitizer The icon appears alongside this information (Must be in Full Mode to use a digitizer)

A reminder is there to keep the information in mind for future consideration

For Your Informationhellip

Instruction Jargon

In this guide click or double-click refers to clicking on the left mouse button A right-click clicking on the right mouse button will be specifically stated

Click the digitizer refers to clicking down once with the stylus pen

NOTE When using a digitizer a click or double-click refers to pressing the ball tip of the stylus pen right on the digitizer (usually in the takeoff area) A right-click can be accomplished by using the digitizer mouse template and the first button on the stylus pen See Appendix I Installing You Digitizer for more information

Drag and drop is holding down the left mouse button after clicking on an object You may simply drag the object to the desired location and release the mouse button

Section 1 Introduction

5

Typographic Conventions

The following are typographical conventions to be aware of when reading this guide

Menu items you are instructed to choose appear in a different typeface with the greater than (gt) symbol separating each menu level For example if you are instructed to select the Open command in the File menu it appears as File gt Open If you are instructed to select the Save As command from the File menu it appears as File gt Save As

Helpful hints or information about the topic are provided throughout the document They will be labeled lsquoNOTErsquo (all caps and bold font to catch your attention)

Several topics will have more detailed steps outlined in either another section of the user guide or in the Appendix They will always be referenced and italicized For example ldquoSee Editing Conditions for more informationrdquo

Help File In combination with this User Guide and the Quick Start video (Help gt Watch Quick Start Video) the Help File will also be a great resource for product information and application There are additional resources available on the website at wwwoncentercom or Help gt Visit our Website Follow these instructions to open the Help file

1 Select Help gt Help Topics

2 This will open the On-Screen Help File

Hide and Show Buttons

The Hide and Show buttons will either remove or display the Topics panel in the Help dialog

Back Button

The Back button takes you back to the last help page you viewed It will be available only if you have navigated through multiple pages in the help file

Print Button

Clicking will print the topic displayed This is helpful if the instructions to follow are long and you prefer to work on a full screen

Options Button

The Options button will allow you to pick from a list of commands to help you navigate the Help file

Section 1 Introduction

6

Contents Tab This tab provides a quick breakout of the Contents of the help file It should be used like the Table of Contents of a book Simply double-click on the book icon to open the chapter Then click the desired page icon to display the relevant information

Index Tab This tab allows you to locate a specifically indexed topic This should be used as you would a book index Begin typing a word in the index entry field and the system will automatically move within the list to the entries closest in spelling to your word(s) Begin typing the topic word to access it in the list quickly

Section 1 Introduction

7

Search Tab This tab works like a word find It allows you to search for any word contained in the Help file Type the

word you are looking for in the lsquoType in the keyword to findrsquo field Click A list of topics containing that word will appear Scroll through the list and double click on the topic you want displayed

Section 2

8

Setup

This section will

Let you know what system requirements you will need to have in place

Recommend components that work well with the software

Help Full Mode users install a digitizer

Section 2 Setup

9

Minimum System Requirements To use On-Screen Takeoff your computer must meet the following minimum system requirements

An IBM PC or 100 compatible computer with a Pentium II or faster Intel processor

Memory Requirements 200 MB of available hard-disk space and256 MB RAM (128 MB preferred)

Windows 2000 SP4 and Windows XP SP2 256 color video card Super VGA display card Mouse 15-inch monitor

While these are the minimum system requirements Windows places heavy demands on your systems resources The more available memory in your computer the faster and more efficient On-Screen Takeoff will operate

Recommended Components

For the best performance we recommend the following components

Pentium III or faster processor

512 or more of RAM

12X speed CD-ROM or better

17-inch monitor or dual monitors Graphic adapter with 128 MB or more VRAM Sound card and speakers installed

NOTE In order to utilize the Training Videos you must have a sound card and speakers installed

Compatible File Formats The resolution in electronic plans does not need to be more that 200 DPI (Dots per Inch) The preferred file format is a black and white TIF (Group4) On-Screen Takeoff recognizes image files with the following extensions

File Extensions View Mode Lite Mode Full Mode TIF X X X PDF X X X OSE X X X JPG X X X CPC X X X CAL X DGN X DWG X DXF X OSP X PLN X PLT X

Section 2 Setup

10

NOTE Use the following image types for best results

Convert to TIF

The converted files will be stored in a folder with the name of the current On-Screen Takeoff project Since the conversion can be very time consuming you should only select this option if you really intend to convert vector files to TIF

1 Select File gt Project Properties

2 In the Pages Field add your image See Section 5 Establishing Project Setting Adding Pages

3 Click

4 Then select the page with the drawing you wish to convert

5 Click

Installing Your Digitizer The following instructions are a quick start to installing your digitizer For more specific information please reference Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer at the end of this guide

Connecting Your Digitizer

Upon receiving your digitizer (either a GTCO or another brand) you will need to connect it to your computer

1 Lay the digitizer out flat

2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer

3 Plug in the power supply

4 Plug the interface cable into the digitizer

5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into the computer

NOTE On-Screen Takeoff is compatible with any tablet that is WinTab compatible

Digitizer options are only available in Full Mode If you are in View or Lite Mode and would like

to use this feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade

Section 3

11

Toolbars and Menus

This section will

Introduce the program toolbars

Familiarize you with On-Screen Take Offtrade Menu options

Section 3 Toolbars and Menus

12

Toolbars On-Screen Takeoff is equipped with several helpful toolbars for application efficiency See Appendix II Toolbar Item` Details for a detailed description of each toolbar item Individually the toolbars may be displayed moved docked reshaped or hidden from view You can also create costume toolbars to fit your needs

Main Toolbar

Tool Toolbar

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Takeoff Toolbar

Image Toolbar Viewing Toolbars Toolbars are displayed on the screen and will be consistent on each tab or page (Some toolbars or toolbar items will be in an inactive state if they donrsquot have a supporting element in the application)

1 Select View gt Toolbars and select the appropriate toolbar name

OR

2 Right-click on a toolbar region of the screen

3 Check the toolbars you want to display

Section 3 Toolbars and Menus

13

Moving Toolbars The toolbars may be positioned anywhere on the screen you wish This feature is provided to allow the flexibility for positioning the toolbars so they are out of your way yet handy for use

1 Click on an edge of the toolbar holding down the mouse button drag it to its new position

2 Release the mouse button to set it in place

NOTE If the toolbar is dropped anywhere other than a screen edge it will become free floating This feature is especially handy when using multiple monitors

Docking Toolbars The toolbars can be docked to any of the screen edges

1 Click on the title bar of an undocked toolbar

2 Drag the toolbar to any location on the screen

Hiding Toolbars

1 Select View gt Toolbars and select the toolbar you wish to remove from the screen

2 Right-click on the toolbar or dock bar areas

3 A floating toolbar can be closed by clicking on the in the upper right corner of the toolbar

Resizing Toolbars Only undocked (floating) toolbars may be resized

1 Position the mouse pointer over an edge

2 Click and drag

3 The toolbar can be resized as desired

Customizing the Toolbars You may rearrange or delete buttons within a toolbarrsquos display or you may move buttons from one toolbar to another If you find that you use a few tools over and over you may want to group them within a single toolbar for convenience On-Screen Takeoff gives you the flexibility to customize your takeoff environment

1 Select Tools gt Customize The Customize dialog will open

2 With the dialog open click on a toolbar button and drag buttons from one toolbar to another or a new location within the same toolbar

3 To add a button without altering another toolbar click on the Commands tab of the Customize dialog and drag the appropriate symbol from the Buttons section to a toolbar

4 To remove a button drag it to within the takeoff area of the application

Section 3 Toolbars and Menus

14

Menus

Section 3 Toolbars and Menus

15

Digitizer Menu

Section 4

16

Features

This section will

Show you how open On-Screen Takeoff

Describe the On-Screen Takeoff environment

Teach you how to navigate pages

Section 4 Features

17

Start On-Screen Takeoff

1 On your desktop double-click your On-Screen Takeoff icon

2 The application will open

OR

3 Left-click on the Start button on your computerrsquos toolbar

4 Scroll up to Programs gt On Center Software

5 Highlight On-Screen Takeoff and click On-Screen Takeoff will open On-Screen Takeoff opens to an untitled blank project The Image view of the screen will be a blank page

Two blank dock bars the Pan dock bar and the Takeoff dock bar appear at the left side of the screen Along the bottom the Status bar displays user status or context-sensitive messages as well as paper size and current zoom percentage of the plan sheet on screen The menu bar and several task specific toolbars are located at the top of the screen

NOTE All toolbars and dock bars may be accessed to view or hide through View gt Toolbars on the menu bar

Section 4 Features

18

Quick Start Video When On-Screen Takeoff opens you will be given an option to watch the Quick Start video (recommended) or start the program without watching the video

The 20 minute video will demonstrate key program functionality and allow you to view application instruction for enhanced learning

If you would like to watch the video click If you prefer to get started without

the video click If you have already viewed the video click the lsquoDo not show this message againrsquo box to prevent this dialog from appearing each time you open the program

NOTE If you decide later that you would like to watch the Quick Start video go to Help gt Watch

Quick Start Videos

On-Screen Takeoff Environment The On-Screen Takeoff environment acts like your drafting table allowing you to work on several sheets of plans at once and to reference at a glance the entire drawing and your position on that drawing while giving you the power of a computer to track analyze print and export your takeoff quantities and plans

The screen is bordered at the top by the Menu bar with pull-down menus and at the bottom by the Status bar which indicates current user status plan page size and current zoom percentage of page The largest portion of the application screen will be your takeoff area bounded on the left (by default) by two dock bars and on the top by several toolbars

In the takeoff area you may view your project plans (images) andor takeoff objects the takeoff list with quantities the worksheet or a legend of your condition list

The main window of On-Screen Takeoff has three tabs located at the bottom left allowing for quick change between Image Takeoff or Worksheet views Select the desired view option on the toolbar and it will automatically open on your screen

Section 4 Features

19

Image View

This view shows the plan file andor takeoff conditions drawn from your plans

Takeoff View This view displays the height if applicable and quantity breakdowns of your conditions according to result types indicated (eg linear feet square feet or count of items) for zones pages and the project as a whole It also displays notes per condition

Section 4 Features

20

Worksheet View This view displays the condition and quantity in units of measure specified in the first results field of the Results tab in the Condition dialog and allows the user to enter amounts for material labor and subcontractor takeoffs

NOTE When in the Worksheet view tab out the field then save This is keep all the values saved

Navigating On-Screen Takeoff

Auto Scrolling When creating linear areas or zones On-Screen Takeoff will automatically scroll the image view when necessary It will move as your mouse or digitizer moves beyond the edge of the current view

Changing Pages

1 Select View gt Next Page Previous Page or Go To Page (specify page number for the Go to Page option)

2 You may also select the corresponding arrows for these options from the Navigate Toolbar The

drop down arrow in the Page field will list the pages The and arrows will take you to the

previous or next page The and arrows will take you to the first or last page

OR

Section 4 Features

21

3 Or press Ctrl G for the Go To Page dialog

Hot Links Hot links allow you to move quickly from one drawing to the pertinent area of another drawing A hot link is handy when viewing enlarged areas of a page and needing the ability to jump back to a reference page

1 Select Tools gt Hot Link

OR

2 Click from the Tools Toolbar

3 Click on the page where you want to set the link The Hot Link dialog will open

4 Using the current page display on the Navigate Toolbar access the pull-down menu of pages by

clicking on the arrow at the right

5 Select the page for your link (You may also choose View gt Go to Page and select by page number)

6 Manipulate the view using the zoom tool and the scroll bars

7 Click

8 After joining a hot link to another page the hot link arrows in the Navigation Toolbar will become active

9 Move a hot link to another location on the page by clicking then click and drag the hot link image anywhere on the page

Section 5

22

Projects

This section will

Help you create settings important to your projects

Explain how On-Screen Takeoff works with your electronic or paper plans

Section 5 Projects

23

Project Template Files You can begin your project with a template Templates allow you to take advantage of conditions and settings used with previous projects

On-Screen Takeoff templates contain condition lists and established layer separations from previous projects you have created You may also use the sample templates provided with On-Screen Takeoff as a great starting point All aspects of the templates may be adjusted for a new project

1 Select File gt New and click the OK button

2 From the New dialog box choose the template that best fits your project

3 The conditions for this template will appear in the Takeoff Dock bar and the Project Properties dialog will open asking for further information

4 Use File gt Save or File gt Save As to rename and save your new project

Saving a Project as a Template File You can save your condition properties and layers as a template for future projects

1 Select File gt Save As

2 Enter a name for your template and select On-Screen Takeoff Template Files (tpo) from the Save As type field of the dialog (click on the down arrow to select)

3 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog Modifying a Template File Follow these steps to modify an existing template file if you need to change or add conditions andor layers

1 Select File gt Open

2 Navigate to your Projects directory

3 In the File Type drop-down select On-Screen Takeoff Template files (tpo)

4 Choose the On-Screen Takeoff template file you would like to modify and click the OK button

5 Make appropriate changes

6 Save and close file

The On-Screen Takeoff template files cannot save takeoff information

Section 5 Projects

24

Opening an Existing Project File 1 Select File gt Open

2 Navigate to the desired file location

3 Click the Open button

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask

you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Creating a New Project

1 Select File gt New

2 For a blank untitled project click

3 At this point the Project Properties dialog will pop-up for more information about your takeoff

NOTE The following are important to keep in mind when beginning a new project

At the start of your project fill out the Project Properties settings to establish the name for all printed output from your project set the default page size and scale for your plans number and names of different pages within the project and locations of electronic drawings

Scale settings can significantly affect quantity outcomes Be sure to set the scale for each page of drawings before beginning condition takeoffs

When using a digitizer remember to make a mark with a pen or pencil in the upper left and lower right corners of the first sheet of the paper plans to delineate the takeoff area for that sheet You can then set the takeoff area on On-Screen Takeoff using your marks

Save your project before you begin taking off any conditions On-Screen Takeoff will write a back-up file using the same file name

Remember the Undo feature If you make a mistake select Edit gt Undo and reverse the process step by step

Section 5 Projects

25

Project Properties

You can either set your Project Properties when you create a new takeoff or once your project file is saved under the appropriate name

1 Select File gt Project Properties the Project Properties dialog box will appear

2 Type in the name of your project to appear on printouts Use the backspace andor delete keys to edit the name as necessary

3 Press the Tab key to move to the Default Image Size option or click within the Image Size box You may click on the arrow at the right for the pull-down menu of page size options or you can use the down-arrow key on your keyboard to scroll through the list to the appropriate selection

4 Press the Tab key to move to the Default Scale option Select a scale by using the drop down arrow If your scale is metric you will need to click in the box next to Metric to convert to that measurement

5 Establish the number of pages for your project plans And load image files See Adding Pages to

Your Project

Adding Pages to Projects Individual Electronic Plans

1 Click on in the Project Properties dialog

2 In the Add Images dialog use the drop down arrow to navigate to the appropriate directory and folder containing your image

3 Select the file so that it displays in the File name field then click The file will display by name and path in the Image File field in Project Properties dialog

4 Click to accept and your project will automatically open

5 Save your project with the new settings by selecting File gt Save

Section 5 Projects

26

Electronic plans scanned from blueprints (as opposed to blue lines) will display as white lines on a black background and are difficult to read on your computer screen Select Image gt Invert and the colors will invert to black on white

You may have noticed the Page column in the Project Properties dialog Generally plan images occupy one page and 1 will be listed in the column indicating Page 1 of your plan file If you import a multi-page TIF a plan file containing more than one page of plans they will import as separate pages and each successive page will be indicated under the Page column as 1 2 3 etc of the plan file

Group of Electronic Plans You may add all the electronic plan files from a particular source (for example from a CD) by using the Auto Add feature

1 Click the button in the Project Properties dialog

2 Browse until you find the appropriate directory and folder containing your plan images

3 Click on any file displayed within your target folder so that the file name appears in the File name box of the Auto Add dialog

4 Click The image paths and file names will be recorded into the project properties arranged alphabetically

5 Click to accept your choices and your project will automatically open

6 Save your project with the new settings by selecting File gt Save

To load Dodge Plans into your Project Properties see Appendix IIi Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

Paper Plans On-Screen Takeoff makes it easy for Full Mode users to perform quantity takeoffs from paper plans using a digitizer

1 Add pages by clicking until you have the number of pages initially in the project

2 Name each page by clicking within the Title area and typing the name

3 Click to accept your choices and close the Project Properties dialog

4 Save your project with the new project properties settings by selecting File gt Save

Section 5 Projects

27

Setting Up a Drawing Template On-Screen Takeoff provides the convenience of using the same work surface for both digitizer and mouse to allow the user to draw conditions and then edit settings of the project or add or change conditions without breaking stride A mouse pad template included with the program defines the area of the digitizer in which use of the stylus or cursor will be recognized as mouse movement as opposed to drawing movement

1 Place your stylus on On-Screen Takeoff

2 Placing the template identifies the location mouse movements will be recognized by the program

Before placing the template the template must be applied to the digitizer surface This may have been done during the installation of your digitizer We suggest attaching the template to the lower right corner of the digitizer surface about one inch inside the grid area

3 Select Digitizer gt Place Template

4 Follow the instruction prompts on the screen clicking first on the target symbol at the left of the On-Screen Takeoff box on the template then on the target at the right

Setting Takeoff Area Before you can begin taking off a drawing you must define the drawing area on the digitizer This requires defining an area that will include all objects on each drawing of your plans As you add pages to your takeoff the same area of the digitizer will be active

1 Secure the plans to the digitizer with tape or a set of clamps

2 With a pen or a pencil mark the upper left corner and the lower right corner of the first page in your set of plans

3 Select Digitizer gt Set Takeoff Area

4 Click each mark with the stylus pen as prompted

5 Verify the active area of the digitizer by looking at the image size located in the lower right corner of your screen

If you close the program before the takeoff is complete you will need to reestablish the takeoff area before you can add additional condition quantities

Electronic plans appear on your computer screen eliminating the need to set a takeoff area You simply drag your mouse across the conditions you wish to takeoff The conditions will be highlighted and quantities will be totaled instantly Electronic plans are available through a variety of services For information contact an On Center Software account manager

Section 5 Projects

28

Setting Scale for Specific Pages You may set the scale in each page view separately This will override the default scale setting in Project Properties for that page Setting the correct scale for the drawing before taking off quantities ensures accurate calculations Be careful to check the scale for each drawing in your project before doing takeoffs

1 Display the page you want to set select Edit gt Set Scale

2 Use the drop down arrow to select a scale that will be applied to that page

3 Click

OR

4 Access the pull-down scale settings on the Navigate toolbar

NOTE As you draw objects notice that the drawn object is similar in width to the object on your plans If it is not the scale set may not be correct

Calculating Scale You may calculate scale according to a known measurement between two points either with a digitizer or on electronic plans

1 Select Edit gt Calculate Scale using Image or Edit gt Calculate Scale using Digitizer

2 Follow the instructions in the related Calculate Scale dialog box You will be asked to click on the first and second points then to enter the dimension for that distance

3 The scale will be recalculated for the displayed page and the Scale display on the Navigate toolbar will show the new scale

Section 6

29

Conditions and Takeoff

This section will Draw Conditions to Takeoff Plan Quantities

What Zones will do to help your takeoff process

Discuss the ins and outs of Takeoffs

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

30

Creating Conditions

If you are starting a new project from scratch you will need to create conditions to takeoff quantities such as floor areas wall lengths and corner bead counts If you are using a template you will have several pre-designed conditions already listed on the Takeoff dock bar However you may want to change the characteristics of some conditions or create additional conditions for a particular project

1 Right Click within the Takeoff dock bar Select New gt Condition

Or

2 From the Takeoff dock bar Click (if the buttons are not showing right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select Show Buttons from the pop-up menu) The New Condition dialog appears

3 Select the condition type (Linear Area Count or Zone) from the pull-down menu accessed by the

down arrow next to the Type option

4 Press Tab or use the mouse (or stylus) to move to Name and enter a name for your condition

5 Specify the desired condition attributes See Condition Attributes for more detail

6 Click for condition to apply

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

31

Condition Attributes Each condition type will have related attributes to select or specify within the General and Advanced tabs of the New Condition dialog Once a condition has been used to takeoff a quantity from your plans certain attributes cannot be changed

All conditions allow the user to specify color and fill pattern for the object drawn

Linear Conditions

General Specify width and height by feet and inches Specify pitch in inches up to the nearest thousandth of an inch if applicable

Advanced Specify rounding for object quantities and droprun default length for electrical or plumbing drops at the ends of lines Select Connect to have lines connect at the corners where one line of the condition ends and another begins (and indicate Tolerance for the featurersquos activation as distance between the ends of two lines) Choose Trim to have lines automatically trim to a line being crossed Choose Curve to draw a curved line

Follow these examples for inputting feet and inches For 7 feet 6 inches type 706 for 13 feet 7 inches type 1307 For 20 feet type 2000

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

32

Area Conditions

General If needed you can specify the thickness (in inches) andor pitch (in inches)

Advanced Specify rounding for object quantities Choose to display an adjustable grid within the area and indicate matrix cell dimensions

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

33

Count Conditions

General

Specify height and indicate the size (in inches) and shape (square circle triangle rectangle or opening) of the count object as it will appear on screen

Advanced Count conditions have advanced attributes These options are available for all shapes except for openings

Zone Conditions Zones allow you to subdivide condition quantities making it easier to modify and complete jobs in phases They can be used at the end of a takeoff to isolate a group of condition quantities that are in different areas of the takeoff

Zones can also be used to break a takeoff into multi-phases and can even be used to isolate quantities while a job is in progress to group the amount of work that has been completed to date They can be applied to one or multiple pages in your plans automatically calculating the takeoff quantities for each zoned area

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

34

The zone feature is only available in Lite and Full Mode If you are in View Mode and would like

to use this feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade

Condition Notes A Note tab is provided for comments regarding the condition These notes will display on the Takeoff List report and will import into Quick Bid

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

35

Condition Results The Results tab of the New Condition is based on condition type Initial settings default to linear feet (LF) for linear conditions square feet (SF) for area conditions and count of items (EA) for count conditions and zones The first of the results fields will display for the condition items in the Takeoff dock bar area All results will display in worksheets and Takeoff List reports as well as in an Excel spreadsheet after being exported

Copying Conditions You may use the condition attributes from a condition yoursquove already created for any future conditions of the same type

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Click the Copy button from the toolbar

OR

3 Right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select copy

4 A new condition will appear in the list with the same condition attributes as the previous condition but with the quantities zeroed

Editing Conditions Once you have copied a condition you might want to change several attributes You can also edit an existing condition to fit any updated needs

1 Highlight the desired condition on the Takeoff dock bar

2 Click the Change button

OR

3 Double-click on the condition you wish to edit to bring up the Change Condition dialog

NOTE The Change Condition dialog differs from the New Condition dialog only in that if takeoffs

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

36

have been performed in your project with this condition you will not be able to change the type of condition or certain properties under the advanced tab of the dialog box

Deleting Conditions 1 Click on the condition in the Takeoff Dock bar area

2 Click the Delete button on the toolbar

OR

3 Right-click and select Delete from the pop-up menu

All takeoff associated with the deleted condition will be deleted immediately and permanently

Organizing Project Conditions Within your project you can create folders andor sub-folders for different types of conditions You may even want to create a folder containing conditions with reset values

To get started organizing your conditions make sure you are viewing the condition tree (right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select Show Tree)

Creating Folders and Sub-Folders 1 Right-click in the Takeoff Dock bar area

2 Select New gt Folder from the pop-up menu

Copying Folders

1 Click on the folder and click Copy on the toolbar

2 All copied conditions within the new folder will have values reset to zero

Renaming Folders

1 Click on the folder

2 Right-click and select Rename from the pop-up menu

3 Enter a name for your folder and click the Enter button

Changing Condition Order

You may move conditions up or down in the condition list of the Takeoff dock bar to suit your project needs

1 Select the condition you would like to move by clicking to highlight it

NOTE When you are ready to move the highlighted conditions be sure that you start

moving using the last condition chosen That condition will have a highlighted boarder

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

37

2 Drag and drop any the condition from one place to another in the list You may also move a condition to another folder on the list in this way

Drawing with Conditions Snap Angles Set up snap angles to prevent lines from appearing jagged Snap angles are commonly set at 15deg and shift snap angles at 0deg

1 Go to Tools gt Options Options dialog appears

2 Under the General tab make the desired settings

3 Click to save the settings As they are drawn lines will snap to the set degree

Drawing a Linear Object 1 Select a condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff dock bar

2 Move the cursor into the Image takeoff area of the screen you will see the cursor display as crosshairs

3 Click and hold left mouse button then drag mouse to draw a line

4 Release mouse button to set line

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

38

5 Repeat steps for further lines

Continuous Mode This feature allows you to draw an object that has connected lines

1 Click the icon from the Takeoff toolbar

OR

2 Go to Tools gt Continuous Mode

3 Follow steps 1-3 from Draw a Linear Object

4 Click at each point of intersection The object will be connected

5 Double-click after making the final point to set the lines

Drawing a Curve To draw a curved line the Curve option must be checked under the Advanced tab of the Condition dialog

1 Click where you want to begin the curve and drag in a straight line to the position for the other endpoint of the curve

2 Click on the line to select it Handles in the shapes of small squares will appear at either end of

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

39

the line and in the center of the line

3 Move the cursor over the center handles until the cursor becomes a two-way arrow

4 Click and drag in the direction of the curve bending the line as you move the cursor Release to set the curve (The line you began with will disappear)

Draw a circle by drawing two curved lines connected

Drawing an Area Object Area conditions are drawn similarly to continuous mode lines You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete your area takeoff

NOTE When drawing an area do not intersect the perimeter or line of the object you are drawing

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

3 The area will be filled with the pattern set for that condition

NOTE The simulated circle will be good enough for you to be able to make a bid

To create a circular area click from point to point with very short distances in between points simulating a circlersquos perimeter Double-click after setting the last point to set the area

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

40

Grid Options Grids give you an added advantage when installing materials such as tiles Use this feature to get a count for how many tiles are needed for an area

1 Double-click on an area condition in the Takeoff dock bar to open its Condition dialog

2 Click on the Advanced tab to show its options

3 Check the box next to Grid by clicking in it

4 Indicate the dimensions of the cell matrix in inches (For example 200 x 400)

5 Under Results tab choose each (EA) for one of the results fields This will tabulate a number of grid cells (including partial grid cells) in area

6 Click to save your settings

7 Use the Move Grid and Rotate Grid features in the Tools menu to manipulate the grid as desired

Grid Calculation

1 Go to Tools gt Options menu

1 Specify if On-Screen Takeoff automatically should Calculate Grid Position

2 If AreaGrid Size is selected On-Screen Takeoff will calculate the number of items needed to fill the grid based on grid demintions

3 Click to accept and close the dialog

To move a line at any angle (regardless of default setting) press the Shift key while moving the mouse

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

41

Backout Mode This feature allows you to take out part of an area and deduct that amount of square footage

1 Select Tools gt Backout Mode

2 Outline the are you want backed out as you would when drawing a regular area object (see Drawing an Area Object)

3 The outlined area will clear and quantities will be recalculated

NOTE The perimeter of the backout area will be added to the LF quantity for that condition

Drawing a Count Object Square triangle rectangle and circle shaped count objects can easily be placed on images

1 Select the condition

2 Click in the location where you want the object to appear

3 To place an opening-shaped count item like a door or window you must click over an existing linear object such as a wall

4 On the Results tab you can change the height properties to give you the result you need

5 If Backout is checked on the advanced tab for each count opening the opening-shaped count item will back out a corresponding section of the linear object

Opening shaped count items are sized at 3rsquo0rdquo by default

Drawing a Zone Zones are drawn in the same way as area objects and may be any polygonal shape You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete the zone perimeter

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

42

Selecting Objects

1 Use the Select Tool to select objects

You can also select all objects that correspond to a condition

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Right-click and choose Select All

3 All objects with this condition will be highlighted with squares as an outline

Moving and Resizing Objects Linear

1 To move or resize a linear object click anywhere on the line to select it

2 To move the line position your pointer over the center handles When the mouse is positioned over the handles you will see a two-way arrow You will only be able to move the line in the direction of the arrows

3 Drag the line to a new position

4 Clicking and dragging the handles on the ends of the line will allow you to lengthen or shorten your line

Area and Zone

1 To move an area object or zone in its entirety click and drag it to its new position

2 Grabbing a handle at a corner or intersection of the object will allow you to adjust and change its perimeter

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

43

Count 1 To move a square circle rectangle or triangle shaped count object click and drag

2 Click and drag an opening shaped count object along the length of the linear object to the desired position then release

NOTE An opening shaped count object may not be moved from its associated linear condition object however it may be moved up and down the length of the linear object

Layers On-Screen Takeoff allows you to sort and separate your takeoff objects within the same job and on the same page On-Screen Takeoff gives you this flexibility through the use of layers

By assigning different conditions to different layers (for example differentiating between floors ceilings and walls) you can choose to view all layers or turn off certain layers to display and print the remaining groups of conditions only You may also remove the background image of electronic plans add text and hot link symbols or print only your condition takeoffs

Layers are only available in Full Mode If you are in View or Lite Mode and would like to use this

feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade Default Layers

On-Screen Takeoff begins every project with three default layers Image Annotation and Default The Image layer holds the electronic plan files you may have in your project The Annotation layer possesses all text notations highlighting and hot links in the project The Default layer will appear in the Condition dialog when creating or editing a condition (listed in the takeoff dock bar) Conditions are assigned to the Default layer unless otherwise specified by the user

Creating Layers To assign a condition to a layer other than the default layer you must first create additional layers for your project

1 Select View gt Layers to open the Layers dialog

2 Click An unnamed layer will be added

3 Click within the empty box and type a name for your layer (for example Wall)

4 New layers are added as active layers The adjacent box under the Show column will be checked

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

44

Assigning a Layer to a Condition 1 Open the Condition dialog box by creating a new condition or editing an existing condition

2 Under the General tab click on the down arrow in the Layer field to display optional layers

3 Select the desired layer for the condition Only the Default layer and layers you have added will be displayed

4 Click

View and Hide Layers

1 Select View gt Layers

2 Under the Show column check the box to view or remove the check (by clicking on it) to hide the specific layer

3 Click to accept and close the Layers dialog

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

45

Assigning Text to a Layer When adding text to an image On-Screen Takeoff has the capability to assign the text to a specified layer

1 Select the Text Tool

2 Click at the point you want to place your text

3 Type in your text using the Enter key for line breaks

4 Click the drop down arrow next to the Layer field and select the desired layer

Section 7

46

Printing and Exporting

This section will

Printing options and procedures

Exporting data by copying and pasting

Exporting quantity results to Excel spreadsheets

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

47

Print Setup On-Screen Takeoff allows the user to print the image takeoff list and worksheet

1 Select File gt Print Setup The Print Setup dialog will open

2 Select a printer or leave the default selection listed (change from the default printer displayed by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the field)

3 Indicate page size and printer tray option (Source) Access page size options by clicking on the

down arrow at the right of the field

4 Choose Portrait or Landscape orientation

5 Click to accept and close the dialog

Printing Images The image area can include the electronic plans the takeoff objects added text and hot links To print a subset of these (for example just the takeoffs without the plans or the added text and hot link symbols) hide layers that you do not want to print (see Section 6 View and Hide Layers) When you are printing your images every page will show the scale of the takeoff you are printing

1 Click on the Image tab to display the area of your project

2 Select File gt Print (or Ctrl + P)

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

48

3 Select the desired view (What to print) and the Image Range

4 Click The second Print dialog will open

5 Change settings accordingly or click if you accept the default settings

Printing Takeoff Lists and Worksheets In Takeoff Lists and Worksheets you may hide columns to print only certain results or adjust column widths to fit the report within the page size selected

1 In Takeoff List or Worksheet view move your cursor to the right side of the columnrsquos title bar the cursor will display as a two-way arrow

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

49

2 Click and drag to adjust the width of the column Holding the mouse button you may

slide the title bar under the title bar to its left to hide the column completely

3 Select File gt Print or press Ctrl + P to access the Print dialog

4 Indicate desired printer and choose the number of copies

5 Click to print and close the dialog

When printing the condition list we suggest printing in landscape

To reset to the default column widths double-click on the right border of a column heading will reset the column to its right (or previously to its right before being hidden)

Print Preview 1 Select File gt Print Preview

2 Use and to vary your view 3 If viewing an image choose current full or scale view to see how it displays

4 For printed outputs that cover more than one page use and to view adjacent pages or click on the down arrow next to Page field and select the page you want displayed

Exporting Using the CopyPaste Feature You may copy all the data or sections from the worksheet and the takeoff list view in On-Screen Takeoff and paste it into another application When pasting into Excel the cell layout will be maintained

1 Highlight the areas you wish to paste Click and hold the left mouse button down as you drag the cursor over the area to be selected then releasing the mouse button

OR

2 Select the entire takeoff list quickly click on the left On-Screen Takeoff column header and hold and drag the cursor across the remaining column headings

The number of pages for the view selected will display in the lower left-hand corner The zoom percentage that applies to the view will be displayed in the lower right-hand corner next to page size of the drawing

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

50

3 In the worksheet view you may highlight rows by clicking on the numbered buttons to the left of each row clicking and dragging across column headings or clicking and dragging over individual cells in the worksheet

Click anywhere in the appropriate view to deselect the area

4 Once your selection is highlighted you may select Edit gt Copy or Ctrl C from the keyboard 5 On your monitor switch to the application into which you want to paste your selection 6 Select Edit gt Paste in the new application or simply press Ctrl + V to paste

The colored keys for conditions cannot be pasted

Using the Export Feature You may export condition quantities to specified cell location within an Excel worksheet file Cell target locations are assigned in the Results tab of the condition dialogs on the Export line relating to each quantity measurement type

On-Screen Takeoff will export takeoff quantity results for up to three different quantity types that you specify For instance you may want to know the number of square feet in a ceiling area as well as the number of linear feet in its perimeter

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

51

1 Bring up the Condition dialog by double-clicking on a condition in the takeoff dock bar or by

selecting the condition and clicking

2 Click on the Results tab to access its fields The default quantities for the condition type will display

3 For each results field click on the arrow to access the pull-down menu and select the appropriate quantity (for example SF LF EA etchellip)

4 Have your Excel spreadsheet opened and saved in a file

5 Specify the Excel spreadsheet cell locations where you want the results to go

6 For a cell in the first sheet of your spreadsheet type in the cell address (eg a1) Case is not important

7 For a cell on a successive sheet of your spreadsheet type in sheet the number followed by a comma and the cell address without any spaces (eg sheet2a1) Case is not important

8 Click

9 Select File gt Export gt Condition Qty to Excel

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

52

10 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

11 Click to export On-Screen Takeoff results to specified cell locations in the Excel file When you return to the Excel application you will see the values have been added to the specified cell locations in your spreadsheet

12 Save your Excel file

Exporting Worksheet to Excel

1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 From On-Screen Takeoff Select File gt Export gt Worksheet to Excel

4 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

5 Click When you return to the Excel application you will see the values from the Worksheet Tab have been added to your spreadsheet

6 Save your Excel file

Exporting Takeoff to CVS 1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 Click the Takeoff Tab in the project you want to export the information

4 Select File gt Export gt Takeoff to CSV

5 Browse to the location of the CSV spreadsheet file click file to select it

6 Click the Save

NOTE CSV files can be opened in Excel Lotus Access etc One may consider this option more of a ldquodumprdquo into a file

The Excel application must be active (it may be minimized on the application bar) with the target spreadsheet open in the application Otherwise an error will occur with the export operation that will affect both the On-Screen Takeofftrade file and the Excel spreadsheet

Section 8

53

Advanced Features

This section will

Some special features of working with condition objects in the takeoff area

Details of advanced options for conditions

Advanced features of the Project Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

54

Features to Use with Objects Roping Feature You can move copy or delete using this feature Using the Select tool (the pointer) you may select several objects at once by clicking and dragging an outline around the objects then releasing the mouse button Roping may select either objects completely within the outlined area (inclusive) or objects both within and touched by the outlined area (touching) Specify your roping preference under Tools gt Options

1 Click and hold the mouse button at a point on the screen near the objects to be selected and drag to surround the objects with an outline

2 Release the mouse button The objects will be selected

3 You may now

Move the group around on the page by clicking within the group dragging the mouse and releasing the button to place the objects

Delete the group of objects by clicking the Delete key or

Copy and paste by pressing Ctrl C to copy the group then Ctrl V to paste it The pasted copy of the grouped objects will appear slightly offset from the original objects

Section 8 Advanced Features

55

Applying a DropRun Count

Use the droprun feature when calculating quantities to take into account the drop or run of a linear condition such as electrical lines or plumbing pipes Drop or run lengths may be added separately to any linear condition on screen while a default droprun length may be indicated for a condition as a whole

1 Select the desired linear condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff Dock bar

2 Click the Change button in the toolbar to open the Change Condition dialog

3 Click the Advanced tab to access the advanced options and click inside the DropRun check box

4 Enter a default length to be applied to all of this condition Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches) You can leave the length blank and manually enter drop run on each segment drawn

5 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog

Edit DropRun Count

1 With the related linear condition in the Takeoff Dock bar highlighted or with the pointer tool selected

2 click on the desired linear object in the image takeoff area The Count button will become active

3 Click on the Count button (alternatively select Tools gt Count) The default droprun amount will show in the pop-up Count dialog (Default length will be zero if droprun has not been selected in this conditionrsquos properties)

4 Type in the desired length Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches)

5 Click the OK button The additional amount will be reflected in the corresponding quantity The new DropRun count will apply only to the object edited

Adding Text in Image View

On-Screen Takeoff allows you to place text comments around your quantity takeoffs that may be printed along with plan images and objects Text is automatically placed within the Annotation Layer (that includes text and hot links)

1 To place text on the image select the Text Tool and click at the point you want to place your text opening a text box

2 Type in your information clicking Enter for line breaks

3 When you are finished click the OK button to exit the text box

4 To reposition text simply click on the text (with the Text Tool active) to select it

5 Move the cursor over the text the cursor will now display as a four-way arrow

6 Click and drag the mouse to position the text as desired

Section 8 Advanced Features

56

1 To edit existing text use the Text Tool to double-click on the text to open the editing box

2 Enter additional text or use the Backspace key to delete text as necessary

Formatting Text Once created you may format the font size type style and color of your text

1 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Font or click on the Font button in the Takeoff Toolbar

2 Select the desired features (color options are disabled) and click the OK button

3 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Color or click on the Color button in the Takeoff Toolbar The Color dialog will open

4 Click on a color in the Basic Color palette or create a color and add to the Custom Colors palette (Be sure to click on the color in the Custom Colors palette to select it)

5 Click the OK button

Object Properties

Linear Objects

Linear objects may be set to connect at corners

A linear object may be set to trim automatically when crossing another linear object (Check the trim option under the advanced tab of the Condition dialog)

When you move a connected linear object objects automatically move and resize connected lines accordingly (quantities are then recalculated)

This feature requires that the connected linear object be moved using the center handles (does not apply when resizing the line from the ends)

Objects constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

Objects are measured from centerline to centerline

Section 8 Advanced Features

57

Area Objects When drawing an area use your escape key to undo the last line drawn You may reverse your

drawing of an area using the escape key

The area will not fill with color and pattern until the user double-clicks after the last line is set

Lines drawn to delineate an area object constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

After selecting an area to move or adjust position the mouse in the center to move the entire area position the mouse at the sides or corners to adjust the perimeter

Count Objects

All count objects are quantified by the physical number of objects per page and reported as EA for the UOM The quantity for the current Image View is (displayed in the Condition List) and the total quantity in your project is displayed in the Takeoff View and Worksheet View)

Square circle rectangle and triangle shaped count objects do not displace or subtract from other object quantities when placed on top of them However on the Advanced Tab for the count condition a connect property can be set (this is a check box) so that when a count object of this shape is put on top of a Linear type takeoff object it will move with the linear if said linear is moved

An opened-shaped count object must be placed within a linear object Opening shaped count objects may also be measured by linear foot or linear yard (EA SF and SY are also options) Opening shaped count items default to a width of 3rsquo 0rdquo at the time of creation This size can be changed The small medium and large size are not options on this type of condition anymore Check Backout on the Advanced tab for each Count object back out the footage (or yardage) of opening-shaped count objects in which they are placed

NOTE In order to see this Backout functionality (in quantity) for SY or SF deductions at least one of the

results for the Linear(s) this object will be placed on must be set to SY or SF and the count object must have a height quantity

Advanced Features of Conditions The Round Feature Under the Advanced tab of the linear and area Condition dialogues you may specify quantity rounding (in inches) For linear objects rounding applies to each linear object drawn For area objects rounding will apply to each segment of the area perimeter adjusting the perimeter and area calculations For example With a linear condition entering 12 in the Round field will round up each related linear object to the nearest 12 inches or one foot With this setting two walls of 1 4 would each round to 2 0 totaling 4 0

NOTE In the Takeoff Dock bar condition list and in the On-Screen Takeoff reports quantities will be displayed in whole numbers rounded up to the nearest foot However calculations are based on true quantities without rounding unless the Round Feature is engaged

Pitch Pitch may apply either to linear or area conditions It is measured in rise per linear foot Entering 12 indicates a 12 rise per 12 of linear distance (a pitch of 12 over 12) or an angle of 45deg

Section 8 Advanced Features

58

Advanced Features of Project Properties Selecting Multiple Pages

1 Select a single page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry

2 Drag the cursor down the column of numbers to select consecutive pages

3 Click on the blank button at the top of this column to select all pages in the Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

59

Changing Image Assigned to a Drawing 1 Select the page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry 2 Click the Change Image button The Change Image dialog box will appear

3 Navigate to the desired file and select by clicking on it

4 Click the Open button The electronic file assigned to the page will have been changed to reflect the new file choice

Changing Image File Path 1 Select pages as described above

2 Choose Change Folder

3 In the Change Folder dialog navigate to the appropriate folder

4 Click the OK button The file path will have been changed for the selected page entries

Delete a Page from Project Properties 1 Select the page you want to delete by clicking on its associated number (in the gray box at the

left of the entry)

2 Choose Delete Page

All Takeoff on the page will be deleted immediately and permanently

Section 8 Advanced Features

60

Advanced Features of Tool Options

Calculation Method On-Screen Takeoff has built-in calculation options to allow for faster work and faster saves until your takeoff is complete Calculation options are found by selecting Tools gt Options then clicking on the Calculation tab

Calculation method can be set to Automatic Automatic except Grids and Manual Manual will allow the program to operate more quickly while Automatic or Automatic except Grids allows the user to see quantity changes as takeoffs are made

In any mode you may press F9 to recalculate quantities for the On-Screen Takeoff current totals

Configuration Tab

When the ldquoPage Label (A01)rdquo radial button is chosen On-Screen Takeoff puts the numbered label on all the pages of in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar If the Page Descriptionrdquo radial button is chosen then a description of what takeoff is on that specific page will be shown in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar

This section of the configuration tab gives you options on how you want to export your information When the ldquoFolderSubfolder Namesrdquo radial button is chosen than on your file that you are exporting to will have all the conditions folders and subfolders In the Delimiter box you can choose the symbol that is needed to separate the information you are exporting Some files need semicolons () or colons () to make sure the information comes exported in is separated it the appropriate places

Section 8 Advanced Features

61

In previous versions of On-Screen Takeoff there are views that users need to have in order for them to display their information By either choosing ldquoOST 1xrdquo or ldquoOST 2xrdquo it will let the program know you want your columns of information exported in that specific format

When you have the Confirm Deletions radial button of ldquoYesrdquo chosen than every time you delete anything you will get a dialog box confirming your intentions of deletion

While working with your takeoff you have a choice to either view the legend of your conditions or hide it Choose whichever radial button that suits your needs

For those who prefer to use the Enter key to navigate in dialog boxes this option is just for that

Font Tab The Font tab is designed for you to make your own look and feel for the application At the bottom of this tab it will show you sample of the fonts and colors you have chosen

Renaming the Current Page You may change the name of the current page in the takeoff area of On-Screen Takeoff by selecting Edit gt Rename Page

This opens the Name Page dialog and you may simply type in a new name and click the Enter button The new name for the file will be reflected on the title bar for the page and in Project Properties

You also may access the Rename Page function by right-clicking in the takeoff area while in Image View and selecting the option from the pop-up menu that appears

Section 9

62

Saving and Exiting

This section will

Explain how to save projects

Show you how to safely exit the program

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

63

Saving Your Project

1 Select File gt Save 2 If your project has not previously been saved a Save dialog box will open to allow you to name

the file and choose the directory and folder in which to save your file 3 Once saved File gt Save will simply save the current version of the file

OR

4 Select File gt Save As then type in a new name for the file and save to the desired file path

The Auto-save Feature With the Auto-save feature On-Screen Takeoff automatically backs up your open project You may choose to have more than one level of backup files The first backup copy will have the extension b00 and successive files will be b01 b02 and so on If you have designated four levels of backup files after the fourth backup copy has been created (b03) the next file will be saved over the file with extension b00 Further backup saves will then rotate through the four backup files in the same way

1 Select Tools gt Options 2 In the Auto-save area (under the General tab) select the frequency of backup file creation (in

minutes) and the number of levels for the feature 3 You also may disengage the feature by clicking in the check box to clear it

The Auto-save feature automatically saves backup copies to the directory of the current project If you are working from a write-protected area such as a CD-ROM On-Screen Takeoff will place backup files in the On-Screen Takeoff folder

Exiting When you are finished using On-Screen Takeoff it is very easy to exit Exiting is very important because of security reasons If someone were to use your computer they could enter the application and view and manipulate information

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

64

On-Screen Takeoff closes the open project when you open another or create a new project or when you exit the program

1 Select File gt Exit

OR

2 You also may click at the upper right-hand corner of the application to exit

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

65

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer When you get your digitizer from GTCO you will need to connect it to your computer Follow the instructions outlined below to do this

Note For rollup digitizers the metal bar must be oriented to the top or right hand side

Connecting the Digitizer 1 Lay the digitizer out flat 2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer 3 Plug in the power adapter 4 Plug the interface (IO) cable into the digitizer 5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into an open serial port on computer

Note GTCO Technical support phone number is 410-381-6688 The electronic manual (on diskette) from GTCO contains more detailed installation and operation instructions for the GTCO digitizer model you have

Installing other Digitizer Drivers If you are using a GTCO Digitizer you will need to install the GTCO TabletWorks Drivers

If you are using a Digitizer not supported by GTCO Tablet Works 10 please contact the manufacturer of your digitizer for assistance with installation

Installing GTCO TabletWorks Drivers 1 Insert the On Center CD into the CD-ROM drive The CD Startup screen will open 2 Click on Install Software 3 Select Additional Software and Drivers 4 Select Digitizer Driver 5 Follow the instructions for installing TabletWorks 10

Adhering the Template The template is a small plastic sticker used to enable mouse function when using the digitizer with On-Screen Takeoff Place your template on your digitizer We suggest placing it in the bottom right corner of the digitizer about one inch inside the takeoff area

Note You may either peel off the back of the template and use the adhesive surface or you can tape the template down

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

66

Testing the Digitizer Drivers Before running OST you may test the digitizer by moving the stylus around on the digitizer pad it should move the mouse cursor (if mouse emulation is enabled)

If the digitizer does not move the mouse cursor on the screen

The superset codes may need to be reset Reset the superset codes by touching on the border of the digitizer with the stylus The digitizer should beep several times

The digitizer may not be communicating with the computer Be sure the COM port selected is correct Be sure the COM port selected is correct If you are not able to get the digitizer to move the mouse cursor you need to call GTCO technical support for help

Note The Mouse Emulation is not required for On-Screen Takeoff to work properly It is used only for the Template functionality if the digitizer is moving the cursor the wrong direction (up instead of sideways or vice-versa)

Click the L-shaped arrow symbol on the digitizer with the stylus

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

67

Appendix II Toolbar Items Main Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

68

Tool Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

69

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

70

Navigate Toolbar (Continued)

Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

71

Takeoff Toolbar (Continued)

Image Toolbar

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

72

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

This section will detail how to load plans from a F W Dodge CD-ROM into an On-Screen Takeoff project file ready for takeoffs

Dodge files may be added to the Project Properties dialog However loading the files in that way will load the files by number rather than name description If you want to load one page only from your Dodge CD You will have to rename the page to display the name rather than number of the file

To load plan files from a Dodge CD so that the files load sequentially by file number but are displayed by name rather than by number within your project follow the instructions below

Opening a Dodge project from a CD-ROM 1 Insert the CD into the drive 2 Choose File gt Custom 3 Choose Dodge Plans Project (plansdat) as the file type 4 Select the appropriate file type by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the Files of type

field 5 In the Look in field access your drive paths by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the

field then

Navigate to your CD-ROM drive Open the data folder and Open the Projects folder

6 Select the desired project and open its folder 7 Open the plansdat file 8 All the images will come in sequenced correctly for that job along with the full descriptions

(names) of each page If there is not a plans folder in the project folder then plans do not exist for that project on the CD Opening the plansdat file will yield an empty project

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

73

Appendix IV Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer The On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer is a limited version of On Center Softwarersquos commercial takeoff software If your status bar located at the very bottom of the main window says View Mode in the lower left-hand corner then you are using the Plan Viewer You can use the plan viewer to

View CD-based amp converted CAD drawings

View a previously created OST file and associated drawings

Download electronic plans online

Navigate through drawings

Quickly Takeoff linearsareas and counts

Zoom in to view the plan better

Print drawings directly from the viewer

Viewing an On-Screen Takeoff Project File

1 To open an OST file that was previously created with of On-Screen Takeoff 2 Select File gt Open 3 An Open dialog will appear if you do not see the OST file you are looking for select the

Look In drop down arrow 4 A drop down menu will appear listing the various folders drives and mapped drives located

on your computer select the correct drive or folder location and continue to browse to the location of your OST file

5 When you see your OST file double-click it to open it 6 Any takeoff and drawings should appear on the Image tab view

If you do not see the drawings but do see the colored takeoff layer the drawings may

not be located in the same place they were originally saved at Go to File gt Project Properties and check the Image File path for each listed page If the image file path is pointing to a CD drive make sure the CD is inside the CR-ROM

Downloading Electronic Plans If your Online Plan Service provides a special file format (OSX) required to use this feature of our plan viewer you can immediately downloaded all electronic plans of a project directly from our viewer

Most Plan Room web sites will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff when a request to download plans is made Your particular Plan Room may differ in operation so please contact the provider directly with questions on using the site

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

74

When you request to download or open a project file from a Plan Room you will usually have the open to open or save an OSX file Choosing open will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff Alternately you may choose to save the file to a local hard drive After you have saved the file either double-click it to launch On-Screen Takeoff or open the OSX file using On-Screen Takeoff by clicking File then Open and locating the file on your hard drive You will need to change the file type to OSX

After the OSX file is opened you will see an additional tab appear in the Conditions List window called Pages

The Pages tab shows the hierarchy of your project Gray file icons represent pages that have not been downloaded and blue icons represents pages that have been downloaded

To download a page simply double-click the page icon

If you wish to select a group of pages to download you can use the Ctrl or Shift key to multiple select them then click the Download button

If you wish to download all pages at once click the Download All button

Downloaded pages will now appear in the Project Properties dialog in the same order in which they appear in the Pages tab

Creating Quick Takeoffs With On-Screen Takeoff you can create quick takeoffs to measure quantities even if you dont have the full version of our program However using the Quick Takeoff functionality shows you just a fraction of what the full version can do

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar is located at the top of the image view It has three buttons designated for three types of takeoffs Linear Area and Count The Quantity drop down list will show secondary quantities for Linears and Areas The Units drop down allows you to select how you want your quantities displayed Feet Inches Yards Millimeters and Meters

NOTE Every time change the type of takeoff you are performing (switching from Area to Linear for example) the previous quantities and takeoff objects will disappear They will also disappear when you changes pages

NOTE You can use the Dimension Tool to basically measure the distance between two points or linears The distance will display on the status bar at the bottom of the application

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

75

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions General

Where is On-Screen Takeoff installed on my computer

Typically it is installed in CProgram FilesOn-Screen Takeoff

In Explorer how do I recognize On-Screen Takeoff file types

On-Screen Takeoff data is stored in a single file per job lsquojob name OSTrsquo On-Screen Takeoff templates are stored as lsquotemplate nameTPOrsquo

Can only one project at a time be open

Yes For that reason opening another project automatically closes the project on screen You will be asked to save any changes

Is only one scale allowed per page What about on drawings that have multiple detail sections on a page and each of those drawings have different scales

Yes For pages with drawings of different scales copy the drawing to another project page and set the appropriate scale

I cannot perform backout on an area that is along a linear

As a workaround use the On-Screen Takeoff layers feature to help you with this issue Electronic Images

How do I start a project from drawings that have been scanned and written to a CD-ROM

Open a new project Select File gt Project Properties and select Auto Add Navigate to your CD and the appropriate folder and select any image file in that location Click Open All files in the location will load into your project Recommended that images are copied from CD to hard drive for performance

If I get a disk of drawings in AutoCAD format (R13 or R14) can I read them in On-Screen Takeoff

Yes On-Screen Takeoff now reads DWG DXF and many other format that are saved with AutoCAD

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

76

When I click on the all pages button what is supposed to happen Currently nothing seems to change when I click on that button

The All Pages button is used to apply the Darken and Enhance Plans feature to all pages in the project (as opposed to only the current page on screen)

Is there a way to deduct a large skylight from an area condition

Yes with the related area condition selected in the Takeoff Dock bar unselect the Backout button on the Takeoff Toolbar then draw the Backout area The area quantity will be deducted from the related condition object and the linear measurement of the Backout perimeter will be added

Digitizer Issues

How do I connect a Digitizer to the computer

See Appendix I Connecting a Digitizer

The Place Template menu choice is disabled

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or the digitizer or the digitzer drivers are not installed

It wonrsquot let me select the Set Takeoff Area menu choice

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or no job is open a digitizer is not installed or the drivers are not installed

The digitizer stylus is not moving the cursor or crosshairs

Click S-0-1 superset on the digitizer

How do I convert my old GTCO Digitizer to work with On- Screen Takeofftrade

Call GTCO and they may be able to reconfigure your digitizer to be compatible with On-Screen Takeoff

Printing Issues Which Printers work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible printers include On-Screen Takeoff Hewlett Packard Epson and Canon printers If you are having printer difficulties please contact support and specify the type of printer along with other pertinent information Contact support at wwwoncentercomsupport or email supportoncentercom

Which Plotters work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible Plotters include Hewlett Packard DesignJet plotters and the EnCAD Cadjet II If you are having plotter difficulties please contact support and specify the type of plotter concerned

ViewingDisplay I can no longer see my condition list How do I get it back

The toolbars and Dock bars can be turned on and off through the View gt Toolbars menu options

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

77

This is also accessible by right-clicking in the toolbar area and selecting (or deselecting) a toolbar listed

I cannot view my folders in the condition list

Right-click in the Takeoff Dock barcondition list area and select Show Tree to display your folders

My Status Bar reads Viewer Mode and I am unable to draw conditions

On-Screen Takeoff needs to be Authorized Or you need to purchase an upgrade Click the Perform Advanced Takeoff button on the main toolbar

I hid a Dock bar and when I selected to view it again it appeared alongside the other Dock

bar instead of stacked on top of it How do I fix it

Pick up the Dock bar by clicking on the bar at the top and continuing to hold down the mouse button drag the Dock bar over the other one It will resize and appear stacked with the other

When I open image files from a CD the images are all upside down How do I get them right

side up

To flip pages from top to bottom follow the steps below 1 Click the All Pages button on the Image Toolbar (All Pages is engaged when the button

is not clicked) 2 Click the Flip Horizontal button on the Image Toolbar 3 Click the All Pages button again to disengage

Templates How do I create a Template

Follow the steps below 1 Create a typical project 2 Choose File gt Save As 3 Choose On-Screen Takeoff Template Files as the file type to save 4 Name the file This will save all of the condition setups as well as the layers for the

project

How do I create a new project from a template

Follow the steps below 1 Choose File gt New 2 Select a template from those listed in the New dialog This will open a new project with

conditions and layers saved from a previous project but no pages or takeoff

78

INDEX

Area Conditions 32

Area Objects 57

Auto Scrolling 20

Auto-save 63

Backout Mode 41

Calculation Method 60

Conditions 29

Configuration 60

Contents Tab 6

Continuous Mode 38

Count Conditions 33

Count Objects 57

Digitizer 10 65 76

Docking Toolbars 13

Dodge CD 72

Drawing 27 37

DropRun Count 55

Environment 18

Exiting 63

Exporting 49

Features 16

Font 61

Frequently Asked Questions 75

Grid 40

Help File 5

Hiding Toolbars 13

Hot Links 21

Image 19 59

Image files 9

Image Toolbar 12 71

Images 75

Index Tab 6

Layers 43

Linear Conditions 31

Linear Objects 56

Main Toolbar 12 67

Menus 14

Moving Toolbars 13

Navigate Toolbar 12 69

Navigating 20

On-Screen Takeofftrade 2

Page 59 61

Pages 20 25 28

Plan Viewer 73

Plans 26

Printing 47 76

Project Properties 25

Projects 22

Quick Start Video 18

Resizing Toolbars 13

Roping 54

Saving 63

Scale 28

Search Tab 7

Selecting Objects 42

Setup 8

Start On-Screen Takeofftrade 17

System Requirements 9

Takeoff 19 27

Takeoff Toolbar 70 71

Takeoff Toolbar 12

Template Files 23

TIF (Group4) 9

Tool Toolbar 12 68

Toolbar 67

Toolbars 12

View Toolbar 12 69

Viewing Toolbars 12

Worksheet 20

Zone Conditions 33

Zoom Toolbar 12 69

  • On-Screen Takeoff Lite
  • Table of Contents
  • Section 1 - Introduction
  • Section 2 - Setup
  • Section 3 - Toolbars and Menus
  • Section 4 - Features
  • Section 5 - Projects
  • Section 6 - Conditions and Takeoff
  • Section 7 - Printing and Exporting
  • Section 8 - Advanced Features
  • Section 9 - Saving and Exiting
  • Appendix I - Installing Your Digitizer
  • Appendix II - Toolbar Items
  • Appendix III - Loading Plans from a Dodge CD
  • Appendix IV - Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer
  • Appendix V - Frequently Asked Questions
  • Index

Auto Scrolling 20 Changing Pages 20 Hot Links 21

SECTION 5 - PROJECTS 22 Project Template Files 23

Saving a Project as a Template 23 Modifying a Template23

Opening an Existing Project 24 Creating a New Project24 Project Properties25 Adding Pages to Projects 25

Individual Electronic Plans 25 Group of Electronic Plans26 Paper Plans 26

Setting Up Drawing Template 27 Setting Takeoff Area 27 Setting Scale for Specific Pages28 Calculating Scale28 SECTION 6 - CONDITIONS AND TAKEOFF 29 Creating Conditions 30 Condition Attributes 31 Linear Conditions 31

General 31 Advanced 31

Area Conditions 32 General 32 Advanced 32

Count Conditions33 General 33 Advanced 33

Zone Conditions 33 Condition Notes 34 Condition Results 35 Copying Conditions 35 Editing Conditions 35 Deleting Conditions 36 Organizing Project Conditions 36

Creating Folders and Sub-Folders36 Copying Folders 36 Renaming Folders 36 Changing Condition Order 36

Drawing with Conditions37 Snap Angles 37

Drawing a Linear Object 37 Continuous Mode 38 Drawing a Curve 38

Drawing an Area Object 39 Grid Options 40 Grid Calculation 40 Backout Mode41

Drawing a Count Object 41 Drawing a Zone 41 Selecting Objects 42 Moving and Resizing Objects 42

Linear42 Area and Zone 42 Count 42

Layers 43 Default Layers 43 Creating Layers43 Assigning a Layers to a Condition44 View and Hide Layers44 Assigning Text to a Layers45

SECTION 7 - PRINTING AND EXPORTING 46 Print Setup 47 Printing Images 47 Printing Takeoff Lists and Worksheets 48 Print Preview 49 Exporting49

Using Copy Paste Feature49 Using Export Feature50 Exporting Worksheet to Excel 52 Exporting Takeoff to CVS52

SECTION 8 - ADVANCED FEATURES 53 Features to Use With Objects54

Roping Feature 54 Applying a Drop Run Count 55 Edit Drop Run Count 55 Adding Text in Image View55 Formatting Text 56

Object Properties 56 Linear Objects 56 Area Objects57 Count Objects57

Advanced Features of Conditions 57 The Round Feature 57

Pitch 57 Advanced Features of Project Properties58

Selecting Multiple Pages 58 Changing Image Assigned to a Drawing 59 Changing Image File Path59 Delete Page from Project Propertiesl 59

Advanced Features of Tool Options 60 Calculation Method60 Configuration Tab 60 Font Tab 61

Renaming the Current Page61 SECTION 9 - SAVING AND EXITING 62 Saving Your Project63

The Auto-Save Feature63 Exiting63 APPENDIX I - INSTALLING YOUR DIGITIZER 65 APPENDIX II - TOOLBAR ITEM DETAILS 67 APPENDIX III - LOADING PLANS FROM A DODGE CD 72 APPENDIX IV -USING THE PLAN VIEWER 73 APPENDIX V - FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS 75 INDEX 78

Section 1

1

Introduction

This section will

Help you become familiar with On-Screen Takeoff and the User Guide

Give Full Mode users information on how the product works with a digitizer

Section 1 Introduction

2

Welcome to On-Screen Takeoff This extraordinary software gives you bidding advantage in less time with greater accuracy by allowing you to perform complex takeoffs right on your computer screen

On-Screen Takeoff can be used with a digitizer and paper plans or a mouse and electronic plan files On-Screen Takeoff enables the user to create live drawings with resizable conditions linear conditions such as walls pipes and electrical lines area conditions such as floors and ceilings count conditions such as sprinkler heads corner beads doors and windows and zone conditions that assess quantities for any part of an area you specify As you record conditions using your plans the program provides reports on quantities and can recalculate instantly for any adjustment to the conditions of your project

New and experienced users will enjoy the power of this estimating system that is very easy to use As with all products from On Center Software this program works well for most construction trades and is ready to use the day you receive it So start bidding jobs more quickly and accurately today with On-Screen Takeoff This program is equipped with three modes View Mode allows the user to perform quick takeoffs view previously created files and drawing zoom to view plans better and print drawings (see Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer for more details) Lite Mode adds the use of zones Full Mode allows the user to perform more advanced takeoff options including layers and working with a digitizer The mode is referenced in the lower left corner of the program screen

If you currently have View or Lite Mode and are interested in performing more advanced takeoffs a

purchase request button has been provided on the main toolbar Clicking will take you to a webpage purchase form You can also call an On-Center Software Account Representative 1-800-880-8254 or visit us on the web at wwwoncentercom for more details

Section 1 Introduction

3

About this Guide This guide is intended to be a compliment to On-Screen Takeoff software The sections are presented in an order intended to help new users understand the software The User Guide provides detailed information about On-Screen Takeoff tools and commands It is designed to assist you in applying program features to your estimating projects Use it as a reference tool along with the online help system in your day to day work with On-Screen Takeoff

Table of Contents outlines the sections and topics covered in each section

Section 1 Introduction explains the user guide and helpful resources

Section 2 Setup lists system requirements and recommended components

Section 3 Toolbars and Menus explains the toolbars and menus used in On-Screen Takeoff

Section 4 Features gives you a tour of the On-Screen Takeoff environment and shows you how to navigate through your projects

Section 5 Projects leads you through your first time with the program or if yoursquore an old hand at On-Screen Takeoff reacquainting yourself with the software

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff shows you features of working with condition objects zones and backouts in the takeoff area

Section 7 Printing and Exporting explains the step-by-step of printing images and reports copying and pasting data from On-Screen Takeoff and exporting quantity results to an Excel spreadsheet

Section 8 Advanced Features discusses special and advanced features of On-Screen Takeoff conditions and options

Section 9 Saving and Exiting explains how to save projects and safely exit the program Appendixes gives you additional information on installing a digitizer toolbar item details loading files using the plan viewer and frequently asked questions Index provides key words or phrases the program application and references the page(s) in the user guide where they can be found

Section 1 Introduction

4

Extras Along the way yoursquoll encounter bits of information that make the User Guide not only more readable but more personal and relevant The signs and signals placed throughout the guide will better help you understand On-Screen Takeoff and On Center Software We think yoursquoll find these bits and pieces interesting Herersquos what to look for

NOTE

To make special notice of specific information

Caution Warning This symbol is there to insure that you are following the information to minimize risk

This symbol represents information that also appears on the Quick Start Video

In this manual some information is specific to using a digitizer The icon appears alongside this information (Must be in Full Mode to use a digitizer)

A reminder is there to keep the information in mind for future consideration

For Your Informationhellip

Instruction Jargon

In this guide click or double-click refers to clicking on the left mouse button A right-click clicking on the right mouse button will be specifically stated

Click the digitizer refers to clicking down once with the stylus pen

NOTE When using a digitizer a click or double-click refers to pressing the ball tip of the stylus pen right on the digitizer (usually in the takeoff area) A right-click can be accomplished by using the digitizer mouse template and the first button on the stylus pen See Appendix I Installing You Digitizer for more information

Drag and drop is holding down the left mouse button after clicking on an object You may simply drag the object to the desired location and release the mouse button

Section 1 Introduction

5

Typographic Conventions

The following are typographical conventions to be aware of when reading this guide

Menu items you are instructed to choose appear in a different typeface with the greater than (gt) symbol separating each menu level For example if you are instructed to select the Open command in the File menu it appears as File gt Open If you are instructed to select the Save As command from the File menu it appears as File gt Save As

Helpful hints or information about the topic are provided throughout the document They will be labeled lsquoNOTErsquo (all caps and bold font to catch your attention)

Several topics will have more detailed steps outlined in either another section of the user guide or in the Appendix They will always be referenced and italicized For example ldquoSee Editing Conditions for more informationrdquo

Help File In combination with this User Guide and the Quick Start video (Help gt Watch Quick Start Video) the Help File will also be a great resource for product information and application There are additional resources available on the website at wwwoncentercom or Help gt Visit our Website Follow these instructions to open the Help file

1 Select Help gt Help Topics

2 This will open the On-Screen Help File

Hide and Show Buttons

The Hide and Show buttons will either remove or display the Topics panel in the Help dialog

Back Button

The Back button takes you back to the last help page you viewed It will be available only if you have navigated through multiple pages in the help file

Print Button

Clicking will print the topic displayed This is helpful if the instructions to follow are long and you prefer to work on a full screen

Options Button

The Options button will allow you to pick from a list of commands to help you navigate the Help file

Section 1 Introduction

6

Contents Tab This tab provides a quick breakout of the Contents of the help file It should be used like the Table of Contents of a book Simply double-click on the book icon to open the chapter Then click the desired page icon to display the relevant information

Index Tab This tab allows you to locate a specifically indexed topic This should be used as you would a book index Begin typing a word in the index entry field and the system will automatically move within the list to the entries closest in spelling to your word(s) Begin typing the topic word to access it in the list quickly

Section 1 Introduction

7

Search Tab This tab works like a word find It allows you to search for any word contained in the Help file Type the

word you are looking for in the lsquoType in the keyword to findrsquo field Click A list of topics containing that word will appear Scroll through the list and double click on the topic you want displayed

Section 2

8

Setup

This section will

Let you know what system requirements you will need to have in place

Recommend components that work well with the software

Help Full Mode users install a digitizer

Section 2 Setup

9

Minimum System Requirements To use On-Screen Takeoff your computer must meet the following minimum system requirements

An IBM PC or 100 compatible computer with a Pentium II or faster Intel processor

Memory Requirements 200 MB of available hard-disk space and256 MB RAM (128 MB preferred)

Windows 2000 SP4 and Windows XP SP2 256 color video card Super VGA display card Mouse 15-inch monitor

While these are the minimum system requirements Windows places heavy demands on your systems resources The more available memory in your computer the faster and more efficient On-Screen Takeoff will operate

Recommended Components

For the best performance we recommend the following components

Pentium III or faster processor

512 or more of RAM

12X speed CD-ROM or better

17-inch monitor or dual monitors Graphic adapter with 128 MB or more VRAM Sound card and speakers installed

NOTE In order to utilize the Training Videos you must have a sound card and speakers installed

Compatible File Formats The resolution in electronic plans does not need to be more that 200 DPI (Dots per Inch) The preferred file format is a black and white TIF (Group4) On-Screen Takeoff recognizes image files with the following extensions

File Extensions View Mode Lite Mode Full Mode TIF X X X PDF X X X OSE X X X JPG X X X CPC X X X CAL X DGN X DWG X DXF X OSP X PLN X PLT X

Section 2 Setup

10

NOTE Use the following image types for best results

Convert to TIF

The converted files will be stored in a folder with the name of the current On-Screen Takeoff project Since the conversion can be very time consuming you should only select this option if you really intend to convert vector files to TIF

1 Select File gt Project Properties

2 In the Pages Field add your image See Section 5 Establishing Project Setting Adding Pages

3 Click

4 Then select the page with the drawing you wish to convert

5 Click

Installing Your Digitizer The following instructions are a quick start to installing your digitizer For more specific information please reference Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer at the end of this guide

Connecting Your Digitizer

Upon receiving your digitizer (either a GTCO or another brand) you will need to connect it to your computer

1 Lay the digitizer out flat

2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer

3 Plug in the power supply

4 Plug the interface cable into the digitizer

5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into the computer

NOTE On-Screen Takeoff is compatible with any tablet that is WinTab compatible

Digitizer options are only available in Full Mode If you are in View or Lite Mode and would like

to use this feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade

Section 3

11

Toolbars and Menus

This section will

Introduce the program toolbars

Familiarize you with On-Screen Take Offtrade Menu options

Section 3 Toolbars and Menus

12

Toolbars On-Screen Takeoff is equipped with several helpful toolbars for application efficiency See Appendix II Toolbar Item` Details for a detailed description of each toolbar item Individually the toolbars may be displayed moved docked reshaped or hidden from view You can also create costume toolbars to fit your needs

Main Toolbar

Tool Toolbar

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Takeoff Toolbar

Image Toolbar Viewing Toolbars Toolbars are displayed on the screen and will be consistent on each tab or page (Some toolbars or toolbar items will be in an inactive state if they donrsquot have a supporting element in the application)

1 Select View gt Toolbars and select the appropriate toolbar name

OR

2 Right-click on a toolbar region of the screen

3 Check the toolbars you want to display

Section 3 Toolbars and Menus

13

Moving Toolbars The toolbars may be positioned anywhere on the screen you wish This feature is provided to allow the flexibility for positioning the toolbars so they are out of your way yet handy for use

1 Click on an edge of the toolbar holding down the mouse button drag it to its new position

2 Release the mouse button to set it in place

NOTE If the toolbar is dropped anywhere other than a screen edge it will become free floating This feature is especially handy when using multiple monitors

Docking Toolbars The toolbars can be docked to any of the screen edges

1 Click on the title bar of an undocked toolbar

2 Drag the toolbar to any location on the screen

Hiding Toolbars

1 Select View gt Toolbars and select the toolbar you wish to remove from the screen

2 Right-click on the toolbar or dock bar areas

3 A floating toolbar can be closed by clicking on the in the upper right corner of the toolbar

Resizing Toolbars Only undocked (floating) toolbars may be resized

1 Position the mouse pointer over an edge

2 Click and drag

3 The toolbar can be resized as desired

Customizing the Toolbars You may rearrange or delete buttons within a toolbarrsquos display or you may move buttons from one toolbar to another If you find that you use a few tools over and over you may want to group them within a single toolbar for convenience On-Screen Takeoff gives you the flexibility to customize your takeoff environment

1 Select Tools gt Customize The Customize dialog will open

2 With the dialog open click on a toolbar button and drag buttons from one toolbar to another or a new location within the same toolbar

3 To add a button without altering another toolbar click on the Commands tab of the Customize dialog and drag the appropriate symbol from the Buttons section to a toolbar

4 To remove a button drag it to within the takeoff area of the application

Section 3 Toolbars and Menus

14

Menus

Section 3 Toolbars and Menus

15

Digitizer Menu

Section 4

16

Features

This section will

Show you how open On-Screen Takeoff

Describe the On-Screen Takeoff environment

Teach you how to navigate pages

Section 4 Features

17

Start On-Screen Takeoff

1 On your desktop double-click your On-Screen Takeoff icon

2 The application will open

OR

3 Left-click on the Start button on your computerrsquos toolbar

4 Scroll up to Programs gt On Center Software

5 Highlight On-Screen Takeoff and click On-Screen Takeoff will open On-Screen Takeoff opens to an untitled blank project The Image view of the screen will be a blank page

Two blank dock bars the Pan dock bar and the Takeoff dock bar appear at the left side of the screen Along the bottom the Status bar displays user status or context-sensitive messages as well as paper size and current zoom percentage of the plan sheet on screen The menu bar and several task specific toolbars are located at the top of the screen

NOTE All toolbars and dock bars may be accessed to view or hide through View gt Toolbars on the menu bar

Section 4 Features

18

Quick Start Video When On-Screen Takeoff opens you will be given an option to watch the Quick Start video (recommended) or start the program without watching the video

The 20 minute video will demonstrate key program functionality and allow you to view application instruction for enhanced learning

If you would like to watch the video click If you prefer to get started without

the video click If you have already viewed the video click the lsquoDo not show this message againrsquo box to prevent this dialog from appearing each time you open the program

NOTE If you decide later that you would like to watch the Quick Start video go to Help gt Watch

Quick Start Videos

On-Screen Takeoff Environment The On-Screen Takeoff environment acts like your drafting table allowing you to work on several sheets of plans at once and to reference at a glance the entire drawing and your position on that drawing while giving you the power of a computer to track analyze print and export your takeoff quantities and plans

The screen is bordered at the top by the Menu bar with pull-down menus and at the bottom by the Status bar which indicates current user status plan page size and current zoom percentage of page The largest portion of the application screen will be your takeoff area bounded on the left (by default) by two dock bars and on the top by several toolbars

In the takeoff area you may view your project plans (images) andor takeoff objects the takeoff list with quantities the worksheet or a legend of your condition list

The main window of On-Screen Takeoff has three tabs located at the bottom left allowing for quick change between Image Takeoff or Worksheet views Select the desired view option on the toolbar and it will automatically open on your screen

Section 4 Features

19

Image View

This view shows the plan file andor takeoff conditions drawn from your plans

Takeoff View This view displays the height if applicable and quantity breakdowns of your conditions according to result types indicated (eg linear feet square feet or count of items) for zones pages and the project as a whole It also displays notes per condition

Section 4 Features

20

Worksheet View This view displays the condition and quantity in units of measure specified in the first results field of the Results tab in the Condition dialog and allows the user to enter amounts for material labor and subcontractor takeoffs

NOTE When in the Worksheet view tab out the field then save This is keep all the values saved

Navigating On-Screen Takeoff

Auto Scrolling When creating linear areas or zones On-Screen Takeoff will automatically scroll the image view when necessary It will move as your mouse or digitizer moves beyond the edge of the current view

Changing Pages

1 Select View gt Next Page Previous Page or Go To Page (specify page number for the Go to Page option)

2 You may also select the corresponding arrows for these options from the Navigate Toolbar The

drop down arrow in the Page field will list the pages The and arrows will take you to the

previous or next page The and arrows will take you to the first or last page

OR

Section 4 Features

21

3 Or press Ctrl G for the Go To Page dialog

Hot Links Hot links allow you to move quickly from one drawing to the pertinent area of another drawing A hot link is handy when viewing enlarged areas of a page and needing the ability to jump back to a reference page

1 Select Tools gt Hot Link

OR

2 Click from the Tools Toolbar

3 Click on the page where you want to set the link The Hot Link dialog will open

4 Using the current page display on the Navigate Toolbar access the pull-down menu of pages by

clicking on the arrow at the right

5 Select the page for your link (You may also choose View gt Go to Page and select by page number)

6 Manipulate the view using the zoom tool and the scroll bars

7 Click

8 After joining a hot link to another page the hot link arrows in the Navigation Toolbar will become active

9 Move a hot link to another location on the page by clicking then click and drag the hot link image anywhere on the page

Section 5

22

Projects

This section will

Help you create settings important to your projects

Explain how On-Screen Takeoff works with your electronic or paper plans

Section 5 Projects

23

Project Template Files You can begin your project with a template Templates allow you to take advantage of conditions and settings used with previous projects

On-Screen Takeoff templates contain condition lists and established layer separations from previous projects you have created You may also use the sample templates provided with On-Screen Takeoff as a great starting point All aspects of the templates may be adjusted for a new project

1 Select File gt New and click the OK button

2 From the New dialog box choose the template that best fits your project

3 The conditions for this template will appear in the Takeoff Dock bar and the Project Properties dialog will open asking for further information

4 Use File gt Save or File gt Save As to rename and save your new project

Saving a Project as a Template File You can save your condition properties and layers as a template for future projects

1 Select File gt Save As

2 Enter a name for your template and select On-Screen Takeoff Template Files (tpo) from the Save As type field of the dialog (click on the down arrow to select)

3 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog Modifying a Template File Follow these steps to modify an existing template file if you need to change or add conditions andor layers

1 Select File gt Open

2 Navigate to your Projects directory

3 In the File Type drop-down select On-Screen Takeoff Template files (tpo)

4 Choose the On-Screen Takeoff template file you would like to modify and click the OK button

5 Make appropriate changes

6 Save and close file

The On-Screen Takeoff template files cannot save takeoff information

Section 5 Projects

24

Opening an Existing Project File 1 Select File gt Open

2 Navigate to the desired file location

3 Click the Open button

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask

you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Creating a New Project

1 Select File gt New

2 For a blank untitled project click

3 At this point the Project Properties dialog will pop-up for more information about your takeoff

NOTE The following are important to keep in mind when beginning a new project

At the start of your project fill out the Project Properties settings to establish the name for all printed output from your project set the default page size and scale for your plans number and names of different pages within the project and locations of electronic drawings

Scale settings can significantly affect quantity outcomes Be sure to set the scale for each page of drawings before beginning condition takeoffs

When using a digitizer remember to make a mark with a pen or pencil in the upper left and lower right corners of the first sheet of the paper plans to delineate the takeoff area for that sheet You can then set the takeoff area on On-Screen Takeoff using your marks

Save your project before you begin taking off any conditions On-Screen Takeoff will write a back-up file using the same file name

Remember the Undo feature If you make a mistake select Edit gt Undo and reverse the process step by step

Section 5 Projects

25

Project Properties

You can either set your Project Properties when you create a new takeoff or once your project file is saved under the appropriate name

1 Select File gt Project Properties the Project Properties dialog box will appear

2 Type in the name of your project to appear on printouts Use the backspace andor delete keys to edit the name as necessary

3 Press the Tab key to move to the Default Image Size option or click within the Image Size box You may click on the arrow at the right for the pull-down menu of page size options or you can use the down-arrow key on your keyboard to scroll through the list to the appropriate selection

4 Press the Tab key to move to the Default Scale option Select a scale by using the drop down arrow If your scale is metric you will need to click in the box next to Metric to convert to that measurement

5 Establish the number of pages for your project plans And load image files See Adding Pages to

Your Project

Adding Pages to Projects Individual Electronic Plans

1 Click on in the Project Properties dialog

2 In the Add Images dialog use the drop down arrow to navigate to the appropriate directory and folder containing your image

3 Select the file so that it displays in the File name field then click The file will display by name and path in the Image File field in Project Properties dialog

4 Click to accept and your project will automatically open

5 Save your project with the new settings by selecting File gt Save

Section 5 Projects

26

Electronic plans scanned from blueprints (as opposed to blue lines) will display as white lines on a black background and are difficult to read on your computer screen Select Image gt Invert and the colors will invert to black on white

You may have noticed the Page column in the Project Properties dialog Generally plan images occupy one page and 1 will be listed in the column indicating Page 1 of your plan file If you import a multi-page TIF a plan file containing more than one page of plans they will import as separate pages and each successive page will be indicated under the Page column as 1 2 3 etc of the plan file

Group of Electronic Plans You may add all the electronic plan files from a particular source (for example from a CD) by using the Auto Add feature

1 Click the button in the Project Properties dialog

2 Browse until you find the appropriate directory and folder containing your plan images

3 Click on any file displayed within your target folder so that the file name appears in the File name box of the Auto Add dialog

4 Click The image paths and file names will be recorded into the project properties arranged alphabetically

5 Click to accept your choices and your project will automatically open

6 Save your project with the new settings by selecting File gt Save

To load Dodge Plans into your Project Properties see Appendix IIi Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

Paper Plans On-Screen Takeoff makes it easy for Full Mode users to perform quantity takeoffs from paper plans using a digitizer

1 Add pages by clicking until you have the number of pages initially in the project

2 Name each page by clicking within the Title area and typing the name

3 Click to accept your choices and close the Project Properties dialog

4 Save your project with the new project properties settings by selecting File gt Save

Section 5 Projects

27

Setting Up a Drawing Template On-Screen Takeoff provides the convenience of using the same work surface for both digitizer and mouse to allow the user to draw conditions and then edit settings of the project or add or change conditions without breaking stride A mouse pad template included with the program defines the area of the digitizer in which use of the stylus or cursor will be recognized as mouse movement as opposed to drawing movement

1 Place your stylus on On-Screen Takeoff

2 Placing the template identifies the location mouse movements will be recognized by the program

Before placing the template the template must be applied to the digitizer surface This may have been done during the installation of your digitizer We suggest attaching the template to the lower right corner of the digitizer surface about one inch inside the grid area

3 Select Digitizer gt Place Template

4 Follow the instruction prompts on the screen clicking first on the target symbol at the left of the On-Screen Takeoff box on the template then on the target at the right

Setting Takeoff Area Before you can begin taking off a drawing you must define the drawing area on the digitizer This requires defining an area that will include all objects on each drawing of your plans As you add pages to your takeoff the same area of the digitizer will be active

1 Secure the plans to the digitizer with tape or a set of clamps

2 With a pen or a pencil mark the upper left corner and the lower right corner of the first page in your set of plans

3 Select Digitizer gt Set Takeoff Area

4 Click each mark with the stylus pen as prompted

5 Verify the active area of the digitizer by looking at the image size located in the lower right corner of your screen

If you close the program before the takeoff is complete you will need to reestablish the takeoff area before you can add additional condition quantities

Electronic plans appear on your computer screen eliminating the need to set a takeoff area You simply drag your mouse across the conditions you wish to takeoff The conditions will be highlighted and quantities will be totaled instantly Electronic plans are available through a variety of services For information contact an On Center Software account manager

Section 5 Projects

28

Setting Scale for Specific Pages You may set the scale in each page view separately This will override the default scale setting in Project Properties for that page Setting the correct scale for the drawing before taking off quantities ensures accurate calculations Be careful to check the scale for each drawing in your project before doing takeoffs

1 Display the page you want to set select Edit gt Set Scale

2 Use the drop down arrow to select a scale that will be applied to that page

3 Click

OR

4 Access the pull-down scale settings on the Navigate toolbar

NOTE As you draw objects notice that the drawn object is similar in width to the object on your plans If it is not the scale set may not be correct

Calculating Scale You may calculate scale according to a known measurement between two points either with a digitizer or on electronic plans

1 Select Edit gt Calculate Scale using Image or Edit gt Calculate Scale using Digitizer

2 Follow the instructions in the related Calculate Scale dialog box You will be asked to click on the first and second points then to enter the dimension for that distance

3 The scale will be recalculated for the displayed page and the Scale display on the Navigate toolbar will show the new scale

Section 6

29

Conditions and Takeoff

This section will Draw Conditions to Takeoff Plan Quantities

What Zones will do to help your takeoff process

Discuss the ins and outs of Takeoffs

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

30

Creating Conditions

If you are starting a new project from scratch you will need to create conditions to takeoff quantities such as floor areas wall lengths and corner bead counts If you are using a template you will have several pre-designed conditions already listed on the Takeoff dock bar However you may want to change the characteristics of some conditions or create additional conditions for a particular project

1 Right Click within the Takeoff dock bar Select New gt Condition

Or

2 From the Takeoff dock bar Click (if the buttons are not showing right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select Show Buttons from the pop-up menu) The New Condition dialog appears

3 Select the condition type (Linear Area Count or Zone) from the pull-down menu accessed by the

down arrow next to the Type option

4 Press Tab or use the mouse (or stylus) to move to Name and enter a name for your condition

5 Specify the desired condition attributes See Condition Attributes for more detail

6 Click for condition to apply

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

31

Condition Attributes Each condition type will have related attributes to select or specify within the General and Advanced tabs of the New Condition dialog Once a condition has been used to takeoff a quantity from your plans certain attributes cannot be changed

All conditions allow the user to specify color and fill pattern for the object drawn

Linear Conditions

General Specify width and height by feet and inches Specify pitch in inches up to the nearest thousandth of an inch if applicable

Advanced Specify rounding for object quantities and droprun default length for electrical or plumbing drops at the ends of lines Select Connect to have lines connect at the corners where one line of the condition ends and another begins (and indicate Tolerance for the featurersquos activation as distance between the ends of two lines) Choose Trim to have lines automatically trim to a line being crossed Choose Curve to draw a curved line

Follow these examples for inputting feet and inches For 7 feet 6 inches type 706 for 13 feet 7 inches type 1307 For 20 feet type 2000

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

32

Area Conditions

General If needed you can specify the thickness (in inches) andor pitch (in inches)

Advanced Specify rounding for object quantities Choose to display an adjustable grid within the area and indicate matrix cell dimensions

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

33

Count Conditions

General

Specify height and indicate the size (in inches) and shape (square circle triangle rectangle or opening) of the count object as it will appear on screen

Advanced Count conditions have advanced attributes These options are available for all shapes except for openings

Zone Conditions Zones allow you to subdivide condition quantities making it easier to modify and complete jobs in phases They can be used at the end of a takeoff to isolate a group of condition quantities that are in different areas of the takeoff

Zones can also be used to break a takeoff into multi-phases and can even be used to isolate quantities while a job is in progress to group the amount of work that has been completed to date They can be applied to one or multiple pages in your plans automatically calculating the takeoff quantities for each zoned area

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

34

The zone feature is only available in Lite and Full Mode If you are in View Mode and would like

to use this feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade

Condition Notes A Note tab is provided for comments regarding the condition These notes will display on the Takeoff List report and will import into Quick Bid

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

35

Condition Results The Results tab of the New Condition is based on condition type Initial settings default to linear feet (LF) for linear conditions square feet (SF) for area conditions and count of items (EA) for count conditions and zones The first of the results fields will display for the condition items in the Takeoff dock bar area All results will display in worksheets and Takeoff List reports as well as in an Excel spreadsheet after being exported

Copying Conditions You may use the condition attributes from a condition yoursquove already created for any future conditions of the same type

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Click the Copy button from the toolbar

OR

3 Right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select copy

4 A new condition will appear in the list with the same condition attributes as the previous condition but with the quantities zeroed

Editing Conditions Once you have copied a condition you might want to change several attributes You can also edit an existing condition to fit any updated needs

1 Highlight the desired condition on the Takeoff dock bar

2 Click the Change button

OR

3 Double-click on the condition you wish to edit to bring up the Change Condition dialog

NOTE The Change Condition dialog differs from the New Condition dialog only in that if takeoffs

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

36

have been performed in your project with this condition you will not be able to change the type of condition or certain properties under the advanced tab of the dialog box

Deleting Conditions 1 Click on the condition in the Takeoff Dock bar area

2 Click the Delete button on the toolbar

OR

3 Right-click and select Delete from the pop-up menu

All takeoff associated with the deleted condition will be deleted immediately and permanently

Organizing Project Conditions Within your project you can create folders andor sub-folders for different types of conditions You may even want to create a folder containing conditions with reset values

To get started organizing your conditions make sure you are viewing the condition tree (right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select Show Tree)

Creating Folders and Sub-Folders 1 Right-click in the Takeoff Dock bar area

2 Select New gt Folder from the pop-up menu

Copying Folders

1 Click on the folder and click Copy on the toolbar

2 All copied conditions within the new folder will have values reset to zero

Renaming Folders

1 Click on the folder

2 Right-click and select Rename from the pop-up menu

3 Enter a name for your folder and click the Enter button

Changing Condition Order

You may move conditions up or down in the condition list of the Takeoff dock bar to suit your project needs

1 Select the condition you would like to move by clicking to highlight it

NOTE When you are ready to move the highlighted conditions be sure that you start

moving using the last condition chosen That condition will have a highlighted boarder

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

37

2 Drag and drop any the condition from one place to another in the list You may also move a condition to another folder on the list in this way

Drawing with Conditions Snap Angles Set up snap angles to prevent lines from appearing jagged Snap angles are commonly set at 15deg and shift snap angles at 0deg

1 Go to Tools gt Options Options dialog appears

2 Under the General tab make the desired settings

3 Click to save the settings As they are drawn lines will snap to the set degree

Drawing a Linear Object 1 Select a condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff dock bar

2 Move the cursor into the Image takeoff area of the screen you will see the cursor display as crosshairs

3 Click and hold left mouse button then drag mouse to draw a line

4 Release mouse button to set line

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

38

5 Repeat steps for further lines

Continuous Mode This feature allows you to draw an object that has connected lines

1 Click the icon from the Takeoff toolbar

OR

2 Go to Tools gt Continuous Mode

3 Follow steps 1-3 from Draw a Linear Object

4 Click at each point of intersection The object will be connected

5 Double-click after making the final point to set the lines

Drawing a Curve To draw a curved line the Curve option must be checked under the Advanced tab of the Condition dialog

1 Click where you want to begin the curve and drag in a straight line to the position for the other endpoint of the curve

2 Click on the line to select it Handles in the shapes of small squares will appear at either end of

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

39

the line and in the center of the line

3 Move the cursor over the center handles until the cursor becomes a two-way arrow

4 Click and drag in the direction of the curve bending the line as you move the cursor Release to set the curve (The line you began with will disappear)

Draw a circle by drawing two curved lines connected

Drawing an Area Object Area conditions are drawn similarly to continuous mode lines You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete your area takeoff

NOTE When drawing an area do not intersect the perimeter or line of the object you are drawing

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

3 The area will be filled with the pattern set for that condition

NOTE The simulated circle will be good enough for you to be able to make a bid

To create a circular area click from point to point with very short distances in between points simulating a circlersquos perimeter Double-click after setting the last point to set the area

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

40

Grid Options Grids give you an added advantage when installing materials such as tiles Use this feature to get a count for how many tiles are needed for an area

1 Double-click on an area condition in the Takeoff dock bar to open its Condition dialog

2 Click on the Advanced tab to show its options

3 Check the box next to Grid by clicking in it

4 Indicate the dimensions of the cell matrix in inches (For example 200 x 400)

5 Under Results tab choose each (EA) for one of the results fields This will tabulate a number of grid cells (including partial grid cells) in area

6 Click to save your settings

7 Use the Move Grid and Rotate Grid features in the Tools menu to manipulate the grid as desired

Grid Calculation

1 Go to Tools gt Options menu

1 Specify if On-Screen Takeoff automatically should Calculate Grid Position

2 If AreaGrid Size is selected On-Screen Takeoff will calculate the number of items needed to fill the grid based on grid demintions

3 Click to accept and close the dialog

To move a line at any angle (regardless of default setting) press the Shift key while moving the mouse

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

41

Backout Mode This feature allows you to take out part of an area and deduct that amount of square footage

1 Select Tools gt Backout Mode

2 Outline the are you want backed out as you would when drawing a regular area object (see Drawing an Area Object)

3 The outlined area will clear and quantities will be recalculated

NOTE The perimeter of the backout area will be added to the LF quantity for that condition

Drawing a Count Object Square triangle rectangle and circle shaped count objects can easily be placed on images

1 Select the condition

2 Click in the location where you want the object to appear

3 To place an opening-shaped count item like a door or window you must click over an existing linear object such as a wall

4 On the Results tab you can change the height properties to give you the result you need

5 If Backout is checked on the advanced tab for each count opening the opening-shaped count item will back out a corresponding section of the linear object

Opening shaped count items are sized at 3rsquo0rdquo by default

Drawing a Zone Zones are drawn in the same way as area objects and may be any polygonal shape You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete the zone perimeter

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

42

Selecting Objects

1 Use the Select Tool to select objects

You can also select all objects that correspond to a condition

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Right-click and choose Select All

3 All objects with this condition will be highlighted with squares as an outline

Moving and Resizing Objects Linear

1 To move or resize a linear object click anywhere on the line to select it

2 To move the line position your pointer over the center handles When the mouse is positioned over the handles you will see a two-way arrow You will only be able to move the line in the direction of the arrows

3 Drag the line to a new position

4 Clicking and dragging the handles on the ends of the line will allow you to lengthen or shorten your line

Area and Zone

1 To move an area object or zone in its entirety click and drag it to its new position

2 Grabbing a handle at a corner or intersection of the object will allow you to adjust and change its perimeter

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

43

Count 1 To move a square circle rectangle or triangle shaped count object click and drag

2 Click and drag an opening shaped count object along the length of the linear object to the desired position then release

NOTE An opening shaped count object may not be moved from its associated linear condition object however it may be moved up and down the length of the linear object

Layers On-Screen Takeoff allows you to sort and separate your takeoff objects within the same job and on the same page On-Screen Takeoff gives you this flexibility through the use of layers

By assigning different conditions to different layers (for example differentiating between floors ceilings and walls) you can choose to view all layers or turn off certain layers to display and print the remaining groups of conditions only You may also remove the background image of electronic plans add text and hot link symbols or print only your condition takeoffs

Layers are only available in Full Mode If you are in View or Lite Mode and would like to use this

feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade Default Layers

On-Screen Takeoff begins every project with three default layers Image Annotation and Default The Image layer holds the electronic plan files you may have in your project The Annotation layer possesses all text notations highlighting and hot links in the project The Default layer will appear in the Condition dialog when creating or editing a condition (listed in the takeoff dock bar) Conditions are assigned to the Default layer unless otherwise specified by the user

Creating Layers To assign a condition to a layer other than the default layer you must first create additional layers for your project

1 Select View gt Layers to open the Layers dialog

2 Click An unnamed layer will be added

3 Click within the empty box and type a name for your layer (for example Wall)

4 New layers are added as active layers The adjacent box under the Show column will be checked

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

44

Assigning a Layer to a Condition 1 Open the Condition dialog box by creating a new condition or editing an existing condition

2 Under the General tab click on the down arrow in the Layer field to display optional layers

3 Select the desired layer for the condition Only the Default layer and layers you have added will be displayed

4 Click

View and Hide Layers

1 Select View gt Layers

2 Under the Show column check the box to view or remove the check (by clicking on it) to hide the specific layer

3 Click to accept and close the Layers dialog

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

45

Assigning Text to a Layer When adding text to an image On-Screen Takeoff has the capability to assign the text to a specified layer

1 Select the Text Tool

2 Click at the point you want to place your text

3 Type in your text using the Enter key for line breaks

4 Click the drop down arrow next to the Layer field and select the desired layer

Section 7

46

Printing and Exporting

This section will

Printing options and procedures

Exporting data by copying and pasting

Exporting quantity results to Excel spreadsheets

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

47

Print Setup On-Screen Takeoff allows the user to print the image takeoff list and worksheet

1 Select File gt Print Setup The Print Setup dialog will open

2 Select a printer or leave the default selection listed (change from the default printer displayed by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the field)

3 Indicate page size and printer tray option (Source) Access page size options by clicking on the

down arrow at the right of the field

4 Choose Portrait or Landscape orientation

5 Click to accept and close the dialog

Printing Images The image area can include the electronic plans the takeoff objects added text and hot links To print a subset of these (for example just the takeoffs without the plans or the added text and hot link symbols) hide layers that you do not want to print (see Section 6 View and Hide Layers) When you are printing your images every page will show the scale of the takeoff you are printing

1 Click on the Image tab to display the area of your project

2 Select File gt Print (or Ctrl + P)

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

48

3 Select the desired view (What to print) and the Image Range

4 Click The second Print dialog will open

5 Change settings accordingly or click if you accept the default settings

Printing Takeoff Lists and Worksheets In Takeoff Lists and Worksheets you may hide columns to print only certain results or adjust column widths to fit the report within the page size selected

1 In Takeoff List or Worksheet view move your cursor to the right side of the columnrsquos title bar the cursor will display as a two-way arrow

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

49

2 Click and drag to adjust the width of the column Holding the mouse button you may

slide the title bar under the title bar to its left to hide the column completely

3 Select File gt Print or press Ctrl + P to access the Print dialog

4 Indicate desired printer and choose the number of copies

5 Click to print and close the dialog

When printing the condition list we suggest printing in landscape

To reset to the default column widths double-click on the right border of a column heading will reset the column to its right (or previously to its right before being hidden)

Print Preview 1 Select File gt Print Preview

2 Use and to vary your view 3 If viewing an image choose current full or scale view to see how it displays

4 For printed outputs that cover more than one page use and to view adjacent pages or click on the down arrow next to Page field and select the page you want displayed

Exporting Using the CopyPaste Feature You may copy all the data or sections from the worksheet and the takeoff list view in On-Screen Takeoff and paste it into another application When pasting into Excel the cell layout will be maintained

1 Highlight the areas you wish to paste Click and hold the left mouse button down as you drag the cursor over the area to be selected then releasing the mouse button

OR

2 Select the entire takeoff list quickly click on the left On-Screen Takeoff column header and hold and drag the cursor across the remaining column headings

The number of pages for the view selected will display in the lower left-hand corner The zoom percentage that applies to the view will be displayed in the lower right-hand corner next to page size of the drawing

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

50

3 In the worksheet view you may highlight rows by clicking on the numbered buttons to the left of each row clicking and dragging across column headings or clicking and dragging over individual cells in the worksheet

Click anywhere in the appropriate view to deselect the area

4 Once your selection is highlighted you may select Edit gt Copy or Ctrl C from the keyboard 5 On your monitor switch to the application into which you want to paste your selection 6 Select Edit gt Paste in the new application or simply press Ctrl + V to paste

The colored keys for conditions cannot be pasted

Using the Export Feature You may export condition quantities to specified cell location within an Excel worksheet file Cell target locations are assigned in the Results tab of the condition dialogs on the Export line relating to each quantity measurement type

On-Screen Takeoff will export takeoff quantity results for up to three different quantity types that you specify For instance you may want to know the number of square feet in a ceiling area as well as the number of linear feet in its perimeter

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

51

1 Bring up the Condition dialog by double-clicking on a condition in the takeoff dock bar or by

selecting the condition and clicking

2 Click on the Results tab to access its fields The default quantities for the condition type will display

3 For each results field click on the arrow to access the pull-down menu and select the appropriate quantity (for example SF LF EA etchellip)

4 Have your Excel spreadsheet opened and saved in a file

5 Specify the Excel spreadsheet cell locations where you want the results to go

6 For a cell in the first sheet of your spreadsheet type in the cell address (eg a1) Case is not important

7 For a cell on a successive sheet of your spreadsheet type in sheet the number followed by a comma and the cell address without any spaces (eg sheet2a1) Case is not important

8 Click

9 Select File gt Export gt Condition Qty to Excel

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

52

10 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

11 Click to export On-Screen Takeoff results to specified cell locations in the Excel file When you return to the Excel application you will see the values have been added to the specified cell locations in your spreadsheet

12 Save your Excel file

Exporting Worksheet to Excel

1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 From On-Screen Takeoff Select File gt Export gt Worksheet to Excel

4 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

5 Click When you return to the Excel application you will see the values from the Worksheet Tab have been added to your spreadsheet

6 Save your Excel file

Exporting Takeoff to CVS 1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 Click the Takeoff Tab in the project you want to export the information

4 Select File gt Export gt Takeoff to CSV

5 Browse to the location of the CSV spreadsheet file click file to select it

6 Click the Save

NOTE CSV files can be opened in Excel Lotus Access etc One may consider this option more of a ldquodumprdquo into a file

The Excel application must be active (it may be minimized on the application bar) with the target spreadsheet open in the application Otherwise an error will occur with the export operation that will affect both the On-Screen Takeofftrade file and the Excel spreadsheet

Section 8

53

Advanced Features

This section will

Some special features of working with condition objects in the takeoff area

Details of advanced options for conditions

Advanced features of the Project Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

54

Features to Use with Objects Roping Feature You can move copy or delete using this feature Using the Select tool (the pointer) you may select several objects at once by clicking and dragging an outline around the objects then releasing the mouse button Roping may select either objects completely within the outlined area (inclusive) or objects both within and touched by the outlined area (touching) Specify your roping preference under Tools gt Options

1 Click and hold the mouse button at a point on the screen near the objects to be selected and drag to surround the objects with an outline

2 Release the mouse button The objects will be selected

3 You may now

Move the group around on the page by clicking within the group dragging the mouse and releasing the button to place the objects

Delete the group of objects by clicking the Delete key or

Copy and paste by pressing Ctrl C to copy the group then Ctrl V to paste it The pasted copy of the grouped objects will appear slightly offset from the original objects

Section 8 Advanced Features

55

Applying a DropRun Count

Use the droprun feature when calculating quantities to take into account the drop or run of a linear condition such as electrical lines or plumbing pipes Drop or run lengths may be added separately to any linear condition on screen while a default droprun length may be indicated for a condition as a whole

1 Select the desired linear condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff Dock bar

2 Click the Change button in the toolbar to open the Change Condition dialog

3 Click the Advanced tab to access the advanced options and click inside the DropRun check box

4 Enter a default length to be applied to all of this condition Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches) You can leave the length blank and manually enter drop run on each segment drawn

5 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog

Edit DropRun Count

1 With the related linear condition in the Takeoff Dock bar highlighted or with the pointer tool selected

2 click on the desired linear object in the image takeoff area The Count button will become active

3 Click on the Count button (alternatively select Tools gt Count) The default droprun amount will show in the pop-up Count dialog (Default length will be zero if droprun has not been selected in this conditionrsquos properties)

4 Type in the desired length Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches)

5 Click the OK button The additional amount will be reflected in the corresponding quantity The new DropRun count will apply only to the object edited

Adding Text in Image View

On-Screen Takeoff allows you to place text comments around your quantity takeoffs that may be printed along with plan images and objects Text is automatically placed within the Annotation Layer (that includes text and hot links)

1 To place text on the image select the Text Tool and click at the point you want to place your text opening a text box

2 Type in your information clicking Enter for line breaks

3 When you are finished click the OK button to exit the text box

4 To reposition text simply click on the text (with the Text Tool active) to select it

5 Move the cursor over the text the cursor will now display as a four-way arrow

6 Click and drag the mouse to position the text as desired

Section 8 Advanced Features

56

1 To edit existing text use the Text Tool to double-click on the text to open the editing box

2 Enter additional text or use the Backspace key to delete text as necessary

Formatting Text Once created you may format the font size type style and color of your text

1 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Font or click on the Font button in the Takeoff Toolbar

2 Select the desired features (color options are disabled) and click the OK button

3 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Color or click on the Color button in the Takeoff Toolbar The Color dialog will open

4 Click on a color in the Basic Color palette or create a color and add to the Custom Colors palette (Be sure to click on the color in the Custom Colors palette to select it)

5 Click the OK button

Object Properties

Linear Objects

Linear objects may be set to connect at corners

A linear object may be set to trim automatically when crossing another linear object (Check the trim option under the advanced tab of the Condition dialog)

When you move a connected linear object objects automatically move and resize connected lines accordingly (quantities are then recalculated)

This feature requires that the connected linear object be moved using the center handles (does not apply when resizing the line from the ends)

Objects constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

Objects are measured from centerline to centerline

Section 8 Advanced Features

57

Area Objects When drawing an area use your escape key to undo the last line drawn You may reverse your

drawing of an area using the escape key

The area will not fill with color and pattern until the user double-clicks after the last line is set

Lines drawn to delineate an area object constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

After selecting an area to move or adjust position the mouse in the center to move the entire area position the mouse at the sides or corners to adjust the perimeter

Count Objects

All count objects are quantified by the physical number of objects per page and reported as EA for the UOM The quantity for the current Image View is (displayed in the Condition List) and the total quantity in your project is displayed in the Takeoff View and Worksheet View)

Square circle rectangle and triangle shaped count objects do not displace or subtract from other object quantities when placed on top of them However on the Advanced Tab for the count condition a connect property can be set (this is a check box) so that when a count object of this shape is put on top of a Linear type takeoff object it will move with the linear if said linear is moved

An opened-shaped count object must be placed within a linear object Opening shaped count objects may also be measured by linear foot or linear yard (EA SF and SY are also options) Opening shaped count items default to a width of 3rsquo 0rdquo at the time of creation This size can be changed The small medium and large size are not options on this type of condition anymore Check Backout on the Advanced tab for each Count object back out the footage (or yardage) of opening-shaped count objects in which they are placed

NOTE In order to see this Backout functionality (in quantity) for SY or SF deductions at least one of the

results for the Linear(s) this object will be placed on must be set to SY or SF and the count object must have a height quantity

Advanced Features of Conditions The Round Feature Under the Advanced tab of the linear and area Condition dialogues you may specify quantity rounding (in inches) For linear objects rounding applies to each linear object drawn For area objects rounding will apply to each segment of the area perimeter adjusting the perimeter and area calculations For example With a linear condition entering 12 in the Round field will round up each related linear object to the nearest 12 inches or one foot With this setting two walls of 1 4 would each round to 2 0 totaling 4 0

NOTE In the Takeoff Dock bar condition list and in the On-Screen Takeoff reports quantities will be displayed in whole numbers rounded up to the nearest foot However calculations are based on true quantities without rounding unless the Round Feature is engaged

Pitch Pitch may apply either to linear or area conditions It is measured in rise per linear foot Entering 12 indicates a 12 rise per 12 of linear distance (a pitch of 12 over 12) or an angle of 45deg

Section 8 Advanced Features

58

Advanced Features of Project Properties Selecting Multiple Pages

1 Select a single page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry

2 Drag the cursor down the column of numbers to select consecutive pages

3 Click on the blank button at the top of this column to select all pages in the Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

59

Changing Image Assigned to a Drawing 1 Select the page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry 2 Click the Change Image button The Change Image dialog box will appear

3 Navigate to the desired file and select by clicking on it

4 Click the Open button The electronic file assigned to the page will have been changed to reflect the new file choice

Changing Image File Path 1 Select pages as described above

2 Choose Change Folder

3 In the Change Folder dialog navigate to the appropriate folder

4 Click the OK button The file path will have been changed for the selected page entries

Delete a Page from Project Properties 1 Select the page you want to delete by clicking on its associated number (in the gray box at the

left of the entry)

2 Choose Delete Page

All Takeoff on the page will be deleted immediately and permanently

Section 8 Advanced Features

60

Advanced Features of Tool Options

Calculation Method On-Screen Takeoff has built-in calculation options to allow for faster work and faster saves until your takeoff is complete Calculation options are found by selecting Tools gt Options then clicking on the Calculation tab

Calculation method can be set to Automatic Automatic except Grids and Manual Manual will allow the program to operate more quickly while Automatic or Automatic except Grids allows the user to see quantity changes as takeoffs are made

In any mode you may press F9 to recalculate quantities for the On-Screen Takeoff current totals

Configuration Tab

When the ldquoPage Label (A01)rdquo radial button is chosen On-Screen Takeoff puts the numbered label on all the pages of in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar If the Page Descriptionrdquo radial button is chosen then a description of what takeoff is on that specific page will be shown in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar

This section of the configuration tab gives you options on how you want to export your information When the ldquoFolderSubfolder Namesrdquo radial button is chosen than on your file that you are exporting to will have all the conditions folders and subfolders In the Delimiter box you can choose the symbol that is needed to separate the information you are exporting Some files need semicolons () or colons () to make sure the information comes exported in is separated it the appropriate places

Section 8 Advanced Features

61

In previous versions of On-Screen Takeoff there are views that users need to have in order for them to display their information By either choosing ldquoOST 1xrdquo or ldquoOST 2xrdquo it will let the program know you want your columns of information exported in that specific format

When you have the Confirm Deletions radial button of ldquoYesrdquo chosen than every time you delete anything you will get a dialog box confirming your intentions of deletion

While working with your takeoff you have a choice to either view the legend of your conditions or hide it Choose whichever radial button that suits your needs

For those who prefer to use the Enter key to navigate in dialog boxes this option is just for that

Font Tab The Font tab is designed for you to make your own look and feel for the application At the bottom of this tab it will show you sample of the fonts and colors you have chosen

Renaming the Current Page You may change the name of the current page in the takeoff area of On-Screen Takeoff by selecting Edit gt Rename Page

This opens the Name Page dialog and you may simply type in a new name and click the Enter button The new name for the file will be reflected on the title bar for the page and in Project Properties

You also may access the Rename Page function by right-clicking in the takeoff area while in Image View and selecting the option from the pop-up menu that appears

Section 9

62

Saving and Exiting

This section will

Explain how to save projects

Show you how to safely exit the program

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

63

Saving Your Project

1 Select File gt Save 2 If your project has not previously been saved a Save dialog box will open to allow you to name

the file and choose the directory and folder in which to save your file 3 Once saved File gt Save will simply save the current version of the file

OR

4 Select File gt Save As then type in a new name for the file and save to the desired file path

The Auto-save Feature With the Auto-save feature On-Screen Takeoff automatically backs up your open project You may choose to have more than one level of backup files The first backup copy will have the extension b00 and successive files will be b01 b02 and so on If you have designated four levels of backup files after the fourth backup copy has been created (b03) the next file will be saved over the file with extension b00 Further backup saves will then rotate through the four backup files in the same way

1 Select Tools gt Options 2 In the Auto-save area (under the General tab) select the frequency of backup file creation (in

minutes) and the number of levels for the feature 3 You also may disengage the feature by clicking in the check box to clear it

The Auto-save feature automatically saves backup copies to the directory of the current project If you are working from a write-protected area such as a CD-ROM On-Screen Takeoff will place backup files in the On-Screen Takeoff folder

Exiting When you are finished using On-Screen Takeoff it is very easy to exit Exiting is very important because of security reasons If someone were to use your computer they could enter the application and view and manipulate information

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

64

On-Screen Takeoff closes the open project when you open another or create a new project or when you exit the program

1 Select File gt Exit

OR

2 You also may click at the upper right-hand corner of the application to exit

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

65

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer When you get your digitizer from GTCO you will need to connect it to your computer Follow the instructions outlined below to do this

Note For rollup digitizers the metal bar must be oriented to the top or right hand side

Connecting the Digitizer 1 Lay the digitizer out flat 2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer 3 Plug in the power adapter 4 Plug the interface (IO) cable into the digitizer 5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into an open serial port on computer

Note GTCO Technical support phone number is 410-381-6688 The electronic manual (on diskette) from GTCO contains more detailed installation and operation instructions for the GTCO digitizer model you have

Installing other Digitizer Drivers If you are using a GTCO Digitizer you will need to install the GTCO TabletWorks Drivers

If you are using a Digitizer not supported by GTCO Tablet Works 10 please contact the manufacturer of your digitizer for assistance with installation

Installing GTCO TabletWorks Drivers 1 Insert the On Center CD into the CD-ROM drive The CD Startup screen will open 2 Click on Install Software 3 Select Additional Software and Drivers 4 Select Digitizer Driver 5 Follow the instructions for installing TabletWorks 10

Adhering the Template The template is a small plastic sticker used to enable mouse function when using the digitizer with On-Screen Takeoff Place your template on your digitizer We suggest placing it in the bottom right corner of the digitizer about one inch inside the takeoff area

Note You may either peel off the back of the template and use the adhesive surface or you can tape the template down

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

66

Testing the Digitizer Drivers Before running OST you may test the digitizer by moving the stylus around on the digitizer pad it should move the mouse cursor (if mouse emulation is enabled)

If the digitizer does not move the mouse cursor on the screen

The superset codes may need to be reset Reset the superset codes by touching on the border of the digitizer with the stylus The digitizer should beep several times

The digitizer may not be communicating with the computer Be sure the COM port selected is correct Be sure the COM port selected is correct If you are not able to get the digitizer to move the mouse cursor you need to call GTCO technical support for help

Note The Mouse Emulation is not required for On-Screen Takeoff to work properly It is used only for the Template functionality if the digitizer is moving the cursor the wrong direction (up instead of sideways or vice-versa)

Click the L-shaped arrow symbol on the digitizer with the stylus

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

67

Appendix II Toolbar Items Main Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

68

Tool Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

69

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

70

Navigate Toolbar (Continued)

Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

71

Takeoff Toolbar (Continued)

Image Toolbar

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

72

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

This section will detail how to load plans from a F W Dodge CD-ROM into an On-Screen Takeoff project file ready for takeoffs

Dodge files may be added to the Project Properties dialog However loading the files in that way will load the files by number rather than name description If you want to load one page only from your Dodge CD You will have to rename the page to display the name rather than number of the file

To load plan files from a Dodge CD so that the files load sequentially by file number but are displayed by name rather than by number within your project follow the instructions below

Opening a Dodge project from a CD-ROM 1 Insert the CD into the drive 2 Choose File gt Custom 3 Choose Dodge Plans Project (plansdat) as the file type 4 Select the appropriate file type by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the Files of type

field 5 In the Look in field access your drive paths by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the

field then

Navigate to your CD-ROM drive Open the data folder and Open the Projects folder

6 Select the desired project and open its folder 7 Open the plansdat file 8 All the images will come in sequenced correctly for that job along with the full descriptions

(names) of each page If there is not a plans folder in the project folder then plans do not exist for that project on the CD Opening the plansdat file will yield an empty project

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

73

Appendix IV Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer The On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer is a limited version of On Center Softwarersquos commercial takeoff software If your status bar located at the very bottom of the main window says View Mode in the lower left-hand corner then you are using the Plan Viewer You can use the plan viewer to

View CD-based amp converted CAD drawings

View a previously created OST file and associated drawings

Download electronic plans online

Navigate through drawings

Quickly Takeoff linearsareas and counts

Zoom in to view the plan better

Print drawings directly from the viewer

Viewing an On-Screen Takeoff Project File

1 To open an OST file that was previously created with of On-Screen Takeoff 2 Select File gt Open 3 An Open dialog will appear if you do not see the OST file you are looking for select the

Look In drop down arrow 4 A drop down menu will appear listing the various folders drives and mapped drives located

on your computer select the correct drive or folder location and continue to browse to the location of your OST file

5 When you see your OST file double-click it to open it 6 Any takeoff and drawings should appear on the Image tab view

If you do not see the drawings but do see the colored takeoff layer the drawings may

not be located in the same place they were originally saved at Go to File gt Project Properties and check the Image File path for each listed page If the image file path is pointing to a CD drive make sure the CD is inside the CR-ROM

Downloading Electronic Plans If your Online Plan Service provides a special file format (OSX) required to use this feature of our plan viewer you can immediately downloaded all electronic plans of a project directly from our viewer

Most Plan Room web sites will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff when a request to download plans is made Your particular Plan Room may differ in operation so please contact the provider directly with questions on using the site

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

74

When you request to download or open a project file from a Plan Room you will usually have the open to open or save an OSX file Choosing open will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff Alternately you may choose to save the file to a local hard drive After you have saved the file either double-click it to launch On-Screen Takeoff or open the OSX file using On-Screen Takeoff by clicking File then Open and locating the file on your hard drive You will need to change the file type to OSX

After the OSX file is opened you will see an additional tab appear in the Conditions List window called Pages

The Pages tab shows the hierarchy of your project Gray file icons represent pages that have not been downloaded and blue icons represents pages that have been downloaded

To download a page simply double-click the page icon

If you wish to select a group of pages to download you can use the Ctrl or Shift key to multiple select them then click the Download button

If you wish to download all pages at once click the Download All button

Downloaded pages will now appear in the Project Properties dialog in the same order in which they appear in the Pages tab

Creating Quick Takeoffs With On-Screen Takeoff you can create quick takeoffs to measure quantities even if you dont have the full version of our program However using the Quick Takeoff functionality shows you just a fraction of what the full version can do

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar is located at the top of the image view It has three buttons designated for three types of takeoffs Linear Area and Count The Quantity drop down list will show secondary quantities for Linears and Areas The Units drop down allows you to select how you want your quantities displayed Feet Inches Yards Millimeters and Meters

NOTE Every time change the type of takeoff you are performing (switching from Area to Linear for example) the previous quantities and takeoff objects will disappear They will also disappear when you changes pages

NOTE You can use the Dimension Tool to basically measure the distance between two points or linears The distance will display on the status bar at the bottom of the application

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

75

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions General

Where is On-Screen Takeoff installed on my computer

Typically it is installed in CProgram FilesOn-Screen Takeoff

In Explorer how do I recognize On-Screen Takeoff file types

On-Screen Takeoff data is stored in a single file per job lsquojob name OSTrsquo On-Screen Takeoff templates are stored as lsquotemplate nameTPOrsquo

Can only one project at a time be open

Yes For that reason opening another project automatically closes the project on screen You will be asked to save any changes

Is only one scale allowed per page What about on drawings that have multiple detail sections on a page and each of those drawings have different scales

Yes For pages with drawings of different scales copy the drawing to another project page and set the appropriate scale

I cannot perform backout on an area that is along a linear

As a workaround use the On-Screen Takeoff layers feature to help you with this issue Electronic Images

How do I start a project from drawings that have been scanned and written to a CD-ROM

Open a new project Select File gt Project Properties and select Auto Add Navigate to your CD and the appropriate folder and select any image file in that location Click Open All files in the location will load into your project Recommended that images are copied from CD to hard drive for performance

If I get a disk of drawings in AutoCAD format (R13 or R14) can I read them in On-Screen Takeoff

Yes On-Screen Takeoff now reads DWG DXF and many other format that are saved with AutoCAD

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

76

When I click on the all pages button what is supposed to happen Currently nothing seems to change when I click on that button

The All Pages button is used to apply the Darken and Enhance Plans feature to all pages in the project (as opposed to only the current page on screen)

Is there a way to deduct a large skylight from an area condition

Yes with the related area condition selected in the Takeoff Dock bar unselect the Backout button on the Takeoff Toolbar then draw the Backout area The area quantity will be deducted from the related condition object and the linear measurement of the Backout perimeter will be added

Digitizer Issues

How do I connect a Digitizer to the computer

See Appendix I Connecting a Digitizer

The Place Template menu choice is disabled

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or the digitizer or the digitzer drivers are not installed

It wonrsquot let me select the Set Takeoff Area menu choice

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or no job is open a digitizer is not installed or the drivers are not installed

The digitizer stylus is not moving the cursor or crosshairs

Click S-0-1 superset on the digitizer

How do I convert my old GTCO Digitizer to work with On- Screen Takeofftrade

Call GTCO and they may be able to reconfigure your digitizer to be compatible with On-Screen Takeoff

Printing Issues Which Printers work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible printers include On-Screen Takeoff Hewlett Packard Epson and Canon printers If you are having printer difficulties please contact support and specify the type of printer along with other pertinent information Contact support at wwwoncentercomsupport or email supportoncentercom

Which Plotters work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible Plotters include Hewlett Packard DesignJet plotters and the EnCAD Cadjet II If you are having plotter difficulties please contact support and specify the type of plotter concerned

ViewingDisplay I can no longer see my condition list How do I get it back

The toolbars and Dock bars can be turned on and off through the View gt Toolbars menu options

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

77

This is also accessible by right-clicking in the toolbar area and selecting (or deselecting) a toolbar listed

I cannot view my folders in the condition list

Right-click in the Takeoff Dock barcondition list area and select Show Tree to display your folders

My Status Bar reads Viewer Mode and I am unable to draw conditions

On-Screen Takeoff needs to be Authorized Or you need to purchase an upgrade Click the Perform Advanced Takeoff button on the main toolbar

I hid a Dock bar and when I selected to view it again it appeared alongside the other Dock

bar instead of stacked on top of it How do I fix it

Pick up the Dock bar by clicking on the bar at the top and continuing to hold down the mouse button drag the Dock bar over the other one It will resize and appear stacked with the other

When I open image files from a CD the images are all upside down How do I get them right

side up

To flip pages from top to bottom follow the steps below 1 Click the All Pages button on the Image Toolbar (All Pages is engaged when the button

is not clicked) 2 Click the Flip Horizontal button on the Image Toolbar 3 Click the All Pages button again to disengage

Templates How do I create a Template

Follow the steps below 1 Create a typical project 2 Choose File gt Save As 3 Choose On-Screen Takeoff Template Files as the file type to save 4 Name the file This will save all of the condition setups as well as the layers for the

project

How do I create a new project from a template

Follow the steps below 1 Choose File gt New 2 Select a template from those listed in the New dialog This will open a new project with

conditions and layers saved from a previous project but no pages or takeoff

78

INDEX

Area Conditions 32

Area Objects 57

Auto Scrolling 20

Auto-save 63

Backout Mode 41

Calculation Method 60

Conditions 29

Configuration 60

Contents Tab 6

Continuous Mode 38

Count Conditions 33

Count Objects 57

Digitizer 10 65 76

Docking Toolbars 13

Dodge CD 72

Drawing 27 37

DropRun Count 55

Environment 18

Exiting 63

Exporting 49

Features 16

Font 61

Frequently Asked Questions 75

Grid 40

Help File 5

Hiding Toolbars 13

Hot Links 21

Image 19 59

Image files 9

Image Toolbar 12 71

Images 75

Index Tab 6

Layers 43

Linear Conditions 31

Linear Objects 56

Main Toolbar 12 67

Menus 14

Moving Toolbars 13

Navigate Toolbar 12 69

Navigating 20

On-Screen Takeofftrade 2

Page 59 61

Pages 20 25 28

Plan Viewer 73

Plans 26

Printing 47 76

Project Properties 25

Projects 22

Quick Start Video 18

Resizing Toolbars 13

Roping 54

Saving 63

Scale 28

Search Tab 7

Selecting Objects 42

Setup 8

Start On-Screen Takeofftrade 17

System Requirements 9

Takeoff 19 27

Takeoff Toolbar 70 71

Takeoff Toolbar 12

Template Files 23

TIF (Group4) 9

Tool Toolbar 12 68

Toolbar 67

Toolbars 12

View Toolbar 12 69

Viewing Toolbars 12

Worksheet 20

Zone Conditions 33

Zoom Toolbar 12 69

  • On-Screen Takeoff Lite
  • Table of Contents
  • Section 1 - Introduction
  • Section 2 - Setup
  • Section 3 - Toolbars and Menus
  • Section 4 - Features
  • Section 5 - Projects
  • Section 6 - Conditions and Takeoff
  • Section 7 - Printing and Exporting
  • Section 8 - Advanced Features
  • Section 9 - Saving and Exiting
  • Appendix I - Installing Your Digitizer
  • Appendix II - Toolbar Items
  • Appendix III - Loading Plans from a Dodge CD
  • Appendix IV - Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer
  • Appendix V - Frequently Asked Questions
  • Index

Drawing a Linear Object 37 Continuous Mode 38 Drawing a Curve 38

Drawing an Area Object 39 Grid Options 40 Grid Calculation 40 Backout Mode41

Drawing a Count Object 41 Drawing a Zone 41 Selecting Objects 42 Moving and Resizing Objects 42

Linear42 Area and Zone 42 Count 42

Layers 43 Default Layers 43 Creating Layers43 Assigning a Layers to a Condition44 View and Hide Layers44 Assigning Text to a Layers45

SECTION 7 - PRINTING AND EXPORTING 46 Print Setup 47 Printing Images 47 Printing Takeoff Lists and Worksheets 48 Print Preview 49 Exporting49

Using Copy Paste Feature49 Using Export Feature50 Exporting Worksheet to Excel 52 Exporting Takeoff to CVS52

SECTION 8 - ADVANCED FEATURES 53 Features to Use With Objects54

Roping Feature 54 Applying a Drop Run Count 55 Edit Drop Run Count 55 Adding Text in Image View55 Formatting Text 56

Object Properties 56 Linear Objects 56 Area Objects57 Count Objects57

Advanced Features of Conditions 57 The Round Feature 57

Pitch 57 Advanced Features of Project Properties58

Selecting Multiple Pages 58 Changing Image Assigned to a Drawing 59 Changing Image File Path59 Delete Page from Project Propertiesl 59

Advanced Features of Tool Options 60 Calculation Method60 Configuration Tab 60 Font Tab 61

Renaming the Current Page61 SECTION 9 - SAVING AND EXITING 62 Saving Your Project63

The Auto-Save Feature63 Exiting63 APPENDIX I - INSTALLING YOUR DIGITIZER 65 APPENDIX II - TOOLBAR ITEM DETAILS 67 APPENDIX III - LOADING PLANS FROM A DODGE CD 72 APPENDIX IV -USING THE PLAN VIEWER 73 APPENDIX V - FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS 75 INDEX 78

Section 1

1

Introduction

This section will

Help you become familiar with On-Screen Takeoff and the User Guide

Give Full Mode users information on how the product works with a digitizer

Section 1 Introduction

2

Welcome to On-Screen Takeoff This extraordinary software gives you bidding advantage in less time with greater accuracy by allowing you to perform complex takeoffs right on your computer screen

On-Screen Takeoff can be used with a digitizer and paper plans or a mouse and electronic plan files On-Screen Takeoff enables the user to create live drawings with resizable conditions linear conditions such as walls pipes and electrical lines area conditions such as floors and ceilings count conditions such as sprinkler heads corner beads doors and windows and zone conditions that assess quantities for any part of an area you specify As you record conditions using your plans the program provides reports on quantities and can recalculate instantly for any adjustment to the conditions of your project

New and experienced users will enjoy the power of this estimating system that is very easy to use As with all products from On Center Software this program works well for most construction trades and is ready to use the day you receive it So start bidding jobs more quickly and accurately today with On-Screen Takeoff This program is equipped with three modes View Mode allows the user to perform quick takeoffs view previously created files and drawing zoom to view plans better and print drawings (see Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer for more details) Lite Mode adds the use of zones Full Mode allows the user to perform more advanced takeoff options including layers and working with a digitizer The mode is referenced in the lower left corner of the program screen

If you currently have View or Lite Mode and are interested in performing more advanced takeoffs a

purchase request button has been provided on the main toolbar Clicking will take you to a webpage purchase form You can also call an On-Center Software Account Representative 1-800-880-8254 or visit us on the web at wwwoncentercom for more details

Section 1 Introduction

3

About this Guide This guide is intended to be a compliment to On-Screen Takeoff software The sections are presented in an order intended to help new users understand the software The User Guide provides detailed information about On-Screen Takeoff tools and commands It is designed to assist you in applying program features to your estimating projects Use it as a reference tool along with the online help system in your day to day work with On-Screen Takeoff

Table of Contents outlines the sections and topics covered in each section

Section 1 Introduction explains the user guide and helpful resources

Section 2 Setup lists system requirements and recommended components

Section 3 Toolbars and Menus explains the toolbars and menus used in On-Screen Takeoff

Section 4 Features gives you a tour of the On-Screen Takeoff environment and shows you how to navigate through your projects

Section 5 Projects leads you through your first time with the program or if yoursquore an old hand at On-Screen Takeoff reacquainting yourself with the software

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff shows you features of working with condition objects zones and backouts in the takeoff area

Section 7 Printing and Exporting explains the step-by-step of printing images and reports copying and pasting data from On-Screen Takeoff and exporting quantity results to an Excel spreadsheet

Section 8 Advanced Features discusses special and advanced features of On-Screen Takeoff conditions and options

Section 9 Saving and Exiting explains how to save projects and safely exit the program Appendixes gives you additional information on installing a digitizer toolbar item details loading files using the plan viewer and frequently asked questions Index provides key words or phrases the program application and references the page(s) in the user guide where they can be found

Section 1 Introduction

4

Extras Along the way yoursquoll encounter bits of information that make the User Guide not only more readable but more personal and relevant The signs and signals placed throughout the guide will better help you understand On-Screen Takeoff and On Center Software We think yoursquoll find these bits and pieces interesting Herersquos what to look for

NOTE

To make special notice of specific information

Caution Warning This symbol is there to insure that you are following the information to minimize risk

This symbol represents information that also appears on the Quick Start Video

In this manual some information is specific to using a digitizer The icon appears alongside this information (Must be in Full Mode to use a digitizer)

A reminder is there to keep the information in mind for future consideration

For Your Informationhellip

Instruction Jargon

In this guide click or double-click refers to clicking on the left mouse button A right-click clicking on the right mouse button will be specifically stated

Click the digitizer refers to clicking down once with the stylus pen

NOTE When using a digitizer a click or double-click refers to pressing the ball tip of the stylus pen right on the digitizer (usually in the takeoff area) A right-click can be accomplished by using the digitizer mouse template and the first button on the stylus pen See Appendix I Installing You Digitizer for more information

Drag and drop is holding down the left mouse button after clicking on an object You may simply drag the object to the desired location and release the mouse button

Section 1 Introduction

5

Typographic Conventions

The following are typographical conventions to be aware of when reading this guide

Menu items you are instructed to choose appear in a different typeface with the greater than (gt) symbol separating each menu level For example if you are instructed to select the Open command in the File menu it appears as File gt Open If you are instructed to select the Save As command from the File menu it appears as File gt Save As

Helpful hints or information about the topic are provided throughout the document They will be labeled lsquoNOTErsquo (all caps and bold font to catch your attention)

Several topics will have more detailed steps outlined in either another section of the user guide or in the Appendix They will always be referenced and italicized For example ldquoSee Editing Conditions for more informationrdquo

Help File In combination with this User Guide and the Quick Start video (Help gt Watch Quick Start Video) the Help File will also be a great resource for product information and application There are additional resources available on the website at wwwoncentercom or Help gt Visit our Website Follow these instructions to open the Help file

1 Select Help gt Help Topics

2 This will open the On-Screen Help File

Hide and Show Buttons

The Hide and Show buttons will either remove or display the Topics panel in the Help dialog

Back Button

The Back button takes you back to the last help page you viewed It will be available only if you have navigated through multiple pages in the help file

Print Button

Clicking will print the topic displayed This is helpful if the instructions to follow are long and you prefer to work on a full screen

Options Button

The Options button will allow you to pick from a list of commands to help you navigate the Help file

Section 1 Introduction

6

Contents Tab This tab provides a quick breakout of the Contents of the help file It should be used like the Table of Contents of a book Simply double-click on the book icon to open the chapter Then click the desired page icon to display the relevant information

Index Tab This tab allows you to locate a specifically indexed topic This should be used as you would a book index Begin typing a word in the index entry field and the system will automatically move within the list to the entries closest in spelling to your word(s) Begin typing the topic word to access it in the list quickly

Section 1 Introduction

7

Search Tab This tab works like a word find It allows you to search for any word contained in the Help file Type the

word you are looking for in the lsquoType in the keyword to findrsquo field Click A list of topics containing that word will appear Scroll through the list and double click on the topic you want displayed

Section 2

8

Setup

This section will

Let you know what system requirements you will need to have in place

Recommend components that work well with the software

Help Full Mode users install a digitizer

Section 2 Setup

9

Minimum System Requirements To use On-Screen Takeoff your computer must meet the following minimum system requirements

An IBM PC or 100 compatible computer with a Pentium II or faster Intel processor

Memory Requirements 200 MB of available hard-disk space and256 MB RAM (128 MB preferred)

Windows 2000 SP4 and Windows XP SP2 256 color video card Super VGA display card Mouse 15-inch monitor

While these are the minimum system requirements Windows places heavy demands on your systems resources The more available memory in your computer the faster and more efficient On-Screen Takeoff will operate

Recommended Components

For the best performance we recommend the following components

Pentium III or faster processor

512 or more of RAM

12X speed CD-ROM or better

17-inch monitor or dual monitors Graphic adapter with 128 MB or more VRAM Sound card and speakers installed

NOTE In order to utilize the Training Videos you must have a sound card and speakers installed

Compatible File Formats The resolution in electronic plans does not need to be more that 200 DPI (Dots per Inch) The preferred file format is a black and white TIF (Group4) On-Screen Takeoff recognizes image files with the following extensions

File Extensions View Mode Lite Mode Full Mode TIF X X X PDF X X X OSE X X X JPG X X X CPC X X X CAL X DGN X DWG X DXF X OSP X PLN X PLT X

Section 2 Setup

10

NOTE Use the following image types for best results

Convert to TIF

The converted files will be stored in a folder with the name of the current On-Screen Takeoff project Since the conversion can be very time consuming you should only select this option if you really intend to convert vector files to TIF

1 Select File gt Project Properties

2 In the Pages Field add your image See Section 5 Establishing Project Setting Adding Pages

3 Click

4 Then select the page with the drawing you wish to convert

5 Click

Installing Your Digitizer The following instructions are a quick start to installing your digitizer For more specific information please reference Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer at the end of this guide

Connecting Your Digitizer

Upon receiving your digitizer (either a GTCO or another brand) you will need to connect it to your computer

1 Lay the digitizer out flat

2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer

3 Plug in the power supply

4 Plug the interface cable into the digitizer

5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into the computer

NOTE On-Screen Takeoff is compatible with any tablet that is WinTab compatible

Digitizer options are only available in Full Mode If you are in View or Lite Mode and would like

to use this feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade

Section 3

11

Toolbars and Menus

This section will

Introduce the program toolbars

Familiarize you with On-Screen Take Offtrade Menu options

Section 3 Toolbars and Menus

12

Toolbars On-Screen Takeoff is equipped with several helpful toolbars for application efficiency See Appendix II Toolbar Item` Details for a detailed description of each toolbar item Individually the toolbars may be displayed moved docked reshaped or hidden from view You can also create costume toolbars to fit your needs

Main Toolbar

Tool Toolbar

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Takeoff Toolbar

Image Toolbar Viewing Toolbars Toolbars are displayed on the screen and will be consistent on each tab or page (Some toolbars or toolbar items will be in an inactive state if they donrsquot have a supporting element in the application)

1 Select View gt Toolbars and select the appropriate toolbar name

OR

2 Right-click on a toolbar region of the screen

3 Check the toolbars you want to display

Section 3 Toolbars and Menus

13

Moving Toolbars The toolbars may be positioned anywhere on the screen you wish This feature is provided to allow the flexibility for positioning the toolbars so they are out of your way yet handy for use

1 Click on an edge of the toolbar holding down the mouse button drag it to its new position

2 Release the mouse button to set it in place

NOTE If the toolbar is dropped anywhere other than a screen edge it will become free floating This feature is especially handy when using multiple monitors

Docking Toolbars The toolbars can be docked to any of the screen edges

1 Click on the title bar of an undocked toolbar

2 Drag the toolbar to any location on the screen

Hiding Toolbars

1 Select View gt Toolbars and select the toolbar you wish to remove from the screen

2 Right-click on the toolbar or dock bar areas

3 A floating toolbar can be closed by clicking on the in the upper right corner of the toolbar

Resizing Toolbars Only undocked (floating) toolbars may be resized

1 Position the mouse pointer over an edge

2 Click and drag

3 The toolbar can be resized as desired

Customizing the Toolbars You may rearrange or delete buttons within a toolbarrsquos display or you may move buttons from one toolbar to another If you find that you use a few tools over and over you may want to group them within a single toolbar for convenience On-Screen Takeoff gives you the flexibility to customize your takeoff environment

1 Select Tools gt Customize The Customize dialog will open

2 With the dialog open click on a toolbar button and drag buttons from one toolbar to another or a new location within the same toolbar

3 To add a button without altering another toolbar click on the Commands tab of the Customize dialog and drag the appropriate symbol from the Buttons section to a toolbar

4 To remove a button drag it to within the takeoff area of the application

Section 3 Toolbars and Menus

14

Menus

Section 3 Toolbars and Menus

15

Digitizer Menu

Section 4

16

Features

This section will

Show you how open On-Screen Takeoff

Describe the On-Screen Takeoff environment

Teach you how to navigate pages

Section 4 Features

17

Start On-Screen Takeoff

1 On your desktop double-click your On-Screen Takeoff icon

2 The application will open

OR

3 Left-click on the Start button on your computerrsquos toolbar

4 Scroll up to Programs gt On Center Software

5 Highlight On-Screen Takeoff and click On-Screen Takeoff will open On-Screen Takeoff opens to an untitled blank project The Image view of the screen will be a blank page

Two blank dock bars the Pan dock bar and the Takeoff dock bar appear at the left side of the screen Along the bottom the Status bar displays user status or context-sensitive messages as well as paper size and current zoom percentage of the plan sheet on screen The menu bar and several task specific toolbars are located at the top of the screen

NOTE All toolbars and dock bars may be accessed to view or hide through View gt Toolbars on the menu bar

Section 4 Features

18

Quick Start Video When On-Screen Takeoff opens you will be given an option to watch the Quick Start video (recommended) or start the program without watching the video

The 20 minute video will demonstrate key program functionality and allow you to view application instruction for enhanced learning

If you would like to watch the video click If you prefer to get started without

the video click If you have already viewed the video click the lsquoDo not show this message againrsquo box to prevent this dialog from appearing each time you open the program

NOTE If you decide later that you would like to watch the Quick Start video go to Help gt Watch

Quick Start Videos

On-Screen Takeoff Environment The On-Screen Takeoff environment acts like your drafting table allowing you to work on several sheets of plans at once and to reference at a glance the entire drawing and your position on that drawing while giving you the power of a computer to track analyze print and export your takeoff quantities and plans

The screen is bordered at the top by the Menu bar with pull-down menus and at the bottom by the Status bar which indicates current user status plan page size and current zoom percentage of page The largest portion of the application screen will be your takeoff area bounded on the left (by default) by two dock bars and on the top by several toolbars

In the takeoff area you may view your project plans (images) andor takeoff objects the takeoff list with quantities the worksheet or a legend of your condition list

The main window of On-Screen Takeoff has three tabs located at the bottom left allowing for quick change between Image Takeoff or Worksheet views Select the desired view option on the toolbar and it will automatically open on your screen

Section 4 Features

19

Image View

This view shows the plan file andor takeoff conditions drawn from your plans

Takeoff View This view displays the height if applicable and quantity breakdowns of your conditions according to result types indicated (eg linear feet square feet or count of items) for zones pages and the project as a whole It also displays notes per condition

Section 4 Features

20

Worksheet View This view displays the condition and quantity in units of measure specified in the first results field of the Results tab in the Condition dialog and allows the user to enter amounts for material labor and subcontractor takeoffs

NOTE When in the Worksheet view tab out the field then save This is keep all the values saved

Navigating On-Screen Takeoff

Auto Scrolling When creating linear areas or zones On-Screen Takeoff will automatically scroll the image view when necessary It will move as your mouse or digitizer moves beyond the edge of the current view

Changing Pages

1 Select View gt Next Page Previous Page or Go To Page (specify page number for the Go to Page option)

2 You may also select the corresponding arrows for these options from the Navigate Toolbar The

drop down arrow in the Page field will list the pages The and arrows will take you to the

previous or next page The and arrows will take you to the first or last page

OR

Section 4 Features

21

3 Or press Ctrl G for the Go To Page dialog

Hot Links Hot links allow you to move quickly from one drawing to the pertinent area of another drawing A hot link is handy when viewing enlarged areas of a page and needing the ability to jump back to a reference page

1 Select Tools gt Hot Link

OR

2 Click from the Tools Toolbar

3 Click on the page where you want to set the link The Hot Link dialog will open

4 Using the current page display on the Navigate Toolbar access the pull-down menu of pages by

clicking on the arrow at the right

5 Select the page for your link (You may also choose View gt Go to Page and select by page number)

6 Manipulate the view using the zoom tool and the scroll bars

7 Click

8 After joining a hot link to another page the hot link arrows in the Navigation Toolbar will become active

9 Move a hot link to another location on the page by clicking then click and drag the hot link image anywhere on the page

Section 5

22

Projects

This section will

Help you create settings important to your projects

Explain how On-Screen Takeoff works with your electronic or paper plans

Section 5 Projects

23

Project Template Files You can begin your project with a template Templates allow you to take advantage of conditions and settings used with previous projects

On-Screen Takeoff templates contain condition lists and established layer separations from previous projects you have created You may also use the sample templates provided with On-Screen Takeoff as a great starting point All aspects of the templates may be adjusted for a new project

1 Select File gt New and click the OK button

2 From the New dialog box choose the template that best fits your project

3 The conditions for this template will appear in the Takeoff Dock bar and the Project Properties dialog will open asking for further information

4 Use File gt Save or File gt Save As to rename and save your new project

Saving a Project as a Template File You can save your condition properties and layers as a template for future projects

1 Select File gt Save As

2 Enter a name for your template and select On-Screen Takeoff Template Files (tpo) from the Save As type field of the dialog (click on the down arrow to select)

3 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog Modifying a Template File Follow these steps to modify an existing template file if you need to change or add conditions andor layers

1 Select File gt Open

2 Navigate to your Projects directory

3 In the File Type drop-down select On-Screen Takeoff Template files (tpo)

4 Choose the On-Screen Takeoff template file you would like to modify and click the OK button

5 Make appropriate changes

6 Save and close file

The On-Screen Takeoff template files cannot save takeoff information

Section 5 Projects

24

Opening an Existing Project File 1 Select File gt Open

2 Navigate to the desired file location

3 Click the Open button

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask

you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Creating a New Project

1 Select File gt New

2 For a blank untitled project click

3 At this point the Project Properties dialog will pop-up for more information about your takeoff

NOTE The following are important to keep in mind when beginning a new project

At the start of your project fill out the Project Properties settings to establish the name for all printed output from your project set the default page size and scale for your plans number and names of different pages within the project and locations of electronic drawings

Scale settings can significantly affect quantity outcomes Be sure to set the scale for each page of drawings before beginning condition takeoffs

When using a digitizer remember to make a mark with a pen or pencil in the upper left and lower right corners of the first sheet of the paper plans to delineate the takeoff area for that sheet You can then set the takeoff area on On-Screen Takeoff using your marks

Save your project before you begin taking off any conditions On-Screen Takeoff will write a back-up file using the same file name

Remember the Undo feature If you make a mistake select Edit gt Undo and reverse the process step by step

Section 5 Projects

25

Project Properties

You can either set your Project Properties when you create a new takeoff or once your project file is saved under the appropriate name

1 Select File gt Project Properties the Project Properties dialog box will appear

2 Type in the name of your project to appear on printouts Use the backspace andor delete keys to edit the name as necessary

3 Press the Tab key to move to the Default Image Size option or click within the Image Size box You may click on the arrow at the right for the pull-down menu of page size options or you can use the down-arrow key on your keyboard to scroll through the list to the appropriate selection

4 Press the Tab key to move to the Default Scale option Select a scale by using the drop down arrow If your scale is metric you will need to click in the box next to Metric to convert to that measurement

5 Establish the number of pages for your project plans And load image files See Adding Pages to

Your Project

Adding Pages to Projects Individual Electronic Plans

1 Click on in the Project Properties dialog

2 In the Add Images dialog use the drop down arrow to navigate to the appropriate directory and folder containing your image

3 Select the file so that it displays in the File name field then click The file will display by name and path in the Image File field in Project Properties dialog

4 Click to accept and your project will automatically open

5 Save your project with the new settings by selecting File gt Save

Section 5 Projects

26

Electronic plans scanned from blueprints (as opposed to blue lines) will display as white lines on a black background and are difficult to read on your computer screen Select Image gt Invert and the colors will invert to black on white

You may have noticed the Page column in the Project Properties dialog Generally plan images occupy one page and 1 will be listed in the column indicating Page 1 of your plan file If you import a multi-page TIF a plan file containing more than one page of plans they will import as separate pages and each successive page will be indicated under the Page column as 1 2 3 etc of the plan file

Group of Electronic Plans You may add all the electronic plan files from a particular source (for example from a CD) by using the Auto Add feature

1 Click the button in the Project Properties dialog

2 Browse until you find the appropriate directory and folder containing your plan images

3 Click on any file displayed within your target folder so that the file name appears in the File name box of the Auto Add dialog

4 Click The image paths and file names will be recorded into the project properties arranged alphabetically

5 Click to accept your choices and your project will automatically open

6 Save your project with the new settings by selecting File gt Save

To load Dodge Plans into your Project Properties see Appendix IIi Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

Paper Plans On-Screen Takeoff makes it easy for Full Mode users to perform quantity takeoffs from paper plans using a digitizer

1 Add pages by clicking until you have the number of pages initially in the project

2 Name each page by clicking within the Title area and typing the name

3 Click to accept your choices and close the Project Properties dialog

4 Save your project with the new project properties settings by selecting File gt Save

Section 5 Projects

27

Setting Up a Drawing Template On-Screen Takeoff provides the convenience of using the same work surface for both digitizer and mouse to allow the user to draw conditions and then edit settings of the project or add or change conditions without breaking stride A mouse pad template included with the program defines the area of the digitizer in which use of the stylus or cursor will be recognized as mouse movement as opposed to drawing movement

1 Place your stylus on On-Screen Takeoff

2 Placing the template identifies the location mouse movements will be recognized by the program

Before placing the template the template must be applied to the digitizer surface This may have been done during the installation of your digitizer We suggest attaching the template to the lower right corner of the digitizer surface about one inch inside the grid area

3 Select Digitizer gt Place Template

4 Follow the instruction prompts on the screen clicking first on the target symbol at the left of the On-Screen Takeoff box on the template then on the target at the right

Setting Takeoff Area Before you can begin taking off a drawing you must define the drawing area on the digitizer This requires defining an area that will include all objects on each drawing of your plans As you add pages to your takeoff the same area of the digitizer will be active

1 Secure the plans to the digitizer with tape or a set of clamps

2 With a pen or a pencil mark the upper left corner and the lower right corner of the first page in your set of plans

3 Select Digitizer gt Set Takeoff Area

4 Click each mark with the stylus pen as prompted

5 Verify the active area of the digitizer by looking at the image size located in the lower right corner of your screen

If you close the program before the takeoff is complete you will need to reestablish the takeoff area before you can add additional condition quantities

Electronic plans appear on your computer screen eliminating the need to set a takeoff area You simply drag your mouse across the conditions you wish to takeoff The conditions will be highlighted and quantities will be totaled instantly Electronic plans are available through a variety of services For information contact an On Center Software account manager

Section 5 Projects

28

Setting Scale for Specific Pages You may set the scale in each page view separately This will override the default scale setting in Project Properties for that page Setting the correct scale for the drawing before taking off quantities ensures accurate calculations Be careful to check the scale for each drawing in your project before doing takeoffs

1 Display the page you want to set select Edit gt Set Scale

2 Use the drop down arrow to select a scale that will be applied to that page

3 Click

OR

4 Access the pull-down scale settings on the Navigate toolbar

NOTE As you draw objects notice that the drawn object is similar in width to the object on your plans If it is not the scale set may not be correct

Calculating Scale You may calculate scale according to a known measurement between two points either with a digitizer or on electronic plans

1 Select Edit gt Calculate Scale using Image or Edit gt Calculate Scale using Digitizer

2 Follow the instructions in the related Calculate Scale dialog box You will be asked to click on the first and second points then to enter the dimension for that distance

3 The scale will be recalculated for the displayed page and the Scale display on the Navigate toolbar will show the new scale

Section 6

29

Conditions and Takeoff

This section will Draw Conditions to Takeoff Plan Quantities

What Zones will do to help your takeoff process

Discuss the ins and outs of Takeoffs

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

30

Creating Conditions

If you are starting a new project from scratch you will need to create conditions to takeoff quantities such as floor areas wall lengths and corner bead counts If you are using a template you will have several pre-designed conditions already listed on the Takeoff dock bar However you may want to change the characteristics of some conditions or create additional conditions for a particular project

1 Right Click within the Takeoff dock bar Select New gt Condition

Or

2 From the Takeoff dock bar Click (if the buttons are not showing right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select Show Buttons from the pop-up menu) The New Condition dialog appears

3 Select the condition type (Linear Area Count or Zone) from the pull-down menu accessed by the

down arrow next to the Type option

4 Press Tab or use the mouse (or stylus) to move to Name and enter a name for your condition

5 Specify the desired condition attributes See Condition Attributes for more detail

6 Click for condition to apply

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

31

Condition Attributes Each condition type will have related attributes to select or specify within the General and Advanced tabs of the New Condition dialog Once a condition has been used to takeoff a quantity from your plans certain attributes cannot be changed

All conditions allow the user to specify color and fill pattern for the object drawn

Linear Conditions

General Specify width and height by feet and inches Specify pitch in inches up to the nearest thousandth of an inch if applicable

Advanced Specify rounding for object quantities and droprun default length for electrical or plumbing drops at the ends of lines Select Connect to have lines connect at the corners where one line of the condition ends and another begins (and indicate Tolerance for the featurersquos activation as distance between the ends of two lines) Choose Trim to have lines automatically trim to a line being crossed Choose Curve to draw a curved line

Follow these examples for inputting feet and inches For 7 feet 6 inches type 706 for 13 feet 7 inches type 1307 For 20 feet type 2000

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

32

Area Conditions

General If needed you can specify the thickness (in inches) andor pitch (in inches)

Advanced Specify rounding for object quantities Choose to display an adjustable grid within the area and indicate matrix cell dimensions

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

33

Count Conditions

General

Specify height and indicate the size (in inches) and shape (square circle triangle rectangle or opening) of the count object as it will appear on screen

Advanced Count conditions have advanced attributes These options are available for all shapes except for openings

Zone Conditions Zones allow you to subdivide condition quantities making it easier to modify and complete jobs in phases They can be used at the end of a takeoff to isolate a group of condition quantities that are in different areas of the takeoff

Zones can also be used to break a takeoff into multi-phases and can even be used to isolate quantities while a job is in progress to group the amount of work that has been completed to date They can be applied to one or multiple pages in your plans automatically calculating the takeoff quantities for each zoned area

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

34

The zone feature is only available in Lite and Full Mode If you are in View Mode and would like

to use this feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade

Condition Notes A Note tab is provided for comments regarding the condition These notes will display on the Takeoff List report and will import into Quick Bid

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

35

Condition Results The Results tab of the New Condition is based on condition type Initial settings default to linear feet (LF) for linear conditions square feet (SF) for area conditions and count of items (EA) for count conditions and zones The first of the results fields will display for the condition items in the Takeoff dock bar area All results will display in worksheets and Takeoff List reports as well as in an Excel spreadsheet after being exported

Copying Conditions You may use the condition attributes from a condition yoursquove already created for any future conditions of the same type

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Click the Copy button from the toolbar

OR

3 Right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select copy

4 A new condition will appear in the list with the same condition attributes as the previous condition but with the quantities zeroed

Editing Conditions Once you have copied a condition you might want to change several attributes You can also edit an existing condition to fit any updated needs

1 Highlight the desired condition on the Takeoff dock bar

2 Click the Change button

OR

3 Double-click on the condition you wish to edit to bring up the Change Condition dialog

NOTE The Change Condition dialog differs from the New Condition dialog only in that if takeoffs

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

36

have been performed in your project with this condition you will not be able to change the type of condition or certain properties under the advanced tab of the dialog box

Deleting Conditions 1 Click on the condition in the Takeoff Dock bar area

2 Click the Delete button on the toolbar

OR

3 Right-click and select Delete from the pop-up menu

All takeoff associated with the deleted condition will be deleted immediately and permanently

Organizing Project Conditions Within your project you can create folders andor sub-folders for different types of conditions You may even want to create a folder containing conditions with reset values

To get started organizing your conditions make sure you are viewing the condition tree (right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select Show Tree)

Creating Folders and Sub-Folders 1 Right-click in the Takeoff Dock bar area

2 Select New gt Folder from the pop-up menu

Copying Folders

1 Click on the folder and click Copy on the toolbar

2 All copied conditions within the new folder will have values reset to zero

Renaming Folders

1 Click on the folder

2 Right-click and select Rename from the pop-up menu

3 Enter a name for your folder and click the Enter button

Changing Condition Order

You may move conditions up or down in the condition list of the Takeoff dock bar to suit your project needs

1 Select the condition you would like to move by clicking to highlight it

NOTE When you are ready to move the highlighted conditions be sure that you start

moving using the last condition chosen That condition will have a highlighted boarder

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

37

2 Drag and drop any the condition from one place to another in the list You may also move a condition to another folder on the list in this way

Drawing with Conditions Snap Angles Set up snap angles to prevent lines from appearing jagged Snap angles are commonly set at 15deg and shift snap angles at 0deg

1 Go to Tools gt Options Options dialog appears

2 Under the General tab make the desired settings

3 Click to save the settings As they are drawn lines will snap to the set degree

Drawing a Linear Object 1 Select a condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff dock bar

2 Move the cursor into the Image takeoff area of the screen you will see the cursor display as crosshairs

3 Click and hold left mouse button then drag mouse to draw a line

4 Release mouse button to set line

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

38

5 Repeat steps for further lines

Continuous Mode This feature allows you to draw an object that has connected lines

1 Click the icon from the Takeoff toolbar

OR

2 Go to Tools gt Continuous Mode

3 Follow steps 1-3 from Draw a Linear Object

4 Click at each point of intersection The object will be connected

5 Double-click after making the final point to set the lines

Drawing a Curve To draw a curved line the Curve option must be checked under the Advanced tab of the Condition dialog

1 Click where you want to begin the curve and drag in a straight line to the position for the other endpoint of the curve

2 Click on the line to select it Handles in the shapes of small squares will appear at either end of

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

39

the line and in the center of the line

3 Move the cursor over the center handles until the cursor becomes a two-way arrow

4 Click and drag in the direction of the curve bending the line as you move the cursor Release to set the curve (The line you began with will disappear)

Draw a circle by drawing two curved lines connected

Drawing an Area Object Area conditions are drawn similarly to continuous mode lines You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete your area takeoff

NOTE When drawing an area do not intersect the perimeter or line of the object you are drawing

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

3 The area will be filled with the pattern set for that condition

NOTE The simulated circle will be good enough for you to be able to make a bid

To create a circular area click from point to point with very short distances in between points simulating a circlersquos perimeter Double-click after setting the last point to set the area

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

40

Grid Options Grids give you an added advantage when installing materials such as tiles Use this feature to get a count for how many tiles are needed for an area

1 Double-click on an area condition in the Takeoff dock bar to open its Condition dialog

2 Click on the Advanced tab to show its options

3 Check the box next to Grid by clicking in it

4 Indicate the dimensions of the cell matrix in inches (For example 200 x 400)

5 Under Results tab choose each (EA) for one of the results fields This will tabulate a number of grid cells (including partial grid cells) in area

6 Click to save your settings

7 Use the Move Grid and Rotate Grid features in the Tools menu to manipulate the grid as desired

Grid Calculation

1 Go to Tools gt Options menu

1 Specify if On-Screen Takeoff automatically should Calculate Grid Position

2 If AreaGrid Size is selected On-Screen Takeoff will calculate the number of items needed to fill the grid based on grid demintions

3 Click to accept and close the dialog

To move a line at any angle (regardless of default setting) press the Shift key while moving the mouse

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

41

Backout Mode This feature allows you to take out part of an area and deduct that amount of square footage

1 Select Tools gt Backout Mode

2 Outline the are you want backed out as you would when drawing a regular area object (see Drawing an Area Object)

3 The outlined area will clear and quantities will be recalculated

NOTE The perimeter of the backout area will be added to the LF quantity for that condition

Drawing a Count Object Square triangle rectangle and circle shaped count objects can easily be placed on images

1 Select the condition

2 Click in the location where you want the object to appear

3 To place an opening-shaped count item like a door or window you must click over an existing linear object such as a wall

4 On the Results tab you can change the height properties to give you the result you need

5 If Backout is checked on the advanced tab for each count opening the opening-shaped count item will back out a corresponding section of the linear object

Opening shaped count items are sized at 3rsquo0rdquo by default

Drawing a Zone Zones are drawn in the same way as area objects and may be any polygonal shape You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete the zone perimeter

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

42

Selecting Objects

1 Use the Select Tool to select objects

You can also select all objects that correspond to a condition

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Right-click and choose Select All

3 All objects with this condition will be highlighted with squares as an outline

Moving and Resizing Objects Linear

1 To move or resize a linear object click anywhere on the line to select it

2 To move the line position your pointer over the center handles When the mouse is positioned over the handles you will see a two-way arrow You will only be able to move the line in the direction of the arrows

3 Drag the line to a new position

4 Clicking and dragging the handles on the ends of the line will allow you to lengthen or shorten your line

Area and Zone

1 To move an area object or zone in its entirety click and drag it to its new position

2 Grabbing a handle at a corner or intersection of the object will allow you to adjust and change its perimeter

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

43

Count 1 To move a square circle rectangle or triangle shaped count object click and drag

2 Click and drag an opening shaped count object along the length of the linear object to the desired position then release

NOTE An opening shaped count object may not be moved from its associated linear condition object however it may be moved up and down the length of the linear object

Layers On-Screen Takeoff allows you to sort and separate your takeoff objects within the same job and on the same page On-Screen Takeoff gives you this flexibility through the use of layers

By assigning different conditions to different layers (for example differentiating between floors ceilings and walls) you can choose to view all layers or turn off certain layers to display and print the remaining groups of conditions only You may also remove the background image of electronic plans add text and hot link symbols or print only your condition takeoffs

Layers are only available in Full Mode If you are in View or Lite Mode and would like to use this

feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade Default Layers

On-Screen Takeoff begins every project with three default layers Image Annotation and Default The Image layer holds the electronic plan files you may have in your project The Annotation layer possesses all text notations highlighting and hot links in the project The Default layer will appear in the Condition dialog when creating or editing a condition (listed in the takeoff dock bar) Conditions are assigned to the Default layer unless otherwise specified by the user

Creating Layers To assign a condition to a layer other than the default layer you must first create additional layers for your project

1 Select View gt Layers to open the Layers dialog

2 Click An unnamed layer will be added

3 Click within the empty box and type a name for your layer (for example Wall)

4 New layers are added as active layers The adjacent box under the Show column will be checked

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

44

Assigning a Layer to a Condition 1 Open the Condition dialog box by creating a new condition or editing an existing condition

2 Under the General tab click on the down arrow in the Layer field to display optional layers

3 Select the desired layer for the condition Only the Default layer and layers you have added will be displayed

4 Click

View and Hide Layers

1 Select View gt Layers

2 Under the Show column check the box to view or remove the check (by clicking on it) to hide the specific layer

3 Click to accept and close the Layers dialog

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

45

Assigning Text to a Layer When adding text to an image On-Screen Takeoff has the capability to assign the text to a specified layer

1 Select the Text Tool

2 Click at the point you want to place your text

3 Type in your text using the Enter key for line breaks

4 Click the drop down arrow next to the Layer field and select the desired layer

Section 7

46

Printing and Exporting

This section will

Printing options and procedures

Exporting data by copying and pasting

Exporting quantity results to Excel spreadsheets

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

47

Print Setup On-Screen Takeoff allows the user to print the image takeoff list and worksheet

1 Select File gt Print Setup The Print Setup dialog will open

2 Select a printer or leave the default selection listed (change from the default printer displayed by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the field)

3 Indicate page size and printer tray option (Source) Access page size options by clicking on the

down arrow at the right of the field

4 Choose Portrait or Landscape orientation

5 Click to accept and close the dialog

Printing Images The image area can include the electronic plans the takeoff objects added text and hot links To print a subset of these (for example just the takeoffs without the plans or the added text and hot link symbols) hide layers that you do not want to print (see Section 6 View and Hide Layers) When you are printing your images every page will show the scale of the takeoff you are printing

1 Click on the Image tab to display the area of your project

2 Select File gt Print (or Ctrl + P)

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

48

3 Select the desired view (What to print) and the Image Range

4 Click The second Print dialog will open

5 Change settings accordingly or click if you accept the default settings

Printing Takeoff Lists and Worksheets In Takeoff Lists and Worksheets you may hide columns to print only certain results or adjust column widths to fit the report within the page size selected

1 In Takeoff List or Worksheet view move your cursor to the right side of the columnrsquos title bar the cursor will display as a two-way arrow

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

49

2 Click and drag to adjust the width of the column Holding the mouse button you may

slide the title bar under the title bar to its left to hide the column completely

3 Select File gt Print or press Ctrl + P to access the Print dialog

4 Indicate desired printer and choose the number of copies

5 Click to print and close the dialog

When printing the condition list we suggest printing in landscape

To reset to the default column widths double-click on the right border of a column heading will reset the column to its right (or previously to its right before being hidden)

Print Preview 1 Select File gt Print Preview

2 Use and to vary your view 3 If viewing an image choose current full or scale view to see how it displays

4 For printed outputs that cover more than one page use and to view adjacent pages or click on the down arrow next to Page field and select the page you want displayed

Exporting Using the CopyPaste Feature You may copy all the data or sections from the worksheet and the takeoff list view in On-Screen Takeoff and paste it into another application When pasting into Excel the cell layout will be maintained

1 Highlight the areas you wish to paste Click and hold the left mouse button down as you drag the cursor over the area to be selected then releasing the mouse button

OR

2 Select the entire takeoff list quickly click on the left On-Screen Takeoff column header and hold and drag the cursor across the remaining column headings

The number of pages for the view selected will display in the lower left-hand corner The zoom percentage that applies to the view will be displayed in the lower right-hand corner next to page size of the drawing

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

50

3 In the worksheet view you may highlight rows by clicking on the numbered buttons to the left of each row clicking and dragging across column headings or clicking and dragging over individual cells in the worksheet

Click anywhere in the appropriate view to deselect the area

4 Once your selection is highlighted you may select Edit gt Copy or Ctrl C from the keyboard 5 On your monitor switch to the application into which you want to paste your selection 6 Select Edit gt Paste in the new application or simply press Ctrl + V to paste

The colored keys for conditions cannot be pasted

Using the Export Feature You may export condition quantities to specified cell location within an Excel worksheet file Cell target locations are assigned in the Results tab of the condition dialogs on the Export line relating to each quantity measurement type

On-Screen Takeoff will export takeoff quantity results for up to three different quantity types that you specify For instance you may want to know the number of square feet in a ceiling area as well as the number of linear feet in its perimeter

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

51

1 Bring up the Condition dialog by double-clicking on a condition in the takeoff dock bar or by

selecting the condition and clicking

2 Click on the Results tab to access its fields The default quantities for the condition type will display

3 For each results field click on the arrow to access the pull-down menu and select the appropriate quantity (for example SF LF EA etchellip)

4 Have your Excel spreadsheet opened and saved in a file

5 Specify the Excel spreadsheet cell locations where you want the results to go

6 For a cell in the first sheet of your spreadsheet type in the cell address (eg a1) Case is not important

7 For a cell on a successive sheet of your spreadsheet type in sheet the number followed by a comma and the cell address without any spaces (eg sheet2a1) Case is not important

8 Click

9 Select File gt Export gt Condition Qty to Excel

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

52

10 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

11 Click to export On-Screen Takeoff results to specified cell locations in the Excel file When you return to the Excel application you will see the values have been added to the specified cell locations in your spreadsheet

12 Save your Excel file

Exporting Worksheet to Excel

1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 From On-Screen Takeoff Select File gt Export gt Worksheet to Excel

4 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

5 Click When you return to the Excel application you will see the values from the Worksheet Tab have been added to your spreadsheet

6 Save your Excel file

Exporting Takeoff to CVS 1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 Click the Takeoff Tab in the project you want to export the information

4 Select File gt Export gt Takeoff to CSV

5 Browse to the location of the CSV spreadsheet file click file to select it

6 Click the Save

NOTE CSV files can be opened in Excel Lotus Access etc One may consider this option more of a ldquodumprdquo into a file

The Excel application must be active (it may be minimized on the application bar) with the target spreadsheet open in the application Otherwise an error will occur with the export operation that will affect both the On-Screen Takeofftrade file and the Excel spreadsheet

Section 8

53

Advanced Features

This section will

Some special features of working with condition objects in the takeoff area

Details of advanced options for conditions

Advanced features of the Project Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

54

Features to Use with Objects Roping Feature You can move copy or delete using this feature Using the Select tool (the pointer) you may select several objects at once by clicking and dragging an outline around the objects then releasing the mouse button Roping may select either objects completely within the outlined area (inclusive) or objects both within and touched by the outlined area (touching) Specify your roping preference under Tools gt Options

1 Click and hold the mouse button at a point on the screen near the objects to be selected and drag to surround the objects with an outline

2 Release the mouse button The objects will be selected

3 You may now

Move the group around on the page by clicking within the group dragging the mouse and releasing the button to place the objects

Delete the group of objects by clicking the Delete key or

Copy and paste by pressing Ctrl C to copy the group then Ctrl V to paste it The pasted copy of the grouped objects will appear slightly offset from the original objects

Section 8 Advanced Features

55

Applying a DropRun Count

Use the droprun feature when calculating quantities to take into account the drop or run of a linear condition such as electrical lines or plumbing pipes Drop or run lengths may be added separately to any linear condition on screen while a default droprun length may be indicated for a condition as a whole

1 Select the desired linear condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff Dock bar

2 Click the Change button in the toolbar to open the Change Condition dialog

3 Click the Advanced tab to access the advanced options and click inside the DropRun check box

4 Enter a default length to be applied to all of this condition Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches) You can leave the length blank and manually enter drop run on each segment drawn

5 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog

Edit DropRun Count

1 With the related linear condition in the Takeoff Dock bar highlighted or with the pointer tool selected

2 click on the desired linear object in the image takeoff area The Count button will become active

3 Click on the Count button (alternatively select Tools gt Count) The default droprun amount will show in the pop-up Count dialog (Default length will be zero if droprun has not been selected in this conditionrsquos properties)

4 Type in the desired length Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches)

5 Click the OK button The additional amount will be reflected in the corresponding quantity The new DropRun count will apply only to the object edited

Adding Text in Image View

On-Screen Takeoff allows you to place text comments around your quantity takeoffs that may be printed along with plan images and objects Text is automatically placed within the Annotation Layer (that includes text and hot links)

1 To place text on the image select the Text Tool and click at the point you want to place your text opening a text box

2 Type in your information clicking Enter for line breaks

3 When you are finished click the OK button to exit the text box

4 To reposition text simply click on the text (with the Text Tool active) to select it

5 Move the cursor over the text the cursor will now display as a four-way arrow

6 Click and drag the mouse to position the text as desired

Section 8 Advanced Features

56

1 To edit existing text use the Text Tool to double-click on the text to open the editing box

2 Enter additional text or use the Backspace key to delete text as necessary

Formatting Text Once created you may format the font size type style and color of your text

1 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Font or click on the Font button in the Takeoff Toolbar

2 Select the desired features (color options are disabled) and click the OK button

3 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Color or click on the Color button in the Takeoff Toolbar The Color dialog will open

4 Click on a color in the Basic Color palette or create a color and add to the Custom Colors palette (Be sure to click on the color in the Custom Colors palette to select it)

5 Click the OK button

Object Properties

Linear Objects

Linear objects may be set to connect at corners

A linear object may be set to trim automatically when crossing another linear object (Check the trim option under the advanced tab of the Condition dialog)

When you move a connected linear object objects automatically move and resize connected lines accordingly (quantities are then recalculated)

This feature requires that the connected linear object be moved using the center handles (does not apply when resizing the line from the ends)

Objects constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

Objects are measured from centerline to centerline

Section 8 Advanced Features

57

Area Objects When drawing an area use your escape key to undo the last line drawn You may reverse your

drawing of an area using the escape key

The area will not fill with color and pattern until the user double-clicks after the last line is set

Lines drawn to delineate an area object constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

After selecting an area to move or adjust position the mouse in the center to move the entire area position the mouse at the sides or corners to adjust the perimeter

Count Objects

All count objects are quantified by the physical number of objects per page and reported as EA for the UOM The quantity for the current Image View is (displayed in the Condition List) and the total quantity in your project is displayed in the Takeoff View and Worksheet View)

Square circle rectangle and triangle shaped count objects do not displace or subtract from other object quantities when placed on top of them However on the Advanced Tab for the count condition a connect property can be set (this is a check box) so that when a count object of this shape is put on top of a Linear type takeoff object it will move with the linear if said linear is moved

An opened-shaped count object must be placed within a linear object Opening shaped count objects may also be measured by linear foot or linear yard (EA SF and SY are also options) Opening shaped count items default to a width of 3rsquo 0rdquo at the time of creation This size can be changed The small medium and large size are not options on this type of condition anymore Check Backout on the Advanced tab for each Count object back out the footage (or yardage) of opening-shaped count objects in which they are placed

NOTE In order to see this Backout functionality (in quantity) for SY or SF deductions at least one of the

results for the Linear(s) this object will be placed on must be set to SY or SF and the count object must have a height quantity

Advanced Features of Conditions The Round Feature Under the Advanced tab of the linear and area Condition dialogues you may specify quantity rounding (in inches) For linear objects rounding applies to each linear object drawn For area objects rounding will apply to each segment of the area perimeter adjusting the perimeter and area calculations For example With a linear condition entering 12 in the Round field will round up each related linear object to the nearest 12 inches or one foot With this setting two walls of 1 4 would each round to 2 0 totaling 4 0

NOTE In the Takeoff Dock bar condition list and in the On-Screen Takeoff reports quantities will be displayed in whole numbers rounded up to the nearest foot However calculations are based on true quantities without rounding unless the Round Feature is engaged

Pitch Pitch may apply either to linear or area conditions It is measured in rise per linear foot Entering 12 indicates a 12 rise per 12 of linear distance (a pitch of 12 over 12) or an angle of 45deg

Section 8 Advanced Features

58

Advanced Features of Project Properties Selecting Multiple Pages

1 Select a single page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry

2 Drag the cursor down the column of numbers to select consecutive pages

3 Click on the blank button at the top of this column to select all pages in the Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

59

Changing Image Assigned to a Drawing 1 Select the page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry 2 Click the Change Image button The Change Image dialog box will appear

3 Navigate to the desired file and select by clicking on it

4 Click the Open button The electronic file assigned to the page will have been changed to reflect the new file choice

Changing Image File Path 1 Select pages as described above

2 Choose Change Folder

3 In the Change Folder dialog navigate to the appropriate folder

4 Click the OK button The file path will have been changed for the selected page entries

Delete a Page from Project Properties 1 Select the page you want to delete by clicking on its associated number (in the gray box at the

left of the entry)

2 Choose Delete Page

All Takeoff on the page will be deleted immediately and permanently

Section 8 Advanced Features

60

Advanced Features of Tool Options

Calculation Method On-Screen Takeoff has built-in calculation options to allow for faster work and faster saves until your takeoff is complete Calculation options are found by selecting Tools gt Options then clicking on the Calculation tab

Calculation method can be set to Automatic Automatic except Grids and Manual Manual will allow the program to operate more quickly while Automatic or Automatic except Grids allows the user to see quantity changes as takeoffs are made

In any mode you may press F9 to recalculate quantities for the On-Screen Takeoff current totals

Configuration Tab

When the ldquoPage Label (A01)rdquo radial button is chosen On-Screen Takeoff puts the numbered label on all the pages of in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar If the Page Descriptionrdquo radial button is chosen then a description of what takeoff is on that specific page will be shown in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar

This section of the configuration tab gives you options on how you want to export your information When the ldquoFolderSubfolder Namesrdquo radial button is chosen than on your file that you are exporting to will have all the conditions folders and subfolders In the Delimiter box you can choose the symbol that is needed to separate the information you are exporting Some files need semicolons () or colons () to make sure the information comes exported in is separated it the appropriate places

Section 8 Advanced Features

61

In previous versions of On-Screen Takeoff there are views that users need to have in order for them to display their information By either choosing ldquoOST 1xrdquo or ldquoOST 2xrdquo it will let the program know you want your columns of information exported in that specific format

When you have the Confirm Deletions radial button of ldquoYesrdquo chosen than every time you delete anything you will get a dialog box confirming your intentions of deletion

While working with your takeoff you have a choice to either view the legend of your conditions or hide it Choose whichever radial button that suits your needs

For those who prefer to use the Enter key to navigate in dialog boxes this option is just for that

Font Tab The Font tab is designed for you to make your own look and feel for the application At the bottom of this tab it will show you sample of the fonts and colors you have chosen

Renaming the Current Page You may change the name of the current page in the takeoff area of On-Screen Takeoff by selecting Edit gt Rename Page

This opens the Name Page dialog and you may simply type in a new name and click the Enter button The new name for the file will be reflected on the title bar for the page and in Project Properties

You also may access the Rename Page function by right-clicking in the takeoff area while in Image View and selecting the option from the pop-up menu that appears

Section 9

62

Saving and Exiting

This section will

Explain how to save projects

Show you how to safely exit the program

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

63

Saving Your Project

1 Select File gt Save 2 If your project has not previously been saved a Save dialog box will open to allow you to name

the file and choose the directory and folder in which to save your file 3 Once saved File gt Save will simply save the current version of the file

OR

4 Select File gt Save As then type in a new name for the file and save to the desired file path

The Auto-save Feature With the Auto-save feature On-Screen Takeoff automatically backs up your open project You may choose to have more than one level of backup files The first backup copy will have the extension b00 and successive files will be b01 b02 and so on If you have designated four levels of backup files after the fourth backup copy has been created (b03) the next file will be saved over the file with extension b00 Further backup saves will then rotate through the four backup files in the same way

1 Select Tools gt Options 2 In the Auto-save area (under the General tab) select the frequency of backup file creation (in

minutes) and the number of levels for the feature 3 You also may disengage the feature by clicking in the check box to clear it

The Auto-save feature automatically saves backup copies to the directory of the current project If you are working from a write-protected area such as a CD-ROM On-Screen Takeoff will place backup files in the On-Screen Takeoff folder

Exiting When you are finished using On-Screen Takeoff it is very easy to exit Exiting is very important because of security reasons If someone were to use your computer they could enter the application and view and manipulate information

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

64

On-Screen Takeoff closes the open project when you open another or create a new project or when you exit the program

1 Select File gt Exit

OR

2 You also may click at the upper right-hand corner of the application to exit

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

65

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer When you get your digitizer from GTCO you will need to connect it to your computer Follow the instructions outlined below to do this

Note For rollup digitizers the metal bar must be oriented to the top or right hand side

Connecting the Digitizer 1 Lay the digitizer out flat 2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer 3 Plug in the power adapter 4 Plug the interface (IO) cable into the digitizer 5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into an open serial port on computer

Note GTCO Technical support phone number is 410-381-6688 The electronic manual (on diskette) from GTCO contains more detailed installation and operation instructions for the GTCO digitizer model you have

Installing other Digitizer Drivers If you are using a GTCO Digitizer you will need to install the GTCO TabletWorks Drivers

If you are using a Digitizer not supported by GTCO Tablet Works 10 please contact the manufacturer of your digitizer for assistance with installation

Installing GTCO TabletWorks Drivers 1 Insert the On Center CD into the CD-ROM drive The CD Startup screen will open 2 Click on Install Software 3 Select Additional Software and Drivers 4 Select Digitizer Driver 5 Follow the instructions for installing TabletWorks 10

Adhering the Template The template is a small plastic sticker used to enable mouse function when using the digitizer with On-Screen Takeoff Place your template on your digitizer We suggest placing it in the bottom right corner of the digitizer about one inch inside the takeoff area

Note You may either peel off the back of the template and use the adhesive surface or you can tape the template down

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

66

Testing the Digitizer Drivers Before running OST you may test the digitizer by moving the stylus around on the digitizer pad it should move the mouse cursor (if mouse emulation is enabled)

If the digitizer does not move the mouse cursor on the screen

The superset codes may need to be reset Reset the superset codes by touching on the border of the digitizer with the stylus The digitizer should beep several times

The digitizer may not be communicating with the computer Be sure the COM port selected is correct Be sure the COM port selected is correct If you are not able to get the digitizer to move the mouse cursor you need to call GTCO technical support for help

Note The Mouse Emulation is not required for On-Screen Takeoff to work properly It is used only for the Template functionality if the digitizer is moving the cursor the wrong direction (up instead of sideways or vice-versa)

Click the L-shaped arrow symbol on the digitizer with the stylus

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

67

Appendix II Toolbar Items Main Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

68

Tool Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

69

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

70

Navigate Toolbar (Continued)

Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

71

Takeoff Toolbar (Continued)

Image Toolbar

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

72

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

This section will detail how to load plans from a F W Dodge CD-ROM into an On-Screen Takeoff project file ready for takeoffs

Dodge files may be added to the Project Properties dialog However loading the files in that way will load the files by number rather than name description If you want to load one page only from your Dodge CD You will have to rename the page to display the name rather than number of the file

To load plan files from a Dodge CD so that the files load sequentially by file number but are displayed by name rather than by number within your project follow the instructions below

Opening a Dodge project from a CD-ROM 1 Insert the CD into the drive 2 Choose File gt Custom 3 Choose Dodge Plans Project (plansdat) as the file type 4 Select the appropriate file type by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the Files of type

field 5 In the Look in field access your drive paths by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the

field then

Navigate to your CD-ROM drive Open the data folder and Open the Projects folder

6 Select the desired project and open its folder 7 Open the plansdat file 8 All the images will come in sequenced correctly for that job along with the full descriptions

(names) of each page If there is not a plans folder in the project folder then plans do not exist for that project on the CD Opening the plansdat file will yield an empty project

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

73

Appendix IV Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer The On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer is a limited version of On Center Softwarersquos commercial takeoff software If your status bar located at the very bottom of the main window says View Mode in the lower left-hand corner then you are using the Plan Viewer You can use the plan viewer to

View CD-based amp converted CAD drawings

View a previously created OST file and associated drawings

Download electronic plans online

Navigate through drawings

Quickly Takeoff linearsareas and counts

Zoom in to view the plan better

Print drawings directly from the viewer

Viewing an On-Screen Takeoff Project File

1 To open an OST file that was previously created with of On-Screen Takeoff 2 Select File gt Open 3 An Open dialog will appear if you do not see the OST file you are looking for select the

Look In drop down arrow 4 A drop down menu will appear listing the various folders drives and mapped drives located

on your computer select the correct drive or folder location and continue to browse to the location of your OST file

5 When you see your OST file double-click it to open it 6 Any takeoff and drawings should appear on the Image tab view

If you do not see the drawings but do see the colored takeoff layer the drawings may

not be located in the same place they were originally saved at Go to File gt Project Properties and check the Image File path for each listed page If the image file path is pointing to a CD drive make sure the CD is inside the CR-ROM

Downloading Electronic Plans If your Online Plan Service provides a special file format (OSX) required to use this feature of our plan viewer you can immediately downloaded all electronic plans of a project directly from our viewer

Most Plan Room web sites will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff when a request to download plans is made Your particular Plan Room may differ in operation so please contact the provider directly with questions on using the site

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

74

When you request to download or open a project file from a Plan Room you will usually have the open to open or save an OSX file Choosing open will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff Alternately you may choose to save the file to a local hard drive After you have saved the file either double-click it to launch On-Screen Takeoff or open the OSX file using On-Screen Takeoff by clicking File then Open and locating the file on your hard drive You will need to change the file type to OSX

After the OSX file is opened you will see an additional tab appear in the Conditions List window called Pages

The Pages tab shows the hierarchy of your project Gray file icons represent pages that have not been downloaded and blue icons represents pages that have been downloaded

To download a page simply double-click the page icon

If you wish to select a group of pages to download you can use the Ctrl or Shift key to multiple select them then click the Download button

If you wish to download all pages at once click the Download All button

Downloaded pages will now appear in the Project Properties dialog in the same order in which they appear in the Pages tab

Creating Quick Takeoffs With On-Screen Takeoff you can create quick takeoffs to measure quantities even if you dont have the full version of our program However using the Quick Takeoff functionality shows you just a fraction of what the full version can do

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar is located at the top of the image view It has three buttons designated for three types of takeoffs Linear Area and Count The Quantity drop down list will show secondary quantities for Linears and Areas The Units drop down allows you to select how you want your quantities displayed Feet Inches Yards Millimeters and Meters

NOTE Every time change the type of takeoff you are performing (switching from Area to Linear for example) the previous quantities and takeoff objects will disappear They will also disappear when you changes pages

NOTE You can use the Dimension Tool to basically measure the distance between two points or linears The distance will display on the status bar at the bottom of the application

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

75

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions General

Where is On-Screen Takeoff installed on my computer

Typically it is installed in CProgram FilesOn-Screen Takeoff

In Explorer how do I recognize On-Screen Takeoff file types

On-Screen Takeoff data is stored in a single file per job lsquojob name OSTrsquo On-Screen Takeoff templates are stored as lsquotemplate nameTPOrsquo

Can only one project at a time be open

Yes For that reason opening another project automatically closes the project on screen You will be asked to save any changes

Is only one scale allowed per page What about on drawings that have multiple detail sections on a page and each of those drawings have different scales

Yes For pages with drawings of different scales copy the drawing to another project page and set the appropriate scale

I cannot perform backout on an area that is along a linear

As a workaround use the On-Screen Takeoff layers feature to help you with this issue Electronic Images

How do I start a project from drawings that have been scanned and written to a CD-ROM

Open a new project Select File gt Project Properties and select Auto Add Navigate to your CD and the appropriate folder and select any image file in that location Click Open All files in the location will load into your project Recommended that images are copied from CD to hard drive for performance

If I get a disk of drawings in AutoCAD format (R13 or R14) can I read them in On-Screen Takeoff

Yes On-Screen Takeoff now reads DWG DXF and many other format that are saved with AutoCAD

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

76

When I click on the all pages button what is supposed to happen Currently nothing seems to change when I click on that button

The All Pages button is used to apply the Darken and Enhance Plans feature to all pages in the project (as opposed to only the current page on screen)

Is there a way to deduct a large skylight from an area condition

Yes with the related area condition selected in the Takeoff Dock bar unselect the Backout button on the Takeoff Toolbar then draw the Backout area The area quantity will be deducted from the related condition object and the linear measurement of the Backout perimeter will be added

Digitizer Issues

How do I connect a Digitizer to the computer

See Appendix I Connecting a Digitizer

The Place Template menu choice is disabled

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or the digitizer or the digitzer drivers are not installed

It wonrsquot let me select the Set Takeoff Area menu choice

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or no job is open a digitizer is not installed or the drivers are not installed

The digitizer stylus is not moving the cursor or crosshairs

Click S-0-1 superset on the digitizer

How do I convert my old GTCO Digitizer to work with On- Screen Takeofftrade

Call GTCO and they may be able to reconfigure your digitizer to be compatible with On-Screen Takeoff

Printing Issues Which Printers work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible printers include On-Screen Takeoff Hewlett Packard Epson and Canon printers If you are having printer difficulties please contact support and specify the type of printer along with other pertinent information Contact support at wwwoncentercomsupport or email supportoncentercom

Which Plotters work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible Plotters include Hewlett Packard DesignJet plotters and the EnCAD Cadjet II If you are having plotter difficulties please contact support and specify the type of plotter concerned

ViewingDisplay I can no longer see my condition list How do I get it back

The toolbars and Dock bars can be turned on and off through the View gt Toolbars menu options

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

77

This is also accessible by right-clicking in the toolbar area and selecting (or deselecting) a toolbar listed

I cannot view my folders in the condition list

Right-click in the Takeoff Dock barcondition list area and select Show Tree to display your folders

My Status Bar reads Viewer Mode and I am unable to draw conditions

On-Screen Takeoff needs to be Authorized Or you need to purchase an upgrade Click the Perform Advanced Takeoff button on the main toolbar

I hid a Dock bar and when I selected to view it again it appeared alongside the other Dock

bar instead of stacked on top of it How do I fix it

Pick up the Dock bar by clicking on the bar at the top and continuing to hold down the mouse button drag the Dock bar over the other one It will resize and appear stacked with the other

When I open image files from a CD the images are all upside down How do I get them right

side up

To flip pages from top to bottom follow the steps below 1 Click the All Pages button on the Image Toolbar (All Pages is engaged when the button

is not clicked) 2 Click the Flip Horizontal button on the Image Toolbar 3 Click the All Pages button again to disengage

Templates How do I create a Template

Follow the steps below 1 Create a typical project 2 Choose File gt Save As 3 Choose On-Screen Takeoff Template Files as the file type to save 4 Name the file This will save all of the condition setups as well as the layers for the

project

How do I create a new project from a template

Follow the steps below 1 Choose File gt New 2 Select a template from those listed in the New dialog This will open a new project with

conditions and layers saved from a previous project but no pages or takeoff

78

INDEX

Area Conditions 32

Area Objects 57

Auto Scrolling 20

Auto-save 63

Backout Mode 41

Calculation Method 60

Conditions 29

Configuration 60

Contents Tab 6

Continuous Mode 38

Count Conditions 33

Count Objects 57

Digitizer 10 65 76

Docking Toolbars 13

Dodge CD 72

Drawing 27 37

DropRun Count 55

Environment 18

Exiting 63

Exporting 49

Features 16

Font 61

Frequently Asked Questions 75

Grid 40

Help File 5

Hiding Toolbars 13

Hot Links 21

Image 19 59

Image files 9

Image Toolbar 12 71

Images 75

Index Tab 6

Layers 43

Linear Conditions 31

Linear Objects 56

Main Toolbar 12 67

Menus 14

Moving Toolbars 13

Navigate Toolbar 12 69

Navigating 20

On-Screen Takeofftrade 2

Page 59 61

Pages 20 25 28

Plan Viewer 73

Plans 26

Printing 47 76

Project Properties 25

Projects 22

Quick Start Video 18

Resizing Toolbars 13

Roping 54

Saving 63

Scale 28

Search Tab 7

Selecting Objects 42

Setup 8

Start On-Screen Takeofftrade 17

System Requirements 9

Takeoff 19 27

Takeoff Toolbar 70 71

Takeoff Toolbar 12

Template Files 23

TIF (Group4) 9

Tool Toolbar 12 68

Toolbar 67

Toolbars 12

View Toolbar 12 69

Viewing Toolbars 12

Worksheet 20

Zone Conditions 33

Zoom Toolbar 12 69

  • On-Screen Takeoff Lite
  • Table of Contents
  • Section 1 - Introduction
  • Section 2 - Setup
  • Section 3 - Toolbars and Menus
  • Section 4 - Features
  • Section 5 - Projects
  • Section 6 - Conditions and Takeoff
  • Section 7 - Printing and Exporting
  • Section 8 - Advanced Features
  • Section 9 - Saving and Exiting
  • Appendix I - Installing Your Digitizer
  • Appendix II - Toolbar Items
  • Appendix III - Loading Plans from a Dodge CD
  • Appendix IV - Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer
  • Appendix V - Frequently Asked Questions
  • Index

Pitch 57 Advanced Features of Project Properties58

Selecting Multiple Pages 58 Changing Image Assigned to a Drawing 59 Changing Image File Path59 Delete Page from Project Propertiesl 59

Advanced Features of Tool Options 60 Calculation Method60 Configuration Tab 60 Font Tab 61

Renaming the Current Page61 SECTION 9 - SAVING AND EXITING 62 Saving Your Project63

The Auto-Save Feature63 Exiting63 APPENDIX I - INSTALLING YOUR DIGITIZER 65 APPENDIX II - TOOLBAR ITEM DETAILS 67 APPENDIX III - LOADING PLANS FROM A DODGE CD 72 APPENDIX IV -USING THE PLAN VIEWER 73 APPENDIX V - FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS 75 INDEX 78

Section 1

1

Introduction

This section will

Help you become familiar with On-Screen Takeoff and the User Guide

Give Full Mode users information on how the product works with a digitizer

Section 1 Introduction

2

Welcome to On-Screen Takeoff This extraordinary software gives you bidding advantage in less time with greater accuracy by allowing you to perform complex takeoffs right on your computer screen

On-Screen Takeoff can be used with a digitizer and paper plans or a mouse and electronic plan files On-Screen Takeoff enables the user to create live drawings with resizable conditions linear conditions such as walls pipes and electrical lines area conditions such as floors and ceilings count conditions such as sprinkler heads corner beads doors and windows and zone conditions that assess quantities for any part of an area you specify As you record conditions using your plans the program provides reports on quantities and can recalculate instantly for any adjustment to the conditions of your project

New and experienced users will enjoy the power of this estimating system that is very easy to use As with all products from On Center Software this program works well for most construction trades and is ready to use the day you receive it So start bidding jobs more quickly and accurately today with On-Screen Takeoff This program is equipped with three modes View Mode allows the user to perform quick takeoffs view previously created files and drawing zoom to view plans better and print drawings (see Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer for more details) Lite Mode adds the use of zones Full Mode allows the user to perform more advanced takeoff options including layers and working with a digitizer The mode is referenced in the lower left corner of the program screen

If you currently have View or Lite Mode and are interested in performing more advanced takeoffs a

purchase request button has been provided on the main toolbar Clicking will take you to a webpage purchase form You can also call an On-Center Software Account Representative 1-800-880-8254 or visit us on the web at wwwoncentercom for more details

Section 1 Introduction

3

About this Guide This guide is intended to be a compliment to On-Screen Takeoff software The sections are presented in an order intended to help new users understand the software The User Guide provides detailed information about On-Screen Takeoff tools and commands It is designed to assist you in applying program features to your estimating projects Use it as a reference tool along with the online help system in your day to day work with On-Screen Takeoff

Table of Contents outlines the sections and topics covered in each section

Section 1 Introduction explains the user guide and helpful resources

Section 2 Setup lists system requirements and recommended components

Section 3 Toolbars and Menus explains the toolbars and menus used in On-Screen Takeoff

Section 4 Features gives you a tour of the On-Screen Takeoff environment and shows you how to navigate through your projects

Section 5 Projects leads you through your first time with the program or if yoursquore an old hand at On-Screen Takeoff reacquainting yourself with the software

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff shows you features of working with condition objects zones and backouts in the takeoff area

Section 7 Printing and Exporting explains the step-by-step of printing images and reports copying and pasting data from On-Screen Takeoff and exporting quantity results to an Excel spreadsheet

Section 8 Advanced Features discusses special and advanced features of On-Screen Takeoff conditions and options

Section 9 Saving and Exiting explains how to save projects and safely exit the program Appendixes gives you additional information on installing a digitizer toolbar item details loading files using the plan viewer and frequently asked questions Index provides key words or phrases the program application and references the page(s) in the user guide where they can be found

Section 1 Introduction

4

Extras Along the way yoursquoll encounter bits of information that make the User Guide not only more readable but more personal and relevant The signs and signals placed throughout the guide will better help you understand On-Screen Takeoff and On Center Software We think yoursquoll find these bits and pieces interesting Herersquos what to look for

NOTE

To make special notice of specific information

Caution Warning This symbol is there to insure that you are following the information to minimize risk

This symbol represents information that also appears on the Quick Start Video

In this manual some information is specific to using a digitizer The icon appears alongside this information (Must be in Full Mode to use a digitizer)

A reminder is there to keep the information in mind for future consideration

For Your Informationhellip

Instruction Jargon

In this guide click or double-click refers to clicking on the left mouse button A right-click clicking on the right mouse button will be specifically stated

Click the digitizer refers to clicking down once with the stylus pen

NOTE When using a digitizer a click or double-click refers to pressing the ball tip of the stylus pen right on the digitizer (usually in the takeoff area) A right-click can be accomplished by using the digitizer mouse template and the first button on the stylus pen See Appendix I Installing You Digitizer for more information

Drag and drop is holding down the left mouse button after clicking on an object You may simply drag the object to the desired location and release the mouse button

Section 1 Introduction

5

Typographic Conventions

The following are typographical conventions to be aware of when reading this guide

Menu items you are instructed to choose appear in a different typeface with the greater than (gt) symbol separating each menu level For example if you are instructed to select the Open command in the File menu it appears as File gt Open If you are instructed to select the Save As command from the File menu it appears as File gt Save As

Helpful hints or information about the topic are provided throughout the document They will be labeled lsquoNOTErsquo (all caps and bold font to catch your attention)

Several topics will have more detailed steps outlined in either another section of the user guide or in the Appendix They will always be referenced and italicized For example ldquoSee Editing Conditions for more informationrdquo

Help File In combination with this User Guide and the Quick Start video (Help gt Watch Quick Start Video) the Help File will also be a great resource for product information and application There are additional resources available on the website at wwwoncentercom or Help gt Visit our Website Follow these instructions to open the Help file

1 Select Help gt Help Topics

2 This will open the On-Screen Help File

Hide and Show Buttons

The Hide and Show buttons will either remove or display the Topics panel in the Help dialog

Back Button

The Back button takes you back to the last help page you viewed It will be available only if you have navigated through multiple pages in the help file

Print Button

Clicking will print the topic displayed This is helpful if the instructions to follow are long and you prefer to work on a full screen

Options Button

The Options button will allow you to pick from a list of commands to help you navigate the Help file

Section 1 Introduction

6

Contents Tab This tab provides a quick breakout of the Contents of the help file It should be used like the Table of Contents of a book Simply double-click on the book icon to open the chapter Then click the desired page icon to display the relevant information

Index Tab This tab allows you to locate a specifically indexed topic This should be used as you would a book index Begin typing a word in the index entry field and the system will automatically move within the list to the entries closest in spelling to your word(s) Begin typing the topic word to access it in the list quickly

Section 1 Introduction

7

Search Tab This tab works like a word find It allows you to search for any word contained in the Help file Type the

word you are looking for in the lsquoType in the keyword to findrsquo field Click A list of topics containing that word will appear Scroll through the list and double click on the topic you want displayed

Section 2

8

Setup

This section will

Let you know what system requirements you will need to have in place

Recommend components that work well with the software

Help Full Mode users install a digitizer

Section 2 Setup

9

Minimum System Requirements To use On-Screen Takeoff your computer must meet the following minimum system requirements

An IBM PC or 100 compatible computer with a Pentium II or faster Intel processor

Memory Requirements 200 MB of available hard-disk space and256 MB RAM (128 MB preferred)

Windows 2000 SP4 and Windows XP SP2 256 color video card Super VGA display card Mouse 15-inch monitor

While these are the minimum system requirements Windows places heavy demands on your systems resources The more available memory in your computer the faster and more efficient On-Screen Takeoff will operate

Recommended Components

For the best performance we recommend the following components

Pentium III or faster processor

512 or more of RAM

12X speed CD-ROM or better

17-inch monitor or dual monitors Graphic adapter with 128 MB or more VRAM Sound card and speakers installed

NOTE In order to utilize the Training Videos you must have a sound card and speakers installed

Compatible File Formats The resolution in electronic plans does not need to be more that 200 DPI (Dots per Inch) The preferred file format is a black and white TIF (Group4) On-Screen Takeoff recognizes image files with the following extensions

File Extensions View Mode Lite Mode Full Mode TIF X X X PDF X X X OSE X X X JPG X X X CPC X X X CAL X DGN X DWG X DXF X OSP X PLN X PLT X

Section 2 Setup

10

NOTE Use the following image types for best results

Convert to TIF

The converted files will be stored in a folder with the name of the current On-Screen Takeoff project Since the conversion can be very time consuming you should only select this option if you really intend to convert vector files to TIF

1 Select File gt Project Properties

2 In the Pages Field add your image See Section 5 Establishing Project Setting Adding Pages

3 Click

4 Then select the page with the drawing you wish to convert

5 Click

Installing Your Digitizer The following instructions are a quick start to installing your digitizer For more specific information please reference Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer at the end of this guide

Connecting Your Digitizer

Upon receiving your digitizer (either a GTCO or another brand) you will need to connect it to your computer

1 Lay the digitizer out flat

2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer

3 Plug in the power supply

4 Plug the interface cable into the digitizer

5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into the computer

NOTE On-Screen Takeoff is compatible with any tablet that is WinTab compatible

Digitizer options are only available in Full Mode If you are in View or Lite Mode and would like

to use this feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade

Section 3

11

Toolbars and Menus

This section will

Introduce the program toolbars

Familiarize you with On-Screen Take Offtrade Menu options

Section 3 Toolbars and Menus

12

Toolbars On-Screen Takeoff is equipped with several helpful toolbars for application efficiency See Appendix II Toolbar Item` Details for a detailed description of each toolbar item Individually the toolbars may be displayed moved docked reshaped or hidden from view You can also create costume toolbars to fit your needs

Main Toolbar

Tool Toolbar

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Takeoff Toolbar

Image Toolbar Viewing Toolbars Toolbars are displayed on the screen and will be consistent on each tab or page (Some toolbars or toolbar items will be in an inactive state if they donrsquot have a supporting element in the application)

1 Select View gt Toolbars and select the appropriate toolbar name

OR

2 Right-click on a toolbar region of the screen

3 Check the toolbars you want to display

Section 3 Toolbars and Menus

13

Moving Toolbars The toolbars may be positioned anywhere on the screen you wish This feature is provided to allow the flexibility for positioning the toolbars so they are out of your way yet handy for use

1 Click on an edge of the toolbar holding down the mouse button drag it to its new position

2 Release the mouse button to set it in place

NOTE If the toolbar is dropped anywhere other than a screen edge it will become free floating This feature is especially handy when using multiple monitors

Docking Toolbars The toolbars can be docked to any of the screen edges

1 Click on the title bar of an undocked toolbar

2 Drag the toolbar to any location on the screen

Hiding Toolbars

1 Select View gt Toolbars and select the toolbar you wish to remove from the screen

2 Right-click on the toolbar or dock bar areas

3 A floating toolbar can be closed by clicking on the in the upper right corner of the toolbar

Resizing Toolbars Only undocked (floating) toolbars may be resized

1 Position the mouse pointer over an edge

2 Click and drag

3 The toolbar can be resized as desired

Customizing the Toolbars You may rearrange or delete buttons within a toolbarrsquos display or you may move buttons from one toolbar to another If you find that you use a few tools over and over you may want to group them within a single toolbar for convenience On-Screen Takeoff gives you the flexibility to customize your takeoff environment

1 Select Tools gt Customize The Customize dialog will open

2 With the dialog open click on a toolbar button and drag buttons from one toolbar to another or a new location within the same toolbar

3 To add a button without altering another toolbar click on the Commands tab of the Customize dialog and drag the appropriate symbol from the Buttons section to a toolbar

4 To remove a button drag it to within the takeoff area of the application

Section 3 Toolbars and Menus

14

Menus

Section 3 Toolbars and Menus

15

Digitizer Menu

Section 4

16

Features

This section will

Show you how open On-Screen Takeoff

Describe the On-Screen Takeoff environment

Teach you how to navigate pages

Section 4 Features

17

Start On-Screen Takeoff

1 On your desktop double-click your On-Screen Takeoff icon

2 The application will open

OR

3 Left-click on the Start button on your computerrsquos toolbar

4 Scroll up to Programs gt On Center Software

5 Highlight On-Screen Takeoff and click On-Screen Takeoff will open On-Screen Takeoff opens to an untitled blank project The Image view of the screen will be a blank page

Two blank dock bars the Pan dock bar and the Takeoff dock bar appear at the left side of the screen Along the bottom the Status bar displays user status or context-sensitive messages as well as paper size and current zoom percentage of the plan sheet on screen The menu bar and several task specific toolbars are located at the top of the screen

NOTE All toolbars and dock bars may be accessed to view or hide through View gt Toolbars on the menu bar

Section 4 Features

18

Quick Start Video When On-Screen Takeoff opens you will be given an option to watch the Quick Start video (recommended) or start the program without watching the video

The 20 minute video will demonstrate key program functionality and allow you to view application instruction for enhanced learning

If you would like to watch the video click If you prefer to get started without

the video click If you have already viewed the video click the lsquoDo not show this message againrsquo box to prevent this dialog from appearing each time you open the program

NOTE If you decide later that you would like to watch the Quick Start video go to Help gt Watch

Quick Start Videos

On-Screen Takeoff Environment The On-Screen Takeoff environment acts like your drafting table allowing you to work on several sheets of plans at once and to reference at a glance the entire drawing and your position on that drawing while giving you the power of a computer to track analyze print and export your takeoff quantities and plans

The screen is bordered at the top by the Menu bar with pull-down menus and at the bottom by the Status bar which indicates current user status plan page size and current zoom percentage of page The largest portion of the application screen will be your takeoff area bounded on the left (by default) by two dock bars and on the top by several toolbars

In the takeoff area you may view your project plans (images) andor takeoff objects the takeoff list with quantities the worksheet or a legend of your condition list

The main window of On-Screen Takeoff has three tabs located at the bottom left allowing for quick change between Image Takeoff or Worksheet views Select the desired view option on the toolbar and it will automatically open on your screen

Section 4 Features

19

Image View

This view shows the plan file andor takeoff conditions drawn from your plans

Takeoff View This view displays the height if applicable and quantity breakdowns of your conditions according to result types indicated (eg linear feet square feet or count of items) for zones pages and the project as a whole It also displays notes per condition

Section 4 Features

20

Worksheet View This view displays the condition and quantity in units of measure specified in the first results field of the Results tab in the Condition dialog and allows the user to enter amounts for material labor and subcontractor takeoffs

NOTE When in the Worksheet view tab out the field then save This is keep all the values saved

Navigating On-Screen Takeoff

Auto Scrolling When creating linear areas or zones On-Screen Takeoff will automatically scroll the image view when necessary It will move as your mouse or digitizer moves beyond the edge of the current view

Changing Pages

1 Select View gt Next Page Previous Page or Go To Page (specify page number for the Go to Page option)

2 You may also select the corresponding arrows for these options from the Navigate Toolbar The

drop down arrow in the Page field will list the pages The and arrows will take you to the

previous or next page The and arrows will take you to the first or last page

OR

Section 4 Features

21

3 Or press Ctrl G for the Go To Page dialog

Hot Links Hot links allow you to move quickly from one drawing to the pertinent area of another drawing A hot link is handy when viewing enlarged areas of a page and needing the ability to jump back to a reference page

1 Select Tools gt Hot Link

OR

2 Click from the Tools Toolbar

3 Click on the page where you want to set the link The Hot Link dialog will open

4 Using the current page display on the Navigate Toolbar access the pull-down menu of pages by

clicking on the arrow at the right

5 Select the page for your link (You may also choose View gt Go to Page and select by page number)

6 Manipulate the view using the zoom tool and the scroll bars

7 Click

8 After joining a hot link to another page the hot link arrows in the Navigation Toolbar will become active

9 Move a hot link to another location on the page by clicking then click and drag the hot link image anywhere on the page

Section 5

22

Projects

This section will

Help you create settings important to your projects

Explain how On-Screen Takeoff works with your electronic or paper plans

Section 5 Projects

23

Project Template Files You can begin your project with a template Templates allow you to take advantage of conditions and settings used with previous projects

On-Screen Takeoff templates contain condition lists and established layer separations from previous projects you have created You may also use the sample templates provided with On-Screen Takeoff as a great starting point All aspects of the templates may be adjusted for a new project

1 Select File gt New and click the OK button

2 From the New dialog box choose the template that best fits your project

3 The conditions for this template will appear in the Takeoff Dock bar and the Project Properties dialog will open asking for further information

4 Use File gt Save or File gt Save As to rename and save your new project

Saving a Project as a Template File You can save your condition properties and layers as a template for future projects

1 Select File gt Save As

2 Enter a name for your template and select On-Screen Takeoff Template Files (tpo) from the Save As type field of the dialog (click on the down arrow to select)

3 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog Modifying a Template File Follow these steps to modify an existing template file if you need to change or add conditions andor layers

1 Select File gt Open

2 Navigate to your Projects directory

3 In the File Type drop-down select On-Screen Takeoff Template files (tpo)

4 Choose the On-Screen Takeoff template file you would like to modify and click the OK button

5 Make appropriate changes

6 Save and close file

The On-Screen Takeoff template files cannot save takeoff information

Section 5 Projects

24

Opening an Existing Project File 1 Select File gt Open

2 Navigate to the desired file location

3 Click the Open button

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask

you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Creating a New Project

1 Select File gt New

2 For a blank untitled project click

3 At this point the Project Properties dialog will pop-up for more information about your takeoff

NOTE The following are important to keep in mind when beginning a new project

At the start of your project fill out the Project Properties settings to establish the name for all printed output from your project set the default page size and scale for your plans number and names of different pages within the project and locations of electronic drawings

Scale settings can significantly affect quantity outcomes Be sure to set the scale for each page of drawings before beginning condition takeoffs

When using a digitizer remember to make a mark with a pen or pencil in the upper left and lower right corners of the first sheet of the paper plans to delineate the takeoff area for that sheet You can then set the takeoff area on On-Screen Takeoff using your marks

Save your project before you begin taking off any conditions On-Screen Takeoff will write a back-up file using the same file name

Remember the Undo feature If you make a mistake select Edit gt Undo and reverse the process step by step

Section 5 Projects

25

Project Properties

You can either set your Project Properties when you create a new takeoff or once your project file is saved under the appropriate name

1 Select File gt Project Properties the Project Properties dialog box will appear

2 Type in the name of your project to appear on printouts Use the backspace andor delete keys to edit the name as necessary

3 Press the Tab key to move to the Default Image Size option or click within the Image Size box You may click on the arrow at the right for the pull-down menu of page size options or you can use the down-arrow key on your keyboard to scroll through the list to the appropriate selection

4 Press the Tab key to move to the Default Scale option Select a scale by using the drop down arrow If your scale is metric you will need to click in the box next to Metric to convert to that measurement

5 Establish the number of pages for your project plans And load image files See Adding Pages to

Your Project

Adding Pages to Projects Individual Electronic Plans

1 Click on in the Project Properties dialog

2 In the Add Images dialog use the drop down arrow to navigate to the appropriate directory and folder containing your image

3 Select the file so that it displays in the File name field then click The file will display by name and path in the Image File field in Project Properties dialog

4 Click to accept and your project will automatically open

5 Save your project with the new settings by selecting File gt Save

Section 5 Projects

26

Electronic plans scanned from blueprints (as opposed to blue lines) will display as white lines on a black background and are difficult to read on your computer screen Select Image gt Invert and the colors will invert to black on white

You may have noticed the Page column in the Project Properties dialog Generally plan images occupy one page and 1 will be listed in the column indicating Page 1 of your plan file If you import a multi-page TIF a plan file containing more than one page of plans they will import as separate pages and each successive page will be indicated under the Page column as 1 2 3 etc of the plan file

Group of Electronic Plans You may add all the electronic plan files from a particular source (for example from a CD) by using the Auto Add feature

1 Click the button in the Project Properties dialog

2 Browse until you find the appropriate directory and folder containing your plan images

3 Click on any file displayed within your target folder so that the file name appears in the File name box of the Auto Add dialog

4 Click The image paths and file names will be recorded into the project properties arranged alphabetically

5 Click to accept your choices and your project will automatically open

6 Save your project with the new settings by selecting File gt Save

To load Dodge Plans into your Project Properties see Appendix IIi Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

Paper Plans On-Screen Takeoff makes it easy for Full Mode users to perform quantity takeoffs from paper plans using a digitizer

1 Add pages by clicking until you have the number of pages initially in the project

2 Name each page by clicking within the Title area and typing the name

3 Click to accept your choices and close the Project Properties dialog

4 Save your project with the new project properties settings by selecting File gt Save

Section 5 Projects

27

Setting Up a Drawing Template On-Screen Takeoff provides the convenience of using the same work surface for both digitizer and mouse to allow the user to draw conditions and then edit settings of the project or add or change conditions without breaking stride A mouse pad template included with the program defines the area of the digitizer in which use of the stylus or cursor will be recognized as mouse movement as opposed to drawing movement

1 Place your stylus on On-Screen Takeoff

2 Placing the template identifies the location mouse movements will be recognized by the program

Before placing the template the template must be applied to the digitizer surface This may have been done during the installation of your digitizer We suggest attaching the template to the lower right corner of the digitizer surface about one inch inside the grid area

3 Select Digitizer gt Place Template

4 Follow the instruction prompts on the screen clicking first on the target symbol at the left of the On-Screen Takeoff box on the template then on the target at the right

Setting Takeoff Area Before you can begin taking off a drawing you must define the drawing area on the digitizer This requires defining an area that will include all objects on each drawing of your plans As you add pages to your takeoff the same area of the digitizer will be active

1 Secure the plans to the digitizer with tape or a set of clamps

2 With a pen or a pencil mark the upper left corner and the lower right corner of the first page in your set of plans

3 Select Digitizer gt Set Takeoff Area

4 Click each mark with the stylus pen as prompted

5 Verify the active area of the digitizer by looking at the image size located in the lower right corner of your screen

If you close the program before the takeoff is complete you will need to reestablish the takeoff area before you can add additional condition quantities

Electronic plans appear on your computer screen eliminating the need to set a takeoff area You simply drag your mouse across the conditions you wish to takeoff The conditions will be highlighted and quantities will be totaled instantly Electronic plans are available through a variety of services For information contact an On Center Software account manager

Section 5 Projects

28

Setting Scale for Specific Pages You may set the scale in each page view separately This will override the default scale setting in Project Properties for that page Setting the correct scale for the drawing before taking off quantities ensures accurate calculations Be careful to check the scale for each drawing in your project before doing takeoffs

1 Display the page you want to set select Edit gt Set Scale

2 Use the drop down arrow to select a scale that will be applied to that page

3 Click

OR

4 Access the pull-down scale settings on the Navigate toolbar

NOTE As you draw objects notice that the drawn object is similar in width to the object on your plans If it is not the scale set may not be correct

Calculating Scale You may calculate scale according to a known measurement between two points either with a digitizer or on electronic plans

1 Select Edit gt Calculate Scale using Image or Edit gt Calculate Scale using Digitizer

2 Follow the instructions in the related Calculate Scale dialog box You will be asked to click on the first and second points then to enter the dimension for that distance

3 The scale will be recalculated for the displayed page and the Scale display on the Navigate toolbar will show the new scale

Section 6

29

Conditions and Takeoff

This section will Draw Conditions to Takeoff Plan Quantities

What Zones will do to help your takeoff process

Discuss the ins and outs of Takeoffs

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

30

Creating Conditions

If you are starting a new project from scratch you will need to create conditions to takeoff quantities such as floor areas wall lengths and corner bead counts If you are using a template you will have several pre-designed conditions already listed on the Takeoff dock bar However you may want to change the characteristics of some conditions or create additional conditions for a particular project

1 Right Click within the Takeoff dock bar Select New gt Condition

Or

2 From the Takeoff dock bar Click (if the buttons are not showing right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select Show Buttons from the pop-up menu) The New Condition dialog appears

3 Select the condition type (Linear Area Count or Zone) from the pull-down menu accessed by the

down arrow next to the Type option

4 Press Tab or use the mouse (or stylus) to move to Name and enter a name for your condition

5 Specify the desired condition attributes See Condition Attributes for more detail

6 Click for condition to apply

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

31

Condition Attributes Each condition type will have related attributes to select or specify within the General and Advanced tabs of the New Condition dialog Once a condition has been used to takeoff a quantity from your plans certain attributes cannot be changed

All conditions allow the user to specify color and fill pattern for the object drawn

Linear Conditions

General Specify width and height by feet and inches Specify pitch in inches up to the nearest thousandth of an inch if applicable

Advanced Specify rounding for object quantities and droprun default length for electrical or plumbing drops at the ends of lines Select Connect to have lines connect at the corners where one line of the condition ends and another begins (and indicate Tolerance for the featurersquos activation as distance between the ends of two lines) Choose Trim to have lines automatically trim to a line being crossed Choose Curve to draw a curved line

Follow these examples for inputting feet and inches For 7 feet 6 inches type 706 for 13 feet 7 inches type 1307 For 20 feet type 2000

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

32

Area Conditions

General If needed you can specify the thickness (in inches) andor pitch (in inches)

Advanced Specify rounding for object quantities Choose to display an adjustable grid within the area and indicate matrix cell dimensions

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

33

Count Conditions

General

Specify height and indicate the size (in inches) and shape (square circle triangle rectangle or opening) of the count object as it will appear on screen

Advanced Count conditions have advanced attributes These options are available for all shapes except for openings

Zone Conditions Zones allow you to subdivide condition quantities making it easier to modify and complete jobs in phases They can be used at the end of a takeoff to isolate a group of condition quantities that are in different areas of the takeoff

Zones can also be used to break a takeoff into multi-phases and can even be used to isolate quantities while a job is in progress to group the amount of work that has been completed to date They can be applied to one or multiple pages in your plans automatically calculating the takeoff quantities for each zoned area

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

34

The zone feature is only available in Lite and Full Mode If you are in View Mode and would like

to use this feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade

Condition Notes A Note tab is provided for comments regarding the condition These notes will display on the Takeoff List report and will import into Quick Bid

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

35

Condition Results The Results tab of the New Condition is based on condition type Initial settings default to linear feet (LF) for linear conditions square feet (SF) for area conditions and count of items (EA) for count conditions and zones The first of the results fields will display for the condition items in the Takeoff dock bar area All results will display in worksheets and Takeoff List reports as well as in an Excel spreadsheet after being exported

Copying Conditions You may use the condition attributes from a condition yoursquove already created for any future conditions of the same type

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Click the Copy button from the toolbar

OR

3 Right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select copy

4 A new condition will appear in the list with the same condition attributes as the previous condition but with the quantities zeroed

Editing Conditions Once you have copied a condition you might want to change several attributes You can also edit an existing condition to fit any updated needs

1 Highlight the desired condition on the Takeoff dock bar

2 Click the Change button

OR

3 Double-click on the condition you wish to edit to bring up the Change Condition dialog

NOTE The Change Condition dialog differs from the New Condition dialog only in that if takeoffs

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

36

have been performed in your project with this condition you will not be able to change the type of condition or certain properties under the advanced tab of the dialog box

Deleting Conditions 1 Click on the condition in the Takeoff Dock bar area

2 Click the Delete button on the toolbar

OR

3 Right-click and select Delete from the pop-up menu

All takeoff associated with the deleted condition will be deleted immediately and permanently

Organizing Project Conditions Within your project you can create folders andor sub-folders for different types of conditions You may even want to create a folder containing conditions with reset values

To get started organizing your conditions make sure you are viewing the condition tree (right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select Show Tree)

Creating Folders and Sub-Folders 1 Right-click in the Takeoff Dock bar area

2 Select New gt Folder from the pop-up menu

Copying Folders

1 Click on the folder and click Copy on the toolbar

2 All copied conditions within the new folder will have values reset to zero

Renaming Folders

1 Click on the folder

2 Right-click and select Rename from the pop-up menu

3 Enter a name for your folder and click the Enter button

Changing Condition Order

You may move conditions up or down in the condition list of the Takeoff dock bar to suit your project needs

1 Select the condition you would like to move by clicking to highlight it

NOTE When you are ready to move the highlighted conditions be sure that you start

moving using the last condition chosen That condition will have a highlighted boarder

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

37

2 Drag and drop any the condition from one place to another in the list You may also move a condition to another folder on the list in this way

Drawing with Conditions Snap Angles Set up snap angles to prevent lines from appearing jagged Snap angles are commonly set at 15deg and shift snap angles at 0deg

1 Go to Tools gt Options Options dialog appears

2 Under the General tab make the desired settings

3 Click to save the settings As they are drawn lines will snap to the set degree

Drawing a Linear Object 1 Select a condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff dock bar

2 Move the cursor into the Image takeoff area of the screen you will see the cursor display as crosshairs

3 Click and hold left mouse button then drag mouse to draw a line

4 Release mouse button to set line

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

38

5 Repeat steps for further lines

Continuous Mode This feature allows you to draw an object that has connected lines

1 Click the icon from the Takeoff toolbar

OR

2 Go to Tools gt Continuous Mode

3 Follow steps 1-3 from Draw a Linear Object

4 Click at each point of intersection The object will be connected

5 Double-click after making the final point to set the lines

Drawing a Curve To draw a curved line the Curve option must be checked under the Advanced tab of the Condition dialog

1 Click where you want to begin the curve and drag in a straight line to the position for the other endpoint of the curve

2 Click on the line to select it Handles in the shapes of small squares will appear at either end of

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

39

the line and in the center of the line

3 Move the cursor over the center handles until the cursor becomes a two-way arrow

4 Click and drag in the direction of the curve bending the line as you move the cursor Release to set the curve (The line you began with will disappear)

Draw a circle by drawing two curved lines connected

Drawing an Area Object Area conditions are drawn similarly to continuous mode lines You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete your area takeoff

NOTE When drawing an area do not intersect the perimeter or line of the object you are drawing

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

3 The area will be filled with the pattern set for that condition

NOTE The simulated circle will be good enough for you to be able to make a bid

To create a circular area click from point to point with very short distances in between points simulating a circlersquos perimeter Double-click after setting the last point to set the area

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

40

Grid Options Grids give you an added advantage when installing materials such as tiles Use this feature to get a count for how many tiles are needed for an area

1 Double-click on an area condition in the Takeoff dock bar to open its Condition dialog

2 Click on the Advanced tab to show its options

3 Check the box next to Grid by clicking in it

4 Indicate the dimensions of the cell matrix in inches (For example 200 x 400)

5 Under Results tab choose each (EA) for one of the results fields This will tabulate a number of grid cells (including partial grid cells) in area

6 Click to save your settings

7 Use the Move Grid and Rotate Grid features in the Tools menu to manipulate the grid as desired

Grid Calculation

1 Go to Tools gt Options menu

1 Specify if On-Screen Takeoff automatically should Calculate Grid Position

2 If AreaGrid Size is selected On-Screen Takeoff will calculate the number of items needed to fill the grid based on grid demintions

3 Click to accept and close the dialog

To move a line at any angle (regardless of default setting) press the Shift key while moving the mouse

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

41

Backout Mode This feature allows you to take out part of an area and deduct that amount of square footage

1 Select Tools gt Backout Mode

2 Outline the are you want backed out as you would when drawing a regular area object (see Drawing an Area Object)

3 The outlined area will clear and quantities will be recalculated

NOTE The perimeter of the backout area will be added to the LF quantity for that condition

Drawing a Count Object Square triangle rectangle and circle shaped count objects can easily be placed on images

1 Select the condition

2 Click in the location where you want the object to appear

3 To place an opening-shaped count item like a door or window you must click over an existing linear object such as a wall

4 On the Results tab you can change the height properties to give you the result you need

5 If Backout is checked on the advanced tab for each count opening the opening-shaped count item will back out a corresponding section of the linear object

Opening shaped count items are sized at 3rsquo0rdquo by default

Drawing a Zone Zones are drawn in the same way as area objects and may be any polygonal shape You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete the zone perimeter

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

42

Selecting Objects

1 Use the Select Tool to select objects

You can also select all objects that correspond to a condition

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Right-click and choose Select All

3 All objects with this condition will be highlighted with squares as an outline

Moving and Resizing Objects Linear

1 To move or resize a linear object click anywhere on the line to select it

2 To move the line position your pointer over the center handles When the mouse is positioned over the handles you will see a two-way arrow You will only be able to move the line in the direction of the arrows

3 Drag the line to a new position

4 Clicking and dragging the handles on the ends of the line will allow you to lengthen or shorten your line

Area and Zone

1 To move an area object or zone in its entirety click and drag it to its new position

2 Grabbing a handle at a corner or intersection of the object will allow you to adjust and change its perimeter

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

43

Count 1 To move a square circle rectangle or triangle shaped count object click and drag

2 Click and drag an opening shaped count object along the length of the linear object to the desired position then release

NOTE An opening shaped count object may not be moved from its associated linear condition object however it may be moved up and down the length of the linear object

Layers On-Screen Takeoff allows you to sort and separate your takeoff objects within the same job and on the same page On-Screen Takeoff gives you this flexibility through the use of layers

By assigning different conditions to different layers (for example differentiating between floors ceilings and walls) you can choose to view all layers or turn off certain layers to display and print the remaining groups of conditions only You may also remove the background image of electronic plans add text and hot link symbols or print only your condition takeoffs

Layers are only available in Full Mode If you are in View or Lite Mode and would like to use this

feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade Default Layers

On-Screen Takeoff begins every project with three default layers Image Annotation and Default The Image layer holds the electronic plan files you may have in your project The Annotation layer possesses all text notations highlighting and hot links in the project The Default layer will appear in the Condition dialog when creating or editing a condition (listed in the takeoff dock bar) Conditions are assigned to the Default layer unless otherwise specified by the user

Creating Layers To assign a condition to a layer other than the default layer you must first create additional layers for your project

1 Select View gt Layers to open the Layers dialog

2 Click An unnamed layer will be added

3 Click within the empty box and type a name for your layer (for example Wall)

4 New layers are added as active layers The adjacent box under the Show column will be checked

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

44

Assigning a Layer to a Condition 1 Open the Condition dialog box by creating a new condition or editing an existing condition

2 Under the General tab click on the down arrow in the Layer field to display optional layers

3 Select the desired layer for the condition Only the Default layer and layers you have added will be displayed

4 Click

View and Hide Layers

1 Select View gt Layers

2 Under the Show column check the box to view or remove the check (by clicking on it) to hide the specific layer

3 Click to accept and close the Layers dialog

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

45

Assigning Text to a Layer When adding text to an image On-Screen Takeoff has the capability to assign the text to a specified layer

1 Select the Text Tool

2 Click at the point you want to place your text

3 Type in your text using the Enter key for line breaks

4 Click the drop down arrow next to the Layer field and select the desired layer

Section 7

46

Printing and Exporting

This section will

Printing options and procedures

Exporting data by copying and pasting

Exporting quantity results to Excel spreadsheets

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

47

Print Setup On-Screen Takeoff allows the user to print the image takeoff list and worksheet

1 Select File gt Print Setup The Print Setup dialog will open

2 Select a printer or leave the default selection listed (change from the default printer displayed by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the field)

3 Indicate page size and printer tray option (Source) Access page size options by clicking on the

down arrow at the right of the field

4 Choose Portrait or Landscape orientation

5 Click to accept and close the dialog

Printing Images The image area can include the electronic plans the takeoff objects added text and hot links To print a subset of these (for example just the takeoffs without the plans or the added text and hot link symbols) hide layers that you do not want to print (see Section 6 View and Hide Layers) When you are printing your images every page will show the scale of the takeoff you are printing

1 Click on the Image tab to display the area of your project

2 Select File gt Print (or Ctrl + P)

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

48

3 Select the desired view (What to print) and the Image Range

4 Click The second Print dialog will open

5 Change settings accordingly or click if you accept the default settings

Printing Takeoff Lists and Worksheets In Takeoff Lists and Worksheets you may hide columns to print only certain results or adjust column widths to fit the report within the page size selected

1 In Takeoff List or Worksheet view move your cursor to the right side of the columnrsquos title bar the cursor will display as a two-way arrow

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

49

2 Click and drag to adjust the width of the column Holding the mouse button you may

slide the title bar under the title bar to its left to hide the column completely

3 Select File gt Print or press Ctrl + P to access the Print dialog

4 Indicate desired printer and choose the number of copies

5 Click to print and close the dialog

When printing the condition list we suggest printing in landscape

To reset to the default column widths double-click on the right border of a column heading will reset the column to its right (or previously to its right before being hidden)

Print Preview 1 Select File gt Print Preview

2 Use and to vary your view 3 If viewing an image choose current full or scale view to see how it displays

4 For printed outputs that cover more than one page use and to view adjacent pages or click on the down arrow next to Page field and select the page you want displayed

Exporting Using the CopyPaste Feature You may copy all the data or sections from the worksheet and the takeoff list view in On-Screen Takeoff and paste it into another application When pasting into Excel the cell layout will be maintained

1 Highlight the areas you wish to paste Click and hold the left mouse button down as you drag the cursor over the area to be selected then releasing the mouse button

OR

2 Select the entire takeoff list quickly click on the left On-Screen Takeoff column header and hold and drag the cursor across the remaining column headings

The number of pages for the view selected will display in the lower left-hand corner The zoom percentage that applies to the view will be displayed in the lower right-hand corner next to page size of the drawing

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

50

3 In the worksheet view you may highlight rows by clicking on the numbered buttons to the left of each row clicking and dragging across column headings or clicking and dragging over individual cells in the worksheet

Click anywhere in the appropriate view to deselect the area

4 Once your selection is highlighted you may select Edit gt Copy or Ctrl C from the keyboard 5 On your monitor switch to the application into which you want to paste your selection 6 Select Edit gt Paste in the new application or simply press Ctrl + V to paste

The colored keys for conditions cannot be pasted

Using the Export Feature You may export condition quantities to specified cell location within an Excel worksheet file Cell target locations are assigned in the Results tab of the condition dialogs on the Export line relating to each quantity measurement type

On-Screen Takeoff will export takeoff quantity results for up to three different quantity types that you specify For instance you may want to know the number of square feet in a ceiling area as well as the number of linear feet in its perimeter

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

51

1 Bring up the Condition dialog by double-clicking on a condition in the takeoff dock bar or by

selecting the condition and clicking

2 Click on the Results tab to access its fields The default quantities for the condition type will display

3 For each results field click on the arrow to access the pull-down menu and select the appropriate quantity (for example SF LF EA etchellip)

4 Have your Excel spreadsheet opened and saved in a file

5 Specify the Excel spreadsheet cell locations where you want the results to go

6 For a cell in the first sheet of your spreadsheet type in the cell address (eg a1) Case is not important

7 For a cell on a successive sheet of your spreadsheet type in sheet the number followed by a comma and the cell address without any spaces (eg sheet2a1) Case is not important

8 Click

9 Select File gt Export gt Condition Qty to Excel

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

52

10 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

11 Click to export On-Screen Takeoff results to specified cell locations in the Excel file When you return to the Excel application you will see the values have been added to the specified cell locations in your spreadsheet

12 Save your Excel file

Exporting Worksheet to Excel

1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 From On-Screen Takeoff Select File gt Export gt Worksheet to Excel

4 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

5 Click When you return to the Excel application you will see the values from the Worksheet Tab have been added to your spreadsheet

6 Save your Excel file

Exporting Takeoff to CVS 1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 Click the Takeoff Tab in the project you want to export the information

4 Select File gt Export gt Takeoff to CSV

5 Browse to the location of the CSV spreadsheet file click file to select it

6 Click the Save

NOTE CSV files can be opened in Excel Lotus Access etc One may consider this option more of a ldquodumprdquo into a file

The Excel application must be active (it may be minimized on the application bar) with the target spreadsheet open in the application Otherwise an error will occur with the export operation that will affect both the On-Screen Takeofftrade file and the Excel spreadsheet

Section 8

53

Advanced Features

This section will

Some special features of working with condition objects in the takeoff area

Details of advanced options for conditions

Advanced features of the Project Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

54

Features to Use with Objects Roping Feature You can move copy or delete using this feature Using the Select tool (the pointer) you may select several objects at once by clicking and dragging an outline around the objects then releasing the mouse button Roping may select either objects completely within the outlined area (inclusive) or objects both within and touched by the outlined area (touching) Specify your roping preference under Tools gt Options

1 Click and hold the mouse button at a point on the screen near the objects to be selected and drag to surround the objects with an outline

2 Release the mouse button The objects will be selected

3 You may now

Move the group around on the page by clicking within the group dragging the mouse and releasing the button to place the objects

Delete the group of objects by clicking the Delete key or

Copy and paste by pressing Ctrl C to copy the group then Ctrl V to paste it The pasted copy of the grouped objects will appear slightly offset from the original objects

Section 8 Advanced Features

55

Applying a DropRun Count

Use the droprun feature when calculating quantities to take into account the drop or run of a linear condition such as electrical lines or plumbing pipes Drop or run lengths may be added separately to any linear condition on screen while a default droprun length may be indicated for a condition as a whole

1 Select the desired linear condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff Dock bar

2 Click the Change button in the toolbar to open the Change Condition dialog

3 Click the Advanced tab to access the advanced options and click inside the DropRun check box

4 Enter a default length to be applied to all of this condition Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches) You can leave the length blank and manually enter drop run on each segment drawn

5 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog

Edit DropRun Count

1 With the related linear condition in the Takeoff Dock bar highlighted or with the pointer tool selected

2 click on the desired linear object in the image takeoff area The Count button will become active

3 Click on the Count button (alternatively select Tools gt Count) The default droprun amount will show in the pop-up Count dialog (Default length will be zero if droprun has not been selected in this conditionrsquos properties)

4 Type in the desired length Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches)

5 Click the OK button The additional amount will be reflected in the corresponding quantity The new DropRun count will apply only to the object edited

Adding Text in Image View

On-Screen Takeoff allows you to place text comments around your quantity takeoffs that may be printed along with plan images and objects Text is automatically placed within the Annotation Layer (that includes text and hot links)

1 To place text on the image select the Text Tool and click at the point you want to place your text opening a text box

2 Type in your information clicking Enter for line breaks

3 When you are finished click the OK button to exit the text box

4 To reposition text simply click on the text (with the Text Tool active) to select it

5 Move the cursor over the text the cursor will now display as a four-way arrow

6 Click and drag the mouse to position the text as desired

Section 8 Advanced Features

56

1 To edit existing text use the Text Tool to double-click on the text to open the editing box

2 Enter additional text or use the Backspace key to delete text as necessary

Formatting Text Once created you may format the font size type style and color of your text

1 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Font or click on the Font button in the Takeoff Toolbar

2 Select the desired features (color options are disabled) and click the OK button

3 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Color or click on the Color button in the Takeoff Toolbar The Color dialog will open

4 Click on a color in the Basic Color palette or create a color and add to the Custom Colors palette (Be sure to click on the color in the Custom Colors palette to select it)

5 Click the OK button

Object Properties

Linear Objects

Linear objects may be set to connect at corners

A linear object may be set to trim automatically when crossing another linear object (Check the trim option under the advanced tab of the Condition dialog)

When you move a connected linear object objects automatically move and resize connected lines accordingly (quantities are then recalculated)

This feature requires that the connected linear object be moved using the center handles (does not apply when resizing the line from the ends)

Objects constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

Objects are measured from centerline to centerline

Section 8 Advanced Features

57

Area Objects When drawing an area use your escape key to undo the last line drawn You may reverse your

drawing of an area using the escape key

The area will not fill with color and pattern until the user double-clicks after the last line is set

Lines drawn to delineate an area object constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

After selecting an area to move or adjust position the mouse in the center to move the entire area position the mouse at the sides or corners to adjust the perimeter

Count Objects

All count objects are quantified by the physical number of objects per page and reported as EA for the UOM The quantity for the current Image View is (displayed in the Condition List) and the total quantity in your project is displayed in the Takeoff View and Worksheet View)

Square circle rectangle and triangle shaped count objects do not displace or subtract from other object quantities when placed on top of them However on the Advanced Tab for the count condition a connect property can be set (this is a check box) so that when a count object of this shape is put on top of a Linear type takeoff object it will move with the linear if said linear is moved

An opened-shaped count object must be placed within a linear object Opening shaped count objects may also be measured by linear foot or linear yard (EA SF and SY are also options) Opening shaped count items default to a width of 3rsquo 0rdquo at the time of creation This size can be changed The small medium and large size are not options on this type of condition anymore Check Backout on the Advanced tab for each Count object back out the footage (or yardage) of opening-shaped count objects in which they are placed

NOTE In order to see this Backout functionality (in quantity) for SY or SF deductions at least one of the

results for the Linear(s) this object will be placed on must be set to SY or SF and the count object must have a height quantity

Advanced Features of Conditions The Round Feature Under the Advanced tab of the linear and area Condition dialogues you may specify quantity rounding (in inches) For linear objects rounding applies to each linear object drawn For area objects rounding will apply to each segment of the area perimeter adjusting the perimeter and area calculations For example With a linear condition entering 12 in the Round field will round up each related linear object to the nearest 12 inches or one foot With this setting two walls of 1 4 would each round to 2 0 totaling 4 0

NOTE In the Takeoff Dock bar condition list and in the On-Screen Takeoff reports quantities will be displayed in whole numbers rounded up to the nearest foot However calculations are based on true quantities without rounding unless the Round Feature is engaged

Pitch Pitch may apply either to linear or area conditions It is measured in rise per linear foot Entering 12 indicates a 12 rise per 12 of linear distance (a pitch of 12 over 12) or an angle of 45deg

Section 8 Advanced Features

58

Advanced Features of Project Properties Selecting Multiple Pages

1 Select a single page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry

2 Drag the cursor down the column of numbers to select consecutive pages

3 Click on the blank button at the top of this column to select all pages in the Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

59

Changing Image Assigned to a Drawing 1 Select the page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry 2 Click the Change Image button The Change Image dialog box will appear

3 Navigate to the desired file and select by clicking on it

4 Click the Open button The electronic file assigned to the page will have been changed to reflect the new file choice

Changing Image File Path 1 Select pages as described above

2 Choose Change Folder

3 In the Change Folder dialog navigate to the appropriate folder

4 Click the OK button The file path will have been changed for the selected page entries

Delete a Page from Project Properties 1 Select the page you want to delete by clicking on its associated number (in the gray box at the

left of the entry)

2 Choose Delete Page

All Takeoff on the page will be deleted immediately and permanently

Section 8 Advanced Features

60

Advanced Features of Tool Options

Calculation Method On-Screen Takeoff has built-in calculation options to allow for faster work and faster saves until your takeoff is complete Calculation options are found by selecting Tools gt Options then clicking on the Calculation tab

Calculation method can be set to Automatic Automatic except Grids and Manual Manual will allow the program to operate more quickly while Automatic or Automatic except Grids allows the user to see quantity changes as takeoffs are made

In any mode you may press F9 to recalculate quantities for the On-Screen Takeoff current totals

Configuration Tab

When the ldquoPage Label (A01)rdquo radial button is chosen On-Screen Takeoff puts the numbered label on all the pages of in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar If the Page Descriptionrdquo radial button is chosen then a description of what takeoff is on that specific page will be shown in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar

This section of the configuration tab gives you options on how you want to export your information When the ldquoFolderSubfolder Namesrdquo radial button is chosen than on your file that you are exporting to will have all the conditions folders and subfolders In the Delimiter box you can choose the symbol that is needed to separate the information you are exporting Some files need semicolons () or colons () to make sure the information comes exported in is separated it the appropriate places

Section 8 Advanced Features

61

In previous versions of On-Screen Takeoff there are views that users need to have in order for them to display their information By either choosing ldquoOST 1xrdquo or ldquoOST 2xrdquo it will let the program know you want your columns of information exported in that specific format

When you have the Confirm Deletions radial button of ldquoYesrdquo chosen than every time you delete anything you will get a dialog box confirming your intentions of deletion

While working with your takeoff you have a choice to either view the legend of your conditions or hide it Choose whichever radial button that suits your needs

For those who prefer to use the Enter key to navigate in dialog boxes this option is just for that

Font Tab The Font tab is designed for you to make your own look and feel for the application At the bottom of this tab it will show you sample of the fonts and colors you have chosen

Renaming the Current Page You may change the name of the current page in the takeoff area of On-Screen Takeoff by selecting Edit gt Rename Page

This opens the Name Page dialog and you may simply type in a new name and click the Enter button The new name for the file will be reflected on the title bar for the page and in Project Properties

You also may access the Rename Page function by right-clicking in the takeoff area while in Image View and selecting the option from the pop-up menu that appears

Section 9

62

Saving and Exiting

This section will

Explain how to save projects

Show you how to safely exit the program

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

63

Saving Your Project

1 Select File gt Save 2 If your project has not previously been saved a Save dialog box will open to allow you to name

the file and choose the directory and folder in which to save your file 3 Once saved File gt Save will simply save the current version of the file

OR

4 Select File gt Save As then type in a new name for the file and save to the desired file path

The Auto-save Feature With the Auto-save feature On-Screen Takeoff automatically backs up your open project You may choose to have more than one level of backup files The first backup copy will have the extension b00 and successive files will be b01 b02 and so on If you have designated four levels of backup files after the fourth backup copy has been created (b03) the next file will be saved over the file with extension b00 Further backup saves will then rotate through the four backup files in the same way

1 Select Tools gt Options 2 In the Auto-save area (under the General tab) select the frequency of backup file creation (in

minutes) and the number of levels for the feature 3 You also may disengage the feature by clicking in the check box to clear it

The Auto-save feature automatically saves backup copies to the directory of the current project If you are working from a write-protected area such as a CD-ROM On-Screen Takeoff will place backup files in the On-Screen Takeoff folder

Exiting When you are finished using On-Screen Takeoff it is very easy to exit Exiting is very important because of security reasons If someone were to use your computer they could enter the application and view and manipulate information

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

64

On-Screen Takeoff closes the open project when you open another or create a new project or when you exit the program

1 Select File gt Exit

OR

2 You also may click at the upper right-hand corner of the application to exit

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

65

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer When you get your digitizer from GTCO you will need to connect it to your computer Follow the instructions outlined below to do this

Note For rollup digitizers the metal bar must be oriented to the top or right hand side

Connecting the Digitizer 1 Lay the digitizer out flat 2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer 3 Plug in the power adapter 4 Plug the interface (IO) cable into the digitizer 5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into an open serial port on computer

Note GTCO Technical support phone number is 410-381-6688 The electronic manual (on diskette) from GTCO contains more detailed installation and operation instructions for the GTCO digitizer model you have

Installing other Digitizer Drivers If you are using a GTCO Digitizer you will need to install the GTCO TabletWorks Drivers

If you are using a Digitizer not supported by GTCO Tablet Works 10 please contact the manufacturer of your digitizer for assistance with installation

Installing GTCO TabletWorks Drivers 1 Insert the On Center CD into the CD-ROM drive The CD Startup screen will open 2 Click on Install Software 3 Select Additional Software and Drivers 4 Select Digitizer Driver 5 Follow the instructions for installing TabletWorks 10

Adhering the Template The template is a small plastic sticker used to enable mouse function when using the digitizer with On-Screen Takeoff Place your template on your digitizer We suggest placing it in the bottom right corner of the digitizer about one inch inside the takeoff area

Note You may either peel off the back of the template and use the adhesive surface or you can tape the template down

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

66

Testing the Digitizer Drivers Before running OST you may test the digitizer by moving the stylus around on the digitizer pad it should move the mouse cursor (if mouse emulation is enabled)

If the digitizer does not move the mouse cursor on the screen

The superset codes may need to be reset Reset the superset codes by touching on the border of the digitizer with the stylus The digitizer should beep several times

The digitizer may not be communicating with the computer Be sure the COM port selected is correct Be sure the COM port selected is correct If you are not able to get the digitizer to move the mouse cursor you need to call GTCO technical support for help

Note The Mouse Emulation is not required for On-Screen Takeoff to work properly It is used only for the Template functionality if the digitizer is moving the cursor the wrong direction (up instead of sideways or vice-versa)

Click the L-shaped arrow symbol on the digitizer with the stylus

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

67

Appendix II Toolbar Items Main Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

68

Tool Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

69

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

70

Navigate Toolbar (Continued)

Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

71

Takeoff Toolbar (Continued)

Image Toolbar

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

72

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

This section will detail how to load plans from a F W Dodge CD-ROM into an On-Screen Takeoff project file ready for takeoffs

Dodge files may be added to the Project Properties dialog However loading the files in that way will load the files by number rather than name description If you want to load one page only from your Dodge CD You will have to rename the page to display the name rather than number of the file

To load plan files from a Dodge CD so that the files load sequentially by file number but are displayed by name rather than by number within your project follow the instructions below

Opening a Dodge project from a CD-ROM 1 Insert the CD into the drive 2 Choose File gt Custom 3 Choose Dodge Plans Project (plansdat) as the file type 4 Select the appropriate file type by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the Files of type

field 5 In the Look in field access your drive paths by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the

field then

Navigate to your CD-ROM drive Open the data folder and Open the Projects folder

6 Select the desired project and open its folder 7 Open the plansdat file 8 All the images will come in sequenced correctly for that job along with the full descriptions

(names) of each page If there is not a plans folder in the project folder then plans do not exist for that project on the CD Opening the plansdat file will yield an empty project

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

73

Appendix IV Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer The On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer is a limited version of On Center Softwarersquos commercial takeoff software If your status bar located at the very bottom of the main window says View Mode in the lower left-hand corner then you are using the Plan Viewer You can use the plan viewer to

View CD-based amp converted CAD drawings

View a previously created OST file and associated drawings

Download electronic plans online

Navigate through drawings

Quickly Takeoff linearsareas and counts

Zoom in to view the plan better

Print drawings directly from the viewer

Viewing an On-Screen Takeoff Project File

1 To open an OST file that was previously created with of On-Screen Takeoff 2 Select File gt Open 3 An Open dialog will appear if you do not see the OST file you are looking for select the

Look In drop down arrow 4 A drop down menu will appear listing the various folders drives and mapped drives located

on your computer select the correct drive or folder location and continue to browse to the location of your OST file

5 When you see your OST file double-click it to open it 6 Any takeoff and drawings should appear on the Image tab view

If you do not see the drawings but do see the colored takeoff layer the drawings may

not be located in the same place they were originally saved at Go to File gt Project Properties and check the Image File path for each listed page If the image file path is pointing to a CD drive make sure the CD is inside the CR-ROM

Downloading Electronic Plans If your Online Plan Service provides a special file format (OSX) required to use this feature of our plan viewer you can immediately downloaded all electronic plans of a project directly from our viewer

Most Plan Room web sites will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff when a request to download plans is made Your particular Plan Room may differ in operation so please contact the provider directly with questions on using the site

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

74

When you request to download or open a project file from a Plan Room you will usually have the open to open or save an OSX file Choosing open will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff Alternately you may choose to save the file to a local hard drive After you have saved the file either double-click it to launch On-Screen Takeoff or open the OSX file using On-Screen Takeoff by clicking File then Open and locating the file on your hard drive You will need to change the file type to OSX

After the OSX file is opened you will see an additional tab appear in the Conditions List window called Pages

The Pages tab shows the hierarchy of your project Gray file icons represent pages that have not been downloaded and blue icons represents pages that have been downloaded

To download a page simply double-click the page icon

If you wish to select a group of pages to download you can use the Ctrl or Shift key to multiple select them then click the Download button

If you wish to download all pages at once click the Download All button

Downloaded pages will now appear in the Project Properties dialog in the same order in which they appear in the Pages tab

Creating Quick Takeoffs With On-Screen Takeoff you can create quick takeoffs to measure quantities even if you dont have the full version of our program However using the Quick Takeoff functionality shows you just a fraction of what the full version can do

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar is located at the top of the image view It has three buttons designated for three types of takeoffs Linear Area and Count The Quantity drop down list will show secondary quantities for Linears and Areas The Units drop down allows you to select how you want your quantities displayed Feet Inches Yards Millimeters and Meters

NOTE Every time change the type of takeoff you are performing (switching from Area to Linear for example) the previous quantities and takeoff objects will disappear They will also disappear when you changes pages

NOTE You can use the Dimension Tool to basically measure the distance between two points or linears The distance will display on the status bar at the bottom of the application

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

75

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions General

Where is On-Screen Takeoff installed on my computer

Typically it is installed in CProgram FilesOn-Screen Takeoff

In Explorer how do I recognize On-Screen Takeoff file types

On-Screen Takeoff data is stored in a single file per job lsquojob name OSTrsquo On-Screen Takeoff templates are stored as lsquotemplate nameTPOrsquo

Can only one project at a time be open

Yes For that reason opening another project automatically closes the project on screen You will be asked to save any changes

Is only one scale allowed per page What about on drawings that have multiple detail sections on a page and each of those drawings have different scales

Yes For pages with drawings of different scales copy the drawing to another project page and set the appropriate scale

I cannot perform backout on an area that is along a linear

As a workaround use the On-Screen Takeoff layers feature to help you with this issue Electronic Images

How do I start a project from drawings that have been scanned and written to a CD-ROM

Open a new project Select File gt Project Properties and select Auto Add Navigate to your CD and the appropriate folder and select any image file in that location Click Open All files in the location will load into your project Recommended that images are copied from CD to hard drive for performance

If I get a disk of drawings in AutoCAD format (R13 or R14) can I read them in On-Screen Takeoff

Yes On-Screen Takeoff now reads DWG DXF and many other format that are saved with AutoCAD

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

76

When I click on the all pages button what is supposed to happen Currently nothing seems to change when I click on that button

The All Pages button is used to apply the Darken and Enhance Plans feature to all pages in the project (as opposed to only the current page on screen)

Is there a way to deduct a large skylight from an area condition

Yes with the related area condition selected in the Takeoff Dock bar unselect the Backout button on the Takeoff Toolbar then draw the Backout area The area quantity will be deducted from the related condition object and the linear measurement of the Backout perimeter will be added

Digitizer Issues

How do I connect a Digitizer to the computer

See Appendix I Connecting a Digitizer

The Place Template menu choice is disabled

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or the digitizer or the digitzer drivers are not installed

It wonrsquot let me select the Set Takeoff Area menu choice

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or no job is open a digitizer is not installed or the drivers are not installed

The digitizer stylus is not moving the cursor or crosshairs

Click S-0-1 superset on the digitizer

How do I convert my old GTCO Digitizer to work with On- Screen Takeofftrade

Call GTCO and they may be able to reconfigure your digitizer to be compatible with On-Screen Takeoff

Printing Issues Which Printers work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible printers include On-Screen Takeoff Hewlett Packard Epson and Canon printers If you are having printer difficulties please contact support and specify the type of printer along with other pertinent information Contact support at wwwoncentercomsupport or email supportoncentercom

Which Plotters work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible Plotters include Hewlett Packard DesignJet plotters and the EnCAD Cadjet II If you are having plotter difficulties please contact support and specify the type of plotter concerned

ViewingDisplay I can no longer see my condition list How do I get it back

The toolbars and Dock bars can be turned on and off through the View gt Toolbars menu options

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

77

This is also accessible by right-clicking in the toolbar area and selecting (or deselecting) a toolbar listed

I cannot view my folders in the condition list

Right-click in the Takeoff Dock barcondition list area and select Show Tree to display your folders

My Status Bar reads Viewer Mode and I am unable to draw conditions

On-Screen Takeoff needs to be Authorized Or you need to purchase an upgrade Click the Perform Advanced Takeoff button on the main toolbar

I hid a Dock bar and when I selected to view it again it appeared alongside the other Dock

bar instead of stacked on top of it How do I fix it

Pick up the Dock bar by clicking on the bar at the top and continuing to hold down the mouse button drag the Dock bar over the other one It will resize and appear stacked with the other

When I open image files from a CD the images are all upside down How do I get them right

side up

To flip pages from top to bottom follow the steps below 1 Click the All Pages button on the Image Toolbar (All Pages is engaged when the button

is not clicked) 2 Click the Flip Horizontal button on the Image Toolbar 3 Click the All Pages button again to disengage

Templates How do I create a Template

Follow the steps below 1 Create a typical project 2 Choose File gt Save As 3 Choose On-Screen Takeoff Template Files as the file type to save 4 Name the file This will save all of the condition setups as well as the layers for the

project

How do I create a new project from a template

Follow the steps below 1 Choose File gt New 2 Select a template from those listed in the New dialog This will open a new project with

conditions and layers saved from a previous project but no pages or takeoff

78

INDEX

Area Conditions 32

Area Objects 57

Auto Scrolling 20

Auto-save 63

Backout Mode 41

Calculation Method 60

Conditions 29

Configuration 60

Contents Tab 6

Continuous Mode 38

Count Conditions 33

Count Objects 57

Digitizer 10 65 76

Docking Toolbars 13

Dodge CD 72

Drawing 27 37

DropRun Count 55

Environment 18

Exiting 63

Exporting 49

Features 16

Font 61

Frequently Asked Questions 75

Grid 40

Help File 5

Hiding Toolbars 13

Hot Links 21

Image 19 59

Image files 9

Image Toolbar 12 71

Images 75

Index Tab 6

Layers 43

Linear Conditions 31

Linear Objects 56

Main Toolbar 12 67

Menus 14

Moving Toolbars 13

Navigate Toolbar 12 69

Navigating 20

On-Screen Takeofftrade 2

Page 59 61

Pages 20 25 28

Plan Viewer 73

Plans 26

Printing 47 76

Project Properties 25

Projects 22

Quick Start Video 18

Resizing Toolbars 13

Roping 54

Saving 63

Scale 28

Search Tab 7

Selecting Objects 42

Setup 8

Start On-Screen Takeofftrade 17

System Requirements 9

Takeoff 19 27

Takeoff Toolbar 70 71

Takeoff Toolbar 12

Template Files 23

TIF (Group4) 9

Tool Toolbar 12 68

Toolbar 67

Toolbars 12

View Toolbar 12 69

Viewing Toolbars 12

Worksheet 20

Zone Conditions 33

Zoom Toolbar 12 69

  • On-Screen Takeoff Lite
  • Table of Contents
  • Section 1 - Introduction
  • Section 2 - Setup
  • Section 3 - Toolbars and Menus
  • Section 4 - Features
  • Section 5 - Projects
  • Section 6 - Conditions and Takeoff
  • Section 7 - Printing and Exporting
  • Section 8 - Advanced Features
  • Section 9 - Saving and Exiting
  • Appendix I - Installing Your Digitizer
  • Appendix II - Toolbar Items
  • Appendix III - Loading Plans from a Dodge CD
  • Appendix IV - Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer
  • Appendix V - Frequently Asked Questions
  • Index

Section 1

1

Introduction

This section will

Help you become familiar with On-Screen Takeoff and the User Guide

Give Full Mode users information on how the product works with a digitizer

Section 1 Introduction

2

Welcome to On-Screen Takeoff This extraordinary software gives you bidding advantage in less time with greater accuracy by allowing you to perform complex takeoffs right on your computer screen

On-Screen Takeoff can be used with a digitizer and paper plans or a mouse and electronic plan files On-Screen Takeoff enables the user to create live drawings with resizable conditions linear conditions such as walls pipes and electrical lines area conditions such as floors and ceilings count conditions such as sprinkler heads corner beads doors and windows and zone conditions that assess quantities for any part of an area you specify As you record conditions using your plans the program provides reports on quantities and can recalculate instantly for any adjustment to the conditions of your project

New and experienced users will enjoy the power of this estimating system that is very easy to use As with all products from On Center Software this program works well for most construction trades and is ready to use the day you receive it So start bidding jobs more quickly and accurately today with On-Screen Takeoff This program is equipped with three modes View Mode allows the user to perform quick takeoffs view previously created files and drawing zoom to view plans better and print drawings (see Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer for more details) Lite Mode adds the use of zones Full Mode allows the user to perform more advanced takeoff options including layers and working with a digitizer The mode is referenced in the lower left corner of the program screen

If you currently have View or Lite Mode and are interested in performing more advanced takeoffs a

purchase request button has been provided on the main toolbar Clicking will take you to a webpage purchase form You can also call an On-Center Software Account Representative 1-800-880-8254 or visit us on the web at wwwoncentercom for more details

Section 1 Introduction

3

About this Guide This guide is intended to be a compliment to On-Screen Takeoff software The sections are presented in an order intended to help new users understand the software The User Guide provides detailed information about On-Screen Takeoff tools and commands It is designed to assist you in applying program features to your estimating projects Use it as a reference tool along with the online help system in your day to day work with On-Screen Takeoff

Table of Contents outlines the sections and topics covered in each section

Section 1 Introduction explains the user guide and helpful resources

Section 2 Setup lists system requirements and recommended components

Section 3 Toolbars and Menus explains the toolbars and menus used in On-Screen Takeoff

Section 4 Features gives you a tour of the On-Screen Takeoff environment and shows you how to navigate through your projects

Section 5 Projects leads you through your first time with the program or if yoursquore an old hand at On-Screen Takeoff reacquainting yourself with the software

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff shows you features of working with condition objects zones and backouts in the takeoff area

Section 7 Printing and Exporting explains the step-by-step of printing images and reports copying and pasting data from On-Screen Takeoff and exporting quantity results to an Excel spreadsheet

Section 8 Advanced Features discusses special and advanced features of On-Screen Takeoff conditions and options

Section 9 Saving and Exiting explains how to save projects and safely exit the program Appendixes gives you additional information on installing a digitizer toolbar item details loading files using the plan viewer and frequently asked questions Index provides key words or phrases the program application and references the page(s) in the user guide where they can be found

Section 1 Introduction

4

Extras Along the way yoursquoll encounter bits of information that make the User Guide not only more readable but more personal and relevant The signs and signals placed throughout the guide will better help you understand On-Screen Takeoff and On Center Software We think yoursquoll find these bits and pieces interesting Herersquos what to look for

NOTE

To make special notice of specific information

Caution Warning This symbol is there to insure that you are following the information to minimize risk

This symbol represents information that also appears on the Quick Start Video

In this manual some information is specific to using a digitizer The icon appears alongside this information (Must be in Full Mode to use a digitizer)

A reminder is there to keep the information in mind for future consideration

For Your Informationhellip

Instruction Jargon

In this guide click or double-click refers to clicking on the left mouse button A right-click clicking on the right mouse button will be specifically stated

Click the digitizer refers to clicking down once with the stylus pen

NOTE When using a digitizer a click or double-click refers to pressing the ball tip of the stylus pen right on the digitizer (usually in the takeoff area) A right-click can be accomplished by using the digitizer mouse template and the first button on the stylus pen See Appendix I Installing You Digitizer for more information

Drag and drop is holding down the left mouse button after clicking on an object You may simply drag the object to the desired location and release the mouse button

Section 1 Introduction

5

Typographic Conventions

The following are typographical conventions to be aware of when reading this guide

Menu items you are instructed to choose appear in a different typeface with the greater than (gt) symbol separating each menu level For example if you are instructed to select the Open command in the File menu it appears as File gt Open If you are instructed to select the Save As command from the File menu it appears as File gt Save As

Helpful hints or information about the topic are provided throughout the document They will be labeled lsquoNOTErsquo (all caps and bold font to catch your attention)

Several topics will have more detailed steps outlined in either another section of the user guide or in the Appendix They will always be referenced and italicized For example ldquoSee Editing Conditions for more informationrdquo

Help File In combination with this User Guide and the Quick Start video (Help gt Watch Quick Start Video) the Help File will also be a great resource for product information and application There are additional resources available on the website at wwwoncentercom or Help gt Visit our Website Follow these instructions to open the Help file

1 Select Help gt Help Topics

2 This will open the On-Screen Help File

Hide and Show Buttons

The Hide and Show buttons will either remove or display the Topics panel in the Help dialog

Back Button

The Back button takes you back to the last help page you viewed It will be available only if you have navigated through multiple pages in the help file

Print Button

Clicking will print the topic displayed This is helpful if the instructions to follow are long and you prefer to work on a full screen

Options Button

The Options button will allow you to pick from a list of commands to help you navigate the Help file

Section 1 Introduction

6

Contents Tab This tab provides a quick breakout of the Contents of the help file It should be used like the Table of Contents of a book Simply double-click on the book icon to open the chapter Then click the desired page icon to display the relevant information

Index Tab This tab allows you to locate a specifically indexed topic This should be used as you would a book index Begin typing a word in the index entry field and the system will automatically move within the list to the entries closest in spelling to your word(s) Begin typing the topic word to access it in the list quickly

Section 1 Introduction

7

Search Tab This tab works like a word find It allows you to search for any word contained in the Help file Type the

word you are looking for in the lsquoType in the keyword to findrsquo field Click A list of topics containing that word will appear Scroll through the list and double click on the topic you want displayed

Section 2

8

Setup

This section will

Let you know what system requirements you will need to have in place

Recommend components that work well with the software

Help Full Mode users install a digitizer

Section 2 Setup

9

Minimum System Requirements To use On-Screen Takeoff your computer must meet the following minimum system requirements

An IBM PC or 100 compatible computer with a Pentium II or faster Intel processor

Memory Requirements 200 MB of available hard-disk space and256 MB RAM (128 MB preferred)

Windows 2000 SP4 and Windows XP SP2 256 color video card Super VGA display card Mouse 15-inch monitor

While these are the minimum system requirements Windows places heavy demands on your systems resources The more available memory in your computer the faster and more efficient On-Screen Takeoff will operate

Recommended Components

For the best performance we recommend the following components

Pentium III or faster processor

512 or more of RAM

12X speed CD-ROM or better

17-inch monitor or dual monitors Graphic adapter with 128 MB or more VRAM Sound card and speakers installed

NOTE In order to utilize the Training Videos you must have a sound card and speakers installed

Compatible File Formats The resolution in electronic plans does not need to be more that 200 DPI (Dots per Inch) The preferred file format is a black and white TIF (Group4) On-Screen Takeoff recognizes image files with the following extensions

File Extensions View Mode Lite Mode Full Mode TIF X X X PDF X X X OSE X X X JPG X X X CPC X X X CAL X DGN X DWG X DXF X OSP X PLN X PLT X

Section 2 Setup

10

NOTE Use the following image types for best results

Convert to TIF

The converted files will be stored in a folder with the name of the current On-Screen Takeoff project Since the conversion can be very time consuming you should only select this option if you really intend to convert vector files to TIF

1 Select File gt Project Properties

2 In the Pages Field add your image See Section 5 Establishing Project Setting Adding Pages

3 Click

4 Then select the page with the drawing you wish to convert

5 Click

Installing Your Digitizer The following instructions are a quick start to installing your digitizer For more specific information please reference Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer at the end of this guide

Connecting Your Digitizer

Upon receiving your digitizer (either a GTCO or another brand) you will need to connect it to your computer

1 Lay the digitizer out flat

2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer

3 Plug in the power supply

4 Plug the interface cable into the digitizer

5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into the computer

NOTE On-Screen Takeoff is compatible with any tablet that is WinTab compatible

Digitizer options are only available in Full Mode If you are in View or Lite Mode and would like

to use this feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade

Section 3

11

Toolbars and Menus

This section will

Introduce the program toolbars

Familiarize you with On-Screen Take Offtrade Menu options

Section 3 Toolbars and Menus

12

Toolbars On-Screen Takeoff is equipped with several helpful toolbars for application efficiency See Appendix II Toolbar Item` Details for a detailed description of each toolbar item Individually the toolbars may be displayed moved docked reshaped or hidden from view You can also create costume toolbars to fit your needs

Main Toolbar

Tool Toolbar

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Takeoff Toolbar

Image Toolbar Viewing Toolbars Toolbars are displayed on the screen and will be consistent on each tab or page (Some toolbars or toolbar items will be in an inactive state if they donrsquot have a supporting element in the application)

1 Select View gt Toolbars and select the appropriate toolbar name

OR

2 Right-click on a toolbar region of the screen

3 Check the toolbars you want to display

Section 3 Toolbars and Menus

13

Moving Toolbars The toolbars may be positioned anywhere on the screen you wish This feature is provided to allow the flexibility for positioning the toolbars so they are out of your way yet handy for use

1 Click on an edge of the toolbar holding down the mouse button drag it to its new position

2 Release the mouse button to set it in place

NOTE If the toolbar is dropped anywhere other than a screen edge it will become free floating This feature is especially handy when using multiple monitors

Docking Toolbars The toolbars can be docked to any of the screen edges

1 Click on the title bar of an undocked toolbar

2 Drag the toolbar to any location on the screen

Hiding Toolbars

1 Select View gt Toolbars and select the toolbar you wish to remove from the screen

2 Right-click on the toolbar or dock bar areas

3 A floating toolbar can be closed by clicking on the in the upper right corner of the toolbar

Resizing Toolbars Only undocked (floating) toolbars may be resized

1 Position the mouse pointer over an edge

2 Click and drag

3 The toolbar can be resized as desired

Customizing the Toolbars You may rearrange or delete buttons within a toolbarrsquos display or you may move buttons from one toolbar to another If you find that you use a few tools over and over you may want to group them within a single toolbar for convenience On-Screen Takeoff gives you the flexibility to customize your takeoff environment

1 Select Tools gt Customize The Customize dialog will open

2 With the dialog open click on a toolbar button and drag buttons from one toolbar to another or a new location within the same toolbar

3 To add a button without altering another toolbar click on the Commands tab of the Customize dialog and drag the appropriate symbol from the Buttons section to a toolbar

4 To remove a button drag it to within the takeoff area of the application

Section 3 Toolbars and Menus

14

Menus

Section 3 Toolbars and Menus

15

Digitizer Menu

Section 4

16

Features

This section will

Show you how open On-Screen Takeoff

Describe the On-Screen Takeoff environment

Teach you how to navigate pages

Section 4 Features

17

Start On-Screen Takeoff

1 On your desktop double-click your On-Screen Takeoff icon

2 The application will open

OR

3 Left-click on the Start button on your computerrsquos toolbar

4 Scroll up to Programs gt On Center Software

5 Highlight On-Screen Takeoff and click On-Screen Takeoff will open On-Screen Takeoff opens to an untitled blank project The Image view of the screen will be a blank page

Two blank dock bars the Pan dock bar and the Takeoff dock bar appear at the left side of the screen Along the bottom the Status bar displays user status or context-sensitive messages as well as paper size and current zoom percentage of the plan sheet on screen The menu bar and several task specific toolbars are located at the top of the screen

NOTE All toolbars and dock bars may be accessed to view or hide through View gt Toolbars on the menu bar

Section 4 Features

18

Quick Start Video When On-Screen Takeoff opens you will be given an option to watch the Quick Start video (recommended) or start the program without watching the video

The 20 minute video will demonstrate key program functionality and allow you to view application instruction for enhanced learning

If you would like to watch the video click If you prefer to get started without

the video click If you have already viewed the video click the lsquoDo not show this message againrsquo box to prevent this dialog from appearing each time you open the program

NOTE If you decide later that you would like to watch the Quick Start video go to Help gt Watch

Quick Start Videos

On-Screen Takeoff Environment The On-Screen Takeoff environment acts like your drafting table allowing you to work on several sheets of plans at once and to reference at a glance the entire drawing and your position on that drawing while giving you the power of a computer to track analyze print and export your takeoff quantities and plans

The screen is bordered at the top by the Menu bar with pull-down menus and at the bottom by the Status bar which indicates current user status plan page size and current zoom percentage of page The largest portion of the application screen will be your takeoff area bounded on the left (by default) by two dock bars and on the top by several toolbars

In the takeoff area you may view your project plans (images) andor takeoff objects the takeoff list with quantities the worksheet or a legend of your condition list

The main window of On-Screen Takeoff has three tabs located at the bottom left allowing for quick change between Image Takeoff or Worksheet views Select the desired view option on the toolbar and it will automatically open on your screen

Section 4 Features

19

Image View

This view shows the plan file andor takeoff conditions drawn from your plans

Takeoff View This view displays the height if applicable and quantity breakdowns of your conditions according to result types indicated (eg linear feet square feet or count of items) for zones pages and the project as a whole It also displays notes per condition

Section 4 Features

20

Worksheet View This view displays the condition and quantity in units of measure specified in the first results field of the Results tab in the Condition dialog and allows the user to enter amounts for material labor and subcontractor takeoffs

NOTE When in the Worksheet view tab out the field then save This is keep all the values saved

Navigating On-Screen Takeoff

Auto Scrolling When creating linear areas or zones On-Screen Takeoff will automatically scroll the image view when necessary It will move as your mouse or digitizer moves beyond the edge of the current view

Changing Pages

1 Select View gt Next Page Previous Page or Go To Page (specify page number for the Go to Page option)

2 You may also select the corresponding arrows for these options from the Navigate Toolbar The

drop down arrow in the Page field will list the pages The and arrows will take you to the

previous or next page The and arrows will take you to the first or last page

OR

Section 4 Features

21

3 Or press Ctrl G for the Go To Page dialog

Hot Links Hot links allow you to move quickly from one drawing to the pertinent area of another drawing A hot link is handy when viewing enlarged areas of a page and needing the ability to jump back to a reference page

1 Select Tools gt Hot Link

OR

2 Click from the Tools Toolbar

3 Click on the page where you want to set the link The Hot Link dialog will open

4 Using the current page display on the Navigate Toolbar access the pull-down menu of pages by

clicking on the arrow at the right

5 Select the page for your link (You may also choose View gt Go to Page and select by page number)

6 Manipulate the view using the zoom tool and the scroll bars

7 Click

8 After joining a hot link to another page the hot link arrows in the Navigation Toolbar will become active

9 Move a hot link to another location on the page by clicking then click and drag the hot link image anywhere on the page

Section 5

22

Projects

This section will

Help you create settings important to your projects

Explain how On-Screen Takeoff works with your electronic or paper plans

Section 5 Projects

23

Project Template Files You can begin your project with a template Templates allow you to take advantage of conditions and settings used with previous projects

On-Screen Takeoff templates contain condition lists and established layer separations from previous projects you have created You may also use the sample templates provided with On-Screen Takeoff as a great starting point All aspects of the templates may be adjusted for a new project

1 Select File gt New and click the OK button

2 From the New dialog box choose the template that best fits your project

3 The conditions for this template will appear in the Takeoff Dock bar and the Project Properties dialog will open asking for further information

4 Use File gt Save or File gt Save As to rename and save your new project

Saving a Project as a Template File You can save your condition properties and layers as a template for future projects

1 Select File gt Save As

2 Enter a name for your template and select On-Screen Takeoff Template Files (tpo) from the Save As type field of the dialog (click on the down arrow to select)

3 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog Modifying a Template File Follow these steps to modify an existing template file if you need to change or add conditions andor layers

1 Select File gt Open

2 Navigate to your Projects directory

3 In the File Type drop-down select On-Screen Takeoff Template files (tpo)

4 Choose the On-Screen Takeoff template file you would like to modify and click the OK button

5 Make appropriate changes

6 Save and close file

The On-Screen Takeoff template files cannot save takeoff information

Section 5 Projects

24

Opening an Existing Project File 1 Select File gt Open

2 Navigate to the desired file location

3 Click the Open button

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask

you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Creating a New Project

1 Select File gt New

2 For a blank untitled project click

3 At this point the Project Properties dialog will pop-up for more information about your takeoff

NOTE The following are important to keep in mind when beginning a new project

At the start of your project fill out the Project Properties settings to establish the name for all printed output from your project set the default page size and scale for your plans number and names of different pages within the project and locations of electronic drawings

Scale settings can significantly affect quantity outcomes Be sure to set the scale for each page of drawings before beginning condition takeoffs

When using a digitizer remember to make a mark with a pen or pencil in the upper left and lower right corners of the first sheet of the paper plans to delineate the takeoff area for that sheet You can then set the takeoff area on On-Screen Takeoff using your marks

Save your project before you begin taking off any conditions On-Screen Takeoff will write a back-up file using the same file name

Remember the Undo feature If you make a mistake select Edit gt Undo and reverse the process step by step

Section 5 Projects

25

Project Properties

You can either set your Project Properties when you create a new takeoff or once your project file is saved under the appropriate name

1 Select File gt Project Properties the Project Properties dialog box will appear

2 Type in the name of your project to appear on printouts Use the backspace andor delete keys to edit the name as necessary

3 Press the Tab key to move to the Default Image Size option or click within the Image Size box You may click on the arrow at the right for the pull-down menu of page size options or you can use the down-arrow key on your keyboard to scroll through the list to the appropriate selection

4 Press the Tab key to move to the Default Scale option Select a scale by using the drop down arrow If your scale is metric you will need to click in the box next to Metric to convert to that measurement

5 Establish the number of pages for your project plans And load image files See Adding Pages to

Your Project

Adding Pages to Projects Individual Electronic Plans

1 Click on in the Project Properties dialog

2 In the Add Images dialog use the drop down arrow to navigate to the appropriate directory and folder containing your image

3 Select the file so that it displays in the File name field then click The file will display by name and path in the Image File field in Project Properties dialog

4 Click to accept and your project will automatically open

5 Save your project with the new settings by selecting File gt Save

Section 5 Projects

26

Electronic plans scanned from blueprints (as opposed to blue lines) will display as white lines on a black background and are difficult to read on your computer screen Select Image gt Invert and the colors will invert to black on white

You may have noticed the Page column in the Project Properties dialog Generally plan images occupy one page and 1 will be listed in the column indicating Page 1 of your plan file If you import a multi-page TIF a plan file containing more than one page of plans they will import as separate pages and each successive page will be indicated under the Page column as 1 2 3 etc of the plan file

Group of Electronic Plans You may add all the electronic plan files from a particular source (for example from a CD) by using the Auto Add feature

1 Click the button in the Project Properties dialog

2 Browse until you find the appropriate directory and folder containing your plan images

3 Click on any file displayed within your target folder so that the file name appears in the File name box of the Auto Add dialog

4 Click The image paths and file names will be recorded into the project properties arranged alphabetically

5 Click to accept your choices and your project will automatically open

6 Save your project with the new settings by selecting File gt Save

To load Dodge Plans into your Project Properties see Appendix IIi Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

Paper Plans On-Screen Takeoff makes it easy for Full Mode users to perform quantity takeoffs from paper plans using a digitizer

1 Add pages by clicking until you have the number of pages initially in the project

2 Name each page by clicking within the Title area and typing the name

3 Click to accept your choices and close the Project Properties dialog

4 Save your project with the new project properties settings by selecting File gt Save

Section 5 Projects

27

Setting Up a Drawing Template On-Screen Takeoff provides the convenience of using the same work surface for both digitizer and mouse to allow the user to draw conditions and then edit settings of the project or add or change conditions without breaking stride A mouse pad template included with the program defines the area of the digitizer in which use of the stylus or cursor will be recognized as mouse movement as opposed to drawing movement

1 Place your stylus on On-Screen Takeoff

2 Placing the template identifies the location mouse movements will be recognized by the program

Before placing the template the template must be applied to the digitizer surface This may have been done during the installation of your digitizer We suggest attaching the template to the lower right corner of the digitizer surface about one inch inside the grid area

3 Select Digitizer gt Place Template

4 Follow the instruction prompts on the screen clicking first on the target symbol at the left of the On-Screen Takeoff box on the template then on the target at the right

Setting Takeoff Area Before you can begin taking off a drawing you must define the drawing area on the digitizer This requires defining an area that will include all objects on each drawing of your plans As you add pages to your takeoff the same area of the digitizer will be active

1 Secure the plans to the digitizer with tape or a set of clamps

2 With a pen or a pencil mark the upper left corner and the lower right corner of the first page in your set of plans

3 Select Digitizer gt Set Takeoff Area

4 Click each mark with the stylus pen as prompted

5 Verify the active area of the digitizer by looking at the image size located in the lower right corner of your screen

If you close the program before the takeoff is complete you will need to reestablish the takeoff area before you can add additional condition quantities

Electronic plans appear on your computer screen eliminating the need to set a takeoff area You simply drag your mouse across the conditions you wish to takeoff The conditions will be highlighted and quantities will be totaled instantly Electronic plans are available through a variety of services For information contact an On Center Software account manager

Section 5 Projects

28

Setting Scale for Specific Pages You may set the scale in each page view separately This will override the default scale setting in Project Properties for that page Setting the correct scale for the drawing before taking off quantities ensures accurate calculations Be careful to check the scale for each drawing in your project before doing takeoffs

1 Display the page you want to set select Edit gt Set Scale

2 Use the drop down arrow to select a scale that will be applied to that page

3 Click

OR

4 Access the pull-down scale settings on the Navigate toolbar

NOTE As you draw objects notice that the drawn object is similar in width to the object on your plans If it is not the scale set may not be correct

Calculating Scale You may calculate scale according to a known measurement between two points either with a digitizer or on electronic plans

1 Select Edit gt Calculate Scale using Image or Edit gt Calculate Scale using Digitizer

2 Follow the instructions in the related Calculate Scale dialog box You will be asked to click on the first and second points then to enter the dimension for that distance

3 The scale will be recalculated for the displayed page and the Scale display on the Navigate toolbar will show the new scale

Section 6

29

Conditions and Takeoff

This section will Draw Conditions to Takeoff Plan Quantities

What Zones will do to help your takeoff process

Discuss the ins and outs of Takeoffs

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

30

Creating Conditions

If you are starting a new project from scratch you will need to create conditions to takeoff quantities such as floor areas wall lengths and corner bead counts If you are using a template you will have several pre-designed conditions already listed on the Takeoff dock bar However you may want to change the characteristics of some conditions or create additional conditions for a particular project

1 Right Click within the Takeoff dock bar Select New gt Condition

Or

2 From the Takeoff dock bar Click (if the buttons are not showing right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select Show Buttons from the pop-up menu) The New Condition dialog appears

3 Select the condition type (Linear Area Count or Zone) from the pull-down menu accessed by the

down arrow next to the Type option

4 Press Tab or use the mouse (or stylus) to move to Name and enter a name for your condition

5 Specify the desired condition attributes See Condition Attributes for more detail

6 Click for condition to apply

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

31

Condition Attributes Each condition type will have related attributes to select or specify within the General and Advanced tabs of the New Condition dialog Once a condition has been used to takeoff a quantity from your plans certain attributes cannot be changed

All conditions allow the user to specify color and fill pattern for the object drawn

Linear Conditions

General Specify width and height by feet and inches Specify pitch in inches up to the nearest thousandth of an inch if applicable

Advanced Specify rounding for object quantities and droprun default length for electrical or plumbing drops at the ends of lines Select Connect to have lines connect at the corners where one line of the condition ends and another begins (and indicate Tolerance for the featurersquos activation as distance between the ends of two lines) Choose Trim to have lines automatically trim to a line being crossed Choose Curve to draw a curved line

Follow these examples for inputting feet and inches For 7 feet 6 inches type 706 for 13 feet 7 inches type 1307 For 20 feet type 2000

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

32

Area Conditions

General If needed you can specify the thickness (in inches) andor pitch (in inches)

Advanced Specify rounding for object quantities Choose to display an adjustable grid within the area and indicate matrix cell dimensions

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

33

Count Conditions

General

Specify height and indicate the size (in inches) and shape (square circle triangle rectangle or opening) of the count object as it will appear on screen

Advanced Count conditions have advanced attributes These options are available for all shapes except for openings

Zone Conditions Zones allow you to subdivide condition quantities making it easier to modify and complete jobs in phases They can be used at the end of a takeoff to isolate a group of condition quantities that are in different areas of the takeoff

Zones can also be used to break a takeoff into multi-phases and can even be used to isolate quantities while a job is in progress to group the amount of work that has been completed to date They can be applied to one or multiple pages in your plans automatically calculating the takeoff quantities for each zoned area

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

34

The zone feature is only available in Lite and Full Mode If you are in View Mode and would like

to use this feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade

Condition Notes A Note tab is provided for comments regarding the condition These notes will display on the Takeoff List report and will import into Quick Bid

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

35

Condition Results The Results tab of the New Condition is based on condition type Initial settings default to linear feet (LF) for linear conditions square feet (SF) for area conditions and count of items (EA) for count conditions and zones The first of the results fields will display for the condition items in the Takeoff dock bar area All results will display in worksheets and Takeoff List reports as well as in an Excel spreadsheet after being exported

Copying Conditions You may use the condition attributes from a condition yoursquove already created for any future conditions of the same type

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Click the Copy button from the toolbar

OR

3 Right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select copy

4 A new condition will appear in the list with the same condition attributes as the previous condition but with the quantities zeroed

Editing Conditions Once you have copied a condition you might want to change several attributes You can also edit an existing condition to fit any updated needs

1 Highlight the desired condition on the Takeoff dock bar

2 Click the Change button

OR

3 Double-click on the condition you wish to edit to bring up the Change Condition dialog

NOTE The Change Condition dialog differs from the New Condition dialog only in that if takeoffs

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

36

have been performed in your project with this condition you will not be able to change the type of condition or certain properties under the advanced tab of the dialog box

Deleting Conditions 1 Click on the condition in the Takeoff Dock bar area

2 Click the Delete button on the toolbar

OR

3 Right-click and select Delete from the pop-up menu

All takeoff associated with the deleted condition will be deleted immediately and permanently

Organizing Project Conditions Within your project you can create folders andor sub-folders for different types of conditions You may even want to create a folder containing conditions with reset values

To get started organizing your conditions make sure you are viewing the condition tree (right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select Show Tree)

Creating Folders and Sub-Folders 1 Right-click in the Takeoff Dock bar area

2 Select New gt Folder from the pop-up menu

Copying Folders

1 Click on the folder and click Copy on the toolbar

2 All copied conditions within the new folder will have values reset to zero

Renaming Folders

1 Click on the folder

2 Right-click and select Rename from the pop-up menu

3 Enter a name for your folder and click the Enter button

Changing Condition Order

You may move conditions up or down in the condition list of the Takeoff dock bar to suit your project needs

1 Select the condition you would like to move by clicking to highlight it

NOTE When you are ready to move the highlighted conditions be sure that you start

moving using the last condition chosen That condition will have a highlighted boarder

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

37

2 Drag and drop any the condition from one place to another in the list You may also move a condition to another folder on the list in this way

Drawing with Conditions Snap Angles Set up snap angles to prevent lines from appearing jagged Snap angles are commonly set at 15deg and shift snap angles at 0deg

1 Go to Tools gt Options Options dialog appears

2 Under the General tab make the desired settings

3 Click to save the settings As they are drawn lines will snap to the set degree

Drawing a Linear Object 1 Select a condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff dock bar

2 Move the cursor into the Image takeoff area of the screen you will see the cursor display as crosshairs

3 Click and hold left mouse button then drag mouse to draw a line

4 Release mouse button to set line

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

38

5 Repeat steps for further lines

Continuous Mode This feature allows you to draw an object that has connected lines

1 Click the icon from the Takeoff toolbar

OR

2 Go to Tools gt Continuous Mode

3 Follow steps 1-3 from Draw a Linear Object

4 Click at each point of intersection The object will be connected

5 Double-click after making the final point to set the lines

Drawing a Curve To draw a curved line the Curve option must be checked under the Advanced tab of the Condition dialog

1 Click where you want to begin the curve and drag in a straight line to the position for the other endpoint of the curve

2 Click on the line to select it Handles in the shapes of small squares will appear at either end of

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

39

the line and in the center of the line

3 Move the cursor over the center handles until the cursor becomes a two-way arrow

4 Click and drag in the direction of the curve bending the line as you move the cursor Release to set the curve (The line you began with will disappear)

Draw a circle by drawing two curved lines connected

Drawing an Area Object Area conditions are drawn similarly to continuous mode lines You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete your area takeoff

NOTE When drawing an area do not intersect the perimeter or line of the object you are drawing

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

3 The area will be filled with the pattern set for that condition

NOTE The simulated circle will be good enough for you to be able to make a bid

To create a circular area click from point to point with very short distances in between points simulating a circlersquos perimeter Double-click after setting the last point to set the area

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

40

Grid Options Grids give you an added advantage when installing materials such as tiles Use this feature to get a count for how many tiles are needed for an area

1 Double-click on an area condition in the Takeoff dock bar to open its Condition dialog

2 Click on the Advanced tab to show its options

3 Check the box next to Grid by clicking in it

4 Indicate the dimensions of the cell matrix in inches (For example 200 x 400)

5 Under Results tab choose each (EA) for one of the results fields This will tabulate a number of grid cells (including partial grid cells) in area

6 Click to save your settings

7 Use the Move Grid and Rotate Grid features in the Tools menu to manipulate the grid as desired

Grid Calculation

1 Go to Tools gt Options menu

1 Specify if On-Screen Takeoff automatically should Calculate Grid Position

2 If AreaGrid Size is selected On-Screen Takeoff will calculate the number of items needed to fill the grid based on grid demintions

3 Click to accept and close the dialog

To move a line at any angle (regardless of default setting) press the Shift key while moving the mouse

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

41

Backout Mode This feature allows you to take out part of an area and deduct that amount of square footage

1 Select Tools gt Backout Mode

2 Outline the are you want backed out as you would when drawing a regular area object (see Drawing an Area Object)

3 The outlined area will clear and quantities will be recalculated

NOTE The perimeter of the backout area will be added to the LF quantity for that condition

Drawing a Count Object Square triangle rectangle and circle shaped count objects can easily be placed on images

1 Select the condition

2 Click in the location where you want the object to appear

3 To place an opening-shaped count item like a door or window you must click over an existing linear object such as a wall

4 On the Results tab you can change the height properties to give you the result you need

5 If Backout is checked on the advanced tab for each count opening the opening-shaped count item will back out a corresponding section of the linear object

Opening shaped count items are sized at 3rsquo0rdquo by default

Drawing a Zone Zones are drawn in the same way as area objects and may be any polygonal shape You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete the zone perimeter

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

42

Selecting Objects

1 Use the Select Tool to select objects

You can also select all objects that correspond to a condition

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Right-click and choose Select All

3 All objects with this condition will be highlighted with squares as an outline

Moving and Resizing Objects Linear

1 To move or resize a linear object click anywhere on the line to select it

2 To move the line position your pointer over the center handles When the mouse is positioned over the handles you will see a two-way arrow You will only be able to move the line in the direction of the arrows

3 Drag the line to a new position

4 Clicking and dragging the handles on the ends of the line will allow you to lengthen or shorten your line

Area and Zone

1 To move an area object or zone in its entirety click and drag it to its new position

2 Grabbing a handle at a corner or intersection of the object will allow you to adjust and change its perimeter

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

43

Count 1 To move a square circle rectangle or triangle shaped count object click and drag

2 Click and drag an opening shaped count object along the length of the linear object to the desired position then release

NOTE An opening shaped count object may not be moved from its associated linear condition object however it may be moved up and down the length of the linear object

Layers On-Screen Takeoff allows you to sort and separate your takeoff objects within the same job and on the same page On-Screen Takeoff gives you this flexibility through the use of layers

By assigning different conditions to different layers (for example differentiating between floors ceilings and walls) you can choose to view all layers or turn off certain layers to display and print the remaining groups of conditions only You may also remove the background image of electronic plans add text and hot link symbols or print only your condition takeoffs

Layers are only available in Full Mode If you are in View or Lite Mode and would like to use this

feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade Default Layers

On-Screen Takeoff begins every project with three default layers Image Annotation and Default The Image layer holds the electronic plan files you may have in your project The Annotation layer possesses all text notations highlighting and hot links in the project The Default layer will appear in the Condition dialog when creating or editing a condition (listed in the takeoff dock bar) Conditions are assigned to the Default layer unless otherwise specified by the user

Creating Layers To assign a condition to a layer other than the default layer you must first create additional layers for your project

1 Select View gt Layers to open the Layers dialog

2 Click An unnamed layer will be added

3 Click within the empty box and type a name for your layer (for example Wall)

4 New layers are added as active layers The adjacent box under the Show column will be checked

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

44

Assigning a Layer to a Condition 1 Open the Condition dialog box by creating a new condition or editing an existing condition

2 Under the General tab click on the down arrow in the Layer field to display optional layers

3 Select the desired layer for the condition Only the Default layer and layers you have added will be displayed

4 Click

View and Hide Layers

1 Select View gt Layers

2 Under the Show column check the box to view or remove the check (by clicking on it) to hide the specific layer

3 Click to accept and close the Layers dialog

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

45

Assigning Text to a Layer When adding text to an image On-Screen Takeoff has the capability to assign the text to a specified layer

1 Select the Text Tool

2 Click at the point you want to place your text

3 Type in your text using the Enter key for line breaks

4 Click the drop down arrow next to the Layer field and select the desired layer

Section 7

46

Printing and Exporting

This section will

Printing options and procedures

Exporting data by copying and pasting

Exporting quantity results to Excel spreadsheets

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

47

Print Setup On-Screen Takeoff allows the user to print the image takeoff list and worksheet

1 Select File gt Print Setup The Print Setup dialog will open

2 Select a printer or leave the default selection listed (change from the default printer displayed by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the field)

3 Indicate page size and printer tray option (Source) Access page size options by clicking on the

down arrow at the right of the field

4 Choose Portrait or Landscape orientation

5 Click to accept and close the dialog

Printing Images The image area can include the electronic plans the takeoff objects added text and hot links To print a subset of these (for example just the takeoffs without the plans or the added text and hot link symbols) hide layers that you do not want to print (see Section 6 View and Hide Layers) When you are printing your images every page will show the scale of the takeoff you are printing

1 Click on the Image tab to display the area of your project

2 Select File gt Print (or Ctrl + P)

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

48

3 Select the desired view (What to print) and the Image Range

4 Click The second Print dialog will open

5 Change settings accordingly or click if you accept the default settings

Printing Takeoff Lists and Worksheets In Takeoff Lists and Worksheets you may hide columns to print only certain results or adjust column widths to fit the report within the page size selected

1 In Takeoff List or Worksheet view move your cursor to the right side of the columnrsquos title bar the cursor will display as a two-way arrow

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

49

2 Click and drag to adjust the width of the column Holding the mouse button you may

slide the title bar under the title bar to its left to hide the column completely

3 Select File gt Print or press Ctrl + P to access the Print dialog

4 Indicate desired printer and choose the number of copies

5 Click to print and close the dialog

When printing the condition list we suggest printing in landscape

To reset to the default column widths double-click on the right border of a column heading will reset the column to its right (or previously to its right before being hidden)

Print Preview 1 Select File gt Print Preview

2 Use and to vary your view 3 If viewing an image choose current full or scale view to see how it displays

4 For printed outputs that cover more than one page use and to view adjacent pages or click on the down arrow next to Page field and select the page you want displayed

Exporting Using the CopyPaste Feature You may copy all the data or sections from the worksheet and the takeoff list view in On-Screen Takeoff and paste it into another application When pasting into Excel the cell layout will be maintained

1 Highlight the areas you wish to paste Click and hold the left mouse button down as you drag the cursor over the area to be selected then releasing the mouse button

OR

2 Select the entire takeoff list quickly click on the left On-Screen Takeoff column header and hold and drag the cursor across the remaining column headings

The number of pages for the view selected will display in the lower left-hand corner The zoom percentage that applies to the view will be displayed in the lower right-hand corner next to page size of the drawing

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

50

3 In the worksheet view you may highlight rows by clicking on the numbered buttons to the left of each row clicking and dragging across column headings or clicking and dragging over individual cells in the worksheet

Click anywhere in the appropriate view to deselect the area

4 Once your selection is highlighted you may select Edit gt Copy or Ctrl C from the keyboard 5 On your monitor switch to the application into which you want to paste your selection 6 Select Edit gt Paste in the new application or simply press Ctrl + V to paste

The colored keys for conditions cannot be pasted

Using the Export Feature You may export condition quantities to specified cell location within an Excel worksheet file Cell target locations are assigned in the Results tab of the condition dialogs on the Export line relating to each quantity measurement type

On-Screen Takeoff will export takeoff quantity results for up to three different quantity types that you specify For instance you may want to know the number of square feet in a ceiling area as well as the number of linear feet in its perimeter

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

51

1 Bring up the Condition dialog by double-clicking on a condition in the takeoff dock bar or by

selecting the condition and clicking

2 Click on the Results tab to access its fields The default quantities for the condition type will display

3 For each results field click on the arrow to access the pull-down menu and select the appropriate quantity (for example SF LF EA etchellip)

4 Have your Excel spreadsheet opened and saved in a file

5 Specify the Excel spreadsheet cell locations where you want the results to go

6 For a cell in the first sheet of your spreadsheet type in the cell address (eg a1) Case is not important

7 For a cell on a successive sheet of your spreadsheet type in sheet the number followed by a comma and the cell address without any spaces (eg sheet2a1) Case is not important

8 Click

9 Select File gt Export gt Condition Qty to Excel

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

52

10 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

11 Click to export On-Screen Takeoff results to specified cell locations in the Excel file When you return to the Excel application you will see the values have been added to the specified cell locations in your spreadsheet

12 Save your Excel file

Exporting Worksheet to Excel

1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 From On-Screen Takeoff Select File gt Export gt Worksheet to Excel

4 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

5 Click When you return to the Excel application you will see the values from the Worksheet Tab have been added to your spreadsheet

6 Save your Excel file

Exporting Takeoff to CVS 1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 Click the Takeoff Tab in the project you want to export the information

4 Select File gt Export gt Takeoff to CSV

5 Browse to the location of the CSV spreadsheet file click file to select it

6 Click the Save

NOTE CSV files can be opened in Excel Lotus Access etc One may consider this option more of a ldquodumprdquo into a file

The Excel application must be active (it may be minimized on the application bar) with the target spreadsheet open in the application Otherwise an error will occur with the export operation that will affect both the On-Screen Takeofftrade file and the Excel spreadsheet

Section 8

53

Advanced Features

This section will

Some special features of working with condition objects in the takeoff area

Details of advanced options for conditions

Advanced features of the Project Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

54

Features to Use with Objects Roping Feature You can move copy or delete using this feature Using the Select tool (the pointer) you may select several objects at once by clicking and dragging an outline around the objects then releasing the mouse button Roping may select either objects completely within the outlined area (inclusive) or objects both within and touched by the outlined area (touching) Specify your roping preference under Tools gt Options

1 Click and hold the mouse button at a point on the screen near the objects to be selected and drag to surround the objects with an outline

2 Release the mouse button The objects will be selected

3 You may now

Move the group around on the page by clicking within the group dragging the mouse and releasing the button to place the objects

Delete the group of objects by clicking the Delete key or

Copy and paste by pressing Ctrl C to copy the group then Ctrl V to paste it The pasted copy of the grouped objects will appear slightly offset from the original objects

Section 8 Advanced Features

55

Applying a DropRun Count

Use the droprun feature when calculating quantities to take into account the drop or run of a linear condition such as electrical lines or plumbing pipes Drop or run lengths may be added separately to any linear condition on screen while a default droprun length may be indicated for a condition as a whole

1 Select the desired linear condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff Dock bar

2 Click the Change button in the toolbar to open the Change Condition dialog

3 Click the Advanced tab to access the advanced options and click inside the DropRun check box

4 Enter a default length to be applied to all of this condition Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches) You can leave the length blank and manually enter drop run on each segment drawn

5 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog

Edit DropRun Count

1 With the related linear condition in the Takeoff Dock bar highlighted or with the pointer tool selected

2 click on the desired linear object in the image takeoff area The Count button will become active

3 Click on the Count button (alternatively select Tools gt Count) The default droprun amount will show in the pop-up Count dialog (Default length will be zero if droprun has not been selected in this conditionrsquos properties)

4 Type in the desired length Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches)

5 Click the OK button The additional amount will be reflected in the corresponding quantity The new DropRun count will apply only to the object edited

Adding Text in Image View

On-Screen Takeoff allows you to place text comments around your quantity takeoffs that may be printed along with plan images and objects Text is automatically placed within the Annotation Layer (that includes text and hot links)

1 To place text on the image select the Text Tool and click at the point you want to place your text opening a text box

2 Type in your information clicking Enter for line breaks

3 When you are finished click the OK button to exit the text box

4 To reposition text simply click on the text (with the Text Tool active) to select it

5 Move the cursor over the text the cursor will now display as a four-way arrow

6 Click and drag the mouse to position the text as desired

Section 8 Advanced Features

56

1 To edit existing text use the Text Tool to double-click on the text to open the editing box

2 Enter additional text or use the Backspace key to delete text as necessary

Formatting Text Once created you may format the font size type style and color of your text

1 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Font or click on the Font button in the Takeoff Toolbar

2 Select the desired features (color options are disabled) and click the OK button

3 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Color or click on the Color button in the Takeoff Toolbar The Color dialog will open

4 Click on a color in the Basic Color palette or create a color and add to the Custom Colors palette (Be sure to click on the color in the Custom Colors palette to select it)

5 Click the OK button

Object Properties

Linear Objects

Linear objects may be set to connect at corners

A linear object may be set to trim automatically when crossing another linear object (Check the trim option under the advanced tab of the Condition dialog)

When you move a connected linear object objects automatically move and resize connected lines accordingly (quantities are then recalculated)

This feature requires that the connected linear object be moved using the center handles (does not apply when resizing the line from the ends)

Objects constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

Objects are measured from centerline to centerline

Section 8 Advanced Features

57

Area Objects When drawing an area use your escape key to undo the last line drawn You may reverse your

drawing of an area using the escape key

The area will not fill with color and pattern until the user double-clicks after the last line is set

Lines drawn to delineate an area object constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

After selecting an area to move or adjust position the mouse in the center to move the entire area position the mouse at the sides or corners to adjust the perimeter

Count Objects

All count objects are quantified by the physical number of objects per page and reported as EA for the UOM The quantity for the current Image View is (displayed in the Condition List) and the total quantity in your project is displayed in the Takeoff View and Worksheet View)

Square circle rectangle and triangle shaped count objects do not displace or subtract from other object quantities when placed on top of them However on the Advanced Tab for the count condition a connect property can be set (this is a check box) so that when a count object of this shape is put on top of a Linear type takeoff object it will move with the linear if said linear is moved

An opened-shaped count object must be placed within a linear object Opening shaped count objects may also be measured by linear foot or linear yard (EA SF and SY are also options) Opening shaped count items default to a width of 3rsquo 0rdquo at the time of creation This size can be changed The small medium and large size are not options on this type of condition anymore Check Backout on the Advanced tab for each Count object back out the footage (or yardage) of opening-shaped count objects in which they are placed

NOTE In order to see this Backout functionality (in quantity) for SY or SF deductions at least one of the

results for the Linear(s) this object will be placed on must be set to SY or SF and the count object must have a height quantity

Advanced Features of Conditions The Round Feature Under the Advanced tab of the linear and area Condition dialogues you may specify quantity rounding (in inches) For linear objects rounding applies to each linear object drawn For area objects rounding will apply to each segment of the area perimeter adjusting the perimeter and area calculations For example With a linear condition entering 12 in the Round field will round up each related linear object to the nearest 12 inches or one foot With this setting two walls of 1 4 would each round to 2 0 totaling 4 0

NOTE In the Takeoff Dock bar condition list and in the On-Screen Takeoff reports quantities will be displayed in whole numbers rounded up to the nearest foot However calculations are based on true quantities without rounding unless the Round Feature is engaged

Pitch Pitch may apply either to linear or area conditions It is measured in rise per linear foot Entering 12 indicates a 12 rise per 12 of linear distance (a pitch of 12 over 12) or an angle of 45deg

Section 8 Advanced Features

58

Advanced Features of Project Properties Selecting Multiple Pages

1 Select a single page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry

2 Drag the cursor down the column of numbers to select consecutive pages

3 Click on the blank button at the top of this column to select all pages in the Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

59

Changing Image Assigned to a Drawing 1 Select the page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry 2 Click the Change Image button The Change Image dialog box will appear

3 Navigate to the desired file and select by clicking on it

4 Click the Open button The electronic file assigned to the page will have been changed to reflect the new file choice

Changing Image File Path 1 Select pages as described above

2 Choose Change Folder

3 In the Change Folder dialog navigate to the appropriate folder

4 Click the OK button The file path will have been changed for the selected page entries

Delete a Page from Project Properties 1 Select the page you want to delete by clicking on its associated number (in the gray box at the

left of the entry)

2 Choose Delete Page

All Takeoff on the page will be deleted immediately and permanently

Section 8 Advanced Features

60

Advanced Features of Tool Options

Calculation Method On-Screen Takeoff has built-in calculation options to allow for faster work and faster saves until your takeoff is complete Calculation options are found by selecting Tools gt Options then clicking on the Calculation tab

Calculation method can be set to Automatic Automatic except Grids and Manual Manual will allow the program to operate more quickly while Automatic or Automatic except Grids allows the user to see quantity changes as takeoffs are made

In any mode you may press F9 to recalculate quantities for the On-Screen Takeoff current totals

Configuration Tab

When the ldquoPage Label (A01)rdquo radial button is chosen On-Screen Takeoff puts the numbered label on all the pages of in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar If the Page Descriptionrdquo radial button is chosen then a description of what takeoff is on that specific page will be shown in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar

This section of the configuration tab gives you options on how you want to export your information When the ldquoFolderSubfolder Namesrdquo radial button is chosen than on your file that you are exporting to will have all the conditions folders and subfolders In the Delimiter box you can choose the symbol that is needed to separate the information you are exporting Some files need semicolons () or colons () to make sure the information comes exported in is separated it the appropriate places

Section 8 Advanced Features

61

In previous versions of On-Screen Takeoff there are views that users need to have in order for them to display their information By either choosing ldquoOST 1xrdquo or ldquoOST 2xrdquo it will let the program know you want your columns of information exported in that specific format

When you have the Confirm Deletions radial button of ldquoYesrdquo chosen than every time you delete anything you will get a dialog box confirming your intentions of deletion

While working with your takeoff you have a choice to either view the legend of your conditions or hide it Choose whichever radial button that suits your needs

For those who prefer to use the Enter key to navigate in dialog boxes this option is just for that

Font Tab The Font tab is designed for you to make your own look and feel for the application At the bottom of this tab it will show you sample of the fonts and colors you have chosen

Renaming the Current Page You may change the name of the current page in the takeoff area of On-Screen Takeoff by selecting Edit gt Rename Page

This opens the Name Page dialog and you may simply type in a new name and click the Enter button The new name for the file will be reflected on the title bar for the page and in Project Properties

You also may access the Rename Page function by right-clicking in the takeoff area while in Image View and selecting the option from the pop-up menu that appears

Section 9

62

Saving and Exiting

This section will

Explain how to save projects

Show you how to safely exit the program

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

63

Saving Your Project

1 Select File gt Save 2 If your project has not previously been saved a Save dialog box will open to allow you to name

the file and choose the directory and folder in which to save your file 3 Once saved File gt Save will simply save the current version of the file

OR

4 Select File gt Save As then type in a new name for the file and save to the desired file path

The Auto-save Feature With the Auto-save feature On-Screen Takeoff automatically backs up your open project You may choose to have more than one level of backup files The first backup copy will have the extension b00 and successive files will be b01 b02 and so on If you have designated four levels of backup files after the fourth backup copy has been created (b03) the next file will be saved over the file with extension b00 Further backup saves will then rotate through the four backup files in the same way

1 Select Tools gt Options 2 In the Auto-save area (under the General tab) select the frequency of backup file creation (in

minutes) and the number of levels for the feature 3 You also may disengage the feature by clicking in the check box to clear it

The Auto-save feature automatically saves backup copies to the directory of the current project If you are working from a write-protected area such as a CD-ROM On-Screen Takeoff will place backup files in the On-Screen Takeoff folder

Exiting When you are finished using On-Screen Takeoff it is very easy to exit Exiting is very important because of security reasons If someone were to use your computer they could enter the application and view and manipulate information

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

64

On-Screen Takeoff closes the open project when you open another or create a new project or when you exit the program

1 Select File gt Exit

OR

2 You also may click at the upper right-hand corner of the application to exit

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

65

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer When you get your digitizer from GTCO you will need to connect it to your computer Follow the instructions outlined below to do this

Note For rollup digitizers the metal bar must be oriented to the top or right hand side

Connecting the Digitizer 1 Lay the digitizer out flat 2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer 3 Plug in the power adapter 4 Plug the interface (IO) cable into the digitizer 5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into an open serial port on computer

Note GTCO Technical support phone number is 410-381-6688 The electronic manual (on diskette) from GTCO contains more detailed installation and operation instructions for the GTCO digitizer model you have

Installing other Digitizer Drivers If you are using a GTCO Digitizer you will need to install the GTCO TabletWorks Drivers

If you are using a Digitizer not supported by GTCO Tablet Works 10 please contact the manufacturer of your digitizer for assistance with installation

Installing GTCO TabletWorks Drivers 1 Insert the On Center CD into the CD-ROM drive The CD Startup screen will open 2 Click on Install Software 3 Select Additional Software and Drivers 4 Select Digitizer Driver 5 Follow the instructions for installing TabletWorks 10

Adhering the Template The template is a small plastic sticker used to enable mouse function when using the digitizer with On-Screen Takeoff Place your template on your digitizer We suggest placing it in the bottom right corner of the digitizer about one inch inside the takeoff area

Note You may either peel off the back of the template and use the adhesive surface or you can tape the template down

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

66

Testing the Digitizer Drivers Before running OST you may test the digitizer by moving the stylus around on the digitizer pad it should move the mouse cursor (if mouse emulation is enabled)

If the digitizer does not move the mouse cursor on the screen

The superset codes may need to be reset Reset the superset codes by touching on the border of the digitizer with the stylus The digitizer should beep several times

The digitizer may not be communicating with the computer Be sure the COM port selected is correct Be sure the COM port selected is correct If you are not able to get the digitizer to move the mouse cursor you need to call GTCO technical support for help

Note The Mouse Emulation is not required for On-Screen Takeoff to work properly It is used only for the Template functionality if the digitizer is moving the cursor the wrong direction (up instead of sideways or vice-versa)

Click the L-shaped arrow symbol on the digitizer with the stylus

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

67

Appendix II Toolbar Items Main Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

68

Tool Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

69

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

70

Navigate Toolbar (Continued)

Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

71

Takeoff Toolbar (Continued)

Image Toolbar

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

72

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

This section will detail how to load plans from a F W Dodge CD-ROM into an On-Screen Takeoff project file ready for takeoffs

Dodge files may be added to the Project Properties dialog However loading the files in that way will load the files by number rather than name description If you want to load one page only from your Dodge CD You will have to rename the page to display the name rather than number of the file

To load plan files from a Dodge CD so that the files load sequentially by file number but are displayed by name rather than by number within your project follow the instructions below

Opening a Dodge project from a CD-ROM 1 Insert the CD into the drive 2 Choose File gt Custom 3 Choose Dodge Plans Project (plansdat) as the file type 4 Select the appropriate file type by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the Files of type

field 5 In the Look in field access your drive paths by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the

field then

Navigate to your CD-ROM drive Open the data folder and Open the Projects folder

6 Select the desired project and open its folder 7 Open the plansdat file 8 All the images will come in sequenced correctly for that job along with the full descriptions

(names) of each page If there is not a plans folder in the project folder then plans do not exist for that project on the CD Opening the plansdat file will yield an empty project

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

73

Appendix IV Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer The On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer is a limited version of On Center Softwarersquos commercial takeoff software If your status bar located at the very bottom of the main window says View Mode in the lower left-hand corner then you are using the Plan Viewer You can use the plan viewer to

View CD-based amp converted CAD drawings

View a previously created OST file and associated drawings

Download electronic plans online

Navigate through drawings

Quickly Takeoff linearsareas and counts

Zoom in to view the plan better

Print drawings directly from the viewer

Viewing an On-Screen Takeoff Project File

1 To open an OST file that was previously created with of On-Screen Takeoff 2 Select File gt Open 3 An Open dialog will appear if you do not see the OST file you are looking for select the

Look In drop down arrow 4 A drop down menu will appear listing the various folders drives and mapped drives located

on your computer select the correct drive or folder location and continue to browse to the location of your OST file

5 When you see your OST file double-click it to open it 6 Any takeoff and drawings should appear on the Image tab view

If you do not see the drawings but do see the colored takeoff layer the drawings may

not be located in the same place they were originally saved at Go to File gt Project Properties and check the Image File path for each listed page If the image file path is pointing to a CD drive make sure the CD is inside the CR-ROM

Downloading Electronic Plans If your Online Plan Service provides a special file format (OSX) required to use this feature of our plan viewer you can immediately downloaded all electronic plans of a project directly from our viewer

Most Plan Room web sites will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff when a request to download plans is made Your particular Plan Room may differ in operation so please contact the provider directly with questions on using the site

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

74

When you request to download or open a project file from a Plan Room you will usually have the open to open or save an OSX file Choosing open will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff Alternately you may choose to save the file to a local hard drive After you have saved the file either double-click it to launch On-Screen Takeoff or open the OSX file using On-Screen Takeoff by clicking File then Open and locating the file on your hard drive You will need to change the file type to OSX

After the OSX file is opened you will see an additional tab appear in the Conditions List window called Pages

The Pages tab shows the hierarchy of your project Gray file icons represent pages that have not been downloaded and blue icons represents pages that have been downloaded

To download a page simply double-click the page icon

If you wish to select a group of pages to download you can use the Ctrl or Shift key to multiple select them then click the Download button

If you wish to download all pages at once click the Download All button

Downloaded pages will now appear in the Project Properties dialog in the same order in which they appear in the Pages tab

Creating Quick Takeoffs With On-Screen Takeoff you can create quick takeoffs to measure quantities even if you dont have the full version of our program However using the Quick Takeoff functionality shows you just a fraction of what the full version can do

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar is located at the top of the image view It has three buttons designated for three types of takeoffs Linear Area and Count The Quantity drop down list will show secondary quantities for Linears and Areas The Units drop down allows you to select how you want your quantities displayed Feet Inches Yards Millimeters and Meters

NOTE Every time change the type of takeoff you are performing (switching from Area to Linear for example) the previous quantities and takeoff objects will disappear They will also disappear when you changes pages

NOTE You can use the Dimension Tool to basically measure the distance between two points or linears The distance will display on the status bar at the bottom of the application

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

75

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions General

Where is On-Screen Takeoff installed on my computer

Typically it is installed in CProgram FilesOn-Screen Takeoff

In Explorer how do I recognize On-Screen Takeoff file types

On-Screen Takeoff data is stored in a single file per job lsquojob name OSTrsquo On-Screen Takeoff templates are stored as lsquotemplate nameTPOrsquo

Can only one project at a time be open

Yes For that reason opening another project automatically closes the project on screen You will be asked to save any changes

Is only one scale allowed per page What about on drawings that have multiple detail sections on a page and each of those drawings have different scales

Yes For pages with drawings of different scales copy the drawing to another project page and set the appropriate scale

I cannot perform backout on an area that is along a linear

As a workaround use the On-Screen Takeoff layers feature to help you with this issue Electronic Images

How do I start a project from drawings that have been scanned and written to a CD-ROM

Open a new project Select File gt Project Properties and select Auto Add Navigate to your CD and the appropriate folder and select any image file in that location Click Open All files in the location will load into your project Recommended that images are copied from CD to hard drive for performance

If I get a disk of drawings in AutoCAD format (R13 or R14) can I read them in On-Screen Takeoff

Yes On-Screen Takeoff now reads DWG DXF and many other format that are saved with AutoCAD

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

76

When I click on the all pages button what is supposed to happen Currently nothing seems to change when I click on that button

The All Pages button is used to apply the Darken and Enhance Plans feature to all pages in the project (as opposed to only the current page on screen)

Is there a way to deduct a large skylight from an area condition

Yes with the related area condition selected in the Takeoff Dock bar unselect the Backout button on the Takeoff Toolbar then draw the Backout area The area quantity will be deducted from the related condition object and the linear measurement of the Backout perimeter will be added

Digitizer Issues

How do I connect a Digitizer to the computer

See Appendix I Connecting a Digitizer

The Place Template menu choice is disabled

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or the digitizer or the digitzer drivers are not installed

It wonrsquot let me select the Set Takeoff Area menu choice

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or no job is open a digitizer is not installed or the drivers are not installed

The digitizer stylus is not moving the cursor or crosshairs

Click S-0-1 superset on the digitizer

How do I convert my old GTCO Digitizer to work with On- Screen Takeofftrade

Call GTCO and they may be able to reconfigure your digitizer to be compatible with On-Screen Takeoff

Printing Issues Which Printers work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible printers include On-Screen Takeoff Hewlett Packard Epson and Canon printers If you are having printer difficulties please contact support and specify the type of printer along with other pertinent information Contact support at wwwoncentercomsupport or email supportoncentercom

Which Plotters work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible Plotters include Hewlett Packard DesignJet plotters and the EnCAD Cadjet II If you are having plotter difficulties please contact support and specify the type of plotter concerned

ViewingDisplay I can no longer see my condition list How do I get it back

The toolbars and Dock bars can be turned on and off through the View gt Toolbars menu options

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

77

This is also accessible by right-clicking in the toolbar area and selecting (or deselecting) a toolbar listed

I cannot view my folders in the condition list

Right-click in the Takeoff Dock barcondition list area and select Show Tree to display your folders

My Status Bar reads Viewer Mode and I am unable to draw conditions

On-Screen Takeoff needs to be Authorized Or you need to purchase an upgrade Click the Perform Advanced Takeoff button on the main toolbar

I hid a Dock bar and when I selected to view it again it appeared alongside the other Dock

bar instead of stacked on top of it How do I fix it

Pick up the Dock bar by clicking on the bar at the top and continuing to hold down the mouse button drag the Dock bar over the other one It will resize and appear stacked with the other

When I open image files from a CD the images are all upside down How do I get them right

side up

To flip pages from top to bottom follow the steps below 1 Click the All Pages button on the Image Toolbar (All Pages is engaged when the button

is not clicked) 2 Click the Flip Horizontal button on the Image Toolbar 3 Click the All Pages button again to disengage

Templates How do I create a Template

Follow the steps below 1 Create a typical project 2 Choose File gt Save As 3 Choose On-Screen Takeoff Template Files as the file type to save 4 Name the file This will save all of the condition setups as well as the layers for the

project

How do I create a new project from a template

Follow the steps below 1 Choose File gt New 2 Select a template from those listed in the New dialog This will open a new project with

conditions and layers saved from a previous project but no pages or takeoff

78

INDEX

Area Conditions 32

Area Objects 57

Auto Scrolling 20

Auto-save 63

Backout Mode 41

Calculation Method 60

Conditions 29

Configuration 60

Contents Tab 6

Continuous Mode 38

Count Conditions 33

Count Objects 57

Digitizer 10 65 76

Docking Toolbars 13

Dodge CD 72

Drawing 27 37

DropRun Count 55

Environment 18

Exiting 63

Exporting 49

Features 16

Font 61

Frequently Asked Questions 75

Grid 40

Help File 5

Hiding Toolbars 13

Hot Links 21

Image 19 59

Image files 9

Image Toolbar 12 71

Images 75

Index Tab 6

Layers 43

Linear Conditions 31

Linear Objects 56

Main Toolbar 12 67

Menus 14

Moving Toolbars 13

Navigate Toolbar 12 69

Navigating 20

On-Screen Takeofftrade 2

Page 59 61

Pages 20 25 28

Plan Viewer 73

Plans 26

Printing 47 76

Project Properties 25

Projects 22

Quick Start Video 18

Resizing Toolbars 13

Roping 54

Saving 63

Scale 28

Search Tab 7

Selecting Objects 42

Setup 8

Start On-Screen Takeofftrade 17

System Requirements 9

Takeoff 19 27

Takeoff Toolbar 70 71

Takeoff Toolbar 12

Template Files 23

TIF (Group4) 9

Tool Toolbar 12 68

Toolbar 67

Toolbars 12

View Toolbar 12 69

Viewing Toolbars 12

Worksheet 20

Zone Conditions 33

Zoom Toolbar 12 69

  • On-Screen Takeoff Lite
  • Table of Contents
  • Section 1 - Introduction
  • Section 2 - Setup
  • Section 3 - Toolbars and Menus
  • Section 4 - Features
  • Section 5 - Projects
  • Section 6 - Conditions and Takeoff
  • Section 7 - Printing and Exporting
  • Section 8 - Advanced Features
  • Section 9 - Saving and Exiting
  • Appendix I - Installing Your Digitizer
  • Appendix II - Toolbar Items
  • Appendix III - Loading Plans from a Dodge CD
  • Appendix IV - Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer
  • Appendix V - Frequently Asked Questions
  • Index

Section 1 Introduction

2

Welcome to On-Screen Takeoff This extraordinary software gives you bidding advantage in less time with greater accuracy by allowing you to perform complex takeoffs right on your computer screen

On-Screen Takeoff can be used with a digitizer and paper plans or a mouse and electronic plan files On-Screen Takeoff enables the user to create live drawings with resizable conditions linear conditions such as walls pipes and electrical lines area conditions such as floors and ceilings count conditions such as sprinkler heads corner beads doors and windows and zone conditions that assess quantities for any part of an area you specify As you record conditions using your plans the program provides reports on quantities and can recalculate instantly for any adjustment to the conditions of your project

New and experienced users will enjoy the power of this estimating system that is very easy to use As with all products from On Center Software this program works well for most construction trades and is ready to use the day you receive it So start bidding jobs more quickly and accurately today with On-Screen Takeoff This program is equipped with three modes View Mode allows the user to perform quick takeoffs view previously created files and drawing zoom to view plans better and print drawings (see Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer for more details) Lite Mode adds the use of zones Full Mode allows the user to perform more advanced takeoff options including layers and working with a digitizer The mode is referenced in the lower left corner of the program screen

If you currently have View or Lite Mode and are interested in performing more advanced takeoffs a

purchase request button has been provided on the main toolbar Clicking will take you to a webpage purchase form You can also call an On-Center Software Account Representative 1-800-880-8254 or visit us on the web at wwwoncentercom for more details

Section 1 Introduction

3

About this Guide This guide is intended to be a compliment to On-Screen Takeoff software The sections are presented in an order intended to help new users understand the software The User Guide provides detailed information about On-Screen Takeoff tools and commands It is designed to assist you in applying program features to your estimating projects Use it as a reference tool along with the online help system in your day to day work with On-Screen Takeoff

Table of Contents outlines the sections and topics covered in each section

Section 1 Introduction explains the user guide and helpful resources

Section 2 Setup lists system requirements and recommended components

Section 3 Toolbars and Menus explains the toolbars and menus used in On-Screen Takeoff

Section 4 Features gives you a tour of the On-Screen Takeoff environment and shows you how to navigate through your projects

Section 5 Projects leads you through your first time with the program or if yoursquore an old hand at On-Screen Takeoff reacquainting yourself with the software

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff shows you features of working with condition objects zones and backouts in the takeoff area

Section 7 Printing and Exporting explains the step-by-step of printing images and reports copying and pasting data from On-Screen Takeoff and exporting quantity results to an Excel spreadsheet

Section 8 Advanced Features discusses special and advanced features of On-Screen Takeoff conditions and options

Section 9 Saving and Exiting explains how to save projects and safely exit the program Appendixes gives you additional information on installing a digitizer toolbar item details loading files using the plan viewer and frequently asked questions Index provides key words or phrases the program application and references the page(s) in the user guide where they can be found

Section 1 Introduction

4

Extras Along the way yoursquoll encounter bits of information that make the User Guide not only more readable but more personal and relevant The signs and signals placed throughout the guide will better help you understand On-Screen Takeoff and On Center Software We think yoursquoll find these bits and pieces interesting Herersquos what to look for

NOTE

To make special notice of specific information

Caution Warning This symbol is there to insure that you are following the information to minimize risk

This symbol represents information that also appears on the Quick Start Video

In this manual some information is specific to using a digitizer The icon appears alongside this information (Must be in Full Mode to use a digitizer)

A reminder is there to keep the information in mind for future consideration

For Your Informationhellip

Instruction Jargon

In this guide click or double-click refers to clicking on the left mouse button A right-click clicking on the right mouse button will be specifically stated

Click the digitizer refers to clicking down once with the stylus pen

NOTE When using a digitizer a click or double-click refers to pressing the ball tip of the stylus pen right on the digitizer (usually in the takeoff area) A right-click can be accomplished by using the digitizer mouse template and the first button on the stylus pen See Appendix I Installing You Digitizer for more information

Drag and drop is holding down the left mouse button after clicking on an object You may simply drag the object to the desired location and release the mouse button

Section 1 Introduction

5

Typographic Conventions

The following are typographical conventions to be aware of when reading this guide

Menu items you are instructed to choose appear in a different typeface with the greater than (gt) symbol separating each menu level For example if you are instructed to select the Open command in the File menu it appears as File gt Open If you are instructed to select the Save As command from the File menu it appears as File gt Save As

Helpful hints or information about the topic are provided throughout the document They will be labeled lsquoNOTErsquo (all caps and bold font to catch your attention)

Several topics will have more detailed steps outlined in either another section of the user guide or in the Appendix They will always be referenced and italicized For example ldquoSee Editing Conditions for more informationrdquo

Help File In combination with this User Guide and the Quick Start video (Help gt Watch Quick Start Video) the Help File will also be a great resource for product information and application There are additional resources available on the website at wwwoncentercom or Help gt Visit our Website Follow these instructions to open the Help file

1 Select Help gt Help Topics

2 This will open the On-Screen Help File

Hide and Show Buttons

The Hide and Show buttons will either remove or display the Topics panel in the Help dialog

Back Button

The Back button takes you back to the last help page you viewed It will be available only if you have navigated through multiple pages in the help file

Print Button

Clicking will print the topic displayed This is helpful if the instructions to follow are long and you prefer to work on a full screen

Options Button

The Options button will allow you to pick from a list of commands to help you navigate the Help file

Section 1 Introduction

6

Contents Tab This tab provides a quick breakout of the Contents of the help file It should be used like the Table of Contents of a book Simply double-click on the book icon to open the chapter Then click the desired page icon to display the relevant information

Index Tab This tab allows you to locate a specifically indexed topic This should be used as you would a book index Begin typing a word in the index entry field and the system will automatically move within the list to the entries closest in spelling to your word(s) Begin typing the topic word to access it in the list quickly

Section 1 Introduction

7

Search Tab This tab works like a word find It allows you to search for any word contained in the Help file Type the

word you are looking for in the lsquoType in the keyword to findrsquo field Click A list of topics containing that word will appear Scroll through the list and double click on the topic you want displayed

Section 2

8

Setup

This section will

Let you know what system requirements you will need to have in place

Recommend components that work well with the software

Help Full Mode users install a digitizer

Section 2 Setup

9

Minimum System Requirements To use On-Screen Takeoff your computer must meet the following minimum system requirements

An IBM PC or 100 compatible computer with a Pentium II or faster Intel processor

Memory Requirements 200 MB of available hard-disk space and256 MB RAM (128 MB preferred)

Windows 2000 SP4 and Windows XP SP2 256 color video card Super VGA display card Mouse 15-inch monitor

While these are the minimum system requirements Windows places heavy demands on your systems resources The more available memory in your computer the faster and more efficient On-Screen Takeoff will operate

Recommended Components

For the best performance we recommend the following components

Pentium III or faster processor

512 or more of RAM

12X speed CD-ROM or better

17-inch monitor or dual monitors Graphic adapter with 128 MB or more VRAM Sound card and speakers installed

NOTE In order to utilize the Training Videos you must have a sound card and speakers installed

Compatible File Formats The resolution in electronic plans does not need to be more that 200 DPI (Dots per Inch) The preferred file format is a black and white TIF (Group4) On-Screen Takeoff recognizes image files with the following extensions

File Extensions View Mode Lite Mode Full Mode TIF X X X PDF X X X OSE X X X JPG X X X CPC X X X CAL X DGN X DWG X DXF X OSP X PLN X PLT X

Section 2 Setup

10

NOTE Use the following image types for best results

Convert to TIF

The converted files will be stored in a folder with the name of the current On-Screen Takeoff project Since the conversion can be very time consuming you should only select this option if you really intend to convert vector files to TIF

1 Select File gt Project Properties

2 In the Pages Field add your image See Section 5 Establishing Project Setting Adding Pages

3 Click

4 Then select the page with the drawing you wish to convert

5 Click

Installing Your Digitizer The following instructions are a quick start to installing your digitizer For more specific information please reference Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer at the end of this guide

Connecting Your Digitizer

Upon receiving your digitizer (either a GTCO or another brand) you will need to connect it to your computer

1 Lay the digitizer out flat

2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer

3 Plug in the power supply

4 Plug the interface cable into the digitizer

5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into the computer

NOTE On-Screen Takeoff is compatible with any tablet that is WinTab compatible

Digitizer options are only available in Full Mode If you are in View or Lite Mode and would like

to use this feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade

Section 3

11

Toolbars and Menus

This section will

Introduce the program toolbars

Familiarize you with On-Screen Take Offtrade Menu options

Section 3 Toolbars and Menus

12

Toolbars On-Screen Takeoff is equipped with several helpful toolbars for application efficiency See Appendix II Toolbar Item` Details for a detailed description of each toolbar item Individually the toolbars may be displayed moved docked reshaped or hidden from view You can also create costume toolbars to fit your needs

Main Toolbar

Tool Toolbar

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Takeoff Toolbar

Image Toolbar Viewing Toolbars Toolbars are displayed on the screen and will be consistent on each tab or page (Some toolbars or toolbar items will be in an inactive state if they donrsquot have a supporting element in the application)

1 Select View gt Toolbars and select the appropriate toolbar name

OR

2 Right-click on a toolbar region of the screen

3 Check the toolbars you want to display

Section 3 Toolbars and Menus

13

Moving Toolbars The toolbars may be positioned anywhere on the screen you wish This feature is provided to allow the flexibility for positioning the toolbars so they are out of your way yet handy for use

1 Click on an edge of the toolbar holding down the mouse button drag it to its new position

2 Release the mouse button to set it in place

NOTE If the toolbar is dropped anywhere other than a screen edge it will become free floating This feature is especially handy when using multiple monitors

Docking Toolbars The toolbars can be docked to any of the screen edges

1 Click on the title bar of an undocked toolbar

2 Drag the toolbar to any location on the screen

Hiding Toolbars

1 Select View gt Toolbars and select the toolbar you wish to remove from the screen

2 Right-click on the toolbar or dock bar areas

3 A floating toolbar can be closed by clicking on the in the upper right corner of the toolbar

Resizing Toolbars Only undocked (floating) toolbars may be resized

1 Position the mouse pointer over an edge

2 Click and drag

3 The toolbar can be resized as desired

Customizing the Toolbars You may rearrange or delete buttons within a toolbarrsquos display or you may move buttons from one toolbar to another If you find that you use a few tools over and over you may want to group them within a single toolbar for convenience On-Screen Takeoff gives you the flexibility to customize your takeoff environment

1 Select Tools gt Customize The Customize dialog will open

2 With the dialog open click on a toolbar button and drag buttons from one toolbar to another or a new location within the same toolbar

3 To add a button without altering another toolbar click on the Commands tab of the Customize dialog and drag the appropriate symbol from the Buttons section to a toolbar

4 To remove a button drag it to within the takeoff area of the application

Section 3 Toolbars and Menus

14

Menus

Section 3 Toolbars and Menus

15

Digitizer Menu

Section 4

16

Features

This section will

Show you how open On-Screen Takeoff

Describe the On-Screen Takeoff environment

Teach you how to navigate pages

Section 4 Features

17

Start On-Screen Takeoff

1 On your desktop double-click your On-Screen Takeoff icon

2 The application will open

OR

3 Left-click on the Start button on your computerrsquos toolbar

4 Scroll up to Programs gt On Center Software

5 Highlight On-Screen Takeoff and click On-Screen Takeoff will open On-Screen Takeoff opens to an untitled blank project The Image view of the screen will be a blank page

Two blank dock bars the Pan dock bar and the Takeoff dock bar appear at the left side of the screen Along the bottom the Status bar displays user status or context-sensitive messages as well as paper size and current zoom percentage of the plan sheet on screen The menu bar and several task specific toolbars are located at the top of the screen

NOTE All toolbars and dock bars may be accessed to view or hide through View gt Toolbars on the menu bar

Section 4 Features

18

Quick Start Video When On-Screen Takeoff opens you will be given an option to watch the Quick Start video (recommended) or start the program without watching the video

The 20 minute video will demonstrate key program functionality and allow you to view application instruction for enhanced learning

If you would like to watch the video click If you prefer to get started without

the video click If you have already viewed the video click the lsquoDo not show this message againrsquo box to prevent this dialog from appearing each time you open the program

NOTE If you decide later that you would like to watch the Quick Start video go to Help gt Watch

Quick Start Videos

On-Screen Takeoff Environment The On-Screen Takeoff environment acts like your drafting table allowing you to work on several sheets of plans at once and to reference at a glance the entire drawing and your position on that drawing while giving you the power of a computer to track analyze print and export your takeoff quantities and plans

The screen is bordered at the top by the Menu bar with pull-down menus and at the bottom by the Status bar which indicates current user status plan page size and current zoom percentage of page The largest portion of the application screen will be your takeoff area bounded on the left (by default) by two dock bars and on the top by several toolbars

In the takeoff area you may view your project plans (images) andor takeoff objects the takeoff list with quantities the worksheet or a legend of your condition list

The main window of On-Screen Takeoff has three tabs located at the bottom left allowing for quick change between Image Takeoff or Worksheet views Select the desired view option on the toolbar and it will automatically open on your screen

Section 4 Features

19

Image View

This view shows the plan file andor takeoff conditions drawn from your plans

Takeoff View This view displays the height if applicable and quantity breakdowns of your conditions according to result types indicated (eg linear feet square feet or count of items) for zones pages and the project as a whole It also displays notes per condition

Section 4 Features

20

Worksheet View This view displays the condition and quantity in units of measure specified in the first results field of the Results tab in the Condition dialog and allows the user to enter amounts for material labor and subcontractor takeoffs

NOTE When in the Worksheet view tab out the field then save This is keep all the values saved

Navigating On-Screen Takeoff

Auto Scrolling When creating linear areas or zones On-Screen Takeoff will automatically scroll the image view when necessary It will move as your mouse or digitizer moves beyond the edge of the current view

Changing Pages

1 Select View gt Next Page Previous Page or Go To Page (specify page number for the Go to Page option)

2 You may also select the corresponding arrows for these options from the Navigate Toolbar The

drop down arrow in the Page field will list the pages The and arrows will take you to the

previous or next page The and arrows will take you to the first or last page

OR

Section 4 Features

21

3 Or press Ctrl G for the Go To Page dialog

Hot Links Hot links allow you to move quickly from one drawing to the pertinent area of another drawing A hot link is handy when viewing enlarged areas of a page and needing the ability to jump back to a reference page

1 Select Tools gt Hot Link

OR

2 Click from the Tools Toolbar

3 Click on the page where you want to set the link The Hot Link dialog will open

4 Using the current page display on the Navigate Toolbar access the pull-down menu of pages by

clicking on the arrow at the right

5 Select the page for your link (You may also choose View gt Go to Page and select by page number)

6 Manipulate the view using the zoom tool and the scroll bars

7 Click

8 After joining a hot link to another page the hot link arrows in the Navigation Toolbar will become active

9 Move a hot link to another location on the page by clicking then click and drag the hot link image anywhere on the page

Section 5

22

Projects

This section will

Help you create settings important to your projects

Explain how On-Screen Takeoff works with your electronic or paper plans

Section 5 Projects

23

Project Template Files You can begin your project with a template Templates allow you to take advantage of conditions and settings used with previous projects

On-Screen Takeoff templates contain condition lists and established layer separations from previous projects you have created You may also use the sample templates provided with On-Screen Takeoff as a great starting point All aspects of the templates may be adjusted for a new project

1 Select File gt New and click the OK button

2 From the New dialog box choose the template that best fits your project

3 The conditions for this template will appear in the Takeoff Dock bar and the Project Properties dialog will open asking for further information

4 Use File gt Save or File gt Save As to rename and save your new project

Saving a Project as a Template File You can save your condition properties and layers as a template for future projects

1 Select File gt Save As

2 Enter a name for your template and select On-Screen Takeoff Template Files (tpo) from the Save As type field of the dialog (click on the down arrow to select)

3 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog Modifying a Template File Follow these steps to modify an existing template file if you need to change or add conditions andor layers

1 Select File gt Open

2 Navigate to your Projects directory

3 In the File Type drop-down select On-Screen Takeoff Template files (tpo)

4 Choose the On-Screen Takeoff template file you would like to modify and click the OK button

5 Make appropriate changes

6 Save and close file

The On-Screen Takeoff template files cannot save takeoff information

Section 5 Projects

24

Opening an Existing Project File 1 Select File gt Open

2 Navigate to the desired file location

3 Click the Open button

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask

you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Creating a New Project

1 Select File gt New

2 For a blank untitled project click

3 At this point the Project Properties dialog will pop-up for more information about your takeoff

NOTE The following are important to keep in mind when beginning a new project

At the start of your project fill out the Project Properties settings to establish the name for all printed output from your project set the default page size and scale for your plans number and names of different pages within the project and locations of electronic drawings

Scale settings can significantly affect quantity outcomes Be sure to set the scale for each page of drawings before beginning condition takeoffs

When using a digitizer remember to make a mark with a pen or pencil in the upper left and lower right corners of the first sheet of the paper plans to delineate the takeoff area for that sheet You can then set the takeoff area on On-Screen Takeoff using your marks

Save your project before you begin taking off any conditions On-Screen Takeoff will write a back-up file using the same file name

Remember the Undo feature If you make a mistake select Edit gt Undo and reverse the process step by step

Section 5 Projects

25

Project Properties

You can either set your Project Properties when you create a new takeoff or once your project file is saved under the appropriate name

1 Select File gt Project Properties the Project Properties dialog box will appear

2 Type in the name of your project to appear on printouts Use the backspace andor delete keys to edit the name as necessary

3 Press the Tab key to move to the Default Image Size option or click within the Image Size box You may click on the arrow at the right for the pull-down menu of page size options or you can use the down-arrow key on your keyboard to scroll through the list to the appropriate selection

4 Press the Tab key to move to the Default Scale option Select a scale by using the drop down arrow If your scale is metric you will need to click in the box next to Metric to convert to that measurement

5 Establish the number of pages for your project plans And load image files See Adding Pages to

Your Project

Adding Pages to Projects Individual Electronic Plans

1 Click on in the Project Properties dialog

2 In the Add Images dialog use the drop down arrow to navigate to the appropriate directory and folder containing your image

3 Select the file so that it displays in the File name field then click The file will display by name and path in the Image File field in Project Properties dialog

4 Click to accept and your project will automatically open

5 Save your project with the new settings by selecting File gt Save

Section 5 Projects

26

Electronic plans scanned from blueprints (as opposed to blue lines) will display as white lines on a black background and are difficult to read on your computer screen Select Image gt Invert and the colors will invert to black on white

You may have noticed the Page column in the Project Properties dialog Generally plan images occupy one page and 1 will be listed in the column indicating Page 1 of your plan file If you import a multi-page TIF a plan file containing more than one page of plans they will import as separate pages and each successive page will be indicated under the Page column as 1 2 3 etc of the plan file

Group of Electronic Plans You may add all the electronic plan files from a particular source (for example from a CD) by using the Auto Add feature

1 Click the button in the Project Properties dialog

2 Browse until you find the appropriate directory and folder containing your plan images

3 Click on any file displayed within your target folder so that the file name appears in the File name box of the Auto Add dialog

4 Click The image paths and file names will be recorded into the project properties arranged alphabetically

5 Click to accept your choices and your project will automatically open

6 Save your project with the new settings by selecting File gt Save

To load Dodge Plans into your Project Properties see Appendix IIi Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

Paper Plans On-Screen Takeoff makes it easy for Full Mode users to perform quantity takeoffs from paper plans using a digitizer

1 Add pages by clicking until you have the number of pages initially in the project

2 Name each page by clicking within the Title area and typing the name

3 Click to accept your choices and close the Project Properties dialog

4 Save your project with the new project properties settings by selecting File gt Save

Section 5 Projects

27

Setting Up a Drawing Template On-Screen Takeoff provides the convenience of using the same work surface for both digitizer and mouse to allow the user to draw conditions and then edit settings of the project or add or change conditions without breaking stride A mouse pad template included with the program defines the area of the digitizer in which use of the stylus or cursor will be recognized as mouse movement as opposed to drawing movement

1 Place your stylus on On-Screen Takeoff

2 Placing the template identifies the location mouse movements will be recognized by the program

Before placing the template the template must be applied to the digitizer surface This may have been done during the installation of your digitizer We suggest attaching the template to the lower right corner of the digitizer surface about one inch inside the grid area

3 Select Digitizer gt Place Template

4 Follow the instruction prompts on the screen clicking first on the target symbol at the left of the On-Screen Takeoff box on the template then on the target at the right

Setting Takeoff Area Before you can begin taking off a drawing you must define the drawing area on the digitizer This requires defining an area that will include all objects on each drawing of your plans As you add pages to your takeoff the same area of the digitizer will be active

1 Secure the plans to the digitizer with tape or a set of clamps

2 With a pen or a pencil mark the upper left corner and the lower right corner of the first page in your set of plans

3 Select Digitizer gt Set Takeoff Area

4 Click each mark with the stylus pen as prompted

5 Verify the active area of the digitizer by looking at the image size located in the lower right corner of your screen

If you close the program before the takeoff is complete you will need to reestablish the takeoff area before you can add additional condition quantities

Electronic plans appear on your computer screen eliminating the need to set a takeoff area You simply drag your mouse across the conditions you wish to takeoff The conditions will be highlighted and quantities will be totaled instantly Electronic plans are available through a variety of services For information contact an On Center Software account manager

Section 5 Projects

28

Setting Scale for Specific Pages You may set the scale in each page view separately This will override the default scale setting in Project Properties for that page Setting the correct scale for the drawing before taking off quantities ensures accurate calculations Be careful to check the scale for each drawing in your project before doing takeoffs

1 Display the page you want to set select Edit gt Set Scale

2 Use the drop down arrow to select a scale that will be applied to that page

3 Click

OR

4 Access the pull-down scale settings on the Navigate toolbar

NOTE As you draw objects notice that the drawn object is similar in width to the object on your plans If it is not the scale set may not be correct

Calculating Scale You may calculate scale according to a known measurement between two points either with a digitizer or on electronic plans

1 Select Edit gt Calculate Scale using Image or Edit gt Calculate Scale using Digitizer

2 Follow the instructions in the related Calculate Scale dialog box You will be asked to click on the first and second points then to enter the dimension for that distance

3 The scale will be recalculated for the displayed page and the Scale display on the Navigate toolbar will show the new scale

Section 6

29

Conditions and Takeoff

This section will Draw Conditions to Takeoff Plan Quantities

What Zones will do to help your takeoff process

Discuss the ins and outs of Takeoffs

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

30

Creating Conditions

If you are starting a new project from scratch you will need to create conditions to takeoff quantities such as floor areas wall lengths and corner bead counts If you are using a template you will have several pre-designed conditions already listed on the Takeoff dock bar However you may want to change the characteristics of some conditions or create additional conditions for a particular project

1 Right Click within the Takeoff dock bar Select New gt Condition

Or

2 From the Takeoff dock bar Click (if the buttons are not showing right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select Show Buttons from the pop-up menu) The New Condition dialog appears

3 Select the condition type (Linear Area Count or Zone) from the pull-down menu accessed by the

down arrow next to the Type option

4 Press Tab or use the mouse (or stylus) to move to Name and enter a name for your condition

5 Specify the desired condition attributes See Condition Attributes for more detail

6 Click for condition to apply

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

31

Condition Attributes Each condition type will have related attributes to select or specify within the General and Advanced tabs of the New Condition dialog Once a condition has been used to takeoff a quantity from your plans certain attributes cannot be changed

All conditions allow the user to specify color and fill pattern for the object drawn

Linear Conditions

General Specify width and height by feet and inches Specify pitch in inches up to the nearest thousandth of an inch if applicable

Advanced Specify rounding for object quantities and droprun default length for electrical or plumbing drops at the ends of lines Select Connect to have lines connect at the corners where one line of the condition ends and another begins (and indicate Tolerance for the featurersquos activation as distance between the ends of two lines) Choose Trim to have lines automatically trim to a line being crossed Choose Curve to draw a curved line

Follow these examples for inputting feet and inches For 7 feet 6 inches type 706 for 13 feet 7 inches type 1307 For 20 feet type 2000

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

32

Area Conditions

General If needed you can specify the thickness (in inches) andor pitch (in inches)

Advanced Specify rounding for object quantities Choose to display an adjustable grid within the area and indicate matrix cell dimensions

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

33

Count Conditions

General

Specify height and indicate the size (in inches) and shape (square circle triangle rectangle or opening) of the count object as it will appear on screen

Advanced Count conditions have advanced attributes These options are available for all shapes except for openings

Zone Conditions Zones allow you to subdivide condition quantities making it easier to modify and complete jobs in phases They can be used at the end of a takeoff to isolate a group of condition quantities that are in different areas of the takeoff

Zones can also be used to break a takeoff into multi-phases and can even be used to isolate quantities while a job is in progress to group the amount of work that has been completed to date They can be applied to one or multiple pages in your plans automatically calculating the takeoff quantities for each zoned area

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

34

The zone feature is only available in Lite and Full Mode If you are in View Mode and would like

to use this feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade

Condition Notes A Note tab is provided for comments regarding the condition These notes will display on the Takeoff List report and will import into Quick Bid

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

35

Condition Results The Results tab of the New Condition is based on condition type Initial settings default to linear feet (LF) for linear conditions square feet (SF) for area conditions and count of items (EA) for count conditions and zones The first of the results fields will display for the condition items in the Takeoff dock bar area All results will display in worksheets and Takeoff List reports as well as in an Excel spreadsheet after being exported

Copying Conditions You may use the condition attributes from a condition yoursquove already created for any future conditions of the same type

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Click the Copy button from the toolbar

OR

3 Right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select copy

4 A new condition will appear in the list with the same condition attributes as the previous condition but with the quantities zeroed

Editing Conditions Once you have copied a condition you might want to change several attributes You can also edit an existing condition to fit any updated needs

1 Highlight the desired condition on the Takeoff dock bar

2 Click the Change button

OR

3 Double-click on the condition you wish to edit to bring up the Change Condition dialog

NOTE The Change Condition dialog differs from the New Condition dialog only in that if takeoffs

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

36

have been performed in your project with this condition you will not be able to change the type of condition or certain properties under the advanced tab of the dialog box

Deleting Conditions 1 Click on the condition in the Takeoff Dock bar area

2 Click the Delete button on the toolbar

OR

3 Right-click and select Delete from the pop-up menu

All takeoff associated with the deleted condition will be deleted immediately and permanently

Organizing Project Conditions Within your project you can create folders andor sub-folders for different types of conditions You may even want to create a folder containing conditions with reset values

To get started organizing your conditions make sure you are viewing the condition tree (right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select Show Tree)

Creating Folders and Sub-Folders 1 Right-click in the Takeoff Dock bar area

2 Select New gt Folder from the pop-up menu

Copying Folders

1 Click on the folder and click Copy on the toolbar

2 All copied conditions within the new folder will have values reset to zero

Renaming Folders

1 Click on the folder

2 Right-click and select Rename from the pop-up menu

3 Enter a name for your folder and click the Enter button

Changing Condition Order

You may move conditions up or down in the condition list of the Takeoff dock bar to suit your project needs

1 Select the condition you would like to move by clicking to highlight it

NOTE When you are ready to move the highlighted conditions be sure that you start

moving using the last condition chosen That condition will have a highlighted boarder

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

37

2 Drag and drop any the condition from one place to another in the list You may also move a condition to another folder on the list in this way

Drawing with Conditions Snap Angles Set up snap angles to prevent lines from appearing jagged Snap angles are commonly set at 15deg and shift snap angles at 0deg

1 Go to Tools gt Options Options dialog appears

2 Under the General tab make the desired settings

3 Click to save the settings As they are drawn lines will snap to the set degree

Drawing a Linear Object 1 Select a condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff dock bar

2 Move the cursor into the Image takeoff area of the screen you will see the cursor display as crosshairs

3 Click and hold left mouse button then drag mouse to draw a line

4 Release mouse button to set line

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

38

5 Repeat steps for further lines

Continuous Mode This feature allows you to draw an object that has connected lines

1 Click the icon from the Takeoff toolbar

OR

2 Go to Tools gt Continuous Mode

3 Follow steps 1-3 from Draw a Linear Object

4 Click at each point of intersection The object will be connected

5 Double-click after making the final point to set the lines

Drawing a Curve To draw a curved line the Curve option must be checked under the Advanced tab of the Condition dialog

1 Click where you want to begin the curve and drag in a straight line to the position for the other endpoint of the curve

2 Click on the line to select it Handles in the shapes of small squares will appear at either end of

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

39

the line and in the center of the line

3 Move the cursor over the center handles until the cursor becomes a two-way arrow

4 Click and drag in the direction of the curve bending the line as you move the cursor Release to set the curve (The line you began with will disappear)

Draw a circle by drawing two curved lines connected

Drawing an Area Object Area conditions are drawn similarly to continuous mode lines You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete your area takeoff

NOTE When drawing an area do not intersect the perimeter or line of the object you are drawing

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

3 The area will be filled with the pattern set for that condition

NOTE The simulated circle will be good enough for you to be able to make a bid

To create a circular area click from point to point with very short distances in between points simulating a circlersquos perimeter Double-click after setting the last point to set the area

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

40

Grid Options Grids give you an added advantage when installing materials such as tiles Use this feature to get a count for how many tiles are needed for an area

1 Double-click on an area condition in the Takeoff dock bar to open its Condition dialog

2 Click on the Advanced tab to show its options

3 Check the box next to Grid by clicking in it

4 Indicate the dimensions of the cell matrix in inches (For example 200 x 400)

5 Under Results tab choose each (EA) for one of the results fields This will tabulate a number of grid cells (including partial grid cells) in area

6 Click to save your settings

7 Use the Move Grid and Rotate Grid features in the Tools menu to manipulate the grid as desired

Grid Calculation

1 Go to Tools gt Options menu

1 Specify if On-Screen Takeoff automatically should Calculate Grid Position

2 If AreaGrid Size is selected On-Screen Takeoff will calculate the number of items needed to fill the grid based on grid demintions

3 Click to accept and close the dialog

To move a line at any angle (regardless of default setting) press the Shift key while moving the mouse

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

41

Backout Mode This feature allows you to take out part of an area and deduct that amount of square footage

1 Select Tools gt Backout Mode

2 Outline the are you want backed out as you would when drawing a regular area object (see Drawing an Area Object)

3 The outlined area will clear and quantities will be recalculated

NOTE The perimeter of the backout area will be added to the LF quantity for that condition

Drawing a Count Object Square triangle rectangle and circle shaped count objects can easily be placed on images

1 Select the condition

2 Click in the location where you want the object to appear

3 To place an opening-shaped count item like a door or window you must click over an existing linear object such as a wall

4 On the Results tab you can change the height properties to give you the result you need

5 If Backout is checked on the advanced tab for each count opening the opening-shaped count item will back out a corresponding section of the linear object

Opening shaped count items are sized at 3rsquo0rdquo by default

Drawing a Zone Zones are drawn in the same way as area objects and may be any polygonal shape You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete the zone perimeter

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

42

Selecting Objects

1 Use the Select Tool to select objects

You can also select all objects that correspond to a condition

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Right-click and choose Select All

3 All objects with this condition will be highlighted with squares as an outline

Moving and Resizing Objects Linear

1 To move or resize a linear object click anywhere on the line to select it

2 To move the line position your pointer over the center handles When the mouse is positioned over the handles you will see a two-way arrow You will only be able to move the line in the direction of the arrows

3 Drag the line to a new position

4 Clicking and dragging the handles on the ends of the line will allow you to lengthen or shorten your line

Area and Zone

1 To move an area object or zone in its entirety click and drag it to its new position

2 Grabbing a handle at a corner or intersection of the object will allow you to adjust and change its perimeter

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

43

Count 1 To move a square circle rectangle or triangle shaped count object click and drag

2 Click and drag an opening shaped count object along the length of the linear object to the desired position then release

NOTE An opening shaped count object may not be moved from its associated linear condition object however it may be moved up and down the length of the linear object

Layers On-Screen Takeoff allows you to sort and separate your takeoff objects within the same job and on the same page On-Screen Takeoff gives you this flexibility through the use of layers

By assigning different conditions to different layers (for example differentiating between floors ceilings and walls) you can choose to view all layers or turn off certain layers to display and print the remaining groups of conditions only You may also remove the background image of electronic plans add text and hot link symbols or print only your condition takeoffs

Layers are only available in Full Mode If you are in View or Lite Mode and would like to use this

feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade Default Layers

On-Screen Takeoff begins every project with three default layers Image Annotation and Default The Image layer holds the electronic plan files you may have in your project The Annotation layer possesses all text notations highlighting and hot links in the project The Default layer will appear in the Condition dialog when creating or editing a condition (listed in the takeoff dock bar) Conditions are assigned to the Default layer unless otherwise specified by the user

Creating Layers To assign a condition to a layer other than the default layer you must first create additional layers for your project

1 Select View gt Layers to open the Layers dialog

2 Click An unnamed layer will be added

3 Click within the empty box and type a name for your layer (for example Wall)

4 New layers are added as active layers The adjacent box under the Show column will be checked

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

44

Assigning a Layer to a Condition 1 Open the Condition dialog box by creating a new condition or editing an existing condition

2 Under the General tab click on the down arrow in the Layer field to display optional layers

3 Select the desired layer for the condition Only the Default layer and layers you have added will be displayed

4 Click

View and Hide Layers

1 Select View gt Layers

2 Under the Show column check the box to view or remove the check (by clicking on it) to hide the specific layer

3 Click to accept and close the Layers dialog

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

45

Assigning Text to a Layer When adding text to an image On-Screen Takeoff has the capability to assign the text to a specified layer

1 Select the Text Tool

2 Click at the point you want to place your text

3 Type in your text using the Enter key for line breaks

4 Click the drop down arrow next to the Layer field and select the desired layer

Section 7

46

Printing and Exporting

This section will

Printing options and procedures

Exporting data by copying and pasting

Exporting quantity results to Excel spreadsheets

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

47

Print Setup On-Screen Takeoff allows the user to print the image takeoff list and worksheet

1 Select File gt Print Setup The Print Setup dialog will open

2 Select a printer or leave the default selection listed (change from the default printer displayed by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the field)

3 Indicate page size and printer tray option (Source) Access page size options by clicking on the

down arrow at the right of the field

4 Choose Portrait or Landscape orientation

5 Click to accept and close the dialog

Printing Images The image area can include the electronic plans the takeoff objects added text and hot links To print a subset of these (for example just the takeoffs without the plans or the added text and hot link symbols) hide layers that you do not want to print (see Section 6 View and Hide Layers) When you are printing your images every page will show the scale of the takeoff you are printing

1 Click on the Image tab to display the area of your project

2 Select File gt Print (or Ctrl + P)

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

48

3 Select the desired view (What to print) and the Image Range

4 Click The second Print dialog will open

5 Change settings accordingly or click if you accept the default settings

Printing Takeoff Lists and Worksheets In Takeoff Lists and Worksheets you may hide columns to print only certain results or adjust column widths to fit the report within the page size selected

1 In Takeoff List or Worksheet view move your cursor to the right side of the columnrsquos title bar the cursor will display as a two-way arrow

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

49

2 Click and drag to adjust the width of the column Holding the mouse button you may

slide the title bar under the title bar to its left to hide the column completely

3 Select File gt Print or press Ctrl + P to access the Print dialog

4 Indicate desired printer and choose the number of copies

5 Click to print and close the dialog

When printing the condition list we suggest printing in landscape

To reset to the default column widths double-click on the right border of a column heading will reset the column to its right (or previously to its right before being hidden)

Print Preview 1 Select File gt Print Preview

2 Use and to vary your view 3 If viewing an image choose current full or scale view to see how it displays

4 For printed outputs that cover more than one page use and to view adjacent pages or click on the down arrow next to Page field and select the page you want displayed

Exporting Using the CopyPaste Feature You may copy all the data or sections from the worksheet and the takeoff list view in On-Screen Takeoff and paste it into another application When pasting into Excel the cell layout will be maintained

1 Highlight the areas you wish to paste Click and hold the left mouse button down as you drag the cursor over the area to be selected then releasing the mouse button

OR

2 Select the entire takeoff list quickly click on the left On-Screen Takeoff column header and hold and drag the cursor across the remaining column headings

The number of pages for the view selected will display in the lower left-hand corner The zoom percentage that applies to the view will be displayed in the lower right-hand corner next to page size of the drawing

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

50

3 In the worksheet view you may highlight rows by clicking on the numbered buttons to the left of each row clicking and dragging across column headings or clicking and dragging over individual cells in the worksheet

Click anywhere in the appropriate view to deselect the area

4 Once your selection is highlighted you may select Edit gt Copy or Ctrl C from the keyboard 5 On your monitor switch to the application into which you want to paste your selection 6 Select Edit gt Paste in the new application or simply press Ctrl + V to paste

The colored keys for conditions cannot be pasted

Using the Export Feature You may export condition quantities to specified cell location within an Excel worksheet file Cell target locations are assigned in the Results tab of the condition dialogs on the Export line relating to each quantity measurement type

On-Screen Takeoff will export takeoff quantity results for up to three different quantity types that you specify For instance you may want to know the number of square feet in a ceiling area as well as the number of linear feet in its perimeter

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

51

1 Bring up the Condition dialog by double-clicking on a condition in the takeoff dock bar or by

selecting the condition and clicking

2 Click on the Results tab to access its fields The default quantities for the condition type will display

3 For each results field click on the arrow to access the pull-down menu and select the appropriate quantity (for example SF LF EA etchellip)

4 Have your Excel spreadsheet opened and saved in a file

5 Specify the Excel spreadsheet cell locations where you want the results to go

6 For a cell in the first sheet of your spreadsheet type in the cell address (eg a1) Case is not important

7 For a cell on a successive sheet of your spreadsheet type in sheet the number followed by a comma and the cell address without any spaces (eg sheet2a1) Case is not important

8 Click

9 Select File gt Export gt Condition Qty to Excel

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

52

10 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

11 Click to export On-Screen Takeoff results to specified cell locations in the Excel file When you return to the Excel application you will see the values have been added to the specified cell locations in your spreadsheet

12 Save your Excel file

Exporting Worksheet to Excel

1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 From On-Screen Takeoff Select File gt Export gt Worksheet to Excel

4 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

5 Click When you return to the Excel application you will see the values from the Worksheet Tab have been added to your spreadsheet

6 Save your Excel file

Exporting Takeoff to CVS 1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 Click the Takeoff Tab in the project you want to export the information

4 Select File gt Export gt Takeoff to CSV

5 Browse to the location of the CSV spreadsheet file click file to select it

6 Click the Save

NOTE CSV files can be opened in Excel Lotus Access etc One may consider this option more of a ldquodumprdquo into a file

The Excel application must be active (it may be minimized on the application bar) with the target spreadsheet open in the application Otherwise an error will occur with the export operation that will affect both the On-Screen Takeofftrade file and the Excel spreadsheet

Section 8

53

Advanced Features

This section will

Some special features of working with condition objects in the takeoff area

Details of advanced options for conditions

Advanced features of the Project Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

54

Features to Use with Objects Roping Feature You can move copy or delete using this feature Using the Select tool (the pointer) you may select several objects at once by clicking and dragging an outline around the objects then releasing the mouse button Roping may select either objects completely within the outlined area (inclusive) or objects both within and touched by the outlined area (touching) Specify your roping preference under Tools gt Options

1 Click and hold the mouse button at a point on the screen near the objects to be selected and drag to surround the objects with an outline

2 Release the mouse button The objects will be selected

3 You may now

Move the group around on the page by clicking within the group dragging the mouse and releasing the button to place the objects

Delete the group of objects by clicking the Delete key or

Copy and paste by pressing Ctrl C to copy the group then Ctrl V to paste it The pasted copy of the grouped objects will appear slightly offset from the original objects

Section 8 Advanced Features

55

Applying a DropRun Count

Use the droprun feature when calculating quantities to take into account the drop or run of a linear condition such as electrical lines or plumbing pipes Drop or run lengths may be added separately to any linear condition on screen while a default droprun length may be indicated for a condition as a whole

1 Select the desired linear condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff Dock bar

2 Click the Change button in the toolbar to open the Change Condition dialog

3 Click the Advanced tab to access the advanced options and click inside the DropRun check box

4 Enter a default length to be applied to all of this condition Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches) You can leave the length blank and manually enter drop run on each segment drawn

5 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog

Edit DropRun Count

1 With the related linear condition in the Takeoff Dock bar highlighted or with the pointer tool selected

2 click on the desired linear object in the image takeoff area The Count button will become active

3 Click on the Count button (alternatively select Tools gt Count) The default droprun amount will show in the pop-up Count dialog (Default length will be zero if droprun has not been selected in this conditionrsquos properties)

4 Type in the desired length Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches)

5 Click the OK button The additional amount will be reflected in the corresponding quantity The new DropRun count will apply only to the object edited

Adding Text in Image View

On-Screen Takeoff allows you to place text comments around your quantity takeoffs that may be printed along with plan images and objects Text is automatically placed within the Annotation Layer (that includes text and hot links)

1 To place text on the image select the Text Tool and click at the point you want to place your text opening a text box

2 Type in your information clicking Enter for line breaks

3 When you are finished click the OK button to exit the text box

4 To reposition text simply click on the text (with the Text Tool active) to select it

5 Move the cursor over the text the cursor will now display as a four-way arrow

6 Click and drag the mouse to position the text as desired

Section 8 Advanced Features

56

1 To edit existing text use the Text Tool to double-click on the text to open the editing box

2 Enter additional text or use the Backspace key to delete text as necessary

Formatting Text Once created you may format the font size type style and color of your text

1 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Font or click on the Font button in the Takeoff Toolbar

2 Select the desired features (color options are disabled) and click the OK button

3 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Color or click on the Color button in the Takeoff Toolbar The Color dialog will open

4 Click on a color in the Basic Color palette or create a color and add to the Custom Colors palette (Be sure to click on the color in the Custom Colors palette to select it)

5 Click the OK button

Object Properties

Linear Objects

Linear objects may be set to connect at corners

A linear object may be set to trim automatically when crossing another linear object (Check the trim option under the advanced tab of the Condition dialog)

When you move a connected linear object objects automatically move and resize connected lines accordingly (quantities are then recalculated)

This feature requires that the connected linear object be moved using the center handles (does not apply when resizing the line from the ends)

Objects constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

Objects are measured from centerline to centerline

Section 8 Advanced Features

57

Area Objects When drawing an area use your escape key to undo the last line drawn You may reverse your

drawing of an area using the escape key

The area will not fill with color and pattern until the user double-clicks after the last line is set

Lines drawn to delineate an area object constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

After selecting an area to move or adjust position the mouse in the center to move the entire area position the mouse at the sides or corners to adjust the perimeter

Count Objects

All count objects are quantified by the physical number of objects per page and reported as EA for the UOM The quantity for the current Image View is (displayed in the Condition List) and the total quantity in your project is displayed in the Takeoff View and Worksheet View)

Square circle rectangle and triangle shaped count objects do not displace or subtract from other object quantities when placed on top of them However on the Advanced Tab for the count condition a connect property can be set (this is a check box) so that when a count object of this shape is put on top of a Linear type takeoff object it will move with the linear if said linear is moved

An opened-shaped count object must be placed within a linear object Opening shaped count objects may also be measured by linear foot or linear yard (EA SF and SY are also options) Opening shaped count items default to a width of 3rsquo 0rdquo at the time of creation This size can be changed The small medium and large size are not options on this type of condition anymore Check Backout on the Advanced tab for each Count object back out the footage (or yardage) of opening-shaped count objects in which they are placed

NOTE In order to see this Backout functionality (in quantity) for SY or SF deductions at least one of the

results for the Linear(s) this object will be placed on must be set to SY or SF and the count object must have a height quantity

Advanced Features of Conditions The Round Feature Under the Advanced tab of the linear and area Condition dialogues you may specify quantity rounding (in inches) For linear objects rounding applies to each linear object drawn For area objects rounding will apply to each segment of the area perimeter adjusting the perimeter and area calculations For example With a linear condition entering 12 in the Round field will round up each related linear object to the nearest 12 inches or one foot With this setting two walls of 1 4 would each round to 2 0 totaling 4 0

NOTE In the Takeoff Dock bar condition list and in the On-Screen Takeoff reports quantities will be displayed in whole numbers rounded up to the nearest foot However calculations are based on true quantities without rounding unless the Round Feature is engaged

Pitch Pitch may apply either to linear or area conditions It is measured in rise per linear foot Entering 12 indicates a 12 rise per 12 of linear distance (a pitch of 12 over 12) or an angle of 45deg

Section 8 Advanced Features

58

Advanced Features of Project Properties Selecting Multiple Pages

1 Select a single page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry

2 Drag the cursor down the column of numbers to select consecutive pages

3 Click on the blank button at the top of this column to select all pages in the Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

59

Changing Image Assigned to a Drawing 1 Select the page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry 2 Click the Change Image button The Change Image dialog box will appear

3 Navigate to the desired file and select by clicking on it

4 Click the Open button The electronic file assigned to the page will have been changed to reflect the new file choice

Changing Image File Path 1 Select pages as described above

2 Choose Change Folder

3 In the Change Folder dialog navigate to the appropriate folder

4 Click the OK button The file path will have been changed for the selected page entries

Delete a Page from Project Properties 1 Select the page you want to delete by clicking on its associated number (in the gray box at the

left of the entry)

2 Choose Delete Page

All Takeoff on the page will be deleted immediately and permanently

Section 8 Advanced Features

60

Advanced Features of Tool Options

Calculation Method On-Screen Takeoff has built-in calculation options to allow for faster work and faster saves until your takeoff is complete Calculation options are found by selecting Tools gt Options then clicking on the Calculation tab

Calculation method can be set to Automatic Automatic except Grids and Manual Manual will allow the program to operate more quickly while Automatic or Automatic except Grids allows the user to see quantity changes as takeoffs are made

In any mode you may press F9 to recalculate quantities for the On-Screen Takeoff current totals

Configuration Tab

When the ldquoPage Label (A01)rdquo radial button is chosen On-Screen Takeoff puts the numbered label on all the pages of in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar If the Page Descriptionrdquo radial button is chosen then a description of what takeoff is on that specific page will be shown in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar

This section of the configuration tab gives you options on how you want to export your information When the ldquoFolderSubfolder Namesrdquo radial button is chosen than on your file that you are exporting to will have all the conditions folders and subfolders In the Delimiter box you can choose the symbol that is needed to separate the information you are exporting Some files need semicolons () or colons () to make sure the information comes exported in is separated it the appropriate places

Section 8 Advanced Features

61

In previous versions of On-Screen Takeoff there are views that users need to have in order for them to display their information By either choosing ldquoOST 1xrdquo or ldquoOST 2xrdquo it will let the program know you want your columns of information exported in that specific format

When you have the Confirm Deletions radial button of ldquoYesrdquo chosen than every time you delete anything you will get a dialog box confirming your intentions of deletion

While working with your takeoff you have a choice to either view the legend of your conditions or hide it Choose whichever radial button that suits your needs

For those who prefer to use the Enter key to navigate in dialog boxes this option is just for that

Font Tab The Font tab is designed for you to make your own look and feel for the application At the bottom of this tab it will show you sample of the fonts and colors you have chosen

Renaming the Current Page You may change the name of the current page in the takeoff area of On-Screen Takeoff by selecting Edit gt Rename Page

This opens the Name Page dialog and you may simply type in a new name and click the Enter button The new name for the file will be reflected on the title bar for the page and in Project Properties

You also may access the Rename Page function by right-clicking in the takeoff area while in Image View and selecting the option from the pop-up menu that appears

Section 9

62

Saving and Exiting

This section will

Explain how to save projects

Show you how to safely exit the program

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

63

Saving Your Project

1 Select File gt Save 2 If your project has not previously been saved a Save dialog box will open to allow you to name

the file and choose the directory and folder in which to save your file 3 Once saved File gt Save will simply save the current version of the file

OR

4 Select File gt Save As then type in a new name for the file and save to the desired file path

The Auto-save Feature With the Auto-save feature On-Screen Takeoff automatically backs up your open project You may choose to have more than one level of backup files The first backup copy will have the extension b00 and successive files will be b01 b02 and so on If you have designated four levels of backup files after the fourth backup copy has been created (b03) the next file will be saved over the file with extension b00 Further backup saves will then rotate through the four backup files in the same way

1 Select Tools gt Options 2 In the Auto-save area (under the General tab) select the frequency of backup file creation (in

minutes) and the number of levels for the feature 3 You also may disengage the feature by clicking in the check box to clear it

The Auto-save feature automatically saves backup copies to the directory of the current project If you are working from a write-protected area such as a CD-ROM On-Screen Takeoff will place backup files in the On-Screen Takeoff folder

Exiting When you are finished using On-Screen Takeoff it is very easy to exit Exiting is very important because of security reasons If someone were to use your computer they could enter the application and view and manipulate information

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

64

On-Screen Takeoff closes the open project when you open another or create a new project or when you exit the program

1 Select File gt Exit

OR

2 You also may click at the upper right-hand corner of the application to exit

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

65

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer When you get your digitizer from GTCO you will need to connect it to your computer Follow the instructions outlined below to do this

Note For rollup digitizers the metal bar must be oriented to the top or right hand side

Connecting the Digitizer 1 Lay the digitizer out flat 2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer 3 Plug in the power adapter 4 Plug the interface (IO) cable into the digitizer 5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into an open serial port on computer

Note GTCO Technical support phone number is 410-381-6688 The electronic manual (on diskette) from GTCO contains more detailed installation and operation instructions for the GTCO digitizer model you have

Installing other Digitizer Drivers If you are using a GTCO Digitizer you will need to install the GTCO TabletWorks Drivers

If you are using a Digitizer not supported by GTCO Tablet Works 10 please contact the manufacturer of your digitizer for assistance with installation

Installing GTCO TabletWorks Drivers 1 Insert the On Center CD into the CD-ROM drive The CD Startup screen will open 2 Click on Install Software 3 Select Additional Software and Drivers 4 Select Digitizer Driver 5 Follow the instructions for installing TabletWorks 10

Adhering the Template The template is a small plastic sticker used to enable mouse function when using the digitizer with On-Screen Takeoff Place your template on your digitizer We suggest placing it in the bottom right corner of the digitizer about one inch inside the takeoff area

Note You may either peel off the back of the template and use the adhesive surface or you can tape the template down

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

66

Testing the Digitizer Drivers Before running OST you may test the digitizer by moving the stylus around on the digitizer pad it should move the mouse cursor (if mouse emulation is enabled)

If the digitizer does not move the mouse cursor on the screen

The superset codes may need to be reset Reset the superset codes by touching on the border of the digitizer with the stylus The digitizer should beep several times

The digitizer may not be communicating with the computer Be sure the COM port selected is correct Be sure the COM port selected is correct If you are not able to get the digitizer to move the mouse cursor you need to call GTCO technical support for help

Note The Mouse Emulation is not required for On-Screen Takeoff to work properly It is used only for the Template functionality if the digitizer is moving the cursor the wrong direction (up instead of sideways or vice-versa)

Click the L-shaped arrow symbol on the digitizer with the stylus

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

67

Appendix II Toolbar Items Main Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

68

Tool Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

69

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

70

Navigate Toolbar (Continued)

Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

71

Takeoff Toolbar (Continued)

Image Toolbar

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

72

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

This section will detail how to load plans from a F W Dodge CD-ROM into an On-Screen Takeoff project file ready for takeoffs

Dodge files may be added to the Project Properties dialog However loading the files in that way will load the files by number rather than name description If you want to load one page only from your Dodge CD You will have to rename the page to display the name rather than number of the file

To load plan files from a Dodge CD so that the files load sequentially by file number but are displayed by name rather than by number within your project follow the instructions below

Opening a Dodge project from a CD-ROM 1 Insert the CD into the drive 2 Choose File gt Custom 3 Choose Dodge Plans Project (plansdat) as the file type 4 Select the appropriate file type by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the Files of type

field 5 In the Look in field access your drive paths by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the

field then

Navigate to your CD-ROM drive Open the data folder and Open the Projects folder

6 Select the desired project and open its folder 7 Open the plansdat file 8 All the images will come in sequenced correctly for that job along with the full descriptions

(names) of each page If there is not a plans folder in the project folder then plans do not exist for that project on the CD Opening the plansdat file will yield an empty project

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

73

Appendix IV Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer The On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer is a limited version of On Center Softwarersquos commercial takeoff software If your status bar located at the very bottom of the main window says View Mode in the lower left-hand corner then you are using the Plan Viewer You can use the plan viewer to

View CD-based amp converted CAD drawings

View a previously created OST file and associated drawings

Download electronic plans online

Navigate through drawings

Quickly Takeoff linearsareas and counts

Zoom in to view the plan better

Print drawings directly from the viewer

Viewing an On-Screen Takeoff Project File

1 To open an OST file that was previously created with of On-Screen Takeoff 2 Select File gt Open 3 An Open dialog will appear if you do not see the OST file you are looking for select the

Look In drop down arrow 4 A drop down menu will appear listing the various folders drives and mapped drives located

on your computer select the correct drive or folder location and continue to browse to the location of your OST file

5 When you see your OST file double-click it to open it 6 Any takeoff and drawings should appear on the Image tab view

If you do not see the drawings but do see the colored takeoff layer the drawings may

not be located in the same place they were originally saved at Go to File gt Project Properties and check the Image File path for each listed page If the image file path is pointing to a CD drive make sure the CD is inside the CR-ROM

Downloading Electronic Plans If your Online Plan Service provides a special file format (OSX) required to use this feature of our plan viewer you can immediately downloaded all electronic plans of a project directly from our viewer

Most Plan Room web sites will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff when a request to download plans is made Your particular Plan Room may differ in operation so please contact the provider directly with questions on using the site

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

74

When you request to download or open a project file from a Plan Room you will usually have the open to open or save an OSX file Choosing open will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff Alternately you may choose to save the file to a local hard drive After you have saved the file either double-click it to launch On-Screen Takeoff or open the OSX file using On-Screen Takeoff by clicking File then Open and locating the file on your hard drive You will need to change the file type to OSX

After the OSX file is opened you will see an additional tab appear in the Conditions List window called Pages

The Pages tab shows the hierarchy of your project Gray file icons represent pages that have not been downloaded and blue icons represents pages that have been downloaded

To download a page simply double-click the page icon

If you wish to select a group of pages to download you can use the Ctrl or Shift key to multiple select them then click the Download button

If you wish to download all pages at once click the Download All button

Downloaded pages will now appear in the Project Properties dialog in the same order in which they appear in the Pages tab

Creating Quick Takeoffs With On-Screen Takeoff you can create quick takeoffs to measure quantities even if you dont have the full version of our program However using the Quick Takeoff functionality shows you just a fraction of what the full version can do

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar is located at the top of the image view It has three buttons designated for three types of takeoffs Linear Area and Count The Quantity drop down list will show secondary quantities for Linears and Areas The Units drop down allows you to select how you want your quantities displayed Feet Inches Yards Millimeters and Meters

NOTE Every time change the type of takeoff you are performing (switching from Area to Linear for example) the previous quantities and takeoff objects will disappear They will also disappear when you changes pages

NOTE You can use the Dimension Tool to basically measure the distance between two points or linears The distance will display on the status bar at the bottom of the application

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

75

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions General

Where is On-Screen Takeoff installed on my computer

Typically it is installed in CProgram FilesOn-Screen Takeoff

In Explorer how do I recognize On-Screen Takeoff file types

On-Screen Takeoff data is stored in a single file per job lsquojob name OSTrsquo On-Screen Takeoff templates are stored as lsquotemplate nameTPOrsquo

Can only one project at a time be open

Yes For that reason opening another project automatically closes the project on screen You will be asked to save any changes

Is only one scale allowed per page What about on drawings that have multiple detail sections on a page and each of those drawings have different scales

Yes For pages with drawings of different scales copy the drawing to another project page and set the appropriate scale

I cannot perform backout on an area that is along a linear

As a workaround use the On-Screen Takeoff layers feature to help you with this issue Electronic Images

How do I start a project from drawings that have been scanned and written to a CD-ROM

Open a new project Select File gt Project Properties and select Auto Add Navigate to your CD and the appropriate folder and select any image file in that location Click Open All files in the location will load into your project Recommended that images are copied from CD to hard drive for performance

If I get a disk of drawings in AutoCAD format (R13 or R14) can I read them in On-Screen Takeoff

Yes On-Screen Takeoff now reads DWG DXF and many other format that are saved with AutoCAD

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

76

When I click on the all pages button what is supposed to happen Currently nothing seems to change when I click on that button

The All Pages button is used to apply the Darken and Enhance Plans feature to all pages in the project (as opposed to only the current page on screen)

Is there a way to deduct a large skylight from an area condition

Yes with the related area condition selected in the Takeoff Dock bar unselect the Backout button on the Takeoff Toolbar then draw the Backout area The area quantity will be deducted from the related condition object and the linear measurement of the Backout perimeter will be added

Digitizer Issues

How do I connect a Digitizer to the computer

See Appendix I Connecting a Digitizer

The Place Template menu choice is disabled

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or the digitizer or the digitzer drivers are not installed

It wonrsquot let me select the Set Takeoff Area menu choice

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or no job is open a digitizer is not installed or the drivers are not installed

The digitizer stylus is not moving the cursor or crosshairs

Click S-0-1 superset on the digitizer

How do I convert my old GTCO Digitizer to work with On- Screen Takeofftrade

Call GTCO and they may be able to reconfigure your digitizer to be compatible with On-Screen Takeoff

Printing Issues Which Printers work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible printers include On-Screen Takeoff Hewlett Packard Epson and Canon printers If you are having printer difficulties please contact support and specify the type of printer along with other pertinent information Contact support at wwwoncentercomsupport or email supportoncentercom

Which Plotters work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible Plotters include Hewlett Packard DesignJet plotters and the EnCAD Cadjet II If you are having plotter difficulties please contact support and specify the type of plotter concerned

ViewingDisplay I can no longer see my condition list How do I get it back

The toolbars and Dock bars can be turned on and off through the View gt Toolbars menu options

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

77

This is also accessible by right-clicking in the toolbar area and selecting (or deselecting) a toolbar listed

I cannot view my folders in the condition list

Right-click in the Takeoff Dock barcondition list area and select Show Tree to display your folders

My Status Bar reads Viewer Mode and I am unable to draw conditions

On-Screen Takeoff needs to be Authorized Or you need to purchase an upgrade Click the Perform Advanced Takeoff button on the main toolbar

I hid a Dock bar and when I selected to view it again it appeared alongside the other Dock

bar instead of stacked on top of it How do I fix it

Pick up the Dock bar by clicking on the bar at the top and continuing to hold down the mouse button drag the Dock bar over the other one It will resize and appear stacked with the other

When I open image files from a CD the images are all upside down How do I get them right

side up

To flip pages from top to bottom follow the steps below 1 Click the All Pages button on the Image Toolbar (All Pages is engaged when the button

is not clicked) 2 Click the Flip Horizontal button on the Image Toolbar 3 Click the All Pages button again to disengage

Templates How do I create a Template

Follow the steps below 1 Create a typical project 2 Choose File gt Save As 3 Choose On-Screen Takeoff Template Files as the file type to save 4 Name the file This will save all of the condition setups as well as the layers for the

project

How do I create a new project from a template

Follow the steps below 1 Choose File gt New 2 Select a template from those listed in the New dialog This will open a new project with

conditions and layers saved from a previous project but no pages or takeoff

78

INDEX

Area Conditions 32

Area Objects 57

Auto Scrolling 20

Auto-save 63

Backout Mode 41

Calculation Method 60

Conditions 29

Configuration 60

Contents Tab 6

Continuous Mode 38

Count Conditions 33

Count Objects 57

Digitizer 10 65 76

Docking Toolbars 13

Dodge CD 72

Drawing 27 37

DropRun Count 55

Environment 18

Exiting 63

Exporting 49

Features 16

Font 61

Frequently Asked Questions 75

Grid 40

Help File 5

Hiding Toolbars 13

Hot Links 21

Image 19 59

Image files 9

Image Toolbar 12 71

Images 75

Index Tab 6

Layers 43

Linear Conditions 31

Linear Objects 56

Main Toolbar 12 67

Menus 14

Moving Toolbars 13

Navigate Toolbar 12 69

Navigating 20

On-Screen Takeofftrade 2

Page 59 61

Pages 20 25 28

Plan Viewer 73

Plans 26

Printing 47 76

Project Properties 25

Projects 22

Quick Start Video 18

Resizing Toolbars 13

Roping 54

Saving 63

Scale 28

Search Tab 7

Selecting Objects 42

Setup 8

Start On-Screen Takeofftrade 17

System Requirements 9

Takeoff 19 27

Takeoff Toolbar 70 71

Takeoff Toolbar 12

Template Files 23

TIF (Group4) 9

Tool Toolbar 12 68

Toolbar 67

Toolbars 12

View Toolbar 12 69

Viewing Toolbars 12

Worksheet 20

Zone Conditions 33

Zoom Toolbar 12 69

  • On-Screen Takeoff Lite
  • Table of Contents
  • Section 1 - Introduction
  • Section 2 - Setup
  • Section 3 - Toolbars and Menus
  • Section 4 - Features
  • Section 5 - Projects
  • Section 6 - Conditions and Takeoff
  • Section 7 - Printing and Exporting
  • Section 8 - Advanced Features
  • Section 9 - Saving and Exiting
  • Appendix I - Installing Your Digitizer
  • Appendix II - Toolbar Items
  • Appendix III - Loading Plans from a Dodge CD
  • Appendix IV - Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer
  • Appendix V - Frequently Asked Questions
  • Index

Section 1 Introduction

3

About this Guide This guide is intended to be a compliment to On-Screen Takeoff software The sections are presented in an order intended to help new users understand the software The User Guide provides detailed information about On-Screen Takeoff tools and commands It is designed to assist you in applying program features to your estimating projects Use it as a reference tool along with the online help system in your day to day work with On-Screen Takeoff

Table of Contents outlines the sections and topics covered in each section

Section 1 Introduction explains the user guide and helpful resources

Section 2 Setup lists system requirements and recommended components

Section 3 Toolbars and Menus explains the toolbars and menus used in On-Screen Takeoff

Section 4 Features gives you a tour of the On-Screen Takeoff environment and shows you how to navigate through your projects

Section 5 Projects leads you through your first time with the program or if yoursquore an old hand at On-Screen Takeoff reacquainting yourself with the software

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff shows you features of working with condition objects zones and backouts in the takeoff area

Section 7 Printing and Exporting explains the step-by-step of printing images and reports copying and pasting data from On-Screen Takeoff and exporting quantity results to an Excel spreadsheet

Section 8 Advanced Features discusses special and advanced features of On-Screen Takeoff conditions and options

Section 9 Saving and Exiting explains how to save projects and safely exit the program Appendixes gives you additional information on installing a digitizer toolbar item details loading files using the plan viewer and frequently asked questions Index provides key words or phrases the program application and references the page(s) in the user guide where they can be found

Section 1 Introduction

4

Extras Along the way yoursquoll encounter bits of information that make the User Guide not only more readable but more personal and relevant The signs and signals placed throughout the guide will better help you understand On-Screen Takeoff and On Center Software We think yoursquoll find these bits and pieces interesting Herersquos what to look for

NOTE

To make special notice of specific information

Caution Warning This symbol is there to insure that you are following the information to minimize risk

This symbol represents information that also appears on the Quick Start Video

In this manual some information is specific to using a digitizer The icon appears alongside this information (Must be in Full Mode to use a digitizer)

A reminder is there to keep the information in mind for future consideration

For Your Informationhellip

Instruction Jargon

In this guide click or double-click refers to clicking on the left mouse button A right-click clicking on the right mouse button will be specifically stated

Click the digitizer refers to clicking down once with the stylus pen

NOTE When using a digitizer a click or double-click refers to pressing the ball tip of the stylus pen right on the digitizer (usually in the takeoff area) A right-click can be accomplished by using the digitizer mouse template and the first button on the stylus pen See Appendix I Installing You Digitizer for more information

Drag and drop is holding down the left mouse button after clicking on an object You may simply drag the object to the desired location and release the mouse button

Section 1 Introduction

5

Typographic Conventions

The following are typographical conventions to be aware of when reading this guide

Menu items you are instructed to choose appear in a different typeface with the greater than (gt) symbol separating each menu level For example if you are instructed to select the Open command in the File menu it appears as File gt Open If you are instructed to select the Save As command from the File menu it appears as File gt Save As

Helpful hints or information about the topic are provided throughout the document They will be labeled lsquoNOTErsquo (all caps and bold font to catch your attention)

Several topics will have more detailed steps outlined in either another section of the user guide or in the Appendix They will always be referenced and italicized For example ldquoSee Editing Conditions for more informationrdquo

Help File In combination with this User Guide and the Quick Start video (Help gt Watch Quick Start Video) the Help File will also be a great resource for product information and application There are additional resources available on the website at wwwoncentercom or Help gt Visit our Website Follow these instructions to open the Help file

1 Select Help gt Help Topics

2 This will open the On-Screen Help File

Hide and Show Buttons

The Hide and Show buttons will either remove or display the Topics panel in the Help dialog

Back Button

The Back button takes you back to the last help page you viewed It will be available only if you have navigated through multiple pages in the help file

Print Button

Clicking will print the topic displayed This is helpful if the instructions to follow are long and you prefer to work on a full screen

Options Button

The Options button will allow you to pick from a list of commands to help you navigate the Help file

Section 1 Introduction

6

Contents Tab This tab provides a quick breakout of the Contents of the help file It should be used like the Table of Contents of a book Simply double-click on the book icon to open the chapter Then click the desired page icon to display the relevant information

Index Tab This tab allows you to locate a specifically indexed topic This should be used as you would a book index Begin typing a word in the index entry field and the system will automatically move within the list to the entries closest in spelling to your word(s) Begin typing the topic word to access it in the list quickly

Section 1 Introduction

7

Search Tab This tab works like a word find It allows you to search for any word contained in the Help file Type the

word you are looking for in the lsquoType in the keyword to findrsquo field Click A list of topics containing that word will appear Scroll through the list and double click on the topic you want displayed

Section 2

8

Setup

This section will

Let you know what system requirements you will need to have in place

Recommend components that work well with the software

Help Full Mode users install a digitizer

Section 2 Setup

9

Minimum System Requirements To use On-Screen Takeoff your computer must meet the following minimum system requirements

An IBM PC or 100 compatible computer with a Pentium II or faster Intel processor

Memory Requirements 200 MB of available hard-disk space and256 MB RAM (128 MB preferred)

Windows 2000 SP4 and Windows XP SP2 256 color video card Super VGA display card Mouse 15-inch monitor

While these are the minimum system requirements Windows places heavy demands on your systems resources The more available memory in your computer the faster and more efficient On-Screen Takeoff will operate

Recommended Components

For the best performance we recommend the following components

Pentium III or faster processor

512 or more of RAM

12X speed CD-ROM or better

17-inch monitor or dual monitors Graphic adapter with 128 MB or more VRAM Sound card and speakers installed

NOTE In order to utilize the Training Videos you must have a sound card and speakers installed

Compatible File Formats The resolution in electronic plans does not need to be more that 200 DPI (Dots per Inch) The preferred file format is a black and white TIF (Group4) On-Screen Takeoff recognizes image files with the following extensions

File Extensions View Mode Lite Mode Full Mode TIF X X X PDF X X X OSE X X X JPG X X X CPC X X X CAL X DGN X DWG X DXF X OSP X PLN X PLT X

Section 2 Setup

10

NOTE Use the following image types for best results

Convert to TIF

The converted files will be stored in a folder with the name of the current On-Screen Takeoff project Since the conversion can be very time consuming you should only select this option if you really intend to convert vector files to TIF

1 Select File gt Project Properties

2 In the Pages Field add your image See Section 5 Establishing Project Setting Adding Pages

3 Click

4 Then select the page with the drawing you wish to convert

5 Click

Installing Your Digitizer The following instructions are a quick start to installing your digitizer For more specific information please reference Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer at the end of this guide

Connecting Your Digitizer

Upon receiving your digitizer (either a GTCO or another brand) you will need to connect it to your computer

1 Lay the digitizer out flat

2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer

3 Plug in the power supply

4 Plug the interface cable into the digitizer

5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into the computer

NOTE On-Screen Takeoff is compatible with any tablet that is WinTab compatible

Digitizer options are only available in Full Mode If you are in View or Lite Mode and would like

to use this feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade

Section 3

11

Toolbars and Menus

This section will

Introduce the program toolbars

Familiarize you with On-Screen Take Offtrade Menu options

Section 3 Toolbars and Menus

12

Toolbars On-Screen Takeoff is equipped with several helpful toolbars for application efficiency See Appendix II Toolbar Item` Details for a detailed description of each toolbar item Individually the toolbars may be displayed moved docked reshaped or hidden from view You can also create costume toolbars to fit your needs

Main Toolbar

Tool Toolbar

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Takeoff Toolbar

Image Toolbar Viewing Toolbars Toolbars are displayed on the screen and will be consistent on each tab or page (Some toolbars or toolbar items will be in an inactive state if they donrsquot have a supporting element in the application)

1 Select View gt Toolbars and select the appropriate toolbar name

OR

2 Right-click on a toolbar region of the screen

3 Check the toolbars you want to display

Section 3 Toolbars and Menus

13

Moving Toolbars The toolbars may be positioned anywhere on the screen you wish This feature is provided to allow the flexibility for positioning the toolbars so they are out of your way yet handy for use

1 Click on an edge of the toolbar holding down the mouse button drag it to its new position

2 Release the mouse button to set it in place

NOTE If the toolbar is dropped anywhere other than a screen edge it will become free floating This feature is especially handy when using multiple monitors

Docking Toolbars The toolbars can be docked to any of the screen edges

1 Click on the title bar of an undocked toolbar

2 Drag the toolbar to any location on the screen

Hiding Toolbars

1 Select View gt Toolbars and select the toolbar you wish to remove from the screen

2 Right-click on the toolbar or dock bar areas

3 A floating toolbar can be closed by clicking on the in the upper right corner of the toolbar

Resizing Toolbars Only undocked (floating) toolbars may be resized

1 Position the mouse pointer over an edge

2 Click and drag

3 The toolbar can be resized as desired

Customizing the Toolbars You may rearrange or delete buttons within a toolbarrsquos display or you may move buttons from one toolbar to another If you find that you use a few tools over and over you may want to group them within a single toolbar for convenience On-Screen Takeoff gives you the flexibility to customize your takeoff environment

1 Select Tools gt Customize The Customize dialog will open

2 With the dialog open click on a toolbar button and drag buttons from one toolbar to another or a new location within the same toolbar

3 To add a button without altering another toolbar click on the Commands tab of the Customize dialog and drag the appropriate symbol from the Buttons section to a toolbar

4 To remove a button drag it to within the takeoff area of the application

Section 3 Toolbars and Menus

14

Menus

Section 3 Toolbars and Menus

15

Digitizer Menu

Section 4

16

Features

This section will

Show you how open On-Screen Takeoff

Describe the On-Screen Takeoff environment

Teach you how to navigate pages

Section 4 Features

17

Start On-Screen Takeoff

1 On your desktop double-click your On-Screen Takeoff icon

2 The application will open

OR

3 Left-click on the Start button on your computerrsquos toolbar

4 Scroll up to Programs gt On Center Software

5 Highlight On-Screen Takeoff and click On-Screen Takeoff will open On-Screen Takeoff opens to an untitled blank project The Image view of the screen will be a blank page

Two blank dock bars the Pan dock bar and the Takeoff dock bar appear at the left side of the screen Along the bottom the Status bar displays user status or context-sensitive messages as well as paper size and current zoom percentage of the plan sheet on screen The menu bar and several task specific toolbars are located at the top of the screen

NOTE All toolbars and dock bars may be accessed to view or hide through View gt Toolbars on the menu bar

Section 4 Features

18

Quick Start Video When On-Screen Takeoff opens you will be given an option to watch the Quick Start video (recommended) or start the program without watching the video

The 20 minute video will demonstrate key program functionality and allow you to view application instruction for enhanced learning

If you would like to watch the video click If you prefer to get started without

the video click If you have already viewed the video click the lsquoDo not show this message againrsquo box to prevent this dialog from appearing each time you open the program

NOTE If you decide later that you would like to watch the Quick Start video go to Help gt Watch

Quick Start Videos

On-Screen Takeoff Environment The On-Screen Takeoff environment acts like your drafting table allowing you to work on several sheets of plans at once and to reference at a glance the entire drawing and your position on that drawing while giving you the power of a computer to track analyze print and export your takeoff quantities and plans

The screen is bordered at the top by the Menu bar with pull-down menus and at the bottom by the Status bar which indicates current user status plan page size and current zoom percentage of page The largest portion of the application screen will be your takeoff area bounded on the left (by default) by two dock bars and on the top by several toolbars

In the takeoff area you may view your project plans (images) andor takeoff objects the takeoff list with quantities the worksheet or a legend of your condition list

The main window of On-Screen Takeoff has three tabs located at the bottom left allowing for quick change between Image Takeoff or Worksheet views Select the desired view option on the toolbar and it will automatically open on your screen

Section 4 Features

19

Image View

This view shows the plan file andor takeoff conditions drawn from your plans

Takeoff View This view displays the height if applicable and quantity breakdowns of your conditions according to result types indicated (eg linear feet square feet or count of items) for zones pages and the project as a whole It also displays notes per condition

Section 4 Features

20

Worksheet View This view displays the condition and quantity in units of measure specified in the first results field of the Results tab in the Condition dialog and allows the user to enter amounts for material labor and subcontractor takeoffs

NOTE When in the Worksheet view tab out the field then save This is keep all the values saved

Navigating On-Screen Takeoff

Auto Scrolling When creating linear areas or zones On-Screen Takeoff will automatically scroll the image view when necessary It will move as your mouse or digitizer moves beyond the edge of the current view

Changing Pages

1 Select View gt Next Page Previous Page or Go To Page (specify page number for the Go to Page option)

2 You may also select the corresponding arrows for these options from the Navigate Toolbar The

drop down arrow in the Page field will list the pages The and arrows will take you to the

previous or next page The and arrows will take you to the first or last page

OR

Section 4 Features

21

3 Or press Ctrl G for the Go To Page dialog

Hot Links Hot links allow you to move quickly from one drawing to the pertinent area of another drawing A hot link is handy when viewing enlarged areas of a page and needing the ability to jump back to a reference page

1 Select Tools gt Hot Link

OR

2 Click from the Tools Toolbar

3 Click on the page where you want to set the link The Hot Link dialog will open

4 Using the current page display on the Navigate Toolbar access the pull-down menu of pages by

clicking on the arrow at the right

5 Select the page for your link (You may also choose View gt Go to Page and select by page number)

6 Manipulate the view using the zoom tool and the scroll bars

7 Click

8 After joining a hot link to another page the hot link arrows in the Navigation Toolbar will become active

9 Move a hot link to another location on the page by clicking then click and drag the hot link image anywhere on the page

Section 5

22

Projects

This section will

Help you create settings important to your projects

Explain how On-Screen Takeoff works with your electronic or paper plans

Section 5 Projects

23

Project Template Files You can begin your project with a template Templates allow you to take advantage of conditions and settings used with previous projects

On-Screen Takeoff templates contain condition lists and established layer separations from previous projects you have created You may also use the sample templates provided with On-Screen Takeoff as a great starting point All aspects of the templates may be adjusted for a new project

1 Select File gt New and click the OK button

2 From the New dialog box choose the template that best fits your project

3 The conditions for this template will appear in the Takeoff Dock bar and the Project Properties dialog will open asking for further information

4 Use File gt Save or File gt Save As to rename and save your new project

Saving a Project as a Template File You can save your condition properties and layers as a template for future projects

1 Select File gt Save As

2 Enter a name for your template and select On-Screen Takeoff Template Files (tpo) from the Save As type field of the dialog (click on the down arrow to select)

3 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog Modifying a Template File Follow these steps to modify an existing template file if you need to change or add conditions andor layers

1 Select File gt Open

2 Navigate to your Projects directory

3 In the File Type drop-down select On-Screen Takeoff Template files (tpo)

4 Choose the On-Screen Takeoff template file you would like to modify and click the OK button

5 Make appropriate changes

6 Save and close file

The On-Screen Takeoff template files cannot save takeoff information

Section 5 Projects

24

Opening an Existing Project File 1 Select File gt Open

2 Navigate to the desired file location

3 Click the Open button

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask

you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Creating a New Project

1 Select File gt New

2 For a blank untitled project click

3 At this point the Project Properties dialog will pop-up for more information about your takeoff

NOTE The following are important to keep in mind when beginning a new project

At the start of your project fill out the Project Properties settings to establish the name for all printed output from your project set the default page size and scale for your plans number and names of different pages within the project and locations of electronic drawings

Scale settings can significantly affect quantity outcomes Be sure to set the scale for each page of drawings before beginning condition takeoffs

When using a digitizer remember to make a mark with a pen or pencil in the upper left and lower right corners of the first sheet of the paper plans to delineate the takeoff area for that sheet You can then set the takeoff area on On-Screen Takeoff using your marks

Save your project before you begin taking off any conditions On-Screen Takeoff will write a back-up file using the same file name

Remember the Undo feature If you make a mistake select Edit gt Undo and reverse the process step by step

Section 5 Projects

25

Project Properties

You can either set your Project Properties when you create a new takeoff or once your project file is saved under the appropriate name

1 Select File gt Project Properties the Project Properties dialog box will appear

2 Type in the name of your project to appear on printouts Use the backspace andor delete keys to edit the name as necessary

3 Press the Tab key to move to the Default Image Size option or click within the Image Size box You may click on the arrow at the right for the pull-down menu of page size options or you can use the down-arrow key on your keyboard to scroll through the list to the appropriate selection

4 Press the Tab key to move to the Default Scale option Select a scale by using the drop down arrow If your scale is metric you will need to click in the box next to Metric to convert to that measurement

5 Establish the number of pages for your project plans And load image files See Adding Pages to

Your Project

Adding Pages to Projects Individual Electronic Plans

1 Click on in the Project Properties dialog

2 In the Add Images dialog use the drop down arrow to navigate to the appropriate directory and folder containing your image

3 Select the file so that it displays in the File name field then click The file will display by name and path in the Image File field in Project Properties dialog

4 Click to accept and your project will automatically open

5 Save your project with the new settings by selecting File gt Save

Section 5 Projects

26

Electronic plans scanned from blueprints (as opposed to blue lines) will display as white lines on a black background and are difficult to read on your computer screen Select Image gt Invert and the colors will invert to black on white

You may have noticed the Page column in the Project Properties dialog Generally plan images occupy one page and 1 will be listed in the column indicating Page 1 of your plan file If you import a multi-page TIF a plan file containing more than one page of plans they will import as separate pages and each successive page will be indicated under the Page column as 1 2 3 etc of the plan file

Group of Electronic Plans You may add all the electronic plan files from a particular source (for example from a CD) by using the Auto Add feature

1 Click the button in the Project Properties dialog

2 Browse until you find the appropriate directory and folder containing your plan images

3 Click on any file displayed within your target folder so that the file name appears in the File name box of the Auto Add dialog

4 Click The image paths and file names will be recorded into the project properties arranged alphabetically

5 Click to accept your choices and your project will automatically open

6 Save your project with the new settings by selecting File gt Save

To load Dodge Plans into your Project Properties see Appendix IIi Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

Paper Plans On-Screen Takeoff makes it easy for Full Mode users to perform quantity takeoffs from paper plans using a digitizer

1 Add pages by clicking until you have the number of pages initially in the project

2 Name each page by clicking within the Title area and typing the name

3 Click to accept your choices and close the Project Properties dialog

4 Save your project with the new project properties settings by selecting File gt Save

Section 5 Projects

27

Setting Up a Drawing Template On-Screen Takeoff provides the convenience of using the same work surface for both digitizer and mouse to allow the user to draw conditions and then edit settings of the project or add or change conditions without breaking stride A mouse pad template included with the program defines the area of the digitizer in which use of the stylus or cursor will be recognized as mouse movement as opposed to drawing movement

1 Place your stylus on On-Screen Takeoff

2 Placing the template identifies the location mouse movements will be recognized by the program

Before placing the template the template must be applied to the digitizer surface This may have been done during the installation of your digitizer We suggest attaching the template to the lower right corner of the digitizer surface about one inch inside the grid area

3 Select Digitizer gt Place Template

4 Follow the instruction prompts on the screen clicking first on the target symbol at the left of the On-Screen Takeoff box on the template then on the target at the right

Setting Takeoff Area Before you can begin taking off a drawing you must define the drawing area on the digitizer This requires defining an area that will include all objects on each drawing of your plans As you add pages to your takeoff the same area of the digitizer will be active

1 Secure the plans to the digitizer with tape or a set of clamps

2 With a pen or a pencil mark the upper left corner and the lower right corner of the first page in your set of plans

3 Select Digitizer gt Set Takeoff Area

4 Click each mark with the stylus pen as prompted

5 Verify the active area of the digitizer by looking at the image size located in the lower right corner of your screen

If you close the program before the takeoff is complete you will need to reestablish the takeoff area before you can add additional condition quantities

Electronic plans appear on your computer screen eliminating the need to set a takeoff area You simply drag your mouse across the conditions you wish to takeoff The conditions will be highlighted and quantities will be totaled instantly Electronic plans are available through a variety of services For information contact an On Center Software account manager

Section 5 Projects

28

Setting Scale for Specific Pages You may set the scale in each page view separately This will override the default scale setting in Project Properties for that page Setting the correct scale for the drawing before taking off quantities ensures accurate calculations Be careful to check the scale for each drawing in your project before doing takeoffs

1 Display the page you want to set select Edit gt Set Scale

2 Use the drop down arrow to select a scale that will be applied to that page

3 Click

OR

4 Access the pull-down scale settings on the Navigate toolbar

NOTE As you draw objects notice that the drawn object is similar in width to the object on your plans If it is not the scale set may not be correct

Calculating Scale You may calculate scale according to a known measurement between two points either with a digitizer or on electronic plans

1 Select Edit gt Calculate Scale using Image or Edit gt Calculate Scale using Digitizer

2 Follow the instructions in the related Calculate Scale dialog box You will be asked to click on the first and second points then to enter the dimension for that distance

3 The scale will be recalculated for the displayed page and the Scale display on the Navigate toolbar will show the new scale

Section 6

29

Conditions and Takeoff

This section will Draw Conditions to Takeoff Plan Quantities

What Zones will do to help your takeoff process

Discuss the ins and outs of Takeoffs

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

30

Creating Conditions

If you are starting a new project from scratch you will need to create conditions to takeoff quantities such as floor areas wall lengths and corner bead counts If you are using a template you will have several pre-designed conditions already listed on the Takeoff dock bar However you may want to change the characteristics of some conditions or create additional conditions for a particular project

1 Right Click within the Takeoff dock bar Select New gt Condition

Or

2 From the Takeoff dock bar Click (if the buttons are not showing right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select Show Buttons from the pop-up menu) The New Condition dialog appears

3 Select the condition type (Linear Area Count or Zone) from the pull-down menu accessed by the

down arrow next to the Type option

4 Press Tab or use the mouse (or stylus) to move to Name and enter a name for your condition

5 Specify the desired condition attributes See Condition Attributes for more detail

6 Click for condition to apply

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

31

Condition Attributes Each condition type will have related attributes to select or specify within the General and Advanced tabs of the New Condition dialog Once a condition has been used to takeoff a quantity from your plans certain attributes cannot be changed

All conditions allow the user to specify color and fill pattern for the object drawn

Linear Conditions

General Specify width and height by feet and inches Specify pitch in inches up to the nearest thousandth of an inch if applicable

Advanced Specify rounding for object quantities and droprun default length for electrical or plumbing drops at the ends of lines Select Connect to have lines connect at the corners where one line of the condition ends and another begins (and indicate Tolerance for the featurersquos activation as distance between the ends of two lines) Choose Trim to have lines automatically trim to a line being crossed Choose Curve to draw a curved line

Follow these examples for inputting feet and inches For 7 feet 6 inches type 706 for 13 feet 7 inches type 1307 For 20 feet type 2000

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

32

Area Conditions

General If needed you can specify the thickness (in inches) andor pitch (in inches)

Advanced Specify rounding for object quantities Choose to display an adjustable grid within the area and indicate matrix cell dimensions

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

33

Count Conditions

General

Specify height and indicate the size (in inches) and shape (square circle triangle rectangle or opening) of the count object as it will appear on screen

Advanced Count conditions have advanced attributes These options are available for all shapes except for openings

Zone Conditions Zones allow you to subdivide condition quantities making it easier to modify and complete jobs in phases They can be used at the end of a takeoff to isolate a group of condition quantities that are in different areas of the takeoff

Zones can also be used to break a takeoff into multi-phases and can even be used to isolate quantities while a job is in progress to group the amount of work that has been completed to date They can be applied to one or multiple pages in your plans automatically calculating the takeoff quantities for each zoned area

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

34

The zone feature is only available in Lite and Full Mode If you are in View Mode and would like

to use this feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade

Condition Notes A Note tab is provided for comments regarding the condition These notes will display on the Takeoff List report and will import into Quick Bid

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

35

Condition Results The Results tab of the New Condition is based on condition type Initial settings default to linear feet (LF) for linear conditions square feet (SF) for area conditions and count of items (EA) for count conditions and zones The first of the results fields will display for the condition items in the Takeoff dock bar area All results will display in worksheets and Takeoff List reports as well as in an Excel spreadsheet after being exported

Copying Conditions You may use the condition attributes from a condition yoursquove already created for any future conditions of the same type

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Click the Copy button from the toolbar

OR

3 Right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select copy

4 A new condition will appear in the list with the same condition attributes as the previous condition but with the quantities zeroed

Editing Conditions Once you have copied a condition you might want to change several attributes You can also edit an existing condition to fit any updated needs

1 Highlight the desired condition on the Takeoff dock bar

2 Click the Change button

OR

3 Double-click on the condition you wish to edit to bring up the Change Condition dialog

NOTE The Change Condition dialog differs from the New Condition dialog only in that if takeoffs

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

36

have been performed in your project with this condition you will not be able to change the type of condition or certain properties under the advanced tab of the dialog box

Deleting Conditions 1 Click on the condition in the Takeoff Dock bar area

2 Click the Delete button on the toolbar

OR

3 Right-click and select Delete from the pop-up menu

All takeoff associated with the deleted condition will be deleted immediately and permanently

Organizing Project Conditions Within your project you can create folders andor sub-folders for different types of conditions You may even want to create a folder containing conditions with reset values

To get started organizing your conditions make sure you are viewing the condition tree (right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select Show Tree)

Creating Folders and Sub-Folders 1 Right-click in the Takeoff Dock bar area

2 Select New gt Folder from the pop-up menu

Copying Folders

1 Click on the folder and click Copy on the toolbar

2 All copied conditions within the new folder will have values reset to zero

Renaming Folders

1 Click on the folder

2 Right-click and select Rename from the pop-up menu

3 Enter a name for your folder and click the Enter button

Changing Condition Order

You may move conditions up or down in the condition list of the Takeoff dock bar to suit your project needs

1 Select the condition you would like to move by clicking to highlight it

NOTE When you are ready to move the highlighted conditions be sure that you start

moving using the last condition chosen That condition will have a highlighted boarder

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

37

2 Drag and drop any the condition from one place to another in the list You may also move a condition to another folder on the list in this way

Drawing with Conditions Snap Angles Set up snap angles to prevent lines from appearing jagged Snap angles are commonly set at 15deg and shift snap angles at 0deg

1 Go to Tools gt Options Options dialog appears

2 Under the General tab make the desired settings

3 Click to save the settings As they are drawn lines will snap to the set degree

Drawing a Linear Object 1 Select a condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff dock bar

2 Move the cursor into the Image takeoff area of the screen you will see the cursor display as crosshairs

3 Click and hold left mouse button then drag mouse to draw a line

4 Release mouse button to set line

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

38

5 Repeat steps for further lines

Continuous Mode This feature allows you to draw an object that has connected lines

1 Click the icon from the Takeoff toolbar

OR

2 Go to Tools gt Continuous Mode

3 Follow steps 1-3 from Draw a Linear Object

4 Click at each point of intersection The object will be connected

5 Double-click after making the final point to set the lines

Drawing a Curve To draw a curved line the Curve option must be checked under the Advanced tab of the Condition dialog

1 Click where you want to begin the curve and drag in a straight line to the position for the other endpoint of the curve

2 Click on the line to select it Handles in the shapes of small squares will appear at either end of

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

39

the line and in the center of the line

3 Move the cursor over the center handles until the cursor becomes a two-way arrow

4 Click and drag in the direction of the curve bending the line as you move the cursor Release to set the curve (The line you began with will disappear)

Draw a circle by drawing two curved lines connected

Drawing an Area Object Area conditions are drawn similarly to continuous mode lines You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete your area takeoff

NOTE When drawing an area do not intersect the perimeter or line of the object you are drawing

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

3 The area will be filled with the pattern set for that condition

NOTE The simulated circle will be good enough for you to be able to make a bid

To create a circular area click from point to point with very short distances in between points simulating a circlersquos perimeter Double-click after setting the last point to set the area

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

40

Grid Options Grids give you an added advantage when installing materials such as tiles Use this feature to get a count for how many tiles are needed for an area

1 Double-click on an area condition in the Takeoff dock bar to open its Condition dialog

2 Click on the Advanced tab to show its options

3 Check the box next to Grid by clicking in it

4 Indicate the dimensions of the cell matrix in inches (For example 200 x 400)

5 Under Results tab choose each (EA) for one of the results fields This will tabulate a number of grid cells (including partial grid cells) in area

6 Click to save your settings

7 Use the Move Grid and Rotate Grid features in the Tools menu to manipulate the grid as desired

Grid Calculation

1 Go to Tools gt Options menu

1 Specify if On-Screen Takeoff automatically should Calculate Grid Position

2 If AreaGrid Size is selected On-Screen Takeoff will calculate the number of items needed to fill the grid based on grid demintions

3 Click to accept and close the dialog

To move a line at any angle (regardless of default setting) press the Shift key while moving the mouse

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

41

Backout Mode This feature allows you to take out part of an area and deduct that amount of square footage

1 Select Tools gt Backout Mode

2 Outline the are you want backed out as you would when drawing a regular area object (see Drawing an Area Object)

3 The outlined area will clear and quantities will be recalculated

NOTE The perimeter of the backout area will be added to the LF quantity for that condition

Drawing a Count Object Square triangle rectangle and circle shaped count objects can easily be placed on images

1 Select the condition

2 Click in the location where you want the object to appear

3 To place an opening-shaped count item like a door or window you must click over an existing linear object such as a wall

4 On the Results tab you can change the height properties to give you the result you need

5 If Backout is checked on the advanced tab for each count opening the opening-shaped count item will back out a corresponding section of the linear object

Opening shaped count items are sized at 3rsquo0rdquo by default

Drawing a Zone Zones are drawn in the same way as area objects and may be any polygonal shape You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete the zone perimeter

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

42

Selecting Objects

1 Use the Select Tool to select objects

You can also select all objects that correspond to a condition

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Right-click and choose Select All

3 All objects with this condition will be highlighted with squares as an outline

Moving and Resizing Objects Linear

1 To move or resize a linear object click anywhere on the line to select it

2 To move the line position your pointer over the center handles When the mouse is positioned over the handles you will see a two-way arrow You will only be able to move the line in the direction of the arrows

3 Drag the line to a new position

4 Clicking and dragging the handles on the ends of the line will allow you to lengthen or shorten your line

Area and Zone

1 To move an area object or zone in its entirety click and drag it to its new position

2 Grabbing a handle at a corner or intersection of the object will allow you to adjust and change its perimeter

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

43

Count 1 To move a square circle rectangle or triangle shaped count object click and drag

2 Click and drag an opening shaped count object along the length of the linear object to the desired position then release

NOTE An opening shaped count object may not be moved from its associated linear condition object however it may be moved up and down the length of the linear object

Layers On-Screen Takeoff allows you to sort and separate your takeoff objects within the same job and on the same page On-Screen Takeoff gives you this flexibility through the use of layers

By assigning different conditions to different layers (for example differentiating between floors ceilings and walls) you can choose to view all layers or turn off certain layers to display and print the remaining groups of conditions only You may also remove the background image of electronic plans add text and hot link symbols or print only your condition takeoffs

Layers are only available in Full Mode If you are in View or Lite Mode and would like to use this

feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade Default Layers

On-Screen Takeoff begins every project with three default layers Image Annotation and Default The Image layer holds the electronic plan files you may have in your project The Annotation layer possesses all text notations highlighting and hot links in the project The Default layer will appear in the Condition dialog when creating or editing a condition (listed in the takeoff dock bar) Conditions are assigned to the Default layer unless otherwise specified by the user

Creating Layers To assign a condition to a layer other than the default layer you must first create additional layers for your project

1 Select View gt Layers to open the Layers dialog

2 Click An unnamed layer will be added

3 Click within the empty box and type a name for your layer (for example Wall)

4 New layers are added as active layers The adjacent box under the Show column will be checked

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

44

Assigning a Layer to a Condition 1 Open the Condition dialog box by creating a new condition or editing an existing condition

2 Under the General tab click on the down arrow in the Layer field to display optional layers

3 Select the desired layer for the condition Only the Default layer and layers you have added will be displayed

4 Click

View and Hide Layers

1 Select View gt Layers

2 Under the Show column check the box to view or remove the check (by clicking on it) to hide the specific layer

3 Click to accept and close the Layers dialog

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

45

Assigning Text to a Layer When adding text to an image On-Screen Takeoff has the capability to assign the text to a specified layer

1 Select the Text Tool

2 Click at the point you want to place your text

3 Type in your text using the Enter key for line breaks

4 Click the drop down arrow next to the Layer field and select the desired layer

Section 7

46

Printing and Exporting

This section will

Printing options and procedures

Exporting data by copying and pasting

Exporting quantity results to Excel spreadsheets

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

47

Print Setup On-Screen Takeoff allows the user to print the image takeoff list and worksheet

1 Select File gt Print Setup The Print Setup dialog will open

2 Select a printer or leave the default selection listed (change from the default printer displayed by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the field)

3 Indicate page size and printer tray option (Source) Access page size options by clicking on the

down arrow at the right of the field

4 Choose Portrait or Landscape orientation

5 Click to accept and close the dialog

Printing Images The image area can include the electronic plans the takeoff objects added text and hot links To print a subset of these (for example just the takeoffs without the plans or the added text and hot link symbols) hide layers that you do not want to print (see Section 6 View and Hide Layers) When you are printing your images every page will show the scale of the takeoff you are printing

1 Click on the Image tab to display the area of your project

2 Select File gt Print (or Ctrl + P)

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

48

3 Select the desired view (What to print) and the Image Range

4 Click The second Print dialog will open

5 Change settings accordingly or click if you accept the default settings

Printing Takeoff Lists and Worksheets In Takeoff Lists and Worksheets you may hide columns to print only certain results or adjust column widths to fit the report within the page size selected

1 In Takeoff List or Worksheet view move your cursor to the right side of the columnrsquos title bar the cursor will display as a two-way arrow

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

49

2 Click and drag to adjust the width of the column Holding the mouse button you may

slide the title bar under the title bar to its left to hide the column completely

3 Select File gt Print or press Ctrl + P to access the Print dialog

4 Indicate desired printer and choose the number of copies

5 Click to print and close the dialog

When printing the condition list we suggest printing in landscape

To reset to the default column widths double-click on the right border of a column heading will reset the column to its right (or previously to its right before being hidden)

Print Preview 1 Select File gt Print Preview

2 Use and to vary your view 3 If viewing an image choose current full or scale view to see how it displays

4 For printed outputs that cover more than one page use and to view adjacent pages or click on the down arrow next to Page field and select the page you want displayed

Exporting Using the CopyPaste Feature You may copy all the data or sections from the worksheet and the takeoff list view in On-Screen Takeoff and paste it into another application When pasting into Excel the cell layout will be maintained

1 Highlight the areas you wish to paste Click and hold the left mouse button down as you drag the cursor over the area to be selected then releasing the mouse button

OR

2 Select the entire takeoff list quickly click on the left On-Screen Takeoff column header and hold and drag the cursor across the remaining column headings

The number of pages for the view selected will display in the lower left-hand corner The zoom percentage that applies to the view will be displayed in the lower right-hand corner next to page size of the drawing

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

50

3 In the worksheet view you may highlight rows by clicking on the numbered buttons to the left of each row clicking and dragging across column headings or clicking and dragging over individual cells in the worksheet

Click anywhere in the appropriate view to deselect the area

4 Once your selection is highlighted you may select Edit gt Copy or Ctrl C from the keyboard 5 On your monitor switch to the application into which you want to paste your selection 6 Select Edit gt Paste in the new application or simply press Ctrl + V to paste

The colored keys for conditions cannot be pasted

Using the Export Feature You may export condition quantities to specified cell location within an Excel worksheet file Cell target locations are assigned in the Results tab of the condition dialogs on the Export line relating to each quantity measurement type

On-Screen Takeoff will export takeoff quantity results for up to three different quantity types that you specify For instance you may want to know the number of square feet in a ceiling area as well as the number of linear feet in its perimeter

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

51

1 Bring up the Condition dialog by double-clicking on a condition in the takeoff dock bar or by

selecting the condition and clicking

2 Click on the Results tab to access its fields The default quantities for the condition type will display

3 For each results field click on the arrow to access the pull-down menu and select the appropriate quantity (for example SF LF EA etchellip)

4 Have your Excel spreadsheet opened and saved in a file

5 Specify the Excel spreadsheet cell locations where you want the results to go

6 For a cell in the first sheet of your spreadsheet type in the cell address (eg a1) Case is not important

7 For a cell on a successive sheet of your spreadsheet type in sheet the number followed by a comma and the cell address without any spaces (eg sheet2a1) Case is not important

8 Click

9 Select File gt Export gt Condition Qty to Excel

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

52

10 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

11 Click to export On-Screen Takeoff results to specified cell locations in the Excel file When you return to the Excel application you will see the values have been added to the specified cell locations in your spreadsheet

12 Save your Excel file

Exporting Worksheet to Excel

1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 From On-Screen Takeoff Select File gt Export gt Worksheet to Excel

4 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

5 Click When you return to the Excel application you will see the values from the Worksheet Tab have been added to your spreadsheet

6 Save your Excel file

Exporting Takeoff to CVS 1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 Click the Takeoff Tab in the project you want to export the information

4 Select File gt Export gt Takeoff to CSV

5 Browse to the location of the CSV spreadsheet file click file to select it

6 Click the Save

NOTE CSV files can be opened in Excel Lotus Access etc One may consider this option more of a ldquodumprdquo into a file

The Excel application must be active (it may be minimized on the application bar) with the target spreadsheet open in the application Otherwise an error will occur with the export operation that will affect both the On-Screen Takeofftrade file and the Excel spreadsheet

Section 8

53

Advanced Features

This section will

Some special features of working with condition objects in the takeoff area

Details of advanced options for conditions

Advanced features of the Project Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

54

Features to Use with Objects Roping Feature You can move copy or delete using this feature Using the Select tool (the pointer) you may select several objects at once by clicking and dragging an outline around the objects then releasing the mouse button Roping may select either objects completely within the outlined area (inclusive) or objects both within and touched by the outlined area (touching) Specify your roping preference under Tools gt Options

1 Click and hold the mouse button at a point on the screen near the objects to be selected and drag to surround the objects with an outline

2 Release the mouse button The objects will be selected

3 You may now

Move the group around on the page by clicking within the group dragging the mouse and releasing the button to place the objects

Delete the group of objects by clicking the Delete key or

Copy and paste by pressing Ctrl C to copy the group then Ctrl V to paste it The pasted copy of the grouped objects will appear slightly offset from the original objects

Section 8 Advanced Features

55

Applying a DropRun Count

Use the droprun feature when calculating quantities to take into account the drop or run of a linear condition such as electrical lines or plumbing pipes Drop or run lengths may be added separately to any linear condition on screen while a default droprun length may be indicated for a condition as a whole

1 Select the desired linear condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff Dock bar

2 Click the Change button in the toolbar to open the Change Condition dialog

3 Click the Advanced tab to access the advanced options and click inside the DropRun check box

4 Enter a default length to be applied to all of this condition Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches) You can leave the length blank and manually enter drop run on each segment drawn

5 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog

Edit DropRun Count

1 With the related linear condition in the Takeoff Dock bar highlighted or with the pointer tool selected

2 click on the desired linear object in the image takeoff area The Count button will become active

3 Click on the Count button (alternatively select Tools gt Count) The default droprun amount will show in the pop-up Count dialog (Default length will be zero if droprun has not been selected in this conditionrsquos properties)

4 Type in the desired length Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches)

5 Click the OK button The additional amount will be reflected in the corresponding quantity The new DropRun count will apply only to the object edited

Adding Text in Image View

On-Screen Takeoff allows you to place text comments around your quantity takeoffs that may be printed along with plan images and objects Text is automatically placed within the Annotation Layer (that includes text and hot links)

1 To place text on the image select the Text Tool and click at the point you want to place your text opening a text box

2 Type in your information clicking Enter for line breaks

3 When you are finished click the OK button to exit the text box

4 To reposition text simply click on the text (with the Text Tool active) to select it

5 Move the cursor over the text the cursor will now display as a four-way arrow

6 Click and drag the mouse to position the text as desired

Section 8 Advanced Features

56

1 To edit existing text use the Text Tool to double-click on the text to open the editing box

2 Enter additional text or use the Backspace key to delete text as necessary

Formatting Text Once created you may format the font size type style and color of your text

1 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Font or click on the Font button in the Takeoff Toolbar

2 Select the desired features (color options are disabled) and click the OK button

3 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Color or click on the Color button in the Takeoff Toolbar The Color dialog will open

4 Click on a color in the Basic Color palette or create a color and add to the Custom Colors palette (Be sure to click on the color in the Custom Colors palette to select it)

5 Click the OK button

Object Properties

Linear Objects

Linear objects may be set to connect at corners

A linear object may be set to trim automatically when crossing another linear object (Check the trim option under the advanced tab of the Condition dialog)

When you move a connected linear object objects automatically move and resize connected lines accordingly (quantities are then recalculated)

This feature requires that the connected linear object be moved using the center handles (does not apply when resizing the line from the ends)

Objects constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

Objects are measured from centerline to centerline

Section 8 Advanced Features

57

Area Objects When drawing an area use your escape key to undo the last line drawn You may reverse your

drawing of an area using the escape key

The area will not fill with color and pattern until the user double-clicks after the last line is set

Lines drawn to delineate an area object constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

After selecting an area to move or adjust position the mouse in the center to move the entire area position the mouse at the sides or corners to adjust the perimeter

Count Objects

All count objects are quantified by the physical number of objects per page and reported as EA for the UOM The quantity for the current Image View is (displayed in the Condition List) and the total quantity in your project is displayed in the Takeoff View and Worksheet View)

Square circle rectangle and triangle shaped count objects do not displace or subtract from other object quantities when placed on top of them However on the Advanced Tab for the count condition a connect property can be set (this is a check box) so that when a count object of this shape is put on top of a Linear type takeoff object it will move with the linear if said linear is moved

An opened-shaped count object must be placed within a linear object Opening shaped count objects may also be measured by linear foot or linear yard (EA SF and SY are also options) Opening shaped count items default to a width of 3rsquo 0rdquo at the time of creation This size can be changed The small medium and large size are not options on this type of condition anymore Check Backout on the Advanced tab for each Count object back out the footage (or yardage) of opening-shaped count objects in which they are placed

NOTE In order to see this Backout functionality (in quantity) for SY or SF deductions at least one of the

results for the Linear(s) this object will be placed on must be set to SY or SF and the count object must have a height quantity

Advanced Features of Conditions The Round Feature Under the Advanced tab of the linear and area Condition dialogues you may specify quantity rounding (in inches) For linear objects rounding applies to each linear object drawn For area objects rounding will apply to each segment of the area perimeter adjusting the perimeter and area calculations For example With a linear condition entering 12 in the Round field will round up each related linear object to the nearest 12 inches or one foot With this setting two walls of 1 4 would each round to 2 0 totaling 4 0

NOTE In the Takeoff Dock bar condition list and in the On-Screen Takeoff reports quantities will be displayed in whole numbers rounded up to the nearest foot However calculations are based on true quantities without rounding unless the Round Feature is engaged

Pitch Pitch may apply either to linear or area conditions It is measured in rise per linear foot Entering 12 indicates a 12 rise per 12 of linear distance (a pitch of 12 over 12) or an angle of 45deg

Section 8 Advanced Features

58

Advanced Features of Project Properties Selecting Multiple Pages

1 Select a single page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry

2 Drag the cursor down the column of numbers to select consecutive pages

3 Click on the blank button at the top of this column to select all pages in the Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

59

Changing Image Assigned to a Drawing 1 Select the page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry 2 Click the Change Image button The Change Image dialog box will appear

3 Navigate to the desired file and select by clicking on it

4 Click the Open button The electronic file assigned to the page will have been changed to reflect the new file choice

Changing Image File Path 1 Select pages as described above

2 Choose Change Folder

3 In the Change Folder dialog navigate to the appropriate folder

4 Click the OK button The file path will have been changed for the selected page entries

Delete a Page from Project Properties 1 Select the page you want to delete by clicking on its associated number (in the gray box at the

left of the entry)

2 Choose Delete Page

All Takeoff on the page will be deleted immediately and permanently

Section 8 Advanced Features

60

Advanced Features of Tool Options

Calculation Method On-Screen Takeoff has built-in calculation options to allow for faster work and faster saves until your takeoff is complete Calculation options are found by selecting Tools gt Options then clicking on the Calculation tab

Calculation method can be set to Automatic Automatic except Grids and Manual Manual will allow the program to operate more quickly while Automatic or Automatic except Grids allows the user to see quantity changes as takeoffs are made

In any mode you may press F9 to recalculate quantities for the On-Screen Takeoff current totals

Configuration Tab

When the ldquoPage Label (A01)rdquo radial button is chosen On-Screen Takeoff puts the numbered label on all the pages of in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar If the Page Descriptionrdquo radial button is chosen then a description of what takeoff is on that specific page will be shown in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar

This section of the configuration tab gives you options on how you want to export your information When the ldquoFolderSubfolder Namesrdquo radial button is chosen than on your file that you are exporting to will have all the conditions folders and subfolders In the Delimiter box you can choose the symbol that is needed to separate the information you are exporting Some files need semicolons () or colons () to make sure the information comes exported in is separated it the appropriate places

Section 8 Advanced Features

61

In previous versions of On-Screen Takeoff there are views that users need to have in order for them to display their information By either choosing ldquoOST 1xrdquo or ldquoOST 2xrdquo it will let the program know you want your columns of information exported in that specific format

When you have the Confirm Deletions radial button of ldquoYesrdquo chosen than every time you delete anything you will get a dialog box confirming your intentions of deletion

While working with your takeoff you have a choice to either view the legend of your conditions or hide it Choose whichever radial button that suits your needs

For those who prefer to use the Enter key to navigate in dialog boxes this option is just for that

Font Tab The Font tab is designed for you to make your own look and feel for the application At the bottom of this tab it will show you sample of the fonts and colors you have chosen

Renaming the Current Page You may change the name of the current page in the takeoff area of On-Screen Takeoff by selecting Edit gt Rename Page

This opens the Name Page dialog and you may simply type in a new name and click the Enter button The new name for the file will be reflected on the title bar for the page and in Project Properties

You also may access the Rename Page function by right-clicking in the takeoff area while in Image View and selecting the option from the pop-up menu that appears

Section 9

62

Saving and Exiting

This section will

Explain how to save projects

Show you how to safely exit the program

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

63

Saving Your Project

1 Select File gt Save 2 If your project has not previously been saved a Save dialog box will open to allow you to name

the file and choose the directory and folder in which to save your file 3 Once saved File gt Save will simply save the current version of the file

OR

4 Select File gt Save As then type in a new name for the file and save to the desired file path

The Auto-save Feature With the Auto-save feature On-Screen Takeoff automatically backs up your open project You may choose to have more than one level of backup files The first backup copy will have the extension b00 and successive files will be b01 b02 and so on If you have designated four levels of backup files after the fourth backup copy has been created (b03) the next file will be saved over the file with extension b00 Further backup saves will then rotate through the four backup files in the same way

1 Select Tools gt Options 2 In the Auto-save area (under the General tab) select the frequency of backup file creation (in

minutes) and the number of levels for the feature 3 You also may disengage the feature by clicking in the check box to clear it

The Auto-save feature automatically saves backup copies to the directory of the current project If you are working from a write-protected area such as a CD-ROM On-Screen Takeoff will place backup files in the On-Screen Takeoff folder

Exiting When you are finished using On-Screen Takeoff it is very easy to exit Exiting is very important because of security reasons If someone were to use your computer they could enter the application and view and manipulate information

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

64

On-Screen Takeoff closes the open project when you open another or create a new project or when you exit the program

1 Select File gt Exit

OR

2 You also may click at the upper right-hand corner of the application to exit

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

65

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer When you get your digitizer from GTCO you will need to connect it to your computer Follow the instructions outlined below to do this

Note For rollup digitizers the metal bar must be oriented to the top or right hand side

Connecting the Digitizer 1 Lay the digitizer out flat 2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer 3 Plug in the power adapter 4 Plug the interface (IO) cable into the digitizer 5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into an open serial port on computer

Note GTCO Technical support phone number is 410-381-6688 The electronic manual (on diskette) from GTCO contains more detailed installation and operation instructions for the GTCO digitizer model you have

Installing other Digitizer Drivers If you are using a GTCO Digitizer you will need to install the GTCO TabletWorks Drivers

If you are using a Digitizer not supported by GTCO Tablet Works 10 please contact the manufacturer of your digitizer for assistance with installation

Installing GTCO TabletWorks Drivers 1 Insert the On Center CD into the CD-ROM drive The CD Startup screen will open 2 Click on Install Software 3 Select Additional Software and Drivers 4 Select Digitizer Driver 5 Follow the instructions for installing TabletWorks 10

Adhering the Template The template is a small plastic sticker used to enable mouse function when using the digitizer with On-Screen Takeoff Place your template on your digitizer We suggest placing it in the bottom right corner of the digitizer about one inch inside the takeoff area

Note You may either peel off the back of the template and use the adhesive surface or you can tape the template down

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

66

Testing the Digitizer Drivers Before running OST you may test the digitizer by moving the stylus around on the digitizer pad it should move the mouse cursor (if mouse emulation is enabled)

If the digitizer does not move the mouse cursor on the screen

The superset codes may need to be reset Reset the superset codes by touching on the border of the digitizer with the stylus The digitizer should beep several times

The digitizer may not be communicating with the computer Be sure the COM port selected is correct Be sure the COM port selected is correct If you are not able to get the digitizer to move the mouse cursor you need to call GTCO technical support for help

Note The Mouse Emulation is not required for On-Screen Takeoff to work properly It is used only for the Template functionality if the digitizer is moving the cursor the wrong direction (up instead of sideways or vice-versa)

Click the L-shaped arrow symbol on the digitizer with the stylus

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

67

Appendix II Toolbar Items Main Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

68

Tool Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

69

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

70

Navigate Toolbar (Continued)

Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

71

Takeoff Toolbar (Continued)

Image Toolbar

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

72

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

This section will detail how to load plans from a F W Dodge CD-ROM into an On-Screen Takeoff project file ready for takeoffs

Dodge files may be added to the Project Properties dialog However loading the files in that way will load the files by number rather than name description If you want to load one page only from your Dodge CD You will have to rename the page to display the name rather than number of the file

To load plan files from a Dodge CD so that the files load sequentially by file number but are displayed by name rather than by number within your project follow the instructions below

Opening a Dodge project from a CD-ROM 1 Insert the CD into the drive 2 Choose File gt Custom 3 Choose Dodge Plans Project (plansdat) as the file type 4 Select the appropriate file type by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the Files of type

field 5 In the Look in field access your drive paths by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the

field then

Navigate to your CD-ROM drive Open the data folder and Open the Projects folder

6 Select the desired project and open its folder 7 Open the plansdat file 8 All the images will come in sequenced correctly for that job along with the full descriptions

(names) of each page If there is not a plans folder in the project folder then plans do not exist for that project on the CD Opening the plansdat file will yield an empty project

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

73

Appendix IV Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer The On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer is a limited version of On Center Softwarersquos commercial takeoff software If your status bar located at the very bottom of the main window says View Mode in the lower left-hand corner then you are using the Plan Viewer You can use the plan viewer to

View CD-based amp converted CAD drawings

View a previously created OST file and associated drawings

Download electronic plans online

Navigate through drawings

Quickly Takeoff linearsareas and counts

Zoom in to view the plan better

Print drawings directly from the viewer

Viewing an On-Screen Takeoff Project File

1 To open an OST file that was previously created with of On-Screen Takeoff 2 Select File gt Open 3 An Open dialog will appear if you do not see the OST file you are looking for select the

Look In drop down arrow 4 A drop down menu will appear listing the various folders drives and mapped drives located

on your computer select the correct drive or folder location and continue to browse to the location of your OST file

5 When you see your OST file double-click it to open it 6 Any takeoff and drawings should appear on the Image tab view

If you do not see the drawings but do see the colored takeoff layer the drawings may

not be located in the same place they were originally saved at Go to File gt Project Properties and check the Image File path for each listed page If the image file path is pointing to a CD drive make sure the CD is inside the CR-ROM

Downloading Electronic Plans If your Online Plan Service provides a special file format (OSX) required to use this feature of our plan viewer you can immediately downloaded all electronic plans of a project directly from our viewer

Most Plan Room web sites will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff when a request to download plans is made Your particular Plan Room may differ in operation so please contact the provider directly with questions on using the site

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

74

When you request to download or open a project file from a Plan Room you will usually have the open to open or save an OSX file Choosing open will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff Alternately you may choose to save the file to a local hard drive After you have saved the file either double-click it to launch On-Screen Takeoff or open the OSX file using On-Screen Takeoff by clicking File then Open and locating the file on your hard drive You will need to change the file type to OSX

After the OSX file is opened you will see an additional tab appear in the Conditions List window called Pages

The Pages tab shows the hierarchy of your project Gray file icons represent pages that have not been downloaded and blue icons represents pages that have been downloaded

To download a page simply double-click the page icon

If you wish to select a group of pages to download you can use the Ctrl or Shift key to multiple select them then click the Download button

If you wish to download all pages at once click the Download All button

Downloaded pages will now appear in the Project Properties dialog in the same order in which they appear in the Pages tab

Creating Quick Takeoffs With On-Screen Takeoff you can create quick takeoffs to measure quantities even if you dont have the full version of our program However using the Quick Takeoff functionality shows you just a fraction of what the full version can do

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar is located at the top of the image view It has three buttons designated for three types of takeoffs Linear Area and Count The Quantity drop down list will show secondary quantities for Linears and Areas The Units drop down allows you to select how you want your quantities displayed Feet Inches Yards Millimeters and Meters

NOTE Every time change the type of takeoff you are performing (switching from Area to Linear for example) the previous quantities and takeoff objects will disappear They will also disappear when you changes pages

NOTE You can use the Dimension Tool to basically measure the distance between two points or linears The distance will display on the status bar at the bottom of the application

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

75

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions General

Where is On-Screen Takeoff installed on my computer

Typically it is installed in CProgram FilesOn-Screen Takeoff

In Explorer how do I recognize On-Screen Takeoff file types

On-Screen Takeoff data is stored in a single file per job lsquojob name OSTrsquo On-Screen Takeoff templates are stored as lsquotemplate nameTPOrsquo

Can only one project at a time be open

Yes For that reason opening another project automatically closes the project on screen You will be asked to save any changes

Is only one scale allowed per page What about on drawings that have multiple detail sections on a page and each of those drawings have different scales

Yes For pages with drawings of different scales copy the drawing to another project page and set the appropriate scale

I cannot perform backout on an area that is along a linear

As a workaround use the On-Screen Takeoff layers feature to help you with this issue Electronic Images

How do I start a project from drawings that have been scanned and written to a CD-ROM

Open a new project Select File gt Project Properties and select Auto Add Navigate to your CD and the appropriate folder and select any image file in that location Click Open All files in the location will load into your project Recommended that images are copied from CD to hard drive for performance

If I get a disk of drawings in AutoCAD format (R13 or R14) can I read them in On-Screen Takeoff

Yes On-Screen Takeoff now reads DWG DXF and many other format that are saved with AutoCAD

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

76

When I click on the all pages button what is supposed to happen Currently nothing seems to change when I click on that button

The All Pages button is used to apply the Darken and Enhance Plans feature to all pages in the project (as opposed to only the current page on screen)

Is there a way to deduct a large skylight from an area condition

Yes with the related area condition selected in the Takeoff Dock bar unselect the Backout button on the Takeoff Toolbar then draw the Backout area The area quantity will be deducted from the related condition object and the linear measurement of the Backout perimeter will be added

Digitizer Issues

How do I connect a Digitizer to the computer

See Appendix I Connecting a Digitizer

The Place Template menu choice is disabled

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or the digitizer or the digitzer drivers are not installed

It wonrsquot let me select the Set Takeoff Area menu choice

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or no job is open a digitizer is not installed or the drivers are not installed

The digitizer stylus is not moving the cursor or crosshairs

Click S-0-1 superset on the digitizer

How do I convert my old GTCO Digitizer to work with On- Screen Takeofftrade

Call GTCO and they may be able to reconfigure your digitizer to be compatible with On-Screen Takeoff

Printing Issues Which Printers work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible printers include On-Screen Takeoff Hewlett Packard Epson and Canon printers If you are having printer difficulties please contact support and specify the type of printer along with other pertinent information Contact support at wwwoncentercomsupport or email supportoncentercom

Which Plotters work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible Plotters include Hewlett Packard DesignJet plotters and the EnCAD Cadjet II If you are having plotter difficulties please contact support and specify the type of plotter concerned

ViewingDisplay I can no longer see my condition list How do I get it back

The toolbars and Dock bars can be turned on and off through the View gt Toolbars menu options

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

77

This is also accessible by right-clicking in the toolbar area and selecting (or deselecting) a toolbar listed

I cannot view my folders in the condition list

Right-click in the Takeoff Dock barcondition list area and select Show Tree to display your folders

My Status Bar reads Viewer Mode and I am unable to draw conditions

On-Screen Takeoff needs to be Authorized Or you need to purchase an upgrade Click the Perform Advanced Takeoff button on the main toolbar

I hid a Dock bar and when I selected to view it again it appeared alongside the other Dock

bar instead of stacked on top of it How do I fix it

Pick up the Dock bar by clicking on the bar at the top and continuing to hold down the mouse button drag the Dock bar over the other one It will resize and appear stacked with the other

When I open image files from a CD the images are all upside down How do I get them right

side up

To flip pages from top to bottom follow the steps below 1 Click the All Pages button on the Image Toolbar (All Pages is engaged when the button

is not clicked) 2 Click the Flip Horizontal button on the Image Toolbar 3 Click the All Pages button again to disengage

Templates How do I create a Template

Follow the steps below 1 Create a typical project 2 Choose File gt Save As 3 Choose On-Screen Takeoff Template Files as the file type to save 4 Name the file This will save all of the condition setups as well as the layers for the

project

How do I create a new project from a template

Follow the steps below 1 Choose File gt New 2 Select a template from those listed in the New dialog This will open a new project with

conditions and layers saved from a previous project but no pages or takeoff

78

INDEX

Area Conditions 32

Area Objects 57

Auto Scrolling 20

Auto-save 63

Backout Mode 41

Calculation Method 60

Conditions 29

Configuration 60

Contents Tab 6

Continuous Mode 38

Count Conditions 33

Count Objects 57

Digitizer 10 65 76

Docking Toolbars 13

Dodge CD 72

Drawing 27 37

DropRun Count 55

Environment 18

Exiting 63

Exporting 49

Features 16

Font 61

Frequently Asked Questions 75

Grid 40

Help File 5

Hiding Toolbars 13

Hot Links 21

Image 19 59

Image files 9

Image Toolbar 12 71

Images 75

Index Tab 6

Layers 43

Linear Conditions 31

Linear Objects 56

Main Toolbar 12 67

Menus 14

Moving Toolbars 13

Navigate Toolbar 12 69

Navigating 20

On-Screen Takeofftrade 2

Page 59 61

Pages 20 25 28

Plan Viewer 73

Plans 26

Printing 47 76

Project Properties 25

Projects 22

Quick Start Video 18

Resizing Toolbars 13

Roping 54

Saving 63

Scale 28

Search Tab 7

Selecting Objects 42

Setup 8

Start On-Screen Takeofftrade 17

System Requirements 9

Takeoff 19 27

Takeoff Toolbar 70 71

Takeoff Toolbar 12

Template Files 23

TIF (Group4) 9

Tool Toolbar 12 68

Toolbar 67

Toolbars 12

View Toolbar 12 69

Viewing Toolbars 12

Worksheet 20

Zone Conditions 33

Zoom Toolbar 12 69

  • On-Screen Takeoff Lite
  • Table of Contents
  • Section 1 - Introduction
  • Section 2 - Setup
  • Section 3 - Toolbars and Menus
  • Section 4 - Features
  • Section 5 - Projects
  • Section 6 - Conditions and Takeoff
  • Section 7 - Printing and Exporting
  • Section 8 - Advanced Features
  • Section 9 - Saving and Exiting
  • Appendix I - Installing Your Digitizer
  • Appendix II - Toolbar Items
  • Appendix III - Loading Plans from a Dodge CD
  • Appendix IV - Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer
  • Appendix V - Frequently Asked Questions
  • Index

Section 1 Introduction

4

Extras Along the way yoursquoll encounter bits of information that make the User Guide not only more readable but more personal and relevant The signs and signals placed throughout the guide will better help you understand On-Screen Takeoff and On Center Software We think yoursquoll find these bits and pieces interesting Herersquos what to look for

NOTE

To make special notice of specific information

Caution Warning This symbol is there to insure that you are following the information to minimize risk

This symbol represents information that also appears on the Quick Start Video

In this manual some information is specific to using a digitizer The icon appears alongside this information (Must be in Full Mode to use a digitizer)

A reminder is there to keep the information in mind for future consideration

For Your Informationhellip

Instruction Jargon

In this guide click or double-click refers to clicking on the left mouse button A right-click clicking on the right mouse button will be specifically stated

Click the digitizer refers to clicking down once with the stylus pen

NOTE When using a digitizer a click or double-click refers to pressing the ball tip of the stylus pen right on the digitizer (usually in the takeoff area) A right-click can be accomplished by using the digitizer mouse template and the first button on the stylus pen See Appendix I Installing You Digitizer for more information

Drag and drop is holding down the left mouse button after clicking on an object You may simply drag the object to the desired location and release the mouse button

Section 1 Introduction

5

Typographic Conventions

The following are typographical conventions to be aware of when reading this guide

Menu items you are instructed to choose appear in a different typeface with the greater than (gt) symbol separating each menu level For example if you are instructed to select the Open command in the File menu it appears as File gt Open If you are instructed to select the Save As command from the File menu it appears as File gt Save As

Helpful hints or information about the topic are provided throughout the document They will be labeled lsquoNOTErsquo (all caps and bold font to catch your attention)

Several topics will have more detailed steps outlined in either another section of the user guide or in the Appendix They will always be referenced and italicized For example ldquoSee Editing Conditions for more informationrdquo

Help File In combination with this User Guide and the Quick Start video (Help gt Watch Quick Start Video) the Help File will also be a great resource for product information and application There are additional resources available on the website at wwwoncentercom or Help gt Visit our Website Follow these instructions to open the Help file

1 Select Help gt Help Topics

2 This will open the On-Screen Help File

Hide and Show Buttons

The Hide and Show buttons will either remove or display the Topics panel in the Help dialog

Back Button

The Back button takes you back to the last help page you viewed It will be available only if you have navigated through multiple pages in the help file

Print Button

Clicking will print the topic displayed This is helpful if the instructions to follow are long and you prefer to work on a full screen

Options Button

The Options button will allow you to pick from a list of commands to help you navigate the Help file

Section 1 Introduction

6

Contents Tab This tab provides a quick breakout of the Contents of the help file It should be used like the Table of Contents of a book Simply double-click on the book icon to open the chapter Then click the desired page icon to display the relevant information

Index Tab This tab allows you to locate a specifically indexed topic This should be used as you would a book index Begin typing a word in the index entry field and the system will automatically move within the list to the entries closest in spelling to your word(s) Begin typing the topic word to access it in the list quickly

Section 1 Introduction

7

Search Tab This tab works like a word find It allows you to search for any word contained in the Help file Type the

word you are looking for in the lsquoType in the keyword to findrsquo field Click A list of topics containing that word will appear Scroll through the list and double click on the topic you want displayed

Section 2

8

Setup

This section will

Let you know what system requirements you will need to have in place

Recommend components that work well with the software

Help Full Mode users install a digitizer

Section 2 Setup

9

Minimum System Requirements To use On-Screen Takeoff your computer must meet the following minimum system requirements

An IBM PC or 100 compatible computer with a Pentium II or faster Intel processor

Memory Requirements 200 MB of available hard-disk space and256 MB RAM (128 MB preferred)

Windows 2000 SP4 and Windows XP SP2 256 color video card Super VGA display card Mouse 15-inch monitor

While these are the minimum system requirements Windows places heavy demands on your systems resources The more available memory in your computer the faster and more efficient On-Screen Takeoff will operate

Recommended Components

For the best performance we recommend the following components

Pentium III or faster processor

512 or more of RAM

12X speed CD-ROM or better

17-inch monitor or dual monitors Graphic adapter with 128 MB or more VRAM Sound card and speakers installed

NOTE In order to utilize the Training Videos you must have a sound card and speakers installed

Compatible File Formats The resolution in electronic plans does not need to be more that 200 DPI (Dots per Inch) The preferred file format is a black and white TIF (Group4) On-Screen Takeoff recognizes image files with the following extensions

File Extensions View Mode Lite Mode Full Mode TIF X X X PDF X X X OSE X X X JPG X X X CPC X X X CAL X DGN X DWG X DXF X OSP X PLN X PLT X

Section 2 Setup

10

NOTE Use the following image types for best results

Convert to TIF

The converted files will be stored in a folder with the name of the current On-Screen Takeoff project Since the conversion can be very time consuming you should only select this option if you really intend to convert vector files to TIF

1 Select File gt Project Properties

2 In the Pages Field add your image See Section 5 Establishing Project Setting Adding Pages

3 Click

4 Then select the page with the drawing you wish to convert

5 Click

Installing Your Digitizer The following instructions are a quick start to installing your digitizer For more specific information please reference Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer at the end of this guide

Connecting Your Digitizer

Upon receiving your digitizer (either a GTCO or another brand) you will need to connect it to your computer

1 Lay the digitizer out flat

2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer

3 Plug in the power supply

4 Plug the interface cable into the digitizer

5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into the computer

NOTE On-Screen Takeoff is compatible with any tablet that is WinTab compatible

Digitizer options are only available in Full Mode If you are in View or Lite Mode and would like

to use this feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade

Section 3

11

Toolbars and Menus

This section will

Introduce the program toolbars

Familiarize you with On-Screen Take Offtrade Menu options

Section 3 Toolbars and Menus

12

Toolbars On-Screen Takeoff is equipped with several helpful toolbars for application efficiency See Appendix II Toolbar Item` Details for a detailed description of each toolbar item Individually the toolbars may be displayed moved docked reshaped or hidden from view You can also create costume toolbars to fit your needs

Main Toolbar

Tool Toolbar

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Takeoff Toolbar

Image Toolbar Viewing Toolbars Toolbars are displayed on the screen and will be consistent on each tab or page (Some toolbars or toolbar items will be in an inactive state if they donrsquot have a supporting element in the application)

1 Select View gt Toolbars and select the appropriate toolbar name

OR

2 Right-click on a toolbar region of the screen

3 Check the toolbars you want to display

Section 3 Toolbars and Menus

13

Moving Toolbars The toolbars may be positioned anywhere on the screen you wish This feature is provided to allow the flexibility for positioning the toolbars so they are out of your way yet handy for use

1 Click on an edge of the toolbar holding down the mouse button drag it to its new position

2 Release the mouse button to set it in place

NOTE If the toolbar is dropped anywhere other than a screen edge it will become free floating This feature is especially handy when using multiple monitors

Docking Toolbars The toolbars can be docked to any of the screen edges

1 Click on the title bar of an undocked toolbar

2 Drag the toolbar to any location on the screen

Hiding Toolbars

1 Select View gt Toolbars and select the toolbar you wish to remove from the screen

2 Right-click on the toolbar or dock bar areas

3 A floating toolbar can be closed by clicking on the in the upper right corner of the toolbar

Resizing Toolbars Only undocked (floating) toolbars may be resized

1 Position the mouse pointer over an edge

2 Click and drag

3 The toolbar can be resized as desired

Customizing the Toolbars You may rearrange or delete buttons within a toolbarrsquos display or you may move buttons from one toolbar to another If you find that you use a few tools over and over you may want to group them within a single toolbar for convenience On-Screen Takeoff gives you the flexibility to customize your takeoff environment

1 Select Tools gt Customize The Customize dialog will open

2 With the dialog open click on a toolbar button and drag buttons from one toolbar to another or a new location within the same toolbar

3 To add a button without altering another toolbar click on the Commands tab of the Customize dialog and drag the appropriate symbol from the Buttons section to a toolbar

4 To remove a button drag it to within the takeoff area of the application

Section 3 Toolbars and Menus

14

Menus

Section 3 Toolbars and Menus

15

Digitizer Menu

Section 4

16

Features

This section will

Show you how open On-Screen Takeoff

Describe the On-Screen Takeoff environment

Teach you how to navigate pages

Section 4 Features

17

Start On-Screen Takeoff

1 On your desktop double-click your On-Screen Takeoff icon

2 The application will open

OR

3 Left-click on the Start button on your computerrsquos toolbar

4 Scroll up to Programs gt On Center Software

5 Highlight On-Screen Takeoff and click On-Screen Takeoff will open On-Screen Takeoff opens to an untitled blank project The Image view of the screen will be a blank page

Two blank dock bars the Pan dock bar and the Takeoff dock bar appear at the left side of the screen Along the bottom the Status bar displays user status or context-sensitive messages as well as paper size and current zoom percentage of the plan sheet on screen The menu bar and several task specific toolbars are located at the top of the screen

NOTE All toolbars and dock bars may be accessed to view or hide through View gt Toolbars on the menu bar

Section 4 Features

18

Quick Start Video When On-Screen Takeoff opens you will be given an option to watch the Quick Start video (recommended) or start the program without watching the video

The 20 minute video will demonstrate key program functionality and allow you to view application instruction for enhanced learning

If you would like to watch the video click If you prefer to get started without

the video click If you have already viewed the video click the lsquoDo not show this message againrsquo box to prevent this dialog from appearing each time you open the program

NOTE If you decide later that you would like to watch the Quick Start video go to Help gt Watch

Quick Start Videos

On-Screen Takeoff Environment The On-Screen Takeoff environment acts like your drafting table allowing you to work on several sheets of plans at once and to reference at a glance the entire drawing and your position on that drawing while giving you the power of a computer to track analyze print and export your takeoff quantities and plans

The screen is bordered at the top by the Menu bar with pull-down menus and at the bottom by the Status bar which indicates current user status plan page size and current zoom percentage of page The largest portion of the application screen will be your takeoff area bounded on the left (by default) by two dock bars and on the top by several toolbars

In the takeoff area you may view your project plans (images) andor takeoff objects the takeoff list with quantities the worksheet or a legend of your condition list

The main window of On-Screen Takeoff has three tabs located at the bottom left allowing for quick change between Image Takeoff or Worksheet views Select the desired view option on the toolbar and it will automatically open on your screen

Section 4 Features

19

Image View

This view shows the plan file andor takeoff conditions drawn from your plans

Takeoff View This view displays the height if applicable and quantity breakdowns of your conditions according to result types indicated (eg linear feet square feet or count of items) for zones pages and the project as a whole It also displays notes per condition

Section 4 Features

20

Worksheet View This view displays the condition and quantity in units of measure specified in the first results field of the Results tab in the Condition dialog and allows the user to enter amounts for material labor and subcontractor takeoffs

NOTE When in the Worksheet view tab out the field then save This is keep all the values saved

Navigating On-Screen Takeoff

Auto Scrolling When creating linear areas or zones On-Screen Takeoff will automatically scroll the image view when necessary It will move as your mouse or digitizer moves beyond the edge of the current view

Changing Pages

1 Select View gt Next Page Previous Page or Go To Page (specify page number for the Go to Page option)

2 You may also select the corresponding arrows for these options from the Navigate Toolbar The

drop down arrow in the Page field will list the pages The and arrows will take you to the

previous or next page The and arrows will take you to the first or last page

OR

Section 4 Features

21

3 Or press Ctrl G for the Go To Page dialog

Hot Links Hot links allow you to move quickly from one drawing to the pertinent area of another drawing A hot link is handy when viewing enlarged areas of a page and needing the ability to jump back to a reference page

1 Select Tools gt Hot Link

OR

2 Click from the Tools Toolbar

3 Click on the page where you want to set the link The Hot Link dialog will open

4 Using the current page display on the Navigate Toolbar access the pull-down menu of pages by

clicking on the arrow at the right

5 Select the page for your link (You may also choose View gt Go to Page and select by page number)

6 Manipulate the view using the zoom tool and the scroll bars

7 Click

8 After joining a hot link to another page the hot link arrows in the Navigation Toolbar will become active

9 Move a hot link to another location on the page by clicking then click and drag the hot link image anywhere on the page

Section 5

22

Projects

This section will

Help you create settings important to your projects

Explain how On-Screen Takeoff works with your electronic or paper plans

Section 5 Projects

23

Project Template Files You can begin your project with a template Templates allow you to take advantage of conditions and settings used with previous projects

On-Screen Takeoff templates contain condition lists and established layer separations from previous projects you have created You may also use the sample templates provided with On-Screen Takeoff as a great starting point All aspects of the templates may be adjusted for a new project

1 Select File gt New and click the OK button

2 From the New dialog box choose the template that best fits your project

3 The conditions for this template will appear in the Takeoff Dock bar and the Project Properties dialog will open asking for further information

4 Use File gt Save or File gt Save As to rename and save your new project

Saving a Project as a Template File You can save your condition properties and layers as a template for future projects

1 Select File gt Save As

2 Enter a name for your template and select On-Screen Takeoff Template Files (tpo) from the Save As type field of the dialog (click on the down arrow to select)

3 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog Modifying a Template File Follow these steps to modify an existing template file if you need to change or add conditions andor layers

1 Select File gt Open

2 Navigate to your Projects directory

3 In the File Type drop-down select On-Screen Takeoff Template files (tpo)

4 Choose the On-Screen Takeoff template file you would like to modify and click the OK button

5 Make appropriate changes

6 Save and close file

The On-Screen Takeoff template files cannot save takeoff information

Section 5 Projects

24

Opening an Existing Project File 1 Select File gt Open

2 Navigate to the desired file location

3 Click the Open button

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask

you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Creating a New Project

1 Select File gt New

2 For a blank untitled project click

3 At this point the Project Properties dialog will pop-up for more information about your takeoff

NOTE The following are important to keep in mind when beginning a new project

At the start of your project fill out the Project Properties settings to establish the name for all printed output from your project set the default page size and scale for your plans number and names of different pages within the project and locations of electronic drawings

Scale settings can significantly affect quantity outcomes Be sure to set the scale for each page of drawings before beginning condition takeoffs

When using a digitizer remember to make a mark with a pen or pencil in the upper left and lower right corners of the first sheet of the paper plans to delineate the takeoff area for that sheet You can then set the takeoff area on On-Screen Takeoff using your marks

Save your project before you begin taking off any conditions On-Screen Takeoff will write a back-up file using the same file name

Remember the Undo feature If you make a mistake select Edit gt Undo and reverse the process step by step

Section 5 Projects

25

Project Properties

You can either set your Project Properties when you create a new takeoff or once your project file is saved under the appropriate name

1 Select File gt Project Properties the Project Properties dialog box will appear

2 Type in the name of your project to appear on printouts Use the backspace andor delete keys to edit the name as necessary

3 Press the Tab key to move to the Default Image Size option or click within the Image Size box You may click on the arrow at the right for the pull-down menu of page size options or you can use the down-arrow key on your keyboard to scroll through the list to the appropriate selection

4 Press the Tab key to move to the Default Scale option Select a scale by using the drop down arrow If your scale is metric you will need to click in the box next to Metric to convert to that measurement

5 Establish the number of pages for your project plans And load image files See Adding Pages to

Your Project

Adding Pages to Projects Individual Electronic Plans

1 Click on in the Project Properties dialog

2 In the Add Images dialog use the drop down arrow to navigate to the appropriate directory and folder containing your image

3 Select the file so that it displays in the File name field then click The file will display by name and path in the Image File field in Project Properties dialog

4 Click to accept and your project will automatically open

5 Save your project with the new settings by selecting File gt Save

Section 5 Projects

26

Electronic plans scanned from blueprints (as opposed to blue lines) will display as white lines on a black background and are difficult to read on your computer screen Select Image gt Invert and the colors will invert to black on white

You may have noticed the Page column in the Project Properties dialog Generally plan images occupy one page and 1 will be listed in the column indicating Page 1 of your plan file If you import a multi-page TIF a plan file containing more than one page of plans they will import as separate pages and each successive page will be indicated under the Page column as 1 2 3 etc of the plan file

Group of Electronic Plans You may add all the electronic plan files from a particular source (for example from a CD) by using the Auto Add feature

1 Click the button in the Project Properties dialog

2 Browse until you find the appropriate directory and folder containing your plan images

3 Click on any file displayed within your target folder so that the file name appears in the File name box of the Auto Add dialog

4 Click The image paths and file names will be recorded into the project properties arranged alphabetically

5 Click to accept your choices and your project will automatically open

6 Save your project with the new settings by selecting File gt Save

To load Dodge Plans into your Project Properties see Appendix IIi Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

Paper Plans On-Screen Takeoff makes it easy for Full Mode users to perform quantity takeoffs from paper plans using a digitizer

1 Add pages by clicking until you have the number of pages initially in the project

2 Name each page by clicking within the Title area and typing the name

3 Click to accept your choices and close the Project Properties dialog

4 Save your project with the new project properties settings by selecting File gt Save

Section 5 Projects

27

Setting Up a Drawing Template On-Screen Takeoff provides the convenience of using the same work surface for both digitizer and mouse to allow the user to draw conditions and then edit settings of the project or add or change conditions without breaking stride A mouse pad template included with the program defines the area of the digitizer in which use of the stylus or cursor will be recognized as mouse movement as opposed to drawing movement

1 Place your stylus on On-Screen Takeoff

2 Placing the template identifies the location mouse movements will be recognized by the program

Before placing the template the template must be applied to the digitizer surface This may have been done during the installation of your digitizer We suggest attaching the template to the lower right corner of the digitizer surface about one inch inside the grid area

3 Select Digitizer gt Place Template

4 Follow the instruction prompts on the screen clicking first on the target symbol at the left of the On-Screen Takeoff box on the template then on the target at the right

Setting Takeoff Area Before you can begin taking off a drawing you must define the drawing area on the digitizer This requires defining an area that will include all objects on each drawing of your plans As you add pages to your takeoff the same area of the digitizer will be active

1 Secure the plans to the digitizer with tape or a set of clamps

2 With a pen or a pencil mark the upper left corner and the lower right corner of the first page in your set of plans

3 Select Digitizer gt Set Takeoff Area

4 Click each mark with the stylus pen as prompted

5 Verify the active area of the digitizer by looking at the image size located in the lower right corner of your screen

If you close the program before the takeoff is complete you will need to reestablish the takeoff area before you can add additional condition quantities

Electronic plans appear on your computer screen eliminating the need to set a takeoff area You simply drag your mouse across the conditions you wish to takeoff The conditions will be highlighted and quantities will be totaled instantly Electronic plans are available through a variety of services For information contact an On Center Software account manager

Section 5 Projects

28

Setting Scale for Specific Pages You may set the scale in each page view separately This will override the default scale setting in Project Properties for that page Setting the correct scale for the drawing before taking off quantities ensures accurate calculations Be careful to check the scale for each drawing in your project before doing takeoffs

1 Display the page you want to set select Edit gt Set Scale

2 Use the drop down arrow to select a scale that will be applied to that page

3 Click

OR

4 Access the pull-down scale settings on the Navigate toolbar

NOTE As you draw objects notice that the drawn object is similar in width to the object on your plans If it is not the scale set may not be correct

Calculating Scale You may calculate scale according to a known measurement between two points either with a digitizer or on electronic plans

1 Select Edit gt Calculate Scale using Image or Edit gt Calculate Scale using Digitizer

2 Follow the instructions in the related Calculate Scale dialog box You will be asked to click on the first and second points then to enter the dimension for that distance

3 The scale will be recalculated for the displayed page and the Scale display on the Navigate toolbar will show the new scale

Section 6

29

Conditions and Takeoff

This section will Draw Conditions to Takeoff Plan Quantities

What Zones will do to help your takeoff process

Discuss the ins and outs of Takeoffs

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

30

Creating Conditions

If you are starting a new project from scratch you will need to create conditions to takeoff quantities such as floor areas wall lengths and corner bead counts If you are using a template you will have several pre-designed conditions already listed on the Takeoff dock bar However you may want to change the characteristics of some conditions or create additional conditions for a particular project

1 Right Click within the Takeoff dock bar Select New gt Condition

Or

2 From the Takeoff dock bar Click (if the buttons are not showing right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select Show Buttons from the pop-up menu) The New Condition dialog appears

3 Select the condition type (Linear Area Count or Zone) from the pull-down menu accessed by the

down arrow next to the Type option

4 Press Tab or use the mouse (or stylus) to move to Name and enter a name for your condition

5 Specify the desired condition attributes See Condition Attributes for more detail

6 Click for condition to apply

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

31

Condition Attributes Each condition type will have related attributes to select or specify within the General and Advanced tabs of the New Condition dialog Once a condition has been used to takeoff a quantity from your plans certain attributes cannot be changed

All conditions allow the user to specify color and fill pattern for the object drawn

Linear Conditions

General Specify width and height by feet and inches Specify pitch in inches up to the nearest thousandth of an inch if applicable

Advanced Specify rounding for object quantities and droprun default length for electrical or plumbing drops at the ends of lines Select Connect to have lines connect at the corners where one line of the condition ends and another begins (and indicate Tolerance for the featurersquos activation as distance between the ends of two lines) Choose Trim to have lines automatically trim to a line being crossed Choose Curve to draw a curved line

Follow these examples for inputting feet and inches For 7 feet 6 inches type 706 for 13 feet 7 inches type 1307 For 20 feet type 2000

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

32

Area Conditions

General If needed you can specify the thickness (in inches) andor pitch (in inches)

Advanced Specify rounding for object quantities Choose to display an adjustable grid within the area and indicate matrix cell dimensions

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

33

Count Conditions

General

Specify height and indicate the size (in inches) and shape (square circle triangle rectangle or opening) of the count object as it will appear on screen

Advanced Count conditions have advanced attributes These options are available for all shapes except for openings

Zone Conditions Zones allow you to subdivide condition quantities making it easier to modify and complete jobs in phases They can be used at the end of a takeoff to isolate a group of condition quantities that are in different areas of the takeoff

Zones can also be used to break a takeoff into multi-phases and can even be used to isolate quantities while a job is in progress to group the amount of work that has been completed to date They can be applied to one or multiple pages in your plans automatically calculating the takeoff quantities for each zoned area

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

34

The zone feature is only available in Lite and Full Mode If you are in View Mode and would like

to use this feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade

Condition Notes A Note tab is provided for comments regarding the condition These notes will display on the Takeoff List report and will import into Quick Bid

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

35

Condition Results The Results tab of the New Condition is based on condition type Initial settings default to linear feet (LF) for linear conditions square feet (SF) for area conditions and count of items (EA) for count conditions and zones The first of the results fields will display for the condition items in the Takeoff dock bar area All results will display in worksheets and Takeoff List reports as well as in an Excel spreadsheet after being exported

Copying Conditions You may use the condition attributes from a condition yoursquove already created for any future conditions of the same type

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Click the Copy button from the toolbar

OR

3 Right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select copy

4 A new condition will appear in the list with the same condition attributes as the previous condition but with the quantities zeroed

Editing Conditions Once you have copied a condition you might want to change several attributes You can also edit an existing condition to fit any updated needs

1 Highlight the desired condition on the Takeoff dock bar

2 Click the Change button

OR

3 Double-click on the condition you wish to edit to bring up the Change Condition dialog

NOTE The Change Condition dialog differs from the New Condition dialog only in that if takeoffs

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

36

have been performed in your project with this condition you will not be able to change the type of condition or certain properties under the advanced tab of the dialog box

Deleting Conditions 1 Click on the condition in the Takeoff Dock bar area

2 Click the Delete button on the toolbar

OR

3 Right-click and select Delete from the pop-up menu

All takeoff associated with the deleted condition will be deleted immediately and permanently

Organizing Project Conditions Within your project you can create folders andor sub-folders for different types of conditions You may even want to create a folder containing conditions with reset values

To get started organizing your conditions make sure you are viewing the condition tree (right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select Show Tree)

Creating Folders and Sub-Folders 1 Right-click in the Takeoff Dock bar area

2 Select New gt Folder from the pop-up menu

Copying Folders

1 Click on the folder and click Copy on the toolbar

2 All copied conditions within the new folder will have values reset to zero

Renaming Folders

1 Click on the folder

2 Right-click and select Rename from the pop-up menu

3 Enter a name for your folder and click the Enter button

Changing Condition Order

You may move conditions up or down in the condition list of the Takeoff dock bar to suit your project needs

1 Select the condition you would like to move by clicking to highlight it

NOTE When you are ready to move the highlighted conditions be sure that you start

moving using the last condition chosen That condition will have a highlighted boarder

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

37

2 Drag and drop any the condition from one place to another in the list You may also move a condition to another folder on the list in this way

Drawing with Conditions Snap Angles Set up snap angles to prevent lines from appearing jagged Snap angles are commonly set at 15deg and shift snap angles at 0deg

1 Go to Tools gt Options Options dialog appears

2 Under the General tab make the desired settings

3 Click to save the settings As they are drawn lines will snap to the set degree

Drawing a Linear Object 1 Select a condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff dock bar

2 Move the cursor into the Image takeoff area of the screen you will see the cursor display as crosshairs

3 Click and hold left mouse button then drag mouse to draw a line

4 Release mouse button to set line

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

38

5 Repeat steps for further lines

Continuous Mode This feature allows you to draw an object that has connected lines

1 Click the icon from the Takeoff toolbar

OR

2 Go to Tools gt Continuous Mode

3 Follow steps 1-3 from Draw a Linear Object

4 Click at each point of intersection The object will be connected

5 Double-click after making the final point to set the lines

Drawing a Curve To draw a curved line the Curve option must be checked under the Advanced tab of the Condition dialog

1 Click where you want to begin the curve and drag in a straight line to the position for the other endpoint of the curve

2 Click on the line to select it Handles in the shapes of small squares will appear at either end of

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

39

the line and in the center of the line

3 Move the cursor over the center handles until the cursor becomes a two-way arrow

4 Click and drag in the direction of the curve bending the line as you move the cursor Release to set the curve (The line you began with will disappear)

Draw a circle by drawing two curved lines connected

Drawing an Area Object Area conditions are drawn similarly to continuous mode lines You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete your area takeoff

NOTE When drawing an area do not intersect the perimeter or line of the object you are drawing

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

3 The area will be filled with the pattern set for that condition

NOTE The simulated circle will be good enough for you to be able to make a bid

To create a circular area click from point to point with very short distances in between points simulating a circlersquos perimeter Double-click after setting the last point to set the area

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

40

Grid Options Grids give you an added advantage when installing materials such as tiles Use this feature to get a count for how many tiles are needed for an area

1 Double-click on an area condition in the Takeoff dock bar to open its Condition dialog

2 Click on the Advanced tab to show its options

3 Check the box next to Grid by clicking in it

4 Indicate the dimensions of the cell matrix in inches (For example 200 x 400)

5 Under Results tab choose each (EA) for one of the results fields This will tabulate a number of grid cells (including partial grid cells) in area

6 Click to save your settings

7 Use the Move Grid and Rotate Grid features in the Tools menu to manipulate the grid as desired

Grid Calculation

1 Go to Tools gt Options menu

1 Specify if On-Screen Takeoff automatically should Calculate Grid Position

2 If AreaGrid Size is selected On-Screen Takeoff will calculate the number of items needed to fill the grid based on grid demintions

3 Click to accept and close the dialog

To move a line at any angle (regardless of default setting) press the Shift key while moving the mouse

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

41

Backout Mode This feature allows you to take out part of an area and deduct that amount of square footage

1 Select Tools gt Backout Mode

2 Outline the are you want backed out as you would when drawing a regular area object (see Drawing an Area Object)

3 The outlined area will clear and quantities will be recalculated

NOTE The perimeter of the backout area will be added to the LF quantity for that condition

Drawing a Count Object Square triangle rectangle and circle shaped count objects can easily be placed on images

1 Select the condition

2 Click in the location where you want the object to appear

3 To place an opening-shaped count item like a door or window you must click over an existing linear object such as a wall

4 On the Results tab you can change the height properties to give you the result you need

5 If Backout is checked on the advanced tab for each count opening the opening-shaped count item will back out a corresponding section of the linear object

Opening shaped count items are sized at 3rsquo0rdquo by default

Drawing a Zone Zones are drawn in the same way as area objects and may be any polygonal shape You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete the zone perimeter

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

42

Selecting Objects

1 Use the Select Tool to select objects

You can also select all objects that correspond to a condition

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Right-click and choose Select All

3 All objects with this condition will be highlighted with squares as an outline

Moving and Resizing Objects Linear

1 To move or resize a linear object click anywhere on the line to select it

2 To move the line position your pointer over the center handles When the mouse is positioned over the handles you will see a two-way arrow You will only be able to move the line in the direction of the arrows

3 Drag the line to a new position

4 Clicking and dragging the handles on the ends of the line will allow you to lengthen or shorten your line

Area and Zone

1 To move an area object or zone in its entirety click and drag it to its new position

2 Grabbing a handle at a corner or intersection of the object will allow you to adjust and change its perimeter

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

43

Count 1 To move a square circle rectangle or triangle shaped count object click and drag

2 Click and drag an opening shaped count object along the length of the linear object to the desired position then release

NOTE An opening shaped count object may not be moved from its associated linear condition object however it may be moved up and down the length of the linear object

Layers On-Screen Takeoff allows you to sort and separate your takeoff objects within the same job and on the same page On-Screen Takeoff gives you this flexibility through the use of layers

By assigning different conditions to different layers (for example differentiating between floors ceilings and walls) you can choose to view all layers or turn off certain layers to display and print the remaining groups of conditions only You may also remove the background image of electronic plans add text and hot link symbols or print only your condition takeoffs

Layers are only available in Full Mode If you are in View or Lite Mode and would like to use this

feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade Default Layers

On-Screen Takeoff begins every project with three default layers Image Annotation and Default The Image layer holds the electronic plan files you may have in your project The Annotation layer possesses all text notations highlighting and hot links in the project The Default layer will appear in the Condition dialog when creating or editing a condition (listed in the takeoff dock bar) Conditions are assigned to the Default layer unless otherwise specified by the user

Creating Layers To assign a condition to a layer other than the default layer you must first create additional layers for your project

1 Select View gt Layers to open the Layers dialog

2 Click An unnamed layer will be added

3 Click within the empty box and type a name for your layer (for example Wall)

4 New layers are added as active layers The adjacent box under the Show column will be checked

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

44

Assigning a Layer to a Condition 1 Open the Condition dialog box by creating a new condition or editing an existing condition

2 Under the General tab click on the down arrow in the Layer field to display optional layers

3 Select the desired layer for the condition Only the Default layer and layers you have added will be displayed

4 Click

View and Hide Layers

1 Select View gt Layers

2 Under the Show column check the box to view or remove the check (by clicking on it) to hide the specific layer

3 Click to accept and close the Layers dialog

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

45

Assigning Text to a Layer When adding text to an image On-Screen Takeoff has the capability to assign the text to a specified layer

1 Select the Text Tool

2 Click at the point you want to place your text

3 Type in your text using the Enter key for line breaks

4 Click the drop down arrow next to the Layer field and select the desired layer

Section 7

46

Printing and Exporting

This section will

Printing options and procedures

Exporting data by copying and pasting

Exporting quantity results to Excel spreadsheets

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

47

Print Setup On-Screen Takeoff allows the user to print the image takeoff list and worksheet

1 Select File gt Print Setup The Print Setup dialog will open

2 Select a printer or leave the default selection listed (change from the default printer displayed by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the field)

3 Indicate page size and printer tray option (Source) Access page size options by clicking on the

down arrow at the right of the field

4 Choose Portrait or Landscape orientation

5 Click to accept and close the dialog

Printing Images The image area can include the electronic plans the takeoff objects added text and hot links To print a subset of these (for example just the takeoffs without the plans or the added text and hot link symbols) hide layers that you do not want to print (see Section 6 View and Hide Layers) When you are printing your images every page will show the scale of the takeoff you are printing

1 Click on the Image tab to display the area of your project

2 Select File gt Print (or Ctrl + P)

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

48

3 Select the desired view (What to print) and the Image Range

4 Click The second Print dialog will open

5 Change settings accordingly or click if you accept the default settings

Printing Takeoff Lists and Worksheets In Takeoff Lists and Worksheets you may hide columns to print only certain results or adjust column widths to fit the report within the page size selected

1 In Takeoff List or Worksheet view move your cursor to the right side of the columnrsquos title bar the cursor will display as a two-way arrow

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

49

2 Click and drag to adjust the width of the column Holding the mouse button you may

slide the title bar under the title bar to its left to hide the column completely

3 Select File gt Print or press Ctrl + P to access the Print dialog

4 Indicate desired printer and choose the number of copies

5 Click to print and close the dialog

When printing the condition list we suggest printing in landscape

To reset to the default column widths double-click on the right border of a column heading will reset the column to its right (or previously to its right before being hidden)

Print Preview 1 Select File gt Print Preview

2 Use and to vary your view 3 If viewing an image choose current full or scale view to see how it displays

4 For printed outputs that cover more than one page use and to view adjacent pages or click on the down arrow next to Page field and select the page you want displayed

Exporting Using the CopyPaste Feature You may copy all the data or sections from the worksheet and the takeoff list view in On-Screen Takeoff and paste it into another application When pasting into Excel the cell layout will be maintained

1 Highlight the areas you wish to paste Click and hold the left mouse button down as you drag the cursor over the area to be selected then releasing the mouse button

OR

2 Select the entire takeoff list quickly click on the left On-Screen Takeoff column header and hold and drag the cursor across the remaining column headings

The number of pages for the view selected will display in the lower left-hand corner The zoom percentage that applies to the view will be displayed in the lower right-hand corner next to page size of the drawing

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

50

3 In the worksheet view you may highlight rows by clicking on the numbered buttons to the left of each row clicking and dragging across column headings or clicking and dragging over individual cells in the worksheet

Click anywhere in the appropriate view to deselect the area

4 Once your selection is highlighted you may select Edit gt Copy or Ctrl C from the keyboard 5 On your monitor switch to the application into which you want to paste your selection 6 Select Edit gt Paste in the new application or simply press Ctrl + V to paste

The colored keys for conditions cannot be pasted

Using the Export Feature You may export condition quantities to specified cell location within an Excel worksheet file Cell target locations are assigned in the Results tab of the condition dialogs on the Export line relating to each quantity measurement type

On-Screen Takeoff will export takeoff quantity results for up to three different quantity types that you specify For instance you may want to know the number of square feet in a ceiling area as well as the number of linear feet in its perimeter

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

51

1 Bring up the Condition dialog by double-clicking on a condition in the takeoff dock bar or by

selecting the condition and clicking

2 Click on the Results tab to access its fields The default quantities for the condition type will display

3 For each results field click on the arrow to access the pull-down menu and select the appropriate quantity (for example SF LF EA etchellip)

4 Have your Excel spreadsheet opened and saved in a file

5 Specify the Excel spreadsheet cell locations where you want the results to go

6 For a cell in the first sheet of your spreadsheet type in the cell address (eg a1) Case is not important

7 For a cell on a successive sheet of your spreadsheet type in sheet the number followed by a comma and the cell address without any spaces (eg sheet2a1) Case is not important

8 Click

9 Select File gt Export gt Condition Qty to Excel

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

52

10 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

11 Click to export On-Screen Takeoff results to specified cell locations in the Excel file When you return to the Excel application you will see the values have been added to the specified cell locations in your spreadsheet

12 Save your Excel file

Exporting Worksheet to Excel

1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 From On-Screen Takeoff Select File gt Export gt Worksheet to Excel

4 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

5 Click When you return to the Excel application you will see the values from the Worksheet Tab have been added to your spreadsheet

6 Save your Excel file

Exporting Takeoff to CVS 1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 Click the Takeoff Tab in the project you want to export the information

4 Select File gt Export gt Takeoff to CSV

5 Browse to the location of the CSV spreadsheet file click file to select it

6 Click the Save

NOTE CSV files can be opened in Excel Lotus Access etc One may consider this option more of a ldquodumprdquo into a file

The Excel application must be active (it may be minimized on the application bar) with the target spreadsheet open in the application Otherwise an error will occur with the export operation that will affect both the On-Screen Takeofftrade file and the Excel spreadsheet

Section 8

53

Advanced Features

This section will

Some special features of working with condition objects in the takeoff area

Details of advanced options for conditions

Advanced features of the Project Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

54

Features to Use with Objects Roping Feature You can move copy or delete using this feature Using the Select tool (the pointer) you may select several objects at once by clicking and dragging an outline around the objects then releasing the mouse button Roping may select either objects completely within the outlined area (inclusive) or objects both within and touched by the outlined area (touching) Specify your roping preference under Tools gt Options

1 Click and hold the mouse button at a point on the screen near the objects to be selected and drag to surround the objects with an outline

2 Release the mouse button The objects will be selected

3 You may now

Move the group around on the page by clicking within the group dragging the mouse and releasing the button to place the objects

Delete the group of objects by clicking the Delete key or

Copy and paste by pressing Ctrl C to copy the group then Ctrl V to paste it The pasted copy of the grouped objects will appear slightly offset from the original objects

Section 8 Advanced Features

55

Applying a DropRun Count

Use the droprun feature when calculating quantities to take into account the drop or run of a linear condition such as electrical lines or plumbing pipes Drop or run lengths may be added separately to any linear condition on screen while a default droprun length may be indicated for a condition as a whole

1 Select the desired linear condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff Dock bar

2 Click the Change button in the toolbar to open the Change Condition dialog

3 Click the Advanced tab to access the advanced options and click inside the DropRun check box

4 Enter a default length to be applied to all of this condition Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches) You can leave the length blank and manually enter drop run on each segment drawn

5 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog

Edit DropRun Count

1 With the related linear condition in the Takeoff Dock bar highlighted or with the pointer tool selected

2 click on the desired linear object in the image takeoff area The Count button will become active

3 Click on the Count button (alternatively select Tools gt Count) The default droprun amount will show in the pop-up Count dialog (Default length will be zero if droprun has not been selected in this conditionrsquos properties)

4 Type in the desired length Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches)

5 Click the OK button The additional amount will be reflected in the corresponding quantity The new DropRun count will apply only to the object edited

Adding Text in Image View

On-Screen Takeoff allows you to place text comments around your quantity takeoffs that may be printed along with plan images and objects Text is automatically placed within the Annotation Layer (that includes text and hot links)

1 To place text on the image select the Text Tool and click at the point you want to place your text opening a text box

2 Type in your information clicking Enter for line breaks

3 When you are finished click the OK button to exit the text box

4 To reposition text simply click on the text (with the Text Tool active) to select it

5 Move the cursor over the text the cursor will now display as a four-way arrow

6 Click and drag the mouse to position the text as desired

Section 8 Advanced Features

56

1 To edit existing text use the Text Tool to double-click on the text to open the editing box

2 Enter additional text or use the Backspace key to delete text as necessary

Formatting Text Once created you may format the font size type style and color of your text

1 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Font or click on the Font button in the Takeoff Toolbar

2 Select the desired features (color options are disabled) and click the OK button

3 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Color or click on the Color button in the Takeoff Toolbar The Color dialog will open

4 Click on a color in the Basic Color palette or create a color and add to the Custom Colors palette (Be sure to click on the color in the Custom Colors palette to select it)

5 Click the OK button

Object Properties

Linear Objects

Linear objects may be set to connect at corners

A linear object may be set to trim automatically when crossing another linear object (Check the trim option under the advanced tab of the Condition dialog)

When you move a connected linear object objects automatically move and resize connected lines accordingly (quantities are then recalculated)

This feature requires that the connected linear object be moved using the center handles (does not apply when resizing the line from the ends)

Objects constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

Objects are measured from centerline to centerline

Section 8 Advanced Features

57

Area Objects When drawing an area use your escape key to undo the last line drawn You may reverse your

drawing of an area using the escape key

The area will not fill with color and pattern until the user double-clicks after the last line is set

Lines drawn to delineate an area object constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

After selecting an area to move or adjust position the mouse in the center to move the entire area position the mouse at the sides or corners to adjust the perimeter

Count Objects

All count objects are quantified by the physical number of objects per page and reported as EA for the UOM The quantity for the current Image View is (displayed in the Condition List) and the total quantity in your project is displayed in the Takeoff View and Worksheet View)

Square circle rectangle and triangle shaped count objects do not displace or subtract from other object quantities when placed on top of them However on the Advanced Tab for the count condition a connect property can be set (this is a check box) so that when a count object of this shape is put on top of a Linear type takeoff object it will move with the linear if said linear is moved

An opened-shaped count object must be placed within a linear object Opening shaped count objects may also be measured by linear foot or linear yard (EA SF and SY are also options) Opening shaped count items default to a width of 3rsquo 0rdquo at the time of creation This size can be changed The small medium and large size are not options on this type of condition anymore Check Backout on the Advanced tab for each Count object back out the footage (or yardage) of opening-shaped count objects in which they are placed

NOTE In order to see this Backout functionality (in quantity) for SY or SF deductions at least one of the

results for the Linear(s) this object will be placed on must be set to SY or SF and the count object must have a height quantity

Advanced Features of Conditions The Round Feature Under the Advanced tab of the linear and area Condition dialogues you may specify quantity rounding (in inches) For linear objects rounding applies to each linear object drawn For area objects rounding will apply to each segment of the area perimeter adjusting the perimeter and area calculations For example With a linear condition entering 12 in the Round field will round up each related linear object to the nearest 12 inches or one foot With this setting two walls of 1 4 would each round to 2 0 totaling 4 0

NOTE In the Takeoff Dock bar condition list and in the On-Screen Takeoff reports quantities will be displayed in whole numbers rounded up to the nearest foot However calculations are based on true quantities without rounding unless the Round Feature is engaged

Pitch Pitch may apply either to linear or area conditions It is measured in rise per linear foot Entering 12 indicates a 12 rise per 12 of linear distance (a pitch of 12 over 12) or an angle of 45deg

Section 8 Advanced Features

58

Advanced Features of Project Properties Selecting Multiple Pages

1 Select a single page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry

2 Drag the cursor down the column of numbers to select consecutive pages

3 Click on the blank button at the top of this column to select all pages in the Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

59

Changing Image Assigned to a Drawing 1 Select the page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry 2 Click the Change Image button The Change Image dialog box will appear

3 Navigate to the desired file and select by clicking on it

4 Click the Open button The electronic file assigned to the page will have been changed to reflect the new file choice

Changing Image File Path 1 Select pages as described above

2 Choose Change Folder

3 In the Change Folder dialog navigate to the appropriate folder

4 Click the OK button The file path will have been changed for the selected page entries

Delete a Page from Project Properties 1 Select the page you want to delete by clicking on its associated number (in the gray box at the

left of the entry)

2 Choose Delete Page

All Takeoff on the page will be deleted immediately and permanently

Section 8 Advanced Features

60

Advanced Features of Tool Options

Calculation Method On-Screen Takeoff has built-in calculation options to allow for faster work and faster saves until your takeoff is complete Calculation options are found by selecting Tools gt Options then clicking on the Calculation tab

Calculation method can be set to Automatic Automatic except Grids and Manual Manual will allow the program to operate more quickly while Automatic or Automatic except Grids allows the user to see quantity changes as takeoffs are made

In any mode you may press F9 to recalculate quantities for the On-Screen Takeoff current totals

Configuration Tab

When the ldquoPage Label (A01)rdquo radial button is chosen On-Screen Takeoff puts the numbered label on all the pages of in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar If the Page Descriptionrdquo radial button is chosen then a description of what takeoff is on that specific page will be shown in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar

This section of the configuration tab gives you options on how you want to export your information When the ldquoFolderSubfolder Namesrdquo radial button is chosen than on your file that you are exporting to will have all the conditions folders and subfolders In the Delimiter box you can choose the symbol that is needed to separate the information you are exporting Some files need semicolons () or colons () to make sure the information comes exported in is separated it the appropriate places

Section 8 Advanced Features

61

In previous versions of On-Screen Takeoff there are views that users need to have in order for them to display their information By either choosing ldquoOST 1xrdquo or ldquoOST 2xrdquo it will let the program know you want your columns of information exported in that specific format

When you have the Confirm Deletions radial button of ldquoYesrdquo chosen than every time you delete anything you will get a dialog box confirming your intentions of deletion

While working with your takeoff you have a choice to either view the legend of your conditions or hide it Choose whichever radial button that suits your needs

For those who prefer to use the Enter key to navigate in dialog boxes this option is just for that

Font Tab The Font tab is designed for you to make your own look and feel for the application At the bottom of this tab it will show you sample of the fonts and colors you have chosen

Renaming the Current Page You may change the name of the current page in the takeoff area of On-Screen Takeoff by selecting Edit gt Rename Page

This opens the Name Page dialog and you may simply type in a new name and click the Enter button The new name for the file will be reflected on the title bar for the page and in Project Properties

You also may access the Rename Page function by right-clicking in the takeoff area while in Image View and selecting the option from the pop-up menu that appears

Section 9

62

Saving and Exiting

This section will

Explain how to save projects

Show you how to safely exit the program

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

63

Saving Your Project

1 Select File gt Save 2 If your project has not previously been saved a Save dialog box will open to allow you to name

the file and choose the directory and folder in which to save your file 3 Once saved File gt Save will simply save the current version of the file

OR

4 Select File gt Save As then type in a new name for the file and save to the desired file path

The Auto-save Feature With the Auto-save feature On-Screen Takeoff automatically backs up your open project You may choose to have more than one level of backup files The first backup copy will have the extension b00 and successive files will be b01 b02 and so on If you have designated four levels of backup files after the fourth backup copy has been created (b03) the next file will be saved over the file with extension b00 Further backup saves will then rotate through the four backup files in the same way

1 Select Tools gt Options 2 In the Auto-save area (under the General tab) select the frequency of backup file creation (in

minutes) and the number of levels for the feature 3 You also may disengage the feature by clicking in the check box to clear it

The Auto-save feature automatically saves backup copies to the directory of the current project If you are working from a write-protected area such as a CD-ROM On-Screen Takeoff will place backup files in the On-Screen Takeoff folder

Exiting When you are finished using On-Screen Takeoff it is very easy to exit Exiting is very important because of security reasons If someone were to use your computer they could enter the application and view and manipulate information

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

64

On-Screen Takeoff closes the open project when you open another or create a new project or when you exit the program

1 Select File gt Exit

OR

2 You also may click at the upper right-hand corner of the application to exit

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

65

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer When you get your digitizer from GTCO you will need to connect it to your computer Follow the instructions outlined below to do this

Note For rollup digitizers the metal bar must be oriented to the top or right hand side

Connecting the Digitizer 1 Lay the digitizer out flat 2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer 3 Plug in the power adapter 4 Plug the interface (IO) cable into the digitizer 5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into an open serial port on computer

Note GTCO Technical support phone number is 410-381-6688 The electronic manual (on diskette) from GTCO contains more detailed installation and operation instructions for the GTCO digitizer model you have

Installing other Digitizer Drivers If you are using a GTCO Digitizer you will need to install the GTCO TabletWorks Drivers

If you are using a Digitizer not supported by GTCO Tablet Works 10 please contact the manufacturer of your digitizer for assistance with installation

Installing GTCO TabletWorks Drivers 1 Insert the On Center CD into the CD-ROM drive The CD Startup screen will open 2 Click on Install Software 3 Select Additional Software and Drivers 4 Select Digitizer Driver 5 Follow the instructions for installing TabletWorks 10

Adhering the Template The template is a small plastic sticker used to enable mouse function when using the digitizer with On-Screen Takeoff Place your template on your digitizer We suggest placing it in the bottom right corner of the digitizer about one inch inside the takeoff area

Note You may either peel off the back of the template and use the adhesive surface or you can tape the template down

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

66

Testing the Digitizer Drivers Before running OST you may test the digitizer by moving the stylus around on the digitizer pad it should move the mouse cursor (if mouse emulation is enabled)

If the digitizer does not move the mouse cursor on the screen

The superset codes may need to be reset Reset the superset codes by touching on the border of the digitizer with the stylus The digitizer should beep several times

The digitizer may not be communicating with the computer Be sure the COM port selected is correct Be sure the COM port selected is correct If you are not able to get the digitizer to move the mouse cursor you need to call GTCO technical support for help

Note The Mouse Emulation is not required for On-Screen Takeoff to work properly It is used only for the Template functionality if the digitizer is moving the cursor the wrong direction (up instead of sideways or vice-versa)

Click the L-shaped arrow symbol on the digitizer with the stylus

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

67

Appendix II Toolbar Items Main Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

68

Tool Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

69

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

70

Navigate Toolbar (Continued)

Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

71

Takeoff Toolbar (Continued)

Image Toolbar

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

72

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

This section will detail how to load plans from a F W Dodge CD-ROM into an On-Screen Takeoff project file ready for takeoffs

Dodge files may be added to the Project Properties dialog However loading the files in that way will load the files by number rather than name description If you want to load one page only from your Dodge CD You will have to rename the page to display the name rather than number of the file

To load plan files from a Dodge CD so that the files load sequentially by file number but are displayed by name rather than by number within your project follow the instructions below

Opening a Dodge project from a CD-ROM 1 Insert the CD into the drive 2 Choose File gt Custom 3 Choose Dodge Plans Project (plansdat) as the file type 4 Select the appropriate file type by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the Files of type

field 5 In the Look in field access your drive paths by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the

field then

Navigate to your CD-ROM drive Open the data folder and Open the Projects folder

6 Select the desired project and open its folder 7 Open the plansdat file 8 All the images will come in sequenced correctly for that job along with the full descriptions

(names) of each page If there is not a plans folder in the project folder then plans do not exist for that project on the CD Opening the plansdat file will yield an empty project

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

73

Appendix IV Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer The On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer is a limited version of On Center Softwarersquos commercial takeoff software If your status bar located at the very bottom of the main window says View Mode in the lower left-hand corner then you are using the Plan Viewer You can use the plan viewer to

View CD-based amp converted CAD drawings

View a previously created OST file and associated drawings

Download electronic plans online

Navigate through drawings

Quickly Takeoff linearsareas and counts

Zoom in to view the plan better

Print drawings directly from the viewer

Viewing an On-Screen Takeoff Project File

1 To open an OST file that was previously created with of On-Screen Takeoff 2 Select File gt Open 3 An Open dialog will appear if you do not see the OST file you are looking for select the

Look In drop down arrow 4 A drop down menu will appear listing the various folders drives and mapped drives located

on your computer select the correct drive or folder location and continue to browse to the location of your OST file

5 When you see your OST file double-click it to open it 6 Any takeoff and drawings should appear on the Image tab view

If you do not see the drawings but do see the colored takeoff layer the drawings may

not be located in the same place they were originally saved at Go to File gt Project Properties and check the Image File path for each listed page If the image file path is pointing to a CD drive make sure the CD is inside the CR-ROM

Downloading Electronic Plans If your Online Plan Service provides a special file format (OSX) required to use this feature of our plan viewer you can immediately downloaded all electronic plans of a project directly from our viewer

Most Plan Room web sites will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff when a request to download plans is made Your particular Plan Room may differ in operation so please contact the provider directly with questions on using the site

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

74

When you request to download or open a project file from a Plan Room you will usually have the open to open or save an OSX file Choosing open will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff Alternately you may choose to save the file to a local hard drive After you have saved the file either double-click it to launch On-Screen Takeoff or open the OSX file using On-Screen Takeoff by clicking File then Open and locating the file on your hard drive You will need to change the file type to OSX

After the OSX file is opened you will see an additional tab appear in the Conditions List window called Pages

The Pages tab shows the hierarchy of your project Gray file icons represent pages that have not been downloaded and blue icons represents pages that have been downloaded

To download a page simply double-click the page icon

If you wish to select a group of pages to download you can use the Ctrl or Shift key to multiple select them then click the Download button

If you wish to download all pages at once click the Download All button

Downloaded pages will now appear in the Project Properties dialog in the same order in which they appear in the Pages tab

Creating Quick Takeoffs With On-Screen Takeoff you can create quick takeoffs to measure quantities even if you dont have the full version of our program However using the Quick Takeoff functionality shows you just a fraction of what the full version can do

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar is located at the top of the image view It has three buttons designated for three types of takeoffs Linear Area and Count The Quantity drop down list will show secondary quantities for Linears and Areas The Units drop down allows you to select how you want your quantities displayed Feet Inches Yards Millimeters and Meters

NOTE Every time change the type of takeoff you are performing (switching from Area to Linear for example) the previous quantities and takeoff objects will disappear They will also disappear when you changes pages

NOTE You can use the Dimension Tool to basically measure the distance between two points or linears The distance will display on the status bar at the bottom of the application

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

75

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions General

Where is On-Screen Takeoff installed on my computer

Typically it is installed in CProgram FilesOn-Screen Takeoff

In Explorer how do I recognize On-Screen Takeoff file types

On-Screen Takeoff data is stored in a single file per job lsquojob name OSTrsquo On-Screen Takeoff templates are stored as lsquotemplate nameTPOrsquo

Can only one project at a time be open

Yes For that reason opening another project automatically closes the project on screen You will be asked to save any changes

Is only one scale allowed per page What about on drawings that have multiple detail sections on a page and each of those drawings have different scales

Yes For pages with drawings of different scales copy the drawing to another project page and set the appropriate scale

I cannot perform backout on an area that is along a linear

As a workaround use the On-Screen Takeoff layers feature to help you with this issue Electronic Images

How do I start a project from drawings that have been scanned and written to a CD-ROM

Open a new project Select File gt Project Properties and select Auto Add Navigate to your CD and the appropriate folder and select any image file in that location Click Open All files in the location will load into your project Recommended that images are copied from CD to hard drive for performance

If I get a disk of drawings in AutoCAD format (R13 or R14) can I read them in On-Screen Takeoff

Yes On-Screen Takeoff now reads DWG DXF and many other format that are saved with AutoCAD

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

76

When I click on the all pages button what is supposed to happen Currently nothing seems to change when I click on that button

The All Pages button is used to apply the Darken and Enhance Plans feature to all pages in the project (as opposed to only the current page on screen)

Is there a way to deduct a large skylight from an area condition

Yes with the related area condition selected in the Takeoff Dock bar unselect the Backout button on the Takeoff Toolbar then draw the Backout area The area quantity will be deducted from the related condition object and the linear measurement of the Backout perimeter will be added

Digitizer Issues

How do I connect a Digitizer to the computer

See Appendix I Connecting a Digitizer

The Place Template menu choice is disabled

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or the digitizer or the digitzer drivers are not installed

It wonrsquot let me select the Set Takeoff Area menu choice

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or no job is open a digitizer is not installed or the drivers are not installed

The digitizer stylus is not moving the cursor or crosshairs

Click S-0-1 superset on the digitizer

How do I convert my old GTCO Digitizer to work with On- Screen Takeofftrade

Call GTCO and they may be able to reconfigure your digitizer to be compatible with On-Screen Takeoff

Printing Issues Which Printers work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible printers include On-Screen Takeoff Hewlett Packard Epson and Canon printers If you are having printer difficulties please contact support and specify the type of printer along with other pertinent information Contact support at wwwoncentercomsupport or email supportoncentercom

Which Plotters work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible Plotters include Hewlett Packard DesignJet plotters and the EnCAD Cadjet II If you are having plotter difficulties please contact support and specify the type of plotter concerned

ViewingDisplay I can no longer see my condition list How do I get it back

The toolbars and Dock bars can be turned on and off through the View gt Toolbars menu options

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

77

This is also accessible by right-clicking in the toolbar area and selecting (or deselecting) a toolbar listed

I cannot view my folders in the condition list

Right-click in the Takeoff Dock barcondition list area and select Show Tree to display your folders

My Status Bar reads Viewer Mode and I am unable to draw conditions

On-Screen Takeoff needs to be Authorized Or you need to purchase an upgrade Click the Perform Advanced Takeoff button on the main toolbar

I hid a Dock bar and when I selected to view it again it appeared alongside the other Dock

bar instead of stacked on top of it How do I fix it

Pick up the Dock bar by clicking on the bar at the top and continuing to hold down the mouse button drag the Dock bar over the other one It will resize and appear stacked with the other

When I open image files from a CD the images are all upside down How do I get them right

side up

To flip pages from top to bottom follow the steps below 1 Click the All Pages button on the Image Toolbar (All Pages is engaged when the button

is not clicked) 2 Click the Flip Horizontal button on the Image Toolbar 3 Click the All Pages button again to disengage

Templates How do I create a Template

Follow the steps below 1 Create a typical project 2 Choose File gt Save As 3 Choose On-Screen Takeoff Template Files as the file type to save 4 Name the file This will save all of the condition setups as well as the layers for the

project

How do I create a new project from a template

Follow the steps below 1 Choose File gt New 2 Select a template from those listed in the New dialog This will open a new project with

conditions and layers saved from a previous project but no pages or takeoff

78

INDEX

Area Conditions 32

Area Objects 57

Auto Scrolling 20

Auto-save 63

Backout Mode 41

Calculation Method 60

Conditions 29

Configuration 60

Contents Tab 6

Continuous Mode 38

Count Conditions 33

Count Objects 57

Digitizer 10 65 76

Docking Toolbars 13

Dodge CD 72

Drawing 27 37

DropRun Count 55

Environment 18

Exiting 63

Exporting 49

Features 16

Font 61

Frequently Asked Questions 75

Grid 40

Help File 5

Hiding Toolbars 13

Hot Links 21

Image 19 59

Image files 9

Image Toolbar 12 71

Images 75

Index Tab 6

Layers 43

Linear Conditions 31

Linear Objects 56

Main Toolbar 12 67

Menus 14

Moving Toolbars 13

Navigate Toolbar 12 69

Navigating 20

On-Screen Takeofftrade 2

Page 59 61

Pages 20 25 28

Plan Viewer 73

Plans 26

Printing 47 76

Project Properties 25

Projects 22

Quick Start Video 18

Resizing Toolbars 13

Roping 54

Saving 63

Scale 28

Search Tab 7

Selecting Objects 42

Setup 8

Start On-Screen Takeofftrade 17

System Requirements 9

Takeoff 19 27

Takeoff Toolbar 70 71

Takeoff Toolbar 12

Template Files 23

TIF (Group4) 9

Tool Toolbar 12 68

Toolbar 67

Toolbars 12

View Toolbar 12 69

Viewing Toolbars 12

Worksheet 20

Zone Conditions 33

Zoom Toolbar 12 69

  • On-Screen Takeoff Lite
  • Table of Contents
  • Section 1 - Introduction
  • Section 2 - Setup
  • Section 3 - Toolbars and Menus
  • Section 4 - Features
  • Section 5 - Projects
  • Section 6 - Conditions and Takeoff
  • Section 7 - Printing and Exporting
  • Section 8 - Advanced Features
  • Section 9 - Saving and Exiting
  • Appendix I - Installing Your Digitizer
  • Appendix II - Toolbar Items
  • Appendix III - Loading Plans from a Dodge CD
  • Appendix IV - Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer
  • Appendix V - Frequently Asked Questions
  • Index

Section 1 Introduction

5

Typographic Conventions

The following are typographical conventions to be aware of when reading this guide

Menu items you are instructed to choose appear in a different typeface with the greater than (gt) symbol separating each menu level For example if you are instructed to select the Open command in the File menu it appears as File gt Open If you are instructed to select the Save As command from the File menu it appears as File gt Save As

Helpful hints or information about the topic are provided throughout the document They will be labeled lsquoNOTErsquo (all caps and bold font to catch your attention)

Several topics will have more detailed steps outlined in either another section of the user guide or in the Appendix They will always be referenced and italicized For example ldquoSee Editing Conditions for more informationrdquo

Help File In combination with this User Guide and the Quick Start video (Help gt Watch Quick Start Video) the Help File will also be a great resource for product information and application There are additional resources available on the website at wwwoncentercom or Help gt Visit our Website Follow these instructions to open the Help file

1 Select Help gt Help Topics

2 This will open the On-Screen Help File

Hide and Show Buttons

The Hide and Show buttons will either remove or display the Topics panel in the Help dialog

Back Button

The Back button takes you back to the last help page you viewed It will be available only if you have navigated through multiple pages in the help file

Print Button

Clicking will print the topic displayed This is helpful if the instructions to follow are long and you prefer to work on a full screen

Options Button

The Options button will allow you to pick from a list of commands to help you navigate the Help file

Section 1 Introduction

6

Contents Tab This tab provides a quick breakout of the Contents of the help file It should be used like the Table of Contents of a book Simply double-click on the book icon to open the chapter Then click the desired page icon to display the relevant information

Index Tab This tab allows you to locate a specifically indexed topic This should be used as you would a book index Begin typing a word in the index entry field and the system will automatically move within the list to the entries closest in spelling to your word(s) Begin typing the topic word to access it in the list quickly

Section 1 Introduction

7

Search Tab This tab works like a word find It allows you to search for any word contained in the Help file Type the

word you are looking for in the lsquoType in the keyword to findrsquo field Click A list of topics containing that word will appear Scroll through the list and double click on the topic you want displayed

Section 2

8

Setup

This section will

Let you know what system requirements you will need to have in place

Recommend components that work well with the software

Help Full Mode users install a digitizer

Section 2 Setup

9

Minimum System Requirements To use On-Screen Takeoff your computer must meet the following minimum system requirements

An IBM PC or 100 compatible computer with a Pentium II or faster Intel processor

Memory Requirements 200 MB of available hard-disk space and256 MB RAM (128 MB preferred)

Windows 2000 SP4 and Windows XP SP2 256 color video card Super VGA display card Mouse 15-inch monitor

While these are the minimum system requirements Windows places heavy demands on your systems resources The more available memory in your computer the faster and more efficient On-Screen Takeoff will operate

Recommended Components

For the best performance we recommend the following components

Pentium III or faster processor

512 or more of RAM

12X speed CD-ROM or better

17-inch monitor or dual monitors Graphic adapter with 128 MB or more VRAM Sound card and speakers installed

NOTE In order to utilize the Training Videos you must have a sound card and speakers installed

Compatible File Formats The resolution in electronic plans does not need to be more that 200 DPI (Dots per Inch) The preferred file format is a black and white TIF (Group4) On-Screen Takeoff recognizes image files with the following extensions

File Extensions View Mode Lite Mode Full Mode TIF X X X PDF X X X OSE X X X JPG X X X CPC X X X CAL X DGN X DWG X DXF X OSP X PLN X PLT X

Section 2 Setup

10

NOTE Use the following image types for best results

Convert to TIF

The converted files will be stored in a folder with the name of the current On-Screen Takeoff project Since the conversion can be very time consuming you should only select this option if you really intend to convert vector files to TIF

1 Select File gt Project Properties

2 In the Pages Field add your image See Section 5 Establishing Project Setting Adding Pages

3 Click

4 Then select the page with the drawing you wish to convert

5 Click

Installing Your Digitizer The following instructions are a quick start to installing your digitizer For more specific information please reference Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer at the end of this guide

Connecting Your Digitizer

Upon receiving your digitizer (either a GTCO or another brand) you will need to connect it to your computer

1 Lay the digitizer out flat

2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer

3 Plug in the power supply

4 Plug the interface cable into the digitizer

5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into the computer

NOTE On-Screen Takeoff is compatible with any tablet that is WinTab compatible

Digitizer options are only available in Full Mode If you are in View or Lite Mode and would like

to use this feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade

Section 3

11

Toolbars and Menus

This section will

Introduce the program toolbars

Familiarize you with On-Screen Take Offtrade Menu options

Section 3 Toolbars and Menus

12

Toolbars On-Screen Takeoff is equipped with several helpful toolbars for application efficiency See Appendix II Toolbar Item` Details for a detailed description of each toolbar item Individually the toolbars may be displayed moved docked reshaped or hidden from view You can also create costume toolbars to fit your needs

Main Toolbar

Tool Toolbar

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Takeoff Toolbar

Image Toolbar Viewing Toolbars Toolbars are displayed on the screen and will be consistent on each tab or page (Some toolbars or toolbar items will be in an inactive state if they donrsquot have a supporting element in the application)

1 Select View gt Toolbars and select the appropriate toolbar name

OR

2 Right-click on a toolbar region of the screen

3 Check the toolbars you want to display

Section 3 Toolbars and Menus

13

Moving Toolbars The toolbars may be positioned anywhere on the screen you wish This feature is provided to allow the flexibility for positioning the toolbars so they are out of your way yet handy for use

1 Click on an edge of the toolbar holding down the mouse button drag it to its new position

2 Release the mouse button to set it in place

NOTE If the toolbar is dropped anywhere other than a screen edge it will become free floating This feature is especially handy when using multiple monitors

Docking Toolbars The toolbars can be docked to any of the screen edges

1 Click on the title bar of an undocked toolbar

2 Drag the toolbar to any location on the screen

Hiding Toolbars

1 Select View gt Toolbars and select the toolbar you wish to remove from the screen

2 Right-click on the toolbar or dock bar areas

3 A floating toolbar can be closed by clicking on the in the upper right corner of the toolbar

Resizing Toolbars Only undocked (floating) toolbars may be resized

1 Position the mouse pointer over an edge

2 Click and drag

3 The toolbar can be resized as desired

Customizing the Toolbars You may rearrange or delete buttons within a toolbarrsquos display or you may move buttons from one toolbar to another If you find that you use a few tools over and over you may want to group them within a single toolbar for convenience On-Screen Takeoff gives you the flexibility to customize your takeoff environment

1 Select Tools gt Customize The Customize dialog will open

2 With the dialog open click on a toolbar button and drag buttons from one toolbar to another or a new location within the same toolbar

3 To add a button without altering another toolbar click on the Commands tab of the Customize dialog and drag the appropriate symbol from the Buttons section to a toolbar

4 To remove a button drag it to within the takeoff area of the application

Section 3 Toolbars and Menus

14

Menus

Section 3 Toolbars and Menus

15

Digitizer Menu

Section 4

16

Features

This section will

Show you how open On-Screen Takeoff

Describe the On-Screen Takeoff environment

Teach you how to navigate pages

Section 4 Features

17

Start On-Screen Takeoff

1 On your desktop double-click your On-Screen Takeoff icon

2 The application will open

OR

3 Left-click on the Start button on your computerrsquos toolbar

4 Scroll up to Programs gt On Center Software

5 Highlight On-Screen Takeoff and click On-Screen Takeoff will open On-Screen Takeoff opens to an untitled blank project The Image view of the screen will be a blank page

Two blank dock bars the Pan dock bar and the Takeoff dock bar appear at the left side of the screen Along the bottom the Status bar displays user status or context-sensitive messages as well as paper size and current zoom percentage of the plan sheet on screen The menu bar and several task specific toolbars are located at the top of the screen

NOTE All toolbars and dock bars may be accessed to view or hide through View gt Toolbars on the menu bar

Section 4 Features

18

Quick Start Video When On-Screen Takeoff opens you will be given an option to watch the Quick Start video (recommended) or start the program without watching the video

The 20 minute video will demonstrate key program functionality and allow you to view application instruction for enhanced learning

If you would like to watch the video click If you prefer to get started without

the video click If you have already viewed the video click the lsquoDo not show this message againrsquo box to prevent this dialog from appearing each time you open the program

NOTE If you decide later that you would like to watch the Quick Start video go to Help gt Watch

Quick Start Videos

On-Screen Takeoff Environment The On-Screen Takeoff environment acts like your drafting table allowing you to work on several sheets of plans at once and to reference at a glance the entire drawing and your position on that drawing while giving you the power of a computer to track analyze print and export your takeoff quantities and plans

The screen is bordered at the top by the Menu bar with pull-down menus and at the bottom by the Status bar which indicates current user status plan page size and current zoom percentage of page The largest portion of the application screen will be your takeoff area bounded on the left (by default) by two dock bars and on the top by several toolbars

In the takeoff area you may view your project plans (images) andor takeoff objects the takeoff list with quantities the worksheet or a legend of your condition list

The main window of On-Screen Takeoff has three tabs located at the bottom left allowing for quick change between Image Takeoff or Worksheet views Select the desired view option on the toolbar and it will automatically open on your screen

Section 4 Features

19

Image View

This view shows the plan file andor takeoff conditions drawn from your plans

Takeoff View This view displays the height if applicable and quantity breakdowns of your conditions according to result types indicated (eg linear feet square feet or count of items) for zones pages and the project as a whole It also displays notes per condition

Section 4 Features

20

Worksheet View This view displays the condition and quantity in units of measure specified in the first results field of the Results tab in the Condition dialog and allows the user to enter amounts for material labor and subcontractor takeoffs

NOTE When in the Worksheet view tab out the field then save This is keep all the values saved

Navigating On-Screen Takeoff

Auto Scrolling When creating linear areas or zones On-Screen Takeoff will automatically scroll the image view when necessary It will move as your mouse or digitizer moves beyond the edge of the current view

Changing Pages

1 Select View gt Next Page Previous Page or Go To Page (specify page number for the Go to Page option)

2 You may also select the corresponding arrows for these options from the Navigate Toolbar The

drop down arrow in the Page field will list the pages The and arrows will take you to the

previous or next page The and arrows will take you to the first or last page

OR

Section 4 Features

21

3 Or press Ctrl G for the Go To Page dialog

Hot Links Hot links allow you to move quickly from one drawing to the pertinent area of another drawing A hot link is handy when viewing enlarged areas of a page and needing the ability to jump back to a reference page

1 Select Tools gt Hot Link

OR

2 Click from the Tools Toolbar

3 Click on the page where you want to set the link The Hot Link dialog will open

4 Using the current page display on the Navigate Toolbar access the pull-down menu of pages by

clicking on the arrow at the right

5 Select the page for your link (You may also choose View gt Go to Page and select by page number)

6 Manipulate the view using the zoom tool and the scroll bars

7 Click

8 After joining a hot link to another page the hot link arrows in the Navigation Toolbar will become active

9 Move a hot link to another location on the page by clicking then click and drag the hot link image anywhere on the page

Section 5

22

Projects

This section will

Help you create settings important to your projects

Explain how On-Screen Takeoff works with your electronic or paper plans

Section 5 Projects

23

Project Template Files You can begin your project with a template Templates allow you to take advantage of conditions and settings used with previous projects

On-Screen Takeoff templates contain condition lists and established layer separations from previous projects you have created You may also use the sample templates provided with On-Screen Takeoff as a great starting point All aspects of the templates may be adjusted for a new project

1 Select File gt New and click the OK button

2 From the New dialog box choose the template that best fits your project

3 The conditions for this template will appear in the Takeoff Dock bar and the Project Properties dialog will open asking for further information

4 Use File gt Save or File gt Save As to rename and save your new project

Saving a Project as a Template File You can save your condition properties and layers as a template for future projects

1 Select File gt Save As

2 Enter a name for your template and select On-Screen Takeoff Template Files (tpo) from the Save As type field of the dialog (click on the down arrow to select)

3 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog Modifying a Template File Follow these steps to modify an existing template file if you need to change or add conditions andor layers

1 Select File gt Open

2 Navigate to your Projects directory

3 In the File Type drop-down select On-Screen Takeoff Template files (tpo)

4 Choose the On-Screen Takeoff template file you would like to modify and click the OK button

5 Make appropriate changes

6 Save and close file

The On-Screen Takeoff template files cannot save takeoff information

Section 5 Projects

24

Opening an Existing Project File 1 Select File gt Open

2 Navigate to the desired file location

3 Click the Open button

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask

you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Creating a New Project

1 Select File gt New

2 For a blank untitled project click

3 At this point the Project Properties dialog will pop-up for more information about your takeoff

NOTE The following are important to keep in mind when beginning a new project

At the start of your project fill out the Project Properties settings to establish the name for all printed output from your project set the default page size and scale for your plans number and names of different pages within the project and locations of electronic drawings

Scale settings can significantly affect quantity outcomes Be sure to set the scale for each page of drawings before beginning condition takeoffs

When using a digitizer remember to make a mark with a pen or pencil in the upper left and lower right corners of the first sheet of the paper plans to delineate the takeoff area for that sheet You can then set the takeoff area on On-Screen Takeoff using your marks

Save your project before you begin taking off any conditions On-Screen Takeoff will write a back-up file using the same file name

Remember the Undo feature If you make a mistake select Edit gt Undo and reverse the process step by step

Section 5 Projects

25

Project Properties

You can either set your Project Properties when you create a new takeoff or once your project file is saved under the appropriate name

1 Select File gt Project Properties the Project Properties dialog box will appear

2 Type in the name of your project to appear on printouts Use the backspace andor delete keys to edit the name as necessary

3 Press the Tab key to move to the Default Image Size option or click within the Image Size box You may click on the arrow at the right for the pull-down menu of page size options or you can use the down-arrow key on your keyboard to scroll through the list to the appropriate selection

4 Press the Tab key to move to the Default Scale option Select a scale by using the drop down arrow If your scale is metric you will need to click in the box next to Metric to convert to that measurement

5 Establish the number of pages for your project plans And load image files See Adding Pages to

Your Project

Adding Pages to Projects Individual Electronic Plans

1 Click on in the Project Properties dialog

2 In the Add Images dialog use the drop down arrow to navigate to the appropriate directory and folder containing your image

3 Select the file so that it displays in the File name field then click The file will display by name and path in the Image File field in Project Properties dialog

4 Click to accept and your project will automatically open

5 Save your project with the new settings by selecting File gt Save

Section 5 Projects

26

Electronic plans scanned from blueprints (as opposed to blue lines) will display as white lines on a black background and are difficult to read on your computer screen Select Image gt Invert and the colors will invert to black on white

You may have noticed the Page column in the Project Properties dialog Generally plan images occupy one page and 1 will be listed in the column indicating Page 1 of your plan file If you import a multi-page TIF a plan file containing more than one page of plans they will import as separate pages and each successive page will be indicated under the Page column as 1 2 3 etc of the plan file

Group of Electronic Plans You may add all the electronic plan files from a particular source (for example from a CD) by using the Auto Add feature

1 Click the button in the Project Properties dialog

2 Browse until you find the appropriate directory and folder containing your plan images

3 Click on any file displayed within your target folder so that the file name appears in the File name box of the Auto Add dialog

4 Click The image paths and file names will be recorded into the project properties arranged alphabetically

5 Click to accept your choices and your project will automatically open

6 Save your project with the new settings by selecting File gt Save

To load Dodge Plans into your Project Properties see Appendix IIi Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

Paper Plans On-Screen Takeoff makes it easy for Full Mode users to perform quantity takeoffs from paper plans using a digitizer

1 Add pages by clicking until you have the number of pages initially in the project

2 Name each page by clicking within the Title area and typing the name

3 Click to accept your choices and close the Project Properties dialog

4 Save your project with the new project properties settings by selecting File gt Save

Section 5 Projects

27

Setting Up a Drawing Template On-Screen Takeoff provides the convenience of using the same work surface for both digitizer and mouse to allow the user to draw conditions and then edit settings of the project or add or change conditions without breaking stride A mouse pad template included with the program defines the area of the digitizer in which use of the stylus or cursor will be recognized as mouse movement as opposed to drawing movement

1 Place your stylus on On-Screen Takeoff

2 Placing the template identifies the location mouse movements will be recognized by the program

Before placing the template the template must be applied to the digitizer surface This may have been done during the installation of your digitizer We suggest attaching the template to the lower right corner of the digitizer surface about one inch inside the grid area

3 Select Digitizer gt Place Template

4 Follow the instruction prompts on the screen clicking first on the target symbol at the left of the On-Screen Takeoff box on the template then on the target at the right

Setting Takeoff Area Before you can begin taking off a drawing you must define the drawing area on the digitizer This requires defining an area that will include all objects on each drawing of your plans As you add pages to your takeoff the same area of the digitizer will be active

1 Secure the plans to the digitizer with tape or a set of clamps

2 With a pen or a pencil mark the upper left corner and the lower right corner of the first page in your set of plans

3 Select Digitizer gt Set Takeoff Area

4 Click each mark with the stylus pen as prompted

5 Verify the active area of the digitizer by looking at the image size located in the lower right corner of your screen

If you close the program before the takeoff is complete you will need to reestablish the takeoff area before you can add additional condition quantities

Electronic plans appear on your computer screen eliminating the need to set a takeoff area You simply drag your mouse across the conditions you wish to takeoff The conditions will be highlighted and quantities will be totaled instantly Electronic plans are available through a variety of services For information contact an On Center Software account manager

Section 5 Projects

28

Setting Scale for Specific Pages You may set the scale in each page view separately This will override the default scale setting in Project Properties for that page Setting the correct scale for the drawing before taking off quantities ensures accurate calculations Be careful to check the scale for each drawing in your project before doing takeoffs

1 Display the page you want to set select Edit gt Set Scale

2 Use the drop down arrow to select a scale that will be applied to that page

3 Click

OR

4 Access the pull-down scale settings on the Navigate toolbar

NOTE As you draw objects notice that the drawn object is similar in width to the object on your plans If it is not the scale set may not be correct

Calculating Scale You may calculate scale according to a known measurement between two points either with a digitizer or on electronic plans

1 Select Edit gt Calculate Scale using Image or Edit gt Calculate Scale using Digitizer

2 Follow the instructions in the related Calculate Scale dialog box You will be asked to click on the first and second points then to enter the dimension for that distance

3 The scale will be recalculated for the displayed page and the Scale display on the Navigate toolbar will show the new scale

Section 6

29

Conditions and Takeoff

This section will Draw Conditions to Takeoff Plan Quantities

What Zones will do to help your takeoff process

Discuss the ins and outs of Takeoffs

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

30

Creating Conditions

If you are starting a new project from scratch you will need to create conditions to takeoff quantities such as floor areas wall lengths and corner bead counts If you are using a template you will have several pre-designed conditions already listed on the Takeoff dock bar However you may want to change the characteristics of some conditions or create additional conditions for a particular project

1 Right Click within the Takeoff dock bar Select New gt Condition

Or

2 From the Takeoff dock bar Click (if the buttons are not showing right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select Show Buttons from the pop-up menu) The New Condition dialog appears

3 Select the condition type (Linear Area Count or Zone) from the pull-down menu accessed by the

down arrow next to the Type option

4 Press Tab or use the mouse (or stylus) to move to Name and enter a name for your condition

5 Specify the desired condition attributes See Condition Attributes for more detail

6 Click for condition to apply

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

31

Condition Attributes Each condition type will have related attributes to select or specify within the General and Advanced tabs of the New Condition dialog Once a condition has been used to takeoff a quantity from your plans certain attributes cannot be changed

All conditions allow the user to specify color and fill pattern for the object drawn

Linear Conditions

General Specify width and height by feet and inches Specify pitch in inches up to the nearest thousandth of an inch if applicable

Advanced Specify rounding for object quantities and droprun default length for electrical or plumbing drops at the ends of lines Select Connect to have lines connect at the corners where one line of the condition ends and another begins (and indicate Tolerance for the featurersquos activation as distance between the ends of two lines) Choose Trim to have lines automatically trim to a line being crossed Choose Curve to draw a curved line

Follow these examples for inputting feet and inches For 7 feet 6 inches type 706 for 13 feet 7 inches type 1307 For 20 feet type 2000

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

32

Area Conditions

General If needed you can specify the thickness (in inches) andor pitch (in inches)

Advanced Specify rounding for object quantities Choose to display an adjustable grid within the area and indicate matrix cell dimensions

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

33

Count Conditions

General

Specify height and indicate the size (in inches) and shape (square circle triangle rectangle or opening) of the count object as it will appear on screen

Advanced Count conditions have advanced attributes These options are available for all shapes except for openings

Zone Conditions Zones allow you to subdivide condition quantities making it easier to modify and complete jobs in phases They can be used at the end of a takeoff to isolate a group of condition quantities that are in different areas of the takeoff

Zones can also be used to break a takeoff into multi-phases and can even be used to isolate quantities while a job is in progress to group the amount of work that has been completed to date They can be applied to one or multiple pages in your plans automatically calculating the takeoff quantities for each zoned area

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

34

The zone feature is only available in Lite and Full Mode If you are in View Mode and would like

to use this feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade

Condition Notes A Note tab is provided for comments regarding the condition These notes will display on the Takeoff List report and will import into Quick Bid

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

35

Condition Results The Results tab of the New Condition is based on condition type Initial settings default to linear feet (LF) for linear conditions square feet (SF) for area conditions and count of items (EA) for count conditions and zones The first of the results fields will display for the condition items in the Takeoff dock bar area All results will display in worksheets and Takeoff List reports as well as in an Excel spreadsheet after being exported

Copying Conditions You may use the condition attributes from a condition yoursquove already created for any future conditions of the same type

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Click the Copy button from the toolbar

OR

3 Right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select copy

4 A new condition will appear in the list with the same condition attributes as the previous condition but with the quantities zeroed

Editing Conditions Once you have copied a condition you might want to change several attributes You can also edit an existing condition to fit any updated needs

1 Highlight the desired condition on the Takeoff dock bar

2 Click the Change button

OR

3 Double-click on the condition you wish to edit to bring up the Change Condition dialog

NOTE The Change Condition dialog differs from the New Condition dialog only in that if takeoffs

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

36

have been performed in your project with this condition you will not be able to change the type of condition or certain properties under the advanced tab of the dialog box

Deleting Conditions 1 Click on the condition in the Takeoff Dock bar area

2 Click the Delete button on the toolbar

OR

3 Right-click and select Delete from the pop-up menu

All takeoff associated with the deleted condition will be deleted immediately and permanently

Organizing Project Conditions Within your project you can create folders andor sub-folders for different types of conditions You may even want to create a folder containing conditions with reset values

To get started organizing your conditions make sure you are viewing the condition tree (right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select Show Tree)

Creating Folders and Sub-Folders 1 Right-click in the Takeoff Dock bar area

2 Select New gt Folder from the pop-up menu

Copying Folders

1 Click on the folder and click Copy on the toolbar

2 All copied conditions within the new folder will have values reset to zero

Renaming Folders

1 Click on the folder

2 Right-click and select Rename from the pop-up menu

3 Enter a name for your folder and click the Enter button

Changing Condition Order

You may move conditions up or down in the condition list of the Takeoff dock bar to suit your project needs

1 Select the condition you would like to move by clicking to highlight it

NOTE When you are ready to move the highlighted conditions be sure that you start

moving using the last condition chosen That condition will have a highlighted boarder

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

37

2 Drag and drop any the condition from one place to another in the list You may also move a condition to another folder on the list in this way

Drawing with Conditions Snap Angles Set up snap angles to prevent lines from appearing jagged Snap angles are commonly set at 15deg and shift snap angles at 0deg

1 Go to Tools gt Options Options dialog appears

2 Under the General tab make the desired settings

3 Click to save the settings As they are drawn lines will snap to the set degree

Drawing a Linear Object 1 Select a condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff dock bar

2 Move the cursor into the Image takeoff area of the screen you will see the cursor display as crosshairs

3 Click and hold left mouse button then drag mouse to draw a line

4 Release mouse button to set line

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

38

5 Repeat steps for further lines

Continuous Mode This feature allows you to draw an object that has connected lines

1 Click the icon from the Takeoff toolbar

OR

2 Go to Tools gt Continuous Mode

3 Follow steps 1-3 from Draw a Linear Object

4 Click at each point of intersection The object will be connected

5 Double-click after making the final point to set the lines

Drawing a Curve To draw a curved line the Curve option must be checked under the Advanced tab of the Condition dialog

1 Click where you want to begin the curve and drag in a straight line to the position for the other endpoint of the curve

2 Click on the line to select it Handles in the shapes of small squares will appear at either end of

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

39

the line and in the center of the line

3 Move the cursor over the center handles until the cursor becomes a two-way arrow

4 Click and drag in the direction of the curve bending the line as you move the cursor Release to set the curve (The line you began with will disappear)

Draw a circle by drawing two curved lines connected

Drawing an Area Object Area conditions are drawn similarly to continuous mode lines You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete your area takeoff

NOTE When drawing an area do not intersect the perimeter or line of the object you are drawing

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

3 The area will be filled with the pattern set for that condition

NOTE The simulated circle will be good enough for you to be able to make a bid

To create a circular area click from point to point with very short distances in between points simulating a circlersquos perimeter Double-click after setting the last point to set the area

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

40

Grid Options Grids give you an added advantage when installing materials such as tiles Use this feature to get a count for how many tiles are needed for an area

1 Double-click on an area condition in the Takeoff dock bar to open its Condition dialog

2 Click on the Advanced tab to show its options

3 Check the box next to Grid by clicking in it

4 Indicate the dimensions of the cell matrix in inches (For example 200 x 400)

5 Under Results tab choose each (EA) for one of the results fields This will tabulate a number of grid cells (including partial grid cells) in area

6 Click to save your settings

7 Use the Move Grid and Rotate Grid features in the Tools menu to manipulate the grid as desired

Grid Calculation

1 Go to Tools gt Options menu

1 Specify if On-Screen Takeoff automatically should Calculate Grid Position

2 If AreaGrid Size is selected On-Screen Takeoff will calculate the number of items needed to fill the grid based on grid demintions

3 Click to accept and close the dialog

To move a line at any angle (regardless of default setting) press the Shift key while moving the mouse

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

41

Backout Mode This feature allows you to take out part of an area and deduct that amount of square footage

1 Select Tools gt Backout Mode

2 Outline the are you want backed out as you would when drawing a regular area object (see Drawing an Area Object)

3 The outlined area will clear and quantities will be recalculated

NOTE The perimeter of the backout area will be added to the LF quantity for that condition

Drawing a Count Object Square triangle rectangle and circle shaped count objects can easily be placed on images

1 Select the condition

2 Click in the location where you want the object to appear

3 To place an opening-shaped count item like a door or window you must click over an existing linear object such as a wall

4 On the Results tab you can change the height properties to give you the result you need

5 If Backout is checked on the advanced tab for each count opening the opening-shaped count item will back out a corresponding section of the linear object

Opening shaped count items are sized at 3rsquo0rdquo by default

Drawing a Zone Zones are drawn in the same way as area objects and may be any polygonal shape You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete the zone perimeter

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

42

Selecting Objects

1 Use the Select Tool to select objects

You can also select all objects that correspond to a condition

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Right-click and choose Select All

3 All objects with this condition will be highlighted with squares as an outline

Moving and Resizing Objects Linear

1 To move or resize a linear object click anywhere on the line to select it

2 To move the line position your pointer over the center handles When the mouse is positioned over the handles you will see a two-way arrow You will only be able to move the line in the direction of the arrows

3 Drag the line to a new position

4 Clicking and dragging the handles on the ends of the line will allow you to lengthen or shorten your line

Area and Zone

1 To move an area object or zone in its entirety click and drag it to its new position

2 Grabbing a handle at a corner or intersection of the object will allow you to adjust and change its perimeter

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

43

Count 1 To move a square circle rectangle or triangle shaped count object click and drag

2 Click and drag an opening shaped count object along the length of the linear object to the desired position then release

NOTE An opening shaped count object may not be moved from its associated linear condition object however it may be moved up and down the length of the linear object

Layers On-Screen Takeoff allows you to sort and separate your takeoff objects within the same job and on the same page On-Screen Takeoff gives you this flexibility through the use of layers

By assigning different conditions to different layers (for example differentiating between floors ceilings and walls) you can choose to view all layers or turn off certain layers to display and print the remaining groups of conditions only You may also remove the background image of electronic plans add text and hot link symbols or print only your condition takeoffs

Layers are only available in Full Mode If you are in View or Lite Mode and would like to use this

feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade Default Layers

On-Screen Takeoff begins every project with three default layers Image Annotation and Default The Image layer holds the electronic plan files you may have in your project The Annotation layer possesses all text notations highlighting and hot links in the project The Default layer will appear in the Condition dialog when creating or editing a condition (listed in the takeoff dock bar) Conditions are assigned to the Default layer unless otherwise specified by the user

Creating Layers To assign a condition to a layer other than the default layer you must first create additional layers for your project

1 Select View gt Layers to open the Layers dialog

2 Click An unnamed layer will be added

3 Click within the empty box and type a name for your layer (for example Wall)

4 New layers are added as active layers The adjacent box under the Show column will be checked

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

44

Assigning a Layer to a Condition 1 Open the Condition dialog box by creating a new condition or editing an existing condition

2 Under the General tab click on the down arrow in the Layer field to display optional layers

3 Select the desired layer for the condition Only the Default layer and layers you have added will be displayed

4 Click

View and Hide Layers

1 Select View gt Layers

2 Under the Show column check the box to view or remove the check (by clicking on it) to hide the specific layer

3 Click to accept and close the Layers dialog

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

45

Assigning Text to a Layer When adding text to an image On-Screen Takeoff has the capability to assign the text to a specified layer

1 Select the Text Tool

2 Click at the point you want to place your text

3 Type in your text using the Enter key for line breaks

4 Click the drop down arrow next to the Layer field and select the desired layer

Section 7

46

Printing and Exporting

This section will

Printing options and procedures

Exporting data by copying and pasting

Exporting quantity results to Excel spreadsheets

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

47

Print Setup On-Screen Takeoff allows the user to print the image takeoff list and worksheet

1 Select File gt Print Setup The Print Setup dialog will open

2 Select a printer or leave the default selection listed (change from the default printer displayed by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the field)

3 Indicate page size and printer tray option (Source) Access page size options by clicking on the

down arrow at the right of the field

4 Choose Portrait or Landscape orientation

5 Click to accept and close the dialog

Printing Images The image area can include the electronic plans the takeoff objects added text and hot links To print a subset of these (for example just the takeoffs without the plans or the added text and hot link symbols) hide layers that you do not want to print (see Section 6 View and Hide Layers) When you are printing your images every page will show the scale of the takeoff you are printing

1 Click on the Image tab to display the area of your project

2 Select File gt Print (or Ctrl + P)

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

48

3 Select the desired view (What to print) and the Image Range

4 Click The second Print dialog will open

5 Change settings accordingly or click if you accept the default settings

Printing Takeoff Lists and Worksheets In Takeoff Lists and Worksheets you may hide columns to print only certain results or adjust column widths to fit the report within the page size selected

1 In Takeoff List or Worksheet view move your cursor to the right side of the columnrsquos title bar the cursor will display as a two-way arrow

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

49

2 Click and drag to adjust the width of the column Holding the mouse button you may

slide the title bar under the title bar to its left to hide the column completely

3 Select File gt Print or press Ctrl + P to access the Print dialog

4 Indicate desired printer and choose the number of copies

5 Click to print and close the dialog

When printing the condition list we suggest printing in landscape

To reset to the default column widths double-click on the right border of a column heading will reset the column to its right (or previously to its right before being hidden)

Print Preview 1 Select File gt Print Preview

2 Use and to vary your view 3 If viewing an image choose current full or scale view to see how it displays

4 For printed outputs that cover more than one page use and to view adjacent pages or click on the down arrow next to Page field and select the page you want displayed

Exporting Using the CopyPaste Feature You may copy all the data or sections from the worksheet and the takeoff list view in On-Screen Takeoff and paste it into another application When pasting into Excel the cell layout will be maintained

1 Highlight the areas you wish to paste Click and hold the left mouse button down as you drag the cursor over the area to be selected then releasing the mouse button

OR

2 Select the entire takeoff list quickly click on the left On-Screen Takeoff column header and hold and drag the cursor across the remaining column headings

The number of pages for the view selected will display in the lower left-hand corner The zoom percentage that applies to the view will be displayed in the lower right-hand corner next to page size of the drawing

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

50

3 In the worksheet view you may highlight rows by clicking on the numbered buttons to the left of each row clicking and dragging across column headings or clicking and dragging over individual cells in the worksheet

Click anywhere in the appropriate view to deselect the area

4 Once your selection is highlighted you may select Edit gt Copy or Ctrl C from the keyboard 5 On your monitor switch to the application into which you want to paste your selection 6 Select Edit gt Paste in the new application or simply press Ctrl + V to paste

The colored keys for conditions cannot be pasted

Using the Export Feature You may export condition quantities to specified cell location within an Excel worksheet file Cell target locations are assigned in the Results tab of the condition dialogs on the Export line relating to each quantity measurement type

On-Screen Takeoff will export takeoff quantity results for up to three different quantity types that you specify For instance you may want to know the number of square feet in a ceiling area as well as the number of linear feet in its perimeter

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

51

1 Bring up the Condition dialog by double-clicking on a condition in the takeoff dock bar or by

selecting the condition and clicking

2 Click on the Results tab to access its fields The default quantities for the condition type will display

3 For each results field click on the arrow to access the pull-down menu and select the appropriate quantity (for example SF LF EA etchellip)

4 Have your Excel spreadsheet opened and saved in a file

5 Specify the Excel spreadsheet cell locations where you want the results to go

6 For a cell in the first sheet of your spreadsheet type in the cell address (eg a1) Case is not important

7 For a cell on a successive sheet of your spreadsheet type in sheet the number followed by a comma and the cell address without any spaces (eg sheet2a1) Case is not important

8 Click

9 Select File gt Export gt Condition Qty to Excel

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

52

10 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

11 Click to export On-Screen Takeoff results to specified cell locations in the Excel file When you return to the Excel application you will see the values have been added to the specified cell locations in your spreadsheet

12 Save your Excel file

Exporting Worksheet to Excel

1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 From On-Screen Takeoff Select File gt Export gt Worksheet to Excel

4 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

5 Click When you return to the Excel application you will see the values from the Worksheet Tab have been added to your spreadsheet

6 Save your Excel file

Exporting Takeoff to CVS 1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 Click the Takeoff Tab in the project you want to export the information

4 Select File gt Export gt Takeoff to CSV

5 Browse to the location of the CSV spreadsheet file click file to select it

6 Click the Save

NOTE CSV files can be opened in Excel Lotus Access etc One may consider this option more of a ldquodumprdquo into a file

The Excel application must be active (it may be minimized on the application bar) with the target spreadsheet open in the application Otherwise an error will occur with the export operation that will affect both the On-Screen Takeofftrade file and the Excel spreadsheet

Section 8

53

Advanced Features

This section will

Some special features of working with condition objects in the takeoff area

Details of advanced options for conditions

Advanced features of the Project Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

54

Features to Use with Objects Roping Feature You can move copy or delete using this feature Using the Select tool (the pointer) you may select several objects at once by clicking and dragging an outline around the objects then releasing the mouse button Roping may select either objects completely within the outlined area (inclusive) or objects both within and touched by the outlined area (touching) Specify your roping preference under Tools gt Options

1 Click and hold the mouse button at a point on the screen near the objects to be selected and drag to surround the objects with an outline

2 Release the mouse button The objects will be selected

3 You may now

Move the group around on the page by clicking within the group dragging the mouse and releasing the button to place the objects

Delete the group of objects by clicking the Delete key or

Copy and paste by pressing Ctrl C to copy the group then Ctrl V to paste it The pasted copy of the grouped objects will appear slightly offset from the original objects

Section 8 Advanced Features

55

Applying a DropRun Count

Use the droprun feature when calculating quantities to take into account the drop or run of a linear condition such as electrical lines or plumbing pipes Drop or run lengths may be added separately to any linear condition on screen while a default droprun length may be indicated for a condition as a whole

1 Select the desired linear condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff Dock bar

2 Click the Change button in the toolbar to open the Change Condition dialog

3 Click the Advanced tab to access the advanced options and click inside the DropRun check box

4 Enter a default length to be applied to all of this condition Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches) You can leave the length blank and manually enter drop run on each segment drawn

5 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog

Edit DropRun Count

1 With the related linear condition in the Takeoff Dock bar highlighted or with the pointer tool selected

2 click on the desired linear object in the image takeoff area The Count button will become active

3 Click on the Count button (alternatively select Tools gt Count) The default droprun amount will show in the pop-up Count dialog (Default length will be zero if droprun has not been selected in this conditionrsquos properties)

4 Type in the desired length Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches)

5 Click the OK button The additional amount will be reflected in the corresponding quantity The new DropRun count will apply only to the object edited

Adding Text in Image View

On-Screen Takeoff allows you to place text comments around your quantity takeoffs that may be printed along with plan images and objects Text is automatically placed within the Annotation Layer (that includes text and hot links)

1 To place text on the image select the Text Tool and click at the point you want to place your text opening a text box

2 Type in your information clicking Enter for line breaks

3 When you are finished click the OK button to exit the text box

4 To reposition text simply click on the text (with the Text Tool active) to select it

5 Move the cursor over the text the cursor will now display as a four-way arrow

6 Click and drag the mouse to position the text as desired

Section 8 Advanced Features

56

1 To edit existing text use the Text Tool to double-click on the text to open the editing box

2 Enter additional text or use the Backspace key to delete text as necessary

Formatting Text Once created you may format the font size type style and color of your text

1 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Font or click on the Font button in the Takeoff Toolbar

2 Select the desired features (color options are disabled) and click the OK button

3 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Color or click on the Color button in the Takeoff Toolbar The Color dialog will open

4 Click on a color in the Basic Color palette or create a color and add to the Custom Colors palette (Be sure to click on the color in the Custom Colors palette to select it)

5 Click the OK button

Object Properties

Linear Objects

Linear objects may be set to connect at corners

A linear object may be set to trim automatically when crossing another linear object (Check the trim option under the advanced tab of the Condition dialog)

When you move a connected linear object objects automatically move and resize connected lines accordingly (quantities are then recalculated)

This feature requires that the connected linear object be moved using the center handles (does not apply when resizing the line from the ends)

Objects constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

Objects are measured from centerline to centerline

Section 8 Advanced Features

57

Area Objects When drawing an area use your escape key to undo the last line drawn You may reverse your

drawing of an area using the escape key

The area will not fill with color and pattern until the user double-clicks after the last line is set

Lines drawn to delineate an area object constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

After selecting an area to move or adjust position the mouse in the center to move the entire area position the mouse at the sides or corners to adjust the perimeter

Count Objects

All count objects are quantified by the physical number of objects per page and reported as EA for the UOM The quantity for the current Image View is (displayed in the Condition List) and the total quantity in your project is displayed in the Takeoff View and Worksheet View)

Square circle rectangle and triangle shaped count objects do not displace or subtract from other object quantities when placed on top of them However on the Advanced Tab for the count condition a connect property can be set (this is a check box) so that when a count object of this shape is put on top of a Linear type takeoff object it will move with the linear if said linear is moved

An opened-shaped count object must be placed within a linear object Opening shaped count objects may also be measured by linear foot or linear yard (EA SF and SY are also options) Opening shaped count items default to a width of 3rsquo 0rdquo at the time of creation This size can be changed The small medium and large size are not options on this type of condition anymore Check Backout on the Advanced tab for each Count object back out the footage (or yardage) of opening-shaped count objects in which they are placed

NOTE In order to see this Backout functionality (in quantity) for SY or SF deductions at least one of the

results for the Linear(s) this object will be placed on must be set to SY or SF and the count object must have a height quantity

Advanced Features of Conditions The Round Feature Under the Advanced tab of the linear and area Condition dialogues you may specify quantity rounding (in inches) For linear objects rounding applies to each linear object drawn For area objects rounding will apply to each segment of the area perimeter adjusting the perimeter and area calculations For example With a linear condition entering 12 in the Round field will round up each related linear object to the nearest 12 inches or one foot With this setting two walls of 1 4 would each round to 2 0 totaling 4 0

NOTE In the Takeoff Dock bar condition list and in the On-Screen Takeoff reports quantities will be displayed in whole numbers rounded up to the nearest foot However calculations are based on true quantities without rounding unless the Round Feature is engaged

Pitch Pitch may apply either to linear or area conditions It is measured in rise per linear foot Entering 12 indicates a 12 rise per 12 of linear distance (a pitch of 12 over 12) or an angle of 45deg

Section 8 Advanced Features

58

Advanced Features of Project Properties Selecting Multiple Pages

1 Select a single page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry

2 Drag the cursor down the column of numbers to select consecutive pages

3 Click on the blank button at the top of this column to select all pages in the Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

59

Changing Image Assigned to a Drawing 1 Select the page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry 2 Click the Change Image button The Change Image dialog box will appear

3 Navigate to the desired file and select by clicking on it

4 Click the Open button The electronic file assigned to the page will have been changed to reflect the new file choice

Changing Image File Path 1 Select pages as described above

2 Choose Change Folder

3 In the Change Folder dialog navigate to the appropriate folder

4 Click the OK button The file path will have been changed for the selected page entries

Delete a Page from Project Properties 1 Select the page you want to delete by clicking on its associated number (in the gray box at the

left of the entry)

2 Choose Delete Page

All Takeoff on the page will be deleted immediately and permanently

Section 8 Advanced Features

60

Advanced Features of Tool Options

Calculation Method On-Screen Takeoff has built-in calculation options to allow for faster work and faster saves until your takeoff is complete Calculation options are found by selecting Tools gt Options then clicking on the Calculation tab

Calculation method can be set to Automatic Automatic except Grids and Manual Manual will allow the program to operate more quickly while Automatic or Automatic except Grids allows the user to see quantity changes as takeoffs are made

In any mode you may press F9 to recalculate quantities for the On-Screen Takeoff current totals

Configuration Tab

When the ldquoPage Label (A01)rdquo radial button is chosen On-Screen Takeoff puts the numbered label on all the pages of in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar If the Page Descriptionrdquo radial button is chosen then a description of what takeoff is on that specific page will be shown in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar

This section of the configuration tab gives you options on how you want to export your information When the ldquoFolderSubfolder Namesrdquo radial button is chosen than on your file that you are exporting to will have all the conditions folders and subfolders In the Delimiter box you can choose the symbol that is needed to separate the information you are exporting Some files need semicolons () or colons () to make sure the information comes exported in is separated it the appropriate places

Section 8 Advanced Features

61

In previous versions of On-Screen Takeoff there are views that users need to have in order for them to display their information By either choosing ldquoOST 1xrdquo or ldquoOST 2xrdquo it will let the program know you want your columns of information exported in that specific format

When you have the Confirm Deletions radial button of ldquoYesrdquo chosen than every time you delete anything you will get a dialog box confirming your intentions of deletion

While working with your takeoff you have a choice to either view the legend of your conditions or hide it Choose whichever radial button that suits your needs

For those who prefer to use the Enter key to navigate in dialog boxes this option is just for that

Font Tab The Font tab is designed for you to make your own look and feel for the application At the bottom of this tab it will show you sample of the fonts and colors you have chosen

Renaming the Current Page You may change the name of the current page in the takeoff area of On-Screen Takeoff by selecting Edit gt Rename Page

This opens the Name Page dialog and you may simply type in a new name and click the Enter button The new name for the file will be reflected on the title bar for the page and in Project Properties

You also may access the Rename Page function by right-clicking in the takeoff area while in Image View and selecting the option from the pop-up menu that appears

Section 9

62

Saving and Exiting

This section will

Explain how to save projects

Show you how to safely exit the program

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

63

Saving Your Project

1 Select File gt Save 2 If your project has not previously been saved a Save dialog box will open to allow you to name

the file and choose the directory and folder in which to save your file 3 Once saved File gt Save will simply save the current version of the file

OR

4 Select File gt Save As then type in a new name for the file and save to the desired file path

The Auto-save Feature With the Auto-save feature On-Screen Takeoff automatically backs up your open project You may choose to have more than one level of backup files The first backup copy will have the extension b00 and successive files will be b01 b02 and so on If you have designated four levels of backup files after the fourth backup copy has been created (b03) the next file will be saved over the file with extension b00 Further backup saves will then rotate through the four backup files in the same way

1 Select Tools gt Options 2 In the Auto-save area (under the General tab) select the frequency of backup file creation (in

minutes) and the number of levels for the feature 3 You also may disengage the feature by clicking in the check box to clear it

The Auto-save feature automatically saves backup copies to the directory of the current project If you are working from a write-protected area such as a CD-ROM On-Screen Takeoff will place backup files in the On-Screen Takeoff folder

Exiting When you are finished using On-Screen Takeoff it is very easy to exit Exiting is very important because of security reasons If someone were to use your computer they could enter the application and view and manipulate information

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

64

On-Screen Takeoff closes the open project when you open another or create a new project or when you exit the program

1 Select File gt Exit

OR

2 You also may click at the upper right-hand corner of the application to exit

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

65

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer When you get your digitizer from GTCO you will need to connect it to your computer Follow the instructions outlined below to do this

Note For rollup digitizers the metal bar must be oriented to the top or right hand side

Connecting the Digitizer 1 Lay the digitizer out flat 2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer 3 Plug in the power adapter 4 Plug the interface (IO) cable into the digitizer 5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into an open serial port on computer

Note GTCO Technical support phone number is 410-381-6688 The electronic manual (on diskette) from GTCO contains more detailed installation and operation instructions for the GTCO digitizer model you have

Installing other Digitizer Drivers If you are using a GTCO Digitizer you will need to install the GTCO TabletWorks Drivers

If you are using a Digitizer not supported by GTCO Tablet Works 10 please contact the manufacturer of your digitizer for assistance with installation

Installing GTCO TabletWorks Drivers 1 Insert the On Center CD into the CD-ROM drive The CD Startup screen will open 2 Click on Install Software 3 Select Additional Software and Drivers 4 Select Digitizer Driver 5 Follow the instructions for installing TabletWorks 10

Adhering the Template The template is a small plastic sticker used to enable mouse function when using the digitizer with On-Screen Takeoff Place your template on your digitizer We suggest placing it in the bottom right corner of the digitizer about one inch inside the takeoff area

Note You may either peel off the back of the template and use the adhesive surface or you can tape the template down

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

66

Testing the Digitizer Drivers Before running OST you may test the digitizer by moving the stylus around on the digitizer pad it should move the mouse cursor (if mouse emulation is enabled)

If the digitizer does not move the mouse cursor on the screen

The superset codes may need to be reset Reset the superset codes by touching on the border of the digitizer with the stylus The digitizer should beep several times

The digitizer may not be communicating with the computer Be sure the COM port selected is correct Be sure the COM port selected is correct If you are not able to get the digitizer to move the mouse cursor you need to call GTCO technical support for help

Note The Mouse Emulation is not required for On-Screen Takeoff to work properly It is used only for the Template functionality if the digitizer is moving the cursor the wrong direction (up instead of sideways or vice-versa)

Click the L-shaped arrow symbol on the digitizer with the stylus

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

67

Appendix II Toolbar Items Main Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

68

Tool Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

69

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

70

Navigate Toolbar (Continued)

Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

71

Takeoff Toolbar (Continued)

Image Toolbar

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

72

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

This section will detail how to load plans from a F W Dodge CD-ROM into an On-Screen Takeoff project file ready for takeoffs

Dodge files may be added to the Project Properties dialog However loading the files in that way will load the files by number rather than name description If you want to load one page only from your Dodge CD You will have to rename the page to display the name rather than number of the file

To load plan files from a Dodge CD so that the files load sequentially by file number but are displayed by name rather than by number within your project follow the instructions below

Opening a Dodge project from a CD-ROM 1 Insert the CD into the drive 2 Choose File gt Custom 3 Choose Dodge Plans Project (plansdat) as the file type 4 Select the appropriate file type by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the Files of type

field 5 In the Look in field access your drive paths by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the

field then

Navigate to your CD-ROM drive Open the data folder and Open the Projects folder

6 Select the desired project and open its folder 7 Open the plansdat file 8 All the images will come in sequenced correctly for that job along with the full descriptions

(names) of each page If there is not a plans folder in the project folder then plans do not exist for that project on the CD Opening the plansdat file will yield an empty project

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

73

Appendix IV Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer The On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer is a limited version of On Center Softwarersquos commercial takeoff software If your status bar located at the very bottom of the main window says View Mode in the lower left-hand corner then you are using the Plan Viewer You can use the plan viewer to

View CD-based amp converted CAD drawings

View a previously created OST file and associated drawings

Download electronic plans online

Navigate through drawings

Quickly Takeoff linearsareas and counts

Zoom in to view the plan better

Print drawings directly from the viewer

Viewing an On-Screen Takeoff Project File

1 To open an OST file that was previously created with of On-Screen Takeoff 2 Select File gt Open 3 An Open dialog will appear if you do not see the OST file you are looking for select the

Look In drop down arrow 4 A drop down menu will appear listing the various folders drives and mapped drives located

on your computer select the correct drive or folder location and continue to browse to the location of your OST file

5 When you see your OST file double-click it to open it 6 Any takeoff and drawings should appear on the Image tab view

If you do not see the drawings but do see the colored takeoff layer the drawings may

not be located in the same place they were originally saved at Go to File gt Project Properties and check the Image File path for each listed page If the image file path is pointing to a CD drive make sure the CD is inside the CR-ROM

Downloading Electronic Plans If your Online Plan Service provides a special file format (OSX) required to use this feature of our plan viewer you can immediately downloaded all electronic plans of a project directly from our viewer

Most Plan Room web sites will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff when a request to download plans is made Your particular Plan Room may differ in operation so please contact the provider directly with questions on using the site

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

74

When you request to download or open a project file from a Plan Room you will usually have the open to open or save an OSX file Choosing open will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff Alternately you may choose to save the file to a local hard drive After you have saved the file either double-click it to launch On-Screen Takeoff or open the OSX file using On-Screen Takeoff by clicking File then Open and locating the file on your hard drive You will need to change the file type to OSX

After the OSX file is opened you will see an additional tab appear in the Conditions List window called Pages

The Pages tab shows the hierarchy of your project Gray file icons represent pages that have not been downloaded and blue icons represents pages that have been downloaded

To download a page simply double-click the page icon

If you wish to select a group of pages to download you can use the Ctrl or Shift key to multiple select them then click the Download button

If you wish to download all pages at once click the Download All button

Downloaded pages will now appear in the Project Properties dialog in the same order in which they appear in the Pages tab

Creating Quick Takeoffs With On-Screen Takeoff you can create quick takeoffs to measure quantities even if you dont have the full version of our program However using the Quick Takeoff functionality shows you just a fraction of what the full version can do

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar is located at the top of the image view It has three buttons designated for three types of takeoffs Linear Area and Count The Quantity drop down list will show secondary quantities for Linears and Areas The Units drop down allows you to select how you want your quantities displayed Feet Inches Yards Millimeters and Meters

NOTE Every time change the type of takeoff you are performing (switching from Area to Linear for example) the previous quantities and takeoff objects will disappear They will also disappear when you changes pages

NOTE You can use the Dimension Tool to basically measure the distance between two points or linears The distance will display on the status bar at the bottom of the application

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

75

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions General

Where is On-Screen Takeoff installed on my computer

Typically it is installed in CProgram FilesOn-Screen Takeoff

In Explorer how do I recognize On-Screen Takeoff file types

On-Screen Takeoff data is stored in a single file per job lsquojob name OSTrsquo On-Screen Takeoff templates are stored as lsquotemplate nameTPOrsquo

Can only one project at a time be open

Yes For that reason opening another project automatically closes the project on screen You will be asked to save any changes

Is only one scale allowed per page What about on drawings that have multiple detail sections on a page and each of those drawings have different scales

Yes For pages with drawings of different scales copy the drawing to another project page and set the appropriate scale

I cannot perform backout on an area that is along a linear

As a workaround use the On-Screen Takeoff layers feature to help you with this issue Electronic Images

How do I start a project from drawings that have been scanned and written to a CD-ROM

Open a new project Select File gt Project Properties and select Auto Add Navigate to your CD and the appropriate folder and select any image file in that location Click Open All files in the location will load into your project Recommended that images are copied from CD to hard drive for performance

If I get a disk of drawings in AutoCAD format (R13 or R14) can I read them in On-Screen Takeoff

Yes On-Screen Takeoff now reads DWG DXF and many other format that are saved with AutoCAD

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

76

When I click on the all pages button what is supposed to happen Currently nothing seems to change when I click on that button

The All Pages button is used to apply the Darken and Enhance Plans feature to all pages in the project (as opposed to only the current page on screen)

Is there a way to deduct a large skylight from an area condition

Yes with the related area condition selected in the Takeoff Dock bar unselect the Backout button on the Takeoff Toolbar then draw the Backout area The area quantity will be deducted from the related condition object and the linear measurement of the Backout perimeter will be added

Digitizer Issues

How do I connect a Digitizer to the computer

See Appendix I Connecting a Digitizer

The Place Template menu choice is disabled

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or the digitizer or the digitzer drivers are not installed

It wonrsquot let me select the Set Takeoff Area menu choice

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or no job is open a digitizer is not installed or the drivers are not installed

The digitizer stylus is not moving the cursor or crosshairs

Click S-0-1 superset on the digitizer

How do I convert my old GTCO Digitizer to work with On- Screen Takeofftrade

Call GTCO and they may be able to reconfigure your digitizer to be compatible with On-Screen Takeoff

Printing Issues Which Printers work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible printers include On-Screen Takeoff Hewlett Packard Epson and Canon printers If you are having printer difficulties please contact support and specify the type of printer along with other pertinent information Contact support at wwwoncentercomsupport or email supportoncentercom

Which Plotters work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible Plotters include Hewlett Packard DesignJet plotters and the EnCAD Cadjet II If you are having plotter difficulties please contact support and specify the type of plotter concerned

ViewingDisplay I can no longer see my condition list How do I get it back

The toolbars and Dock bars can be turned on and off through the View gt Toolbars menu options

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

77

This is also accessible by right-clicking in the toolbar area and selecting (or deselecting) a toolbar listed

I cannot view my folders in the condition list

Right-click in the Takeoff Dock barcondition list area and select Show Tree to display your folders

My Status Bar reads Viewer Mode and I am unable to draw conditions

On-Screen Takeoff needs to be Authorized Or you need to purchase an upgrade Click the Perform Advanced Takeoff button on the main toolbar

I hid a Dock bar and when I selected to view it again it appeared alongside the other Dock

bar instead of stacked on top of it How do I fix it

Pick up the Dock bar by clicking on the bar at the top and continuing to hold down the mouse button drag the Dock bar over the other one It will resize and appear stacked with the other

When I open image files from a CD the images are all upside down How do I get them right

side up

To flip pages from top to bottom follow the steps below 1 Click the All Pages button on the Image Toolbar (All Pages is engaged when the button

is not clicked) 2 Click the Flip Horizontal button on the Image Toolbar 3 Click the All Pages button again to disengage

Templates How do I create a Template

Follow the steps below 1 Create a typical project 2 Choose File gt Save As 3 Choose On-Screen Takeoff Template Files as the file type to save 4 Name the file This will save all of the condition setups as well as the layers for the

project

How do I create a new project from a template

Follow the steps below 1 Choose File gt New 2 Select a template from those listed in the New dialog This will open a new project with

conditions and layers saved from a previous project but no pages or takeoff

78

INDEX

Area Conditions 32

Area Objects 57

Auto Scrolling 20

Auto-save 63

Backout Mode 41

Calculation Method 60

Conditions 29

Configuration 60

Contents Tab 6

Continuous Mode 38

Count Conditions 33

Count Objects 57

Digitizer 10 65 76

Docking Toolbars 13

Dodge CD 72

Drawing 27 37

DropRun Count 55

Environment 18

Exiting 63

Exporting 49

Features 16

Font 61

Frequently Asked Questions 75

Grid 40

Help File 5

Hiding Toolbars 13

Hot Links 21

Image 19 59

Image files 9

Image Toolbar 12 71

Images 75

Index Tab 6

Layers 43

Linear Conditions 31

Linear Objects 56

Main Toolbar 12 67

Menus 14

Moving Toolbars 13

Navigate Toolbar 12 69

Navigating 20

On-Screen Takeofftrade 2

Page 59 61

Pages 20 25 28

Plan Viewer 73

Plans 26

Printing 47 76

Project Properties 25

Projects 22

Quick Start Video 18

Resizing Toolbars 13

Roping 54

Saving 63

Scale 28

Search Tab 7

Selecting Objects 42

Setup 8

Start On-Screen Takeofftrade 17

System Requirements 9

Takeoff 19 27

Takeoff Toolbar 70 71

Takeoff Toolbar 12

Template Files 23

TIF (Group4) 9

Tool Toolbar 12 68

Toolbar 67

Toolbars 12

View Toolbar 12 69

Viewing Toolbars 12

Worksheet 20

Zone Conditions 33

Zoom Toolbar 12 69

  • On-Screen Takeoff Lite
  • Table of Contents
  • Section 1 - Introduction
  • Section 2 - Setup
  • Section 3 - Toolbars and Menus
  • Section 4 - Features
  • Section 5 - Projects
  • Section 6 - Conditions and Takeoff
  • Section 7 - Printing and Exporting
  • Section 8 - Advanced Features
  • Section 9 - Saving and Exiting
  • Appendix I - Installing Your Digitizer
  • Appendix II - Toolbar Items
  • Appendix III - Loading Plans from a Dodge CD
  • Appendix IV - Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer
  • Appendix V - Frequently Asked Questions
  • Index

Section 1 Introduction

6

Contents Tab This tab provides a quick breakout of the Contents of the help file It should be used like the Table of Contents of a book Simply double-click on the book icon to open the chapter Then click the desired page icon to display the relevant information

Index Tab This tab allows you to locate a specifically indexed topic This should be used as you would a book index Begin typing a word in the index entry field and the system will automatically move within the list to the entries closest in spelling to your word(s) Begin typing the topic word to access it in the list quickly

Section 1 Introduction

7

Search Tab This tab works like a word find It allows you to search for any word contained in the Help file Type the

word you are looking for in the lsquoType in the keyword to findrsquo field Click A list of topics containing that word will appear Scroll through the list and double click on the topic you want displayed

Section 2

8

Setup

This section will

Let you know what system requirements you will need to have in place

Recommend components that work well with the software

Help Full Mode users install a digitizer

Section 2 Setup

9

Minimum System Requirements To use On-Screen Takeoff your computer must meet the following minimum system requirements

An IBM PC or 100 compatible computer with a Pentium II or faster Intel processor

Memory Requirements 200 MB of available hard-disk space and256 MB RAM (128 MB preferred)

Windows 2000 SP4 and Windows XP SP2 256 color video card Super VGA display card Mouse 15-inch monitor

While these are the minimum system requirements Windows places heavy demands on your systems resources The more available memory in your computer the faster and more efficient On-Screen Takeoff will operate

Recommended Components

For the best performance we recommend the following components

Pentium III or faster processor

512 or more of RAM

12X speed CD-ROM or better

17-inch monitor or dual monitors Graphic adapter with 128 MB or more VRAM Sound card and speakers installed

NOTE In order to utilize the Training Videos you must have a sound card and speakers installed

Compatible File Formats The resolution in electronic plans does not need to be more that 200 DPI (Dots per Inch) The preferred file format is a black and white TIF (Group4) On-Screen Takeoff recognizes image files with the following extensions

File Extensions View Mode Lite Mode Full Mode TIF X X X PDF X X X OSE X X X JPG X X X CPC X X X CAL X DGN X DWG X DXF X OSP X PLN X PLT X

Section 2 Setup

10

NOTE Use the following image types for best results

Convert to TIF

The converted files will be stored in a folder with the name of the current On-Screen Takeoff project Since the conversion can be very time consuming you should only select this option if you really intend to convert vector files to TIF

1 Select File gt Project Properties

2 In the Pages Field add your image See Section 5 Establishing Project Setting Adding Pages

3 Click

4 Then select the page with the drawing you wish to convert

5 Click

Installing Your Digitizer The following instructions are a quick start to installing your digitizer For more specific information please reference Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer at the end of this guide

Connecting Your Digitizer

Upon receiving your digitizer (either a GTCO or another brand) you will need to connect it to your computer

1 Lay the digitizer out flat

2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer

3 Plug in the power supply

4 Plug the interface cable into the digitizer

5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into the computer

NOTE On-Screen Takeoff is compatible with any tablet that is WinTab compatible

Digitizer options are only available in Full Mode If you are in View or Lite Mode and would like

to use this feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade

Section 3

11

Toolbars and Menus

This section will

Introduce the program toolbars

Familiarize you with On-Screen Take Offtrade Menu options

Section 3 Toolbars and Menus

12

Toolbars On-Screen Takeoff is equipped with several helpful toolbars for application efficiency See Appendix II Toolbar Item` Details for a detailed description of each toolbar item Individually the toolbars may be displayed moved docked reshaped or hidden from view You can also create costume toolbars to fit your needs

Main Toolbar

Tool Toolbar

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Takeoff Toolbar

Image Toolbar Viewing Toolbars Toolbars are displayed on the screen and will be consistent on each tab or page (Some toolbars or toolbar items will be in an inactive state if they donrsquot have a supporting element in the application)

1 Select View gt Toolbars and select the appropriate toolbar name

OR

2 Right-click on a toolbar region of the screen

3 Check the toolbars you want to display

Section 3 Toolbars and Menus

13

Moving Toolbars The toolbars may be positioned anywhere on the screen you wish This feature is provided to allow the flexibility for positioning the toolbars so they are out of your way yet handy for use

1 Click on an edge of the toolbar holding down the mouse button drag it to its new position

2 Release the mouse button to set it in place

NOTE If the toolbar is dropped anywhere other than a screen edge it will become free floating This feature is especially handy when using multiple monitors

Docking Toolbars The toolbars can be docked to any of the screen edges

1 Click on the title bar of an undocked toolbar

2 Drag the toolbar to any location on the screen

Hiding Toolbars

1 Select View gt Toolbars and select the toolbar you wish to remove from the screen

2 Right-click on the toolbar or dock bar areas

3 A floating toolbar can be closed by clicking on the in the upper right corner of the toolbar

Resizing Toolbars Only undocked (floating) toolbars may be resized

1 Position the mouse pointer over an edge

2 Click and drag

3 The toolbar can be resized as desired

Customizing the Toolbars You may rearrange or delete buttons within a toolbarrsquos display or you may move buttons from one toolbar to another If you find that you use a few tools over and over you may want to group them within a single toolbar for convenience On-Screen Takeoff gives you the flexibility to customize your takeoff environment

1 Select Tools gt Customize The Customize dialog will open

2 With the dialog open click on a toolbar button and drag buttons from one toolbar to another or a new location within the same toolbar

3 To add a button without altering another toolbar click on the Commands tab of the Customize dialog and drag the appropriate symbol from the Buttons section to a toolbar

4 To remove a button drag it to within the takeoff area of the application

Section 3 Toolbars and Menus

14

Menus

Section 3 Toolbars and Menus

15

Digitizer Menu

Section 4

16

Features

This section will

Show you how open On-Screen Takeoff

Describe the On-Screen Takeoff environment

Teach you how to navigate pages

Section 4 Features

17

Start On-Screen Takeoff

1 On your desktop double-click your On-Screen Takeoff icon

2 The application will open

OR

3 Left-click on the Start button on your computerrsquos toolbar

4 Scroll up to Programs gt On Center Software

5 Highlight On-Screen Takeoff and click On-Screen Takeoff will open On-Screen Takeoff opens to an untitled blank project The Image view of the screen will be a blank page

Two blank dock bars the Pan dock bar and the Takeoff dock bar appear at the left side of the screen Along the bottom the Status bar displays user status or context-sensitive messages as well as paper size and current zoom percentage of the plan sheet on screen The menu bar and several task specific toolbars are located at the top of the screen

NOTE All toolbars and dock bars may be accessed to view or hide through View gt Toolbars on the menu bar

Section 4 Features

18

Quick Start Video When On-Screen Takeoff opens you will be given an option to watch the Quick Start video (recommended) or start the program without watching the video

The 20 minute video will demonstrate key program functionality and allow you to view application instruction for enhanced learning

If you would like to watch the video click If you prefer to get started without

the video click If you have already viewed the video click the lsquoDo not show this message againrsquo box to prevent this dialog from appearing each time you open the program

NOTE If you decide later that you would like to watch the Quick Start video go to Help gt Watch

Quick Start Videos

On-Screen Takeoff Environment The On-Screen Takeoff environment acts like your drafting table allowing you to work on several sheets of plans at once and to reference at a glance the entire drawing and your position on that drawing while giving you the power of a computer to track analyze print and export your takeoff quantities and plans

The screen is bordered at the top by the Menu bar with pull-down menus and at the bottom by the Status bar which indicates current user status plan page size and current zoom percentage of page The largest portion of the application screen will be your takeoff area bounded on the left (by default) by two dock bars and on the top by several toolbars

In the takeoff area you may view your project plans (images) andor takeoff objects the takeoff list with quantities the worksheet or a legend of your condition list

The main window of On-Screen Takeoff has three tabs located at the bottom left allowing for quick change between Image Takeoff or Worksheet views Select the desired view option on the toolbar and it will automatically open on your screen

Section 4 Features

19

Image View

This view shows the plan file andor takeoff conditions drawn from your plans

Takeoff View This view displays the height if applicable and quantity breakdowns of your conditions according to result types indicated (eg linear feet square feet or count of items) for zones pages and the project as a whole It also displays notes per condition

Section 4 Features

20

Worksheet View This view displays the condition and quantity in units of measure specified in the first results field of the Results tab in the Condition dialog and allows the user to enter amounts for material labor and subcontractor takeoffs

NOTE When in the Worksheet view tab out the field then save This is keep all the values saved

Navigating On-Screen Takeoff

Auto Scrolling When creating linear areas or zones On-Screen Takeoff will automatically scroll the image view when necessary It will move as your mouse or digitizer moves beyond the edge of the current view

Changing Pages

1 Select View gt Next Page Previous Page or Go To Page (specify page number for the Go to Page option)

2 You may also select the corresponding arrows for these options from the Navigate Toolbar The

drop down arrow in the Page field will list the pages The and arrows will take you to the

previous or next page The and arrows will take you to the first or last page

OR

Section 4 Features

21

3 Or press Ctrl G for the Go To Page dialog

Hot Links Hot links allow you to move quickly from one drawing to the pertinent area of another drawing A hot link is handy when viewing enlarged areas of a page and needing the ability to jump back to a reference page

1 Select Tools gt Hot Link

OR

2 Click from the Tools Toolbar

3 Click on the page where you want to set the link The Hot Link dialog will open

4 Using the current page display on the Navigate Toolbar access the pull-down menu of pages by

clicking on the arrow at the right

5 Select the page for your link (You may also choose View gt Go to Page and select by page number)

6 Manipulate the view using the zoom tool and the scroll bars

7 Click

8 After joining a hot link to another page the hot link arrows in the Navigation Toolbar will become active

9 Move a hot link to another location on the page by clicking then click and drag the hot link image anywhere on the page

Section 5

22

Projects

This section will

Help you create settings important to your projects

Explain how On-Screen Takeoff works with your electronic or paper plans

Section 5 Projects

23

Project Template Files You can begin your project with a template Templates allow you to take advantage of conditions and settings used with previous projects

On-Screen Takeoff templates contain condition lists and established layer separations from previous projects you have created You may also use the sample templates provided with On-Screen Takeoff as a great starting point All aspects of the templates may be adjusted for a new project

1 Select File gt New and click the OK button

2 From the New dialog box choose the template that best fits your project

3 The conditions for this template will appear in the Takeoff Dock bar and the Project Properties dialog will open asking for further information

4 Use File gt Save or File gt Save As to rename and save your new project

Saving a Project as a Template File You can save your condition properties and layers as a template for future projects

1 Select File gt Save As

2 Enter a name for your template and select On-Screen Takeoff Template Files (tpo) from the Save As type field of the dialog (click on the down arrow to select)

3 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog Modifying a Template File Follow these steps to modify an existing template file if you need to change or add conditions andor layers

1 Select File gt Open

2 Navigate to your Projects directory

3 In the File Type drop-down select On-Screen Takeoff Template files (tpo)

4 Choose the On-Screen Takeoff template file you would like to modify and click the OK button

5 Make appropriate changes

6 Save and close file

The On-Screen Takeoff template files cannot save takeoff information

Section 5 Projects

24

Opening an Existing Project File 1 Select File gt Open

2 Navigate to the desired file location

3 Click the Open button

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask

you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Creating a New Project

1 Select File gt New

2 For a blank untitled project click

3 At this point the Project Properties dialog will pop-up for more information about your takeoff

NOTE The following are important to keep in mind when beginning a new project

At the start of your project fill out the Project Properties settings to establish the name for all printed output from your project set the default page size and scale for your plans number and names of different pages within the project and locations of electronic drawings

Scale settings can significantly affect quantity outcomes Be sure to set the scale for each page of drawings before beginning condition takeoffs

When using a digitizer remember to make a mark with a pen or pencil in the upper left and lower right corners of the first sheet of the paper plans to delineate the takeoff area for that sheet You can then set the takeoff area on On-Screen Takeoff using your marks

Save your project before you begin taking off any conditions On-Screen Takeoff will write a back-up file using the same file name

Remember the Undo feature If you make a mistake select Edit gt Undo and reverse the process step by step

Section 5 Projects

25

Project Properties

You can either set your Project Properties when you create a new takeoff or once your project file is saved under the appropriate name

1 Select File gt Project Properties the Project Properties dialog box will appear

2 Type in the name of your project to appear on printouts Use the backspace andor delete keys to edit the name as necessary

3 Press the Tab key to move to the Default Image Size option or click within the Image Size box You may click on the arrow at the right for the pull-down menu of page size options or you can use the down-arrow key on your keyboard to scroll through the list to the appropriate selection

4 Press the Tab key to move to the Default Scale option Select a scale by using the drop down arrow If your scale is metric you will need to click in the box next to Metric to convert to that measurement

5 Establish the number of pages for your project plans And load image files See Adding Pages to

Your Project

Adding Pages to Projects Individual Electronic Plans

1 Click on in the Project Properties dialog

2 In the Add Images dialog use the drop down arrow to navigate to the appropriate directory and folder containing your image

3 Select the file so that it displays in the File name field then click The file will display by name and path in the Image File field in Project Properties dialog

4 Click to accept and your project will automatically open

5 Save your project with the new settings by selecting File gt Save

Section 5 Projects

26

Electronic plans scanned from blueprints (as opposed to blue lines) will display as white lines on a black background and are difficult to read on your computer screen Select Image gt Invert and the colors will invert to black on white

You may have noticed the Page column in the Project Properties dialog Generally plan images occupy one page and 1 will be listed in the column indicating Page 1 of your plan file If you import a multi-page TIF a plan file containing more than one page of plans they will import as separate pages and each successive page will be indicated under the Page column as 1 2 3 etc of the plan file

Group of Electronic Plans You may add all the electronic plan files from a particular source (for example from a CD) by using the Auto Add feature

1 Click the button in the Project Properties dialog

2 Browse until you find the appropriate directory and folder containing your plan images

3 Click on any file displayed within your target folder so that the file name appears in the File name box of the Auto Add dialog

4 Click The image paths and file names will be recorded into the project properties arranged alphabetically

5 Click to accept your choices and your project will automatically open

6 Save your project with the new settings by selecting File gt Save

To load Dodge Plans into your Project Properties see Appendix IIi Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

Paper Plans On-Screen Takeoff makes it easy for Full Mode users to perform quantity takeoffs from paper plans using a digitizer

1 Add pages by clicking until you have the number of pages initially in the project

2 Name each page by clicking within the Title area and typing the name

3 Click to accept your choices and close the Project Properties dialog

4 Save your project with the new project properties settings by selecting File gt Save

Section 5 Projects

27

Setting Up a Drawing Template On-Screen Takeoff provides the convenience of using the same work surface for both digitizer and mouse to allow the user to draw conditions and then edit settings of the project or add or change conditions without breaking stride A mouse pad template included with the program defines the area of the digitizer in which use of the stylus or cursor will be recognized as mouse movement as opposed to drawing movement

1 Place your stylus on On-Screen Takeoff

2 Placing the template identifies the location mouse movements will be recognized by the program

Before placing the template the template must be applied to the digitizer surface This may have been done during the installation of your digitizer We suggest attaching the template to the lower right corner of the digitizer surface about one inch inside the grid area

3 Select Digitizer gt Place Template

4 Follow the instruction prompts on the screen clicking first on the target symbol at the left of the On-Screen Takeoff box on the template then on the target at the right

Setting Takeoff Area Before you can begin taking off a drawing you must define the drawing area on the digitizer This requires defining an area that will include all objects on each drawing of your plans As you add pages to your takeoff the same area of the digitizer will be active

1 Secure the plans to the digitizer with tape or a set of clamps

2 With a pen or a pencil mark the upper left corner and the lower right corner of the first page in your set of plans

3 Select Digitizer gt Set Takeoff Area

4 Click each mark with the stylus pen as prompted

5 Verify the active area of the digitizer by looking at the image size located in the lower right corner of your screen

If you close the program before the takeoff is complete you will need to reestablish the takeoff area before you can add additional condition quantities

Electronic plans appear on your computer screen eliminating the need to set a takeoff area You simply drag your mouse across the conditions you wish to takeoff The conditions will be highlighted and quantities will be totaled instantly Electronic plans are available through a variety of services For information contact an On Center Software account manager

Section 5 Projects

28

Setting Scale for Specific Pages You may set the scale in each page view separately This will override the default scale setting in Project Properties for that page Setting the correct scale for the drawing before taking off quantities ensures accurate calculations Be careful to check the scale for each drawing in your project before doing takeoffs

1 Display the page you want to set select Edit gt Set Scale

2 Use the drop down arrow to select a scale that will be applied to that page

3 Click

OR

4 Access the pull-down scale settings on the Navigate toolbar

NOTE As you draw objects notice that the drawn object is similar in width to the object on your plans If it is not the scale set may not be correct

Calculating Scale You may calculate scale according to a known measurement between two points either with a digitizer or on electronic plans

1 Select Edit gt Calculate Scale using Image or Edit gt Calculate Scale using Digitizer

2 Follow the instructions in the related Calculate Scale dialog box You will be asked to click on the first and second points then to enter the dimension for that distance

3 The scale will be recalculated for the displayed page and the Scale display on the Navigate toolbar will show the new scale

Section 6

29

Conditions and Takeoff

This section will Draw Conditions to Takeoff Plan Quantities

What Zones will do to help your takeoff process

Discuss the ins and outs of Takeoffs

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

30

Creating Conditions

If you are starting a new project from scratch you will need to create conditions to takeoff quantities such as floor areas wall lengths and corner bead counts If you are using a template you will have several pre-designed conditions already listed on the Takeoff dock bar However you may want to change the characteristics of some conditions or create additional conditions for a particular project

1 Right Click within the Takeoff dock bar Select New gt Condition

Or

2 From the Takeoff dock bar Click (if the buttons are not showing right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select Show Buttons from the pop-up menu) The New Condition dialog appears

3 Select the condition type (Linear Area Count or Zone) from the pull-down menu accessed by the

down arrow next to the Type option

4 Press Tab or use the mouse (or stylus) to move to Name and enter a name for your condition

5 Specify the desired condition attributes See Condition Attributes for more detail

6 Click for condition to apply

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

31

Condition Attributes Each condition type will have related attributes to select or specify within the General and Advanced tabs of the New Condition dialog Once a condition has been used to takeoff a quantity from your plans certain attributes cannot be changed

All conditions allow the user to specify color and fill pattern for the object drawn

Linear Conditions

General Specify width and height by feet and inches Specify pitch in inches up to the nearest thousandth of an inch if applicable

Advanced Specify rounding for object quantities and droprun default length for electrical or plumbing drops at the ends of lines Select Connect to have lines connect at the corners where one line of the condition ends and another begins (and indicate Tolerance for the featurersquos activation as distance between the ends of two lines) Choose Trim to have lines automatically trim to a line being crossed Choose Curve to draw a curved line

Follow these examples for inputting feet and inches For 7 feet 6 inches type 706 for 13 feet 7 inches type 1307 For 20 feet type 2000

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

32

Area Conditions

General If needed you can specify the thickness (in inches) andor pitch (in inches)

Advanced Specify rounding for object quantities Choose to display an adjustable grid within the area and indicate matrix cell dimensions

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

33

Count Conditions

General

Specify height and indicate the size (in inches) and shape (square circle triangle rectangle or opening) of the count object as it will appear on screen

Advanced Count conditions have advanced attributes These options are available for all shapes except for openings

Zone Conditions Zones allow you to subdivide condition quantities making it easier to modify and complete jobs in phases They can be used at the end of a takeoff to isolate a group of condition quantities that are in different areas of the takeoff

Zones can also be used to break a takeoff into multi-phases and can even be used to isolate quantities while a job is in progress to group the amount of work that has been completed to date They can be applied to one or multiple pages in your plans automatically calculating the takeoff quantities for each zoned area

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

34

The zone feature is only available in Lite and Full Mode If you are in View Mode and would like

to use this feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade

Condition Notes A Note tab is provided for comments regarding the condition These notes will display on the Takeoff List report and will import into Quick Bid

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

35

Condition Results The Results tab of the New Condition is based on condition type Initial settings default to linear feet (LF) for linear conditions square feet (SF) for area conditions and count of items (EA) for count conditions and zones The first of the results fields will display for the condition items in the Takeoff dock bar area All results will display in worksheets and Takeoff List reports as well as in an Excel spreadsheet after being exported

Copying Conditions You may use the condition attributes from a condition yoursquove already created for any future conditions of the same type

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Click the Copy button from the toolbar

OR

3 Right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select copy

4 A new condition will appear in the list with the same condition attributes as the previous condition but with the quantities zeroed

Editing Conditions Once you have copied a condition you might want to change several attributes You can also edit an existing condition to fit any updated needs

1 Highlight the desired condition on the Takeoff dock bar

2 Click the Change button

OR

3 Double-click on the condition you wish to edit to bring up the Change Condition dialog

NOTE The Change Condition dialog differs from the New Condition dialog only in that if takeoffs

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

36

have been performed in your project with this condition you will not be able to change the type of condition or certain properties under the advanced tab of the dialog box

Deleting Conditions 1 Click on the condition in the Takeoff Dock bar area

2 Click the Delete button on the toolbar

OR

3 Right-click and select Delete from the pop-up menu

All takeoff associated with the deleted condition will be deleted immediately and permanently

Organizing Project Conditions Within your project you can create folders andor sub-folders for different types of conditions You may even want to create a folder containing conditions with reset values

To get started organizing your conditions make sure you are viewing the condition tree (right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select Show Tree)

Creating Folders and Sub-Folders 1 Right-click in the Takeoff Dock bar area

2 Select New gt Folder from the pop-up menu

Copying Folders

1 Click on the folder and click Copy on the toolbar

2 All copied conditions within the new folder will have values reset to zero

Renaming Folders

1 Click on the folder

2 Right-click and select Rename from the pop-up menu

3 Enter a name for your folder and click the Enter button

Changing Condition Order

You may move conditions up or down in the condition list of the Takeoff dock bar to suit your project needs

1 Select the condition you would like to move by clicking to highlight it

NOTE When you are ready to move the highlighted conditions be sure that you start

moving using the last condition chosen That condition will have a highlighted boarder

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

37

2 Drag and drop any the condition from one place to another in the list You may also move a condition to another folder on the list in this way

Drawing with Conditions Snap Angles Set up snap angles to prevent lines from appearing jagged Snap angles are commonly set at 15deg and shift snap angles at 0deg

1 Go to Tools gt Options Options dialog appears

2 Under the General tab make the desired settings

3 Click to save the settings As they are drawn lines will snap to the set degree

Drawing a Linear Object 1 Select a condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff dock bar

2 Move the cursor into the Image takeoff area of the screen you will see the cursor display as crosshairs

3 Click and hold left mouse button then drag mouse to draw a line

4 Release mouse button to set line

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

38

5 Repeat steps for further lines

Continuous Mode This feature allows you to draw an object that has connected lines

1 Click the icon from the Takeoff toolbar

OR

2 Go to Tools gt Continuous Mode

3 Follow steps 1-3 from Draw a Linear Object

4 Click at each point of intersection The object will be connected

5 Double-click after making the final point to set the lines

Drawing a Curve To draw a curved line the Curve option must be checked under the Advanced tab of the Condition dialog

1 Click where you want to begin the curve and drag in a straight line to the position for the other endpoint of the curve

2 Click on the line to select it Handles in the shapes of small squares will appear at either end of

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

39

the line and in the center of the line

3 Move the cursor over the center handles until the cursor becomes a two-way arrow

4 Click and drag in the direction of the curve bending the line as you move the cursor Release to set the curve (The line you began with will disappear)

Draw a circle by drawing two curved lines connected

Drawing an Area Object Area conditions are drawn similarly to continuous mode lines You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete your area takeoff

NOTE When drawing an area do not intersect the perimeter or line of the object you are drawing

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

3 The area will be filled with the pattern set for that condition

NOTE The simulated circle will be good enough for you to be able to make a bid

To create a circular area click from point to point with very short distances in between points simulating a circlersquos perimeter Double-click after setting the last point to set the area

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

40

Grid Options Grids give you an added advantage when installing materials such as tiles Use this feature to get a count for how many tiles are needed for an area

1 Double-click on an area condition in the Takeoff dock bar to open its Condition dialog

2 Click on the Advanced tab to show its options

3 Check the box next to Grid by clicking in it

4 Indicate the dimensions of the cell matrix in inches (For example 200 x 400)

5 Under Results tab choose each (EA) for one of the results fields This will tabulate a number of grid cells (including partial grid cells) in area

6 Click to save your settings

7 Use the Move Grid and Rotate Grid features in the Tools menu to manipulate the grid as desired

Grid Calculation

1 Go to Tools gt Options menu

1 Specify if On-Screen Takeoff automatically should Calculate Grid Position

2 If AreaGrid Size is selected On-Screen Takeoff will calculate the number of items needed to fill the grid based on grid demintions

3 Click to accept and close the dialog

To move a line at any angle (regardless of default setting) press the Shift key while moving the mouse

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

41

Backout Mode This feature allows you to take out part of an area and deduct that amount of square footage

1 Select Tools gt Backout Mode

2 Outline the are you want backed out as you would when drawing a regular area object (see Drawing an Area Object)

3 The outlined area will clear and quantities will be recalculated

NOTE The perimeter of the backout area will be added to the LF quantity for that condition

Drawing a Count Object Square triangle rectangle and circle shaped count objects can easily be placed on images

1 Select the condition

2 Click in the location where you want the object to appear

3 To place an opening-shaped count item like a door or window you must click over an existing linear object such as a wall

4 On the Results tab you can change the height properties to give you the result you need

5 If Backout is checked on the advanced tab for each count opening the opening-shaped count item will back out a corresponding section of the linear object

Opening shaped count items are sized at 3rsquo0rdquo by default

Drawing a Zone Zones are drawn in the same way as area objects and may be any polygonal shape You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete the zone perimeter

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

42

Selecting Objects

1 Use the Select Tool to select objects

You can also select all objects that correspond to a condition

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Right-click and choose Select All

3 All objects with this condition will be highlighted with squares as an outline

Moving and Resizing Objects Linear

1 To move or resize a linear object click anywhere on the line to select it

2 To move the line position your pointer over the center handles When the mouse is positioned over the handles you will see a two-way arrow You will only be able to move the line in the direction of the arrows

3 Drag the line to a new position

4 Clicking and dragging the handles on the ends of the line will allow you to lengthen or shorten your line

Area and Zone

1 To move an area object or zone in its entirety click and drag it to its new position

2 Grabbing a handle at a corner or intersection of the object will allow you to adjust and change its perimeter

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

43

Count 1 To move a square circle rectangle or triangle shaped count object click and drag

2 Click and drag an opening shaped count object along the length of the linear object to the desired position then release

NOTE An opening shaped count object may not be moved from its associated linear condition object however it may be moved up and down the length of the linear object

Layers On-Screen Takeoff allows you to sort and separate your takeoff objects within the same job and on the same page On-Screen Takeoff gives you this flexibility through the use of layers

By assigning different conditions to different layers (for example differentiating between floors ceilings and walls) you can choose to view all layers or turn off certain layers to display and print the remaining groups of conditions only You may also remove the background image of electronic plans add text and hot link symbols or print only your condition takeoffs

Layers are only available in Full Mode If you are in View or Lite Mode and would like to use this

feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade Default Layers

On-Screen Takeoff begins every project with three default layers Image Annotation and Default The Image layer holds the electronic plan files you may have in your project The Annotation layer possesses all text notations highlighting and hot links in the project The Default layer will appear in the Condition dialog when creating or editing a condition (listed in the takeoff dock bar) Conditions are assigned to the Default layer unless otherwise specified by the user

Creating Layers To assign a condition to a layer other than the default layer you must first create additional layers for your project

1 Select View gt Layers to open the Layers dialog

2 Click An unnamed layer will be added

3 Click within the empty box and type a name for your layer (for example Wall)

4 New layers are added as active layers The adjacent box under the Show column will be checked

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

44

Assigning a Layer to a Condition 1 Open the Condition dialog box by creating a new condition or editing an existing condition

2 Under the General tab click on the down arrow in the Layer field to display optional layers

3 Select the desired layer for the condition Only the Default layer and layers you have added will be displayed

4 Click

View and Hide Layers

1 Select View gt Layers

2 Under the Show column check the box to view or remove the check (by clicking on it) to hide the specific layer

3 Click to accept and close the Layers dialog

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

45

Assigning Text to a Layer When adding text to an image On-Screen Takeoff has the capability to assign the text to a specified layer

1 Select the Text Tool

2 Click at the point you want to place your text

3 Type in your text using the Enter key for line breaks

4 Click the drop down arrow next to the Layer field and select the desired layer

Section 7

46

Printing and Exporting

This section will

Printing options and procedures

Exporting data by copying and pasting

Exporting quantity results to Excel spreadsheets

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

47

Print Setup On-Screen Takeoff allows the user to print the image takeoff list and worksheet

1 Select File gt Print Setup The Print Setup dialog will open

2 Select a printer or leave the default selection listed (change from the default printer displayed by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the field)

3 Indicate page size and printer tray option (Source) Access page size options by clicking on the

down arrow at the right of the field

4 Choose Portrait or Landscape orientation

5 Click to accept and close the dialog

Printing Images The image area can include the electronic plans the takeoff objects added text and hot links To print a subset of these (for example just the takeoffs without the plans or the added text and hot link symbols) hide layers that you do not want to print (see Section 6 View and Hide Layers) When you are printing your images every page will show the scale of the takeoff you are printing

1 Click on the Image tab to display the area of your project

2 Select File gt Print (or Ctrl + P)

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

48

3 Select the desired view (What to print) and the Image Range

4 Click The second Print dialog will open

5 Change settings accordingly or click if you accept the default settings

Printing Takeoff Lists and Worksheets In Takeoff Lists and Worksheets you may hide columns to print only certain results or adjust column widths to fit the report within the page size selected

1 In Takeoff List or Worksheet view move your cursor to the right side of the columnrsquos title bar the cursor will display as a two-way arrow

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

49

2 Click and drag to adjust the width of the column Holding the mouse button you may

slide the title bar under the title bar to its left to hide the column completely

3 Select File gt Print or press Ctrl + P to access the Print dialog

4 Indicate desired printer and choose the number of copies

5 Click to print and close the dialog

When printing the condition list we suggest printing in landscape

To reset to the default column widths double-click on the right border of a column heading will reset the column to its right (or previously to its right before being hidden)

Print Preview 1 Select File gt Print Preview

2 Use and to vary your view 3 If viewing an image choose current full or scale view to see how it displays

4 For printed outputs that cover more than one page use and to view adjacent pages or click on the down arrow next to Page field and select the page you want displayed

Exporting Using the CopyPaste Feature You may copy all the data or sections from the worksheet and the takeoff list view in On-Screen Takeoff and paste it into another application When pasting into Excel the cell layout will be maintained

1 Highlight the areas you wish to paste Click and hold the left mouse button down as you drag the cursor over the area to be selected then releasing the mouse button

OR

2 Select the entire takeoff list quickly click on the left On-Screen Takeoff column header and hold and drag the cursor across the remaining column headings

The number of pages for the view selected will display in the lower left-hand corner The zoom percentage that applies to the view will be displayed in the lower right-hand corner next to page size of the drawing

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

50

3 In the worksheet view you may highlight rows by clicking on the numbered buttons to the left of each row clicking and dragging across column headings or clicking and dragging over individual cells in the worksheet

Click anywhere in the appropriate view to deselect the area

4 Once your selection is highlighted you may select Edit gt Copy or Ctrl C from the keyboard 5 On your monitor switch to the application into which you want to paste your selection 6 Select Edit gt Paste in the new application or simply press Ctrl + V to paste

The colored keys for conditions cannot be pasted

Using the Export Feature You may export condition quantities to specified cell location within an Excel worksheet file Cell target locations are assigned in the Results tab of the condition dialogs on the Export line relating to each quantity measurement type

On-Screen Takeoff will export takeoff quantity results for up to three different quantity types that you specify For instance you may want to know the number of square feet in a ceiling area as well as the number of linear feet in its perimeter

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

51

1 Bring up the Condition dialog by double-clicking on a condition in the takeoff dock bar or by

selecting the condition and clicking

2 Click on the Results tab to access its fields The default quantities for the condition type will display

3 For each results field click on the arrow to access the pull-down menu and select the appropriate quantity (for example SF LF EA etchellip)

4 Have your Excel spreadsheet opened and saved in a file

5 Specify the Excel spreadsheet cell locations where you want the results to go

6 For a cell in the first sheet of your spreadsheet type in the cell address (eg a1) Case is not important

7 For a cell on a successive sheet of your spreadsheet type in sheet the number followed by a comma and the cell address without any spaces (eg sheet2a1) Case is not important

8 Click

9 Select File gt Export gt Condition Qty to Excel

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

52

10 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

11 Click to export On-Screen Takeoff results to specified cell locations in the Excel file When you return to the Excel application you will see the values have been added to the specified cell locations in your spreadsheet

12 Save your Excel file

Exporting Worksheet to Excel

1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 From On-Screen Takeoff Select File gt Export gt Worksheet to Excel

4 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

5 Click When you return to the Excel application you will see the values from the Worksheet Tab have been added to your spreadsheet

6 Save your Excel file

Exporting Takeoff to CVS 1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 Click the Takeoff Tab in the project you want to export the information

4 Select File gt Export gt Takeoff to CSV

5 Browse to the location of the CSV spreadsheet file click file to select it

6 Click the Save

NOTE CSV files can be opened in Excel Lotus Access etc One may consider this option more of a ldquodumprdquo into a file

The Excel application must be active (it may be minimized on the application bar) with the target spreadsheet open in the application Otherwise an error will occur with the export operation that will affect both the On-Screen Takeofftrade file and the Excel spreadsheet

Section 8

53

Advanced Features

This section will

Some special features of working with condition objects in the takeoff area

Details of advanced options for conditions

Advanced features of the Project Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

54

Features to Use with Objects Roping Feature You can move copy or delete using this feature Using the Select tool (the pointer) you may select several objects at once by clicking and dragging an outline around the objects then releasing the mouse button Roping may select either objects completely within the outlined area (inclusive) or objects both within and touched by the outlined area (touching) Specify your roping preference under Tools gt Options

1 Click and hold the mouse button at a point on the screen near the objects to be selected and drag to surround the objects with an outline

2 Release the mouse button The objects will be selected

3 You may now

Move the group around on the page by clicking within the group dragging the mouse and releasing the button to place the objects

Delete the group of objects by clicking the Delete key or

Copy and paste by pressing Ctrl C to copy the group then Ctrl V to paste it The pasted copy of the grouped objects will appear slightly offset from the original objects

Section 8 Advanced Features

55

Applying a DropRun Count

Use the droprun feature when calculating quantities to take into account the drop or run of a linear condition such as electrical lines or plumbing pipes Drop or run lengths may be added separately to any linear condition on screen while a default droprun length may be indicated for a condition as a whole

1 Select the desired linear condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff Dock bar

2 Click the Change button in the toolbar to open the Change Condition dialog

3 Click the Advanced tab to access the advanced options and click inside the DropRun check box

4 Enter a default length to be applied to all of this condition Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches) You can leave the length blank and manually enter drop run on each segment drawn

5 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog

Edit DropRun Count

1 With the related linear condition in the Takeoff Dock bar highlighted or with the pointer tool selected

2 click on the desired linear object in the image takeoff area The Count button will become active

3 Click on the Count button (alternatively select Tools gt Count) The default droprun amount will show in the pop-up Count dialog (Default length will be zero if droprun has not been selected in this conditionrsquos properties)

4 Type in the desired length Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches)

5 Click the OK button The additional amount will be reflected in the corresponding quantity The new DropRun count will apply only to the object edited

Adding Text in Image View

On-Screen Takeoff allows you to place text comments around your quantity takeoffs that may be printed along with plan images and objects Text is automatically placed within the Annotation Layer (that includes text and hot links)

1 To place text on the image select the Text Tool and click at the point you want to place your text opening a text box

2 Type in your information clicking Enter for line breaks

3 When you are finished click the OK button to exit the text box

4 To reposition text simply click on the text (with the Text Tool active) to select it

5 Move the cursor over the text the cursor will now display as a four-way arrow

6 Click and drag the mouse to position the text as desired

Section 8 Advanced Features

56

1 To edit existing text use the Text Tool to double-click on the text to open the editing box

2 Enter additional text or use the Backspace key to delete text as necessary

Formatting Text Once created you may format the font size type style and color of your text

1 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Font or click on the Font button in the Takeoff Toolbar

2 Select the desired features (color options are disabled) and click the OK button

3 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Color or click on the Color button in the Takeoff Toolbar The Color dialog will open

4 Click on a color in the Basic Color palette or create a color and add to the Custom Colors palette (Be sure to click on the color in the Custom Colors palette to select it)

5 Click the OK button

Object Properties

Linear Objects

Linear objects may be set to connect at corners

A linear object may be set to trim automatically when crossing another linear object (Check the trim option under the advanced tab of the Condition dialog)

When you move a connected linear object objects automatically move and resize connected lines accordingly (quantities are then recalculated)

This feature requires that the connected linear object be moved using the center handles (does not apply when resizing the line from the ends)

Objects constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

Objects are measured from centerline to centerline

Section 8 Advanced Features

57

Area Objects When drawing an area use your escape key to undo the last line drawn You may reverse your

drawing of an area using the escape key

The area will not fill with color and pattern until the user double-clicks after the last line is set

Lines drawn to delineate an area object constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

After selecting an area to move or adjust position the mouse in the center to move the entire area position the mouse at the sides or corners to adjust the perimeter

Count Objects

All count objects are quantified by the physical number of objects per page and reported as EA for the UOM The quantity for the current Image View is (displayed in the Condition List) and the total quantity in your project is displayed in the Takeoff View and Worksheet View)

Square circle rectangle and triangle shaped count objects do not displace or subtract from other object quantities when placed on top of them However on the Advanced Tab for the count condition a connect property can be set (this is a check box) so that when a count object of this shape is put on top of a Linear type takeoff object it will move with the linear if said linear is moved

An opened-shaped count object must be placed within a linear object Opening shaped count objects may also be measured by linear foot or linear yard (EA SF and SY are also options) Opening shaped count items default to a width of 3rsquo 0rdquo at the time of creation This size can be changed The small medium and large size are not options on this type of condition anymore Check Backout on the Advanced tab for each Count object back out the footage (or yardage) of opening-shaped count objects in which they are placed

NOTE In order to see this Backout functionality (in quantity) for SY or SF deductions at least one of the

results for the Linear(s) this object will be placed on must be set to SY or SF and the count object must have a height quantity

Advanced Features of Conditions The Round Feature Under the Advanced tab of the linear and area Condition dialogues you may specify quantity rounding (in inches) For linear objects rounding applies to each linear object drawn For area objects rounding will apply to each segment of the area perimeter adjusting the perimeter and area calculations For example With a linear condition entering 12 in the Round field will round up each related linear object to the nearest 12 inches or one foot With this setting two walls of 1 4 would each round to 2 0 totaling 4 0

NOTE In the Takeoff Dock bar condition list and in the On-Screen Takeoff reports quantities will be displayed in whole numbers rounded up to the nearest foot However calculations are based on true quantities without rounding unless the Round Feature is engaged

Pitch Pitch may apply either to linear or area conditions It is measured in rise per linear foot Entering 12 indicates a 12 rise per 12 of linear distance (a pitch of 12 over 12) or an angle of 45deg

Section 8 Advanced Features

58

Advanced Features of Project Properties Selecting Multiple Pages

1 Select a single page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry

2 Drag the cursor down the column of numbers to select consecutive pages

3 Click on the blank button at the top of this column to select all pages in the Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

59

Changing Image Assigned to a Drawing 1 Select the page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry 2 Click the Change Image button The Change Image dialog box will appear

3 Navigate to the desired file and select by clicking on it

4 Click the Open button The electronic file assigned to the page will have been changed to reflect the new file choice

Changing Image File Path 1 Select pages as described above

2 Choose Change Folder

3 In the Change Folder dialog navigate to the appropriate folder

4 Click the OK button The file path will have been changed for the selected page entries

Delete a Page from Project Properties 1 Select the page you want to delete by clicking on its associated number (in the gray box at the

left of the entry)

2 Choose Delete Page

All Takeoff on the page will be deleted immediately and permanently

Section 8 Advanced Features

60

Advanced Features of Tool Options

Calculation Method On-Screen Takeoff has built-in calculation options to allow for faster work and faster saves until your takeoff is complete Calculation options are found by selecting Tools gt Options then clicking on the Calculation tab

Calculation method can be set to Automatic Automatic except Grids and Manual Manual will allow the program to operate more quickly while Automatic or Automatic except Grids allows the user to see quantity changes as takeoffs are made

In any mode you may press F9 to recalculate quantities for the On-Screen Takeoff current totals

Configuration Tab

When the ldquoPage Label (A01)rdquo radial button is chosen On-Screen Takeoff puts the numbered label on all the pages of in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar If the Page Descriptionrdquo radial button is chosen then a description of what takeoff is on that specific page will be shown in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar

This section of the configuration tab gives you options on how you want to export your information When the ldquoFolderSubfolder Namesrdquo radial button is chosen than on your file that you are exporting to will have all the conditions folders and subfolders In the Delimiter box you can choose the symbol that is needed to separate the information you are exporting Some files need semicolons () or colons () to make sure the information comes exported in is separated it the appropriate places

Section 8 Advanced Features

61

In previous versions of On-Screen Takeoff there are views that users need to have in order for them to display their information By either choosing ldquoOST 1xrdquo or ldquoOST 2xrdquo it will let the program know you want your columns of information exported in that specific format

When you have the Confirm Deletions radial button of ldquoYesrdquo chosen than every time you delete anything you will get a dialog box confirming your intentions of deletion

While working with your takeoff you have a choice to either view the legend of your conditions or hide it Choose whichever radial button that suits your needs

For those who prefer to use the Enter key to navigate in dialog boxes this option is just for that

Font Tab The Font tab is designed for you to make your own look and feel for the application At the bottom of this tab it will show you sample of the fonts and colors you have chosen

Renaming the Current Page You may change the name of the current page in the takeoff area of On-Screen Takeoff by selecting Edit gt Rename Page

This opens the Name Page dialog and you may simply type in a new name and click the Enter button The new name for the file will be reflected on the title bar for the page and in Project Properties

You also may access the Rename Page function by right-clicking in the takeoff area while in Image View and selecting the option from the pop-up menu that appears

Section 9

62

Saving and Exiting

This section will

Explain how to save projects

Show you how to safely exit the program

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

63

Saving Your Project

1 Select File gt Save 2 If your project has not previously been saved a Save dialog box will open to allow you to name

the file and choose the directory and folder in which to save your file 3 Once saved File gt Save will simply save the current version of the file

OR

4 Select File gt Save As then type in a new name for the file and save to the desired file path

The Auto-save Feature With the Auto-save feature On-Screen Takeoff automatically backs up your open project You may choose to have more than one level of backup files The first backup copy will have the extension b00 and successive files will be b01 b02 and so on If you have designated four levels of backup files after the fourth backup copy has been created (b03) the next file will be saved over the file with extension b00 Further backup saves will then rotate through the four backup files in the same way

1 Select Tools gt Options 2 In the Auto-save area (under the General tab) select the frequency of backup file creation (in

minutes) and the number of levels for the feature 3 You also may disengage the feature by clicking in the check box to clear it

The Auto-save feature automatically saves backup copies to the directory of the current project If you are working from a write-protected area such as a CD-ROM On-Screen Takeoff will place backup files in the On-Screen Takeoff folder

Exiting When you are finished using On-Screen Takeoff it is very easy to exit Exiting is very important because of security reasons If someone were to use your computer they could enter the application and view and manipulate information

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

64

On-Screen Takeoff closes the open project when you open another or create a new project or when you exit the program

1 Select File gt Exit

OR

2 You also may click at the upper right-hand corner of the application to exit

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

65

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer When you get your digitizer from GTCO you will need to connect it to your computer Follow the instructions outlined below to do this

Note For rollup digitizers the metal bar must be oriented to the top or right hand side

Connecting the Digitizer 1 Lay the digitizer out flat 2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer 3 Plug in the power adapter 4 Plug the interface (IO) cable into the digitizer 5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into an open serial port on computer

Note GTCO Technical support phone number is 410-381-6688 The electronic manual (on diskette) from GTCO contains more detailed installation and operation instructions for the GTCO digitizer model you have

Installing other Digitizer Drivers If you are using a GTCO Digitizer you will need to install the GTCO TabletWorks Drivers

If you are using a Digitizer not supported by GTCO Tablet Works 10 please contact the manufacturer of your digitizer for assistance with installation

Installing GTCO TabletWorks Drivers 1 Insert the On Center CD into the CD-ROM drive The CD Startup screen will open 2 Click on Install Software 3 Select Additional Software and Drivers 4 Select Digitizer Driver 5 Follow the instructions for installing TabletWorks 10

Adhering the Template The template is a small plastic sticker used to enable mouse function when using the digitizer with On-Screen Takeoff Place your template on your digitizer We suggest placing it in the bottom right corner of the digitizer about one inch inside the takeoff area

Note You may either peel off the back of the template and use the adhesive surface or you can tape the template down

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

66

Testing the Digitizer Drivers Before running OST you may test the digitizer by moving the stylus around on the digitizer pad it should move the mouse cursor (if mouse emulation is enabled)

If the digitizer does not move the mouse cursor on the screen

The superset codes may need to be reset Reset the superset codes by touching on the border of the digitizer with the stylus The digitizer should beep several times

The digitizer may not be communicating with the computer Be sure the COM port selected is correct Be sure the COM port selected is correct If you are not able to get the digitizer to move the mouse cursor you need to call GTCO technical support for help

Note The Mouse Emulation is not required for On-Screen Takeoff to work properly It is used only for the Template functionality if the digitizer is moving the cursor the wrong direction (up instead of sideways or vice-versa)

Click the L-shaped arrow symbol on the digitizer with the stylus

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

67

Appendix II Toolbar Items Main Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

68

Tool Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

69

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

70

Navigate Toolbar (Continued)

Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

71

Takeoff Toolbar (Continued)

Image Toolbar

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

72

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

This section will detail how to load plans from a F W Dodge CD-ROM into an On-Screen Takeoff project file ready for takeoffs

Dodge files may be added to the Project Properties dialog However loading the files in that way will load the files by number rather than name description If you want to load one page only from your Dodge CD You will have to rename the page to display the name rather than number of the file

To load plan files from a Dodge CD so that the files load sequentially by file number but are displayed by name rather than by number within your project follow the instructions below

Opening a Dodge project from a CD-ROM 1 Insert the CD into the drive 2 Choose File gt Custom 3 Choose Dodge Plans Project (plansdat) as the file type 4 Select the appropriate file type by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the Files of type

field 5 In the Look in field access your drive paths by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the

field then

Navigate to your CD-ROM drive Open the data folder and Open the Projects folder

6 Select the desired project and open its folder 7 Open the plansdat file 8 All the images will come in sequenced correctly for that job along with the full descriptions

(names) of each page If there is not a plans folder in the project folder then plans do not exist for that project on the CD Opening the plansdat file will yield an empty project

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

73

Appendix IV Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer The On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer is a limited version of On Center Softwarersquos commercial takeoff software If your status bar located at the very bottom of the main window says View Mode in the lower left-hand corner then you are using the Plan Viewer You can use the plan viewer to

View CD-based amp converted CAD drawings

View a previously created OST file and associated drawings

Download electronic plans online

Navigate through drawings

Quickly Takeoff linearsareas and counts

Zoom in to view the plan better

Print drawings directly from the viewer

Viewing an On-Screen Takeoff Project File

1 To open an OST file that was previously created with of On-Screen Takeoff 2 Select File gt Open 3 An Open dialog will appear if you do not see the OST file you are looking for select the

Look In drop down arrow 4 A drop down menu will appear listing the various folders drives and mapped drives located

on your computer select the correct drive or folder location and continue to browse to the location of your OST file

5 When you see your OST file double-click it to open it 6 Any takeoff and drawings should appear on the Image tab view

If you do not see the drawings but do see the colored takeoff layer the drawings may

not be located in the same place they were originally saved at Go to File gt Project Properties and check the Image File path for each listed page If the image file path is pointing to a CD drive make sure the CD is inside the CR-ROM

Downloading Electronic Plans If your Online Plan Service provides a special file format (OSX) required to use this feature of our plan viewer you can immediately downloaded all electronic plans of a project directly from our viewer

Most Plan Room web sites will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff when a request to download plans is made Your particular Plan Room may differ in operation so please contact the provider directly with questions on using the site

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

74

When you request to download or open a project file from a Plan Room you will usually have the open to open or save an OSX file Choosing open will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff Alternately you may choose to save the file to a local hard drive After you have saved the file either double-click it to launch On-Screen Takeoff or open the OSX file using On-Screen Takeoff by clicking File then Open and locating the file on your hard drive You will need to change the file type to OSX

After the OSX file is opened you will see an additional tab appear in the Conditions List window called Pages

The Pages tab shows the hierarchy of your project Gray file icons represent pages that have not been downloaded and blue icons represents pages that have been downloaded

To download a page simply double-click the page icon

If you wish to select a group of pages to download you can use the Ctrl or Shift key to multiple select them then click the Download button

If you wish to download all pages at once click the Download All button

Downloaded pages will now appear in the Project Properties dialog in the same order in which they appear in the Pages tab

Creating Quick Takeoffs With On-Screen Takeoff you can create quick takeoffs to measure quantities even if you dont have the full version of our program However using the Quick Takeoff functionality shows you just a fraction of what the full version can do

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar is located at the top of the image view It has three buttons designated for three types of takeoffs Linear Area and Count The Quantity drop down list will show secondary quantities for Linears and Areas The Units drop down allows you to select how you want your quantities displayed Feet Inches Yards Millimeters and Meters

NOTE Every time change the type of takeoff you are performing (switching from Area to Linear for example) the previous quantities and takeoff objects will disappear They will also disappear when you changes pages

NOTE You can use the Dimension Tool to basically measure the distance between two points or linears The distance will display on the status bar at the bottom of the application

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

75

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions General

Where is On-Screen Takeoff installed on my computer

Typically it is installed in CProgram FilesOn-Screen Takeoff

In Explorer how do I recognize On-Screen Takeoff file types

On-Screen Takeoff data is stored in a single file per job lsquojob name OSTrsquo On-Screen Takeoff templates are stored as lsquotemplate nameTPOrsquo

Can only one project at a time be open

Yes For that reason opening another project automatically closes the project on screen You will be asked to save any changes

Is only one scale allowed per page What about on drawings that have multiple detail sections on a page and each of those drawings have different scales

Yes For pages with drawings of different scales copy the drawing to another project page and set the appropriate scale

I cannot perform backout on an area that is along a linear

As a workaround use the On-Screen Takeoff layers feature to help you with this issue Electronic Images

How do I start a project from drawings that have been scanned and written to a CD-ROM

Open a new project Select File gt Project Properties and select Auto Add Navigate to your CD and the appropriate folder and select any image file in that location Click Open All files in the location will load into your project Recommended that images are copied from CD to hard drive for performance

If I get a disk of drawings in AutoCAD format (R13 or R14) can I read them in On-Screen Takeoff

Yes On-Screen Takeoff now reads DWG DXF and many other format that are saved with AutoCAD

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

76

When I click on the all pages button what is supposed to happen Currently nothing seems to change when I click on that button

The All Pages button is used to apply the Darken and Enhance Plans feature to all pages in the project (as opposed to only the current page on screen)

Is there a way to deduct a large skylight from an area condition

Yes with the related area condition selected in the Takeoff Dock bar unselect the Backout button on the Takeoff Toolbar then draw the Backout area The area quantity will be deducted from the related condition object and the linear measurement of the Backout perimeter will be added

Digitizer Issues

How do I connect a Digitizer to the computer

See Appendix I Connecting a Digitizer

The Place Template menu choice is disabled

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or the digitizer or the digitzer drivers are not installed

It wonrsquot let me select the Set Takeoff Area menu choice

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or no job is open a digitizer is not installed or the drivers are not installed

The digitizer stylus is not moving the cursor or crosshairs

Click S-0-1 superset on the digitizer

How do I convert my old GTCO Digitizer to work with On- Screen Takeofftrade

Call GTCO and they may be able to reconfigure your digitizer to be compatible with On-Screen Takeoff

Printing Issues Which Printers work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible printers include On-Screen Takeoff Hewlett Packard Epson and Canon printers If you are having printer difficulties please contact support and specify the type of printer along with other pertinent information Contact support at wwwoncentercomsupport or email supportoncentercom

Which Plotters work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible Plotters include Hewlett Packard DesignJet plotters and the EnCAD Cadjet II If you are having plotter difficulties please contact support and specify the type of plotter concerned

ViewingDisplay I can no longer see my condition list How do I get it back

The toolbars and Dock bars can be turned on and off through the View gt Toolbars menu options

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

77

This is also accessible by right-clicking in the toolbar area and selecting (or deselecting) a toolbar listed

I cannot view my folders in the condition list

Right-click in the Takeoff Dock barcondition list area and select Show Tree to display your folders

My Status Bar reads Viewer Mode and I am unable to draw conditions

On-Screen Takeoff needs to be Authorized Or you need to purchase an upgrade Click the Perform Advanced Takeoff button on the main toolbar

I hid a Dock bar and when I selected to view it again it appeared alongside the other Dock

bar instead of stacked on top of it How do I fix it

Pick up the Dock bar by clicking on the bar at the top and continuing to hold down the mouse button drag the Dock bar over the other one It will resize and appear stacked with the other

When I open image files from a CD the images are all upside down How do I get them right

side up

To flip pages from top to bottom follow the steps below 1 Click the All Pages button on the Image Toolbar (All Pages is engaged when the button

is not clicked) 2 Click the Flip Horizontal button on the Image Toolbar 3 Click the All Pages button again to disengage

Templates How do I create a Template

Follow the steps below 1 Create a typical project 2 Choose File gt Save As 3 Choose On-Screen Takeoff Template Files as the file type to save 4 Name the file This will save all of the condition setups as well as the layers for the

project

How do I create a new project from a template

Follow the steps below 1 Choose File gt New 2 Select a template from those listed in the New dialog This will open a new project with

conditions and layers saved from a previous project but no pages or takeoff

78

INDEX

Area Conditions 32

Area Objects 57

Auto Scrolling 20

Auto-save 63

Backout Mode 41

Calculation Method 60

Conditions 29

Configuration 60

Contents Tab 6

Continuous Mode 38

Count Conditions 33

Count Objects 57

Digitizer 10 65 76

Docking Toolbars 13

Dodge CD 72

Drawing 27 37

DropRun Count 55

Environment 18

Exiting 63

Exporting 49

Features 16

Font 61

Frequently Asked Questions 75

Grid 40

Help File 5

Hiding Toolbars 13

Hot Links 21

Image 19 59

Image files 9

Image Toolbar 12 71

Images 75

Index Tab 6

Layers 43

Linear Conditions 31

Linear Objects 56

Main Toolbar 12 67

Menus 14

Moving Toolbars 13

Navigate Toolbar 12 69

Navigating 20

On-Screen Takeofftrade 2

Page 59 61

Pages 20 25 28

Plan Viewer 73

Plans 26

Printing 47 76

Project Properties 25

Projects 22

Quick Start Video 18

Resizing Toolbars 13

Roping 54

Saving 63

Scale 28

Search Tab 7

Selecting Objects 42

Setup 8

Start On-Screen Takeofftrade 17

System Requirements 9

Takeoff 19 27

Takeoff Toolbar 70 71

Takeoff Toolbar 12

Template Files 23

TIF (Group4) 9

Tool Toolbar 12 68

Toolbar 67

Toolbars 12

View Toolbar 12 69

Viewing Toolbars 12

Worksheet 20

Zone Conditions 33

Zoom Toolbar 12 69

  • On-Screen Takeoff Lite
  • Table of Contents
  • Section 1 - Introduction
  • Section 2 - Setup
  • Section 3 - Toolbars and Menus
  • Section 4 - Features
  • Section 5 - Projects
  • Section 6 - Conditions and Takeoff
  • Section 7 - Printing and Exporting
  • Section 8 - Advanced Features
  • Section 9 - Saving and Exiting
  • Appendix I - Installing Your Digitizer
  • Appendix II - Toolbar Items
  • Appendix III - Loading Plans from a Dodge CD
  • Appendix IV - Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer
  • Appendix V - Frequently Asked Questions
  • Index

Section 1 Introduction

7

Search Tab This tab works like a word find It allows you to search for any word contained in the Help file Type the

word you are looking for in the lsquoType in the keyword to findrsquo field Click A list of topics containing that word will appear Scroll through the list and double click on the topic you want displayed

Section 2

8

Setup

This section will

Let you know what system requirements you will need to have in place

Recommend components that work well with the software

Help Full Mode users install a digitizer

Section 2 Setup

9

Minimum System Requirements To use On-Screen Takeoff your computer must meet the following minimum system requirements

An IBM PC or 100 compatible computer with a Pentium II or faster Intel processor

Memory Requirements 200 MB of available hard-disk space and256 MB RAM (128 MB preferred)

Windows 2000 SP4 and Windows XP SP2 256 color video card Super VGA display card Mouse 15-inch monitor

While these are the minimum system requirements Windows places heavy demands on your systems resources The more available memory in your computer the faster and more efficient On-Screen Takeoff will operate

Recommended Components

For the best performance we recommend the following components

Pentium III or faster processor

512 or more of RAM

12X speed CD-ROM or better

17-inch monitor or dual monitors Graphic adapter with 128 MB or more VRAM Sound card and speakers installed

NOTE In order to utilize the Training Videos you must have a sound card and speakers installed

Compatible File Formats The resolution in electronic plans does not need to be more that 200 DPI (Dots per Inch) The preferred file format is a black and white TIF (Group4) On-Screen Takeoff recognizes image files with the following extensions

File Extensions View Mode Lite Mode Full Mode TIF X X X PDF X X X OSE X X X JPG X X X CPC X X X CAL X DGN X DWG X DXF X OSP X PLN X PLT X

Section 2 Setup

10

NOTE Use the following image types for best results

Convert to TIF

The converted files will be stored in a folder with the name of the current On-Screen Takeoff project Since the conversion can be very time consuming you should only select this option if you really intend to convert vector files to TIF

1 Select File gt Project Properties

2 In the Pages Field add your image See Section 5 Establishing Project Setting Adding Pages

3 Click

4 Then select the page with the drawing you wish to convert

5 Click

Installing Your Digitizer The following instructions are a quick start to installing your digitizer For more specific information please reference Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer at the end of this guide

Connecting Your Digitizer

Upon receiving your digitizer (either a GTCO or another brand) you will need to connect it to your computer

1 Lay the digitizer out flat

2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer

3 Plug in the power supply

4 Plug the interface cable into the digitizer

5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into the computer

NOTE On-Screen Takeoff is compatible with any tablet that is WinTab compatible

Digitizer options are only available in Full Mode If you are in View or Lite Mode and would like

to use this feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade

Section 3

11

Toolbars and Menus

This section will

Introduce the program toolbars

Familiarize you with On-Screen Take Offtrade Menu options

Section 3 Toolbars and Menus

12

Toolbars On-Screen Takeoff is equipped with several helpful toolbars for application efficiency See Appendix II Toolbar Item` Details for a detailed description of each toolbar item Individually the toolbars may be displayed moved docked reshaped or hidden from view You can also create costume toolbars to fit your needs

Main Toolbar

Tool Toolbar

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Takeoff Toolbar

Image Toolbar Viewing Toolbars Toolbars are displayed on the screen and will be consistent on each tab or page (Some toolbars or toolbar items will be in an inactive state if they donrsquot have a supporting element in the application)

1 Select View gt Toolbars and select the appropriate toolbar name

OR

2 Right-click on a toolbar region of the screen

3 Check the toolbars you want to display

Section 3 Toolbars and Menus

13

Moving Toolbars The toolbars may be positioned anywhere on the screen you wish This feature is provided to allow the flexibility for positioning the toolbars so they are out of your way yet handy for use

1 Click on an edge of the toolbar holding down the mouse button drag it to its new position

2 Release the mouse button to set it in place

NOTE If the toolbar is dropped anywhere other than a screen edge it will become free floating This feature is especially handy when using multiple monitors

Docking Toolbars The toolbars can be docked to any of the screen edges

1 Click on the title bar of an undocked toolbar

2 Drag the toolbar to any location on the screen

Hiding Toolbars

1 Select View gt Toolbars and select the toolbar you wish to remove from the screen

2 Right-click on the toolbar or dock bar areas

3 A floating toolbar can be closed by clicking on the in the upper right corner of the toolbar

Resizing Toolbars Only undocked (floating) toolbars may be resized

1 Position the mouse pointer over an edge

2 Click and drag

3 The toolbar can be resized as desired

Customizing the Toolbars You may rearrange or delete buttons within a toolbarrsquos display or you may move buttons from one toolbar to another If you find that you use a few tools over and over you may want to group them within a single toolbar for convenience On-Screen Takeoff gives you the flexibility to customize your takeoff environment

1 Select Tools gt Customize The Customize dialog will open

2 With the dialog open click on a toolbar button and drag buttons from one toolbar to another or a new location within the same toolbar

3 To add a button without altering another toolbar click on the Commands tab of the Customize dialog and drag the appropriate symbol from the Buttons section to a toolbar

4 To remove a button drag it to within the takeoff area of the application

Section 3 Toolbars and Menus

14

Menus

Section 3 Toolbars and Menus

15

Digitizer Menu

Section 4

16

Features

This section will

Show you how open On-Screen Takeoff

Describe the On-Screen Takeoff environment

Teach you how to navigate pages

Section 4 Features

17

Start On-Screen Takeoff

1 On your desktop double-click your On-Screen Takeoff icon

2 The application will open

OR

3 Left-click on the Start button on your computerrsquos toolbar

4 Scroll up to Programs gt On Center Software

5 Highlight On-Screen Takeoff and click On-Screen Takeoff will open On-Screen Takeoff opens to an untitled blank project The Image view of the screen will be a blank page

Two blank dock bars the Pan dock bar and the Takeoff dock bar appear at the left side of the screen Along the bottom the Status bar displays user status or context-sensitive messages as well as paper size and current zoom percentage of the plan sheet on screen The menu bar and several task specific toolbars are located at the top of the screen

NOTE All toolbars and dock bars may be accessed to view or hide through View gt Toolbars on the menu bar

Section 4 Features

18

Quick Start Video When On-Screen Takeoff opens you will be given an option to watch the Quick Start video (recommended) or start the program without watching the video

The 20 minute video will demonstrate key program functionality and allow you to view application instruction for enhanced learning

If you would like to watch the video click If you prefer to get started without

the video click If you have already viewed the video click the lsquoDo not show this message againrsquo box to prevent this dialog from appearing each time you open the program

NOTE If you decide later that you would like to watch the Quick Start video go to Help gt Watch

Quick Start Videos

On-Screen Takeoff Environment The On-Screen Takeoff environment acts like your drafting table allowing you to work on several sheets of plans at once and to reference at a glance the entire drawing and your position on that drawing while giving you the power of a computer to track analyze print and export your takeoff quantities and plans

The screen is bordered at the top by the Menu bar with pull-down menus and at the bottom by the Status bar which indicates current user status plan page size and current zoom percentage of page The largest portion of the application screen will be your takeoff area bounded on the left (by default) by two dock bars and on the top by several toolbars

In the takeoff area you may view your project plans (images) andor takeoff objects the takeoff list with quantities the worksheet or a legend of your condition list

The main window of On-Screen Takeoff has three tabs located at the bottom left allowing for quick change between Image Takeoff or Worksheet views Select the desired view option on the toolbar and it will automatically open on your screen

Section 4 Features

19

Image View

This view shows the plan file andor takeoff conditions drawn from your plans

Takeoff View This view displays the height if applicable and quantity breakdowns of your conditions according to result types indicated (eg linear feet square feet or count of items) for zones pages and the project as a whole It also displays notes per condition

Section 4 Features

20

Worksheet View This view displays the condition and quantity in units of measure specified in the first results field of the Results tab in the Condition dialog and allows the user to enter amounts for material labor and subcontractor takeoffs

NOTE When in the Worksheet view tab out the field then save This is keep all the values saved

Navigating On-Screen Takeoff

Auto Scrolling When creating linear areas or zones On-Screen Takeoff will automatically scroll the image view when necessary It will move as your mouse or digitizer moves beyond the edge of the current view

Changing Pages

1 Select View gt Next Page Previous Page or Go To Page (specify page number for the Go to Page option)

2 You may also select the corresponding arrows for these options from the Navigate Toolbar The

drop down arrow in the Page field will list the pages The and arrows will take you to the

previous or next page The and arrows will take you to the first or last page

OR

Section 4 Features

21

3 Or press Ctrl G for the Go To Page dialog

Hot Links Hot links allow you to move quickly from one drawing to the pertinent area of another drawing A hot link is handy when viewing enlarged areas of a page and needing the ability to jump back to a reference page

1 Select Tools gt Hot Link

OR

2 Click from the Tools Toolbar

3 Click on the page where you want to set the link The Hot Link dialog will open

4 Using the current page display on the Navigate Toolbar access the pull-down menu of pages by

clicking on the arrow at the right

5 Select the page for your link (You may also choose View gt Go to Page and select by page number)

6 Manipulate the view using the zoom tool and the scroll bars

7 Click

8 After joining a hot link to another page the hot link arrows in the Navigation Toolbar will become active

9 Move a hot link to another location on the page by clicking then click and drag the hot link image anywhere on the page

Section 5

22

Projects

This section will

Help you create settings important to your projects

Explain how On-Screen Takeoff works with your electronic or paper plans

Section 5 Projects

23

Project Template Files You can begin your project with a template Templates allow you to take advantage of conditions and settings used with previous projects

On-Screen Takeoff templates contain condition lists and established layer separations from previous projects you have created You may also use the sample templates provided with On-Screen Takeoff as a great starting point All aspects of the templates may be adjusted for a new project

1 Select File gt New and click the OK button

2 From the New dialog box choose the template that best fits your project

3 The conditions for this template will appear in the Takeoff Dock bar and the Project Properties dialog will open asking for further information

4 Use File gt Save or File gt Save As to rename and save your new project

Saving a Project as a Template File You can save your condition properties and layers as a template for future projects

1 Select File gt Save As

2 Enter a name for your template and select On-Screen Takeoff Template Files (tpo) from the Save As type field of the dialog (click on the down arrow to select)

3 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog Modifying a Template File Follow these steps to modify an existing template file if you need to change or add conditions andor layers

1 Select File gt Open

2 Navigate to your Projects directory

3 In the File Type drop-down select On-Screen Takeoff Template files (tpo)

4 Choose the On-Screen Takeoff template file you would like to modify and click the OK button

5 Make appropriate changes

6 Save and close file

The On-Screen Takeoff template files cannot save takeoff information

Section 5 Projects

24

Opening an Existing Project File 1 Select File gt Open

2 Navigate to the desired file location

3 Click the Open button

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask

you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Creating a New Project

1 Select File gt New

2 For a blank untitled project click

3 At this point the Project Properties dialog will pop-up for more information about your takeoff

NOTE The following are important to keep in mind when beginning a new project

At the start of your project fill out the Project Properties settings to establish the name for all printed output from your project set the default page size and scale for your plans number and names of different pages within the project and locations of electronic drawings

Scale settings can significantly affect quantity outcomes Be sure to set the scale for each page of drawings before beginning condition takeoffs

When using a digitizer remember to make a mark with a pen or pencil in the upper left and lower right corners of the first sheet of the paper plans to delineate the takeoff area for that sheet You can then set the takeoff area on On-Screen Takeoff using your marks

Save your project before you begin taking off any conditions On-Screen Takeoff will write a back-up file using the same file name

Remember the Undo feature If you make a mistake select Edit gt Undo and reverse the process step by step

Section 5 Projects

25

Project Properties

You can either set your Project Properties when you create a new takeoff or once your project file is saved under the appropriate name

1 Select File gt Project Properties the Project Properties dialog box will appear

2 Type in the name of your project to appear on printouts Use the backspace andor delete keys to edit the name as necessary

3 Press the Tab key to move to the Default Image Size option or click within the Image Size box You may click on the arrow at the right for the pull-down menu of page size options or you can use the down-arrow key on your keyboard to scroll through the list to the appropriate selection

4 Press the Tab key to move to the Default Scale option Select a scale by using the drop down arrow If your scale is metric you will need to click in the box next to Metric to convert to that measurement

5 Establish the number of pages for your project plans And load image files See Adding Pages to

Your Project

Adding Pages to Projects Individual Electronic Plans

1 Click on in the Project Properties dialog

2 In the Add Images dialog use the drop down arrow to navigate to the appropriate directory and folder containing your image

3 Select the file so that it displays in the File name field then click The file will display by name and path in the Image File field in Project Properties dialog

4 Click to accept and your project will automatically open

5 Save your project with the new settings by selecting File gt Save

Section 5 Projects

26

Electronic plans scanned from blueprints (as opposed to blue lines) will display as white lines on a black background and are difficult to read on your computer screen Select Image gt Invert and the colors will invert to black on white

You may have noticed the Page column in the Project Properties dialog Generally plan images occupy one page and 1 will be listed in the column indicating Page 1 of your plan file If you import a multi-page TIF a plan file containing more than one page of plans they will import as separate pages and each successive page will be indicated under the Page column as 1 2 3 etc of the plan file

Group of Electronic Plans You may add all the electronic plan files from a particular source (for example from a CD) by using the Auto Add feature

1 Click the button in the Project Properties dialog

2 Browse until you find the appropriate directory and folder containing your plan images

3 Click on any file displayed within your target folder so that the file name appears in the File name box of the Auto Add dialog

4 Click The image paths and file names will be recorded into the project properties arranged alphabetically

5 Click to accept your choices and your project will automatically open

6 Save your project with the new settings by selecting File gt Save

To load Dodge Plans into your Project Properties see Appendix IIi Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

Paper Plans On-Screen Takeoff makes it easy for Full Mode users to perform quantity takeoffs from paper plans using a digitizer

1 Add pages by clicking until you have the number of pages initially in the project

2 Name each page by clicking within the Title area and typing the name

3 Click to accept your choices and close the Project Properties dialog

4 Save your project with the new project properties settings by selecting File gt Save

Section 5 Projects

27

Setting Up a Drawing Template On-Screen Takeoff provides the convenience of using the same work surface for both digitizer and mouse to allow the user to draw conditions and then edit settings of the project or add or change conditions without breaking stride A mouse pad template included with the program defines the area of the digitizer in which use of the stylus or cursor will be recognized as mouse movement as opposed to drawing movement

1 Place your stylus on On-Screen Takeoff

2 Placing the template identifies the location mouse movements will be recognized by the program

Before placing the template the template must be applied to the digitizer surface This may have been done during the installation of your digitizer We suggest attaching the template to the lower right corner of the digitizer surface about one inch inside the grid area

3 Select Digitizer gt Place Template

4 Follow the instruction prompts on the screen clicking first on the target symbol at the left of the On-Screen Takeoff box on the template then on the target at the right

Setting Takeoff Area Before you can begin taking off a drawing you must define the drawing area on the digitizer This requires defining an area that will include all objects on each drawing of your plans As you add pages to your takeoff the same area of the digitizer will be active

1 Secure the plans to the digitizer with tape or a set of clamps

2 With a pen or a pencil mark the upper left corner and the lower right corner of the first page in your set of plans

3 Select Digitizer gt Set Takeoff Area

4 Click each mark with the stylus pen as prompted

5 Verify the active area of the digitizer by looking at the image size located in the lower right corner of your screen

If you close the program before the takeoff is complete you will need to reestablish the takeoff area before you can add additional condition quantities

Electronic plans appear on your computer screen eliminating the need to set a takeoff area You simply drag your mouse across the conditions you wish to takeoff The conditions will be highlighted and quantities will be totaled instantly Electronic plans are available through a variety of services For information contact an On Center Software account manager

Section 5 Projects

28

Setting Scale for Specific Pages You may set the scale in each page view separately This will override the default scale setting in Project Properties for that page Setting the correct scale for the drawing before taking off quantities ensures accurate calculations Be careful to check the scale for each drawing in your project before doing takeoffs

1 Display the page you want to set select Edit gt Set Scale

2 Use the drop down arrow to select a scale that will be applied to that page

3 Click

OR

4 Access the pull-down scale settings on the Navigate toolbar

NOTE As you draw objects notice that the drawn object is similar in width to the object on your plans If it is not the scale set may not be correct

Calculating Scale You may calculate scale according to a known measurement between two points either with a digitizer or on electronic plans

1 Select Edit gt Calculate Scale using Image or Edit gt Calculate Scale using Digitizer

2 Follow the instructions in the related Calculate Scale dialog box You will be asked to click on the first and second points then to enter the dimension for that distance

3 The scale will be recalculated for the displayed page and the Scale display on the Navigate toolbar will show the new scale

Section 6

29

Conditions and Takeoff

This section will Draw Conditions to Takeoff Plan Quantities

What Zones will do to help your takeoff process

Discuss the ins and outs of Takeoffs

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

30

Creating Conditions

If you are starting a new project from scratch you will need to create conditions to takeoff quantities such as floor areas wall lengths and corner bead counts If you are using a template you will have several pre-designed conditions already listed on the Takeoff dock bar However you may want to change the characteristics of some conditions or create additional conditions for a particular project

1 Right Click within the Takeoff dock bar Select New gt Condition

Or

2 From the Takeoff dock bar Click (if the buttons are not showing right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select Show Buttons from the pop-up menu) The New Condition dialog appears

3 Select the condition type (Linear Area Count or Zone) from the pull-down menu accessed by the

down arrow next to the Type option

4 Press Tab or use the mouse (or stylus) to move to Name and enter a name for your condition

5 Specify the desired condition attributes See Condition Attributes for more detail

6 Click for condition to apply

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

31

Condition Attributes Each condition type will have related attributes to select or specify within the General and Advanced tabs of the New Condition dialog Once a condition has been used to takeoff a quantity from your plans certain attributes cannot be changed

All conditions allow the user to specify color and fill pattern for the object drawn

Linear Conditions

General Specify width and height by feet and inches Specify pitch in inches up to the nearest thousandth of an inch if applicable

Advanced Specify rounding for object quantities and droprun default length for electrical or plumbing drops at the ends of lines Select Connect to have lines connect at the corners where one line of the condition ends and another begins (and indicate Tolerance for the featurersquos activation as distance between the ends of two lines) Choose Trim to have lines automatically trim to a line being crossed Choose Curve to draw a curved line

Follow these examples for inputting feet and inches For 7 feet 6 inches type 706 for 13 feet 7 inches type 1307 For 20 feet type 2000

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

32

Area Conditions

General If needed you can specify the thickness (in inches) andor pitch (in inches)

Advanced Specify rounding for object quantities Choose to display an adjustable grid within the area and indicate matrix cell dimensions

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

33

Count Conditions

General

Specify height and indicate the size (in inches) and shape (square circle triangle rectangle or opening) of the count object as it will appear on screen

Advanced Count conditions have advanced attributes These options are available for all shapes except for openings

Zone Conditions Zones allow you to subdivide condition quantities making it easier to modify and complete jobs in phases They can be used at the end of a takeoff to isolate a group of condition quantities that are in different areas of the takeoff

Zones can also be used to break a takeoff into multi-phases and can even be used to isolate quantities while a job is in progress to group the amount of work that has been completed to date They can be applied to one or multiple pages in your plans automatically calculating the takeoff quantities for each zoned area

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

34

The zone feature is only available in Lite and Full Mode If you are in View Mode and would like

to use this feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade

Condition Notes A Note tab is provided for comments regarding the condition These notes will display on the Takeoff List report and will import into Quick Bid

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

35

Condition Results The Results tab of the New Condition is based on condition type Initial settings default to linear feet (LF) for linear conditions square feet (SF) for area conditions and count of items (EA) for count conditions and zones The first of the results fields will display for the condition items in the Takeoff dock bar area All results will display in worksheets and Takeoff List reports as well as in an Excel spreadsheet after being exported

Copying Conditions You may use the condition attributes from a condition yoursquove already created for any future conditions of the same type

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Click the Copy button from the toolbar

OR

3 Right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select copy

4 A new condition will appear in the list with the same condition attributes as the previous condition but with the quantities zeroed

Editing Conditions Once you have copied a condition you might want to change several attributes You can also edit an existing condition to fit any updated needs

1 Highlight the desired condition on the Takeoff dock bar

2 Click the Change button

OR

3 Double-click on the condition you wish to edit to bring up the Change Condition dialog

NOTE The Change Condition dialog differs from the New Condition dialog only in that if takeoffs

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

36

have been performed in your project with this condition you will not be able to change the type of condition or certain properties under the advanced tab of the dialog box

Deleting Conditions 1 Click on the condition in the Takeoff Dock bar area

2 Click the Delete button on the toolbar

OR

3 Right-click and select Delete from the pop-up menu

All takeoff associated with the deleted condition will be deleted immediately and permanently

Organizing Project Conditions Within your project you can create folders andor sub-folders for different types of conditions You may even want to create a folder containing conditions with reset values

To get started organizing your conditions make sure you are viewing the condition tree (right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select Show Tree)

Creating Folders and Sub-Folders 1 Right-click in the Takeoff Dock bar area

2 Select New gt Folder from the pop-up menu

Copying Folders

1 Click on the folder and click Copy on the toolbar

2 All copied conditions within the new folder will have values reset to zero

Renaming Folders

1 Click on the folder

2 Right-click and select Rename from the pop-up menu

3 Enter a name for your folder and click the Enter button

Changing Condition Order

You may move conditions up or down in the condition list of the Takeoff dock bar to suit your project needs

1 Select the condition you would like to move by clicking to highlight it

NOTE When you are ready to move the highlighted conditions be sure that you start

moving using the last condition chosen That condition will have a highlighted boarder

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

37

2 Drag and drop any the condition from one place to another in the list You may also move a condition to another folder on the list in this way

Drawing with Conditions Snap Angles Set up snap angles to prevent lines from appearing jagged Snap angles are commonly set at 15deg and shift snap angles at 0deg

1 Go to Tools gt Options Options dialog appears

2 Under the General tab make the desired settings

3 Click to save the settings As they are drawn lines will snap to the set degree

Drawing a Linear Object 1 Select a condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff dock bar

2 Move the cursor into the Image takeoff area of the screen you will see the cursor display as crosshairs

3 Click and hold left mouse button then drag mouse to draw a line

4 Release mouse button to set line

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

38

5 Repeat steps for further lines

Continuous Mode This feature allows you to draw an object that has connected lines

1 Click the icon from the Takeoff toolbar

OR

2 Go to Tools gt Continuous Mode

3 Follow steps 1-3 from Draw a Linear Object

4 Click at each point of intersection The object will be connected

5 Double-click after making the final point to set the lines

Drawing a Curve To draw a curved line the Curve option must be checked under the Advanced tab of the Condition dialog

1 Click where you want to begin the curve and drag in a straight line to the position for the other endpoint of the curve

2 Click on the line to select it Handles in the shapes of small squares will appear at either end of

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

39

the line and in the center of the line

3 Move the cursor over the center handles until the cursor becomes a two-way arrow

4 Click and drag in the direction of the curve bending the line as you move the cursor Release to set the curve (The line you began with will disappear)

Draw a circle by drawing two curved lines connected

Drawing an Area Object Area conditions are drawn similarly to continuous mode lines You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete your area takeoff

NOTE When drawing an area do not intersect the perimeter or line of the object you are drawing

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

3 The area will be filled with the pattern set for that condition

NOTE The simulated circle will be good enough for you to be able to make a bid

To create a circular area click from point to point with very short distances in between points simulating a circlersquos perimeter Double-click after setting the last point to set the area

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

40

Grid Options Grids give you an added advantage when installing materials such as tiles Use this feature to get a count for how many tiles are needed for an area

1 Double-click on an area condition in the Takeoff dock bar to open its Condition dialog

2 Click on the Advanced tab to show its options

3 Check the box next to Grid by clicking in it

4 Indicate the dimensions of the cell matrix in inches (For example 200 x 400)

5 Under Results tab choose each (EA) for one of the results fields This will tabulate a number of grid cells (including partial grid cells) in area

6 Click to save your settings

7 Use the Move Grid and Rotate Grid features in the Tools menu to manipulate the grid as desired

Grid Calculation

1 Go to Tools gt Options menu

1 Specify if On-Screen Takeoff automatically should Calculate Grid Position

2 If AreaGrid Size is selected On-Screen Takeoff will calculate the number of items needed to fill the grid based on grid demintions

3 Click to accept and close the dialog

To move a line at any angle (regardless of default setting) press the Shift key while moving the mouse

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

41

Backout Mode This feature allows you to take out part of an area and deduct that amount of square footage

1 Select Tools gt Backout Mode

2 Outline the are you want backed out as you would when drawing a regular area object (see Drawing an Area Object)

3 The outlined area will clear and quantities will be recalculated

NOTE The perimeter of the backout area will be added to the LF quantity for that condition

Drawing a Count Object Square triangle rectangle and circle shaped count objects can easily be placed on images

1 Select the condition

2 Click in the location where you want the object to appear

3 To place an opening-shaped count item like a door or window you must click over an existing linear object such as a wall

4 On the Results tab you can change the height properties to give you the result you need

5 If Backout is checked on the advanced tab for each count opening the opening-shaped count item will back out a corresponding section of the linear object

Opening shaped count items are sized at 3rsquo0rdquo by default

Drawing a Zone Zones are drawn in the same way as area objects and may be any polygonal shape You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete the zone perimeter

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

42

Selecting Objects

1 Use the Select Tool to select objects

You can also select all objects that correspond to a condition

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Right-click and choose Select All

3 All objects with this condition will be highlighted with squares as an outline

Moving and Resizing Objects Linear

1 To move or resize a linear object click anywhere on the line to select it

2 To move the line position your pointer over the center handles When the mouse is positioned over the handles you will see a two-way arrow You will only be able to move the line in the direction of the arrows

3 Drag the line to a new position

4 Clicking and dragging the handles on the ends of the line will allow you to lengthen or shorten your line

Area and Zone

1 To move an area object or zone in its entirety click and drag it to its new position

2 Grabbing a handle at a corner or intersection of the object will allow you to adjust and change its perimeter

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

43

Count 1 To move a square circle rectangle or triangle shaped count object click and drag

2 Click and drag an opening shaped count object along the length of the linear object to the desired position then release

NOTE An opening shaped count object may not be moved from its associated linear condition object however it may be moved up and down the length of the linear object

Layers On-Screen Takeoff allows you to sort and separate your takeoff objects within the same job and on the same page On-Screen Takeoff gives you this flexibility through the use of layers

By assigning different conditions to different layers (for example differentiating between floors ceilings and walls) you can choose to view all layers or turn off certain layers to display and print the remaining groups of conditions only You may also remove the background image of electronic plans add text and hot link symbols or print only your condition takeoffs

Layers are only available in Full Mode If you are in View or Lite Mode and would like to use this

feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade Default Layers

On-Screen Takeoff begins every project with three default layers Image Annotation and Default The Image layer holds the electronic plan files you may have in your project The Annotation layer possesses all text notations highlighting and hot links in the project The Default layer will appear in the Condition dialog when creating or editing a condition (listed in the takeoff dock bar) Conditions are assigned to the Default layer unless otherwise specified by the user

Creating Layers To assign a condition to a layer other than the default layer you must first create additional layers for your project

1 Select View gt Layers to open the Layers dialog

2 Click An unnamed layer will be added

3 Click within the empty box and type a name for your layer (for example Wall)

4 New layers are added as active layers The adjacent box under the Show column will be checked

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

44

Assigning a Layer to a Condition 1 Open the Condition dialog box by creating a new condition or editing an existing condition

2 Under the General tab click on the down arrow in the Layer field to display optional layers

3 Select the desired layer for the condition Only the Default layer and layers you have added will be displayed

4 Click

View and Hide Layers

1 Select View gt Layers

2 Under the Show column check the box to view or remove the check (by clicking on it) to hide the specific layer

3 Click to accept and close the Layers dialog

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

45

Assigning Text to a Layer When adding text to an image On-Screen Takeoff has the capability to assign the text to a specified layer

1 Select the Text Tool

2 Click at the point you want to place your text

3 Type in your text using the Enter key for line breaks

4 Click the drop down arrow next to the Layer field and select the desired layer

Section 7

46

Printing and Exporting

This section will

Printing options and procedures

Exporting data by copying and pasting

Exporting quantity results to Excel spreadsheets

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

47

Print Setup On-Screen Takeoff allows the user to print the image takeoff list and worksheet

1 Select File gt Print Setup The Print Setup dialog will open

2 Select a printer or leave the default selection listed (change from the default printer displayed by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the field)

3 Indicate page size and printer tray option (Source) Access page size options by clicking on the

down arrow at the right of the field

4 Choose Portrait or Landscape orientation

5 Click to accept and close the dialog

Printing Images The image area can include the electronic plans the takeoff objects added text and hot links To print a subset of these (for example just the takeoffs without the plans or the added text and hot link symbols) hide layers that you do not want to print (see Section 6 View and Hide Layers) When you are printing your images every page will show the scale of the takeoff you are printing

1 Click on the Image tab to display the area of your project

2 Select File gt Print (or Ctrl + P)

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

48

3 Select the desired view (What to print) and the Image Range

4 Click The second Print dialog will open

5 Change settings accordingly or click if you accept the default settings

Printing Takeoff Lists and Worksheets In Takeoff Lists and Worksheets you may hide columns to print only certain results or adjust column widths to fit the report within the page size selected

1 In Takeoff List or Worksheet view move your cursor to the right side of the columnrsquos title bar the cursor will display as a two-way arrow

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

49

2 Click and drag to adjust the width of the column Holding the mouse button you may

slide the title bar under the title bar to its left to hide the column completely

3 Select File gt Print or press Ctrl + P to access the Print dialog

4 Indicate desired printer and choose the number of copies

5 Click to print and close the dialog

When printing the condition list we suggest printing in landscape

To reset to the default column widths double-click on the right border of a column heading will reset the column to its right (or previously to its right before being hidden)

Print Preview 1 Select File gt Print Preview

2 Use and to vary your view 3 If viewing an image choose current full or scale view to see how it displays

4 For printed outputs that cover more than one page use and to view adjacent pages or click on the down arrow next to Page field and select the page you want displayed

Exporting Using the CopyPaste Feature You may copy all the data or sections from the worksheet and the takeoff list view in On-Screen Takeoff and paste it into another application When pasting into Excel the cell layout will be maintained

1 Highlight the areas you wish to paste Click and hold the left mouse button down as you drag the cursor over the area to be selected then releasing the mouse button

OR

2 Select the entire takeoff list quickly click on the left On-Screen Takeoff column header and hold and drag the cursor across the remaining column headings

The number of pages for the view selected will display in the lower left-hand corner The zoom percentage that applies to the view will be displayed in the lower right-hand corner next to page size of the drawing

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

50

3 In the worksheet view you may highlight rows by clicking on the numbered buttons to the left of each row clicking and dragging across column headings or clicking and dragging over individual cells in the worksheet

Click anywhere in the appropriate view to deselect the area

4 Once your selection is highlighted you may select Edit gt Copy or Ctrl C from the keyboard 5 On your monitor switch to the application into which you want to paste your selection 6 Select Edit gt Paste in the new application or simply press Ctrl + V to paste

The colored keys for conditions cannot be pasted

Using the Export Feature You may export condition quantities to specified cell location within an Excel worksheet file Cell target locations are assigned in the Results tab of the condition dialogs on the Export line relating to each quantity measurement type

On-Screen Takeoff will export takeoff quantity results for up to three different quantity types that you specify For instance you may want to know the number of square feet in a ceiling area as well as the number of linear feet in its perimeter

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

51

1 Bring up the Condition dialog by double-clicking on a condition in the takeoff dock bar or by

selecting the condition and clicking

2 Click on the Results tab to access its fields The default quantities for the condition type will display

3 For each results field click on the arrow to access the pull-down menu and select the appropriate quantity (for example SF LF EA etchellip)

4 Have your Excel spreadsheet opened and saved in a file

5 Specify the Excel spreadsheet cell locations where you want the results to go

6 For a cell in the first sheet of your spreadsheet type in the cell address (eg a1) Case is not important

7 For a cell on a successive sheet of your spreadsheet type in sheet the number followed by a comma and the cell address without any spaces (eg sheet2a1) Case is not important

8 Click

9 Select File gt Export gt Condition Qty to Excel

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

52

10 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

11 Click to export On-Screen Takeoff results to specified cell locations in the Excel file When you return to the Excel application you will see the values have been added to the specified cell locations in your spreadsheet

12 Save your Excel file

Exporting Worksheet to Excel

1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 From On-Screen Takeoff Select File gt Export gt Worksheet to Excel

4 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

5 Click When you return to the Excel application you will see the values from the Worksheet Tab have been added to your spreadsheet

6 Save your Excel file

Exporting Takeoff to CVS 1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 Click the Takeoff Tab in the project you want to export the information

4 Select File gt Export gt Takeoff to CSV

5 Browse to the location of the CSV spreadsheet file click file to select it

6 Click the Save

NOTE CSV files can be opened in Excel Lotus Access etc One may consider this option more of a ldquodumprdquo into a file

The Excel application must be active (it may be minimized on the application bar) with the target spreadsheet open in the application Otherwise an error will occur with the export operation that will affect both the On-Screen Takeofftrade file and the Excel spreadsheet

Section 8

53

Advanced Features

This section will

Some special features of working with condition objects in the takeoff area

Details of advanced options for conditions

Advanced features of the Project Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

54

Features to Use with Objects Roping Feature You can move copy or delete using this feature Using the Select tool (the pointer) you may select several objects at once by clicking and dragging an outline around the objects then releasing the mouse button Roping may select either objects completely within the outlined area (inclusive) or objects both within and touched by the outlined area (touching) Specify your roping preference under Tools gt Options

1 Click and hold the mouse button at a point on the screen near the objects to be selected and drag to surround the objects with an outline

2 Release the mouse button The objects will be selected

3 You may now

Move the group around on the page by clicking within the group dragging the mouse and releasing the button to place the objects

Delete the group of objects by clicking the Delete key or

Copy and paste by pressing Ctrl C to copy the group then Ctrl V to paste it The pasted copy of the grouped objects will appear slightly offset from the original objects

Section 8 Advanced Features

55

Applying a DropRun Count

Use the droprun feature when calculating quantities to take into account the drop or run of a linear condition such as electrical lines or plumbing pipes Drop or run lengths may be added separately to any linear condition on screen while a default droprun length may be indicated for a condition as a whole

1 Select the desired linear condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff Dock bar

2 Click the Change button in the toolbar to open the Change Condition dialog

3 Click the Advanced tab to access the advanced options and click inside the DropRun check box

4 Enter a default length to be applied to all of this condition Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches) You can leave the length blank and manually enter drop run on each segment drawn

5 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog

Edit DropRun Count

1 With the related linear condition in the Takeoff Dock bar highlighted or with the pointer tool selected

2 click on the desired linear object in the image takeoff area The Count button will become active

3 Click on the Count button (alternatively select Tools gt Count) The default droprun amount will show in the pop-up Count dialog (Default length will be zero if droprun has not been selected in this conditionrsquos properties)

4 Type in the desired length Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches)

5 Click the OK button The additional amount will be reflected in the corresponding quantity The new DropRun count will apply only to the object edited

Adding Text in Image View

On-Screen Takeoff allows you to place text comments around your quantity takeoffs that may be printed along with plan images and objects Text is automatically placed within the Annotation Layer (that includes text and hot links)

1 To place text on the image select the Text Tool and click at the point you want to place your text opening a text box

2 Type in your information clicking Enter for line breaks

3 When you are finished click the OK button to exit the text box

4 To reposition text simply click on the text (with the Text Tool active) to select it

5 Move the cursor over the text the cursor will now display as a four-way arrow

6 Click and drag the mouse to position the text as desired

Section 8 Advanced Features

56

1 To edit existing text use the Text Tool to double-click on the text to open the editing box

2 Enter additional text or use the Backspace key to delete text as necessary

Formatting Text Once created you may format the font size type style and color of your text

1 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Font or click on the Font button in the Takeoff Toolbar

2 Select the desired features (color options are disabled) and click the OK button

3 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Color or click on the Color button in the Takeoff Toolbar The Color dialog will open

4 Click on a color in the Basic Color palette or create a color and add to the Custom Colors palette (Be sure to click on the color in the Custom Colors palette to select it)

5 Click the OK button

Object Properties

Linear Objects

Linear objects may be set to connect at corners

A linear object may be set to trim automatically when crossing another linear object (Check the trim option under the advanced tab of the Condition dialog)

When you move a connected linear object objects automatically move and resize connected lines accordingly (quantities are then recalculated)

This feature requires that the connected linear object be moved using the center handles (does not apply when resizing the line from the ends)

Objects constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

Objects are measured from centerline to centerline

Section 8 Advanced Features

57

Area Objects When drawing an area use your escape key to undo the last line drawn You may reverse your

drawing of an area using the escape key

The area will not fill with color and pattern until the user double-clicks after the last line is set

Lines drawn to delineate an area object constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

After selecting an area to move or adjust position the mouse in the center to move the entire area position the mouse at the sides or corners to adjust the perimeter

Count Objects

All count objects are quantified by the physical number of objects per page and reported as EA for the UOM The quantity for the current Image View is (displayed in the Condition List) and the total quantity in your project is displayed in the Takeoff View and Worksheet View)

Square circle rectangle and triangle shaped count objects do not displace or subtract from other object quantities when placed on top of them However on the Advanced Tab for the count condition a connect property can be set (this is a check box) so that when a count object of this shape is put on top of a Linear type takeoff object it will move with the linear if said linear is moved

An opened-shaped count object must be placed within a linear object Opening shaped count objects may also be measured by linear foot or linear yard (EA SF and SY are also options) Opening shaped count items default to a width of 3rsquo 0rdquo at the time of creation This size can be changed The small medium and large size are not options on this type of condition anymore Check Backout on the Advanced tab for each Count object back out the footage (or yardage) of opening-shaped count objects in which they are placed

NOTE In order to see this Backout functionality (in quantity) for SY or SF deductions at least one of the

results for the Linear(s) this object will be placed on must be set to SY or SF and the count object must have a height quantity

Advanced Features of Conditions The Round Feature Under the Advanced tab of the linear and area Condition dialogues you may specify quantity rounding (in inches) For linear objects rounding applies to each linear object drawn For area objects rounding will apply to each segment of the area perimeter adjusting the perimeter and area calculations For example With a linear condition entering 12 in the Round field will round up each related linear object to the nearest 12 inches or one foot With this setting two walls of 1 4 would each round to 2 0 totaling 4 0

NOTE In the Takeoff Dock bar condition list and in the On-Screen Takeoff reports quantities will be displayed in whole numbers rounded up to the nearest foot However calculations are based on true quantities without rounding unless the Round Feature is engaged

Pitch Pitch may apply either to linear or area conditions It is measured in rise per linear foot Entering 12 indicates a 12 rise per 12 of linear distance (a pitch of 12 over 12) or an angle of 45deg

Section 8 Advanced Features

58

Advanced Features of Project Properties Selecting Multiple Pages

1 Select a single page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry

2 Drag the cursor down the column of numbers to select consecutive pages

3 Click on the blank button at the top of this column to select all pages in the Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

59

Changing Image Assigned to a Drawing 1 Select the page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry 2 Click the Change Image button The Change Image dialog box will appear

3 Navigate to the desired file and select by clicking on it

4 Click the Open button The electronic file assigned to the page will have been changed to reflect the new file choice

Changing Image File Path 1 Select pages as described above

2 Choose Change Folder

3 In the Change Folder dialog navigate to the appropriate folder

4 Click the OK button The file path will have been changed for the selected page entries

Delete a Page from Project Properties 1 Select the page you want to delete by clicking on its associated number (in the gray box at the

left of the entry)

2 Choose Delete Page

All Takeoff on the page will be deleted immediately and permanently

Section 8 Advanced Features

60

Advanced Features of Tool Options

Calculation Method On-Screen Takeoff has built-in calculation options to allow for faster work and faster saves until your takeoff is complete Calculation options are found by selecting Tools gt Options then clicking on the Calculation tab

Calculation method can be set to Automatic Automatic except Grids and Manual Manual will allow the program to operate more quickly while Automatic or Automatic except Grids allows the user to see quantity changes as takeoffs are made

In any mode you may press F9 to recalculate quantities for the On-Screen Takeoff current totals

Configuration Tab

When the ldquoPage Label (A01)rdquo radial button is chosen On-Screen Takeoff puts the numbered label on all the pages of in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar If the Page Descriptionrdquo radial button is chosen then a description of what takeoff is on that specific page will be shown in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar

This section of the configuration tab gives you options on how you want to export your information When the ldquoFolderSubfolder Namesrdquo radial button is chosen than on your file that you are exporting to will have all the conditions folders and subfolders In the Delimiter box you can choose the symbol that is needed to separate the information you are exporting Some files need semicolons () or colons () to make sure the information comes exported in is separated it the appropriate places

Section 8 Advanced Features

61

In previous versions of On-Screen Takeoff there are views that users need to have in order for them to display their information By either choosing ldquoOST 1xrdquo or ldquoOST 2xrdquo it will let the program know you want your columns of information exported in that specific format

When you have the Confirm Deletions radial button of ldquoYesrdquo chosen than every time you delete anything you will get a dialog box confirming your intentions of deletion

While working with your takeoff you have a choice to either view the legend of your conditions or hide it Choose whichever radial button that suits your needs

For those who prefer to use the Enter key to navigate in dialog boxes this option is just for that

Font Tab The Font tab is designed for you to make your own look and feel for the application At the bottom of this tab it will show you sample of the fonts and colors you have chosen

Renaming the Current Page You may change the name of the current page in the takeoff area of On-Screen Takeoff by selecting Edit gt Rename Page

This opens the Name Page dialog and you may simply type in a new name and click the Enter button The new name for the file will be reflected on the title bar for the page and in Project Properties

You also may access the Rename Page function by right-clicking in the takeoff area while in Image View and selecting the option from the pop-up menu that appears

Section 9

62

Saving and Exiting

This section will

Explain how to save projects

Show you how to safely exit the program

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

63

Saving Your Project

1 Select File gt Save 2 If your project has not previously been saved a Save dialog box will open to allow you to name

the file and choose the directory and folder in which to save your file 3 Once saved File gt Save will simply save the current version of the file

OR

4 Select File gt Save As then type in a new name for the file and save to the desired file path

The Auto-save Feature With the Auto-save feature On-Screen Takeoff automatically backs up your open project You may choose to have more than one level of backup files The first backup copy will have the extension b00 and successive files will be b01 b02 and so on If you have designated four levels of backup files after the fourth backup copy has been created (b03) the next file will be saved over the file with extension b00 Further backup saves will then rotate through the four backup files in the same way

1 Select Tools gt Options 2 In the Auto-save area (under the General tab) select the frequency of backup file creation (in

minutes) and the number of levels for the feature 3 You also may disengage the feature by clicking in the check box to clear it

The Auto-save feature automatically saves backup copies to the directory of the current project If you are working from a write-protected area such as a CD-ROM On-Screen Takeoff will place backup files in the On-Screen Takeoff folder

Exiting When you are finished using On-Screen Takeoff it is very easy to exit Exiting is very important because of security reasons If someone were to use your computer they could enter the application and view and manipulate information

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

64

On-Screen Takeoff closes the open project when you open another or create a new project or when you exit the program

1 Select File gt Exit

OR

2 You also may click at the upper right-hand corner of the application to exit

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

65

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer When you get your digitizer from GTCO you will need to connect it to your computer Follow the instructions outlined below to do this

Note For rollup digitizers the metal bar must be oriented to the top or right hand side

Connecting the Digitizer 1 Lay the digitizer out flat 2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer 3 Plug in the power adapter 4 Plug the interface (IO) cable into the digitizer 5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into an open serial port on computer

Note GTCO Technical support phone number is 410-381-6688 The electronic manual (on diskette) from GTCO contains more detailed installation and operation instructions for the GTCO digitizer model you have

Installing other Digitizer Drivers If you are using a GTCO Digitizer you will need to install the GTCO TabletWorks Drivers

If you are using a Digitizer not supported by GTCO Tablet Works 10 please contact the manufacturer of your digitizer for assistance with installation

Installing GTCO TabletWorks Drivers 1 Insert the On Center CD into the CD-ROM drive The CD Startup screen will open 2 Click on Install Software 3 Select Additional Software and Drivers 4 Select Digitizer Driver 5 Follow the instructions for installing TabletWorks 10

Adhering the Template The template is a small plastic sticker used to enable mouse function when using the digitizer with On-Screen Takeoff Place your template on your digitizer We suggest placing it in the bottom right corner of the digitizer about one inch inside the takeoff area

Note You may either peel off the back of the template and use the adhesive surface or you can tape the template down

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

66

Testing the Digitizer Drivers Before running OST you may test the digitizer by moving the stylus around on the digitizer pad it should move the mouse cursor (if mouse emulation is enabled)

If the digitizer does not move the mouse cursor on the screen

The superset codes may need to be reset Reset the superset codes by touching on the border of the digitizer with the stylus The digitizer should beep several times

The digitizer may not be communicating with the computer Be sure the COM port selected is correct Be sure the COM port selected is correct If you are not able to get the digitizer to move the mouse cursor you need to call GTCO technical support for help

Note The Mouse Emulation is not required for On-Screen Takeoff to work properly It is used only for the Template functionality if the digitizer is moving the cursor the wrong direction (up instead of sideways or vice-versa)

Click the L-shaped arrow symbol on the digitizer with the stylus

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

67

Appendix II Toolbar Items Main Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

68

Tool Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

69

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

70

Navigate Toolbar (Continued)

Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

71

Takeoff Toolbar (Continued)

Image Toolbar

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

72

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

This section will detail how to load plans from a F W Dodge CD-ROM into an On-Screen Takeoff project file ready for takeoffs

Dodge files may be added to the Project Properties dialog However loading the files in that way will load the files by number rather than name description If you want to load one page only from your Dodge CD You will have to rename the page to display the name rather than number of the file

To load plan files from a Dodge CD so that the files load sequentially by file number but are displayed by name rather than by number within your project follow the instructions below

Opening a Dodge project from a CD-ROM 1 Insert the CD into the drive 2 Choose File gt Custom 3 Choose Dodge Plans Project (plansdat) as the file type 4 Select the appropriate file type by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the Files of type

field 5 In the Look in field access your drive paths by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the

field then

Navigate to your CD-ROM drive Open the data folder and Open the Projects folder

6 Select the desired project and open its folder 7 Open the plansdat file 8 All the images will come in sequenced correctly for that job along with the full descriptions

(names) of each page If there is not a plans folder in the project folder then plans do not exist for that project on the CD Opening the plansdat file will yield an empty project

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

73

Appendix IV Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer The On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer is a limited version of On Center Softwarersquos commercial takeoff software If your status bar located at the very bottom of the main window says View Mode in the lower left-hand corner then you are using the Plan Viewer You can use the plan viewer to

View CD-based amp converted CAD drawings

View a previously created OST file and associated drawings

Download electronic plans online

Navigate through drawings

Quickly Takeoff linearsareas and counts

Zoom in to view the plan better

Print drawings directly from the viewer

Viewing an On-Screen Takeoff Project File

1 To open an OST file that was previously created with of On-Screen Takeoff 2 Select File gt Open 3 An Open dialog will appear if you do not see the OST file you are looking for select the

Look In drop down arrow 4 A drop down menu will appear listing the various folders drives and mapped drives located

on your computer select the correct drive or folder location and continue to browse to the location of your OST file

5 When you see your OST file double-click it to open it 6 Any takeoff and drawings should appear on the Image tab view

If you do not see the drawings but do see the colored takeoff layer the drawings may

not be located in the same place they were originally saved at Go to File gt Project Properties and check the Image File path for each listed page If the image file path is pointing to a CD drive make sure the CD is inside the CR-ROM

Downloading Electronic Plans If your Online Plan Service provides a special file format (OSX) required to use this feature of our plan viewer you can immediately downloaded all electronic plans of a project directly from our viewer

Most Plan Room web sites will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff when a request to download plans is made Your particular Plan Room may differ in operation so please contact the provider directly with questions on using the site

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

74

When you request to download or open a project file from a Plan Room you will usually have the open to open or save an OSX file Choosing open will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff Alternately you may choose to save the file to a local hard drive After you have saved the file either double-click it to launch On-Screen Takeoff or open the OSX file using On-Screen Takeoff by clicking File then Open and locating the file on your hard drive You will need to change the file type to OSX

After the OSX file is opened you will see an additional tab appear in the Conditions List window called Pages

The Pages tab shows the hierarchy of your project Gray file icons represent pages that have not been downloaded and blue icons represents pages that have been downloaded

To download a page simply double-click the page icon

If you wish to select a group of pages to download you can use the Ctrl or Shift key to multiple select them then click the Download button

If you wish to download all pages at once click the Download All button

Downloaded pages will now appear in the Project Properties dialog in the same order in which they appear in the Pages tab

Creating Quick Takeoffs With On-Screen Takeoff you can create quick takeoffs to measure quantities even if you dont have the full version of our program However using the Quick Takeoff functionality shows you just a fraction of what the full version can do

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar is located at the top of the image view It has three buttons designated for three types of takeoffs Linear Area and Count The Quantity drop down list will show secondary quantities for Linears and Areas The Units drop down allows you to select how you want your quantities displayed Feet Inches Yards Millimeters and Meters

NOTE Every time change the type of takeoff you are performing (switching from Area to Linear for example) the previous quantities and takeoff objects will disappear They will also disappear when you changes pages

NOTE You can use the Dimension Tool to basically measure the distance between two points or linears The distance will display on the status bar at the bottom of the application

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

75

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions General

Where is On-Screen Takeoff installed on my computer

Typically it is installed in CProgram FilesOn-Screen Takeoff

In Explorer how do I recognize On-Screen Takeoff file types

On-Screen Takeoff data is stored in a single file per job lsquojob name OSTrsquo On-Screen Takeoff templates are stored as lsquotemplate nameTPOrsquo

Can only one project at a time be open

Yes For that reason opening another project automatically closes the project on screen You will be asked to save any changes

Is only one scale allowed per page What about on drawings that have multiple detail sections on a page and each of those drawings have different scales

Yes For pages with drawings of different scales copy the drawing to another project page and set the appropriate scale

I cannot perform backout on an area that is along a linear

As a workaround use the On-Screen Takeoff layers feature to help you with this issue Electronic Images

How do I start a project from drawings that have been scanned and written to a CD-ROM

Open a new project Select File gt Project Properties and select Auto Add Navigate to your CD and the appropriate folder and select any image file in that location Click Open All files in the location will load into your project Recommended that images are copied from CD to hard drive for performance

If I get a disk of drawings in AutoCAD format (R13 or R14) can I read them in On-Screen Takeoff

Yes On-Screen Takeoff now reads DWG DXF and many other format that are saved with AutoCAD

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

76

When I click on the all pages button what is supposed to happen Currently nothing seems to change when I click on that button

The All Pages button is used to apply the Darken and Enhance Plans feature to all pages in the project (as opposed to only the current page on screen)

Is there a way to deduct a large skylight from an area condition

Yes with the related area condition selected in the Takeoff Dock bar unselect the Backout button on the Takeoff Toolbar then draw the Backout area The area quantity will be deducted from the related condition object and the linear measurement of the Backout perimeter will be added

Digitizer Issues

How do I connect a Digitizer to the computer

See Appendix I Connecting a Digitizer

The Place Template menu choice is disabled

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or the digitizer or the digitzer drivers are not installed

It wonrsquot let me select the Set Takeoff Area menu choice

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or no job is open a digitizer is not installed or the drivers are not installed

The digitizer stylus is not moving the cursor or crosshairs

Click S-0-1 superset on the digitizer

How do I convert my old GTCO Digitizer to work with On- Screen Takeofftrade

Call GTCO and they may be able to reconfigure your digitizer to be compatible with On-Screen Takeoff

Printing Issues Which Printers work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible printers include On-Screen Takeoff Hewlett Packard Epson and Canon printers If you are having printer difficulties please contact support and specify the type of printer along with other pertinent information Contact support at wwwoncentercomsupport or email supportoncentercom

Which Plotters work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible Plotters include Hewlett Packard DesignJet plotters and the EnCAD Cadjet II If you are having plotter difficulties please contact support and specify the type of plotter concerned

ViewingDisplay I can no longer see my condition list How do I get it back

The toolbars and Dock bars can be turned on and off through the View gt Toolbars menu options

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

77

This is also accessible by right-clicking in the toolbar area and selecting (or deselecting) a toolbar listed

I cannot view my folders in the condition list

Right-click in the Takeoff Dock barcondition list area and select Show Tree to display your folders

My Status Bar reads Viewer Mode and I am unable to draw conditions

On-Screen Takeoff needs to be Authorized Or you need to purchase an upgrade Click the Perform Advanced Takeoff button on the main toolbar

I hid a Dock bar and when I selected to view it again it appeared alongside the other Dock

bar instead of stacked on top of it How do I fix it

Pick up the Dock bar by clicking on the bar at the top and continuing to hold down the mouse button drag the Dock bar over the other one It will resize and appear stacked with the other

When I open image files from a CD the images are all upside down How do I get them right

side up

To flip pages from top to bottom follow the steps below 1 Click the All Pages button on the Image Toolbar (All Pages is engaged when the button

is not clicked) 2 Click the Flip Horizontal button on the Image Toolbar 3 Click the All Pages button again to disengage

Templates How do I create a Template

Follow the steps below 1 Create a typical project 2 Choose File gt Save As 3 Choose On-Screen Takeoff Template Files as the file type to save 4 Name the file This will save all of the condition setups as well as the layers for the

project

How do I create a new project from a template

Follow the steps below 1 Choose File gt New 2 Select a template from those listed in the New dialog This will open a new project with

conditions and layers saved from a previous project but no pages or takeoff

78

INDEX

Area Conditions 32

Area Objects 57

Auto Scrolling 20

Auto-save 63

Backout Mode 41

Calculation Method 60

Conditions 29

Configuration 60

Contents Tab 6

Continuous Mode 38

Count Conditions 33

Count Objects 57

Digitizer 10 65 76

Docking Toolbars 13

Dodge CD 72

Drawing 27 37

DropRun Count 55

Environment 18

Exiting 63

Exporting 49

Features 16

Font 61

Frequently Asked Questions 75

Grid 40

Help File 5

Hiding Toolbars 13

Hot Links 21

Image 19 59

Image files 9

Image Toolbar 12 71

Images 75

Index Tab 6

Layers 43

Linear Conditions 31

Linear Objects 56

Main Toolbar 12 67

Menus 14

Moving Toolbars 13

Navigate Toolbar 12 69

Navigating 20

On-Screen Takeofftrade 2

Page 59 61

Pages 20 25 28

Plan Viewer 73

Plans 26

Printing 47 76

Project Properties 25

Projects 22

Quick Start Video 18

Resizing Toolbars 13

Roping 54

Saving 63

Scale 28

Search Tab 7

Selecting Objects 42

Setup 8

Start On-Screen Takeofftrade 17

System Requirements 9

Takeoff 19 27

Takeoff Toolbar 70 71

Takeoff Toolbar 12

Template Files 23

TIF (Group4) 9

Tool Toolbar 12 68

Toolbar 67

Toolbars 12

View Toolbar 12 69

Viewing Toolbars 12

Worksheet 20

Zone Conditions 33

Zoom Toolbar 12 69

  • On-Screen Takeoff Lite
  • Table of Contents
  • Section 1 - Introduction
  • Section 2 - Setup
  • Section 3 - Toolbars and Menus
  • Section 4 - Features
  • Section 5 - Projects
  • Section 6 - Conditions and Takeoff
  • Section 7 - Printing and Exporting
  • Section 8 - Advanced Features
  • Section 9 - Saving and Exiting
  • Appendix I - Installing Your Digitizer
  • Appendix II - Toolbar Items
  • Appendix III - Loading Plans from a Dodge CD
  • Appendix IV - Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer
  • Appendix V - Frequently Asked Questions
  • Index

Section 2

8

Setup

This section will

Let you know what system requirements you will need to have in place

Recommend components that work well with the software

Help Full Mode users install a digitizer

Section 2 Setup

9

Minimum System Requirements To use On-Screen Takeoff your computer must meet the following minimum system requirements

An IBM PC or 100 compatible computer with a Pentium II or faster Intel processor

Memory Requirements 200 MB of available hard-disk space and256 MB RAM (128 MB preferred)

Windows 2000 SP4 and Windows XP SP2 256 color video card Super VGA display card Mouse 15-inch monitor

While these are the minimum system requirements Windows places heavy demands on your systems resources The more available memory in your computer the faster and more efficient On-Screen Takeoff will operate

Recommended Components

For the best performance we recommend the following components

Pentium III or faster processor

512 or more of RAM

12X speed CD-ROM or better

17-inch monitor or dual monitors Graphic adapter with 128 MB or more VRAM Sound card and speakers installed

NOTE In order to utilize the Training Videos you must have a sound card and speakers installed

Compatible File Formats The resolution in electronic plans does not need to be more that 200 DPI (Dots per Inch) The preferred file format is a black and white TIF (Group4) On-Screen Takeoff recognizes image files with the following extensions

File Extensions View Mode Lite Mode Full Mode TIF X X X PDF X X X OSE X X X JPG X X X CPC X X X CAL X DGN X DWG X DXF X OSP X PLN X PLT X

Section 2 Setup

10

NOTE Use the following image types for best results

Convert to TIF

The converted files will be stored in a folder with the name of the current On-Screen Takeoff project Since the conversion can be very time consuming you should only select this option if you really intend to convert vector files to TIF

1 Select File gt Project Properties

2 In the Pages Field add your image See Section 5 Establishing Project Setting Adding Pages

3 Click

4 Then select the page with the drawing you wish to convert

5 Click

Installing Your Digitizer The following instructions are a quick start to installing your digitizer For more specific information please reference Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer at the end of this guide

Connecting Your Digitizer

Upon receiving your digitizer (either a GTCO or another brand) you will need to connect it to your computer

1 Lay the digitizer out flat

2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer

3 Plug in the power supply

4 Plug the interface cable into the digitizer

5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into the computer

NOTE On-Screen Takeoff is compatible with any tablet that is WinTab compatible

Digitizer options are only available in Full Mode If you are in View or Lite Mode and would like

to use this feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade

Section 3

11

Toolbars and Menus

This section will

Introduce the program toolbars

Familiarize you with On-Screen Take Offtrade Menu options

Section 3 Toolbars and Menus

12

Toolbars On-Screen Takeoff is equipped with several helpful toolbars for application efficiency See Appendix II Toolbar Item` Details for a detailed description of each toolbar item Individually the toolbars may be displayed moved docked reshaped or hidden from view You can also create costume toolbars to fit your needs

Main Toolbar

Tool Toolbar

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Takeoff Toolbar

Image Toolbar Viewing Toolbars Toolbars are displayed on the screen and will be consistent on each tab or page (Some toolbars or toolbar items will be in an inactive state if they donrsquot have a supporting element in the application)

1 Select View gt Toolbars and select the appropriate toolbar name

OR

2 Right-click on a toolbar region of the screen

3 Check the toolbars you want to display

Section 3 Toolbars and Menus

13

Moving Toolbars The toolbars may be positioned anywhere on the screen you wish This feature is provided to allow the flexibility for positioning the toolbars so they are out of your way yet handy for use

1 Click on an edge of the toolbar holding down the mouse button drag it to its new position

2 Release the mouse button to set it in place

NOTE If the toolbar is dropped anywhere other than a screen edge it will become free floating This feature is especially handy when using multiple monitors

Docking Toolbars The toolbars can be docked to any of the screen edges

1 Click on the title bar of an undocked toolbar

2 Drag the toolbar to any location on the screen

Hiding Toolbars

1 Select View gt Toolbars and select the toolbar you wish to remove from the screen

2 Right-click on the toolbar or dock bar areas

3 A floating toolbar can be closed by clicking on the in the upper right corner of the toolbar

Resizing Toolbars Only undocked (floating) toolbars may be resized

1 Position the mouse pointer over an edge

2 Click and drag

3 The toolbar can be resized as desired

Customizing the Toolbars You may rearrange or delete buttons within a toolbarrsquos display or you may move buttons from one toolbar to another If you find that you use a few tools over and over you may want to group them within a single toolbar for convenience On-Screen Takeoff gives you the flexibility to customize your takeoff environment

1 Select Tools gt Customize The Customize dialog will open

2 With the dialog open click on a toolbar button and drag buttons from one toolbar to another or a new location within the same toolbar

3 To add a button without altering another toolbar click on the Commands tab of the Customize dialog and drag the appropriate symbol from the Buttons section to a toolbar

4 To remove a button drag it to within the takeoff area of the application

Section 3 Toolbars and Menus

14

Menus

Section 3 Toolbars and Menus

15

Digitizer Menu

Section 4

16

Features

This section will

Show you how open On-Screen Takeoff

Describe the On-Screen Takeoff environment

Teach you how to navigate pages

Section 4 Features

17

Start On-Screen Takeoff

1 On your desktop double-click your On-Screen Takeoff icon

2 The application will open

OR

3 Left-click on the Start button on your computerrsquos toolbar

4 Scroll up to Programs gt On Center Software

5 Highlight On-Screen Takeoff and click On-Screen Takeoff will open On-Screen Takeoff opens to an untitled blank project The Image view of the screen will be a blank page

Two blank dock bars the Pan dock bar and the Takeoff dock bar appear at the left side of the screen Along the bottom the Status bar displays user status or context-sensitive messages as well as paper size and current zoom percentage of the plan sheet on screen The menu bar and several task specific toolbars are located at the top of the screen

NOTE All toolbars and dock bars may be accessed to view or hide through View gt Toolbars on the menu bar

Section 4 Features

18

Quick Start Video When On-Screen Takeoff opens you will be given an option to watch the Quick Start video (recommended) or start the program without watching the video

The 20 minute video will demonstrate key program functionality and allow you to view application instruction for enhanced learning

If you would like to watch the video click If you prefer to get started without

the video click If you have already viewed the video click the lsquoDo not show this message againrsquo box to prevent this dialog from appearing each time you open the program

NOTE If you decide later that you would like to watch the Quick Start video go to Help gt Watch

Quick Start Videos

On-Screen Takeoff Environment The On-Screen Takeoff environment acts like your drafting table allowing you to work on several sheets of plans at once and to reference at a glance the entire drawing and your position on that drawing while giving you the power of a computer to track analyze print and export your takeoff quantities and plans

The screen is bordered at the top by the Menu bar with pull-down menus and at the bottom by the Status bar which indicates current user status plan page size and current zoom percentage of page The largest portion of the application screen will be your takeoff area bounded on the left (by default) by two dock bars and on the top by several toolbars

In the takeoff area you may view your project plans (images) andor takeoff objects the takeoff list with quantities the worksheet or a legend of your condition list

The main window of On-Screen Takeoff has three tabs located at the bottom left allowing for quick change between Image Takeoff or Worksheet views Select the desired view option on the toolbar and it will automatically open on your screen

Section 4 Features

19

Image View

This view shows the plan file andor takeoff conditions drawn from your plans

Takeoff View This view displays the height if applicable and quantity breakdowns of your conditions according to result types indicated (eg linear feet square feet or count of items) for zones pages and the project as a whole It also displays notes per condition

Section 4 Features

20

Worksheet View This view displays the condition and quantity in units of measure specified in the first results field of the Results tab in the Condition dialog and allows the user to enter amounts for material labor and subcontractor takeoffs

NOTE When in the Worksheet view tab out the field then save This is keep all the values saved

Navigating On-Screen Takeoff

Auto Scrolling When creating linear areas or zones On-Screen Takeoff will automatically scroll the image view when necessary It will move as your mouse or digitizer moves beyond the edge of the current view

Changing Pages

1 Select View gt Next Page Previous Page or Go To Page (specify page number for the Go to Page option)

2 You may also select the corresponding arrows for these options from the Navigate Toolbar The

drop down arrow in the Page field will list the pages The and arrows will take you to the

previous or next page The and arrows will take you to the first or last page

OR

Section 4 Features

21

3 Or press Ctrl G for the Go To Page dialog

Hot Links Hot links allow you to move quickly from one drawing to the pertinent area of another drawing A hot link is handy when viewing enlarged areas of a page and needing the ability to jump back to a reference page

1 Select Tools gt Hot Link

OR

2 Click from the Tools Toolbar

3 Click on the page where you want to set the link The Hot Link dialog will open

4 Using the current page display on the Navigate Toolbar access the pull-down menu of pages by

clicking on the arrow at the right

5 Select the page for your link (You may also choose View gt Go to Page and select by page number)

6 Manipulate the view using the zoom tool and the scroll bars

7 Click

8 After joining a hot link to another page the hot link arrows in the Navigation Toolbar will become active

9 Move a hot link to another location on the page by clicking then click and drag the hot link image anywhere on the page

Section 5

22

Projects

This section will

Help you create settings important to your projects

Explain how On-Screen Takeoff works with your electronic or paper plans

Section 5 Projects

23

Project Template Files You can begin your project with a template Templates allow you to take advantage of conditions and settings used with previous projects

On-Screen Takeoff templates contain condition lists and established layer separations from previous projects you have created You may also use the sample templates provided with On-Screen Takeoff as a great starting point All aspects of the templates may be adjusted for a new project

1 Select File gt New and click the OK button

2 From the New dialog box choose the template that best fits your project

3 The conditions for this template will appear in the Takeoff Dock bar and the Project Properties dialog will open asking for further information

4 Use File gt Save or File gt Save As to rename and save your new project

Saving a Project as a Template File You can save your condition properties and layers as a template for future projects

1 Select File gt Save As

2 Enter a name for your template and select On-Screen Takeoff Template Files (tpo) from the Save As type field of the dialog (click on the down arrow to select)

3 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog Modifying a Template File Follow these steps to modify an existing template file if you need to change or add conditions andor layers

1 Select File gt Open

2 Navigate to your Projects directory

3 In the File Type drop-down select On-Screen Takeoff Template files (tpo)

4 Choose the On-Screen Takeoff template file you would like to modify and click the OK button

5 Make appropriate changes

6 Save and close file

The On-Screen Takeoff template files cannot save takeoff information

Section 5 Projects

24

Opening an Existing Project File 1 Select File gt Open

2 Navigate to the desired file location

3 Click the Open button

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask

you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Creating a New Project

1 Select File gt New

2 For a blank untitled project click

3 At this point the Project Properties dialog will pop-up for more information about your takeoff

NOTE The following are important to keep in mind when beginning a new project

At the start of your project fill out the Project Properties settings to establish the name for all printed output from your project set the default page size and scale for your plans number and names of different pages within the project and locations of electronic drawings

Scale settings can significantly affect quantity outcomes Be sure to set the scale for each page of drawings before beginning condition takeoffs

When using a digitizer remember to make a mark with a pen or pencil in the upper left and lower right corners of the first sheet of the paper plans to delineate the takeoff area for that sheet You can then set the takeoff area on On-Screen Takeoff using your marks

Save your project before you begin taking off any conditions On-Screen Takeoff will write a back-up file using the same file name

Remember the Undo feature If you make a mistake select Edit gt Undo and reverse the process step by step

Section 5 Projects

25

Project Properties

You can either set your Project Properties when you create a new takeoff or once your project file is saved under the appropriate name

1 Select File gt Project Properties the Project Properties dialog box will appear

2 Type in the name of your project to appear on printouts Use the backspace andor delete keys to edit the name as necessary

3 Press the Tab key to move to the Default Image Size option or click within the Image Size box You may click on the arrow at the right for the pull-down menu of page size options or you can use the down-arrow key on your keyboard to scroll through the list to the appropriate selection

4 Press the Tab key to move to the Default Scale option Select a scale by using the drop down arrow If your scale is metric you will need to click in the box next to Metric to convert to that measurement

5 Establish the number of pages for your project plans And load image files See Adding Pages to

Your Project

Adding Pages to Projects Individual Electronic Plans

1 Click on in the Project Properties dialog

2 In the Add Images dialog use the drop down arrow to navigate to the appropriate directory and folder containing your image

3 Select the file so that it displays in the File name field then click The file will display by name and path in the Image File field in Project Properties dialog

4 Click to accept and your project will automatically open

5 Save your project with the new settings by selecting File gt Save

Section 5 Projects

26

Electronic plans scanned from blueprints (as opposed to blue lines) will display as white lines on a black background and are difficult to read on your computer screen Select Image gt Invert and the colors will invert to black on white

You may have noticed the Page column in the Project Properties dialog Generally plan images occupy one page and 1 will be listed in the column indicating Page 1 of your plan file If you import a multi-page TIF a plan file containing more than one page of plans they will import as separate pages and each successive page will be indicated under the Page column as 1 2 3 etc of the plan file

Group of Electronic Plans You may add all the electronic plan files from a particular source (for example from a CD) by using the Auto Add feature

1 Click the button in the Project Properties dialog

2 Browse until you find the appropriate directory and folder containing your plan images

3 Click on any file displayed within your target folder so that the file name appears in the File name box of the Auto Add dialog

4 Click The image paths and file names will be recorded into the project properties arranged alphabetically

5 Click to accept your choices and your project will automatically open

6 Save your project with the new settings by selecting File gt Save

To load Dodge Plans into your Project Properties see Appendix IIi Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

Paper Plans On-Screen Takeoff makes it easy for Full Mode users to perform quantity takeoffs from paper plans using a digitizer

1 Add pages by clicking until you have the number of pages initially in the project

2 Name each page by clicking within the Title area and typing the name

3 Click to accept your choices and close the Project Properties dialog

4 Save your project with the new project properties settings by selecting File gt Save

Section 5 Projects

27

Setting Up a Drawing Template On-Screen Takeoff provides the convenience of using the same work surface for both digitizer and mouse to allow the user to draw conditions and then edit settings of the project or add or change conditions without breaking stride A mouse pad template included with the program defines the area of the digitizer in which use of the stylus or cursor will be recognized as mouse movement as opposed to drawing movement

1 Place your stylus on On-Screen Takeoff

2 Placing the template identifies the location mouse movements will be recognized by the program

Before placing the template the template must be applied to the digitizer surface This may have been done during the installation of your digitizer We suggest attaching the template to the lower right corner of the digitizer surface about one inch inside the grid area

3 Select Digitizer gt Place Template

4 Follow the instruction prompts on the screen clicking first on the target symbol at the left of the On-Screen Takeoff box on the template then on the target at the right

Setting Takeoff Area Before you can begin taking off a drawing you must define the drawing area on the digitizer This requires defining an area that will include all objects on each drawing of your plans As you add pages to your takeoff the same area of the digitizer will be active

1 Secure the plans to the digitizer with tape or a set of clamps

2 With a pen or a pencil mark the upper left corner and the lower right corner of the first page in your set of plans

3 Select Digitizer gt Set Takeoff Area

4 Click each mark with the stylus pen as prompted

5 Verify the active area of the digitizer by looking at the image size located in the lower right corner of your screen

If you close the program before the takeoff is complete you will need to reestablish the takeoff area before you can add additional condition quantities

Electronic plans appear on your computer screen eliminating the need to set a takeoff area You simply drag your mouse across the conditions you wish to takeoff The conditions will be highlighted and quantities will be totaled instantly Electronic plans are available through a variety of services For information contact an On Center Software account manager

Section 5 Projects

28

Setting Scale for Specific Pages You may set the scale in each page view separately This will override the default scale setting in Project Properties for that page Setting the correct scale for the drawing before taking off quantities ensures accurate calculations Be careful to check the scale for each drawing in your project before doing takeoffs

1 Display the page you want to set select Edit gt Set Scale

2 Use the drop down arrow to select a scale that will be applied to that page

3 Click

OR

4 Access the pull-down scale settings on the Navigate toolbar

NOTE As you draw objects notice that the drawn object is similar in width to the object on your plans If it is not the scale set may not be correct

Calculating Scale You may calculate scale according to a known measurement between two points either with a digitizer or on electronic plans

1 Select Edit gt Calculate Scale using Image or Edit gt Calculate Scale using Digitizer

2 Follow the instructions in the related Calculate Scale dialog box You will be asked to click on the first and second points then to enter the dimension for that distance

3 The scale will be recalculated for the displayed page and the Scale display on the Navigate toolbar will show the new scale

Section 6

29

Conditions and Takeoff

This section will Draw Conditions to Takeoff Plan Quantities

What Zones will do to help your takeoff process

Discuss the ins and outs of Takeoffs

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

30

Creating Conditions

If you are starting a new project from scratch you will need to create conditions to takeoff quantities such as floor areas wall lengths and corner bead counts If you are using a template you will have several pre-designed conditions already listed on the Takeoff dock bar However you may want to change the characteristics of some conditions or create additional conditions for a particular project

1 Right Click within the Takeoff dock bar Select New gt Condition

Or

2 From the Takeoff dock bar Click (if the buttons are not showing right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select Show Buttons from the pop-up menu) The New Condition dialog appears

3 Select the condition type (Linear Area Count or Zone) from the pull-down menu accessed by the

down arrow next to the Type option

4 Press Tab or use the mouse (or stylus) to move to Name and enter a name for your condition

5 Specify the desired condition attributes See Condition Attributes for more detail

6 Click for condition to apply

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

31

Condition Attributes Each condition type will have related attributes to select or specify within the General and Advanced tabs of the New Condition dialog Once a condition has been used to takeoff a quantity from your plans certain attributes cannot be changed

All conditions allow the user to specify color and fill pattern for the object drawn

Linear Conditions

General Specify width and height by feet and inches Specify pitch in inches up to the nearest thousandth of an inch if applicable

Advanced Specify rounding for object quantities and droprun default length for electrical or plumbing drops at the ends of lines Select Connect to have lines connect at the corners where one line of the condition ends and another begins (and indicate Tolerance for the featurersquos activation as distance between the ends of two lines) Choose Trim to have lines automatically trim to a line being crossed Choose Curve to draw a curved line

Follow these examples for inputting feet and inches For 7 feet 6 inches type 706 for 13 feet 7 inches type 1307 For 20 feet type 2000

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

32

Area Conditions

General If needed you can specify the thickness (in inches) andor pitch (in inches)

Advanced Specify rounding for object quantities Choose to display an adjustable grid within the area and indicate matrix cell dimensions

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

33

Count Conditions

General

Specify height and indicate the size (in inches) and shape (square circle triangle rectangle or opening) of the count object as it will appear on screen

Advanced Count conditions have advanced attributes These options are available for all shapes except for openings

Zone Conditions Zones allow you to subdivide condition quantities making it easier to modify and complete jobs in phases They can be used at the end of a takeoff to isolate a group of condition quantities that are in different areas of the takeoff

Zones can also be used to break a takeoff into multi-phases and can even be used to isolate quantities while a job is in progress to group the amount of work that has been completed to date They can be applied to one or multiple pages in your plans automatically calculating the takeoff quantities for each zoned area

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

34

The zone feature is only available in Lite and Full Mode If you are in View Mode and would like

to use this feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade

Condition Notes A Note tab is provided for comments regarding the condition These notes will display on the Takeoff List report and will import into Quick Bid

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

35

Condition Results The Results tab of the New Condition is based on condition type Initial settings default to linear feet (LF) for linear conditions square feet (SF) for area conditions and count of items (EA) for count conditions and zones The first of the results fields will display for the condition items in the Takeoff dock bar area All results will display in worksheets and Takeoff List reports as well as in an Excel spreadsheet after being exported

Copying Conditions You may use the condition attributes from a condition yoursquove already created for any future conditions of the same type

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Click the Copy button from the toolbar

OR

3 Right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select copy

4 A new condition will appear in the list with the same condition attributes as the previous condition but with the quantities zeroed

Editing Conditions Once you have copied a condition you might want to change several attributes You can also edit an existing condition to fit any updated needs

1 Highlight the desired condition on the Takeoff dock bar

2 Click the Change button

OR

3 Double-click on the condition you wish to edit to bring up the Change Condition dialog

NOTE The Change Condition dialog differs from the New Condition dialog only in that if takeoffs

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

36

have been performed in your project with this condition you will not be able to change the type of condition or certain properties under the advanced tab of the dialog box

Deleting Conditions 1 Click on the condition in the Takeoff Dock bar area

2 Click the Delete button on the toolbar

OR

3 Right-click and select Delete from the pop-up menu

All takeoff associated with the deleted condition will be deleted immediately and permanently

Organizing Project Conditions Within your project you can create folders andor sub-folders for different types of conditions You may even want to create a folder containing conditions with reset values

To get started organizing your conditions make sure you are viewing the condition tree (right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select Show Tree)

Creating Folders and Sub-Folders 1 Right-click in the Takeoff Dock bar area

2 Select New gt Folder from the pop-up menu

Copying Folders

1 Click on the folder and click Copy on the toolbar

2 All copied conditions within the new folder will have values reset to zero

Renaming Folders

1 Click on the folder

2 Right-click and select Rename from the pop-up menu

3 Enter a name for your folder and click the Enter button

Changing Condition Order

You may move conditions up or down in the condition list of the Takeoff dock bar to suit your project needs

1 Select the condition you would like to move by clicking to highlight it

NOTE When you are ready to move the highlighted conditions be sure that you start

moving using the last condition chosen That condition will have a highlighted boarder

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

37

2 Drag and drop any the condition from one place to another in the list You may also move a condition to another folder on the list in this way

Drawing with Conditions Snap Angles Set up snap angles to prevent lines from appearing jagged Snap angles are commonly set at 15deg and shift snap angles at 0deg

1 Go to Tools gt Options Options dialog appears

2 Under the General tab make the desired settings

3 Click to save the settings As they are drawn lines will snap to the set degree

Drawing a Linear Object 1 Select a condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff dock bar

2 Move the cursor into the Image takeoff area of the screen you will see the cursor display as crosshairs

3 Click and hold left mouse button then drag mouse to draw a line

4 Release mouse button to set line

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

38

5 Repeat steps for further lines

Continuous Mode This feature allows you to draw an object that has connected lines

1 Click the icon from the Takeoff toolbar

OR

2 Go to Tools gt Continuous Mode

3 Follow steps 1-3 from Draw a Linear Object

4 Click at each point of intersection The object will be connected

5 Double-click after making the final point to set the lines

Drawing a Curve To draw a curved line the Curve option must be checked under the Advanced tab of the Condition dialog

1 Click where you want to begin the curve and drag in a straight line to the position for the other endpoint of the curve

2 Click on the line to select it Handles in the shapes of small squares will appear at either end of

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

39

the line and in the center of the line

3 Move the cursor over the center handles until the cursor becomes a two-way arrow

4 Click and drag in the direction of the curve bending the line as you move the cursor Release to set the curve (The line you began with will disappear)

Draw a circle by drawing two curved lines connected

Drawing an Area Object Area conditions are drawn similarly to continuous mode lines You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete your area takeoff

NOTE When drawing an area do not intersect the perimeter or line of the object you are drawing

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

3 The area will be filled with the pattern set for that condition

NOTE The simulated circle will be good enough for you to be able to make a bid

To create a circular area click from point to point with very short distances in between points simulating a circlersquos perimeter Double-click after setting the last point to set the area

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

40

Grid Options Grids give you an added advantage when installing materials such as tiles Use this feature to get a count for how many tiles are needed for an area

1 Double-click on an area condition in the Takeoff dock bar to open its Condition dialog

2 Click on the Advanced tab to show its options

3 Check the box next to Grid by clicking in it

4 Indicate the dimensions of the cell matrix in inches (For example 200 x 400)

5 Under Results tab choose each (EA) for one of the results fields This will tabulate a number of grid cells (including partial grid cells) in area

6 Click to save your settings

7 Use the Move Grid and Rotate Grid features in the Tools menu to manipulate the grid as desired

Grid Calculation

1 Go to Tools gt Options menu

1 Specify if On-Screen Takeoff automatically should Calculate Grid Position

2 If AreaGrid Size is selected On-Screen Takeoff will calculate the number of items needed to fill the grid based on grid demintions

3 Click to accept and close the dialog

To move a line at any angle (regardless of default setting) press the Shift key while moving the mouse

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

41

Backout Mode This feature allows you to take out part of an area and deduct that amount of square footage

1 Select Tools gt Backout Mode

2 Outline the are you want backed out as you would when drawing a regular area object (see Drawing an Area Object)

3 The outlined area will clear and quantities will be recalculated

NOTE The perimeter of the backout area will be added to the LF quantity for that condition

Drawing a Count Object Square triangle rectangle and circle shaped count objects can easily be placed on images

1 Select the condition

2 Click in the location where you want the object to appear

3 To place an opening-shaped count item like a door or window you must click over an existing linear object such as a wall

4 On the Results tab you can change the height properties to give you the result you need

5 If Backout is checked on the advanced tab for each count opening the opening-shaped count item will back out a corresponding section of the linear object

Opening shaped count items are sized at 3rsquo0rdquo by default

Drawing a Zone Zones are drawn in the same way as area objects and may be any polygonal shape You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete the zone perimeter

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

42

Selecting Objects

1 Use the Select Tool to select objects

You can also select all objects that correspond to a condition

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Right-click and choose Select All

3 All objects with this condition will be highlighted with squares as an outline

Moving and Resizing Objects Linear

1 To move or resize a linear object click anywhere on the line to select it

2 To move the line position your pointer over the center handles When the mouse is positioned over the handles you will see a two-way arrow You will only be able to move the line in the direction of the arrows

3 Drag the line to a new position

4 Clicking and dragging the handles on the ends of the line will allow you to lengthen or shorten your line

Area and Zone

1 To move an area object or zone in its entirety click and drag it to its new position

2 Grabbing a handle at a corner or intersection of the object will allow you to adjust and change its perimeter

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

43

Count 1 To move a square circle rectangle or triangle shaped count object click and drag

2 Click and drag an opening shaped count object along the length of the linear object to the desired position then release

NOTE An opening shaped count object may not be moved from its associated linear condition object however it may be moved up and down the length of the linear object

Layers On-Screen Takeoff allows you to sort and separate your takeoff objects within the same job and on the same page On-Screen Takeoff gives you this flexibility through the use of layers

By assigning different conditions to different layers (for example differentiating between floors ceilings and walls) you can choose to view all layers or turn off certain layers to display and print the remaining groups of conditions only You may also remove the background image of electronic plans add text and hot link symbols or print only your condition takeoffs

Layers are only available in Full Mode If you are in View or Lite Mode and would like to use this

feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade Default Layers

On-Screen Takeoff begins every project with three default layers Image Annotation and Default The Image layer holds the electronic plan files you may have in your project The Annotation layer possesses all text notations highlighting and hot links in the project The Default layer will appear in the Condition dialog when creating or editing a condition (listed in the takeoff dock bar) Conditions are assigned to the Default layer unless otherwise specified by the user

Creating Layers To assign a condition to a layer other than the default layer you must first create additional layers for your project

1 Select View gt Layers to open the Layers dialog

2 Click An unnamed layer will be added

3 Click within the empty box and type a name for your layer (for example Wall)

4 New layers are added as active layers The adjacent box under the Show column will be checked

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

44

Assigning a Layer to a Condition 1 Open the Condition dialog box by creating a new condition or editing an existing condition

2 Under the General tab click on the down arrow in the Layer field to display optional layers

3 Select the desired layer for the condition Only the Default layer and layers you have added will be displayed

4 Click

View and Hide Layers

1 Select View gt Layers

2 Under the Show column check the box to view or remove the check (by clicking on it) to hide the specific layer

3 Click to accept and close the Layers dialog

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

45

Assigning Text to a Layer When adding text to an image On-Screen Takeoff has the capability to assign the text to a specified layer

1 Select the Text Tool

2 Click at the point you want to place your text

3 Type in your text using the Enter key for line breaks

4 Click the drop down arrow next to the Layer field and select the desired layer

Section 7

46

Printing and Exporting

This section will

Printing options and procedures

Exporting data by copying and pasting

Exporting quantity results to Excel spreadsheets

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

47

Print Setup On-Screen Takeoff allows the user to print the image takeoff list and worksheet

1 Select File gt Print Setup The Print Setup dialog will open

2 Select a printer or leave the default selection listed (change from the default printer displayed by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the field)

3 Indicate page size and printer tray option (Source) Access page size options by clicking on the

down arrow at the right of the field

4 Choose Portrait or Landscape orientation

5 Click to accept and close the dialog

Printing Images The image area can include the electronic plans the takeoff objects added text and hot links To print a subset of these (for example just the takeoffs without the plans or the added text and hot link symbols) hide layers that you do not want to print (see Section 6 View and Hide Layers) When you are printing your images every page will show the scale of the takeoff you are printing

1 Click on the Image tab to display the area of your project

2 Select File gt Print (or Ctrl + P)

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

48

3 Select the desired view (What to print) and the Image Range

4 Click The second Print dialog will open

5 Change settings accordingly or click if you accept the default settings

Printing Takeoff Lists and Worksheets In Takeoff Lists and Worksheets you may hide columns to print only certain results or adjust column widths to fit the report within the page size selected

1 In Takeoff List or Worksheet view move your cursor to the right side of the columnrsquos title bar the cursor will display as a two-way arrow

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

49

2 Click and drag to adjust the width of the column Holding the mouse button you may

slide the title bar under the title bar to its left to hide the column completely

3 Select File gt Print or press Ctrl + P to access the Print dialog

4 Indicate desired printer and choose the number of copies

5 Click to print and close the dialog

When printing the condition list we suggest printing in landscape

To reset to the default column widths double-click on the right border of a column heading will reset the column to its right (or previously to its right before being hidden)

Print Preview 1 Select File gt Print Preview

2 Use and to vary your view 3 If viewing an image choose current full or scale view to see how it displays

4 For printed outputs that cover more than one page use and to view adjacent pages or click on the down arrow next to Page field and select the page you want displayed

Exporting Using the CopyPaste Feature You may copy all the data or sections from the worksheet and the takeoff list view in On-Screen Takeoff and paste it into another application When pasting into Excel the cell layout will be maintained

1 Highlight the areas you wish to paste Click and hold the left mouse button down as you drag the cursor over the area to be selected then releasing the mouse button

OR

2 Select the entire takeoff list quickly click on the left On-Screen Takeoff column header and hold and drag the cursor across the remaining column headings

The number of pages for the view selected will display in the lower left-hand corner The zoom percentage that applies to the view will be displayed in the lower right-hand corner next to page size of the drawing

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

50

3 In the worksheet view you may highlight rows by clicking on the numbered buttons to the left of each row clicking and dragging across column headings or clicking and dragging over individual cells in the worksheet

Click anywhere in the appropriate view to deselect the area

4 Once your selection is highlighted you may select Edit gt Copy or Ctrl C from the keyboard 5 On your monitor switch to the application into which you want to paste your selection 6 Select Edit gt Paste in the new application or simply press Ctrl + V to paste

The colored keys for conditions cannot be pasted

Using the Export Feature You may export condition quantities to specified cell location within an Excel worksheet file Cell target locations are assigned in the Results tab of the condition dialogs on the Export line relating to each quantity measurement type

On-Screen Takeoff will export takeoff quantity results for up to three different quantity types that you specify For instance you may want to know the number of square feet in a ceiling area as well as the number of linear feet in its perimeter

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

51

1 Bring up the Condition dialog by double-clicking on a condition in the takeoff dock bar or by

selecting the condition and clicking

2 Click on the Results tab to access its fields The default quantities for the condition type will display

3 For each results field click on the arrow to access the pull-down menu and select the appropriate quantity (for example SF LF EA etchellip)

4 Have your Excel spreadsheet opened and saved in a file

5 Specify the Excel spreadsheet cell locations where you want the results to go

6 For a cell in the first sheet of your spreadsheet type in the cell address (eg a1) Case is not important

7 For a cell on a successive sheet of your spreadsheet type in sheet the number followed by a comma and the cell address without any spaces (eg sheet2a1) Case is not important

8 Click

9 Select File gt Export gt Condition Qty to Excel

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

52

10 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

11 Click to export On-Screen Takeoff results to specified cell locations in the Excel file When you return to the Excel application you will see the values have been added to the specified cell locations in your spreadsheet

12 Save your Excel file

Exporting Worksheet to Excel

1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 From On-Screen Takeoff Select File gt Export gt Worksheet to Excel

4 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

5 Click When you return to the Excel application you will see the values from the Worksheet Tab have been added to your spreadsheet

6 Save your Excel file

Exporting Takeoff to CVS 1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 Click the Takeoff Tab in the project you want to export the information

4 Select File gt Export gt Takeoff to CSV

5 Browse to the location of the CSV spreadsheet file click file to select it

6 Click the Save

NOTE CSV files can be opened in Excel Lotus Access etc One may consider this option more of a ldquodumprdquo into a file

The Excel application must be active (it may be minimized on the application bar) with the target spreadsheet open in the application Otherwise an error will occur with the export operation that will affect both the On-Screen Takeofftrade file and the Excel spreadsheet

Section 8

53

Advanced Features

This section will

Some special features of working with condition objects in the takeoff area

Details of advanced options for conditions

Advanced features of the Project Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

54

Features to Use with Objects Roping Feature You can move copy or delete using this feature Using the Select tool (the pointer) you may select several objects at once by clicking and dragging an outline around the objects then releasing the mouse button Roping may select either objects completely within the outlined area (inclusive) or objects both within and touched by the outlined area (touching) Specify your roping preference under Tools gt Options

1 Click and hold the mouse button at a point on the screen near the objects to be selected and drag to surround the objects with an outline

2 Release the mouse button The objects will be selected

3 You may now

Move the group around on the page by clicking within the group dragging the mouse and releasing the button to place the objects

Delete the group of objects by clicking the Delete key or

Copy and paste by pressing Ctrl C to copy the group then Ctrl V to paste it The pasted copy of the grouped objects will appear slightly offset from the original objects

Section 8 Advanced Features

55

Applying a DropRun Count

Use the droprun feature when calculating quantities to take into account the drop or run of a linear condition such as electrical lines or plumbing pipes Drop or run lengths may be added separately to any linear condition on screen while a default droprun length may be indicated for a condition as a whole

1 Select the desired linear condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff Dock bar

2 Click the Change button in the toolbar to open the Change Condition dialog

3 Click the Advanced tab to access the advanced options and click inside the DropRun check box

4 Enter a default length to be applied to all of this condition Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches) You can leave the length blank and manually enter drop run on each segment drawn

5 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog

Edit DropRun Count

1 With the related linear condition in the Takeoff Dock bar highlighted or with the pointer tool selected

2 click on the desired linear object in the image takeoff area The Count button will become active

3 Click on the Count button (alternatively select Tools gt Count) The default droprun amount will show in the pop-up Count dialog (Default length will be zero if droprun has not been selected in this conditionrsquos properties)

4 Type in the desired length Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches)

5 Click the OK button The additional amount will be reflected in the corresponding quantity The new DropRun count will apply only to the object edited

Adding Text in Image View

On-Screen Takeoff allows you to place text comments around your quantity takeoffs that may be printed along with plan images and objects Text is automatically placed within the Annotation Layer (that includes text and hot links)

1 To place text on the image select the Text Tool and click at the point you want to place your text opening a text box

2 Type in your information clicking Enter for line breaks

3 When you are finished click the OK button to exit the text box

4 To reposition text simply click on the text (with the Text Tool active) to select it

5 Move the cursor over the text the cursor will now display as a four-way arrow

6 Click and drag the mouse to position the text as desired

Section 8 Advanced Features

56

1 To edit existing text use the Text Tool to double-click on the text to open the editing box

2 Enter additional text or use the Backspace key to delete text as necessary

Formatting Text Once created you may format the font size type style and color of your text

1 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Font or click on the Font button in the Takeoff Toolbar

2 Select the desired features (color options are disabled) and click the OK button

3 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Color or click on the Color button in the Takeoff Toolbar The Color dialog will open

4 Click on a color in the Basic Color palette or create a color and add to the Custom Colors palette (Be sure to click on the color in the Custom Colors palette to select it)

5 Click the OK button

Object Properties

Linear Objects

Linear objects may be set to connect at corners

A linear object may be set to trim automatically when crossing another linear object (Check the trim option under the advanced tab of the Condition dialog)

When you move a connected linear object objects automatically move and resize connected lines accordingly (quantities are then recalculated)

This feature requires that the connected linear object be moved using the center handles (does not apply when resizing the line from the ends)

Objects constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

Objects are measured from centerline to centerline

Section 8 Advanced Features

57

Area Objects When drawing an area use your escape key to undo the last line drawn You may reverse your

drawing of an area using the escape key

The area will not fill with color and pattern until the user double-clicks after the last line is set

Lines drawn to delineate an area object constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

After selecting an area to move or adjust position the mouse in the center to move the entire area position the mouse at the sides or corners to adjust the perimeter

Count Objects

All count objects are quantified by the physical number of objects per page and reported as EA for the UOM The quantity for the current Image View is (displayed in the Condition List) and the total quantity in your project is displayed in the Takeoff View and Worksheet View)

Square circle rectangle and triangle shaped count objects do not displace or subtract from other object quantities when placed on top of them However on the Advanced Tab for the count condition a connect property can be set (this is a check box) so that when a count object of this shape is put on top of a Linear type takeoff object it will move with the linear if said linear is moved

An opened-shaped count object must be placed within a linear object Opening shaped count objects may also be measured by linear foot or linear yard (EA SF and SY are also options) Opening shaped count items default to a width of 3rsquo 0rdquo at the time of creation This size can be changed The small medium and large size are not options on this type of condition anymore Check Backout on the Advanced tab for each Count object back out the footage (or yardage) of opening-shaped count objects in which they are placed

NOTE In order to see this Backout functionality (in quantity) for SY or SF deductions at least one of the

results for the Linear(s) this object will be placed on must be set to SY or SF and the count object must have a height quantity

Advanced Features of Conditions The Round Feature Under the Advanced tab of the linear and area Condition dialogues you may specify quantity rounding (in inches) For linear objects rounding applies to each linear object drawn For area objects rounding will apply to each segment of the area perimeter adjusting the perimeter and area calculations For example With a linear condition entering 12 in the Round field will round up each related linear object to the nearest 12 inches or one foot With this setting two walls of 1 4 would each round to 2 0 totaling 4 0

NOTE In the Takeoff Dock bar condition list and in the On-Screen Takeoff reports quantities will be displayed in whole numbers rounded up to the nearest foot However calculations are based on true quantities without rounding unless the Round Feature is engaged

Pitch Pitch may apply either to linear or area conditions It is measured in rise per linear foot Entering 12 indicates a 12 rise per 12 of linear distance (a pitch of 12 over 12) or an angle of 45deg

Section 8 Advanced Features

58

Advanced Features of Project Properties Selecting Multiple Pages

1 Select a single page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry

2 Drag the cursor down the column of numbers to select consecutive pages

3 Click on the blank button at the top of this column to select all pages in the Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

59

Changing Image Assigned to a Drawing 1 Select the page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry 2 Click the Change Image button The Change Image dialog box will appear

3 Navigate to the desired file and select by clicking on it

4 Click the Open button The electronic file assigned to the page will have been changed to reflect the new file choice

Changing Image File Path 1 Select pages as described above

2 Choose Change Folder

3 In the Change Folder dialog navigate to the appropriate folder

4 Click the OK button The file path will have been changed for the selected page entries

Delete a Page from Project Properties 1 Select the page you want to delete by clicking on its associated number (in the gray box at the

left of the entry)

2 Choose Delete Page

All Takeoff on the page will be deleted immediately and permanently

Section 8 Advanced Features

60

Advanced Features of Tool Options

Calculation Method On-Screen Takeoff has built-in calculation options to allow for faster work and faster saves until your takeoff is complete Calculation options are found by selecting Tools gt Options then clicking on the Calculation tab

Calculation method can be set to Automatic Automatic except Grids and Manual Manual will allow the program to operate more quickly while Automatic or Automatic except Grids allows the user to see quantity changes as takeoffs are made

In any mode you may press F9 to recalculate quantities for the On-Screen Takeoff current totals

Configuration Tab

When the ldquoPage Label (A01)rdquo radial button is chosen On-Screen Takeoff puts the numbered label on all the pages of in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar If the Page Descriptionrdquo radial button is chosen then a description of what takeoff is on that specific page will be shown in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar

This section of the configuration tab gives you options on how you want to export your information When the ldquoFolderSubfolder Namesrdquo radial button is chosen than on your file that you are exporting to will have all the conditions folders and subfolders In the Delimiter box you can choose the symbol that is needed to separate the information you are exporting Some files need semicolons () or colons () to make sure the information comes exported in is separated it the appropriate places

Section 8 Advanced Features

61

In previous versions of On-Screen Takeoff there are views that users need to have in order for them to display their information By either choosing ldquoOST 1xrdquo or ldquoOST 2xrdquo it will let the program know you want your columns of information exported in that specific format

When you have the Confirm Deletions radial button of ldquoYesrdquo chosen than every time you delete anything you will get a dialog box confirming your intentions of deletion

While working with your takeoff you have a choice to either view the legend of your conditions or hide it Choose whichever radial button that suits your needs

For those who prefer to use the Enter key to navigate in dialog boxes this option is just for that

Font Tab The Font tab is designed for you to make your own look and feel for the application At the bottom of this tab it will show you sample of the fonts and colors you have chosen

Renaming the Current Page You may change the name of the current page in the takeoff area of On-Screen Takeoff by selecting Edit gt Rename Page

This opens the Name Page dialog and you may simply type in a new name and click the Enter button The new name for the file will be reflected on the title bar for the page and in Project Properties

You also may access the Rename Page function by right-clicking in the takeoff area while in Image View and selecting the option from the pop-up menu that appears

Section 9

62

Saving and Exiting

This section will

Explain how to save projects

Show you how to safely exit the program

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

63

Saving Your Project

1 Select File gt Save 2 If your project has not previously been saved a Save dialog box will open to allow you to name

the file and choose the directory and folder in which to save your file 3 Once saved File gt Save will simply save the current version of the file

OR

4 Select File gt Save As then type in a new name for the file and save to the desired file path

The Auto-save Feature With the Auto-save feature On-Screen Takeoff automatically backs up your open project You may choose to have more than one level of backup files The first backup copy will have the extension b00 and successive files will be b01 b02 and so on If you have designated four levels of backup files after the fourth backup copy has been created (b03) the next file will be saved over the file with extension b00 Further backup saves will then rotate through the four backup files in the same way

1 Select Tools gt Options 2 In the Auto-save area (under the General tab) select the frequency of backup file creation (in

minutes) and the number of levels for the feature 3 You also may disengage the feature by clicking in the check box to clear it

The Auto-save feature automatically saves backup copies to the directory of the current project If you are working from a write-protected area such as a CD-ROM On-Screen Takeoff will place backup files in the On-Screen Takeoff folder

Exiting When you are finished using On-Screen Takeoff it is very easy to exit Exiting is very important because of security reasons If someone were to use your computer they could enter the application and view and manipulate information

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

64

On-Screen Takeoff closes the open project when you open another or create a new project or when you exit the program

1 Select File gt Exit

OR

2 You also may click at the upper right-hand corner of the application to exit

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

65

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer When you get your digitizer from GTCO you will need to connect it to your computer Follow the instructions outlined below to do this

Note For rollup digitizers the metal bar must be oriented to the top or right hand side

Connecting the Digitizer 1 Lay the digitizer out flat 2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer 3 Plug in the power adapter 4 Plug the interface (IO) cable into the digitizer 5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into an open serial port on computer

Note GTCO Technical support phone number is 410-381-6688 The electronic manual (on diskette) from GTCO contains more detailed installation and operation instructions for the GTCO digitizer model you have

Installing other Digitizer Drivers If you are using a GTCO Digitizer you will need to install the GTCO TabletWorks Drivers

If you are using a Digitizer not supported by GTCO Tablet Works 10 please contact the manufacturer of your digitizer for assistance with installation

Installing GTCO TabletWorks Drivers 1 Insert the On Center CD into the CD-ROM drive The CD Startup screen will open 2 Click on Install Software 3 Select Additional Software and Drivers 4 Select Digitizer Driver 5 Follow the instructions for installing TabletWorks 10

Adhering the Template The template is a small plastic sticker used to enable mouse function when using the digitizer with On-Screen Takeoff Place your template on your digitizer We suggest placing it in the bottom right corner of the digitizer about one inch inside the takeoff area

Note You may either peel off the back of the template and use the adhesive surface or you can tape the template down

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

66

Testing the Digitizer Drivers Before running OST you may test the digitizer by moving the stylus around on the digitizer pad it should move the mouse cursor (if mouse emulation is enabled)

If the digitizer does not move the mouse cursor on the screen

The superset codes may need to be reset Reset the superset codes by touching on the border of the digitizer with the stylus The digitizer should beep several times

The digitizer may not be communicating with the computer Be sure the COM port selected is correct Be sure the COM port selected is correct If you are not able to get the digitizer to move the mouse cursor you need to call GTCO technical support for help

Note The Mouse Emulation is not required for On-Screen Takeoff to work properly It is used only for the Template functionality if the digitizer is moving the cursor the wrong direction (up instead of sideways or vice-versa)

Click the L-shaped arrow symbol on the digitizer with the stylus

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

67

Appendix II Toolbar Items Main Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

68

Tool Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

69

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

70

Navigate Toolbar (Continued)

Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

71

Takeoff Toolbar (Continued)

Image Toolbar

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

72

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

This section will detail how to load plans from a F W Dodge CD-ROM into an On-Screen Takeoff project file ready for takeoffs

Dodge files may be added to the Project Properties dialog However loading the files in that way will load the files by number rather than name description If you want to load one page only from your Dodge CD You will have to rename the page to display the name rather than number of the file

To load plan files from a Dodge CD so that the files load sequentially by file number but are displayed by name rather than by number within your project follow the instructions below

Opening a Dodge project from a CD-ROM 1 Insert the CD into the drive 2 Choose File gt Custom 3 Choose Dodge Plans Project (plansdat) as the file type 4 Select the appropriate file type by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the Files of type

field 5 In the Look in field access your drive paths by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the

field then

Navigate to your CD-ROM drive Open the data folder and Open the Projects folder

6 Select the desired project and open its folder 7 Open the plansdat file 8 All the images will come in sequenced correctly for that job along with the full descriptions

(names) of each page If there is not a plans folder in the project folder then plans do not exist for that project on the CD Opening the plansdat file will yield an empty project

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

73

Appendix IV Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer The On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer is a limited version of On Center Softwarersquos commercial takeoff software If your status bar located at the very bottom of the main window says View Mode in the lower left-hand corner then you are using the Plan Viewer You can use the plan viewer to

View CD-based amp converted CAD drawings

View a previously created OST file and associated drawings

Download electronic plans online

Navigate through drawings

Quickly Takeoff linearsareas and counts

Zoom in to view the plan better

Print drawings directly from the viewer

Viewing an On-Screen Takeoff Project File

1 To open an OST file that was previously created with of On-Screen Takeoff 2 Select File gt Open 3 An Open dialog will appear if you do not see the OST file you are looking for select the

Look In drop down arrow 4 A drop down menu will appear listing the various folders drives and mapped drives located

on your computer select the correct drive or folder location and continue to browse to the location of your OST file

5 When you see your OST file double-click it to open it 6 Any takeoff and drawings should appear on the Image tab view

If you do not see the drawings but do see the colored takeoff layer the drawings may

not be located in the same place they were originally saved at Go to File gt Project Properties and check the Image File path for each listed page If the image file path is pointing to a CD drive make sure the CD is inside the CR-ROM

Downloading Electronic Plans If your Online Plan Service provides a special file format (OSX) required to use this feature of our plan viewer you can immediately downloaded all electronic plans of a project directly from our viewer

Most Plan Room web sites will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff when a request to download plans is made Your particular Plan Room may differ in operation so please contact the provider directly with questions on using the site

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

74

When you request to download or open a project file from a Plan Room you will usually have the open to open or save an OSX file Choosing open will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff Alternately you may choose to save the file to a local hard drive After you have saved the file either double-click it to launch On-Screen Takeoff or open the OSX file using On-Screen Takeoff by clicking File then Open and locating the file on your hard drive You will need to change the file type to OSX

After the OSX file is opened you will see an additional tab appear in the Conditions List window called Pages

The Pages tab shows the hierarchy of your project Gray file icons represent pages that have not been downloaded and blue icons represents pages that have been downloaded

To download a page simply double-click the page icon

If you wish to select a group of pages to download you can use the Ctrl or Shift key to multiple select them then click the Download button

If you wish to download all pages at once click the Download All button

Downloaded pages will now appear in the Project Properties dialog in the same order in which they appear in the Pages tab

Creating Quick Takeoffs With On-Screen Takeoff you can create quick takeoffs to measure quantities even if you dont have the full version of our program However using the Quick Takeoff functionality shows you just a fraction of what the full version can do

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar is located at the top of the image view It has three buttons designated for three types of takeoffs Linear Area and Count The Quantity drop down list will show secondary quantities for Linears and Areas The Units drop down allows you to select how you want your quantities displayed Feet Inches Yards Millimeters and Meters

NOTE Every time change the type of takeoff you are performing (switching from Area to Linear for example) the previous quantities and takeoff objects will disappear They will also disappear when you changes pages

NOTE You can use the Dimension Tool to basically measure the distance between two points or linears The distance will display on the status bar at the bottom of the application

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

75

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions General

Where is On-Screen Takeoff installed on my computer

Typically it is installed in CProgram FilesOn-Screen Takeoff

In Explorer how do I recognize On-Screen Takeoff file types

On-Screen Takeoff data is stored in a single file per job lsquojob name OSTrsquo On-Screen Takeoff templates are stored as lsquotemplate nameTPOrsquo

Can only one project at a time be open

Yes For that reason opening another project automatically closes the project on screen You will be asked to save any changes

Is only one scale allowed per page What about on drawings that have multiple detail sections on a page and each of those drawings have different scales

Yes For pages with drawings of different scales copy the drawing to another project page and set the appropriate scale

I cannot perform backout on an area that is along a linear

As a workaround use the On-Screen Takeoff layers feature to help you with this issue Electronic Images

How do I start a project from drawings that have been scanned and written to a CD-ROM

Open a new project Select File gt Project Properties and select Auto Add Navigate to your CD and the appropriate folder and select any image file in that location Click Open All files in the location will load into your project Recommended that images are copied from CD to hard drive for performance

If I get a disk of drawings in AutoCAD format (R13 or R14) can I read them in On-Screen Takeoff

Yes On-Screen Takeoff now reads DWG DXF and many other format that are saved with AutoCAD

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

76

When I click on the all pages button what is supposed to happen Currently nothing seems to change when I click on that button

The All Pages button is used to apply the Darken and Enhance Plans feature to all pages in the project (as opposed to only the current page on screen)

Is there a way to deduct a large skylight from an area condition

Yes with the related area condition selected in the Takeoff Dock bar unselect the Backout button on the Takeoff Toolbar then draw the Backout area The area quantity will be deducted from the related condition object and the linear measurement of the Backout perimeter will be added

Digitizer Issues

How do I connect a Digitizer to the computer

See Appendix I Connecting a Digitizer

The Place Template menu choice is disabled

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or the digitizer or the digitzer drivers are not installed

It wonrsquot let me select the Set Takeoff Area menu choice

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or no job is open a digitizer is not installed or the drivers are not installed

The digitizer stylus is not moving the cursor or crosshairs

Click S-0-1 superset on the digitizer

How do I convert my old GTCO Digitizer to work with On- Screen Takeofftrade

Call GTCO and they may be able to reconfigure your digitizer to be compatible with On-Screen Takeoff

Printing Issues Which Printers work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible printers include On-Screen Takeoff Hewlett Packard Epson and Canon printers If you are having printer difficulties please contact support and specify the type of printer along with other pertinent information Contact support at wwwoncentercomsupport or email supportoncentercom

Which Plotters work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible Plotters include Hewlett Packard DesignJet plotters and the EnCAD Cadjet II If you are having plotter difficulties please contact support and specify the type of plotter concerned

ViewingDisplay I can no longer see my condition list How do I get it back

The toolbars and Dock bars can be turned on and off through the View gt Toolbars menu options

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

77

This is also accessible by right-clicking in the toolbar area and selecting (or deselecting) a toolbar listed

I cannot view my folders in the condition list

Right-click in the Takeoff Dock barcondition list area and select Show Tree to display your folders

My Status Bar reads Viewer Mode and I am unable to draw conditions

On-Screen Takeoff needs to be Authorized Or you need to purchase an upgrade Click the Perform Advanced Takeoff button on the main toolbar

I hid a Dock bar and when I selected to view it again it appeared alongside the other Dock

bar instead of stacked on top of it How do I fix it

Pick up the Dock bar by clicking on the bar at the top and continuing to hold down the mouse button drag the Dock bar over the other one It will resize and appear stacked with the other

When I open image files from a CD the images are all upside down How do I get them right

side up

To flip pages from top to bottom follow the steps below 1 Click the All Pages button on the Image Toolbar (All Pages is engaged when the button

is not clicked) 2 Click the Flip Horizontal button on the Image Toolbar 3 Click the All Pages button again to disengage

Templates How do I create a Template

Follow the steps below 1 Create a typical project 2 Choose File gt Save As 3 Choose On-Screen Takeoff Template Files as the file type to save 4 Name the file This will save all of the condition setups as well as the layers for the

project

How do I create a new project from a template

Follow the steps below 1 Choose File gt New 2 Select a template from those listed in the New dialog This will open a new project with

conditions and layers saved from a previous project but no pages or takeoff

78

INDEX

Area Conditions 32

Area Objects 57

Auto Scrolling 20

Auto-save 63

Backout Mode 41

Calculation Method 60

Conditions 29

Configuration 60

Contents Tab 6

Continuous Mode 38

Count Conditions 33

Count Objects 57

Digitizer 10 65 76

Docking Toolbars 13

Dodge CD 72

Drawing 27 37

DropRun Count 55

Environment 18

Exiting 63

Exporting 49

Features 16

Font 61

Frequently Asked Questions 75

Grid 40

Help File 5

Hiding Toolbars 13

Hot Links 21

Image 19 59

Image files 9

Image Toolbar 12 71

Images 75

Index Tab 6

Layers 43

Linear Conditions 31

Linear Objects 56

Main Toolbar 12 67

Menus 14

Moving Toolbars 13

Navigate Toolbar 12 69

Navigating 20

On-Screen Takeofftrade 2

Page 59 61

Pages 20 25 28

Plan Viewer 73

Plans 26

Printing 47 76

Project Properties 25

Projects 22

Quick Start Video 18

Resizing Toolbars 13

Roping 54

Saving 63

Scale 28

Search Tab 7

Selecting Objects 42

Setup 8

Start On-Screen Takeofftrade 17

System Requirements 9

Takeoff 19 27

Takeoff Toolbar 70 71

Takeoff Toolbar 12

Template Files 23

TIF (Group4) 9

Tool Toolbar 12 68

Toolbar 67

Toolbars 12

View Toolbar 12 69

Viewing Toolbars 12

Worksheet 20

Zone Conditions 33

Zoom Toolbar 12 69

  • On-Screen Takeoff Lite
  • Table of Contents
  • Section 1 - Introduction
  • Section 2 - Setup
  • Section 3 - Toolbars and Menus
  • Section 4 - Features
  • Section 5 - Projects
  • Section 6 - Conditions and Takeoff
  • Section 7 - Printing and Exporting
  • Section 8 - Advanced Features
  • Section 9 - Saving and Exiting
  • Appendix I - Installing Your Digitizer
  • Appendix II - Toolbar Items
  • Appendix III - Loading Plans from a Dodge CD
  • Appendix IV - Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer
  • Appendix V - Frequently Asked Questions
  • Index

Section 2 Setup

9

Minimum System Requirements To use On-Screen Takeoff your computer must meet the following minimum system requirements

An IBM PC or 100 compatible computer with a Pentium II or faster Intel processor

Memory Requirements 200 MB of available hard-disk space and256 MB RAM (128 MB preferred)

Windows 2000 SP4 and Windows XP SP2 256 color video card Super VGA display card Mouse 15-inch monitor

While these are the minimum system requirements Windows places heavy demands on your systems resources The more available memory in your computer the faster and more efficient On-Screen Takeoff will operate

Recommended Components

For the best performance we recommend the following components

Pentium III or faster processor

512 or more of RAM

12X speed CD-ROM or better

17-inch monitor or dual monitors Graphic adapter with 128 MB or more VRAM Sound card and speakers installed

NOTE In order to utilize the Training Videos you must have a sound card and speakers installed

Compatible File Formats The resolution in electronic plans does not need to be more that 200 DPI (Dots per Inch) The preferred file format is a black and white TIF (Group4) On-Screen Takeoff recognizes image files with the following extensions

File Extensions View Mode Lite Mode Full Mode TIF X X X PDF X X X OSE X X X JPG X X X CPC X X X CAL X DGN X DWG X DXF X OSP X PLN X PLT X

Section 2 Setup

10

NOTE Use the following image types for best results

Convert to TIF

The converted files will be stored in a folder with the name of the current On-Screen Takeoff project Since the conversion can be very time consuming you should only select this option if you really intend to convert vector files to TIF

1 Select File gt Project Properties

2 In the Pages Field add your image See Section 5 Establishing Project Setting Adding Pages

3 Click

4 Then select the page with the drawing you wish to convert

5 Click

Installing Your Digitizer The following instructions are a quick start to installing your digitizer For more specific information please reference Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer at the end of this guide

Connecting Your Digitizer

Upon receiving your digitizer (either a GTCO or another brand) you will need to connect it to your computer

1 Lay the digitizer out flat

2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer

3 Plug in the power supply

4 Plug the interface cable into the digitizer

5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into the computer

NOTE On-Screen Takeoff is compatible with any tablet that is WinTab compatible

Digitizer options are only available in Full Mode If you are in View or Lite Mode and would like

to use this feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade

Section 3

11

Toolbars and Menus

This section will

Introduce the program toolbars

Familiarize you with On-Screen Take Offtrade Menu options

Section 3 Toolbars and Menus

12

Toolbars On-Screen Takeoff is equipped with several helpful toolbars for application efficiency See Appendix II Toolbar Item` Details for a detailed description of each toolbar item Individually the toolbars may be displayed moved docked reshaped or hidden from view You can also create costume toolbars to fit your needs

Main Toolbar

Tool Toolbar

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Takeoff Toolbar

Image Toolbar Viewing Toolbars Toolbars are displayed on the screen and will be consistent on each tab or page (Some toolbars or toolbar items will be in an inactive state if they donrsquot have a supporting element in the application)

1 Select View gt Toolbars and select the appropriate toolbar name

OR

2 Right-click on a toolbar region of the screen

3 Check the toolbars you want to display

Section 3 Toolbars and Menus

13

Moving Toolbars The toolbars may be positioned anywhere on the screen you wish This feature is provided to allow the flexibility for positioning the toolbars so they are out of your way yet handy for use

1 Click on an edge of the toolbar holding down the mouse button drag it to its new position

2 Release the mouse button to set it in place

NOTE If the toolbar is dropped anywhere other than a screen edge it will become free floating This feature is especially handy when using multiple monitors

Docking Toolbars The toolbars can be docked to any of the screen edges

1 Click on the title bar of an undocked toolbar

2 Drag the toolbar to any location on the screen

Hiding Toolbars

1 Select View gt Toolbars and select the toolbar you wish to remove from the screen

2 Right-click on the toolbar or dock bar areas

3 A floating toolbar can be closed by clicking on the in the upper right corner of the toolbar

Resizing Toolbars Only undocked (floating) toolbars may be resized

1 Position the mouse pointer over an edge

2 Click and drag

3 The toolbar can be resized as desired

Customizing the Toolbars You may rearrange or delete buttons within a toolbarrsquos display or you may move buttons from one toolbar to another If you find that you use a few tools over and over you may want to group them within a single toolbar for convenience On-Screen Takeoff gives you the flexibility to customize your takeoff environment

1 Select Tools gt Customize The Customize dialog will open

2 With the dialog open click on a toolbar button and drag buttons from one toolbar to another or a new location within the same toolbar

3 To add a button without altering another toolbar click on the Commands tab of the Customize dialog and drag the appropriate symbol from the Buttons section to a toolbar

4 To remove a button drag it to within the takeoff area of the application

Section 3 Toolbars and Menus

14

Menus

Section 3 Toolbars and Menus

15

Digitizer Menu

Section 4

16

Features

This section will

Show you how open On-Screen Takeoff

Describe the On-Screen Takeoff environment

Teach you how to navigate pages

Section 4 Features

17

Start On-Screen Takeoff

1 On your desktop double-click your On-Screen Takeoff icon

2 The application will open

OR

3 Left-click on the Start button on your computerrsquos toolbar

4 Scroll up to Programs gt On Center Software

5 Highlight On-Screen Takeoff and click On-Screen Takeoff will open On-Screen Takeoff opens to an untitled blank project The Image view of the screen will be a blank page

Two blank dock bars the Pan dock bar and the Takeoff dock bar appear at the left side of the screen Along the bottom the Status bar displays user status or context-sensitive messages as well as paper size and current zoom percentage of the plan sheet on screen The menu bar and several task specific toolbars are located at the top of the screen

NOTE All toolbars and dock bars may be accessed to view or hide through View gt Toolbars on the menu bar

Section 4 Features

18

Quick Start Video When On-Screen Takeoff opens you will be given an option to watch the Quick Start video (recommended) or start the program without watching the video

The 20 minute video will demonstrate key program functionality and allow you to view application instruction for enhanced learning

If you would like to watch the video click If you prefer to get started without

the video click If you have already viewed the video click the lsquoDo not show this message againrsquo box to prevent this dialog from appearing each time you open the program

NOTE If you decide later that you would like to watch the Quick Start video go to Help gt Watch

Quick Start Videos

On-Screen Takeoff Environment The On-Screen Takeoff environment acts like your drafting table allowing you to work on several sheets of plans at once and to reference at a glance the entire drawing and your position on that drawing while giving you the power of a computer to track analyze print and export your takeoff quantities and plans

The screen is bordered at the top by the Menu bar with pull-down menus and at the bottom by the Status bar which indicates current user status plan page size and current zoom percentage of page The largest portion of the application screen will be your takeoff area bounded on the left (by default) by two dock bars and on the top by several toolbars

In the takeoff area you may view your project plans (images) andor takeoff objects the takeoff list with quantities the worksheet or a legend of your condition list

The main window of On-Screen Takeoff has three tabs located at the bottom left allowing for quick change between Image Takeoff or Worksheet views Select the desired view option on the toolbar and it will automatically open on your screen

Section 4 Features

19

Image View

This view shows the plan file andor takeoff conditions drawn from your plans

Takeoff View This view displays the height if applicable and quantity breakdowns of your conditions according to result types indicated (eg linear feet square feet or count of items) for zones pages and the project as a whole It also displays notes per condition

Section 4 Features

20

Worksheet View This view displays the condition and quantity in units of measure specified in the first results field of the Results tab in the Condition dialog and allows the user to enter amounts for material labor and subcontractor takeoffs

NOTE When in the Worksheet view tab out the field then save This is keep all the values saved

Navigating On-Screen Takeoff

Auto Scrolling When creating linear areas or zones On-Screen Takeoff will automatically scroll the image view when necessary It will move as your mouse or digitizer moves beyond the edge of the current view

Changing Pages

1 Select View gt Next Page Previous Page or Go To Page (specify page number for the Go to Page option)

2 You may also select the corresponding arrows for these options from the Navigate Toolbar The

drop down arrow in the Page field will list the pages The and arrows will take you to the

previous or next page The and arrows will take you to the first or last page

OR

Section 4 Features

21

3 Or press Ctrl G for the Go To Page dialog

Hot Links Hot links allow you to move quickly from one drawing to the pertinent area of another drawing A hot link is handy when viewing enlarged areas of a page and needing the ability to jump back to a reference page

1 Select Tools gt Hot Link

OR

2 Click from the Tools Toolbar

3 Click on the page where you want to set the link The Hot Link dialog will open

4 Using the current page display on the Navigate Toolbar access the pull-down menu of pages by

clicking on the arrow at the right

5 Select the page for your link (You may also choose View gt Go to Page and select by page number)

6 Manipulate the view using the zoom tool and the scroll bars

7 Click

8 After joining a hot link to another page the hot link arrows in the Navigation Toolbar will become active

9 Move a hot link to another location on the page by clicking then click and drag the hot link image anywhere on the page

Section 5

22

Projects

This section will

Help you create settings important to your projects

Explain how On-Screen Takeoff works with your electronic or paper plans

Section 5 Projects

23

Project Template Files You can begin your project with a template Templates allow you to take advantage of conditions and settings used with previous projects

On-Screen Takeoff templates contain condition lists and established layer separations from previous projects you have created You may also use the sample templates provided with On-Screen Takeoff as a great starting point All aspects of the templates may be adjusted for a new project

1 Select File gt New and click the OK button

2 From the New dialog box choose the template that best fits your project

3 The conditions for this template will appear in the Takeoff Dock bar and the Project Properties dialog will open asking for further information

4 Use File gt Save or File gt Save As to rename and save your new project

Saving a Project as a Template File You can save your condition properties and layers as a template for future projects

1 Select File gt Save As

2 Enter a name for your template and select On-Screen Takeoff Template Files (tpo) from the Save As type field of the dialog (click on the down arrow to select)

3 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog Modifying a Template File Follow these steps to modify an existing template file if you need to change or add conditions andor layers

1 Select File gt Open

2 Navigate to your Projects directory

3 In the File Type drop-down select On-Screen Takeoff Template files (tpo)

4 Choose the On-Screen Takeoff template file you would like to modify and click the OK button

5 Make appropriate changes

6 Save and close file

The On-Screen Takeoff template files cannot save takeoff information

Section 5 Projects

24

Opening an Existing Project File 1 Select File gt Open

2 Navigate to the desired file location

3 Click the Open button

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask

you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Creating a New Project

1 Select File gt New

2 For a blank untitled project click

3 At this point the Project Properties dialog will pop-up for more information about your takeoff

NOTE The following are important to keep in mind when beginning a new project

At the start of your project fill out the Project Properties settings to establish the name for all printed output from your project set the default page size and scale for your plans number and names of different pages within the project and locations of electronic drawings

Scale settings can significantly affect quantity outcomes Be sure to set the scale for each page of drawings before beginning condition takeoffs

When using a digitizer remember to make a mark with a pen or pencil in the upper left and lower right corners of the first sheet of the paper plans to delineate the takeoff area for that sheet You can then set the takeoff area on On-Screen Takeoff using your marks

Save your project before you begin taking off any conditions On-Screen Takeoff will write a back-up file using the same file name

Remember the Undo feature If you make a mistake select Edit gt Undo and reverse the process step by step

Section 5 Projects

25

Project Properties

You can either set your Project Properties when you create a new takeoff or once your project file is saved under the appropriate name

1 Select File gt Project Properties the Project Properties dialog box will appear

2 Type in the name of your project to appear on printouts Use the backspace andor delete keys to edit the name as necessary

3 Press the Tab key to move to the Default Image Size option or click within the Image Size box You may click on the arrow at the right for the pull-down menu of page size options or you can use the down-arrow key on your keyboard to scroll through the list to the appropriate selection

4 Press the Tab key to move to the Default Scale option Select a scale by using the drop down arrow If your scale is metric you will need to click in the box next to Metric to convert to that measurement

5 Establish the number of pages for your project plans And load image files See Adding Pages to

Your Project

Adding Pages to Projects Individual Electronic Plans

1 Click on in the Project Properties dialog

2 In the Add Images dialog use the drop down arrow to navigate to the appropriate directory and folder containing your image

3 Select the file so that it displays in the File name field then click The file will display by name and path in the Image File field in Project Properties dialog

4 Click to accept and your project will automatically open

5 Save your project with the new settings by selecting File gt Save

Section 5 Projects

26

Electronic plans scanned from blueprints (as opposed to blue lines) will display as white lines on a black background and are difficult to read on your computer screen Select Image gt Invert and the colors will invert to black on white

You may have noticed the Page column in the Project Properties dialog Generally plan images occupy one page and 1 will be listed in the column indicating Page 1 of your plan file If you import a multi-page TIF a plan file containing more than one page of plans they will import as separate pages and each successive page will be indicated under the Page column as 1 2 3 etc of the plan file

Group of Electronic Plans You may add all the electronic plan files from a particular source (for example from a CD) by using the Auto Add feature

1 Click the button in the Project Properties dialog

2 Browse until you find the appropriate directory and folder containing your plan images

3 Click on any file displayed within your target folder so that the file name appears in the File name box of the Auto Add dialog

4 Click The image paths and file names will be recorded into the project properties arranged alphabetically

5 Click to accept your choices and your project will automatically open

6 Save your project with the new settings by selecting File gt Save

To load Dodge Plans into your Project Properties see Appendix IIi Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

Paper Plans On-Screen Takeoff makes it easy for Full Mode users to perform quantity takeoffs from paper plans using a digitizer

1 Add pages by clicking until you have the number of pages initially in the project

2 Name each page by clicking within the Title area and typing the name

3 Click to accept your choices and close the Project Properties dialog

4 Save your project with the new project properties settings by selecting File gt Save

Section 5 Projects

27

Setting Up a Drawing Template On-Screen Takeoff provides the convenience of using the same work surface for both digitizer and mouse to allow the user to draw conditions and then edit settings of the project or add or change conditions without breaking stride A mouse pad template included with the program defines the area of the digitizer in which use of the stylus or cursor will be recognized as mouse movement as opposed to drawing movement

1 Place your stylus on On-Screen Takeoff

2 Placing the template identifies the location mouse movements will be recognized by the program

Before placing the template the template must be applied to the digitizer surface This may have been done during the installation of your digitizer We suggest attaching the template to the lower right corner of the digitizer surface about one inch inside the grid area

3 Select Digitizer gt Place Template

4 Follow the instruction prompts on the screen clicking first on the target symbol at the left of the On-Screen Takeoff box on the template then on the target at the right

Setting Takeoff Area Before you can begin taking off a drawing you must define the drawing area on the digitizer This requires defining an area that will include all objects on each drawing of your plans As you add pages to your takeoff the same area of the digitizer will be active

1 Secure the plans to the digitizer with tape or a set of clamps

2 With a pen or a pencil mark the upper left corner and the lower right corner of the first page in your set of plans

3 Select Digitizer gt Set Takeoff Area

4 Click each mark with the stylus pen as prompted

5 Verify the active area of the digitizer by looking at the image size located in the lower right corner of your screen

If you close the program before the takeoff is complete you will need to reestablish the takeoff area before you can add additional condition quantities

Electronic plans appear on your computer screen eliminating the need to set a takeoff area You simply drag your mouse across the conditions you wish to takeoff The conditions will be highlighted and quantities will be totaled instantly Electronic plans are available through a variety of services For information contact an On Center Software account manager

Section 5 Projects

28

Setting Scale for Specific Pages You may set the scale in each page view separately This will override the default scale setting in Project Properties for that page Setting the correct scale for the drawing before taking off quantities ensures accurate calculations Be careful to check the scale for each drawing in your project before doing takeoffs

1 Display the page you want to set select Edit gt Set Scale

2 Use the drop down arrow to select a scale that will be applied to that page

3 Click

OR

4 Access the pull-down scale settings on the Navigate toolbar

NOTE As you draw objects notice that the drawn object is similar in width to the object on your plans If it is not the scale set may not be correct

Calculating Scale You may calculate scale according to a known measurement between two points either with a digitizer or on electronic plans

1 Select Edit gt Calculate Scale using Image or Edit gt Calculate Scale using Digitizer

2 Follow the instructions in the related Calculate Scale dialog box You will be asked to click on the first and second points then to enter the dimension for that distance

3 The scale will be recalculated for the displayed page and the Scale display on the Navigate toolbar will show the new scale

Section 6

29

Conditions and Takeoff

This section will Draw Conditions to Takeoff Plan Quantities

What Zones will do to help your takeoff process

Discuss the ins and outs of Takeoffs

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

30

Creating Conditions

If you are starting a new project from scratch you will need to create conditions to takeoff quantities such as floor areas wall lengths and corner bead counts If you are using a template you will have several pre-designed conditions already listed on the Takeoff dock bar However you may want to change the characteristics of some conditions or create additional conditions for a particular project

1 Right Click within the Takeoff dock bar Select New gt Condition

Or

2 From the Takeoff dock bar Click (if the buttons are not showing right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select Show Buttons from the pop-up menu) The New Condition dialog appears

3 Select the condition type (Linear Area Count or Zone) from the pull-down menu accessed by the

down arrow next to the Type option

4 Press Tab or use the mouse (or stylus) to move to Name and enter a name for your condition

5 Specify the desired condition attributes See Condition Attributes for more detail

6 Click for condition to apply

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

31

Condition Attributes Each condition type will have related attributes to select or specify within the General and Advanced tabs of the New Condition dialog Once a condition has been used to takeoff a quantity from your plans certain attributes cannot be changed

All conditions allow the user to specify color and fill pattern for the object drawn

Linear Conditions

General Specify width and height by feet and inches Specify pitch in inches up to the nearest thousandth of an inch if applicable

Advanced Specify rounding for object quantities and droprun default length for electrical or plumbing drops at the ends of lines Select Connect to have lines connect at the corners where one line of the condition ends and another begins (and indicate Tolerance for the featurersquos activation as distance between the ends of two lines) Choose Trim to have lines automatically trim to a line being crossed Choose Curve to draw a curved line

Follow these examples for inputting feet and inches For 7 feet 6 inches type 706 for 13 feet 7 inches type 1307 For 20 feet type 2000

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

32

Area Conditions

General If needed you can specify the thickness (in inches) andor pitch (in inches)

Advanced Specify rounding for object quantities Choose to display an adjustable grid within the area and indicate matrix cell dimensions

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

33

Count Conditions

General

Specify height and indicate the size (in inches) and shape (square circle triangle rectangle or opening) of the count object as it will appear on screen

Advanced Count conditions have advanced attributes These options are available for all shapes except for openings

Zone Conditions Zones allow you to subdivide condition quantities making it easier to modify and complete jobs in phases They can be used at the end of a takeoff to isolate a group of condition quantities that are in different areas of the takeoff

Zones can also be used to break a takeoff into multi-phases and can even be used to isolate quantities while a job is in progress to group the amount of work that has been completed to date They can be applied to one or multiple pages in your plans automatically calculating the takeoff quantities for each zoned area

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

34

The zone feature is only available in Lite and Full Mode If you are in View Mode and would like

to use this feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade

Condition Notes A Note tab is provided for comments regarding the condition These notes will display on the Takeoff List report and will import into Quick Bid

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

35

Condition Results The Results tab of the New Condition is based on condition type Initial settings default to linear feet (LF) for linear conditions square feet (SF) for area conditions and count of items (EA) for count conditions and zones The first of the results fields will display for the condition items in the Takeoff dock bar area All results will display in worksheets and Takeoff List reports as well as in an Excel spreadsheet after being exported

Copying Conditions You may use the condition attributes from a condition yoursquove already created for any future conditions of the same type

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Click the Copy button from the toolbar

OR

3 Right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select copy

4 A new condition will appear in the list with the same condition attributes as the previous condition but with the quantities zeroed

Editing Conditions Once you have copied a condition you might want to change several attributes You can also edit an existing condition to fit any updated needs

1 Highlight the desired condition on the Takeoff dock bar

2 Click the Change button

OR

3 Double-click on the condition you wish to edit to bring up the Change Condition dialog

NOTE The Change Condition dialog differs from the New Condition dialog only in that if takeoffs

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

36

have been performed in your project with this condition you will not be able to change the type of condition or certain properties under the advanced tab of the dialog box

Deleting Conditions 1 Click on the condition in the Takeoff Dock bar area

2 Click the Delete button on the toolbar

OR

3 Right-click and select Delete from the pop-up menu

All takeoff associated with the deleted condition will be deleted immediately and permanently

Organizing Project Conditions Within your project you can create folders andor sub-folders for different types of conditions You may even want to create a folder containing conditions with reset values

To get started organizing your conditions make sure you are viewing the condition tree (right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select Show Tree)

Creating Folders and Sub-Folders 1 Right-click in the Takeoff Dock bar area

2 Select New gt Folder from the pop-up menu

Copying Folders

1 Click on the folder and click Copy on the toolbar

2 All copied conditions within the new folder will have values reset to zero

Renaming Folders

1 Click on the folder

2 Right-click and select Rename from the pop-up menu

3 Enter a name for your folder and click the Enter button

Changing Condition Order

You may move conditions up or down in the condition list of the Takeoff dock bar to suit your project needs

1 Select the condition you would like to move by clicking to highlight it

NOTE When you are ready to move the highlighted conditions be sure that you start

moving using the last condition chosen That condition will have a highlighted boarder

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

37

2 Drag and drop any the condition from one place to another in the list You may also move a condition to another folder on the list in this way

Drawing with Conditions Snap Angles Set up snap angles to prevent lines from appearing jagged Snap angles are commonly set at 15deg and shift snap angles at 0deg

1 Go to Tools gt Options Options dialog appears

2 Under the General tab make the desired settings

3 Click to save the settings As they are drawn lines will snap to the set degree

Drawing a Linear Object 1 Select a condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff dock bar

2 Move the cursor into the Image takeoff area of the screen you will see the cursor display as crosshairs

3 Click and hold left mouse button then drag mouse to draw a line

4 Release mouse button to set line

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

38

5 Repeat steps for further lines

Continuous Mode This feature allows you to draw an object that has connected lines

1 Click the icon from the Takeoff toolbar

OR

2 Go to Tools gt Continuous Mode

3 Follow steps 1-3 from Draw a Linear Object

4 Click at each point of intersection The object will be connected

5 Double-click after making the final point to set the lines

Drawing a Curve To draw a curved line the Curve option must be checked under the Advanced tab of the Condition dialog

1 Click where you want to begin the curve and drag in a straight line to the position for the other endpoint of the curve

2 Click on the line to select it Handles in the shapes of small squares will appear at either end of

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

39

the line and in the center of the line

3 Move the cursor over the center handles until the cursor becomes a two-way arrow

4 Click and drag in the direction of the curve bending the line as you move the cursor Release to set the curve (The line you began with will disappear)

Draw a circle by drawing two curved lines connected

Drawing an Area Object Area conditions are drawn similarly to continuous mode lines You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete your area takeoff

NOTE When drawing an area do not intersect the perimeter or line of the object you are drawing

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

3 The area will be filled with the pattern set for that condition

NOTE The simulated circle will be good enough for you to be able to make a bid

To create a circular area click from point to point with very short distances in between points simulating a circlersquos perimeter Double-click after setting the last point to set the area

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

40

Grid Options Grids give you an added advantage when installing materials such as tiles Use this feature to get a count for how many tiles are needed for an area

1 Double-click on an area condition in the Takeoff dock bar to open its Condition dialog

2 Click on the Advanced tab to show its options

3 Check the box next to Grid by clicking in it

4 Indicate the dimensions of the cell matrix in inches (For example 200 x 400)

5 Under Results tab choose each (EA) for one of the results fields This will tabulate a number of grid cells (including partial grid cells) in area

6 Click to save your settings

7 Use the Move Grid and Rotate Grid features in the Tools menu to manipulate the grid as desired

Grid Calculation

1 Go to Tools gt Options menu

1 Specify if On-Screen Takeoff automatically should Calculate Grid Position

2 If AreaGrid Size is selected On-Screen Takeoff will calculate the number of items needed to fill the grid based on grid demintions

3 Click to accept and close the dialog

To move a line at any angle (regardless of default setting) press the Shift key while moving the mouse

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

41

Backout Mode This feature allows you to take out part of an area and deduct that amount of square footage

1 Select Tools gt Backout Mode

2 Outline the are you want backed out as you would when drawing a regular area object (see Drawing an Area Object)

3 The outlined area will clear and quantities will be recalculated

NOTE The perimeter of the backout area will be added to the LF quantity for that condition

Drawing a Count Object Square triangle rectangle and circle shaped count objects can easily be placed on images

1 Select the condition

2 Click in the location where you want the object to appear

3 To place an opening-shaped count item like a door or window you must click over an existing linear object such as a wall

4 On the Results tab you can change the height properties to give you the result you need

5 If Backout is checked on the advanced tab for each count opening the opening-shaped count item will back out a corresponding section of the linear object

Opening shaped count items are sized at 3rsquo0rdquo by default

Drawing a Zone Zones are drawn in the same way as area objects and may be any polygonal shape You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete the zone perimeter

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

42

Selecting Objects

1 Use the Select Tool to select objects

You can also select all objects that correspond to a condition

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Right-click and choose Select All

3 All objects with this condition will be highlighted with squares as an outline

Moving and Resizing Objects Linear

1 To move or resize a linear object click anywhere on the line to select it

2 To move the line position your pointer over the center handles When the mouse is positioned over the handles you will see a two-way arrow You will only be able to move the line in the direction of the arrows

3 Drag the line to a new position

4 Clicking and dragging the handles on the ends of the line will allow you to lengthen or shorten your line

Area and Zone

1 To move an area object or zone in its entirety click and drag it to its new position

2 Grabbing a handle at a corner or intersection of the object will allow you to adjust and change its perimeter

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

43

Count 1 To move a square circle rectangle or triangle shaped count object click and drag

2 Click and drag an opening shaped count object along the length of the linear object to the desired position then release

NOTE An opening shaped count object may not be moved from its associated linear condition object however it may be moved up and down the length of the linear object

Layers On-Screen Takeoff allows you to sort and separate your takeoff objects within the same job and on the same page On-Screen Takeoff gives you this flexibility through the use of layers

By assigning different conditions to different layers (for example differentiating between floors ceilings and walls) you can choose to view all layers or turn off certain layers to display and print the remaining groups of conditions only You may also remove the background image of electronic plans add text and hot link symbols or print only your condition takeoffs

Layers are only available in Full Mode If you are in View or Lite Mode and would like to use this

feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade Default Layers

On-Screen Takeoff begins every project with three default layers Image Annotation and Default The Image layer holds the electronic plan files you may have in your project The Annotation layer possesses all text notations highlighting and hot links in the project The Default layer will appear in the Condition dialog when creating or editing a condition (listed in the takeoff dock bar) Conditions are assigned to the Default layer unless otherwise specified by the user

Creating Layers To assign a condition to a layer other than the default layer you must first create additional layers for your project

1 Select View gt Layers to open the Layers dialog

2 Click An unnamed layer will be added

3 Click within the empty box and type a name for your layer (for example Wall)

4 New layers are added as active layers The adjacent box under the Show column will be checked

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

44

Assigning a Layer to a Condition 1 Open the Condition dialog box by creating a new condition or editing an existing condition

2 Under the General tab click on the down arrow in the Layer field to display optional layers

3 Select the desired layer for the condition Only the Default layer and layers you have added will be displayed

4 Click

View and Hide Layers

1 Select View gt Layers

2 Under the Show column check the box to view or remove the check (by clicking on it) to hide the specific layer

3 Click to accept and close the Layers dialog

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

45

Assigning Text to a Layer When adding text to an image On-Screen Takeoff has the capability to assign the text to a specified layer

1 Select the Text Tool

2 Click at the point you want to place your text

3 Type in your text using the Enter key for line breaks

4 Click the drop down arrow next to the Layer field and select the desired layer

Section 7

46

Printing and Exporting

This section will

Printing options and procedures

Exporting data by copying and pasting

Exporting quantity results to Excel spreadsheets

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

47

Print Setup On-Screen Takeoff allows the user to print the image takeoff list and worksheet

1 Select File gt Print Setup The Print Setup dialog will open

2 Select a printer or leave the default selection listed (change from the default printer displayed by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the field)

3 Indicate page size and printer tray option (Source) Access page size options by clicking on the

down arrow at the right of the field

4 Choose Portrait or Landscape orientation

5 Click to accept and close the dialog

Printing Images The image area can include the electronic plans the takeoff objects added text and hot links To print a subset of these (for example just the takeoffs without the plans or the added text and hot link symbols) hide layers that you do not want to print (see Section 6 View and Hide Layers) When you are printing your images every page will show the scale of the takeoff you are printing

1 Click on the Image tab to display the area of your project

2 Select File gt Print (or Ctrl + P)

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

48

3 Select the desired view (What to print) and the Image Range

4 Click The second Print dialog will open

5 Change settings accordingly or click if you accept the default settings

Printing Takeoff Lists and Worksheets In Takeoff Lists and Worksheets you may hide columns to print only certain results or adjust column widths to fit the report within the page size selected

1 In Takeoff List or Worksheet view move your cursor to the right side of the columnrsquos title bar the cursor will display as a two-way arrow

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

49

2 Click and drag to adjust the width of the column Holding the mouse button you may

slide the title bar under the title bar to its left to hide the column completely

3 Select File gt Print or press Ctrl + P to access the Print dialog

4 Indicate desired printer and choose the number of copies

5 Click to print and close the dialog

When printing the condition list we suggest printing in landscape

To reset to the default column widths double-click on the right border of a column heading will reset the column to its right (or previously to its right before being hidden)

Print Preview 1 Select File gt Print Preview

2 Use and to vary your view 3 If viewing an image choose current full or scale view to see how it displays

4 For printed outputs that cover more than one page use and to view adjacent pages or click on the down arrow next to Page field and select the page you want displayed

Exporting Using the CopyPaste Feature You may copy all the data or sections from the worksheet and the takeoff list view in On-Screen Takeoff and paste it into another application When pasting into Excel the cell layout will be maintained

1 Highlight the areas you wish to paste Click and hold the left mouse button down as you drag the cursor over the area to be selected then releasing the mouse button

OR

2 Select the entire takeoff list quickly click on the left On-Screen Takeoff column header and hold and drag the cursor across the remaining column headings

The number of pages for the view selected will display in the lower left-hand corner The zoom percentage that applies to the view will be displayed in the lower right-hand corner next to page size of the drawing

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

50

3 In the worksheet view you may highlight rows by clicking on the numbered buttons to the left of each row clicking and dragging across column headings or clicking and dragging over individual cells in the worksheet

Click anywhere in the appropriate view to deselect the area

4 Once your selection is highlighted you may select Edit gt Copy or Ctrl C from the keyboard 5 On your monitor switch to the application into which you want to paste your selection 6 Select Edit gt Paste in the new application or simply press Ctrl + V to paste

The colored keys for conditions cannot be pasted

Using the Export Feature You may export condition quantities to specified cell location within an Excel worksheet file Cell target locations are assigned in the Results tab of the condition dialogs on the Export line relating to each quantity measurement type

On-Screen Takeoff will export takeoff quantity results for up to three different quantity types that you specify For instance you may want to know the number of square feet in a ceiling area as well as the number of linear feet in its perimeter

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

51

1 Bring up the Condition dialog by double-clicking on a condition in the takeoff dock bar or by

selecting the condition and clicking

2 Click on the Results tab to access its fields The default quantities for the condition type will display

3 For each results field click on the arrow to access the pull-down menu and select the appropriate quantity (for example SF LF EA etchellip)

4 Have your Excel spreadsheet opened and saved in a file

5 Specify the Excel spreadsheet cell locations where you want the results to go

6 For a cell in the first sheet of your spreadsheet type in the cell address (eg a1) Case is not important

7 For a cell on a successive sheet of your spreadsheet type in sheet the number followed by a comma and the cell address without any spaces (eg sheet2a1) Case is not important

8 Click

9 Select File gt Export gt Condition Qty to Excel

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

52

10 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

11 Click to export On-Screen Takeoff results to specified cell locations in the Excel file When you return to the Excel application you will see the values have been added to the specified cell locations in your spreadsheet

12 Save your Excel file

Exporting Worksheet to Excel

1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 From On-Screen Takeoff Select File gt Export gt Worksheet to Excel

4 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

5 Click When you return to the Excel application you will see the values from the Worksheet Tab have been added to your spreadsheet

6 Save your Excel file

Exporting Takeoff to CVS 1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 Click the Takeoff Tab in the project you want to export the information

4 Select File gt Export gt Takeoff to CSV

5 Browse to the location of the CSV spreadsheet file click file to select it

6 Click the Save

NOTE CSV files can be opened in Excel Lotus Access etc One may consider this option more of a ldquodumprdquo into a file

The Excel application must be active (it may be minimized on the application bar) with the target spreadsheet open in the application Otherwise an error will occur with the export operation that will affect both the On-Screen Takeofftrade file and the Excel spreadsheet

Section 8

53

Advanced Features

This section will

Some special features of working with condition objects in the takeoff area

Details of advanced options for conditions

Advanced features of the Project Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

54

Features to Use with Objects Roping Feature You can move copy or delete using this feature Using the Select tool (the pointer) you may select several objects at once by clicking and dragging an outline around the objects then releasing the mouse button Roping may select either objects completely within the outlined area (inclusive) or objects both within and touched by the outlined area (touching) Specify your roping preference under Tools gt Options

1 Click and hold the mouse button at a point on the screen near the objects to be selected and drag to surround the objects with an outline

2 Release the mouse button The objects will be selected

3 You may now

Move the group around on the page by clicking within the group dragging the mouse and releasing the button to place the objects

Delete the group of objects by clicking the Delete key or

Copy and paste by pressing Ctrl C to copy the group then Ctrl V to paste it The pasted copy of the grouped objects will appear slightly offset from the original objects

Section 8 Advanced Features

55

Applying a DropRun Count

Use the droprun feature when calculating quantities to take into account the drop or run of a linear condition such as electrical lines or plumbing pipes Drop or run lengths may be added separately to any linear condition on screen while a default droprun length may be indicated for a condition as a whole

1 Select the desired linear condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff Dock bar

2 Click the Change button in the toolbar to open the Change Condition dialog

3 Click the Advanced tab to access the advanced options and click inside the DropRun check box

4 Enter a default length to be applied to all of this condition Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches) You can leave the length blank and manually enter drop run on each segment drawn

5 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog

Edit DropRun Count

1 With the related linear condition in the Takeoff Dock bar highlighted or with the pointer tool selected

2 click on the desired linear object in the image takeoff area The Count button will become active

3 Click on the Count button (alternatively select Tools gt Count) The default droprun amount will show in the pop-up Count dialog (Default length will be zero if droprun has not been selected in this conditionrsquos properties)

4 Type in the desired length Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches)

5 Click the OK button The additional amount will be reflected in the corresponding quantity The new DropRun count will apply only to the object edited

Adding Text in Image View

On-Screen Takeoff allows you to place text comments around your quantity takeoffs that may be printed along with plan images and objects Text is automatically placed within the Annotation Layer (that includes text and hot links)

1 To place text on the image select the Text Tool and click at the point you want to place your text opening a text box

2 Type in your information clicking Enter for line breaks

3 When you are finished click the OK button to exit the text box

4 To reposition text simply click on the text (with the Text Tool active) to select it

5 Move the cursor over the text the cursor will now display as a four-way arrow

6 Click and drag the mouse to position the text as desired

Section 8 Advanced Features

56

1 To edit existing text use the Text Tool to double-click on the text to open the editing box

2 Enter additional text or use the Backspace key to delete text as necessary

Formatting Text Once created you may format the font size type style and color of your text

1 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Font or click on the Font button in the Takeoff Toolbar

2 Select the desired features (color options are disabled) and click the OK button

3 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Color or click on the Color button in the Takeoff Toolbar The Color dialog will open

4 Click on a color in the Basic Color palette or create a color and add to the Custom Colors palette (Be sure to click on the color in the Custom Colors palette to select it)

5 Click the OK button

Object Properties

Linear Objects

Linear objects may be set to connect at corners

A linear object may be set to trim automatically when crossing another linear object (Check the trim option under the advanced tab of the Condition dialog)

When you move a connected linear object objects automatically move and resize connected lines accordingly (quantities are then recalculated)

This feature requires that the connected linear object be moved using the center handles (does not apply when resizing the line from the ends)

Objects constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

Objects are measured from centerline to centerline

Section 8 Advanced Features

57

Area Objects When drawing an area use your escape key to undo the last line drawn You may reverse your

drawing of an area using the escape key

The area will not fill with color and pattern until the user double-clicks after the last line is set

Lines drawn to delineate an area object constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

After selecting an area to move or adjust position the mouse in the center to move the entire area position the mouse at the sides or corners to adjust the perimeter

Count Objects

All count objects are quantified by the physical number of objects per page and reported as EA for the UOM The quantity for the current Image View is (displayed in the Condition List) and the total quantity in your project is displayed in the Takeoff View and Worksheet View)

Square circle rectangle and triangle shaped count objects do not displace or subtract from other object quantities when placed on top of them However on the Advanced Tab for the count condition a connect property can be set (this is a check box) so that when a count object of this shape is put on top of a Linear type takeoff object it will move with the linear if said linear is moved

An opened-shaped count object must be placed within a linear object Opening shaped count objects may also be measured by linear foot or linear yard (EA SF and SY are also options) Opening shaped count items default to a width of 3rsquo 0rdquo at the time of creation This size can be changed The small medium and large size are not options on this type of condition anymore Check Backout on the Advanced tab for each Count object back out the footage (or yardage) of opening-shaped count objects in which they are placed

NOTE In order to see this Backout functionality (in quantity) for SY or SF deductions at least one of the

results for the Linear(s) this object will be placed on must be set to SY or SF and the count object must have a height quantity

Advanced Features of Conditions The Round Feature Under the Advanced tab of the linear and area Condition dialogues you may specify quantity rounding (in inches) For linear objects rounding applies to each linear object drawn For area objects rounding will apply to each segment of the area perimeter adjusting the perimeter and area calculations For example With a linear condition entering 12 in the Round field will round up each related linear object to the nearest 12 inches or one foot With this setting two walls of 1 4 would each round to 2 0 totaling 4 0

NOTE In the Takeoff Dock bar condition list and in the On-Screen Takeoff reports quantities will be displayed in whole numbers rounded up to the nearest foot However calculations are based on true quantities without rounding unless the Round Feature is engaged

Pitch Pitch may apply either to linear or area conditions It is measured in rise per linear foot Entering 12 indicates a 12 rise per 12 of linear distance (a pitch of 12 over 12) or an angle of 45deg

Section 8 Advanced Features

58

Advanced Features of Project Properties Selecting Multiple Pages

1 Select a single page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry

2 Drag the cursor down the column of numbers to select consecutive pages

3 Click on the blank button at the top of this column to select all pages in the Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

59

Changing Image Assigned to a Drawing 1 Select the page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry 2 Click the Change Image button The Change Image dialog box will appear

3 Navigate to the desired file and select by clicking on it

4 Click the Open button The electronic file assigned to the page will have been changed to reflect the new file choice

Changing Image File Path 1 Select pages as described above

2 Choose Change Folder

3 In the Change Folder dialog navigate to the appropriate folder

4 Click the OK button The file path will have been changed for the selected page entries

Delete a Page from Project Properties 1 Select the page you want to delete by clicking on its associated number (in the gray box at the

left of the entry)

2 Choose Delete Page

All Takeoff on the page will be deleted immediately and permanently

Section 8 Advanced Features

60

Advanced Features of Tool Options

Calculation Method On-Screen Takeoff has built-in calculation options to allow for faster work and faster saves until your takeoff is complete Calculation options are found by selecting Tools gt Options then clicking on the Calculation tab

Calculation method can be set to Automatic Automatic except Grids and Manual Manual will allow the program to operate more quickly while Automatic or Automatic except Grids allows the user to see quantity changes as takeoffs are made

In any mode you may press F9 to recalculate quantities for the On-Screen Takeoff current totals

Configuration Tab

When the ldquoPage Label (A01)rdquo radial button is chosen On-Screen Takeoff puts the numbered label on all the pages of in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar If the Page Descriptionrdquo radial button is chosen then a description of what takeoff is on that specific page will be shown in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar

This section of the configuration tab gives you options on how you want to export your information When the ldquoFolderSubfolder Namesrdquo radial button is chosen than on your file that you are exporting to will have all the conditions folders and subfolders In the Delimiter box you can choose the symbol that is needed to separate the information you are exporting Some files need semicolons () or colons () to make sure the information comes exported in is separated it the appropriate places

Section 8 Advanced Features

61

In previous versions of On-Screen Takeoff there are views that users need to have in order for them to display their information By either choosing ldquoOST 1xrdquo or ldquoOST 2xrdquo it will let the program know you want your columns of information exported in that specific format

When you have the Confirm Deletions radial button of ldquoYesrdquo chosen than every time you delete anything you will get a dialog box confirming your intentions of deletion

While working with your takeoff you have a choice to either view the legend of your conditions or hide it Choose whichever radial button that suits your needs

For those who prefer to use the Enter key to navigate in dialog boxes this option is just for that

Font Tab The Font tab is designed for you to make your own look and feel for the application At the bottom of this tab it will show you sample of the fonts and colors you have chosen

Renaming the Current Page You may change the name of the current page in the takeoff area of On-Screen Takeoff by selecting Edit gt Rename Page

This opens the Name Page dialog and you may simply type in a new name and click the Enter button The new name for the file will be reflected on the title bar for the page and in Project Properties

You also may access the Rename Page function by right-clicking in the takeoff area while in Image View and selecting the option from the pop-up menu that appears

Section 9

62

Saving and Exiting

This section will

Explain how to save projects

Show you how to safely exit the program

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

63

Saving Your Project

1 Select File gt Save 2 If your project has not previously been saved a Save dialog box will open to allow you to name

the file and choose the directory and folder in which to save your file 3 Once saved File gt Save will simply save the current version of the file

OR

4 Select File gt Save As then type in a new name for the file and save to the desired file path

The Auto-save Feature With the Auto-save feature On-Screen Takeoff automatically backs up your open project You may choose to have more than one level of backup files The first backup copy will have the extension b00 and successive files will be b01 b02 and so on If you have designated four levels of backup files after the fourth backup copy has been created (b03) the next file will be saved over the file with extension b00 Further backup saves will then rotate through the four backup files in the same way

1 Select Tools gt Options 2 In the Auto-save area (under the General tab) select the frequency of backup file creation (in

minutes) and the number of levels for the feature 3 You also may disengage the feature by clicking in the check box to clear it

The Auto-save feature automatically saves backup copies to the directory of the current project If you are working from a write-protected area such as a CD-ROM On-Screen Takeoff will place backup files in the On-Screen Takeoff folder

Exiting When you are finished using On-Screen Takeoff it is very easy to exit Exiting is very important because of security reasons If someone were to use your computer they could enter the application and view and manipulate information

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

64

On-Screen Takeoff closes the open project when you open another or create a new project or when you exit the program

1 Select File gt Exit

OR

2 You also may click at the upper right-hand corner of the application to exit

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

65

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer When you get your digitizer from GTCO you will need to connect it to your computer Follow the instructions outlined below to do this

Note For rollup digitizers the metal bar must be oriented to the top or right hand side

Connecting the Digitizer 1 Lay the digitizer out flat 2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer 3 Plug in the power adapter 4 Plug the interface (IO) cable into the digitizer 5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into an open serial port on computer

Note GTCO Technical support phone number is 410-381-6688 The electronic manual (on diskette) from GTCO contains more detailed installation and operation instructions for the GTCO digitizer model you have

Installing other Digitizer Drivers If you are using a GTCO Digitizer you will need to install the GTCO TabletWorks Drivers

If you are using a Digitizer not supported by GTCO Tablet Works 10 please contact the manufacturer of your digitizer for assistance with installation

Installing GTCO TabletWorks Drivers 1 Insert the On Center CD into the CD-ROM drive The CD Startup screen will open 2 Click on Install Software 3 Select Additional Software and Drivers 4 Select Digitizer Driver 5 Follow the instructions for installing TabletWorks 10

Adhering the Template The template is a small plastic sticker used to enable mouse function when using the digitizer with On-Screen Takeoff Place your template on your digitizer We suggest placing it in the bottom right corner of the digitizer about one inch inside the takeoff area

Note You may either peel off the back of the template and use the adhesive surface or you can tape the template down

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

66

Testing the Digitizer Drivers Before running OST you may test the digitizer by moving the stylus around on the digitizer pad it should move the mouse cursor (if mouse emulation is enabled)

If the digitizer does not move the mouse cursor on the screen

The superset codes may need to be reset Reset the superset codes by touching on the border of the digitizer with the stylus The digitizer should beep several times

The digitizer may not be communicating with the computer Be sure the COM port selected is correct Be sure the COM port selected is correct If you are not able to get the digitizer to move the mouse cursor you need to call GTCO technical support for help

Note The Mouse Emulation is not required for On-Screen Takeoff to work properly It is used only for the Template functionality if the digitizer is moving the cursor the wrong direction (up instead of sideways or vice-versa)

Click the L-shaped arrow symbol on the digitizer with the stylus

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

67

Appendix II Toolbar Items Main Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

68

Tool Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

69

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

70

Navigate Toolbar (Continued)

Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

71

Takeoff Toolbar (Continued)

Image Toolbar

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

72

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

This section will detail how to load plans from a F W Dodge CD-ROM into an On-Screen Takeoff project file ready for takeoffs

Dodge files may be added to the Project Properties dialog However loading the files in that way will load the files by number rather than name description If you want to load one page only from your Dodge CD You will have to rename the page to display the name rather than number of the file

To load plan files from a Dodge CD so that the files load sequentially by file number but are displayed by name rather than by number within your project follow the instructions below

Opening a Dodge project from a CD-ROM 1 Insert the CD into the drive 2 Choose File gt Custom 3 Choose Dodge Plans Project (plansdat) as the file type 4 Select the appropriate file type by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the Files of type

field 5 In the Look in field access your drive paths by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the

field then

Navigate to your CD-ROM drive Open the data folder and Open the Projects folder

6 Select the desired project and open its folder 7 Open the plansdat file 8 All the images will come in sequenced correctly for that job along with the full descriptions

(names) of each page If there is not a plans folder in the project folder then plans do not exist for that project on the CD Opening the plansdat file will yield an empty project

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

73

Appendix IV Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer The On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer is a limited version of On Center Softwarersquos commercial takeoff software If your status bar located at the very bottom of the main window says View Mode in the lower left-hand corner then you are using the Plan Viewer You can use the plan viewer to

View CD-based amp converted CAD drawings

View a previously created OST file and associated drawings

Download electronic plans online

Navigate through drawings

Quickly Takeoff linearsareas and counts

Zoom in to view the plan better

Print drawings directly from the viewer

Viewing an On-Screen Takeoff Project File

1 To open an OST file that was previously created with of On-Screen Takeoff 2 Select File gt Open 3 An Open dialog will appear if you do not see the OST file you are looking for select the

Look In drop down arrow 4 A drop down menu will appear listing the various folders drives and mapped drives located

on your computer select the correct drive or folder location and continue to browse to the location of your OST file

5 When you see your OST file double-click it to open it 6 Any takeoff and drawings should appear on the Image tab view

If you do not see the drawings but do see the colored takeoff layer the drawings may

not be located in the same place they were originally saved at Go to File gt Project Properties and check the Image File path for each listed page If the image file path is pointing to a CD drive make sure the CD is inside the CR-ROM

Downloading Electronic Plans If your Online Plan Service provides a special file format (OSX) required to use this feature of our plan viewer you can immediately downloaded all electronic plans of a project directly from our viewer

Most Plan Room web sites will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff when a request to download plans is made Your particular Plan Room may differ in operation so please contact the provider directly with questions on using the site

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

74

When you request to download or open a project file from a Plan Room you will usually have the open to open or save an OSX file Choosing open will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff Alternately you may choose to save the file to a local hard drive After you have saved the file either double-click it to launch On-Screen Takeoff or open the OSX file using On-Screen Takeoff by clicking File then Open and locating the file on your hard drive You will need to change the file type to OSX

After the OSX file is opened you will see an additional tab appear in the Conditions List window called Pages

The Pages tab shows the hierarchy of your project Gray file icons represent pages that have not been downloaded and blue icons represents pages that have been downloaded

To download a page simply double-click the page icon

If you wish to select a group of pages to download you can use the Ctrl or Shift key to multiple select them then click the Download button

If you wish to download all pages at once click the Download All button

Downloaded pages will now appear in the Project Properties dialog in the same order in which they appear in the Pages tab

Creating Quick Takeoffs With On-Screen Takeoff you can create quick takeoffs to measure quantities even if you dont have the full version of our program However using the Quick Takeoff functionality shows you just a fraction of what the full version can do

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar is located at the top of the image view It has three buttons designated for three types of takeoffs Linear Area and Count The Quantity drop down list will show secondary quantities for Linears and Areas The Units drop down allows you to select how you want your quantities displayed Feet Inches Yards Millimeters and Meters

NOTE Every time change the type of takeoff you are performing (switching from Area to Linear for example) the previous quantities and takeoff objects will disappear They will also disappear when you changes pages

NOTE You can use the Dimension Tool to basically measure the distance between two points or linears The distance will display on the status bar at the bottom of the application

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

75

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions General

Where is On-Screen Takeoff installed on my computer

Typically it is installed in CProgram FilesOn-Screen Takeoff

In Explorer how do I recognize On-Screen Takeoff file types

On-Screen Takeoff data is stored in a single file per job lsquojob name OSTrsquo On-Screen Takeoff templates are stored as lsquotemplate nameTPOrsquo

Can only one project at a time be open

Yes For that reason opening another project automatically closes the project on screen You will be asked to save any changes

Is only one scale allowed per page What about on drawings that have multiple detail sections on a page and each of those drawings have different scales

Yes For pages with drawings of different scales copy the drawing to another project page and set the appropriate scale

I cannot perform backout on an area that is along a linear

As a workaround use the On-Screen Takeoff layers feature to help you with this issue Electronic Images

How do I start a project from drawings that have been scanned and written to a CD-ROM

Open a new project Select File gt Project Properties and select Auto Add Navigate to your CD and the appropriate folder and select any image file in that location Click Open All files in the location will load into your project Recommended that images are copied from CD to hard drive for performance

If I get a disk of drawings in AutoCAD format (R13 or R14) can I read them in On-Screen Takeoff

Yes On-Screen Takeoff now reads DWG DXF and many other format that are saved with AutoCAD

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

76

When I click on the all pages button what is supposed to happen Currently nothing seems to change when I click on that button

The All Pages button is used to apply the Darken and Enhance Plans feature to all pages in the project (as opposed to only the current page on screen)

Is there a way to deduct a large skylight from an area condition

Yes with the related area condition selected in the Takeoff Dock bar unselect the Backout button on the Takeoff Toolbar then draw the Backout area The area quantity will be deducted from the related condition object and the linear measurement of the Backout perimeter will be added

Digitizer Issues

How do I connect a Digitizer to the computer

See Appendix I Connecting a Digitizer

The Place Template menu choice is disabled

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or the digitizer or the digitzer drivers are not installed

It wonrsquot let me select the Set Takeoff Area menu choice

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or no job is open a digitizer is not installed or the drivers are not installed

The digitizer stylus is not moving the cursor or crosshairs

Click S-0-1 superset on the digitizer

How do I convert my old GTCO Digitizer to work with On- Screen Takeofftrade

Call GTCO and they may be able to reconfigure your digitizer to be compatible with On-Screen Takeoff

Printing Issues Which Printers work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible printers include On-Screen Takeoff Hewlett Packard Epson and Canon printers If you are having printer difficulties please contact support and specify the type of printer along with other pertinent information Contact support at wwwoncentercomsupport or email supportoncentercom

Which Plotters work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible Plotters include Hewlett Packard DesignJet plotters and the EnCAD Cadjet II If you are having plotter difficulties please contact support and specify the type of plotter concerned

ViewingDisplay I can no longer see my condition list How do I get it back

The toolbars and Dock bars can be turned on and off through the View gt Toolbars menu options

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

77

This is also accessible by right-clicking in the toolbar area and selecting (or deselecting) a toolbar listed

I cannot view my folders in the condition list

Right-click in the Takeoff Dock barcondition list area and select Show Tree to display your folders

My Status Bar reads Viewer Mode and I am unable to draw conditions

On-Screen Takeoff needs to be Authorized Or you need to purchase an upgrade Click the Perform Advanced Takeoff button on the main toolbar

I hid a Dock bar and when I selected to view it again it appeared alongside the other Dock

bar instead of stacked on top of it How do I fix it

Pick up the Dock bar by clicking on the bar at the top and continuing to hold down the mouse button drag the Dock bar over the other one It will resize and appear stacked with the other

When I open image files from a CD the images are all upside down How do I get them right

side up

To flip pages from top to bottom follow the steps below 1 Click the All Pages button on the Image Toolbar (All Pages is engaged when the button

is not clicked) 2 Click the Flip Horizontal button on the Image Toolbar 3 Click the All Pages button again to disengage

Templates How do I create a Template

Follow the steps below 1 Create a typical project 2 Choose File gt Save As 3 Choose On-Screen Takeoff Template Files as the file type to save 4 Name the file This will save all of the condition setups as well as the layers for the

project

How do I create a new project from a template

Follow the steps below 1 Choose File gt New 2 Select a template from those listed in the New dialog This will open a new project with

conditions and layers saved from a previous project but no pages or takeoff

78

INDEX

Area Conditions 32

Area Objects 57

Auto Scrolling 20

Auto-save 63

Backout Mode 41

Calculation Method 60

Conditions 29

Configuration 60

Contents Tab 6

Continuous Mode 38

Count Conditions 33

Count Objects 57

Digitizer 10 65 76

Docking Toolbars 13

Dodge CD 72

Drawing 27 37

DropRun Count 55

Environment 18

Exiting 63

Exporting 49

Features 16

Font 61

Frequently Asked Questions 75

Grid 40

Help File 5

Hiding Toolbars 13

Hot Links 21

Image 19 59

Image files 9

Image Toolbar 12 71

Images 75

Index Tab 6

Layers 43

Linear Conditions 31

Linear Objects 56

Main Toolbar 12 67

Menus 14

Moving Toolbars 13

Navigate Toolbar 12 69

Navigating 20

On-Screen Takeofftrade 2

Page 59 61

Pages 20 25 28

Plan Viewer 73

Plans 26

Printing 47 76

Project Properties 25

Projects 22

Quick Start Video 18

Resizing Toolbars 13

Roping 54

Saving 63

Scale 28

Search Tab 7

Selecting Objects 42

Setup 8

Start On-Screen Takeofftrade 17

System Requirements 9

Takeoff 19 27

Takeoff Toolbar 70 71

Takeoff Toolbar 12

Template Files 23

TIF (Group4) 9

Tool Toolbar 12 68

Toolbar 67

Toolbars 12

View Toolbar 12 69

Viewing Toolbars 12

Worksheet 20

Zone Conditions 33

Zoom Toolbar 12 69

  • On-Screen Takeoff Lite
  • Table of Contents
  • Section 1 - Introduction
  • Section 2 - Setup
  • Section 3 - Toolbars and Menus
  • Section 4 - Features
  • Section 5 - Projects
  • Section 6 - Conditions and Takeoff
  • Section 7 - Printing and Exporting
  • Section 8 - Advanced Features
  • Section 9 - Saving and Exiting
  • Appendix I - Installing Your Digitizer
  • Appendix II - Toolbar Items
  • Appendix III - Loading Plans from a Dodge CD
  • Appendix IV - Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer
  • Appendix V - Frequently Asked Questions
  • Index

Section 2 Setup

10

NOTE Use the following image types for best results

Convert to TIF

The converted files will be stored in a folder with the name of the current On-Screen Takeoff project Since the conversion can be very time consuming you should only select this option if you really intend to convert vector files to TIF

1 Select File gt Project Properties

2 In the Pages Field add your image See Section 5 Establishing Project Setting Adding Pages

3 Click

4 Then select the page with the drawing you wish to convert

5 Click

Installing Your Digitizer The following instructions are a quick start to installing your digitizer For more specific information please reference Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer at the end of this guide

Connecting Your Digitizer

Upon receiving your digitizer (either a GTCO or another brand) you will need to connect it to your computer

1 Lay the digitizer out flat

2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer

3 Plug in the power supply

4 Plug the interface cable into the digitizer

5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into the computer

NOTE On-Screen Takeoff is compatible with any tablet that is WinTab compatible

Digitizer options are only available in Full Mode If you are in View or Lite Mode and would like

to use this feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade

Section 3

11

Toolbars and Menus

This section will

Introduce the program toolbars

Familiarize you with On-Screen Take Offtrade Menu options

Section 3 Toolbars and Menus

12

Toolbars On-Screen Takeoff is equipped with several helpful toolbars for application efficiency See Appendix II Toolbar Item` Details for a detailed description of each toolbar item Individually the toolbars may be displayed moved docked reshaped or hidden from view You can also create costume toolbars to fit your needs

Main Toolbar

Tool Toolbar

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Takeoff Toolbar

Image Toolbar Viewing Toolbars Toolbars are displayed on the screen and will be consistent on each tab or page (Some toolbars or toolbar items will be in an inactive state if they donrsquot have a supporting element in the application)

1 Select View gt Toolbars and select the appropriate toolbar name

OR

2 Right-click on a toolbar region of the screen

3 Check the toolbars you want to display

Section 3 Toolbars and Menus

13

Moving Toolbars The toolbars may be positioned anywhere on the screen you wish This feature is provided to allow the flexibility for positioning the toolbars so they are out of your way yet handy for use

1 Click on an edge of the toolbar holding down the mouse button drag it to its new position

2 Release the mouse button to set it in place

NOTE If the toolbar is dropped anywhere other than a screen edge it will become free floating This feature is especially handy when using multiple monitors

Docking Toolbars The toolbars can be docked to any of the screen edges

1 Click on the title bar of an undocked toolbar

2 Drag the toolbar to any location on the screen

Hiding Toolbars

1 Select View gt Toolbars and select the toolbar you wish to remove from the screen

2 Right-click on the toolbar or dock bar areas

3 A floating toolbar can be closed by clicking on the in the upper right corner of the toolbar

Resizing Toolbars Only undocked (floating) toolbars may be resized

1 Position the mouse pointer over an edge

2 Click and drag

3 The toolbar can be resized as desired

Customizing the Toolbars You may rearrange or delete buttons within a toolbarrsquos display or you may move buttons from one toolbar to another If you find that you use a few tools over and over you may want to group them within a single toolbar for convenience On-Screen Takeoff gives you the flexibility to customize your takeoff environment

1 Select Tools gt Customize The Customize dialog will open

2 With the dialog open click on a toolbar button and drag buttons from one toolbar to another or a new location within the same toolbar

3 To add a button without altering another toolbar click on the Commands tab of the Customize dialog and drag the appropriate symbol from the Buttons section to a toolbar

4 To remove a button drag it to within the takeoff area of the application

Section 3 Toolbars and Menus

14

Menus

Section 3 Toolbars and Menus

15

Digitizer Menu

Section 4

16

Features

This section will

Show you how open On-Screen Takeoff

Describe the On-Screen Takeoff environment

Teach you how to navigate pages

Section 4 Features

17

Start On-Screen Takeoff

1 On your desktop double-click your On-Screen Takeoff icon

2 The application will open

OR

3 Left-click on the Start button on your computerrsquos toolbar

4 Scroll up to Programs gt On Center Software

5 Highlight On-Screen Takeoff and click On-Screen Takeoff will open On-Screen Takeoff opens to an untitled blank project The Image view of the screen will be a blank page

Two blank dock bars the Pan dock bar and the Takeoff dock bar appear at the left side of the screen Along the bottom the Status bar displays user status or context-sensitive messages as well as paper size and current zoom percentage of the plan sheet on screen The menu bar and several task specific toolbars are located at the top of the screen

NOTE All toolbars and dock bars may be accessed to view or hide through View gt Toolbars on the menu bar

Section 4 Features

18

Quick Start Video When On-Screen Takeoff opens you will be given an option to watch the Quick Start video (recommended) or start the program without watching the video

The 20 minute video will demonstrate key program functionality and allow you to view application instruction for enhanced learning

If you would like to watch the video click If you prefer to get started without

the video click If you have already viewed the video click the lsquoDo not show this message againrsquo box to prevent this dialog from appearing each time you open the program

NOTE If you decide later that you would like to watch the Quick Start video go to Help gt Watch

Quick Start Videos

On-Screen Takeoff Environment The On-Screen Takeoff environment acts like your drafting table allowing you to work on several sheets of plans at once and to reference at a glance the entire drawing and your position on that drawing while giving you the power of a computer to track analyze print and export your takeoff quantities and plans

The screen is bordered at the top by the Menu bar with pull-down menus and at the bottom by the Status bar which indicates current user status plan page size and current zoom percentage of page The largest portion of the application screen will be your takeoff area bounded on the left (by default) by two dock bars and on the top by several toolbars

In the takeoff area you may view your project plans (images) andor takeoff objects the takeoff list with quantities the worksheet or a legend of your condition list

The main window of On-Screen Takeoff has three tabs located at the bottom left allowing for quick change between Image Takeoff or Worksheet views Select the desired view option on the toolbar and it will automatically open on your screen

Section 4 Features

19

Image View

This view shows the plan file andor takeoff conditions drawn from your plans

Takeoff View This view displays the height if applicable and quantity breakdowns of your conditions according to result types indicated (eg linear feet square feet or count of items) for zones pages and the project as a whole It also displays notes per condition

Section 4 Features

20

Worksheet View This view displays the condition and quantity in units of measure specified in the first results field of the Results tab in the Condition dialog and allows the user to enter amounts for material labor and subcontractor takeoffs

NOTE When in the Worksheet view tab out the field then save This is keep all the values saved

Navigating On-Screen Takeoff

Auto Scrolling When creating linear areas or zones On-Screen Takeoff will automatically scroll the image view when necessary It will move as your mouse or digitizer moves beyond the edge of the current view

Changing Pages

1 Select View gt Next Page Previous Page or Go To Page (specify page number for the Go to Page option)

2 You may also select the corresponding arrows for these options from the Navigate Toolbar The

drop down arrow in the Page field will list the pages The and arrows will take you to the

previous or next page The and arrows will take you to the first or last page

OR

Section 4 Features

21

3 Or press Ctrl G for the Go To Page dialog

Hot Links Hot links allow you to move quickly from one drawing to the pertinent area of another drawing A hot link is handy when viewing enlarged areas of a page and needing the ability to jump back to a reference page

1 Select Tools gt Hot Link

OR

2 Click from the Tools Toolbar

3 Click on the page where you want to set the link The Hot Link dialog will open

4 Using the current page display on the Navigate Toolbar access the pull-down menu of pages by

clicking on the arrow at the right

5 Select the page for your link (You may also choose View gt Go to Page and select by page number)

6 Manipulate the view using the zoom tool and the scroll bars

7 Click

8 After joining a hot link to another page the hot link arrows in the Navigation Toolbar will become active

9 Move a hot link to another location on the page by clicking then click and drag the hot link image anywhere on the page

Section 5

22

Projects

This section will

Help you create settings important to your projects

Explain how On-Screen Takeoff works with your electronic or paper plans

Section 5 Projects

23

Project Template Files You can begin your project with a template Templates allow you to take advantage of conditions and settings used with previous projects

On-Screen Takeoff templates contain condition lists and established layer separations from previous projects you have created You may also use the sample templates provided with On-Screen Takeoff as a great starting point All aspects of the templates may be adjusted for a new project

1 Select File gt New and click the OK button

2 From the New dialog box choose the template that best fits your project

3 The conditions for this template will appear in the Takeoff Dock bar and the Project Properties dialog will open asking for further information

4 Use File gt Save or File gt Save As to rename and save your new project

Saving a Project as a Template File You can save your condition properties and layers as a template for future projects

1 Select File gt Save As

2 Enter a name for your template and select On-Screen Takeoff Template Files (tpo) from the Save As type field of the dialog (click on the down arrow to select)

3 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog Modifying a Template File Follow these steps to modify an existing template file if you need to change or add conditions andor layers

1 Select File gt Open

2 Navigate to your Projects directory

3 In the File Type drop-down select On-Screen Takeoff Template files (tpo)

4 Choose the On-Screen Takeoff template file you would like to modify and click the OK button

5 Make appropriate changes

6 Save and close file

The On-Screen Takeoff template files cannot save takeoff information

Section 5 Projects

24

Opening an Existing Project File 1 Select File gt Open

2 Navigate to the desired file location

3 Click the Open button

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask

you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Creating a New Project

1 Select File gt New

2 For a blank untitled project click

3 At this point the Project Properties dialog will pop-up for more information about your takeoff

NOTE The following are important to keep in mind when beginning a new project

At the start of your project fill out the Project Properties settings to establish the name for all printed output from your project set the default page size and scale for your plans number and names of different pages within the project and locations of electronic drawings

Scale settings can significantly affect quantity outcomes Be sure to set the scale for each page of drawings before beginning condition takeoffs

When using a digitizer remember to make a mark with a pen or pencil in the upper left and lower right corners of the first sheet of the paper plans to delineate the takeoff area for that sheet You can then set the takeoff area on On-Screen Takeoff using your marks

Save your project before you begin taking off any conditions On-Screen Takeoff will write a back-up file using the same file name

Remember the Undo feature If you make a mistake select Edit gt Undo and reverse the process step by step

Section 5 Projects

25

Project Properties

You can either set your Project Properties when you create a new takeoff or once your project file is saved under the appropriate name

1 Select File gt Project Properties the Project Properties dialog box will appear

2 Type in the name of your project to appear on printouts Use the backspace andor delete keys to edit the name as necessary

3 Press the Tab key to move to the Default Image Size option or click within the Image Size box You may click on the arrow at the right for the pull-down menu of page size options or you can use the down-arrow key on your keyboard to scroll through the list to the appropriate selection

4 Press the Tab key to move to the Default Scale option Select a scale by using the drop down arrow If your scale is metric you will need to click in the box next to Metric to convert to that measurement

5 Establish the number of pages for your project plans And load image files See Adding Pages to

Your Project

Adding Pages to Projects Individual Electronic Plans

1 Click on in the Project Properties dialog

2 In the Add Images dialog use the drop down arrow to navigate to the appropriate directory and folder containing your image

3 Select the file so that it displays in the File name field then click The file will display by name and path in the Image File field in Project Properties dialog

4 Click to accept and your project will automatically open

5 Save your project with the new settings by selecting File gt Save

Section 5 Projects

26

Electronic plans scanned from blueprints (as opposed to blue lines) will display as white lines on a black background and are difficult to read on your computer screen Select Image gt Invert and the colors will invert to black on white

You may have noticed the Page column in the Project Properties dialog Generally plan images occupy one page and 1 will be listed in the column indicating Page 1 of your plan file If you import a multi-page TIF a plan file containing more than one page of plans they will import as separate pages and each successive page will be indicated under the Page column as 1 2 3 etc of the plan file

Group of Electronic Plans You may add all the electronic plan files from a particular source (for example from a CD) by using the Auto Add feature

1 Click the button in the Project Properties dialog

2 Browse until you find the appropriate directory and folder containing your plan images

3 Click on any file displayed within your target folder so that the file name appears in the File name box of the Auto Add dialog

4 Click The image paths and file names will be recorded into the project properties arranged alphabetically

5 Click to accept your choices and your project will automatically open

6 Save your project with the new settings by selecting File gt Save

To load Dodge Plans into your Project Properties see Appendix IIi Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

Paper Plans On-Screen Takeoff makes it easy for Full Mode users to perform quantity takeoffs from paper plans using a digitizer

1 Add pages by clicking until you have the number of pages initially in the project

2 Name each page by clicking within the Title area and typing the name

3 Click to accept your choices and close the Project Properties dialog

4 Save your project with the new project properties settings by selecting File gt Save

Section 5 Projects

27

Setting Up a Drawing Template On-Screen Takeoff provides the convenience of using the same work surface for both digitizer and mouse to allow the user to draw conditions and then edit settings of the project or add or change conditions without breaking stride A mouse pad template included with the program defines the area of the digitizer in which use of the stylus or cursor will be recognized as mouse movement as opposed to drawing movement

1 Place your stylus on On-Screen Takeoff

2 Placing the template identifies the location mouse movements will be recognized by the program

Before placing the template the template must be applied to the digitizer surface This may have been done during the installation of your digitizer We suggest attaching the template to the lower right corner of the digitizer surface about one inch inside the grid area

3 Select Digitizer gt Place Template

4 Follow the instruction prompts on the screen clicking first on the target symbol at the left of the On-Screen Takeoff box on the template then on the target at the right

Setting Takeoff Area Before you can begin taking off a drawing you must define the drawing area on the digitizer This requires defining an area that will include all objects on each drawing of your plans As you add pages to your takeoff the same area of the digitizer will be active

1 Secure the plans to the digitizer with tape or a set of clamps

2 With a pen or a pencil mark the upper left corner and the lower right corner of the first page in your set of plans

3 Select Digitizer gt Set Takeoff Area

4 Click each mark with the stylus pen as prompted

5 Verify the active area of the digitizer by looking at the image size located in the lower right corner of your screen

If you close the program before the takeoff is complete you will need to reestablish the takeoff area before you can add additional condition quantities

Electronic plans appear on your computer screen eliminating the need to set a takeoff area You simply drag your mouse across the conditions you wish to takeoff The conditions will be highlighted and quantities will be totaled instantly Electronic plans are available through a variety of services For information contact an On Center Software account manager

Section 5 Projects

28

Setting Scale for Specific Pages You may set the scale in each page view separately This will override the default scale setting in Project Properties for that page Setting the correct scale for the drawing before taking off quantities ensures accurate calculations Be careful to check the scale for each drawing in your project before doing takeoffs

1 Display the page you want to set select Edit gt Set Scale

2 Use the drop down arrow to select a scale that will be applied to that page

3 Click

OR

4 Access the pull-down scale settings on the Navigate toolbar

NOTE As you draw objects notice that the drawn object is similar in width to the object on your plans If it is not the scale set may not be correct

Calculating Scale You may calculate scale according to a known measurement between two points either with a digitizer or on electronic plans

1 Select Edit gt Calculate Scale using Image or Edit gt Calculate Scale using Digitizer

2 Follow the instructions in the related Calculate Scale dialog box You will be asked to click on the first and second points then to enter the dimension for that distance

3 The scale will be recalculated for the displayed page and the Scale display on the Navigate toolbar will show the new scale

Section 6

29

Conditions and Takeoff

This section will Draw Conditions to Takeoff Plan Quantities

What Zones will do to help your takeoff process

Discuss the ins and outs of Takeoffs

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

30

Creating Conditions

If you are starting a new project from scratch you will need to create conditions to takeoff quantities such as floor areas wall lengths and corner bead counts If you are using a template you will have several pre-designed conditions already listed on the Takeoff dock bar However you may want to change the characteristics of some conditions or create additional conditions for a particular project

1 Right Click within the Takeoff dock bar Select New gt Condition

Or

2 From the Takeoff dock bar Click (if the buttons are not showing right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select Show Buttons from the pop-up menu) The New Condition dialog appears

3 Select the condition type (Linear Area Count or Zone) from the pull-down menu accessed by the

down arrow next to the Type option

4 Press Tab or use the mouse (or stylus) to move to Name and enter a name for your condition

5 Specify the desired condition attributes See Condition Attributes for more detail

6 Click for condition to apply

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

31

Condition Attributes Each condition type will have related attributes to select or specify within the General and Advanced tabs of the New Condition dialog Once a condition has been used to takeoff a quantity from your plans certain attributes cannot be changed

All conditions allow the user to specify color and fill pattern for the object drawn

Linear Conditions

General Specify width and height by feet and inches Specify pitch in inches up to the nearest thousandth of an inch if applicable

Advanced Specify rounding for object quantities and droprun default length for electrical or plumbing drops at the ends of lines Select Connect to have lines connect at the corners where one line of the condition ends and another begins (and indicate Tolerance for the featurersquos activation as distance between the ends of two lines) Choose Trim to have lines automatically trim to a line being crossed Choose Curve to draw a curved line

Follow these examples for inputting feet and inches For 7 feet 6 inches type 706 for 13 feet 7 inches type 1307 For 20 feet type 2000

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

32

Area Conditions

General If needed you can specify the thickness (in inches) andor pitch (in inches)

Advanced Specify rounding for object quantities Choose to display an adjustable grid within the area and indicate matrix cell dimensions

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

33

Count Conditions

General

Specify height and indicate the size (in inches) and shape (square circle triangle rectangle or opening) of the count object as it will appear on screen

Advanced Count conditions have advanced attributes These options are available for all shapes except for openings

Zone Conditions Zones allow you to subdivide condition quantities making it easier to modify and complete jobs in phases They can be used at the end of a takeoff to isolate a group of condition quantities that are in different areas of the takeoff

Zones can also be used to break a takeoff into multi-phases and can even be used to isolate quantities while a job is in progress to group the amount of work that has been completed to date They can be applied to one or multiple pages in your plans automatically calculating the takeoff quantities for each zoned area

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

34

The zone feature is only available in Lite and Full Mode If you are in View Mode and would like

to use this feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade

Condition Notes A Note tab is provided for comments regarding the condition These notes will display on the Takeoff List report and will import into Quick Bid

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

35

Condition Results The Results tab of the New Condition is based on condition type Initial settings default to linear feet (LF) for linear conditions square feet (SF) for area conditions and count of items (EA) for count conditions and zones The first of the results fields will display for the condition items in the Takeoff dock bar area All results will display in worksheets and Takeoff List reports as well as in an Excel spreadsheet after being exported

Copying Conditions You may use the condition attributes from a condition yoursquove already created for any future conditions of the same type

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Click the Copy button from the toolbar

OR

3 Right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select copy

4 A new condition will appear in the list with the same condition attributes as the previous condition but with the quantities zeroed

Editing Conditions Once you have copied a condition you might want to change several attributes You can also edit an existing condition to fit any updated needs

1 Highlight the desired condition on the Takeoff dock bar

2 Click the Change button

OR

3 Double-click on the condition you wish to edit to bring up the Change Condition dialog

NOTE The Change Condition dialog differs from the New Condition dialog only in that if takeoffs

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

36

have been performed in your project with this condition you will not be able to change the type of condition or certain properties under the advanced tab of the dialog box

Deleting Conditions 1 Click on the condition in the Takeoff Dock bar area

2 Click the Delete button on the toolbar

OR

3 Right-click and select Delete from the pop-up menu

All takeoff associated with the deleted condition will be deleted immediately and permanently

Organizing Project Conditions Within your project you can create folders andor sub-folders for different types of conditions You may even want to create a folder containing conditions with reset values

To get started organizing your conditions make sure you are viewing the condition tree (right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select Show Tree)

Creating Folders and Sub-Folders 1 Right-click in the Takeoff Dock bar area

2 Select New gt Folder from the pop-up menu

Copying Folders

1 Click on the folder and click Copy on the toolbar

2 All copied conditions within the new folder will have values reset to zero

Renaming Folders

1 Click on the folder

2 Right-click and select Rename from the pop-up menu

3 Enter a name for your folder and click the Enter button

Changing Condition Order

You may move conditions up or down in the condition list of the Takeoff dock bar to suit your project needs

1 Select the condition you would like to move by clicking to highlight it

NOTE When you are ready to move the highlighted conditions be sure that you start

moving using the last condition chosen That condition will have a highlighted boarder

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

37

2 Drag and drop any the condition from one place to another in the list You may also move a condition to another folder on the list in this way

Drawing with Conditions Snap Angles Set up snap angles to prevent lines from appearing jagged Snap angles are commonly set at 15deg and shift snap angles at 0deg

1 Go to Tools gt Options Options dialog appears

2 Under the General tab make the desired settings

3 Click to save the settings As they are drawn lines will snap to the set degree

Drawing a Linear Object 1 Select a condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff dock bar

2 Move the cursor into the Image takeoff area of the screen you will see the cursor display as crosshairs

3 Click and hold left mouse button then drag mouse to draw a line

4 Release mouse button to set line

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

38

5 Repeat steps for further lines

Continuous Mode This feature allows you to draw an object that has connected lines

1 Click the icon from the Takeoff toolbar

OR

2 Go to Tools gt Continuous Mode

3 Follow steps 1-3 from Draw a Linear Object

4 Click at each point of intersection The object will be connected

5 Double-click after making the final point to set the lines

Drawing a Curve To draw a curved line the Curve option must be checked under the Advanced tab of the Condition dialog

1 Click where you want to begin the curve and drag in a straight line to the position for the other endpoint of the curve

2 Click on the line to select it Handles in the shapes of small squares will appear at either end of

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

39

the line and in the center of the line

3 Move the cursor over the center handles until the cursor becomes a two-way arrow

4 Click and drag in the direction of the curve bending the line as you move the cursor Release to set the curve (The line you began with will disappear)

Draw a circle by drawing two curved lines connected

Drawing an Area Object Area conditions are drawn similarly to continuous mode lines You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete your area takeoff

NOTE When drawing an area do not intersect the perimeter or line of the object you are drawing

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

3 The area will be filled with the pattern set for that condition

NOTE The simulated circle will be good enough for you to be able to make a bid

To create a circular area click from point to point with very short distances in between points simulating a circlersquos perimeter Double-click after setting the last point to set the area

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

40

Grid Options Grids give you an added advantage when installing materials such as tiles Use this feature to get a count for how many tiles are needed for an area

1 Double-click on an area condition in the Takeoff dock bar to open its Condition dialog

2 Click on the Advanced tab to show its options

3 Check the box next to Grid by clicking in it

4 Indicate the dimensions of the cell matrix in inches (For example 200 x 400)

5 Under Results tab choose each (EA) for one of the results fields This will tabulate a number of grid cells (including partial grid cells) in area

6 Click to save your settings

7 Use the Move Grid and Rotate Grid features in the Tools menu to manipulate the grid as desired

Grid Calculation

1 Go to Tools gt Options menu

1 Specify if On-Screen Takeoff automatically should Calculate Grid Position

2 If AreaGrid Size is selected On-Screen Takeoff will calculate the number of items needed to fill the grid based on grid demintions

3 Click to accept and close the dialog

To move a line at any angle (regardless of default setting) press the Shift key while moving the mouse

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

41

Backout Mode This feature allows you to take out part of an area and deduct that amount of square footage

1 Select Tools gt Backout Mode

2 Outline the are you want backed out as you would when drawing a regular area object (see Drawing an Area Object)

3 The outlined area will clear and quantities will be recalculated

NOTE The perimeter of the backout area will be added to the LF quantity for that condition

Drawing a Count Object Square triangle rectangle and circle shaped count objects can easily be placed on images

1 Select the condition

2 Click in the location where you want the object to appear

3 To place an opening-shaped count item like a door or window you must click over an existing linear object such as a wall

4 On the Results tab you can change the height properties to give you the result you need

5 If Backout is checked on the advanced tab for each count opening the opening-shaped count item will back out a corresponding section of the linear object

Opening shaped count items are sized at 3rsquo0rdquo by default

Drawing a Zone Zones are drawn in the same way as area objects and may be any polygonal shape You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete the zone perimeter

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

42

Selecting Objects

1 Use the Select Tool to select objects

You can also select all objects that correspond to a condition

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Right-click and choose Select All

3 All objects with this condition will be highlighted with squares as an outline

Moving and Resizing Objects Linear

1 To move or resize a linear object click anywhere on the line to select it

2 To move the line position your pointer over the center handles When the mouse is positioned over the handles you will see a two-way arrow You will only be able to move the line in the direction of the arrows

3 Drag the line to a new position

4 Clicking and dragging the handles on the ends of the line will allow you to lengthen or shorten your line

Area and Zone

1 To move an area object or zone in its entirety click and drag it to its new position

2 Grabbing a handle at a corner or intersection of the object will allow you to adjust and change its perimeter

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

43

Count 1 To move a square circle rectangle or triangle shaped count object click and drag

2 Click and drag an opening shaped count object along the length of the linear object to the desired position then release

NOTE An opening shaped count object may not be moved from its associated linear condition object however it may be moved up and down the length of the linear object

Layers On-Screen Takeoff allows you to sort and separate your takeoff objects within the same job and on the same page On-Screen Takeoff gives you this flexibility through the use of layers

By assigning different conditions to different layers (for example differentiating between floors ceilings and walls) you can choose to view all layers or turn off certain layers to display and print the remaining groups of conditions only You may also remove the background image of electronic plans add text and hot link symbols or print only your condition takeoffs

Layers are only available in Full Mode If you are in View or Lite Mode and would like to use this

feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade Default Layers

On-Screen Takeoff begins every project with three default layers Image Annotation and Default The Image layer holds the electronic plan files you may have in your project The Annotation layer possesses all text notations highlighting and hot links in the project The Default layer will appear in the Condition dialog when creating or editing a condition (listed in the takeoff dock bar) Conditions are assigned to the Default layer unless otherwise specified by the user

Creating Layers To assign a condition to a layer other than the default layer you must first create additional layers for your project

1 Select View gt Layers to open the Layers dialog

2 Click An unnamed layer will be added

3 Click within the empty box and type a name for your layer (for example Wall)

4 New layers are added as active layers The adjacent box under the Show column will be checked

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

44

Assigning a Layer to a Condition 1 Open the Condition dialog box by creating a new condition or editing an existing condition

2 Under the General tab click on the down arrow in the Layer field to display optional layers

3 Select the desired layer for the condition Only the Default layer and layers you have added will be displayed

4 Click

View and Hide Layers

1 Select View gt Layers

2 Under the Show column check the box to view or remove the check (by clicking on it) to hide the specific layer

3 Click to accept and close the Layers dialog

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

45

Assigning Text to a Layer When adding text to an image On-Screen Takeoff has the capability to assign the text to a specified layer

1 Select the Text Tool

2 Click at the point you want to place your text

3 Type in your text using the Enter key for line breaks

4 Click the drop down arrow next to the Layer field and select the desired layer

Section 7

46

Printing and Exporting

This section will

Printing options and procedures

Exporting data by copying and pasting

Exporting quantity results to Excel spreadsheets

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

47

Print Setup On-Screen Takeoff allows the user to print the image takeoff list and worksheet

1 Select File gt Print Setup The Print Setup dialog will open

2 Select a printer or leave the default selection listed (change from the default printer displayed by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the field)

3 Indicate page size and printer tray option (Source) Access page size options by clicking on the

down arrow at the right of the field

4 Choose Portrait or Landscape orientation

5 Click to accept and close the dialog

Printing Images The image area can include the electronic plans the takeoff objects added text and hot links To print a subset of these (for example just the takeoffs without the plans or the added text and hot link symbols) hide layers that you do not want to print (see Section 6 View and Hide Layers) When you are printing your images every page will show the scale of the takeoff you are printing

1 Click on the Image tab to display the area of your project

2 Select File gt Print (or Ctrl + P)

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

48

3 Select the desired view (What to print) and the Image Range

4 Click The second Print dialog will open

5 Change settings accordingly or click if you accept the default settings

Printing Takeoff Lists and Worksheets In Takeoff Lists and Worksheets you may hide columns to print only certain results or adjust column widths to fit the report within the page size selected

1 In Takeoff List or Worksheet view move your cursor to the right side of the columnrsquos title bar the cursor will display as a two-way arrow

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

49

2 Click and drag to adjust the width of the column Holding the mouse button you may

slide the title bar under the title bar to its left to hide the column completely

3 Select File gt Print or press Ctrl + P to access the Print dialog

4 Indicate desired printer and choose the number of copies

5 Click to print and close the dialog

When printing the condition list we suggest printing in landscape

To reset to the default column widths double-click on the right border of a column heading will reset the column to its right (or previously to its right before being hidden)

Print Preview 1 Select File gt Print Preview

2 Use and to vary your view 3 If viewing an image choose current full or scale view to see how it displays

4 For printed outputs that cover more than one page use and to view adjacent pages or click on the down arrow next to Page field and select the page you want displayed

Exporting Using the CopyPaste Feature You may copy all the data or sections from the worksheet and the takeoff list view in On-Screen Takeoff and paste it into another application When pasting into Excel the cell layout will be maintained

1 Highlight the areas you wish to paste Click and hold the left mouse button down as you drag the cursor over the area to be selected then releasing the mouse button

OR

2 Select the entire takeoff list quickly click on the left On-Screen Takeoff column header and hold and drag the cursor across the remaining column headings

The number of pages for the view selected will display in the lower left-hand corner The zoom percentage that applies to the view will be displayed in the lower right-hand corner next to page size of the drawing

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

50

3 In the worksheet view you may highlight rows by clicking on the numbered buttons to the left of each row clicking and dragging across column headings or clicking and dragging over individual cells in the worksheet

Click anywhere in the appropriate view to deselect the area

4 Once your selection is highlighted you may select Edit gt Copy or Ctrl C from the keyboard 5 On your monitor switch to the application into which you want to paste your selection 6 Select Edit gt Paste in the new application or simply press Ctrl + V to paste

The colored keys for conditions cannot be pasted

Using the Export Feature You may export condition quantities to specified cell location within an Excel worksheet file Cell target locations are assigned in the Results tab of the condition dialogs on the Export line relating to each quantity measurement type

On-Screen Takeoff will export takeoff quantity results for up to three different quantity types that you specify For instance you may want to know the number of square feet in a ceiling area as well as the number of linear feet in its perimeter

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

51

1 Bring up the Condition dialog by double-clicking on a condition in the takeoff dock bar or by

selecting the condition and clicking

2 Click on the Results tab to access its fields The default quantities for the condition type will display

3 For each results field click on the arrow to access the pull-down menu and select the appropriate quantity (for example SF LF EA etchellip)

4 Have your Excel spreadsheet opened and saved in a file

5 Specify the Excel spreadsheet cell locations where you want the results to go

6 For a cell in the first sheet of your spreadsheet type in the cell address (eg a1) Case is not important

7 For a cell on a successive sheet of your spreadsheet type in sheet the number followed by a comma and the cell address without any spaces (eg sheet2a1) Case is not important

8 Click

9 Select File gt Export gt Condition Qty to Excel

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

52

10 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

11 Click to export On-Screen Takeoff results to specified cell locations in the Excel file When you return to the Excel application you will see the values have been added to the specified cell locations in your spreadsheet

12 Save your Excel file

Exporting Worksheet to Excel

1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 From On-Screen Takeoff Select File gt Export gt Worksheet to Excel

4 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

5 Click When you return to the Excel application you will see the values from the Worksheet Tab have been added to your spreadsheet

6 Save your Excel file

Exporting Takeoff to CVS 1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 Click the Takeoff Tab in the project you want to export the information

4 Select File gt Export gt Takeoff to CSV

5 Browse to the location of the CSV spreadsheet file click file to select it

6 Click the Save

NOTE CSV files can be opened in Excel Lotus Access etc One may consider this option more of a ldquodumprdquo into a file

The Excel application must be active (it may be minimized on the application bar) with the target spreadsheet open in the application Otherwise an error will occur with the export operation that will affect both the On-Screen Takeofftrade file and the Excel spreadsheet

Section 8

53

Advanced Features

This section will

Some special features of working with condition objects in the takeoff area

Details of advanced options for conditions

Advanced features of the Project Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

54

Features to Use with Objects Roping Feature You can move copy or delete using this feature Using the Select tool (the pointer) you may select several objects at once by clicking and dragging an outline around the objects then releasing the mouse button Roping may select either objects completely within the outlined area (inclusive) or objects both within and touched by the outlined area (touching) Specify your roping preference under Tools gt Options

1 Click and hold the mouse button at a point on the screen near the objects to be selected and drag to surround the objects with an outline

2 Release the mouse button The objects will be selected

3 You may now

Move the group around on the page by clicking within the group dragging the mouse and releasing the button to place the objects

Delete the group of objects by clicking the Delete key or

Copy and paste by pressing Ctrl C to copy the group then Ctrl V to paste it The pasted copy of the grouped objects will appear slightly offset from the original objects

Section 8 Advanced Features

55

Applying a DropRun Count

Use the droprun feature when calculating quantities to take into account the drop or run of a linear condition such as electrical lines or plumbing pipes Drop or run lengths may be added separately to any linear condition on screen while a default droprun length may be indicated for a condition as a whole

1 Select the desired linear condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff Dock bar

2 Click the Change button in the toolbar to open the Change Condition dialog

3 Click the Advanced tab to access the advanced options and click inside the DropRun check box

4 Enter a default length to be applied to all of this condition Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches) You can leave the length blank and manually enter drop run on each segment drawn

5 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog

Edit DropRun Count

1 With the related linear condition in the Takeoff Dock bar highlighted or with the pointer tool selected

2 click on the desired linear object in the image takeoff area The Count button will become active

3 Click on the Count button (alternatively select Tools gt Count) The default droprun amount will show in the pop-up Count dialog (Default length will be zero if droprun has not been selected in this conditionrsquos properties)

4 Type in the desired length Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches)

5 Click the OK button The additional amount will be reflected in the corresponding quantity The new DropRun count will apply only to the object edited

Adding Text in Image View

On-Screen Takeoff allows you to place text comments around your quantity takeoffs that may be printed along with plan images and objects Text is automatically placed within the Annotation Layer (that includes text and hot links)

1 To place text on the image select the Text Tool and click at the point you want to place your text opening a text box

2 Type in your information clicking Enter for line breaks

3 When you are finished click the OK button to exit the text box

4 To reposition text simply click on the text (with the Text Tool active) to select it

5 Move the cursor over the text the cursor will now display as a four-way arrow

6 Click and drag the mouse to position the text as desired

Section 8 Advanced Features

56

1 To edit existing text use the Text Tool to double-click on the text to open the editing box

2 Enter additional text or use the Backspace key to delete text as necessary

Formatting Text Once created you may format the font size type style and color of your text

1 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Font or click on the Font button in the Takeoff Toolbar

2 Select the desired features (color options are disabled) and click the OK button

3 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Color or click on the Color button in the Takeoff Toolbar The Color dialog will open

4 Click on a color in the Basic Color palette or create a color and add to the Custom Colors palette (Be sure to click on the color in the Custom Colors palette to select it)

5 Click the OK button

Object Properties

Linear Objects

Linear objects may be set to connect at corners

A linear object may be set to trim automatically when crossing another linear object (Check the trim option under the advanced tab of the Condition dialog)

When you move a connected linear object objects automatically move and resize connected lines accordingly (quantities are then recalculated)

This feature requires that the connected linear object be moved using the center handles (does not apply when resizing the line from the ends)

Objects constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

Objects are measured from centerline to centerline

Section 8 Advanced Features

57

Area Objects When drawing an area use your escape key to undo the last line drawn You may reverse your

drawing of an area using the escape key

The area will not fill with color and pattern until the user double-clicks after the last line is set

Lines drawn to delineate an area object constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

After selecting an area to move or adjust position the mouse in the center to move the entire area position the mouse at the sides or corners to adjust the perimeter

Count Objects

All count objects are quantified by the physical number of objects per page and reported as EA for the UOM The quantity for the current Image View is (displayed in the Condition List) and the total quantity in your project is displayed in the Takeoff View and Worksheet View)

Square circle rectangle and triangle shaped count objects do not displace or subtract from other object quantities when placed on top of them However on the Advanced Tab for the count condition a connect property can be set (this is a check box) so that when a count object of this shape is put on top of a Linear type takeoff object it will move with the linear if said linear is moved

An opened-shaped count object must be placed within a linear object Opening shaped count objects may also be measured by linear foot or linear yard (EA SF and SY are also options) Opening shaped count items default to a width of 3rsquo 0rdquo at the time of creation This size can be changed The small medium and large size are not options on this type of condition anymore Check Backout on the Advanced tab for each Count object back out the footage (or yardage) of opening-shaped count objects in which they are placed

NOTE In order to see this Backout functionality (in quantity) for SY or SF deductions at least one of the

results for the Linear(s) this object will be placed on must be set to SY or SF and the count object must have a height quantity

Advanced Features of Conditions The Round Feature Under the Advanced tab of the linear and area Condition dialogues you may specify quantity rounding (in inches) For linear objects rounding applies to each linear object drawn For area objects rounding will apply to each segment of the area perimeter adjusting the perimeter and area calculations For example With a linear condition entering 12 in the Round field will round up each related linear object to the nearest 12 inches or one foot With this setting two walls of 1 4 would each round to 2 0 totaling 4 0

NOTE In the Takeoff Dock bar condition list and in the On-Screen Takeoff reports quantities will be displayed in whole numbers rounded up to the nearest foot However calculations are based on true quantities without rounding unless the Round Feature is engaged

Pitch Pitch may apply either to linear or area conditions It is measured in rise per linear foot Entering 12 indicates a 12 rise per 12 of linear distance (a pitch of 12 over 12) or an angle of 45deg

Section 8 Advanced Features

58

Advanced Features of Project Properties Selecting Multiple Pages

1 Select a single page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry

2 Drag the cursor down the column of numbers to select consecutive pages

3 Click on the blank button at the top of this column to select all pages in the Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

59

Changing Image Assigned to a Drawing 1 Select the page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry 2 Click the Change Image button The Change Image dialog box will appear

3 Navigate to the desired file and select by clicking on it

4 Click the Open button The electronic file assigned to the page will have been changed to reflect the new file choice

Changing Image File Path 1 Select pages as described above

2 Choose Change Folder

3 In the Change Folder dialog navigate to the appropriate folder

4 Click the OK button The file path will have been changed for the selected page entries

Delete a Page from Project Properties 1 Select the page you want to delete by clicking on its associated number (in the gray box at the

left of the entry)

2 Choose Delete Page

All Takeoff on the page will be deleted immediately and permanently

Section 8 Advanced Features

60

Advanced Features of Tool Options

Calculation Method On-Screen Takeoff has built-in calculation options to allow for faster work and faster saves until your takeoff is complete Calculation options are found by selecting Tools gt Options then clicking on the Calculation tab

Calculation method can be set to Automatic Automatic except Grids and Manual Manual will allow the program to operate more quickly while Automatic or Automatic except Grids allows the user to see quantity changes as takeoffs are made

In any mode you may press F9 to recalculate quantities for the On-Screen Takeoff current totals

Configuration Tab

When the ldquoPage Label (A01)rdquo radial button is chosen On-Screen Takeoff puts the numbered label on all the pages of in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar If the Page Descriptionrdquo radial button is chosen then a description of what takeoff is on that specific page will be shown in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar

This section of the configuration tab gives you options on how you want to export your information When the ldquoFolderSubfolder Namesrdquo radial button is chosen than on your file that you are exporting to will have all the conditions folders and subfolders In the Delimiter box you can choose the symbol that is needed to separate the information you are exporting Some files need semicolons () or colons () to make sure the information comes exported in is separated it the appropriate places

Section 8 Advanced Features

61

In previous versions of On-Screen Takeoff there are views that users need to have in order for them to display their information By either choosing ldquoOST 1xrdquo or ldquoOST 2xrdquo it will let the program know you want your columns of information exported in that specific format

When you have the Confirm Deletions radial button of ldquoYesrdquo chosen than every time you delete anything you will get a dialog box confirming your intentions of deletion

While working with your takeoff you have a choice to either view the legend of your conditions or hide it Choose whichever radial button that suits your needs

For those who prefer to use the Enter key to navigate in dialog boxes this option is just for that

Font Tab The Font tab is designed for you to make your own look and feel for the application At the bottom of this tab it will show you sample of the fonts and colors you have chosen

Renaming the Current Page You may change the name of the current page in the takeoff area of On-Screen Takeoff by selecting Edit gt Rename Page

This opens the Name Page dialog and you may simply type in a new name and click the Enter button The new name for the file will be reflected on the title bar for the page and in Project Properties

You also may access the Rename Page function by right-clicking in the takeoff area while in Image View and selecting the option from the pop-up menu that appears

Section 9

62

Saving and Exiting

This section will

Explain how to save projects

Show you how to safely exit the program

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

63

Saving Your Project

1 Select File gt Save 2 If your project has not previously been saved a Save dialog box will open to allow you to name

the file and choose the directory and folder in which to save your file 3 Once saved File gt Save will simply save the current version of the file

OR

4 Select File gt Save As then type in a new name for the file and save to the desired file path

The Auto-save Feature With the Auto-save feature On-Screen Takeoff automatically backs up your open project You may choose to have more than one level of backup files The first backup copy will have the extension b00 and successive files will be b01 b02 and so on If you have designated four levels of backup files after the fourth backup copy has been created (b03) the next file will be saved over the file with extension b00 Further backup saves will then rotate through the four backup files in the same way

1 Select Tools gt Options 2 In the Auto-save area (under the General tab) select the frequency of backup file creation (in

minutes) and the number of levels for the feature 3 You also may disengage the feature by clicking in the check box to clear it

The Auto-save feature automatically saves backup copies to the directory of the current project If you are working from a write-protected area such as a CD-ROM On-Screen Takeoff will place backup files in the On-Screen Takeoff folder

Exiting When you are finished using On-Screen Takeoff it is very easy to exit Exiting is very important because of security reasons If someone were to use your computer they could enter the application and view and manipulate information

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

64

On-Screen Takeoff closes the open project when you open another or create a new project or when you exit the program

1 Select File gt Exit

OR

2 You also may click at the upper right-hand corner of the application to exit

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

65

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer When you get your digitizer from GTCO you will need to connect it to your computer Follow the instructions outlined below to do this

Note For rollup digitizers the metal bar must be oriented to the top or right hand side

Connecting the Digitizer 1 Lay the digitizer out flat 2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer 3 Plug in the power adapter 4 Plug the interface (IO) cable into the digitizer 5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into an open serial port on computer

Note GTCO Technical support phone number is 410-381-6688 The electronic manual (on diskette) from GTCO contains more detailed installation and operation instructions for the GTCO digitizer model you have

Installing other Digitizer Drivers If you are using a GTCO Digitizer you will need to install the GTCO TabletWorks Drivers

If you are using a Digitizer not supported by GTCO Tablet Works 10 please contact the manufacturer of your digitizer for assistance with installation

Installing GTCO TabletWorks Drivers 1 Insert the On Center CD into the CD-ROM drive The CD Startup screen will open 2 Click on Install Software 3 Select Additional Software and Drivers 4 Select Digitizer Driver 5 Follow the instructions for installing TabletWorks 10

Adhering the Template The template is a small plastic sticker used to enable mouse function when using the digitizer with On-Screen Takeoff Place your template on your digitizer We suggest placing it in the bottom right corner of the digitizer about one inch inside the takeoff area

Note You may either peel off the back of the template and use the adhesive surface or you can tape the template down

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

66

Testing the Digitizer Drivers Before running OST you may test the digitizer by moving the stylus around on the digitizer pad it should move the mouse cursor (if mouse emulation is enabled)

If the digitizer does not move the mouse cursor on the screen

The superset codes may need to be reset Reset the superset codes by touching on the border of the digitizer with the stylus The digitizer should beep several times

The digitizer may not be communicating with the computer Be sure the COM port selected is correct Be sure the COM port selected is correct If you are not able to get the digitizer to move the mouse cursor you need to call GTCO technical support for help

Note The Mouse Emulation is not required for On-Screen Takeoff to work properly It is used only for the Template functionality if the digitizer is moving the cursor the wrong direction (up instead of sideways or vice-versa)

Click the L-shaped arrow symbol on the digitizer with the stylus

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

67

Appendix II Toolbar Items Main Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

68

Tool Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

69

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

70

Navigate Toolbar (Continued)

Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

71

Takeoff Toolbar (Continued)

Image Toolbar

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

72

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

This section will detail how to load plans from a F W Dodge CD-ROM into an On-Screen Takeoff project file ready for takeoffs

Dodge files may be added to the Project Properties dialog However loading the files in that way will load the files by number rather than name description If you want to load one page only from your Dodge CD You will have to rename the page to display the name rather than number of the file

To load plan files from a Dodge CD so that the files load sequentially by file number but are displayed by name rather than by number within your project follow the instructions below

Opening a Dodge project from a CD-ROM 1 Insert the CD into the drive 2 Choose File gt Custom 3 Choose Dodge Plans Project (plansdat) as the file type 4 Select the appropriate file type by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the Files of type

field 5 In the Look in field access your drive paths by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the

field then

Navigate to your CD-ROM drive Open the data folder and Open the Projects folder

6 Select the desired project and open its folder 7 Open the plansdat file 8 All the images will come in sequenced correctly for that job along with the full descriptions

(names) of each page If there is not a plans folder in the project folder then plans do not exist for that project on the CD Opening the plansdat file will yield an empty project

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

73

Appendix IV Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer The On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer is a limited version of On Center Softwarersquos commercial takeoff software If your status bar located at the very bottom of the main window says View Mode in the lower left-hand corner then you are using the Plan Viewer You can use the plan viewer to

View CD-based amp converted CAD drawings

View a previously created OST file and associated drawings

Download electronic plans online

Navigate through drawings

Quickly Takeoff linearsareas and counts

Zoom in to view the plan better

Print drawings directly from the viewer

Viewing an On-Screen Takeoff Project File

1 To open an OST file that was previously created with of On-Screen Takeoff 2 Select File gt Open 3 An Open dialog will appear if you do not see the OST file you are looking for select the

Look In drop down arrow 4 A drop down menu will appear listing the various folders drives and mapped drives located

on your computer select the correct drive or folder location and continue to browse to the location of your OST file

5 When you see your OST file double-click it to open it 6 Any takeoff and drawings should appear on the Image tab view

If you do not see the drawings but do see the colored takeoff layer the drawings may

not be located in the same place they were originally saved at Go to File gt Project Properties and check the Image File path for each listed page If the image file path is pointing to a CD drive make sure the CD is inside the CR-ROM

Downloading Electronic Plans If your Online Plan Service provides a special file format (OSX) required to use this feature of our plan viewer you can immediately downloaded all electronic plans of a project directly from our viewer

Most Plan Room web sites will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff when a request to download plans is made Your particular Plan Room may differ in operation so please contact the provider directly with questions on using the site

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

74

When you request to download or open a project file from a Plan Room you will usually have the open to open or save an OSX file Choosing open will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff Alternately you may choose to save the file to a local hard drive After you have saved the file either double-click it to launch On-Screen Takeoff or open the OSX file using On-Screen Takeoff by clicking File then Open and locating the file on your hard drive You will need to change the file type to OSX

After the OSX file is opened you will see an additional tab appear in the Conditions List window called Pages

The Pages tab shows the hierarchy of your project Gray file icons represent pages that have not been downloaded and blue icons represents pages that have been downloaded

To download a page simply double-click the page icon

If you wish to select a group of pages to download you can use the Ctrl or Shift key to multiple select them then click the Download button

If you wish to download all pages at once click the Download All button

Downloaded pages will now appear in the Project Properties dialog in the same order in which they appear in the Pages tab

Creating Quick Takeoffs With On-Screen Takeoff you can create quick takeoffs to measure quantities even if you dont have the full version of our program However using the Quick Takeoff functionality shows you just a fraction of what the full version can do

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar is located at the top of the image view It has three buttons designated for three types of takeoffs Linear Area and Count The Quantity drop down list will show secondary quantities for Linears and Areas The Units drop down allows you to select how you want your quantities displayed Feet Inches Yards Millimeters and Meters

NOTE Every time change the type of takeoff you are performing (switching from Area to Linear for example) the previous quantities and takeoff objects will disappear They will also disappear when you changes pages

NOTE You can use the Dimension Tool to basically measure the distance between two points or linears The distance will display on the status bar at the bottom of the application

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

75

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions General

Where is On-Screen Takeoff installed on my computer

Typically it is installed in CProgram FilesOn-Screen Takeoff

In Explorer how do I recognize On-Screen Takeoff file types

On-Screen Takeoff data is stored in a single file per job lsquojob name OSTrsquo On-Screen Takeoff templates are stored as lsquotemplate nameTPOrsquo

Can only one project at a time be open

Yes For that reason opening another project automatically closes the project on screen You will be asked to save any changes

Is only one scale allowed per page What about on drawings that have multiple detail sections on a page and each of those drawings have different scales

Yes For pages with drawings of different scales copy the drawing to another project page and set the appropriate scale

I cannot perform backout on an area that is along a linear

As a workaround use the On-Screen Takeoff layers feature to help you with this issue Electronic Images

How do I start a project from drawings that have been scanned and written to a CD-ROM

Open a new project Select File gt Project Properties and select Auto Add Navigate to your CD and the appropriate folder and select any image file in that location Click Open All files in the location will load into your project Recommended that images are copied from CD to hard drive for performance

If I get a disk of drawings in AutoCAD format (R13 or R14) can I read them in On-Screen Takeoff

Yes On-Screen Takeoff now reads DWG DXF and many other format that are saved with AutoCAD

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

76

When I click on the all pages button what is supposed to happen Currently nothing seems to change when I click on that button

The All Pages button is used to apply the Darken and Enhance Plans feature to all pages in the project (as opposed to only the current page on screen)

Is there a way to deduct a large skylight from an area condition

Yes with the related area condition selected in the Takeoff Dock bar unselect the Backout button on the Takeoff Toolbar then draw the Backout area The area quantity will be deducted from the related condition object and the linear measurement of the Backout perimeter will be added

Digitizer Issues

How do I connect a Digitizer to the computer

See Appendix I Connecting a Digitizer

The Place Template menu choice is disabled

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or the digitizer or the digitzer drivers are not installed

It wonrsquot let me select the Set Takeoff Area menu choice

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or no job is open a digitizer is not installed or the drivers are not installed

The digitizer stylus is not moving the cursor or crosshairs

Click S-0-1 superset on the digitizer

How do I convert my old GTCO Digitizer to work with On- Screen Takeofftrade

Call GTCO and they may be able to reconfigure your digitizer to be compatible with On-Screen Takeoff

Printing Issues Which Printers work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible printers include On-Screen Takeoff Hewlett Packard Epson and Canon printers If you are having printer difficulties please contact support and specify the type of printer along with other pertinent information Contact support at wwwoncentercomsupport or email supportoncentercom

Which Plotters work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible Plotters include Hewlett Packard DesignJet plotters and the EnCAD Cadjet II If you are having plotter difficulties please contact support and specify the type of plotter concerned

ViewingDisplay I can no longer see my condition list How do I get it back

The toolbars and Dock bars can be turned on and off through the View gt Toolbars menu options

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

77

This is also accessible by right-clicking in the toolbar area and selecting (or deselecting) a toolbar listed

I cannot view my folders in the condition list

Right-click in the Takeoff Dock barcondition list area and select Show Tree to display your folders

My Status Bar reads Viewer Mode and I am unable to draw conditions

On-Screen Takeoff needs to be Authorized Or you need to purchase an upgrade Click the Perform Advanced Takeoff button on the main toolbar

I hid a Dock bar and when I selected to view it again it appeared alongside the other Dock

bar instead of stacked on top of it How do I fix it

Pick up the Dock bar by clicking on the bar at the top and continuing to hold down the mouse button drag the Dock bar over the other one It will resize and appear stacked with the other

When I open image files from a CD the images are all upside down How do I get them right

side up

To flip pages from top to bottom follow the steps below 1 Click the All Pages button on the Image Toolbar (All Pages is engaged when the button

is not clicked) 2 Click the Flip Horizontal button on the Image Toolbar 3 Click the All Pages button again to disengage

Templates How do I create a Template

Follow the steps below 1 Create a typical project 2 Choose File gt Save As 3 Choose On-Screen Takeoff Template Files as the file type to save 4 Name the file This will save all of the condition setups as well as the layers for the

project

How do I create a new project from a template

Follow the steps below 1 Choose File gt New 2 Select a template from those listed in the New dialog This will open a new project with

conditions and layers saved from a previous project but no pages or takeoff

78

INDEX

Area Conditions 32

Area Objects 57

Auto Scrolling 20

Auto-save 63

Backout Mode 41

Calculation Method 60

Conditions 29

Configuration 60

Contents Tab 6

Continuous Mode 38

Count Conditions 33

Count Objects 57

Digitizer 10 65 76

Docking Toolbars 13

Dodge CD 72

Drawing 27 37

DropRun Count 55

Environment 18

Exiting 63

Exporting 49

Features 16

Font 61

Frequently Asked Questions 75

Grid 40

Help File 5

Hiding Toolbars 13

Hot Links 21

Image 19 59

Image files 9

Image Toolbar 12 71

Images 75

Index Tab 6

Layers 43

Linear Conditions 31

Linear Objects 56

Main Toolbar 12 67

Menus 14

Moving Toolbars 13

Navigate Toolbar 12 69

Navigating 20

On-Screen Takeofftrade 2

Page 59 61

Pages 20 25 28

Plan Viewer 73

Plans 26

Printing 47 76

Project Properties 25

Projects 22

Quick Start Video 18

Resizing Toolbars 13

Roping 54

Saving 63

Scale 28

Search Tab 7

Selecting Objects 42

Setup 8

Start On-Screen Takeofftrade 17

System Requirements 9

Takeoff 19 27

Takeoff Toolbar 70 71

Takeoff Toolbar 12

Template Files 23

TIF (Group4) 9

Tool Toolbar 12 68

Toolbar 67

Toolbars 12

View Toolbar 12 69

Viewing Toolbars 12

Worksheet 20

Zone Conditions 33

Zoom Toolbar 12 69

  • On-Screen Takeoff Lite
  • Table of Contents
  • Section 1 - Introduction
  • Section 2 - Setup
  • Section 3 - Toolbars and Menus
  • Section 4 - Features
  • Section 5 - Projects
  • Section 6 - Conditions and Takeoff
  • Section 7 - Printing and Exporting
  • Section 8 - Advanced Features
  • Section 9 - Saving and Exiting
  • Appendix I - Installing Your Digitizer
  • Appendix II - Toolbar Items
  • Appendix III - Loading Plans from a Dodge CD
  • Appendix IV - Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer
  • Appendix V - Frequently Asked Questions
  • Index

Section 3

11

Toolbars and Menus

This section will

Introduce the program toolbars

Familiarize you with On-Screen Take Offtrade Menu options

Section 3 Toolbars and Menus

12

Toolbars On-Screen Takeoff is equipped with several helpful toolbars for application efficiency See Appendix II Toolbar Item` Details for a detailed description of each toolbar item Individually the toolbars may be displayed moved docked reshaped or hidden from view You can also create costume toolbars to fit your needs

Main Toolbar

Tool Toolbar

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Takeoff Toolbar

Image Toolbar Viewing Toolbars Toolbars are displayed on the screen and will be consistent on each tab or page (Some toolbars or toolbar items will be in an inactive state if they donrsquot have a supporting element in the application)

1 Select View gt Toolbars and select the appropriate toolbar name

OR

2 Right-click on a toolbar region of the screen

3 Check the toolbars you want to display

Section 3 Toolbars and Menus

13

Moving Toolbars The toolbars may be positioned anywhere on the screen you wish This feature is provided to allow the flexibility for positioning the toolbars so they are out of your way yet handy for use

1 Click on an edge of the toolbar holding down the mouse button drag it to its new position

2 Release the mouse button to set it in place

NOTE If the toolbar is dropped anywhere other than a screen edge it will become free floating This feature is especially handy when using multiple monitors

Docking Toolbars The toolbars can be docked to any of the screen edges

1 Click on the title bar of an undocked toolbar

2 Drag the toolbar to any location on the screen

Hiding Toolbars

1 Select View gt Toolbars and select the toolbar you wish to remove from the screen

2 Right-click on the toolbar or dock bar areas

3 A floating toolbar can be closed by clicking on the in the upper right corner of the toolbar

Resizing Toolbars Only undocked (floating) toolbars may be resized

1 Position the mouse pointer over an edge

2 Click and drag

3 The toolbar can be resized as desired

Customizing the Toolbars You may rearrange or delete buttons within a toolbarrsquos display or you may move buttons from one toolbar to another If you find that you use a few tools over and over you may want to group them within a single toolbar for convenience On-Screen Takeoff gives you the flexibility to customize your takeoff environment

1 Select Tools gt Customize The Customize dialog will open

2 With the dialog open click on a toolbar button and drag buttons from one toolbar to another or a new location within the same toolbar

3 To add a button without altering another toolbar click on the Commands tab of the Customize dialog and drag the appropriate symbol from the Buttons section to a toolbar

4 To remove a button drag it to within the takeoff area of the application

Section 3 Toolbars and Menus

14

Menus

Section 3 Toolbars and Menus

15

Digitizer Menu

Section 4

16

Features

This section will

Show you how open On-Screen Takeoff

Describe the On-Screen Takeoff environment

Teach you how to navigate pages

Section 4 Features

17

Start On-Screen Takeoff

1 On your desktop double-click your On-Screen Takeoff icon

2 The application will open

OR

3 Left-click on the Start button on your computerrsquos toolbar

4 Scroll up to Programs gt On Center Software

5 Highlight On-Screen Takeoff and click On-Screen Takeoff will open On-Screen Takeoff opens to an untitled blank project The Image view of the screen will be a blank page

Two blank dock bars the Pan dock bar and the Takeoff dock bar appear at the left side of the screen Along the bottom the Status bar displays user status or context-sensitive messages as well as paper size and current zoom percentage of the plan sheet on screen The menu bar and several task specific toolbars are located at the top of the screen

NOTE All toolbars and dock bars may be accessed to view or hide through View gt Toolbars on the menu bar

Section 4 Features

18

Quick Start Video When On-Screen Takeoff opens you will be given an option to watch the Quick Start video (recommended) or start the program without watching the video

The 20 minute video will demonstrate key program functionality and allow you to view application instruction for enhanced learning

If you would like to watch the video click If you prefer to get started without

the video click If you have already viewed the video click the lsquoDo not show this message againrsquo box to prevent this dialog from appearing each time you open the program

NOTE If you decide later that you would like to watch the Quick Start video go to Help gt Watch

Quick Start Videos

On-Screen Takeoff Environment The On-Screen Takeoff environment acts like your drafting table allowing you to work on several sheets of plans at once and to reference at a glance the entire drawing and your position on that drawing while giving you the power of a computer to track analyze print and export your takeoff quantities and plans

The screen is bordered at the top by the Menu bar with pull-down menus and at the bottom by the Status bar which indicates current user status plan page size and current zoom percentage of page The largest portion of the application screen will be your takeoff area bounded on the left (by default) by two dock bars and on the top by several toolbars

In the takeoff area you may view your project plans (images) andor takeoff objects the takeoff list with quantities the worksheet or a legend of your condition list

The main window of On-Screen Takeoff has three tabs located at the bottom left allowing for quick change between Image Takeoff or Worksheet views Select the desired view option on the toolbar and it will automatically open on your screen

Section 4 Features

19

Image View

This view shows the plan file andor takeoff conditions drawn from your plans

Takeoff View This view displays the height if applicable and quantity breakdowns of your conditions according to result types indicated (eg linear feet square feet or count of items) for zones pages and the project as a whole It also displays notes per condition

Section 4 Features

20

Worksheet View This view displays the condition and quantity in units of measure specified in the first results field of the Results tab in the Condition dialog and allows the user to enter amounts for material labor and subcontractor takeoffs

NOTE When in the Worksheet view tab out the field then save This is keep all the values saved

Navigating On-Screen Takeoff

Auto Scrolling When creating linear areas or zones On-Screen Takeoff will automatically scroll the image view when necessary It will move as your mouse or digitizer moves beyond the edge of the current view

Changing Pages

1 Select View gt Next Page Previous Page or Go To Page (specify page number for the Go to Page option)

2 You may also select the corresponding arrows for these options from the Navigate Toolbar The

drop down arrow in the Page field will list the pages The and arrows will take you to the

previous or next page The and arrows will take you to the first or last page

OR

Section 4 Features

21

3 Or press Ctrl G for the Go To Page dialog

Hot Links Hot links allow you to move quickly from one drawing to the pertinent area of another drawing A hot link is handy when viewing enlarged areas of a page and needing the ability to jump back to a reference page

1 Select Tools gt Hot Link

OR

2 Click from the Tools Toolbar

3 Click on the page where you want to set the link The Hot Link dialog will open

4 Using the current page display on the Navigate Toolbar access the pull-down menu of pages by

clicking on the arrow at the right

5 Select the page for your link (You may also choose View gt Go to Page and select by page number)

6 Manipulate the view using the zoom tool and the scroll bars

7 Click

8 After joining a hot link to another page the hot link arrows in the Navigation Toolbar will become active

9 Move a hot link to another location on the page by clicking then click and drag the hot link image anywhere on the page

Section 5

22

Projects

This section will

Help you create settings important to your projects

Explain how On-Screen Takeoff works with your electronic or paper plans

Section 5 Projects

23

Project Template Files You can begin your project with a template Templates allow you to take advantage of conditions and settings used with previous projects

On-Screen Takeoff templates contain condition lists and established layer separations from previous projects you have created You may also use the sample templates provided with On-Screen Takeoff as a great starting point All aspects of the templates may be adjusted for a new project

1 Select File gt New and click the OK button

2 From the New dialog box choose the template that best fits your project

3 The conditions for this template will appear in the Takeoff Dock bar and the Project Properties dialog will open asking for further information

4 Use File gt Save or File gt Save As to rename and save your new project

Saving a Project as a Template File You can save your condition properties and layers as a template for future projects

1 Select File gt Save As

2 Enter a name for your template and select On-Screen Takeoff Template Files (tpo) from the Save As type field of the dialog (click on the down arrow to select)

3 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog Modifying a Template File Follow these steps to modify an existing template file if you need to change or add conditions andor layers

1 Select File gt Open

2 Navigate to your Projects directory

3 In the File Type drop-down select On-Screen Takeoff Template files (tpo)

4 Choose the On-Screen Takeoff template file you would like to modify and click the OK button

5 Make appropriate changes

6 Save and close file

The On-Screen Takeoff template files cannot save takeoff information

Section 5 Projects

24

Opening an Existing Project File 1 Select File gt Open

2 Navigate to the desired file location

3 Click the Open button

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask

you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Creating a New Project

1 Select File gt New

2 For a blank untitled project click

3 At this point the Project Properties dialog will pop-up for more information about your takeoff

NOTE The following are important to keep in mind when beginning a new project

At the start of your project fill out the Project Properties settings to establish the name for all printed output from your project set the default page size and scale for your plans number and names of different pages within the project and locations of electronic drawings

Scale settings can significantly affect quantity outcomes Be sure to set the scale for each page of drawings before beginning condition takeoffs

When using a digitizer remember to make a mark with a pen or pencil in the upper left and lower right corners of the first sheet of the paper plans to delineate the takeoff area for that sheet You can then set the takeoff area on On-Screen Takeoff using your marks

Save your project before you begin taking off any conditions On-Screen Takeoff will write a back-up file using the same file name

Remember the Undo feature If you make a mistake select Edit gt Undo and reverse the process step by step

Section 5 Projects

25

Project Properties

You can either set your Project Properties when you create a new takeoff or once your project file is saved under the appropriate name

1 Select File gt Project Properties the Project Properties dialog box will appear

2 Type in the name of your project to appear on printouts Use the backspace andor delete keys to edit the name as necessary

3 Press the Tab key to move to the Default Image Size option or click within the Image Size box You may click on the arrow at the right for the pull-down menu of page size options or you can use the down-arrow key on your keyboard to scroll through the list to the appropriate selection

4 Press the Tab key to move to the Default Scale option Select a scale by using the drop down arrow If your scale is metric you will need to click in the box next to Metric to convert to that measurement

5 Establish the number of pages for your project plans And load image files See Adding Pages to

Your Project

Adding Pages to Projects Individual Electronic Plans

1 Click on in the Project Properties dialog

2 In the Add Images dialog use the drop down arrow to navigate to the appropriate directory and folder containing your image

3 Select the file so that it displays in the File name field then click The file will display by name and path in the Image File field in Project Properties dialog

4 Click to accept and your project will automatically open

5 Save your project with the new settings by selecting File gt Save

Section 5 Projects

26

Electronic plans scanned from blueprints (as opposed to blue lines) will display as white lines on a black background and are difficult to read on your computer screen Select Image gt Invert and the colors will invert to black on white

You may have noticed the Page column in the Project Properties dialog Generally plan images occupy one page and 1 will be listed in the column indicating Page 1 of your plan file If you import a multi-page TIF a plan file containing more than one page of plans they will import as separate pages and each successive page will be indicated under the Page column as 1 2 3 etc of the plan file

Group of Electronic Plans You may add all the electronic plan files from a particular source (for example from a CD) by using the Auto Add feature

1 Click the button in the Project Properties dialog

2 Browse until you find the appropriate directory and folder containing your plan images

3 Click on any file displayed within your target folder so that the file name appears in the File name box of the Auto Add dialog

4 Click The image paths and file names will be recorded into the project properties arranged alphabetically

5 Click to accept your choices and your project will automatically open

6 Save your project with the new settings by selecting File gt Save

To load Dodge Plans into your Project Properties see Appendix IIi Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

Paper Plans On-Screen Takeoff makes it easy for Full Mode users to perform quantity takeoffs from paper plans using a digitizer

1 Add pages by clicking until you have the number of pages initially in the project

2 Name each page by clicking within the Title area and typing the name

3 Click to accept your choices and close the Project Properties dialog

4 Save your project with the new project properties settings by selecting File gt Save

Section 5 Projects

27

Setting Up a Drawing Template On-Screen Takeoff provides the convenience of using the same work surface for both digitizer and mouse to allow the user to draw conditions and then edit settings of the project or add or change conditions without breaking stride A mouse pad template included with the program defines the area of the digitizer in which use of the stylus or cursor will be recognized as mouse movement as opposed to drawing movement

1 Place your stylus on On-Screen Takeoff

2 Placing the template identifies the location mouse movements will be recognized by the program

Before placing the template the template must be applied to the digitizer surface This may have been done during the installation of your digitizer We suggest attaching the template to the lower right corner of the digitizer surface about one inch inside the grid area

3 Select Digitizer gt Place Template

4 Follow the instruction prompts on the screen clicking first on the target symbol at the left of the On-Screen Takeoff box on the template then on the target at the right

Setting Takeoff Area Before you can begin taking off a drawing you must define the drawing area on the digitizer This requires defining an area that will include all objects on each drawing of your plans As you add pages to your takeoff the same area of the digitizer will be active

1 Secure the plans to the digitizer with tape or a set of clamps

2 With a pen or a pencil mark the upper left corner and the lower right corner of the first page in your set of plans

3 Select Digitizer gt Set Takeoff Area

4 Click each mark with the stylus pen as prompted

5 Verify the active area of the digitizer by looking at the image size located in the lower right corner of your screen

If you close the program before the takeoff is complete you will need to reestablish the takeoff area before you can add additional condition quantities

Electronic plans appear on your computer screen eliminating the need to set a takeoff area You simply drag your mouse across the conditions you wish to takeoff The conditions will be highlighted and quantities will be totaled instantly Electronic plans are available through a variety of services For information contact an On Center Software account manager

Section 5 Projects

28

Setting Scale for Specific Pages You may set the scale in each page view separately This will override the default scale setting in Project Properties for that page Setting the correct scale for the drawing before taking off quantities ensures accurate calculations Be careful to check the scale for each drawing in your project before doing takeoffs

1 Display the page you want to set select Edit gt Set Scale

2 Use the drop down arrow to select a scale that will be applied to that page

3 Click

OR

4 Access the pull-down scale settings on the Navigate toolbar

NOTE As you draw objects notice that the drawn object is similar in width to the object on your plans If it is not the scale set may not be correct

Calculating Scale You may calculate scale according to a known measurement between two points either with a digitizer or on electronic plans

1 Select Edit gt Calculate Scale using Image or Edit gt Calculate Scale using Digitizer

2 Follow the instructions in the related Calculate Scale dialog box You will be asked to click on the first and second points then to enter the dimension for that distance

3 The scale will be recalculated for the displayed page and the Scale display on the Navigate toolbar will show the new scale

Section 6

29

Conditions and Takeoff

This section will Draw Conditions to Takeoff Plan Quantities

What Zones will do to help your takeoff process

Discuss the ins and outs of Takeoffs

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

30

Creating Conditions

If you are starting a new project from scratch you will need to create conditions to takeoff quantities such as floor areas wall lengths and corner bead counts If you are using a template you will have several pre-designed conditions already listed on the Takeoff dock bar However you may want to change the characteristics of some conditions or create additional conditions for a particular project

1 Right Click within the Takeoff dock bar Select New gt Condition

Or

2 From the Takeoff dock bar Click (if the buttons are not showing right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select Show Buttons from the pop-up menu) The New Condition dialog appears

3 Select the condition type (Linear Area Count or Zone) from the pull-down menu accessed by the

down arrow next to the Type option

4 Press Tab or use the mouse (or stylus) to move to Name and enter a name for your condition

5 Specify the desired condition attributes See Condition Attributes for more detail

6 Click for condition to apply

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

31

Condition Attributes Each condition type will have related attributes to select or specify within the General and Advanced tabs of the New Condition dialog Once a condition has been used to takeoff a quantity from your plans certain attributes cannot be changed

All conditions allow the user to specify color and fill pattern for the object drawn

Linear Conditions

General Specify width and height by feet and inches Specify pitch in inches up to the nearest thousandth of an inch if applicable

Advanced Specify rounding for object quantities and droprun default length for electrical or plumbing drops at the ends of lines Select Connect to have lines connect at the corners where one line of the condition ends and another begins (and indicate Tolerance for the featurersquos activation as distance between the ends of two lines) Choose Trim to have lines automatically trim to a line being crossed Choose Curve to draw a curved line

Follow these examples for inputting feet and inches For 7 feet 6 inches type 706 for 13 feet 7 inches type 1307 For 20 feet type 2000

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

32

Area Conditions

General If needed you can specify the thickness (in inches) andor pitch (in inches)

Advanced Specify rounding for object quantities Choose to display an adjustable grid within the area and indicate matrix cell dimensions

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

33

Count Conditions

General

Specify height and indicate the size (in inches) and shape (square circle triangle rectangle or opening) of the count object as it will appear on screen

Advanced Count conditions have advanced attributes These options are available for all shapes except for openings

Zone Conditions Zones allow you to subdivide condition quantities making it easier to modify and complete jobs in phases They can be used at the end of a takeoff to isolate a group of condition quantities that are in different areas of the takeoff

Zones can also be used to break a takeoff into multi-phases and can even be used to isolate quantities while a job is in progress to group the amount of work that has been completed to date They can be applied to one or multiple pages in your plans automatically calculating the takeoff quantities for each zoned area

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

34

The zone feature is only available in Lite and Full Mode If you are in View Mode and would like

to use this feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade

Condition Notes A Note tab is provided for comments regarding the condition These notes will display on the Takeoff List report and will import into Quick Bid

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

35

Condition Results The Results tab of the New Condition is based on condition type Initial settings default to linear feet (LF) for linear conditions square feet (SF) for area conditions and count of items (EA) for count conditions and zones The first of the results fields will display for the condition items in the Takeoff dock bar area All results will display in worksheets and Takeoff List reports as well as in an Excel spreadsheet after being exported

Copying Conditions You may use the condition attributes from a condition yoursquove already created for any future conditions of the same type

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Click the Copy button from the toolbar

OR

3 Right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select copy

4 A new condition will appear in the list with the same condition attributes as the previous condition but with the quantities zeroed

Editing Conditions Once you have copied a condition you might want to change several attributes You can also edit an existing condition to fit any updated needs

1 Highlight the desired condition on the Takeoff dock bar

2 Click the Change button

OR

3 Double-click on the condition you wish to edit to bring up the Change Condition dialog

NOTE The Change Condition dialog differs from the New Condition dialog only in that if takeoffs

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

36

have been performed in your project with this condition you will not be able to change the type of condition or certain properties under the advanced tab of the dialog box

Deleting Conditions 1 Click on the condition in the Takeoff Dock bar area

2 Click the Delete button on the toolbar

OR

3 Right-click and select Delete from the pop-up menu

All takeoff associated with the deleted condition will be deleted immediately and permanently

Organizing Project Conditions Within your project you can create folders andor sub-folders for different types of conditions You may even want to create a folder containing conditions with reset values

To get started organizing your conditions make sure you are viewing the condition tree (right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select Show Tree)

Creating Folders and Sub-Folders 1 Right-click in the Takeoff Dock bar area

2 Select New gt Folder from the pop-up menu

Copying Folders

1 Click on the folder and click Copy on the toolbar

2 All copied conditions within the new folder will have values reset to zero

Renaming Folders

1 Click on the folder

2 Right-click and select Rename from the pop-up menu

3 Enter a name for your folder and click the Enter button

Changing Condition Order

You may move conditions up or down in the condition list of the Takeoff dock bar to suit your project needs

1 Select the condition you would like to move by clicking to highlight it

NOTE When you are ready to move the highlighted conditions be sure that you start

moving using the last condition chosen That condition will have a highlighted boarder

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

37

2 Drag and drop any the condition from one place to another in the list You may also move a condition to another folder on the list in this way

Drawing with Conditions Snap Angles Set up snap angles to prevent lines from appearing jagged Snap angles are commonly set at 15deg and shift snap angles at 0deg

1 Go to Tools gt Options Options dialog appears

2 Under the General tab make the desired settings

3 Click to save the settings As they are drawn lines will snap to the set degree

Drawing a Linear Object 1 Select a condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff dock bar

2 Move the cursor into the Image takeoff area of the screen you will see the cursor display as crosshairs

3 Click and hold left mouse button then drag mouse to draw a line

4 Release mouse button to set line

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

38

5 Repeat steps for further lines

Continuous Mode This feature allows you to draw an object that has connected lines

1 Click the icon from the Takeoff toolbar

OR

2 Go to Tools gt Continuous Mode

3 Follow steps 1-3 from Draw a Linear Object

4 Click at each point of intersection The object will be connected

5 Double-click after making the final point to set the lines

Drawing a Curve To draw a curved line the Curve option must be checked under the Advanced tab of the Condition dialog

1 Click where you want to begin the curve and drag in a straight line to the position for the other endpoint of the curve

2 Click on the line to select it Handles in the shapes of small squares will appear at either end of

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

39

the line and in the center of the line

3 Move the cursor over the center handles until the cursor becomes a two-way arrow

4 Click and drag in the direction of the curve bending the line as you move the cursor Release to set the curve (The line you began with will disappear)

Draw a circle by drawing two curved lines connected

Drawing an Area Object Area conditions are drawn similarly to continuous mode lines You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete your area takeoff

NOTE When drawing an area do not intersect the perimeter or line of the object you are drawing

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

3 The area will be filled with the pattern set for that condition

NOTE The simulated circle will be good enough for you to be able to make a bid

To create a circular area click from point to point with very short distances in between points simulating a circlersquos perimeter Double-click after setting the last point to set the area

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

40

Grid Options Grids give you an added advantage when installing materials such as tiles Use this feature to get a count for how many tiles are needed for an area

1 Double-click on an area condition in the Takeoff dock bar to open its Condition dialog

2 Click on the Advanced tab to show its options

3 Check the box next to Grid by clicking in it

4 Indicate the dimensions of the cell matrix in inches (For example 200 x 400)

5 Under Results tab choose each (EA) for one of the results fields This will tabulate a number of grid cells (including partial grid cells) in area

6 Click to save your settings

7 Use the Move Grid and Rotate Grid features in the Tools menu to manipulate the grid as desired

Grid Calculation

1 Go to Tools gt Options menu

1 Specify if On-Screen Takeoff automatically should Calculate Grid Position

2 If AreaGrid Size is selected On-Screen Takeoff will calculate the number of items needed to fill the grid based on grid demintions

3 Click to accept and close the dialog

To move a line at any angle (regardless of default setting) press the Shift key while moving the mouse

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

41

Backout Mode This feature allows you to take out part of an area and deduct that amount of square footage

1 Select Tools gt Backout Mode

2 Outline the are you want backed out as you would when drawing a regular area object (see Drawing an Area Object)

3 The outlined area will clear and quantities will be recalculated

NOTE The perimeter of the backout area will be added to the LF quantity for that condition

Drawing a Count Object Square triangle rectangle and circle shaped count objects can easily be placed on images

1 Select the condition

2 Click in the location where you want the object to appear

3 To place an opening-shaped count item like a door or window you must click over an existing linear object such as a wall

4 On the Results tab you can change the height properties to give you the result you need

5 If Backout is checked on the advanced tab for each count opening the opening-shaped count item will back out a corresponding section of the linear object

Opening shaped count items are sized at 3rsquo0rdquo by default

Drawing a Zone Zones are drawn in the same way as area objects and may be any polygonal shape You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete the zone perimeter

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

42

Selecting Objects

1 Use the Select Tool to select objects

You can also select all objects that correspond to a condition

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Right-click and choose Select All

3 All objects with this condition will be highlighted with squares as an outline

Moving and Resizing Objects Linear

1 To move or resize a linear object click anywhere on the line to select it

2 To move the line position your pointer over the center handles When the mouse is positioned over the handles you will see a two-way arrow You will only be able to move the line in the direction of the arrows

3 Drag the line to a new position

4 Clicking and dragging the handles on the ends of the line will allow you to lengthen or shorten your line

Area and Zone

1 To move an area object or zone in its entirety click and drag it to its new position

2 Grabbing a handle at a corner or intersection of the object will allow you to adjust and change its perimeter

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

43

Count 1 To move a square circle rectangle or triangle shaped count object click and drag

2 Click and drag an opening shaped count object along the length of the linear object to the desired position then release

NOTE An opening shaped count object may not be moved from its associated linear condition object however it may be moved up and down the length of the linear object

Layers On-Screen Takeoff allows you to sort and separate your takeoff objects within the same job and on the same page On-Screen Takeoff gives you this flexibility through the use of layers

By assigning different conditions to different layers (for example differentiating between floors ceilings and walls) you can choose to view all layers or turn off certain layers to display and print the remaining groups of conditions only You may also remove the background image of electronic plans add text and hot link symbols or print only your condition takeoffs

Layers are only available in Full Mode If you are in View or Lite Mode and would like to use this

feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade Default Layers

On-Screen Takeoff begins every project with three default layers Image Annotation and Default The Image layer holds the electronic plan files you may have in your project The Annotation layer possesses all text notations highlighting and hot links in the project The Default layer will appear in the Condition dialog when creating or editing a condition (listed in the takeoff dock bar) Conditions are assigned to the Default layer unless otherwise specified by the user

Creating Layers To assign a condition to a layer other than the default layer you must first create additional layers for your project

1 Select View gt Layers to open the Layers dialog

2 Click An unnamed layer will be added

3 Click within the empty box and type a name for your layer (for example Wall)

4 New layers are added as active layers The adjacent box under the Show column will be checked

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

44

Assigning a Layer to a Condition 1 Open the Condition dialog box by creating a new condition or editing an existing condition

2 Under the General tab click on the down arrow in the Layer field to display optional layers

3 Select the desired layer for the condition Only the Default layer and layers you have added will be displayed

4 Click

View and Hide Layers

1 Select View gt Layers

2 Under the Show column check the box to view or remove the check (by clicking on it) to hide the specific layer

3 Click to accept and close the Layers dialog

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

45

Assigning Text to a Layer When adding text to an image On-Screen Takeoff has the capability to assign the text to a specified layer

1 Select the Text Tool

2 Click at the point you want to place your text

3 Type in your text using the Enter key for line breaks

4 Click the drop down arrow next to the Layer field and select the desired layer

Section 7

46

Printing and Exporting

This section will

Printing options and procedures

Exporting data by copying and pasting

Exporting quantity results to Excel spreadsheets

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

47

Print Setup On-Screen Takeoff allows the user to print the image takeoff list and worksheet

1 Select File gt Print Setup The Print Setup dialog will open

2 Select a printer or leave the default selection listed (change from the default printer displayed by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the field)

3 Indicate page size and printer tray option (Source) Access page size options by clicking on the

down arrow at the right of the field

4 Choose Portrait or Landscape orientation

5 Click to accept and close the dialog

Printing Images The image area can include the electronic plans the takeoff objects added text and hot links To print a subset of these (for example just the takeoffs without the plans or the added text and hot link symbols) hide layers that you do not want to print (see Section 6 View and Hide Layers) When you are printing your images every page will show the scale of the takeoff you are printing

1 Click on the Image tab to display the area of your project

2 Select File gt Print (or Ctrl + P)

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

48

3 Select the desired view (What to print) and the Image Range

4 Click The second Print dialog will open

5 Change settings accordingly or click if you accept the default settings

Printing Takeoff Lists and Worksheets In Takeoff Lists and Worksheets you may hide columns to print only certain results or adjust column widths to fit the report within the page size selected

1 In Takeoff List or Worksheet view move your cursor to the right side of the columnrsquos title bar the cursor will display as a two-way arrow

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

49

2 Click and drag to adjust the width of the column Holding the mouse button you may

slide the title bar under the title bar to its left to hide the column completely

3 Select File gt Print or press Ctrl + P to access the Print dialog

4 Indicate desired printer and choose the number of copies

5 Click to print and close the dialog

When printing the condition list we suggest printing in landscape

To reset to the default column widths double-click on the right border of a column heading will reset the column to its right (or previously to its right before being hidden)

Print Preview 1 Select File gt Print Preview

2 Use and to vary your view 3 If viewing an image choose current full or scale view to see how it displays

4 For printed outputs that cover more than one page use and to view adjacent pages or click on the down arrow next to Page field and select the page you want displayed

Exporting Using the CopyPaste Feature You may copy all the data or sections from the worksheet and the takeoff list view in On-Screen Takeoff and paste it into another application When pasting into Excel the cell layout will be maintained

1 Highlight the areas you wish to paste Click and hold the left mouse button down as you drag the cursor over the area to be selected then releasing the mouse button

OR

2 Select the entire takeoff list quickly click on the left On-Screen Takeoff column header and hold and drag the cursor across the remaining column headings

The number of pages for the view selected will display in the lower left-hand corner The zoom percentage that applies to the view will be displayed in the lower right-hand corner next to page size of the drawing

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

50

3 In the worksheet view you may highlight rows by clicking on the numbered buttons to the left of each row clicking and dragging across column headings or clicking and dragging over individual cells in the worksheet

Click anywhere in the appropriate view to deselect the area

4 Once your selection is highlighted you may select Edit gt Copy or Ctrl C from the keyboard 5 On your monitor switch to the application into which you want to paste your selection 6 Select Edit gt Paste in the new application or simply press Ctrl + V to paste

The colored keys for conditions cannot be pasted

Using the Export Feature You may export condition quantities to specified cell location within an Excel worksheet file Cell target locations are assigned in the Results tab of the condition dialogs on the Export line relating to each quantity measurement type

On-Screen Takeoff will export takeoff quantity results for up to three different quantity types that you specify For instance you may want to know the number of square feet in a ceiling area as well as the number of linear feet in its perimeter

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

51

1 Bring up the Condition dialog by double-clicking on a condition in the takeoff dock bar or by

selecting the condition and clicking

2 Click on the Results tab to access its fields The default quantities for the condition type will display

3 For each results field click on the arrow to access the pull-down menu and select the appropriate quantity (for example SF LF EA etchellip)

4 Have your Excel spreadsheet opened and saved in a file

5 Specify the Excel spreadsheet cell locations where you want the results to go

6 For a cell in the first sheet of your spreadsheet type in the cell address (eg a1) Case is not important

7 For a cell on a successive sheet of your spreadsheet type in sheet the number followed by a comma and the cell address without any spaces (eg sheet2a1) Case is not important

8 Click

9 Select File gt Export gt Condition Qty to Excel

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

52

10 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

11 Click to export On-Screen Takeoff results to specified cell locations in the Excel file When you return to the Excel application you will see the values have been added to the specified cell locations in your spreadsheet

12 Save your Excel file

Exporting Worksheet to Excel

1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 From On-Screen Takeoff Select File gt Export gt Worksheet to Excel

4 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

5 Click When you return to the Excel application you will see the values from the Worksheet Tab have been added to your spreadsheet

6 Save your Excel file

Exporting Takeoff to CVS 1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 Click the Takeoff Tab in the project you want to export the information

4 Select File gt Export gt Takeoff to CSV

5 Browse to the location of the CSV spreadsheet file click file to select it

6 Click the Save

NOTE CSV files can be opened in Excel Lotus Access etc One may consider this option more of a ldquodumprdquo into a file

The Excel application must be active (it may be minimized on the application bar) with the target spreadsheet open in the application Otherwise an error will occur with the export operation that will affect both the On-Screen Takeofftrade file and the Excel spreadsheet

Section 8

53

Advanced Features

This section will

Some special features of working with condition objects in the takeoff area

Details of advanced options for conditions

Advanced features of the Project Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

54

Features to Use with Objects Roping Feature You can move copy or delete using this feature Using the Select tool (the pointer) you may select several objects at once by clicking and dragging an outline around the objects then releasing the mouse button Roping may select either objects completely within the outlined area (inclusive) or objects both within and touched by the outlined area (touching) Specify your roping preference under Tools gt Options

1 Click and hold the mouse button at a point on the screen near the objects to be selected and drag to surround the objects with an outline

2 Release the mouse button The objects will be selected

3 You may now

Move the group around on the page by clicking within the group dragging the mouse and releasing the button to place the objects

Delete the group of objects by clicking the Delete key or

Copy and paste by pressing Ctrl C to copy the group then Ctrl V to paste it The pasted copy of the grouped objects will appear slightly offset from the original objects

Section 8 Advanced Features

55

Applying a DropRun Count

Use the droprun feature when calculating quantities to take into account the drop or run of a linear condition such as electrical lines or plumbing pipes Drop or run lengths may be added separately to any linear condition on screen while a default droprun length may be indicated for a condition as a whole

1 Select the desired linear condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff Dock bar

2 Click the Change button in the toolbar to open the Change Condition dialog

3 Click the Advanced tab to access the advanced options and click inside the DropRun check box

4 Enter a default length to be applied to all of this condition Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches) You can leave the length blank and manually enter drop run on each segment drawn

5 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog

Edit DropRun Count

1 With the related linear condition in the Takeoff Dock bar highlighted or with the pointer tool selected

2 click on the desired linear object in the image takeoff area The Count button will become active

3 Click on the Count button (alternatively select Tools gt Count) The default droprun amount will show in the pop-up Count dialog (Default length will be zero if droprun has not been selected in this conditionrsquos properties)

4 Type in the desired length Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches)

5 Click the OK button The additional amount will be reflected in the corresponding quantity The new DropRun count will apply only to the object edited

Adding Text in Image View

On-Screen Takeoff allows you to place text comments around your quantity takeoffs that may be printed along with plan images and objects Text is automatically placed within the Annotation Layer (that includes text and hot links)

1 To place text on the image select the Text Tool and click at the point you want to place your text opening a text box

2 Type in your information clicking Enter for line breaks

3 When you are finished click the OK button to exit the text box

4 To reposition text simply click on the text (with the Text Tool active) to select it

5 Move the cursor over the text the cursor will now display as a four-way arrow

6 Click and drag the mouse to position the text as desired

Section 8 Advanced Features

56

1 To edit existing text use the Text Tool to double-click on the text to open the editing box

2 Enter additional text or use the Backspace key to delete text as necessary

Formatting Text Once created you may format the font size type style and color of your text

1 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Font or click on the Font button in the Takeoff Toolbar

2 Select the desired features (color options are disabled) and click the OK button

3 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Color or click on the Color button in the Takeoff Toolbar The Color dialog will open

4 Click on a color in the Basic Color palette or create a color and add to the Custom Colors palette (Be sure to click on the color in the Custom Colors palette to select it)

5 Click the OK button

Object Properties

Linear Objects

Linear objects may be set to connect at corners

A linear object may be set to trim automatically when crossing another linear object (Check the trim option under the advanced tab of the Condition dialog)

When you move a connected linear object objects automatically move and resize connected lines accordingly (quantities are then recalculated)

This feature requires that the connected linear object be moved using the center handles (does not apply when resizing the line from the ends)

Objects constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

Objects are measured from centerline to centerline

Section 8 Advanced Features

57

Area Objects When drawing an area use your escape key to undo the last line drawn You may reverse your

drawing of an area using the escape key

The area will not fill with color and pattern until the user double-clicks after the last line is set

Lines drawn to delineate an area object constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

After selecting an area to move or adjust position the mouse in the center to move the entire area position the mouse at the sides or corners to adjust the perimeter

Count Objects

All count objects are quantified by the physical number of objects per page and reported as EA for the UOM The quantity for the current Image View is (displayed in the Condition List) and the total quantity in your project is displayed in the Takeoff View and Worksheet View)

Square circle rectangle and triangle shaped count objects do not displace or subtract from other object quantities when placed on top of them However on the Advanced Tab for the count condition a connect property can be set (this is a check box) so that when a count object of this shape is put on top of a Linear type takeoff object it will move with the linear if said linear is moved

An opened-shaped count object must be placed within a linear object Opening shaped count objects may also be measured by linear foot or linear yard (EA SF and SY are also options) Opening shaped count items default to a width of 3rsquo 0rdquo at the time of creation This size can be changed The small medium and large size are not options on this type of condition anymore Check Backout on the Advanced tab for each Count object back out the footage (or yardage) of opening-shaped count objects in which they are placed

NOTE In order to see this Backout functionality (in quantity) for SY or SF deductions at least one of the

results for the Linear(s) this object will be placed on must be set to SY or SF and the count object must have a height quantity

Advanced Features of Conditions The Round Feature Under the Advanced tab of the linear and area Condition dialogues you may specify quantity rounding (in inches) For linear objects rounding applies to each linear object drawn For area objects rounding will apply to each segment of the area perimeter adjusting the perimeter and area calculations For example With a linear condition entering 12 in the Round field will round up each related linear object to the nearest 12 inches or one foot With this setting two walls of 1 4 would each round to 2 0 totaling 4 0

NOTE In the Takeoff Dock bar condition list and in the On-Screen Takeoff reports quantities will be displayed in whole numbers rounded up to the nearest foot However calculations are based on true quantities without rounding unless the Round Feature is engaged

Pitch Pitch may apply either to linear or area conditions It is measured in rise per linear foot Entering 12 indicates a 12 rise per 12 of linear distance (a pitch of 12 over 12) or an angle of 45deg

Section 8 Advanced Features

58

Advanced Features of Project Properties Selecting Multiple Pages

1 Select a single page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry

2 Drag the cursor down the column of numbers to select consecutive pages

3 Click on the blank button at the top of this column to select all pages in the Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

59

Changing Image Assigned to a Drawing 1 Select the page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry 2 Click the Change Image button The Change Image dialog box will appear

3 Navigate to the desired file and select by clicking on it

4 Click the Open button The electronic file assigned to the page will have been changed to reflect the new file choice

Changing Image File Path 1 Select pages as described above

2 Choose Change Folder

3 In the Change Folder dialog navigate to the appropriate folder

4 Click the OK button The file path will have been changed for the selected page entries

Delete a Page from Project Properties 1 Select the page you want to delete by clicking on its associated number (in the gray box at the

left of the entry)

2 Choose Delete Page

All Takeoff on the page will be deleted immediately and permanently

Section 8 Advanced Features

60

Advanced Features of Tool Options

Calculation Method On-Screen Takeoff has built-in calculation options to allow for faster work and faster saves until your takeoff is complete Calculation options are found by selecting Tools gt Options then clicking on the Calculation tab

Calculation method can be set to Automatic Automatic except Grids and Manual Manual will allow the program to operate more quickly while Automatic or Automatic except Grids allows the user to see quantity changes as takeoffs are made

In any mode you may press F9 to recalculate quantities for the On-Screen Takeoff current totals

Configuration Tab

When the ldquoPage Label (A01)rdquo radial button is chosen On-Screen Takeoff puts the numbered label on all the pages of in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar If the Page Descriptionrdquo radial button is chosen then a description of what takeoff is on that specific page will be shown in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar

This section of the configuration tab gives you options on how you want to export your information When the ldquoFolderSubfolder Namesrdquo radial button is chosen than on your file that you are exporting to will have all the conditions folders and subfolders In the Delimiter box you can choose the symbol that is needed to separate the information you are exporting Some files need semicolons () or colons () to make sure the information comes exported in is separated it the appropriate places

Section 8 Advanced Features

61

In previous versions of On-Screen Takeoff there are views that users need to have in order for them to display their information By either choosing ldquoOST 1xrdquo or ldquoOST 2xrdquo it will let the program know you want your columns of information exported in that specific format

When you have the Confirm Deletions radial button of ldquoYesrdquo chosen than every time you delete anything you will get a dialog box confirming your intentions of deletion

While working with your takeoff you have a choice to either view the legend of your conditions or hide it Choose whichever radial button that suits your needs

For those who prefer to use the Enter key to navigate in dialog boxes this option is just for that

Font Tab The Font tab is designed for you to make your own look and feel for the application At the bottom of this tab it will show you sample of the fonts and colors you have chosen

Renaming the Current Page You may change the name of the current page in the takeoff area of On-Screen Takeoff by selecting Edit gt Rename Page

This opens the Name Page dialog and you may simply type in a new name and click the Enter button The new name for the file will be reflected on the title bar for the page and in Project Properties

You also may access the Rename Page function by right-clicking in the takeoff area while in Image View and selecting the option from the pop-up menu that appears

Section 9

62

Saving and Exiting

This section will

Explain how to save projects

Show you how to safely exit the program

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

63

Saving Your Project

1 Select File gt Save 2 If your project has not previously been saved a Save dialog box will open to allow you to name

the file and choose the directory and folder in which to save your file 3 Once saved File gt Save will simply save the current version of the file

OR

4 Select File gt Save As then type in a new name for the file and save to the desired file path

The Auto-save Feature With the Auto-save feature On-Screen Takeoff automatically backs up your open project You may choose to have more than one level of backup files The first backup copy will have the extension b00 and successive files will be b01 b02 and so on If you have designated four levels of backup files after the fourth backup copy has been created (b03) the next file will be saved over the file with extension b00 Further backup saves will then rotate through the four backup files in the same way

1 Select Tools gt Options 2 In the Auto-save area (under the General tab) select the frequency of backup file creation (in

minutes) and the number of levels for the feature 3 You also may disengage the feature by clicking in the check box to clear it

The Auto-save feature automatically saves backup copies to the directory of the current project If you are working from a write-protected area such as a CD-ROM On-Screen Takeoff will place backup files in the On-Screen Takeoff folder

Exiting When you are finished using On-Screen Takeoff it is very easy to exit Exiting is very important because of security reasons If someone were to use your computer they could enter the application and view and manipulate information

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

64

On-Screen Takeoff closes the open project when you open another or create a new project or when you exit the program

1 Select File gt Exit

OR

2 You also may click at the upper right-hand corner of the application to exit

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

65

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer When you get your digitizer from GTCO you will need to connect it to your computer Follow the instructions outlined below to do this

Note For rollup digitizers the metal bar must be oriented to the top or right hand side

Connecting the Digitizer 1 Lay the digitizer out flat 2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer 3 Plug in the power adapter 4 Plug the interface (IO) cable into the digitizer 5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into an open serial port on computer

Note GTCO Technical support phone number is 410-381-6688 The electronic manual (on diskette) from GTCO contains more detailed installation and operation instructions for the GTCO digitizer model you have

Installing other Digitizer Drivers If you are using a GTCO Digitizer you will need to install the GTCO TabletWorks Drivers

If you are using a Digitizer not supported by GTCO Tablet Works 10 please contact the manufacturer of your digitizer for assistance with installation

Installing GTCO TabletWorks Drivers 1 Insert the On Center CD into the CD-ROM drive The CD Startup screen will open 2 Click on Install Software 3 Select Additional Software and Drivers 4 Select Digitizer Driver 5 Follow the instructions for installing TabletWorks 10

Adhering the Template The template is a small plastic sticker used to enable mouse function when using the digitizer with On-Screen Takeoff Place your template on your digitizer We suggest placing it in the bottom right corner of the digitizer about one inch inside the takeoff area

Note You may either peel off the back of the template and use the adhesive surface or you can tape the template down

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

66

Testing the Digitizer Drivers Before running OST you may test the digitizer by moving the stylus around on the digitizer pad it should move the mouse cursor (if mouse emulation is enabled)

If the digitizer does not move the mouse cursor on the screen

The superset codes may need to be reset Reset the superset codes by touching on the border of the digitizer with the stylus The digitizer should beep several times

The digitizer may not be communicating with the computer Be sure the COM port selected is correct Be sure the COM port selected is correct If you are not able to get the digitizer to move the mouse cursor you need to call GTCO technical support for help

Note The Mouse Emulation is not required for On-Screen Takeoff to work properly It is used only for the Template functionality if the digitizer is moving the cursor the wrong direction (up instead of sideways or vice-versa)

Click the L-shaped arrow symbol on the digitizer with the stylus

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

67

Appendix II Toolbar Items Main Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

68

Tool Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

69

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

70

Navigate Toolbar (Continued)

Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

71

Takeoff Toolbar (Continued)

Image Toolbar

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

72

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

This section will detail how to load plans from a F W Dodge CD-ROM into an On-Screen Takeoff project file ready for takeoffs

Dodge files may be added to the Project Properties dialog However loading the files in that way will load the files by number rather than name description If you want to load one page only from your Dodge CD You will have to rename the page to display the name rather than number of the file

To load plan files from a Dodge CD so that the files load sequentially by file number but are displayed by name rather than by number within your project follow the instructions below

Opening a Dodge project from a CD-ROM 1 Insert the CD into the drive 2 Choose File gt Custom 3 Choose Dodge Plans Project (plansdat) as the file type 4 Select the appropriate file type by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the Files of type

field 5 In the Look in field access your drive paths by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the

field then

Navigate to your CD-ROM drive Open the data folder and Open the Projects folder

6 Select the desired project and open its folder 7 Open the plansdat file 8 All the images will come in sequenced correctly for that job along with the full descriptions

(names) of each page If there is not a plans folder in the project folder then plans do not exist for that project on the CD Opening the plansdat file will yield an empty project

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

73

Appendix IV Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer The On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer is a limited version of On Center Softwarersquos commercial takeoff software If your status bar located at the very bottom of the main window says View Mode in the lower left-hand corner then you are using the Plan Viewer You can use the plan viewer to

View CD-based amp converted CAD drawings

View a previously created OST file and associated drawings

Download electronic plans online

Navigate through drawings

Quickly Takeoff linearsareas and counts

Zoom in to view the plan better

Print drawings directly from the viewer

Viewing an On-Screen Takeoff Project File

1 To open an OST file that was previously created with of On-Screen Takeoff 2 Select File gt Open 3 An Open dialog will appear if you do not see the OST file you are looking for select the

Look In drop down arrow 4 A drop down menu will appear listing the various folders drives and mapped drives located

on your computer select the correct drive or folder location and continue to browse to the location of your OST file

5 When you see your OST file double-click it to open it 6 Any takeoff and drawings should appear on the Image tab view

If you do not see the drawings but do see the colored takeoff layer the drawings may

not be located in the same place they were originally saved at Go to File gt Project Properties and check the Image File path for each listed page If the image file path is pointing to a CD drive make sure the CD is inside the CR-ROM

Downloading Electronic Plans If your Online Plan Service provides a special file format (OSX) required to use this feature of our plan viewer you can immediately downloaded all electronic plans of a project directly from our viewer

Most Plan Room web sites will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff when a request to download plans is made Your particular Plan Room may differ in operation so please contact the provider directly with questions on using the site

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

74

When you request to download or open a project file from a Plan Room you will usually have the open to open or save an OSX file Choosing open will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff Alternately you may choose to save the file to a local hard drive After you have saved the file either double-click it to launch On-Screen Takeoff or open the OSX file using On-Screen Takeoff by clicking File then Open and locating the file on your hard drive You will need to change the file type to OSX

After the OSX file is opened you will see an additional tab appear in the Conditions List window called Pages

The Pages tab shows the hierarchy of your project Gray file icons represent pages that have not been downloaded and blue icons represents pages that have been downloaded

To download a page simply double-click the page icon

If you wish to select a group of pages to download you can use the Ctrl or Shift key to multiple select them then click the Download button

If you wish to download all pages at once click the Download All button

Downloaded pages will now appear in the Project Properties dialog in the same order in which they appear in the Pages tab

Creating Quick Takeoffs With On-Screen Takeoff you can create quick takeoffs to measure quantities even if you dont have the full version of our program However using the Quick Takeoff functionality shows you just a fraction of what the full version can do

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar is located at the top of the image view It has three buttons designated for three types of takeoffs Linear Area and Count The Quantity drop down list will show secondary quantities for Linears and Areas The Units drop down allows you to select how you want your quantities displayed Feet Inches Yards Millimeters and Meters

NOTE Every time change the type of takeoff you are performing (switching from Area to Linear for example) the previous quantities and takeoff objects will disappear They will also disappear when you changes pages

NOTE You can use the Dimension Tool to basically measure the distance between two points or linears The distance will display on the status bar at the bottom of the application

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

75

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions General

Where is On-Screen Takeoff installed on my computer

Typically it is installed in CProgram FilesOn-Screen Takeoff

In Explorer how do I recognize On-Screen Takeoff file types

On-Screen Takeoff data is stored in a single file per job lsquojob name OSTrsquo On-Screen Takeoff templates are stored as lsquotemplate nameTPOrsquo

Can only one project at a time be open

Yes For that reason opening another project automatically closes the project on screen You will be asked to save any changes

Is only one scale allowed per page What about on drawings that have multiple detail sections on a page and each of those drawings have different scales

Yes For pages with drawings of different scales copy the drawing to another project page and set the appropriate scale

I cannot perform backout on an area that is along a linear

As a workaround use the On-Screen Takeoff layers feature to help you with this issue Electronic Images

How do I start a project from drawings that have been scanned and written to a CD-ROM

Open a new project Select File gt Project Properties and select Auto Add Navigate to your CD and the appropriate folder and select any image file in that location Click Open All files in the location will load into your project Recommended that images are copied from CD to hard drive for performance

If I get a disk of drawings in AutoCAD format (R13 or R14) can I read them in On-Screen Takeoff

Yes On-Screen Takeoff now reads DWG DXF and many other format that are saved with AutoCAD

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

76

When I click on the all pages button what is supposed to happen Currently nothing seems to change when I click on that button

The All Pages button is used to apply the Darken and Enhance Plans feature to all pages in the project (as opposed to only the current page on screen)

Is there a way to deduct a large skylight from an area condition

Yes with the related area condition selected in the Takeoff Dock bar unselect the Backout button on the Takeoff Toolbar then draw the Backout area The area quantity will be deducted from the related condition object and the linear measurement of the Backout perimeter will be added

Digitizer Issues

How do I connect a Digitizer to the computer

See Appendix I Connecting a Digitizer

The Place Template menu choice is disabled

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or the digitizer or the digitzer drivers are not installed

It wonrsquot let me select the Set Takeoff Area menu choice

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or no job is open a digitizer is not installed or the drivers are not installed

The digitizer stylus is not moving the cursor or crosshairs

Click S-0-1 superset on the digitizer

How do I convert my old GTCO Digitizer to work with On- Screen Takeofftrade

Call GTCO and they may be able to reconfigure your digitizer to be compatible with On-Screen Takeoff

Printing Issues Which Printers work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible printers include On-Screen Takeoff Hewlett Packard Epson and Canon printers If you are having printer difficulties please contact support and specify the type of printer along with other pertinent information Contact support at wwwoncentercomsupport or email supportoncentercom

Which Plotters work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible Plotters include Hewlett Packard DesignJet plotters and the EnCAD Cadjet II If you are having plotter difficulties please contact support and specify the type of plotter concerned

ViewingDisplay I can no longer see my condition list How do I get it back

The toolbars and Dock bars can be turned on and off through the View gt Toolbars menu options

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

77

This is also accessible by right-clicking in the toolbar area and selecting (or deselecting) a toolbar listed

I cannot view my folders in the condition list

Right-click in the Takeoff Dock barcondition list area and select Show Tree to display your folders

My Status Bar reads Viewer Mode and I am unable to draw conditions

On-Screen Takeoff needs to be Authorized Or you need to purchase an upgrade Click the Perform Advanced Takeoff button on the main toolbar

I hid a Dock bar and when I selected to view it again it appeared alongside the other Dock

bar instead of stacked on top of it How do I fix it

Pick up the Dock bar by clicking on the bar at the top and continuing to hold down the mouse button drag the Dock bar over the other one It will resize and appear stacked with the other

When I open image files from a CD the images are all upside down How do I get them right

side up

To flip pages from top to bottom follow the steps below 1 Click the All Pages button on the Image Toolbar (All Pages is engaged when the button

is not clicked) 2 Click the Flip Horizontal button on the Image Toolbar 3 Click the All Pages button again to disengage

Templates How do I create a Template

Follow the steps below 1 Create a typical project 2 Choose File gt Save As 3 Choose On-Screen Takeoff Template Files as the file type to save 4 Name the file This will save all of the condition setups as well as the layers for the

project

How do I create a new project from a template

Follow the steps below 1 Choose File gt New 2 Select a template from those listed in the New dialog This will open a new project with

conditions and layers saved from a previous project but no pages or takeoff

78

INDEX

Area Conditions 32

Area Objects 57

Auto Scrolling 20

Auto-save 63

Backout Mode 41

Calculation Method 60

Conditions 29

Configuration 60

Contents Tab 6

Continuous Mode 38

Count Conditions 33

Count Objects 57

Digitizer 10 65 76

Docking Toolbars 13

Dodge CD 72

Drawing 27 37

DropRun Count 55

Environment 18

Exiting 63

Exporting 49

Features 16

Font 61

Frequently Asked Questions 75

Grid 40

Help File 5

Hiding Toolbars 13

Hot Links 21

Image 19 59

Image files 9

Image Toolbar 12 71

Images 75

Index Tab 6

Layers 43

Linear Conditions 31

Linear Objects 56

Main Toolbar 12 67

Menus 14

Moving Toolbars 13

Navigate Toolbar 12 69

Navigating 20

On-Screen Takeofftrade 2

Page 59 61

Pages 20 25 28

Plan Viewer 73

Plans 26

Printing 47 76

Project Properties 25

Projects 22

Quick Start Video 18

Resizing Toolbars 13

Roping 54

Saving 63

Scale 28

Search Tab 7

Selecting Objects 42

Setup 8

Start On-Screen Takeofftrade 17

System Requirements 9

Takeoff 19 27

Takeoff Toolbar 70 71

Takeoff Toolbar 12

Template Files 23

TIF (Group4) 9

Tool Toolbar 12 68

Toolbar 67

Toolbars 12

View Toolbar 12 69

Viewing Toolbars 12

Worksheet 20

Zone Conditions 33

Zoom Toolbar 12 69

  • On-Screen Takeoff Lite
  • Table of Contents
  • Section 1 - Introduction
  • Section 2 - Setup
  • Section 3 - Toolbars and Menus
  • Section 4 - Features
  • Section 5 - Projects
  • Section 6 - Conditions and Takeoff
  • Section 7 - Printing and Exporting
  • Section 8 - Advanced Features
  • Section 9 - Saving and Exiting
  • Appendix I - Installing Your Digitizer
  • Appendix II - Toolbar Items
  • Appendix III - Loading Plans from a Dodge CD
  • Appendix IV - Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer
  • Appendix V - Frequently Asked Questions
  • Index

Section 3 Toolbars and Menus

12

Toolbars On-Screen Takeoff is equipped with several helpful toolbars for application efficiency See Appendix II Toolbar Item` Details for a detailed description of each toolbar item Individually the toolbars may be displayed moved docked reshaped or hidden from view You can also create costume toolbars to fit your needs

Main Toolbar

Tool Toolbar

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Takeoff Toolbar

Image Toolbar Viewing Toolbars Toolbars are displayed on the screen and will be consistent on each tab or page (Some toolbars or toolbar items will be in an inactive state if they donrsquot have a supporting element in the application)

1 Select View gt Toolbars and select the appropriate toolbar name

OR

2 Right-click on a toolbar region of the screen

3 Check the toolbars you want to display

Section 3 Toolbars and Menus

13

Moving Toolbars The toolbars may be positioned anywhere on the screen you wish This feature is provided to allow the flexibility for positioning the toolbars so they are out of your way yet handy for use

1 Click on an edge of the toolbar holding down the mouse button drag it to its new position

2 Release the mouse button to set it in place

NOTE If the toolbar is dropped anywhere other than a screen edge it will become free floating This feature is especially handy when using multiple monitors

Docking Toolbars The toolbars can be docked to any of the screen edges

1 Click on the title bar of an undocked toolbar

2 Drag the toolbar to any location on the screen

Hiding Toolbars

1 Select View gt Toolbars and select the toolbar you wish to remove from the screen

2 Right-click on the toolbar or dock bar areas

3 A floating toolbar can be closed by clicking on the in the upper right corner of the toolbar

Resizing Toolbars Only undocked (floating) toolbars may be resized

1 Position the mouse pointer over an edge

2 Click and drag

3 The toolbar can be resized as desired

Customizing the Toolbars You may rearrange or delete buttons within a toolbarrsquos display or you may move buttons from one toolbar to another If you find that you use a few tools over and over you may want to group them within a single toolbar for convenience On-Screen Takeoff gives you the flexibility to customize your takeoff environment

1 Select Tools gt Customize The Customize dialog will open

2 With the dialog open click on a toolbar button and drag buttons from one toolbar to another or a new location within the same toolbar

3 To add a button without altering another toolbar click on the Commands tab of the Customize dialog and drag the appropriate symbol from the Buttons section to a toolbar

4 To remove a button drag it to within the takeoff area of the application

Section 3 Toolbars and Menus

14

Menus

Section 3 Toolbars and Menus

15

Digitizer Menu

Section 4

16

Features

This section will

Show you how open On-Screen Takeoff

Describe the On-Screen Takeoff environment

Teach you how to navigate pages

Section 4 Features

17

Start On-Screen Takeoff

1 On your desktop double-click your On-Screen Takeoff icon

2 The application will open

OR

3 Left-click on the Start button on your computerrsquos toolbar

4 Scroll up to Programs gt On Center Software

5 Highlight On-Screen Takeoff and click On-Screen Takeoff will open On-Screen Takeoff opens to an untitled blank project The Image view of the screen will be a blank page

Two blank dock bars the Pan dock bar and the Takeoff dock bar appear at the left side of the screen Along the bottom the Status bar displays user status or context-sensitive messages as well as paper size and current zoom percentage of the plan sheet on screen The menu bar and several task specific toolbars are located at the top of the screen

NOTE All toolbars and dock bars may be accessed to view or hide through View gt Toolbars on the menu bar

Section 4 Features

18

Quick Start Video When On-Screen Takeoff opens you will be given an option to watch the Quick Start video (recommended) or start the program without watching the video

The 20 minute video will demonstrate key program functionality and allow you to view application instruction for enhanced learning

If you would like to watch the video click If you prefer to get started without

the video click If you have already viewed the video click the lsquoDo not show this message againrsquo box to prevent this dialog from appearing each time you open the program

NOTE If you decide later that you would like to watch the Quick Start video go to Help gt Watch

Quick Start Videos

On-Screen Takeoff Environment The On-Screen Takeoff environment acts like your drafting table allowing you to work on several sheets of plans at once and to reference at a glance the entire drawing and your position on that drawing while giving you the power of a computer to track analyze print and export your takeoff quantities and plans

The screen is bordered at the top by the Menu bar with pull-down menus and at the bottom by the Status bar which indicates current user status plan page size and current zoom percentage of page The largest portion of the application screen will be your takeoff area bounded on the left (by default) by two dock bars and on the top by several toolbars

In the takeoff area you may view your project plans (images) andor takeoff objects the takeoff list with quantities the worksheet or a legend of your condition list

The main window of On-Screen Takeoff has three tabs located at the bottom left allowing for quick change between Image Takeoff or Worksheet views Select the desired view option on the toolbar and it will automatically open on your screen

Section 4 Features

19

Image View

This view shows the plan file andor takeoff conditions drawn from your plans

Takeoff View This view displays the height if applicable and quantity breakdowns of your conditions according to result types indicated (eg linear feet square feet or count of items) for zones pages and the project as a whole It also displays notes per condition

Section 4 Features

20

Worksheet View This view displays the condition and quantity in units of measure specified in the first results field of the Results tab in the Condition dialog and allows the user to enter amounts for material labor and subcontractor takeoffs

NOTE When in the Worksheet view tab out the field then save This is keep all the values saved

Navigating On-Screen Takeoff

Auto Scrolling When creating linear areas or zones On-Screen Takeoff will automatically scroll the image view when necessary It will move as your mouse or digitizer moves beyond the edge of the current view

Changing Pages

1 Select View gt Next Page Previous Page or Go To Page (specify page number for the Go to Page option)

2 You may also select the corresponding arrows for these options from the Navigate Toolbar The

drop down arrow in the Page field will list the pages The and arrows will take you to the

previous or next page The and arrows will take you to the first or last page

OR

Section 4 Features

21

3 Or press Ctrl G for the Go To Page dialog

Hot Links Hot links allow you to move quickly from one drawing to the pertinent area of another drawing A hot link is handy when viewing enlarged areas of a page and needing the ability to jump back to a reference page

1 Select Tools gt Hot Link

OR

2 Click from the Tools Toolbar

3 Click on the page where you want to set the link The Hot Link dialog will open

4 Using the current page display on the Navigate Toolbar access the pull-down menu of pages by

clicking on the arrow at the right

5 Select the page for your link (You may also choose View gt Go to Page and select by page number)

6 Manipulate the view using the zoom tool and the scroll bars

7 Click

8 After joining a hot link to another page the hot link arrows in the Navigation Toolbar will become active

9 Move a hot link to another location on the page by clicking then click and drag the hot link image anywhere on the page

Section 5

22

Projects

This section will

Help you create settings important to your projects

Explain how On-Screen Takeoff works with your electronic or paper plans

Section 5 Projects

23

Project Template Files You can begin your project with a template Templates allow you to take advantage of conditions and settings used with previous projects

On-Screen Takeoff templates contain condition lists and established layer separations from previous projects you have created You may also use the sample templates provided with On-Screen Takeoff as a great starting point All aspects of the templates may be adjusted for a new project

1 Select File gt New and click the OK button

2 From the New dialog box choose the template that best fits your project

3 The conditions for this template will appear in the Takeoff Dock bar and the Project Properties dialog will open asking for further information

4 Use File gt Save or File gt Save As to rename and save your new project

Saving a Project as a Template File You can save your condition properties and layers as a template for future projects

1 Select File gt Save As

2 Enter a name for your template and select On-Screen Takeoff Template Files (tpo) from the Save As type field of the dialog (click on the down arrow to select)

3 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog Modifying a Template File Follow these steps to modify an existing template file if you need to change or add conditions andor layers

1 Select File gt Open

2 Navigate to your Projects directory

3 In the File Type drop-down select On-Screen Takeoff Template files (tpo)

4 Choose the On-Screen Takeoff template file you would like to modify and click the OK button

5 Make appropriate changes

6 Save and close file

The On-Screen Takeoff template files cannot save takeoff information

Section 5 Projects

24

Opening an Existing Project File 1 Select File gt Open

2 Navigate to the desired file location

3 Click the Open button

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask

you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Creating a New Project

1 Select File gt New

2 For a blank untitled project click

3 At this point the Project Properties dialog will pop-up for more information about your takeoff

NOTE The following are important to keep in mind when beginning a new project

At the start of your project fill out the Project Properties settings to establish the name for all printed output from your project set the default page size and scale for your plans number and names of different pages within the project and locations of electronic drawings

Scale settings can significantly affect quantity outcomes Be sure to set the scale for each page of drawings before beginning condition takeoffs

When using a digitizer remember to make a mark with a pen or pencil in the upper left and lower right corners of the first sheet of the paper plans to delineate the takeoff area for that sheet You can then set the takeoff area on On-Screen Takeoff using your marks

Save your project before you begin taking off any conditions On-Screen Takeoff will write a back-up file using the same file name

Remember the Undo feature If you make a mistake select Edit gt Undo and reverse the process step by step

Section 5 Projects

25

Project Properties

You can either set your Project Properties when you create a new takeoff or once your project file is saved under the appropriate name

1 Select File gt Project Properties the Project Properties dialog box will appear

2 Type in the name of your project to appear on printouts Use the backspace andor delete keys to edit the name as necessary

3 Press the Tab key to move to the Default Image Size option or click within the Image Size box You may click on the arrow at the right for the pull-down menu of page size options or you can use the down-arrow key on your keyboard to scroll through the list to the appropriate selection

4 Press the Tab key to move to the Default Scale option Select a scale by using the drop down arrow If your scale is metric you will need to click in the box next to Metric to convert to that measurement

5 Establish the number of pages for your project plans And load image files See Adding Pages to

Your Project

Adding Pages to Projects Individual Electronic Plans

1 Click on in the Project Properties dialog

2 In the Add Images dialog use the drop down arrow to navigate to the appropriate directory and folder containing your image

3 Select the file so that it displays in the File name field then click The file will display by name and path in the Image File field in Project Properties dialog

4 Click to accept and your project will automatically open

5 Save your project with the new settings by selecting File gt Save

Section 5 Projects

26

Electronic plans scanned from blueprints (as opposed to blue lines) will display as white lines on a black background and are difficult to read on your computer screen Select Image gt Invert and the colors will invert to black on white

You may have noticed the Page column in the Project Properties dialog Generally plan images occupy one page and 1 will be listed in the column indicating Page 1 of your plan file If you import a multi-page TIF a plan file containing more than one page of plans they will import as separate pages and each successive page will be indicated under the Page column as 1 2 3 etc of the plan file

Group of Electronic Plans You may add all the electronic plan files from a particular source (for example from a CD) by using the Auto Add feature

1 Click the button in the Project Properties dialog

2 Browse until you find the appropriate directory and folder containing your plan images

3 Click on any file displayed within your target folder so that the file name appears in the File name box of the Auto Add dialog

4 Click The image paths and file names will be recorded into the project properties arranged alphabetically

5 Click to accept your choices and your project will automatically open

6 Save your project with the new settings by selecting File gt Save

To load Dodge Plans into your Project Properties see Appendix IIi Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

Paper Plans On-Screen Takeoff makes it easy for Full Mode users to perform quantity takeoffs from paper plans using a digitizer

1 Add pages by clicking until you have the number of pages initially in the project

2 Name each page by clicking within the Title area and typing the name

3 Click to accept your choices and close the Project Properties dialog

4 Save your project with the new project properties settings by selecting File gt Save

Section 5 Projects

27

Setting Up a Drawing Template On-Screen Takeoff provides the convenience of using the same work surface for both digitizer and mouse to allow the user to draw conditions and then edit settings of the project or add or change conditions without breaking stride A mouse pad template included with the program defines the area of the digitizer in which use of the stylus or cursor will be recognized as mouse movement as opposed to drawing movement

1 Place your stylus on On-Screen Takeoff

2 Placing the template identifies the location mouse movements will be recognized by the program

Before placing the template the template must be applied to the digitizer surface This may have been done during the installation of your digitizer We suggest attaching the template to the lower right corner of the digitizer surface about one inch inside the grid area

3 Select Digitizer gt Place Template

4 Follow the instruction prompts on the screen clicking first on the target symbol at the left of the On-Screen Takeoff box on the template then on the target at the right

Setting Takeoff Area Before you can begin taking off a drawing you must define the drawing area on the digitizer This requires defining an area that will include all objects on each drawing of your plans As you add pages to your takeoff the same area of the digitizer will be active

1 Secure the plans to the digitizer with tape or a set of clamps

2 With a pen or a pencil mark the upper left corner and the lower right corner of the first page in your set of plans

3 Select Digitizer gt Set Takeoff Area

4 Click each mark with the stylus pen as prompted

5 Verify the active area of the digitizer by looking at the image size located in the lower right corner of your screen

If you close the program before the takeoff is complete you will need to reestablish the takeoff area before you can add additional condition quantities

Electronic plans appear on your computer screen eliminating the need to set a takeoff area You simply drag your mouse across the conditions you wish to takeoff The conditions will be highlighted and quantities will be totaled instantly Electronic plans are available through a variety of services For information contact an On Center Software account manager

Section 5 Projects

28

Setting Scale for Specific Pages You may set the scale in each page view separately This will override the default scale setting in Project Properties for that page Setting the correct scale for the drawing before taking off quantities ensures accurate calculations Be careful to check the scale for each drawing in your project before doing takeoffs

1 Display the page you want to set select Edit gt Set Scale

2 Use the drop down arrow to select a scale that will be applied to that page

3 Click

OR

4 Access the pull-down scale settings on the Navigate toolbar

NOTE As you draw objects notice that the drawn object is similar in width to the object on your plans If it is not the scale set may not be correct

Calculating Scale You may calculate scale according to a known measurement between two points either with a digitizer or on electronic plans

1 Select Edit gt Calculate Scale using Image or Edit gt Calculate Scale using Digitizer

2 Follow the instructions in the related Calculate Scale dialog box You will be asked to click on the first and second points then to enter the dimension for that distance

3 The scale will be recalculated for the displayed page and the Scale display on the Navigate toolbar will show the new scale

Section 6

29

Conditions and Takeoff

This section will Draw Conditions to Takeoff Plan Quantities

What Zones will do to help your takeoff process

Discuss the ins and outs of Takeoffs

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

30

Creating Conditions

If you are starting a new project from scratch you will need to create conditions to takeoff quantities such as floor areas wall lengths and corner bead counts If you are using a template you will have several pre-designed conditions already listed on the Takeoff dock bar However you may want to change the characteristics of some conditions or create additional conditions for a particular project

1 Right Click within the Takeoff dock bar Select New gt Condition

Or

2 From the Takeoff dock bar Click (if the buttons are not showing right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select Show Buttons from the pop-up menu) The New Condition dialog appears

3 Select the condition type (Linear Area Count or Zone) from the pull-down menu accessed by the

down arrow next to the Type option

4 Press Tab or use the mouse (or stylus) to move to Name and enter a name for your condition

5 Specify the desired condition attributes See Condition Attributes for more detail

6 Click for condition to apply

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

31

Condition Attributes Each condition type will have related attributes to select or specify within the General and Advanced tabs of the New Condition dialog Once a condition has been used to takeoff a quantity from your plans certain attributes cannot be changed

All conditions allow the user to specify color and fill pattern for the object drawn

Linear Conditions

General Specify width and height by feet and inches Specify pitch in inches up to the nearest thousandth of an inch if applicable

Advanced Specify rounding for object quantities and droprun default length for electrical or plumbing drops at the ends of lines Select Connect to have lines connect at the corners where one line of the condition ends and another begins (and indicate Tolerance for the featurersquos activation as distance between the ends of two lines) Choose Trim to have lines automatically trim to a line being crossed Choose Curve to draw a curved line

Follow these examples for inputting feet and inches For 7 feet 6 inches type 706 for 13 feet 7 inches type 1307 For 20 feet type 2000

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

32

Area Conditions

General If needed you can specify the thickness (in inches) andor pitch (in inches)

Advanced Specify rounding for object quantities Choose to display an adjustable grid within the area and indicate matrix cell dimensions

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

33

Count Conditions

General

Specify height and indicate the size (in inches) and shape (square circle triangle rectangle or opening) of the count object as it will appear on screen

Advanced Count conditions have advanced attributes These options are available for all shapes except for openings

Zone Conditions Zones allow you to subdivide condition quantities making it easier to modify and complete jobs in phases They can be used at the end of a takeoff to isolate a group of condition quantities that are in different areas of the takeoff

Zones can also be used to break a takeoff into multi-phases and can even be used to isolate quantities while a job is in progress to group the amount of work that has been completed to date They can be applied to one or multiple pages in your plans automatically calculating the takeoff quantities for each zoned area

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

34

The zone feature is only available in Lite and Full Mode If you are in View Mode and would like

to use this feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade

Condition Notes A Note tab is provided for comments regarding the condition These notes will display on the Takeoff List report and will import into Quick Bid

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

35

Condition Results The Results tab of the New Condition is based on condition type Initial settings default to linear feet (LF) for linear conditions square feet (SF) for area conditions and count of items (EA) for count conditions and zones The first of the results fields will display for the condition items in the Takeoff dock bar area All results will display in worksheets and Takeoff List reports as well as in an Excel spreadsheet after being exported

Copying Conditions You may use the condition attributes from a condition yoursquove already created for any future conditions of the same type

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Click the Copy button from the toolbar

OR

3 Right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select copy

4 A new condition will appear in the list with the same condition attributes as the previous condition but with the quantities zeroed

Editing Conditions Once you have copied a condition you might want to change several attributes You can also edit an existing condition to fit any updated needs

1 Highlight the desired condition on the Takeoff dock bar

2 Click the Change button

OR

3 Double-click on the condition you wish to edit to bring up the Change Condition dialog

NOTE The Change Condition dialog differs from the New Condition dialog only in that if takeoffs

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

36

have been performed in your project with this condition you will not be able to change the type of condition or certain properties under the advanced tab of the dialog box

Deleting Conditions 1 Click on the condition in the Takeoff Dock bar area

2 Click the Delete button on the toolbar

OR

3 Right-click and select Delete from the pop-up menu

All takeoff associated with the deleted condition will be deleted immediately and permanently

Organizing Project Conditions Within your project you can create folders andor sub-folders for different types of conditions You may even want to create a folder containing conditions with reset values

To get started organizing your conditions make sure you are viewing the condition tree (right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select Show Tree)

Creating Folders and Sub-Folders 1 Right-click in the Takeoff Dock bar area

2 Select New gt Folder from the pop-up menu

Copying Folders

1 Click on the folder and click Copy on the toolbar

2 All copied conditions within the new folder will have values reset to zero

Renaming Folders

1 Click on the folder

2 Right-click and select Rename from the pop-up menu

3 Enter a name for your folder and click the Enter button

Changing Condition Order

You may move conditions up or down in the condition list of the Takeoff dock bar to suit your project needs

1 Select the condition you would like to move by clicking to highlight it

NOTE When you are ready to move the highlighted conditions be sure that you start

moving using the last condition chosen That condition will have a highlighted boarder

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

37

2 Drag and drop any the condition from one place to another in the list You may also move a condition to another folder on the list in this way

Drawing with Conditions Snap Angles Set up snap angles to prevent lines from appearing jagged Snap angles are commonly set at 15deg and shift snap angles at 0deg

1 Go to Tools gt Options Options dialog appears

2 Under the General tab make the desired settings

3 Click to save the settings As they are drawn lines will snap to the set degree

Drawing a Linear Object 1 Select a condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff dock bar

2 Move the cursor into the Image takeoff area of the screen you will see the cursor display as crosshairs

3 Click and hold left mouse button then drag mouse to draw a line

4 Release mouse button to set line

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

38

5 Repeat steps for further lines

Continuous Mode This feature allows you to draw an object that has connected lines

1 Click the icon from the Takeoff toolbar

OR

2 Go to Tools gt Continuous Mode

3 Follow steps 1-3 from Draw a Linear Object

4 Click at each point of intersection The object will be connected

5 Double-click after making the final point to set the lines

Drawing a Curve To draw a curved line the Curve option must be checked under the Advanced tab of the Condition dialog

1 Click where you want to begin the curve and drag in a straight line to the position for the other endpoint of the curve

2 Click on the line to select it Handles in the shapes of small squares will appear at either end of

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

39

the line and in the center of the line

3 Move the cursor over the center handles until the cursor becomes a two-way arrow

4 Click and drag in the direction of the curve bending the line as you move the cursor Release to set the curve (The line you began with will disappear)

Draw a circle by drawing two curved lines connected

Drawing an Area Object Area conditions are drawn similarly to continuous mode lines You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete your area takeoff

NOTE When drawing an area do not intersect the perimeter or line of the object you are drawing

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

3 The area will be filled with the pattern set for that condition

NOTE The simulated circle will be good enough for you to be able to make a bid

To create a circular area click from point to point with very short distances in between points simulating a circlersquos perimeter Double-click after setting the last point to set the area

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

40

Grid Options Grids give you an added advantage when installing materials such as tiles Use this feature to get a count for how many tiles are needed for an area

1 Double-click on an area condition in the Takeoff dock bar to open its Condition dialog

2 Click on the Advanced tab to show its options

3 Check the box next to Grid by clicking in it

4 Indicate the dimensions of the cell matrix in inches (For example 200 x 400)

5 Under Results tab choose each (EA) for one of the results fields This will tabulate a number of grid cells (including partial grid cells) in area

6 Click to save your settings

7 Use the Move Grid and Rotate Grid features in the Tools menu to manipulate the grid as desired

Grid Calculation

1 Go to Tools gt Options menu

1 Specify if On-Screen Takeoff automatically should Calculate Grid Position

2 If AreaGrid Size is selected On-Screen Takeoff will calculate the number of items needed to fill the grid based on grid demintions

3 Click to accept and close the dialog

To move a line at any angle (regardless of default setting) press the Shift key while moving the mouse

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

41

Backout Mode This feature allows you to take out part of an area and deduct that amount of square footage

1 Select Tools gt Backout Mode

2 Outline the are you want backed out as you would when drawing a regular area object (see Drawing an Area Object)

3 The outlined area will clear and quantities will be recalculated

NOTE The perimeter of the backout area will be added to the LF quantity for that condition

Drawing a Count Object Square triangle rectangle and circle shaped count objects can easily be placed on images

1 Select the condition

2 Click in the location where you want the object to appear

3 To place an opening-shaped count item like a door or window you must click over an existing linear object such as a wall

4 On the Results tab you can change the height properties to give you the result you need

5 If Backout is checked on the advanced tab for each count opening the opening-shaped count item will back out a corresponding section of the linear object

Opening shaped count items are sized at 3rsquo0rdquo by default

Drawing a Zone Zones are drawn in the same way as area objects and may be any polygonal shape You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete the zone perimeter

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

42

Selecting Objects

1 Use the Select Tool to select objects

You can also select all objects that correspond to a condition

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Right-click and choose Select All

3 All objects with this condition will be highlighted with squares as an outline

Moving and Resizing Objects Linear

1 To move or resize a linear object click anywhere on the line to select it

2 To move the line position your pointer over the center handles When the mouse is positioned over the handles you will see a two-way arrow You will only be able to move the line in the direction of the arrows

3 Drag the line to a new position

4 Clicking and dragging the handles on the ends of the line will allow you to lengthen or shorten your line

Area and Zone

1 To move an area object or zone in its entirety click and drag it to its new position

2 Grabbing a handle at a corner or intersection of the object will allow you to adjust and change its perimeter

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

43

Count 1 To move a square circle rectangle or triangle shaped count object click and drag

2 Click and drag an opening shaped count object along the length of the linear object to the desired position then release

NOTE An opening shaped count object may not be moved from its associated linear condition object however it may be moved up and down the length of the linear object

Layers On-Screen Takeoff allows you to sort and separate your takeoff objects within the same job and on the same page On-Screen Takeoff gives you this flexibility through the use of layers

By assigning different conditions to different layers (for example differentiating between floors ceilings and walls) you can choose to view all layers or turn off certain layers to display and print the remaining groups of conditions only You may also remove the background image of electronic plans add text and hot link symbols or print only your condition takeoffs

Layers are only available in Full Mode If you are in View or Lite Mode and would like to use this

feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade Default Layers

On-Screen Takeoff begins every project with three default layers Image Annotation and Default The Image layer holds the electronic plan files you may have in your project The Annotation layer possesses all text notations highlighting and hot links in the project The Default layer will appear in the Condition dialog when creating or editing a condition (listed in the takeoff dock bar) Conditions are assigned to the Default layer unless otherwise specified by the user

Creating Layers To assign a condition to a layer other than the default layer you must first create additional layers for your project

1 Select View gt Layers to open the Layers dialog

2 Click An unnamed layer will be added

3 Click within the empty box and type a name for your layer (for example Wall)

4 New layers are added as active layers The adjacent box under the Show column will be checked

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

44

Assigning a Layer to a Condition 1 Open the Condition dialog box by creating a new condition or editing an existing condition

2 Under the General tab click on the down arrow in the Layer field to display optional layers

3 Select the desired layer for the condition Only the Default layer and layers you have added will be displayed

4 Click

View and Hide Layers

1 Select View gt Layers

2 Under the Show column check the box to view or remove the check (by clicking on it) to hide the specific layer

3 Click to accept and close the Layers dialog

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

45

Assigning Text to a Layer When adding text to an image On-Screen Takeoff has the capability to assign the text to a specified layer

1 Select the Text Tool

2 Click at the point you want to place your text

3 Type in your text using the Enter key for line breaks

4 Click the drop down arrow next to the Layer field and select the desired layer

Section 7

46

Printing and Exporting

This section will

Printing options and procedures

Exporting data by copying and pasting

Exporting quantity results to Excel spreadsheets

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

47

Print Setup On-Screen Takeoff allows the user to print the image takeoff list and worksheet

1 Select File gt Print Setup The Print Setup dialog will open

2 Select a printer or leave the default selection listed (change from the default printer displayed by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the field)

3 Indicate page size and printer tray option (Source) Access page size options by clicking on the

down arrow at the right of the field

4 Choose Portrait or Landscape orientation

5 Click to accept and close the dialog

Printing Images The image area can include the electronic plans the takeoff objects added text and hot links To print a subset of these (for example just the takeoffs without the plans or the added text and hot link symbols) hide layers that you do not want to print (see Section 6 View and Hide Layers) When you are printing your images every page will show the scale of the takeoff you are printing

1 Click on the Image tab to display the area of your project

2 Select File gt Print (or Ctrl + P)

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

48

3 Select the desired view (What to print) and the Image Range

4 Click The second Print dialog will open

5 Change settings accordingly or click if you accept the default settings

Printing Takeoff Lists and Worksheets In Takeoff Lists and Worksheets you may hide columns to print only certain results or adjust column widths to fit the report within the page size selected

1 In Takeoff List or Worksheet view move your cursor to the right side of the columnrsquos title bar the cursor will display as a two-way arrow

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

49

2 Click and drag to adjust the width of the column Holding the mouse button you may

slide the title bar under the title bar to its left to hide the column completely

3 Select File gt Print or press Ctrl + P to access the Print dialog

4 Indicate desired printer and choose the number of copies

5 Click to print and close the dialog

When printing the condition list we suggest printing in landscape

To reset to the default column widths double-click on the right border of a column heading will reset the column to its right (or previously to its right before being hidden)

Print Preview 1 Select File gt Print Preview

2 Use and to vary your view 3 If viewing an image choose current full or scale view to see how it displays

4 For printed outputs that cover more than one page use and to view adjacent pages or click on the down arrow next to Page field and select the page you want displayed

Exporting Using the CopyPaste Feature You may copy all the data or sections from the worksheet and the takeoff list view in On-Screen Takeoff and paste it into another application When pasting into Excel the cell layout will be maintained

1 Highlight the areas you wish to paste Click and hold the left mouse button down as you drag the cursor over the area to be selected then releasing the mouse button

OR

2 Select the entire takeoff list quickly click on the left On-Screen Takeoff column header and hold and drag the cursor across the remaining column headings

The number of pages for the view selected will display in the lower left-hand corner The zoom percentage that applies to the view will be displayed in the lower right-hand corner next to page size of the drawing

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

50

3 In the worksheet view you may highlight rows by clicking on the numbered buttons to the left of each row clicking and dragging across column headings or clicking and dragging over individual cells in the worksheet

Click anywhere in the appropriate view to deselect the area

4 Once your selection is highlighted you may select Edit gt Copy or Ctrl C from the keyboard 5 On your monitor switch to the application into which you want to paste your selection 6 Select Edit gt Paste in the new application or simply press Ctrl + V to paste

The colored keys for conditions cannot be pasted

Using the Export Feature You may export condition quantities to specified cell location within an Excel worksheet file Cell target locations are assigned in the Results tab of the condition dialogs on the Export line relating to each quantity measurement type

On-Screen Takeoff will export takeoff quantity results for up to three different quantity types that you specify For instance you may want to know the number of square feet in a ceiling area as well as the number of linear feet in its perimeter

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

51

1 Bring up the Condition dialog by double-clicking on a condition in the takeoff dock bar or by

selecting the condition and clicking

2 Click on the Results tab to access its fields The default quantities for the condition type will display

3 For each results field click on the arrow to access the pull-down menu and select the appropriate quantity (for example SF LF EA etchellip)

4 Have your Excel spreadsheet opened and saved in a file

5 Specify the Excel spreadsheet cell locations where you want the results to go

6 For a cell in the first sheet of your spreadsheet type in the cell address (eg a1) Case is not important

7 For a cell on a successive sheet of your spreadsheet type in sheet the number followed by a comma and the cell address without any spaces (eg sheet2a1) Case is not important

8 Click

9 Select File gt Export gt Condition Qty to Excel

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

52

10 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

11 Click to export On-Screen Takeoff results to specified cell locations in the Excel file When you return to the Excel application you will see the values have been added to the specified cell locations in your spreadsheet

12 Save your Excel file

Exporting Worksheet to Excel

1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 From On-Screen Takeoff Select File gt Export gt Worksheet to Excel

4 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

5 Click When you return to the Excel application you will see the values from the Worksheet Tab have been added to your spreadsheet

6 Save your Excel file

Exporting Takeoff to CVS 1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 Click the Takeoff Tab in the project you want to export the information

4 Select File gt Export gt Takeoff to CSV

5 Browse to the location of the CSV spreadsheet file click file to select it

6 Click the Save

NOTE CSV files can be opened in Excel Lotus Access etc One may consider this option more of a ldquodumprdquo into a file

The Excel application must be active (it may be minimized on the application bar) with the target spreadsheet open in the application Otherwise an error will occur with the export operation that will affect both the On-Screen Takeofftrade file and the Excel spreadsheet

Section 8

53

Advanced Features

This section will

Some special features of working with condition objects in the takeoff area

Details of advanced options for conditions

Advanced features of the Project Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

54

Features to Use with Objects Roping Feature You can move copy or delete using this feature Using the Select tool (the pointer) you may select several objects at once by clicking and dragging an outline around the objects then releasing the mouse button Roping may select either objects completely within the outlined area (inclusive) or objects both within and touched by the outlined area (touching) Specify your roping preference under Tools gt Options

1 Click and hold the mouse button at a point on the screen near the objects to be selected and drag to surround the objects with an outline

2 Release the mouse button The objects will be selected

3 You may now

Move the group around on the page by clicking within the group dragging the mouse and releasing the button to place the objects

Delete the group of objects by clicking the Delete key or

Copy and paste by pressing Ctrl C to copy the group then Ctrl V to paste it The pasted copy of the grouped objects will appear slightly offset from the original objects

Section 8 Advanced Features

55

Applying a DropRun Count

Use the droprun feature when calculating quantities to take into account the drop or run of a linear condition such as electrical lines or plumbing pipes Drop or run lengths may be added separately to any linear condition on screen while a default droprun length may be indicated for a condition as a whole

1 Select the desired linear condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff Dock bar

2 Click the Change button in the toolbar to open the Change Condition dialog

3 Click the Advanced tab to access the advanced options and click inside the DropRun check box

4 Enter a default length to be applied to all of this condition Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches) You can leave the length blank and manually enter drop run on each segment drawn

5 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog

Edit DropRun Count

1 With the related linear condition in the Takeoff Dock bar highlighted or with the pointer tool selected

2 click on the desired linear object in the image takeoff area The Count button will become active

3 Click on the Count button (alternatively select Tools gt Count) The default droprun amount will show in the pop-up Count dialog (Default length will be zero if droprun has not been selected in this conditionrsquos properties)

4 Type in the desired length Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches)

5 Click the OK button The additional amount will be reflected in the corresponding quantity The new DropRun count will apply only to the object edited

Adding Text in Image View

On-Screen Takeoff allows you to place text comments around your quantity takeoffs that may be printed along with plan images and objects Text is automatically placed within the Annotation Layer (that includes text and hot links)

1 To place text on the image select the Text Tool and click at the point you want to place your text opening a text box

2 Type in your information clicking Enter for line breaks

3 When you are finished click the OK button to exit the text box

4 To reposition text simply click on the text (with the Text Tool active) to select it

5 Move the cursor over the text the cursor will now display as a four-way arrow

6 Click and drag the mouse to position the text as desired

Section 8 Advanced Features

56

1 To edit existing text use the Text Tool to double-click on the text to open the editing box

2 Enter additional text or use the Backspace key to delete text as necessary

Formatting Text Once created you may format the font size type style and color of your text

1 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Font or click on the Font button in the Takeoff Toolbar

2 Select the desired features (color options are disabled) and click the OK button

3 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Color or click on the Color button in the Takeoff Toolbar The Color dialog will open

4 Click on a color in the Basic Color palette or create a color and add to the Custom Colors palette (Be sure to click on the color in the Custom Colors palette to select it)

5 Click the OK button

Object Properties

Linear Objects

Linear objects may be set to connect at corners

A linear object may be set to trim automatically when crossing another linear object (Check the trim option under the advanced tab of the Condition dialog)

When you move a connected linear object objects automatically move and resize connected lines accordingly (quantities are then recalculated)

This feature requires that the connected linear object be moved using the center handles (does not apply when resizing the line from the ends)

Objects constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

Objects are measured from centerline to centerline

Section 8 Advanced Features

57

Area Objects When drawing an area use your escape key to undo the last line drawn You may reverse your

drawing of an area using the escape key

The area will not fill with color and pattern until the user double-clicks after the last line is set

Lines drawn to delineate an area object constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

After selecting an area to move or adjust position the mouse in the center to move the entire area position the mouse at the sides or corners to adjust the perimeter

Count Objects

All count objects are quantified by the physical number of objects per page and reported as EA for the UOM The quantity for the current Image View is (displayed in the Condition List) and the total quantity in your project is displayed in the Takeoff View and Worksheet View)

Square circle rectangle and triangle shaped count objects do not displace or subtract from other object quantities when placed on top of them However on the Advanced Tab for the count condition a connect property can be set (this is a check box) so that when a count object of this shape is put on top of a Linear type takeoff object it will move with the linear if said linear is moved

An opened-shaped count object must be placed within a linear object Opening shaped count objects may also be measured by linear foot or linear yard (EA SF and SY are also options) Opening shaped count items default to a width of 3rsquo 0rdquo at the time of creation This size can be changed The small medium and large size are not options on this type of condition anymore Check Backout on the Advanced tab for each Count object back out the footage (or yardage) of opening-shaped count objects in which they are placed

NOTE In order to see this Backout functionality (in quantity) for SY or SF deductions at least one of the

results for the Linear(s) this object will be placed on must be set to SY or SF and the count object must have a height quantity

Advanced Features of Conditions The Round Feature Under the Advanced tab of the linear and area Condition dialogues you may specify quantity rounding (in inches) For linear objects rounding applies to each linear object drawn For area objects rounding will apply to each segment of the area perimeter adjusting the perimeter and area calculations For example With a linear condition entering 12 in the Round field will round up each related linear object to the nearest 12 inches or one foot With this setting two walls of 1 4 would each round to 2 0 totaling 4 0

NOTE In the Takeoff Dock bar condition list and in the On-Screen Takeoff reports quantities will be displayed in whole numbers rounded up to the nearest foot However calculations are based on true quantities without rounding unless the Round Feature is engaged

Pitch Pitch may apply either to linear or area conditions It is measured in rise per linear foot Entering 12 indicates a 12 rise per 12 of linear distance (a pitch of 12 over 12) or an angle of 45deg

Section 8 Advanced Features

58

Advanced Features of Project Properties Selecting Multiple Pages

1 Select a single page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry

2 Drag the cursor down the column of numbers to select consecutive pages

3 Click on the blank button at the top of this column to select all pages in the Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

59

Changing Image Assigned to a Drawing 1 Select the page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry 2 Click the Change Image button The Change Image dialog box will appear

3 Navigate to the desired file and select by clicking on it

4 Click the Open button The electronic file assigned to the page will have been changed to reflect the new file choice

Changing Image File Path 1 Select pages as described above

2 Choose Change Folder

3 In the Change Folder dialog navigate to the appropriate folder

4 Click the OK button The file path will have been changed for the selected page entries

Delete a Page from Project Properties 1 Select the page you want to delete by clicking on its associated number (in the gray box at the

left of the entry)

2 Choose Delete Page

All Takeoff on the page will be deleted immediately and permanently

Section 8 Advanced Features

60

Advanced Features of Tool Options

Calculation Method On-Screen Takeoff has built-in calculation options to allow for faster work and faster saves until your takeoff is complete Calculation options are found by selecting Tools gt Options then clicking on the Calculation tab

Calculation method can be set to Automatic Automatic except Grids and Manual Manual will allow the program to operate more quickly while Automatic or Automatic except Grids allows the user to see quantity changes as takeoffs are made

In any mode you may press F9 to recalculate quantities for the On-Screen Takeoff current totals

Configuration Tab

When the ldquoPage Label (A01)rdquo radial button is chosen On-Screen Takeoff puts the numbered label on all the pages of in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar If the Page Descriptionrdquo radial button is chosen then a description of what takeoff is on that specific page will be shown in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar

This section of the configuration tab gives you options on how you want to export your information When the ldquoFolderSubfolder Namesrdquo radial button is chosen than on your file that you are exporting to will have all the conditions folders and subfolders In the Delimiter box you can choose the symbol that is needed to separate the information you are exporting Some files need semicolons () or colons () to make sure the information comes exported in is separated it the appropriate places

Section 8 Advanced Features

61

In previous versions of On-Screen Takeoff there are views that users need to have in order for them to display their information By either choosing ldquoOST 1xrdquo or ldquoOST 2xrdquo it will let the program know you want your columns of information exported in that specific format

When you have the Confirm Deletions radial button of ldquoYesrdquo chosen than every time you delete anything you will get a dialog box confirming your intentions of deletion

While working with your takeoff you have a choice to either view the legend of your conditions or hide it Choose whichever radial button that suits your needs

For those who prefer to use the Enter key to navigate in dialog boxes this option is just for that

Font Tab The Font tab is designed for you to make your own look and feel for the application At the bottom of this tab it will show you sample of the fonts and colors you have chosen

Renaming the Current Page You may change the name of the current page in the takeoff area of On-Screen Takeoff by selecting Edit gt Rename Page

This opens the Name Page dialog and you may simply type in a new name and click the Enter button The new name for the file will be reflected on the title bar for the page and in Project Properties

You also may access the Rename Page function by right-clicking in the takeoff area while in Image View and selecting the option from the pop-up menu that appears

Section 9

62

Saving and Exiting

This section will

Explain how to save projects

Show you how to safely exit the program

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

63

Saving Your Project

1 Select File gt Save 2 If your project has not previously been saved a Save dialog box will open to allow you to name

the file and choose the directory and folder in which to save your file 3 Once saved File gt Save will simply save the current version of the file

OR

4 Select File gt Save As then type in a new name for the file and save to the desired file path

The Auto-save Feature With the Auto-save feature On-Screen Takeoff automatically backs up your open project You may choose to have more than one level of backup files The first backup copy will have the extension b00 and successive files will be b01 b02 and so on If you have designated four levels of backup files after the fourth backup copy has been created (b03) the next file will be saved over the file with extension b00 Further backup saves will then rotate through the four backup files in the same way

1 Select Tools gt Options 2 In the Auto-save area (under the General tab) select the frequency of backup file creation (in

minutes) and the number of levels for the feature 3 You also may disengage the feature by clicking in the check box to clear it

The Auto-save feature automatically saves backup copies to the directory of the current project If you are working from a write-protected area such as a CD-ROM On-Screen Takeoff will place backup files in the On-Screen Takeoff folder

Exiting When you are finished using On-Screen Takeoff it is very easy to exit Exiting is very important because of security reasons If someone were to use your computer they could enter the application and view and manipulate information

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

64

On-Screen Takeoff closes the open project when you open another or create a new project or when you exit the program

1 Select File gt Exit

OR

2 You also may click at the upper right-hand corner of the application to exit

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

65

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer When you get your digitizer from GTCO you will need to connect it to your computer Follow the instructions outlined below to do this

Note For rollup digitizers the metal bar must be oriented to the top or right hand side

Connecting the Digitizer 1 Lay the digitizer out flat 2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer 3 Plug in the power adapter 4 Plug the interface (IO) cable into the digitizer 5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into an open serial port on computer

Note GTCO Technical support phone number is 410-381-6688 The electronic manual (on diskette) from GTCO contains more detailed installation and operation instructions for the GTCO digitizer model you have

Installing other Digitizer Drivers If you are using a GTCO Digitizer you will need to install the GTCO TabletWorks Drivers

If you are using a Digitizer not supported by GTCO Tablet Works 10 please contact the manufacturer of your digitizer for assistance with installation

Installing GTCO TabletWorks Drivers 1 Insert the On Center CD into the CD-ROM drive The CD Startup screen will open 2 Click on Install Software 3 Select Additional Software and Drivers 4 Select Digitizer Driver 5 Follow the instructions for installing TabletWorks 10

Adhering the Template The template is a small plastic sticker used to enable mouse function when using the digitizer with On-Screen Takeoff Place your template on your digitizer We suggest placing it in the bottom right corner of the digitizer about one inch inside the takeoff area

Note You may either peel off the back of the template and use the adhesive surface or you can tape the template down

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

66

Testing the Digitizer Drivers Before running OST you may test the digitizer by moving the stylus around on the digitizer pad it should move the mouse cursor (if mouse emulation is enabled)

If the digitizer does not move the mouse cursor on the screen

The superset codes may need to be reset Reset the superset codes by touching on the border of the digitizer with the stylus The digitizer should beep several times

The digitizer may not be communicating with the computer Be sure the COM port selected is correct Be sure the COM port selected is correct If you are not able to get the digitizer to move the mouse cursor you need to call GTCO technical support for help

Note The Mouse Emulation is not required for On-Screen Takeoff to work properly It is used only for the Template functionality if the digitizer is moving the cursor the wrong direction (up instead of sideways or vice-versa)

Click the L-shaped arrow symbol on the digitizer with the stylus

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

67

Appendix II Toolbar Items Main Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

68

Tool Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

69

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

70

Navigate Toolbar (Continued)

Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

71

Takeoff Toolbar (Continued)

Image Toolbar

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

72

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

This section will detail how to load plans from a F W Dodge CD-ROM into an On-Screen Takeoff project file ready for takeoffs

Dodge files may be added to the Project Properties dialog However loading the files in that way will load the files by number rather than name description If you want to load one page only from your Dodge CD You will have to rename the page to display the name rather than number of the file

To load plan files from a Dodge CD so that the files load sequentially by file number but are displayed by name rather than by number within your project follow the instructions below

Opening a Dodge project from a CD-ROM 1 Insert the CD into the drive 2 Choose File gt Custom 3 Choose Dodge Plans Project (plansdat) as the file type 4 Select the appropriate file type by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the Files of type

field 5 In the Look in field access your drive paths by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the

field then

Navigate to your CD-ROM drive Open the data folder and Open the Projects folder

6 Select the desired project and open its folder 7 Open the plansdat file 8 All the images will come in sequenced correctly for that job along with the full descriptions

(names) of each page If there is not a plans folder in the project folder then plans do not exist for that project on the CD Opening the plansdat file will yield an empty project

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

73

Appendix IV Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer The On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer is a limited version of On Center Softwarersquos commercial takeoff software If your status bar located at the very bottom of the main window says View Mode in the lower left-hand corner then you are using the Plan Viewer You can use the plan viewer to

View CD-based amp converted CAD drawings

View a previously created OST file and associated drawings

Download electronic plans online

Navigate through drawings

Quickly Takeoff linearsareas and counts

Zoom in to view the plan better

Print drawings directly from the viewer

Viewing an On-Screen Takeoff Project File

1 To open an OST file that was previously created with of On-Screen Takeoff 2 Select File gt Open 3 An Open dialog will appear if you do not see the OST file you are looking for select the

Look In drop down arrow 4 A drop down menu will appear listing the various folders drives and mapped drives located

on your computer select the correct drive or folder location and continue to browse to the location of your OST file

5 When you see your OST file double-click it to open it 6 Any takeoff and drawings should appear on the Image tab view

If you do not see the drawings but do see the colored takeoff layer the drawings may

not be located in the same place they were originally saved at Go to File gt Project Properties and check the Image File path for each listed page If the image file path is pointing to a CD drive make sure the CD is inside the CR-ROM

Downloading Electronic Plans If your Online Plan Service provides a special file format (OSX) required to use this feature of our plan viewer you can immediately downloaded all electronic plans of a project directly from our viewer

Most Plan Room web sites will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff when a request to download plans is made Your particular Plan Room may differ in operation so please contact the provider directly with questions on using the site

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

74

When you request to download or open a project file from a Plan Room you will usually have the open to open or save an OSX file Choosing open will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff Alternately you may choose to save the file to a local hard drive After you have saved the file either double-click it to launch On-Screen Takeoff or open the OSX file using On-Screen Takeoff by clicking File then Open and locating the file on your hard drive You will need to change the file type to OSX

After the OSX file is opened you will see an additional tab appear in the Conditions List window called Pages

The Pages tab shows the hierarchy of your project Gray file icons represent pages that have not been downloaded and blue icons represents pages that have been downloaded

To download a page simply double-click the page icon

If you wish to select a group of pages to download you can use the Ctrl or Shift key to multiple select them then click the Download button

If you wish to download all pages at once click the Download All button

Downloaded pages will now appear in the Project Properties dialog in the same order in which they appear in the Pages tab

Creating Quick Takeoffs With On-Screen Takeoff you can create quick takeoffs to measure quantities even if you dont have the full version of our program However using the Quick Takeoff functionality shows you just a fraction of what the full version can do

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar is located at the top of the image view It has three buttons designated for three types of takeoffs Linear Area and Count The Quantity drop down list will show secondary quantities for Linears and Areas The Units drop down allows you to select how you want your quantities displayed Feet Inches Yards Millimeters and Meters

NOTE Every time change the type of takeoff you are performing (switching from Area to Linear for example) the previous quantities and takeoff objects will disappear They will also disappear when you changes pages

NOTE You can use the Dimension Tool to basically measure the distance between two points or linears The distance will display on the status bar at the bottom of the application

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

75

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions General

Where is On-Screen Takeoff installed on my computer

Typically it is installed in CProgram FilesOn-Screen Takeoff

In Explorer how do I recognize On-Screen Takeoff file types

On-Screen Takeoff data is stored in a single file per job lsquojob name OSTrsquo On-Screen Takeoff templates are stored as lsquotemplate nameTPOrsquo

Can only one project at a time be open

Yes For that reason opening another project automatically closes the project on screen You will be asked to save any changes

Is only one scale allowed per page What about on drawings that have multiple detail sections on a page and each of those drawings have different scales

Yes For pages with drawings of different scales copy the drawing to another project page and set the appropriate scale

I cannot perform backout on an area that is along a linear

As a workaround use the On-Screen Takeoff layers feature to help you with this issue Electronic Images

How do I start a project from drawings that have been scanned and written to a CD-ROM

Open a new project Select File gt Project Properties and select Auto Add Navigate to your CD and the appropriate folder and select any image file in that location Click Open All files in the location will load into your project Recommended that images are copied from CD to hard drive for performance

If I get a disk of drawings in AutoCAD format (R13 or R14) can I read them in On-Screen Takeoff

Yes On-Screen Takeoff now reads DWG DXF and many other format that are saved with AutoCAD

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

76

When I click on the all pages button what is supposed to happen Currently nothing seems to change when I click on that button

The All Pages button is used to apply the Darken and Enhance Plans feature to all pages in the project (as opposed to only the current page on screen)

Is there a way to deduct a large skylight from an area condition

Yes with the related area condition selected in the Takeoff Dock bar unselect the Backout button on the Takeoff Toolbar then draw the Backout area The area quantity will be deducted from the related condition object and the linear measurement of the Backout perimeter will be added

Digitizer Issues

How do I connect a Digitizer to the computer

See Appendix I Connecting a Digitizer

The Place Template menu choice is disabled

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or the digitizer or the digitzer drivers are not installed

It wonrsquot let me select the Set Takeoff Area menu choice

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or no job is open a digitizer is not installed or the drivers are not installed

The digitizer stylus is not moving the cursor or crosshairs

Click S-0-1 superset on the digitizer

How do I convert my old GTCO Digitizer to work with On- Screen Takeofftrade

Call GTCO and they may be able to reconfigure your digitizer to be compatible with On-Screen Takeoff

Printing Issues Which Printers work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible printers include On-Screen Takeoff Hewlett Packard Epson and Canon printers If you are having printer difficulties please contact support and specify the type of printer along with other pertinent information Contact support at wwwoncentercomsupport or email supportoncentercom

Which Plotters work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible Plotters include Hewlett Packard DesignJet plotters and the EnCAD Cadjet II If you are having plotter difficulties please contact support and specify the type of plotter concerned

ViewingDisplay I can no longer see my condition list How do I get it back

The toolbars and Dock bars can be turned on and off through the View gt Toolbars menu options

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

77

This is also accessible by right-clicking in the toolbar area and selecting (or deselecting) a toolbar listed

I cannot view my folders in the condition list

Right-click in the Takeoff Dock barcondition list area and select Show Tree to display your folders

My Status Bar reads Viewer Mode and I am unable to draw conditions

On-Screen Takeoff needs to be Authorized Or you need to purchase an upgrade Click the Perform Advanced Takeoff button on the main toolbar

I hid a Dock bar and when I selected to view it again it appeared alongside the other Dock

bar instead of stacked on top of it How do I fix it

Pick up the Dock bar by clicking on the bar at the top and continuing to hold down the mouse button drag the Dock bar over the other one It will resize and appear stacked with the other

When I open image files from a CD the images are all upside down How do I get them right

side up

To flip pages from top to bottom follow the steps below 1 Click the All Pages button on the Image Toolbar (All Pages is engaged when the button

is not clicked) 2 Click the Flip Horizontal button on the Image Toolbar 3 Click the All Pages button again to disengage

Templates How do I create a Template

Follow the steps below 1 Create a typical project 2 Choose File gt Save As 3 Choose On-Screen Takeoff Template Files as the file type to save 4 Name the file This will save all of the condition setups as well as the layers for the

project

How do I create a new project from a template

Follow the steps below 1 Choose File gt New 2 Select a template from those listed in the New dialog This will open a new project with

conditions and layers saved from a previous project but no pages or takeoff

78

INDEX

Area Conditions 32

Area Objects 57

Auto Scrolling 20

Auto-save 63

Backout Mode 41

Calculation Method 60

Conditions 29

Configuration 60

Contents Tab 6

Continuous Mode 38

Count Conditions 33

Count Objects 57

Digitizer 10 65 76

Docking Toolbars 13

Dodge CD 72

Drawing 27 37

DropRun Count 55

Environment 18

Exiting 63

Exporting 49

Features 16

Font 61

Frequently Asked Questions 75

Grid 40

Help File 5

Hiding Toolbars 13

Hot Links 21

Image 19 59

Image files 9

Image Toolbar 12 71

Images 75

Index Tab 6

Layers 43

Linear Conditions 31

Linear Objects 56

Main Toolbar 12 67

Menus 14

Moving Toolbars 13

Navigate Toolbar 12 69

Navigating 20

On-Screen Takeofftrade 2

Page 59 61

Pages 20 25 28

Plan Viewer 73

Plans 26

Printing 47 76

Project Properties 25

Projects 22

Quick Start Video 18

Resizing Toolbars 13

Roping 54

Saving 63

Scale 28

Search Tab 7

Selecting Objects 42

Setup 8

Start On-Screen Takeofftrade 17

System Requirements 9

Takeoff 19 27

Takeoff Toolbar 70 71

Takeoff Toolbar 12

Template Files 23

TIF (Group4) 9

Tool Toolbar 12 68

Toolbar 67

Toolbars 12

View Toolbar 12 69

Viewing Toolbars 12

Worksheet 20

Zone Conditions 33

Zoom Toolbar 12 69

  • On-Screen Takeoff Lite
  • Table of Contents
  • Section 1 - Introduction
  • Section 2 - Setup
  • Section 3 - Toolbars and Menus
  • Section 4 - Features
  • Section 5 - Projects
  • Section 6 - Conditions and Takeoff
  • Section 7 - Printing and Exporting
  • Section 8 - Advanced Features
  • Section 9 - Saving and Exiting
  • Appendix I - Installing Your Digitizer
  • Appendix II - Toolbar Items
  • Appendix III - Loading Plans from a Dodge CD
  • Appendix IV - Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer
  • Appendix V - Frequently Asked Questions
  • Index

Section 3 Toolbars and Menus

13

Moving Toolbars The toolbars may be positioned anywhere on the screen you wish This feature is provided to allow the flexibility for positioning the toolbars so they are out of your way yet handy for use

1 Click on an edge of the toolbar holding down the mouse button drag it to its new position

2 Release the mouse button to set it in place

NOTE If the toolbar is dropped anywhere other than a screen edge it will become free floating This feature is especially handy when using multiple monitors

Docking Toolbars The toolbars can be docked to any of the screen edges

1 Click on the title bar of an undocked toolbar

2 Drag the toolbar to any location on the screen

Hiding Toolbars

1 Select View gt Toolbars and select the toolbar you wish to remove from the screen

2 Right-click on the toolbar or dock bar areas

3 A floating toolbar can be closed by clicking on the in the upper right corner of the toolbar

Resizing Toolbars Only undocked (floating) toolbars may be resized

1 Position the mouse pointer over an edge

2 Click and drag

3 The toolbar can be resized as desired

Customizing the Toolbars You may rearrange or delete buttons within a toolbarrsquos display or you may move buttons from one toolbar to another If you find that you use a few tools over and over you may want to group them within a single toolbar for convenience On-Screen Takeoff gives you the flexibility to customize your takeoff environment

1 Select Tools gt Customize The Customize dialog will open

2 With the dialog open click on a toolbar button and drag buttons from one toolbar to another or a new location within the same toolbar

3 To add a button without altering another toolbar click on the Commands tab of the Customize dialog and drag the appropriate symbol from the Buttons section to a toolbar

4 To remove a button drag it to within the takeoff area of the application

Section 3 Toolbars and Menus

14

Menus

Section 3 Toolbars and Menus

15

Digitizer Menu

Section 4

16

Features

This section will

Show you how open On-Screen Takeoff

Describe the On-Screen Takeoff environment

Teach you how to navigate pages

Section 4 Features

17

Start On-Screen Takeoff

1 On your desktop double-click your On-Screen Takeoff icon

2 The application will open

OR

3 Left-click on the Start button on your computerrsquos toolbar

4 Scroll up to Programs gt On Center Software

5 Highlight On-Screen Takeoff and click On-Screen Takeoff will open On-Screen Takeoff opens to an untitled blank project The Image view of the screen will be a blank page

Two blank dock bars the Pan dock bar and the Takeoff dock bar appear at the left side of the screen Along the bottom the Status bar displays user status or context-sensitive messages as well as paper size and current zoom percentage of the plan sheet on screen The menu bar and several task specific toolbars are located at the top of the screen

NOTE All toolbars and dock bars may be accessed to view or hide through View gt Toolbars on the menu bar

Section 4 Features

18

Quick Start Video When On-Screen Takeoff opens you will be given an option to watch the Quick Start video (recommended) or start the program without watching the video

The 20 minute video will demonstrate key program functionality and allow you to view application instruction for enhanced learning

If you would like to watch the video click If you prefer to get started without

the video click If you have already viewed the video click the lsquoDo not show this message againrsquo box to prevent this dialog from appearing each time you open the program

NOTE If you decide later that you would like to watch the Quick Start video go to Help gt Watch

Quick Start Videos

On-Screen Takeoff Environment The On-Screen Takeoff environment acts like your drafting table allowing you to work on several sheets of plans at once and to reference at a glance the entire drawing and your position on that drawing while giving you the power of a computer to track analyze print and export your takeoff quantities and plans

The screen is bordered at the top by the Menu bar with pull-down menus and at the bottom by the Status bar which indicates current user status plan page size and current zoom percentage of page The largest portion of the application screen will be your takeoff area bounded on the left (by default) by two dock bars and on the top by several toolbars

In the takeoff area you may view your project plans (images) andor takeoff objects the takeoff list with quantities the worksheet or a legend of your condition list

The main window of On-Screen Takeoff has three tabs located at the bottom left allowing for quick change between Image Takeoff or Worksheet views Select the desired view option on the toolbar and it will automatically open on your screen

Section 4 Features

19

Image View

This view shows the plan file andor takeoff conditions drawn from your plans

Takeoff View This view displays the height if applicable and quantity breakdowns of your conditions according to result types indicated (eg linear feet square feet or count of items) for zones pages and the project as a whole It also displays notes per condition

Section 4 Features

20

Worksheet View This view displays the condition and quantity in units of measure specified in the first results field of the Results tab in the Condition dialog and allows the user to enter amounts for material labor and subcontractor takeoffs

NOTE When in the Worksheet view tab out the field then save This is keep all the values saved

Navigating On-Screen Takeoff

Auto Scrolling When creating linear areas or zones On-Screen Takeoff will automatically scroll the image view when necessary It will move as your mouse or digitizer moves beyond the edge of the current view

Changing Pages

1 Select View gt Next Page Previous Page or Go To Page (specify page number for the Go to Page option)

2 You may also select the corresponding arrows for these options from the Navigate Toolbar The

drop down arrow in the Page field will list the pages The and arrows will take you to the

previous or next page The and arrows will take you to the first or last page

OR

Section 4 Features

21

3 Or press Ctrl G for the Go To Page dialog

Hot Links Hot links allow you to move quickly from one drawing to the pertinent area of another drawing A hot link is handy when viewing enlarged areas of a page and needing the ability to jump back to a reference page

1 Select Tools gt Hot Link

OR

2 Click from the Tools Toolbar

3 Click on the page where you want to set the link The Hot Link dialog will open

4 Using the current page display on the Navigate Toolbar access the pull-down menu of pages by

clicking on the arrow at the right

5 Select the page for your link (You may also choose View gt Go to Page and select by page number)

6 Manipulate the view using the zoom tool and the scroll bars

7 Click

8 After joining a hot link to another page the hot link arrows in the Navigation Toolbar will become active

9 Move a hot link to another location on the page by clicking then click and drag the hot link image anywhere on the page

Section 5

22

Projects

This section will

Help you create settings important to your projects

Explain how On-Screen Takeoff works with your electronic or paper plans

Section 5 Projects

23

Project Template Files You can begin your project with a template Templates allow you to take advantage of conditions and settings used with previous projects

On-Screen Takeoff templates contain condition lists and established layer separations from previous projects you have created You may also use the sample templates provided with On-Screen Takeoff as a great starting point All aspects of the templates may be adjusted for a new project

1 Select File gt New and click the OK button

2 From the New dialog box choose the template that best fits your project

3 The conditions for this template will appear in the Takeoff Dock bar and the Project Properties dialog will open asking for further information

4 Use File gt Save or File gt Save As to rename and save your new project

Saving a Project as a Template File You can save your condition properties and layers as a template for future projects

1 Select File gt Save As

2 Enter a name for your template and select On-Screen Takeoff Template Files (tpo) from the Save As type field of the dialog (click on the down arrow to select)

3 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog Modifying a Template File Follow these steps to modify an existing template file if you need to change or add conditions andor layers

1 Select File gt Open

2 Navigate to your Projects directory

3 In the File Type drop-down select On-Screen Takeoff Template files (tpo)

4 Choose the On-Screen Takeoff template file you would like to modify and click the OK button

5 Make appropriate changes

6 Save and close file

The On-Screen Takeoff template files cannot save takeoff information

Section 5 Projects

24

Opening an Existing Project File 1 Select File gt Open

2 Navigate to the desired file location

3 Click the Open button

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask

you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Creating a New Project

1 Select File gt New

2 For a blank untitled project click

3 At this point the Project Properties dialog will pop-up for more information about your takeoff

NOTE The following are important to keep in mind when beginning a new project

At the start of your project fill out the Project Properties settings to establish the name for all printed output from your project set the default page size and scale for your plans number and names of different pages within the project and locations of electronic drawings

Scale settings can significantly affect quantity outcomes Be sure to set the scale for each page of drawings before beginning condition takeoffs

When using a digitizer remember to make a mark with a pen or pencil in the upper left and lower right corners of the first sheet of the paper plans to delineate the takeoff area for that sheet You can then set the takeoff area on On-Screen Takeoff using your marks

Save your project before you begin taking off any conditions On-Screen Takeoff will write a back-up file using the same file name

Remember the Undo feature If you make a mistake select Edit gt Undo and reverse the process step by step

Section 5 Projects

25

Project Properties

You can either set your Project Properties when you create a new takeoff or once your project file is saved under the appropriate name

1 Select File gt Project Properties the Project Properties dialog box will appear

2 Type in the name of your project to appear on printouts Use the backspace andor delete keys to edit the name as necessary

3 Press the Tab key to move to the Default Image Size option or click within the Image Size box You may click on the arrow at the right for the pull-down menu of page size options or you can use the down-arrow key on your keyboard to scroll through the list to the appropriate selection

4 Press the Tab key to move to the Default Scale option Select a scale by using the drop down arrow If your scale is metric you will need to click in the box next to Metric to convert to that measurement

5 Establish the number of pages for your project plans And load image files See Adding Pages to

Your Project

Adding Pages to Projects Individual Electronic Plans

1 Click on in the Project Properties dialog

2 In the Add Images dialog use the drop down arrow to navigate to the appropriate directory and folder containing your image

3 Select the file so that it displays in the File name field then click The file will display by name and path in the Image File field in Project Properties dialog

4 Click to accept and your project will automatically open

5 Save your project with the new settings by selecting File gt Save

Section 5 Projects

26

Electronic plans scanned from blueprints (as opposed to blue lines) will display as white lines on a black background and are difficult to read on your computer screen Select Image gt Invert and the colors will invert to black on white

You may have noticed the Page column in the Project Properties dialog Generally plan images occupy one page and 1 will be listed in the column indicating Page 1 of your plan file If you import a multi-page TIF a plan file containing more than one page of plans they will import as separate pages and each successive page will be indicated under the Page column as 1 2 3 etc of the plan file

Group of Electronic Plans You may add all the electronic plan files from a particular source (for example from a CD) by using the Auto Add feature

1 Click the button in the Project Properties dialog

2 Browse until you find the appropriate directory and folder containing your plan images

3 Click on any file displayed within your target folder so that the file name appears in the File name box of the Auto Add dialog

4 Click The image paths and file names will be recorded into the project properties arranged alphabetically

5 Click to accept your choices and your project will automatically open

6 Save your project with the new settings by selecting File gt Save

To load Dodge Plans into your Project Properties see Appendix IIi Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

Paper Plans On-Screen Takeoff makes it easy for Full Mode users to perform quantity takeoffs from paper plans using a digitizer

1 Add pages by clicking until you have the number of pages initially in the project

2 Name each page by clicking within the Title area and typing the name

3 Click to accept your choices and close the Project Properties dialog

4 Save your project with the new project properties settings by selecting File gt Save

Section 5 Projects

27

Setting Up a Drawing Template On-Screen Takeoff provides the convenience of using the same work surface for both digitizer and mouse to allow the user to draw conditions and then edit settings of the project or add or change conditions without breaking stride A mouse pad template included with the program defines the area of the digitizer in which use of the stylus or cursor will be recognized as mouse movement as opposed to drawing movement

1 Place your stylus on On-Screen Takeoff

2 Placing the template identifies the location mouse movements will be recognized by the program

Before placing the template the template must be applied to the digitizer surface This may have been done during the installation of your digitizer We suggest attaching the template to the lower right corner of the digitizer surface about one inch inside the grid area

3 Select Digitizer gt Place Template

4 Follow the instruction prompts on the screen clicking first on the target symbol at the left of the On-Screen Takeoff box on the template then on the target at the right

Setting Takeoff Area Before you can begin taking off a drawing you must define the drawing area on the digitizer This requires defining an area that will include all objects on each drawing of your plans As you add pages to your takeoff the same area of the digitizer will be active

1 Secure the plans to the digitizer with tape or a set of clamps

2 With a pen or a pencil mark the upper left corner and the lower right corner of the first page in your set of plans

3 Select Digitizer gt Set Takeoff Area

4 Click each mark with the stylus pen as prompted

5 Verify the active area of the digitizer by looking at the image size located in the lower right corner of your screen

If you close the program before the takeoff is complete you will need to reestablish the takeoff area before you can add additional condition quantities

Electronic plans appear on your computer screen eliminating the need to set a takeoff area You simply drag your mouse across the conditions you wish to takeoff The conditions will be highlighted and quantities will be totaled instantly Electronic plans are available through a variety of services For information contact an On Center Software account manager

Section 5 Projects

28

Setting Scale for Specific Pages You may set the scale in each page view separately This will override the default scale setting in Project Properties for that page Setting the correct scale for the drawing before taking off quantities ensures accurate calculations Be careful to check the scale for each drawing in your project before doing takeoffs

1 Display the page you want to set select Edit gt Set Scale

2 Use the drop down arrow to select a scale that will be applied to that page

3 Click

OR

4 Access the pull-down scale settings on the Navigate toolbar

NOTE As you draw objects notice that the drawn object is similar in width to the object on your plans If it is not the scale set may not be correct

Calculating Scale You may calculate scale according to a known measurement between two points either with a digitizer or on electronic plans

1 Select Edit gt Calculate Scale using Image or Edit gt Calculate Scale using Digitizer

2 Follow the instructions in the related Calculate Scale dialog box You will be asked to click on the first and second points then to enter the dimension for that distance

3 The scale will be recalculated for the displayed page and the Scale display on the Navigate toolbar will show the new scale

Section 6

29

Conditions and Takeoff

This section will Draw Conditions to Takeoff Plan Quantities

What Zones will do to help your takeoff process

Discuss the ins and outs of Takeoffs

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

30

Creating Conditions

If you are starting a new project from scratch you will need to create conditions to takeoff quantities such as floor areas wall lengths and corner bead counts If you are using a template you will have several pre-designed conditions already listed on the Takeoff dock bar However you may want to change the characteristics of some conditions or create additional conditions for a particular project

1 Right Click within the Takeoff dock bar Select New gt Condition

Or

2 From the Takeoff dock bar Click (if the buttons are not showing right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select Show Buttons from the pop-up menu) The New Condition dialog appears

3 Select the condition type (Linear Area Count or Zone) from the pull-down menu accessed by the

down arrow next to the Type option

4 Press Tab or use the mouse (or stylus) to move to Name and enter a name for your condition

5 Specify the desired condition attributes See Condition Attributes for more detail

6 Click for condition to apply

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

31

Condition Attributes Each condition type will have related attributes to select or specify within the General and Advanced tabs of the New Condition dialog Once a condition has been used to takeoff a quantity from your plans certain attributes cannot be changed

All conditions allow the user to specify color and fill pattern for the object drawn

Linear Conditions

General Specify width and height by feet and inches Specify pitch in inches up to the nearest thousandth of an inch if applicable

Advanced Specify rounding for object quantities and droprun default length for electrical or plumbing drops at the ends of lines Select Connect to have lines connect at the corners where one line of the condition ends and another begins (and indicate Tolerance for the featurersquos activation as distance between the ends of two lines) Choose Trim to have lines automatically trim to a line being crossed Choose Curve to draw a curved line

Follow these examples for inputting feet and inches For 7 feet 6 inches type 706 for 13 feet 7 inches type 1307 For 20 feet type 2000

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

32

Area Conditions

General If needed you can specify the thickness (in inches) andor pitch (in inches)

Advanced Specify rounding for object quantities Choose to display an adjustable grid within the area and indicate matrix cell dimensions

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

33

Count Conditions

General

Specify height and indicate the size (in inches) and shape (square circle triangle rectangle or opening) of the count object as it will appear on screen

Advanced Count conditions have advanced attributes These options are available for all shapes except for openings

Zone Conditions Zones allow you to subdivide condition quantities making it easier to modify and complete jobs in phases They can be used at the end of a takeoff to isolate a group of condition quantities that are in different areas of the takeoff

Zones can also be used to break a takeoff into multi-phases and can even be used to isolate quantities while a job is in progress to group the amount of work that has been completed to date They can be applied to one or multiple pages in your plans automatically calculating the takeoff quantities for each zoned area

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

34

The zone feature is only available in Lite and Full Mode If you are in View Mode and would like

to use this feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade

Condition Notes A Note tab is provided for comments regarding the condition These notes will display on the Takeoff List report and will import into Quick Bid

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

35

Condition Results The Results tab of the New Condition is based on condition type Initial settings default to linear feet (LF) for linear conditions square feet (SF) for area conditions and count of items (EA) for count conditions and zones The first of the results fields will display for the condition items in the Takeoff dock bar area All results will display in worksheets and Takeoff List reports as well as in an Excel spreadsheet after being exported

Copying Conditions You may use the condition attributes from a condition yoursquove already created for any future conditions of the same type

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Click the Copy button from the toolbar

OR

3 Right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select copy

4 A new condition will appear in the list with the same condition attributes as the previous condition but with the quantities zeroed

Editing Conditions Once you have copied a condition you might want to change several attributes You can also edit an existing condition to fit any updated needs

1 Highlight the desired condition on the Takeoff dock bar

2 Click the Change button

OR

3 Double-click on the condition you wish to edit to bring up the Change Condition dialog

NOTE The Change Condition dialog differs from the New Condition dialog only in that if takeoffs

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

36

have been performed in your project with this condition you will not be able to change the type of condition or certain properties under the advanced tab of the dialog box

Deleting Conditions 1 Click on the condition in the Takeoff Dock bar area

2 Click the Delete button on the toolbar

OR

3 Right-click and select Delete from the pop-up menu

All takeoff associated with the deleted condition will be deleted immediately and permanently

Organizing Project Conditions Within your project you can create folders andor sub-folders for different types of conditions You may even want to create a folder containing conditions with reset values

To get started organizing your conditions make sure you are viewing the condition tree (right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select Show Tree)

Creating Folders and Sub-Folders 1 Right-click in the Takeoff Dock bar area

2 Select New gt Folder from the pop-up menu

Copying Folders

1 Click on the folder and click Copy on the toolbar

2 All copied conditions within the new folder will have values reset to zero

Renaming Folders

1 Click on the folder

2 Right-click and select Rename from the pop-up menu

3 Enter a name for your folder and click the Enter button

Changing Condition Order

You may move conditions up or down in the condition list of the Takeoff dock bar to suit your project needs

1 Select the condition you would like to move by clicking to highlight it

NOTE When you are ready to move the highlighted conditions be sure that you start

moving using the last condition chosen That condition will have a highlighted boarder

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

37

2 Drag and drop any the condition from one place to another in the list You may also move a condition to another folder on the list in this way

Drawing with Conditions Snap Angles Set up snap angles to prevent lines from appearing jagged Snap angles are commonly set at 15deg and shift snap angles at 0deg

1 Go to Tools gt Options Options dialog appears

2 Under the General tab make the desired settings

3 Click to save the settings As they are drawn lines will snap to the set degree

Drawing a Linear Object 1 Select a condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff dock bar

2 Move the cursor into the Image takeoff area of the screen you will see the cursor display as crosshairs

3 Click and hold left mouse button then drag mouse to draw a line

4 Release mouse button to set line

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

38

5 Repeat steps for further lines

Continuous Mode This feature allows you to draw an object that has connected lines

1 Click the icon from the Takeoff toolbar

OR

2 Go to Tools gt Continuous Mode

3 Follow steps 1-3 from Draw a Linear Object

4 Click at each point of intersection The object will be connected

5 Double-click after making the final point to set the lines

Drawing a Curve To draw a curved line the Curve option must be checked under the Advanced tab of the Condition dialog

1 Click where you want to begin the curve and drag in a straight line to the position for the other endpoint of the curve

2 Click on the line to select it Handles in the shapes of small squares will appear at either end of

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

39

the line and in the center of the line

3 Move the cursor over the center handles until the cursor becomes a two-way arrow

4 Click and drag in the direction of the curve bending the line as you move the cursor Release to set the curve (The line you began with will disappear)

Draw a circle by drawing two curved lines connected

Drawing an Area Object Area conditions are drawn similarly to continuous mode lines You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete your area takeoff

NOTE When drawing an area do not intersect the perimeter or line of the object you are drawing

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

3 The area will be filled with the pattern set for that condition

NOTE The simulated circle will be good enough for you to be able to make a bid

To create a circular area click from point to point with very short distances in between points simulating a circlersquos perimeter Double-click after setting the last point to set the area

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

40

Grid Options Grids give you an added advantage when installing materials such as tiles Use this feature to get a count for how many tiles are needed for an area

1 Double-click on an area condition in the Takeoff dock bar to open its Condition dialog

2 Click on the Advanced tab to show its options

3 Check the box next to Grid by clicking in it

4 Indicate the dimensions of the cell matrix in inches (For example 200 x 400)

5 Under Results tab choose each (EA) for one of the results fields This will tabulate a number of grid cells (including partial grid cells) in area

6 Click to save your settings

7 Use the Move Grid and Rotate Grid features in the Tools menu to manipulate the grid as desired

Grid Calculation

1 Go to Tools gt Options menu

1 Specify if On-Screen Takeoff automatically should Calculate Grid Position

2 If AreaGrid Size is selected On-Screen Takeoff will calculate the number of items needed to fill the grid based on grid demintions

3 Click to accept and close the dialog

To move a line at any angle (regardless of default setting) press the Shift key while moving the mouse

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

41

Backout Mode This feature allows you to take out part of an area and deduct that amount of square footage

1 Select Tools gt Backout Mode

2 Outline the are you want backed out as you would when drawing a regular area object (see Drawing an Area Object)

3 The outlined area will clear and quantities will be recalculated

NOTE The perimeter of the backout area will be added to the LF quantity for that condition

Drawing a Count Object Square triangle rectangle and circle shaped count objects can easily be placed on images

1 Select the condition

2 Click in the location where you want the object to appear

3 To place an opening-shaped count item like a door or window you must click over an existing linear object such as a wall

4 On the Results tab you can change the height properties to give you the result you need

5 If Backout is checked on the advanced tab for each count opening the opening-shaped count item will back out a corresponding section of the linear object

Opening shaped count items are sized at 3rsquo0rdquo by default

Drawing a Zone Zones are drawn in the same way as area objects and may be any polygonal shape You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete the zone perimeter

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

42

Selecting Objects

1 Use the Select Tool to select objects

You can also select all objects that correspond to a condition

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Right-click and choose Select All

3 All objects with this condition will be highlighted with squares as an outline

Moving and Resizing Objects Linear

1 To move or resize a linear object click anywhere on the line to select it

2 To move the line position your pointer over the center handles When the mouse is positioned over the handles you will see a two-way arrow You will only be able to move the line in the direction of the arrows

3 Drag the line to a new position

4 Clicking and dragging the handles on the ends of the line will allow you to lengthen or shorten your line

Area and Zone

1 To move an area object or zone in its entirety click and drag it to its new position

2 Grabbing a handle at a corner or intersection of the object will allow you to adjust and change its perimeter

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

43

Count 1 To move a square circle rectangle or triangle shaped count object click and drag

2 Click and drag an opening shaped count object along the length of the linear object to the desired position then release

NOTE An opening shaped count object may not be moved from its associated linear condition object however it may be moved up and down the length of the linear object

Layers On-Screen Takeoff allows you to sort and separate your takeoff objects within the same job and on the same page On-Screen Takeoff gives you this flexibility through the use of layers

By assigning different conditions to different layers (for example differentiating between floors ceilings and walls) you can choose to view all layers or turn off certain layers to display and print the remaining groups of conditions only You may also remove the background image of electronic plans add text and hot link symbols or print only your condition takeoffs

Layers are only available in Full Mode If you are in View or Lite Mode and would like to use this

feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade Default Layers

On-Screen Takeoff begins every project with three default layers Image Annotation and Default The Image layer holds the electronic plan files you may have in your project The Annotation layer possesses all text notations highlighting and hot links in the project The Default layer will appear in the Condition dialog when creating or editing a condition (listed in the takeoff dock bar) Conditions are assigned to the Default layer unless otherwise specified by the user

Creating Layers To assign a condition to a layer other than the default layer you must first create additional layers for your project

1 Select View gt Layers to open the Layers dialog

2 Click An unnamed layer will be added

3 Click within the empty box and type a name for your layer (for example Wall)

4 New layers are added as active layers The adjacent box under the Show column will be checked

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

44

Assigning a Layer to a Condition 1 Open the Condition dialog box by creating a new condition or editing an existing condition

2 Under the General tab click on the down arrow in the Layer field to display optional layers

3 Select the desired layer for the condition Only the Default layer and layers you have added will be displayed

4 Click

View and Hide Layers

1 Select View gt Layers

2 Under the Show column check the box to view or remove the check (by clicking on it) to hide the specific layer

3 Click to accept and close the Layers dialog

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

45

Assigning Text to a Layer When adding text to an image On-Screen Takeoff has the capability to assign the text to a specified layer

1 Select the Text Tool

2 Click at the point you want to place your text

3 Type in your text using the Enter key for line breaks

4 Click the drop down arrow next to the Layer field and select the desired layer

Section 7

46

Printing and Exporting

This section will

Printing options and procedures

Exporting data by copying and pasting

Exporting quantity results to Excel spreadsheets

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

47

Print Setup On-Screen Takeoff allows the user to print the image takeoff list and worksheet

1 Select File gt Print Setup The Print Setup dialog will open

2 Select a printer or leave the default selection listed (change from the default printer displayed by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the field)

3 Indicate page size and printer tray option (Source) Access page size options by clicking on the

down arrow at the right of the field

4 Choose Portrait or Landscape orientation

5 Click to accept and close the dialog

Printing Images The image area can include the electronic plans the takeoff objects added text and hot links To print a subset of these (for example just the takeoffs without the plans or the added text and hot link symbols) hide layers that you do not want to print (see Section 6 View and Hide Layers) When you are printing your images every page will show the scale of the takeoff you are printing

1 Click on the Image tab to display the area of your project

2 Select File gt Print (or Ctrl + P)

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

48

3 Select the desired view (What to print) and the Image Range

4 Click The second Print dialog will open

5 Change settings accordingly or click if you accept the default settings

Printing Takeoff Lists and Worksheets In Takeoff Lists and Worksheets you may hide columns to print only certain results or adjust column widths to fit the report within the page size selected

1 In Takeoff List or Worksheet view move your cursor to the right side of the columnrsquos title bar the cursor will display as a two-way arrow

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

49

2 Click and drag to adjust the width of the column Holding the mouse button you may

slide the title bar under the title bar to its left to hide the column completely

3 Select File gt Print or press Ctrl + P to access the Print dialog

4 Indicate desired printer and choose the number of copies

5 Click to print and close the dialog

When printing the condition list we suggest printing in landscape

To reset to the default column widths double-click on the right border of a column heading will reset the column to its right (or previously to its right before being hidden)

Print Preview 1 Select File gt Print Preview

2 Use and to vary your view 3 If viewing an image choose current full or scale view to see how it displays

4 For printed outputs that cover more than one page use and to view adjacent pages or click on the down arrow next to Page field and select the page you want displayed

Exporting Using the CopyPaste Feature You may copy all the data or sections from the worksheet and the takeoff list view in On-Screen Takeoff and paste it into another application When pasting into Excel the cell layout will be maintained

1 Highlight the areas you wish to paste Click and hold the left mouse button down as you drag the cursor over the area to be selected then releasing the mouse button

OR

2 Select the entire takeoff list quickly click on the left On-Screen Takeoff column header and hold and drag the cursor across the remaining column headings

The number of pages for the view selected will display in the lower left-hand corner The zoom percentage that applies to the view will be displayed in the lower right-hand corner next to page size of the drawing

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

50

3 In the worksheet view you may highlight rows by clicking on the numbered buttons to the left of each row clicking and dragging across column headings or clicking and dragging over individual cells in the worksheet

Click anywhere in the appropriate view to deselect the area

4 Once your selection is highlighted you may select Edit gt Copy or Ctrl C from the keyboard 5 On your monitor switch to the application into which you want to paste your selection 6 Select Edit gt Paste in the new application or simply press Ctrl + V to paste

The colored keys for conditions cannot be pasted

Using the Export Feature You may export condition quantities to specified cell location within an Excel worksheet file Cell target locations are assigned in the Results tab of the condition dialogs on the Export line relating to each quantity measurement type

On-Screen Takeoff will export takeoff quantity results for up to three different quantity types that you specify For instance you may want to know the number of square feet in a ceiling area as well as the number of linear feet in its perimeter

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

51

1 Bring up the Condition dialog by double-clicking on a condition in the takeoff dock bar or by

selecting the condition and clicking

2 Click on the Results tab to access its fields The default quantities for the condition type will display

3 For each results field click on the arrow to access the pull-down menu and select the appropriate quantity (for example SF LF EA etchellip)

4 Have your Excel spreadsheet opened and saved in a file

5 Specify the Excel spreadsheet cell locations where you want the results to go

6 For a cell in the first sheet of your spreadsheet type in the cell address (eg a1) Case is not important

7 For a cell on a successive sheet of your spreadsheet type in sheet the number followed by a comma and the cell address without any spaces (eg sheet2a1) Case is not important

8 Click

9 Select File gt Export gt Condition Qty to Excel

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

52

10 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

11 Click to export On-Screen Takeoff results to specified cell locations in the Excel file When you return to the Excel application you will see the values have been added to the specified cell locations in your spreadsheet

12 Save your Excel file

Exporting Worksheet to Excel

1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 From On-Screen Takeoff Select File gt Export gt Worksheet to Excel

4 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

5 Click When you return to the Excel application you will see the values from the Worksheet Tab have been added to your spreadsheet

6 Save your Excel file

Exporting Takeoff to CVS 1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 Click the Takeoff Tab in the project you want to export the information

4 Select File gt Export gt Takeoff to CSV

5 Browse to the location of the CSV spreadsheet file click file to select it

6 Click the Save

NOTE CSV files can be opened in Excel Lotus Access etc One may consider this option more of a ldquodumprdquo into a file

The Excel application must be active (it may be minimized on the application bar) with the target spreadsheet open in the application Otherwise an error will occur with the export operation that will affect both the On-Screen Takeofftrade file and the Excel spreadsheet

Section 8

53

Advanced Features

This section will

Some special features of working with condition objects in the takeoff area

Details of advanced options for conditions

Advanced features of the Project Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

54

Features to Use with Objects Roping Feature You can move copy or delete using this feature Using the Select tool (the pointer) you may select several objects at once by clicking and dragging an outline around the objects then releasing the mouse button Roping may select either objects completely within the outlined area (inclusive) or objects both within and touched by the outlined area (touching) Specify your roping preference under Tools gt Options

1 Click and hold the mouse button at a point on the screen near the objects to be selected and drag to surround the objects with an outline

2 Release the mouse button The objects will be selected

3 You may now

Move the group around on the page by clicking within the group dragging the mouse and releasing the button to place the objects

Delete the group of objects by clicking the Delete key or

Copy and paste by pressing Ctrl C to copy the group then Ctrl V to paste it The pasted copy of the grouped objects will appear slightly offset from the original objects

Section 8 Advanced Features

55

Applying a DropRun Count

Use the droprun feature when calculating quantities to take into account the drop or run of a linear condition such as electrical lines or plumbing pipes Drop or run lengths may be added separately to any linear condition on screen while a default droprun length may be indicated for a condition as a whole

1 Select the desired linear condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff Dock bar

2 Click the Change button in the toolbar to open the Change Condition dialog

3 Click the Advanced tab to access the advanced options and click inside the DropRun check box

4 Enter a default length to be applied to all of this condition Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches) You can leave the length blank and manually enter drop run on each segment drawn

5 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog

Edit DropRun Count

1 With the related linear condition in the Takeoff Dock bar highlighted or with the pointer tool selected

2 click on the desired linear object in the image takeoff area The Count button will become active

3 Click on the Count button (alternatively select Tools gt Count) The default droprun amount will show in the pop-up Count dialog (Default length will be zero if droprun has not been selected in this conditionrsquos properties)

4 Type in the desired length Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches)

5 Click the OK button The additional amount will be reflected in the corresponding quantity The new DropRun count will apply only to the object edited

Adding Text in Image View

On-Screen Takeoff allows you to place text comments around your quantity takeoffs that may be printed along with plan images and objects Text is automatically placed within the Annotation Layer (that includes text and hot links)

1 To place text on the image select the Text Tool and click at the point you want to place your text opening a text box

2 Type in your information clicking Enter for line breaks

3 When you are finished click the OK button to exit the text box

4 To reposition text simply click on the text (with the Text Tool active) to select it

5 Move the cursor over the text the cursor will now display as a four-way arrow

6 Click and drag the mouse to position the text as desired

Section 8 Advanced Features

56

1 To edit existing text use the Text Tool to double-click on the text to open the editing box

2 Enter additional text or use the Backspace key to delete text as necessary

Formatting Text Once created you may format the font size type style and color of your text

1 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Font or click on the Font button in the Takeoff Toolbar

2 Select the desired features (color options are disabled) and click the OK button

3 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Color or click on the Color button in the Takeoff Toolbar The Color dialog will open

4 Click on a color in the Basic Color palette or create a color and add to the Custom Colors palette (Be sure to click on the color in the Custom Colors palette to select it)

5 Click the OK button

Object Properties

Linear Objects

Linear objects may be set to connect at corners

A linear object may be set to trim automatically when crossing another linear object (Check the trim option under the advanced tab of the Condition dialog)

When you move a connected linear object objects automatically move and resize connected lines accordingly (quantities are then recalculated)

This feature requires that the connected linear object be moved using the center handles (does not apply when resizing the line from the ends)

Objects constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

Objects are measured from centerline to centerline

Section 8 Advanced Features

57

Area Objects When drawing an area use your escape key to undo the last line drawn You may reverse your

drawing of an area using the escape key

The area will not fill with color and pattern until the user double-clicks after the last line is set

Lines drawn to delineate an area object constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

After selecting an area to move or adjust position the mouse in the center to move the entire area position the mouse at the sides or corners to adjust the perimeter

Count Objects

All count objects are quantified by the physical number of objects per page and reported as EA for the UOM The quantity for the current Image View is (displayed in the Condition List) and the total quantity in your project is displayed in the Takeoff View and Worksheet View)

Square circle rectangle and triangle shaped count objects do not displace or subtract from other object quantities when placed on top of them However on the Advanced Tab for the count condition a connect property can be set (this is a check box) so that when a count object of this shape is put on top of a Linear type takeoff object it will move with the linear if said linear is moved

An opened-shaped count object must be placed within a linear object Opening shaped count objects may also be measured by linear foot or linear yard (EA SF and SY are also options) Opening shaped count items default to a width of 3rsquo 0rdquo at the time of creation This size can be changed The small medium and large size are not options on this type of condition anymore Check Backout on the Advanced tab for each Count object back out the footage (or yardage) of opening-shaped count objects in which they are placed

NOTE In order to see this Backout functionality (in quantity) for SY or SF deductions at least one of the

results for the Linear(s) this object will be placed on must be set to SY or SF and the count object must have a height quantity

Advanced Features of Conditions The Round Feature Under the Advanced tab of the linear and area Condition dialogues you may specify quantity rounding (in inches) For linear objects rounding applies to each linear object drawn For area objects rounding will apply to each segment of the area perimeter adjusting the perimeter and area calculations For example With a linear condition entering 12 in the Round field will round up each related linear object to the nearest 12 inches or one foot With this setting two walls of 1 4 would each round to 2 0 totaling 4 0

NOTE In the Takeoff Dock bar condition list and in the On-Screen Takeoff reports quantities will be displayed in whole numbers rounded up to the nearest foot However calculations are based on true quantities without rounding unless the Round Feature is engaged

Pitch Pitch may apply either to linear or area conditions It is measured in rise per linear foot Entering 12 indicates a 12 rise per 12 of linear distance (a pitch of 12 over 12) or an angle of 45deg

Section 8 Advanced Features

58

Advanced Features of Project Properties Selecting Multiple Pages

1 Select a single page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry

2 Drag the cursor down the column of numbers to select consecutive pages

3 Click on the blank button at the top of this column to select all pages in the Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

59

Changing Image Assigned to a Drawing 1 Select the page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry 2 Click the Change Image button The Change Image dialog box will appear

3 Navigate to the desired file and select by clicking on it

4 Click the Open button The electronic file assigned to the page will have been changed to reflect the new file choice

Changing Image File Path 1 Select pages as described above

2 Choose Change Folder

3 In the Change Folder dialog navigate to the appropriate folder

4 Click the OK button The file path will have been changed for the selected page entries

Delete a Page from Project Properties 1 Select the page you want to delete by clicking on its associated number (in the gray box at the

left of the entry)

2 Choose Delete Page

All Takeoff on the page will be deleted immediately and permanently

Section 8 Advanced Features

60

Advanced Features of Tool Options

Calculation Method On-Screen Takeoff has built-in calculation options to allow for faster work and faster saves until your takeoff is complete Calculation options are found by selecting Tools gt Options then clicking on the Calculation tab

Calculation method can be set to Automatic Automatic except Grids and Manual Manual will allow the program to operate more quickly while Automatic or Automatic except Grids allows the user to see quantity changes as takeoffs are made

In any mode you may press F9 to recalculate quantities for the On-Screen Takeoff current totals

Configuration Tab

When the ldquoPage Label (A01)rdquo radial button is chosen On-Screen Takeoff puts the numbered label on all the pages of in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar If the Page Descriptionrdquo radial button is chosen then a description of what takeoff is on that specific page will be shown in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar

This section of the configuration tab gives you options on how you want to export your information When the ldquoFolderSubfolder Namesrdquo radial button is chosen than on your file that you are exporting to will have all the conditions folders and subfolders In the Delimiter box you can choose the symbol that is needed to separate the information you are exporting Some files need semicolons () or colons () to make sure the information comes exported in is separated it the appropriate places

Section 8 Advanced Features

61

In previous versions of On-Screen Takeoff there are views that users need to have in order for them to display their information By either choosing ldquoOST 1xrdquo or ldquoOST 2xrdquo it will let the program know you want your columns of information exported in that specific format

When you have the Confirm Deletions radial button of ldquoYesrdquo chosen than every time you delete anything you will get a dialog box confirming your intentions of deletion

While working with your takeoff you have a choice to either view the legend of your conditions or hide it Choose whichever radial button that suits your needs

For those who prefer to use the Enter key to navigate in dialog boxes this option is just for that

Font Tab The Font tab is designed for you to make your own look and feel for the application At the bottom of this tab it will show you sample of the fonts and colors you have chosen

Renaming the Current Page You may change the name of the current page in the takeoff area of On-Screen Takeoff by selecting Edit gt Rename Page

This opens the Name Page dialog and you may simply type in a new name and click the Enter button The new name for the file will be reflected on the title bar for the page and in Project Properties

You also may access the Rename Page function by right-clicking in the takeoff area while in Image View and selecting the option from the pop-up menu that appears

Section 9

62

Saving and Exiting

This section will

Explain how to save projects

Show you how to safely exit the program

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

63

Saving Your Project

1 Select File gt Save 2 If your project has not previously been saved a Save dialog box will open to allow you to name

the file and choose the directory and folder in which to save your file 3 Once saved File gt Save will simply save the current version of the file

OR

4 Select File gt Save As then type in a new name for the file and save to the desired file path

The Auto-save Feature With the Auto-save feature On-Screen Takeoff automatically backs up your open project You may choose to have more than one level of backup files The first backup copy will have the extension b00 and successive files will be b01 b02 and so on If you have designated four levels of backup files after the fourth backup copy has been created (b03) the next file will be saved over the file with extension b00 Further backup saves will then rotate through the four backup files in the same way

1 Select Tools gt Options 2 In the Auto-save area (under the General tab) select the frequency of backup file creation (in

minutes) and the number of levels for the feature 3 You also may disengage the feature by clicking in the check box to clear it

The Auto-save feature automatically saves backup copies to the directory of the current project If you are working from a write-protected area such as a CD-ROM On-Screen Takeoff will place backup files in the On-Screen Takeoff folder

Exiting When you are finished using On-Screen Takeoff it is very easy to exit Exiting is very important because of security reasons If someone were to use your computer they could enter the application and view and manipulate information

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

64

On-Screen Takeoff closes the open project when you open another or create a new project or when you exit the program

1 Select File gt Exit

OR

2 You also may click at the upper right-hand corner of the application to exit

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

65

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer When you get your digitizer from GTCO you will need to connect it to your computer Follow the instructions outlined below to do this

Note For rollup digitizers the metal bar must be oriented to the top or right hand side

Connecting the Digitizer 1 Lay the digitizer out flat 2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer 3 Plug in the power adapter 4 Plug the interface (IO) cable into the digitizer 5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into an open serial port on computer

Note GTCO Technical support phone number is 410-381-6688 The electronic manual (on diskette) from GTCO contains more detailed installation and operation instructions for the GTCO digitizer model you have

Installing other Digitizer Drivers If you are using a GTCO Digitizer you will need to install the GTCO TabletWorks Drivers

If you are using a Digitizer not supported by GTCO Tablet Works 10 please contact the manufacturer of your digitizer for assistance with installation

Installing GTCO TabletWorks Drivers 1 Insert the On Center CD into the CD-ROM drive The CD Startup screen will open 2 Click on Install Software 3 Select Additional Software and Drivers 4 Select Digitizer Driver 5 Follow the instructions for installing TabletWorks 10

Adhering the Template The template is a small plastic sticker used to enable mouse function when using the digitizer with On-Screen Takeoff Place your template on your digitizer We suggest placing it in the bottom right corner of the digitizer about one inch inside the takeoff area

Note You may either peel off the back of the template and use the adhesive surface or you can tape the template down

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

66

Testing the Digitizer Drivers Before running OST you may test the digitizer by moving the stylus around on the digitizer pad it should move the mouse cursor (if mouse emulation is enabled)

If the digitizer does not move the mouse cursor on the screen

The superset codes may need to be reset Reset the superset codes by touching on the border of the digitizer with the stylus The digitizer should beep several times

The digitizer may not be communicating with the computer Be sure the COM port selected is correct Be sure the COM port selected is correct If you are not able to get the digitizer to move the mouse cursor you need to call GTCO technical support for help

Note The Mouse Emulation is not required for On-Screen Takeoff to work properly It is used only for the Template functionality if the digitizer is moving the cursor the wrong direction (up instead of sideways or vice-versa)

Click the L-shaped arrow symbol on the digitizer with the stylus

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

67

Appendix II Toolbar Items Main Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

68

Tool Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

69

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

70

Navigate Toolbar (Continued)

Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

71

Takeoff Toolbar (Continued)

Image Toolbar

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

72

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

This section will detail how to load plans from a F W Dodge CD-ROM into an On-Screen Takeoff project file ready for takeoffs

Dodge files may be added to the Project Properties dialog However loading the files in that way will load the files by number rather than name description If you want to load one page only from your Dodge CD You will have to rename the page to display the name rather than number of the file

To load plan files from a Dodge CD so that the files load sequentially by file number but are displayed by name rather than by number within your project follow the instructions below

Opening a Dodge project from a CD-ROM 1 Insert the CD into the drive 2 Choose File gt Custom 3 Choose Dodge Plans Project (plansdat) as the file type 4 Select the appropriate file type by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the Files of type

field 5 In the Look in field access your drive paths by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the

field then

Navigate to your CD-ROM drive Open the data folder and Open the Projects folder

6 Select the desired project and open its folder 7 Open the plansdat file 8 All the images will come in sequenced correctly for that job along with the full descriptions

(names) of each page If there is not a plans folder in the project folder then plans do not exist for that project on the CD Opening the plansdat file will yield an empty project

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

73

Appendix IV Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer The On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer is a limited version of On Center Softwarersquos commercial takeoff software If your status bar located at the very bottom of the main window says View Mode in the lower left-hand corner then you are using the Plan Viewer You can use the plan viewer to

View CD-based amp converted CAD drawings

View a previously created OST file and associated drawings

Download electronic plans online

Navigate through drawings

Quickly Takeoff linearsareas and counts

Zoom in to view the plan better

Print drawings directly from the viewer

Viewing an On-Screen Takeoff Project File

1 To open an OST file that was previously created with of On-Screen Takeoff 2 Select File gt Open 3 An Open dialog will appear if you do not see the OST file you are looking for select the

Look In drop down arrow 4 A drop down menu will appear listing the various folders drives and mapped drives located

on your computer select the correct drive or folder location and continue to browse to the location of your OST file

5 When you see your OST file double-click it to open it 6 Any takeoff and drawings should appear on the Image tab view

If you do not see the drawings but do see the colored takeoff layer the drawings may

not be located in the same place they were originally saved at Go to File gt Project Properties and check the Image File path for each listed page If the image file path is pointing to a CD drive make sure the CD is inside the CR-ROM

Downloading Electronic Plans If your Online Plan Service provides a special file format (OSX) required to use this feature of our plan viewer you can immediately downloaded all electronic plans of a project directly from our viewer

Most Plan Room web sites will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff when a request to download plans is made Your particular Plan Room may differ in operation so please contact the provider directly with questions on using the site

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

74

When you request to download or open a project file from a Plan Room you will usually have the open to open or save an OSX file Choosing open will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff Alternately you may choose to save the file to a local hard drive After you have saved the file either double-click it to launch On-Screen Takeoff or open the OSX file using On-Screen Takeoff by clicking File then Open and locating the file on your hard drive You will need to change the file type to OSX

After the OSX file is opened you will see an additional tab appear in the Conditions List window called Pages

The Pages tab shows the hierarchy of your project Gray file icons represent pages that have not been downloaded and blue icons represents pages that have been downloaded

To download a page simply double-click the page icon

If you wish to select a group of pages to download you can use the Ctrl or Shift key to multiple select them then click the Download button

If you wish to download all pages at once click the Download All button

Downloaded pages will now appear in the Project Properties dialog in the same order in which they appear in the Pages tab

Creating Quick Takeoffs With On-Screen Takeoff you can create quick takeoffs to measure quantities even if you dont have the full version of our program However using the Quick Takeoff functionality shows you just a fraction of what the full version can do

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar is located at the top of the image view It has three buttons designated for three types of takeoffs Linear Area and Count The Quantity drop down list will show secondary quantities for Linears and Areas The Units drop down allows you to select how you want your quantities displayed Feet Inches Yards Millimeters and Meters

NOTE Every time change the type of takeoff you are performing (switching from Area to Linear for example) the previous quantities and takeoff objects will disappear They will also disappear when you changes pages

NOTE You can use the Dimension Tool to basically measure the distance between two points or linears The distance will display on the status bar at the bottom of the application

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

75

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions General

Where is On-Screen Takeoff installed on my computer

Typically it is installed in CProgram FilesOn-Screen Takeoff

In Explorer how do I recognize On-Screen Takeoff file types

On-Screen Takeoff data is stored in a single file per job lsquojob name OSTrsquo On-Screen Takeoff templates are stored as lsquotemplate nameTPOrsquo

Can only one project at a time be open

Yes For that reason opening another project automatically closes the project on screen You will be asked to save any changes

Is only one scale allowed per page What about on drawings that have multiple detail sections on a page and each of those drawings have different scales

Yes For pages with drawings of different scales copy the drawing to another project page and set the appropriate scale

I cannot perform backout on an area that is along a linear

As a workaround use the On-Screen Takeoff layers feature to help you with this issue Electronic Images

How do I start a project from drawings that have been scanned and written to a CD-ROM

Open a new project Select File gt Project Properties and select Auto Add Navigate to your CD and the appropriate folder and select any image file in that location Click Open All files in the location will load into your project Recommended that images are copied from CD to hard drive for performance

If I get a disk of drawings in AutoCAD format (R13 or R14) can I read them in On-Screen Takeoff

Yes On-Screen Takeoff now reads DWG DXF and many other format that are saved with AutoCAD

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

76

When I click on the all pages button what is supposed to happen Currently nothing seems to change when I click on that button

The All Pages button is used to apply the Darken and Enhance Plans feature to all pages in the project (as opposed to only the current page on screen)

Is there a way to deduct a large skylight from an area condition

Yes with the related area condition selected in the Takeoff Dock bar unselect the Backout button on the Takeoff Toolbar then draw the Backout area The area quantity will be deducted from the related condition object and the linear measurement of the Backout perimeter will be added

Digitizer Issues

How do I connect a Digitizer to the computer

See Appendix I Connecting a Digitizer

The Place Template menu choice is disabled

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or the digitizer or the digitzer drivers are not installed

It wonrsquot let me select the Set Takeoff Area menu choice

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or no job is open a digitizer is not installed or the drivers are not installed

The digitizer stylus is not moving the cursor or crosshairs

Click S-0-1 superset on the digitizer

How do I convert my old GTCO Digitizer to work with On- Screen Takeofftrade

Call GTCO and they may be able to reconfigure your digitizer to be compatible with On-Screen Takeoff

Printing Issues Which Printers work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible printers include On-Screen Takeoff Hewlett Packard Epson and Canon printers If you are having printer difficulties please contact support and specify the type of printer along with other pertinent information Contact support at wwwoncentercomsupport or email supportoncentercom

Which Plotters work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible Plotters include Hewlett Packard DesignJet plotters and the EnCAD Cadjet II If you are having plotter difficulties please contact support and specify the type of plotter concerned

ViewingDisplay I can no longer see my condition list How do I get it back

The toolbars and Dock bars can be turned on and off through the View gt Toolbars menu options

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

77

This is also accessible by right-clicking in the toolbar area and selecting (or deselecting) a toolbar listed

I cannot view my folders in the condition list

Right-click in the Takeoff Dock barcondition list area and select Show Tree to display your folders

My Status Bar reads Viewer Mode and I am unable to draw conditions

On-Screen Takeoff needs to be Authorized Or you need to purchase an upgrade Click the Perform Advanced Takeoff button on the main toolbar

I hid a Dock bar and when I selected to view it again it appeared alongside the other Dock

bar instead of stacked on top of it How do I fix it

Pick up the Dock bar by clicking on the bar at the top and continuing to hold down the mouse button drag the Dock bar over the other one It will resize and appear stacked with the other

When I open image files from a CD the images are all upside down How do I get them right

side up

To flip pages from top to bottom follow the steps below 1 Click the All Pages button on the Image Toolbar (All Pages is engaged when the button

is not clicked) 2 Click the Flip Horizontal button on the Image Toolbar 3 Click the All Pages button again to disengage

Templates How do I create a Template

Follow the steps below 1 Create a typical project 2 Choose File gt Save As 3 Choose On-Screen Takeoff Template Files as the file type to save 4 Name the file This will save all of the condition setups as well as the layers for the

project

How do I create a new project from a template

Follow the steps below 1 Choose File gt New 2 Select a template from those listed in the New dialog This will open a new project with

conditions and layers saved from a previous project but no pages or takeoff

78

INDEX

Area Conditions 32

Area Objects 57

Auto Scrolling 20

Auto-save 63

Backout Mode 41

Calculation Method 60

Conditions 29

Configuration 60

Contents Tab 6

Continuous Mode 38

Count Conditions 33

Count Objects 57

Digitizer 10 65 76

Docking Toolbars 13

Dodge CD 72

Drawing 27 37

DropRun Count 55

Environment 18

Exiting 63

Exporting 49

Features 16

Font 61

Frequently Asked Questions 75

Grid 40

Help File 5

Hiding Toolbars 13

Hot Links 21

Image 19 59

Image files 9

Image Toolbar 12 71

Images 75

Index Tab 6

Layers 43

Linear Conditions 31

Linear Objects 56

Main Toolbar 12 67

Menus 14

Moving Toolbars 13

Navigate Toolbar 12 69

Navigating 20

On-Screen Takeofftrade 2

Page 59 61

Pages 20 25 28

Plan Viewer 73

Plans 26

Printing 47 76

Project Properties 25

Projects 22

Quick Start Video 18

Resizing Toolbars 13

Roping 54

Saving 63

Scale 28

Search Tab 7

Selecting Objects 42

Setup 8

Start On-Screen Takeofftrade 17

System Requirements 9

Takeoff 19 27

Takeoff Toolbar 70 71

Takeoff Toolbar 12

Template Files 23

TIF (Group4) 9

Tool Toolbar 12 68

Toolbar 67

Toolbars 12

View Toolbar 12 69

Viewing Toolbars 12

Worksheet 20

Zone Conditions 33

Zoom Toolbar 12 69

  • On-Screen Takeoff Lite
  • Table of Contents
  • Section 1 - Introduction
  • Section 2 - Setup
  • Section 3 - Toolbars and Menus
  • Section 4 - Features
  • Section 5 - Projects
  • Section 6 - Conditions and Takeoff
  • Section 7 - Printing and Exporting
  • Section 8 - Advanced Features
  • Section 9 - Saving and Exiting
  • Appendix I - Installing Your Digitizer
  • Appendix II - Toolbar Items
  • Appendix III - Loading Plans from a Dodge CD
  • Appendix IV - Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer
  • Appendix V - Frequently Asked Questions
  • Index

Section 3 Toolbars and Menus

14

Menus

Section 3 Toolbars and Menus

15

Digitizer Menu

Section 4

16

Features

This section will

Show you how open On-Screen Takeoff

Describe the On-Screen Takeoff environment

Teach you how to navigate pages

Section 4 Features

17

Start On-Screen Takeoff

1 On your desktop double-click your On-Screen Takeoff icon

2 The application will open

OR

3 Left-click on the Start button on your computerrsquos toolbar

4 Scroll up to Programs gt On Center Software

5 Highlight On-Screen Takeoff and click On-Screen Takeoff will open On-Screen Takeoff opens to an untitled blank project The Image view of the screen will be a blank page

Two blank dock bars the Pan dock bar and the Takeoff dock bar appear at the left side of the screen Along the bottom the Status bar displays user status or context-sensitive messages as well as paper size and current zoom percentage of the plan sheet on screen The menu bar and several task specific toolbars are located at the top of the screen

NOTE All toolbars and dock bars may be accessed to view or hide through View gt Toolbars on the menu bar

Section 4 Features

18

Quick Start Video When On-Screen Takeoff opens you will be given an option to watch the Quick Start video (recommended) or start the program without watching the video

The 20 minute video will demonstrate key program functionality and allow you to view application instruction for enhanced learning

If you would like to watch the video click If you prefer to get started without

the video click If you have already viewed the video click the lsquoDo not show this message againrsquo box to prevent this dialog from appearing each time you open the program

NOTE If you decide later that you would like to watch the Quick Start video go to Help gt Watch

Quick Start Videos

On-Screen Takeoff Environment The On-Screen Takeoff environment acts like your drafting table allowing you to work on several sheets of plans at once and to reference at a glance the entire drawing and your position on that drawing while giving you the power of a computer to track analyze print and export your takeoff quantities and plans

The screen is bordered at the top by the Menu bar with pull-down menus and at the bottom by the Status bar which indicates current user status plan page size and current zoom percentage of page The largest portion of the application screen will be your takeoff area bounded on the left (by default) by two dock bars and on the top by several toolbars

In the takeoff area you may view your project plans (images) andor takeoff objects the takeoff list with quantities the worksheet or a legend of your condition list

The main window of On-Screen Takeoff has three tabs located at the bottom left allowing for quick change between Image Takeoff or Worksheet views Select the desired view option on the toolbar and it will automatically open on your screen

Section 4 Features

19

Image View

This view shows the plan file andor takeoff conditions drawn from your plans

Takeoff View This view displays the height if applicable and quantity breakdowns of your conditions according to result types indicated (eg linear feet square feet or count of items) for zones pages and the project as a whole It also displays notes per condition

Section 4 Features

20

Worksheet View This view displays the condition and quantity in units of measure specified in the first results field of the Results tab in the Condition dialog and allows the user to enter amounts for material labor and subcontractor takeoffs

NOTE When in the Worksheet view tab out the field then save This is keep all the values saved

Navigating On-Screen Takeoff

Auto Scrolling When creating linear areas or zones On-Screen Takeoff will automatically scroll the image view when necessary It will move as your mouse or digitizer moves beyond the edge of the current view

Changing Pages

1 Select View gt Next Page Previous Page or Go To Page (specify page number for the Go to Page option)

2 You may also select the corresponding arrows for these options from the Navigate Toolbar The

drop down arrow in the Page field will list the pages The and arrows will take you to the

previous or next page The and arrows will take you to the first or last page

OR

Section 4 Features

21

3 Or press Ctrl G for the Go To Page dialog

Hot Links Hot links allow you to move quickly from one drawing to the pertinent area of another drawing A hot link is handy when viewing enlarged areas of a page and needing the ability to jump back to a reference page

1 Select Tools gt Hot Link

OR

2 Click from the Tools Toolbar

3 Click on the page where you want to set the link The Hot Link dialog will open

4 Using the current page display on the Navigate Toolbar access the pull-down menu of pages by

clicking on the arrow at the right

5 Select the page for your link (You may also choose View gt Go to Page and select by page number)

6 Manipulate the view using the zoom tool and the scroll bars

7 Click

8 After joining a hot link to another page the hot link arrows in the Navigation Toolbar will become active

9 Move a hot link to another location on the page by clicking then click and drag the hot link image anywhere on the page

Section 5

22

Projects

This section will

Help you create settings important to your projects

Explain how On-Screen Takeoff works with your electronic or paper plans

Section 5 Projects

23

Project Template Files You can begin your project with a template Templates allow you to take advantage of conditions and settings used with previous projects

On-Screen Takeoff templates contain condition lists and established layer separations from previous projects you have created You may also use the sample templates provided with On-Screen Takeoff as a great starting point All aspects of the templates may be adjusted for a new project

1 Select File gt New and click the OK button

2 From the New dialog box choose the template that best fits your project

3 The conditions for this template will appear in the Takeoff Dock bar and the Project Properties dialog will open asking for further information

4 Use File gt Save or File gt Save As to rename and save your new project

Saving a Project as a Template File You can save your condition properties and layers as a template for future projects

1 Select File gt Save As

2 Enter a name for your template and select On-Screen Takeoff Template Files (tpo) from the Save As type field of the dialog (click on the down arrow to select)

3 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog Modifying a Template File Follow these steps to modify an existing template file if you need to change or add conditions andor layers

1 Select File gt Open

2 Navigate to your Projects directory

3 In the File Type drop-down select On-Screen Takeoff Template files (tpo)

4 Choose the On-Screen Takeoff template file you would like to modify and click the OK button

5 Make appropriate changes

6 Save and close file

The On-Screen Takeoff template files cannot save takeoff information

Section 5 Projects

24

Opening an Existing Project File 1 Select File gt Open

2 Navigate to the desired file location

3 Click the Open button

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask

you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Creating a New Project

1 Select File gt New

2 For a blank untitled project click

3 At this point the Project Properties dialog will pop-up for more information about your takeoff

NOTE The following are important to keep in mind when beginning a new project

At the start of your project fill out the Project Properties settings to establish the name for all printed output from your project set the default page size and scale for your plans number and names of different pages within the project and locations of electronic drawings

Scale settings can significantly affect quantity outcomes Be sure to set the scale for each page of drawings before beginning condition takeoffs

When using a digitizer remember to make a mark with a pen or pencil in the upper left and lower right corners of the first sheet of the paper plans to delineate the takeoff area for that sheet You can then set the takeoff area on On-Screen Takeoff using your marks

Save your project before you begin taking off any conditions On-Screen Takeoff will write a back-up file using the same file name

Remember the Undo feature If you make a mistake select Edit gt Undo and reverse the process step by step

Section 5 Projects

25

Project Properties

You can either set your Project Properties when you create a new takeoff or once your project file is saved under the appropriate name

1 Select File gt Project Properties the Project Properties dialog box will appear

2 Type in the name of your project to appear on printouts Use the backspace andor delete keys to edit the name as necessary

3 Press the Tab key to move to the Default Image Size option or click within the Image Size box You may click on the arrow at the right for the pull-down menu of page size options or you can use the down-arrow key on your keyboard to scroll through the list to the appropriate selection

4 Press the Tab key to move to the Default Scale option Select a scale by using the drop down arrow If your scale is metric you will need to click in the box next to Metric to convert to that measurement

5 Establish the number of pages for your project plans And load image files See Adding Pages to

Your Project

Adding Pages to Projects Individual Electronic Plans

1 Click on in the Project Properties dialog

2 In the Add Images dialog use the drop down arrow to navigate to the appropriate directory and folder containing your image

3 Select the file so that it displays in the File name field then click The file will display by name and path in the Image File field in Project Properties dialog

4 Click to accept and your project will automatically open

5 Save your project with the new settings by selecting File gt Save

Section 5 Projects

26

Electronic plans scanned from blueprints (as opposed to blue lines) will display as white lines on a black background and are difficult to read on your computer screen Select Image gt Invert and the colors will invert to black on white

You may have noticed the Page column in the Project Properties dialog Generally plan images occupy one page and 1 will be listed in the column indicating Page 1 of your plan file If you import a multi-page TIF a plan file containing more than one page of plans they will import as separate pages and each successive page will be indicated under the Page column as 1 2 3 etc of the plan file

Group of Electronic Plans You may add all the electronic plan files from a particular source (for example from a CD) by using the Auto Add feature

1 Click the button in the Project Properties dialog

2 Browse until you find the appropriate directory and folder containing your plan images

3 Click on any file displayed within your target folder so that the file name appears in the File name box of the Auto Add dialog

4 Click The image paths and file names will be recorded into the project properties arranged alphabetically

5 Click to accept your choices and your project will automatically open

6 Save your project with the new settings by selecting File gt Save

To load Dodge Plans into your Project Properties see Appendix IIi Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

Paper Plans On-Screen Takeoff makes it easy for Full Mode users to perform quantity takeoffs from paper plans using a digitizer

1 Add pages by clicking until you have the number of pages initially in the project

2 Name each page by clicking within the Title area and typing the name

3 Click to accept your choices and close the Project Properties dialog

4 Save your project with the new project properties settings by selecting File gt Save

Section 5 Projects

27

Setting Up a Drawing Template On-Screen Takeoff provides the convenience of using the same work surface for both digitizer and mouse to allow the user to draw conditions and then edit settings of the project or add or change conditions without breaking stride A mouse pad template included with the program defines the area of the digitizer in which use of the stylus or cursor will be recognized as mouse movement as opposed to drawing movement

1 Place your stylus on On-Screen Takeoff

2 Placing the template identifies the location mouse movements will be recognized by the program

Before placing the template the template must be applied to the digitizer surface This may have been done during the installation of your digitizer We suggest attaching the template to the lower right corner of the digitizer surface about one inch inside the grid area

3 Select Digitizer gt Place Template

4 Follow the instruction prompts on the screen clicking first on the target symbol at the left of the On-Screen Takeoff box on the template then on the target at the right

Setting Takeoff Area Before you can begin taking off a drawing you must define the drawing area on the digitizer This requires defining an area that will include all objects on each drawing of your plans As you add pages to your takeoff the same area of the digitizer will be active

1 Secure the plans to the digitizer with tape or a set of clamps

2 With a pen or a pencil mark the upper left corner and the lower right corner of the first page in your set of plans

3 Select Digitizer gt Set Takeoff Area

4 Click each mark with the stylus pen as prompted

5 Verify the active area of the digitizer by looking at the image size located in the lower right corner of your screen

If you close the program before the takeoff is complete you will need to reestablish the takeoff area before you can add additional condition quantities

Electronic plans appear on your computer screen eliminating the need to set a takeoff area You simply drag your mouse across the conditions you wish to takeoff The conditions will be highlighted and quantities will be totaled instantly Electronic plans are available through a variety of services For information contact an On Center Software account manager

Section 5 Projects

28

Setting Scale for Specific Pages You may set the scale in each page view separately This will override the default scale setting in Project Properties for that page Setting the correct scale for the drawing before taking off quantities ensures accurate calculations Be careful to check the scale for each drawing in your project before doing takeoffs

1 Display the page you want to set select Edit gt Set Scale

2 Use the drop down arrow to select a scale that will be applied to that page

3 Click

OR

4 Access the pull-down scale settings on the Navigate toolbar

NOTE As you draw objects notice that the drawn object is similar in width to the object on your plans If it is not the scale set may not be correct

Calculating Scale You may calculate scale according to a known measurement between two points either with a digitizer or on electronic plans

1 Select Edit gt Calculate Scale using Image or Edit gt Calculate Scale using Digitizer

2 Follow the instructions in the related Calculate Scale dialog box You will be asked to click on the first and second points then to enter the dimension for that distance

3 The scale will be recalculated for the displayed page and the Scale display on the Navigate toolbar will show the new scale

Section 6

29

Conditions and Takeoff

This section will Draw Conditions to Takeoff Plan Quantities

What Zones will do to help your takeoff process

Discuss the ins and outs of Takeoffs

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

30

Creating Conditions

If you are starting a new project from scratch you will need to create conditions to takeoff quantities such as floor areas wall lengths and corner bead counts If you are using a template you will have several pre-designed conditions already listed on the Takeoff dock bar However you may want to change the characteristics of some conditions or create additional conditions for a particular project

1 Right Click within the Takeoff dock bar Select New gt Condition

Or

2 From the Takeoff dock bar Click (if the buttons are not showing right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select Show Buttons from the pop-up menu) The New Condition dialog appears

3 Select the condition type (Linear Area Count or Zone) from the pull-down menu accessed by the

down arrow next to the Type option

4 Press Tab or use the mouse (or stylus) to move to Name and enter a name for your condition

5 Specify the desired condition attributes See Condition Attributes for more detail

6 Click for condition to apply

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

31

Condition Attributes Each condition type will have related attributes to select or specify within the General and Advanced tabs of the New Condition dialog Once a condition has been used to takeoff a quantity from your plans certain attributes cannot be changed

All conditions allow the user to specify color and fill pattern for the object drawn

Linear Conditions

General Specify width and height by feet and inches Specify pitch in inches up to the nearest thousandth of an inch if applicable

Advanced Specify rounding for object quantities and droprun default length for electrical or plumbing drops at the ends of lines Select Connect to have lines connect at the corners where one line of the condition ends and another begins (and indicate Tolerance for the featurersquos activation as distance between the ends of two lines) Choose Trim to have lines automatically trim to a line being crossed Choose Curve to draw a curved line

Follow these examples for inputting feet and inches For 7 feet 6 inches type 706 for 13 feet 7 inches type 1307 For 20 feet type 2000

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

32

Area Conditions

General If needed you can specify the thickness (in inches) andor pitch (in inches)

Advanced Specify rounding for object quantities Choose to display an adjustable grid within the area and indicate matrix cell dimensions

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

33

Count Conditions

General

Specify height and indicate the size (in inches) and shape (square circle triangle rectangle or opening) of the count object as it will appear on screen

Advanced Count conditions have advanced attributes These options are available for all shapes except for openings

Zone Conditions Zones allow you to subdivide condition quantities making it easier to modify and complete jobs in phases They can be used at the end of a takeoff to isolate a group of condition quantities that are in different areas of the takeoff

Zones can also be used to break a takeoff into multi-phases and can even be used to isolate quantities while a job is in progress to group the amount of work that has been completed to date They can be applied to one or multiple pages in your plans automatically calculating the takeoff quantities for each zoned area

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

34

The zone feature is only available in Lite and Full Mode If you are in View Mode and would like

to use this feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade

Condition Notes A Note tab is provided for comments regarding the condition These notes will display on the Takeoff List report and will import into Quick Bid

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

35

Condition Results The Results tab of the New Condition is based on condition type Initial settings default to linear feet (LF) for linear conditions square feet (SF) for area conditions and count of items (EA) for count conditions and zones The first of the results fields will display for the condition items in the Takeoff dock bar area All results will display in worksheets and Takeoff List reports as well as in an Excel spreadsheet after being exported

Copying Conditions You may use the condition attributes from a condition yoursquove already created for any future conditions of the same type

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Click the Copy button from the toolbar

OR

3 Right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select copy

4 A new condition will appear in the list with the same condition attributes as the previous condition but with the quantities zeroed

Editing Conditions Once you have copied a condition you might want to change several attributes You can also edit an existing condition to fit any updated needs

1 Highlight the desired condition on the Takeoff dock bar

2 Click the Change button

OR

3 Double-click on the condition you wish to edit to bring up the Change Condition dialog

NOTE The Change Condition dialog differs from the New Condition dialog only in that if takeoffs

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

36

have been performed in your project with this condition you will not be able to change the type of condition or certain properties under the advanced tab of the dialog box

Deleting Conditions 1 Click on the condition in the Takeoff Dock bar area

2 Click the Delete button on the toolbar

OR

3 Right-click and select Delete from the pop-up menu

All takeoff associated with the deleted condition will be deleted immediately and permanently

Organizing Project Conditions Within your project you can create folders andor sub-folders for different types of conditions You may even want to create a folder containing conditions with reset values

To get started organizing your conditions make sure you are viewing the condition tree (right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select Show Tree)

Creating Folders and Sub-Folders 1 Right-click in the Takeoff Dock bar area

2 Select New gt Folder from the pop-up menu

Copying Folders

1 Click on the folder and click Copy on the toolbar

2 All copied conditions within the new folder will have values reset to zero

Renaming Folders

1 Click on the folder

2 Right-click and select Rename from the pop-up menu

3 Enter a name for your folder and click the Enter button

Changing Condition Order

You may move conditions up or down in the condition list of the Takeoff dock bar to suit your project needs

1 Select the condition you would like to move by clicking to highlight it

NOTE When you are ready to move the highlighted conditions be sure that you start

moving using the last condition chosen That condition will have a highlighted boarder

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

37

2 Drag and drop any the condition from one place to another in the list You may also move a condition to another folder on the list in this way

Drawing with Conditions Snap Angles Set up snap angles to prevent lines from appearing jagged Snap angles are commonly set at 15deg and shift snap angles at 0deg

1 Go to Tools gt Options Options dialog appears

2 Under the General tab make the desired settings

3 Click to save the settings As they are drawn lines will snap to the set degree

Drawing a Linear Object 1 Select a condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff dock bar

2 Move the cursor into the Image takeoff area of the screen you will see the cursor display as crosshairs

3 Click and hold left mouse button then drag mouse to draw a line

4 Release mouse button to set line

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

38

5 Repeat steps for further lines

Continuous Mode This feature allows you to draw an object that has connected lines

1 Click the icon from the Takeoff toolbar

OR

2 Go to Tools gt Continuous Mode

3 Follow steps 1-3 from Draw a Linear Object

4 Click at each point of intersection The object will be connected

5 Double-click after making the final point to set the lines

Drawing a Curve To draw a curved line the Curve option must be checked under the Advanced tab of the Condition dialog

1 Click where you want to begin the curve and drag in a straight line to the position for the other endpoint of the curve

2 Click on the line to select it Handles in the shapes of small squares will appear at either end of

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

39

the line and in the center of the line

3 Move the cursor over the center handles until the cursor becomes a two-way arrow

4 Click and drag in the direction of the curve bending the line as you move the cursor Release to set the curve (The line you began with will disappear)

Draw a circle by drawing two curved lines connected

Drawing an Area Object Area conditions are drawn similarly to continuous mode lines You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete your area takeoff

NOTE When drawing an area do not intersect the perimeter or line of the object you are drawing

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

3 The area will be filled with the pattern set for that condition

NOTE The simulated circle will be good enough for you to be able to make a bid

To create a circular area click from point to point with very short distances in between points simulating a circlersquos perimeter Double-click after setting the last point to set the area

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

40

Grid Options Grids give you an added advantage when installing materials such as tiles Use this feature to get a count for how many tiles are needed for an area

1 Double-click on an area condition in the Takeoff dock bar to open its Condition dialog

2 Click on the Advanced tab to show its options

3 Check the box next to Grid by clicking in it

4 Indicate the dimensions of the cell matrix in inches (For example 200 x 400)

5 Under Results tab choose each (EA) for one of the results fields This will tabulate a number of grid cells (including partial grid cells) in area

6 Click to save your settings

7 Use the Move Grid and Rotate Grid features in the Tools menu to manipulate the grid as desired

Grid Calculation

1 Go to Tools gt Options menu

1 Specify if On-Screen Takeoff automatically should Calculate Grid Position

2 If AreaGrid Size is selected On-Screen Takeoff will calculate the number of items needed to fill the grid based on grid demintions

3 Click to accept and close the dialog

To move a line at any angle (regardless of default setting) press the Shift key while moving the mouse

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

41

Backout Mode This feature allows you to take out part of an area and deduct that amount of square footage

1 Select Tools gt Backout Mode

2 Outline the are you want backed out as you would when drawing a regular area object (see Drawing an Area Object)

3 The outlined area will clear and quantities will be recalculated

NOTE The perimeter of the backout area will be added to the LF quantity for that condition

Drawing a Count Object Square triangle rectangle and circle shaped count objects can easily be placed on images

1 Select the condition

2 Click in the location where you want the object to appear

3 To place an opening-shaped count item like a door or window you must click over an existing linear object such as a wall

4 On the Results tab you can change the height properties to give you the result you need

5 If Backout is checked on the advanced tab for each count opening the opening-shaped count item will back out a corresponding section of the linear object

Opening shaped count items are sized at 3rsquo0rdquo by default

Drawing a Zone Zones are drawn in the same way as area objects and may be any polygonal shape You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete the zone perimeter

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

42

Selecting Objects

1 Use the Select Tool to select objects

You can also select all objects that correspond to a condition

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Right-click and choose Select All

3 All objects with this condition will be highlighted with squares as an outline

Moving and Resizing Objects Linear

1 To move or resize a linear object click anywhere on the line to select it

2 To move the line position your pointer over the center handles When the mouse is positioned over the handles you will see a two-way arrow You will only be able to move the line in the direction of the arrows

3 Drag the line to a new position

4 Clicking and dragging the handles on the ends of the line will allow you to lengthen or shorten your line

Area and Zone

1 To move an area object or zone in its entirety click and drag it to its new position

2 Grabbing a handle at a corner or intersection of the object will allow you to adjust and change its perimeter

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

43

Count 1 To move a square circle rectangle or triangle shaped count object click and drag

2 Click and drag an opening shaped count object along the length of the linear object to the desired position then release

NOTE An opening shaped count object may not be moved from its associated linear condition object however it may be moved up and down the length of the linear object

Layers On-Screen Takeoff allows you to sort and separate your takeoff objects within the same job and on the same page On-Screen Takeoff gives you this flexibility through the use of layers

By assigning different conditions to different layers (for example differentiating between floors ceilings and walls) you can choose to view all layers or turn off certain layers to display and print the remaining groups of conditions only You may also remove the background image of electronic plans add text and hot link symbols or print only your condition takeoffs

Layers are only available in Full Mode If you are in View or Lite Mode and would like to use this

feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade Default Layers

On-Screen Takeoff begins every project with three default layers Image Annotation and Default The Image layer holds the electronic plan files you may have in your project The Annotation layer possesses all text notations highlighting and hot links in the project The Default layer will appear in the Condition dialog when creating or editing a condition (listed in the takeoff dock bar) Conditions are assigned to the Default layer unless otherwise specified by the user

Creating Layers To assign a condition to a layer other than the default layer you must first create additional layers for your project

1 Select View gt Layers to open the Layers dialog

2 Click An unnamed layer will be added

3 Click within the empty box and type a name for your layer (for example Wall)

4 New layers are added as active layers The adjacent box under the Show column will be checked

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

44

Assigning a Layer to a Condition 1 Open the Condition dialog box by creating a new condition or editing an existing condition

2 Under the General tab click on the down arrow in the Layer field to display optional layers

3 Select the desired layer for the condition Only the Default layer and layers you have added will be displayed

4 Click

View and Hide Layers

1 Select View gt Layers

2 Under the Show column check the box to view or remove the check (by clicking on it) to hide the specific layer

3 Click to accept and close the Layers dialog

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

45

Assigning Text to a Layer When adding text to an image On-Screen Takeoff has the capability to assign the text to a specified layer

1 Select the Text Tool

2 Click at the point you want to place your text

3 Type in your text using the Enter key for line breaks

4 Click the drop down arrow next to the Layer field and select the desired layer

Section 7

46

Printing and Exporting

This section will

Printing options and procedures

Exporting data by copying and pasting

Exporting quantity results to Excel spreadsheets

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

47

Print Setup On-Screen Takeoff allows the user to print the image takeoff list and worksheet

1 Select File gt Print Setup The Print Setup dialog will open

2 Select a printer or leave the default selection listed (change from the default printer displayed by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the field)

3 Indicate page size and printer tray option (Source) Access page size options by clicking on the

down arrow at the right of the field

4 Choose Portrait or Landscape orientation

5 Click to accept and close the dialog

Printing Images The image area can include the electronic plans the takeoff objects added text and hot links To print a subset of these (for example just the takeoffs without the plans or the added text and hot link symbols) hide layers that you do not want to print (see Section 6 View and Hide Layers) When you are printing your images every page will show the scale of the takeoff you are printing

1 Click on the Image tab to display the area of your project

2 Select File gt Print (or Ctrl + P)

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

48

3 Select the desired view (What to print) and the Image Range

4 Click The second Print dialog will open

5 Change settings accordingly or click if you accept the default settings

Printing Takeoff Lists and Worksheets In Takeoff Lists and Worksheets you may hide columns to print only certain results or adjust column widths to fit the report within the page size selected

1 In Takeoff List or Worksheet view move your cursor to the right side of the columnrsquos title bar the cursor will display as a two-way arrow

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

49

2 Click and drag to adjust the width of the column Holding the mouse button you may

slide the title bar under the title bar to its left to hide the column completely

3 Select File gt Print or press Ctrl + P to access the Print dialog

4 Indicate desired printer and choose the number of copies

5 Click to print and close the dialog

When printing the condition list we suggest printing in landscape

To reset to the default column widths double-click on the right border of a column heading will reset the column to its right (or previously to its right before being hidden)

Print Preview 1 Select File gt Print Preview

2 Use and to vary your view 3 If viewing an image choose current full or scale view to see how it displays

4 For printed outputs that cover more than one page use and to view adjacent pages or click on the down arrow next to Page field and select the page you want displayed

Exporting Using the CopyPaste Feature You may copy all the data or sections from the worksheet and the takeoff list view in On-Screen Takeoff and paste it into another application When pasting into Excel the cell layout will be maintained

1 Highlight the areas you wish to paste Click and hold the left mouse button down as you drag the cursor over the area to be selected then releasing the mouse button

OR

2 Select the entire takeoff list quickly click on the left On-Screen Takeoff column header and hold and drag the cursor across the remaining column headings

The number of pages for the view selected will display in the lower left-hand corner The zoom percentage that applies to the view will be displayed in the lower right-hand corner next to page size of the drawing

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

50

3 In the worksheet view you may highlight rows by clicking on the numbered buttons to the left of each row clicking and dragging across column headings or clicking and dragging over individual cells in the worksheet

Click anywhere in the appropriate view to deselect the area

4 Once your selection is highlighted you may select Edit gt Copy or Ctrl C from the keyboard 5 On your monitor switch to the application into which you want to paste your selection 6 Select Edit gt Paste in the new application or simply press Ctrl + V to paste

The colored keys for conditions cannot be pasted

Using the Export Feature You may export condition quantities to specified cell location within an Excel worksheet file Cell target locations are assigned in the Results tab of the condition dialogs on the Export line relating to each quantity measurement type

On-Screen Takeoff will export takeoff quantity results for up to three different quantity types that you specify For instance you may want to know the number of square feet in a ceiling area as well as the number of linear feet in its perimeter

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

51

1 Bring up the Condition dialog by double-clicking on a condition in the takeoff dock bar or by

selecting the condition and clicking

2 Click on the Results tab to access its fields The default quantities for the condition type will display

3 For each results field click on the arrow to access the pull-down menu and select the appropriate quantity (for example SF LF EA etchellip)

4 Have your Excel spreadsheet opened and saved in a file

5 Specify the Excel spreadsheet cell locations where you want the results to go

6 For a cell in the first sheet of your spreadsheet type in the cell address (eg a1) Case is not important

7 For a cell on a successive sheet of your spreadsheet type in sheet the number followed by a comma and the cell address without any spaces (eg sheet2a1) Case is not important

8 Click

9 Select File gt Export gt Condition Qty to Excel

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

52

10 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

11 Click to export On-Screen Takeoff results to specified cell locations in the Excel file When you return to the Excel application you will see the values have been added to the specified cell locations in your spreadsheet

12 Save your Excel file

Exporting Worksheet to Excel

1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 From On-Screen Takeoff Select File gt Export gt Worksheet to Excel

4 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

5 Click When you return to the Excel application you will see the values from the Worksheet Tab have been added to your spreadsheet

6 Save your Excel file

Exporting Takeoff to CVS 1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 Click the Takeoff Tab in the project you want to export the information

4 Select File gt Export gt Takeoff to CSV

5 Browse to the location of the CSV spreadsheet file click file to select it

6 Click the Save

NOTE CSV files can be opened in Excel Lotus Access etc One may consider this option more of a ldquodumprdquo into a file

The Excel application must be active (it may be minimized on the application bar) with the target spreadsheet open in the application Otherwise an error will occur with the export operation that will affect both the On-Screen Takeofftrade file and the Excel spreadsheet

Section 8

53

Advanced Features

This section will

Some special features of working with condition objects in the takeoff area

Details of advanced options for conditions

Advanced features of the Project Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

54

Features to Use with Objects Roping Feature You can move copy or delete using this feature Using the Select tool (the pointer) you may select several objects at once by clicking and dragging an outline around the objects then releasing the mouse button Roping may select either objects completely within the outlined area (inclusive) or objects both within and touched by the outlined area (touching) Specify your roping preference under Tools gt Options

1 Click and hold the mouse button at a point on the screen near the objects to be selected and drag to surround the objects with an outline

2 Release the mouse button The objects will be selected

3 You may now

Move the group around on the page by clicking within the group dragging the mouse and releasing the button to place the objects

Delete the group of objects by clicking the Delete key or

Copy and paste by pressing Ctrl C to copy the group then Ctrl V to paste it The pasted copy of the grouped objects will appear slightly offset from the original objects

Section 8 Advanced Features

55

Applying a DropRun Count

Use the droprun feature when calculating quantities to take into account the drop or run of a linear condition such as electrical lines or plumbing pipes Drop or run lengths may be added separately to any linear condition on screen while a default droprun length may be indicated for a condition as a whole

1 Select the desired linear condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff Dock bar

2 Click the Change button in the toolbar to open the Change Condition dialog

3 Click the Advanced tab to access the advanced options and click inside the DropRun check box

4 Enter a default length to be applied to all of this condition Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches) You can leave the length blank and manually enter drop run on each segment drawn

5 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog

Edit DropRun Count

1 With the related linear condition in the Takeoff Dock bar highlighted or with the pointer tool selected

2 click on the desired linear object in the image takeoff area The Count button will become active

3 Click on the Count button (alternatively select Tools gt Count) The default droprun amount will show in the pop-up Count dialog (Default length will be zero if droprun has not been selected in this conditionrsquos properties)

4 Type in the desired length Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches)

5 Click the OK button The additional amount will be reflected in the corresponding quantity The new DropRun count will apply only to the object edited

Adding Text in Image View

On-Screen Takeoff allows you to place text comments around your quantity takeoffs that may be printed along with plan images and objects Text is automatically placed within the Annotation Layer (that includes text and hot links)

1 To place text on the image select the Text Tool and click at the point you want to place your text opening a text box

2 Type in your information clicking Enter for line breaks

3 When you are finished click the OK button to exit the text box

4 To reposition text simply click on the text (with the Text Tool active) to select it

5 Move the cursor over the text the cursor will now display as a four-way arrow

6 Click and drag the mouse to position the text as desired

Section 8 Advanced Features

56

1 To edit existing text use the Text Tool to double-click on the text to open the editing box

2 Enter additional text or use the Backspace key to delete text as necessary

Formatting Text Once created you may format the font size type style and color of your text

1 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Font or click on the Font button in the Takeoff Toolbar

2 Select the desired features (color options are disabled) and click the OK button

3 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Color or click on the Color button in the Takeoff Toolbar The Color dialog will open

4 Click on a color in the Basic Color palette or create a color and add to the Custom Colors palette (Be sure to click on the color in the Custom Colors palette to select it)

5 Click the OK button

Object Properties

Linear Objects

Linear objects may be set to connect at corners

A linear object may be set to trim automatically when crossing another linear object (Check the trim option under the advanced tab of the Condition dialog)

When you move a connected linear object objects automatically move and resize connected lines accordingly (quantities are then recalculated)

This feature requires that the connected linear object be moved using the center handles (does not apply when resizing the line from the ends)

Objects constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

Objects are measured from centerline to centerline

Section 8 Advanced Features

57

Area Objects When drawing an area use your escape key to undo the last line drawn You may reverse your

drawing of an area using the escape key

The area will not fill with color and pattern until the user double-clicks after the last line is set

Lines drawn to delineate an area object constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

After selecting an area to move or adjust position the mouse in the center to move the entire area position the mouse at the sides or corners to adjust the perimeter

Count Objects

All count objects are quantified by the physical number of objects per page and reported as EA for the UOM The quantity for the current Image View is (displayed in the Condition List) and the total quantity in your project is displayed in the Takeoff View and Worksheet View)

Square circle rectangle and triangle shaped count objects do not displace or subtract from other object quantities when placed on top of them However on the Advanced Tab for the count condition a connect property can be set (this is a check box) so that when a count object of this shape is put on top of a Linear type takeoff object it will move with the linear if said linear is moved

An opened-shaped count object must be placed within a linear object Opening shaped count objects may also be measured by linear foot or linear yard (EA SF and SY are also options) Opening shaped count items default to a width of 3rsquo 0rdquo at the time of creation This size can be changed The small medium and large size are not options on this type of condition anymore Check Backout on the Advanced tab for each Count object back out the footage (or yardage) of opening-shaped count objects in which they are placed

NOTE In order to see this Backout functionality (in quantity) for SY or SF deductions at least one of the

results for the Linear(s) this object will be placed on must be set to SY or SF and the count object must have a height quantity

Advanced Features of Conditions The Round Feature Under the Advanced tab of the linear and area Condition dialogues you may specify quantity rounding (in inches) For linear objects rounding applies to each linear object drawn For area objects rounding will apply to each segment of the area perimeter adjusting the perimeter and area calculations For example With a linear condition entering 12 in the Round field will round up each related linear object to the nearest 12 inches or one foot With this setting two walls of 1 4 would each round to 2 0 totaling 4 0

NOTE In the Takeoff Dock bar condition list and in the On-Screen Takeoff reports quantities will be displayed in whole numbers rounded up to the nearest foot However calculations are based on true quantities without rounding unless the Round Feature is engaged

Pitch Pitch may apply either to linear or area conditions It is measured in rise per linear foot Entering 12 indicates a 12 rise per 12 of linear distance (a pitch of 12 over 12) or an angle of 45deg

Section 8 Advanced Features

58

Advanced Features of Project Properties Selecting Multiple Pages

1 Select a single page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry

2 Drag the cursor down the column of numbers to select consecutive pages

3 Click on the blank button at the top of this column to select all pages in the Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

59

Changing Image Assigned to a Drawing 1 Select the page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry 2 Click the Change Image button The Change Image dialog box will appear

3 Navigate to the desired file and select by clicking on it

4 Click the Open button The electronic file assigned to the page will have been changed to reflect the new file choice

Changing Image File Path 1 Select pages as described above

2 Choose Change Folder

3 In the Change Folder dialog navigate to the appropriate folder

4 Click the OK button The file path will have been changed for the selected page entries

Delete a Page from Project Properties 1 Select the page you want to delete by clicking on its associated number (in the gray box at the

left of the entry)

2 Choose Delete Page

All Takeoff on the page will be deleted immediately and permanently

Section 8 Advanced Features

60

Advanced Features of Tool Options

Calculation Method On-Screen Takeoff has built-in calculation options to allow for faster work and faster saves until your takeoff is complete Calculation options are found by selecting Tools gt Options then clicking on the Calculation tab

Calculation method can be set to Automatic Automatic except Grids and Manual Manual will allow the program to operate more quickly while Automatic or Automatic except Grids allows the user to see quantity changes as takeoffs are made

In any mode you may press F9 to recalculate quantities for the On-Screen Takeoff current totals

Configuration Tab

When the ldquoPage Label (A01)rdquo radial button is chosen On-Screen Takeoff puts the numbered label on all the pages of in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar If the Page Descriptionrdquo radial button is chosen then a description of what takeoff is on that specific page will be shown in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar

This section of the configuration tab gives you options on how you want to export your information When the ldquoFolderSubfolder Namesrdquo radial button is chosen than on your file that you are exporting to will have all the conditions folders and subfolders In the Delimiter box you can choose the symbol that is needed to separate the information you are exporting Some files need semicolons () or colons () to make sure the information comes exported in is separated it the appropriate places

Section 8 Advanced Features

61

In previous versions of On-Screen Takeoff there are views that users need to have in order for them to display their information By either choosing ldquoOST 1xrdquo or ldquoOST 2xrdquo it will let the program know you want your columns of information exported in that specific format

When you have the Confirm Deletions radial button of ldquoYesrdquo chosen than every time you delete anything you will get a dialog box confirming your intentions of deletion

While working with your takeoff you have a choice to either view the legend of your conditions or hide it Choose whichever radial button that suits your needs

For those who prefer to use the Enter key to navigate in dialog boxes this option is just for that

Font Tab The Font tab is designed for you to make your own look and feel for the application At the bottom of this tab it will show you sample of the fonts and colors you have chosen

Renaming the Current Page You may change the name of the current page in the takeoff area of On-Screen Takeoff by selecting Edit gt Rename Page

This opens the Name Page dialog and you may simply type in a new name and click the Enter button The new name for the file will be reflected on the title bar for the page and in Project Properties

You also may access the Rename Page function by right-clicking in the takeoff area while in Image View and selecting the option from the pop-up menu that appears

Section 9

62

Saving and Exiting

This section will

Explain how to save projects

Show you how to safely exit the program

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

63

Saving Your Project

1 Select File gt Save 2 If your project has not previously been saved a Save dialog box will open to allow you to name

the file and choose the directory and folder in which to save your file 3 Once saved File gt Save will simply save the current version of the file

OR

4 Select File gt Save As then type in a new name for the file and save to the desired file path

The Auto-save Feature With the Auto-save feature On-Screen Takeoff automatically backs up your open project You may choose to have more than one level of backup files The first backup copy will have the extension b00 and successive files will be b01 b02 and so on If you have designated four levels of backup files after the fourth backup copy has been created (b03) the next file will be saved over the file with extension b00 Further backup saves will then rotate through the four backup files in the same way

1 Select Tools gt Options 2 In the Auto-save area (under the General tab) select the frequency of backup file creation (in

minutes) and the number of levels for the feature 3 You also may disengage the feature by clicking in the check box to clear it

The Auto-save feature automatically saves backup copies to the directory of the current project If you are working from a write-protected area such as a CD-ROM On-Screen Takeoff will place backup files in the On-Screen Takeoff folder

Exiting When you are finished using On-Screen Takeoff it is very easy to exit Exiting is very important because of security reasons If someone were to use your computer they could enter the application and view and manipulate information

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

64

On-Screen Takeoff closes the open project when you open another or create a new project or when you exit the program

1 Select File gt Exit

OR

2 You also may click at the upper right-hand corner of the application to exit

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

65

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer When you get your digitizer from GTCO you will need to connect it to your computer Follow the instructions outlined below to do this

Note For rollup digitizers the metal bar must be oriented to the top or right hand side

Connecting the Digitizer 1 Lay the digitizer out flat 2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer 3 Plug in the power adapter 4 Plug the interface (IO) cable into the digitizer 5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into an open serial port on computer

Note GTCO Technical support phone number is 410-381-6688 The electronic manual (on diskette) from GTCO contains more detailed installation and operation instructions for the GTCO digitizer model you have

Installing other Digitizer Drivers If you are using a GTCO Digitizer you will need to install the GTCO TabletWorks Drivers

If you are using a Digitizer not supported by GTCO Tablet Works 10 please contact the manufacturer of your digitizer for assistance with installation

Installing GTCO TabletWorks Drivers 1 Insert the On Center CD into the CD-ROM drive The CD Startup screen will open 2 Click on Install Software 3 Select Additional Software and Drivers 4 Select Digitizer Driver 5 Follow the instructions for installing TabletWorks 10

Adhering the Template The template is a small plastic sticker used to enable mouse function when using the digitizer with On-Screen Takeoff Place your template on your digitizer We suggest placing it in the bottom right corner of the digitizer about one inch inside the takeoff area

Note You may either peel off the back of the template and use the adhesive surface or you can tape the template down

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

66

Testing the Digitizer Drivers Before running OST you may test the digitizer by moving the stylus around on the digitizer pad it should move the mouse cursor (if mouse emulation is enabled)

If the digitizer does not move the mouse cursor on the screen

The superset codes may need to be reset Reset the superset codes by touching on the border of the digitizer with the stylus The digitizer should beep several times

The digitizer may not be communicating with the computer Be sure the COM port selected is correct Be sure the COM port selected is correct If you are not able to get the digitizer to move the mouse cursor you need to call GTCO technical support for help

Note The Mouse Emulation is not required for On-Screen Takeoff to work properly It is used only for the Template functionality if the digitizer is moving the cursor the wrong direction (up instead of sideways or vice-versa)

Click the L-shaped arrow symbol on the digitizer with the stylus

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

67

Appendix II Toolbar Items Main Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

68

Tool Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

69

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

70

Navigate Toolbar (Continued)

Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

71

Takeoff Toolbar (Continued)

Image Toolbar

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

72

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

This section will detail how to load plans from a F W Dodge CD-ROM into an On-Screen Takeoff project file ready for takeoffs

Dodge files may be added to the Project Properties dialog However loading the files in that way will load the files by number rather than name description If you want to load one page only from your Dodge CD You will have to rename the page to display the name rather than number of the file

To load plan files from a Dodge CD so that the files load sequentially by file number but are displayed by name rather than by number within your project follow the instructions below

Opening a Dodge project from a CD-ROM 1 Insert the CD into the drive 2 Choose File gt Custom 3 Choose Dodge Plans Project (plansdat) as the file type 4 Select the appropriate file type by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the Files of type

field 5 In the Look in field access your drive paths by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the

field then

Navigate to your CD-ROM drive Open the data folder and Open the Projects folder

6 Select the desired project and open its folder 7 Open the plansdat file 8 All the images will come in sequenced correctly for that job along with the full descriptions

(names) of each page If there is not a plans folder in the project folder then plans do not exist for that project on the CD Opening the plansdat file will yield an empty project

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

73

Appendix IV Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer The On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer is a limited version of On Center Softwarersquos commercial takeoff software If your status bar located at the very bottom of the main window says View Mode in the lower left-hand corner then you are using the Plan Viewer You can use the plan viewer to

View CD-based amp converted CAD drawings

View a previously created OST file and associated drawings

Download electronic plans online

Navigate through drawings

Quickly Takeoff linearsareas and counts

Zoom in to view the plan better

Print drawings directly from the viewer

Viewing an On-Screen Takeoff Project File

1 To open an OST file that was previously created with of On-Screen Takeoff 2 Select File gt Open 3 An Open dialog will appear if you do not see the OST file you are looking for select the

Look In drop down arrow 4 A drop down menu will appear listing the various folders drives and mapped drives located

on your computer select the correct drive or folder location and continue to browse to the location of your OST file

5 When you see your OST file double-click it to open it 6 Any takeoff and drawings should appear on the Image tab view

If you do not see the drawings but do see the colored takeoff layer the drawings may

not be located in the same place they were originally saved at Go to File gt Project Properties and check the Image File path for each listed page If the image file path is pointing to a CD drive make sure the CD is inside the CR-ROM

Downloading Electronic Plans If your Online Plan Service provides a special file format (OSX) required to use this feature of our plan viewer you can immediately downloaded all electronic plans of a project directly from our viewer

Most Plan Room web sites will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff when a request to download plans is made Your particular Plan Room may differ in operation so please contact the provider directly with questions on using the site

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

74

When you request to download or open a project file from a Plan Room you will usually have the open to open or save an OSX file Choosing open will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff Alternately you may choose to save the file to a local hard drive After you have saved the file either double-click it to launch On-Screen Takeoff or open the OSX file using On-Screen Takeoff by clicking File then Open and locating the file on your hard drive You will need to change the file type to OSX

After the OSX file is opened you will see an additional tab appear in the Conditions List window called Pages

The Pages tab shows the hierarchy of your project Gray file icons represent pages that have not been downloaded and blue icons represents pages that have been downloaded

To download a page simply double-click the page icon

If you wish to select a group of pages to download you can use the Ctrl or Shift key to multiple select them then click the Download button

If you wish to download all pages at once click the Download All button

Downloaded pages will now appear in the Project Properties dialog in the same order in which they appear in the Pages tab

Creating Quick Takeoffs With On-Screen Takeoff you can create quick takeoffs to measure quantities even if you dont have the full version of our program However using the Quick Takeoff functionality shows you just a fraction of what the full version can do

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar is located at the top of the image view It has three buttons designated for three types of takeoffs Linear Area and Count The Quantity drop down list will show secondary quantities for Linears and Areas The Units drop down allows you to select how you want your quantities displayed Feet Inches Yards Millimeters and Meters

NOTE Every time change the type of takeoff you are performing (switching from Area to Linear for example) the previous quantities and takeoff objects will disappear They will also disappear when you changes pages

NOTE You can use the Dimension Tool to basically measure the distance between two points or linears The distance will display on the status bar at the bottom of the application

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

75

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions General

Where is On-Screen Takeoff installed on my computer

Typically it is installed in CProgram FilesOn-Screen Takeoff

In Explorer how do I recognize On-Screen Takeoff file types

On-Screen Takeoff data is stored in a single file per job lsquojob name OSTrsquo On-Screen Takeoff templates are stored as lsquotemplate nameTPOrsquo

Can only one project at a time be open

Yes For that reason opening another project automatically closes the project on screen You will be asked to save any changes

Is only one scale allowed per page What about on drawings that have multiple detail sections on a page and each of those drawings have different scales

Yes For pages with drawings of different scales copy the drawing to another project page and set the appropriate scale

I cannot perform backout on an area that is along a linear

As a workaround use the On-Screen Takeoff layers feature to help you with this issue Electronic Images

How do I start a project from drawings that have been scanned and written to a CD-ROM

Open a new project Select File gt Project Properties and select Auto Add Navigate to your CD and the appropriate folder and select any image file in that location Click Open All files in the location will load into your project Recommended that images are copied from CD to hard drive for performance

If I get a disk of drawings in AutoCAD format (R13 or R14) can I read them in On-Screen Takeoff

Yes On-Screen Takeoff now reads DWG DXF and many other format that are saved with AutoCAD

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

76

When I click on the all pages button what is supposed to happen Currently nothing seems to change when I click on that button

The All Pages button is used to apply the Darken and Enhance Plans feature to all pages in the project (as opposed to only the current page on screen)

Is there a way to deduct a large skylight from an area condition

Yes with the related area condition selected in the Takeoff Dock bar unselect the Backout button on the Takeoff Toolbar then draw the Backout area The area quantity will be deducted from the related condition object and the linear measurement of the Backout perimeter will be added

Digitizer Issues

How do I connect a Digitizer to the computer

See Appendix I Connecting a Digitizer

The Place Template menu choice is disabled

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or the digitizer or the digitzer drivers are not installed

It wonrsquot let me select the Set Takeoff Area menu choice

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or no job is open a digitizer is not installed or the drivers are not installed

The digitizer stylus is not moving the cursor or crosshairs

Click S-0-1 superset on the digitizer

How do I convert my old GTCO Digitizer to work with On- Screen Takeofftrade

Call GTCO and they may be able to reconfigure your digitizer to be compatible with On-Screen Takeoff

Printing Issues Which Printers work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible printers include On-Screen Takeoff Hewlett Packard Epson and Canon printers If you are having printer difficulties please contact support and specify the type of printer along with other pertinent information Contact support at wwwoncentercomsupport or email supportoncentercom

Which Plotters work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible Plotters include Hewlett Packard DesignJet plotters and the EnCAD Cadjet II If you are having plotter difficulties please contact support and specify the type of plotter concerned

ViewingDisplay I can no longer see my condition list How do I get it back

The toolbars and Dock bars can be turned on and off through the View gt Toolbars menu options

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

77

This is also accessible by right-clicking in the toolbar area and selecting (or deselecting) a toolbar listed

I cannot view my folders in the condition list

Right-click in the Takeoff Dock barcondition list area and select Show Tree to display your folders

My Status Bar reads Viewer Mode and I am unable to draw conditions

On-Screen Takeoff needs to be Authorized Or you need to purchase an upgrade Click the Perform Advanced Takeoff button on the main toolbar

I hid a Dock bar and when I selected to view it again it appeared alongside the other Dock

bar instead of stacked on top of it How do I fix it

Pick up the Dock bar by clicking on the bar at the top and continuing to hold down the mouse button drag the Dock bar over the other one It will resize and appear stacked with the other

When I open image files from a CD the images are all upside down How do I get them right

side up

To flip pages from top to bottom follow the steps below 1 Click the All Pages button on the Image Toolbar (All Pages is engaged when the button

is not clicked) 2 Click the Flip Horizontal button on the Image Toolbar 3 Click the All Pages button again to disengage

Templates How do I create a Template

Follow the steps below 1 Create a typical project 2 Choose File gt Save As 3 Choose On-Screen Takeoff Template Files as the file type to save 4 Name the file This will save all of the condition setups as well as the layers for the

project

How do I create a new project from a template

Follow the steps below 1 Choose File gt New 2 Select a template from those listed in the New dialog This will open a new project with

conditions and layers saved from a previous project but no pages or takeoff

78

INDEX

Area Conditions 32

Area Objects 57

Auto Scrolling 20

Auto-save 63

Backout Mode 41

Calculation Method 60

Conditions 29

Configuration 60

Contents Tab 6

Continuous Mode 38

Count Conditions 33

Count Objects 57

Digitizer 10 65 76

Docking Toolbars 13

Dodge CD 72

Drawing 27 37

DropRun Count 55

Environment 18

Exiting 63

Exporting 49

Features 16

Font 61

Frequently Asked Questions 75

Grid 40

Help File 5

Hiding Toolbars 13

Hot Links 21

Image 19 59

Image files 9

Image Toolbar 12 71

Images 75

Index Tab 6

Layers 43

Linear Conditions 31

Linear Objects 56

Main Toolbar 12 67

Menus 14

Moving Toolbars 13

Navigate Toolbar 12 69

Navigating 20

On-Screen Takeofftrade 2

Page 59 61

Pages 20 25 28

Plan Viewer 73

Plans 26

Printing 47 76

Project Properties 25

Projects 22

Quick Start Video 18

Resizing Toolbars 13

Roping 54

Saving 63

Scale 28

Search Tab 7

Selecting Objects 42

Setup 8

Start On-Screen Takeofftrade 17

System Requirements 9

Takeoff 19 27

Takeoff Toolbar 70 71

Takeoff Toolbar 12

Template Files 23

TIF (Group4) 9

Tool Toolbar 12 68

Toolbar 67

Toolbars 12

View Toolbar 12 69

Viewing Toolbars 12

Worksheet 20

Zone Conditions 33

Zoom Toolbar 12 69

  • On-Screen Takeoff Lite
  • Table of Contents
  • Section 1 - Introduction
  • Section 2 - Setup
  • Section 3 - Toolbars and Menus
  • Section 4 - Features
  • Section 5 - Projects
  • Section 6 - Conditions and Takeoff
  • Section 7 - Printing and Exporting
  • Section 8 - Advanced Features
  • Section 9 - Saving and Exiting
  • Appendix I - Installing Your Digitizer
  • Appendix II - Toolbar Items
  • Appendix III - Loading Plans from a Dodge CD
  • Appendix IV - Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer
  • Appendix V - Frequently Asked Questions
  • Index

Section 3 Toolbars and Menus

15

Digitizer Menu

Section 4

16

Features

This section will

Show you how open On-Screen Takeoff

Describe the On-Screen Takeoff environment

Teach you how to navigate pages

Section 4 Features

17

Start On-Screen Takeoff

1 On your desktop double-click your On-Screen Takeoff icon

2 The application will open

OR

3 Left-click on the Start button on your computerrsquos toolbar

4 Scroll up to Programs gt On Center Software

5 Highlight On-Screen Takeoff and click On-Screen Takeoff will open On-Screen Takeoff opens to an untitled blank project The Image view of the screen will be a blank page

Two blank dock bars the Pan dock bar and the Takeoff dock bar appear at the left side of the screen Along the bottom the Status bar displays user status or context-sensitive messages as well as paper size and current zoom percentage of the plan sheet on screen The menu bar and several task specific toolbars are located at the top of the screen

NOTE All toolbars and dock bars may be accessed to view or hide through View gt Toolbars on the menu bar

Section 4 Features

18

Quick Start Video When On-Screen Takeoff opens you will be given an option to watch the Quick Start video (recommended) or start the program without watching the video

The 20 minute video will demonstrate key program functionality and allow you to view application instruction for enhanced learning

If you would like to watch the video click If you prefer to get started without

the video click If you have already viewed the video click the lsquoDo not show this message againrsquo box to prevent this dialog from appearing each time you open the program

NOTE If you decide later that you would like to watch the Quick Start video go to Help gt Watch

Quick Start Videos

On-Screen Takeoff Environment The On-Screen Takeoff environment acts like your drafting table allowing you to work on several sheets of plans at once and to reference at a glance the entire drawing and your position on that drawing while giving you the power of a computer to track analyze print and export your takeoff quantities and plans

The screen is bordered at the top by the Menu bar with pull-down menus and at the bottom by the Status bar which indicates current user status plan page size and current zoom percentage of page The largest portion of the application screen will be your takeoff area bounded on the left (by default) by two dock bars and on the top by several toolbars

In the takeoff area you may view your project plans (images) andor takeoff objects the takeoff list with quantities the worksheet or a legend of your condition list

The main window of On-Screen Takeoff has three tabs located at the bottom left allowing for quick change between Image Takeoff or Worksheet views Select the desired view option on the toolbar and it will automatically open on your screen

Section 4 Features

19

Image View

This view shows the plan file andor takeoff conditions drawn from your plans

Takeoff View This view displays the height if applicable and quantity breakdowns of your conditions according to result types indicated (eg linear feet square feet or count of items) for zones pages and the project as a whole It also displays notes per condition

Section 4 Features

20

Worksheet View This view displays the condition and quantity in units of measure specified in the first results field of the Results tab in the Condition dialog and allows the user to enter amounts for material labor and subcontractor takeoffs

NOTE When in the Worksheet view tab out the field then save This is keep all the values saved

Navigating On-Screen Takeoff

Auto Scrolling When creating linear areas or zones On-Screen Takeoff will automatically scroll the image view when necessary It will move as your mouse or digitizer moves beyond the edge of the current view

Changing Pages

1 Select View gt Next Page Previous Page or Go To Page (specify page number for the Go to Page option)

2 You may also select the corresponding arrows for these options from the Navigate Toolbar The

drop down arrow in the Page field will list the pages The and arrows will take you to the

previous or next page The and arrows will take you to the first or last page

OR

Section 4 Features

21

3 Or press Ctrl G for the Go To Page dialog

Hot Links Hot links allow you to move quickly from one drawing to the pertinent area of another drawing A hot link is handy when viewing enlarged areas of a page and needing the ability to jump back to a reference page

1 Select Tools gt Hot Link

OR

2 Click from the Tools Toolbar

3 Click on the page where you want to set the link The Hot Link dialog will open

4 Using the current page display on the Navigate Toolbar access the pull-down menu of pages by

clicking on the arrow at the right

5 Select the page for your link (You may also choose View gt Go to Page and select by page number)

6 Manipulate the view using the zoom tool and the scroll bars

7 Click

8 After joining a hot link to another page the hot link arrows in the Navigation Toolbar will become active

9 Move a hot link to another location on the page by clicking then click and drag the hot link image anywhere on the page

Section 5

22

Projects

This section will

Help you create settings important to your projects

Explain how On-Screen Takeoff works with your electronic or paper plans

Section 5 Projects

23

Project Template Files You can begin your project with a template Templates allow you to take advantage of conditions and settings used with previous projects

On-Screen Takeoff templates contain condition lists and established layer separations from previous projects you have created You may also use the sample templates provided with On-Screen Takeoff as a great starting point All aspects of the templates may be adjusted for a new project

1 Select File gt New and click the OK button

2 From the New dialog box choose the template that best fits your project

3 The conditions for this template will appear in the Takeoff Dock bar and the Project Properties dialog will open asking for further information

4 Use File gt Save or File gt Save As to rename and save your new project

Saving a Project as a Template File You can save your condition properties and layers as a template for future projects

1 Select File gt Save As

2 Enter a name for your template and select On-Screen Takeoff Template Files (tpo) from the Save As type field of the dialog (click on the down arrow to select)

3 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog Modifying a Template File Follow these steps to modify an existing template file if you need to change or add conditions andor layers

1 Select File gt Open

2 Navigate to your Projects directory

3 In the File Type drop-down select On-Screen Takeoff Template files (tpo)

4 Choose the On-Screen Takeoff template file you would like to modify and click the OK button

5 Make appropriate changes

6 Save and close file

The On-Screen Takeoff template files cannot save takeoff information

Section 5 Projects

24

Opening an Existing Project File 1 Select File gt Open

2 Navigate to the desired file location

3 Click the Open button

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask

you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Creating a New Project

1 Select File gt New

2 For a blank untitled project click

3 At this point the Project Properties dialog will pop-up for more information about your takeoff

NOTE The following are important to keep in mind when beginning a new project

At the start of your project fill out the Project Properties settings to establish the name for all printed output from your project set the default page size and scale for your plans number and names of different pages within the project and locations of electronic drawings

Scale settings can significantly affect quantity outcomes Be sure to set the scale for each page of drawings before beginning condition takeoffs

When using a digitizer remember to make a mark with a pen or pencil in the upper left and lower right corners of the first sheet of the paper plans to delineate the takeoff area for that sheet You can then set the takeoff area on On-Screen Takeoff using your marks

Save your project before you begin taking off any conditions On-Screen Takeoff will write a back-up file using the same file name

Remember the Undo feature If you make a mistake select Edit gt Undo and reverse the process step by step

Section 5 Projects

25

Project Properties

You can either set your Project Properties when you create a new takeoff or once your project file is saved under the appropriate name

1 Select File gt Project Properties the Project Properties dialog box will appear

2 Type in the name of your project to appear on printouts Use the backspace andor delete keys to edit the name as necessary

3 Press the Tab key to move to the Default Image Size option or click within the Image Size box You may click on the arrow at the right for the pull-down menu of page size options or you can use the down-arrow key on your keyboard to scroll through the list to the appropriate selection

4 Press the Tab key to move to the Default Scale option Select a scale by using the drop down arrow If your scale is metric you will need to click in the box next to Metric to convert to that measurement

5 Establish the number of pages for your project plans And load image files See Adding Pages to

Your Project

Adding Pages to Projects Individual Electronic Plans

1 Click on in the Project Properties dialog

2 In the Add Images dialog use the drop down arrow to navigate to the appropriate directory and folder containing your image

3 Select the file so that it displays in the File name field then click The file will display by name and path in the Image File field in Project Properties dialog

4 Click to accept and your project will automatically open

5 Save your project with the new settings by selecting File gt Save

Section 5 Projects

26

Electronic plans scanned from blueprints (as opposed to blue lines) will display as white lines on a black background and are difficult to read on your computer screen Select Image gt Invert and the colors will invert to black on white

You may have noticed the Page column in the Project Properties dialog Generally plan images occupy one page and 1 will be listed in the column indicating Page 1 of your plan file If you import a multi-page TIF a plan file containing more than one page of plans they will import as separate pages and each successive page will be indicated under the Page column as 1 2 3 etc of the plan file

Group of Electronic Plans You may add all the electronic plan files from a particular source (for example from a CD) by using the Auto Add feature

1 Click the button in the Project Properties dialog

2 Browse until you find the appropriate directory and folder containing your plan images

3 Click on any file displayed within your target folder so that the file name appears in the File name box of the Auto Add dialog

4 Click The image paths and file names will be recorded into the project properties arranged alphabetically

5 Click to accept your choices and your project will automatically open

6 Save your project with the new settings by selecting File gt Save

To load Dodge Plans into your Project Properties see Appendix IIi Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

Paper Plans On-Screen Takeoff makes it easy for Full Mode users to perform quantity takeoffs from paper plans using a digitizer

1 Add pages by clicking until you have the number of pages initially in the project

2 Name each page by clicking within the Title area and typing the name

3 Click to accept your choices and close the Project Properties dialog

4 Save your project with the new project properties settings by selecting File gt Save

Section 5 Projects

27

Setting Up a Drawing Template On-Screen Takeoff provides the convenience of using the same work surface for both digitizer and mouse to allow the user to draw conditions and then edit settings of the project or add or change conditions without breaking stride A mouse pad template included with the program defines the area of the digitizer in which use of the stylus or cursor will be recognized as mouse movement as opposed to drawing movement

1 Place your stylus on On-Screen Takeoff

2 Placing the template identifies the location mouse movements will be recognized by the program

Before placing the template the template must be applied to the digitizer surface This may have been done during the installation of your digitizer We suggest attaching the template to the lower right corner of the digitizer surface about one inch inside the grid area

3 Select Digitizer gt Place Template

4 Follow the instruction prompts on the screen clicking first on the target symbol at the left of the On-Screen Takeoff box on the template then on the target at the right

Setting Takeoff Area Before you can begin taking off a drawing you must define the drawing area on the digitizer This requires defining an area that will include all objects on each drawing of your plans As you add pages to your takeoff the same area of the digitizer will be active

1 Secure the plans to the digitizer with tape or a set of clamps

2 With a pen or a pencil mark the upper left corner and the lower right corner of the first page in your set of plans

3 Select Digitizer gt Set Takeoff Area

4 Click each mark with the stylus pen as prompted

5 Verify the active area of the digitizer by looking at the image size located in the lower right corner of your screen

If you close the program before the takeoff is complete you will need to reestablish the takeoff area before you can add additional condition quantities

Electronic plans appear on your computer screen eliminating the need to set a takeoff area You simply drag your mouse across the conditions you wish to takeoff The conditions will be highlighted and quantities will be totaled instantly Electronic plans are available through a variety of services For information contact an On Center Software account manager

Section 5 Projects

28

Setting Scale for Specific Pages You may set the scale in each page view separately This will override the default scale setting in Project Properties for that page Setting the correct scale for the drawing before taking off quantities ensures accurate calculations Be careful to check the scale for each drawing in your project before doing takeoffs

1 Display the page you want to set select Edit gt Set Scale

2 Use the drop down arrow to select a scale that will be applied to that page

3 Click

OR

4 Access the pull-down scale settings on the Navigate toolbar

NOTE As you draw objects notice that the drawn object is similar in width to the object on your plans If it is not the scale set may not be correct

Calculating Scale You may calculate scale according to a known measurement between two points either with a digitizer or on electronic plans

1 Select Edit gt Calculate Scale using Image or Edit gt Calculate Scale using Digitizer

2 Follow the instructions in the related Calculate Scale dialog box You will be asked to click on the first and second points then to enter the dimension for that distance

3 The scale will be recalculated for the displayed page and the Scale display on the Navigate toolbar will show the new scale

Section 6

29

Conditions and Takeoff

This section will Draw Conditions to Takeoff Plan Quantities

What Zones will do to help your takeoff process

Discuss the ins and outs of Takeoffs

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

30

Creating Conditions

If you are starting a new project from scratch you will need to create conditions to takeoff quantities such as floor areas wall lengths and corner bead counts If you are using a template you will have several pre-designed conditions already listed on the Takeoff dock bar However you may want to change the characteristics of some conditions or create additional conditions for a particular project

1 Right Click within the Takeoff dock bar Select New gt Condition

Or

2 From the Takeoff dock bar Click (if the buttons are not showing right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select Show Buttons from the pop-up menu) The New Condition dialog appears

3 Select the condition type (Linear Area Count or Zone) from the pull-down menu accessed by the

down arrow next to the Type option

4 Press Tab or use the mouse (or stylus) to move to Name and enter a name for your condition

5 Specify the desired condition attributes See Condition Attributes for more detail

6 Click for condition to apply

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

31

Condition Attributes Each condition type will have related attributes to select or specify within the General and Advanced tabs of the New Condition dialog Once a condition has been used to takeoff a quantity from your plans certain attributes cannot be changed

All conditions allow the user to specify color and fill pattern for the object drawn

Linear Conditions

General Specify width and height by feet and inches Specify pitch in inches up to the nearest thousandth of an inch if applicable

Advanced Specify rounding for object quantities and droprun default length for electrical or plumbing drops at the ends of lines Select Connect to have lines connect at the corners where one line of the condition ends and another begins (and indicate Tolerance for the featurersquos activation as distance between the ends of two lines) Choose Trim to have lines automatically trim to a line being crossed Choose Curve to draw a curved line

Follow these examples for inputting feet and inches For 7 feet 6 inches type 706 for 13 feet 7 inches type 1307 For 20 feet type 2000

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

32

Area Conditions

General If needed you can specify the thickness (in inches) andor pitch (in inches)

Advanced Specify rounding for object quantities Choose to display an adjustable grid within the area and indicate matrix cell dimensions

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

33

Count Conditions

General

Specify height and indicate the size (in inches) and shape (square circle triangle rectangle or opening) of the count object as it will appear on screen

Advanced Count conditions have advanced attributes These options are available for all shapes except for openings

Zone Conditions Zones allow you to subdivide condition quantities making it easier to modify and complete jobs in phases They can be used at the end of a takeoff to isolate a group of condition quantities that are in different areas of the takeoff

Zones can also be used to break a takeoff into multi-phases and can even be used to isolate quantities while a job is in progress to group the amount of work that has been completed to date They can be applied to one or multiple pages in your plans automatically calculating the takeoff quantities for each zoned area

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

34

The zone feature is only available in Lite and Full Mode If you are in View Mode and would like

to use this feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade

Condition Notes A Note tab is provided for comments regarding the condition These notes will display on the Takeoff List report and will import into Quick Bid

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

35

Condition Results The Results tab of the New Condition is based on condition type Initial settings default to linear feet (LF) for linear conditions square feet (SF) for area conditions and count of items (EA) for count conditions and zones The first of the results fields will display for the condition items in the Takeoff dock bar area All results will display in worksheets and Takeoff List reports as well as in an Excel spreadsheet after being exported

Copying Conditions You may use the condition attributes from a condition yoursquove already created for any future conditions of the same type

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Click the Copy button from the toolbar

OR

3 Right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select copy

4 A new condition will appear in the list with the same condition attributes as the previous condition but with the quantities zeroed

Editing Conditions Once you have copied a condition you might want to change several attributes You can also edit an existing condition to fit any updated needs

1 Highlight the desired condition on the Takeoff dock bar

2 Click the Change button

OR

3 Double-click on the condition you wish to edit to bring up the Change Condition dialog

NOTE The Change Condition dialog differs from the New Condition dialog only in that if takeoffs

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

36

have been performed in your project with this condition you will not be able to change the type of condition or certain properties under the advanced tab of the dialog box

Deleting Conditions 1 Click on the condition in the Takeoff Dock bar area

2 Click the Delete button on the toolbar

OR

3 Right-click and select Delete from the pop-up menu

All takeoff associated with the deleted condition will be deleted immediately and permanently

Organizing Project Conditions Within your project you can create folders andor sub-folders for different types of conditions You may even want to create a folder containing conditions with reset values

To get started organizing your conditions make sure you are viewing the condition tree (right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select Show Tree)

Creating Folders and Sub-Folders 1 Right-click in the Takeoff Dock bar area

2 Select New gt Folder from the pop-up menu

Copying Folders

1 Click on the folder and click Copy on the toolbar

2 All copied conditions within the new folder will have values reset to zero

Renaming Folders

1 Click on the folder

2 Right-click and select Rename from the pop-up menu

3 Enter a name for your folder and click the Enter button

Changing Condition Order

You may move conditions up or down in the condition list of the Takeoff dock bar to suit your project needs

1 Select the condition you would like to move by clicking to highlight it

NOTE When you are ready to move the highlighted conditions be sure that you start

moving using the last condition chosen That condition will have a highlighted boarder

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

37

2 Drag and drop any the condition from one place to another in the list You may also move a condition to another folder on the list in this way

Drawing with Conditions Snap Angles Set up snap angles to prevent lines from appearing jagged Snap angles are commonly set at 15deg and shift snap angles at 0deg

1 Go to Tools gt Options Options dialog appears

2 Under the General tab make the desired settings

3 Click to save the settings As they are drawn lines will snap to the set degree

Drawing a Linear Object 1 Select a condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff dock bar

2 Move the cursor into the Image takeoff area of the screen you will see the cursor display as crosshairs

3 Click and hold left mouse button then drag mouse to draw a line

4 Release mouse button to set line

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

38

5 Repeat steps for further lines

Continuous Mode This feature allows you to draw an object that has connected lines

1 Click the icon from the Takeoff toolbar

OR

2 Go to Tools gt Continuous Mode

3 Follow steps 1-3 from Draw a Linear Object

4 Click at each point of intersection The object will be connected

5 Double-click after making the final point to set the lines

Drawing a Curve To draw a curved line the Curve option must be checked under the Advanced tab of the Condition dialog

1 Click where you want to begin the curve and drag in a straight line to the position for the other endpoint of the curve

2 Click on the line to select it Handles in the shapes of small squares will appear at either end of

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

39

the line and in the center of the line

3 Move the cursor over the center handles until the cursor becomes a two-way arrow

4 Click and drag in the direction of the curve bending the line as you move the cursor Release to set the curve (The line you began with will disappear)

Draw a circle by drawing two curved lines connected

Drawing an Area Object Area conditions are drawn similarly to continuous mode lines You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete your area takeoff

NOTE When drawing an area do not intersect the perimeter or line of the object you are drawing

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

3 The area will be filled with the pattern set for that condition

NOTE The simulated circle will be good enough for you to be able to make a bid

To create a circular area click from point to point with very short distances in between points simulating a circlersquos perimeter Double-click after setting the last point to set the area

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

40

Grid Options Grids give you an added advantage when installing materials such as tiles Use this feature to get a count for how many tiles are needed for an area

1 Double-click on an area condition in the Takeoff dock bar to open its Condition dialog

2 Click on the Advanced tab to show its options

3 Check the box next to Grid by clicking in it

4 Indicate the dimensions of the cell matrix in inches (For example 200 x 400)

5 Under Results tab choose each (EA) for one of the results fields This will tabulate a number of grid cells (including partial grid cells) in area

6 Click to save your settings

7 Use the Move Grid and Rotate Grid features in the Tools menu to manipulate the grid as desired

Grid Calculation

1 Go to Tools gt Options menu

1 Specify if On-Screen Takeoff automatically should Calculate Grid Position

2 If AreaGrid Size is selected On-Screen Takeoff will calculate the number of items needed to fill the grid based on grid demintions

3 Click to accept and close the dialog

To move a line at any angle (regardless of default setting) press the Shift key while moving the mouse

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

41

Backout Mode This feature allows you to take out part of an area and deduct that amount of square footage

1 Select Tools gt Backout Mode

2 Outline the are you want backed out as you would when drawing a regular area object (see Drawing an Area Object)

3 The outlined area will clear and quantities will be recalculated

NOTE The perimeter of the backout area will be added to the LF quantity for that condition

Drawing a Count Object Square triangle rectangle and circle shaped count objects can easily be placed on images

1 Select the condition

2 Click in the location where you want the object to appear

3 To place an opening-shaped count item like a door or window you must click over an existing linear object such as a wall

4 On the Results tab you can change the height properties to give you the result you need

5 If Backout is checked on the advanced tab for each count opening the opening-shaped count item will back out a corresponding section of the linear object

Opening shaped count items are sized at 3rsquo0rdquo by default

Drawing a Zone Zones are drawn in the same way as area objects and may be any polygonal shape You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete the zone perimeter

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

42

Selecting Objects

1 Use the Select Tool to select objects

You can also select all objects that correspond to a condition

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Right-click and choose Select All

3 All objects with this condition will be highlighted with squares as an outline

Moving and Resizing Objects Linear

1 To move or resize a linear object click anywhere on the line to select it

2 To move the line position your pointer over the center handles When the mouse is positioned over the handles you will see a two-way arrow You will only be able to move the line in the direction of the arrows

3 Drag the line to a new position

4 Clicking and dragging the handles on the ends of the line will allow you to lengthen or shorten your line

Area and Zone

1 To move an area object or zone in its entirety click and drag it to its new position

2 Grabbing a handle at a corner or intersection of the object will allow you to adjust and change its perimeter

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

43

Count 1 To move a square circle rectangle or triangle shaped count object click and drag

2 Click and drag an opening shaped count object along the length of the linear object to the desired position then release

NOTE An opening shaped count object may not be moved from its associated linear condition object however it may be moved up and down the length of the linear object

Layers On-Screen Takeoff allows you to sort and separate your takeoff objects within the same job and on the same page On-Screen Takeoff gives you this flexibility through the use of layers

By assigning different conditions to different layers (for example differentiating between floors ceilings and walls) you can choose to view all layers or turn off certain layers to display and print the remaining groups of conditions only You may also remove the background image of electronic plans add text and hot link symbols or print only your condition takeoffs

Layers are only available in Full Mode If you are in View or Lite Mode and would like to use this

feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade Default Layers

On-Screen Takeoff begins every project with three default layers Image Annotation and Default The Image layer holds the electronic plan files you may have in your project The Annotation layer possesses all text notations highlighting and hot links in the project The Default layer will appear in the Condition dialog when creating or editing a condition (listed in the takeoff dock bar) Conditions are assigned to the Default layer unless otherwise specified by the user

Creating Layers To assign a condition to a layer other than the default layer you must first create additional layers for your project

1 Select View gt Layers to open the Layers dialog

2 Click An unnamed layer will be added

3 Click within the empty box and type a name for your layer (for example Wall)

4 New layers are added as active layers The adjacent box under the Show column will be checked

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

44

Assigning a Layer to a Condition 1 Open the Condition dialog box by creating a new condition or editing an existing condition

2 Under the General tab click on the down arrow in the Layer field to display optional layers

3 Select the desired layer for the condition Only the Default layer and layers you have added will be displayed

4 Click

View and Hide Layers

1 Select View gt Layers

2 Under the Show column check the box to view or remove the check (by clicking on it) to hide the specific layer

3 Click to accept and close the Layers dialog

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

45

Assigning Text to a Layer When adding text to an image On-Screen Takeoff has the capability to assign the text to a specified layer

1 Select the Text Tool

2 Click at the point you want to place your text

3 Type in your text using the Enter key for line breaks

4 Click the drop down arrow next to the Layer field and select the desired layer

Section 7

46

Printing and Exporting

This section will

Printing options and procedures

Exporting data by copying and pasting

Exporting quantity results to Excel spreadsheets

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

47

Print Setup On-Screen Takeoff allows the user to print the image takeoff list and worksheet

1 Select File gt Print Setup The Print Setup dialog will open

2 Select a printer or leave the default selection listed (change from the default printer displayed by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the field)

3 Indicate page size and printer tray option (Source) Access page size options by clicking on the

down arrow at the right of the field

4 Choose Portrait or Landscape orientation

5 Click to accept and close the dialog

Printing Images The image area can include the electronic plans the takeoff objects added text and hot links To print a subset of these (for example just the takeoffs without the plans or the added text and hot link symbols) hide layers that you do not want to print (see Section 6 View and Hide Layers) When you are printing your images every page will show the scale of the takeoff you are printing

1 Click on the Image tab to display the area of your project

2 Select File gt Print (or Ctrl + P)

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

48

3 Select the desired view (What to print) and the Image Range

4 Click The second Print dialog will open

5 Change settings accordingly or click if you accept the default settings

Printing Takeoff Lists and Worksheets In Takeoff Lists and Worksheets you may hide columns to print only certain results or adjust column widths to fit the report within the page size selected

1 In Takeoff List or Worksheet view move your cursor to the right side of the columnrsquos title bar the cursor will display as a two-way arrow

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

49

2 Click and drag to adjust the width of the column Holding the mouse button you may

slide the title bar under the title bar to its left to hide the column completely

3 Select File gt Print or press Ctrl + P to access the Print dialog

4 Indicate desired printer and choose the number of copies

5 Click to print and close the dialog

When printing the condition list we suggest printing in landscape

To reset to the default column widths double-click on the right border of a column heading will reset the column to its right (or previously to its right before being hidden)

Print Preview 1 Select File gt Print Preview

2 Use and to vary your view 3 If viewing an image choose current full or scale view to see how it displays

4 For printed outputs that cover more than one page use and to view adjacent pages or click on the down arrow next to Page field and select the page you want displayed

Exporting Using the CopyPaste Feature You may copy all the data or sections from the worksheet and the takeoff list view in On-Screen Takeoff and paste it into another application When pasting into Excel the cell layout will be maintained

1 Highlight the areas you wish to paste Click and hold the left mouse button down as you drag the cursor over the area to be selected then releasing the mouse button

OR

2 Select the entire takeoff list quickly click on the left On-Screen Takeoff column header and hold and drag the cursor across the remaining column headings

The number of pages for the view selected will display in the lower left-hand corner The zoom percentage that applies to the view will be displayed in the lower right-hand corner next to page size of the drawing

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

50

3 In the worksheet view you may highlight rows by clicking on the numbered buttons to the left of each row clicking and dragging across column headings or clicking and dragging over individual cells in the worksheet

Click anywhere in the appropriate view to deselect the area

4 Once your selection is highlighted you may select Edit gt Copy or Ctrl C from the keyboard 5 On your monitor switch to the application into which you want to paste your selection 6 Select Edit gt Paste in the new application or simply press Ctrl + V to paste

The colored keys for conditions cannot be pasted

Using the Export Feature You may export condition quantities to specified cell location within an Excel worksheet file Cell target locations are assigned in the Results tab of the condition dialogs on the Export line relating to each quantity measurement type

On-Screen Takeoff will export takeoff quantity results for up to three different quantity types that you specify For instance you may want to know the number of square feet in a ceiling area as well as the number of linear feet in its perimeter

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

51

1 Bring up the Condition dialog by double-clicking on a condition in the takeoff dock bar or by

selecting the condition and clicking

2 Click on the Results tab to access its fields The default quantities for the condition type will display

3 For each results field click on the arrow to access the pull-down menu and select the appropriate quantity (for example SF LF EA etchellip)

4 Have your Excel spreadsheet opened and saved in a file

5 Specify the Excel spreadsheet cell locations where you want the results to go

6 For a cell in the first sheet of your spreadsheet type in the cell address (eg a1) Case is not important

7 For a cell on a successive sheet of your spreadsheet type in sheet the number followed by a comma and the cell address without any spaces (eg sheet2a1) Case is not important

8 Click

9 Select File gt Export gt Condition Qty to Excel

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

52

10 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

11 Click to export On-Screen Takeoff results to specified cell locations in the Excel file When you return to the Excel application you will see the values have been added to the specified cell locations in your spreadsheet

12 Save your Excel file

Exporting Worksheet to Excel

1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 From On-Screen Takeoff Select File gt Export gt Worksheet to Excel

4 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

5 Click When you return to the Excel application you will see the values from the Worksheet Tab have been added to your spreadsheet

6 Save your Excel file

Exporting Takeoff to CVS 1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 Click the Takeoff Tab in the project you want to export the information

4 Select File gt Export gt Takeoff to CSV

5 Browse to the location of the CSV spreadsheet file click file to select it

6 Click the Save

NOTE CSV files can be opened in Excel Lotus Access etc One may consider this option more of a ldquodumprdquo into a file

The Excel application must be active (it may be minimized on the application bar) with the target spreadsheet open in the application Otherwise an error will occur with the export operation that will affect both the On-Screen Takeofftrade file and the Excel spreadsheet

Section 8

53

Advanced Features

This section will

Some special features of working with condition objects in the takeoff area

Details of advanced options for conditions

Advanced features of the Project Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

54

Features to Use with Objects Roping Feature You can move copy or delete using this feature Using the Select tool (the pointer) you may select several objects at once by clicking and dragging an outline around the objects then releasing the mouse button Roping may select either objects completely within the outlined area (inclusive) or objects both within and touched by the outlined area (touching) Specify your roping preference under Tools gt Options

1 Click and hold the mouse button at a point on the screen near the objects to be selected and drag to surround the objects with an outline

2 Release the mouse button The objects will be selected

3 You may now

Move the group around on the page by clicking within the group dragging the mouse and releasing the button to place the objects

Delete the group of objects by clicking the Delete key or

Copy and paste by pressing Ctrl C to copy the group then Ctrl V to paste it The pasted copy of the grouped objects will appear slightly offset from the original objects

Section 8 Advanced Features

55

Applying a DropRun Count

Use the droprun feature when calculating quantities to take into account the drop or run of a linear condition such as electrical lines or plumbing pipes Drop or run lengths may be added separately to any linear condition on screen while a default droprun length may be indicated for a condition as a whole

1 Select the desired linear condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff Dock bar

2 Click the Change button in the toolbar to open the Change Condition dialog

3 Click the Advanced tab to access the advanced options and click inside the DropRun check box

4 Enter a default length to be applied to all of this condition Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches) You can leave the length blank and manually enter drop run on each segment drawn

5 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog

Edit DropRun Count

1 With the related linear condition in the Takeoff Dock bar highlighted or with the pointer tool selected

2 click on the desired linear object in the image takeoff area The Count button will become active

3 Click on the Count button (alternatively select Tools gt Count) The default droprun amount will show in the pop-up Count dialog (Default length will be zero if droprun has not been selected in this conditionrsquos properties)

4 Type in the desired length Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches)

5 Click the OK button The additional amount will be reflected in the corresponding quantity The new DropRun count will apply only to the object edited

Adding Text in Image View

On-Screen Takeoff allows you to place text comments around your quantity takeoffs that may be printed along with plan images and objects Text is automatically placed within the Annotation Layer (that includes text and hot links)

1 To place text on the image select the Text Tool and click at the point you want to place your text opening a text box

2 Type in your information clicking Enter for line breaks

3 When you are finished click the OK button to exit the text box

4 To reposition text simply click on the text (with the Text Tool active) to select it

5 Move the cursor over the text the cursor will now display as a four-way arrow

6 Click and drag the mouse to position the text as desired

Section 8 Advanced Features

56

1 To edit existing text use the Text Tool to double-click on the text to open the editing box

2 Enter additional text or use the Backspace key to delete text as necessary

Formatting Text Once created you may format the font size type style and color of your text

1 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Font or click on the Font button in the Takeoff Toolbar

2 Select the desired features (color options are disabled) and click the OK button

3 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Color or click on the Color button in the Takeoff Toolbar The Color dialog will open

4 Click on a color in the Basic Color palette or create a color and add to the Custom Colors palette (Be sure to click on the color in the Custom Colors palette to select it)

5 Click the OK button

Object Properties

Linear Objects

Linear objects may be set to connect at corners

A linear object may be set to trim automatically when crossing another linear object (Check the trim option under the advanced tab of the Condition dialog)

When you move a connected linear object objects automatically move and resize connected lines accordingly (quantities are then recalculated)

This feature requires that the connected linear object be moved using the center handles (does not apply when resizing the line from the ends)

Objects constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

Objects are measured from centerline to centerline

Section 8 Advanced Features

57

Area Objects When drawing an area use your escape key to undo the last line drawn You may reverse your

drawing of an area using the escape key

The area will not fill with color and pattern until the user double-clicks after the last line is set

Lines drawn to delineate an area object constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

After selecting an area to move or adjust position the mouse in the center to move the entire area position the mouse at the sides or corners to adjust the perimeter

Count Objects

All count objects are quantified by the physical number of objects per page and reported as EA for the UOM The quantity for the current Image View is (displayed in the Condition List) and the total quantity in your project is displayed in the Takeoff View and Worksheet View)

Square circle rectangle and triangle shaped count objects do not displace or subtract from other object quantities when placed on top of them However on the Advanced Tab for the count condition a connect property can be set (this is a check box) so that when a count object of this shape is put on top of a Linear type takeoff object it will move with the linear if said linear is moved

An opened-shaped count object must be placed within a linear object Opening shaped count objects may also be measured by linear foot or linear yard (EA SF and SY are also options) Opening shaped count items default to a width of 3rsquo 0rdquo at the time of creation This size can be changed The small medium and large size are not options on this type of condition anymore Check Backout on the Advanced tab for each Count object back out the footage (or yardage) of opening-shaped count objects in which they are placed

NOTE In order to see this Backout functionality (in quantity) for SY or SF deductions at least one of the

results for the Linear(s) this object will be placed on must be set to SY or SF and the count object must have a height quantity

Advanced Features of Conditions The Round Feature Under the Advanced tab of the linear and area Condition dialogues you may specify quantity rounding (in inches) For linear objects rounding applies to each linear object drawn For area objects rounding will apply to each segment of the area perimeter adjusting the perimeter and area calculations For example With a linear condition entering 12 in the Round field will round up each related linear object to the nearest 12 inches or one foot With this setting two walls of 1 4 would each round to 2 0 totaling 4 0

NOTE In the Takeoff Dock bar condition list and in the On-Screen Takeoff reports quantities will be displayed in whole numbers rounded up to the nearest foot However calculations are based on true quantities without rounding unless the Round Feature is engaged

Pitch Pitch may apply either to linear or area conditions It is measured in rise per linear foot Entering 12 indicates a 12 rise per 12 of linear distance (a pitch of 12 over 12) or an angle of 45deg

Section 8 Advanced Features

58

Advanced Features of Project Properties Selecting Multiple Pages

1 Select a single page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry

2 Drag the cursor down the column of numbers to select consecutive pages

3 Click on the blank button at the top of this column to select all pages in the Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

59

Changing Image Assigned to a Drawing 1 Select the page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry 2 Click the Change Image button The Change Image dialog box will appear

3 Navigate to the desired file and select by clicking on it

4 Click the Open button The electronic file assigned to the page will have been changed to reflect the new file choice

Changing Image File Path 1 Select pages as described above

2 Choose Change Folder

3 In the Change Folder dialog navigate to the appropriate folder

4 Click the OK button The file path will have been changed for the selected page entries

Delete a Page from Project Properties 1 Select the page you want to delete by clicking on its associated number (in the gray box at the

left of the entry)

2 Choose Delete Page

All Takeoff on the page will be deleted immediately and permanently

Section 8 Advanced Features

60

Advanced Features of Tool Options

Calculation Method On-Screen Takeoff has built-in calculation options to allow for faster work and faster saves until your takeoff is complete Calculation options are found by selecting Tools gt Options then clicking on the Calculation tab

Calculation method can be set to Automatic Automatic except Grids and Manual Manual will allow the program to operate more quickly while Automatic or Automatic except Grids allows the user to see quantity changes as takeoffs are made

In any mode you may press F9 to recalculate quantities for the On-Screen Takeoff current totals

Configuration Tab

When the ldquoPage Label (A01)rdquo radial button is chosen On-Screen Takeoff puts the numbered label on all the pages of in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar If the Page Descriptionrdquo radial button is chosen then a description of what takeoff is on that specific page will be shown in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar

This section of the configuration tab gives you options on how you want to export your information When the ldquoFolderSubfolder Namesrdquo radial button is chosen than on your file that you are exporting to will have all the conditions folders and subfolders In the Delimiter box you can choose the symbol that is needed to separate the information you are exporting Some files need semicolons () or colons () to make sure the information comes exported in is separated it the appropriate places

Section 8 Advanced Features

61

In previous versions of On-Screen Takeoff there are views that users need to have in order for them to display their information By either choosing ldquoOST 1xrdquo or ldquoOST 2xrdquo it will let the program know you want your columns of information exported in that specific format

When you have the Confirm Deletions radial button of ldquoYesrdquo chosen than every time you delete anything you will get a dialog box confirming your intentions of deletion

While working with your takeoff you have a choice to either view the legend of your conditions or hide it Choose whichever radial button that suits your needs

For those who prefer to use the Enter key to navigate in dialog boxes this option is just for that

Font Tab The Font tab is designed for you to make your own look and feel for the application At the bottom of this tab it will show you sample of the fonts and colors you have chosen

Renaming the Current Page You may change the name of the current page in the takeoff area of On-Screen Takeoff by selecting Edit gt Rename Page

This opens the Name Page dialog and you may simply type in a new name and click the Enter button The new name for the file will be reflected on the title bar for the page and in Project Properties

You also may access the Rename Page function by right-clicking in the takeoff area while in Image View and selecting the option from the pop-up menu that appears

Section 9

62

Saving and Exiting

This section will

Explain how to save projects

Show you how to safely exit the program

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

63

Saving Your Project

1 Select File gt Save 2 If your project has not previously been saved a Save dialog box will open to allow you to name

the file and choose the directory and folder in which to save your file 3 Once saved File gt Save will simply save the current version of the file

OR

4 Select File gt Save As then type in a new name for the file and save to the desired file path

The Auto-save Feature With the Auto-save feature On-Screen Takeoff automatically backs up your open project You may choose to have more than one level of backup files The first backup copy will have the extension b00 and successive files will be b01 b02 and so on If you have designated four levels of backup files after the fourth backup copy has been created (b03) the next file will be saved over the file with extension b00 Further backup saves will then rotate through the four backup files in the same way

1 Select Tools gt Options 2 In the Auto-save area (under the General tab) select the frequency of backup file creation (in

minutes) and the number of levels for the feature 3 You also may disengage the feature by clicking in the check box to clear it

The Auto-save feature automatically saves backup copies to the directory of the current project If you are working from a write-protected area such as a CD-ROM On-Screen Takeoff will place backup files in the On-Screen Takeoff folder

Exiting When you are finished using On-Screen Takeoff it is very easy to exit Exiting is very important because of security reasons If someone were to use your computer they could enter the application and view and manipulate information

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

64

On-Screen Takeoff closes the open project when you open another or create a new project or when you exit the program

1 Select File gt Exit

OR

2 You also may click at the upper right-hand corner of the application to exit

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

65

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer When you get your digitizer from GTCO you will need to connect it to your computer Follow the instructions outlined below to do this

Note For rollup digitizers the metal bar must be oriented to the top or right hand side

Connecting the Digitizer 1 Lay the digitizer out flat 2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer 3 Plug in the power adapter 4 Plug the interface (IO) cable into the digitizer 5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into an open serial port on computer

Note GTCO Technical support phone number is 410-381-6688 The electronic manual (on diskette) from GTCO contains more detailed installation and operation instructions for the GTCO digitizer model you have

Installing other Digitizer Drivers If you are using a GTCO Digitizer you will need to install the GTCO TabletWorks Drivers

If you are using a Digitizer not supported by GTCO Tablet Works 10 please contact the manufacturer of your digitizer for assistance with installation

Installing GTCO TabletWorks Drivers 1 Insert the On Center CD into the CD-ROM drive The CD Startup screen will open 2 Click on Install Software 3 Select Additional Software and Drivers 4 Select Digitizer Driver 5 Follow the instructions for installing TabletWorks 10

Adhering the Template The template is a small plastic sticker used to enable mouse function when using the digitizer with On-Screen Takeoff Place your template on your digitizer We suggest placing it in the bottom right corner of the digitizer about one inch inside the takeoff area

Note You may either peel off the back of the template and use the adhesive surface or you can tape the template down

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

66

Testing the Digitizer Drivers Before running OST you may test the digitizer by moving the stylus around on the digitizer pad it should move the mouse cursor (if mouse emulation is enabled)

If the digitizer does not move the mouse cursor on the screen

The superset codes may need to be reset Reset the superset codes by touching on the border of the digitizer with the stylus The digitizer should beep several times

The digitizer may not be communicating with the computer Be sure the COM port selected is correct Be sure the COM port selected is correct If you are not able to get the digitizer to move the mouse cursor you need to call GTCO technical support for help

Note The Mouse Emulation is not required for On-Screen Takeoff to work properly It is used only for the Template functionality if the digitizer is moving the cursor the wrong direction (up instead of sideways or vice-versa)

Click the L-shaped arrow symbol on the digitizer with the stylus

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

67

Appendix II Toolbar Items Main Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

68

Tool Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

69

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

70

Navigate Toolbar (Continued)

Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

71

Takeoff Toolbar (Continued)

Image Toolbar

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

72

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

This section will detail how to load plans from a F W Dodge CD-ROM into an On-Screen Takeoff project file ready for takeoffs

Dodge files may be added to the Project Properties dialog However loading the files in that way will load the files by number rather than name description If you want to load one page only from your Dodge CD You will have to rename the page to display the name rather than number of the file

To load plan files from a Dodge CD so that the files load sequentially by file number but are displayed by name rather than by number within your project follow the instructions below

Opening a Dodge project from a CD-ROM 1 Insert the CD into the drive 2 Choose File gt Custom 3 Choose Dodge Plans Project (plansdat) as the file type 4 Select the appropriate file type by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the Files of type

field 5 In the Look in field access your drive paths by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the

field then

Navigate to your CD-ROM drive Open the data folder and Open the Projects folder

6 Select the desired project and open its folder 7 Open the plansdat file 8 All the images will come in sequenced correctly for that job along with the full descriptions

(names) of each page If there is not a plans folder in the project folder then plans do not exist for that project on the CD Opening the plansdat file will yield an empty project

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

73

Appendix IV Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer The On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer is a limited version of On Center Softwarersquos commercial takeoff software If your status bar located at the very bottom of the main window says View Mode in the lower left-hand corner then you are using the Plan Viewer You can use the plan viewer to

View CD-based amp converted CAD drawings

View a previously created OST file and associated drawings

Download electronic plans online

Navigate through drawings

Quickly Takeoff linearsareas and counts

Zoom in to view the plan better

Print drawings directly from the viewer

Viewing an On-Screen Takeoff Project File

1 To open an OST file that was previously created with of On-Screen Takeoff 2 Select File gt Open 3 An Open dialog will appear if you do not see the OST file you are looking for select the

Look In drop down arrow 4 A drop down menu will appear listing the various folders drives and mapped drives located

on your computer select the correct drive or folder location and continue to browse to the location of your OST file

5 When you see your OST file double-click it to open it 6 Any takeoff and drawings should appear on the Image tab view

If you do not see the drawings but do see the colored takeoff layer the drawings may

not be located in the same place they were originally saved at Go to File gt Project Properties and check the Image File path for each listed page If the image file path is pointing to a CD drive make sure the CD is inside the CR-ROM

Downloading Electronic Plans If your Online Plan Service provides a special file format (OSX) required to use this feature of our plan viewer you can immediately downloaded all electronic plans of a project directly from our viewer

Most Plan Room web sites will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff when a request to download plans is made Your particular Plan Room may differ in operation so please contact the provider directly with questions on using the site

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

74

When you request to download or open a project file from a Plan Room you will usually have the open to open or save an OSX file Choosing open will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff Alternately you may choose to save the file to a local hard drive After you have saved the file either double-click it to launch On-Screen Takeoff or open the OSX file using On-Screen Takeoff by clicking File then Open and locating the file on your hard drive You will need to change the file type to OSX

After the OSX file is opened you will see an additional tab appear in the Conditions List window called Pages

The Pages tab shows the hierarchy of your project Gray file icons represent pages that have not been downloaded and blue icons represents pages that have been downloaded

To download a page simply double-click the page icon

If you wish to select a group of pages to download you can use the Ctrl or Shift key to multiple select them then click the Download button

If you wish to download all pages at once click the Download All button

Downloaded pages will now appear in the Project Properties dialog in the same order in which they appear in the Pages tab

Creating Quick Takeoffs With On-Screen Takeoff you can create quick takeoffs to measure quantities even if you dont have the full version of our program However using the Quick Takeoff functionality shows you just a fraction of what the full version can do

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar is located at the top of the image view It has three buttons designated for three types of takeoffs Linear Area and Count The Quantity drop down list will show secondary quantities for Linears and Areas The Units drop down allows you to select how you want your quantities displayed Feet Inches Yards Millimeters and Meters

NOTE Every time change the type of takeoff you are performing (switching from Area to Linear for example) the previous quantities and takeoff objects will disappear They will also disappear when you changes pages

NOTE You can use the Dimension Tool to basically measure the distance between two points or linears The distance will display on the status bar at the bottom of the application

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

75

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions General

Where is On-Screen Takeoff installed on my computer

Typically it is installed in CProgram FilesOn-Screen Takeoff

In Explorer how do I recognize On-Screen Takeoff file types

On-Screen Takeoff data is stored in a single file per job lsquojob name OSTrsquo On-Screen Takeoff templates are stored as lsquotemplate nameTPOrsquo

Can only one project at a time be open

Yes For that reason opening another project automatically closes the project on screen You will be asked to save any changes

Is only one scale allowed per page What about on drawings that have multiple detail sections on a page and each of those drawings have different scales

Yes For pages with drawings of different scales copy the drawing to another project page and set the appropriate scale

I cannot perform backout on an area that is along a linear

As a workaround use the On-Screen Takeoff layers feature to help you with this issue Electronic Images

How do I start a project from drawings that have been scanned and written to a CD-ROM

Open a new project Select File gt Project Properties and select Auto Add Navigate to your CD and the appropriate folder and select any image file in that location Click Open All files in the location will load into your project Recommended that images are copied from CD to hard drive for performance

If I get a disk of drawings in AutoCAD format (R13 or R14) can I read them in On-Screen Takeoff

Yes On-Screen Takeoff now reads DWG DXF and many other format that are saved with AutoCAD

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

76

When I click on the all pages button what is supposed to happen Currently nothing seems to change when I click on that button

The All Pages button is used to apply the Darken and Enhance Plans feature to all pages in the project (as opposed to only the current page on screen)

Is there a way to deduct a large skylight from an area condition

Yes with the related area condition selected in the Takeoff Dock bar unselect the Backout button on the Takeoff Toolbar then draw the Backout area The area quantity will be deducted from the related condition object and the linear measurement of the Backout perimeter will be added

Digitizer Issues

How do I connect a Digitizer to the computer

See Appendix I Connecting a Digitizer

The Place Template menu choice is disabled

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or the digitizer or the digitzer drivers are not installed

It wonrsquot let me select the Set Takeoff Area menu choice

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or no job is open a digitizer is not installed or the drivers are not installed

The digitizer stylus is not moving the cursor or crosshairs

Click S-0-1 superset on the digitizer

How do I convert my old GTCO Digitizer to work with On- Screen Takeofftrade

Call GTCO and they may be able to reconfigure your digitizer to be compatible with On-Screen Takeoff

Printing Issues Which Printers work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible printers include On-Screen Takeoff Hewlett Packard Epson and Canon printers If you are having printer difficulties please contact support and specify the type of printer along with other pertinent information Contact support at wwwoncentercomsupport or email supportoncentercom

Which Plotters work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible Plotters include Hewlett Packard DesignJet plotters and the EnCAD Cadjet II If you are having plotter difficulties please contact support and specify the type of plotter concerned

ViewingDisplay I can no longer see my condition list How do I get it back

The toolbars and Dock bars can be turned on and off through the View gt Toolbars menu options

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

77

This is also accessible by right-clicking in the toolbar area and selecting (or deselecting) a toolbar listed

I cannot view my folders in the condition list

Right-click in the Takeoff Dock barcondition list area and select Show Tree to display your folders

My Status Bar reads Viewer Mode and I am unable to draw conditions

On-Screen Takeoff needs to be Authorized Or you need to purchase an upgrade Click the Perform Advanced Takeoff button on the main toolbar

I hid a Dock bar and when I selected to view it again it appeared alongside the other Dock

bar instead of stacked on top of it How do I fix it

Pick up the Dock bar by clicking on the bar at the top and continuing to hold down the mouse button drag the Dock bar over the other one It will resize and appear stacked with the other

When I open image files from a CD the images are all upside down How do I get them right

side up

To flip pages from top to bottom follow the steps below 1 Click the All Pages button on the Image Toolbar (All Pages is engaged when the button

is not clicked) 2 Click the Flip Horizontal button on the Image Toolbar 3 Click the All Pages button again to disengage

Templates How do I create a Template

Follow the steps below 1 Create a typical project 2 Choose File gt Save As 3 Choose On-Screen Takeoff Template Files as the file type to save 4 Name the file This will save all of the condition setups as well as the layers for the

project

How do I create a new project from a template

Follow the steps below 1 Choose File gt New 2 Select a template from those listed in the New dialog This will open a new project with

conditions and layers saved from a previous project but no pages or takeoff

78

INDEX

Area Conditions 32

Area Objects 57

Auto Scrolling 20

Auto-save 63

Backout Mode 41

Calculation Method 60

Conditions 29

Configuration 60

Contents Tab 6

Continuous Mode 38

Count Conditions 33

Count Objects 57

Digitizer 10 65 76

Docking Toolbars 13

Dodge CD 72

Drawing 27 37

DropRun Count 55

Environment 18

Exiting 63

Exporting 49

Features 16

Font 61

Frequently Asked Questions 75

Grid 40

Help File 5

Hiding Toolbars 13

Hot Links 21

Image 19 59

Image files 9

Image Toolbar 12 71

Images 75

Index Tab 6

Layers 43

Linear Conditions 31

Linear Objects 56

Main Toolbar 12 67

Menus 14

Moving Toolbars 13

Navigate Toolbar 12 69

Navigating 20

On-Screen Takeofftrade 2

Page 59 61

Pages 20 25 28

Plan Viewer 73

Plans 26

Printing 47 76

Project Properties 25

Projects 22

Quick Start Video 18

Resizing Toolbars 13

Roping 54

Saving 63

Scale 28

Search Tab 7

Selecting Objects 42

Setup 8

Start On-Screen Takeofftrade 17

System Requirements 9

Takeoff 19 27

Takeoff Toolbar 70 71

Takeoff Toolbar 12

Template Files 23

TIF (Group4) 9

Tool Toolbar 12 68

Toolbar 67

Toolbars 12

View Toolbar 12 69

Viewing Toolbars 12

Worksheet 20

Zone Conditions 33

Zoom Toolbar 12 69

  • On-Screen Takeoff Lite
  • Table of Contents
  • Section 1 - Introduction
  • Section 2 - Setup
  • Section 3 - Toolbars and Menus
  • Section 4 - Features
  • Section 5 - Projects
  • Section 6 - Conditions and Takeoff
  • Section 7 - Printing and Exporting
  • Section 8 - Advanced Features
  • Section 9 - Saving and Exiting
  • Appendix I - Installing Your Digitizer
  • Appendix II - Toolbar Items
  • Appendix III - Loading Plans from a Dodge CD
  • Appendix IV - Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer
  • Appendix V - Frequently Asked Questions
  • Index

Section 4

16

Features

This section will

Show you how open On-Screen Takeoff

Describe the On-Screen Takeoff environment

Teach you how to navigate pages

Section 4 Features

17

Start On-Screen Takeoff

1 On your desktop double-click your On-Screen Takeoff icon

2 The application will open

OR

3 Left-click on the Start button on your computerrsquos toolbar

4 Scroll up to Programs gt On Center Software

5 Highlight On-Screen Takeoff and click On-Screen Takeoff will open On-Screen Takeoff opens to an untitled blank project The Image view of the screen will be a blank page

Two blank dock bars the Pan dock bar and the Takeoff dock bar appear at the left side of the screen Along the bottom the Status bar displays user status or context-sensitive messages as well as paper size and current zoom percentage of the plan sheet on screen The menu bar and several task specific toolbars are located at the top of the screen

NOTE All toolbars and dock bars may be accessed to view or hide through View gt Toolbars on the menu bar

Section 4 Features

18

Quick Start Video When On-Screen Takeoff opens you will be given an option to watch the Quick Start video (recommended) or start the program without watching the video

The 20 minute video will demonstrate key program functionality and allow you to view application instruction for enhanced learning

If you would like to watch the video click If you prefer to get started without

the video click If you have already viewed the video click the lsquoDo not show this message againrsquo box to prevent this dialog from appearing each time you open the program

NOTE If you decide later that you would like to watch the Quick Start video go to Help gt Watch

Quick Start Videos

On-Screen Takeoff Environment The On-Screen Takeoff environment acts like your drafting table allowing you to work on several sheets of plans at once and to reference at a glance the entire drawing and your position on that drawing while giving you the power of a computer to track analyze print and export your takeoff quantities and plans

The screen is bordered at the top by the Menu bar with pull-down menus and at the bottom by the Status bar which indicates current user status plan page size and current zoom percentage of page The largest portion of the application screen will be your takeoff area bounded on the left (by default) by two dock bars and on the top by several toolbars

In the takeoff area you may view your project plans (images) andor takeoff objects the takeoff list with quantities the worksheet or a legend of your condition list

The main window of On-Screen Takeoff has three tabs located at the bottom left allowing for quick change between Image Takeoff or Worksheet views Select the desired view option on the toolbar and it will automatically open on your screen

Section 4 Features

19

Image View

This view shows the plan file andor takeoff conditions drawn from your plans

Takeoff View This view displays the height if applicable and quantity breakdowns of your conditions according to result types indicated (eg linear feet square feet or count of items) for zones pages and the project as a whole It also displays notes per condition

Section 4 Features

20

Worksheet View This view displays the condition and quantity in units of measure specified in the first results field of the Results tab in the Condition dialog and allows the user to enter amounts for material labor and subcontractor takeoffs

NOTE When in the Worksheet view tab out the field then save This is keep all the values saved

Navigating On-Screen Takeoff

Auto Scrolling When creating linear areas or zones On-Screen Takeoff will automatically scroll the image view when necessary It will move as your mouse or digitizer moves beyond the edge of the current view

Changing Pages

1 Select View gt Next Page Previous Page or Go To Page (specify page number for the Go to Page option)

2 You may also select the corresponding arrows for these options from the Navigate Toolbar The

drop down arrow in the Page field will list the pages The and arrows will take you to the

previous or next page The and arrows will take you to the first or last page

OR

Section 4 Features

21

3 Or press Ctrl G for the Go To Page dialog

Hot Links Hot links allow you to move quickly from one drawing to the pertinent area of another drawing A hot link is handy when viewing enlarged areas of a page and needing the ability to jump back to a reference page

1 Select Tools gt Hot Link

OR

2 Click from the Tools Toolbar

3 Click on the page where you want to set the link The Hot Link dialog will open

4 Using the current page display on the Navigate Toolbar access the pull-down menu of pages by

clicking on the arrow at the right

5 Select the page for your link (You may also choose View gt Go to Page and select by page number)

6 Manipulate the view using the zoom tool and the scroll bars

7 Click

8 After joining a hot link to another page the hot link arrows in the Navigation Toolbar will become active

9 Move a hot link to another location on the page by clicking then click and drag the hot link image anywhere on the page

Section 5

22

Projects

This section will

Help you create settings important to your projects

Explain how On-Screen Takeoff works with your electronic or paper plans

Section 5 Projects

23

Project Template Files You can begin your project with a template Templates allow you to take advantage of conditions and settings used with previous projects

On-Screen Takeoff templates contain condition lists and established layer separations from previous projects you have created You may also use the sample templates provided with On-Screen Takeoff as a great starting point All aspects of the templates may be adjusted for a new project

1 Select File gt New and click the OK button

2 From the New dialog box choose the template that best fits your project

3 The conditions for this template will appear in the Takeoff Dock bar and the Project Properties dialog will open asking for further information

4 Use File gt Save or File gt Save As to rename and save your new project

Saving a Project as a Template File You can save your condition properties and layers as a template for future projects

1 Select File gt Save As

2 Enter a name for your template and select On-Screen Takeoff Template Files (tpo) from the Save As type field of the dialog (click on the down arrow to select)

3 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog Modifying a Template File Follow these steps to modify an existing template file if you need to change or add conditions andor layers

1 Select File gt Open

2 Navigate to your Projects directory

3 In the File Type drop-down select On-Screen Takeoff Template files (tpo)

4 Choose the On-Screen Takeoff template file you would like to modify and click the OK button

5 Make appropriate changes

6 Save and close file

The On-Screen Takeoff template files cannot save takeoff information

Section 5 Projects

24

Opening an Existing Project File 1 Select File gt Open

2 Navigate to the desired file location

3 Click the Open button

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask

you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Creating a New Project

1 Select File gt New

2 For a blank untitled project click

3 At this point the Project Properties dialog will pop-up for more information about your takeoff

NOTE The following are important to keep in mind when beginning a new project

At the start of your project fill out the Project Properties settings to establish the name for all printed output from your project set the default page size and scale for your plans number and names of different pages within the project and locations of electronic drawings

Scale settings can significantly affect quantity outcomes Be sure to set the scale for each page of drawings before beginning condition takeoffs

When using a digitizer remember to make a mark with a pen or pencil in the upper left and lower right corners of the first sheet of the paper plans to delineate the takeoff area for that sheet You can then set the takeoff area on On-Screen Takeoff using your marks

Save your project before you begin taking off any conditions On-Screen Takeoff will write a back-up file using the same file name

Remember the Undo feature If you make a mistake select Edit gt Undo and reverse the process step by step

Section 5 Projects

25

Project Properties

You can either set your Project Properties when you create a new takeoff or once your project file is saved under the appropriate name

1 Select File gt Project Properties the Project Properties dialog box will appear

2 Type in the name of your project to appear on printouts Use the backspace andor delete keys to edit the name as necessary

3 Press the Tab key to move to the Default Image Size option or click within the Image Size box You may click on the arrow at the right for the pull-down menu of page size options or you can use the down-arrow key on your keyboard to scroll through the list to the appropriate selection

4 Press the Tab key to move to the Default Scale option Select a scale by using the drop down arrow If your scale is metric you will need to click in the box next to Metric to convert to that measurement

5 Establish the number of pages for your project plans And load image files See Adding Pages to

Your Project

Adding Pages to Projects Individual Electronic Plans

1 Click on in the Project Properties dialog

2 In the Add Images dialog use the drop down arrow to navigate to the appropriate directory and folder containing your image

3 Select the file so that it displays in the File name field then click The file will display by name and path in the Image File field in Project Properties dialog

4 Click to accept and your project will automatically open

5 Save your project with the new settings by selecting File gt Save

Section 5 Projects

26

Electronic plans scanned from blueprints (as opposed to blue lines) will display as white lines on a black background and are difficult to read on your computer screen Select Image gt Invert and the colors will invert to black on white

You may have noticed the Page column in the Project Properties dialog Generally plan images occupy one page and 1 will be listed in the column indicating Page 1 of your plan file If you import a multi-page TIF a plan file containing more than one page of plans they will import as separate pages and each successive page will be indicated under the Page column as 1 2 3 etc of the plan file

Group of Electronic Plans You may add all the electronic plan files from a particular source (for example from a CD) by using the Auto Add feature

1 Click the button in the Project Properties dialog

2 Browse until you find the appropriate directory and folder containing your plan images

3 Click on any file displayed within your target folder so that the file name appears in the File name box of the Auto Add dialog

4 Click The image paths and file names will be recorded into the project properties arranged alphabetically

5 Click to accept your choices and your project will automatically open

6 Save your project with the new settings by selecting File gt Save

To load Dodge Plans into your Project Properties see Appendix IIi Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

Paper Plans On-Screen Takeoff makes it easy for Full Mode users to perform quantity takeoffs from paper plans using a digitizer

1 Add pages by clicking until you have the number of pages initially in the project

2 Name each page by clicking within the Title area and typing the name

3 Click to accept your choices and close the Project Properties dialog

4 Save your project with the new project properties settings by selecting File gt Save

Section 5 Projects

27

Setting Up a Drawing Template On-Screen Takeoff provides the convenience of using the same work surface for both digitizer and mouse to allow the user to draw conditions and then edit settings of the project or add or change conditions without breaking stride A mouse pad template included with the program defines the area of the digitizer in which use of the stylus or cursor will be recognized as mouse movement as opposed to drawing movement

1 Place your stylus on On-Screen Takeoff

2 Placing the template identifies the location mouse movements will be recognized by the program

Before placing the template the template must be applied to the digitizer surface This may have been done during the installation of your digitizer We suggest attaching the template to the lower right corner of the digitizer surface about one inch inside the grid area

3 Select Digitizer gt Place Template

4 Follow the instruction prompts on the screen clicking first on the target symbol at the left of the On-Screen Takeoff box on the template then on the target at the right

Setting Takeoff Area Before you can begin taking off a drawing you must define the drawing area on the digitizer This requires defining an area that will include all objects on each drawing of your plans As you add pages to your takeoff the same area of the digitizer will be active

1 Secure the plans to the digitizer with tape or a set of clamps

2 With a pen or a pencil mark the upper left corner and the lower right corner of the first page in your set of plans

3 Select Digitizer gt Set Takeoff Area

4 Click each mark with the stylus pen as prompted

5 Verify the active area of the digitizer by looking at the image size located in the lower right corner of your screen

If you close the program before the takeoff is complete you will need to reestablish the takeoff area before you can add additional condition quantities

Electronic plans appear on your computer screen eliminating the need to set a takeoff area You simply drag your mouse across the conditions you wish to takeoff The conditions will be highlighted and quantities will be totaled instantly Electronic plans are available through a variety of services For information contact an On Center Software account manager

Section 5 Projects

28

Setting Scale for Specific Pages You may set the scale in each page view separately This will override the default scale setting in Project Properties for that page Setting the correct scale for the drawing before taking off quantities ensures accurate calculations Be careful to check the scale for each drawing in your project before doing takeoffs

1 Display the page you want to set select Edit gt Set Scale

2 Use the drop down arrow to select a scale that will be applied to that page

3 Click

OR

4 Access the pull-down scale settings on the Navigate toolbar

NOTE As you draw objects notice that the drawn object is similar in width to the object on your plans If it is not the scale set may not be correct

Calculating Scale You may calculate scale according to a known measurement between two points either with a digitizer or on electronic plans

1 Select Edit gt Calculate Scale using Image or Edit gt Calculate Scale using Digitizer

2 Follow the instructions in the related Calculate Scale dialog box You will be asked to click on the first and second points then to enter the dimension for that distance

3 The scale will be recalculated for the displayed page and the Scale display on the Navigate toolbar will show the new scale

Section 6

29

Conditions and Takeoff

This section will Draw Conditions to Takeoff Plan Quantities

What Zones will do to help your takeoff process

Discuss the ins and outs of Takeoffs

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

30

Creating Conditions

If you are starting a new project from scratch you will need to create conditions to takeoff quantities such as floor areas wall lengths and corner bead counts If you are using a template you will have several pre-designed conditions already listed on the Takeoff dock bar However you may want to change the characteristics of some conditions or create additional conditions for a particular project

1 Right Click within the Takeoff dock bar Select New gt Condition

Or

2 From the Takeoff dock bar Click (if the buttons are not showing right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select Show Buttons from the pop-up menu) The New Condition dialog appears

3 Select the condition type (Linear Area Count or Zone) from the pull-down menu accessed by the

down arrow next to the Type option

4 Press Tab or use the mouse (or stylus) to move to Name and enter a name for your condition

5 Specify the desired condition attributes See Condition Attributes for more detail

6 Click for condition to apply

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

31

Condition Attributes Each condition type will have related attributes to select or specify within the General and Advanced tabs of the New Condition dialog Once a condition has been used to takeoff a quantity from your plans certain attributes cannot be changed

All conditions allow the user to specify color and fill pattern for the object drawn

Linear Conditions

General Specify width and height by feet and inches Specify pitch in inches up to the nearest thousandth of an inch if applicable

Advanced Specify rounding for object quantities and droprun default length for electrical or plumbing drops at the ends of lines Select Connect to have lines connect at the corners where one line of the condition ends and another begins (and indicate Tolerance for the featurersquos activation as distance between the ends of two lines) Choose Trim to have lines automatically trim to a line being crossed Choose Curve to draw a curved line

Follow these examples for inputting feet and inches For 7 feet 6 inches type 706 for 13 feet 7 inches type 1307 For 20 feet type 2000

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

32

Area Conditions

General If needed you can specify the thickness (in inches) andor pitch (in inches)

Advanced Specify rounding for object quantities Choose to display an adjustable grid within the area and indicate matrix cell dimensions

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

33

Count Conditions

General

Specify height and indicate the size (in inches) and shape (square circle triangle rectangle or opening) of the count object as it will appear on screen

Advanced Count conditions have advanced attributes These options are available for all shapes except for openings

Zone Conditions Zones allow you to subdivide condition quantities making it easier to modify and complete jobs in phases They can be used at the end of a takeoff to isolate a group of condition quantities that are in different areas of the takeoff

Zones can also be used to break a takeoff into multi-phases and can even be used to isolate quantities while a job is in progress to group the amount of work that has been completed to date They can be applied to one or multiple pages in your plans automatically calculating the takeoff quantities for each zoned area

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

34

The zone feature is only available in Lite and Full Mode If you are in View Mode and would like

to use this feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade

Condition Notes A Note tab is provided for comments regarding the condition These notes will display on the Takeoff List report and will import into Quick Bid

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

35

Condition Results The Results tab of the New Condition is based on condition type Initial settings default to linear feet (LF) for linear conditions square feet (SF) for area conditions and count of items (EA) for count conditions and zones The first of the results fields will display for the condition items in the Takeoff dock bar area All results will display in worksheets and Takeoff List reports as well as in an Excel spreadsheet after being exported

Copying Conditions You may use the condition attributes from a condition yoursquove already created for any future conditions of the same type

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Click the Copy button from the toolbar

OR

3 Right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select copy

4 A new condition will appear in the list with the same condition attributes as the previous condition but with the quantities zeroed

Editing Conditions Once you have copied a condition you might want to change several attributes You can also edit an existing condition to fit any updated needs

1 Highlight the desired condition on the Takeoff dock bar

2 Click the Change button

OR

3 Double-click on the condition you wish to edit to bring up the Change Condition dialog

NOTE The Change Condition dialog differs from the New Condition dialog only in that if takeoffs

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

36

have been performed in your project with this condition you will not be able to change the type of condition or certain properties under the advanced tab of the dialog box

Deleting Conditions 1 Click on the condition in the Takeoff Dock bar area

2 Click the Delete button on the toolbar

OR

3 Right-click and select Delete from the pop-up menu

All takeoff associated with the deleted condition will be deleted immediately and permanently

Organizing Project Conditions Within your project you can create folders andor sub-folders for different types of conditions You may even want to create a folder containing conditions with reset values

To get started organizing your conditions make sure you are viewing the condition tree (right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select Show Tree)

Creating Folders and Sub-Folders 1 Right-click in the Takeoff Dock bar area

2 Select New gt Folder from the pop-up menu

Copying Folders

1 Click on the folder and click Copy on the toolbar

2 All copied conditions within the new folder will have values reset to zero

Renaming Folders

1 Click on the folder

2 Right-click and select Rename from the pop-up menu

3 Enter a name for your folder and click the Enter button

Changing Condition Order

You may move conditions up or down in the condition list of the Takeoff dock bar to suit your project needs

1 Select the condition you would like to move by clicking to highlight it

NOTE When you are ready to move the highlighted conditions be sure that you start

moving using the last condition chosen That condition will have a highlighted boarder

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

37

2 Drag and drop any the condition from one place to another in the list You may also move a condition to another folder on the list in this way

Drawing with Conditions Snap Angles Set up snap angles to prevent lines from appearing jagged Snap angles are commonly set at 15deg and shift snap angles at 0deg

1 Go to Tools gt Options Options dialog appears

2 Under the General tab make the desired settings

3 Click to save the settings As they are drawn lines will snap to the set degree

Drawing a Linear Object 1 Select a condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff dock bar

2 Move the cursor into the Image takeoff area of the screen you will see the cursor display as crosshairs

3 Click and hold left mouse button then drag mouse to draw a line

4 Release mouse button to set line

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

38

5 Repeat steps for further lines

Continuous Mode This feature allows you to draw an object that has connected lines

1 Click the icon from the Takeoff toolbar

OR

2 Go to Tools gt Continuous Mode

3 Follow steps 1-3 from Draw a Linear Object

4 Click at each point of intersection The object will be connected

5 Double-click after making the final point to set the lines

Drawing a Curve To draw a curved line the Curve option must be checked under the Advanced tab of the Condition dialog

1 Click where you want to begin the curve and drag in a straight line to the position for the other endpoint of the curve

2 Click on the line to select it Handles in the shapes of small squares will appear at either end of

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

39

the line and in the center of the line

3 Move the cursor over the center handles until the cursor becomes a two-way arrow

4 Click and drag in the direction of the curve bending the line as you move the cursor Release to set the curve (The line you began with will disappear)

Draw a circle by drawing two curved lines connected

Drawing an Area Object Area conditions are drawn similarly to continuous mode lines You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete your area takeoff

NOTE When drawing an area do not intersect the perimeter or line of the object you are drawing

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

3 The area will be filled with the pattern set for that condition

NOTE The simulated circle will be good enough for you to be able to make a bid

To create a circular area click from point to point with very short distances in between points simulating a circlersquos perimeter Double-click after setting the last point to set the area

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

40

Grid Options Grids give you an added advantage when installing materials such as tiles Use this feature to get a count for how many tiles are needed for an area

1 Double-click on an area condition in the Takeoff dock bar to open its Condition dialog

2 Click on the Advanced tab to show its options

3 Check the box next to Grid by clicking in it

4 Indicate the dimensions of the cell matrix in inches (For example 200 x 400)

5 Under Results tab choose each (EA) for one of the results fields This will tabulate a number of grid cells (including partial grid cells) in area

6 Click to save your settings

7 Use the Move Grid and Rotate Grid features in the Tools menu to manipulate the grid as desired

Grid Calculation

1 Go to Tools gt Options menu

1 Specify if On-Screen Takeoff automatically should Calculate Grid Position

2 If AreaGrid Size is selected On-Screen Takeoff will calculate the number of items needed to fill the grid based on grid demintions

3 Click to accept and close the dialog

To move a line at any angle (regardless of default setting) press the Shift key while moving the mouse

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

41

Backout Mode This feature allows you to take out part of an area and deduct that amount of square footage

1 Select Tools gt Backout Mode

2 Outline the are you want backed out as you would when drawing a regular area object (see Drawing an Area Object)

3 The outlined area will clear and quantities will be recalculated

NOTE The perimeter of the backout area will be added to the LF quantity for that condition

Drawing a Count Object Square triangle rectangle and circle shaped count objects can easily be placed on images

1 Select the condition

2 Click in the location where you want the object to appear

3 To place an opening-shaped count item like a door or window you must click over an existing linear object such as a wall

4 On the Results tab you can change the height properties to give you the result you need

5 If Backout is checked on the advanced tab for each count opening the opening-shaped count item will back out a corresponding section of the linear object

Opening shaped count items are sized at 3rsquo0rdquo by default

Drawing a Zone Zones are drawn in the same way as area objects and may be any polygonal shape You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete the zone perimeter

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

42

Selecting Objects

1 Use the Select Tool to select objects

You can also select all objects that correspond to a condition

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Right-click and choose Select All

3 All objects with this condition will be highlighted with squares as an outline

Moving and Resizing Objects Linear

1 To move or resize a linear object click anywhere on the line to select it

2 To move the line position your pointer over the center handles When the mouse is positioned over the handles you will see a two-way arrow You will only be able to move the line in the direction of the arrows

3 Drag the line to a new position

4 Clicking and dragging the handles on the ends of the line will allow you to lengthen or shorten your line

Area and Zone

1 To move an area object or zone in its entirety click and drag it to its new position

2 Grabbing a handle at a corner or intersection of the object will allow you to adjust and change its perimeter

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

43

Count 1 To move a square circle rectangle or triangle shaped count object click and drag

2 Click and drag an opening shaped count object along the length of the linear object to the desired position then release

NOTE An opening shaped count object may not be moved from its associated linear condition object however it may be moved up and down the length of the linear object

Layers On-Screen Takeoff allows you to sort and separate your takeoff objects within the same job and on the same page On-Screen Takeoff gives you this flexibility through the use of layers

By assigning different conditions to different layers (for example differentiating between floors ceilings and walls) you can choose to view all layers or turn off certain layers to display and print the remaining groups of conditions only You may also remove the background image of electronic plans add text and hot link symbols or print only your condition takeoffs

Layers are only available in Full Mode If you are in View or Lite Mode and would like to use this

feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade Default Layers

On-Screen Takeoff begins every project with three default layers Image Annotation and Default The Image layer holds the electronic plan files you may have in your project The Annotation layer possesses all text notations highlighting and hot links in the project The Default layer will appear in the Condition dialog when creating or editing a condition (listed in the takeoff dock bar) Conditions are assigned to the Default layer unless otherwise specified by the user

Creating Layers To assign a condition to a layer other than the default layer you must first create additional layers for your project

1 Select View gt Layers to open the Layers dialog

2 Click An unnamed layer will be added

3 Click within the empty box and type a name for your layer (for example Wall)

4 New layers are added as active layers The adjacent box under the Show column will be checked

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

44

Assigning a Layer to a Condition 1 Open the Condition dialog box by creating a new condition or editing an existing condition

2 Under the General tab click on the down arrow in the Layer field to display optional layers

3 Select the desired layer for the condition Only the Default layer and layers you have added will be displayed

4 Click

View and Hide Layers

1 Select View gt Layers

2 Under the Show column check the box to view or remove the check (by clicking on it) to hide the specific layer

3 Click to accept and close the Layers dialog

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

45

Assigning Text to a Layer When adding text to an image On-Screen Takeoff has the capability to assign the text to a specified layer

1 Select the Text Tool

2 Click at the point you want to place your text

3 Type in your text using the Enter key for line breaks

4 Click the drop down arrow next to the Layer field and select the desired layer

Section 7

46

Printing and Exporting

This section will

Printing options and procedures

Exporting data by copying and pasting

Exporting quantity results to Excel spreadsheets

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

47

Print Setup On-Screen Takeoff allows the user to print the image takeoff list and worksheet

1 Select File gt Print Setup The Print Setup dialog will open

2 Select a printer or leave the default selection listed (change from the default printer displayed by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the field)

3 Indicate page size and printer tray option (Source) Access page size options by clicking on the

down arrow at the right of the field

4 Choose Portrait or Landscape orientation

5 Click to accept and close the dialog

Printing Images The image area can include the electronic plans the takeoff objects added text and hot links To print a subset of these (for example just the takeoffs without the plans or the added text and hot link symbols) hide layers that you do not want to print (see Section 6 View and Hide Layers) When you are printing your images every page will show the scale of the takeoff you are printing

1 Click on the Image tab to display the area of your project

2 Select File gt Print (or Ctrl + P)

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

48

3 Select the desired view (What to print) and the Image Range

4 Click The second Print dialog will open

5 Change settings accordingly or click if you accept the default settings

Printing Takeoff Lists and Worksheets In Takeoff Lists and Worksheets you may hide columns to print only certain results or adjust column widths to fit the report within the page size selected

1 In Takeoff List or Worksheet view move your cursor to the right side of the columnrsquos title bar the cursor will display as a two-way arrow

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

49

2 Click and drag to adjust the width of the column Holding the mouse button you may

slide the title bar under the title bar to its left to hide the column completely

3 Select File gt Print or press Ctrl + P to access the Print dialog

4 Indicate desired printer and choose the number of copies

5 Click to print and close the dialog

When printing the condition list we suggest printing in landscape

To reset to the default column widths double-click on the right border of a column heading will reset the column to its right (or previously to its right before being hidden)

Print Preview 1 Select File gt Print Preview

2 Use and to vary your view 3 If viewing an image choose current full or scale view to see how it displays

4 For printed outputs that cover more than one page use and to view adjacent pages or click on the down arrow next to Page field and select the page you want displayed

Exporting Using the CopyPaste Feature You may copy all the data or sections from the worksheet and the takeoff list view in On-Screen Takeoff and paste it into another application When pasting into Excel the cell layout will be maintained

1 Highlight the areas you wish to paste Click and hold the left mouse button down as you drag the cursor over the area to be selected then releasing the mouse button

OR

2 Select the entire takeoff list quickly click on the left On-Screen Takeoff column header and hold and drag the cursor across the remaining column headings

The number of pages for the view selected will display in the lower left-hand corner The zoom percentage that applies to the view will be displayed in the lower right-hand corner next to page size of the drawing

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

50

3 In the worksheet view you may highlight rows by clicking on the numbered buttons to the left of each row clicking and dragging across column headings or clicking and dragging over individual cells in the worksheet

Click anywhere in the appropriate view to deselect the area

4 Once your selection is highlighted you may select Edit gt Copy or Ctrl C from the keyboard 5 On your monitor switch to the application into which you want to paste your selection 6 Select Edit gt Paste in the new application or simply press Ctrl + V to paste

The colored keys for conditions cannot be pasted

Using the Export Feature You may export condition quantities to specified cell location within an Excel worksheet file Cell target locations are assigned in the Results tab of the condition dialogs on the Export line relating to each quantity measurement type

On-Screen Takeoff will export takeoff quantity results for up to three different quantity types that you specify For instance you may want to know the number of square feet in a ceiling area as well as the number of linear feet in its perimeter

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

51

1 Bring up the Condition dialog by double-clicking on a condition in the takeoff dock bar or by

selecting the condition and clicking

2 Click on the Results tab to access its fields The default quantities for the condition type will display

3 For each results field click on the arrow to access the pull-down menu and select the appropriate quantity (for example SF LF EA etchellip)

4 Have your Excel spreadsheet opened and saved in a file

5 Specify the Excel spreadsheet cell locations where you want the results to go

6 For a cell in the first sheet of your spreadsheet type in the cell address (eg a1) Case is not important

7 For a cell on a successive sheet of your spreadsheet type in sheet the number followed by a comma and the cell address without any spaces (eg sheet2a1) Case is not important

8 Click

9 Select File gt Export gt Condition Qty to Excel

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

52

10 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

11 Click to export On-Screen Takeoff results to specified cell locations in the Excel file When you return to the Excel application you will see the values have been added to the specified cell locations in your spreadsheet

12 Save your Excel file

Exporting Worksheet to Excel

1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 From On-Screen Takeoff Select File gt Export gt Worksheet to Excel

4 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

5 Click When you return to the Excel application you will see the values from the Worksheet Tab have been added to your spreadsheet

6 Save your Excel file

Exporting Takeoff to CVS 1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 Click the Takeoff Tab in the project you want to export the information

4 Select File gt Export gt Takeoff to CSV

5 Browse to the location of the CSV spreadsheet file click file to select it

6 Click the Save

NOTE CSV files can be opened in Excel Lotus Access etc One may consider this option more of a ldquodumprdquo into a file

The Excel application must be active (it may be minimized on the application bar) with the target spreadsheet open in the application Otherwise an error will occur with the export operation that will affect both the On-Screen Takeofftrade file and the Excel spreadsheet

Section 8

53

Advanced Features

This section will

Some special features of working with condition objects in the takeoff area

Details of advanced options for conditions

Advanced features of the Project Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

54

Features to Use with Objects Roping Feature You can move copy or delete using this feature Using the Select tool (the pointer) you may select several objects at once by clicking and dragging an outline around the objects then releasing the mouse button Roping may select either objects completely within the outlined area (inclusive) or objects both within and touched by the outlined area (touching) Specify your roping preference under Tools gt Options

1 Click and hold the mouse button at a point on the screen near the objects to be selected and drag to surround the objects with an outline

2 Release the mouse button The objects will be selected

3 You may now

Move the group around on the page by clicking within the group dragging the mouse and releasing the button to place the objects

Delete the group of objects by clicking the Delete key or

Copy and paste by pressing Ctrl C to copy the group then Ctrl V to paste it The pasted copy of the grouped objects will appear slightly offset from the original objects

Section 8 Advanced Features

55

Applying a DropRun Count

Use the droprun feature when calculating quantities to take into account the drop or run of a linear condition such as electrical lines or plumbing pipes Drop or run lengths may be added separately to any linear condition on screen while a default droprun length may be indicated for a condition as a whole

1 Select the desired linear condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff Dock bar

2 Click the Change button in the toolbar to open the Change Condition dialog

3 Click the Advanced tab to access the advanced options and click inside the DropRun check box

4 Enter a default length to be applied to all of this condition Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches) You can leave the length blank and manually enter drop run on each segment drawn

5 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog

Edit DropRun Count

1 With the related linear condition in the Takeoff Dock bar highlighted or with the pointer tool selected

2 click on the desired linear object in the image takeoff area The Count button will become active

3 Click on the Count button (alternatively select Tools gt Count) The default droprun amount will show in the pop-up Count dialog (Default length will be zero if droprun has not been selected in this conditionrsquos properties)

4 Type in the desired length Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches)

5 Click the OK button The additional amount will be reflected in the corresponding quantity The new DropRun count will apply only to the object edited

Adding Text in Image View

On-Screen Takeoff allows you to place text comments around your quantity takeoffs that may be printed along with plan images and objects Text is automatically placed within the Annotation Layer (that includes text and hot links)

1 To place text on the image select the Text Tool and click at the point you want to place your text opening a text box

2 Type in your information clicking Enter for line breaks

3 When you are finished click the OK button to exit the text box

4 To reposition text simply click on the text (with the Text Tool active) to select it

5 Move the cursor over the text the cursor will now display as a four-way arrow

6 Click and drag the mouse to position the text as desired

Section 8 Advanced Features

56

1 To edit existing text use the Text Tool to double-click on the text to open the editing box

2 Enter additional text or use the Backspace key to delete text as necessary

Formatting Text Once created you may format the font size type style and color of your text

1 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Font or click on the Font button in the Takeoff Toolbar

2 Select the desired features (color options are disabled) and click the OK button

3 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Color or click on the Color button in the Takeoff Toolbar The Color dialog will open

4 Click on a color in the Basic Color palette or create a color and add to the Custom Colors palette (Be sure to click on the color in the Custom Colors palette to select it)

5 Click the OK button

Object Properties

Linear Objects

Linear objects may be set to connect at corners

A linear object may be set to trim automatically when crossing another linear object (Check the trim option under the advanced tab of the Condition dialog)

When you move a connected linear object objects automatically move and resize connected lines accordingly (quantities are then recalculated)

This feature requires that the connected linear object be moved using the center handles (does not apply when resizing the line from the ends)

Objects constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

Objects are measured from centerline to centerline

Section 8 Advanced Features

57

Area Objects When drawing an area use your escape key to undo the last line drawn You may reverse your

drawing of an area using the escape key

The area will not fill with color and pattern until the user double-clicks after the last line is set

Lines drawn to delineate an area object constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

After selecting an area to move or adjust position the mouse in the center to move the entire area position the mouse at the sides or corners to adjust the perimeter

Count Objects

All count objects are quantified by the physical number of objects per page and reported as EA for the UOM The quantity for the current Image View is (displayed in the Condition List) and the total quantity in your project is displayed in the Takeoff View and Worksheet View)

Square circle rectangle and triangle shaped count objects do not displace or subtract from other object quantities when placed on top of them However on the Advanced Tab for the count condition a connect property can be set (this is a check box) so that when a count object of this shape is put on top of a Linear type takeoff object it will move with the linear if said linear is moved

An opened-shaped count object must be placed within a linear object Opening shaped count objects may also be measured by linear foot or linear yard (EA SF and SY are also options) Opening shaped count items default to a width of 3rsquo 0rdquo at the time of creation This size can be changed The small medium and large size are not options on this type of condition anymore Check Backout on the Advanced tab for each Count object back out the footage (or yardage) of opening-shaped count objects in which they are placed

NOTE In order to see this Backout functionality (in quantity) for SY or SF deductions at least one of the

results for the Linear(s) this object will be placed on must be set to SY or SF and the count object must have a height quantity

Advanced Features of Conditions The Round Feature Under the Advanced tab of the linear and area Condition dialogues you may specify quantity rounding (in inches) For linear objects rounding applies to each linear object drawn For area objects rounding will apply to each segment of the area perimeter adjusting the perimeter and area calculations For example With a linear condition entering 12 in the Round field will round up each related linear object to the nearest 12 inches or one foot With this setting two walls of 1 4 would each round to 2 0 totaling 4 0

NOTE In the Takeoff Dock bar condition list and in the On-Screen Takeoff reports quantities will be displayed in whole numbers rounded up to the nearest foot However calculations are based on true quantities without rounding unless the Round Feature is engaged

Pitch Pitch may apply either to linear or area conditions It is measured in rise per linear foot Entering 12 indicates a 12 rise per 12 of linear distance (a pitch of 12 over 12) or an angle of 45deg

Section 8 Advanced Features

58

Advanced Features of Project Properties Selecting Multiple Pages

1 Select a single page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry

2 Drag the cursor down the column of numbers to select consecutive pages

3 Click on the blank button at the top of this column to select all pages in the Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

59

Changing Image Assigned to a Drawing 1 Select the page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry 2 Click the Change Image button The Change Image dialog box will appear

3 Navigate to the desired file and select by clicking on it

4 Click the Open button The electronic file assigned to the page will have been changed to reflect the new file choice

Changing Image File Path 1 Select pages as described above

2 Choose Change Folder

3 In the Change Folder dialog navigate to the appropriate folder

4 Click the OK button The file path will have been changed for the selected page entries

Delete a Page from Project Properties 1 Select the page you want to delete by clicking on its associated number (in the gray box at the

left of the entry)

2 Choose Delete Page

All Takeoff on the page will be deleted immediately and permanently

Section 8 Advanced Features

60

Advanced Features of Tool Options

Calculation Method On-Screen Takeoff has built-in calculation options to allow for faster work and faster saves until your takeoff is complete Calculation options are found by selecting Tools gt Options then clicking on the Calculation tab

Calculation method can be set to Automatic Automatic except Grids and Manual Manual will allow the program to operate more quickly while Automatic or Automatic except Grids allows the user to see quantity changes as takeoffs are made

In any mode you may press F9 to recalculate quantities for the On-Screen Takeoff current totals

Configuration Tab

When the ldquoPage Label (A01)rdquo radial button is chosen On-Screen Takeoff puts the numbered label on all the pages of in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar If the Page Descriptionrdquo radial button is chosen then a description of what takeoff is on that specific page will be shown in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar

This section of the configuration tab gives you options on how you want to export your information When the ldquoFolderSubfolder Namesrdquo radial button is chosen than on your file that you are exporting to will have all the conditions folders and subfolders In the Delimiter box you can choose the symbol that is needed to separate the information you are exporting Some files need semicolons () or colons () to make sure the information comes exported in is separated it the appropriate places

Section 8 Advanced Features

61

In previous versions of On-Screen Takeoff there are views that users need to have in order for them to display their information By either choosing ldquoOST 1xrdquo or ldquoOST 2xrdquo it will let the program know you want your columns of information exported in that specific format

When you have the Confirm Deletions radial button of ldquoYesrdquo chosen than every time you delete anything you will get a dialog box confirming your intentions of deletion

While working with your takeoff you have a choice to either view the legend of your conditions or hide it Choose whichever radial button that suits your needs

For those who prefer to use the Enter key to navigate in dialog boxes this option is just for that

Font Tab The Font tab is designed for you to make your own look and feel for the application At the bottom of this tab it will show you sample of the fonts and colors you have chosen

Renaming the Current Page You may change the name of the current page in the takeoff area of On-Screen Takeoff by selecting Edit gt Rename Page

This opens the Name Page dialog and you may simply type in a new name and click the Enter button The new name for the file will be reflected on the title bar for the page and in Project Properties

You also may access the Rename Page function by right-clicking in the takeoff area while in Image View and selecting the option from the pop-up menu that appears

Section 9

62

Saving and Exiting

This section will

Explain how to save projects

Show you how to safely exit the program

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

63

Saving Your Project

1 Select File gt Save 2 If your project has not previously been saved a Save dialog box will open to allow you to name

the file and choose the directory and folder in which to save your file 3 Once saved File gt Save will simply save the current version of the file

OR

4 Select File gt Save As then type in a new name for the file and save to the desired file path

The Auto-save Feature With the Auto-save feature On-Screen Takeoff automatically backs up your open project You may choose to have more than one level of backup files The first backup copy will have the extension b00 and successive files will be b01 b02 and so on If you have designated four levels of backup files after the fourth backup copy has been created (b03) the next file will be saved over the file with extension b00 Further backup saves will then rotate through the four backup files in the same way

1 Select Tools gt Options 2 In the Auto-save area (under the General tab) select the frequency of backup file creation (in

minutes) and the number of levels for the feature 3 You also may disengage the feature by clicking in the check box to clear it

The Auto-save feature automatically saves backup copies to the directory of the current project If you are working from a write-protected area such as a CD-ROM On-Screen Takeoff will place backup files in the On-Screen Takeoff folder

Exiting When you are finished using On-Screen Takeoff it is very easy to exit Exiting is very important because of security reasons If someone were to use your computer they could enter the application and view and manipulate information

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

64

On-Screen Takeoff closes the open project when you open another or create a new project or when you exit the program

1 Select File gt Exit

OR

2 You also may click at the upper right-hand corner of the application to exit

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

65

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer When you get your digitizer from GTCO you will need to connect it to your computer Follow the instructions outlined below to do this

Note For rollup digitizers the metal bar must be oriented to the top or right hand side

Connecting the Digitizer 1 Lay the digitizer out flat 2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer 3 Plug in the power adapter 4 Plug the interface (IO) cable into the digitizer 5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into an open serial port on computer

Note GTCO Technical support phone number is 410-381-6688 The electronic manual (on diskette) from GTCO contains more detailed installation and operation instructions for the GTCO digitizer model you have

Installing other Digitizer Drivers If you are using a GTCO Digitizer you will need to install the GTCO TabletWorks Drivers

If you are using a Digitizer not supported by GTCO Tablet Works 10 please contact the manufacturer of your digitizer for assistance with installation

Installing GTCO TabletWorks Drivers 1 Insert the On Center CD into the CD-ROM drive The CD Startup screen will open 2 Click on Install Software 3 Select Additional Software and Drivers 4 Select Digitizer Driver 5 Follow the instructions for installing TabletWorks 10

Adhering the Template The template is a small plastic sticker used to enable mouse function when using the digitizer with On-Screen Takeoff Place your template on your digitizer We suggest placing it in the bottom right corner of the digitizer about one inch inside the takeoff area

Note You may either peel off the back of the template and use the adhesive surface or you can tape the template down

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

66

Testing the Digitizer Drivers Before running OST you may test the digitizer by moving the stylus around on the digitizer pad it should move the mouse cursor (if mouse emulation is enabled)

If the digitizer does not move the mouse cursor on the screen

The superset codes may need to be reset Reset the superset codes by touching on the border of the digitizer with the stylus The digitizer should beep several times

The digitizer may not be communicating with the computer Be sure the COM port selected is correct Be sure the COM port selected is correct If you are not able to get the digitizer to move the mouse cursor you need to call GTCO technical support for help

Note The Mouse Emulation is not required for On-Screen Takeoff to work properly It is used only for the Template functionality if the digitizer is moving the cursor the wrong direction (up instead of sideways or vice-versa)

Click the L-shaped arrow symbol on the digitizer with the stylus

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

67

Appendix II Toolbar Items Main Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

68

Tool Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

69

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

70

Navigate Toolbar (Continued)

Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

71

Takeoff Toolbar (Continued)

Image Toolbar

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

72

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

This section will detail how to load plans from a F W Dodge CD-ROM into an On-Screen Takeoff project file ready for takeoffs

Dodge files may be added to the Project Properties dialog However loading the files in that way will load the files by number rather than name description If you want to load one page only from your Dodge CD You will have to rename the page to display the name rather than number of the file

To load plan files from a Dodge CD so that the files load sequentially by file number but are displayed by name rather than by number within your project follow the instructions below

Opening a Dodge project from a CD-ROM 1 Insert the CD into the drive 2 Choose File gt Custom 3 Choose Dodge Plans Project (plansdat) as the file type 4 Select the appropriate file type by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the Files of type

field 5 In the Look in field access your drive paths by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the

field then

Navigate to your CD-ROM drive Open the data folder and Open the Projects folder

6 Select the desired project and open its folder 7 Open the plansdat file 8 All the images will come in sequenced correctly for that job along with the full descriptions

(names) of each page If there is not a plans folder in the project folder then plans do not exist for that project on the CD Opening the plansdat file will yield an empty project

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

73

Appendix IV Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer The On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer is a limited version of On Center Softwarersquos commercial takeoff software If your status bar located at the very bottom of the main window says View Mode in the lower left-hand corner then you are using the Plan Viewer You can use the plan viewer to

View CD-based amp converted CAD drawings

View a previously created OST file and associated drawings

Download electronic plans online

Navigate through drawings

Quickly Takeoff linearsareas and counts

Zoom in to view the plan better

Print drawings directly from the viewer

Viewing an On-Screen Takeoff Project File

1 To open an OST file that was previously created with of On-Screen Takeoff 2 Select File gt Open 3 An Open dialog will appear if you do not see the OST file you are looking for select the

Look In drop down arrow 4 A drop down menu will appear listing the various folders drives and mapped drives located

on your computer select the correct drive or folder location and continue to browse to the location of your OST file

5 When you see your OST file double-click it to open it 6 Any takeoff and drawings should appear on the Image tab view

If you do not see the drawings but do see the colored takeoff layer the drawings may

not be located in the same place they were originally saved at Go to File gt Project Properties and check the Image File path for each listed page If the image file path is pointing to a CD drive make sure the CD is inside the CR-ROM

Downloading Electronic Plans If your Online Plan Service provides a special file format (OSX) required to use this feature of our plan viewer you can immediately downloaded all electronic plans of a project directly from our viewer

Most Plan Room web sites will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff when a request to download plans is made Your particular Plan Room may differ in operation so please contact the provider directly with questions on using the site

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

74

When you request to download or open a project file from a Plan Room you will usually have the open to open or save an OSX file Choosing open will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff Alternately you may choose to save the file to a local hard drive After you have saved the file either double-click it to launch On-Screen Takeoff or open the OSX file using On-Screen Takeoff by clicking File then Open and locating the file on your hard drive You will need to change the file type to OSX

After the OSX file is opened you will see an additional tab appear in the Conditions List window called Pages

The Pages tab shows the hierarchy of your project Gray file icons represent pages that have not been downloaded and blue icons represents pages that have been downloaded

To download a page simply double-click the page icon

If you wish to select a group of pages to download you can use the Ctrl or Shift key to multiple select them then click the Download button

If you wish to download all pages at once click the Download All button

Downloaded pages will now appear in the Project Properties dialog in the same order in which they appear in the Pages tab

Creating Quick Takeoffs With On-Screen Takeoff you can create quick takeoffs to measure quantities even if you dont have the full version of our program However using the Quick Takeoff functionality shows you just a fraction of what the full version can do

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar is located at the top of the image view It has three buttons designated for three types of takeoffs Linear Area and Count The Quantity drop down list will show secondary quantities for Linears and Areas The Units drop down allows you to select how you want your quantities displayed Feet Inches Yards Millimeters and Meters

NOTE Every time change the type of takeoff you are performing (switching from Area to Linear for example) the previous quantities and takeoff objects will disappear They will also disappear when you changes pages

NOTE You can use the Dimension Tool to basically measure the distance between two points or linears The distance will display on the status bar at the bottom of the application

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

75

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions General

Where is On-Screen Takeoff installed on my computer

Typically it is installed in CProgram FilesOn-Screen Takeoff

In Explorer how do I recognize On-Screen Takeoff file types

On-Screen Takeoff data is stored in a single file per job lsquojob name OSTrsquo On-Screen Takeoff templates are stored as lsquotemplate nameTPOrsquo

Can only one project at a time be open

Yes For that reason opening another project automatically closes the project on screen You will be asked to save any changes

Is only one scale allowed per page What about on drawings that have multiple detail sections on a page and each of those drawings have different scales

Yes For pages with drawings of different scales copy the drawing to another project page and set the appropriate scale

I cannot perform backout on an area that is along a linear

As a workaround use the On-Screen Takeoff layers feature to help you with this issue Electronic Images

How do I start a project from drawings that have been scanned and written to a CD-ROM

Open a new project Select File gt Project Properties and select Auto Add Navigate to your CD and the appropriate folder and select any image file in that location Click Open All files in the location will load into your project Recommended that images are copied from CD to hard drive for performance

If I get a disk of drawings in AutoCAD format (R13 or R14) can I read them in On-Screen Takeoff

Yes On-Screen Takeoff now reads DWG DXF and many other format that are saved with AutoCAD

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

76

When I click on the all pages button what is supposed to happen Currently nothing seems to change when I click on that button

The All Pages button is used to apply the Darken and Enhance Plans feature to all pages in the project (as opposed to only the current page on screen)

Is there a way to deduct a large skylight from an area condition

Yes with the related area condition selected in the Takeoff Dock bar unselect the Backout button on the Takeoff Toolbar then draw the Backout area The area quantity will be deducted from the related condition object and the linear measurement of the Backout perimeter will be added

Digitizer Issues

How do I connect a Digitizer to the computer

See Appendix I Connecting a Digitizer

The Place Template menu choice is disabled

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or the digitizer or the digitzer drivers are not installed

It wonrsquot let me select the Set Takeoff Area menu choice

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or no job is open a digitizer is not installed or the drivers are not installed

The digitizer stylus is not moving the cursor or crosshairs

Click S-0-1 superset on the digitizer

How do I convert my old GTCO Digitizer to work with On- Screen Takeofftrade

Call GTCO and they may be able to reconfigure your digitizer to be compatible with On-Screen Takeoff

Printing Issues Which Printers work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible printers include On-Screen Takeoff Hewlett Packard Epson and Canon printers If you are having printer difficulties please contact support and specify the type of printer along with other pertinent information Contact support at wwwoncentercomsupport or email supportoncentercom

Which Plotters work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible Plotters include Hewlett Packard DesignJet plotters and the EnCAD Cadjet II If you are having plotter difficulties please contact support and specify the type of plotter concerned

ViewingDisplay I can no longer see my condition list How do I get it back

The toolbars and Dock bars can be turned on and off through the View gt Toolbars menu options

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

77

This is also accessible by right-clicking in the toolbar area and selecting (or deselecting) a toolbar listed

I cannot view my folders in the condition list

Right-click in the Takeoff Dock barcondition list area and select Show Tree to display your folders

My Status Bar reads Viewer Mode and I am unable to draw conditions

On-Screen Takeoff needs to be Authorized Or you need to purchase an upgrade Click the Perform Advanced Takeoff button on the main toolbar

I hid a Dock bar and when I selected to view it again it appeared alongside the other Dock

bar instead of stacked on top of it How do I fix it

Pick up the Dock bar by clicking on the bar at the top and continuing to hold down the mouse button drag the Dock bar over the other one It will resize and appear stacked with the other

When I open image files from a CD the images are all upside down How do I get them right

side up

To flip pages from top to bottom follow the steps below 1 Click the All Pages button on the Image Toolbar (All Pages is engaged when the button

is not clicked) 2 Click the Flip Horizontal button on the Image Toolbar 3 Click the All Pages button again to disengage

Templates How do I create a Template

Follow the steps below 1 Create a typical project 2 Choose File gt Save As 3 Choose On-Screen Takeoff Template Files as the file type to save 4 Name the file This will save all of the condition setups as well as the layers for the

project

How do I create a new project from a template

Follow the steps below 1 Choose File gt New 2 Select a template from those listed in the New dialog This will open a new project with

conditions and layers saved from a previous project but no pages or takeoff

78

INDEX

Area Conditions 32

Area Objects 57

Auto Scrolling 20

Auto-save 63

Backout Mode 41

Calculation Method 60

Conditions 29

Configuration 60

Contents Tab 6

Continuous Mode 38

Count Conditions 33

Count Objects 57

Digitizer 10 65 76

Docking Toolbars 13

Dodge CD 72

Drawing 27 37

DropRun Count 55

Environment 18

Exiting 63

Exporting 49

Features 16

Font 61

Frequently Asked Questions 75

Grid 40

Help File 5

Hiding Toolbars 13

Hot Links 21

Image 19 59

Image files 9

Image Toolbar 12 71

Images 75

Index Tab 6

Layers 43

Linear Conditions 31

Linear Objects 56

Main Toolbar 12 67

Menus 14

Moving Toolbars 13

Navigate Toolbar 12 69

Navigating 20

On-Screen Takeofftrade 2

Page 59 61

Pages 20 25 28

Plan Viewer 73

Plans 26

Printing 47 76

Project Properties 25

Projects 22

Quick Start Video 18

Resizing Toolbars 13

Roping 54

Saving 63

Scale 28

Search Tab 7

Selecting Objects 42

Setup 8

Start On-Screen Takeofftrade 17

System Requirements 9

Takeoff 19 27

Takeoff Toolbar 70 71

Takeoff Toolbar 12

Template Files 23

TIF (Group4) 9

Tool Toolbar 12 68

Toolbar 67

Toolbars 12

View Toolbar 12 69

Viewing Toolbars 12

Worksheet 20

Zone Conditions 33

Zoom Toolbar 12 69

  • On-Screen Takeoff Lite
  • Table of Contents
  • Section 1 - Introduction
  • Section 2 - Setup
  • Section 3 - Toolbars and Menus
  • Section 4 - Features
  • Section 5 - Projects
  • Section 6 - Conditions and Takeoff
  • Section 7 - Printing and Exporting
  • Section 8 - Advanced Features
  • Section 9 - Saving and Exiting
  • Appendix I - Installing Your Digitizer
  • Appendix II - Toolbar Items
  • Appendix III - Loading Plans from a Dodge CD
  • Appendix IV - Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer
  • Appendix V - Frequently Asked Questions
  • Index

Section 4 Features

17

Start On-Screen Takeoff

1 On your desktop double-click your On-Screen Takeoff icon

2 The application will open

OR

3 Left-click on the Start button on your computerrsquos toolbar

4 Scroll up to Programs gt On Center Software

5 Highlight On-Screen Takeoff and click On-Screen Takeoff will open On-Screen Takeoff opens to an untitled blank project The Image view of the screen will be a blank page

Two blank dock bars the Pan dock bar and the Takeoff dock bar appear at the left side of the screen Along the bottom the Status bar displays user status or context-sensitive messages as well as paper size and current zoom percentage of the plan sheet on screen The menu bar and several task specific toolbars are located at the top of the screen

NOTE All toolbars and dock bars may be accessed to view or hide through View gt Toolbars on the menu bar

Section 4 Features

18

Quick Start Video When On-Screen Takeoff opens you will be given an option to watch the Quick Start video (recommended) or start the program without watching the video

The 20 minute video will demonstrate key program functionality and allow you to view application instruction for enhanced learning

If you would like to watch the video click If you prefer to get started without

the video click If you have already viewed the video click the lsquoDo not show this message againrsquo box to prevent this dialog from appearing each time you open the program

NOTE If you decide later that you would like to watch the Quick Start video go to Help gt Watch

Quick Start Videos

On-Screen Takeoff Environment The On-Screen Takeoff environment acts like your drafting table allowing you to work on several sheets of plans at once and to reference at a glance the entire drawing and your position on that drawing while giving you the power of a computer to track analyze print and export your takeoff quantities and plans

The screen is bordered at the top by the Menu bar with pull-down menus and at the bottom by the Status bar which indicates current user status plan page size and current zoom percentage of page The largest portion of the application screen will be your takeoff area bounded on the left (by default) by two dock bars and on the top by several toolbars

In the takeoff area you may view your project plans (images) andor takeoff objects the takeoff list with quantities the worksheet or a legend of your condition list

The main window of On-Screen Takeoff has three tabs located at the bottom left allowing for quick change between Image Takeoff or Worksheet views Select the desired view option on the toolbar and it will automatically open on your screen

Section 4 Features

19

Image View

This view shows the plan file andor takeoff conditions drawn from your plans

Takeoff View This view displays the height if applicable and quantity breakdowns of your conditions according to result types indicated (eg linear feet square feet or count of items) for zones pages and the project as a whole It also displays notes per condition

Section 4 Features

20

Worksheet View This view displays the condition and quantity in units of measure specified in the first results field of the Results tab in the Condition dialog and allows the user to enter amounts for material labor and subcontractor takeoffs

NOTE When in the Worksheet view tab out the field then save This is keep all the values saved

Navigating On-Screen Takeoff

Auto Scrolling When creating linear areas or zones On-Screen Takeoff will automatically scroll the image view when necessary It will move as your mouse or digitizer moves beyond the edge of the current view

Changing Pages

1 Select View gt Next Page Previous Page or Go To Page (specify page number for the Go to Page option)

2 You may also select the corresponding arrows for these options from the Navigate Toolbar The

drop down arrow in the Page field will list the pages The and arrows will take you to the

previous or next page The and arrows will take you to the first or last page

OR

Section 4 Features

21

3 Or press Ctrl G for the Go To Page dialog

Hot Links Hot links allow you to move quickly from one drawing to the pertinent area of another drawing A hot link is handy when viewing enlarged areas of a page and needing the ability to jump back to a reference page

1 Select Tools gt Hot Link

OR

2 Click from the Tools Toolbar

3 Click on the page where you want to set the link The Hot Link dialog will open

4 Using the current page display on the Navigate Toolbar access the pull-down menu of pages by

clicking on the arrow at the right

5 Select the page for your link (You may also choose View gt Go to Page and select by page number)

6 Manipulate the view using the zoom tool and the scroll bars

7 Click

8 After joining a hot link to another page the hot link arrows in the Navigation Toolbar will become active

9 Move a hot link to another location on the page by clicking then click and drag the hot link image anywhere on the page

Section 5

22

Projects

This section will

Help you create settings important to your projects

Explain how On-Screen Takeoff works with your electronic or paper plans

Section 5 Projects

23

Project Template Files You can begin your project with a template Templates allow you to take advantage of conditions and settings used with previous projects

On-Screen Takeoff templates contain condition lists and established layer separations from previous projects you have created You may also use the sample templates provided with On-Screen Takeoff as a great starting point All aspects of the templates may be adjusted for a new project

1 Select File gt New and click the OK button

2 From the New dialog box choose the template that best fits your project

3 The conditions for this template will appear in the Takeoff Dock bar and the Project Properties dialog will open asking for further information

4 Use File gt Save or File gt Save As to rename and save your new project

Saving a Project as a Template File You can save your condition properties and layers as a template for future projects

1 Select File gt Save As

2 Enter a name for your template and select On-Screen Takeoff Template Files (tpo) from the Save As type field of the dialog (click on the down arrow to select)

3 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog Modifying a Template File Follow these steps to modify an existing template file if you need to change or add conditions andor layers

1 Select File gt Open

2 Navigate to your Projects directory

3 In the File Type drop-down select On-Screen Takeoff Template files (tpo)

4 Choose the On-Screen Takeoff template file you would like to modify and click the OK button

5 Make appropriate changes

6 Save and close file

The On-Screen Takeoff template files cannot save takeoff information

Section 5 Projects

24

Opening an Existing Project File 1 Select File gt Open

2 Navigate to the desired file location

3 Click the Open button

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask

you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Creating a New Project

1 Select File gt New

2 For a blank untitled project click

3 At this point the Project Properties dialog will pop-up for more information about your takeoff

NOTE The following are important to keep in mind when beginning a new project

At the start of your project fill out the Project Properties settings to establish the name for all printed output from your project set the default page size and scale for your plans number and names of different pages within the project and locations of electronic drawings

Scale settings can significantly affect quantity outcomes Be sure to set the scale for each page of drawings before beginning condition takeoffs

When using a digitizer remember to make a mark with a pen or pencil in the upper left and lower right corners of the first sheet of the paper plans to delineate the takeoff area for that sheet You can then set the takeoff area on On-Screen Takeoff using your marks

Save your project before you begin taking off any conditions On-Screen Takeoff will write a back-up file using the same file name

Remember the Undo feature If you make a mistake select Edit gt Undo and reverse the process step by step

Section 5 Projects

25

Project Properties

You can either set your Project Properties when you create a new takeoff or once your project file is saved under the appropriate name

1 Select File gt Project Properties the Project Properties dialog box will appear

2 Type in the name of your project to appear on printouts Use the backspace andor delete keys to edit the name as necessary

3 Press the Tab key to move to the Default Image Size option or click within the Image Size box You may click on the arrow at the right for the pull-down menu of page size options or you can use the down-arrow key on your keyboard to scroll through the list to the appropriate selection

4 Press the Tab key to move to the Default Scale option Select a scale by using the drop down arrow If your scale is metric you will need to click in the box next to Metric to convert to that measurement

5 Establish the number of pages for your project plans And load image files See Adding Pages to

Your Project

Adding Pages to Projects Individual Electronic Plans

1 Click on in the Project Properties dialog

2 In the Add Images dialog use the drop down arrow to navigate to the appropriate directory and folder containing your image

3 Select the file so that it displays in the File name field then click The file will display by name and path in the Image File field in Project Properties dialog

4 Click to accept and your project will automatically open

5 Save your project with the new settings by selecting File gt Save

Section 5 Projects

26

Electronic plans scanned from blueprints (as opposed to blue lines) will display as white lines on a black background and are difficult to read on your computer screen Select Image gt Invert and the colors will invert to black on white

You may have noticed the Page column in the Project Properties dialog Generally plan images occupy one page and 1 will be listed in the column indicating Page 1 of your plan file If you import a multi-page TIF a plan file containing more than one page of plans they will import as separate pages and each successive page will be indicated under the Page column as 1 2 3 etc of the plan file

Group of Electronic Plans You may add all the electronic plan files from a particular source (for example from a CD) by using the Auto Add feature

1 Click the button in the Project Properties dialog

2 Browse until you find the appropriate directory and folder containing your plan images

3 Click on any file displayed within your target folder so that the file name appears in the File name box of the Auto Add dialog

4 Click The image paths and file names will be recorded into the project properties arranged alphabetically

5 Click to accept your choices and your project will automatically open

6 Save your project with the new settings by selecting File gt Save

To load Dodge Plans into your Project Properties see Appendix IIi Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

Paper Plans On-Screen Takeoff makes it easy for Full Mode users to perform quantity takeoffs from paper plans using a digitizer

1 Add pages by clicking until you have the number of pages initially in the project

2 Name each page by clicking within the Title area and typing the name

3 Click to accept your choices and close the Project Properties dialog

4 Save your project with the new project properties settings by selecting File gt Save

Section 5 Projects

27

Setting Up a Drawing Template On-Screen Takeoff provides the convenience of using the same work surface for both digitizer and mouse to allow the user to draw conditions and then edit settings of the project or add or change conditions without breaking stride A mouse pad template included with the program defines the area of the digitizer in which use of the stylus or cursor will be recognized as mouse movement as opposed to drawing movement

1 Place your stylus on On-Screen Takeoff

2 Placing the template identifies the location mouse movements will be recognized by the program

Before placing the template the template must be applied to the digitizer surface This may have been done during the installation of your digitizer We suggest attaching the template to the lower right corner of the digitizer surface about one inch inside the grid area

3 Select Digitizer gt Place Template

4 Follow the instruction prompts on the screen clicking first on the target symbol at the left of the On-Screen Takeoff box on the template then on the target at the right

Setting Takeoff Area Before you can begin taking off a drawing you must define the drawing area on the digitizer This requires defining an area that will include all objects on each drawing of your plans As you add pages to your takeoff the same area of the digitizer will be active

1 Secure the plans to the digitizer with tape or a set of clamps

2 With a pen or a pencil mark the upper left corner and the lower right corner of the first page in your set of plans

3 Select Digitizer gt Set Takeoff Area

4 Click each mark with the stylus pen as prompted

5 Verify the active area of the digitizer by looking at the image size located in the lower right corner of your screen

If you close the program before the takeoff is complete you will need to reestablish the takeoff area before you can add additional condition quantities

Electronic plans appear on your computer screen eliminating the need to set a takeoff area You simply drag your mouse across the conditions you wish to takeoff The conditions will be highlighted and quantities will be totaled instantly Electronic plans are available through a variety of services For information contact an On Center Software account manager

Section 5 Projects

28

Setting Scale for Specific Pages You may set the scale in each page view separately This will override the default scale setting in Project Properties for that page Setting the correct scale for the drawing before taking off quantities ensures accurate calculations Be careful to check the scale for each drawing in your project before doing takeoffs

1 Display the page you want to set select Edit gt Set Scale

2 Use the drop down arrow to select a scale that will be applied to that page

3 Click

OR

4 Access the pull-down scale settings on the Navigate toolbar

NOTE As you draw objects notice that the drawn object is similar in width to the object on your plans If it is not the scale set may not be correct

Calculating Scale You may calculate scale according to a known measurement between two points either with a digitizer or on electronic plans

1 Select Edit gt Calculate Scale using Image or Edit gt Calculate Scale using Digitizer

2 Follow the instructions in the related Calculate Scale dialog box You will be asked to click on the first and second points then to enter the dimension for that distance

3 The scale will be recalculated for the displayed page and the Scale display on the Navigate toolbar will show the new scale

Section 6

29

Conditions and Takeoff

This section will Draw Conditions to Takeoff Plan Quantities

What Zones will do to help your takeoff process

Discuss the ins and outs of Takeoffs

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

30

Creating Conditions

If you are starting a new project from scratch you will need to create conditions to takeoff quantities such as floor areas wall lengths and corner bead counts If you are using a template you will have several pre-designed conditions already listed on the Takeoff dock bar However you may want to change the characteristics of some conditions or create additional conditions for a particular project

1 Right Click within the Takeoff dock bar Select New gt Condition

Or

2 From the Takeoff dock bar Click (if the buttons are not showing right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select Show Buttons from the pop-up menu) The New Condition dialog appears

3 Select the condition type (Linear Area Count or Zone) from the pull-down menu accessed by the

down arrow next to the Type option

4 Press Tab or use the mouse (or stylus) to move to Name and enter a name for your condition

5 Specify the desired condition attributes See Condition Attributes for more detail

6 Click for condition to apply

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

31

Condition Attributes Each condition type will have related attributes to select or specify within the General and Advanced tabs of the New Condition dialog Once a condition has been used to takeoff a quantity from your plans certain attributes cannot be changed

All conditions allow the user to specify color and fill pattern for the object drawn

Linear Conditions

General Specify width and height by feet and inches Specify pitch in inches up to the nearest thousandth of an inch if applicable

Advanced Specify rounding for object quantities and droprun default length for electrical or plumbing drops at the ends of lines Select Connect to have lines connect at the corners where one line of the condition ends and another begins (and indicate Tolerance for the featurersquos activation as distance between the ends of two lines) Choose Trim to have lines automatically trim to a line being crossed Choose Curve to draw a curved line

Follow these examples for inputting feet and inches For 7 feet 6 inches type 706 for 13 feet 7 inches type 1307 For 20 feet type 2000

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

32

Area Conditions

General If needed you can specify the thickness (in inches) andor pitch (in inches)

Advanced Specify rounding for object quantities Choose to display an adjustable grid within the area and indicate matrix cell dimensions

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

33

Count Conditions

General

Specify height and indicate the size (in inches) and shape (square circle triangle rectangle or opening) of the count object as it will appear on screen

Advanced Count conditions have advanced attributes These options are available for all shapes except for openings

Zone Conditions Zones allow you to subdivide condition quantities making it easier to modify and complete jobs in phases They can be used at the end of a takeoff to isolate a group of condition quantities that are in different areas of the takeoff

Zones can also be used to break a takeoff into multi-phases and can even be used to isolate quantities while a job is in progress to group the amount of work that has been completed to date They can be applied to one or multiple pages in your plans automatically calculating the takeoff quantities for each zoned area

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

34

The zone feature is only available in Lite and Full Mode If you are in View Mode and would like

to use this feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade

Condition Notes A Note tab is provided for comments regarding the condition These notes will display on the Takeoff List report and will import into Quick Bid

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

35

Condition Results The Results tab of the New Condition is based on condition type Initial settings default to linear feet (LF) for linear conditions square feet (SF) for area conditions and count of items (EA) for count conditions and zones The first of the results fields will display for the condition items in the Takeoff dock bar area All results will display in worksheets and Takeoff List reports as well as in an Excel spreadsheet after being exported

Copying Conditions You may use the condition attributes from a condition yoursquove already created for any future conditions of the same type

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Click the Copy button from the toolbar

OR

3 Right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select copy

4 A new condition will appear in the list with the same condition attributes as the previous condition but with the quantities zeroed

Editing Conditions Once you have copied a condition you might want to change several attributes You can also edit an existing condition to fit any updated needs

1 Highlight the desired condition on the Takeoff dock bar

2 Click the Change button

OR

3 Double-click on the condition you wish to edit to bring up the Change Condition dialog

NOTE The Change Condition dialog differs from the New Condition dialog only in that if takeoffs

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

36

have been performed in your project with this condition you will not be able to change the type of condition or certain properties under the advanced tab of the dialog box

Deleting Conditions 1 Click on the condition in the Takeoff Dock bar area

2 Click the Delete button on the toolbar

OR

3 Right-click and select Delete from the pop-up menu

All takeoff associated with the deleted condition will be deleted immediately and permanently

Organizing Project Conditions Within your project you can create folders andor sub-folders for different types of conditions You may even want to create a folder containing conditions with reset values

To get started organizing your conditions make sure you are viewing the condition tree (right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select Show Tree)

Creating Folders and Sub-Folders 1 Right-click in the Takeoff Dock bar area

2 Select New gt Folder from the pop-up menu

Copying Folders

1 Click on the folder and click Copy on the toolbar

2 All copied conditions within the new folder will have values reset to zero

Renaming Folders

1 Click on the folder

2 Right-click and select Rename from the pop-up menu

3 Enter a name for your folder and click the Enter button

Changing Condition Order

You may move conditions up or down in the condition list of the Takeoff dock bar to suit your project needs

1 Select the condition you would like to move by clicking to highlight it

NOTE When you are ready to move the highlighted conditions be sure that you start

moving using the last condition chosen That condition will have a highlighted boarder

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

37

2 Drag and drop any the condition from one place to another in the list You may also move a condition to another folder on the list in this way

Drawing with Conditions Snap Angles Set up snap angles to prevent lines from appearing jagged Snap angles are commonly set at 15deg and shift snap angles at 0deg

1 Go to Tools gt Options Options dialog appears

2 Under the General tab make the desired settings

3 Click to save the settings As they are drawn lines will snap to the set degree

Drawing a Linear Object 1 Select a condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff dock bar

2 Move the cursor into the Image takeoff area of the screen you will see the cursor display as crosshairs

3 Click and hold left mouse button then drag mouse to draw a line

4 Release mouse button to set line

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

38

5 Repeat steps for further lines

Continuous Mode This feature allows you to draw an object that has connected lines

1 Click the icon from the Takeoff toolbar

OR

2 Go to Tools gt Continuous Mode

3 Follow steps 1-3 from Draw a Linear Object

4 Click at each point of intersection The object will be connected

5 Double-click after making the final point to set the lines

Drawing a Curve To draw a curved line the Curve option must be checked under the Advanced tab of the Condition dialog

1 Click where you want to begin the curve and drag in a straight line to the position for the other endpoint of the curve

2 Click on the line to select it Handles in the shapes of small squares will appear at either end of

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

39

the line and in the center of the line

3 Move the cursor over the center handles until the cursor becomes a two-way arrow

4 Click and drag in the direction of the curve bending the line as you move the cursor Release to set the curve (The line you began with will disappear)

Draw a circle by drawing two curved lines connected

Drawing an Area Object Area conditions are drawn similarly to continuous mode lines You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete your area takeoff

NOTE When drawing an area do not intersect the perimeter or line of the object you are drawing

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

3 The area will be filled with the pattern set for that condition

NOTE The simulated circle will be good enough for you to be able to make a bid

To create a circular area click from point to point with very short distances in between points simulating a circlersquos perimeter Double-click after setting the last point to set the area

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

40

Grid Options Grids give you an added advantage when installing materials such as tiles Use this feature to get a count for how many tiles are needed for an area

1 Double-click on an area condition in the Takeoff dock bar to open its Condition dialog

2 Click on the Advanced tab to show its options

3 Check the box next to Grid by clicking in it

4 Indicate the dimensions of the cell matrix in inches (For example 200 x 400)

5 Under Results tab choose each (EA) for one of the results fields This will tabulate a number of grid cells (including partial grid cells) in area

6 Click to save your settings

7 Use the Move Grid and Rotate Grid features in the Tools menu to manipulate the grid as desired

Grid Calculation

1 Go to Tools gt Options menu

1 Specify if On-Screen Takeoff automatically should Calculate Grid Position

2 If AreaGrid Size is selected On-Screen Takeoff will calculate the number of items needed to fill the grid based on grid demintions

3 Click to accept and close the dialog

To move a line at any angle (regardless of default setting) press the Shift key while moving the mouse

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

41

Backout Mode This feature allows you to take out part of an area and deduct that amount of square footage

1 Select Tools gt Backout Mode

2 Outline the are you want backed out as you would when drawing a regular area object (see Drawing an Area Object)

3 The outlined area will clear and quantities will be recalculated

NOTE The perimeter of the backout area will be added to the LF quantity for that condition

Drawing a Count Object Square triangle rectangle and circle shaped count objects can easily be placed on images

1 Select the condition

2 Click in the location where you want the object to appear

3 To place an opening-shaped count item like a door or window you must click over an existing linear object such as a wall

4 On the Results tab you can change the height properties to give you the result you need

5 If Backout is checked on the advanced tab for each count opening the opening-shaped count item will back out a corresponding section of the linear object

Opening shaped count items are sized at 3rsquo0rdquo by default

Drawing a Zone Zones are drawn in the same way as area objects and may be any polygonal shape You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete the zone perimeter

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

42

Selecting Objects

1 Use the Select Tool to select objects

You can also select all objects that correspond to a condition

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Right-click and choose Select All

3 All objects with this condition will be highlighted with squares as an outline

Moving and Resizing Objects Linear

1 To move or resize a linear object click anywhere on the line to select it

2 To move the line position your pointer over the center handles When the mouse is positioned over the handles you will see a two-way arrow You will only be able to move the line in the direction of the arrows

3 Drag the line to a new position

4 Clicking and dragging the handles on the ends of the line will allow you to lengthen or shorten your line

Area and Zone

1 To move an area object or zone in its entirety click and drag it to its new position

2 Grabbing a handle at a corner or intersection of the object will allow you to adjust and change its perimeter

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

43

Count 1 To move a square circle rectangle or triangle shaped count object click and drag

2 Click and drag an opening shaped count object along the length of the linear object to the desired position then release

NOTE An opening shaped count object may not be moved from its associated linear condition object however it may be moved up and down the length of the linear object

Layers On-Screen Takeoff allows you to sort and separate your takeoff objects within the same job and on the same page On-Screen Takeoff gives you this flexibility through the use of layers

By assigning different conditions to different layers (for example differentiating between floors ceilings and walls) you can choose to view all layers or turn off certain layers to display and print the remaining groups of conditions only You may also remove the background image of electronic plans add text and hot link symbols or print only your condition takeoffs

Layers are only available in Full Mode If you are in View or Lite Mode and would like to use this

feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade Default Layers

On-Screen Takeoff begins every project with three default layers Image Annotation and Default The Image layer holds the electronic plan files you may have in your project The Annotation layer possesses all text notations highlighting and hot links in the project The Default layer will appear in the Condition dialog when creating or editing a condition (listed in the takeoff dock bar) Conditions are assigned to the Default layer unless otherwise specified by the user

Creating Layers To assign a condition to a layer other than the default layer you must first create additional layers for your project

1 Select View gt Layers to open the Layers dialog

2 Click An unnamed layer will be added

3 Click within the empty box and type a name for your layer (for example Wall)

4 New layers are added as active layers The adjacent box under the Show column will be checked

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

44

Assigning a Layer to a Condition 1 Open the Condition dialog box by creating a new condition or editing an existing condition

2 Under the General tab click on the down arrow in the Layer field to display optional layers

3 Select the desired layer for the condition Only the Default layer and layers you have added will be displayed

4 Click

View and Hide Layers

1 Select View gt Layers

2 Under the Show column check the box to view or remove the check (by clicking on it) to hide the specific layer

3 Click to accept and close the Layers dialog

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

45

Assigning Text to a Layer When adding text to an image On-Screen Takeoff has the capability to assign the text to a specified layer

1 Select the Text Tool

2 Click at the point you want to place your text

3 Type in your text using the Enter key for line breaks

4 Click the drop down arrow next to the Layer field and select the desired layer

Section 7

46

Printing and Exporting

This section will

Printing options and procedures

Exporting data by copying and pasting

Exporting quantity results to Excel spreadsheets

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

47

Print Setup On-Screen Takeoff allows the user to print the image takeoff list and worksheet

1 Select File gt Print Setup The Print Setup dialog will open

2 Select a printer or leave the default selection listed (change from the default printer displayed by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the field)

3 Indicate page size and printer tray option (Source) Access page size options by clicking on the

down arrow at the right of the field

4 Choose Portrait or Landscape orientation

5 Click to accept and close the dialog

Printing Images The image area can include the electronic plans the takeoff objects added text and hot links To print a subset of these (for example just the takeoffs without the plans or the added text and hot link symbols) hide layers that you do not want to print (see Section 6 View and Hide Layers) When you are printing your images every page will show the scale of the takeoff you are printing

1 Click on the Image tab to display the area of your project

2 Select File gt Print (or Ctrl + P)

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

48

3 Select the desired view (What to print) and the Image Range

4 Click The second Print dialog will open

5 Change settings accordingly or click if you accept the default settings

Printing Takeoff Lists and Worksheets In Takeoff Lists and Worksheets you may hide columns to print only certain results or adjust column widths to fit the report within the page size selected

1 In Takeoff List or Worksheet view move your cursor to the right side of the columnrsquos title bar the cursor will display as a two-way arrow

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

49

2 Click and drag to adjust the width of the column Holding the mouse button you may

slide the title bar under the title bar to its left to hide the column completely

3 Select File gt Print or press Ctrl + P to access the Print dialog

4 Indicate desired printer and choose the number of copies

5 Click to print and close the dialog

When printing the condition list we suggest printing in landscape

To reset to the default column widths double-click on the right border of a column heading will reset the column to its right (or previously to its right before being hidden)

Print Preview 1 Select File gt Print Preview

2 Use and to vary your view 3 If viewing an image choose current full or scale view to see how it displays

4 For printed outputs that cover more than one page use and to view adjacent pages or click on the down arrow next to Page field and select the page you want displayed

Exporting Using the CopyPaste Feature You may copy all the data or sections from the worksheet and the takeoff list view in On-Screen Takeoff and paste it into another application When pasting into Excel the cell layout will be maintained

1 Highlight the areas you wish to paste Click and hold the left mouse button down as you drag the cursor over the area to be selected then releasing the mouse button

OR

2 Select the entire takeoff list quickly click on the left On-Screen Takeoff column header and hold and drag the cursor across the remaining column headings

The number of pages for the view selected will display in the lower left-hand corner The zoom percentage that applies to the view will be displayed in the lower right-hand corner next to page size of the drawing

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

50

3 In the worksheet view you may highlight rows by clicking on the numbered buttons to the left of each row clicking and dragging across column headings or clicking and dragging over individual cells in the worksheet

Click anywhere in the appropriate view to deselect the area

4 Once your selection is highlighted you may select Edit gt Copy or Ctrl C from the keyboard 5 On your monitor switch to the application into which you want to paste your selection 6 Select Edit gt Paste in the new application or simply press Ctrl + V to paste

The colored keys for conditions cannot be pasted

Using the Export Feature You may export condition quantities to specified cell location within an Excel worksheet file Cell target locations are assigned in the Results tab of the condition dialogs on the Export line relating to each quantity measurement type

On-Screen Takeoff will export takeoff quantity results for up to three different quantity types that you specify For instance you may want to know the number of square feet in a ceiling area as well as the number of linear feet in its perimeter

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

51

1 Bring up the Condition dialog by double-clicking on a condition in the takeoff dock bar or by

selecting the condition and clicking

2 Click on the Results tab to access its fields The default quantities for the condition type will display

3 For each results field click on the arrow to access the pull-down menu and select the appropriate quantity (for example SF LF EA etchellip)

4 Have your Excel spreadsheet opened and saved in a file

5 Specify the Excel spreadsheet cell locations where you want the results to go

6 For a cell in the first sheet of your spreadsheet type in the cell address (eg a1) Case is not important

7 For a cell on a successive sheet of your spreadsheet type in sheet the number followed by a comma and the cell address without any spaces (eg sheet2a1) Case is not important

8 Click

9 Select File gt Export gt Condition Qty to Excel

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

52

10 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

11 Click to export On-Screen Takeoff results to specified cell locations in the Excel file When you return to the Excel application you will see the values have been added to the specified cell locations in your spreadsheet

12 Save your Excel file

Exporting Worksheet to Excel

1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 From On-Screen Takeoff Select File gt Export gt Worksheet to Excel

4 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

5 Click When you return to the Excel application you will see the values from the Worksheet Tab have been added to your spreadsheet

6 Save your Excel file

Exporting Takeoff to CVS 1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 Click the Takeoff Tab in the project you want to export the information

4 Select File gt Export gt Takeoff to CSV

5 Browse to the location of the CSV spreadsheet file click file to select it

6 Click the Save

NOTE CSV files can be opened in Excel Lotus Access etc One may consider this option more of a ldquodumprdquo into a file

The Excel application must be active (it may be minimized on the application bar) with the target spreadsheet open in the application Otherwise an error will occur with the export operation that will affect both the On-Screen Takeofftrade file and the Excel spreadsheet

Section 8

53

Advanced Features

This section will

Some special features of working with condition objects in the takeoff area

Details of advanced options for conditions

Advanced features of the Project Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

54

Features to Use with Objects Roping Feature You can move copy or delete using this feature Using the Select tool (the pointer) you may select several objects at once by clicking and dragging an outline around the objects then releasing the mouse button Roping may select either objects completely within the outlined area (inclusive) or objects both within and touched by the outlined area (touching) Specify your roping preference under Tools gt Options

1 Click and hold the mouse button at a point on the screen near the objects to be selected and drag to surround the objects with an outline

2 Release the mouse button The objects will be selected

3 You may now

Move the group around on the page by clicking within the group dragging the mouse and releasing the button to place the objects

Delete the group of objects by clicking the Delete key or

Copy and paste by pressing Ctrl C to copy the group then Ctrl V to paste it The pasted copy of the grouped objects will appear slightly offset from the original objects

Section 8 Advanced Features

55

Applying a DropRun Count

Use the droprun feature when calculating quantities to take into account the drop or run of a linear condition such as electrical lines or plumbing pipes Drop or run lengths may be added separately to any linear condition on screen while a default droprun length may be indicated for a condition as a whole

1 Select the desired linear condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff Dock bar

2 Click the Change button in the toolbar to open the Change Condition dialog

3 Click the Advanced tab to access the advanced options and click inside the DropRun check box

4 Enter a default length to be applied to all of this condition Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches) You can leave the length blank and manually enter drop run on each segment drawn

5 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog

Edit DropRun Count

1 With the related linear condition in the Takeoff Dock bar highlighted or with the pointer tool selected

2 click on the desired linear object in the image takeoff area The Count button will become active

3 Click on the Count button (alternatively select Tools gt Count) The default droprun amount will show in the pop-up Count dialog (Default length will be zero if droprun has not been selected in this conditionrsquos properties)

4 Type in the desired length Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches)

5 Click the OK button The additional amount will be reflected in the corresponding quantity The new DropRun count will apply only to the object edited

Adding Text in Image View

On-Screen Takeoff allows you to place text comments around your quantity takeoffs that may be printed along with plan images and objects Text is automatically placed within the Annotation Layer (that includes text and hot links)

1 To place text on the image select the Text Tool and click at the point you want to place your text opening a text box

2 Type in your information clicking Enter for line breaks

3 When you are finished click the OK button to exit the text box

4 To reposition text simply click on the text (with the Text Tool active) to select it

5 Move the cursor over the text the cursor will now display as a four-way arrow

6 Click and drag the mouse to position the text as desired

Section 8 Advanced Features

56

1 To edit existing text use the Text Tool to double-click on the text to open the editing box

2 Enter additional text or use the Backspace key to delete text as necessary

Formatting Text Once created you may format the font size type style and color of your text

1 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Font or click on the Font button in the Takeoff Toolbar

2 Select the desired features (color options are disabled) and click the OK button

3 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Color or click on the Color button in the Takeoff Toolbar The Color dialog will open

4 Click on a color in the Basic Color palette or create a color and add to the Custom Colors palette (Be sure to click on the color in the Custom Colors palette to select it)

5 Click the OK button

Object Properties

Linear Objects

Linear objects may be set to connect at corners

A linear object may be set to trim automatically when crossing another linear object (Check the trim option under the advanced tab of the Condition dialog)

When you move a connected linear object objects automatically move and resize connected lines accordingly (quantities are then recalculated)

This feature requires that the connected linear object be moved using the center handles (does not apply when resizing the line from the ends)

Objects constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

Objects are measured from centerline to centerline

Section 8 Advanced Features

57

Area Objects When drawing an area use your escape key to undo the last line drawn You may reverse your

drawing of an area using the escape key

The area will not fill with color and pattern until the user double-clicks after the last line is set

Lines drawn to delineate an area object constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

After selecting an area to move or adjust position the mouse in the center to move the entire area position the mouse at the sides or corners to adjust the perimeter

Count Objects

All count objects are quantified by the physical number of objects per page and reported as EA for the UOM The quantity for the current Image View is (displayed in the Condition List) and the total quantity in your project is displayed in the Takeoff View and Worksheet View)

Square circle rectangle and triangle shaped count objects do not displace or subtract from other object quantities when placed on top of them However on the Advanced Tab for the count condition a connect property can be set (this is a check box) so that when a count object of this shape is put on top of a Linear type takeoff object it will move with the linear if said linear is moved

An opened-shaped count object must be placed within a linear object Opening shaped count objects may also be measured by linear foot or linear yard (EA SF and SY are also options) Opening shaped count items default to a width of 3rsquo 0rdquo at the time of creation This size can be changed The small medium and large size are not options on this type of condition anymore Check Backout on the Advanced tab for each Count object back out the footage (or yardage) of opening-shaped count objects in which they are placed

NOTE In order to see this Backout functionality (in quantity) for SY or SF deductions at least one of the

results for the Linear(s) this object will be placed on must be set to SY or SF and the count object must have a height quantity

Advanced Features of Conditions The Round Feature Under the Advanced tab of the linear and area Condition dialogues you may specify quantity rounding (in inches) For linear objects rounding applies to each linear object drawn For area objects rounding will apply to each segment of the area perimeter adjusting the perimeter and area calculations For example With a linear condition entering 12 in the Round field will round up each related linear object to the nearest 12 inches or one foot With this setting two walls of 1 4 would each round to 2 0 totaling 4 0

NOTE In the Takeoff Dock bar condition list and in the On-Screen Takeoff reports quantities will be displayed in whole numbers rounded up to the nearest foot However calculations are based on true quantities without rounding unless the Round Feature is engaged

Pitch Pitch may apply either to linear or area conditions It is measured in rise per linear foot Entering 12 indicates a 12 rise per 12 of linear distance (a pitch of 12 over 12) or an angle of 45deg

Section 8 Advanced Features

58

Advanced Features of Project Properties Selecting Multiple Pages

1 Select a single page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry

2 Drag the cursor down the column of numbers to select consecutive pages

3 Click on the blank button at the top of this column to select all pages in the Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

59

Changing Image Assigned to a Drawing 1 Select the page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry 2 Click the Change Image button The Change Image dialog box will appear

3 Navigate to the desired file and select by clicking on it

4 Click the Open button The electronic file assigned to the page will have been changed to reflect the new file choice

Changing Image File Path 1 Select pages as described above

2 Choose Change Folder

3 In the Change Folder dialog navigate to the appropriate folder

4 Click the OK button The file path will have been changed for the selected page entries

Delete a Page from Project Properties 1 Select the page you want to delete by clicking on its associated number (in the gray box at the

left of the entry)

2 Choose Delete Page

All Takeoff on the page will be deleted immediately and permanently

Section 8 Advanced Features

60

Advanced Features of Tool Options

Calculation Method On-Screen Takeoff has built-in calculation options to allow for faster work and faster saves until your takeoff is complete Calculation options are found by selecting Tools gt Options then clicking on the Calculation tab

Calculation method can be set to Automatic Automatic except Grids and Manual Manual will allow the program to operate more quickly while Automatic or Automatic except Grids allows the user to see quantity changes as takeoffs are made

In any mode you may press F9 to recalculate quantities for the On-Screen Takeoff current totals

Configuration Tab

When the ldquoPage Label (A01)rdquo radial button is chosen On-Screen Takeoff puts the numbered label on all the pages of in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar If the Page Descriptionrdquo radial button is chosen then a description of what takeoff is on that specific page will be shown in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar

This section of the configuration tab gives you options on how you want to export your information When the ldquoFolderSubfolder Namesrdquo radial button is chosen than on your file that you are exporting to will have all the conditions folders and subfolders In the Delimiter box you can choose the symbol that is needed to separate the information you are exporting Some files need semicolons () or colons () to make sure the information comes exported in is separated it the appropriate places

Section 8 Advanced Features

61

In previous versions of On-Screen Takeoff there are views that users need to have in order for them to display their information By either choosing ldquoOST 1xrdquo or ldquoOST 2xrdquo it will let the program know you want your columns of information exported in that specific format

When you have the Confirm Deletions radial button of ldquoYesrdquo chosen than every time you delete anything you will get a dialog box confirming your intentions of deletion

While working with your takeoff you have a choice to either view the legend of your conditions or hide it Choose whichever radial button that suits your needs

For those who prefer to use the Enter key to navigate in dialog boxes this option is just for that

Font Tab The Font tab is designed for you to make your own look and feel for the application At the bottom of this tab it will show you sample of the fonts and colors you have chosen

Renaming the Current Page You may change the name of the current page in the takeoff area of On-Screen Takeoff by selecting Edit gt Rename Page

This opens the Name Page dialog and you may simply type in a new name and click the Enter button The new name for the file will be reflected on the title bar for the page and in Project Properties

You also may access the Rename Page function by right-clicking in the takeoff area while in Image View and selecting the option from the pop-up menu that appears

Section 9

62

Saving and Exiting

This section will

Explain how to save projects

Show you how to safely exit the program

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

63

Saving Your Project

1 Select File gt Save 2 If your project has not previously been saved a Save dialog box will open to allow you to name

the file and choose the directory and folder in which to save your file 3 Once saved File gt Save will simply save the current version of the file

OR

4 Select File gt Save As then type in a new name for the file and save to the desired file path

The Auto-save Feature With the Auto-save feature On-Screen Takeoff automatically backs up your open project You may choose to have more than one level of backup files The first backup copy will have the extension b00 and successive files will be b01 b02 and so on If you have designated four levels of backup files after the fourth backup copy has been created (b03) the next file will be saved over the file with extension b00 Further backup saves will then rotate through the four backup files in the same way

1 Select Tools gt Options 2 In the Auto-save area (under the General tab) select the frequency of backup file creation (in

minutes) and the number of levels for the feature 3 You also may disengage the feature by clicking in the check box to clear it

The Auto-save feature automatically saves backup copies to the directory of the current project If you are working from a write-protected area such as a CD-ROM On-Screen Takeoff will place backup files in the On-Screen Takeoff folder

Exiting When you are finished using On-Screen Takeoff it is very easy to exit Exiting is very important because of security reasons If someone were to use your computer they could enter the application and view and manipulate information

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

64

On-Screen Takeoff closes the open project when you open another or create a new project or when you exit the program

1 Select File gt Exit

OR

2 You also may click at the upper right-hand corner of the application to exit

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

65

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer When you get your digitizer from GTCO you will need to connect it to your computer Follow the instructions outlined below to do this

Note For rollup digitizers the metal bar must be oriented to the top or right hand side

Connecting the Digitizer 1 Lay the digitizer out flat 2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer 3 Plug in the power adapter 4 Plug the interface (IO) cable into the digitizer 5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into an open serial port on computer

Note GTCO Technical support phone number is 410-381-6688 The electronic manual (on diskette) from GTCO contains more detailed installation and operation instructions for the GTCO digitizer model you have

Installing other Digitizer Drivers If you are using a GTCO Digitizer you will need to install the GTCO TabletWorks Drivers

If you are using a Digitizer not supported by GTCO Tablet Works 10 please contact the manufacturer of your digitizer for assistance with installation

Installing GTCO TabletWorks Drivers 1 Insert the On Center CD into the CD-ROM drive The CD Startup screen will open 2 Click on Install Software 3 Select Additional Software and Drivers 4 Select Digitizer Driver 5 Follow the instructions for installing TabletWorks 10

Adhering the Template The template is a small plastic sticker used to enable mouse function when using the digitizer with On-Screen Takeoff Place your template on your digitizer We suggest placing it in the bottom right corner of the digitizer about one inch inside the takeoff area

Note You may either peel off the back of the template and use the adhesive surface or you can tape the template down

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

66

Testing the Digitizer Drivers Before running OST you may test the digitizer by moving the stylus around on the digitizer pad it should move the mouse cursor (if mouse emulation is enabled)

If the digitizer does not move the mouse cursor on the screen

The superset codes may need to be reset Reset the superset codes by touching on the border of the digitizer with the stylus The digitizer should beep several times

The digitizer may not be communicating with the computer Be sure the COM port selected is correct Be sure the COM port selected is correct If you are not able to get the digitizer to move the mouse cursor you need to call GTCO technical support for help

Note The Mouse Emulation is not required for On-Screen Takeoff to work properly It is used only for the Template functionality if the digitizer is moving the cursor the wrong direction (up instead of sideways or vice-versa)

Click the L-shaped arrow symbol on the digitizer with the stylus

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

67

Appendix II Toolbar Items Main Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

68

Tool Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

69

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

70

Navigate Toolbar (Continued)

Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

71

Takeoff Toolbar (Continued)

Image Toolbar

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

72

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

This section will detail how to load plans from a F W Dodge CD-ROM into an On-Screen Takeoff project file ready for takeoffs

Dodge files may be added to the Project Properties dialog However loading the files in that way will load the files by number rather than name description If you want to load one page only from your Dodge CD You will have to rename the page to display the name rather than number of the file

To load plan files from a Dodge CD so that the files load sequentially by file number but are displayed by name rather than by number within your project follow the instructions below

Opening a Dodge project from a CD-ROM 1 Insert the CD into the drive 2 Choose File gt Custom 3 Choose Dodge Plans Project (plansdat) as the file type 4 Select the appropriate file type by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the Files of type

field 5 In the Look in field access your drive paths by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the

field then

Navigate to your CD-ROM drive Open the data folder and Open the Projects folder

6 Select the desired project and open its folder 7 Open the plansdat file 8 All the images will come in sequenced correctly for that job along with the full descriptions

(names) of each page If there is not a plans folder in the project folder then plans do not exist for that project on the CD Opening the plansdat file will yield an empty project

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

73

Appendix IV Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer The On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer is a limited version of On Center Softwarersquos commercial takeoff software If your status bar located at the very bottom of the main window says View Mode in the lower left-hand corner then you are using the Plan Viewer You can use the plan viewer to

View CD-based amp converted CAD drawings

View a previously created OST file and associated drawings

Download electronic plans online

Navigate through drawings

Quickly Takeoff linearsareas and counts

Zoom in to view the plan better

Print drawings directly from the viewer

Viewing an On-Screen Takeoff Project File

1 To open an OST file that was previously created with of On-Screen Takeoff 2 Select File gt Open 3 An Open dialog will appear if you do not see the OST file you are looking for select the

Look In drop down arrow 4 A drop down menu will appear listing the various folders drives and mapped drives located

on your computer select the correct drive or folder location and continue to browse to the location of your OST file

5 When you see your OST file double-click it to open it 6 Any takeoff and drawings should appear on the Image tab view

If you do not see the drawings but do see the colored takeoff layer the drawings may

not be located in the same place they were originally saved at Go to File gt Project Properties and check the Image File path for each listed page If the image file path is pointing to a CD drive make sure the CD is inside the CR-ROM

Downloading Electronic Plans If your Online Plan Service provides a special file format (OSX) required to use this feature of our plan viewer you can immediately downloaded all electronic plans of a project directly from our viewer

Most Plan Room web sites will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff when a request to download plans is made Your particular Plan Room may differ in operation so please contact the provider directly with questions on using the site

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

74

When you request to download or open a project file from a Plan Room you will usually have the open to open or save an OSX file Choosing open will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff Alternately you may choose to save the file to a local hard drive After you have saved the file either double-click it to launch On-Screen Takeoff or open the OSX file using On-Screen Takeoff by clicking File then Open and locating the file on your hard drive You will need to change the file type to OSX

After the OSX file is opened you will see an additional tab appear in the Conditions List window called Pages

The Pages tab shows the hierarchy of your project Gray file icons represent pages that have not been downloaded and blue icons represents pages that have been downloaded

To download a page simply double-click the page icon

If you wish to select a group of pages to download you can use the Ctrl or Shift key to multiple select them then click the Download button

If you wish to download all pages at once click the Download All button

Downloaded pages will now appear in the Project Properties dialog in the same order in which they appear in the Pages tab

Creating Quick Takeoffs With On-Screen Takeoff you can create quick takeoffs to measure quantities even if you dont have the full version of our program However using the Quick Takeoff functionality shows you just a fraction of what the full version can do

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar is located at the top of the image view It has three buttons designated for three types of takeoffs Linear Area and Count The Quantity drop down list will show secondary quantities for Linears and Areas The Units drop down allows you to select how you want your quantities displayed Feet Inches Yards Millimeters and Meters

NOTE Every time change the type of takeoff you are performing (switching from Area to Linear for example) the previous quantities and takeoff objects will disappear They will also disappear when you changes pages

NOTE You can use the Dimension Tool to basically measure the distance between two points or linears The distance will display on the status bar at the bottom of the application

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

75

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions General

Where is On-Screen Takeoff installed on my computer

Typically it is installed in CProgram FilesOn-Screen Takeoff

In Explorer how do I recognize On-Screen Takeoff file types

On-Screen Takeoff data is stored in a single file per job lsquojob name OSTrsquo On-Screen Takeoff templates are stored as lsquotemplate nameTPOrsquo

Can only one project at a time be open

Yes For that reason opening another project automatically closes the project on screen You will be asked to save any changes

Is only one scale allowed per page What about on drawings that have multiple detail sections on a page and each of those drawings have different scales

Yes For pages with drawings of different scales copy the drawing to another project page and set the appropriate scale

I cannot perform backout on an area that is along a linear

As a workaround use the On-Screen Takeoff layers feature to help you with this issue Electronic Images

How do I start a project from drawings that have been scanned and written to a CD-ROM

Open a new project Select File gt Project Properties and select Auto Add Navigate to your CD and the appropriate folder and select any image file in that location Click Open All files in the location will load into your project Recommended that images are copied from CD to hard drive for performance

If I get a disk of drawings in AutoCAD format (R13 or R14) can I read them in On-Screen Takeoff

Yes On-Screen Takeoff now reads DWG DXF and many other format that are saved with AutoCAD

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

76

When I click on the all pages button what is supposed to happen Currently nothing seems to change when I click on that button

The All Pages button is used to apply the Darken and Enhance Plans feature to all pages in the project (as opposed to only the current page on screen)

Is there a way to deduct a large skylight from an area condition

Yes with the related area condition selected in the Takeoff Dock bar unselect the Backout button on the Takeoff Toolbar then draw the Backout area The area quantity will be deducted from the related condition object and the linear measurement of the Backout perimeter will be added

Digitizer Issues

How do I connect a Digitizer to the computer

See Appendix I Connecting a Digitizer

The Place Template menu choice is disabled

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or the digitizer or the digitzer drivers are not installed

It wonrsquot let me select the Set Takeoff Area menu choice

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or no job is open a digitizer is not installed or the drivers are not installed

The digitizer stylus is not moving the cursor or crosshairs

Click S-0-1 superset on the digitizer

How do I convert my old GTCO Digitizer to work with On- Screen Takeofftrade

Call GTCO and they may be able to reconfigure your digitizer to be compatible with On-Screen Takeoff

Printing Issues Which Printers work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible printers include On-Screen Takeoff Hewlett Packard Epson and Canon printers If you are having printer difficulties please contact support and specify the type of printer along with other pertinent information Contact support at wwwoncentercomsupport or email supportoncentercom

Which Plotters work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible Plotters include Hewlett Packard DesignJet plotters and the EnCAD Cadjet II If you are having plotter difficulties please contact support and specify the type of plotter concerned

ViewingDisplay I can no longer see my condition list How do I get it back

The toolbars and Dock bars can be turned on and off through the View gt Toolbars menu options

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

77

This is also accessible by right-clicking in the toolbar area and selecting (or deselecting) a toolbar listed

I cannot view my folders in the condition list

Right-click in the Takeoff Dock barcondition list area and select Show Tree to display your folders

My Status Bar reads Viewer Mode and I am unable to draw conditions

On-Screen Takeoff needs to be Authorized Or you need to purchase an upgrade Click the Perform Advanced Takeoff button on the main toolbar

I hid a Dock bar and when I selected to view it again it appeared alongside the other Dock

bar instead of stacked on top of it How do I fix it

Pick up the Dock bar by clicking on the bar at the top and continuing to hold down the mouse button drag the Dock bar over the other one It will resize and appear stacked with the other

When I open image files from a CD the images are all upside down How do I get them right

side up

To flip pages from top to bottom follow the steps below 1 Click the All Pages button on the Image Toolbar (All Pages is engaged when the button

is not clicked) 2 Click the Flip Horizontal button on the Image Toolbar 3 Click the All Pages button again to disengage

Templates How do I create a Template

Follow the steps below 1 Create a typical project 2 Choose File gt Save As 3 Choose On-Screen Takeoff Template Files as the file type to save 4 Name the file This will save all of the condition setups as well as the layers for the

project

How do I create a new project from a template

Follow the steps below 1 Choose File gt New 2 Select a template from those listed in the New dialog This will open a new project with

conditions and layers saved from a previous project but no pages or takeoff

78

INDEX

Area Conditions 32

Area Objects 57

Auto Scrolling 20

Auto-save 63

Backout Mode 41

Calculation Method 60

Conditions 29

Configuration 60

Contents Tab 6

Continuous Mode 38

Count Conditions 33

Count Objects 57

Digitizer 10 65 76

Docking Toolbars 13

Dodge CD 72

Drawing 27 37

DropRun Count 55

Environment 18

Exiting 63

Exporting 49

Features 16

Font 61

Frequently Asked Questions 75

Grid 40

Help File 5

Hiding Toolbars 13

Hot Links 21

Image 19 59

Image files 9

Image Toolbar 12 71

Images 75

Index Tab 6

Layers 43

Linear Conditions 31

Linear Objects 56

Main Toolbar 12 67

Menus 14

Moving Toolbars 13

Navigate Toolbar 12 69

Navigating 20

On-Screen Takeofftrade 2

Page 59 61

Pages 20 25 28

Plan Viewer 73

Plans 26

Printing 47 76

Project Properties 25

Projects 22

Quick Start Video 18

Resizing Toolbars 13

Roping 54

Saving 63

Scale 28

Search Tab 7

Selecting Objects 42

Setup 8

Start On-Screen Takeofftrade 17

System Requirements 9

Takeoff 19 27

Takeoff Toolbar 70 71

Takeoff Toolbar 12

Template Files 23

TIF (Group4) 9

Tool Toolbar 12 68

Toolbar 67

Toolbars 12

View Toolbar 12 69

Viewing Toolbars 12

Worksheet 20

Zone Conditions 33

Zoom Toolbar 12 69

  • On-Screen Takeoff Lite
  • Table of Contents
  • Section 1 - Introduction
  • Section 2 - Setup
  • Section 3 - Toolbars and Menus
  • Section 4 - Features
  • Section 5 - Projects
  • Section 6 - Conditions and Takeoff
  • Section 7 - Printing and Exporting
  • Section 8 - Advanced Features
  • Section 9 - Saving and Exiting
  • Appendix I - Installing Your Digitizer
  • Appendix II - Toolbar Items
  • Appendix III - Loading Plans from a Dodge CD
  • Appendix IV - Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer
  • Appendix V - Frequently Asked Questions
  • Index

Section 4 Features

18

Quick Start Video When On-Screen Takeoff opens you will be given an option to watch the Quick Start video (recommended) or start the program without watching the video

The 20 minute video will demonstrate key program functionality and allow you to view application instruction for enhanced learning

If you would like to watch the video click If you prefer to get started without

the video click If you have already viewed the video click the lsquoDo not show this message againrsquo box to prevent this dialog from appearing each time you open the program

NOTE If you decide later that you would like to watch the Quick Start video go to Help gt Watch

Quick Start Videos

On-Screen Takeoff Environment The On-Screen Takeoff environment acts like your drafting table allowing you to work on several sheets of plans at once and to reference at a glance the entire drawing and your position on that drawing while giving you the power of a computer to track analyze print and export your takeoff quantities and plans

The screen is bordered at the top by the Menu bar with pull-down menus and at the bottom by the Status bar which indicates current user status plan page size and current zoom percentage of page The largest portion of the application screen will be your takeoff area bounded on the left (by default) by two dock bars and on the top by several toolbars

In the takeoff area you may view your project plans (images) andor takeoff objects the takeoff list with quantities the worksheet or a legend of your condition list

The main window of On-Screen Takeoff has three tabs located at the bottom left allowing for quick change between Image Takeoff or Worksheet views Select the desired view option on the toolbar and it will automatically open on your screen

Section 4 Features

19

Image View

This view shows the plan file andor takeoff conditions drawn from your plans

Takeoff View This view displays the height if applicable and quantity breakdowns of your conditions according to result types indicated (eg linear feet square feet or count of items) for zones pages and the project as a whole It also displays notes per condition

Section 4 Features

20

Worksheet View This view displays the condition and quantity in units of measure specified in the first results field of the Results tab in the Condition dialog and allows the user to enter amounts for material labor and subcontractor takeoffs

NOTE When in the Worksheet view tab out the field then save This is keep all the values saved

Navigating On-Screen Takeoff

Auto Scrolling When creating linear areas or zones On-Screen Takeoff will automatically scroll the image view when necessary It will move as your mouse or digitizer moves beyond the edge of the current view

Changing Pages

1 Select View gt Next Page Previous Page or Go To Page (specify page number for the Go to Page option)

2 You may also select the corresponding arrows for these options from the Navigate Toolbar The

drop down arrow in the Page field will list the pages The and arrows will take you to the

previous or next page The and arrows will take you to the first or last page

OR

Section 4 Features

21

3 Or press Ctrl G for the Go To Page dialog

Hot Links Hot links allow you to move quickly from one drawing to the pertinent area of another drawing A hot link is handy when viewing enlarged areas of a page and needing the ability to jump back to a reference page

1 Select Tools gt Hot Link

OR

2 Click from the Tools Toolbar

3 Click on the page where you want to set the link The Hot Link dialog will open

4 Using the current page display on the Navigate Toolbar access the pull-down menu of pages by

clicking on the arrow at the right

5 Select the page for your link (You may also choose View gt Go to Page and select by page number)

6 Manipulate the view using the zoom tool and the scroll bars

7 Click

8 After joining a hot link to another page the hot link arrows in the Navigation Toolbar will become active

9 Move a hot link to another location on the page by clicking then click and drag the hot link image anywhere on the page

Section 5

22

Projects

This section will

Help you create settings important to your projects

Explain how On-Screen Takeoff works with your electronic or paper plans

Section 5 Projects

23

Project Template Files You can begin your project with a template Templates allow you to take advantage of conditions and settings used with previous projects

On-Screen Takeoff templates contain condition lists and established layer separations from previous projects you have created You may also use the sample templates provided with On-Screen Takeoff as a great starting point All aspects of the templates may be adjusted for a new project

1 Select File gt New and click the OK button

2 From the New dialog box choose the template that best fits your project

3 The conditions for this template will appear in the Takeoff Dock bar and the Project Properties dialog will open asking for further information

4 Use File gt Save or File gt Save As to rename and save your new project

Saving a Project as a Template File You can save your condition properties and layers as a template for future projects

1 Select File gt Save As

2 Enter a name for your template and select On-Screen Takeoff Template Files (tpo) from the Save As type field of the dialog (click on the down arrow to select)

3 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog Modifying a Template File Follow these steps to modify an existing template file if you need to change or add conditions andor layers

1 Select File gt Open

2 Navigate to your Projects directory

3 In the File Type drop-down select On-Screen Takeoff Template files (tpo)

4 Choose the On-Screen Takeoff template file you would like to modify and click the OK button

5 Make appropriate changes

6 Save and close file

The On-Screen Takeoff template files cannot save takeoff information

Section 5 Projects

24

Opening an Existing Project File 1 Select File gt Open

2 Navigate to the desired file location

3 Click the Open button

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask

you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Creating a New Project

1 Select File gt New

2 For a blank untitled project click

3 At this point the Project Properties dialog will pop-up for more information about your takeoff

NOTE The following are important to keep in mind when beginning a new project

At the start of your project fill out the Project Properties settings to establish the name for all printed output from your project set the default page size and scale for your plans number and names of different pages within the project and locations of electronic drawings

Scale settings can significantly affect quantity outcomes Be sure to set the scale for each page of drawings before beginning condition takeoffs

When using a digitizer remember to make a mark with a pen or pencil in the upper left and lower right corners of the first sheet of the paper plans to delineate the takeoff area for that sheet You can then set the takeoff area on On-Screen Takeoff using your marks

Save your project before you begin taking off any conditions On-Screen Takeoff will write a back-up file using the same file name

Remember the Undo feature If you make a mistake select Edit gt Undo and reverse the process step by step

Section 5 Projects

25

Project Properties

You can either set your Project Properties when you create a new takeoff or once your project file is saved under the appropriate name

1 Select File gt Project Properties the Project Properties dialog box will appear

2 Type in the name of your project to appear on printouts Use the backspace andor delete keys to edit the name as necessary

3 Press the Tab key to move to the Default Image Size option or click within the Image Size box You may click on the arrow at the right for the pull-down menu of page size options or you can use the down-arrow key on your keyboard to scroll through the list to the appropriate selection

4 Press the Tab key to move to the Default Scale option Select a scale by using the drop down arrow If your scale is metric you will need to click in the box next to Metric to convert to that measurement

5 Establish the number of pages for your project plans And load image files See Adding Pages to

Your Project

Adding Pages to Projects Individual Electronic Plans

1 Click on in the Project Properties dialog

2 In the Add Images dialog use the drop down arrow to navigate to the appropriate directory and folder containing your image

3 Select the file so that it displays in the File name field then click The file will display by name and path in the Image File field in Project Properties dialog

4 Click to accept and your project will automatically open

5 Save your project with the new settings by selecting File gt Save

Section 5 Projects

26

Electronic plans scanned from blueprints (as opposed to blue lines) will display as white lines on a black background and are difficult to read on your computer screen Select Image gt Invert and the colors will invert to black on white

You may have noticed the Page column in the Project Properties dialog Generally plan images occupy one page and 1 will be listed in the column indicating Page 1 of your plan file If you import a multi-page TIF a plan file containing more than one page of plans they will import as separate pages and each successive page will be indicated under the Page column as 1 2 3 etc of the plan file

Group of Electronic Plans You may add all the electronic plan files from a particular source (for example from a CD) by using the Auto Add feature

1 Click the button in the Project Properties dialog

2 Browse until you find the appropriate directory and folder containing your plan images

3 Click on any file displayed within your target folder so that the file name appears in the File name box of the Auto Add dialog

4 Click The image paths and file names will be recorded into the project properties arranged alphabetically

5 Click to accept your choices and your project will automatically open

6 Save your project with the new settings by selecting File gt Save

To load Dodge Plans into your Project Properties see Appendix IIi Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

Paper Plans On-Screen Takeoff makes it easy for Full Mode users to perform quantity takeoffs from paper plans using a digitizer

1 Add pages by clicking until you have the number of pages initially in the project

2 Name each page by clicking within the Title area and typing the name

3 Click to accept your choices and close the Project Properties dialog

4 Save your project with the new project properties settings by selecting File gt Save

Section 5 Projects

27

Setting Up a Drawing Template On-Screen Takeoff provides the convenience of using the same work surface for both digitizer and mouse to allow the user to draw conditions and then edit settings of the project or add or change conditions without breaking stride A mouse pad template included with the program defines the area of the digitizer in which use of the stylus or cursor will be recognized as mouse movement as opposed to drawing movement

1 Place your stylus on On-Screen Takeoff

2 Placing the template identifies the location mouse movements will be recognized by the program

Before placing the template the template must be applied to the digitizer surface This may have been done during the installation of your digitizer We suggest attaching the template to the lower right corner of the digitizer surface about one inch inside the grid area

3 Select Digitizer gt Place Template

4 Follow the instruction prompts on the screen clicking first on the target symbol at the left of the On-Screen Takeoff box on the template then on the target at the right

Setting Takeoff Area Before you can begin taking off a drawing you must define the drawing area on the digitizer This requires defining an area that will include all objects on each drawing of your plans As you add pages to your takeoff the same area of the digitizer will be active

1 Secure the plans to the digitizer with tape or a set of clamps

2 With a pen or a pencil mark the upper left corner and the lower right corner of the first page in your set of plans

3 Select Digitizer gt Set Takeoff Area

4 Click each mark with the stylus pen as prompted

5 Verify the active area of the digitizer by looking at the image size located in the lower right corner of your screen

If you close the program before the takeoff is complete you will need to reestablish the takeoff area before you can add additional condition quantities

Electronic plans appear on your computer screen eliminating the need to set a takeoff area You simply drag your mouse across the conditions you wish to takeoff The conditions will be highlighted and quantities will be totaled instantly Electronic plans are available through a variety of services For information contact an On Center Software account manager

Section 5 Projects

28

Setting Scale for Specific Pages You may set the scale in each page view separately This will override the default scale setting in Project Properties for that page Setting the correct scale for the drawing before taking off quantities ensures accurate calculations Be careful to check the scale for each drawing in your project before doing takeoffs

1 Display the page you want to set select Edit gt Set Scale

2 Use the drop down arrow to select a scale that will be applied to that page

3 Click

OR

4 Access the pull-down scale settings on the Navigate toolbar

NOTE As you draw objects notice that the drawn object is similar in width to the object on your plans If it is not the scale set may not be correct

Calculating Scale You may calculate scale according to a known measurement between two points either with a digitizer or on electronic plans

1 Select Edit gt Calculate Scale using Image or Edit gt Calculate Scale using Digitizer

2 Follow the instructions in the related Calculate Scale dialog box You will be asked to click on the first and second points then to enter the dimension for that distance

3 The scale will be recalculated for the displayed page and the Scale display on the Navigate toolbar will show the new scale

Section 6

29

Conditions and Takeoff

This section will Draw Conditions to Takeoff Plan Quantities

What Zones will do to help your takeoff process

Discuss the ins and outs of Takeoffs

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

30

Creating Conditions

If you are starting a new project from scratch you will need to create conditions to takeoff quantities such as floor areas wall lengths and corner bead counts If you are using a template you will have several pre-designed conditions already listed on the Takeoff dock bar However you may want to change the characteristics of some conditions or create additional conditions for a particular project

1 Right Click within the Takeoff dock bar Select New gt Condition

Or

2 From the Takeoff dock bar Click (if the buttons are not showing right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select Show Buttons from the pop-up menu) The New Condition dialog appears

3 Select the condition type (Linear Area Count or Zone) from the pull-down menu accessed by the

down arrow next to the Type option

4 Press Tab or use the mouse (or stylus) to move to Name and enter a name for your condition

5 Specify the desired condition attributes See Condition Attributes for more detail

6 Click for condition to apply

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

31

Condition Attributes Each condition type will have related attributes to select or specify within the General and Advanced tabs of the New Condition dialog Once a condition has been used to takeoff a quantity from your plans certain attributes cannot be changed

All conditions allow the user to specify color and fill pattern for the object drawn

Linear Conditions

General Specify width and height by feet and inches Specify pitch in inches up to the nearest thousandth of an inch if applicable

Advanced Specify rounding for object quantities and droprun default length for electrical or plumbing drops at the ends of lines Select Connect to have lines connect at the corners where one line of the condition ends and another begins (and indicate Tolerance for the featurersquos activation as distance between the ends of two lines) Choose Trim to have lines automatically trim to a line being crossed Choose Curve to draw a curved line

Follow these examples for inputting feet and inches For 7 feet 6 inches type 706 for 13 feet 7 inches type 1307 For 20 feet type 2000

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

32

Area Conditions

General If needed you can specify the thickness (in inches) andor pitch (in inches)

Advanced Specify rounding for object quantities Choose to display an adjustable grid within the area and indicate matrix cell dimensions

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

33

Count Conditions

General

Specify height and indicate the size (in inches) and shape (square circle triangle rectangle or opening) of the count object as it will appear on screen

Advanced Count conditions have advanced attributes These options are available for all shapes except for openings

Zone Conditions Zones allow you to subdivide condition quantities making it easier to modify and complete jobs in phases They can be used at the end of a takeoff to isolate a group of condition quantities that are in different areas of the takeoff

Zones can also be used to break a takeoff into multi-phases and can even be used to isolate quantities while a job is in progress to group the amount of work that has been completed to date They can be applied to one or multiple pages in your plans automatically calculating the takeoff quantities for each zoned area

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

34

The zone feature is only available in Lite and Full Mode If you are in View Mode and would like

to use this feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade

Condition Notes A Note tab is provided for comments regarding the condition These notes will display on the Takeoff List report and will import into Quick Bid

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

35

Condition Results The Results tab of the New Condition is based on condition type Initial settings default to linear feet (LF) for linear conditions square feet (SF) for area conditions and count of items (EA) for count conditions and zones The first of the results fields will display for the condition items in the Takeoff dock bar area All results will display in worksheets and Takeoff List reports as well as in an Excel spreadsheet after being exported

Copying Conditions You may use the condition attributes from a condition yoursquove already created for any future conditions of the same type

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Click the Copy button from the toolbar

OR

3 Right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select copy

4 A new condition will appear in the list with the same condition attributes as the previous condition but with the quantities zeroed

Editing Conditions Once you have copied a condition you might want to change several attributes You can also edit an existing condition to fit any updated needs

1 Highlight the desired condition on the Takeoff dock bar

2 Click the Change button

OR

3 Double-click on the condition you wish to edit to bring up the Change Condition dialog

NOTE The Change Condition dialog differs from the New Condition dialog only in that if takeoffs

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

36

have been performed in your project with this condition you will not be able to change the type of condition or certain properties under the advanced tab of the dialog box

Deleting Conditions 1 Click on the condition in the Takeoff Dock bar area

2 Click the Delete button on the toolbar

OR

3 Right-click and select Delete from the pop-up menu

All takeoff associated with the deleted condition will be deleted immediately and permanently

Organizing Project Conditions Within your project you can create folders andor sub-folders for different types of conditions You may even want to create a folder containing conditions with reset values

To get started organizing your conditions make sure you are viewing the condition tree (right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select Show Tree)

Creating Folders and Sub-Folders 1 Right-click in the Takeoff Dock bar area

2 Select New gt Folder from the pop-up menu

Copying Folders

1 Click on the folder and click Copy on the toolbar

2 All copied conditions within the new folder will have values reset to zero

Renaming Folders

1 Click on the folder

2 Right-click and select Rename from the pop-up menu

3 Enter a name for your folder and click the Enter button

Changing Condition Order

You may move conditions up or down in the condition list of the Takeoff dock bar to suit your project needs

1 Select the condition you would like to move by clicking to highlight it

NOTE When you are ready to move the highlighted conditions be sure that you start

moving using the last condition chosen That condition will have a highlighted boarder

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

37

2 Drag and drop any the condition from one place to another in the list You may also move a condition to another folder on the list in this way

Drawing with Conditions Snap Angles Set up snap angles to prevent lines from appearing jagged Snap angles are commonly set at 15deg and shift snap angles at 0deg

1 Go to Tools gt Options Options dialog appears

2 Under the General tab make the desired settings

3 Click to save the settings As they are drawn lines will snap to the set degree

Drawing a Linear Object 1 Select a condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff dock bar

2 Move the cursor into the Image takeoff area of the screen you will see the cursor display as crosshairs

3 Click and hold left mouse button then drag mouse to draw a line

4 Release mouse button to set line

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

38

5 Repeat steps for further lines

Continuous Mode This feature allows you to draw an object that has connected lines

1 Click the icon from the Takeoff toolbar

OR

2 Go to Tools gt Continuous Mode

3 Follow steps 1-3 from Draw a Linear Object

4 Click at each point of intersection The object will be connected

5 Double-click after making the final point to set the lines

Drawing a Curve To draw a curved line the Curve option must be checked under the Advanced tab of the Condition dialog

1 Click where you want to begin the curve and drag in a straight line to the position for the other endpoint of the curve

2 Click on the line to select it Handles in the shapes of small squares will appear at either end of

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

39

the line and in the center of the line

3 Move the cursor over the center handles until the cursor becomes a two-way arrow

4 Click and drag in the direction of the curve bending the line as you move the cursor Release to set the curve (The line you began with will disappear)

Draw a circle by drawing two curved lines connected

Drawing an Area Object Area conditions are drawn similarly to continuous mode lines You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete your area takeoff

NOTE When drawing an area do not intersect the perimeter or line of the object you are drawing

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

3 The area will be filled with the pattern set for that condition

NOTE The simulated circle will be good enough for you to be able to make a bid

To create a circular area click from point to point with very short distances in between points simulating a circlersquos perimeter Double-click after setting the last point to set the area

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

40

Grid Options Grids give you an added advantage when installing materials such as tiles Use this feature to get a count for how many tiles are needed for an area

1 Double-click on an area condition in the Takeoff dock bar to open its Condition dialog

2 Click on the Advanced tab to show its options

3 Check the box next to Grid by clicking in it

4 Indicate the dimensions of the cell matrix in inches (For example 200 x 400)

5 Under Results tab choose each (EA) for one of the results fields This will tabulate a number of grid cells (including partial grid cells) in area

6 Click to save your settings

7 Use the Move Grid and Rotate Grid features in the Tools menu to manipulate the grid as desired

Grid Calculation

1 Go to Tools gt Options menu

1 Specify if On-Screen Takeoff automatically should Calculate Grid Position

2 If AreaGrid Size is selected On-Screen Takeoff will calculate the number of items needed to fill the grid based on grid demintions

3 Click to accept and close the dialog

To move a line at any angle (regardless of default setting) press the Shift key while moving the mouse

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

41

Backout Mode This feature allows you to take out part of an area and deduct that amount of square footage

1 Select Tools gt Backout Mode

2 Outline the are you want backed out as you would when drawing a regular area object (see Drawing an Area Object)

3 The outlined area will clear and quantities will be recalculated

NOTE The perimeter of the backout area will be added to the LF quantity for that condition

Drawing a Count Object Square triangle rectangle and circle shaped count objects can easily be placed on images

1 Select the condition

2 Click in the location where you want the object to appear

3 To place an opening-shaped count item like a door or window you must click over an existing linear object such as a wall

4 On the Results tab you can change the height properties to give you the result you need

5 If Backout is checked on the advanced tab for each count opening the opening-shaped count item will back out a corresponding section of the linear object

Opening shaped count items are sized at 3rsquo0rdquo by default

Drawing a Zone Zones are drawn in the same way as area objects and may be any polygonal shape You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete the zone perimeter

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

42

Selecting Objects

1 Use the Select Tool to select objects

You can also select all objects that correspond to a condition

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Right-click and choose Select All

3 All objects with this condition will be highlighted with squares as an outline

Moving and Resizing Objects Linear

1 To move or resize a linear object click anywhere on the line to select it

2 To move the line position your pointer over the center handles When the mouse is positioned over the handles you will see a two-way arrow You will only be able to move the line in the direction of the arrows

3 Drag the line to a new position

4 Clicking and dragging the handles on the ends of the line will allow you to lengthen or shorten your line

Area and Zone

1 To move an area object or zone in its entirety click and drag it to its new position

2 Grabbing a handle at a corner or intersection of the object will allow you to adjust and change its perimeter

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

43

Count 1 To move a square circle rectangle or triangle shaped count object click and drag

2 Click and drag an opening shaped count object along the length of the linear object to the desired position then release

NOTE An opening shaped count object may not be moved from its associated linear condition object however it may be moved up and down the length of the linear object

Layers On-Screen Takeoff allows you to sort and separate your takeoff objects within the same job and on the same page On-Screen Takeoff gives you this flexibility through the use of layers

By assigning different conditions to different layers (for example differentiating between floors ceilings and walls) you can choose to view all layers or turn off certain layers to display and print the remaining groups of conditions only You may also remove the background image of electronic plans add text and hot link symbols or print only your condition takeoffs

Layers are only available in Full Mode If you are in View or Lite Mode and would like to use this

feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade Default Layers

On-Screen Takeoff begins every project with three default layers Image Annotation and Default The Image layer holds the electronic plan files you may have in your project The Annotation layer possesses all text notations highlighting and hot links in the project The Default layer will appear in the Condition dialog when creating or editing a condition (listed in the takeoff dock bar) Conditions are assigned to the Default layer unless otherwise specified by the user

Creating Layers To assign a condition to a layer other than the default layer you must first create additional layers for your project

1 Select View gt Layers to open the Layers dialog

2 Click An unnamed layer will be added

3 Click within the empty box and type a name for your layer (for example Wall)

4 New layers are added as active layers The adjacent box under the Show column will be checked

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

44

Assigning a Layer to a Condition 1 Open the Condition dialog box by creating a new condition or editing an existing condition

2 Under the General tab click on the down arrow in the Layer field to display optional layers

3 Select the desired layer for the condition Only the Default layer and layers you have added will be displayed

4 Click

View and Hide Layers

1 Select View gt Layers

2 Under the Show column check the box to view or remove the check (by clicking on it) to hide the specific layer

3 Click to accept and close the Layers dialog

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

45

Assigning Text to a Layer When adding text to an image On-Screen Takeoff has the capability to assign the text to a specified layer

1 Select the Text Tool

2 Click at the point you want to place your text

3 Type in your text using the Enter key for line breaks

4 Click the drop down arrow next to the Layer field and select the desired layer

Section 7

46

Printing and Exporting

This section will

Printing options and procedures

Exporting data by copying and pasting

Exporting quantity results to Excel spreadsheets

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

47

Print Setup On-Screen Takeoff allows the user to print the image takeoff list and worksheet

1 Select File gt Print Setup The Print Setup dialog will open

2 Select a printer or leave the default selection listed (change from the default printer displayed by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the field)

3 Indicate page size and printer tray option (Source) Access page size options by clicking on the

down arrow at the right of the field

4 Choose Portrait or Landscape orientation

5 Click to accept and close the dialog

Printing Images The image area can include the electronic plans the takeoff objects added text and hot links To print a subset of these (for example just the takeoffs without the plans or the added text and hot link symbols) hide layers that you do not want to print (see Section 6 View and Hide Layers) When you are printing your images every page will show the scale of the takeoff you are printing

1 Click on the Image tab to display the area of your project

2 Select File gt Print (or Ctrl + P)

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

48

3 Select the desired view (What to print) and the Image Range

4 Click The second Print dialog will open

5 Change settings accordingly or click if you accept the default settings

Printing Takeoff Lists and Worksheets In Takeoff Lists and Worksheets you may hide columns to print only certain results or adjust column widths to fit the report within the page size selected

1 In Takeoff List or Worksheet view move your cursor to the right side of the columnrsquos title bar the cursor will display as a two-way arrow

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

49

2 Click and drag to adjust the width of the column Holding the mouse button you may

slide the title bar under the title bar to its left to hide the column completely

3 Select File gt Print or press Ctrl + P to access the Print dialog

4 Indicate desired printer and choose the number of copies

5 Click to print and close the dialog

When printing the condition list we suggest printing in landscape

To reset to the default column widths double-click on the right border of a column heading will reset the column to its right (or previously to its right before being hidden)

Print Preview 1 Select File gt Print Preview

2 Use and to vary your view 3 If viewing an image choose current full or scale view to see how it displays

4 For printed outputs that cover more than one page use and to view adjacent pages or click on the down arrow next to Page field and select the page you want displayed

Exporting Using the CopyPaste Feature You may copy all the data or sections from the worksheet and the takeoff list view in On-Screen Takeoff and paste it into another application When pasting into Excel the cell layout will be maintained

1 Highlight the areas you wish to paste Click and hold the left mouse button down as you drag the cursor over the area to be selected then releasing the mouse button

OR

2 Select the entire takeoff list quickly click on the left On-Screen Takeoff column header and hold and drag the cursor across the remaining column headings

The number of pages for the view selected will display in the lower left-hand corner The zoom percentage that applies to the view will be displayed in the lower right-hand corner next to page size of the drawing

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

50

3 In the worksheet view you may highlight rows by clicking on the numbered buttons to the left of each row clicking and dragging across column headings or clicking and dragging over individual cells in the worksheet

Click anywhere in the appropriate view to deselect the area

4 Once your selection is highlighted you may select Edit gt Copy or Ctrl C from the keyboard 5 On your monitor switch to the application into which you want to paste your selection 6 Select Edit gt Paste in the new application or simply press Ctrl + V to paste

The colored keys for conditions cannot be pasted

Using the Export Feature You may export condition quantities to specified cell location within an Excel worksheet file Cell target locations are assigned in the Results tab of the condition dialogs on the Export line relating to each quantity measurement type

On-Screen Takeoff will export takeoff quantity results for up to three different quantity types that you specify For instance you may want to know the number of square feet in a ceiling area as well as the number of linear feet in its perimeter

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

51

1 Bring up the Condition dialog by double-clicking on a condition in the takeoff dock bar or by

selecting the condition and clicking

2 Click on the Results tab to access its fields The default quantities for the condition type will display

3 For each results field click on the arrow to access the pull-down menu and select the appropriate quantity (for example SF LF EA etchellip)

4 Have your Excel spreadsheet opened and saved in a file

5 Specify the Excel spreadsheet cell locations where you want the results to go

6 For a cell in the first sheet of your spreadsheet type in the cell address (eg a1) Case is not important

7 For a cell on a successive sheet of your spreadsheet type in sheet the number followed by a comma and the cell address without any spaces (eg sheet2a1) Case is not important

8 Click

9 Select File gt Export gt Condition Qty to Excel

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

52

10 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

11 Click to export On-Screen Takeoff results to specified cell locations in the Excel file When you return to the Excel application you will see the values have been added to the specified cell locations in your spreadsheet

12 Save your Excel file

Exporting Worksheet to Excel

1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 From On-Screen Takeoff Select File gt Export gt Worksheet to Excel

4 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

5 Click When you return to the Excel application you will see the values from the Worksheet Tab have been added to your spreadsheet

6 Save your Excel file

Exporting Takeoff to CVS 1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 Click the Takeoff Tab in the project you want to export the information

4 Select File gt Export gt Takeoff to CSV

5 Browse to the location of the CSV spreadsheet file click file to select it

6 Click the Save

NOTE CSV files can be opened in Excel Lotus Access etc One may consider this option more of a ldquodumprdquo into a file

The Excel application must be active (it may be minimized on the application bar) with the target spreadsheet open in the application Otherwise an error will occur with the export operation that will affect both the On-Screen Takeofftrade file and the Excel spreadsheet

Section 8

53

Advanced Features

This section will

Some special features of working with condition objects in the takeoff area

Details of advanced options for conditions

Advanced features of the Project Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

54

Features to Use with Objects Roping Feature You can move copy or delete using this feature Using the Select tool (the pointer) you may select several objects at once by clicking and dragging an outline around the objects then releasing the mouse button Roping may select either objects completely within the outlined area (inclusive) or objects both within and touched by the outlined area (touching) Specify your roping preference under Tools gt Options

1 Click and hold the mouse button at a point on the screen near the objects to be selected and drag to surround the objects with an outline

2 Release the mouse button The objects will be selected

3 You may now

Move the group around on the page by clicking within the group dragging the mouse and releasing the button to place the objects

Delete the group of objects by clicking the Delete key or

Copy and paste by pressing Ctrl C to copy the group then Ctrl V to paste it The pasted copy of the grouped objects will appear slightly offset from the original objects

Section 8 Advanced Features

55

Applying a DropRun Count

Use the droprun feature when calculating quantities to take into account the drop or run of a linear condition such as electrical lines or plumbing pipes Drop or run lengths may be added separately to any linear condition on screen while a default droprun length may be indicated for a condition as a whole

1 Select the desired linear condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff Dock bar

2 Click the Change button in the toolbar to open the Change Condition dialog

3 Click the Advanced tab to access the advanced options and click inside the DropRun check box

4 Enter a default length to be applied to all of this condition Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches) You can leave the length blank and manually enter drop run on each segment drawn

5 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog

Edit DropRun Count

1 With the related linear condition in the Takeoff Dock bar highlighted or with the pointer tool selected

2 click on the desired linear object in the image takeoff area The Count button will become active

3 Click on the Count button (alternatively select Tools gt Count) The default droprun amount will show in the pop-up Count dialog (Default length will be zero if droprun has not been selected in this conditionrsquos properties)

4 Type in the desired length Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches)

5 Click the OK button The additional amount will be reflected in the corresponding quantity The new DropRun count will apply only to the object edited

Adding Text in Image View

On-Screen Takeoff allows you to place text comments around your quantity takeoffs that may be printed along with plan images and objects Text is automatically placed within the Annotation Layer (that includes text and hot links)

1 To place text on the image select the Text Tool and click at the point you want to place your text opening a text box

2 Type in your information clicking Enter for line breaks

3 When you are finished click the OK button to exit the text box

4 To reposition text simply click on the text (with the Text Tool active) to select it

5 Move the cursor over the text the cursor will now display as a four-way arrow

6 Click and drag the mouse to position the text as desired

Section 8 Advanced Features

56

1 To edit existing text use the Text Tool to double-click on the text to open the editing box

2 Enter additional text or use the Backspace key to delete text as necessary

Formatting Text Once created you may format the font size type style and color of your text

1 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Font or click on the Font button in the Takeoff Toolbar

2 Select the desired features (color options are disabled) and click the OK button

3 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Color or click on the Color button in the Takeoff Toolbar The Color dialog will open

4 Click on a color in the Basic Color palette or create a color and add to the Custom Colors palette (Be sure to click on the color in the Custom Colors palette to select it)

5 Click the OK button

Object Properties

Linear Objects

Linear objects may be set to connect at corners

A linear object may be set to trim automatically when crossing another linear object (Check the trim option under the advanced tab of the Condition dialog)

When you move a connected linear object objects automatically move and resize connected lines accordingly (quantities are then recalculated)

This feature requires that the connected linear object be moved using the center handles (does not apply when resizing the line from the ends)

Objects constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

Objects are measured from centerline to centerline

Section 8 Advanced Features

57

Area Objects When drawing an area use your escape key to undo the last line drawn You may reverse your

drawing of an area using the escape key

The area will not fill with color and pattern until the user double-clicks after the last line is set

Lines drawn to delineate an area object constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

After selecting an area to move or adjust position the mouse in the center to move the entire area position the mouse at the sides or corners to adjust the perimeter

Count Objects

All count objects are quantified by the physical number of objects per page and reported as EA for the UOM The quantity for the current Image View is (displayed in the Condition List) and the total quantity in your project is displayed in the Takeoff View and Worksheet View)

Square circle rectangle and triangle shaped count objects do not displace or subtract from other object quantities when placed on top of them However on the Advanced Tab for the count condition a connect property can be set (this is a check box) so that when a count object of this shape is put on top of a Linear type takeoff object it will move with the linear if said linear is moved

An opened-shaped count object must be placed within a linear object Opening shaped count objects may also be measured by linear foot or linear yard (EA SF and SY are also options) Opening shaped count items default to a width of 3rsquo 0rdquo at the time of creation This size can be changed The small medium and large size are not options on this type of condition anymore Check Backout on the Advanced tab for each Count object back out the footage (or yardage) of opening-shaped count objects in which they are placed

NOTE In order to see this Backout functionality (in quantity) for SY or SF deductions at least one of the

results for the Linear(s) this object will be placed on must be set to SY or SF and the count object must have a height quantity

Advanced Features of Conditions The Round Feature Under the Advanced tab of the linear and area Condition dialogues you may specify quantity rounding (in inches) For linear objects rounding applies to each linear object drawn For area objects rounding will apply to each segment of the area perimeter adjusting the perimeter and area calculations For example With a linear condition entering 12 in the Round field will round up each related linear object to the nearest 12 inches or one foot With this setting two walls of 1 4 would each round to 2 0 totaling 4 0

NOTE In the Takeoff Dock bar condition list and in the On-Screen Takeoff reports quantities will be displayed in whole numbers rounded up to the nearest foot However calculations are based on true quantities without rounding unless the Round Feature is engaged

Pitch Pitch may apply either to linear or area conditions It is measured in rise per linear foot Entering 12 indicates a 12 rise per 12 of linear distance (a pitch of 12 over 12) or an angle of 45deg

Section 8 Advanced Features

58

Advanced Features of Project Properties Selecting Multiple Pages

1 Select a single page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry

2 Drag the cursor down the column of numbers to select consecutive pages

3 Click on the blank button at the top of this column to select all pages in the Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

59

Changing Image Assigned to a Drawing 1 Select the page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry 2 Click the Change Image button The Change Image dialog box will appear

3 Navigate to the desired file and select by clicking on it

4 Click the Open button The electronic file assigned to the page will have been changed to reflect the new file choice

Changing Image File Path 1 Select pages as described above

2 Choose Change Folder

3 In the Change Folder dialog navigate to the appropriate folder

4 Click the OK button The file path will have been changed for the selected page entries

Delete a Page from Project Properties 1 Select the page you want to delete by clicking on its associated number (in the gray box at the

left of the entry)

2 Choose Delete Page

All Takeoff on the page will be deleted immediately and permanently

Section 8 Advanced Features

60

Advanced Features of Tool Options

Calculation Method On-Screen Takeoff has built-in calculation options to allow for faster work and faster saves until your takeoff is complete Calculation options are found by selecting Tools gt Options then clicking on the Calculation tab

Calculation method can be set to Automatic Automatic except Grids and Manual Manual will allow the program to operate more quickly while Automatic or Automatic except Grids allows the user to see quantity changes as takeoffs are made

In any mode you may press F9 to recalculate quantities for the On-Screen Takeoff current totals

Configuration Tab

When the ldquoPage Label (A01)rdquo radial button is chosen On-Screen Takeoff puts the numbered label on all the pages of in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar If the Page Descriptionrdquo radial button is chosen then a description of what takeoff is on that specific page will be shown in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar

This section of the configuration tab gives you options on how you want to export your information When the ldquoFolderSubfolder Namesrdquo radial button is chosen than on your file that you are exporting to will have all the conditions folders and subfolders In the Delimiter box you can choose the symbol that is needed to separate the information you are exporting Some files need semicolons () or colons () to make sure the information comes exported in is separated it the appropriate places

Section 8 Advanced Features

61

In previous versions of On-Screen Takeoff there are views that users need to have in order for them to display their information By either choosing ldquoOST 1xrdquo or ldquoOST 2xrdquo it will let the program know you want your columns of information exported in that specific format

When you have the Confirm Deletions radial button of ldquoYesrdquo chosen than every time you delete anything you will get a dialog box confirming your intentions of deletion

While working with your takeoff you have a choice to either view the legend of your conditions or hide it Choose whichever radial button that suits your needs

For those who prefer to use the Enter key to navigate in dialog boxes this option is just for that

Font Tab The Font tab is designed for you to make your own look and feel for the application At the bottom of this tab it will show you sample of the fonts and colors you have chosen

Renaming the Current Page You may change the name of the current page in the takeoff area of On-Screen Takeoff by selecting Edit gt Rename Page

This opens the Name Page dialog and you may simply type in a new name and click the Enter button The new name for the file will be reflected on the title bar for the page and in Project Properties

You also may access the Rename Page function by right-clicking in the takeoff area while in Image View and selecting the option from the pop-up menu that appears

Section 9

62

Saving and Exiting

This section will

Explain how to save projects

Show you how to safely exit the program

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

63

Saving Your Project

1 Select File gt Save 2 If your project has not previously been saved a Save dialog box will open to allow you to name

the file and choose the directory and folder in which to save your file 3 Once saved File gt Save will simply save the current version of the file

OR

4 Select File gt Save As then type in a new name for the file and save to the desired file path

The Auto-save Feature With the Auto-save feature On-Screen Takeoff automatically backs up your open project You may choose to have more than one level of backup files The first backup copy will have the extension b00 and successive files will be b01 b02 and so on If you have designated four levels of backup files after the fourth backup copy has been created (b03) the next file will be saved over the file with extension b00 Further backup saves will then rotate through the four backup files in the same way

1 Select Tools gt Options 2 In the Auto-save area (under the General tab) select the frequency of backup file creation (in

minutes) and the number of levels for the feature 3 You also may disengage the feature by clicking in the check box to clear it

The Auto-save feature automatically saves backup copies to the directory of the current project If you are working from a write-protected area such as a CD-ROM On-Screen Takeoff will place backup files in the On-Screen Takeoff folder

Exiting When you are finished using On-Screen Takeoff it is very easy to exit Exiting is very important because of security reasons If someone were to use your computer they could enter the application and view and manipulate information

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

64

On-Screen Takeoff closes the open project when you open another or create a new project or when you exit the program

1 Select File gt Exit

OR

2 You also may click at the upper right-hand corner of the application to exit

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

65

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer When you get your digitizer from GTCO you will need to connect it to your computer Follow the instructions outlined below to do this

Note For rollup digitizers the metal bar must be oriented to the top or right hand side

Connecting the Digitizer 1 Lay the digitizer out flat 2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer 3 Plug in the power adapter 4 Plug the interface (IO) cable into the digitizer 5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into an open serial port on computer

Note GTCO Technical support phone number is 410-381-6688 The electronic manual (on diskette) from GTCO contains more detailed installation and operation instructions for the GTCO digitizer model you have

Installing other Digitizer Drivers If you are using a GTCO Digitizer you will need to install the GTCO TabletWorks Drivers

If you are using a Digitizer not supported by GTCO Tablet Works 10 please contact the manufacturer of your digitizer for assistance with installation

Installing GTCO TabletWorks Drivers 1 Insert the On Center CD into the CD-ROM drive The CD Startup screen will open 2 Click on Install Software 3 Select Additional Software and Drivers 4 Select Digitizer Driver 5 Follow the instructions for installing TabletWorks 10

Adhering the Template The template is a small plastic sticker used to enable mouse function when using the digitizer with On-Screen Takeoff Place your template on your digitizer We suggest placing it in the bottom right corner of the digitizer about one inch inside the takeoff area

Note You may either peel off the back of the template and use the adhesive surface or you can tape the template down

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

66

Testing the Digitizer Drivers Before running OST you may test the digitizer by moving the stylus around on the digitizer pad it should move the mouse cursor (if mouse emulation is enabled)

If the digitizer does not move the mouse cursor on the screen

The superset codes may need to be reset Reset the superset codes by touching on the border of the digitizer with the stylus The digitizer should beep several times

The digitizer may not be communicating with the computer Be sure the COM port selected is correct Be sure the COM port selected is correct If you are not able to get the digitizer to move the mouse cursor you need to call GTCO technical support for help

Note The Mouse Emulation is not required for On-Screen Takeoff to work properly It is used only for the Template functionality if the digitizer is moving the cursor the wrong direction (up instead of sideways or vice-versa)

Click the L-shaped arrow symbol on the digitizer with the stylus

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

67

Appendix II Toolbar Items Main Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

68

Tool Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

69

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

70

Navigate Toolbar (Continued)

Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

71

Takeoff Toolbar (Continued)

Image Toolbar

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

72

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

This section will detail how to load plans from a F W Dodge CD-ROM into an On-Screen Takeoff project file ready for takeoffs

Dodge files may be added to the Project Properties dialog However loading the files in that way will load the files by number rather than name description If you want to load one page only from your Dodge CD You will have to rename the page to display the name rather than number of the file

To load plan files from a Dodge CD so that the files load sequentially by file number but are displayed by name rather than by number within your project follow the instructions below

Opening a Dodge project from a CD-ROM 1 Insert the CD into the drive 2 Choose File gt Custom 3 Choose Dodge Plans Project (plansdat) as the file type 4 Select the appropriate file type by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the Files of type

field 5 In the Look in field access your drive paths by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the

field then

Navigate to your CD-ROM drive Open the data folder and Open the Projects folder

6 Select the desired project and open its folder 7 Open the plansdat file 8 All the images will come in sequenced correctly for that job along with the full descriptions

(names) of each page If there is not a plans folder in the project folder then plans do not exist for that project on the CD Opening the plansdat file will yield an empty project

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

73

Appendix IV Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer The On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer is a limited version of On Center Softwarersquos commercial takeoff software If your status bar located at the very bottom of the main window says View Mode in the lower left-hand corner then you are using the Plan Viewer You can use the plan viewer to

View CD-based amp converted CAD drawings

View a previously created OST file and associated drawings

Download electronic plans online

Navigate through drawings

Quickly Takeoff linearsareas and counts

Zoom in to view the plan better

Print drawings directly from the viewer

Viewing an On-Screen Takeoff Project File

1 To open an OST file that was previously created with of On-Screen Takeoff 2 Select File gt Open 3 An Open dialog will appear if you do not see the OST file you are looking for select the

Look In drop down arrow 4 A drop down menu will appear listing the various folders drives and mapped drives located

on your computer select the correct drive or folder location and continue to browse to the location of your OST file

5 When you see your OST file double-click it to open it 6 Any takeoff and drawings should appear on the Image tab view

If you do not see the drawings but do see the colored takeoff layer the drawings may

not be located in the same place they were originally saved at Go to File gt Project Properties and check the Image File path for each listed page If the image file path is pointing to a CD drive make sure the CD is inside the CR-ROM

Downloading Electronic Plans If your Online Plan Service provides a special file format (OSX) required to use this feature of our plan viewer you can immediately downloaded all electronic plans of a project directly from our viewer

Most Plan Room web sites will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff when a request to download plans is made Your particular Plan Room may differ in operation so please contact the provider directly with questions on using the site

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

74

When you request to download or open a project file from a Plan Room you will usually have the open to open or save an OSX file Choosing open will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff Alternately you may choose to save the file to a local hard drive After you have saved the file either double-click it to launch On-Screen Takeoff or open the OSX file using On-Screen Takeoff by clicking File then Open and locating the file on your hard drive You will need to change the file type to OSX

After the OSX file is opened you will see an additional tab appear in the Conditions List window called Pages

The Pages tab shows the hierarchy of your project Gray file icons represent pages that have not been downloaded and blue icons represents pages that have been downloaded

To download a page simply double-click the page icon

If you wish to select a group of pages to download you can use the Ctrl or Shift key to multiple select them then click the Download button

If you wish to download all pages at once click the Download All button

Downloaded pages will now appear in the Project Properties dialog in the same order in which they appear in the Pages tab

Creating Quick Takeoffs With On-Screen Takeoff you can create quick takeoffs to measure quantities even if you dont have the full version of our program However using the Quick Takeoff functionality shows you just a fraction of what the full version can do

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar is located at the top of the image view It has three buttons designated for three types of takeoffs Linear Area and Count The Quantity drop down list will show secondary quantities for Linears and Areas The Units drop down allows you to select how you want your quantities displayed Feet Inches Yards Millimeters and Meters

NOTE Every time change the type of takeoff you are performing (switching from Area to Linear for example) the previous quantities and takeoff objects will disappear They will also disappear when you changes pages

NOTE You can use the Dimension Tool to basically measure the distance between two points or linears The distance will display on the status bar at the bottom of the application

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

75

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions General

Where is On-Screen Takeoff installed on my computer

Typically it is installed in CProgram FilesOn-Screen Takeoff

In Explorer how do I recognize On-Screen Takeoff file types

On-Screen Takeoff data is stored in a single file per job lsquojob name OSTrsquo On-Screen Takeoff templates are stored as lsquotemplate nameTPOrsquo

Can only one project at a time be open

Yes For that reason opening another project automatically closes the project on screen You will be asked to save any changes

Is only one scale allowed per page What about on drawings that have multiple detail sections on a page and each of those drawings have different scales

Yes For pages with drawings of different scales copy the drawing to another project page and set the appropriate scale

I cannot perform backout on an area that is along a linear

As a workaround use the On-Screen Takeoff layers feature to help you with this issue Electronic Images

How do I start a project from drawings that have been scanned and written to a CD-ROM

Open a new project Select File gt Project Properties and select Auto Add Navigate to your CD and the appropriate folder and select any image file in that location Click Open All files in the location will load into your project Recommended that images are copied from CD to hard drive for performance

If I get a disk of drawings in AutoCAD format (R13 or R14) can I read them in On-Screen Takeoff

Yes On-Screen Takeoff now reads DWG DXF and many other format that are saved with AutoCAD

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

76

When I click on the all pages button what is supposed to happen Currently nothing seems to change when I click on that button

The All Pages button is used to apply the Darken and Enhance Plans feature to all pages in the project (as opposed to only the current page on screen)

Is there a way to deduct a large skylight from an area condition

Yes with the related area condition selected in the Takeoff Dock bar unselect the Backout button on the Takeoff Toolbar then draw the Backout area The area quantity will be deducted from the related condition object and the linear measurement of the Backout perimeter will be added

Digitizer Issues

How do I connect a Digitizer to the computer

See Appendix I Connecting a Digitizer

The Place Template menu choice is disabled

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or the digitizer or the digitzer drivers are not installed

It wonrsquot let me select the Set Takeoff Area menu choice

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or no job is open a digitizer is not installed or the drivers are not installed

The digitizer stylus is not moving the cursor or crosshairs

Click S-0-1 superset on the digitizer

How do I convert my old GTCO Digitizer to work with On- Screen Takeofftrade

Call GTCO and they may be able to reconfigure your digitizer to be compatible with On-Screen Takeoff

Printing Issues Which Printers work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible printers include On-Screen Takeoff Hewlett Packard Epson and Canon printers If you are having printer difficulties please contact support and specify the type of printer along with other pertinent information Contact support at wwwoncentercomsupport or email supportoncentercom

Which Plotters work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible Plotters include Hewlett Packard DesignJet plotters and the EnCAD Cadjet II If you are having plotter difficulties please contact support and specify the type of plotter concerned

ViewingDisplay I can no longer see my condition list How do I get it back

The toolbars and Dock bars can be turned on and off through the View gt Toolbars menu options

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

77

This is also accessible by right-clicking in the toolbar area and selecting (or deselecting) a toolbar listed

I cannot view my folders in the condition list

Right-click in the Takeoff Dock barcondition list area and select Show Tree to display your folders

My Status Bar reads Viewer Mode and I am unable to draw conditions

On-Screen Takeoff needs to be Authorized Or you need to purchase an upgrade Click the Perform Advanced Takeoff button on the main toolbar

I hid a Dock bar and when I selected to view it again it appeared alongside the other Dock

bar instead of stacked on top of it How do I fix it

Pick up the Dock bar by clicking on the bar at the top and continuing to hold down the mouse button drag the Dock bar over the other one It will resize and appear stacked with the other

When I open image files from a CD the images are all upside down How do I get them right

side up

To flip pages from top to bottom follow the steps below 1 Click the All Pages button on the Image Toolbar (All Pages is engaged when the button

is not clicked) 2 Click the Flip Horizontal button on the Image Toolbar 3 Click the All Pages button again to disengage

Templates How do I create a Template

Follow the steps below 1 Create a typical project 2 Choose File gt Save As 3 Choose On-Screen Takeoff Template Files as the file type to save 4 Name the file This will save all of the condition setups as well as the layers for the

project

How do I create a new project from a template

Follow the steps below 1 Choose File gt New 2 Select a template from those listed in the New dialog This will open a new project with

conditions and layers saved from a previous project but no pages or takeoff

78

INDEX

Area Conditions 32

Area Objects 57

Auto Scrolling 20

Auto-save 63

Backout Mode 41

Calculation Method 60

Conditions 29

Configuration 60

Contents Tab 6

Continuous Mode 38

Count Conditions 33

Count Objects 57

Digitizer 10 65 76

Docking Toolbars 13

Dodge CD 72

Drawing 27 37

DropRun Count 55

Environment 18

Exiting 63

Exporting 49

Features 16

Font 61

Frequently Asked Questions 75

Grid 40

Help File 5

Hiding Toolbars 13

Hot Links 21

Image 19 59

Image files 9

Image Toolbar 12 71

Images 75

Index Tab 6

Layers 43

Linear Conditions 31

Linear Objects 56

Main Toolbar 12 67

Menus 14

Moving Toolbars 13

Navigate Toolbar 12 69

Navigating 20

On-Screen Takeofftrade 2

Page 59 61

Pages 20 25 28

Plan Viewer 73

Plans 26

Printing 47 76

Project Properties 25

Projects 22

Quick Start Video 18

Resizing Toolbars 13

Roping 54

Saving 63

Scale 28

Search Tab 7

Selecting Objects 42

Setup 8

Start On-Screen Takeofftrade 17

System Requirements 9

Takeoff 19 27

Takeoff Toolbar 70 71

Takeoff Toolbar 12

Template Files 23

TIF (Group4) 9

Tool Toolbar 12 68

Toolbar 67

Toolbars 12

View Toolbar 12 69

Viewing Toolbars 12

Worksheet 20

Zone Conditions 33

Zoom Toolbar 12 69

  • On-Screen Takeoff Lite
  • Table of Contents
  • Section 1 - Introduction
  • Section 2 - Setup
  • Section 3 - Toolbars and Menus
  • Section 4 - Features
  • Section 5 - Projects
  • Section 6 - Conditions and Takeoff
  • Section 7 - Printing and Exporting
  • Section 8 - Advanced Features
  • Section 9 - Saving and Exiting
  • Appendix I - Installing Your Digitizer
  • Appendix II - Toolbar Items
  • Appendix III - Loading Plans from a Dodge CD
  • Appendix IV - Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer
  • Appendix V - Frequently Asked Questions
  • Index

Section 4 Features

19

Image View

This view shows the plan file andor takeoff conditions drawn from your plans

Takeoff View This view displays the height if applicable and quantity breakdowns of your conditions according to result types indicated (eg linear feet square feet or count of items) for zones pages and the project as a whole It also displays notes per condition

Section 4 Features

20

Worksheet View This view displays the condition and quantity in units of measure specified in the first results field of the Results tab in the Condition dialog and allows the user to enter amounts for material labor and subcontractor takeoffs

NOTE When in the Worksheet view tab out the field then save This is keep all the values saved

Navigating On-Screen Takeoff

Auto Scrolling When creating linear areas or zones On-Screen Takeoff will automatically scroll the image view when necessary It will move as your mouse or digitizer moves beyond the edge of the current view

Changing Pages

1 Select View gt Next Page Previous Page or Go To Page (specify page number for the Go to Page option)

2 You may also select the corresponding arrows for these options from the Navigate Toolbar The

drop down arrow in the Page field will list the pages The and arrows will take you to the

previous or next page The and arrows will take you to the first or last page

OR

Section 4 Features

21

3 Or press Ctrl G for the Go To Page dialog

Hot Links Hot links allow you to move quickly from one drawing to the pertinent area of another drawing A hot link is handy when viewing enlarged areas of a page and needing the ability to jump back to a reference page

1 Select Tools gt Hot Link

OR

2 Click from the Tools Toolbar

3 Click on the page where you want to set the link The Hot Link dialog will open

4 Using the current page display on the Navigate Toolbar access the pull-down menu of pages by

clicking on the arrow at the right

5 Select the page for your link (You may also choose View gt Go to Page and select by page number)

6 Manipulate the view using the zoom tool and the scroll bars

7 Click

8 After joining a hot link to another page the hot link arrows in the Navigation Toolbar will become active

9 Move a hot link to another location on the page by clicking then click and drag the hot link image anywhere on the page

Section 5

22

Projects

This section will

Help you create settings important to your projects

Explain how On-Screen Takeoff works with your electronic or paper plans

Section 5 Projects

23

Project Template Files You can begin your project with a template Templates allow you to take advantage of conditions and settings used with previous projects

On-Screen Takeoff templates contain condition lists and established layer separations from previous projects you have created You may also use the sample templates provided with On-Screen Takeoff as a great starting point All aspects of the templates may be adjusted for a new project

1 Select File gt New and click the OK button

2 From the New dialog box choose the template that best fits your project

3 The conditions for this template will appear in the Takeoff Dock bar and the Project Properties dialog will open asking for further information

4 Use File gt Save or File gt Save As to rename and save your new project

Saving a Project as a Template File You can save your condition properties and layers as a template for future projects

1 Select File gt Save As

2 Enter a name for your template and select On-Screen Takeoff Template Files (tpo) from the Save As type field of the dialog (click on the down arrow to select)

3 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog Modifying a Template File Follow these steps to modify an existing template file if you need to change or add conditions andor layers

1 Select File gt Open

2 Navigate to your Projects directory

3 In the File Type drop-down select On-Screen Takeoff Template files (tpo)

4 Choose the On-Screen Takeoff template file you would like to modify and click the OK button

5 Make appropriate changes

6 Save and close file

The On-Screen Takeoff template files cannot save takeoff information

Section 5 Projects

24

Opening an Existing Project File 1 Select File gt Open

2 Navigate to the desired file location

3 Click the Open button

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask

you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Creating a New Project

1 Select File gt New

2 For a blank untitled project click

3 At this point the Project Properties dialog will pop-up for more information about your takeoff

NOTE The following are important to keep in mind when beginning a new project

At the start of your project fill out the Project Properties settings to establish the name for all printed output from your project set the default page size and scale for your plans number and names of different pages within the project and locations of electronic drawings

Scale settings can significantly affect quantity outcomes Be sure to set the scale for each page of drawings before beginning condition takeoffs

When using a digitizer remember to make a mark with a pen or pencil in the upper left and lower right corners of the first sheet of the paper plans to delineate the takeoff area for that sheet You can then set the takeoff area on On-Screen Takeoff using your marks

Save your project before you begin taking off any conditions On-Screen Takeoff will write a back-up file using the same file name

Remember the Undo feature If you make a mistake select Edit gt Undo and reverse the process step by step

Section 5 Projects

25

Project Properties

You can either set your Project Properties when you create a new takeoff or once your project file is saved under the appropriate name

1 Select File gt Project Properties the Project Properties dialog box will appear

2 Type in the name of your project to appear on printouts Use the backspace andor delete keys to edit the name as necessary

3 Press the Tab key to move to the Default Image Size option or click within the Image Size box You may click on the arrow at the right for the pull-down menu of page size options or you can use the down-arrow key on your keyboard to scroll through the list to the appropriate selection

4 Press the Tab key to move to the Default Scale option Select a scale by using the drop down arrow If your scale is metric you will need to click in the box next to Metric to convert to that measurement

5 Establish the number of pages for your project plans And load image files See Adding Pages to

Your Project

Adding Pages to Projects Individual Electronic Plans

1 Click on in the Project Properties dialog

2 In the Add Images dialog use the drop down arrow to navigate to the appropriate directory and folder containing your image

3 Select the file so that it displays in the File name field then click The file will display by name and path in the Image File field in Project Properties dialog

4 Click to accept and your project will automatically open

5 Save your project with the new settings by selecting File gt Save

Section 5 Projects

26

Electronic plans scanned from blueprints (as opposed to blue lines) will display as white lines on a black background and are difficult to read on your computer screen Select Image gt Invert and the colors will invert to black on white

You may have noticed the Page column in the Project Properties dialog Generally plan images occupy one page and 1 will be listed in the column indicating Page 1 of your plan file If you import a multi-page TIF a plan file containing more than one page of plans they will import as separate pages and each successive page will be indicated under the Page column as 1 2 3 etc of the plan file

Group of Electronic Plans You may add all the electronic plan files from a particular source (for example from a CD) by using the Auto Add feature

1 Click the button in the Project Properties dialog

2 Browse until you find the appropriate directory and folder containing your plan images

3 Click on any file displayed within your target folder so that the file name appears in the File name box of the Auto Add dialog

4 Click The image paths and file names will be recorded into the project properties arranged alphabetically

5 Click to accept your choices and your project will automatically open

6 Save your project with the new settings by selecting File gt Save

To load Dodge Plans into your Project Properties see Appendix IIi Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

Paper Plans On-Screen Takeoff makes it easy for Full Mode users to perform quantity takeoffs from paper plans using a digitizer

1 Add pages by clicking until you have the number of pages initially in the project

2 Name each page by clicking within the Title area and typing the name

3 Click to accept your choices and close the Project Properties dialog

4 Save your project with the new project properties settings by selecting File gt Save

Section 5 Projects

27

Setting Up a Drawing Template On-Screen Takeoff provides the convenience of using the same work surface for both digitizer and mouse to allow the user to draw conditions and then edit settings of the project or add or change conditions without breaking stride A mouse pad template included with the program defines the area of the digitizer in which use of the stylus or cursor will be recognized as mouse movement as opposed to drawing movement

1 Place your stylus on On-Screen Takeoff

2 Placing the template identifies the location mouse movements will be recognized by the program

Before placing the template the template must be applied to the digitizer surface This may have been done during the installation of your digitizer We suggest attaching the template to the lower right corner of the digitizer surface about one inch inside the grid area

3 Select Digitizer gt Place Template

4 Follow the instruction prompts on the screen clicking first on the target symbol at the left of the On-Screen Takeoff box on the template then on the target at the right

Setting Takeoff Area Before you can begin taking off a drawing you must define the drawing area on the digitizer This requires defining an area that will include all objects on each drawing of your plans As you add pages to your takeoff the same area of the digitizer will be active

1 Secure the plans to the digitizer with tape or a set of clamps

2 With a pen or a pencil mark the upper left corner and the lower right corner of the first page in your set of plans

3 Select Digitizer gt Set Takeoff Area

4 Click each mark with the stylus pen as prompted

5 Verify the active area of the digitizer by looking at the image size located in the lower right corner of your screen

If you close the program before the takeoff is complete you will need to reestablish the takeoff area before you can add additional condition quantities

Electronic plans appear on your computer screen eliminating the need to set a takeoff area You simply drag your mouse across the conditions you wish to takeoff The conditions will be highlighted and quantities will be totaled instantly Electronic plans are available through a variety of services For information contact an On Center Software account manager

Section 5 Projects

28

Setting Scale for Specific Pages You may set the scale in each page view separately This will override the default scale setting in Project Properties for that page Setting the correct scale for the drawing before taking off quantities ensures accurate calculations Be careful to check the scale for each drawing in your project before doing takeoffs

1 Display the page you want to set select Edit gt Set Scale

2 Use the drop down arrow to select a scale that will be applied to that page

3 Click

OR

4 Access the pull-down scale settings on the Navigate toolbar

NOTE As you draw objects notice that the drawn object is similar in width to the object on your plans If it is not the scale set may not be correct

Calculating Scale You may calculate scale according to a known measurement between two points either with a digitizer or on electronic plans

1 Select Edit gt Calculate Scale using Image or Edit gt Calculate Scale using Digitizer

2 Follow the instructions in the related Calculate Scale dialog box You will be asked to click on the first and second points then to enter the dimension for that distance

3 The scale will be recalculated for the displayed page and the Scale display on the Navigate toolbar will show the new scale

Section 6

29

Conditions and Takeoff

This section will Draw Conditions to Takeoff Plan Quantities

What Zones will do to help your takeoff process

Discuss the ins and outs of Takeoffs

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

30

Creating Conditions

If you are starting a new project from scratch you will need to create conditions to takeoff quantities such as floor areas wall lengths and corner bead counts If you are using a template you will have several pre-designed conditions already listed on the Takeoff dock bar However you may want to change the characteristics of some conditions or create additional conditions for a particular project

1 Right Click within the Takeoff dock bar Select New gt Condition

Or

2 From the Takeoff dock bar Click (if the buttons are not showing right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select Show Buttons from the pop-up menu) The New Condition dialog appears

3 Select the condition type (Linear Area Count or Zone) from the pull-down menu accessed by the

down arrow next to the Type option

4 Press Tab or use the mouse (or stylus) to move to Name and enter a name for your condition

5 Specify the desired condition attributes See Condition Attributes for more detail

6 Click for condition to apply

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

31

Condition Attributes Each condition type will have related attributes to select or specify within the General and Advanced tabs of the New Condition dialog Once a condition has been used to takeoff a quantity from your plans certain attributes cannot be changed

All conditions allow the user to specify color and fill pattern for the object drawn

Linear Conditions

General Specify width and height by feet and inches Specify pitch in inches up to the nearest thousandth of an inch if applicable

Advanced Specify rounding for object quantities and droprun default length for electrical or plumbing drops at the ends of lines Select Connect to have lines connect at the corners where one line of the condition ends and another begins (and indicate Tolerance for the featurersquos activation as distance between the ends of two lines) Choose Trim to have lines automatically trim to a line being crossed Choose Curve to draw a curved line

Follow these examples for inputting feet and inches For 7 feet 6 inches type 706 for 13 feet 7 inches type 1307 For 20 feet type 2000

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

32

Area Conditions

General If needed you can specify the thickness (in inches) andor pitch (in inches)

Advanced Specify rounding for object quantities Choose to display an adjustable grid within the area and indicate matrix cell dimensions

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

33

Count Conditions

General

Specify height and indicate the size (in inches) and shape (square circle triangle rectangle or opening) of the count object as it will appear on screen

Advanced Count conditions have advanced attributes These options are available for all shapes except for openings

Zone Conditions Zones allow you to subdivide condition quantities making it easier to modify and complete jobs in phases They can be used at the end of a takeoff to isolate a group of condition quantities that are in different areas of the takeoff

Zones can also be used to break a takeoff into multi-phases and can even be used to isolate quantities while a job is in progress to group the amount of work that has been completed to date They can be applied to one or multiple pages in your plans automatically calculating the takeoff quantities for each zoned area

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

34

The zone feature is only available in Lite and Full Mode If you are in View Mode and would like

to use this feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade

Condition Notes A Note tab is provided for comments regarding the condition These notes will display on the Takeoff List report and will import into Quick Bid

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

35

Condition Results The Results tab of the New Condition is based on condition type Initial settings default to linear feet (LF) for linear conditions square feet (SF) for area conditions and count of items (EA) for count conditions and zones The first of the results fields will display for the condition items in the Takeoff dock bar area All results will display in worksheets and Takeoff List reports as well as in an Excel spreadsheet after being exported

Copying Conditions You may use the condition attributes from a condition yoursquove already created for any future conditions of the same type

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Click the Copy button from the toolbar

OR

3 Right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select copy

4 A new condition will appear in the list with the same condition attributes as the previous condition but with the quantities zeroed

Editing Conditions Once you have copied a condition you might want to change several attributes You can also edit an existing condition to fit any updated needs

1 Highlight the desired condition on the Takeoff dock bar

2 Click the Change button

OR

3 Double-click on the condition you wish to edit to bring up the Change Condition dialog

NOTE The Change Condition dialog differs from the New Condition dialog only in that if takeoffs

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

36

have been performed in your project with this condition you will not be able to change the type of condition or certain properties under the advanced tab of the dialog box

Deleting Conditions 1 Click on the condition in the Takeoff Dock bar area

2 Click the Delete button on the toolbar

OR

3 Right-click and select Delete from the pop-up menu

All takeoff associated with the deleted condition will be deleted immediately and permanently

Organizing Project Conditions Within your project you can create folders andor sub-folders for different types of conditions You may even want to create a folder containing conditions with reset values

To get started organizing your conditions make sure you are viewing the condition tree (right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select Show Tree)

Creating Folders and Sub-Folders 1 Right-click in the Takeoff Dock bar area

2 Select New gt Folder from the pop-up menu

Copying Folders

1 Click on the folder and click Copy on the toolbar

2 All copied conditions within the new folder will have values reset to zero

Renaming Folders

1 Click on the folder

2 Right-click and select Rename from the pop-up menu

3 Enter a name for your folder and click the Enter button

Changing Condition Order

You may move conditions up or down in the condition list of the Takeoff dock bar to suit your project needs

1 Select the condition you would like to move by clicking to highlight it

NOTE When you are ready to move the highlighted conditions be sure that you start

moving using the last condition chosen That condition will have a highlighted boarder

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

37

2 Drag and drop any the condition from one place to another in the list You may also move a condition to another folder on the list in this way

Drawing with Conditions Snap Angles Set up snap angles to prevent lines from appearing jagged Snap angles are commonly set at 15deg and shift snap angles at 0deg

1 Go to Tools gt Options Options dialog appears

2 Under the General tab make the desired settings

3 Click to save the settings As they are drawn lines will snap to the set degree

Drawing a Linear Object 1 Select a condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff dock bar

2 Move the cursor into the Image takeoff area of the screen you will see the cursor display as crosshairs

3 Click and hold left mouse button then drag mouse to draw a line

4 Release mouse button to set line

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

38

5 Repeat steps for further lines

Continuous Mode This feature allows you to draw an object that has connected lines

1 Click the icon from the Takeoff toolbar

OR

2 Go to Tools gt Continuous Mode

3 Follow steps 1-3 from Draw a Linear Object

4 Click at each point of intersection The object will be connected

5 Double-click after making the final point to set the lines

Drawing a Curve To draw a curved line the Curve option must be checked under the Advanced tab of the Condition dialog

1 Click where you want to begin the curve and drag in a straight line to the position for the other endpoint of the curve

2 Click on the line to select it Handles in the shapes of small squares will appear at either end of

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

39

the line and in the center of the line

3 Move the cursor over the center handles until the cursor becomes a two-way arrow

4 Click and drag in the direction of the curve bending the line as you move the cursor Release to set the curve (The line you began with will disappear)

Draw a circle by drawing two curved lines connected

Drawing an Area Object Area conditions are drawn similarly to continuous mode lines You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete your area takeoff

NOTE When drawing an area do not intersect the perimeter or line of the object you are drawing

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

3 The area will be filled with the pattern set for that condition

NOTE The simulated circle will be good enough for you to be able to make a bid

To create a circular area click from point to point with very short distances in between points simulating a circlersquos perimeter Double-click after setting the last point to set the area

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

40

Grid Options Grids give you an added advantage when installing materials such as tiles Use this feature to get a count for how many tiles are needed for an area

1 Double-click on an area condition in the Takeoff dock bar to open its Condition dialog

2 Click on the Advanced tab to show its options

3 Check the box next to Grid by clicking in it

4 Indicate the dimensions of the cell matrix in inches (For example 200 x 400)

5 Under Results tab choose each (EA) for one of the results fields This will tabulate a number of grid cells (including partial grid cells) in area

6 Click to save your settings

7 Use the Move Grid and Rotate Grid features in the Tools menu to manipulate the grid as desired

Grid Calculation

1 Go to Tools gt Options menu

1 Specify if On-Screen Takeoff automatically should Calculate Grid Position

2 If AreaGrid Size is selected On-Screen Takeoff will calculate the number of items needed to fill the grid based on grid demintions

3 Click to accept and close the dialog

To move a line at any angle (regardless of default setting) press the Shift key while moving the mouse

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

41

Backout Mode This feature allows you to take out part of an area and deduct that amount of square footage

1 Select Tools gt Backout Mode

2 Outline the are you want backed out as you would when drawing a regular area object (see Drawing an Area Object)

3 The outlined area will clear and quantities will be recalculated

NOTE The perimeter of the backout area will be added to the LF quantity for that condition

Drawing a Count Object Square triangle rectangle and circle shaped count objects can easily be placed on images

1 Select the condition

2 Click in the location where you want the object to appear

3 To place an opening-shaped count item like a door or window you must click over an existing linear object such as a wall

4 On the Results tab you can change the height properties to give you the result you need

5 If Backout is checked on the advanced tab for each count opening the opening-shaped count item will back out a corresponding section of the linear object

Opening shaped count items are sized at 3rsquo0rdquo by default

Drawing a Zone Zones are drawn in the same way as area objects and may be any polygonal shape You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete the zone perimeter

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

42

Selecting Objects

1 Use the Select Tool to select objects

You can also select all objects that correspond to a condition

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Right-click and choose Select All

3 All objects with this condition will be highlighted with squares as an outline

Moving and Resizing Objects Linear

1 To move or resize a linear object click anywhere on the line to select it

2 To move the line position your pointer over the center handles When the mouse is positioned over the handles you will see a two-way arrow You will only be able to move the line in the direction of the arrows

3 Drag the line to a new position

4 Clicking and dragging the handles on the ends of the line will allow you to lengthen or shorten your line

Area and Zone

1 To move an area object or zone in its entirety click and drag it to its new position

2 Grabbing a handle at a corner or intersection of the object will allow you to adjust and change its perimeter

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

43

Count 1 To move a square circle rectangle or triangle shaped count object click and drag

2 Click and drag an opening shaped count object along the length of the linear object to the desired position then release

NOTE An opening shaped count object may not be moved from its associated linear condition object however it may be moved up and down the length of the linear object

Layers On-Screen Takeoff allows you to sort and separate your takeoff objects within the same job and on the same page On-Screen Takeoff gives you this flexibility through the use of layers

By assigning different conditions to different layers (for example differentiating between floors ceilings and walls) you can choose to view all layers or turn off certain layers to display and print the remaining groups of conditions only You may also remove the background image of electronic plans add text and hot link symbols or print only your condition takeoffs

Layers are only available in Full Mode If you are in View or Lite Mode and would like to use this

feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade Default Layers

On-Screen Takeoff begins every project with three default layers Image Annotation and Default The Image layer holds the electronic plan files you may have in your project The Annotation layer possesses all text notations highlighting and hot links in the project The Default layer will appear in the Condition dialog when creating or editing a condition (listed in the takeoff dock bar) Conditions are assigned to the Default layer unless otherwise specified by the user

Creating Layers To assign a condition to a layer other than the default layer you must first create additional layers for your project

1 Select View gt Layers to open the Layers dialog

2 Click An unnamed layer will be added

3 Click within the empty box and type a name for your layer (for example Wall)

4 New layers are added as active layers The adjacent box under the Show column will be checked

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

44

Assigning a Layer to a Condition 1 Open the Condition dialog box by creating a new condition or editing an existing condition

2 Under the General tab click on the down arrow in the Layer field to display optional layers

3 Select the desired layer for the condition Only the Default layer and layers you have added will be displayed

4 Click

View and Hide Layers

1 Select View gt Layers

2 Under the Show column check the box to view or remove the check (by clicking on it) to hide the specific layer

3 Click to accept and close the Layers dialog

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

45

Assigning Text to a Layer When adding text to an image On-Screen Takeoff has the capability to assign the text to a specified layer

1 Select the Text Tool

2 Click at the point you want to place your text

3 Type in your text using the Enter key for line breaks

4 Click the drop down arrow next to the Layer field and select the desired layer

Section 7

46

Printing and Exporting

This section will

Printing options and procedures

Exporting data by copying and pasting

Exporting quantity results to Excel spreadsheets

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

47

Print Setup On-Screen Takeoff allows the user to print the image takeoff list and worksheet

1 Select File gt Print Setup The Print Setup dialog will open

2 Select a printer or leave the default selection listed (change from the default printer displayed by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the field)

3 Indicate page size and printer tray option (Source) Access page size options by clicking on the

down arrow at the right of the field

4 Choose Portrait or Landscape orientation

5 Click to accept and close the dialog

Printing Images The image area can include the electronic plans the takeoff objects added text and hot links To print a subset of these (for example just the takeoffs without the plans or the added text and hot link symbols) hide layers that you do not want to print (see Section 6 View and Hide Layers) When you are printing your images every page will show the scale of the takeoff you are printing

1 Click on the Image tab to display the area of your project

2 Select File gt Print (or Ctrl + P)

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

48

3 Select the desired view (What to print) and the Image Range

4 Click The second Print dialog will open

5 Change settings accordingly or click if you accept the default settings

Printing Takeoff Lists and Worksheets In Takeoff Lists and Worksheets you may hide columns to print only certain results or adjust column widths to fit the report within the page size selected

1 In Takeoff List or Worksheet view move your cursor to the right side of the columnrsquos title bar the cursor will display as a two-way arrow

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

49

2 Click and drag to adjust the width of the column Holding the mouse button you may

slide the title bar under the title bar to its left to hide the column completely

3 Select File gt Print or press Ctrl + P to access the Print dialog

4 Indicate desired printer and choose the number of copies

5 Click to print and close the dialog

When printing the condition list we suggest printing in landscape

To reset to the default column widths double-click on the right border of a column heading will reset the column to its right (or previously to its right before being hidden)

Print Preview 1 Select File gt Print Preview

2 Use and to vary your view 3 If viewing an image choose current full or scale view to see how it displays

4 For printed outputs that cover more than one page use and to view adjacent pages or click on the down arrow next to Page field and select the page you want displayed

Exporting Using the CopyPaste Feature You may copy all the data or sections from the worksheet and the takeoff list view in On-Screen Takeoff and paste it into another application When pasting into Excel the cell layout will be maintained

1 Highlight the areas you wish to paste Click and hold the left mouse button down as you drag the cursor over the area to be selected then releasing the mouse button

OR

2 Select the entire takeoff list quickly click on the left On-Screen Takeoff column header and hold and drag the cursor across the remaining column headings

The number of pages for the view selected will display in the lower left-hand corner The zoom percentage that applies to the view will be displayed in the lower right-hand corner next to page size of the drawing

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

50

3 In the worksheet view you may highlight rows by clicking on the numbered buttons to the left of each row clicking and dragging across column headings or clicking and dragging over individual cells in the worksheet

Click anywhere in the appropriate view to deselect the area

4 Once your selection is highlighted you may select Edit gt Copy or Ctrl C from the keyboard 5 On your monitor switch to the application into which you want to paste your selection 6 Select Edit gt Paste in the new application or simply press Ctrl + V to paste

The colored keys for conditions cannot be pasted

Using the Export Feature You may export condition quantities to specified cell location within an Excel worksheet file Cell target locations are assigned in the Results tab of the condition dialogs on the Export line relating to each quantity measurement type

On-Screen Takeoff will export takeoff quantity results for up to three different quantity types that you specify For instance you may want to know the number of square feet in a ceiling area as well as the number of linear feet in its perimeter

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

51

1 Bring up the Condition dialog by double-clicking on a condition in the takeoff dock bar or by

selecting the condition and clicking

2 Click on the Results tab to access its fields The default quantities for the condition type will display

3 For each results field click on the arrow to access the pull-down menu and select the appropriate quantity (for example SF LF EA etchellip)

4 Have your Excel spreadsheet opened and saved in a file

5 Specify the Excel spreadsheet cell locations where you want the results to go

6 For a cell in the first sheet of your spreadsheet type in the cell address (eg a1) Case is not important

7 For a cell on a successive sheet of your spreadsheet type in sheet the number followed by a comma and the cell address without any spaces (eg sheet2a1) Case is not important

8 Click

9 Select File gt Export gt Condition Qty to Excel

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

52

10 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

11 Click to export On-Screen Takeoff results to specified cell locations in the Excel file When you return to the Excel application you will see the values have been added to the specified cell locations in your spreadsheet

12 Save your Excel file

Exporting Worksheet to Excel

1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 From On-Screen Takeoff Select File gt Export gt Worksheet to Excel

4 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

5 Click When you return to the Excel application you will see the values from the Worksheet Tab have been added to your spreadsheet

6 Save your Excel file

Exporting Takeoff to CVS 1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 Click the Takeoff Tab in the project you want to export the information

4 Select File gt Export gt Takeoff to CSV

5 Browse to the location of the CSV spreadsheet file click file to select it

6 Click the Save

NOTE CSV files can be opened in Excel Lotus Access etc One may consider this option more of a ldquodumprdquo into a file

The Excel application must be active (it may be minimized on the application bar) with the target spreadsheet open in the application Otherwise an error will occur with the export operation that will affect both the On-Screen Takeofftrade file and the Excel spreadsheet

Section 8

53

Advanced Features

This section will

Some special features of working with condition objects in the takeoff area

Details of advanced options for conditions

Advanced features of the Project Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

54

Features to Use with Objects Roping Feature You can move copy or delete using this feature Using the Select tool (the pointer) you may select several objects at once by clicking and dragging an outline around the objects then releasing the mouse button Roping may select either objects completely within the outlined area (inclusive) or objects both within and touched by the outlined area (touching) Specify your roping preference under Tools gt Options

1 Click and hold the mouse button at a point on the screen near the objects to be selected and drag to surround the objects with an outline

2 Release the mouse button The objects will be selected

3 You may now

Move the group around on the page by clicking within the group dragging the mouse and releasing the button to place the objects

Delete the group of objects by clicking the Delete key or

Copy and paste by pressing Ctrl C to copy the group then Ctrl V to paste it The pasted copy of the grouped objects will appear slightly offset from the original objects

Section 8 Advanced Features

55

Applying a DropRun Count

Use the droprun feature when calculating quantities to take into account the drop or run of a linear condition such as electrical lines or plumbing pipes Drop or run lengths may be added separately to any linear condition on screen while a default droprun length may be indicated for a condition as a whole

1 Select the desired linear condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff Dock bar

2 Click the Change button in the toolbar to open the Change Condition dialog

3 Click the Advanced tab to access the advanced options and click inside the DropRun check box

4 Enter a default length to be applied to all of this condition Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches) You can leave the length blank and manually enter drop run on each segment drawn

5 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog

Edit DropRun Count

1 With the related linear condition in the Takeoff Dock bar highlighted or with the pointer tool selected

2 click on the desired linear object in the image takeoff area The Count button will become active

3 Click on the Count button (alternatively select Tools gt Count) The default droprun amount will show in the pop-up Count dialog (Default length will be zero if droprun has not been selected in this conditionrsquos properties)

4 Type in the desired length Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches)

5 Click the OK button The additional amount will be reflected in the corresponding quantity The new DropRun count will apply only to the object edited

Adding Text in Image View

On-Screen Takeoff allows you to place text comments around your quantity takeoffs that may be printed along with plan images and objects Text is automatically placed within the Annotation Layer (that includes text and hot links)

1 To place text on the image select the Text Tool and click at the point you want to place your text opening a text box

2 Type in your information clicking Enter for line breaks

3 When you are finished click the OK button to exit the text box

4 To reposition text simply click on the text (with the Text Tool active) to select it

5 Move the cursor over the text the cursor will now display as a four-way arrow

6 Click and drag the mouse to position the text as desired

Section 8 Advanced Features

56

1 To edit existing text use the Text Tool to double-click on the text to open the editing box

2 Enter additional text or use the Backspace key to delete text as necessary

Formatting Text Once created you may format the font size type style and color of your text

1 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Font or click on the Font button in the Takeoff Toolbar

2 Select the desired features (color options are disabled) and click the OK button

3 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Color or click on the Color button in the Takeoff Toolbar The Color dialog will open

4 Click on a color in the Basic Color palette or create a color and add to the Custom Colors palette (Be sure to click on the color in the Custom Colors palette to select it)

5 Click the OK button

Object Properties

Linear Objects

Linear objects may be set to connect at corners

A linear object may be set to trim automatically when crossing another linear object (Check the trim option under the advanced tab of the Condition dialog)

When you move a connected linear object objects automatically move and resize connected lines accordingly (quantities are then recalculated)

This feature requires that the connected linear object be moved using the center handles (does not apply when resizing the line from the ends)

Objects constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

Objects are measured from centerline to centerline

Section 8 Advanced Features

57

Area Objects When drawing an area use your escape key to undo the last line drawn You may reverse your

drawing of an area using the escape key

The area will not fill with color and pattern until the user double-clicks after the last line is set

Lines drawn to delineate an area object constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

After selecting an area to move or adjust position the mouse in the center to move the entire area position the mouse at the sides or corners to adjust the perimeter

Count Objects

All count objects are quantified by the physical number of objects per page and reported as EA for the UOM The quantity for the current Image View is (displayed in the Condition List) and the total quantity in your project is displayed in the Takeoff View and Worksheet View)

Square circle rectangle and triangle shaped count objects do not displace or subtract from other object quantities when placed on top of them However on the Advanced Tab for the count condition a connect property can be set (this is a check box) so that when a count object of this shape is put on top of a Linear type takeoff object it will move with the linear if said linear is moved

An opened-shaped count object must be placed within a linear object Opening shaped count objects may also be measured by linear foot or linear yard (EA SF and SY are also options) Opening shaped count items default to a width of 3rsquo 0rdquo at the time of creation This size can be changed The small medium and large size are not options on this type of condition anymore Check Backout on the Advanced tab for each Count object back out the footage (or yardage) of opening-shaped count objects in which they are placed

NOTE In order to see this Backout functionality (in quantity) for SY or SF deductions at least one of the

results for the Linear(s) this object will be placed on must be set to SY or SF and the count object must have a height quantity

Advanced Features of Conditions The Round Feature Under the Advanced tab of the linear and area Condition dialogues you may specify quantity rounding (in inches) For linear objects rounding applies to each linear object drawn For area objects rounding will apply to each segment of the area perimeter adjusting the perimeter and area calculations For example With a linear condition entering 12 in the Round field will round up each related linear object to the nearest 12 inches or one foot With this setting two walls of 1 4 would each round to 2 0 totaling 4 0

NOTE In the Takeoff Dock bar condition list and in the On-Screen Takeoff reports quantities will be displayed in whole numbers rounded up to the nearest foot However calculations are based on true quantities without rounding unless the Round Feature is engaged

Pitch Pitch may apply either to linear or area conditions It is measured in rise per linear foot Entering 12 indicates a 12 rise per 12 of linear distance (a pitch of 12 over 12) or an angle of 45deg

Section 8 Advanced Features

58

Advanced Features of Project Properties Selecting Multiple Pages

1 Select a single page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry

2 Drag the cursor down the column of numbers to select consecutive pages

3 Click on the blank button at the top of this column to select all pages in the Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

59

Changing Image Assigned to a Drawing 1 Select the page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry 2 Click the Change Image button The Change Image dialog box will appear

3 Navigate to the desired file and select by clicking on it

4 Click the Open button The electronic file assigned to the page will have been changed to reflect the new file choice

Changing Image File Path 1 Select pages as described above

2 Choose Change Folder

3 In the Change Folder dialog navigate to the appropriate folder

4 Click the OK button The file path will have been changed for the selected page entries

Delete a Page from Project Properties 1 Select the page you want to delete by clicking on its associated number (in the gray box at the

left of the entry)

2 Choose Delete Page

All Takeoff on the page will be deleted immediately and permanently

Section 8 Advanced Features

60

Advanced Features of Tool Options

Calculation Method On-Screen Takeoff has built-in calculation options to allow for faster work and faster saves until your takeoff is complete Calculation options are found by selecting Tools gt Options then clicking on the Calculation tab

Calculation method can be set to Automatic Automatic except Grids and Manual Manual will allow the program to operate more quickly while Automatic or Automatic except Grids allows the user to see quantity changes as takeoffs are made

In any mode you may press F9 to recalculate quantities for the On-Screen Takeoff current totals

Configuration Tab

When the ldquoPage Label (A01)rdquo radial button is chosen On-Screen Takeoff puts the numbered label on all the pages of in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar If the Page Descriptionrdquo radial button is chosen then a description of what takeoff is on that specific page will be shown in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar

This section of the configuration tab gives you options on how you want to export your information When the ldquoFolderSubfolder Namesrdquo radial button is chosen than on your file that you are exporting to will have all the conditions folders and subfolders In the Delimiter box you can choose the symbol that is needed to separate the information you are exporting Some files need semicolons () or colons () to make sure the information comes exported in is separated it the appropriate places

Section 8 Advanced Features

61

In previous versions of On-Screen Takeoff there are views that users need to have in order for them to display their information By either choosing ldquoOST 1xrdquo or ldquoOST 2xrdquo it will let the program know you want your columns of information exported in that specific format

When you have the Confirm Deletions radial button of ldquoYesrdquo chosen than every time you delete anything you will get a dialog box confirming your intentions of deletion

While working with your takeoff you have a choice to either view the legend of your conditions or hide it Choose whichever radial button that suits your needs

For those who prefer to use the Enter key to navigate in dialog boxes this option is just for that

Font Tab The Font tab is designed for you to make your own look and feel for the application At the bottom of this tab it will show you sample of the fonts and colors you have chosen

Renaming the Current Page You may change the name of the current page in the takeoff area of On-Screen Takeoff by selecting Edit gt Rename Page

This opens the Name Page dialog and you may simply type in a new name and click the Enter button The new name for the file will be reflected on the title bar for the page and in Project Properties

You also may access the Rename Page function by right-clicking in the takeoff area while in Image View and selecting the option from the pop-up menu that appears

Section 9

62

Saving and Exiting

This section will

Explain how to save projects

Show you how to safely exit the program

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

63

Saving Your Project

1 Select File gt Save 2 If your project has not previously been saved a Save dialog box will open to allow you to name

the file and choose the directory and folder in which to save your file 3 Once saved File gt Save will simply save the current version of the file

OR

4 Select File gt Save As then type in a new name for the file and save to the desired file path

The Auto-save Feature With the Auto-save feature On-Screen Takeoff automatically backs up your open project You may choose to have more than one level of backup files The first backup copy will have the extension b00 and successive files will be b01 b02 and so on If you have designated four levels of backup files after the fourth backup copy has been created (b03) the next file will be saved over the file with extension b00 Further backup saves will then rotate through the four backup files in the same way

1 Select Tools gt Options 2 In the Auto-save area (under the General tab) select the frequency of backup file creation (in

minutes) and the number of levels for the feature 3 You also may disengage the feature by clicking in the check box to clear it

The Auto-save feature automatically saves backup copies to the directory of the current project If you are working from a write-protected area such as a CD-ROM On-Screen Takeoff will place backup files in the On-Screen Takeoff folder

Exiting When you are finished using On-Screen Takeoff it is very easy to exit Exiting is very important because of security reasons If someone were to use your computer they could enter the application and view and manipulate information

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

64

On-Screen Takeoff closes the open project when you open another or create a new project or when you exit the program

1 Select File gt Exit

OR

2 You also may click at the upper right-hand corner of the application to exit

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

65

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer When you get your digitizer from GTCO you will need to connect it to your computer Follow the instructions outlined below to do this

Note For rollup digitizers the metal bar must be oriented to the top or right hand side

Connecting the Digitizer 1 Lay the digitizer out flat 2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer 3 Plug in the power adapter 4 Plug the interface (IO) cable into the digitizer 5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into an open serial port on computer

Note GTCO Technical support phone number is 410-381-6688 The electronic manual (on diskette) from GTCO contains more detailed installation and operation instructions for the GTCO digitizer model you have

Installing other Digitizer Drivers If you are using a GTCO Digitizer you will need to install the GTCO TabletWorks Drivers

If you are using a Digitizer not supported by GTCO Tablet Works 10 please contact the manufacturer of your digitizer for assistance with installation

Installing GTCO TabletWorks Drivers 1 Insert the On Center CD into the CD-ROM drive The CD Startup screen will open 2 Click on Install Software 3 Select Additional Software and Drivers 4 Select Digitizer Driver 5 Follow the instructions for installing TabletWorks 10

Adhering the Template The template is a small plastic sticker used to enable mouse function when using the digitizer with On-Screen Takeoff Place your template on your digitizer We suggest placing it in the bottom right corner of the digitizer about one inch inside the takeoff area

Note You may either peel off the back of the template and use the adhesive surface or you can tape the template down

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

66

Testing the Digitizer Drivers Before running OST you may test the digitizer by moving the stylus around on the digitizer pad it should move the mouse cursor (if mouse emulation is enabled)

If the digitizer does not move the mouse cursor on the screen

The superset codes may need to be reset Reset the superset codes by touching on the border of the digitizer with the stylus The digitizer should beep several times

The digitizer may not be communicating with the computer Be sure the COM port selected is correct Be sure the COM port selected is correct If you are not able to get the digitizer to move the mouse cursor you need to call GTCO technical support for help

Note The Mouse Emulation is not required for On-Screen Takeoff to work properly It is used only for the Template functionality if the digitizer is moving the cursor the wrong direction (up instead of sideways or vice-versa)

Click the L-shaped arrow symbol on the digitizer with the stylus

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

67

Appendix II Toolbar Items Main Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

68

Tool Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

69

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

70

Navigate Toolbar (Continued)

Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

71

Takeoff Toolbar (Continued)

Image Toolbar

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

72

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

This section will detail how to load plans from a F W Dodge CD-ROM into an On-Screen Takeoff project file ready for takeoffs

Dodge files may be added to the Project Properties dialog However loading the files in that way will load the files by number rather than name description If you want to load one page only from your Dodge CD You will have to rename the page to display the name rather than number of the file

To load plan files from a Dodge CD so that the files load sequentially by file number but are displayed by name rather than by number within your project follow the instructions below

Opening a Dodge project from a CD-ROM 1 Insert the CD into the drive 2 Choose File gt Custom 3 Choose Dodge Plans Project (plansdat) as the file type 4 Select the appropriate file type by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the Files of type

field 5 In the Look in field access your drive paths by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the

field then

Navigate to your CD-ROM drive Open the data folder and Open the Projects folder

6 Select the desired project and open its folder 7 Open the plansdat file 8 All the images will come in sequenced correctly for that job along with the full descriptions

(names) of each page If there is not a plans folder in the project folder then plans do not exist for that project on the CD Opening the plansdat file will yield an empty project

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

73

Appendix IV Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer The On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer is a limited version of On Center Softwarersquos commercial takeoff software If your status bar located at the very bottom of the main window says View Mode in the lower left-hand corner then you are using the Plan Viewer You can use the plan viewer to

View CD-based amp converted CAD drawings

View a previously created OST file and associated drawings

Download electronic plans online

Navigate through drawings

Quickly Takeoff linearsareas and counts

Zoom in to view the plan better

Print drawings directly from the viewer

Viewing an On-Screen Takeoff Project File

1 To open an OST file that was previously created with of On-Screen Takeoff 2 Select File gt Open 3 An Open dialog will appear if you do not see the OST file you are looking for select the

Look In drop down arrow 4 A drop down menu will appear listing the various folders drives and mapped drives located

on your computer select the correct drive or folder location and continue to browse to the location of your OST file

5 When you see your OST file double-click it to open it 6 Any takeoff and drawings should appear on the Image tab view

If you do not see the drawings but do see the colored takeoff layer the drawings may

not be located in the same place they were originally saved at Go to File gt Project Properties and check the Image File path for each listed page If the image file path is pointing to a CD drive make sure the CD is inside the CR-ROM

Downloading Electronic Plans If your Online Plan Service provides a special file format (OSX) required to use this feature of our plan viewer you can immediately downloaded all electronic plans of a project directly from our viewer

Most Plan Room web sites will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff when a request to download plans is made Your particular Plan Room may differ in operation so please contact the provider directly with questions on using the site

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

74

When you request to download or open a project file from a Plan Room you will usually have the open to open or save an OSX file Choosing open will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff Alternately you may choose to save the file to a local hard drive After you have saved the file either double-click it to launch On-Screen Takeoff or open the OSX file using On-Screen Takeoff by clicking File then Open and locating the file on your hard drive You will need to change the file type to OSX

After the OSX file is opened you will see an additional tab appear in the Conditions List window called Pages

The Pages tab shows the hierarchy of your project Gray file icons represent pages that have not been downloaded and blue icons represents pages that have been downloaded

To download a page simply double-click the page icon

If you wish to select a group of pages to download you can use the Ctrl or Shift key to multiple select them then click the Download button

If you wish to download all pages at once click the Download All button

Downloaded pages will now appear in the Project Properties dialog in the same order in which they appear in the Pages tab

Creating Quick Takeoffs With On-Screen Takeoff you can create quick takeoffs to measure quantities even if you dont have the full version of our program However using the Quick Takeoff functionality shows you just a fraction of what the full version can do

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar is located at the top of the image view It has three buttons designated for three types of takeoffs Linear Area and Count The Quantity drop down list will show secondary quantities for Linears and Areas The Units drop down allows you to select how you want your quantities displayed Feet Inches Yards Millimeters and Meters

NOTE Every time change the type of takeoff you are performing (switching from Area to Linear for example) the previous quantities and takeoff objects will disappear They will also disappear when you changes pages

NOTE You can use the Dimension Tool to basically measure the distance between two points or linears The distance will display on the status bar at the bottom of the application

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

75

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions General

Where is On-Screen Takeoff installed on my computer

Typically it is installed in CProgram FilesOn-Screen Takeoff

In Explorer how do I recognize On-Screen Takeoff file types

On-Screen Takeoff data is stored in a single file per job lsquojob name OSTrsquo On-Screen Takeoff templates are stored as lsquotemplate nameTPOrsquo

Can only one project at a time be open

Yes For that reason opening another project automatically closes the project on screen You will be asked to save any changes

Is only one scale allowed per page What about on drawings that have multiple detail sections on a page and each of those drawings have different scales

Yes For pages with drawings of different scales copy the drawing to another project page and set the appropriate scale

I cannot perform backout on an area that is along a linear

As a workaround use the On-Screen Takeoff layers feature to help you with this issue Electronic Images

How do I start a project from drawings that have been scanned and written to a CD-ROM

Open a new project Select File gt Project Properties and select Auto Add Navigate to your CD and the appropriate folder and select any image file in that location Click Open All files in the location will load into your project Recommended that images are copied from CD to hard drive for performance

If I get a disk of drawings in AutoCAD format (R13 or R14) can I read them in On-Screen Takeoff

Yes On-Screen Takeoff now reads DWG DXF and many other format that are saved with AutoCAD

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

76

When I click on the all pages button what is supposed to happen Currently nothing seems to change when I click on that button

The All Pages button is used to apply the Darken and Enhance Plans feature to all pages in the project (as opposed to only the current page on screen)

Is there a way to deduct a large skylight from an area condition

Yes with the related area condition selected in the Takeoff Dock bar unselect the Backout button on the Takeoff Toolbar then draw the Backout area The area quantity will be deducted from the related condition object and the linear measurement of the Backout perimeter will be added

Digitizer Issues

How do I connect a Digitizer to the computer

See Appendix I Connecting a Digitizer

The Place Template menu choice is disabled

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or the digitizer or the digitzer drivers are not installed

It wonrsquot let me select the Set Takeoff Area menu choice

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or no job is open a digitizer is not installed or the drivers are not installed

The digitizer stylus is not moving the cursor or crosshairs

Click S-0-1 superset on the digitizer

How do I convert my old GTCO Digitizer to work with On- Screen Takeofftrade

Call GTCO and they may be able to reconfigure your digitizer to be compatible with On-Screen Takeoff

Printing Issues Which Printers work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible printers include On-Screen Takeoff Hewlett Packard Epson and Canon printers If you are having printer difficulties please contact support and specify the type of printer along with other pertinent information Contact support at wwwoncentercomsupport or email supportoncentercom

Which Plotters work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible Plotters include Hewlett Packard DesignJet plotters and the EnCAD Cadjet II If you are having plotter difficulties please contact support and specify the type of plotter concerned

ViewingDisplay I can no longer see my condition list How do I get it back

The toolbars and Dock bars can be turned on and off through the View gt Toolbars menu options

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

77

This is also accessible by right-clicking in the toolbar area and selecting (or deselecting) a toolbar listed

I cannot view my folders in the condition list

Right-click in the Takeoff Dock barcondition list area and select Show Tree to display your folders

My Status Bar reads Viewer Mode and I am unable to draw conditions

On-Screen Takeoff needs to be Authorized Or you need to purchase an upgrade Click the Perform Advanced Takeoff button on the main toolbar

I hid a Dock bar and when I selected to view it again it appeared alongside the other Dock

bar instead of stacked on top of it How do I fix it

Pick up the Dock bar by clicking on the bar at the top and continuing to hold down the mouse button drag the Dock bar over the other one It will resize and appear stacked with the other

When I open image files from a CD the images are all upside down How do I get them right

side up

To flip pages from top to bottom follow the steps below 1 Click the All Pages button on the Image Toolbar (All Pages is engaged when the button

is not clicked) 2 Click the Flip Horizontal button on the Image Toolbar 3 Click the All Pages button again to disengage

Templates How do I create a Template

Follow the steps below 1 Create a typical project 2 Choose File gt Save As 3 Choose On-Screen Takeoff Template Files as the file type to save 4 Name the file This will save all of the condition setups as well as the layers for the

project

How do I create a new project from a template

Follow the steps below 1 Choose File gt New 2 Select a template from those listed in the New dialog This will open a new project with

conditions and layers saved from a previous project but no pages or takeoff

78

INDEX

Area Conditions 32

Area Objects 57

Auto Scrolling 20

Auto-save 63

Backout Mode 41

Calculation Method 60

Conditions 29

Configuration 60

Contents Tab 6

Continuous Mode 38

Count Conditions 33

Count Objects 57

Digitizer 10 65 76

Docking Toolbars 13

Dodge CD 72

Drawing 27 37

DropRun Count 55

Environment 18

Exiting 63

Exporting 49

Features 16

Font 61

Frequently Asked Questions 75

Grid 40

Help File 5

Hiding Toolbars 13

Hot Links 21

Image 19 59

Image files 9

Image Toolbar 12 71

Images 75

Index Tab 6

Layers 43

Linear Conditions 31

Linear Objects 56

Main Toolbar 12 67

Menus 14

Moving Toolbars 13

Navigate Toolbar 12 69

Navigating 20

On-Screen Takeofftrade 2

Page 59 61

Pages 20 25 28

Plan Viewer 73

Plans 26

Printing 47 76

Project Properties 25

Projects 22

Quick Start Video 18

Resizing Toolbars 13

Roping 54

Saving 63

Scale 28

Search Tab 7

Selecting Objects 42

Setup 8

Start On-Screen Takeofftrade 17

System Requirements 9

Takeoff 19 27

Takeoff Toolbar 70 71

Takeoff Toolbar 12

Template Files 23

TIF (Group4) 9

Tool Toolbar 12 68

Toolbar 67

Toolbars 12

View Toolbar 12 69

Viewing Toolbars 12

Worksheet 20

Zone Conditions 33

Zoom Toolbar 12 69

  • On-Screen Takeoff Lite
  • Table of Contents
  • Section 1 - Introduction
  • Section 2 - Setup
  • Section 3 - Toolbars and Menus
  • Section 4 - Features
  • Section 5 - Projects
  • Section 6 - Conditions and Takeoff
  • Section 7 - Printing and Exporting
  • Section 8 - Advanced Features
  • Section 9 - Saving and Exiting
  • Appendix I - Installing Your Digitizer
  • Appendix II - Toolbar Items
  • Appendix III - Loading Plans from a Dodge CD
  • Appendix IV - Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer
  • Appendix V - Frequently Asked Questions
  • Index

Section 4 Features

20

Worksheet View This view displays the condition and quantity in units of measure specified in the first results field of the Results tab in the Condition dialog and allows the user to enter amounts for material labor and subcontractor takeoffs

NOTE When in the Worksheet view tab out the field then save This is keep all the values saved

Navigating On-Screen Takeoff

Auto Scrolling When creating linear areas or zones On-Screen Takeoff will automatically scroll the image view when necessary It will move as your mouse or digitizer moves beyond the edge of the current view

Changing Pages

1 Select View gt Next Page Previous Page or Go To Page (specify page number for the Go to Page option)

2 You may also select the corresponding arrows for these options from the Navigate Toolbar The

drop down arrow in the Page field will list the pages The and arrows will take you to the

previous or next page The and arrows will take you to the first or last page

OR

Section 4 Features

21

3 Or press Ctrl G for the Go To Page dialog

Hot Links Hot links allow you to move quickly from one drawing to the pertinent area of another drawing A hot link is handy when viewing enlarged areas of a page and needing the ability to jump back to a reference page

1 Select Tools gt Hot Link

OR

2 Click from the Tools Toolbar

3 Click on the page where you want to set the link The Hot Link dialog will open

4 Using the current page display on the Navigate Toolbar access the pull-down menu of pages by

clicking on the arrow at the right

5 Select the page for your link (You may also choose View gt Go to Page and select by page number)

6 Manipulate the view using the zoom tool and the scroll bars

7 Click

8 After joining a hot link to another page the hot link arrows in the Navigation Toolbar will become active

9 Move a hot link to another location on the page by clicking then click and drag the hot link image anywhere on the page

Section 5

22

Projects

This section will

Help you create settings important to your projects

Explain how On-Screen Takeoff works with your electronic or paper plans

Section 5 Projects

23

Project Template Files You can begin your project with a template Templates allow you to take advantage of conditions and settings used with previous projects

On-Screen Takeoff templates contain condition lists and established layer separations from previous projects you have created You may also use the sample templates provided with On-Screen Takeoff as a great starting point All aspects of the templates may be adjusted for a new project

1 Select File gt New and click the OK button

2 From the New dialog box choose the template that best fits your project

3 The conditions for this template will appear in the Takeoff Dock bar and the Project Properties dialog will open asking for further information

4 Use File gt Save or File gt Save As to rename and save your new project

Saving a Project as a Template File You can save your condition properties and layers as a template for future projects

1 Select File gt Save As

2 Enter a name for your template and select On-Screen Takeoff Template Files (tpo) from the Save As type field of the dialog (click on the down arrow to select)

3 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog Modifying a Template File Follow these steps to modify an existing template file if you need to change or add conditions andor layers

1 Select File gt Open

2 Navigate to your Projects directory

3 In the File Type drop-down select On-Screen Takeoff Template files (tpo)

4 Choose the On-Screen Takeoff template file you would like to modify and click the OK button

5 Make appropriate changes

6 Save and close file

The On-Screen Takeoff template files cannot save takeoff information

Section 5 Projects

24

Opening an Existing Project File 1 Select File gt Open

2 Navigate to the desired file location

3 Click the Open button

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask

you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Creating a New Project

1 Select File gt New

2 For a blank untitled project click

3 At this point the Project Properties dialog will pop-up for more information about your takeoff

NOTE The following are important to keep in mind when beginning a new project

At the start of your project fill out the Project Properties settings to establish the name for all printed output from your project set the default page size and scale for your plans number and names of different pages within the project and locations of electronic drawings

Scale settings can significantly affect quantity outcomes Be sure to set the scale for each page of drawings before beginning condition takeoffs

When using a digitizer remember to make a mark with a pen or pencil in the upper left and lower right corners of the first sheet of the paper plans to delineate the takeoff area for that sheet You can then set the takeoff area on On-Screen Takeoff using your marks

Save your project before you begin taking off any conditions On-Screen Takeoff will write a back-up file using the same file name

Remember the Undo feature If you make a mistake select Edit gt Undo and reverse the process step by step

Section 5 Projects

25

Project Properties

You can either set your Project Properties when you create a new takeoff or once your project file is saved under the appropriate name

1 Select File gt Project Properties the Project Properties dialog box will appear

2 Type in the name of your project to appear on printouts Use the backspace andor delete keys to edit the name as necessary

3 Press the Tab key to move to the Default Image Size option or click within the Image Size box You may click on the arrow at the right for the pull-down menu of page size options or you can use the down-arrow key on your keyboard to scroll through the list to the appropriate selection

4 Press the Tab key to move to the Default Scale option Select a scale by using the drop down arrow If your scale is metric you will need to click in the box next to Metric to convert to that measurement

5 Establish the number of pages for your project plans And load image files See Adding Pages to

Your Project

Adding Pages to Projects Individual Electronic Plans

1 Click on in the Project Properties dialog

2 In the Add Images dialog use the drop down arrow to navigate to the appropriate directory and folder containing your image

3 Select the file so that it displays in the File name field then click The file will display by name and path in the Image File field in Project Properties dialog

4 Click to accept and your project will automatically open

5 Save your project with the new settings by selecting File gt Save

Section 5 Projects

26

Electronic plans scanned from blueprints (as opposed to blue lines) will display as white lines on a black background and are difficult to read on your computer screen Select Image gt Invert and the colors will invert to black on white

You may have noticed the Page column in the Project Properties dialog Generally plan images occupy one page and 1 will be listed in the column indicating Page 1 of your plan file If you import a multi-page TIF a plan file containing more than one page of plans they will import as separate pages and each successive page will be indicated under the Page column as 1 2 3 etc of the plan file

Group of Electronic Plans You may add all the electronic plan files from a particular source (for example from a CD) by using the Auto Add feature

1 Click the button in the Project Properties dialog

2 Browse until you find the appropriate directory and folder containing your plan images

3 Click on any file displayed within your target folder so that the file name appears in the File name box of the Auto Add dialog

4 Click The image paths and file names will be recorded into the project properties arranged alphabetically

5 Click to accept your choices and your project will automatically open

6 Save your project with the new settings by selecting File gt Save

To load Dodge Plans into your Project Properties see Appendix IIi Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

Paper Plans On-Screen Takeoff makes it easy for Full Mode users to perform quantity takeoffs from paper plans using a digitizer

1 Add pages by clicking until you have the number of pages initially in the project

2 Name each page by clicking within the Title area and typing the name

3 Click to accept your choices and close the Project Properties dialog

4 Save your project with the new project properties settings by selecting File gt Save

Section 5 Projects

27

Setting Up a Drawing Template On-Screen Takeoff provides the convenience of using the same work surface for both digitizer and mouse to allow the user to draw conditions and then edit settings of the project or add or change conditions without breaking stride A mouse pad template included with the program defines the area of the digitizer in which use of the stylus or cursor will be recognized as mouse movement as opposed to drawing movement

1 Place your stylus on On-Screen Takeoff

2 Placing the template identifies the location mouse movements will be recognized by the program

Before placing the template the template must be applied to the digitizer surface This may have been done during the installation of your digitizer We suggest attaching the template to the lower right corner of the digitizer surface about one inch inside the grid area

3 Select Digitizer gt Place Template

4 Follow the instruction prompts on the screen clicking first on the target symbol at the left of the On-Screen Takeoff box on the template then on the target at the right

Setting Takeoff Area Before you can begin taking off a drawing you must define the drawing area on the digitizer This requires defining an area that will include all objects on each drawing of your plans As you add pages to your takeoff the same area of the digitizer will be active

1 Secure the plans to the digitizer with tape or a set of clamps

2 With a pen or a pencil mark the upper left corner and the lower right corner of the first page in your set of plans

3 Select Digitizer gt Set Takeoff Area

4 Click each mark with the stylus pen as prompted

5 Verify the active area of the digitizer by looking at the image size located in the lower right corner of your screen

If you close the program before the takeoff is complete you will need to reestablish the takeoff area before you can add additional condition quantities

Electronic plans appear on your computer screen eliminating the need to set a takeoff area You simply drag your mouse across the conditions you wish to takeoff The conditions will be highlighted and quantities will be totaled instantly Electronic plans are available through a variety of services For information contact an On Center Software account manager

Section 5 Projects

28

Setting Scale for Specific Pages You may set the scale in each page view separately This will override the default scale setting in Project Properties for that page Setting the correct scale for the drawing before taking off quantities ensures accurate calculations Be careful to check the scale for each drawing in your project before doing takeoffs

1 Display the page you want to set select Edit gt Set Scale

2 Use the drop down arrow to select a scale that will be applied to that page

3 Click

OR

4 Access the pull-down scale settings on the Navigate toolbar

NOTE As you draw objects notice that the drawn object is similar in width to the object on your plans If it is not the scale set may not be correct

Calculating Scale You may calculate scale according to a known measurement between two points either with a digitizer or on electronic plans

1 Select Edit gt Calculate Scale using Image or Edit gt Calculate Scale using Digitizer

2 Follow the instructions in the related Calculate Scale dialog box You will be asked to click on the first and second points then to enter the dimension for that distance

3 The scale will be recalculated for the displayed page and the Scale display on the Navigate toolbar will show the new scale

Section 6

29

Conditions and Takeoff

This section will Draw Conditions to Takeoff Plan Quantities

What Zones will do to help your takeoff process

Discuss the ins and outs of Takeoffs

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

30

Creating Conditions

If you are starting a new project from scratch you will need to create conditions to takeoff quantities such as floor areas wall lengths and corner bead counts If you are using a template you will have several pre-designed conditions already listed on the Takeoff dock bar However you may want to change the characteristics of some conditions or create additional conditions for a particular project

1 Right Click within the Takeoff dock bar Select New gt Condition

Or

2 From the Takeoff dock bar Click (if the buttons are not showing right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select Show Buttons from the pop-up menu) The New Condition dialog appears

3 Select the condition type (Linear Area Count or Zone) from the pull-down menu accessed by the

down arrow next to the Type option

4 Press Tab or use the mouse (or stylus) to move to Name and enter a name for your condition

5 Specify the desired condition attributes See Condition Attributes for more detail

6 Click for condition to apply

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

31

Condition Attributes Each condition type will have related attributes to select or specify within the General and Advanced tabs of the New Condition dialog Once a condition has been used to takeoff a quantity from your plans certain attributes cannot be changed

All conditions allow the user to specify color and fill pattern for the object drawn

Linear Conditions

General Specify width and height by feet and inches Specify pitch in inches up to the nearest thousandth of an inch if applicable

Advanced Specify rounding for object quantities and droprun default length for electrical or plumbing drops at the ends of lines Select Connect to have lines connect at the corners where one line of the condition ends and another begins (and indicate Tolerance for the featurersquos activation as distance between the ends of two lines) Choose Trim to have lines automatically trim to a line being crossed Choose Curve to draw a curved line

Follow these examples for inputting feet and inches For 7 feet 6 inches type 706 for 13 feet 7 inches type 1307 For 20 feet type 2000

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

32

Area Conditions

General If needed you can specify the thickness (in inches) andor pitch (in inches)

Advanced Specify rounding for object quantities Choose to display an adjustable grid within the area and indicate matrix cell dimensions

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

33

Count Conditions

General

Specify height and indicate the size (in inches) and shape (square circle triangle rectangle or opening) of the count object as it will appear on screen

Advanced Count conditions have advanced attributes These options are available for all shapes except for openings

Zone Conditions Zones allow you to subdivide condition quantities making it easier to modify and complete jobs in phases They can be used at the end of a takeoff to isolate a group of condition quantities that are in different areas of the takeoff

Zones can also be used to break a takeoff into multi-phases and can even be used to isolate quantities while a job is in progress to group the amount of work that has been completed to date They can be applied to one or multiple pages in your plans automatically calculating the takeoff quantities for each zoned area

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

34

The zone feature is only available in Lite and Full Mode If you are in View Mode and would like

to use this feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade

Condition Notes A Note tab is provided for comments regarding the condition These notes will display on the Takeoff List report and will import into Quick Bid

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

35

Condition Results The Results tab of the New Condition is based on condition type Initial settings default to linear feet (LF) for linear conditions square feet (SF) for area conditions and count of items (EA) for count conditions and zones The first of the results fields will display for the condition items in the Takeoff dock bar area All results will display in worksheets and Takeoff List reports as well as in an Excel spreadsheet after being exported

Copying Conditions You may use the condition attributes from a condition yoursquove already created for any future conditions of the same type

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Click the Copy button from the toolbar

OR

3 Right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select copy

4 A new condition will appear in the list with the same condition attributes as the previous condition but with the quantities zeroed

Editing Conditions Once you have copied a condition you might want to change several attributes You can also edit an existing condition to fit any updated needs

1 Highlight the desired condition on the Takeoff dock bar

2 Click the Change button

OR

3 Double-click on the condition you wish to edit to bring up the Change Condition dialog

NOTE The Change Condition dialog differs from the New Condition dialog only in that if takeoffs

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

36

have been performed in your project with this condition you will not be able to change the type of condition or certain properties under the advanced tab of the dialog box

Deleting Conditions 1 Click on the condition in the Takeoff Dock bar area

2 Click the Delete button on the toolbar

OR

3 Right-click and select Delete from the pop-up menu

All takeoff associated with the deleted condition will be deleted immediately and permanently

Organizing Project Conditions Within your project you can create folders andor sub-folders for different types of conditions You may even want to create a folder containing conditions with reset values

To get started organizing your conditions make sure you are viewing the condition tree (right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select Show Tree)

Creating Folders and Sub-Folders 1 Right-click in the Takeoff Dock bar area

2 Select New gt Folder from the pop-up menu

Copying Folders

1 Click on the folder and click Copy on the toolbar

2 All copied conditions within the new folder will have values reset to zero

Renaming Folders

1 Click on the folder

2 Right-click and select Rename from the pop-up menu

3 Enter a name for your folder and click the Enter button

Changing Condition Order

You may move conditions up or down in the condition list of the Takeoff dock bar to suit your project needs

1 Select the condition you would like to move by clicking to highlight it

NOTE When you are ready to move the highlighted conditions be sure that you start

moving using the last condition chosen That condition will have a highlighted boarder

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

37

2 Drag and drop any the condition from one place to another in the list You may also move a condition to another folder on the list in this way

Drawing with Conditions Snap Angles Set up snap angles to prevent lines from appearing jagged Snap angles are commonly set at 15deg and shift snap angles at 0deg

1 Go to Tools gt Options Options dialog appears

2 Under the General tab make the desired settings

3 Click to save the settings As they are drawn lines will snap to the set degree

Drawing a Linear Object 1 Select a condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff dock bar

2 Move the cursor into the Image takeoff area of the screen you will see the cursor display as crosshairs

3 Click and hold left mouse button then drag mouse to draw a line

4 Release mouse button to set line

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

38

5 Repeat steps for further lines

Continuous Mode This feature allows you to draw an object that has connected lines

1 Click the icon from the Takeoff toolbar

OR

2 Go to Tools gt Continuous Mode

3 Follow steps 1-3 from Draw a Linear Object

4 Click at each point of intersection The object will be connected

5 Double-click after making the final point to set the lines

Drawing a Curve To draw a curved line the Curve option must be checked under the Advanced tab of the Condition dialog

1 Click where you want to begin the curve and drag in a straight line to the position for the other endpoint of the curve

2 Click on the line to select it Handles in the shapes of small squares will appear at either end of

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

39

the line and in the center of the line

3 Move the cursor over the center handles until the cursor becomes a two-way arrow

4 Click and drag in the direction of the curve bending the line as you move the cursor Release to set the curve (The line you began with will disappear)

Draw a circle by drawing two curved lines connected

Drawing an Area Object Area conditions are drawn similarly to continuous mode lines You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete your area takeoff

NOTE When drawing an area do not intersect the perimeter or line of the object you are drawing

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

3 The area will be filled with the pattern set for that condition

NOTE The simulated circle will be good enough for you to be able to make a bid

To create a circular area click from point to point with very short distances in between points simulating a circlersquos perimeter Double-click after setting the last point to set the area

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

40

Grid Options Grids give you an added advantage when installing materials such as tiles Use this feature to get a count for how many tiles are needed for an area

1 Double-click on an area condition in the Takeoff dock bar to open its Condition dialog

2 Click on the Advanced tab to show its options

3 Check the box next to Grid by clicking in it

4 Indicate the dimensions of the cell matrix in inches (For example 200 x 400)

5 Under Results tab choose each (EA) for one of the results fields This will tabulate a number of grid cells (including partial grid cells) in area

6 Click to save your settings

7 Use the Move Grid and Rotate Grid features in the Tools menu to manipulate the grid as desired

Grid Calculation

1 Go to Tools gt Options menu

1 Specify if On-Screen Takeoff automatically should Calculate Grid Position

2 If AreaGrid Size is selected On-Screen Takeoff will calculate the number of items needed to fill the grid based on grid demintions

3 Click to accept and close the dialog

To move a line at any angle (regardless of default setting) press the Shift key while moving the mouse

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

41

Backout Mode This feature allows you to take out part of an area and deduct that amount of square footage

1 Select Tools gt Backout Mode

2 Outline the are you want backed out as you would when drawing a regular area object (see Drawing an Area Object)

3 The outlined area will clear and quantities will be recalculated

NOTE The perimeter of the backout area will be added to the LF quantity for that condition

Drawing a Count Object Square triangle rectangle and circle shaped count objects can easily be placed on images

1 Select the condition

2 Click in the location where you want the object to appear

3 To place an opening-shaped count item like a door or window you must click over an existing linear object such as a wall

4 On the Results tab you can change the height properties to give you the result you need

5 If Backout is checked on the advanced tab for each count opening the opening-shaped count item will back out a corresponding section of the linear object

Opening shaped count items are sized at 3rsquo0rdquo by default

Drawing a Zone Zones are drawn in the same way as area objects and may be any polygonal shape You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete the zone perimeter

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

42

Selecting Objects

1 Use the Select Tool to select objects

You can also select all objects that correspond to a condition

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Right-click and choose Select All

3 All objects with this condition will be highlighted with squares as an outline

Moving and Resizing Objects Linear

1 To move or resize a linear object click anywhere on the line to select it

2 To move the line position your pointer over the center handles When the mouse is positioned over the handles you will see a two-way arrow You will only be able to move the line in the direction of the arrows

3 Drag the line to a new position

4 Clicking and dragging the handles on the ends of the line will allow you to lengthen or shorten your line

Area and Zone

1 To move an area object or zone in its entirety click and drag it to its new position

2 Grabbing a handle at a corner or intersection of the object will allow you to adjust and change its perimeter

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

43

Count 1 To move a square circle rectangle or triangle shaped count object click and drag

2 Click and drag an opening shaped count object along the length of the linear object to the desired position then release

NOTE An opening shaped count object may not be moved from its associated linear condition object however it may be moved up and down the length of the linear object

Layers On-Screen Takeoff allows you to sort and separate your takeoff objects within the same job and on the same page On-Screen Takeoff gives you this flexibility through the use of layers

By assigning different conditions to different layers (for example differentiating between floors ceilings and walls) you can choose to view all layers or turn off certain layers to display and print the remaining groups of conditions only You may also remove the background image of electronic plans add text and hot link symbols or print only your condition takeoffs

Layers are only available in Full Mode If you are in View or Lite Mode and would like to use this

feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade Default Layers

On-Screen Takeoff begins every project with three default layers Image Annotation and Default The Image layer holds the electronic plan files you may have in your project The Annotation layer possesses all text notations highlighting and hot links in the project The Default layer will appear in the Condition dialog when creating or editing a condition (listed in the takeoff dock bar) Conditions are assigned to the Default layer unless otherwise specified by the user

Creating Layers To assign a condition to a layer other than the default layer you must first create additional layers for your project

1 Select View gt Layers to open the Layers dialog

2 Click An unnamed layer will be added

3 Click within the empty box and type a name for your layer (for example Wall)

4 New layers are added as active layers The adjacent box under the Show column will be checked

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

44

Assigning a Layer to a Condition 1 Open the Condition dialog box by creating a new condition or editing an existing condition

2 Under the General tab click on the down arrow in the Layer field to display optional layers

3 Select the desired layer for the condition Only the Default layer and layers you have added will be displayed

4 Click

View and Hide Layers

1 Select View gt Layers

2 Under the Show column check the box to view or remove the check (by clicking on it) to hide the specific layer

3 Click to accept and close the Layers dialog

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

45

Assigning Text to a Layer When adding text to an image On-Screen Takeoff has the capability to assign the text to a specified layer

1 Select the Text Tool

2 Click at the point you want to place your text

3 Type in your text using the Enter key for line breaks

4 Click the drop down arrow next to the Layer field and select the desired layer

Section 7

46

Printing and Exporting

This section will

Printing options and procedures

Exporting data by copying and pasting

Exporting quantity results to Excel spreadsheets

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

47

Print Setup On-Screen Takeoff allows the user to print the image takeoff list and worksheet

1 Select File gt Print Setup The Print Setup dialog will open

2 Select a printer or leave the default selection listed (change from the default printer displayed by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the field)

3 Indicate page size and printer tray option (Source) Access page size options by clicking on the

down arrow at the right of the field

4 Choose Portrait or Landscape orientation

5 Click to accept and close the dialog

Printing Images The image area can include the electronic plans the takeoff objects added text and hot links To print a subset of these (for example just the takeoffs without the plans or the added text and hot link symbols) hide layers that you do not want to print (see Section 6 View and Hide Layers) When you are printing your images every page will show the scale of the takeoff you are printing

1 Click on the Image tab to display the area of your project

2 Select File gt Print (or Ctrl + P)

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

48

3 Select the desired view (What to print) and the Image Range

4 Click The second Print dialog will open

5 Change settings accordingly or click if you accept the default settings

Printing Takeoff Lists and Worksheets In Takeoff Lists and Worksheets you may hide columns to print only certain results or adjust column widths to fit the report within the page size selected

1 In Takeoff List or Worksheet view move your cursor to the right side of the columnrsquos title bar the cursor will display as a two-way arrow

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

49

2 Click and drag to adjust the width of the column Holding the mouse button you may

slide the title bar under the title bar to its left to hide the column completely

3 Select File gt Print or press Ctrl + P to access the Print dialog

4 Indicate desired printer and choose the number of copies

5 Click to print and close the dialog

When printing the condition list we suggest printing in landscape

To reset to the default column widths double-click on the right border of a column heading will reset the column to its right (or previously to its right before being hidden)

Print Preview 1 Select File gt Print Preview

2 Use and to vary your view 3 If viewing an image choose current full or scale view to see how it displays

4 For printed outputs that cover more than one page use and to view adjacent pages or click on the down arrow next to Page field and select the page you want displayed

Exporting Using the CopyPaste Feature You may copy all the data or sections from the worksheet and the takeoff list view in On-Screen Takeoff and paste it into another application When pasting into Excel the cell layout will be maintained

1 Highlight the areas you wish to paste Click and hold the left mouse button down as you drag the cursor over the area to be selected then releasing the mouse button

OR

2 Select the entire takeoff list quickly click on the left On-Screen Takeoff column header and hold and drag the cursor across the remaining column headings

The number of pages for the view selected will display in the lower left-hand corner The zoom percentage that applies to the view will be displayed in the lower right-hand corner next to page size of the drawing

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

50

3 In the worksheet view you may highlight rows by clicking on the numbered buttons to the left of each row clicking and dragging across column headings or clicking and dragging over individual cells in the worksheet

Click anywhere in the appropriate view to deselect the area

4 Once your selection is highlighted you may select Edit gt Copy or Ctrl C from the keyboard 5 On your monitor switch to the application into which you want to paste your selection 6 Select Edit gt Paste in the new application or simply press Ctrl + V to paste

The colored keys for conditions cannot be pasted

Using the Export Feature You may export condition quantities to specified cell location within an Excel worksheet file Cell target locations are assigned in the Results tab of the condition dialogs on the Export line relating to each quantity measurement type

On-Screen Takeoff will export takeoff quantity results for up to three different quantity types that you specify For instance you may want to know the number of square feet in a ceiling area as well as the number of linear feet in its perimeter

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

51

1 Bring up the Condition dialog by double-clicking on a condition in the takeoff dock bar or by

selecting the condition and clicking

2 Click on the Results tab to access its fields The default quantities for the condition type will display

3 For each results field click on the arrow to access the pull-down menu and select the appropriate quantity (for example SF LF EA etchellip)

4 Have your Excel spreadsheet opened and saved in a file

5 Specify the Excel spreadsheet cell locations where you want the results to go

6 For a cell in the first sheet of your spreadsheet type in the cell address (eg a1) Case is not important

7 For a cell on a successive sheet of your spreadsheet type in sheet the number followed by a comma and the cell address without any spaces (eg sheet2a1) Case is not important

8 Click

9 Select File gt Export gt Condition Qty to Excel

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

52

10 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

11 Click to export On-Screen Takeoff results to specified cell locations in the Excel file When you return to the Excel application you will see the values have been added to the specified cell locations in your spreadsheet

12 Save your Excel file

Exporting Worksheet to Excel

1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 From On-Screen Takeoff Select File gt Export gt Worksheet to Excel

4 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

5 Click When you return to the Excel application you will see the values from the Worksheet Tab have been added to your spreadsheet

6 Save your Excel file

Exporting Takeoff to CVS 1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 Click the Takeoff Tab in the project you want to export the information

4 Select File gt Export gt Takeoff to CSV

5 Browse to the location of the CSV spreadsheet file click file to select it

6 Click the Save

NOTE CSV files can be opened in Excel Lotus Access etc One may consider this option more of a ldquodumprdquo into a file

The Excel application must be active (it may be minimized on the application bar) with the target spreadsheet open in the application Otherwise an error will occur with the export operation that will affect both the On-Screen Takeofftrade file and the Excel spreadsheet

Section 8

53

Advanced Features

This section will

Some special features of working with condition objects in the takeoff area

Details of advanced options for conditions

Advanced features of the Project Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

54

Features to Use with Objects Roping Feature You can move copy or delete using this feature Using the Select tool (the pointer) you may select several objects at once by clicking and dragging an outline around the objects then releasing the mouse button Roping may select either objects completely within the outlined area (inclusive) or objects both within and touched by the outlined area (touching) Specify your roping preference under Tools gt Options

1 Click and hold the mouse button at a point on the screen near the objects to be selected and drag to surround the objects with an outline

2 Release the mouse button The objects will be selected

3 You may now

Move the group around on the page by clicking within the group dragging the mouse and releasing the button to place the objects

Delete the group of objects by clicking the Delete key or

Copy and paste by pressing Ctrl C to copy the group then Ctrl V to paste it The pasted copy of the grouped objects will appear slightly offset from the original objects

Section 8 Advanced Features

55

Applying a DropRun Count

Use the droprun feature when calculating quantities to take into account the drop or run of a linear condition such as electrical lines or plumbing pipes Drop or run lengths may be added separately to any linear condition on screen while a default droprun length may be indicated for a condition as a whole

1 Select the desired linear condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff Dock bar

2 Click the Change button in the toolbar to open the Change Condition dialog

3 Click the Advanced tab to access the advanced options and click inside the DropRun check box

4 Enter a default length to be applied to all of this condition Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches) You can leave the length blank and manually enter drop run on each segment drawn

5 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog

Edit DropRun Count

1 With the related linear condition in the Takeoff Dock bar highlighted or with the pointer tool selected

2 click on the desired linear object in the image takeoff area The Count button will become active

3 Click on the Count button (alternatively select Tools gt Count) The default droprun amount will show in the pop-up Count dialog (Default length will be zero if droprun has not been selected in this conditionrsquos properties)

4 Type in the desired length Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches)

5 Click the OK button The additional amount will be reflected in the corresponding quantity The new DropRun count will apply only to the object edited

Adding Text in Image View

On-Screen Takeoff allows you to place text comments around your quantity takeoffs that may be printed along with plan images and objects Text is automatically placed within the Annotation Layer (that includes text and hot links)

1 To place text on the image select the Text Tool and click at the point you want to place your text opening a text box

2 Type in your information clicking Enter for line breaks

3 When you are finished click the OK button to exit the text box

4 To reposition text simply click on the text (with the Text Tool active) to select it

5 Move the cursor over the text the cursor will now display as a four-way arrow

6 Click and drag the mouse to position the text as desired

Section 8 Advanced Features

56

1 To edit existing text use the Text Tool to double-click on the text to open the editing box

2 Enter additional text or use the Backspace key to delete text as necessary

Formatting Text Once created you may format the font size type style and color of your text

1 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Font or click on the Font button in the Takeoff Toolbar

2 Select the desired features (color options are disabled) and click the OK button

3 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Color or click on the Color button in the Takeoff Toolbar The Color dialog will open

4 Click on a color in the Basic Color palette or create a color and add to the Custom Colors palette (Be sure to click on the color in the Custom Colors palette to select it)

5 Click the OK button

Object Properties

Linear Objects

Linear objects may be set to connect at corners

A linear object may be set to trim automatically when crossing another linear object (Check the trim option under the advanced tab of the Condition dialog)

When you move a connected linear object objects automatically move and resize connected lines accordingly (quantities are then recalculated)

This feature requires that the connected linear object be moved using the center handles (does not apply when resizing the line from the ends)

Objects constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

Objects are measured from centerline to centerline

Section 8 Advanced Features

57

Area Objects When drawing an area use your escape key to undo the last line drawn You may reverse your

drawing of an area using the escape key

The area will not fill with color and pattern until the user double-clicks after the last line is set

Lines drawn to delineate an area object constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

After selecting an area to move or adjust position the mouse in the center to move the entire area position the mouse at the sides or corners to adjust the perimeter

Count Objects

All count objects are quantified by the physical number of objects per page and reported as EA for the UOM The quantity for the current Image View is (displayed in the Condition List) and the total quantity in your project is displayed in the Takeoff View and Worksheet View)

Square circle rectangle and triangle shaped count objects do not displace or subtract from other object quantities when placed on top of them However on the Advanced Tab for the count condition a connect property can be set (this is a check box) so that when a count object of this shape is put on top of a Linear type takeoff object it will move with the linear if said linear is moved

An opened-shaped count object must be placed within a linear object Opening shaped count objects may also be measured by linear foot or linear yard (EA SF and SY are also options) Opening shaped count items default to a width of 3rsquo 0rdquo at the time of creation This size can be changed The small medium and large size are not options on this type of condition anymore Check Backout on the Advanced tab for each Count object back out the footage (or yardage) of opening-shaped count objects in which they are placed

NOTE In order to see this Backout functionality (in quantity) for SY or SF deductions at least one of the

results for the Linear(s) this object will be placed on must be set to SY or SF and the count object must have a height quantity

Advanced Features of Conditions The Round Feature Under the Advanced tab of the linear and area Condition dialogues you may specify quantity rounding (in inches) For linear objects rounding applies to each linear object drawn For area objects rounding will apply to each segment of the area perimeter adjusting the perimeter and area calculations For example With a linear condition entering 12 in the Round field will round up each related linear object to the nearest 12 inches or one foot With this setting two walls of 1 4 would each round to 2 0 totaling 4 0

NOTE In the Takeoff Dock bar condition list and in the On-Screen Takeoff reports quantities will be displayed in whole numbers rounded up to the nearest foot However calculations are based on true quantities without rounding unless the Round Feature is engaged

Pitch Pitch may apply either to linear or area conditions It is measured in rise per linear foot Entering 12 indicates a 12 rise per 12 of linear distance (a pitch of 12 over 12) or an angle of 45deg

Section 8 Advanced Features

58

Advanced Features of Project Properties Selecting Multiple Pages

1 Select a single page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry

2 Drag the cursor down the column of numbers to select consecutive pages

3 Click on the blank button at the top of this column to select all pages in the Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

59

Changing Image Assigned to a Drawing 1 Select the page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry 2 Click the Change Image button The Change Image dialog box will appear

3 Navigate to the desired file and select by clicking on it

4 Click the Open button The electronic file assigned to the page will have been changed to reflect the new file choice

Changing Image File Path 1 Select pages as described above

2 Choose Change Folder

3 In the Change Folder dialog navigate to the appropriate folder

4 Click the OK button The file path will have been changed for the selected page entries

Delete a Page from Project Properties 1 Select the page you want to delete by clicking on its associated number (in the gray box at the

left of the entry)

2 Choose Delete Page

All Takeoff on the page will be deleted immediately and permanently

Section 8 Advanced Features

60

Advanced Features of Tool Options

Calculation Method On-Screen Takeoff has built-in calculation options to allow for faster work and faster saves until your takeoff is complete Calculation options are found by selecting Tools gt Options then clicking on the Calculation tab

Calculation method can be set to Automatic Automatic except Grids and Manual Manual will allow the program to operate more quickly while Automatic or Automatic except Grids allows the user to see quantity changes as takeoffs are made

In any mode you may press F9 to recalculate quantities for the On-Screen Takeoff current totals

Configuration Tab

When the ldquoPage Label (A01)rdquo radial button is chosen On-Screen Takeoff puts the numbered label on all the pages of in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar If the Page Descriptionrdquo radial button is chosen then a description of what takeoff is on that specific page will be shown in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar

This section of the configuration tab gives you options on how you want to export your information When the ldquoFolderSubfolder Namesrdquo radial button is chosen than on your file that you are exporting to will have all the conditions folders and subfolders In the Delimiter box you can choose the symbol that is needed to separate the information you are exporting Some files need semicolons () or colons () to make sure the information comes exported in is separated it the appropriate places

Section 8 Advanced Features

61

In previous versions of On-Screen Takeoff there are views that users need to have in order for them to display their information By either choosing ldquoOST 1xrdquo or ldquoOST 2xrdquo it will let the program know you want your columns of information exported in that specific format

When you have the Confirm Deletions radial button of ldquoYesrdquo chosen than every time you delete anything you will get a dialog box confirming your intentions of deletion

While working with your takeoff you have a choice to either view the legend of your conditions or hide it Choose whichever radial button that suits your needs

For those who prefer to use the Enter key to navigate in dialog boxes this option is just for that

Font Tab The Font tab is designed for you to make your own look and feel for the application At the bottom of this tab it will show you sample of the fonts and colors you have chosen

Renaming the Current Page You may change the name of the current page in the takeoff area of On-Screen Takeoff by selecting Edit gt Rename Page

This opens the Name Page dialog and you may simply type in a new name and click the Enter button The new name for the file will be reflected on the title bar for the page and in Project Properties

You also may access the Rename Page function by right-clicking in the takeoff area while in Image View and selecting the option from the pop-up menu that appears

Section 9

62

Saving and Exiting

This section will

Explain how to save projects

Show you how to safely exit the program

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

63

Saving Your Project

1 Select File gt Save 2 If your project has not previously been saved a Save dialog box will open to allow you to name

the file and choose the directory and folder in which to save your file 3 Once saved File gt Save will simply save the current version of the file

OR

4 Select File gt Save As then type in a new name for the file and save to the desired file path

The Auto-save Feature With the Auto-save feature On-Screen Takeoff automatically backs up your open project You may choose to have more than one level of backup files The first backup copy will have the extension b00 and successive files will be b01 b02 and so on If you have designated four levels of backup files after the fourth backup copy has been created (b03) the next file will be saved over the file with extension b00 Further backup saves will then rotate through the four backup files in the same way

1 Select Tools gt Options 2 In the Auto-save area (under the General tab) select the frequency of backup file creation (in

minutes) and the number of levels for the feature 3 You also may disengage the feature by clicking in the check box to clear it

The Auto-save feature automatically saves backup copies to the directory of the current project If you are working from a write-protected area such as a CD-ROM On-Screen Takeoff will place backup files in the On-Screen Takeoff folder

Exiting When you are finished using On-Screen Takeoff it is very easy to exit Exiting is very important because of security reasons If someone were to use your computer they could enter the application and view and manipulate information

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

64

On-Screen Takeoff closes the open project when you open another or create a new project or when you exit the program

1 Select File gt Exit

OR

2 You also may click at the upper right-hand corner of the application to exit

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

65

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer When you get your digitizer from GTCO you will need to connect it to your computer Follow the instructions outlined below to do this

Note For rollup digitizers the metal bar must be oriented to the top or right hand side

Connecting the Digitizer 1 Lay the digitizer out flat 2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer 3 Plug in the power adapter 4 Plug the interface (IO) cable into the digitizer 5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into an open serial port on computer

Note GTCO Technical support phone number is 410-381-6688 The electronic manual (on diskette) from GTCO contains more detailed installation and operation instructions for the GTCO digitizer model you have

Installing other Digitizer Drivers If you are using a GTCO Digitizer you will need to install the GTCO TabletWorks Drivers

If you are using a Digitizer not supported by GTCO Tablet Works 10 please contact the manufacturer of your digitizer for assistance with installation

Installing GTCO TabletWorks Drivers 1 Insert the On Center CD into the CD-ROM drive The CD Startup screen will open 2 Click on Install Software 3 Select Additional Software and Drivers 4 Select Digitizer Driver 5 Follow the instructions for installing TabletWorks 10

Adhering the Template The template is a small plastic sticker used to enable mouse function when using the digitizer with On-Screen Takeoff Place your template on your digitizer We suggest placing it in the bottom right corner of the digitizer about one inch inside the takeoff area

Note You may either peel off the back of the template and use the adhesive surface or you can tape the template down

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

66

Testing the Digitizer Drivers Before running OST you may test the digitizer by moving the stylus around on the digitizer pad it should move the mouse cursor (if mouse emulation is enabled)

If the digitizer does not move the mouse cursor on the screen

The superset codes may need to be reset Reset the superset codes by touching on the border of the digitizer with the stylus The digitizer should beep several times

The digitizer may not be communicating with the computer Be sure the COM port selected is correct Be sure the COM port selected is correct If you are not able to get the digitizer to move the mouse cursor you need to call GTCO technical support for help

Note The Mouse Emulation is not required for On-Screen Takeoff to work properly It is used only for the Template functionality if the digitizer is moving the cursor the wrong direction (up instead of sideways or vice-versa)

Click the L-shaped arrow symbol on the digitizer with the stylus

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

67

Appendix II Toolbar Items Main Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

68

Tool Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

69

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

70

Navigate Toolbar (Continued)

Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

71

Takeoff Toolbar (Continued)

Image Toolbar

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

72

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

This section will detail how to load plans from a F W Dodge CD-ROM into an On-Screen Takeoff project file ready for takeoffs

Dodge files may be added to the Project Properties dialog However loading the files in that way will load the files by number rather than name description If you want to load one page only from your Dodge CD You will have to rename the page to display the name rather than number of the file

To load plan files from a Dodge CD so that the files load sequentially by file number but are displayed by name rather than by number within your project follow the instructions below

Opening a Dodge project from a CD-ROM 1 Insert the CD into the drive 2 Choose File gt Custom 3 Choose Dodge Plans Project (plansdat) as the file type 4 Select the appropriate file type by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the Files of type

field 5 In the Look in field access your drive paths by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the

field then

Navigate to your CD-ROM drive Open the data folder and Open the Projects folder

6 Select the desired project and open its folder 7 Open the plansdat file 8 All the images will come in sequenced correctly for that job along with the full descriptions

(names) of each page If there is not a plans folder in the project folder then plans do not exist for that project on the CD Opening the plansdat file will yield an empty project

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

73

Appendix IV Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer The On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer is a limited version of On Center Softwarersquos commercial takeoff software If your status bar located at the very bottom of the main window says View Mode in the lower left-hand corner then you are using the Plan Viewer You can use the plan viewer to

View CD-based amp converted CAD drawings

View a previously created OST file and associated drawings

Download electronic plans online

Navigate through drawings

Quickly Takeoff linearsareas and counts

Zoom in to view the plan better

Print drawings directly from the viewer

Viewing an On-Screen Takeoff Project File

1 To open an OST file that was previously created with of On-Screen Takeoff 2 Select File gt Open 3 An Open dialog will appear if you do not see the OST file you are looking for select the

Look In drop down arrow 4 A drop down menu will appear listing the various folders drives and mapped drives located

on your computer select the correct drive or folder location and continue to browse to the location of your OST file

5 When you see your OST file double-click it to open it 6 Any takeoff and drawings should appear on the Image tab view

If you do not see the drawings but do see the colored takeoff layer the drawings may

not be located in the same place they were originally saved at Go to File gt Project Properties and check the Image File path for each listed page If the image file path is pointing to a CD drive make sure the CD is inside the CR-ROM

Downloading Electronic Plans If your Online Plan Service provides a special file format (OSX) required to use this feature of our plan viewer you can immediately downloaded all electronic plans of a project directly from our viewer

Most Plan Room web sites will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff when a request to download plans is made Your particular Plan Room may differ in operation so please contact the provider directly with questions on using the site

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

74

When you request to download or open a project file from a Plan Room you will usually have the open to open or save an OSX file Choosing open will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff Alternately you may choose to save the file to a local hard drive After you have saved the file either double-click it to launch On-Screen Takeoff or open the OSX file using On-Screen Takeoff by clicking File then Open and locating the file on your hard drive You will need to change the file type to OSX

After the OSX file is opened you will see an additional tab appear in the Conditions List window called Pages

The Pages tab shows the hierarchy of your project Gray file icons represent pages that have not been downloaded and blue icons represents pages that have been downloaded

To download a page simply double-click the page icon

If you wish to select a group of pages to download you can use the Ctrl or Shift key to multiple select them then click the Download button

If you wish to download all pages at once click the Download All button

Downloaded pages will now appear in the Project Properties dialog in the same order in which they appear in the Pages tab

Creating Quick Takeoffs With On-Screen Takeoff you can create quick takeoffs to measure quantities even if you dont have the full version of our program However using the Quick Takeoff functionality shows you just a fraction of what the full version can do

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar is located at the top of the image view It has three buttons designated for three types of takeoffs Linear Area and Count The Quantity drop down list will show secondary quantities for Linears and Areas The Units drop down allows you to select how you want your quantities displayed Feet Inches Yards Millimeters and Meters

NOTE Every time change the type of takeoff you are performing (switching from Area to Linear for example) the previous quantities and takeoff objects will disappear They will also disappear when you changes pages

NOTE You can use the Dimension Tool to basically measure the distance between two points or linears The distance will display on the status bar at the bottom of the application

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

75

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions General

Where is On-Screen Takeoff installed on my computer

Typically it is installed in CProgram FilesOn-Screen Takeoff

In Explorer how do I recognize On-Screen Takeoff file types

On-Screen Takeoff data is stored in a single file per job lsquojob name OSTrsquo On-Screen Takeoff templates are stored as lsquotemplate nameTPOrsquo

Can only one project at a time be open

Yes For that reason opening another project automatically closes the project on screen You will be asked to save any changes

Is only one scale allowed per page What about on drawings that have multiple detail sections on a page and each of those drawings have different scales

Yes For pages with drawings of different scales copy the drawing to another project page and set the appropriate scale

I cannot perform backout on an area that is along a linear

As a workaround use the On-Screen Takeoff layers feature to help you with this issue Electronic Images

How do I start a project from drawings that have been scanned and written to a CD-ROM

Open a new project Select File gt Project Properties and select Auto Add Navigate to your CD and the appropriate folder and select any image file in that location Click Open All files in the location will load into your project Recommended that images are copied from CD to hard drive for performance

If I get a disk of drawings in AutoCAD format (R13 or R14) can I read them in On-Screen Takeoff

Yes On-Screen Takeoff now reads DWG DXF and many other format that are saved with AutoCAD

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

76

When I click on the all pages button what is supposed to happen Currently nothing seems to change when I click on that button

The All Pages button is used to apply the Darken and Enhance Plans feature to all pages in the project (as opposed to only the current page on screen)

Is there a way to deduct a large skylight from an area condition

Yes with the related area condition selected in the Takeoff Dock bar unselect the Backout button on the Takeoff Toolbar then draw the Backout area The area quantity will be deducted from the related condition object and the linear measurement of the Backout perimeter will be added

Digitizer Issues

How do I connect a Digitizer to the computer

See Appendix I Connecting a Digitizer

The Place Template menu choice is disabled

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or the digitizer or the digitzer drivers are not installed

It wonrsquot let me select the Set Takeoff Area menu choice

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or no job is open a digitizer is not installed or the drivers are not installed

The digitizer stylus is not moving the cursor or crosshairs

Click S-0-1 superset on the digitizer

How do I convert my old GTCO Digitizer to work with On- Screen Takeofftrade

Call GTCO and they may be able to reconfigure your digitizer to be compatible with On-Screen Takeoff

Printing Issues Which Printers work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible printers include On-Screen Takeoff Hewlett Packard Epson and Canon printers If you are having printer difficulties please contact support and specify the type of printer along with other pertinent information Contact support at wwwoncentercomsupport or email supportoncentercom

Which Plotters work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible Plotters include Hewlett Packard DesignJet plotters and the EnCAD Cadjet II If you are having plotter difficulties please contact support and specify the type of plotter concerned

ViewingDisplay I can no longer see my condition list How do I get it back

The toolbars and Dock bars can be turned on and off through the View gt Toolbars menu options

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

77

This is also accessible by right-clicking in the toolbar area and selecting (or deselecting) a toolbar listed

I cannot view my folders in the condition list

Right-click in the Takeoff Dock barcondition list area and select Show Tree to display your folders

My Status Bar reads Viewer Mode and I am unable to draw conditions

On-Screen Takeoff needs to be Authorized Or you need to purchase an upgrade Click the Perform Advanced Takeoff button on the main toolbar

I hid a Dock bar and when I selected to view it again it appeared alongside the other Dock

bar instead of stacked on top of it How do I fix it

Pick up the Dock bar by clicking on the bar at the top and continuing to hold down the mouse button drag the Dock bar over the other one It will resize and appear stacked with the other

When I open image files from a CD the images are all upside down How do I get them right

side up

To flip pages from top to bottom follow the steps below 1 Click the All Pages button on the Image Toolbar (All Pages is engaged when the button

is not clicked) 2 Click the Flip Horizontal button on the Image Toolbar 3 Click the All Pages button again to disengage

Templates How do I create a Template

Follow the steps below 1 Create a typical project 2 Choose File gt Save As 3 Choose On-Screen Takeoff Template Files as the file type to save 4 Name the file This will save all of the condition setups as well as the layers for the

project

How do I create a new project from a template

Follow the steps below 1 Choose File gt New 2 Select a template from those listed in the New dialog This will open a new project with

conditions and layers saved from a previous project but no pages or takeoff

78

INDEX

Area Conditions 32

Area Objects 57

Auto Scrolling 20

Auto-save 63

Backout Mode 41

Calculation Method 60

Conditions 29

Configuration 60

Contents Tab 6

Continuous Mode 38

Count Conditions 33

Count Objects 57

Digitizer 10 65 76

Docking Toolbars 13

Dodge CD 72

Drawing 27 37

DropRun Count 55

Environment 18

Exiting 63

Exporting 49

Features 16

Font 61

Frequently Asked Questions 75

Grid 40

Help File 5

Hiding Toolbars 13

Hot Links 21

Image 19 59

Image files 9

Image Toolbar 12 71

Images 75

Index Tab 6

Layers 43

Linear Conditions 31

Linear Objects 56

Main Toolbar 12 67

Menus 14

Moving Toolbars 13

Navigate Toolbar 12 69

Navigating 20

On-Screen Takeofftrade 2

Page 59 61

Pages 20 25 28

Plan Viewer 73

Plans 26

Printing 47 76

Project Properties 25

Projects 22

Quick Start Video 18

Resizing Toolbars 13

Roping 54

Saving 63

Scale 28

Search Tab 7

Selecting Objects 42

Setup 8

Start On-Screen Takeofftrade 17

System Requirements 9

Takeoff 19 27

Takeoff Toolbar 70 71

Takeoff Toolbar 12

Template Files 23

TIF (Group4) 9

Tool Toolbar 12 68

Toolbar 67

Toolbars 12

View Toolbar 12 69

Viewing Toolbars 12

Worksheet 20

Zone Conditions 33

Zoom Toolbar 12 69

  • On-Screen Takeoff Lite
  • Table of Contents
  • Section 1 - Introduction
  • Section 2 - Setup
  • Section 3 - Toolbars and Menus
  • Section 4 - Features
  • Section 5 - Projects
  • Section 6 - Conditions and Takeoff
  • Section 7 - Printing and Exporting
  • Section 8 - Advanced Features
  • Section 9 - Saving and Exiting
  • Appendix I - Installing Your Digitizer
  • Appendix II - Toolbar Items
  • Appendix III - Loading Plans from a Dodge CD
  • Appendix IV - Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer
  • Appendix V - Frequently Asked Questions
  • Index

Section 4 Features

21

3 Or press Ctrl G for the Go To Page dialog

Hot Links Hot links allow you to move quickly from one drawing to the pertinent area of another drawing A hot link is handy when viewing enlarged areas of a page and needing the ability to jump back to a reference page

1 Select Tools gt Hot Link

OR

2 Click from the Tools Toolbar

3 Click on the page where you want to set the link The Hot Link dialog will open

4 Using the current page display on the Navigate Toolbar access the pull-down menu of pages by

clicking on the arrow at the right

5 Select the page for your link (You may also choose View gt Go to Page and select by page number)

6 Manipulate the view using the zoom tool and the scroll bars

7 Click

8 After joining a hot link to another page the hot link arrows in the Navigation Toolbar will become active

9 Move a hot link to another location on the page by clicking then click and drag the hot link image anywhere on the page

Section 5

22

Projects

This section will

Help you create settings important to your projects

Explain how On-Screen Takeoff works with your electronic or paper plans

Section 5 Projects

23

Project Template Files You can begin your project with a template Templates allow you to take advantage of conditions and settings used with previous projects

On-Screen Takeoff templates contain condition lists and established layer separations from previous projects you have created You may also use the sample templates provided with On-Screen Takeoff as a great starting point All aspects of the templates may be adjusted for a new project

1 Select File gt New and click the OK button

2 From the New dialog box choose the template that best fits your project

3 The conditions for this template will appear in the Takeoff Dock bar and the Project Properties dialog will open asking for further information

4 Use File gt Save or File gt Save As to rename and save your new project

Saving a Project as a Template File You can save your condition properties and layers as a template for future projects

1 Select File gt Save As

2 Enter a name for your template and select On-Screen Takeoff Template Files (tpo) from the Save As type field of the dialog (click on the down arrow to select)

3 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog Modifying a Template File Follow these steps to modify an existing template file if you need to change or add conditions andor layers

1 Select File gt Open

2 Navigate to your Projects directory

3 In the File Type drop-down select On-Screen Takeoff Template files (tpo)

4 Choose the On-Screen Takeoff template file you would like to modify and click the OK button

5 Make appropriate changes

6 Save and close file

The On-Screen Takeoff template files cannot save takeoff information

Section 5 Projects

24

Opening an Existing Project File 1 Select File gt Open

2 Navigate to the desired file location

3 Click the Open button

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask

you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Creating a New Project

1 Select File gt New

2 For a blank untitled project click

3 At this point the Project Properties dialog will pop-up for more information about your takeoff

NOTE The following are important to keep in mind when beginning a new project

At the start of your project fill out the Project Properties settings to establish the name for all printed output from your project set the default page size and scale for your plans number and names of different pages within the project and locations of electronic drawings

Scale settings can significantly affect quantity outcomes Be sure to set the scale for each page of drawings before beginning condition takeoffs

When using a digitizer remember to make a mark with a pen or pencil in the upper left and lower right corners of the first sheet of the paper plans to delineate the takeoff area for that sheet You can then set the takeoff area on On-Screen Takeoff using your marks

Save your project before you begin taking off any conditions On-Screen Takeoff will write a back-up file using the same file name

Remember the Undo feature If you make a mistake select Edit gt Undo and reverse the process step by step

Section 5 Projects

25

Project Properties

You can either set your Project Properties when you create a new takeoff or once your project file is saved under the appropriate name

1 Select File gt Project Properties the Project Properties dialog box will appear

2 Type in the name of your project to appear on printouts Use the backspace andor delete keys to edit the name as necessary

3 Press the Tab key to move to the Default Image Size option or click within the Image Size box You may click on the arrow at the right for the pull-down menu of page size options or you can use the down-arrow key on your keyboard to scroll through the list to the appropriate selection

4 Press the Tab key to move to the Default Scale option Select a scale by using the drop down arrow If your scale is metric you will need to click in the box next to Metric to convert to that measurement

5 Establish the number of pages for your project plans And load image files See Adding Pages to

Your Project

Adding Pages to Projects Individual Electronic Plans

1 Click on in the Project Properties dialog

2 In the Add Images dialog use the drop down arrow to navigate to the appropriate directory and folder containing your image

3 Select the file so that it displays in the File name field then click The file will display by name and path in the Image File field in Project Properties dialog

4 Click to accept and your project will automatically open

5 Save your project with the new settings by selecting File gt Save

Section 5 Projects

26

Electronic plans scanned from blueprints (as opposed to blue lines) will display as white lines on a black background and are difficult to read on your computer screen Select Image gt Invert and the colors will invert to black on white

You may have noticed the Page column in the Project Properties dialog Generally plan images occupy one page and 1 will be listed in the column indicating Page 1 of your plan file If you import a multi-page TIF a plan file containing more than one page of plans they will import as separate pages and each successive page will be indicated under the Page column as 1 2 3 etc of the plan file

Group of Electronic Plans You may add all the electronic plan files from a particular source (for example from a CD) by using the Auto Add feature

1 Click the button in the Project Properties dialog

2 Browse until you find the appropriate directory and folder containing your plan images

3 Click on any file displayed within your target folder so that the file name appears in the File name box of the Auto Add dialog

4 Click The image paths and file names will be recorded into the project properties arranged alphabetically

5 Click to accept your choices and your project will automatically open

6 Save your project with the new settings by selecting File gt Save

To load Dodge Plans into your Project Properties see Appendix IIi Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

Paper Plans On-Screen Takeoff makes it easy for Full Mode users to perform quantity takeoffs from paper plans using a digitizer

1 Add pages by clicking until you have the number of pages initially in the project

2 Name each page by clicking within the Title area and typing the name

3 Click to accept your choices and close the Project Properties dialog

4 Save your project with the new project properties settings by selecting File gt Save

Section 5 Projects

27

Setting Up a Drawing Template On-Screen Takeoff provides the convenience of using the same work surface for both digitizer and mouse to allow the user to draw conditions and then edit settings of the project or add or change conditions without breaking stride A mouse pad template included with the program defines the area of the digitizer in which use of the stylus or cursor will be recognized as mouse movement as opposed to drawing movement

1 Place your stylus on On-Screen Takeoff

2 Placing the template identifies the location mouse movements will be recognized by the program

Before placing the template the template must be applied to the digitizer surface This may have been done during the installation of your digitizer We suggest attaching the template to the lower right corner of the digitizer surface about one inch inside the grid area

3 Select Digitizer gt Place Template

4 Follow the instruction prompts on the screen clicking first on the target symbol at the left of the On-Screen Takeoff box on the template then on the target at the right

Setting Takeoff Area Before you can begin taking off a drawing you must define the drawing area on the digitizer This requires defining an area that will include all objects on each drawing of your plans As you add pages to your takeoff the same area of the digitizer will be active

1 Secure the plans to the digitizer with tape or a set of clamps

2 With a pen or a pencil mark the upper left corner and the lower right corner of the first page in your set of plans

3 Select Digitizer gt Set Takeoff Area

4 Click each mark with the stylus pen as prompted

5 Verify the active area of the digitizer by looking at the image size located in the lower right corner of your screen

If you close the program before the takeoff is complete you will need to reestablish the takeoff area before you can add additional condition quantities

Electronic plans appear on your computer screen eliminating the need to set a takeoff area You simply drag your mouse across the conditions you wish to takeoff The conditions will be highlighted and quantities will be totaled instantly Electronic plans are available through a variety of services For information contact an On Center Software account manager

Section 5 Projects

28

Setting Scale for Specific Pages You may set the scale in each page view separately This will override the default scale setting in Project Properties for that page Setting the correct scale for the drawing before taking off quantities ensures accurate calculations Be careful to check the scale for each drawing in your project before doing takeoffs

1 Display the page you want to set select Edit gt Set Scale

2 Use the drop down arrow to select a scale that will be applied to that page

3 Click

OR

4 Access the pull-down scale settings on the Navigate toolbar

NOTE As you draw objects notice that the drawn object is similar in width to the object on your plans If it is not the scale set may not be correct

Calculating Scale You may calculate scale according to a known measurement between two points either with a digitizer or on electronic plans

1 Select Edit gt Calculate Scale using Image or Edit gt Calculate Scale using Digitizer

2 Follow the instructions in the related Calculate Scale dialog box You will be asked to click on the first and second points then to enter the dimension for that distance

3 The scale will be recalculated for the displayed page and the Scale display on the Navigate toolbar will show the new scale

Section 6

29

Conditions and Takeoff

This section will Draw Conditions to Takeoff Plan Quantities

What Zones will do to help your takeoff process

Discuss the ins and outs of Takeoffs

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

30

Creating Conditions

If you are starting a new project from scratch you will need to create conditions to takeoff quantities such as floor areas wall lengths and corner bead counts If you are using a template you will have several pre-designed conditions already listed on the Takeoff dock bar However you may want to change the characteristics of some conditions or create additional conditions for a particular project

1 Right Click within the Takeoff dock bar Select New gt Condition

Or

2 From the Takeoff dock bar Click (if the buttons are not showing right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select Show Buttons from the pop-up menu) The New Condition dialog appears

3 Select the condition type (Linear Area Count or Zone) from the pull-down menu accessed by the

down arrow next to the Type option

4 Press Tab or use the mouse (or stylus) to move to Name and enter a name for your condition

5 Specify the desired condition attributes See Condition Attributes for more detail

6 Click for condition to apply

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

31

Condition Attributes Each condition type will have related attributes to select or specify within the General and Advanced tabs of the New Condition dialog Once a condition has been used to takeoff a quantity from your plans certain attributes cannot be changed

All conditions allow the user to specify color and fill pattern for the object drawn

Linear Conditions

General Specify width and height by feet and inches Specify pitch in inches up to the nearest thousandth of an inch if applicable

Advanced Specify rounding for object quantities and droprun default length for electrical or plumbing drops at the ends of lines Select Connect to have lines connect at the corners where one line of the condition ends and another begins (and indicate Tolerance for the featurersquos activation as distance between the ends of two lines) Choose Trim to have lines automatically trim to a line being crossed Choose Curve to draw a curved line

Follow these examples for inputting feet and inches For 7 feet 6 inches type 706 for 13 feet 7 inches type 1307 For 20 feet type 2000

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

32

Area Conditions

General If needed you can specify the thickness (in inches) andor pitch (in inches)

Advanced Specify rounding for object quantities Choose to display an adjustable grid within the area and indicate matrix cell dimensions

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

33

Count Conditions

General

Specify height and indicate the size (in inches) and shape (square circle triangle rectangle or opening) of the count object as it will appear on screen

Advanced Count conditions have advanced attributes These options are available for all shapes except for openings

Zone Conditions Zones allow you to subdivide condition quantities making it easier to modify and complete jobs in phases They can be used at the end of a takeoff to isolate a group of condition quantities that are in different areas of the takeoff

Zones can also be used to break a takeoff into multi-phases and can even be used to isolate quantities while a job is in progress to group the amount of work that has been completed to date They can be applied to one or multiple pages in your plans automatically calculating the takeoff quantities for each zoned area

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

34

The zone feature is only available in Lite and Full Mode If you are in View Mode and would like

to use this feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade

Condition Notes A Note tab is provided for comments regarding the condition These notes will display on the Takeoff List report and will import into Quick Bid

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

35

Condition Results The Results tab of the New Condition is based on condition type Initial settings default to linear feet (LF) for linear conditions square feet (SF) for area conditions and count of items (EA) for count conditions and zones The first of the results fields will display for the condition items in the Takeoff dock bar area All results will display in worksheets and Takeoff List reports as well as in an Excel spreadsheet after being exported

Copying Conditions You may use the condition attributes from a condition yoursquove already created for any future conditions of the same type

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Click the Copy button from the toolbar

OR

3 Right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select copy

4 A new condition will appear in the list with the same condition attributes as the previous condition but with the quantities zeroed

Editing Conditions Once you have copied a condition you might want to change several attributes You can also edit an existing condition to fit any updated needs

1 Highlight the desired condition on the Takeoff dock bar

2 Click the Change button

OR

3 Double-click on the condition you wish to edit to bring up the Change Condition dialog

NOTE The Change Condition dialog differs from the New Condition dialog only in that if takeoffs

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

36

have been performed in your project with this condition you will not be able to change the type of condition or certain properties under the advanced tab of the dialog box

Deleting Conditions 1 Click on the condition in the Takeoff Dock bar area

2 Click the Delete button on the toolbar

OR

3 Right-click and select Delete from the pop-up menu

All takeoff associated with the deleted condition will be deleted immediately and permanently

Organizing Project Conditions Within your project you can create folders andor sub-folders for different types of conditions You may even want to create a folder containing conditions with reset values

To get started organizing your conditions make sure you are viewing the condition tree (right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select Show Tree)

Creating Folders and Sub-Folders 1 Right-click in the Takeoff Dock bar area

2 Select New gt Folder from the pop-up menu

Copying Folders

1 Click on the folder and click Copy on the toolbar

2 All copied conditions within the new folder will have values reset to zero

Renaming Folders

1 Click on the folder

2 Right-click and select Rename from the pop-up menu

3 Enter a name for your folder and click the Enter button

Changing Condition Order

You may move conditions up or down in the condition list of the Takeoff dock bar to suit your project needs

1 Select the condition you would like to move by clicking to highlight it

NOTE When you are ready to move the highlighted conditions be sure that you start

moving using the last condition chosen That condition will have a highlighted boarder

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

37

2 Drag and drop any the condition from one place to another in the list You may also move a condition to another folder on the list in this way

Drawing with Conditions Snap Angles Set up snap angles to prevent lines from appearing jagged Snap angles are commonly set at 15deg and shift snap angles at 0deg

1 Go to Tools gt Options Options dialog appears

2 Under the General tab make the desired settings

3 Click to save the settings As they are drawn lines will snap to the set degree

Drawing a Linear Object 1 Select a condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff dock bar

2 Move the cursor into the Image takeoff area of the screen you will see the cursor display as crosshairs

3 Click and hold left mouse button then drag mouse to draw a line

4 Release mouse button to set line

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

38

5 Repeat steps for further lines

Continuous Mode This feature allows you to draw an object that has connected lines

1 Click the icon from the Takeoff toolbar

OR

2 Go to Tools gt Continuous Mode

3 Follow steps 1-3 from Draw a Linear Object

4 Click at each point of intersection The object will be connected

5 Double-click after making the final point to set the lines

Drawing a Curve To draw a curved line the Curve option must be checked under the Advanced tab of the Condition dialog

1 Click where you want to begin the curve and drag in a straight line to the position for the other endpoint of the curve

2 Click on the line to select it Handles in the shapes of small squares will appear at either end of

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

39

the line and in the center of the line

3 Move the cursor over the center handles until the cursor becomes a two-way arrow

4 Click and drag in the direction of the curve bending the line as you move the cursor Release to set the curve (The line you began with will disappear)

Draw a circle by drawing two curved lines connected

Drawing an Area Object Area conditions are drawn similarly to continuous mode lines You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete your area takeoff

NOTE When drawing an area do not intersect the perimeter or line of the object you are drawing

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

3 The area will be filled with the pattern set for that condition

NOTE The simulated circle will be good enough for you to be able to make a bid

To create a circular area click from point to point with very short distances in between points simulating a circlersquos perimeter Double-click after setting the last point to set the area

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

40

Grid Options Grids give you an added advantage when installing materials such as tiles Use this feature to get a count for how many tiles are needed for an area

1 Double-click on an area condition in the Takeoff dock bar to open its Condition dialog

2 Click on the Advanced tab to show its options

3 Check the box next to Grid by clicking in it

4 Indicate the dimensions of the cell matrix in inches (For example 200 x 400)

5 Under Results tab choose each (EA) for one of the results fields This will tabulate a number of grid cells (including partial grid cells) in area

6 Click to save your settings

7 Use the Move Grid and Rotate Grid features in the Tools menu to manipulate the grid as desired

Grid Calculation

1 Go to Tools gt Options menu

1 Specify if On-Screen Takeoff automatically should Calculate Grid Position

2 If AreaGrid Size is selected On-Screen Takeoff will calculate the number of items needed to fill the grid based on grid demintions

3 Click to accept and close the dialog

To move a line at any angle (regardless of default setting) press the Shift key while moving the mouse

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

41

Backout Mode This feature allows you to take out part of an area and deduct that amount of square footage

1 Select Tools gt Backout Mode

2 Outline the are you want backed out as you would when drawing a regular area object (see Drawing an Area Object)

3 The outlined area will clear and quantities will be recalculated

NOTE The perimeter of the backout area will be added to the LF quantity for that condition

Drawing a Count Object Square triangle rectangle and circle shaped count objects can easily be placed on images

1 Select the condition

2 Click in the location where you want the object to appear

3 To place an opening-shaped count item like a door or window you must click over an existing linear object such as a wall

4 On the Results tab you can change the height properties to give you the result you need

5 If Backout is checked on the advanced tab for each count opening the opening-shaped count item will back out a corresponding section of the linear object

Opening shaped count items are sized at 3rsquo0rdquo by default

Drawing a Zone Zones are drawn in the same way as area objects and may be any polygonal shape You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete the zone perimeter

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

42

Selecting Objects

1 Use the Select Tool to select objects

You can also select all objects that correspond to a condition

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Right-click and choose Select All

3 All objects with this condition will be highlighted with squares as an outline

Moving and Resizing Objects Linear

1 To move or resize a linear object click anywhere on the line to select it

2 To move the line position your pointer over the center handles When the mouse is positioned over the handles you will see a two-way arrow You will only be able to move the line in the direction of the arrows

3 Drag the line to a new position

4 Clicking and dragging the handles on the ends of the line will allow you to lengthen or shorten your line

Area and Zone

1 To move an area object or zone in its entirety click and drag it to its new position

2 Grabbing a handle at a corner or intersection of the object will allow you to adjust and change its perimeter

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

43

Count 1 To move a square circle rectangle or triangle shaped count object click and drag

2 Click and drag an opening shaped count object along the length of the linear object to the desired position then release

NOTE An opening shaped count object may not be moved from its associated linear condition object however it may be moved up and down the length of the linear object

Layers On-Screen Takeoff allows you to sort and separate your takeoff objects within the same job and on the same page On-Screen Takeoff gives you this flexibility through the use of layers

By assigning different conditions to different layers (for example differentiating between floors ceilings and walls) you can choose to view all layers or turn off certain layers to display and print the remaining groups of conditions only You may also remove the background image of electronic plans add text and hot link symbols or print only your condition takeoffs

Layers are only available in Full Mode If you are in View or Lite Mode and would like to use this

feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade Default Layers

On-Screen Takeoff begins every project with three default layers Image Annotation and Default The Image layer holds the electronic plan files you may have in your project The Annotation layer possesses all text notations highlighting and hot links in the project The Default layer will appear in the Condition dialog when creating or editing a condition (listed in the takeoff dock bar) Conditions are assigned to the Default layer unless otherwise specified by the user

Creating Layers To assign a condition to a layer other than the default layer you must first create additional layers for your project

1 Select View gt Layers to open the Layers dialog

2 Click An unnamed layer will be added

3 Click within the empty box and type a name for your layer (for example Wall)

4 New layers are added as active layers The adjacent box under the Show column will be checked

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

44

Assigning a Layer to a Condition 1 Open the Condition dialog box by creating a new condition or editing an existing condition

2 Under the General tab click on the down arrow in the Layer field to display optional layers

3 Select the desired layer for the condition Only the Default layer and layers you have added will be displayed

4 Click

View and Hide Layers

1 Select View gt Layers

2 Under the Show column check the box to view or remove the check (by clicking on it) to hide the specific layer

3 Click to accept and close the Layers dialog

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

45

Assigning Text to a Layer When adding text to an image On-Screen Takeoff has the capability to assign the text to a specified layer

1 Select the Text Tool

2 Click at the point you want to place your text

3 Type in your text using the Enter key for line breaks

4 Click the drop down arrow next to the Layer field and select the desired layer

Section 7

46

Printing and Exporting

This section will

Printing options and procedures

Exporting data by copying and pasting

Exporting quantity results to Excel spreadsheets

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

47

Print Setup On-Screen Takeoff allows the user to print the image takeoff list and worksheet

1 Select File gt Print Setup The Print Setup dialog will open

2 Select a printer or leave the default selection listed (change from the default printer displayed by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the field)

3 Indicate page size and printer tray option (Source) Access page size options by clicking on the

down arrow at the right of the field

4 Choose Portrait or Landscape orientation

5 Click to accept and close the dialog

Printing Images The image area can include the electronic plans the takeoff objects added text and hot links To print a subset of these (for example just the takeoffs without the plans or the added text and hot link symbols) hide layers that you do not want to print (see Section 6 View and Hide Layers) When you are printing your images every page will show the scale of the takeoff you are printing

1 Click on the Image tab to display the area of your project

2 Select File gt Print (or Ctrl + P)

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

48

3 Select the desired view (What to print) and the Image Range

4 Click The second Print dialog will open

5 Change settings accordingly or click if you accept the default settings

Printing Takeoff Lists and Worksheets In Takeoff Lists and Worksheets you may hide columns to print only certain results or adjust column widths to fit the report within the page size selected

1 In Takeoff List or Worksheet view move your cursor to the right side of the columnrsquos title bar the cursor will display as a two-way arrow

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

49

2 Click and drag to adjust the width of the column Holding the mouse button you may

slide the title bar under the title bar to its left to hide the column completely

3 Select File gt Print or press Ctrl + P to access the Print dialog

4 Indicate desired printer and choose the number of copies

5 Click to print and close the dialog

When printing the condition list we suggest printing in landscape

To reset to the default column widths double-click on the right border of a column heading will reset the column to its right (or previously to its right before being hidden)

Print Preview 1 Select File gt Print Preview

2 Use and to vary your view 3 If viewing an image choose current full or scale view to see how it displays

4 For printed outputs that cover more than one page use and to view adjacent pages or click on the down arrow next to Page field and select the page you want displayed

Exporting Using the CopyPaste Feature You may copy all the data or sections from the worksheet and the takeoff list view in On-Screen Takeoff and paste it into another application When pasting into Excel the cell layout will be maintained

1 Highlight the areas you wish to paste Click and hold the left mouse button down as you drag the cursor over the area to be selected then releasing the mouse button

OR

2 Select the entire takeoff list quickly click on the left On-Screen Takeoff column header and hold and drag the cursor across the remaining column headings

The number of pages for the view selected will display in the lower left-hand corner The zoom percentage that applies to the view will be displayed in the lower right-hand corner next to page size of the drawing

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

50

3 In the worksheet view you may highlight rows by clicking on the numbered buttons to the left of each row clicking and dragging across column headings or clicking and dragging over individual cells in the worksheet

Click anywhere in the appropriate view to deselect the area

4 Once your selection is highlighted you may select Edit gt Copy or Ctrl C from the keyboard 5 On your monitor switch to the application into which you want to paste your selection 6 Select Edit gt Paste in the new application or simply press Ctrl + V to paste

The colored keys for conditions cannot be pasted

Using the Export Feature You may export condition quantities to specified cell location within an Excel worksheet file Cell target locations are assigned in the Results tab of the condition dialogs on the Export line relating to each quantity measurement type

On-Screen Takeoff will export takeoff quantity results for up to three different quantity types that you specify For instance you may want to know the number of square feet in a ceiling area as well as the number of linear feet in its perimeter

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

51

1 Bring up the Condition dialog by double-clicking on a condition in the takeoff dock bar or by

selecting the condition and clicking

2 Click on the Results tab to access its fields The default quantities for the condition type will display

3 For each results field click on the arrow to access the pull-down menu and select the appropriate quantity (for example SF LF EA etchellip)

4 Have your Excel spreadsheet opened and saved in a file

5 Specify the Excel spreadsheet cell locations where you want the results to go

6 For a cell in the first sheet of your spreadsheet type in the cell address (eg a1) Case is not important

7 For a cell on a successive sheet of your spreadsheet type in sheet the number followed by a comma and the cell address without any spaces (eg sheet2a1) Case is not important

8 Click

9 Select File gt Export gt Condition Qty to Excel

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

52

10 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

11 Click to export On-Screen Takeoff results to specified cell locations in the Excel file When you return to the Excel application you will see the values have been added to the specified cell locations in your spreadsheet

12 Save your Excel file

Exporting Worksheet to Excel

1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 From On-Screen Takeoff Select File gt Export gt Worksheet to Excel

4 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

5 Click When you return to the Excel application you will see the values from the Worksheet Tab have been added to your spreadsheet

6 Save your Excel file

Exporting Takeoff to CVS 1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 Click the Takeoff Tab in the project you want to export the information

4 Select File gt Export gt Takeoff to CSV

5 Browse to the location of the CSV spreadsheet file click file to select it

6 Click the Save

NOTE CSV files can be opened in Excel Lotus Access etc One may consider this option more of a ldquodumprdquo into a file

The Excel application must be active (it may be minimized on the application bar) with the target spreadsheet open in the application Otherwise an error will occur with the export operation that will affect both the On-Screen Takeofftrade file and the Excel spreadsheet

Section 8

53

Advanced Features

This section will

Some special features of working with condition objects in the takeoff area

Details of advanced options for conditions

Advanced features of the Project Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

54

Features to Use with Objects Roping Feature You can move copy or delete using this feature Using the Select tool (the pointer) you may select several objects at once by clicking and dragging an outline around the objects then releasing the mouse button Roping may select either objects completely within the outlined area (inclusive) or objects both within and touched by the outlined area (touching) Specify your roping preference under Tools gt Options

1 Click and hold the mouse button at a point on the screen near the objects to be selected and drag to surround the objects with an outline

2 Release the mouse button The objects will be selected

3 You may now

Move the group around on the page by clicking within the group dragging the mouse and releasing the button to place the objects

Delete the group of objects by clicking the Delete key or

Copy and paste by pressing Ctrl C to copy the group then Ctrl V to paste it The pasted copy of the grouped objects will appear slightly offset from the original objects

Section 8 Advanced Features

55

Applying a DropRun Count

Use the droprun feature when calculating quantities to take into account the drop or run of a linear condition such as electrical lines or plumbing pipes Drop or run lengths may be added separately to any linear condition on screen while a default droprun length may be indicated for a condition as a whole

1 Select the desired linear condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff Dock bar

2 Click the Change button in the toolbar to open the Change Condition dialog

3 Click the Advanced tab to access the advanced options and click inside the DropRun check box

4 Enter a default length to be applied to all of this condition Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches) You can leave the length blank and manually enter drop run on each segment drawn

5 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog

Edit DropRun Count

1 With the related linear condition in the Takeoff Dock bar highlighted or with the pointer tool selected

2 click on the desired linear object in the image takeoff area The Count button will become active

3 Click on the Count button (alternatively select Tools gt Count) The default droprun amount will show in the pop-up Count dialog (Default length will be zero if droprun has not been selected in this conditionrsquos properties)

4 Type in the desired length Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches)

5 Click the OK button The additional amount will be reflected in the corresponding quantity The new DropRun count will apply only to the object edited

Adding Text in Image View

On-Screen Takeoff allows you to place text comments around your quantity takeoffs that may be printed along with plan images and objects Text is automatically placed within the Annotation Layer (that includes text and hot links)

1 To place text on the image select the Text Tool and click at the point you want to place your text opening a text box

2 Type in your information clicking Enter for line breaks

3 When you are finished click the OK button to exit the text box

4 To reposition text simply click on the text (with the Text Tool active) to select it

5 Move the cursor over the text the cursor will now display as a four-way arrow

6 Click and drag the mouse to position the text as desired

Section 8 Advanced Features

56

1 To edit existing text use the Text Tool to double-click on the text to open the editing box

2 Enter additional text or use the Backspace key to delete text as necessary

Formatting Text Once created you may format the font size type style and color of your text

1 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Font or click on the Font button in the Takeoff Toolbar

2 Select the desired features (color options are disabled) and click the OK button

3 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Color or click on the Color button in the Takeoff Toolbar The Color dialog will open

4 Click on a color in the Basic Color palette or create a color and add to the Custom Colors palette (Be sure to click on the color in the Custom Colors palette to select it)

5 Click the OK button

Object Properties

Linear Objects

Linear objects may be set to connect at corners

A linear object may be set to trim automatically when crossing another linear object (Check the trim option under the advanced tab of the Condition dialog)

When you move a connected linear object objects automatically move and resize connected lines accordingly (quantities are then recalculated)

This feature requires that the connected linear object be moved using the center handles (does not apply when resizing the line from the ends)

Objects constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

Objects are measured from centerline to centerline

Section 8 Advanced Features

57

Area Objects When drawing an area use your escape key to undo the last line drawn You may reverse your

drawing of an area using the escape key

The area will not fill with color and pattern until the user double-clicks after the last line is set

Lines drawn to delineate an area object constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

After selecting an area to move or adjust position the mouse in the center to move the entire area position the mouse at the sides or corners to adjust the perimeter

Count Objects

All count objects are quantified by the physical number of objects per page and reported as EA for the UOM The quantity for the current Image View is (displayed in the Condition List) and the total quantity in your project is displayed in the Takeoff View and Worksheet View)

Square circle rectangle and triangle shaped count objects do not displace or subtract from other object quantities when placed on top of them However on the Advanced Tab for the count condition a connect property can be set (this is a check box) so that when a count object of this shape is put on top of a Linear type takeoff object it will move with the linear if said linear is moved

An opened-shaped count object must be placed within a linear object Opening shaped count objects may also be measured by linear foot or linear yard (EA SF and SY are also options) Opening shaped count items default to a width of 3rsquo 0rdquo at the time of creation This size can be changed The small medium and large size are not options on this type of condition anymore Check Backout on the Advanced tab for each Count object back out the footage (or yardage) of opening-shaped count objects in which they are placed

NOTE In order to see this Backout functionality (in quantity) for SY or SF deductions at least one of the

results for the Linear(s) this object will be placed on must be set to SY or SF and the count object must have a height quantity

Advanced Features of Conditions The Round Feature Under the Advanced tab of the linear and area Condition dialogues you may specify quantity rounding (in inches) For linear objects rounding applies to each linear object drawn For area objects rounding will apply to each segment of the area perimeter adjusting the perimeter and area calculations For example With a linear condition entering 12 in the Round field will round up each related linear object to the nearest 12 inches or one foot With this setting two walls of 1 4 would each round to 2 0 totaling 4 0

NOTE In the Takeoff Dock bar condition list and in the On-Screen Takeoff reports quantities will be displayed in whole numbers rounded up to the nearest foot However calculations are based on true quantities without rounding unless the Round Feature is engaged

Pitch Pitch may apply either to linear or area conditions It is measured in rise per linear foot Entering 12 indicates a 12 rise per 12 of linear distance (a pitch of 12 over 12) or an angle of 45deg

Section 8 Advanced Features

58

Advanced Features of Project Properties Selecting Multiple Pages

1 Select a single page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry

2 Drag the cursor down the column of numbers to select consecutive pages

3 Click on the blank button at the top of this column to select all pages in the Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

59

Changing Image Assigned to a Drawing 1 Select the page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry 2 Click the Change Image button The Change Image dialog box will appear

3 Navigate to the desired file and select by clicking on it

4 Click the Open button The electronic file assigned to the page will have been changed to reflect the new file choice

Changing Image File Path 1 Select pages as described above

2 Choose Change Folder

3 In the Change Folder dialog navigate to the appropriate folder

4 Click the OK button The file path will have been changed for the selected page entries

Delete a Page from Project Properties 1 Select the page you want to delete by clicking on its associated number (in the gray box at the

left of the entry)

2 Choose Delete Page

All Takeoff on the page will be deleted immediately and permanently

Section 8 Advanced Features

60

Advanced Features of Tool Options

Calculation Method On-Screen Takeoff has built-in calculation options to allow for faster work and faster saves until your takeoff is complete Calculation options are found by selecting Tools gt Options then clicking on the Calculation tab

Calculation method can be set to Automatic Automatic except Grids and Manual Manual will allow the program to operate more quickly while Automatic or Automatic except Grids allows the user to see quantity changes as takeoffs are made

In any mode you may press F9 to recalculate quantities for the On-Screen Takeoff current totals

Configuration Tab

When the ldquoPage Label (A01)rdquo radial button is chosen On-Screen Takeoff puts the numbered label on all the pages of in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar If the Page Descriptionrdquo radial button is chosen then a description of what takeoff is on that specific page will be shown in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar

This section of the configuration tab gives you options on how you want to export your information When the ldquoFolderSubfolder Namesrdquo radial button is chosen than on your file that you are exporting to will have all the conditions folders and subfolders In the Delimiter box you can choose the symbol that is needed to separate the information you are exporting Some files need semicolons () or colons () to make sure the information comes exported in is separated it the appropriate places

Section 8 Advanced Features

61

In previous versions of On-Screen Takeoff there are views that users need to have in order for them to display their information By either choosing ldquoOST 1xrdquo or ldquoOST 2xrdquo it will let the program know you want your columns of information exported in that specific format

When you have the Confirm Deletions radial button of ldquoYesrdquo chosen than every time you delete anything you will get a dialog box confirming your intentions of deletion

While working with your takeoff you have a choice to either view the legend of your conditions or hide it Choose whichever radial button that suits your needs

For those who prefer to use the Enter key to navigate in dialog boxes this option is just for that

Font Tab The Font tab is designed for you to make your own look and feel for the application At the bottom of this tab it will show you sample of the fonts and colors you have chosen

Renaming the Current Page You may change the name of the current page in the takeoff area of On-Screen Takeoff by selecting Edit gt Rename Page

This opens the Name Page dialog and you may simply type in a new name and click the Enter button The new name for the file will be reflected on the title bar for the page and in Project Properties

You also may access the Rename Page function by right-clicking in the takeoff area while in Image View and selecting the option from the pop-up menu that appears

Section 9

62

Saving and Exiting

This section will

Explain how to save projects

Show you how to safely exit the program

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

63

Saving Your Project

1 Select File gt Save 2 If your project has not previously been saved a Save dialog box will open to allow you to name

the file and choose the directory and folder in which to save your file 3 Once saved File gt Save will simply save the current version of the file

OR

4 Select File gt Save As then type in a new name for the file and save to the desired file path

The Auto-save Feature With the Auto-save feature On-Screen Takeoff automatically backs up your open project You may choose to have more than one level of backup files The first backup copy will have the extension b00 and successive files will be b01 b02 and so on If you have designated four levels of backup files after the fourth backup copy has been created (b03) the next file will be saved over the file with extension b00 Further backup saves will then rotate through the four backup files in the same way

1 Select Tools gt Options 2 In the Auto-save area (under the General tab) select the frequency of backup file creation (in

minutes) and the number of levels for the feature 3 You also may disengage the feature by clicking in the check box to clear it

The Auto-save feature automatically saves backup copies to the directory of the current project If you are working from a write-protected area such as a CD-ROM On-Screen Takeoff will place backup files in the On-Screen Takeoff folder

Exiting When you are finished using On-Screen Takeoff it is very easy to exit Exiting is very important because of security reasons If someone were to use your computer they could enter the application and view and manipulate information

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

64

On-Screen Takeoff closes the open project when you open another or create a new project or when you exit the program

1 Select File gt Exit

OR

2 You also may click at the upper right-hand corner of the application to exit

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

65

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer When you get your digitizer from GTCO you will need to connect it to your computer Follow the instructions outlined below to do this

Note For rollup digitizers the metal bar must be oriented to the top or right hand side

Connecting the Digitizer 1 Lay the digitizer out flat 2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer 3 Plug in the power adapter 4 Plug the interface (IO) cable into the digitizer 5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into an open serial port on computer

Note GTCO Technical support phone number is 410-381-6688 The electronic manual (on diskette) from GTCO contains more detailed installation and operation instructions for the GTCO digitizer model you have

Installing other Digitizer Drivers If you are using a GTCO Digitizer you will need to install the GTCO TabletWorks Drivers

If you are using a Digitizer not supported by GTCO Tablet Works 10 please contact the manufacturer of your digitizer for assistance with installation

Installing GTCO TabletWorks Drivers 1 Insert the On Center CD into the CD-ROM drive The CD Startup screen will open 2 Click on Install Software 3 Select Additional Software and Drivers 4 Select Digitizer Driver 5 Follow the instructions for installing TabletWorks 10

Adhering the Template The template is a small plastic sticker used to enable mouse function when using the digitizer with On-Screen Takeoff Place your template on your digitizer We suggest placing it in the bottom right corner of the digitizer about one inch inside the takeoff area

Note You may either peel off the back of the template and use the adhesive surface or you can tape the template down

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

66

Testing the Digitizer Drivers Before running OST you may test the digitizer by moving the stylus around on the digitizer pad it should move the mouse cursor (if mouse emulation is enabled)

If the digitizer does not move the mouse cursor on the screen

The superset codes may need to be reset Reset the superset codes by touching on the border of the digitizer with the stylus The digitizer should beep several times

The digitizer may not be communicating with the computer Be sure the COM port selected is correct Be sure the COM port selected is correct If you are not able to get the digitizer to move the mouse cursor you need to call GTCO technical support for help

Note The Mouse Emulation is not required for On-Screen Takeoff to work properly It is used only for the Template functionality if the digitizer is moving the cursor the wrong direction (up instead of sideways or vice-versa)

Click the L-shaped arrow symbol on the digitizer with the stylus

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

67

Appendix II Toolbar Items Main Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

68

Tool Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

69

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

70

Navigate Toolbar (Continued)

Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

71

Takeoff Toolbar (Continued)

Image Toolbar

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

72

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

This section will detail how to load plans from a F W Dodge CD-ROM into an On-Screen Takeoff project file ready for takeoffs

Dodge files may be added to the Project Properties dialog However loading the files in that way will load the files by number rather than name description If you want to load one page only from your Dodge CD You will have to rename the page to display the name rather than number of the file

To load plan files from a Dodge CD so that the files load sequentially by file number but are displayed by name rather than by number within your project follow the instructions below

Opening a Dodge project from a CD-ROM 1 Insert the CD into the drive 2 Choose File gt Custom 3 Choose Dodge Plans Project (plansdat) as the file type 4 Select the appropriate file type by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the Files of type

field 5 In the Look in field access your drive paths by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the

field then

Navigate to your CD-ROM drive Open the data folder and Open the Projects folder

6 Select the desired project and open its folder 7 Open the plansdat file 8 All the images will come in sequenced correctly for that job along with the full descriptions

(names) of each page If there is not a plans folder in the project folder then plans do not exist for that project on the CD Opening the plansdat file will yield an empty project

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

73

Appendix IV Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer The On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer is a limited version of On Center Softwarersquos commercial takeoff software If your status bar located at the very bottom of the main window says View Mode in the lower left-hand corner then you are using the Plan Viewer You can use the plan viewer to

View CD-based amp converted CAD drawings

View a previously created OST file and associated drawings

Download electronic plans online

Navigate through drawings

Quickly Takeoff linearsareas and counts

Zoom in to view the plan better

Print drawings directly from the viewer

Viewing an On-Screen Takeoff Project File

1 To open an OST file that was previously created with of On-Screen Takeoff 2 Select File gt Open 3 An Open dialog will appear if you do not see the OST file you are looking for select the

Look In drop down arrow 4 A drop down menu will appear listing the various folders drives and mapped drives located

on your computer select the correct drive or folder location and continue to browse to the location of your OST file

5 When you see your OST file double-click it to open it 6 Any takeoff and drawings should appear on the Image tab view

If you do not see the drawings but do see the colored takeoff layer the drawings may

not be located in the same place they were originally saved at Go to File gt Project Properties and check the Image File path for each listed page If the image file path is pointing to a CD drive make sure the CD is inside the CR-ROM

Downloading Electronic Plans If your Online Plan Service provides a special file format (OSX) required to use this feature of our plan viewer you can immediately downloaded all electronic plans of a project directly from our viewer

Most Plan Room web sites will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff when a request to download plans is made Your particular Plan Room may differ in operation so please contact the provider directly with questions on using the site

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

74

When you request to download or open a project file from a Plan Room you will usually have the open to open or save an OSX file Choosing open will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff Alternately you may choose to save the file to a local hard drive After you have saved the file either double-click it to launch On-Screen Takeoff or open the OSX file using On-Screen Takeoff by clicking File then Open and locating the file on your hard drive You will need to change the file type to OSX

After the OSX file is opened you will see an additional tab appear in the Conditions List window called Pages

The Pages tab shows the hierarchy of your project Gray file icons represent pages that have not been downloaded and blue icons represents pages that have been downloaded

To download a page simply double-click the page icon

If you wish to select a group of pages to download you can use the Ctrl or Shift key to multiple select them then click the Download button

If you wish to download all pages at once click the Download All button

Downloaded pages will now appear in the Project Properties dialog in the same order in which they appear in the Pages tab

Creating Quick Takeoffs With On-Screen Takeoff you can create quick takeoffs to measure quantities even if you dont have the full version of our program However using the Quick Takeoff functionality shows you just a fraction of what the full version can do

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar is located at the top of the image view It has three buttons designated for three types of takeoffs Linear Area and Count The Quantity drop down list will show secondary quantities for Linears and Areas The Units drop down allows you to select how you want your quantities displayed Feet Inches Yards Millimeters and Meters

NOTE Every time change the type of takeoff you are performing (switching from Area to Linear for example) the previous quantities and takeoff objects will disappear They will also disappear when you changes pages

NOTE You can use the Dimension Tool to basically measure the distance between two points or linears The distance will display on the status bar at the bottom of the application

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

75

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions General

Where is On-Screen Takeoff installed on my computer

Typically it is installed in CProgram FilesOn-Screen Takeoff

In Explorer how do I recognize On-Screen Takeoff file types

On-Screen Takeoff data is stored in a single file per job lsquojob name OSTrsquo On-Screen Takeoff templates are stored as lsquotemplate nameTPOrsquo

Can only one project at a time be open

Yes For that reason opening another project automatically closes the project on screen You will be asked to save any changes

Is only one scale allowed per page What about on drawings that have multiple detail sections on a page and each of those drawings have different scales

Yes For pages with drawings of different scales copy the drawing to another project page and set the appropriate scale

I cannot perform backout on an area that is along a linear

As a workaround use the On-Screen Takeoff layers feature to help you with this issue Electronic Images

How do I start a project from drawings that have been scanned and written to a CD-ROM

Open a new project Select File gt Project Properties and select Auto Add Navigate to your CD and the appropriate folder and select any image file in that location Click Open All files in the location will load into your project Recommended that images are copied from CD to hard drive for performance

If I get a disk of drawings in AutoCAD format (R13 or R14) can I read them in On-Screen Takeoff

Yes On-Screen Takeoff now reads DWG DXF and many other format that are saved with AutoCAD

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

76

When I click on the all pages button what is supposed to happen Currently nothing seems to change when I click on that button

The All Pages button is used to apply the Darken and Enhance Plans feature to all pages in the project (as opposed to only the current page on screen)

Is there a way to deduct a large skylight from an area condition

Yes with the related area condition selected in the Takeoff Dock bar unselect the Backout button on the Takeoff Toolbar then draw the Backout area The area quantity will be deducted from the related condition object and the linear measurement of the Backout perimeter will be added

Digitizer Issues

How do I connect a Digitizer to the computer

See Appendix I Connecting a Digitizer

The Place Template menu choice is disabled

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or the digitizer or the digitzer drivers are not installed

It wonrsquot let me select the Set Takeoff Area menu choice

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or no job is open a digitizer is not installed or the drivers are not installed

The digitizer stylus is not moving the cursor or crosshairs

Click S-0-1 superset on the digitizer

How do I convert my old GTCO Digitizer to work with On- Screen Takeofftrade

Call GTCO and they may be able to reconfigure your digitizer to be compatible with On-Screen Takeoff

Printing Issues Which Printers work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible printers include On-Screen Takeoff Hewlett Packard Epson and Canon printers If you are having printer difficulties please contact support and specify the type of printer along with other pertinent information Contact support at wwwoncentercomsupport or email supportoncentercom

Which Plotters work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible Plotters include Hewlett Packard DesignJet plotters and the EnCAD Cadjet II If you are having plotter difficulties please contact support and specify the type of plotter concerned

ViewingDisplay I can no longer see my condition list How do I get it back

The toolbars and Dock bars can be turned on and off through the View gt Toolbars menu options

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

77

This is also accessible by right-clicking in the toolbar area and selecting (or deselecting) a toolbar listed

I cannot view my folders in the condition list

Right-click in the Takeoff Dock barcondition list area and select Show Tree to display your folders

My Status Bar reads Viewer Mode and I am unable to draw conditions

On-Screen Takeoff needs to be Authorized Or you need to purchase an upgrade Click the Perform Advanced Takeoff button on the main toolbar

I hid a Dock bar and when I selected to view it again it appeared alongside the other Dock

bar instead of stacked on top of it How do I fix it

Pick up the Dock bar by clicking on the bar at the top and continuing to hold down the mouse button drag the Dock bar over the other one It will resize and appear stacked with the other

When I open image files from a CD the images are all upside down How do I get them right

side up

To flip pages from top to bottom follow the steps below 1 Click the All Pages button on the Image Toolbar (All Pages is engaged when the button

is not clicked) 2 Click the Flip Horizontal button on the Image Toolbar 3 Click the All Pages button again to disengage

Templates How do I create a Template

Follow the steps below 1 Create a typical project 2 Choose File gt Save As 3 Choose On-Screen Takeoff Template Files as the file type to save 4 Name the file This will save all of the condition setups as well as the layers for the

project

How do I create a new project from a template

Follow the steps below 1 Choose File gt New 2 Select a template from those listed in the New dialog This will open a new project with

conditions and layers saved from a previous project but no pages or takeoff

78

INDEX

Area Conditions 32

Area Objects 57

Auto Scrolling 20

Auto-save 63

Backout Mode 41

Calculation Method 60

Conditions 29

Configuration 60

Contents Tab 6

Continuous Mode 38

Count Conditions 33

Count Objects 57

Digitizer 10 65 76

Docking Toolbars 13

Dodge CD 72

Drawing 27 37

DropRun Count 55

Environment 18

Exiting 63

Exporting 49

Features 16

Font 61

Frequently Asked Questions 75

Grid 40

Help File 5

Hiding Toolbars 13

Hot Links 21

Image 19 59

Image files 9

Image Toolbar 12 71

Images 75

Index Tab 6

Layers 43

Linear Conditions 31

Linear Objects 56

Main Toolbar 12 67

Menus 14

Moving Toolbars 13

Navigate Toolbar 12 69

Navigating 20

On-Screen Takeofftrade 2

Page 59 61

Pages 20 25 28

Plan Viewer 73

Plans 26

Printing 47 76

Project Properties 25

Projects 22

Quick Start Video 18

Resizing Toolbars 13

Roping 54

Saving 63

Scale 28

Search Tab 7

Selecting Objects 42

Setup 8

Start On-Screen Takeofftrade 17

System Requirements 9

Takeoff 19 27

Takeoff Toolbar 70 71

Takeoff Toolbar 12

Template Files 23

TIF (Group4) 9

Tool Toolbar 12 68

Toolbar 67

Toolbars 12

View Toolbar 12 69

Viewing Toolbars 12

Worksheet 20

Zone Conditions 33

Zoom Toolbar 12 69

  • On-Screen Takeoff Lite
  • Table of Contents
  • Section 1 - Introduction
  • Section 2 - Setup
  • Section 3 - Toolbars and Menus
  • Section 4 - Features
  • Section 5 - Projects
  • Section 6 - Conditions and Takeoff
  • Section 7 - Printing and Exporting
  • Section 8 - Advanced Features
  • Section 9 - Saving and Exiting
  • Appendix I - Installing Your Digitizer
  • Appendix II - Toolbar Items
  • Appendix III - Loading Plans from a Dodge CD
  • Appendix IV - Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer
  • Appendix V - Frequently Asked Questions
  • Index

Section 5

22

Projects

This section will

Help you create settings important to your projects

Explain how On-Screen Takeoff works with your electronic or paper plans

Section 5 Projects

23

Project Template Files You can begin your project with a template Templates allow you to take advantage of conditions and settings used with previous projects

On-Screen Takeoff templates contain condition lists and established layer separations from previous projects you have created You may also use the sample templates provided with On-Screen Takeoff as a great starting point All aspects of the templates may be adjusted for a new project

1 Select File gt New and click the OK button

2 From the New dialog box choose the template that best fits your project

3 The conditions for this template will appear in the Takeoff Dock bar and the Project Properties dialog will open asking for further information

4 Use File gt Save or File gt Save As to rename and save your new project

Saving a Project as a Template File You can save your condition properties and layers as a template for future projects

1 Select File gt Save As

2 Enter a name for your template and select On-Screen Takeoff Template Files (tpo) from the Save As type field of the dialog (click on the down arrow to select)

3 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog Modifying a Template File Follow these steps to modify an existing template file if you need to change or add conditions andor layers

1 Select File gt Open

2 Navigate to your Projects directory

3 In the File Type drop-down select On-Screen Takeoff Template files (tpo)

4 Choose the On-Screen Takeoff template file you would like to modify and click the OK button

5 Make appropriate changes

6 Save and close file

The On-Screen Takeoff template files cannot save takeoff information

Section 5 Projects

24

Opening an Existing Project File 1 Select File gt Open

2 Navigate to the desired file location

3 Click the Open button

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask

you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Creating a New Project

1 Select File gt New

2 For a blank untitled project click

3 At this point the Project Properties dialog will pop-up for more information about your takeoff

NOTE The following are important to keep in mind when beginning a new project

At the start of your project fill out the Project Properties settings to establish the name for all printed output from your project set the default page size and scale for your plans number and names of different pages within the project and locations of electronic drawings

Scale settings can significantly affect quantity outcomes Be sure to set the scale for each page of drawings before beginning condition takeoffs

When using a digitizer remember to make a mark with a pen or pencil in the upper left and lower right corners of the first sheet of the paper plans to delineate the takeoff area for that sheet You can then set the takeoff area on On-Screen Takeoff using your marks

Save your project before you begin taking off any conditions On-Screen Takeoff will write a back-up file using the same file name

Remember the Undo feature If you make a mistake select Edit gt Undo and reverse the process step by step

Section 5 Projects

25

Project Properties

You can either set your Project Properties when you create a new takeoff or once your project file is saved under the appropriate name

1 Select File gt Project Properties the Project Properties dialog box will appear

2 Type in the name of your project to appear on printouts Use the backspace andor delete keys to edit the name as necessary

3 Press the Tab key to move to the Default Image Size option or click within the Image Size box You may click on the arrow at the right for the pull-down menu of page size options or you can use the down-arrow key on your keyboard to scroll through the list to the appropriate selection

4 Press the Tab key to move to the Default Scale option Select a scale by using the drop down arrow If your scale is metric you will need to click in the box next to Metric to convert to that measurement

5 Establish the number of pages for your project plans And load image files See Adding Pages to

Your Project

Adding Pages to Projects Individual Electronic Plans

1 Click on in the Project Properties dialog

2 In the Add Images dialog use the drop down arrow to navigate to the appropriate directory and folder containing your image

3 Select the file so that it displays in the File name field then click The file will display by name and path in the Image File field in Project Properties dialog

4 Click to accept and your project will automatically open

5 Save your project with the new settings by selecting File gt Save

Section 5 Projects

26

Electronic plans scanned from blueprints (as opposed to blue lines) will display as white lines on a black background and are difficult to read on your computer screen Select Image gt Invert and the colors will invert to black on white

You may have noticed the Page column in the Project Properties dialog Generally plan images occupy one page and 1 will be listed in the column indicating Page 1 of your plan file If you import a multi-page TIF a plan file containing more than one page of plans they will import as separate pages and each successive page will be indicated under the Page column as 1 2 3 etc of the plan file

Group of Electronic Plans You may add all the electronic plan files from a particular source (for example from a CD) by using the Auto Add feature

1 Click the button in the Project Properties dialog

2 Browse until you find the appropriate directory and folder containing your plan images

3 Click on any file displayed within your target folder so that the file name appears in the File name box of the Auto Add dialog

4 Click The image paths and file names will be recorded into the project properties arranged alphabetically

5 Click to accept your choices and your project will automatically open

6 Save your project with the new settings by selecting File gt Save

To load Dodge Plans into your Project Properties see Appendix IIi Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

Paper Plans On-Screen Takeoff makes it easy for Full Mode users to perform quantity takeoffs from paper plans using a digitizer

1 Add pages by clicking until you have the number of pages initially in the project

2 Name each page by clicking within the Title area and typing the name

3 Click to accept your choices and close the Project Properties dialog

4 Save your project with the new project properties settings by selecting File gt Save

Section 5 Projects

27

Setting Up a Drawing Template On-Screen Takeoff provides the convenience of using the same work surface for both digitizer and mouse to allow the user to draw conditions and then edit settings of the project or add or change conditions without breaking stride A mouse pad template included with the program defines the area of the digitizer in which use of the stylus or cursor will be recognized as mouse movement as opposed to drawing movement

1 Place your stylus on On-Screen Takeoff

2 Placing the template identifies the location mouse movements will be recognized by the program

Before placing the template the template must be applied to the digitizer surface This may have been done during the installation of your digitizer We suggest attaching the template to the lower right corner of the digitizer surface about one inch inside the grid area

3 Select Digitizer gt Place Template

4 Follow the instruction prompts on the screen clicking first on the target symbol at the left of the On-Screen Takeoff box on the template then on the target at the right

Setting Takeoff Area Before you can begin taking off a drawing you must define the drawing area on the digitizer This requires defining an area that will include all objects on each drawing of your plans As you add pages to your takeoff the same area of the digitizer will be active

1 Secure the plans to the digitizer with tape or a set of clamps

2 With a pen or a pencil mark the upper left corner and the lower right corner of the first page in your set of plans

3 Select Digitizer gt Set Takeoff Area

4 Click each mark with the stylus pen as prompted

5 Verify the active area of the digitizer by looking at the image size located in the lower right corner of your screen

If you close the program before the takeoff is complete you will need to reestablish the takeoff area before you can add additional condition quantities

Electronic plans appear on your computer screen eliminating the need to set a takeoff area You simply drag your mouse across the conditions you wish to takeoff The conditions will be highlighted and quantities will be totaled instantly Electronic plans are available through a variety of services For information contact an On Center Software account manager

Section 5 Projects

28

Setting Scale for Specific Pages You may set the scale in each page view separately This will override the default scale setting in Project Properties for that page Setting the correct scale for the drawing before taking off quantities ensures accurate calculations Be careful to check the scale for each drawing in your project before doing takeoffs

1 Display the page you want to set select Edit gt Set Scale

2 Use the drop down arrow to select a scale that will be applied to that page

3 Click

OR

4 Access the pull-down scale settings on the Navigate toolbar

NOTE As you draw objects notice that the drawn object is similar in width to the object on your plans If it is not the scale set may not be correct

Calculating Scale You may calculate scale according to a known measurement between two points either with a digitizer or on electronic plans

1 Select Edit gt Calculate Scale using Image or Edit gt Calculate Scale using Digitizer

2 Follow the instructions in the related Calculate Scale dialog box You will be asked to click on the first and second points then to enter the dimension for that distance

3 The scale will be recalculated for the displayed page and the Scale display on the Navigate toolbar will show the new scale

Section 6

29

Conditions and Takeoff

This section will Draw Conditions to Takeoff Plan Quantities

What Zones will do to help your takeoff process

Discuss the ins and outs of Takeoffs

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

30

Creating Conditions

If you are starting a new project from scratch you will need to create conditions to takeoff quantities such as floor areas wall lengths and corner bead counts If you are using a template you will have several pre-designed conditions already listed on the Takeoff dock bar However you may want to change the characteristics of some conditions or create additional conditions for a particular project

1 Right Click within the Takeoff dock bar Select New gt Condition

Or

2 From the Takeoff dock bar Click (if the buttons are not showing right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select Show Buttons from the pop-up menu) The New Condition dialog appears

3 Select the condition type (Linear Area Count or Zone) from the pull-down menu accessed by the

down arrow next to the Type option

4 Press Tab or use the mouse (or stylus) to move to Name and enter a name for your condition

5 Specify the desired condition attributes See Condition Attributes for more detail

6 Click for condition to apply

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

31

Condition Attributes Each condition type will have related attributes to select or specify within the General and Advanced tabs of the New Condition dialog Once a condition has been used to takeoff a quantity from your plans certain attributes cannot be changed

All conditions allow the user to specify color and fill pattern for the object drawn

Linear Conditions

General Specify width and height by feet and inches Specify pitch in inches up to the nearest thousandth of an inch if applicable

Advanced Specify rounding for object quantities and droprun default length for electrical or plumbing drops at the ends of lines Select Connect to have lines connect at the corners where one line of the condition ends and another begins (and indicate Tolerance for the featurersquos activation as distance between the ends of two lines) Choose Trim to have lines automatically trim to a line being crossed Choose Curve to draw a curved line

Follow these examples for inputting feet and inches For 7 feet 6 inches type 706 for 13 feet 7 inches type 1307 For 20 feet type 2000

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

32

Area Conditions

General If needed you can specify the thickness (in inches) andor pitch (in inches)

Advanced Specify rounding for object quantities Choose to display an adjustable grid within the area and indicate matrix cell dimensions

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

33

Count Conditions

General

Specify height and indicate the size (in inches) and shape (square circle triangle rectangle or opening) of the count object as it will appear on screen

Advanced Count conditions have advanced attributes These options are available for all shapes except for openings

Zone Conditions Zones allow you to subdivide condition quantities making it easier to modify and complete jobs in phases They can be used at the end of a takeoff to isolate a group of condition quantities that are in different areas of the takeoff

Zones can also be used to break a takeoff into multi-phases and can even be used to isolate quantities while a job is in progress to group the amount of work that has been completed to date They can be applied to one or multiple pages in your plans automatically calculating the takeoff quantities for each zoned area

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

34

The zone feature is only available in Lite and Full Mode If you are in View Mode and would like

to use this feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade

Condition Notes A Note tab is provided for comments regarding the condition These notes will display on the Takeoff List report and will import into Quick Bid

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

35

Condition Results The Results tab of the New Condition is based on condition type Initial settings default to linear feet (LF) for linear conditions square feet (SF) for area conditions and count of items (EA) for count conditions and zones The first of the results fields will display for the condition items in the Takeoff dock bar area All results will display in worksheets and Takeoff List reports as well as in an Excel spreadsheet after being exported

Copying Conditions You may use the condition attributes from a condition yoursquove already created for any future conditions of the same type

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Click the Copy button from the toolbar

OR

3 Right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select copy

4 A new condition will appear in the list with the same condition attributes as the previous condition but with the quantities zeroed

Editing Conditions Once you have copied a condition you might want to change several attributes You can also edit an existing condition to fit any updated needs

1 Highlight the desired condition on the Takeoff dock bar

2 Click the Change button

OR

3 Double-click on the condition you wish to edit to bring up the Change Condition dialog

NOTE The Change Condition dialog differs from the New Condition dialog only in that if takeoffs

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

36

have been performed in your project with this condition you will not be able to change the type of condition or certain properties under the advanced tab of the dialog box

Deleting Conditions 1 Click on the condition in the Takeoff Dock bar area

2 Click the Delete button on the toolbar

OR

3 Right-click and select Delete from the pop-up menu

All takeoff associated with the deleted condition will be deleted immediately and permanently

Organizing Project Conditions Within your project you can create folders andor sub-folders for different types of conditions You may even want to create a folder containing conditions with reset values

To get started organizing your conditions make sure you are viewing the condition tree (right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select Show Tree)

Creating Folders and Sub-Folders 1 Right-click in the Takeoff Dock bar area

2 Select New gt Folder from the pop-up menu

Copying Folders

1 Click on the folder and click Copy on the toolbar

2 All copied conditions within the new folder will have values reset to zero

Renaming Folders

1 Click on the folder

2 Right-click and select Rename from the pop-up menu

3 Enter a name for your folder and click the Enter button

Changing Condition Order

You may move conditions up or down in the condition list of the Takeoff dock bar to suit your project needs

1 Select the condition you would like to move by clicking to highlight it

NOTE When you are ready to move the highlighted conditions be sure that you start

moving using the last condition chosen That condition will have a highlighted boarder

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

37

2 Drag and drop any the condition from one place to another in the list You may also move a condition to another folder on the list in this way

Drawing with Conditions Snap Angles Set up snap angles to prevent lines from appearing jagged Snap angles are commonly set at 15deg and shift snap angles at 0deg

1 Go to Tools gt Options Options dialog appears

2 Under the General tab make the desired settings

3 Click to save the settings As they are drawn lines will snap to the set degree

Drawing a Linear Object 1 Select a condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff dock bar

2 Move the cursor into the Image takeoff area of the screen you will see the cursor display as crosshairs

3 Click and hold left mouse button then drag mouse to draw a line

4 Release mouse button to set line

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

38

5 Repeat steps for further lines

Continuous Mode This feature allows you to draw an object that has connected lines

1 Click the icon from the Takeoff toolbar

OR

2 Go to Tools gt Continuous Mode

3 Follow steps 1-3 from Draw a Linear Object

4 Click at each point of intersection The object will be connected

5 Double-click after making the final point to set the lines

Drawing a Curve To draw a curved line the Curve option must be checked under the Advanced tab of the Condition dialog

1 Click where you want to begin the curve and drag in a straight line to the position for the other endpoint of the curve

2 Click on the line to select it Handles in the shapes of small squares will appear at either end of

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

39

the line and in the center of the line

3 Move the cursor over the center handles until the cursor becomes a two-way arrow

4 Click and drag in the direction of the curve bending the line as you move the cursor Release to set the curve (The line you began with will disappear)

Draw a circle by drawing two curved lines connected

Drawing an Area Object Area conditions are drawn similarly to continuous mode lines You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete your area takeoff

NOTE When drawing an area do not intersect the perimeter or line of the object you are drawing

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

3 The area will be filled with the pattern set for that condition

NOTE The simulated circle will be good enough for you to be able to make a bid

To create a circular area click from point to point with very short distances in between points simulating a circlersquos perimeter Double-click after setting the last point to set the area

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

40

Grid Options Grids give you an added advantage when installing materials such as tiles Use this feature to get a count for how many tiles are needed for an area

1 Double-click on an area condition in the Takeoff dock bar to open its Condition dialog

2 Click on the Advanced tab to show its options

3 Check the box next to Grid by clicking in it

4 Indicate the dimensions of the cell matrix in inches (For example 200 x 400)

5 Under Results tab choose each (EA) for one of the results fields This will tabulate a number of grid cells (including partial grid cells) in area

6 Click to save your settings

7 Use the Move Grid and Rotate Grid features in the Tools menu to manipulate the grid as desired

Grid Calculation

1 Go to Tools gt Options menu

1 Specify if On-Screen Takeoff automatically should Calculate Grid Position

2 If AreaGrid Size is selected On-Screen Takeoff will calculate the number of items needed to fill the grid based on grid demintions

3 Click to accept and close the dialog

To move a line at any angle (regardless of default setting) press the Shift key while moving the mouse

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

41

Backout Mode This feature allows you to take out part of an area and deduct that amount of square footage

1 Select Tools gt Backout Mode

2 Outline the are you want backed out as you would when drawing a regular area object (see Drawing an Area Object)

3 The outlined area will clear and quantities will be recalculated

NOTE The perimeter of the backout area will be added to the LF quantity for that condition

Drawing a Count Object Square triangle rectangle and circle shaped count objects can easily be placed on images

1 Select the condition

2 Click in the location where you want the object to appear

3 To place an opening-shaped count item like a door or window you must click over an existing linear object such as a wall

4 On the Results tab you can change the height properties to give you the result you need

5 If Backout is checked on the advanced tab for each count opening the opening-shaped count item will back out a corresponding section of the linear object

Opening shaped count items are sized at 3rsquo0rdquo by default

Drawing a Zone Zones are drawn in the same way as area objects and may be any polygonal shape You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete the zone perimeter

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

42

Selecting Objects

1 Use the Select Tool to select objects

You can also select all objects that correspond to a condition

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Right-click and choose Select All

3 All objects with this condition will be highlighted with squares as an outline

Moving and Resizing Objects Linear

1 To move or resize a linear object click anywhere on the line to select it

2 To move the line position your pointer over the center handles When the mouse is positioned over the handles you will see a two-way arrow You will only be able to move the line in the direction of the arrows

3 Drag the line to a new position

4 Clicking and dragging the handles on the ends of the line will allow you to lengthen or shorten your line

Area and Zone

1 To move an area object or zone in its entirety click and drag it to its new position

2 Grabbing a handle at a corner or intersection of the object will allow you to adjust and change its perimeter

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

43

Count 1 To move a square circle rectangle or triangle shaped count object click and drag

2 Click and drag an opening shaped count object along the length of the linear object to the desired position then release

NOTE An opening shaped count object may not be moved from its associated linear condition object however it may be moved up and down the length of the linear object

Layers On-Screen Takeoff allows you to sort and separate your takeoff objects within the same job and on the same page On-Screen Takeoff gives you this flexibility through the use of layers

By assigning different conditions to different layers (for example differentiating between floors ceilings and walls) you can choose to view all layers or turn off certain layers to display and print the remaining groups of conditions only You may also remove the background image of electronic plans add text and hot link symbols or print only your condition takeoffs

Layers are only available in Full Mode If you are in View or Lite Mode and would like to use this

feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade Default Layers

On-Screen Takeoff begins every project with three default layers Image Annotation and Default The Image layer holds the electronic plan files you may have in your project The Annotation layer possesses all text notations highlighting and hot links in the project The Default layer will appear in the Condition dialog when creating or editing a condition (listed in the takeoff dock bar) Conditions are assigned to the Default layer unless otherwise specified by the user

Creating Layers To assign a condition to a layer other than the default layer you must first create additional layers for your project

1 Select View gt Layers to open the Layers dialog

2 Click An unnamed layer will be added

3 Click within the empty box and type a name for your layer (for example Wall)

4 New layers are added as active layers The adjacent box under the Show column will be checked

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

44

Assigning a Layer to a Condition 1 Open the Condition dialog box by creating a new condition or editing an existing condition

2 Under the General tab click on the down arrow in the Layer field to display optional layers

3 Select the desired layer for the condition Only the Default layer and layers you have added will be displayed

4 Click

View and Hide Layers

1 Select View gt Layers

2 Under the Show column check the box to view or remove the check (by clicking on it) to hide the specific layer

3 Click to accept and close the Layers dialog

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

45

Assigning Text to a Layer When adding text to an image On-Screen Takeoff has the capability to assign the text to a specified layer

1 Select the Text Tool

2 Click at the point you want to place your text

3 Type in your text using the Enter key for line breaks

4 Click the drop down arrow next to the Layer field and select the desired layer

Section 7

46

Printing and Exporting

This section will

Printing options and procedures

Exporting data by copying and pasting

Exporting quantity results to Excel spreadsheets

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

47

Print Setup On-Screen Takeoff allows the user to print the image takeoff list and worksheet

1 Select File gt Print Setup The Print Setup dialog will open

2 Select a printer or leave the default selection listed (change from the default printer displayed by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the field)

3 Indicate page size and printer tray option (Source) Access page size options by clicking on the

down arrow at the right of the field

4 Choose Portrait or Landscape orientation

5 Click to accept and close the dialog

Printing Images The image area can include the electronic plans the takeoff objects added text and hot links To print a subset of these (for example just the takeoffs without the plans or the added text and hot link symbols) hide layers that you do not want to print (see Section 6 View and Hide Layers) When you are printing your images every page will show the scale of the takeoff you are printing

1 Click on the Image tab to display the area of your project

2 Select File gt Print (or Ctrl + P)

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

48

3 Select the desired view (What to print) and the Image Range

4 Click The second Print dialog will open

5 Change settings accordingly or click if you accept the default settings

Printing Takeoff Lists and Worksheets In Takeoff Lists and Worksheets you may hide columns to print only certain results or adjust column widths to fit the report within the page size selected

1 In Takeoff List or Worksheet view move your cursor to the right side of the columnrsquos title bar the cursor will display as a two-way arrow

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

49

2 Click and drag to adjust the width of the column Holding the mouse button you may

slide the title bar under the title bar to its left to hide the column completely

3 Select File gt Print or press Ctrl + P to access the Print dialog

4 Indicate desired printer and choose the number of copies

5 Click to print and close the dialog

When printing the condition list we suggest printing in landscape

To reset to the default column widths double-click on the right border of a column heading will reset the column to its right (or previously to its right before being hidden)

Print Preview 1 Select File gt Print Preview

2 Use and to vary your view 3 If viewing an image choose current full or scale view to see how it displays

4 For printed outputs that cover more than one page use and to view adjacent pages or click on the down arrow next to Page field and select the page you want displayed

Exporting Using the CopyPaste Feature You may copy all the data or sections from the worksheet and the takeoff list view in On-Screen Takeoff and paste it into another application When pasting into Excel the cell layout will be maintained

1 Highlight the areas you wish to paste Click and hold the left mouse button down as you drag the cursor over the area to be selected then releasing the mouse button

OR

2 Select the entire takeoff list quickly click on the left On-Screen Takeoff column header and hold and drag the cursor across the remaining column headings

The number of pages for the view selected will display in the lower left-hand corner The zoom percentage that applies to the view will be displayed in the lower right-hand corner next to page size of the drawing

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

50

3 In the worksheet view you may highlight rows by clicking on the numbered buttons to the left of each row clicking and dragging across column headings or clicking and dragging over individual cells in the worksheet

Click anywhere in the appropriate view to deselect the area

4 Once your selection is highlighted you may select Edit gt Copy or Ctrl C from the keyboard 5 On your monitor switch to the application into which you want to paste your selection 6 Select Edit gt Paste in the new application or simply press Ctrl + V to paste

The colored keys for conditions cannot be pasted

Using the Export Feature You may export condition quantities to specified cell location within an Excel worksheet file Cell target locations are assigned in the Results tab of the condition dialogs on the Export line relating to each quantity measurement type

On-Screen Takeoff will export takeoff quantity results for up to three different quantity types that you specify For instance you may want to know the number of square feet in a ceiling area as well as the number of linear feet in its perimeter

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

51

1 Bring up the Condition dialog by double-clicking on a condition in the takeoff dock bar or by

selecting the condition and clicking

2 Click on the Results tab to access its fields The default quantities for the condition type will display

3 For each results field click on the arrow to access the pull-down menu and select the appropriate quantity (for example SF LF EA etchellip)

4 Have your Excel spreadsheet opened and saved in a file

5 Specify the Excel spreadsheet cell locations where you want the results to go

6 For a cell in the first sheet of your spreadsheet type in the cell address (eg a1) Case is not important

7 For a cell on a successive sheet of your spreadsheet type in sheet the number followed by a comma and the cell address without any spaces (eg sheet2a1) Case is not important

8 Click

9 Select File gt Export gt Condition Qty to Excel

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

52

10 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

11 Click to export On-Screen Takeoff results to specified cell locations in the Excel file When you return to the Excel application you will see the values have been added to the specified cell locations in your spreadsheet

12 Save your Excel file

Exporting Worksheet to Excel

1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 From On-Screen Takeoff Select File gt Export gt Worksheet to Excel

4 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

5 Click When you return to the Excel application you will see the values from the Worksheet Tab have been added to your spreadsheet

6 Save your Excel file

Exporting Takeoff to CVS 1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 Click the Takeoff Tab in the project you want to export the information

4 Select File gt Export gt Takeoff to CSV

5 Browse to the location of the CSV spreadsheet file click file to select it

6 Click the Save

NOTE CSV files can be opened in Excel Lotus Access etc One may consider this option more of a ldquodumprdquo into a file

The Excel application must be active (it may be minimized on the application bar) with the target spreadsheet open in the application Otherwise an error will occur with the export operation that will affect both the On-Screen Takeofftrade file and the Excel spreadsheet

Section 8

53

Advanced Features

This section will

Some special features of working with condition objects in the takeoff area

Details of advanced options for conditions

Advanced features of the Project Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

54

Features to Use with Objects Roping Feature You can move copy or delete using this feature Using the Select tool (the pointer) you may select several objects at once by clicking and dragging an outline around the objects then releasing the mouse button Roping may select either objects completely within the outlined area (inclusive) or objects both within and touched by the outlined area (touching) Specify your roping preference under Tools gt Options

1 Click and hold the mouse button at a point on the screen near the objects to be selected and drag to surround the objects with an outline

2 Release the mouse button The objects will be selected

3 You may now

Move the group around on the page by clicking within the group dragging the mouse and releasing the button to place the objects

Delete the group of objects by clicking the Delete key or

Copy and paste by pressing Ctrl C to copy the group then Ctrl V to paste it The pasted copy of the grouped objects will appear slightly offset from the original objects

Section 8 Advanced Features

55

Applying a DropRun Count

Use the droprun feature when calculating quantities to take into account the drop or run of a linear condition such as electrical lines or plumbing pipes Drop or run lengths may be added separately to any linear condition on screen while a default droprun length may be indicated for a condition as a whole

1 Select the desired linear condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff Dock bar

2 Click the Change button in the toolbar to open the Change Condition dialog

3 Click the Advanced tab to access the advanced options and click inside the DropRun check box

4 Enter a default length to be applied to all of this condition Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches) You can leave the length blank and manually enter drop run on each segment drawn

5 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog

Edit DropRun Count

1 With the related linear condition in the Takeoff Dock bar highlighted or with the pointer tool selected

2 click on the desired linear object in the image takeoff area The Count button will become active

3 Click on the Count button (alternatively select Tools gt Count) The default droprun amount will show in the pop-up Count dialog (Default length will be zero if droprun has not been selected in this conditionrsquos properties)

4 Type in the desired length Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches)

5 Click the OK button The additional amount will be reflected in the corresponding quantity The new DropRun count will apply only to the object edited

Adding Text in Image View

On-Screen Takeoff allows you to place text comments around your quantity takeoffs that may be printed along with plan images and objects Text is automatically placed within the Annotation Layer (that includes text and hot links)

1 To place text on the image select the Text Tool and click at the point you want to place your text opening a text box

2 Type in your information clicking Enter for line breaks

3 When you are finished click the OK button to exit the text box

4 To reposition text simply click on the text (with the Text Tool active) to select it

5 Move the cursor over the text the cursor will now display as a four-way arrow

6 Click and drag the mouse to position the text as desired

Section 8 Advanced Features

56

1 To edit existing text use the Text Tool to double-click on the text to open the editing box

2 Enter additional text or use the Backspace key to delete text as necessary

Formatting Text Once created you may format the font size type style and color of your text

1 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Font or click on the Font button in the Takeoff Toolbar

2 Select the desired features (color options are disabled) and click the OK button

3 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Color or click on the Color button in the Takeoff Toolbar The Color dialog will open

4 Click on a color in the Basic Color palette or create a color and add to the Custom Colors palette (Be sure to click on the color in the Custom Colors palette to select it)

5 Click the OK button

Object Properties

Linear Objects

Linear objects may be set to connect at corners

A linear object may be set to trim automatically when crossing another linear object (Check the trim option under the advanced tab of the Condition dialog)

When you move a connected linear object objects automatically move and resize connected lines accordingly (quantities are then recalculated)

This feature requires that the connected linear object be moved using the center handles (does not apply when resizing the line from the ends)

Objects constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

Objects are measured from centerline to centerline

Section 8 Advanced Features

57

Area Objects When drawing an area use your escape key to undo the last line drawn You may reverse your

drawing of an area using the escape key

The area will not fill with color and pattern until the user double-clicks after the last line is set

Lines drawn to delineate an area object constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

After selecting an area to move or adjust position the mouse in the center to move the entire area position the mouse at the sides or corners to adjust the perimeter

Count Objects

All count objects are quantified by the physical number of objects per page and reported as EA for the UOM The quantity for the current Image View is (displayed in the Condition List) and the total quantity in your project is displayed in the Takeoff View and Worksheet View)

Square circle rectangle and triangle shaped count objects do not displace or subtract from other object quantities when placed on top of them However on the Advanced Tab for the count condition a connect property can be set (this is a check box) so that when a count object of this shape is put on top of a Linear type takeoff object it will move with the linear if said linear is moved

An opened-shaped count object must be placed within a linear object Opening shaped count objects may also be measured by linear foot or linear yard (EA SF and SY are also options) Opening shaped count items default to a width of 3rsquo 0rdquo at the time of creation This size can be changed The small medium and large size are not options on this type of condition anymore Check Backout on the Advanced tab for each Count object back out the footage (or yardage) of opening-shaped count objects in which they are placed

NOTE In order to see this Backout functionality (in quantity) for SY or SF deductions at least one of the

results for the Linear(s) this object will be placed on must be set to SY or SF and the count object must have a height quantity

Advanced Features of Conditions The Round Feature Under the Advanced tab of the linear and area Condition dialogues you may specify quantity rounding (in inches) For linear objects rounding applies to each linear object drawn For area objects rounding will apply to each segment of the area perimeter adjusting the perimeter and area calculations For example With a linear condition entering 12 in the Round field will round up each related linear object to the nearest 12 inches or one foot With this setting two walls of 1 4 would each round to 2 0 totaling 4 0

NOTE In the Takeoff Dock bar condition list and in the On-Screen Takeoff reports quantities will be displayed in whole numbers rounded up to the nearest foot However calculations are based on true quantities without rounding unless the Round Feature is engaged

Pitch Pitch may apply either to linear or area conditions It is measured in rise per linear foot Entering 12 indicates a 12 rise per 12 of linear distance (a pitch of 12 over 12) or an angle of 45deg

Section 8 Advanced Features

58

Advanced Features of Project Properties Selecting Multiple Pages

1 Select a single page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry

2 Drag the cursor down the column of numbers to select consecutive pages

3 Click on the blank button at the top of this column to select all pages in the Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

59

Changing Image Assigned to a Drawing 1 Select the page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry 2 Click the Change Image button The Change Image dialog box will appear

3 Navigate to the desired file and select by clicking on it

4 Click the Open button The electronic file assigned to the page will have been changed to reflect the new file choice

Changing Image File Path 1 Select pages as described above

2 Choose Change Folder

3 In the Change Folder dialog navigate to the appropriate folder

4 Click the OK button The file path will have been changed for the selected page entries

Delete a Page from Project Properties 1 Select the page you want to delete by clicking on its associated number (in the gray box at the

left of the entry)

2 Choose Delete Page

All Takeoff on the page will be deleted immediately and permanently

Section 8 Advanced Features

60

Advanced Features of Tool Options

Calculation Method On-Screen Takeoff has built-in calculation options to allow for faster work and faster saves until your takeoff is complete Calculation options are found by selecting Tools gt Options then clicking on the Calculation tab

Calculation method can be set to Automatic Automatic except Grids and Manual Manual will allow the program to operate more quickly while Automatic or Automatic except Grids allows the user to see quantity changes as takeoffs are made

In any mode you may press F9 to recalculate quantities for the On-Screen Takeoff current totals

Configuration Tab

When the ldquoPage Label (A01)rdquo radial button is chosen On-Screen Takeoff puts the numbered label on all the pages of in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar If the Page Descriptionrdquo radial button is chosen then a description of what takeoff is on that specific page will be shown in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar

This section of the configuration tab gives you options on how you want to export your information When the ldquoFolderSubfolder Namesrdquo radial button is chosen than on your file that you are exporting to will have all the conditions folders and subfolders In the Delimiter box you can choose the symbol that is needed to separate the information you are exporting Some files need semicolons () or colons () to make sure the information comes exported in is separated it the appropriate places

Section 8 Advanced Features

61

In previous versions of On-Screen Takeoff there are views that users need to have in order for them to display their information By either choosing ldquoOST 1xrdquo or ldquoOST 2xrdquo it will let the program know you want your columns of information exported in that specific format

When you have the Confirm Deletions radial button of ldquoYesrdquo chosen than every time you delete anything you will get a dialog box confirming your intentions of deletion

While working with your takeoff you have a choice to either view the legend of your conditions or hide it Choose whichever radial button that suits your needs

For those who prefer to use the Enter key to navigate in dialog boxes this option is just for that

Font Tab The Font tab is designed for you to make your own look and feel for the application At the bottom of this tab it will show you sample of the fonts and colors you have chosen

Renaming the Current Page You may change the name of the current page in the takeoff area of On-Screen Takeoff by selecting Edit gt Rename Page

This opens the Name Page dialog and you may simply type in a new name and click the Enter button The new name for the file will be reflected on the title bar for the page and in Project Properties

You also may access the Rename Page function by right-clicking in the takeoff area while in Image View and selecting the option from the pop-up menu that appears

Section 9

62

Saving and Exiting

This section will

Explain how to save projects

Show you how to safely exit the program

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

63

Saving Your Project

1 Select File gt Save 2 If your project has not previously been saved a Save dialog box will open to allow you to name

the file and choose the directory and folder in which to save your file 3 Once saved File gt Save will simply save the current version of the file

OR

4 Select File gt Save As then type in a new name for the file and save to the desired file path

The Auto-save Feature With the Auto-save feature On-Screen Takeoff automatically backs up your open project You may choose to have more than one level of backup files The first backup copy will have the extension b00 and successive files will be b01 b02 and so on If you have designated four levels of backup files after the fourth backup copy has been created (b03) the next file will be saved over the file with extension b00 Further backup saves will then rotate through the four backup files in the same way

1 Select Tools gt Options 2 In the Auto-save area (under the General tab) select the frequency of backup file creation (in

minutes) and the number of levels for the feature 3 You also may disengage the feature by clicking in the check box to clear it

The Auto-save feature automatically saves backup copies to the directory of the current project If you are working from a write-protected area such as a CD-ROM On-Screen Takeoff will place backup files in the On-Screen Takeoff folder

Exiting When you are finished using On-Screen Takeoff it is very easy to exit Exiting is very important because of security reasons If someone were to use your computer they could enter the application and view and manipulate information

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

64

On-Screen Takeoff closes the open project when you open another or create a new project or when you exit the program

1 Select File gt Exit

OR

2 You also may click at the upper right-hand corner of the application to exit

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

65

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer When you get your digitizer from GTCO you will need to connect it to your computer Follow the instructions outlined below to do this

Note For rollup digitizers the metal bar must be oriented to the top or right hand side

Connecting the Digitizer 1 Lay the digitizer out flat 2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer 3 Plug in the power adapter 4 Plug the interface (IO) cable into the digitizer 5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into an open serial port on computer

Note GTCO Technical support phone number is 410-381-6688 The electronic manual (on diskette) from GTCO contains more detailed installation and operation instructions for the GTCO digitizer model you have

Installing other Digitizer Drivers If you are using a GTCO Digitizer you will need to install the GTCO TabletWorks Drivers

If you are using a Digitizer not supported by GTCO Tablet Works 10 please contact the manufacturer of your digitizer for assistance with installation

Installing GTCO TabletWorks Drivers 1 Insert the On Center CD into the CD-ROM drive The CD Startup screen will open 2 Click on Install Software 3 Select Additional Software and Drivers 4 Select Digitizer Driver 5 Follow the instructions for installing TabletWorks 10

Adhering the Template The template is a small plastic sticker used to enable mouse function when using the digitizer with On-Screen Takeoff Place your template on your digitizer We suggest placing it in the bottom right corner of the digitizer about one inch inside the takeoff area

Note You may either peel off the back of the template and use the adhesive surface or you can tape the template down

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

66

Testing the Digitizer Drivers Before running OST you may test the digitizer by moving the stylus around on the digitizer pad it should move the mouse cursor (if mouse emulation is enabled)

If the digitizer does not move the mouse cursor on the screen

The superset codes may need to be reset Reset the superset codes by touching on the border of the digitizer with the stylus The digitizer should beep several times

The digitizer may not be communicating with the computer Be sure the COM port selected is correct Be sure the COM port selected is correct If you are not able to get the digitizer to move the mouse cursor you need to call GTCO technical support for help

Note The Mouse Emulation is not required for On-Screen Takeoff to work properly It is used only for the Template functionality if the digitizer is moving the cursor the wrong direction (up instead of sideways or vice-versa)

Click the L-shaped arrow symbol on the digitizer with the stylus

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

67

Appendix II Toolbar Items Main Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

68

Tool Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

69

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

70

Navigate Toolbar (Continued)

Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

71

Takeoff Toolbar (Continued)

Image Toolbar

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

72

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

This section will detail how to load plans from a F W Dodge CD-ROM into an On-Screen Takeoff project file ready for takeoffs

Dodge files may be added to the Project Properties dialog However loading the files in that way will load the files by number rather than name description If you want to load one page only from your Dodge CD You will have to rename the page to display the name rather than number of the file

To load plan files from a Dodge CD so that the files load sequentially by file number but are displayed by name rather than by number within your project follow the instructions below

Opening a Dodge project from a CD-ROM 1 Insert the CD into the drive 2 Choose File gt Custom 3 Choose Dodge Plans Project (plansdat) as the file type 4 Select the appropriate file type by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the Files of type

field 5 In the Look in field access your drive paths by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the

field then

Navigate to your CD-ROM drive Open the data folder and Open the Projects folder

6 Select the desired project and open its folder 7 Open the plansdat file 8 All the images will come in sequenced correctly for that job along with the full descriptions

(names) of each page If there is not a plans folder in the project folder then plans do not exist for that project on the CD Opening the plansdat file will yield an empty project

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

73

Appendix IV Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer The On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer is a limited version of On Center Softwarersquos commercial takeoff software If your status bar located at the very bottom of the main window says View Mode in the lower left-hand corner then you are using the Plan Viewer You can use the plan viewer to

View CD-based amp converted CAD drawings

View a previously created OST file and associated drawings

Download electronic plans online

Navigate through drawings

Quickly Takeoff linearsareas and counts

Zoom in to view the plan better

Print drawings directly from the viewer

Viewing an On-Screen Takeoff Project File

1 To open an OST file that was previously created with of On-Screen Takeoff 2 Select File gt Open 3 An Open dialog will appear if you do not see the OST file you are looking for select the

Look In drop down arrow 4 A drop down menu will appear listing the various folders drives and mapped drives located

on your computer select the correct drive or folder location and continue to browse to the location of your OST file

5 When you see your OST file double-click it to open it 6 Any takeoff and drawings should appear on the Image tab view

If you do not see the drawings but do see the colored takeoff layer the drawings may

not be located in the same place they were originally saved at Go to File gt Project Properties and check the Image File path for each listed page If the image file path is pointing to a CD drive make sure the CD is inside the CR-ROM

Downloading Electronic Plans If your Online Plan Service provides a special file format (OSX) required to use this feature of our plan viewer you can immediately downloaded all electronic plans of a project directly from our viewer

Most Plan Room web sites will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff when a request to download plans is made Your particular Plan Room may differ in operation so please contact the provider directly with questions on using the site

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

74

When you request to download or open a project file from a Plan Room you will usually have the open to open or save an OSX file Choosing open will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff Alternately you may choose to save the file to a local hard drive After you have saved the file either double-click it to launch On-Screen Takeoff or open the OSX file using On-Screen Takeoff by clicking File then Open and locating the file on your hard drive You will need to change the file type to OSX

After the OSX file is opened you will see an additional tab appear in the Conditions List window called Pages

The Pages tab shows the hierarchy of your project Gray file icons represent pages that have not been downloaded and blue icons represents pages that have been downloaded

To download a page simply double-click the page icon

If you wish to select a group of pages to download you can use the Ctrl or Shift key to multiple select them then click the Download button

If you wish to download all pages at once click the Download All button

Downloaded pages will now appear in the Project Properties dialog in the same order in which they appear in the Pages tab

Creating Quick Takeoffs With On-Screen Takeoff you can create quick takeoffs to measure quantities even if you dont have the full version of our program However using the Quick Takeoff functionality shows you just a fraction of what the full version can do

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar is located at the top of the image view It has three buttons designated for three types of takeoffs Linear Area and Count The Quantity drop down list will show secondary quantities for Linears and Areas The Units drop down allows you to select how you want your quantities displayed Feet Inches Yards Millimeters and Meters

NOTE Every time change the type of takeoff you are performing (switching from Area to Linear for example) the previous quantities and takeoff objects will disappear They will also disappear when you changes pages

NOTE You can use the Dimension Tool to basically measure the distance between two points or linears The distance will display on the status bar at the bottom of the application

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

75

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions General

Where is On-Screen Takeoff installed on my computer

Typically it is installed in CProgram FilesOn-Screen Takeoff

In Explorer how do I recognize On-Screen Takeoff file types

On-Screen Takeoff data is stored in a single file per job lsquojob name OSTrsquo On-Screen Takeoff templates are stored as lsquotemplate nameTPOrsquo

Can only one project at a time be open

Yes For that reason opening another project automatically closes the project on screen You will be asked to save any changes

Is only one scale allowed per page What about on drawings that have multiple detail sections on a page and each of those drawings have different scales

Yes For pages with drawings of different scales copy the drawing to another project page and set the appropriate scale

I cannot perform backout on an area that is along a linear

As a workaround use the On-Screen Takeoff layers feature to help you with this issue Electronic Images

How do I start a project from drawings that have been scanned and written to a CD-ROM

Open a new project Select File gt Project Properties and select Auto Add Navigate to your CD and the appropriate folder and select any image file in that location Click Open All files in the location will load into your project Recommended that images are copied from CD to hard drive for performance

If I get a disk of drawings in AutoCAD format (R13 or R14) can I read them in On-Screen Takeoff

Yes On-Screen Takeoff now reads DWG DXF and many other format that are saved with AutoCAD

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

76

When I click on the all pages button what is supposed to happen Currently nothing seems to change when I click on that button

The All Pages button is used to apply the Darken and Enhance Plans feature to all pages in the project (as opposed to only the current page on screen)

Is there a way to deduct a large skylight from an area condition

Yes with the related area condition selected in the Takeoff Dock bar unselect the Backout button on the Takeoff Toolbar then draw the Backout area The area quantity will be deducted from the related condition object and the linear measurement of the Backout perimeter will be added

Digitizer Issues

How do I connect a Digitizer to the computer

See Appendix I Connecting a Digitizer

The Place Template menu choice is disabled

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or the digitizer or the digitzer drivers are not installed

It wonrsquot let me select the Set Takeoff Area menu choice

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or no job is open a digitizer is not installed or the drivers are not installed

The digitizer stylus is not moving the cursor or crosshairs

Click S-0-1 superset on the digitizer

How do I convert my old GTCO Digitizer to work with On- Screen Takeofftrade

Call GTCO and they may be able to reconfigure your digitizer to be compatible with On-Screen Takeoff

Printing Issues Which Printers work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible printers include On-Screen Takeoff Hewlett Packard Epson and Canon printers If you are having printer difficulties please contact support and specify the type of printer along with other pertinent information Contact support at wwwoncentercomsupport or email supportoncentercom

Which Plotters work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible Plotters include Hewlett Packard DesignJet plotters and the EnCAD Cadjet II If you are having plotter difficulties please contact support and specify the type of plotter concerned

ViewingDisplay I can no longer see my condition list How do I get it back

The toolbars and Dock bars can be turned on and off through the View gt Toolbars menu options

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

77

This is also accessible by right-clicking in the toolbar area and selecting (or deselecting) a toolbar listed

I cannot view my folders in the condition list

Right-click in the Takeoff Dock barcondition list area and select Show Tree to display your folders

My Status Bar reads Viewer Mode and I am unable to draw conditions

On-Screen Takeoff needs to be Authorized Or you need to purchase an upgrade Click the Perform Advanced Takeoff button on the main toolbar

I hid a Dock bar and when I selected to view it again it appeared alongside the other Dock

bar instead of stacked on top of it How do I fix it

Pick up the Dock bar by clicking on the bar at the top and continuing to hold down the mouse button drag the Dock bar over the other one It will resize and appear stacked with the other

When I open image files from a CD the images are all upside down How do I get them right

side up

To flip pages from top to bottom follow the steps below 1 Click the All Pages button on the Image Toolbar (All Pages is engaged when the button

is not clicked) 2 Click the Flip Horizontal button on the Image Toolbar 3 Click the All Pages button again to disengage

Templates How do I create a Template

Follow the steps below 1 Create a typical project 2 Choose File gt Save As 3 Choose On-Screen Takeoff Template Files as the file type to save 4 Name the file This will save all of the condition setups as well as the layers for the

project

How do I create a new project from a template

Follow the steps below 1 Choose File gt New 2 Select a template from those listed in the New dialog This will open a new project with

conditions and layers saved from a previous project but no pages or takeoff

78

INDEX

Area Conditions 32

Area Objects 57

Auto Scrolling 20

Auto-save 63

Backout Mode 41

Calculation Method 60

Conditions 29

Configuration 60

Contents Tab 6

Continuous Mode 38

Count Conditions 33

Count Objects 57

Digitizer 10 65 76

Docking Toolbars 13

Dodge CD 72

Drawing 27 37

DropRun Count 55

Environment 18

Exiting 63

Exporting 49

Features 16

Font 61

Frequently Asked Questions 75

Grid 40

Help File 5

Hiding Toolbars 13

Hot Links 21

Image 19 59

Image files 9

Image Toolbar 12 71

Images 75

Index Tab 6

Layers 43

Linear Conditions 31

Linear Objects 56

Main Toolbar 12 67

Menus 14

Moving Toolbars 13

Navigate Toolbar 12 69

Navigating 20

On-Screen Takeofftrade 2

Page 59 61

Pages 20 25 28

Plan Viewer 73

Plans 26

Printing 47 76

Project Properties 25

Projects 22

Quick Start Video 18

Resizing Toolbars 13

Roping 54

Saving 63

Scale 28

Search Tab 7

Selecting Objects 42

Setup 8

Start On-Screen Takeofftrade 17

System Requirements 9

Takeoff 19 27

Takeoff Toolbar 70 71

Takeoff Toolbar 12

Template Files 23

TIF (Group4) 9

Tool Toolbar 12 68

Toolbar 67

Toolbars 12

View Toolbar 12 69

Viewing Toolbars 12

Worksheet 20

Zone Conditions 33

Zoom Toolbar 12 69

  • On-Screen Takeoff Lite
  • Table of Contents
  • Section 1 - Introduction
  • Section 2 - Setup
  • Section 3 - Toolbars and Menus
  • Section 4 - Features
  • Section 5 - Projects
  • Section 6 - Conditions and Takeoff
  • Section 7 - Printing and Exporting
  • Section 8 - Advanced Features
  • Section 9 - Saving and Exiting
  • Appendix I - Installing Your Digitizer
  • Appendix II - Toolbar Items
  • Appendix III - Loading Plans from a Dodge CD
  • Appendix IV - Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer
  • Appendix V - Frequently Asked Questions
  • Index

Section 5 Projects

23

Project Template Files You can begin your project with a template Templates allow you to take advantage of conditions and settings used with previous projects

On-Screen Takeoff templates contain condition lists and established layer separations from previous projects you have created You may also use the sample templates provided with On-Screen Takeoff as a great starting point All aspects of the templates may be adjusted for a new project

1 Select File gt New and click the OK button

2 From the New dialog box choose the template that best fits your project

3 The conditions for this template will appear in the Takeoff Dock bar and the Project Properties dialog will open asking for further information

4 Use File gt Save or File gt Save As to rename and save your new project

Saving a Project as a Template File You can save your condition properties and layers as a template for future projects

1 Select File gt Save As

2 Enter a name for your template and select On-Screen Takeoff Template Files (tpo) from the Save As type field of the dialog (click on the down arrow to select)

3 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog Modifying a Template File Follow these steps to modify an existing template file if you need to change or add conditions andor layers

1 Select File gt Open

2 Navigate to your Projects directory

3 In the File Type drop-down select On-Screen Takeoff Template files (tpo)

4 Choose the On-Screen Takeoff template file you would like to modify and click the OK button

5 Make appropriate changes

6 Save and close file

The On-Screen Takeoff template files cannot save takeoff information

Section 5 Projects

24

Opening an Existing Project File 1 Select File gt Open

2 Navigate to the desired file location

3 Click the Open button

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask

you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Creating a New Project

1 Select File gt New

2 For a blank untitled project click

3 At this point the Project Properties dialog will pop-up for more information about your takeoff

NOTE The following are important to keep in mind when beginning a new project

At the start of your project fill out the Project Properties settings to establish the name for all printed output from your project set the default page size and scale for your plans number and names of different pages within the project and locations of electronic drawings

Scale settings can significantly affect quantity outcomes Be sure to set the scale for each page of drawings before beginning condition takeoffs

When using a digitizer remember to make a mark with a pen or pencil in the upper left and lower right corners of the first sheet of the paper plans to delineate the takeoff area for that sheet You can then set the takeoff area on On-Screen Takeoff using your marks

Save your project before you begin taking off any conditions On-Screen Takeoff will write a back-up file using the same file name

Remember the Undo feature If you make a mistake select Edit gt Undo and reverse the process step by step

Section 5 Projects

25

Project Properties

You can either set your Project Properties when you create a new takeoff or once your project file is saved under the appropriate name

1 Select File gt Project Properties the Project Properties dialog box will appear

2 Type in the name of your project to appear on printouts Use the backspace andor delete keys to edit the name as necessary

3 Press the Tab key to move to the Default Image Size option or click within the Image Size box You may click on the arrow at the right for the pull-down menu of page size options or you can use the down-arrow key on your keyboard to scroll through the list to the appropriate selection

4 Press the Tab key to move to the Default Scale option Select a scale by using the drop down arrow If your scale is metric you will need to click in the box next to Metric to convert to that measurement

5 Establish the number of pages for your project plans And load image files See Adding Pages to

Your Project

Adding Pages to Projects Individual Electronic Plans

1 Click on in the Project Properties dialog

2 In the Add Images dialog use the drop down arrow to navigate to the appropriate directory and folder containing your image

3 Select the file so that it displays in the File name field then click The file will display by name and path in the Image File field in Project Properties dialog

4 Click to accept and your project will automatically open

5 Save your project with the new settings by selecting File gt Save

Section 5 Projects

26

Electronic plans scanned from blueprints (as opposed to blue lines) will display as white lines on a black background and are difficult to read on your computer screen Select Image gt Invert and the colors will invert to black on white

You may have noticed the Page column in the Project Properties dialog Generally plan images occupy one page and 1 will be listed in the column indicating Page 1 of your plan file If you import a multi-page TIF a plan file containing more than one page of plans they will import as separate pages and each successive page will be indicated under the Page column as 1 2 3 etc of the plan file

Group of Electronic Plans You may add all the electronic plan files from a particular source (for example from a CD) by using the Auto Add feature

1 Click the button in the Project Properties dialog

2 Browse until you find the appropriate directory and folder containing your plan images

3 Click on any file displayed within your target folder so that the file name appears in the File name box of the Auto Add dialog

4 Click The image paths and file names will be recorded into the project properties arranged alphabetically

5 Click to accept your choices and your project will automatically open

6 Save your project with the new settings by selecting File gt Save

To load Dodge Plans into your Project Properties see Appendix IIi Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

Paper Plans On-Screen Takeoff makes it easy for Full Mode users to perform quantity takeoffs from paper plans using a digitizer

1 Add pages by clicking until you have the number of pages initially in the project

2 Name each page by clicking within the Title area and typing the name

3 Click to accept your choices and close the Project Properties dialog

4 Save your project with the new project properties settings by selecting File gt Save

Section 5 Projects

27

Setting Up a Drawing Template On-Screen Takeoff provides the convenience of using the same work surface for both digitizer and mouse to allow the user to draw conditions and then edit settings of the project or add or change conditions without breaking stride A mouse pad template included with the program defines the area of the digitizer in which use of the stylus or cursor will be recognized as mouse movement as opposed to drawing movement

1 Place your stylus on On-Screen Takeoff

2 Placing the template identifies the location mouse movements will be recognized by the program

Before placing the template the template must be applied to the digitizer surface This may have been done during the installation of your digitizer We suggest attaching the template to the lower right corner of the digitizer surface about one inch inside the grid area

3 Select Digitizer gt Place Template

4 Follow the instruction prompts on the screen clicking first on the target symbol at the left of the On-Screen Takeoff box on the template then on the target at the right

Setting Takeoff Area Before you can begin taking off a drawing you must define the drawing area on the digitizer This requires defining an area that will include all objects on each drawing of your plans As you add pages to your takeoff the same area of the digitizer will be active

1 Secure the plans to the digitizer with tape or a set of clamps

2 With a pen or a pencil mark the upper left corner and the lower right corner of the first page in your set of plans

3 Select Digitizer gt Set Takeoff Area

4 Click each mark with the stylus pen as prompted

5 Verify the active area of the digitizer by looking at the image size located in the lower right corner of your screen

If you close the program before the takeoff is complete you will need to reestablish the takeoff area before you can add additional condition quantities

Electronic plans appear on your computer screen eliminating the need to set a takeoff area You simply drag your mouse across the conditions you wish to takeoff The conditions will be highlighted and quantities will be totaled instantly Electronic plans are available through a variety of services For information contact an On Center Software account manager

Section 5 Projects

28

Setting Scale for Specific Pages You may set the scale in each page view separately This will override the default scale setting in Project Properties for that page Setting the correct scale for the drawing before taking off quantities ensures accurate calculations Be careful to check the scale for each drawing in your project before doing takeoffs

1 Display the page you want to set select Edit gt Set Scale

2 Use the drop down arrow to select a scale that will be applied to that page

3 Click

OR

4 Access the pull-down scale settings on the Navigate toolbar

NOTE As you draw objects notice that the drawn object is similar in width to the object on your plans If it is not the scale set may not be correct

Calculating Scale You may calculate scale according to a known measurement between two points either with a digitizer or on electronic plans

1 Select Edit gt Calculate Scale using Image or Edit gt Calculate Scale using Digitizer

2 Follow the instructions in the related Calculate Scale dialog box You will be asked to click on the first and second points then to enter the dimension for that distance

3 The scale will be recalculated for the displayed page and the Scale display on the Navigate toolbar will show the new scale

Section 6

29

Conditions and Takeoff

This section will Draw Conditions to Takeoff Plan Quantities

What Zones will do to help your takeoff process

Discuss the ins and outs of Takeoffs

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

30

Creating Conditions

If you are starting a new project from scratch you will need to create conditions to takeoff quantities such as floor areas wall lengths and corner bead counts If you are using a template you will have several pre-designed conditions already listed on the Takeoff dock bar However you may want to change the characteristics of some conditions or create additional conditions for a particular project

1 Right Click within the Takeoff dock bar Select New gt Condition

Or

2 From the Takeoff dock bar Click (if the buttons are not showing right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select Show Buttons from the pop-up menu) The New Condition dialog appears

3 Select the condition type (Linear Area Count or Zone) from the pull-down menu accessed by the

down arrow next to the Type option

4 Press Tab or use the mouse (or stylus) to move to Name and enter a name for your condition

5 Specify the desired condition attributes See Condition Attributes for more detail

6 Click for condition to apply

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

31

Condition Attributes Each condition type will have related attributes to select or specify within the General and Advanced tabs of the New Condition dialog Once a condition has been used to takeoff a quantity from your plans certain attributes cannot be changed

All conditions allow the user to specify color and fill pattern for the object drawn

Linear Conditions

General Specify width and height by feet and inches Specify pitch in inches up to the nearest thousandth of an inch if applicable

Advanced Specify rounding for object quantities and droprun default length for electrical or plumbing drops at the ends of lines Select Connect to have lines connect at the corners where one line of the condition ends and another begins (and indicate Tolerance for the featurersquos activation as distance between the ends of two lines) Choose Trim to have lines automatically trim to a line being crossed Choose Curve to draw a curved line

Follow these examples for inputting feet and inches For 7 feet 6 inches type 706 for 13 feet 7 inches type 1307 For 20 feet type 2000

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

32

Area Conditions

General If needed you can specify the thickness (in inches) andor pitch (in inches)

Advanced Specify rounding for object quantities Choose to display an adjustable grid within the area and indicate matrix cell dimensions

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

33

Count Conditions

General

Specify height and indicate the size (in inches) and shape (square circle triangle rectangle or opening) of the count object as it will appear on screen

Advanced Count conditions have advanced attributes These options are available for all shapes except for openings

Zone Conditions Zones allow you to subdivide condition quantities making it easier to modify and complete jobs in phases They can be used at the end of a takeoff to isolate a group of condition quantities that are in different areas of the takeoff

Zones can also be used to break a takeoff into multi-phases and can even be used to isolate quantities while a job is in progress to group the amount of work that has been completed to date They can be applied to one or multiple pages in your plans automatically calculating the takeoff quantities for each zoned area

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

34

The zone feature is only available in Lite and Full Mode If you are in View Mode and would like

to use this feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade

Condition Notes A Note tab is provided for comments regarding the condition These notes will display on the Takeoff List report and will import into Quick Bid

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

35

Condition Results The Results tab of the New Condition is based on condition type Initial settings default to linear feet (LF) for linear conditions square feet (SF) for area conditions and count of items (EA) for count conditions and zones The first of the results fields will display for the condition items in the Takeoff dock bar area All results will display in worksheets and Takeoff List reports as well as in an Excel spreadsheet after being exported

Copying Conditions You may use the condition attributes from a condition yoursquove already created for any future conditions of the same type

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Click the Copy button from the toolbar

OR

3 Right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select copy

4 A new condition will appear in the list with the same condition attributes as the previous condition but with the quantities zeroed

Editing Conditions Once you have copied a condition you might want to change several attributes You can also edit an existing condition to fit any updated needs

1 Highlight the desired condition on the Takeoff dock bar

2 Click the Change button

OR

3 Double-click on the condition you wish to edit to bring up the Change Condition dialog

NOTE The Change Condition dialog differs from the New Condition dialog only in that if takeoffs

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

36

have been performed in your project with this condition you will not be able to change the type of condition or certain properties under the advanced tab of the dialog box

Deleting Conditions 1 Click on the condition in the Takeoff Dock bar area

2 Click the Delete button on the toolbar

OR

3 Right-click and select Delete from the pop-up menu

All takeoff associated with the deleted condition will be deleted immediately and permanently

Organizing Project Conditions Within your project you can create folders andor sub-folders for different types of conditions You may even want to create a folder containing conditions with reset values

To get started organizing your conditions make sure you are viewing the condition tree (right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select Show Tree)

Creating Folders and Sub-Folders 1 Right-click in the Takeoff Dock bar area

2 Select New gt Folder from the pop-up menu

Copying Folders

1 Click on the folder and click Copy on the toolbar

2 All copied conditions within the new folder will have values reset to zero

Renaming Folders

1 Click on the folder

2 Right-click and select Rename from the pop-up menu

3 Enter a name for your folder and click the Enter button

Changing Condition Order

You may move conditions up or down in the condition list of the Takeoff dock bar to suit your project needs

1 Select the condition you would like to move by clicking to highlight it

NOTE When you are ready to move the highlighted conditions be sure that you start

moving using the last condition chosen That condition will have a highlighted boarder

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

37

2 Drag and drop any the condition from one place to another in the list You may also move a condition to another folder on the list in this way

Drawing with Conditions Snap Angles Set up snap angles to prevent lines from appearing jagged Snap angles are commonly set at 15deg and shift snap angles at 0deg

1 Go to Tools gt Options Options dialog appears

2 Under the General tab make the desired settings

3 Click to save the settings As they are drawn lines will snap to the set degree

Drawing a Linear Object 1 Select a condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff dock bar

2 Move the cursor into the Image takeoff area of the screen you will see the cursor display as crosshairs

3 Click and hold left mouse button then drag mouse to draw a line

4 Release mouse button to set line

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

38

5 Repeat steps for further lines

Continuous Mode This feature allows you to draw an object that has connected lines

1 Click the icon from the Takeoff toolbar

OR

2 Go to Tools gt Continuous Mode

3 Follow steps 1-3 from Draw a Linear Object

4 Click at each point of intersection The object will be connected

5 Double-click after making the final point to set the lines

Drawing a Curve To draw a curved line the Curve option must be checked under the Advanced tab of the Condition dialog

1 Click where you want to begin the curve and drag in a straight line to the position for the other endpoint of the curve

2 Click on the line to select it Handles in the shapes of small squares will appear at either end of

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

39

the line and in the center of the line

3 Move the cursor over the center handles until the cursor becomes a two-way arrow

4 Click and drag in the direction of the curve bending the line as you move the cursor Release to set the curve (The line you began with will disappear)

Draw a circle by drawing two curved lines connected

Drawing an Area Object Area conditions are drawn similarly to continuous mode lines You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete your area takeoff

NOTE When drawing an area do not intersect the perimeter or line of the object you are drawing

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

3 The area will be filled with the pattern set for that condition

NOTE The simulated circle will be good enough for you to be able to make a bid

To create a circular area click from point to point with very short distances in between points simulating a circlersquos perimeter Double-click after setting the last point to set the area

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

40

Grid Options Grids give you an added advantage when installing materials such as tiles Use this feature to get a count for how many tiles are needed for an area

1 Double-click on an area condition in the Takeoff dock bar to open its Condition dialog

2 Click on the Advanced tab to show its options

3 Check the box next to Grid by clicking in it

4 Indicate the dimensions of the cell matrix in inches (For example 200 x 400)

5 Under Results tab choose each (EA) for one of the results fields This will tabulate a number of grid cells (including partial grid cells) in area

6 Click to save your settings

7 Use the Move Grid and Rotate Grid features in the Tools menu to manipulate the grid as desired

Grid Calculation

1 Go to Tools gt Options menu

1 Specify if On-Screen Takeoff automatically should Calculate Grid Position

2 If AreaGrid Size is selected On-Screen Takeoff will calculate the number of items needed to fill the grid based on grid demintions

3 Click to accept and close the dialog

To move a line at any angle (regardless of default setting) press the Shift key while moving the mouse

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

41

Backout Mode This feature allows you to take out part of an area and deduct that amount of square footage

1 Select Tools gt Backout Mode

2 Outline the are you want backed out as you would when drawing a regular area object (see Drawing an Area Object)

3 The outlined area will clear and quantities will be recalculated

NOTE The perimeter of the backout area will be added to the LF quantity for that condition

Drawing a Count Object Square triangle rectangle and circle shaped count objects can easily be placed on images

1 Select the condition

2 Click in the location where you want the object to appear

3 To place an opening-shaped count item like a door or window you must click over an existing linear object such as a wall

4 On the Results tab you can change the height properties to give you the result you need

5 If Backout is checked on the advanced tab for each count opening the opening-shaped count item will back out a corresponding section of the linear object

Opening shaped count items are sized at 3rsquo0rdquo by default

Drawing a Zone Zones are drawn in the same way as area objects and may be any polygonal shape You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete the zone perimeter

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

42

Selecting Objects

1 Use the Select Tool to select objects

You can also select all objects that correspond to a condition

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Right-click and choose Select All

3 All objects with this condition will be highlighted with squares as an outline

Moving and Resizing Objects Linear

1 To move or resize a linear object click anywhere on the line to select it

2 To move the line position your pointer over the center handles When the mouse is positioned over the handles you will see a two-way arrow You will only be able to move the line in the direction of the arrows

3 Drag the line to a new position

4 Clicking and dragging the handles on the ends of the line will allow you to lengthen or shorten your line

Area and Zone

1 To move an area object or zone in its entirety click and drag it to its new position

2 Grabbing a handle at a corner or intersection of the object will allow you to adjust and change its perimeter

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

43

Count 1 To move a square circle rectangle or triangle shaped count object click and drag

2 Click and drag an opening shaped count object along the length of the linear object to the desired position then release

NOTE An opening shaped count object may not be moved from its associated linear condition object however it may be moved up and down the length of the linear object

Layers On-Screen Takeoff allows you to sort and separate your takeoff objects within the same job and on the same page On-Screen Takeoff gives you this flexibility through the use of layers

By assigning different conditions to different layers (for example differentiating between floors ceilings and walls) you can choose to view all layers or turn off certain layers to display and print the remaining groups of conditions only You may also remove the background image of electronic plans add text and hot link symbols or print only your condition takeoffs

Layers are only available in Full Mode If you are in View or Lite Mode and would like to use this

feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade Default Layers

On-Screen Takeoff begins every project with three default layers Image Annotation and Default The Image layer holds the electronic plan files you may have in your project The Annotation layer possesses all text notations highlighting and hot links in the project The Default layer will appear in the Condition dialog when creating or editing a condition (listed in the takeoff dock bar) Conditions are assigned to the Default layer unless otherwise specified by the user

Creating Layers To assign a condition to a layer other than the default layer you must first create additional layers for your project

1 Select View gt Layers to open the Layers dialog

2 Click An unnamed layer will be added

3 Click within the empty box and type a name for your layer (for example Wall)

4 New layers are added as active layers The adjacent box under the Show column will be checked

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

44

Assigning a Layer to a Condition 1 Open the Condition dialog box by creating a new condition or editing an existing condition

2 Under the General tab click on the down arrow in the Layer field to display optional layers

3 Select the desired layer for the condition Only the Default layer and layers you have added will be displayed

4 Click

View and Hide Layers

1 Select View gt Layers

2 Under the Show column check the box to view or remove the check (by clicking on it) to hide the specific layer

3 Click to accept and close the Layers dialog

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

45

Assigning Text to a Layer When adding text to an image On-Screen Takeoff has the capability to assign the text to a specified layer

1 Select the Text Tool

2 Click at the point you want to place your text

3 Type in your text using the Enter key for line breaks

4 Click the drop down arrow next to the Layer field and select the desired layer

Section 7

46

Printing and Exporting

This section will

Printing options and procedures

Exporting data by copying and pasting

Exporting quantity results to Excel spreadsheets

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

47

Print Setup On-Screen Takeoff allows the user to print the image takeoff list and worksheet

1 Select File gt Print Setup The Print Setup dialog will open

2 Select a printer or leave the default selection listed (change from the default printer displayed by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the field)

3 Indicate page size and printer tray option (Source) Access page size options by clicking on the

down arrow at the right of the field

4 Choose Portrait or Landscape orientation

5 Click to accept and close the dialog

Printing Images The image area can include the electronic plans the takeoff objects added text and hot links To print a subset of these (for example just the takeoffs without the plans or the added text and hot link symbols) hide layers that you do not want to print (see Section 6 View and Hide Layers) When you are printing your images every page will show the scale of the takeoff you are printing

1 Click on the Image tab to display the area of your project

2 Select File gt Print (or Ctrl + P)

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

48

3 Select the desired view (What to print) and the Image Range

4 Click The second Print dialog will open

5 Change settings accordingly or click if you accept the default settings

Printing Takeoff Lists and Worksheets In Takeoff Lists and Worksheets you may hide columns to print only certain results or adjust column widths to fit the report within the page size selected

1 In Takeoff List or Worksheet view move your cursor to the right side of the columnrsquos title bar the cursor will display as a two-way arrow

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

49

2 Click and drag to adjust the width of the column Holding the mouse button you may

slide the title bar under the title bar to its left to hide the column completely

3 Select File gt Print or press Ctrl + P to access the Print dialog

4 Indicate desired printer and choose the number of copies

5 Click to print and close the dialog

When printing the condition list we suggest printing in landscape

To reset to the default column widths double-click on the right border of a column heading will reset the column to its right (or previously to its right before being hidden)

Print Preview 1 Select File gt Print Preview

2 Use and to vary your view 3 If viewing an image choose current full or scale view to see how it displays

4 For printed outputs that cover more than one page use and to view adjacent pages or click on the down arrow next to Page field and select the page you want displayed

Exporting Using the CopyPaste Feature You may copy all the data or sections from the worksheet and the takeoff list view in On-Screen Takeoff and paste it into another application When pasting into Excel the cell layout will be maintained

1 Highlight the areas you wish to paste Click and hold the left mouse button down as you drag the cursor over the area to be selected then releasing the mouse button

OR

2 Select the entire takeoff list quickly click on the left On-Screen Takeoff column header and hold and drag the cursor across the remaining column headings

The number of pages for the view selected will display in the lower left-hand corner The zoom percentage that applies to the view will be displayed in the lower right-hand corner next to page size of the drawing

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

50

3 In the worksheet view you may highlight rows by clicking on the numbered buttons to the left of each row clicking and dragging across column headings or clicking and dragging over individual cells in the worksheet

Click anywhere in the appropriate view to deselect the area

4 Once your selection is highlighted you may select Edit gt Copy or Ctrl C from the keyboard 5 On your monitor switch to the application into which you want to paste your selection 6 Select Edit gt Paste in the new application or simply press Ctrl + V to paste

The colored keys for conditions cannot be pasted

Using the Export Feature You may export condition quantities to specified cell location within an Excel worksheet file Cell target locations are assigned in the Results tab of the condition dialogs on the Export line relating to each quantity measurement type

On-Screen Takeoff will export takeoff quantity results for up to three different quantity types that you specify For instance you may want to know the number of square feet in a ceiling area as well as the number of linear feet in its perimeter

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

51

1 Bring up the Condition dialog by double-clicking on a condition in the takeoff dock bar or by

selecting the condition and clicking

2 Click on the Results tab to access its fields The default quantities for the condition type will display

3 For each results field click on the arrow to access the pull-down menu and select the appropriate quantity (for example SF LF EA etchellip)

4 Have your Excel spreadsheet opened and saved in a file

5 Specify the Excel spreadsheet cell locations where you want the results to go

6 For a cell in the first sheet of your spreadsheet type in the cell address (eg a1) Case is not important

7 For a cell on a successive sheet of your spreadsheet type in sheet the number followed by a comma and the cell address without any spaces (eg sheet2a1) Case is not important

8 Click

9 Select File gt Export gt Condition Qty to Excel

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

52

10 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

11 Click to export On-Screen Takeoff results to specified cell locations in the Excel file When you return to the Excel application you will see the values have been added to the specified cell locations in your spreadsheet

12 Save your Excel file

Exporting Worksheet to Excel

1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 From On-Screen Takeoff Select File gt Export gt Worksheet to Excel

4 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

5 Click When you return to the Excel application you will see the values from the Worksheet Tab have been added to your spreadsheet

6 Save your Excel file

Exporting Takeoff to CVS 1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 Click the Takeoff Tab in the project you want to export the information

4 Select File gt Export gt Takeoff to CSV

5 Browse to the location of the CSV spreadsheet file click file to select it

6 Click the Save

NOTE CSV files can be opened in Excel Lotus Access etc One may consider this option more of a ldquodumprdquo into a file

The Excel application must be active (it may be minimized on the application bar) with the target spreadsheet open in the application Otherwise an error will occur with the export operation that will affect both the On-Screen Takeofftrade file and the Excel spreadsheet

Section 8

53

Advanced Features

This section will

Some special features of working with condition objects in the takeoff area

Details of advanced options for conditions

Advanced features of the Project Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

54

Features to Use with Objects Roping Feature You can move copy or delete using this feature Using the Select tool (the pointer) you may select several objects at once by clicking and dragging an outline around the objects then releasing the mouse button Roping may select either objects completely within the outlined area (inclusive) or objects both within and touched by the outlined area (touching) Specify your roping preference under Tools gt Options

1 Click and hold the mouse button at a point on the screen near the objects to be selected and drag to surround the objects with an outline

2 Release the mouse button The objects will be selected

3 You may now

Move the group around on the page by clicking within the group dragging the mouse and releasing the button to place the objects

Delete the group of objects by clicking the Delete key or

Copy and paste by pressing Ctrl C to copy the group then Ctrl V to paste it The pasted copy of the grouped objects will appear slightly offset from the original objects

Section 8 Advanced Features

55

Applying a DropRun Count

Use the droprun feature when calculating quantities to take into account the drop or run of a linear condition such as electrical lines or plumbing pipes Drop or run lengths may be added separately to any linear condition on screen while a default droprun length may be indicated for a condition as a whole

1 Select the desired linear condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff Dock bar

2 Click the Change button in the toolbar to open the Change Condition dialog

3 Click the Advanced tab to access the advanced options and click inside the DropRun check box

4 Enter a default length to be applied to all of this condition Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches) You can leave the length blank and manually enter drop run on each segment drawn

5 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog

Edit DropRun Count

1 With the related linear condition in the Takeoff Dock bar highlighted or with the pointer tool selected

2 click on the desired linear object in the image takeoff area The Count button will become active

3 Click on the Count button (alternatively select Tools gt Count) The default droprun amount will show in the pop-up Count dialog (Default length will be zero if droprun has not been selected in this conditionrsquos properties)

4 Type in the desired length Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches)

5 Click the OK button The additional amount will be reflected in the corresponding quantity The new DropRun count will apply only to the object edited

Adding Text in Image View

On-Screen Takeoff allows you to place text comments around your quantity takeoffs that may be printed along with plan images and objects Text is automatically placed within the Annotation Layer (that includes text and hot links)

1 To place text on the image select the Text Tool and click at the point you want to place your text opening a text box

2 Type in your information clicking Enter for line breaks

3 When you are finished click the OK button to exit the text box

4 To reposition text simply click on the text (with the Text Tool active) to select it

5 Move the cursor over the text the cursor will now display as a four-way arrow

6 Click and drag the mouse to position the text as desired

Section 8 Advanced Features

56

1 To edit existing text use the Text Tool to double-click on the text to open the editing box

2 Enter additional text or use the Backspace key to delete text as necessary

Formatting Text Once created you may format the font size type style and color of your text

1 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Font or click on the Font button in the Takeoff Toolbar

2 Select the desired features (color options are disabled) and click the OK button

3 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Color or click on the Color button in the Takeoff Toolbar The Color dialog will open

4 Click on a color in the Basic Color palette or create a color and add to the Custom Colors palette (Be sure to click on the color in the Custom Colors palette to select it)

5 Click the OK button

Object Properties

Linear Objects

Linear objects may be set to connect at corners

A linear object may be set to trim automatically when crossing another linear object (Check the trim option under the advanced tab of the Condition dialog)

When you move a connected linear object objects automatically move and resize connected lines accordingly (quantities are then recalculated)

This feature requires that the connected linear object be moved using the center handles (does not apply when resizing the line from the ends)

Objects constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

Objects are measured from centerline to centerline

Section 8 Advanced Features

57

Area Objects When drawing an area use your escape key to undo the last line drawn You may reverse your

drawing of an area using the escape key

The area will not fill with color and pattern until the user double-clicks after the last line is set

Lines drawn to delineate an area object constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

After selecting an area to move or adjust position the mouse in the center to move the entire area position the mouse at the sides or corners to adjust the perimeter

Count Objects

All count objects are quantified by the physical number of objects per page and reported as EA for the UOM The quantity for the current Image View is (displayed in the Condition List) and the total quantity in your project is displayed in the Takeoff View and Worksheet View)

Square circle rectangle and triangle shaped count objects do not displace or subtract from other object quantities when placed on top of them However on the Advanced Tab for the count condition a connect property can be set (this is a check box) so that when a count object of this shape is put on top of a Linear type takeoff object it will move with the linear if said linear is moved

An opened-shaped count object must be placed within a linear object Opening shaped count objects may also be measured by linear foot or linear yard (EA SF and SY are also options) Opening shaped count items default to a width of 3rsquo 0rdquo at the time of creation This size can be changed The small medium and large size are not options on this type of condition anymore Check Backout on the Advanced tab for each Count object back out the footage (or yardage) of opening-shaped count objects in which they are placed

NOTE In order to see this Backout functionality (in quantity) for SY or SF deductions at least one of the

results for the Linear(s) this object will be placed on must be set to SY or SF and the count object must have a height quantity

Advanced Features of Conditions The Round Feature Under the Advanced tab of the linear and area Condition dialogues you may specify quantity rounding (in inches) For linear objects rounding applies to each linear object drawn For area objects rounding will apply to each segment of the area perimeter adjusting the perimeter and area calculations For example With a linear condition entering 12 in the Round field will round up each related linear object to the nearest 12 inches or one foot With this setting two walls of 1 4 would each round to 2 0 totaling 4 0

NOTE In the Takeoff Dock bar condition list and in the On-Screen Takeoff reports quantities will be displayed in whole numbers rounded up to the nearest foot However calculations are based on true quantities without rounding unless the Round Feature is engaged

Pitch Pitch may apply either to linear or area conditions It is measured in rise per linear foot Entering 12 indicates a 12 rise per 12 of linear distance (a pitch of 12 over 12) or an angle of 45deg

Section 8 Advanced Features

58

Advanced Features of Project Properties Selecting Multiple Pages

1 Select a single page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry

2 Drag the cursor down the column of numbers to select consecutive pages

3 Click on the blank button at the top of this column to select all pages in the Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

59

Changing Image Assigned to a Drawing 1 Select the page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry 2 Click the Change Image button The Change Image dialog box will appear

3 Navigate to the desired file and select by clicking on it

4 Click the Open button The electronic file assigned to the page will have been changed to reflect the new file choice

Changing Image File Path 1 Select pages as described above

2 Choose Change Folder

3 In the Change Folder dialog navigate to the appropriate folder

4 Click the OK button The file path will have been changed for the selected page entries

Delete a Page from Project Properties 1 Select the page you want to delete by clicking on its associated number (in the gray box at the

left of the entry)

2 Choose Delete Page

All Takeoff on the page will be deleted immediately and permanently

Section 8 Advanced Features

60

Advanced Features of Tool Options

Calculation Method On-Screen Takeoff has built-in calculation options to allow for faster work and faster saves until your takeoff is complete Calculation options are found by selecting Tools gt Options then clicking on the Calculation tab

Calculation method can be set to Automatic Automatic except Grids and Manual Manual will allow the program to operate more quickly while Automatic or Automatic except Grids allows the user to see quantity changes as takeoffs are made

In any mode you may press F9 to recalculate quantities for the On-Screen Takeoff current totals

Configuration Tab

When the ldquoPage Label (A01)rdquo radial button is chosen On-Screen Takeoff puts the numbered label on all the pages of in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar If the Page Descriptionrdquo radial button is chosen then a description of what takeoff is on that specific page will be shown in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar

This section of the configuration tab gives you options on how you want to export your information When the ldquoFolderSubfolder Namesrdquo radial button is chosen than on your file that you are exporting to will have all the conditions folders and subfolders In the Delimiter box you can choose the symbol that is needed to separate the information you are exporting Some files need semicolons () or colons () to make sure the information comes exported in is separated it the appropriate places

Section 8 Advanced Features

61

In previous versions of On-Screen Takeoff there are views that users need to have in order for them to display their information By either choosing ldquoOST 1xrdquo or ldquoOST 2xrdquo it will let the program know you want your columns of information exported in that specific format

When you have the Confirm Deletions radial button of ldquoYesrdquo chosen than every time you delete anything you will get a dialog box confirming your intentions of deletion

While working with your takeoff you have a choice to either view the legend of your conditions or hide it Choose whichever radial button that suits your needs

For those who prefer to use the Enter key to navigate in dialog boxes this option is just for that

Font Tab The Font tab is designed for you to make your own look and feel for the application At the bottom of this tab it will show you sample of the fonts and colors you have chosen

Renaming the Current Page You may change the name of the current page in the takeoff area of On-Screen Takeoff by selecting Edit gt Rename Page

This opens the Name Page dialog and you may simply type in a new name and click the Enter button The new name for the file will be reflected on the title bar for the page and in Project Properties

You also may access the Rename Page function by right-clicking in the takeoff area while in Image View and selecting the option from the pop-up menu that appears

Section 9

62

Saving and Exiting

This section will

Explain how to save projects

Show you how to safely exit the program

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

63

Saving Your Project

1 Select File gt Save 2 If your project has not previously been saved a Save dialog box will open to allow you to name

the file and choose the directory and folder in which to save your file 3 Once saved File gt Save will simply save the current version of the file

OR

4 Select File gt Save As then type in a new name for the file and save to the desired file path

The Auto-save Feature With the Auto-save feature On-Screen Takeoff automatically backs up your open project You may choose to have more than one level of backup files The first backup copy will have the extension b00 and successive files will be b01 b02 and so on If you have designated four levels of backup files after the fourth backup copy has been created (b03) the next file will be saved over the file with extension b00 Further backup saves will then rotate through the four backup files in the same way

1 Select Tools gt Options 2 In the Auto-save area (under the General tab) select the frequency of backup file creation (in

minutes) and the number of levels for the feature 3 You also may disengage the feature by clicking in the check box to clear it

The Auto-save feature automatically saves backup copies to the directory of the current project If you are working from a write-protected area such as a CD-ROM On-Screen Takeoff will place backup files in the On-Screen Takeoff folder

Exiting When you are finished using On-Screen Takeoff it is very easy to exit Exiting is very important because of security reasons If someone were to use your computer they could enter the application and view and manipulate information

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

64

On-Screen Takeoff closes the open project when you open another or create a new project or when you exit the program

1 Select File gt Exit

OR

2 You also may click at the upper right-hand corner of the application to exit

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

65

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer When you get your digitizer from GTCO you will need to connect it to your computer Follow the instructions outlined below to do this

Note For rollup digitizers the metal bar must be oriented to the top or right hand side

Connecting the Digitizer 1 Lay the digitizer out flat 2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer 3 Plug in the power adapter 4 Plug the interface (IO) cable into the digitizer 5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into an open serial port on computer

Note GTCO Technical support phone number is 410-381-6688 The electronic manual (on diskette) from GTCO contains more detailed installation and operation instructions for the GTCO digitizer model you have

Installing other Digitizer Drivers If you are using a GTCO Digitizer you will need to install the GTCO TabletWorks Drivers

If you are using a Digitizer not supported by GTCO Tablet Works 10 please contact the manufacturer of your digitizer for assistance with installation

Installing GTCO TabletWorks Drivers 1 Insert the On Center CD into the CD-ROM drive The CD Startup screen will open 2 Click on Install Software 3 Select Additional Software and Drivers 4 Select Digitizer Driver 5 Follow the instructions for installing TabletWorks 10

Adhering the Template The template is a small plastic sticker used to enable mouse function when using the digitizer with On-Screen Takeoff Place your template on your digitizer We suggest placing it in the bottom right corner of the digitizer about one inch inside the takeoff area

Note You may either peel off the back of the template and use the adhesive surface or you can tape the template down

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

66

Testing the Digitizer Drivers Before running OST you may test the digitizer by moving the stylus around on the digitizer pad it should move the mouse cursor (if mouse emulation is enabled)

If the digitizer does not move the mouse cursor on the screen

The superset codes may need to be reset Reset the superset codes by touching on the border of the digitizer with the stylus The digitizer should beep several times

The digitizer may not be communicating with the computer Be sure the COM port selected is correct Be sure the COM port selected is correct If you are not able to get the digitizer to move the mouse cursor you need to call GTCO technical support for help

Note The Mouse Emulation is not required for On-Screen Takeoff to work properly It is used only for the Template functionality if the digitizer is moving the cursor the wrong direction (up instead of sideways or vice-versa)

Click the L-shaped arrow symbol on the digitizer with the stylus

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

67

Appendix II Toolbar Items Main Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

68

Tool Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

69

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

70

Navigate Toolbar (Continued)

Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

71

Takeoff Toolbar (Continued)

Image Toolbar

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

72

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

This section will detail how to load plans from a F W Dodge CD-ROM into an On-Screen Takeoff project file ready for takeoffs

Dodge files may be added to the Project Properties dialog However loading the files in that way will load the files by number rather than name description If you want to load one page only from your Dodge CD You will have to rename the page to display the name rather than number of the file

To load plan files from a Dodge CD so that the files load sequentially by file number but are displayed by name rather than by number within your project follow the instructions below

Opening a Dodge project from a CD-ROM 1 Insert the CD into the drive 2 Choose File gt Custom 3 Choose Dodge Plans Project (plansdat) as the file type 4 Select the appropriate file type by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the Files of type

field 5 In the Look in field access your drive paths by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the

field then

Navigate to your CD-ROM drive Open the data folder and Open the Projects folder

6 Select the desired project and open its folder 7 Open the plansdat file 8 All the images will come in sequenced correctly for that job along with the full descriptions

(names) of each page If there is not a plans folder in the project folder then plans do not exist for that project on the CD Opening the plansdat file will yield an empty project

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

73

Appendix IV Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer The On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer is a limited version of On Center Softwarersquos commercial takeoff software If your status bar located at the very bottom of the main window says View Mode in the lower left-hand corner then you are using the Plan Viewer You can use the plan viewer to

View CD-based amp converted CAD drawings

View a previously created OST file and associated drawings

Download electronic plans online

Navigate through drawings

Quickly Takeoff linearsareas and counts

Zoom in to view the plan better

Print drawings directly from the viewer

Viewing an On-Screen Takeoff Project File

1 To open an OST file that was previously created with of On-Screen Takeoff 2 Select File gt Open 3 An Open dialog will appear if you do not see the OST file you are looking for select the

Look In drop down arrow 4 A drop down menu will appear listing the various folders drives and mapped drives located

on your computer select the correct drive or folder location and continue to browse to the location of your OST file

5 When you see your OST file double-click it to open it 6 Any takeoff and drawings should appear on the Image tab view

If you do not see the drawings but do see the colored takeoff layer the drawings may

not be located in the same place they were originally saved at Go to File gt Project Properties and check the Image File path for each listed page If the image file path is pointing to a CD drive make sure the CD is inside the CR-ROM

Downloading Electronic Plans If your Online Plan Service provides a special file format (OSX) required to use this feature of our plan viewer you can immediately downloaded all electronic plans of a project directly from our viewer

Most Plan Room web sites will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff when a request to download plans is made Your particular Plan Room may differ in operation so please contact the provider directly with questions on using the site

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

74

When you request to download or open a project file from a Plan Room you will usually have the open to open or save an OSX file Choosing open will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff Alternately you may choose to save the file to a local hard drive After you have saved the file either double-click it to launch On-Screen Takeoff or open the OSX file using On-Screen Takeoff by clicking File then Open and locating the file on your hard drive You will need to change the file type to OSX

After the OSX file is opened you will see an additional tab appear in the Conditions List window called Pages

The Pages tab shows the hierarchy of your project Gray file icons represent pages that have not been downloaded and blue icons represents pages that have been downloaded

To download a page simply double-click the page icon

If you wish to select a group of pages to download you can use the Ctrl or Shift key to multiple select them then click the Download button

If you wish to download all pages at once click the Download All button

Downloaded pages will now appear in the Project Properties dialog in the same order in which they appear in the Pages tab

Creating Quick Takeoffs With On-Screen Takeoff you can create quick takeoffs to measure quantities even if you dont have the full version of our program However using the Quick Takeoff functionality shows you just a fraction of what the full version can do

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar is located at the top of the image view It has three buttons designated for three types of takeoffs Linear Area and Count The Quantity drop down list will show secondary quantities for Linears and Areas The Units drop down allows you to select how you want your quantities displayed Feet Inches Yards Millimeters and Meters

NOTE Every time change the type of takeoff you are performing (switching from Area to Linear for example) the previous quantities and takeoff objects will disappear They will also disappear when you changes pages

NOTE You can use the Dimension Tool to basically measure the distance between two points or linears The distance will display on the status bar at the bottom of the application

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

75

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions General

Where is On-Screen Takeoff installed on my computer

Typically it is installed in CProgram FilesOn-Screen Takeoff

In Explorer how do I recognize On-Screen Takeoff file types

On-Screen Takeoff data is stored in a single file per job lsquojob name OSTrsquo On-Screen Takeoff templates are stored as lsquotemplate nameTPOrsquo

Can only one project at a time be open

Yes For that reason opening another project automatically closes the project on screen You will be asked to save any changes

Is only one scale allowed per page What about on drawings that have multiple detail sections on a page and each of those drawings have different scales

Yes For pages with drawings of different scales copy the drawing to another project page and set the appropriate scale

I cannot perform backout on an area that is along a linear

As a workaround use the On-Screen Takeoff layers feature to help you with this issue Electronic Images

How do I start a project from drawings that have been scanned and written to a CD-ROM

Open a new project Select File gt Project Properties and select Auto Add Navigate to your CD and the appropriate folder and select any image file in that location Click Open All files in the location will load into your project Recommended that images are copied from CD to hard drive for performance

If I get a disk of drawings in AutoCAD format (R13 or R14) can I read them in On-Screen Takeoff

Yes On-Screen Takeoff now reads DWG DXF and many other format that are saved with AutoCAD

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

76

When I click on the all pages button what is supposed to happen Currently nothing seems to change when I click on that button

The All Pages button is used to apply the Darken and Enhance Plans feature to all pages in the project (as opposed to only the current page on screen)

Is there a way to deduct a large skylight from an area condition

Yes with the related area condition selected in the Takeoff Dock bar unselect the Backout button on the Takeoff Toolbar then draw the Backout area The area quantity will be deducted from the related condition object and the linear measurement of the Backout perimeter will be added

Digitizer Issues

How do I connect a Digitizer to the computer

See Appendix I Connecting a Digitizer

The Place Template menu choice is disabled

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or the digitizer or the digitzer drivers are not installed

It wonrsquot let me select the Set Takeoff Area menu choice

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or no job is open a digitizer is not installed or the drivers are not installed

The digitizer stylus is not moving the cursor or crosshairs

Click S-0-1 superset on the digitizer

How do I convert my old GTCO Digitizer to work with On- Screen Takeofftrade

Call GTCO and they may be able to reconfigure your digitizer to be compatible with On-Screen Takeoff

Printing Issues Which Printers work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible printers include On-Screen Takeoff Hewlett Packard Epson and Canon printers If you are having printer difficulties please contact support and specify the type of printer along with other pertinent information Contact support at wwwoncentercomsupport or email supportoncentercom

Which Plotters work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible Plotters include Hewlett Packard DesignJet plotters and the EnCAD Cadjet II If you are having plotter difficulties please contact support and specify the type of plotter concerned

ViewingDisplay I can no longer see my condition list How do I get it back

The toolbars and Dock bars can be turned on and off through the View gt Toolbars menu options

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

77

This is also accessible by right-clicking in the toolbar area and selecting (or deselecting) a toolbar listed

I cannot view my folders in the condition list

Right-click in the Takeoff Dock barcondition list area and select Show Tree to display your folders

My Status Bar reads Viewer Mode and I am unable to draw conditions

On-Screen Takeoff needs to be Authorized Or you need to purchase an upgrade Click the Perform Advanced Takeoff button on the main toolbar

I hid a Dock bar and when I selected to view it again it appeared alongside the other Dock

bar instead of stacked on top of it How do I fix it

Pick up the Dock bar by clicking on the bar at the top and continuing to hold down the mouse button drag the Dock bar over the other one It will resize and appear stacked with the other

When I open image files from a CD the images are all upside down How do I get them right

side up

To flip pages from top to bottom follow the steps below 1 Click the All Pages button on the Image Toolbar (All Pages is engaged when the button

is not clicked) 2 Click the Flip Horizontal button on the Image Toolbar 3 Click the All Pages button again to disengage

Templates How do I create a Template

Follow the steps below 1 Create a typical project 2 Choose File gt Save As 3 Choose On-Screen Takeoff Template Files as the file type to save 4 Name the file This will save all of the condition setups as well as the layers for the

project

How do I create a new project from a template

Follow the steps below 1 Choose File gt New 2 Select a template from those listed in the New dialog This will open a new project with

conditions and layers saved from a previous project but no pages or takeoff

78

INDEX

Area Conditions 32

Area Objects 57

Auto Scrolling 20

Auto-save 63

Backout Mode 41

Calculation Method 60

Conditions 29

Configuration 60

Contents Tab 6

Continuous Mode 38

Count Conditions 33

Count Objects 57

Digitizer 10 65 76

Docking Toolbars 13

Dodge CD 72

Drawing 27 37

DropRun Count 55

Environment 18

Exiting 63

Exporting 49

Features 16

Font 61

Frequently Asked Questions 75

Grid 40

Help File 5

Hiding Toolbars 13

Hot Links 21

Image 19 59

Image files 9

Image Toolbar 12 71

Images 75

Index Tab 6

Layers 43

Linear Conditions 31

Linear Objects 56

Main Toolbar 12 67

Menus 14

Moving Toolbars 13

Navigate Toolbar 12 69

Navigating 20

On-Screen Takeofftrade 2

Page 59 61

Pages 20 25 28

Plan Viewer 73

Plans 26

Printing 47 76

Project Properties 25

Projects 22

Quick Start Video 18

Resizing Toolbars 13

Roping 54

Saving 63

Scale 28

Search Tab 7

Selecting Objects 42

Setup 8

Start On-Screen Takeofftrade 17

System Requirements 9

Takeoff 19 27

Takeoff Toolbar 70 71

Takeoff Toolbar 12

Template Files 23

TIF (Group4) 9

Tool Toolbar 12 68

Toolbar 67

Toolbars 12

View Toolbar 12 69

Viewing Toolbars 12

Worksheet 20

Zone Conditions 33

Zoom Toolbar 12 69

  • On-Screen Takeoff Lite
  • Table of Contents
  • Section 1 - Introduction
  • Section 2 - Setup
  • Section 3 - Toolbars and Menus
  • Section 4 - Features
  • Section 5 - Projects
  • Section 6 - Conditions and Takeoff
  • Section 7 - Printing and Exporting
  • Section 8 - Advanced Features
  • Section 9 - Saving and Exiting
  • Appendix I - Installing Your Digitizer
  • Appendix II - Toolbar Items
  • Appendix III - Loading Plans from a Dodge CD
  • Appendix IV - Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer
  • Appendix V - Frequently Asked Questions
  • Index

Section 5 Projects

24

Opening an Existing Project File 1 Select File gt Open

2 Navigate to the desired file location

3 Click the Open button

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask

you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Creating a New Project

1 Select File gt New

2 For a blank untitled project click

3 At this point the Project Properties dialog will pop-up for more information about your takeoff

NOTE The following are important to keep in mind when beginning a new project

At the start of your project fill out the Project Properties settings to establish the name for all printed output from your project set the default page size and scale for your plans number and names of different pages within the project and locations of electronic drawings

Scale settings can significantly affect quantity outcomes Be sure to set the scale for each page of drawings before beginning condition takeoffs

When using a digitizer remember to make a mark with a pen or pencil in the upper left and lower right corners of the first sheet of the paper plans to delineate the takeoff area for that sheet You can then set the takeoff area on On-Screen Takeoff using your marks

Save your project before you begin taking off any conditions On-Screen Takeoff will write a back-up file using the same file name

Remember the Undo feature If you make a mistake select Edit gt Undo and reverse the process step by step

Section 5 Projects

25

Project Properties

You can either set your Project Properties when you create a new takeoff or once your project file is saved under the appropriate name

1 Select File gt Project Properties the Project Properties dialog box will appear

2 Type in the name of your project to appear on printouts Use the backspace andor delete keys to edit the name as necessary

3 Press the Tab key to move to the Default Image Size option or click within the Image Size box You may click on the arrow at the right for the pull-down menu of page size options or you can use the down-arrow key on your keyboard to scroll through the list to the appropriate selection

4 Press the Tab key to move to the Default Scale option Select a scale by using the drop down arrow If your scale is metric you will need to click in the box next to Metric to convert to that measurement

5 Establish the number of pages for your project plans And load image files See Adding Pages to

Your Project

Adding Pages to Projects Individual Electronic Plans

1 Click on in the Project Properties dialog

2 In the Add Images dialog use the drop down arrow to navigate to the appropriate directory and folder containing your image

3 Select the file so that it displays in the File name field then click The file will display by name and path in the Image File field in Project Properties dialog

4 Click to accept and your project will automatically open

5 Save your project with the new settings by selecting File gt Save

Section 5 Projects

26

Electronic plans scanned from blueprints (as opposed to blue lines) will display as white lines on a black background and are difficult to read on your computer screen Select Image gt Invert and the colors will invert to black on white

You may have noticed the Page column in the Project Properties dialog Generally plan images occupy one page and 1 will be listed in the column indicating Page 1 of your plan file If you import a multi-page TIF a plan file containing more than one page of plans they will import as separate pages and each successive page will be indicated under the Page column as 1 2 3 etc of the plan file

Group of Electronic Plans You may add all the electronic plan files from a particular source (for example from a CD) by using the Auto Add feature

1 Click the button in the Project Properties dialog

2 Browse until you find the appropriate directory and folder containing your plan images

3 Click on any file displayed within your target folder so that the file name appears in the File name box of the Auto Add dialog

4 Click The image paths and file names will be recorded into the project properties arranged alphabetically

5 Click to accept your choices and your project will automatically open

6 Save your project with the new settings by selecting File gt Save

To load Dodge Plans into your Project Properties see Appendix IIi Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

Paper Plans On-Screen Takeoff makes it easy for Full Mode users to perform quantity takeoffs from paper plans using a digitizer

1 Add pages by clicking until you have the number of pages initially in the project

2 Name each page by clicking within the Title area and typing the name

3 Click to accept your choices and close the Project Properties dialog

4 Save your project with the new project properties settings by selecting File gt Save

Section 5 Projects

27

Setting Up a Drawing Template On-Screen Takeoff provides the convenience of using the same work surface for both digitizer and mouse to allow the user to draw conditions and then edit settings of the project or add or change conditions without breaking stride A mouse pad template included with the program defines the area of the digitizer in which use of the stylus or cursor will be recognized as mouse movement as opposed to drawing movement

1 Place your stylus on On-Screen Takeoff

2 Placing the template identifies the location mouse movements will be recognized by the program

Before placing the template the template must be applied to the digitizer surface This may have been done during the installation of your digitizer We suggest attaching the template to the lower right corner of the digitizer surface about one inch inside the grid area

3 Select Digitizer gt Place Template

4 Follow the instruction prompts on the screen clicking first on the target symbol at the left of the On-Screen Takeoff box on the template then on the target at the right

Setting Takeoff Area Before you can begin taking off a drawing you must define the drawing area on the digitizer This requires defining an area that will include all objects on each drawing of your plans As you add pages to your takeoff the same area of the digitizer will be active

1 Secure the plans to the digitizer with tape or a set of clamps

2 With a pen or a pencil mark the upper left corner and the lower right corner of the first page in your set of plans

3 Select Digitizer gt Set Takeoff Area

4 Click each mark with the stylus pen as prompted

5 Verify the active area of the digitizer by looking at the image size located in the lower right corner of your screen

If you close the program before the takeoff is complete you will need to reestablish the takeoff area before you can add additional condition quantities

Electronic plans appear on your computer screen eliminating the need to set a takeoff area You simply drag your mouse across the conditions you wish to takeoff The conditions will be highlighted and quantities will be totaled instantly Electronic plans are available through a variety of services For information contact an On Center Software account manager

Section 5 Projects

28

Setting Scale for Specific Pages You may set the scale in each page view separately This will override the default scale setting in Project Properties for that page Setting the correct scale for the drawing before taking off quantities ensures accurate calculations Be careful to check the scale for each drawing in your project before doing takeoffs

1 Display the page you want to set select Edit gt Set Scale

2 Use the drop down arrow to select a scale that will be applied to that page

3 Click

OR

4 Access the pull-down scale settings on the Navigate toolbar

NOTE As you draw objects notice that the drawn object is similar in width to the object on your plans If it is not the scale set may not be correct

Calculating Scale You may calculate scale according to a known measurement between two points either with a digitizer or on electronic plans

1 Select Edit gt Calculate Scale using Image or Edit gt Calculate Scale using Digitizer

2 Follow the instructions in the related Calculate Scale dialog box You will be asked to click on the first and second points then to enter the dimension for that distance

3 The scale will be recalculated for the displayed page and the Scale display on the Navigate toolbar will show the new scale

Section 6

29

Conditions and Takeoff

This section will Draw Conditions to Takeoff Plan Quantities

What Zones will do to help your takeoff process

Discuss the ins and outs of Takeoffs

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

30

Creating Conditions

If you are starting a new project from scratch you will need to create conditions to takeoff quantities such as floor areas wall lengths and corner bead counts If you are using a template you will have several pre-designed conditions already listed on the Takeoff dock bar However you may want to change the characteristics of some conditions or create additional conditions for a particular project

1 Right Click within the Takeoff dock bar Select New gt Condition

Or

2 From the Takeoff dock bar Click (if the buttons are not showing right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select Show Buttons from the pop-up menu) The New Condition dialog appears

3 Select the condition type (Linear Area Count or Zone) from the pull-down menu accessed by the

down arrow next to the Type option

4 Press Tab or use the mouse (or stylus) to move to Name and enter a name for your condition

5 Specify the desired condition attributes See Condition Attributes for more detail

6 Click for condition to apply

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

31

Condition Attributes Each condition type will have related attributes to select or specify within the General and Advanced tabs of the New Condition dialog Once a condition has been used to takeoff a quantity from your plans certain attributes cannot be changed

All conditions allow the user to specify color and fill pattern for the object drawn

Linear Conditions

General Specify width and height by feet and inches Specify pitch in inches up to the nearest thousandth of an inch if applicable

Advanced Specify rounding for object quantities and droprun default length for electrical or plumbing drops at the ends of lines Select Connect to have lines connect at the corners where one line of the condition ends and another begins (and indicate Tolerance for the featurersquos activation as distance between the ends of two lines) Choose Trim to have lines automatically trim to a line being crossed Choose Curve to draw a curved line

Follow these examples for inputting feet and inches For 7 feet 6 inches type 706 for 13 feet 7 inches type 1307 For 20 feet type 2000

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

32

Area Conditions

General If needed you can specify the thickness (in inches) andor pitch (in inches)

Advanced Specify rounding for object quantities Choose to display an adjustable grid within the area and indicate matrix cell dimensions

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

33

Count Conditions

General

Specify height and indicate the size (in inches) and shape (square circle triangle rectangle or opening) of the count object as it will appear on screen

Advanced Count conditions have advanced attributes These options are available for all shapes except for openings

Zone Conditions Zones allow you to subdivide condition quantities making it easier to modify and complete jobs in phases They can be used at the end of a takeoff to isolate a group of condition quantities that are in different areas of the takeoff

Zones can also be used to break a takeoff into multi-phases and can even be used to isolate quantities while a job is in progress to group the amount of work that has been completed to date They can be applied to one or multiple pages in your plans automatically calculating the takeoff quantities for each zoned area

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

34

The zone feature is only available in Lite and Full Mode If you are in View Mode and would like

to use this feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade

Condition Notes A Note tab is provided for comments regarding the condition These notes will display on the Takeoff List report and will import into Quick Bid

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

35

Condition Results The Results tab of the New Condition is based on condition type Initial settings default to linear feet (LF) for linear conditions square feet (SF) for area conditions and count of items (EA) for count conditions and zones The first of the results fields will display for the condition items in the Takeoff dock bar area All results will display in worksheets and Takeoff List reports as well as in an Excel spreadsheet after being exported

Copying Conditions You may use the condition attributes from a condition yoursquove already created for any future conditions of the same type

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Click the Copy button from the toolbar

OR

3 Right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select copy

4 A new condition will appear in the list with the same condition attributes as the previous condition but with the quantities zeroed

Editing Conditions Once you have copied a condition you might want to change several attributes You can also edit an existing condition to fit any updated needs

1 Highlight the desired condition on the Takeoff dock bar

2 Click the Change button

OR

3 Double-click on the condition you wish to edit to bring up the Change Condition dialog

NOTE The Change Condition dialog differs from the New Condition dialog only in that if takeoffs

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

36

have been performed in your project with this condition you will not be able to change the type of condition or certain properties under the advanced tab of the dialog box

Deleting Conditions 1 Click on the condition in the Takeoff Dock bar area

2 Click the Delete button on the toolbar

OR

3 Right-click and select Delete from the pop-up menu

All takeoff associated with the deleted condition will be deleted immediately and permanently

Organizing Project Conditions Within your project you can create folders andor sub-folders for different types of conditions You may even want to create a folder containing conditions with reset values

To get started organizing your conditions make sure you are viewing the condition tree (right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select Show Tree)

Creating Folders and Sub-Folders 1 Right-click in the Takeoff Dock bar area

2 Select New gt Folder from the pop-up menu

Copying Folders

1 Click on the folder and click Copy on the toolbar

2 All copied conditions within the new folder will have values reset to zero

Renaming Folders

1 Click on the folder

2 Right-click and select Rename from the pop-up menu

3 Enter a name for your folder and click the Enter button

Changing Condition Order

You may move conditions up or down in the condition list of the Takeoff dock bar to suit your project needs

1 Select the condition you would like to move by clicking to highlight it

NOTE When you are ready to move the highlighted conditions be sure that you start

moving using the last condition chosen That condition will have a highlighted boarder

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

37

2 Drag and drop any the condition from one place to another in the list You may also move a condition to another folder on the list in this way

Drawing with Conditions Snap Angles Set up snap angles to prevent lines from appearing jagged Snap angles are commonly set at 15deg and shift snap angles at 0deg

1 Go to Tools gt Options Options dialog appears

2 Under the General tab make the desired settings

3 Click to save the settings As they are drawn lines will snap to the set degree

Drawing a Linear Object 1 Select a condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff dock bar

2 Move the cursor into the Image takeoff area of the screen you will see the cursor display as crosshairs

3 Click and hold left mouse button then drag mouse to draw a line

4 Release mouse button to set line

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

38

5 Repeat steps for further lines

Continuous Mode This feature allows you to draw an object that has connected lines

1 Click the icon from the Takeoff toolbar

OR

2 Go to Tools gt Continuous Mode

3 Follow steps 1-3 from Draw a Linear Object

4 Click at each point of intersection The object will be connected

5 Double-click after making the final point to set the lines

Drawing a Curve To draw a curved line the Curve option must be checked under the Advanced tab of the Condition dialog

1 Click where you want to begin the curve and drag in a straight line to the position for the other endpoint of the curve

2 Click on the line to select it Handles in the shapes of small squares will appear at either end of

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

39

the line and in the center of the line

3 Move the cursor over the center handles until the cursor becomes a two-way arrow

4 Click and drag in the direction of the curve bending the line as you move the cursor Release to set the curve (The line you began with will disappear)

Draw a circle by drawing two curved lines connected

Drawing an Area Object Area conditions are drawn similarly to continuous mode lines You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete your area takeoff

NOTE When drawing an area do not intersect the perimeter or line of the object you are drawing

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

3 The area will be filled with the pattern set for that condition

NOTE The simulated circle will be good enough for you to be able to make a bid

To create a circular area click from point to point with very short distances in between points simulating a circlersquos perimeter Double-click after setting the last point to set the area

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

40

Grid Options Grids give you an added advantage when installing materials such as tiles Use this feature to get a count for how many tiles are needed for an area

1 Double-click on an area condition in the Takeoff dock bar to open its Condition dialog

2 Click on the Advanced tab to show its options

3 Check the box next to Grid by clicking in it

4 Indicate the dimensions of the cell matrix in inches (For example 200 x 400)

5 Under Results tab choose each (EA) for one of the results fields This will tabulate a number of grid cells (including partial grid cells) in area

6 Click to save your settings

7 Use the Move Grid and Rotate Grid features in the Tools menu to manipulate the grid as desired

Grid Calculation

1 Go to Tools gt Options menu

1 Specify if On-Screen Takeoff automatically should Calculate Grid Position

2 If AreaGrid Size is selected On-Screen Takeoff will calculate the number of items needed to fill the grid based on grid demintions

3 Click to accept and close the dialog

To move a line at any angle (regardless of default setting) press the Shift key while moving the mouse

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

41

Backout Mode This feature allows you to take out part of an area and deduct that amount of square footage

1 Select Tools gt Backout Mode

2 Outline the are you want backed out as you would when drawing a regular area object (see Drawing an Area Object)

3 The outlined area will clear and quantities will be recalculated

NOTE The perimeter of the backout area will be added to the LF quantity for that condition

Drawing a Count Object Square triangle rectangle and circle shaped count objects can easily be placed on images

1 Select the condition

2 Click in the location where you want the object to appear

3 To place an opening-shaped count item like a door or window you must click over an existing linear object such as a wall

4 On the Results tab you can change the height properties to give you the result you need

5 If Backout is checked on the advanced tab for each count opening the opening-shaped count item will back out a corresponding section of the linear object

Opening shaped count items are sized at 3rsquo0rdquo by default

Drawing a Zone Zones are drawn in the same way as area objects and may be any polygonal shape You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete the zone perimeter

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

42

Selecting Objects

1 Use the Select Tool to select objects

You can also select all objects that correspond to a condition

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Right-click and choose Select All

3 All objects with this condition will be highlighted with squares as an outline

Moving and Resizing Objects Linear

1 To move or resize a linear object click anywhere on the line to select it

2 To move the line position your pointer over the center handles When the mouse is positioned over the handles you will see a two-way arrow You will only be able to move the line in the direction of the arrows

3 Drag the line to a new position

4 Clicking and dragging the handles on the ends of the line will allow you to lengthen or shorten your line

Area and Zone

1 To move an area object or zone in its entirety click and drag it to its new position

2 Grabbing a handle at a corner or intersection of the object will allow you to adjust and change its perimeter

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

43

Count 1 To move a square circle rectangle or triangle shaped count object click and drag

2 Click and drag an opening shaped count object along the length of the linear object to the desired position then release

NOTE An opening shaped count object may not be moved from its associated linear condition object however it may be moved up and down the length of the linear object

Layers On-Screen Takeoff allows you to sort and separate your takeoff objects within the same job and on the same page On-Screen Takeoff gives you this flexibility through the use of layers

By assigning different conditions to different layers (for example differentiating between floors ceilings and walls) you can choose to view all layers or turn off certain layers to display and print the remaining groups of conditions only You may also remove the background image of electronic plans add text and hot link symbols or print only your condition takeoffs

Layers are only available in Full Mode If you are in View or Lite Mode and would like to use this

feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade Default Layers

On-Screen Takeoff begins every project with three default layers Image Annotation and Default The Image layer holds the electronic plan files you may have in your project The Annotation layer possesses all text notations highlighting and hot links in the project The Default layer will appear in the Condition dialog when creating or editing a condition (listed in the takeoff dock bar) Conditions are assigned to the Default layer unless otherwise specified by the user

Creating Layers To assign a condition to a layer other than the default layer you must first create additional layers for your project

1 Select View gt Layers to open the Layers dialog

2 Click An unnamed layer will be added

3 Click within the empty box and type a name for your layer (for example Wall)

4 New layers are added as active layers The adjacent box under the Show column will be checked

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

44

Assigning a Layer to a Condition 1 Open the Condition dialog box by creating a new condition or editing an existing condition

2 Under the General tab click on the down arrow in the Layer field to display optional layers

3 Select the desired layer for the condition Only the Default layer and layers you have added will be displayed

4 Click

View and Hide Layers

1 Select View gt Layers

2 Under the Show column check the box to view or remove the check (by clicking on it) to hide the specific layer

3 Click to accept and close the Layers dialog

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

45

Assigning Text to a Layer When adding text to an image On-Screen Takeoff has the capability to assign the text to a specified layer

1 Select the Text Tool

2 Click at the point you want to place your text

3 Type in your text using the Enter key for line breaks

4 Click the drop down arrow next to the Layer field and select the desired layer

Section 7

46

Printing and Exporting

This section will

Printing options and procedures

Exporting data by copying and pasting

Exporting quantity results to Excel spreadsheets

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

47

Print Setup On-Screen Takeoff allows the user to print the image takeoff list and worksheet

1 Select File gt Print Setup The Print Setup dialog will open

2 Select a printer or leave the default selection listed (change from the default printer displayed by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the field)

3 Indicate page size and printer tray option (Source) Access page size options by clicking on the

down arrow at the right of the field

4 Choose Portrait or Landscape orientation

5 Click to accept and close the dialog

Printing Images The image area can include the electronic plans the takeoff objects added text and hot links To print a subset of these (for example just the takeoffs without the plans or the added text and hot link symbols) hide layers that you do not want to print (see Section 6 View and Hide Layers) When you are printing your images every page will show the scale of the takeoff you are printing

1 Click on the Image tab to display the area of your project

2 Select File gt Print (or Ctrl + P)

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

48

3 Select the desired view (What to print) and the Image Range

4 Click The second Print dialog will open

5 Change settings accordingly or click if you accept the default settings

Printing Takeoff Lists and Worksheets In Takeoff Lists and Worksheets you may hide columns to print only certain results or adjust column widths to fit the report within the page size selected

1 In Takeoff List or Worksheet view move your cursor to the right side of the columnrsquos title bar the cursor will display as a two-way arrow

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

49

2 Click and drag to adjust the width of the column Holding the mouse button you may

slide the title bar under the title bar to its left to hide the column completely

3 Select File gt Print or press Ctrl + P to access the Print dialog

4 Indicate desired printer and choose the number of copies

5 Click to print and close the dialog

When printing the condition list we suggest printing in landscape

To reset to the default column widths double-click on the right border of a column heading will reset the column to its right (or previously to its right before being hidden)

Print Preview 1 Select File gt Print Preview

2 Use and to vary your view 3 If viewing an image choose current full or scale view to see how it displays

4 For printed outputs that cover more than one page use and to view adjacent pages or click on the down arrow next to Page field and select the page you want displayed

Exporting Using the CopyPaste Feature You may copy all the data or sections from the worksheet and the takeoff list view in On-Screen Takeoff and paste it into another application When pasting into Excel the cell layout will be maintained

1 Highlight the areas you wish to paste Click and hold the left mouse button down as you drag the cursor over the area to be selected then releasing the mouse button

OR

2 Select the entire takeoff list quickly click on the left On-Screen Takeoff column header and hold and drag the cursor across the remaining column headings

The number of pages for the view selected will display in the lower left-hand corner The zoom percentage that applies to the view will be displayed in the lower right-hand corner next to page size of the drawing

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

50

3 In the worksheet view you may highlight rows by clicking on the numbered buttons to the left of each row clicking and dragging across column headings or clicking and dragging over individual cells in the worksheet

Click anywhere in the appropriate view to deselect the area

4 Once your selection is highlighted you may select Edit gt Copy or Ctrl C from the keyboard 5 On your monitor switch to the application into which you want to paste your selection 6 Select Edit gt Paste in the new application or simply press Ctrl + V to paste

The colored keys for conditions cannot be pasted

Using the Export Feature You may export condition quantities to specified cell location within an Excel worksheet file Cell target locations are assigned in the Results tab of the condition dialogs on the Export line relating to each quantity measurement type

On-Screen Takeoff will export takeoff quantity results for up to three different quantity types that you specify For instance you may want to know the number of square feet in a ceiling area as well as the number of linear feet in its perimeter

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

51

1 Bring up the Condition dialog by double-clicking on a condition in the takeoff dock bar or by

selecting the condition and clicking

2 Click on the Results tab to access its fields The default quantities for the condition type will display

3 For each results field click on the arrow to access the pull-down menu and select the appropriate quantity (for example SF LF EA etchellip)

4 Have your Excel spreadsheet opened and saved in a file

5 Specify the Excel spreadsheet cell locations where you want the results to go

6 For a cell in the first sheet of your spreadsheet type in the cell address (eg a1) Case is not important

7 For a cell on a successive sheet of your spreadsheet type in sheet the number followed by a comma and the cell address without any spaces (eg sheet2a1) Case is not important

8 Click

9 Select File gt Export gt Condition Qty to Excel

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

52

10 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

11 Click to export On-Screen Takeoff results to specified cell locations in the Excel file When you return to the Excel application you will see the values have been added to the specified cell locations in your spreadsheet

12 Save your Excel file

Exporting Worksheet to Excel

1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 From On-Screen Takeoff Select File gt Export gt Worksheet to Excel

4 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

5 Click When you return to the Excel application you will see the values from the Worksheet Tab have been added to your spreadsheet

6 Save your Excel file

Exporting Takeoff to CVS 1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 Click the Takeoff Tab in the project you want to export the information

4 Select File gt Export gt Takeoff to CSV

5 Browse to the location of the CSV spreadsheet file click file to select it

6 Click the Save

NOTE CSV files can be opened in Excel Lotus Access etc One may consider this option more of a ldquodumprdquo into a file

The Excel application must be active (it may be minimized on the application bar) with the target spreadsheet open in the application Otherwise an error will occur with the export operation that will affect both the On-Screen Takeofftrade file and the Excel spreadsheet

Section 8

53

Advanced Features

This section will

Some special features of working with condition objects in the takeoff area

Details of advanced options for conditions

Advanced features of the Project Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

54

Features to Use with Objects Roping Feature You can move copy or delete using this feature Using the Select tool (the pointer) you may select several objects at once by clicking and dragging an outline around the objects then releasing the mouse button Roping may select either objects completely within the outlined area (inclusive) or objects both within and touched by the outlined area (touching) Specify your roping preference under Tools gt Options

1 Click and hold the mouse button at a point on the screen near the objects to be selected and drag to surround the objects with an outline

2 Release the mouse button The objects will be selected

3 You may now

Move the group around on the page by clicking within the group dragging the mouse and releasing the button to place the objects

Delete the group of objects by clicking the Delete key or

Copy and paste by pressing Ctrl C to copy the group then Ctrl V to paste it The pasted copy of the grouped objects will appear slightly offset from the original objects

Section 8 Advanced Features

55

Applying a DropRun Count

Use the droprun feature when calculating quantities to take into account the drop or run of a linear condition such as electrical lines or plumbing pipes Drop or run lengths may be added separately to any linear condition on screen while a default droprun length may be indicated for a condition as a whole

1 Select the desired linear condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff Dock bar

2 Click the Change button in the toolbar to open the Change Condition dialog

3 Click the Advanced tab to access the advanced options and click inside the DropRun check box

4 Enter a default length to be applied to all of this condition Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches) You can leave the length blank and manually enter drop run on each segment drawn

5 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog

Edit DropRun Count

1 With the related linear condition in the Takeoff Dock bar highlighted or with the pointer tool selected

2 click on the desired linear object in the image takeoff area The Count button will become active

3 Click on the Count button (alternatively select Tools gt Count) The default droprun amount will show in the pop-up Count dialog (Default length will be zero if droprun has not been selected in this conditionrsquos properties)

4 Type in the desired length Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches)

5 Click the OK button The additional amount will be reflected in the corresponding quantity The new DropRun count will apply only to the object edited

Adding Text in Image View

On-Screen Takeoff allows you to place text comments around your quantity takeoffs that may be printed along with plan images and objects Text is automatically placed within the Annotation Layer (that includes text and hot links)

1 To place text on the image select the Text Tool and click at the point you want to place your text opening a text box

2 Type in your information clicking Enter for line breaks

3 When you are finished click the OK button to exit the text box

4 To reposition text simply click on the text (with the Text Tool active) to select it

5 Move the cursor over the text the cursor will now display as a four-way arrow

6 Click and drag the mouse to position the text as desired

Section 8 Advanced Features

56

1 To edit existing text use the Text Tool to double-click on the text to open the editing box

2 Enter additional text or use the Backspace key to delete text as necessary

Formatting Text Once created you may format the font size type style and color of your text

1 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Font or click on the Font button in the Takeoff Toolbar

2 Select the desired features (color options are disabled) and click the OK button

3 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Color or click on the Color button in the Takeoff Toolbar The Color dialog will open

4 Click on a color in the Basic Color palette or create a color and add to the Custom Colors palette (Be sure to click on the color in the Custom Colors palette to select it)

5 Click the OK button

Object Properties

Linear Objects

Linear objects may be set to connect at corners

A linear object may be set to trim automatically when crossing another linear object (Check the trim option under the advanced tab of the Condition dialog)

When you move a connected linear object objects automatically move and resize connected lines accordingly (quantities are then recalculated)

This feature requires that the connected linear object be moved using the center handles (does not apply when resizing the line from the ends)

Objects constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

Objects are measured from centerline to centerline

Section 8 Advanced Features

57

Area Objects When drawing an area use your escape key to undo the last line drawn You may reverse your

drawing of an area using the escape key

The area will not fill with color and pattern until the user double-clicks after the last line is set

Lines drawn to delineate an area object constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

After selecting an area to move or adjust position the mouse in the center to move the entire area position the mouse at the sides or corners to adjust the perimeter

Count Objects

All count objects are quantified by the physical number of objects per page and reported as EA for the UOM The quantity for the current Image View is (displayed in the Condition List) and the total quantity in your project is displayed in the Takeoff View and Worksheet View)

Square circle rectangle and triangle shaped count objects do not displace or subtract from other object quantities when placed on top of them However on the Advanced Tab for the count condition a connect property can be set (this is a check box) so that when a count object of this shape is put on top of a Linear type takeoff object it will move with the linear if said linear is moved

An opened-shaped count object must be placed within a linear object Opening shaped count objects may also be measured by linear foot or linear yard (EA SF and SY are also options) Opening shaped count items default to a width of 3rsquo 0rdquo at the time of creation This size can be changed The small medium and large size are not options on this type of condition anymore Check Backout on the Advanced tab for each Count object back out the footage (or yardage) of opening-shaped count objects in which they are placed

NOTE In order to see this Backout functionality (in quantity) for SY or SF deductions at least one of the

results for the Linear(s) this object will be placed on must be set to SY or SF and the count object must have a height quantity

Advanced Features of Conditions The Round Feature Under the Advanced tab of the linear and area Condition dialogues you may specify quantity rounding (in inches) For linear objects rounding applies to each linear object drawn For area objects rounding will apply to each segment of the area perimeter adjusting the perimeter and area calculations For example With a linear condition entering 12 in the Round field will round up each related linear object to the nearest 12 inches or one foot With this setting two walls of 1 4 would each round to 2 0 totaling 4 0

NOTE In the Takeoff Dock bar condition list and in the On-Screen Takeoff reports quantities will be displayed in whole numbers rounded up to the nearest foot However calculations are based on true quantities without rounding unless the Round Feature is engaged

Pitch Pitch may apply either to linear or area conditions It is measured in rise per linear foot Entering 12 indicates a 12 rise per 12 of linear distance (a pitch of 12 over 12) or an angle of 45deg

Section 8 Advanced Features

58

Advanced Features of Project Properties Selecting Multiple Pages

1 Select a single page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry

2 Drag the cursor down the column of numbers to select consecutive pages

3 Click on the blank button at the top of this column to select all pages in the Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

59

Changing Image Assigned to a Drawing 1 Select the page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry 2 Click the Change Image button The Change Image dialog box will appear

3 Navigate to the desired file and select by clicking on it

4 Click the Open button The electronic file assigned to the page will have been changed to reflect the new file choice

Changing Image File Path 1 Select pages as described above

2 Choose Change Folder

3 In the Change Folder dialog navigate to the appropriate folder

4 Click the OK button The file path will have been changed for the selected page entries

Delete a Page from Project Properties 1 Select the page you want to delete by clicking on its associated number (in the gray box at the

left of the entry)

2 Choose Delete Page

All Takeoff on the page will be deleted immediately and permanently

Section 8 Advanced Features

60

Advanced Features of Tool Options

Calculation Method On-Screen Takeoff has built-in calculation options to allow for faster work and faster saves until your takeoff is complete Calculation options are found by selecting Tools gt Options then clicking on the Calculation tab

Calculation method can be set to Automatic Automatic except Grids and Manual Manual will allow the program to operate more quickly while Automatic or Automatic except Grids allows the user to see quantity changes as takeoffs are made

In any mode you may press F9 to recalculate quantities for the On-Screen Takeoff current totals

Configuration Tab

When the ldquoPage Label (A01)rdquo radial button is chosen On-Screen Takeoff puts the numbered label on all the pages of in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar If the Page Descriptionrdquo radial button is chosen then a description of what takeoff is on that specific page will be shown in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar

This section of the configuration tab gives you options on how you want to export your information When the ldquoFolderSubfolder Namesrdquo radial button is chosen than on your file that you are exporting to will have all the conditions folders and subfolders In the Delimiter box you can choose the symbol that is needed to separate the information you are exporting Some files need semicolons () or colons () to make sure the information comes exported in is separated it the appropriate places

Section 8 Advanced Features

61

In previous versions of On-Screen Takeoff there are views that users need to have in order for them to display their information By either choosing ldquoOST 1xrdquo or ldquoOST 2xrdquo it will let the program know you want your columns of information exported in that specific format

When you have the Confirm Deletions radial button of ldquoYesrdquo chosen than every time you delete anything you will get a dialog box confirming your intentions of deletion

While working with your takeoff you have a choice to either view the legend of your conditions or hide it Choose whichever radial button that suits your needs

For those who prefer to use the Enter key to navigate in dialog boxes this option is just for that

Font Tab The Font tab is designed for you to make your own look and feel for the application At the bottom of this tab it will show you sample of the fonts and colors you have chosen

Renaming the Current Page You may change the name of the current page in the takeoff area of On-Screen Takeoff by selecting Edit gt Rename Page

This opens the Name Page dialog and you may simply type in a new name and click the Enter button The new name for the file will be reflected on the title bar for the page and in Project Properties

You also may access the Rename Page function by right-clicking in the takeoff area while in Image View and selecting the option from the pop-up menu that appears

Section 9

62

Saving and Exiting

This section will

Explain how to save projects

Show you how to safely exit the program

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

63

Saving Your Project

1 Select File gt Save 2 If your project has not previously been saved a Save dialog box will open to allow you to name

the file and choose the directory and folder in which to save your file 3 Once saved File gt Save will simply save the current version of the file

OR

4 Select File gt Save As then type in a new name for the file and save to the desired file path

The Auto-save Feature With the Auto-save feature On-Screen Takeoff automatically backs up your open project You may choose to have more than one level of backup files The first backup copy will have the extension b00 and successive files will be b01 b02 and so on If you have designated four levels of backup files after the fourth backup copy has been created (b03) the next file will be saved over the file with extension b00 Further backup saves will then rotate through the four backup files in the same way

1 Select Tools gt Options 2 In the Auto-save area (under the General tab) select the frequency of backup file creation (in

minutes) and the number of levels for the feature 3 You also may disengage the feature by clicking in the check box to clear it

The Auto-save feature automatically saves backup copies to the directory of the current project If you are working from a write-protected area such as a CD-ROM On-Screen Takeoff will place backup files in the On-Screen Takeoff folder

Exiting When you are finished using On-Screen Takeoff it is very easy to exit Exiting is very important because of security reasons If someone were to use your computer they could enter the application and view and manipulate information

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

64

On-Screen Takeoff closes the open project when you open another or create a new project or when you exit the program

1 Select File gt Exit

OR

2 You also may click at the upper right-hand corner of the application to exit

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

65

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer When you get your digitizer from GTCO you will need to connect it to your computer Follow the instructions outlined below to do this

Note For rollup digitizers the metal bar must be oriented to the top or right hand side

Connecting the Digitizer 1 Lay the digitizer out flat 2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer 3 Plug in the power adapter 4 Plug the interface (IO) cable into the digitizer 5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into an open serial port on computer

Note GTCO Technical support phone number is 410-381-6688 The electronic manual (on diskette) from GTCO contains more detailed installation and operation instructions for the GTCO digitizer model you have

Installing other Digitizer Drivers If you are using a GTCO Digitizer you will need to install the GTCO TabletWorks Drivers

If you are using a Digitizer not supported by GTCO Tablet Works 10 please contact the manufacturer of your digitizer for assistance with installation

Installing GTCO TabletWorks Drivers 1 Insert the On Center CD into the CD-ROM drive The CD Startup screen will open 2 Click on Install Software 3 Select Additional Software and Drivers 4 Select Digitizer Driver 5 Follow the instructions for installing TabletWorks 10

Adhering the Template The template is a small plastic sticker used to enable mouse function when using the digitizer with On-Screen Takeoff Place your template on your digitizer We suggest placing it in the bottom right corner of the digitizer about one inch inside the takeoff area

Note You may either peel off the back of the template and use the adhesive surface or you can tape the template down

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

66

Testing the Digitizer Drivers Before running OST you may test the digitizer by moving the stylus around on the digitizer pad it should move the mouse cursor (if mouse emulation is enabled)

If the digitizer does not move the mouse cursor on the screen

The superset codes may need to be reset Reset the superset codes by touching on the border of the digitizer with the stylus The digitizer should beep several times

The digitizer may not be communicating with the computer Be sure the COM port selected is correct Be sure the COM port selected is correct If you are not able to get the digitizer to move the mouse cursor you need to call GTCO technical support for help

Note The Mouse Emulation is not required for On-Screen Takeoff to work properly It is used only for the Template functionality if the digitizer is moving the cursor the wrong direction (up instead of sideways or vice-versa)

Click the L-shaped arrow symbol on the digitizer with the stylus

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

67

Appendix II Toolbar Items Main Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

68

Tool Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

69

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

70

Navigate Toolbar (Continued)

Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

71

Takeoff Toolbar (Continued)

Image Toolbar

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

72

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

This section will detail how to load plans from a F W Dodge CD-ROM into an On-Screen Takeoff project file ready for takeoffs

Dodge files may be added to the Project Properties dialog However loading the files in that way will load the files by number rather than name description If you want to load one page only from your Dodge CD You will have to rename the page to display the name rather than number of the file

To load plan files from a Dodge CD so that the files load sequentially by file number but are displayed by name rather than by number within your project follow the instructions below

Opening a Dodge project from a CD-ROM 1 Insert the CD into the drive 2 Choose File gt Custom 3 Choose Dodge Plans Project (plansdat) as the file type 4 Select the appropriate file type by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the Files of type

field 5 In the Look in field access your drive paths by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the

field then

Navigate to your CD-ROM drive Open the data folder and Open the Projects folder

6 Select the desired project and open its folder 7 Open the plansdat file 8 All the images will come in sequenced correctly for that job along with the full descriptions

(names) of each page If there is not a plans folder in the project folder then plans do not exist for that project on the CD Opening the plansdat file will yield an empty project

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

73

Appendix IV Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer The On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer is a limited version of On Center Softwarersquos commercial takeoff software If your status bar located at the very bottom of the main window says View Mode in the lower left-hand corner then you are using the Plan Viewer You can use the plan viewer to

View CD-based amp converted CAD drawings

View a previously created OST file and associated drawings

Download electronic plans online

Navigate through drawings

Quickly Takeoff linearsareas and counts

Zoom in to view the plan better

Print drawings directly from the viewer

Viewing an On-Screen Takeoff Project File

1 To open an OST file that was previously created with of On-Screen Takeoff 2 Select File gt Open 3 An Open dialog will appear if you do not see the OST file you are looking for select the

Look In drop down arrow 4 A drop down menu will appear listing the various folders drives and mapped drives located

on your computer select the correct drive or folder location and continue to browse to the location of your OST file

5 When you see your OST file double-click it to open it 6 Any takeoff and drawings should appear on the Image tab view

If you do not see the drawings but do see the colored takeoff layer the drawings may

not be located in the same place they were originally saved at Go to File gt Project Properties and check the Image File path for each listed page If the image file path is pointing to a CD drive make sure the CD is inside the CR-ROM

Downloading Electronic Plans If your Online Plan Service provides a special file format (OSX) required to use this feature of our plan viewer you can immediately downloaded all electronic plans of a project directly from our viewer

Most Plan Room web sites will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff when a request to download plans is made Your particular Plan Room may differ in operation so please contact the provider directly with questions on using the site

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

74

When you request to download or open a project file from a Plan Room you will usually have the open to open or save an OSX file Choosing open will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff Alternately you may choose to save the file to a local hard drive After you have saved the file either double-click it to launch On-Screen Takeoff or open the OSX file using On-Screen Takeoff by clicking File then Open and locating the file on your hard drive You will need to change the file type to OSX

After the OSX file is opened you will see an additional tab appear in the Conditions List window called Pages

The Pages tab shows the hierarchy of your project Gray file icons represent pages that have not been downloaded and blue icons represents pages that have been downloaded

To download a page simply double-click the page icon

If you wish to select a group of pages to download you can use the Ctrl or Shift key to multiple select them then click the Download button

If you wish to download all pages at once click the Download All button

Downloaded pages will now appear in the Project Properties dialog in the same order in which they appear in the Pages tab

Creating Quick Takeoffs With On-Screen Takeoff you can create quick takeoffs to measure quantities even if you dont have the full version of our program However using the Quick Takeoff functionality shows you just a fraction of what the full version can do

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar is located at the top of the image view It has three buttons designated for three types of takeoffs Linear Area and Count The Quantity drop down list will show secondary quantities for Linears and Areas The Units drop down allows you to select how you want your quantities displayed Feet Inches Yards Millimeters and Meters

NOTE Every time change the type of takeoff you are performing (switching from Area to Linear for example) the previous quantities and takeoff objects will disappear They will also disappear when you changes pages

NOTE You can use the Dimension Tool to basically measure the distance between two points or linears The distance will display on the status bar at the bottom of the application

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

75

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions General

Where is On-Screen Takeoff installed on my computer

Typically it is installed in CProgram FilesOn-Screen Takeoff

In Explorer how do I recognize On-Screen Takeoff file types

On-Screen Takeoff data is stored in a single file per job lsquojob name OSTrsquo On-Screen Takeoff templates are stored as lsquotemplate nameTPOrsquo

Can only one project at a time be open

Yes For that reason opening another project automatically closes the project on screen You will be asked to save any changes

Is only one scale allowed per page What about on drawings that have multiple detail sections on a page and each of those drawings have different scales

Yes For pages with drawings of different scales copy the drawing to another project page and set the appropriate scale

I cannot perform backout on an area that is along a linear

As a workaround use the On-Screen Takeoff layers feature to help you with this issue Electronic Images

How do I start a project from drawings that have been scanned and written to a CD-ROM

Open a new project Select File gt Project Properties and select Auto Add Navigate to your CD and the appropriate folder and select any image file in that location Click Open All files in the location will load into your project Recommended that images are copied from CD to hard drive for performance

If I get a disk of drawings in AutoCAD format (R13 or R14) can I read them in On-Screen Takeoff

Yes On-Screen Takeoff now reads DWG DXF and many other format that are saved with AutoCAD

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

76

When I click on the all pages button what is supposed to happen Currently nothing seems to change when I click on that button

The All Pages button is used to apply the Darken and Enhance Plans feature to all pages in the project (as opposed to only the current page on screen)

Is there a way to deduct a large skylight from an area condition

Yes with the related area condition selected in the Takeoff Dock bar unselect the Backout button on the Takeoff Toolbar then draw the Backout area The area quantity will be deducted from the related condition object and the linear measurement of the Backout perimeter will be added

Digitizer Issues

How do I connect a Digitizer to the computer

See Appendix I Connecting a Digitizer

The Place Template menu choice is disabled

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or the digitizer or the digitzer drivers are not installed

It wonrsquot let me select the Set Takeoff Area menu choice

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or no job is open a digitizer is not installed or the drivers are not installed

The digitizer stylus is not moving the cursor or crosshairs

Click S-0-1 superset on the digitizer

How do I convert my old GTCO Digitizer to work with On- Screen Takeofftrade

Call GTCO and they may be able to reconfigure your digitizer to be compatible with On-Screen Takeoff

Printing Issues Which Printers work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible printers include On-Screen Takeoff Hewlett Packard Epson and Canon printers If you are having printer difficulties please contact support and specify the type of printer along with other pertinent information Contact support at wwwoncentercomsupport or email supportoncentercom

Which Plotters work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible Plotters include Hewlett Packard DesignJet plotters and the EnCAD Cadjet II If you are having plotter difficulties please contact support and specify the type of plotter concerned

ViewingDisplay I can no longer see my condition list How do I get it back

The toolbars and Dock bars can be turned on and off through the View gt Toolbars menu options

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

77

This is also accessible by right-clicking in the toolbar area and selecting (or deselecting) a toolbar listed

I cannot view my folders in the condition list

Right-click in the Takeoff Dock barcondition list area and select Show Tree to display your folders

My Status Bar reads Viewer Mode and I am unable to draw conditions

On-Screen Takeoff needs to be Authorized Or you need to purchase an upgrade Click the Perform Advanced Takeoff button on the main toolbar

I hid a Dock bar and when I selected to view it again it appeared alongside the other Dock

bar instead of stacked on top of it How do I fix it

Pick up the Dock bar by clicking on the bar at the top and continuing to hold down the mouse button drag the Dock bar over the other one It will resize and appear stacked with the other

When I open image files from a CD the images are all upside down How do I get them right

side up

To flip pages from top to bottom follow the steps below 1 Click the All Pages button on the Image Toolbar (All Pages is engaged when the button

is not clicked) 2 Click the Flip Horizontal button on the Image Toolbar 3 Click the All Pages button again to disengage

Templates How do I create a Template

Follow the steps below 1 Create a typical project 2 Choose File gt Save As 3 Choose On-Screen Takeoff Template Files as the file type to save 4 Name the file This will save all of the condition setups as well as the layers for the

project

How do I create a new project from a template

Follow the steps below 1 Choose File gt New 2 Select a template from those listed in the New dialog This will open a new project with

conditions and layers saved from a previous project but no pages or takeoff

78

INDEX

Area Conditions 32

Area Objects 57

Auto Scrolling 20

Auto-save 63

Backout Mode 41

Calculation Method 60

Conditions 29

Configuration 60

Contents Tab 6

Continuous Mode 38

Count Conditions 33

Count Objects 57

Digitizer 10 65 76

Docking Toolbars 13

Dodge CD 72

Drawing 27 37

DropRun Count 55

Environment 18

Exiting 63

Exporting 49

Features 16

Font 61

Frequently Asked Questions 75

Grid 40

Help File 5

Hiding Toolbars 13

Hot Links 21

Image 19 59

Image files 9

Image Toolbar 12 71

Images 75

Index Tab 6

Layers 43

Linear Conditions 31

Linear Objects 56

Main Toolbar 12 67

Menus 14

Moving Toolbars 13

Navigate Toolbar 12 69

Navigating 20

On-Screen Takeofftrade 2

Page 59 61

Pages 20 25 28

Plan Viewer 73

Plans 26

Printing 47 76

Project Properties 25

Projects 22

Quick Start Video 18

Resizing Toolbars 13

Roping 54

Saving 63

Scale 28

Search Tab 7

Selecting Objects 42

Setup 8

Start On-Screen Takeofftrade 17

System Requirements 9

Takeoff 19 27

Takeoff Toolbar 70 71

Takeoff Toolbar 12

Template Files 23

TIF (Group4) 9

Tool Toolbar 12 68

Toolbar 67

Toolbars 12

View Toolbar 12 69

Viewing Toolbars 12

Worksheet 20

Zone Conditions 33

Zoom Toolbar 12 69

  • On-Screen Takeoff Lite
  • Table of Contents
  • Section 1 - Introduction
  • Section 2 - Setup
  • Section 3 - Toolbars and Menus
  • Section 4 - Features
  • Section 5 - Projects
  • Section 6 - Conditions and Takeoff
  • Section 7 - Printing and Exporting
  • Section 8 - Advanced Features
  • Section 9 - Saving and Exiting
  • Appendix I - Installing Your Digitizer
  • Appendix II - Toolbar Items
  • Appendix III - Loading Plans from a Dodge CD
  • Appendix IV - Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer
  • Appendix V - Frequently Asked Questions
  • Index

Section 5 Projects

25

Project Properties

You can either set your Project Properties when you create a new takeoff or once your project file is saved under the appropriate name

1 Select File gt Project Properties the Project Properties dialog box will appear

2 Type in the name of your project to appear on printouts Use the backspace andor delete keys to edit the name as necessary

3 Press the Tab key to move to the Default Image Size option or click within the Image Size box You may click on the arrow at the right for the pull-down menu of page size options or you can use the down-arrow key on your keyboard to scroll through the list to the appropriate selection

4 Press the Tab key to move to the Default Scale option Select a scale by using the drop down arrow If your scale is metric you will need to click in the box next to Metric to convert to that measurement

5 Establish the number of pages for your project plans And load image files See Adding Pages to

Your Project

Adding Pages to Projects Individual Electronic Plans

1 Click on in the Project Properties dialog

2 In the Add Images dialog use the drop down arrow to navigate to the appropriate directory and folder containing your image

3 Select the file so that it displays in the File name field then click The file will display by name and path in the Image File field in Project Properties dialog

4 Click to accept and your project will automatically open

5 Save your project with the new settings by selecting File gt Save

Section 5 Projects

26

Electronic plans scanned from blueprints (as opposed to blue lines) will display as white lines on a black background and are difficult to read on your computer screen Select Image gt Invert and the colors will invert to black on white

You may have noticed the Page column in the Project Properties dialog Generally plan images occupy one page and 1 will be listed in the column indicating Page 1 of your plan file If you import a multi-page TIF a plan file containing more than one page of plans they will import as separate pages and each successive page will be indicated under the Page column as 1 2 3 etc of the plan file

Group of Electronic Plans You may add all the electronic plan files from a particular source (for example from a CD) by using the Auto Add feature

1 Click the button in the Project Properties dialog

2 Browse until you find the appropriate directory and folder containing your plan images

3 Click on any file displayed within your target folder so that the file name appears in the File name box of the Auto Add dialog

4 Click The image paths and file names will be recorded into the project properties arranged alphabetically

5 Click to accept your choices and your project will automatically open

6 Save your project with the new settings by selecting File gt Save

To load Dodge Plans into your Project Properties see Appendix IIi Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

Paper Plans On-Screen Takeoff makes it easy for Full Mode users to perform quantity takeoffs from paper plans using a digitizer

1 Add pages by clicking until you have the number of pages initially in the project

2 Name each page by clicking within the Title area and typing the name

3 Click to accept your choices and close the Project Properties dialog

4 Save your project with the new project properties settings by selecting File gt Save

Section 5 Projects

27

Setting Up a Drawing Template On-Screen Takeoff provides the convenience of using the same work surface for both digitizer and mouse to allow the user to draw conditions and then edit settings of the project or add or change conditions without breaking stride A mouse pad template included with the program defines the area of the digitizer in which use of the stylus or cursor will be recognized as mouse movement as opposed to drawing movement

1 Place your stylus on On-Screen Takeoff

2 Placing the template identifies the location mouse movements will be recognized by the program

Before placing the template the template must be applied to the digitizer surface This may have been done during the installation of your digitizer We suggest attaching the template to the lower right corner of the digitizer surface about one inch inside the grid area

3 Select Digitizer gt Place Template

4 Follow the instruction prompts on the screen clicking first on the target symbol at the left of the On-Screen Takeoff box on the template then on the target at the right

Setting Takeoff Area Before you can begin taking off a drawing you must define the drawing area on the digitizer This requires defining an area that will include all objects on each drawing of your plans As you add pages to your takeoff the same area of the digitizer will be active

1 Secure the plans to the digitizer with tape or a set of clamps

2 With a pen or a pencil mark the upper left corner and the lower right corner of the first page in your set of plans

3 Select Digitizer gt Set Takeoff Area

4 Click each mark with the stylus pen as prompted

5 Verify the active area of the digitizer by looking at the image size located in the lower right corner of your screen

If you close the program before the takeoff is complete you will need to reestablish the takeoff area before you can add additional condition quantities

Electronic plans appear on your computer screen eliminating the need to set a takeoff area You simply drag your mouse across the conditions you wish to takeoff The conditions will be highlighted and quantities will be totaled instantly Electronic plans are available through a variety of services For information contact an On Center Software account manager

Section 5 Projects

28

Setting Scale for Specific Pages You may set the scale in each page view separately This will override the default scale setting in Project Properties for that page Setting the correct scale for the drawing before taking off quantities ensures accurate calculations Be careful to check the scale for each drawing in your project before doing takeoffs

1 Display the page you want to set select Edit gt Set Scale

2 Use the drop down arrow to select a scale that will be applied to that page

3 Click

OR

4 Access the pull-down scale settings on the Navigate toolbar

NOTE As you draw objects notice that the drawn object is similar in width to the object on your plans If it is not the scale set may not be correct

Calculating Scale You may calculate scale according to a known measurement between two points either with a digitizer or on electronic plans

1 Select Edit gt Calculate Scale using Image or Edit gt Calculate Scale using Digitizer

2 Follow the instructions in the related Calculate Scale dialog box You will be asked to click on the first and second points then to enter the dimension for that distance

3 The scale will be recalculated for the displayed page and the Scale display on the Navigate toolbar will show the new scale

Section 6

29

Conditions and Takeoff

This section will Draw Conditions to Takeoff Plan Quantities

What Zones will do to help your takeoff process

Discuss the ins and outs of Takeoffs

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

30

Creating Conditions

If you are starting a new project from scratch you will need to create conditions to takeoff quantities such as floor areas wall lengths and corner bead counts If you are using a template you will have several pre-designed conditions already listed on the Takeoff dock bar However you may want to change the characteristics of some conditions or create additional conditions for a particular project

1 Right Click within the Takeoff dock bar Select New gt Condition

Or

2 From the Takeoff dock bar Click (if the buttons are not showing right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select Show Buttons from the pop-up menu) The New Condition dialog appears

3 Select the condition type (Linear Area Count or Zone) from the pull-down menu accessed by the

down arrow next to the Type option

4 Press Tab or use the mouse (or stylus) to move to Name and enter a name for your condition

5 Specify the desired condition attributes See Condition Attributes for more detail

6 Click for condition to apply

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

31

Condition Attributes Each condition type will have related attributes to select or specify within the General and Advanced tabs of the New Condition dialog Once a condition has been used to takeoff a quantity from your plans certain attributes cannot be changed

All conditions allow the user to specify color and fill pattern for the object drawn

Linear Conditions

General Specify width and height by feet and inches Specify pitch in inches up to the nearest thousandth of an inch if applicable

Advanced Specify rounding for object quantities and droprun default length for electrical or plumbing drops at the ends of lines Select Connect to have lines connect at the corners where one line of the condition ends and another begins (and indicate Tolerance for the featurersquos activation as distance between the ends of two lines) Choose Trim to have lines automatically trim to a line being crossed Choose Curve to draw a curved line

Follow these examples for inputting feet and inches For 7 feet 6 inches type 706 for 13 feet 7 inches type 1307 For 20 feet type 2000

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

32

Area Conditions

General If needed you can specify the thickness (in inches) andor pitch (in inches)

Advanced Specify rounding for object quantities Choose to display an adjustable grid within the area and indicate matrix cell dimensions

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

33

Count Conditions

General

Specify height and indicate the size (in inches) and shape (square circle triangle rectangle or opening) of the count object as it will appear on screen

Advanced Count conditions have advanced attributes These options are available for all shapes except for openings

Zone Conditions Zones allow you to subdivide condition quantities making it easier to modify and complete jobs in phases They can be used at the end of a takeoff to isolate a group of condition quantities that are in different areas of the takeoff

Zones can also be used to break a takeoff into multi-phases and can even be used to isolate quantities while a job is in progress to group the amount of work that has been completed to date They can be applied to one or multiple pages in your plans automatically calculating the takeoff quantities for each zoned area

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

34

The zone feature is only available in Lite and Full Mode If you are in View Mode and would like

to use this feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade

Condition Notes A Note tab is provided for comments regarding the condition These notes will display on the Takeoff List report and will import into Quick Bid

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

35

Condition Results The Results tab of the New Condition is based on condition type Initial settings default to linear feet (LF) for linear conditions square feet (SF) for area conditions and count of items (EA) for count conditions and zones The first of the results fields will display for the condition items in the Takeoff dock bar area All results will display in worksheets and Takeoff List reports as well as in an Excel spreadsheet after being exported

Copying Conditions You may use the condition attributes from a condition yoursquove already created for any future conditions of the same type

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Click the Copy button from the toolbar

OR

3 Right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select copy

4 A new condition will appear in the list with the same condition attributes as the previous condition but with the quantities zeroed

Editing Conditions Once you have copied a condition you might want to change several attributes You can also edit an existing condition to fit any updated needs

1 Highlight the desired condition on the Takeoff dock bar

2 Click the Change button

OR

3 Double-click on the condition you wish to edit to bring up the Change Condition dialog

NOTE The Change Condition dialog differs from the New Condition dialog only in that if takeoffs

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

36

have been performed in your project with this condition you will not be able to change the type of condition or certain properties under the advanced tab of the dialog box

Deleting Conditions 1 Click on the condition in the Takeoff Dock bar area

2 Click the Delete button on the toolbar

OR

3 Right-click and select Delete from the pop-up menu

All takeoff associated with the deleted condition will be deleted immediately and permanently

Organizing Project Conditions Within your project you can create folders andor sub-folders for different types of conditions You may even want to create a folder containing conditions with reset values

To get started organizing your conditions make sure you are viewing the condition tree (right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select Show Tree)

Creating Folders and Sub-Folders 1 Right-click in the Takeoff Dock bar area

2 Select New gt Folder from the pop-up menu

Copying Folders

1 Click on the folder and click Copy on the toolbar

2 All copied conditions within the new folder will have values reset to zero

Renaming Folders

1 Click on the folder

2 Right-click and select Rename from the pop-up menu

3 Enter a name for your folder and click the Enter button

Changing Condition Order

You may move conditions up or down in the condition list of the Takeoff dock bar to suit your project needs

1 Select the condition you would like to move by clicking to highlight it

NOTE When you are ready to move the highlighted conditions be sure that you start

moving using the last condition chosen That condition will have a highlighted boarder

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

37

2 Drag and drop any the condition from one place to another in the list You may also move a condition to another folder on the list in this way

Drawing with Conditions Snap Angles Set up snap angles to prevent lines from appearing jagged Snap angles are commonly set at 15deg and shift snap angles at 0deg

1 Go to Tools gt Options Options dialog appears

2 Under the General tab make the desired settings

3 Click to save the settings As they are drawn lines will snap to the set degree

Drawing a Linear Object 1 Select a condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff dock bar

2 Move the cursor into the Image takeoff area of the screen you will see the cursor display as crosshairs

3 Click and hold left mouse button then drag mouse to draw a line

4 Release mouse button to set line

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

38

5 Repeat steps for further lines

Continuous Mode This feature allows you to draw an object that has connected lines

1 Click the icon from the Takeoff toolbar

OR

2 Go to Tools gt Continuous Mode

3 Follow steps 1-3 from Draw a Linear Object

4 Click at each point of intersection The object will be connected

5 Double-click after making the final point to set the lines

Drawing a Curve To draw a curved line the Curve option must be checked under the Advanced tab of the Condition dialog

1 Click where you want to begin the curve and drag in a straight line to the position for the other endpoint of the curve

2 Click on the line to select it Handles in the shapes of small squares will appear at either end of

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

39

the line and in the center of the line

3 Move the cursor over the center handles until the cursor becomes a two-way arrow

4 Click and drag in the direction of the curve bending the line as you move the cursor Release to set the curve (The line you began with will disappear)

Draw a circle by drawing two curved lines connected

Drawing an Area Object Area conditions are drawn similarly to continuous mode lines You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete your area takeoff

NOTE When drawing an area do not intersect the perimeter or line of the object you are drawing

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

3 The area will be filled with the pattern set for that condition

NOTE The simulated circle will be good enough for you to be able to make a bid

To create a circular area click from point to point with very short distances in between points simulating a circlersquos perimeter Double-click after setting the last point to set the area

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

40

Grid Options Grids give you an added advantage when installing materials such as tiles Use this feature to get a count for how many tiles are needed for an area

1 Double-click on an area condition in the Takeoff dock bar to open its Condition dialog

2 Click on the Advanced tab to show its options

3 Check the box next to Grid by clicking in it

4 Indicate the dimensions of the cell matrix in inches (For example 200 x 400)

5 Under Results tab choose each (EA) for one of the results fields This will tabulate a number of grid cells (including partial grid cells) in area

6 Click to save your settings

7 Use the Move Grid and Rotate Grid features in the Tools menu to manipulate the grid as desired

Grid Calculation

1 Go to Tools gt Options menu

1 Specify if On-Screen Takeoff automatically should Calculate Grid Position

2 If AreaGrid Size is selected On-Screen Takeoff will calculate the number of items needed to fill the grid based on grid demintions

3 Click to accept and close the dialog

To move a line at any angle (regardless of default setting) press the Shift key while moving the mouse

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

41

Backout Mode This feature allows you to take out part of an area and deduct that amount of square footage

1 Select Tools gt Backout Mode

2 Outline the are you want backed out as you would when drawing a regular area object (see Drawing an Area Object)

3 The outlined area will clear and quantities will be recalculated

NOTE The perimeter of the backout area will be added to the LF quantity for that condition

Drawing a Count Object Square triangle rectangle and circle shaped count objects can easily be placed on images

1 Select the condition

2 Click in the location where you want the object to appear

3 To place an opening-shaped count item like a door or window you must click over an existing linear object such as a wall

4 On the Results tab you can change the height properties to give you the result you need

5 If Backout is checked on the advanced tab for each count opening the opening-shaped count item will back out a corresponding section of the linear object

Opening shaped count items are sized at 3rsquo0rdquo by default

Drawing a Zone Zones are drawn in the same way as area objects and may be any polygonal shape You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete the zone perimeter

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

42

Selecting Objects

1 Use the Select Tool to select objects

You can also select all objects that correspond to a condition

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Right-click and choose Select All

3 All objects with this condition will be highlighted with squares as an outline

Moving and Resizing Objects Linear

1 To move or resize a linear object click anywhere on the line to select it

2 To move the line position your pointer over the center handles When the mouse is positioned over the handles you will see a two-way arrow You will only be able to move the line in the direction of the arrows

3 Drag the line to a new position

4 Clicking and dragging the handles on the ends of the line will allow you to lengthen or shorten your line

Area and Zone

1 To move an area object or zone in its entirety click and drag it to its new position

2 Grabbing a handle at a corner or intersection of the object will allow you to adjust and change its perimeter

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

43

Count 1 To move a square circle rectangle or triangle shaped count object click and drag

2 Click and drag an opening shaped count object along the length of the linear object to the desired position then release

NOTE An opening shaped count object may not be moved from its associated linear condition object however it may be moved up and down the length of the linear object

Layers On-Screen Takeoff allows you to sort and separate your takeoff objects within the same job and on the same page On-Screen Takeoff gives you this flexibility through the use of layers

By assigning different conditions to different layers (for example differentiating between floors ceilings and walls) you can choose to view all layers or turn off certain layers to display and print the remaining groups of conditions only You may also remove the background image of electronic plans add text and hot link symbols or print only your condition takeoffs

Layers are only available in Full Mode If you are in View or Lite Mode and would like to use this

feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade Default Layers

On-Screen Takeoff begins every project with three default layers Image Annotation and Default The Image layer holds the electronic plan files you may have in your project The Annotation layer possesses all text notations highlighting and hot links in the project The Default layer will appear in the Condition dialog when creating or editing a condition (listed in the takeoff dock bar) Conditions are assigned to the Default layer unless otherwise specified by the user

Creating Layers To assign a condition to a layer other than the default layer you must first create additional layers for your project

1 Select View gt Layers to open the Layers dialog

2 Click An unnamed layer will be added

3 Click within the empty box and type a name for your layer (for example Wall)

4 New layers are added as active layers The adjacent box under the Show column will be checked

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

44

Assigning a Layer to a Condition 1 Open the Condition dialog box by creating a new condition or editing an existing condition

2 Under the General tab click on the down arrow in the Layer field to display optional layers

3 Select the desired layer for the condition Only the Default layer and layers you have added will be displayed

4 Click

View and Hide Layers

1 Select View gt Layers

2 Under the Show column check the box to view or remove the check (by clicking on it) to hide the specific layer

3 Click to accept and close the Layers dialog

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

45

Assigning Text to a Layer When adding text to an image On-Screen Takeoff has the capability to assign the text to a specified layer

1 Select the Text Tool

2 Click at the point you want to place your text

3 Type in your text using the Enter key for line breaks

4 Click the drop down arrow next to the Layer field and select the desired layer

Section 7

46

Printing and Exporting

This section will

Printing options and procedures

Exporting data by copying and pasting

Exporting quantity results to Excel spreadsheets

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

47

Print Setup On-Screen Takeoff allows the user to print the image takeoff list and worksheet

1 Select File gt Print Setup The Print Setup dialog will open

2 Select a printer or leave the default selection listed (change from the default printer displayed by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the field)

3 Indicate page size and printer tray option (Source) Access page size options by clicking on the

down arrow at the right of the field

4 Choose Portrait or Landscape orientation

5 Click to accept and close the dialog

Printing Images The image area can include the electronic plans the takeoff objects added text and hot links To print a subset of these (for example just the takeoffs without the plans or the added text and hot link symbols) hide layers that you do not want to print (see Section 6 View and Hide Layers) When you are printing your images every page will show the scale of the takeoff you are printing

1 Click on the Image tab to display the area of your project

2 Select File gt Print (or Ctrl + P)

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

48

3 Select the desired view (What to print) and the Image Range

4 Click The second Print dialog will open

5 Change settings accordingly or click if you accept the default settings

Printing Takeoff Lists and Worksheets In Takeoff Lists and Worksheets you may hide columns to print only certain results or adjust column widths to fit the report within the page size selected

1 In Takeoff List or Worksheet view move your cursor to the right side of the columnrsquos title bar the cursor will display as a two-way arrow

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

49

2 Click and drag to adjust the width of the column Holding the mouse button you may

slide the title bar under the title bar to its left to hide the column completely

3 Select File gt Print or press Ctrl + P to access the Print dialog

4 Indicate desired printer and choose the number of copies

5 Click to print and close the dialog

When printing the condition list we suggest printing in landscape

To reset to the default column widths double-click on the right border of a column heading will reset the column to its right (or previously to its right before being hidden)

Print Preview 1 Select File gt Print Preview

2 Use and to vary your view 3 If viewing an image choose current full or scale view to see how it displays

4 For printed outputs that cover more than one page use and to view adjacent pages or click on the down arrow next to Page field and select the page you want displayed

Exporting Using the CopyPaste Feature You may copy all the data or sections from the worksheet and the takeoff list view in On-Screen Takeoff and paste it into another application When pasting into Excel the cell layout will be maintained

1 Highlight the areas you wish to paste Click and hold the left mouse button down as you drag the cursor over the area to be selected then releasing the mouse button

OR

2 Select the entire takeoff list quickly click on the left On-Screen Takeoff column header and hold and drag the cursor across the remaining column headings

The number of pages for the view selected will display in the lower left-hand corner The zoom percentage that applies to the view will be displayed in the lower right-hand corner next to page size of the drawing

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

50

3 In the worksheet view you may highlight rows by clicking on the numbered buttons to the left of each row clicking and dragging across column headings or clicking and dragging over individual cells in the worksheet

Click anywhere in the appropriate view to deselect the area

4 Once your selection is highlighted you may select Edit gt Copy or Ctrl C from the keyboard 5 On your monitor switch to the application into which you want to paste your selection 6 Select Edit gt Paste in the new application or simply press Ctrl + V to paste

The colored keys for conditions cannot be pasted

Using the Export Feature You may export condition quantities to specified cell location within an Excel worksheet file Cell target locations are assigned in the Results tab of the condition dialogs on the Export line relating to each quantity measurement type

On-Screen Takeoff will export takeoff quantity results for up to three different quantity types that you specify For instance you may want to know the number of square feet in a ceiling area as well as the number of linear feet in its perimeter

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

51

1 Bring up the Condition dialog by double-clicking on a condition in the takeoff dock bar or by

selecting the condition and clicking

2 Click on the Results tab to access its fields The default quantities for the condition type will display

3 For each results field click on the arrow to access the pull-down menu and select the appropriate quantity (for example SF LF EA etchellip)

4 Have your Excel spreadsheet opened and saved in a file

5 Specify the Excel spreadsheet cell locations where you want the results to go

6 For a cell in the first sheet of your spreadsheet type in the cell address (eg a1) Case is not important

7 For a cell on a successive sheet of your spreadsheet type in sheet the number followed by a comma and the cell address without any spaces (eg sheet2a1) Case is not important

8 Click

9 Select File gt Export gt Condition Qty to Excel

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

52

10 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

11 Click to export On-Screen Takeoff results to specified cell locations in the Excel file When you return to the Excel application you will see the values have been added to the specified cell locations in your spreadsheet

12 Save your Excel file

Exporting Worksheet to Excel

1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 From On-Screen Takeoff Select File gt Export gt Worksheet to Excel

4 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

5 Click When you return to the Excel application you will see the values from the Worksheet Tab have been added to your spreadsheet

6 Save your Excel file

Exporting Takeoff to CVS 1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 Click the Takeoff Tab in the project you want to export the information

4 Select File gt Export gt Takeoff to CSV

5 Browse to the location of the CSV spreadsheet file click file to select it

6 Click the Save

NOTE CSV files can be opened in Excel Lotus Access etc One may consider this option more of a ldquodumprdquo into a file

The Excel application must be active (it may be minimized on the application bar) with the target spreadsheet open in the application Otherwise an error will occur with the export operation that will affect both the On-Screen Takeofftrade file and the Excel spreadsheet

Section 8

53

Advanced Features

This section will

Some special features of working with condition objects in the takeoff area

Details of advanced options for conditions

Advanced features of the Project Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

54

Features to Use with Objects Roping Feature You can move copy or delete using this feature Using the Select tool (the pointer) you may select several objects at once by clicking and dragging an outline around the objects then releasing the mouse button Roping may select either objects completely within the outlined area (inclusive) or objects both within and touched by the outlined area (touching) Specify your roping preference under Tools gt Options

1 Click and hold the mouse button at a point on the screen near the objects to be selected and drag to surround the objects with an outline

2 Release the mouse button The objects will be selected

3 You may now

Move the group around on the page by clicking within the group dragging the mouse and releasing the button to place the objects

Delete the group of objects by clicking the Delete key or

Copy and paste by pressing Ctrl C to copy the group then Ctrl V to paste it The pasted copy of the grouped objects will appear slightly offset from the original objects

Section 8 Advanced Features

55

Applying a DropRun Count

Use the droprun feature when calculating quantities to take into account the drop or run of a linear condition such as electrical lines or plumbing pipes Drop or run lengths may be added separately to any linear condition on screen while a default droprun length may be indicated for a condition as a whole

1 Select the desired linear condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff Dock bar

2 Click the Change button in the toolbar to open the Change Condition dialog

3 Click the Advanced tab to access the advanced options and click inside the DropRun check box

4 Enter a default length to be applied to all of this condition Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches) You can leave the length blank and manually enter drop run on each segment drawn

5 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog

Edit DropRun Count

1 With the related linear condition in the Takeoff Dock bar highlighted or with the pointer tool selected

2 click on the desired linear object in the image takeoff area The Count button will become active

3 Click on the Count button (alternatively select Tools gt Count) The default droprun amount will show in the pop-up Count dialog (Default length will be zero if droprun has not been selected in this conditionrsquos properties)

4 Type in the desired length Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches)

5 Click the OK button The additional amount will be reflected in the corresponding quantity The new DropRun count will apply only to the object edited

Adding Text in Image View

On-Screen Takeoff allows you to place text comments around your quantity takeoffs that may be printed along with plan images and objects Text is automatically placed within the Annotation Layer (that includes text and hot links)

1 To place text on the image select the Text Tool and click at the point you want to place your text opening a text box

2 Type in your information clicking Enter for line breaks

3 When you are finished click the OK button to exit the text box

4 To reposition text simply click on the text (with the Text Tool active) to select it

5 Move the cursor over the text the cursor will now display as a four-way arrow

6 Click and drag the mouse to position the text as desired

Section 8 Advanced Features

56

1 To edit existing text use the Text Tool to double-click on the text to open the editing box

2 Enter additional text or use the Backspace key to delete text as necessary

Formatting Text Once created you may format the font size type style and color of your text

1 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Font or click on the Font button in the Takeoff Toolbar

2 Select the desired features (color options are disabled) and click the OK button

3 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Color or click on the Color button in the Takeoff Toolbar The Color dialog will open

4 Click on a color in the Basic Color palette or create a color and add to the Custom Colors palette (Be sure to click on the color in the Custom Colors palette to select it)

5 Click the OK button

Object Properties

Linear Objects

Linear objects may be set to connect at corners

A linear object may be set to trim automatically when crossing another linear object (Check the trim option under the advanced tab of the Condition dialog)

When you move a connected linear object objects automatically move and resize connected lines accordingly (quantities are then recalculated)

This feature requires that the connected linear object be moved using the center handles (does not apply when resizing the line from the ends)

Objects constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

Objects are measured from centerline to centerline

Section 8 Advanced Features

57

Area Objects When drawing an area use your escape key to undo the last line drawn You may reverse your

drawing of an area using the escape key

The area will not fill with color and pattern until the user double-clicks after the last line is set

Lines drawn to delineate an area object constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

After selecting an area to move or adjust position the mouse in the center to move the entire area position the mouse at the sides or corners to adjust the perimeter

Count Objects

All count objects are quantified by the physical number of objects per page and reported as EA for the UOM The quantity for the current Image View is (displayed in the Condition List) and the total quantity in your project is displayed in the Takeoff View and Worksheet View)

Square circle rectangle and triangle shaped count objects do not displace or subtract from other object quantities when placed on top of them However on the Advanced Tab for the count condition a connect property can be set (this is a check box) so that when a count object of this shape is put on top of a Linear type takeoff object it will move with the linear if said linear is moved

An opened-shaped count object must be placed within a linear object Opening shaped count objects may also be measured by linear foot or linear yard (EA SF and SY are also options) Opening shaped count items default to a width of 3rsquo 0rdquo at the time of creation This size can be changed The small medium and large size are not options on this type of condition anymore Check Backout on the Advanced tab for each Count object back out the footage (or yardage) of opening-shaped count objects in which they are placed

NOTE In order to see this Backout functionality (in quantity) for SY or SF deductions at least one of the

results for the Linear(s) this object will be placed on must be set to SY or SF and the count object must have a height quantity

Advanced Features of Conditions The Round Feature Under the Advanced tab of the linear and area Condition dialogues you may specify quantity rounding (in inches) For linear objects rounding applies to each linear object drawn For area objects rounding will apply to each segment of the area perimeter adjusting the perimeter and area calculations For example With a linear condition entering 12 in the Round field will round up each related linear object to the nearest 12 inches or one foot With this setting two walls of 1 4 would each round to 2 0 totaling 4 0

NOTE In the Takeoff Dock bar condition list and in the On-Screen Takeoff reports quantities will be displayed in whole numbers rounded up to the nearest foot However calculations are based on true quantities without rounding unless the Round Feature is engaged

Pitch Pitch may apply either to linear or area conditions It is measured in rise per linear foot Entering 12 indicates a 12 rise per 12 of linear distance (a pitch of 12 over 12) or an angle of 45deg

Section 8 Advanced Features

58

Advanced Features of Project Properties Selecting Multiple Pages

1 Select a single page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry

2 Drag the cursor down the column of numbers to select consecutive pages

3 Click on the blank button at the top of this column to select all pages in the Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

59

Changing Image Assigned to a Drawing 1 Select the page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry 2 Click the Change Image button The Change Image dialog box will appear

3 Navigate to the desired file and select by clicking on it

4 Click the Open button The electronic file assigned to the page will have been changed to reflect the new file choice

Changing Image File Path 1 Select pages as described above

2 Choose Change Folder

3 In the Change Folder dialog navigate to the appropriate folder

4 Click the OK button The file path will have been changed for the selected page entries

Delete a Page from Project Properties 1 Select the page you want to delete by clicking on its associated number (in the gray box at the

left of the entry)

2 Choose Delete Page

All Takeoff on the page will be deleted immediately and permanently

Section 8 Advanced Features

60

Advanced Features of Tool Options

Calculation Method On-Screen Takeoff has built-in calculation options to allow for faster work and faster saves until your takeoff is complete Calculation options are found by selecting Tools gt Options then clicking on the Calculation tab

Calculation method can be set to Automatic Automatic except Grids and Manual Manual will allow the program to operate more quickly while Automatic or Automatic except Grids allows the user to see quantity changes as takeoffs are made

In any mode you may press F9 to recalculate quantities for the On-Screen Takeoff current totals

Configuration Tab

When the ldquoPage Label (A01)rdquo radial button is chosen On-Screen Takeoff puts the numbered label on all the pages of in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar If the Page Descriptionrdquo radial button is chosen then a description of what takeoff is on that specific page will be shown in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar

This section of the configuration tab gives you options on how you want to export your information When the ldquoFolderSubfolder Namesrdquo radial button is chosen than on your file that you are exporting to will have all the conditions folders and subfolders In the Delimiter box you can choose the symbol that is needed to separate the information you are exporting Some files need semicolons () or colons () to make sure the information comes exported in is separated it the appropriate places

Section 8 Advanced Features

61

In previous versions of On-Screen Takeoff there are views that users need to have in order for them to display their information By either choosing ldquoOST 1xrdquo or ldquoOST 2xrdquo it will let the program know you want your columns of information exported in that specific format

When you have the Confirm Deletions radial button of ldquoYesrdquo chosen than every time you delete anything you will get a dialog box confirming your intentions of deletion

While working with your takeoff you have a choice to either view the legend of your conditions or hide it Choose whichever radial button that suits your needs

For those who prefer to use the Enter key to navigate in dialog boxes this option is just for that

Font Tab The Font tab is designed for you to make your own look and feel for the application At the bottom of this tab it will show you sample of the fonts and colors you have chosen

Renaming the Current Page You may change the name of the current page in the takeoff area of On-Screen Takeoff by selecting Edit gt Rename Page

This opens the Name Page dialog and you may simply type in a new name and click the Enter button The new name for the file will be reflected on the title bar for the page and in Project Properties

You also may access the Rename Page function by right-clicking in the takeoff area while in Image View and selecting the option from the pop-up menu that appears

Section 9

62

Saving and Exiting

This section will

Explain how to save projects

Show you how to safely exit the program

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

63

Saving Your Project

1 Select File gt Save 2 If your project has not previously been saved a Save dialog box will open to allow you to name

the file and choose the directory and folder in which to save your file 3 Once saved File gt Save will simply save the current version of the file

OR

4 Select File gt Save As then type in a new name for the file and save to the desired file path

The Auto-save Feature With the Auto-save feature On-Screen Takeoff automatically backs up your open project You may choose to have more than one level of backup files The first backup copy will have the extension b00 and successive files will be b01 b02 and so on If you have designated four levels of backup files after the fourth backup copy has been created (b03) the next file will be saved over the file with extension b00 Further backup saves will then rotate through the four backup files in the same way

1 Select Tools gt Options 2 In the Auto-save area (under the General tab) select the frequency of backup file creation (in

minutes) and the number of levels for the feature 3 You also may disengage the feature by clicking in the check box to clear it

The Auto-save feature automatically saves backup copies to the directory of the current project If you are working from a write-protected area such as a CD-ROM On-Screen Takeoff will place backup files in the On-Screen Takeoff folder

Exiting When you are finished using On-Screen Takeoff it is very easy to exit Exiting is very important because of security reasons If someone were to use your computer they could enter the application and view and manipulate information

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

64

On-Screen Takeoff closes the open project when you open another or create a new project or when you exit the program

1 Select File gt Exit

OR

2 You also may click at the upper right-hand corner of the application to exit

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

65

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer When you get your digitizer from GTCO you will need to connect it to your computer Follow the instructions outlined below to do this

Note For rollup digitizers the metal bar must be oriented to the top or right hand side

Connecting the Digitizer 1 Lay the digitizer out flat 2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer 3 Plug in the power adapter 4 Plug the interface (IO) cable into the digitizer 5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into an open serial port on computer

Note GTCO Technical support phone number is 410-381-6688 The electronic manual (on diskette) from GTCO contains more detailed installation and operation instructions for the GTCO digitizer model you have

Installing other Digitizer Drivers If you are using a GTCO Digitizer you will need to install the GTCO TabletWorks Drivers

If you are using a Digitizer not supported by GTCO Tablet Works 10 please contact the manufacturer of your digitizer for assistance with installation

Installing GTCO TabletWorks Drivers 1 Insert the On Center CD into the CD-ROM drive The CD Startup screen will open 2 Click on Install Software 3 Select Additional Software and Drivers 4 Select Digitizer Driver 5 Follow the instructions for installing TabletWorks 10

Adhering the Template The template is a small plastic sticker used to enable mouse function when using the digitizer with On-Screen Takeoff Place your template on your digitizer We suggest placing it in the bottom right corner of the digitizer about one inch inside the takeoff area

Note You may either peel off the back of the template and use the adhesive surface or you can tape the template down

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

66

Testing the Digitizer Drivers Before running OST you may test the digitizer by moving the stylus around on the digitizer pad it should move the mouse cursor (if mouse emulation is enabled)

If the digitizer does not move the mouse cursor on the screen

The superset codes may need to be reset Reset the superset codes by touching on the border of the digitizer with the stylus The digitizer should beep several times

The digitizer may not be communicating with the computer Be sure the COM port selected is correct Be sure the COM port selected is correct If you are not able to get the digitizer to move the mouse cursor you need to call GTCO technical support for help

Note The Mouse Emulation is not required for On-Screen Takeoff to work properly It is used only for the Template functionality if the digitizer is moving the cursor the wrong direction (up instead of sideways or vice-versa)

Click the L-shaped arrow symbol on the digitizer with the stylus

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

67

Appendix II Toolbar Items Main Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

68

Tool Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

69

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

70

Navigate Toolbar (Continued)

Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

71

Takeoff Toolbar (Continued)

Image Toolbar

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

72

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

This section will detail how to load plans from a F W Dodge CD-ROM into an On-Screen Takeoff project file ready for takeoffs

Dodge files may be added to the Project Properties dialog However loading the files in that way will load the files by number rather than name description If you want to load one page only from your Dodge CD You will have to rename the page to display the name rather than number of the file

To load plan files from a Dodge CD so that the files load sequentially by file number but are displayed by name rather than by number within your project follow the instructions below

Opening a Dodge project from a CD-ROM 1 Insert the CD into the drive 2 Choose File gt Custom 3 Choose Dodge Plans Project (plansdat) as the file type 4 Select the appropriate file type by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the Files of type

field 5 In the Look in field access your drive paths by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the

field then

Navigate to your CD-ROM drive Open the data folder and Open the Projects folder

6 Select the desired project and open its folder 7 Open the plansdat file 8 All the images will come in sequenced correctly for that job along with the full descriptions

(names) of each page If there is not a plans folder in the project folder then plans do not exist for that project on the CD Opening the plansdat file will yield an empty project

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

73

Appendix IV Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer The On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer is a limited version of On Center Softwarersquos commercial takeoff software If your status bar located at the very bottom of the main window says View Mode in the lower left-hand corner then you are using the Plan Viewer You can use the plan viewer to

View CD-based amp converted CAD drawings

View a previously created OST file and associated drawings

Download electronic plans online

Navigate through drawings

Quickly Takeoff linearsareas and counts

Zoom in to view the plan better

Print drawings directly from the viewer

Viewing an On-Screen Takeoff Project File

1 To open an OST file that was previously created with of On-Screen Takeoff 2 Select File gt Open 3 An Open dialog will appear if you do not see the OST file you are looking for select the

Look In drop down arrow 4 A drop down menu will appear listing the various folders drives and mapped drives located

on your computer select the correct drive or folder location and continue to browse to the location of your OST file

5 When you see your OST file double-click it to open it 6 Any takeoff and drawings should appear on the Image tab view

If you do not see the drawings but do see the colored takeoff layer the drawings may

not be located in the same place they were originally saved at Go to File gt Project Properties and check the Image File path for each listed page If the image file path is pointing to a CD drive make sure the CD is inside the CR-ROM

Downloading Electronic Plans If your Online Plan Service provides a special file format (OSX) required to use this feature of our plan viewer you can immediately downloaded all electronic plans of a project directly from our viewer

Most Plan Room web sites will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff when a request to download plans is made Your particular Plan Room may differ in operation so please contact the provider directly with questions on using the site

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

74

When you request to download or open a project file from a Plan Room you will usually have the open to open or save an OSX file Choosing open will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff Alternately you may choose to save the file to a local hard drive After you have saved the file either double-click it to launch On-Screen Takeoff or open the OSX file using On-Screen Takeoff by clicking File then Open and locating the file on your hard drive You will need to change the file type to OSX

After the OSX file is opened you will see an additional tab appear in the Conditions List window called Pages

The Pages tab shows the hierarchy of your project Gray file icons represent pages that have not been downloaded and blue icons represents pages that have been downloaded

To download a page simply double-click the page icon

If you wish to select a group of pages to download you can use the Ctrl or Shift key to multiple select them then click the Download button

If you wish to download all pages at once click the Download All button

Downloaded pages will now appear in the Project Properties dialog in the same order in which they appear in the Pages tab

Creating Quick Takeoffs With On-Screen Takeoff you can create quick takeoffs to measure quantities even if you dont have the full version of our program However using the Quick Takeoff functionality shows you just a fraction of what the full version can do

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar is located at the top of the image view It has three buttons designated for three types of takeoffs Linear Area and Count The Quantity drop down list will show secondary quantities for Linears and Areas The Units drop down allows you to select how you want your quantities displayed Feet Inches Yards Millimeters and Meters

NOTE Every time change the type of takeoff you are performing (switching from Area to Linear for example) the previous quantities and takeoff objects will disappear They will also disappear when you changes pages

NOTE You can use the Dimension Tool to basically measure the distance between two points or linears The distance will display on the status bar at the bottom of the application

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

75

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions General

Where is On-Screen Takeoff installed on my computer

Typically it is installed in CProgram FilesOn-Screen Takeoff

In Explorer how do I recognize On-Screen Takeoff file types

On-Screen Takeoff data is stored in a single file per job lsquojob name OSTrsquo On-Screen Takeoff templates are stored as lsquotemplate nameTPOrsquo

Can only one project at a time be open

Yes For that reason opening another project automatically closes the project on screen You will be asked to save any changes

Is only one scale allowed per page What about on drawings that have multiple detail sections on a page and each of those drawings have different scales

Yes For pages with drawings of different scales copy the drawing to another project page and set the appropriate scale

I cannot perform backout on an area that is along a linear

As a workaround use the On-Screen Takeoff layers feature to help you with this issue Electronic Images

How do I start a project from drawings that have been scanned and written to a CD-ROM

Open a new project Select File gt Project Properties and select Auto Add Navigate to your CD and the appropriate folder and select any image file in that location Click Open All files in the location will load into your project Recommended that images are copied from CD to hard drive for performance

If I get a disk of drawings in AutoCAD format (R13 or R14) can I read them in On-Screen Takeoff

Yes On-Screen Takeoff now reads DWG DXF and many other format that are saved with AutoCAD

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

76

When I click on the all pages button what is supposed to happen Currently nothing seems to change when I click on that button

The All Pages button is used to apply the Darken and Enhance Plans feature to all pages in the project (as opposed to only the current page on screen)

Is there a way to deduct a large skylight from an area condition

Yes with the related area condition selected in the Takeoff Dock bar unselect the Backout button on the Takeoff Toolbar then draw the Backout area The area quantity will be deducted from the related condition object and the linear measurement of the Backout perimeter will be added

Digitizer Issues

How do I connect a Digitizer to the computer

See Appendix I Connecting a Digitizer

The Place Template menu choice is disabled

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or the digitizer or the digitzer drivers are not installed

It wonrsquot let me select the Set Takeoff Area menu choice

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or no job is open a digitizer is not installed or the drivers are not installed

The digitizer stylus is not moving the cursor or crosshairs

Click S-0-1 superset on the digitizer

How do I convert my old GTCO Digitizer to work with On- Screen Takeofftrade

Call GTCO and they may be able to reconfigure your digitizer to be compatible with On-Screen Takeoff

Printing Issues Which Printers work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible printers include On-Screen Takeoff Hewlett Packard Epson and Canon printers If you are having printer difficulties please contact support and specify the type of printer along with other pertinent information Contact support at wwwoncentercomsupport or email supportoncentercom

Which Plotters work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible Plotters include Hewlett Packard DesignJet plotters and the EnCAD Cadjet II If you are having plotter difficulties please contact support and specify the type of plotter concerned

ViewingDisplay I can no longer see my condition list How do I get it back

The toolbars and Dock bars can be turned on and off through the View gt Toolbars menu options

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

77

This is also accessible by right-clicking in the toolbar area and selecting (or deselecting) a toolbar listed

I cannot view my folders in the condition list

Right-click in the Takeoff Dock barcondition list area and select Show Tree to display your folders

My Status Bar reads Viewer Mode and I am unable to draw conditions

On-Screen Takeoff needs to be Authorized Or you need to purchase an upgrade Click the Perform Advanced Takeoff button on the main toolbar

I hid a Dock bar and when I selected to view it again it appeared alongside the other Dock

bar instead of stacked on top of it How do I fix it

Pick up the Dock bar by clicking on the bar at the top and continuing to hold down the mouse button drag the Dock bar over the other one It will resize and appear stacked with the other

When I open image files from a CD the images are all upside down How do I get them right

side up

To flip pages from top to bottom follow the steps below 1 Click the All Pages button on the Image Toolbar (All Pages is engaged when the button

is not clicked) 2 Click the Flip Horizontal button on the Image Toolbar 3 Click the All Pages button again to disengage

Templates How do I create a Template

Follow the steps below 1 Create a typical project 2 Choose File gt Save As 3 Choose On-Screen Takeoff Template Files as the file type to save 4 Name the file This will save all of the condition setups as well as the layers for the

project

How do I create a new project from a template

Follow the steps below 1 Choose File gt New 2 Select a template from those listed in the New dialog This will open a new project with

conditions and layers saved from a previous project but no pages or takeoff

78

INDEX

Area Conditions 32

Area Objects 57

Auto Scrolling 20

Auto-save 63

Backout Mode 41

Calculation Method 60

Conditions 29

Configuration 60

Contents Tab 6

Continuous Mode 38

Count Conditions 33

Count Objects 57

Digitizer 10 65 76

Docking Toolbars 13

Dodge CD 72

Drawing 27 37

DropRun Count 55

Environment 18

Exiting 63

Exporting 49

Features 16

Font 61

Frequently Asked Questions 75

Grid 40

Help File 5

Hiding Toolbars 13

Hot Links 21

Image 19 59

Image files 9

Image Toolbar 12 71

Images 75

Index Tab 6

Layers 43

Linear Conditions 31

Linear Objects 56

Main Toolbar 12 67

Menus 14

Moving Toolbars 13

Navigate Toolbar 12 69

Navigating 20

On-Screen Takeofftrade 2

Page 59 61

Pages 20 25 28

Plan Viewer 73

Plans 26

Printing 47 76

Project Properties 25

Projects 22

Quick Start Video 18

Resizing Toolbars 13

Roping 54

Saving 63

Scale 28

Search Tab 7

Selecting Objects 42

Setup 8

Start On-Screen Takeofftrade 17

System Requirements 9

Takeoff 19 27

Takeoff Toolbar 70 71

Takeoff Toolbar 12

Template Files 23

TIF (Group4) 9

Tool Toolbar 12 68

Toolbar 67

Toolbars 12

View Toolbar 12 69

Viewing Toolbars 12

Worksheet 20

Zone Conditions 33

Zoom Toolbar 12 69

  • On-Screen Takeoff Lite
  • Table of Contents
  • Section 1 - Introduction
  • Section 2 - Setup
  • Section 3 - Toolbars and Menus
  • Section 4 - Features
  • Section 5 - Projects
  • Section 6 - Conditions and Takeoff
  • Section 7 - Printing and Exporting
  • Section 8 - Advanced Features
  • Section 9 - Saving and Exiting
  • Appendix I - Installing Your Digitizer
  • Appendix II - Toolbar Items
  • Appendix III - Loading Plans from a Dodge CD
  • Appendix IV - Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer
  • Appendix V - Frequently Asked Questions
  • Index

Section 5 Projects

26

Electronic plans scanned from blueprints (as opposed to blue lines) will display as white lines on a black background and are difficult to read on your computer screen Select Image gt Invert and the colors will invert to black on white

You may have noticed the Page column in the Project Properties dialog Generally plan images occupy one page and 1 will be listed in the column indicating Page 1 of your plan file If you import a multi-page TIF a plan file containing more than one page of plans they will import as separate pages and each successive page will be indicated under the Page column as 1 2 3 etc of the plan file

Group of Electronic Plans You may add all the electronic plan files from a particular source (for example from a CD) by using the Auto Add feature

1 Click the button in the Project Properties dialog

2 Browse until you find the appropriate directory and folder containing your plan images

3 Click on any file displayed within your target folder so that the file name appears in the File name box of the Auto Add dialog

4 Click The image paths and file names will be recorded into the project properties arranged alphabetically

5 Click to accept your choices and your project will automatically open

6 Save your project with the new settings by selecting File gt Save

To load Dodge Plans into your Project Properties see Appendix IIi Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

Paper Plans On-Screen Takeoff makes it easy for Full Mode users to perform quantity takeoffs from paper plans using a digitizer

1 Add pages by clicking until you have the number of pages initially in the project

2 Name each page by clicking within the Title area and typing the name

3 Click to accept your choices and close the Project Properties dialog

4 Save your project with the new project properties settings by selecting File gt Save

Section 5 Projects

27

Setting Up a Drawing Template On-Screen Takeoff provides the convenience of using the same work surface for both digitizer and mouse to allow the user to draw conditions and then edit settings of the project or add or change conditions without breaking stride A mouse pad template included with the program defines the area of the digitizer in which use of the stylus or cursor will be recognized as mouse movement as opposed to drawing movement

1 Place your stylus on On-Screen Takeoff

2 Placing the template identifies the location mouse movements will be recognized by the program

Before placing the template the template must be applied to the digitizer surface This may have been done during the installation of your digitizer We suggest attaching the template to the lower right corner of the digitizer surface about one inch inside the grid area

3 Select Digitizer gt Place Template

4 Follow the instruction prompts on the screen clicking first on the target symbol at the left of the On-Screen Takeoff box on the template then on the target at the right

Setting Takeoff Area Before you can begin taking off a drawing you must define the drawing area on the digitizer This requires defining an area that will include all objects on each drawing of your plans As you add pages to your takeoff the same area of the digitizer will be active

1 Secure the plans to the digitizer with tape or a set of clamps

2 With a pen or a pencil mark the upper left corner and the lower right corner of the first page in your set of plans

3 Select Digitizer gt Set Takeoff Area

4 Click each mark with the stylus pen as prompted

5 Verify the active area of the digitizer by looking at the image size located in the lower right corner of your screen

If you close the program before the takeoff is complete you will need to reestablish the takeoff area before you can add additional condition quantities

Electronic plans appear on your computer screen eliminating the need to set a takeoff area You simply drag your mouse across the conditions you wish to takeoff The conditions will be highlighted and quantities will be totaled instantly Electronic plans are available through a variety of services For information contact an On Center Software account manager

Section 5 Projects

28

Setting Scale for Specific Pages You may set the scale in each page view separately This will override the default scale setting in Project Properties for that page Setting the correct scale for the drawing before taking off quantities ensures accurate calculations Be careful to check the scale for each drawing in your project before doing takeoffs

1 Display the page you want to set select Edit gt Set Scale

2 Use the drop down arrow to select a scale that will be applied to that page

3 Click

OR

4 Access the pull-down scale settings on the Navigate toolbar

NOTE As you draw objects notice that the drawn object is similar in width to the object on your plans If it is not the scale set may not be correct

Calculating Scale You may calculate scale according to a known measurement between two points either with a digitizer or on electronic plans

1 Select Edit gt Calculate Scale using Image or Edit gt Calculate Scale using Digitizer

2 Follow the instructions in the related Calculate Scale dialog box You will be asked to click on the first and second points then to enter the dimension for that distance

3 The scale will be recalculated for the displayed page and the Scale display on the Navigate toolbar will show the new scale

Section 6

29

Conditions and Takeoff

This section will Draw Conditions to Takeoff Plan Quantities

What Zones will do to help your takeoff process

Discuss the ins and outs of Takeoffs

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

30

Creating Conditions

If you are starting a new project from scratch you will need to create conditions to takeoff quantities such as floor areas wall lengths and corner bead counts If you are using a template you will have several pre-designed conditions already listed on the Takeoff dock bar However you may want to change the characteristics of some conditions or create additional conditions for a particular project

1 Right Click within the Takeoff dock bar Select New gt Condition

Or

2 From the Takeoff dock bar Click (if the buttons are not showing right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select Show Buttons from the pop-up menu) The New Condition dialog appears

3 Select the condition type (Linear Area Count or Zone) from the pull-down menu accessed by the

down arrow next to the Type option

4 Press Tab or use the mouse (or stylus) to move to Name and enter a name for your condition

5 Specify the desired condition attributes See Condition Attributes for more detail

6 Click for condition to apply

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

31

Condition Attributes Each condition type will have related attributes to select or specify within the General and Advanced tabs of the New Condition dialog Once a condition has been used to takeoff a quantity from your plans certain attributes cannot be changed

All conditions allow the user to specify color and fill pattern for the object drawn

Linear Conditions

General Specify width and height by feet and inches Specify pitch in inches up to the nearest thousandth of an inch if applicable

Advanced Specify rounding for object quantities and droprun default length for electrical or plumbing drops at the ends of lines Select Connect to have lines connect at the corners where one line of the condition ends and another begins (and indicate Tolerance for the featurersquos activation as distance between the ends of two lines) Choose Trim to have lines automatically trim to a line being crossed Choose Curve to draw a curved line

Follow these examples for inputting feet and inches For 7 feet 6 inches type 706 for 13 feet 7 inches type 1307 For 20 feet type 2000

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

32

Area Conditions

General If needed you can specify the thickness (in inches) andor pitch (in inches)

Advanced Specify rounding for object quantities Choose to display an adjustable grid within the area and indicate matrix cell dimensions

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

33

Count Conditions

General

Specify height and indicate the size (in inches) and shape (square circle triangle rectangle or opening) of the count object as it will appear on screen

Advanced Count conditions have advanced attributes These options are available for all shapes except for openings

Zone Conditions Zones allow you to subdivide condition quantities making it easier to modify and complete jobs in phases They can be used at the end of a takeoff to isolate a group of condition quantities that are in different areas of the takeoff

Zones can also be used to break a takeoff into multi-phases and can even be used to isolate quantities while a job is in progress to group the amount of work that has been completed to date They can be applied to one or multiple pages in your plans automatically calculating the takeoff quantities for each zoned area

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

34

The zone feature is only available in Lite and Full Mode If you are in View Mode and would like

to use this feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade

Condition Notes A Note tab is provided for comments regarding the condition These notes will display on the Takeoff List report and will import into Quick Bid

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

35

Condition Results The Results tab of the New Condition is based on condition type Initial settings default to linear feet (LF) for linear conditions square feet (SF) for area conditions and count of items (EA) for count conditions and zones The first of the results fields will display for the condition items in the Takeoff dock bar area All results will display in worksheets and Takeoff List reports as well as in an Excel spreadsheet after being exported

Copying Conditions You may use the condition attributes from a condition yoursquove already created for any future conditions of the same type

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Click the Copy button from the toolbar

OR

3 Right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select copy

4 A new condition will appear in the list with the same condition attributes as the previous condition but with the quantities zeroed

Editing Conditions Once you have copied a condition you might want to change several attributes You can also edit an existing condition to fit any updated needs

1 Highlight the desired condition on the Takeoff dock bar

2 Click the Change button

OR

3 Double-click on the condition you wish to edit to bring up the Change Condition dialog

NOTE The Change Condition dialog differs from the New Condition dialog only in that if takeoffs

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

36

have been performed in your project with this condition you will not be able to change the type of condition or certain properties under the advanced tab of the dialog box

Deleting Conditions 1 Click on the condition in the Takeoff Dock bar area

2 Click the Delete button on the toolbar

OR

3 Right-click and select Delete from the pop-up menu

All takeoff associated with the deleted condition will be deleted immediately and permanently

Organizing Project Conditions Within your project you can create folders andor sub-folders for different types of conditions You may even want to create a folder containing conditions with reset values

To get started organizing your conditions make sure you are viewing the condition tree (right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select Show Tree)

Creating Folders and Sub-Folders 1 Right-click in the Takeoff Dock bar area

2 Select New gt Folder from the pop-up menu

Copying Folders

1 Click on the folder and click Copy on the toolbar

2 All copied conditions within the new folder will have values reset to zero

Renaming Folders

1 Click on the folder

2 Right-click and select Rename from the pop-up menu

3 Enter a name for your folder and click the Enter button

Changing Condition Order

You may move conditions up or down in the condition list of the Takeoff dock bar to suit your project needs

1 Select the condition you would like to move by clicking to highlight it

NOTE When you are ready to move the highlighted conditions be sure that you start

moving using the last condition chosen That condition will have a highlighted boarder

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

37

2 Drag and drop any the condition from one place to another in the list You may also move a condition to another folder on the list in this way

Drawing with Conditions Snap Angles Set up snap angles to prevent lines from appearing jagged Snap angles are commonly set at 15deg and shift snap angles at 0deg

1 Go to Tools gt Options Options dialog appears

2 Under the General tab make the desired settings

3 Click to save the settings As they are drawn lines will snap to the set degree

Drawing a Linear Object 1 Select a condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff dock bar

2 Move the cursor into the Image takeoff area of the screen you will see the cursor display as crosshairs

3 Click and hold left mouse button then drag mouse to draw a line

4 Release mouse button to set line

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

38

5 Repeat steps for further lines

Continuous Mode This feature allows you to draw an object that has connected lines

1 Click the icon from the Takeoff toolbar

OR

2 Go to Tools gt Continuous Mode

3 Follow steps 1-3 from Draw a Linear Object

4 Click at each point of intersection The object will be connected

5 Double-click after making the final point to set the lines

Drawing a Curve To draw a curved line the Curve option must be checked under the Advanced tab of the Condition dialog

1 Click where you want to begin the curve and drag in a straight line to the position for the other endpoint of the curve

2 Click on the line to select it Handles in the shapes of small squares will appear at either end of

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

39

the line and in the center of the line

3 Move the cursor over the center handles until the cursor becomes a two-way arrow

4 Click and drag in the direction of the curve bending the line as you move the cursor Release to set the curve (The line you began with will disappear)

Draw a circle by drawing two curved lines connected

Drawing an Area Object Area conditions are drawn similarly to continuous mode lines You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete your area takeoff

NOTE When drawing an area do not intersect the perimeter or line of the object you are drawing

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

3 The area will be filled with the pattern set for that condition

NOTE The simulated circle will be good enough for you to be able to make a bid

To create a circular area click from point to point with very short distances in between points simulating a circlersquos perimeter Double-click after setting the last point to set the area

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

40

Grid Options Grids give you an added advantage when installing materials such as tiles Use this feature to get a count for how many tiles are needed for an area

1 Double-click on an area condition in the Takeoff dock bar to open its Condition dialog

2 Click on the Advanced tab to show its options

3 Check the box next to Grid by clicking in it

4 Indicate the dimensions of the cell matrix in inches (For example 200 x 400)

5 Under Results tab choose each (EA) for one of the results fields This will tabulate a number of grid cells (including partial grid cells) in area

6 Click to save your settings

7 Use the Move Grid and Rotate Grid features in the Tools menu to manipulate the grid as desired

Grid Calculation

1 Go to Tools gt Options menu

1 Specify if On-Screen Takeoff automatically should Calculate Grid Position

2 If AreaGrid Size is selected On-Screen Takeoff will calculate the number of items needed to fill the grid based on grid demintions

3 Click to accept and close the dialog

To move a line at any angle (regardless of default setting) press the Shift key while moving the mouse

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

41

Backout Mode This feature allows you to take out part of an area and deduct that amount of square footage

1 Select Tools gt Backout Mode

2 Outline the are you want backed out as you would when drawing a regular area object (see Drawing an Area Object)

3 The outlined area will clear and quantities will be recalculated

NOTE The perimeter of the backout area will be added to the LF quantity for that condition

Drawing a Count Object Square triangle rectangle and circle shaped count objects can easily be placed on images

1 Select the condition

2 Click in the location where you want the object to appear

3 To place an opening-shaped count item like a door or window you must click over an existing linear object such as a wall

4 On the Results tab you can change the height properties to give you the result you need

5 If Backout is checked on the advanced tab for each count opening the opening-shaped count item will back out a corresponding section of the linear object

Opening shaped count items are sized at 3rsquo0rdquo by default

Drawing a Zone Zones are drawn in the same way as area objects and may be any polygonal shape You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete the zone perimeter

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

42

Selecting Objects

1 Use the Select Tool to select objects

You can also select all objects that correspond to a condition

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Right-click and choose Select All

3 All objects with this condition will be highlighted with squares as an outline

Moving and Resizing Objects Linear

1 To move or resize a linear object click anywhere on the line to select it

2 To move the line position your pointer over the center handles When the mouse is positioned over the handles you will see a two-way arrow You will only be able to move the line in the direction of the arrows

3 Drag the line to a new position

4 Clicking and dragging the handles on the ends of the line will allow you to lengthen or shorten your line

Area and Zone

1 To move an area object or zone in its entirety click and drag it to its new position

2 Grabbing a handle at a corner or intersection of the object will allow you to adjust and change its perimeter

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

43

Count 1 To move a square circle rectangle or triangle shaped count object click and drag

2 Click and drag an opening shaped count object along the length of the linear object to the desired position then release

NOTE An opening shaped count object may not be moved from its associated linear condition object however it may be moved up and down the length of the linear object

Layers On-Screen Takeoff allows you to sort and separate your takeoff objects within the same job and on the same page On-Screen Takeoff gives you this flexibility through the use of layers

By assigning different conditions to different layers (for example differentiating between floors ceilings and walls) you can choose to view all layers or turn off certain layers to display and print the remaining groups of conditions only You may also remove the background image of electronic plans add text and hot link symbols or print only your condition takeoffs

Layers are only available in Full Mode If you are in View or Lite Mode and would like to use this

feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade Default Layers

On-Screen Takeoff begins every project with three default layers Image Annotation and Default The Image layer holds the electronic plan files you may have in your project The Annotation layer possesses all text notations highlighting and hot links in the project The Default layer will appear in the Condition dialog when creating or editing a condition (listed in the takeoff dock bar) Conditions are assigned to the Default layer unless otherwise specified by the user

Creating Layers To assign a condition to a layer other than the default layer you must first create additional layers for your project

1 Select View gt Layers to open the Layers dialog

2 Click An unnamed layer will be added

3 Click within the empty box and type a name for your layer (for example Wall)

4 New layers are added as active layers The adjacent box under the Show column will be checked

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

44

Assigning a Layer to a Condition 1 Open the Condition dialog box by creating a new condition or editing an existing condition

2 Under the General tab click on the down arrow in the Layer field to display optional layers

3 Select the desired layer for the condition Only the Default layer and layers you have added will be displayed

4 Click

View and Hide Layers

1 Select View gt Layers

2 Under the Show column check the box to view or remove the check (by clicking on it) to hide the specific layer

3 Click to accept and close the Layers dialog

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

45

Assigning Text to a Layer When adding text to an image On-Screen Takeoff has the capability to assign the text to a specified layer

1 Select the Text Tool

2 Click at the point you want to place your text

3 Type in your text using the Enter key for line breaks

4 Click the drop down arrow next to the Layer field and select the desired layer

Section 7

46

Printing and Exporting

This section will

Printing options and procedures

Exporting data by copying and pasting

Exporting quantity results to Excel spreadsheets

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

47

Print Setup On-Screen Takeoff allows the user to print the image takeoff list and worksheet

1 Select File gt Print Setup The Print Setup dialog will open

2 Select a printer or leave the default selection listed (change from the default printer displayed by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the field)

3 Indicate page size and printer tray option (Source) Access page size options by clicking on the

down arrow at the right of the field

4 Choose Portrait or Landscape orientation

5 Click to accept and close the dialog

Printing Images The image area can include the electronic plans the takeoff objects added text and hot links To print a subset of these (for example just the takeoffs without the plans or the added text and hot link symbols) hide layers that you do not want to print (see Section 6 View and Hide Layers) When you are printing your images every page will show the scale of the takeoff you are printing

1 Click on the Image tab to display the area of your project

2 Select File gt Print (or Ctrl + P)

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

48

3 Select the desired view (What to print) and the Image Range

4 Click The second Print dialog will open

5 Change settings accordingly or click if you accept the default settings

Printing Takeoff Lists and Worksheets In Takeoff Lists and Worksheets you may hide columns to print only certain results or adjust column widths to fit the report within the page size selected

1 In Takeoff List or Worksheet view move your cursor to the right side of the columnrsquos title bar the cursor will display as a two-way arrow

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

49

2 Click and drag to adjust the width of the column Holding the mouse button you may

slide the title bar under the title bar to its left to hide the column completely

3 Select File gt Print or press Ctrl + P to access the Print dialog

4 Indicate desired printer and choose the number of copies

5 Click to print and close the dialog

When printing the condition list we suggest printing in landscape

To reset to the default column widths double-click on the right border of a column heading will reset the column to its right (or previously to its right before being hidden)

Print Preview 1 Select File gt Print Preview

2 Use and to vary your view 3 If viewing an image choose current full or scale view to see how it displays

4 For printed outputs that cover more than one page use and to view adjacent pages or click on the down arrow next to Page field and select the page you want displayed

Exporting Using the CopyPaste Feature You may copy all the data or sections from the worksheet and the takeoff list view in On-Screen Takeoff and paste it into another application When pasting into Excel the cell layout will be maintained

1 Highlight the areas you wish to paste Click and hold the left mouse button down as you drag the cursor over the area to be selected then releasing the mouse button

OR

2 Select the entire takeoff list quickly click on the left On-Screen Takeoff column header and hold and drag the cursor across the remaining column headings

The number of pages for the view selected will display in the lower left-hand corner The zoom percentage that applies to the view will be displayed in the lower right-hand corner next to page size of the drawing

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

50

3 In the worksheet view you may highlight rows by clicking on the numbered buttons to the left of each row clicking and dragging across column headings or clicking and dragging over individual cells in the worksheet

Click anywhere in the appropriate view to deselect the area

4 Once your selection is highlighted you may select Edit gt Copy or Ctrl C from the keyboard 5 On your monitor switch to the application into which you want to paste your selection 6 Select Edit gt Paste in the new application or simply press Ctrl + V to paste

The colored keys for conditions cannot be pasted

Using the Export Feature You may export condition quantities to specified cell location within an Excel worksheet file Cell target locations are assigned in the Results tab of the condition dialogs on the Export line relating to each quantity measurement type

On-Screen Takeoff will export takeoff quantity results for up to three different quantity types that you specify For instance you may want to know the number of square feet in a ceiling area as well as the number of linear feet in its perimeter

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

51

1 Bring up the Condition dialog by double-clicking on a condition in the takeoff dock bar or by

selecting the condition and clicking

2 Click on the Results tab to access its fields The default quantities for the condition type will display

3 For each results field click on the arrow to access the pull-down menu and select the appropriate quantity (for example SF LF EA etchellip)

4 Have your Excel spreadsheet opened and saved in a file

5 Specify the Excel spreadsheet cell locations where you want the results to go

6 For a cell in the first sheet of your spreadsheet type in the cell address (eg a1) Case is not important

7 For a cell on a successive sheet of your spreadsheet type in sheet the number followed by a comma and the cell address without any spaces (eg sheet2a1) Case is not important

8 Click

9 Select File gt Export gt Condition Qty to Excel

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

52

10 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

11 Click to export On-Screen Takeoff results to specified cell locations in the Excel file When you return to the Excel application you will see the values have been added to the specified cell locations in your spreadsheet

12 Save your Excel file

Exporting Worksheet to Excel

1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 From On-Screen Takeoff Select File gt Export gt Worksheet to Excel

4 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

5 Click When you return to the Excel application you will see the values from the Worksheet Tab have been added to your spreadsheet

6 Save your Excel file

Exporting Takeoff to CVS 1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 Click the Takeoff Tab in the project you want to export the information

4 Select File gt Export gt Takeoff to CSV

5 Browse to the location of the CSV spreadsheet file click file to select it

6 Click the Save

NOTE CSV files can be opened in Excel Lotus Access etc One may consider this option more of a ldquodumprdquo into a file

The Excel application must be active (it may be minimized on the application bar) with the target spreadsheet open in the application Otherwise an error will occur with the export operation that will affect both the On-Screen Takeofftrade file and the Excel spreadsheet

Section 8

53

Advanced Features

This section will

Some special features of working with condition objects in the takeoff area

Details of advanced options for conditions

Advanced features of the Project Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

54

Features to Use with Objects Roping Feature You can move copy or delete using this feature Using the Select tool (the pointer) you may select several objects at once by clicking and dragging an outline around the objects then releasing the mouse button Roping may select either objects completely within the outlined area (inclusive) or objects both within and touched by the outlined area (touching) Specify your roping preference under Tools gt Options

1 Click and hold the mouse button at a point on the screen near the objects to be selected and drag to surround the objects with an outline

2 Release the mouse button The objects will be selected

3 You may now

Move the group around on the page by clicking within the group dragging the mouse and releasing the button to place the objects

Delete the group of objects by clicking the Delete key or

Copy and paste by pressing Ctrl C to copy the group then Ctrl V to paste it The pasted copy of the grouped objects will appear slightly offset from the original objects

Section 8 Advanced Features

55

Applying a DropRun Count

Use the droprun feature when calculating quantities to take into account the drop or run of a linear condition such as electrical lines or plumbing pipes Drop or run lengths may be added separately to any linear condition on screen while a default droprun length may be indicated for a condition as a whole

1 Select the desired linear condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff Dock bar

2 Click the Change button in the toolbar to open the Change Condition dialog

3 Click the Advanced tab to access the advanced options and click inside the DropRun check box

4 Enter a default length to be applied to all of this condition Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches) You can leave the length blank and manually enter drop run on each segment drawn

5 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog

Edit DropRun Count

1 With the related linear condition in the Takeoff Dock bar highlighted or with the pointer tool selected

2 click on the desired linear object in the image takeoff area The Count button will become active

3 Click on the Count button (alternatively select Tools gt Count) The default droprun amount will show in the pop-up Count dialog (Default length will be zero if droprun has not been selected in this conditionrsquos properties)

4 Type in the desired length Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches)

5 Click the OK button The additional amount will be reflected in the corresponding quantity The new DropRun count will apply only to the object edited

Adding Text in Image View

On-Screen Takeoff allows you to place text comments around your quantity takeoffs that may be printed along with plan images and objects Text is automatically placed within the Annotation Layer (that includes text and hot links)

1 To place text on the image select the Text Tool and click at the point you want to place your text opening a text box

2 Type in your information clicking Enter for line breaks

3 When you are finished click the OK button to exit the text box

4 To reposition text simply click on the text (with the Text Tool active) to select it

5 Move the cursor over the text the cursor will now display as a four-way arrow

6 Click and drag the mouse to position the text as desired

Section 8 Advanced Features

56

1 To edit existing text use the Text Tool to double-click on the text to open the editing box

2 Enter additional text or use the Backspace key to delete text as necessary

Formatting Text Once created you may format the font size type style and color of your text

1 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Font or click on the Font button in the Takeoff Toolbar

2 Select the desired features (color options are disabled) and click the OK button

3 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Color or click on the Color button in the Takeoff Toolbar The Color dialog will open

4 Click on a color in the Basic Color palette or create a color and add to the Custom Colors palette (Be sure to click on the color in the Custom Colors palette to select it)

5 Click the OK button

Object Properties

Linear Objects

Linear objects may be set to connect at corners

A linear object may be set to trim automatically when crossing another linear object (Check the trim option under the advanced tab of the Condition dialog)

When you move a connected linear object objects automatically move and resize connected lines accordingly (quantities are then recalculated)

This feature requires that the connected linear object be moved using the center handles (does not apply when resizing the line from the ends)

Objects constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

Objects are measured from centerline to centerline

Section 8 Advanced Features

57

Area Objects When drawing an area use your escape key to undo the last line drawn You may reverse your

drawing of an area using the escape key

The area will not fill with color and pattern until the user double-clicks after the last line is set

Lines drawn to delineate an area object constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

After selecting an area to move or adjust position the mouse in the center to move the entire area position the mouse at the sides or corners to adjust the perimeter

Count Objects

All count objects are quantified by the physical number of objects per page and reported as EA for the UOM The quantity for the current Image View is (displayed in the Condition List) and the total quantity in your project is displayed in the Takeoff View and Worksheet View)

Square circle rectangle and triangle shaped count objects do not displace or subtract from other object quantities when placed on top of them However on the Advanced Tab for the count condition a connect property can be set (this is a check box) so that when a count object of this shape is put on top of a Linear type takeoff object it will move with the linear if said linear is moved

An opened-shaped count object must be placed within a linear object Opening shaped count objects may also be measured by linear foot or linear yard (EA SF and SY are also options) Opening shaped count items default to a width of 3rsquo 0rdquo at the time of creation This size can be changed The small medium and large size are not options on this type of condition anymore Check Backout on the Advanced tab for each Count object back out the footage (or yardage) of opening-shaped count objects in which they are placed

NOTE In order to see this Backout functionality (in quantity) for SY or SF deductions at least one of the

results for the Linear(s) this object will be placed on must be set to SY or SF and the count object must have a height quantity

Advanced Features of Conditions The Round Feature Under the Advanced tab of the linear and area Condition dialogues you may specify quantity rounding (in inches) For linear objects rounding applies to each linear object drawn For area objects rounding will apply to each segment of the area perimeter adjusting the perimeter and area calculations For example With a linear condition entering 12 in the Round field will round up each related linear object to the nearest 12 inches or one foot With this setting two walls of 1 4 would each round to 2 0 totaling 4 0

NOTE In the Takeoff Dock bar condition list and in the On-Screen Takeoff reports quantities will be displayed in whole numbers rounded up to the nearest foot However calculations are based on true quantities without rounding unless the Round Feature is engaged

Pitch Pitch may apply either to linear or area conditions It is measured in rise per linear foot Entering 12 indicates a 12 rise per 12 of linear distance (a pitch of 12 over 12) or an angle of 45deg

Section 8 Advanced Features

58

Advanced Features of Project Properties Selecting Multiple Pages

1 Select a single page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry

2 Drag the cursor down the column of numbers to select consecutive pages

3 Click on the blank button at the top of this column to select all pages in the Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

59

Changing Image Assigned to a Drawing 1 Select the page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry 2 Click the Change Image button The Change Image dialog box will appear

3 Navigate to the desired file and select by clicking on it

4 Click the Open button The electronic file assigned to the page will have been changed to reflect the new file choice

Changing Image File Path 1 Select pages as described above

2 Choose Change Folder

3 In the Change Folder dialog navigate to the appropriate folder

4 Click the OK button The file path will have been changed for the selected page entries

Delete a Page from Project Properties 1 Select the page you want to delete by clicking on its associated number (in the gray box at the

left of the entry)

2 Choose Delete Page

All Takeoff on the page will be deleted immediately and permanently

Section 8 Advanced Features

60

Advanced Features of Tool Options

Calculation Method On-Screen Takeoff has built-in calculation options to allow for faster work and faster saves until your takeoff is complete Calculation options are found by selecting Tools gt Options then clicking on the Calculation tab

Calculation method can be set to Automatic Automatic except Grids and Manual Manual will allow the program to operate more quickly while Automatic or Automatic except Grids allows the user to see quantity changes as takeoffs are made

In any mode you may press F9 to recalculate quantities for the On-Screen Takeoff current totals

Configuration Tab

When the ldquoPage Label (A01)rdquo radial button is chosen On-Screen Takeoff puts the numbered label on all the pages of in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar If the Page Descriptionrdquo radial button is chosen then a description of what takeoff is on that specific page will be shown in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar

This section of the configuration tab gives you options on how you want to export your information When the ldquoFolderSubfolder Namesrdquo radial button is chosen than on your file that you are exporting to will have all the conditions folders and subfolders In the Delimiter box you can choose the symbol that is needed to separate the information you are exporting Some files need semicolons () or colons () to make sure the information comes exported in is separated it the appropriate places

Section 8 Advanced Features

61

In previous versions of On-Screen Takeoff there are views that users need to have in order for them to display their information By either choosing ldquoOST 1xrdquo or ldquoOST 2xrdquo it will let the program know you want your columns of information exported in that specific format

When you have the Confirm Deletions radial button of ldquoYesrdquo chosen than every time you delete anything you will get a dialog box confirming your intentions of deletion

While working with your takeoff you have a choice to either view the legend of your conditions or hide it Choose whichever radial button that suits your needs

For those who prefer to use the Enter key to navigate in dialog boxes this option is just for that

Font Tab The Font tab is designed for you to make your own look and feel for the application At the bottom of this tab it will show you sample of the fonts and colors you have chosen

Renaming the Current Page You may change the name of the current page in the takeoff area of On-Screen Takeoff by selecting Edit gt Rename Page

This opens the Name Page dialog and you may simply type in a new name and click the Enter button The new name for the file will be reflected on the title bar for the page and in Project Properties

You also may access the Rename Page function by right-clicking in the takeoff area while in Image View and selecting the option from the pop-up menu that appears

Section 9

62

Saving and Exiting

This section will

Explain how to save projects

Show you how to safely exit the program

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

63

Saving Your Project

1 Select File gt Save 2 If your project has not previously been saved a Save dialog box will open to allow you to name

the file and choose the directory and folder in which to save your file 3 Once saved File gt Save will simply save the current version of the file

OR

4 Select File gt Save As then type in a new name for the file and save to the desired file path

The Auto-save Feature With the Auto-save feature On-Screen Takeoff automatically backs up your open project You may choose to have more than one level of backup files The first backup copy will have the extension b00 and successive files will be b01 b02 and so on If you have designated four levels of backup files after the fourth backup copy has been created (b03) the next file will be saved over the file with extension b00 Further backup saves will then rotate through the four backup files in the same way

1 Select Tools gt Options 2 In the Auto-save area (under the General tab) select the frequency of backup file creation (in

minutes) and the number of levels for the feature 3 You also may disengage the feature by clicking in the check box to clear it

The Auto-save feature automatically saves backup copies to the directory of the current project If you are working from a write-protected area such as a CD-ROM On-Screen Takeoff will place backup files in the On-Screen Takeoff folder

Exiting When you are finished using On-Screen Takeoff it is very easy to exit Exiting is very important because of security reasons If someone were to use your computer they could enter the application and view and manipulate information

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

64

On-Screen Takeoff closes the open project when you open another or create a new project or when you exit the program

1 Select File gt Exit

OR

2 You also may click at the upper right-hand corner of the application to exit

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

65

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer When you get your digitizer from GTCO you will need to connect it to your computer Follow the instructions outlined below to do this

Note For rollup digitizers the metal bar must be oriented to the top or right hand side

Connecting the Digitizer 1 Lay the digitizer out flat 2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer 3 Plug in the power adapter 4 Plug the interface (IO) cable into the digitizer 5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into an open serial port on computer

Note GTCO Technical support phone number is 410-381-6688 The electronic manual (on diskette) from GTCO contains more detailed installation and operation instructions for the GTCO digitizer model you have

Installing other Digitizer Drivers If you are using a GTCO Digitizer you will need to install the GTCO TabletWorks Drivers

If you are using a Digitizer not supported by GTCO Tablet Works 10 please contact the manufacturer of your digitizer for assistance with installation

Installing GTCO TabletWorks Drivers 1 Insert the On Center CD into the CD-ROM drive The CD Startup screen will open 2 Click on Install Software 3 Select Additional Software and Drivers 4 Select Digitizer Driver 5 Follow the instructions for installing TabletWorks 10

Adhering the Template The template is a small plastic sticker used to enable mouse function when using the digitizer with On-Screen Takeoff Place your template on your digitizer We suggest placing it in the bottom right corner of the digitizer about one inch inside the takeoff area

Note You may either peel off the back of the template and use the adhesive surface or you can tape the template down

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

66

Testing the Digitizer Drivers Before running OST you may test the digitizer by moving the stylus around on the digitizer pad it should move the mouse cursor (if mouse emulation is enabled)

If the digitizer does not move the mouse cursor on the screen

The superset codes may need to be reset Reset the superset codes by touching on the border of the digitizer with the stylus The digitizer should beep several times

The digitizer may not be communicating with the computer Be sure the COM port selected is correct Be sure the COM port selected is correct If you are not able to get the digitizer to move the mouse cursor you need to call GTCO technical support for help

Note The Mouse Emulation is not required for On-Screen Takeoff to work properly It is used only for the Template functionality if the digitizer is moving the cursor the wrong direction (up instead of sideways or vice-versa)

Click the L-shaped arrow symbol on the digitizer with the stylus

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

67

Appendix II Toolbar Items Main Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

68

Tool Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

69

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

70

Navigate Toolbar (Continued)

Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

71

Takeoff Toolbar (Continued)

Image Toolbar

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

72

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

This section will detail how to load plans from a F W Dodge CD-ROM into an On-Screen Takeoff project file ready for takeoffs

Dodge files may be added to the Project Properties dialog However loading the files in that way will load the files by number rather than name description If you want to load one page only from your Dodge CD You will have to rename the page to display the name rather than number of the file

To load plan files from a Dodge CD so that the files load sequentially by file number but are displayed by name rather than by number within your project follow the instructions below

Opening a Dodge project from a CD-ROM 1 Insert the CD into the drive 2 Choose File gt Custom 3 Choose Dodge Plans Project (plansdat) as the file type 4 Select the appropriate file type by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the Files of type

field 5 In the Look in field access your drive paths by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the

field then

Navigate to your CD-ROM drive Open the data folder and Open the Projects folder

6 Select the desired project and open its folder 7 Open the plansdat file 8 All the images will come in sequenced correctly for that job along with the full descriptions

(names) of each page If there is not a plans folder in the project folder then plans do not exist for that project on the CD Opening the plansdat file will yield an empty project

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

73

Appendix IV Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer The On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer is a limited version of On Center Softwarersquos commercial takeoff software If your status bar located at the very bottom of the main window says View Mode in the lower left-hand corner then you are using the Plan Viewer You can use the plan viewer to

View CD-based amp converted CAD drawings

View a previously created OST file and associated drawings

Download electronic plans online

Navigate through drawings

Quickly Takeoff linearsareas and counts

Zoom in to view the plan better

Print drawings directly from the viewer

Viewing an On-Screen Takeoff Project File

1 To open an OST file that was previously created with of On-Screen Takeoff 2 Select File gt Open 3 An Open dialog will appear if you do not see the OST file you are looking for select the

Look In drop down arrow 4 A drop down menu will appear listing the various folders drives and mapped drives located

on your computer select the correct drive or folder location and continue to browse to the location of your OST file

5 When you see your OST file double-click it to open it 6 Any takeoff and drawings should appear on the Image tab view

If you do not see the drawings but do see the colored takeoff layer the drawings may

not be located in the same place they were originally saved at Go to File gt Project Properties and check the Image File path for each listed page If the image file path is pointing to a CD drive make sure the CD is inside the CR-ROM

Downloading Electronic Plans If your Online Plan Service provides a special file format (OSX) required to use this feature of our plan viewer you can immediately downloaded all electronic plans of a project directly from our viewer

Most Plan Room web sites will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff when a request to download plans is made Your particular Plan Room may differ in operation so please contact the provider directly with questions on using the site

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

74

When you request to download or open a project file from a Plan Room you will usually have the open to open or save an OSX file Choosing open will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff Alternately you may choose to save the file to a local hard drive After you have saved the file either double-click it to launch On-Screen Takeoff or open the OSX file using On-Screen Takeoff by clicking File then Open and locating the file on your hard drive You will need to change the file type to OSX

After the OSX file is opened you will see an additional tab appear in the Conditions List window called Pages

The Pages tab shows the hierarchy of your project Gray file icons represent pages that have not been downloaded and blue icons represents pages that have been downloaded

To download a page simply double-click the page icon

If you wish to select a group of pages to download you can use the Ctrl or Shift key to multiple select them then click the Download button

If you wish to download all pages at once click the Download All button

Downloaded pages will now appear in the Project Properties dialog in the same order in which they appear in the Pages tab

Creating Quick Takeoffs With On-Screen Takeoff you can create quick takeoffs to measure quantities even if you dont have the full version of our program However using the Quick Takeoff functionality shows you just a fraction of what the full version can do

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar is located at the top of the image view It has three buttons designated for three types of takeoffs Linear Area and Count The Quantity drop down list will show secondary quantities for Linears and Areas The Units drop down allows you to select how you want your quantities displayed Feet Inches Yards Millimeters and Meters

NOTE Every time change the type of takeoff you are performing (switching from Area to Linear for example) the previous quantities and takeoff objects will disappear They will also disappear when you changes pages

NOTE You can use the Dimension Tool to basically measure the distance between two points or linears The distance will display on the status bar at the bottom of the application

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

75

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions General

Where is On-Screen Takeoff installed on my computer

Typically it is installed in CProgram FilesOn-Screen Takeoff

In Explorer how do I recognize On-Screen Takeoff file types

On-Screen Takeoff data is stored in a single file per job lsquojob name OSTrsquo On-Screen Takeoff templates are stored as lsquotemplate nameTPOrsquo

Can only one project at a time be open

Yes For that reason opening another project automatically closes the project on screen You will be asked to save any changes

Is only one scale allowed per page What about on drawings that have multiple detail sections on a page and each of those drawings have different scales

Yes For pages with drawings of different scales copy the drawing to another project page and set the appropriate scale

I cannot perform backout on an area that is along a linear

As a workaround use the On-Screen Takeoff layers feature to help you with this issue Electronic Images

How do I start a project from drawings that have been scanned and written to a CD-ROM

Open a new project Select File gt Project Properties and select Auto Add Navigate to your CD and the appropriate folder and select any image file in that location Click Open All files in the location will load into your project Recommended that images are copied from CD to hard drive for performance

If I get a disk of drawings in AutoCAD format (R13 or R14) can I read them in On-Screen Takeoff

Yes On-Screen Takeoff now reads DWG DXF and many other format that are saved with AutoCAD

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

76

When I click on the all pages button what is supposed to happen Currently nothing seems to change when I click on that button

The All Pages button is used to apply the Darken and Enhance Plans feature to all pages in the project (as opposed to only the current page on screen)

Is there a way to deduct a large skylight from an area condition

Yes with the related area condition selected in the Takeoff Dock bar unselect the Backout button on the Takeoff Toolbar then draw the Backout area The area quantity will be deducted from the related condition object and the linear measurement of the Backout perimeter will be added

Digitizer Issues

How do I connect a Digitizer to the computer

See Appendix I Connecting a Digitizer

The Place Template menu choice is disabled

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or the digitizer or the digitzer drivers are not installed

It wonrsquot let me select the Set Takeoff Area menu choice

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or no job is open a digitizer is not installed or the drivers are not installed

The digitizer stylus is not moving the cursor or crosshairs

Click S-0-1 superset on the digitizer

How do I convert my old GTCO Digitizer to work with On- Screen Takeofftrade

Call GTCO and they may be able to reconfigure your digitizer to be compatible with On-Screen Takeoff

Printing Issues Which Printers work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible printers include On-Screen Takeoff Hewlett Packard Epson and Canon printers If you are having printer difficulties please contact support and specify the type of printer along with other pertinent information Contact support at wwwoncentercomsupport or email supportoncentercom

Which Plotters work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible Plotters include Hewlett Packard DesignJet plotters and the EnCAD Cadjet II If you are having plotter difficulties please contact support and specify the type of plotter concerned

ViewingDisplay I can no longer see my condition list How do I get it back

The toolbars and Dock bars can be turned on and off through the View gt Toolbars menu options

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

77

This is also accessible by right-clicking in the toolbar area and selecting (or deselecting) a toolbar listed

I cannot view my folders in the condition list

Right-click in the Takeoff Dock barcondition list area and select Show Tree to display your folders

My Status Bar reads Viewer Mode and I am unable to draw conditions

On-Screen Takeoff needs to be Authorized Or you need to purchase an upgrade Click the Perform Advanced Takeoff button on the main toolbar

I hid a Dock bar and when I selected to view it again it appeared alongside the other Dock

bar instead of stacked on top of it How do I fix it

Pick up the Dock bar by clicking on the bar at the top and continuing to hold down the mouse button drag the Dock bar over the other one It will resize and appear stacked with the other

When I open image files from a CD the images are all upside down How do I get them right

side up

To flip pages from top to bottom follow the steps below 1 Click the All Pages button on the Image Toolbar (All Pages is engaged when the button

is not clicked) 2 Click the Flip Horizontal button on the Image Toolbar 3 Click the All Pages button again to disengage

Templates How do I create a Template

Follow the steps below 1 Create a typical project 2 Choose File gt Save As 3 Choose On-Screen Takeoff Template Files as the file type to save 4 Name the file This will save all of the condition setups as well as the layers for the

project

How do I create a new project from a template

Follow the steps below 1 Choose File gt New 2 Select a template from those listed in the New dialog This will open a new project with

conditions and layers saved from a previous project but no pages or takeoff

78

INDEX

Area Conditions 32

Area Objects 57

Auto Scrolling 20

Auto-save 63

Backout Mode 41

Calculation Method 60

Conditions 29

Configuration 60

Contents Tab 6

Continuous Mode 38

Count Conditions 33

Count Objects 57

Digitizer 10 65 76

Docking Toolbars 13

Dodge CD 72

Drawing 27 37

DropRun Count 55

Environment 18

Exiting 63

Exporting 49

Features 16

Font 61

Frequently Asked Questions 75

Grid 40

Help File 5

Hiding Toolbars 13

Hot Links 21

Image 19 59

Image files 9

Image Toolbar 12 71

Images 75

Index Tab 6

Layers 43

Linear Conditions 31

Linear Objects 56

Main Toolbar 12 67

Menus 14

Moving Toolbars 13

Navigate Toolbar 12 69

Navigating 20

On-Screen Takeofftrade 2

Page 59 61

Pages 20 25 28

Plan Viewer 73

Plans 26

Printing 47 76

Project Properties 25

Projects 22

Quick Start Video 18

Resizing Toolbars 13

Roping 54

Saving 63

Scale 28

Search Tab 7

Selecting Objects 42

Setup 8

Start On-Screen Takeofftrade 17

System Requirements 9

Takeoff 19 27

Takeoff Toolbar 70 71

Takeoff Toolbar 12

Template Files 23

TIF (Group4) 9

Tool Toolbar 12 68

Toolbar 67

Toolbars 12

View Toolbar 12 69

Viewing Toolbars 12

Worksheet 20

Zone Conditions 33

Zoom Toolbar 12 69

  • On-Screen Takeoff Lite
  • Table of Contents
  • Section 1 - Introduction
  • Section 2 - Setup
  • Section 3 - Toolbars and Menus
  • Section 4 - Features
  • Section 5 - Projects
  • Section 6 - Conditions and Takeoff
  • Section 7 - Printing and Exporting
  • Section 8 - Advanced Features
  • Section 9 - Saving and Exiting
  • Appendix I - Installing Your Digitizer
  • Appendix II - Toolbar Items
  • Appendix III - Loading Plans from a Dodge CD
  • Appendix IV - Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer
  • Appendix V - Frequently Asked Questions
  • Index

Section 5 Projects

27

Setting Up a Drawing Template On-Screen Takeoff provides the convenience of using the same work surface for both digitizer and mouse to allow the user to draw conditions and then edit settings of the project or add or change conditions without breaking stride A mouse pad template included with the program defines the area of the digitizer in which use of the stylus or cursor will be recognized as mouse movement as opposed to drawing movement

1 Place your stylus on On-Screen Takeoff

2 Placing the template identifies the location mouse movements will be recognized by the program

Before placing the template the template must be applied to the digitizer surface This may have been done during the installation of your digitizer We suggest attaching the template to the lower right corner of the digitizer surface about one inch inside the grid area

3 Select Digitizer gt Place Template

4 Follow the instruction prompts on the screen clicking first on the target symbol at the left of the On-Screen Takeoff box on the template then on the target at the right

Setting Takeoff Area Before you can begin taking off a drawing you must define the drawing area on the digitizer This requires defining an area that will include all objects on each drawing of your plans As you add pages to your takeoff the same area of the digitizer will be active

1 Secure the plans to the digitizer with tape or a set of clamps

2 With a pen or a pencil mark the upper left corner and the lower right corner of the first page in your set of plans

3 Select Digitizer gt Set Takeoff Area

4 Click each mark with the stylus pen as prompted

5 Verify the active area of the digitizer by looking at the image size located in the lower right corner of your screen

If you close the program before the takeoff is complete you will need to reestablish the takeoff area before you can add additional condition quantities

Electronic plans appear on your computer screen eliminating the need to set a takeoff area You simply drag your mouse across the conditions you wish to takeoff The conditions will be highlighted and quantities will be totaled instantly Electronic plans are available through a variety of services For information contact an On Center Software account manager

Section 5 Projects

28

Setting Scale for Specific Pages You may set the scale in each page view separately This will override the default scale setting in Project Properties for that page Setting the correct scale for the drawing before taking off quantities ensures accurate calculations Be careful to check the scale for each drawing in your project before doing takeoffs

1 Display the page you want to set select Edit gt Set Scale

2 Use the drop down arrow to select a scale that will be applied to that page

3 Click

OR

4 Access the pull-down scale settings on the Navigate toolbar

NOTE As you draw objects notice that the drawn object is similar in width to the object on your plans If it is not the scale set may not be correct

Calculating Scale You may calculate scale according to a known measurement between two points either with a digitizer or on electronic plans

1 Select Edit gt Calculate Scale using Image or Edit gt Calculate Scale using Digitizer

2 Follow the instructions in the related Calculate Scale dialog box You will be asked to click on the first and second points then to enter the dimension for that distance

3 The scale will be recalculated for the displayed page and the Scale display on the Navigate toolbar will show the new scale

Section 6

29

Conditions and Takeoff

This section will Draw Conditions to Takeoff Plan Quantities

What Zones will do to help your takeoff process

Discuss the ins and outs of Takeoffs

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

30

Creating Conditions

If you are starting a new project from scratch you will need to create conditions to takeoff quantities such as floor areas wall lengths and corner bead counts If you are using a template you will have several pre-designed conditions already listed on the Takeoff dock bar However you may want to change the characteristics of some conditions or create additional conditions for a particular project

1 Right Click within the Takeoff dock bar Select New gt Condition

Or

2 From the Takeoff dock bar Click (if the buttons are not showing right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select Show Buttons from the pop-up menu) The New Condition dialog appears

3 Select the condition type (Linear Area Count or Zone) from the pull-down menu accessed by the

down arrow next to the Type option

4 Press Tab or use the mouse (or stylus) to move to Name and enter a name for your condition

5 Specify the desired condition attributes See Condition Attributes for more detail

6 Click for condition to apply

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

31

Condition Attributes Each condition type will have related attributes to select or specify within the General and Advanced tabs of the New Condition dialog Once a condition has been used to takeoff a quantity from your plans certain attributes cannot be changed

All conditions allow the user to specify color and fill pattern for the object drawn

Linear Conditions

General Specify width and height by feet and inches Specify pitch in inches up to the nearest thousandth of an inch if applicable

Advanced Specify rounding for object quantities and droprun default length for electrical or plumbing drops at the ends of lines Select Connect to have lines connect at the corners where one line of the condition ends and another begins (and indicate Tolerance for the featurersquos activation as distance between the ends of two lines) Choose Trim to have lines automatically trim to a line being crossed Choose Curve to draw a curved line

Follow these examples for inputting feet and inches For 7 feet 6 inches type 706 for 13 feet 7 inches type 1307 For 20 feet type 2000

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

32

Area Conditions

General If needed you can specify the thickness (in inches) andor pitch (in inches)

Advanced Specify rounding for object quantities Choose to display an adjustable grid within the area and indicate matrix cell dimensions

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

33

Count Conditions

General

Specify height and indicate the size (in inches) and shape (square circle triangle rectangle or opening) of the count object as it will appear on screen

Advanced Count conditions have advanced attributes These options are available for all shapes except for openings

Zone Conditions Zones allow you to subdivide condition quantities making it easier to modify and complete jobs in phases They can be used at the end of a takeoff to isolate a group of condition quantities that are in different areas of the takeoff

Zones can also be used to break a takeoff into multi-phases and can even be used to isolate quantities while a job is in progress to group the amount of work that has been completed to date They can be applied to one or multiple pages in your plans automatically calculating the takeoff quantities for each zoned area

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

34

The zone feature is only available in Lite and Full Mode If you are in View Mode and would like

to use this feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade

Condition Notes A Note tab is provided for comments regarding the condition These notes will display on the Takeoff List report and will import into Quick Bid

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

35

Condition Results The Results tab of the New Condition is based on condition type Initial settings default to linear feet (LF) for linear conditions square feet (SF) for area conditions and count of items (EA) for count conditions and zones The first of the results fields will display for the condition items in the Takeoff dock bar area All results will display in worksheets and Takeoff List reports as well as in an Excel spreadsheet after being exported

Copying Conditions You may use the condition attributes from a condition yoursquove already created for any future conditions of the same type

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Click the Copy button from the toolbar

OR

3 Right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select copy

4 A new condition will appear in the list with the same condition attributes as the previous condition but with the quantities zeroed

Editing Conditions Once you have copied a condition you might want to change several attributes You can also edit an existing condition to fit any updated needs

1 Highlight the desired condition on the Takeoff dock bar

2 Click the Change button

OR

3 Double-click on the condition you wish to edit to bring up the Change Condition dialog

NOTE The Change Condition dialog differs from the New Condition dialog only in that if takeoffs

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

36

have been performed in your project with this condition you will not be able to change the type of condition or certain properties under the advanced tab of the dialog box

Deleting Conditions 1 Click on the condition in the Takeoff Dock bar area

2 Click the Delete button on the toolbar

OR

3 Right-click and select Delete from the pop-up menu

All takeoff associated with the deleted condition will be deleted immediately and permanently

Organizing Project Conditions Within your project you can create folders andor sub-folders for different types of conditions You may even want to create a folder containing conditions with reset values

To get started organizing your conditions make sure you are viewing the condition tree (right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select Show Tree)

Creating Folders and Sub-Folders 1 Right-click in the Takeoff Dock bar area

2 Select New gt Folder from the pop-up menu

Copying Folders

1 Click on the folder and click Copy on the toolbar

2 All copied conditions within the new folder will have values reset to zero

Renaming Folders

1 Click on the folder

2 Right-click and select Rename from the pop-up menu

3 Enter a name for your folder and click the Enter button

Changing Condition Order

You may move conditions up or down in the condition list of the Takeoff dock bar to suit your project needs

1 Select the condition you would like to move by clicking to highlight it

NOTE When you are ready to move the highlighted conditions be sure that you start

moving using the last condition chosen That condition will have a highlighted boarder

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

37

2 Drag and drop any the condition from one place to another in the list You may also move a condition to another folder on the list in this way

Drawing with Conditions Snap Angles Set up snap angles to prevent lines from appearing jagged Snap angles are commonly set at 15deg and shift snap angles at 0deg

1 Go to Tools gt Options Options dialog appears

2 Under the General tab make the desired settings

3 Click to save the settings As they are drawn lines will snap to the set degree

Drawing a Linear Object 1 Select a condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff dock bar

2 Move the cursor into the Image takeoff area of the screen you will see the cursor display as crosshairs

3 Click and hold left mouse button then drag mouse to draw a line

4 Release mouse button to set line

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

38

5 Repeat steps for further lines

Continuous Mode This feature allows you to draw an object that has connected lines

1 Click the icon from the Takeoff toolbar

OR

2 Go to Tools gt Continuous Mode

3 Follow steps 1-3 from Draw a Linear Object

4 Click at each point of intersection The object will be connected

5 Double-click after making the final point to set the lines

Drawing a Curve To draw a curved line the Curve option must be checked under the Advanced tab of the Condition dialog

1 Click where you want to begin the curve and drag in a straight line to the position for the other endpoint of the curve

2 Click on the line to select it Handles in the shapes of small squares will appear at either end of

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

39

the line and in the center of the line

3 Move the cursor over the center handles until the cursor becomes a two-way arrow

4 Click and drag in the direction of the curve bending the line as you move the cursor Release to set the curve (The line you began with will disappear)

Draw a circle by drawing two curved lines connected

Drawing an Area Object Area conditions are drawn similarly to continuous mode lines You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete your area takeoff

NOTE When drawing an area do not intersect the perimeter or line of the object you are drawing

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

3 The area will be filled with the pattern set for that condition

NOTE The simulated circle will be good enough for you to be able to make a bid

To create a circular area click from point to point with very short distances in between points simulating a circlersquos perimeter Double-click after setting the last point to set the area

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

40

Grid Options Grids give you an added advantage when installing materials such as tiles Use this feature to get a count for how many tiles are needed for an area

1 Double-click on an area condition in the Takeoff dock bar to open its Condition dialog

2 Click on the Advanced tab to show its options

3 Check the box next to Grid by clicking in it

4 Indicate the dimensions of the cell matrix in inches (For example 200 x 400)

5 Under Results tab choose each (EA) for one of the results fields This will tabulate a number of grid cells (including partial grid cells) in area

6 Click to save your settings

7 Use the Move Grid and Rotate Grid features in the Tools menu to manipulate the grid as desired

Grid Calculation

1 Go to Tools gt Options menu

1 Specify if On-Screen Takeoff automatically should Calculate Grid Position

2 If AreaGrid Size is selected On-Screen Takeoff will calculate the number of items needed to fill the grid based on grid demintions

3 Click to accept and close the dialog

To move a line at any angle (regardless of default setting) press the Shift key while moving the mouse

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

41

Backout Mode This feature allows you to take out part of an area and deduct that amount of square footage

1 Select Tools gt Backout Mode

2 Outline the are you want backed out as you would when drawing a regular area object (see Drawing an Area Object)

3 The outlined area will clear and quantities will be recalculated

NOTE The perimeter of the backout area will be added to the LF quantity for that condition

Drawing a Count Object Square triangle rectangle and circle shaped count objects can easily be placed on images

1 Select the condition

2 Click in the location where you want the object to appear

3 To place an opening-shaped count item like a door or window you must click over an existing linear object such as a wall

4 On the Results tab you can change the height properties to give you the result you need

5 If Backout is checked on the advanced tab for each count opening the opening-shaped count item will back out a corresponding section of the linear object

Opening shaped count items are sized at 3rsquo0rdquo by default

Drawing a Zone Zones are drawn in the same way as area objects and may be any polygonal shape You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete the zone perimeter

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

42

Selecting Objects

1 Use the Select Tool to select objects

You can also select all objects that correspond to a condition

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Right-click and choose Select All

3 All objects with this condition will be highlighted with squares as an outline

Moving and Resizing Objects Linear

1 To move or resize a linear object click anywhere on the line to select it

2 To move the line position your pointer over the center handles When the mouse is positioned over the handles you will see a two-way arrow You will only be able to move the line in the direction of the arrows

3 Drag the line to a new position

4 Clicking and dragging the handles on the ends of the line will allow you to lengthen or shorten your line

Area and Zone

1 To move an area object or zone in its entirety click and drag it to its new position

2 Grabbing a handle at a corner or intersection of the object will allow you to adjust and change its perimeter

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

43

Count 1 To move a square circle rectangle or triangle shaped count object click and drag

2 Click and drag an opening shaped count object along the length of the linear object to the desired position then release

NOTE An opening shaped count object may not be moved from its associated linear condition object however it may be moved up and down the length of the linear object

Layers On-Screen Takeoff allows you to sort and separate your takeoff objects within the same job and on the same page On-Screen Takeoff gives you this flexibility through the use of layers

By assigning different conditions to different layers (for example differentiating between floors ceilings and walls) you can choose to view all layers or turn off certain layers to display and print the remaining groups of conditions only You may also remove the background image of electronic plans add text and hot link symbols or print only your condition takeoffs

Layers are only available in Full Mode If you are in View or Lite Mode and would like to use this

feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade Default Layers

On-Screen Takeoff begins every project with three default layers Image Annotation and Default The Image layer holds the electronic plan files you may have in your project The Annotation layer possesses all text notations highlighting and hot links in the project The Default layer will appear in the Condition dialog when creating or editing a condition (listed in the takeoff dock bar) Conditions are assigned to the Default layer unless otherwise specified by the user

Creating Layers To assign a condition to a layer other than the default layer you must first create additional layers for your project

1 Select View gt Layers to open the Layers dialog

2 Click An unnamed layer will be added

3 Click within the empty box and type a name for your layer (for example Wall)

4 New layers are added as active layers The adjacent box under the Show column will be checked

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

44

Assigning a Layer to a Condition 1 Open the Condition dialog box by creating a new condition or editing an existing condition

2 Under the General tab click on the down arrow in the Layer field to display optional layers

3 Select the desired layer for the condition Only the Default layer and layers you have added will be displayed

4 Click

View and Hide Layers

1 Select View gt Layers

2 Under the Show column check the box to view or remove the check (by clicking on it) to hide the specific layer

3 Click to accept and close the Layers dialog

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

45

Assigning Text to a Layer When adding text to an image On-Screen Takeoff has the capability to assign the text to a specified layer

1 Select the Text Tool

2 Click at the point you want to place your text

3 Type in your text using the Enter key for line breaks

4 Click the drop down arrow next to the Layer field and select the desired layer

Section 7

46

Printing and Exporting

This section will

Printing options and procedures

Exporting data by copying and pasting

Exporting quantity results to Excel spreadsheets

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

47

Print Setup On-Screen Takeoff allows the user to print the image takeoff list and worksheet

1 Select File gt Print Setup The Print Setup dialog will open

2 Select a printer or leave the default selection listed (change from the default printer displayed by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the field)

3 Indicate page size and printer tray option (Source) Access page size options by clicking on the

down arrow at the right of the field

4 Choose Portrait or Landscape orientation

5 Click to accept and close the dialog

Printing Images The image area can include the electronic plans the takeoff objects added text and hot links To print a subset of these (for example just the takeoffs without the plans or the added text and hot link symbols) hide layers that you do not want to print (see Section 6 View and Hide Layers) When you are printing your images every page will show the scale of the takeoff you are printing

1 Click on the Image tab to display the area of your project

2 Select File gt Print (or Ctrl + P)

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

48

3 Select the desired view (What to print) and the Image Range

4 Click The second Print dialog will open

5 Change settings accordingly or click if you accept the default settings

Printing Takeoff Lists and Worksheets In Takeoff Lists and Worksheets you may hide columns to print only certain results or adjust column widths to fit the report within the page size selected

1 In Takeoff List or Worksheet view move your cursor to the right side of the columnrsquos title bar the cursor will display as a two-way arrow

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

49

2 Click and drag to adjust the width of the column Holding the mouse button you may

slide the title bar under the title bar to its left to hide the column completely

3 Select File gt Print or press Ctrl + P to access the Print dialog

4 Indicate desired printer and choose the number of copies

5 Click to print and close the dialog

When printing the condition list we suggest printing in landscape

To reset to the default column widths double-click on the right border of a column heading will reset the column to its right (or previously to its right before being hidden)

Print Preview 1 Select File gt Print Preview

2 Use and to vary your view 3 If viewing an image choose current full or scale view to see how it displays

4 For printed outputs that cover more than one page use and to view adjacent pages or click on the down arrow next to Page field and select the page you want displayed

Exporting Using the CopyPaste Feature You may copy all the data or sections from the worksheet and the takeoff list view in On-Screen Takeoff and paste it into another application When pasting into Excel the cell layout will be maintained

1 Highlight the areas you wish to paste Click and hold the left mouse button down as you drag the cursor over the area to be selected then releasing the mouse button

OR

2 Select the entire takeoff list quickly click on the left On-Screen Takeoff column header and hold and drag the cursor across the remaining column headings

The number of pages for the view selected will display in the lower left-hand corner The zoom percentage that applies to the view will be displayed in the lower right-hand corner next to page size of the drawing

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

50

3 In the worksheet view you may highlight rows by clicking on the numbered buttons to the left of each row clicking and dragging across column headings or clicking and dragging over individual cells in the worksheet

Click anywhere in the appropriate view to deselect the area

4 Once your selection is highlighted you may select Edit gt Copy or Ctrl C from the keyboard 5 On your monitor switch to the application into which you want to paste your selection 6 Select Edit gt Paste in the new application or simply press Ctrl + V to paste

The colored keys for conditions cannot be pasted

Using the Export Feature You may export condition quantities to specified cell location within an Excel worksheet file Cell target locations are assigned in the Results tab of the condition dialogs on the Export line relating to each quantity measurement type

On-Screen Takeoff will export takeoff quantity results for up to three different quantity types that you specify For instance you may want to know the number of square feet in a ceiling area as well as the number of linear feet in its perimeter

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

51

1 Bring up the Condition dialog by double-clicking on a condition in the takeoff dock bar or by

selecting the condition and clicking

2 Click on the Results tab to access its fields The default quantities for the condition type will display

3 For each results field click on the arrow to access the pull-down menu and select the appropriate quantity (for example SF LF EA etchellip)

4 Have your Excel spreadsheet opened and saved in a file

5 Specify the Excel spreadsheet cell locations where you want the results to go

6 For a cell in the first sheet of your spreadsheet type in the cell address (eg a1) Case is not important

7 For a cell on a successive sheet of your spreadsheet type in sheet the number followed by a comma and the cell address without any spaces (eg sheet2a1) Case is not important

8 Click

9 Select File gt Export gt Condition Qty to Excel

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

52

10 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

11 Click to export On-Screen Takeoff results to specified cell locations in the Excel file When you return to the Excel application you will see the values have been added to the specified cell locations in your spreadsheet

12 Save your Excel file

Exporting Worksheet to Excel

1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 From On-Screen Takeoff Select File gt Export gt Worksheet to Excel

4 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

5 Click When you return to the Excel application you will see the values from the Worksheet Tab have been added to your spreadsheet

6 Save your Excel file

Exporting Takeoff to CVS 1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 Click the Takeoff Tab in the project you want to export the information

4 Select File gt Export gt Takeoff to CSV

5 Browse to the location of the CSV spreadsheet file click file to select it

6 Click the Save

NOTE CSV files can be opened in Excel Lotus Access etc One may consider this option more of a ldquodumprdquo into a file

The Excel application must be active (it may be minimized on the application bar) with the target spreadsheet open in the application Otherwise an error will occur with the export operation that will affect both the On-Screen Takeofftrade file and the Excel spreadsheet

Section 8

53

Advanced Features

This section will

Some special features of working with condition objects in the takeoff area

Details of advanced options for conditions

Advanced features of the Project Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

54

Features to Use with Objects Roping Feature You can move copy or delete using this feature Using the Select tool (the pointer) you may select several objects at once by clicking and dragging an outline around the objects then releasing the mouse button Roping may select either objects completely within the outlined area (inclusive) or objects both within and touched by the outlined area (touching) Specify your roping preference under Tools gt Options

1 Click and hold the mouse button at a point on the screen near the objects to be selected and drag to surround the objects with an outline

2 Release the mouse button The objects will be selected

3 You may now

Move the group around on the page by clicking within the group dragging the mouse and releasing the button to place the objects

Delete the group of objects by clicking the Delete key or

Copy and paste by pressing Ctrl C to copy the group then Ctrl V to paste it The pasted copy of the grouped objects will appear slightly offset from the original objects

Section 8 Advanced Features

55

Applying a DropRun Count

Use the droprun feature when calculating quantities to take into account the drop or run of a linear condition such as electrical lines or plumbing pipes Drop or run lengths may be added separately to any linear condition on screen while a default droprun length may be indicated for a condition as a whole

1 Select the desired linear condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff Dock bar

2 Click the Change button in the toolbar to open the Change Condition dialog

3 Click the Advanced tab to access the advanced options and click inside the DropRun check box

4 Enter a default length to be applied to all of this condition Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches) You can leave the length blank and manually enter drop run on each segment drawn

5 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog

Edit DropRun Count

1 With the related linear condition in the Takeoff Dock bar highlighted or with the pointer tool selected

2 click on the desired linear object in the image takeoff area The Count button will become active

3 Click on the Count button (alternatively select Tools gt Count) The default droprun amount will show in the pop-up Count dialog (Default length will be zero if droprun has not been selected in this conditionrsquos properties)

4 Type in the desired length Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches)

5 Click the OK button The additional amount will be reflected in the corresponding quantity The new DropRun count will apply only to the object edited

Adding Text in Image View

On-Screen Takeoff allows you to place text comments around your quantity takeoffs that may be printed along with plan images and objects Text is automatically placed within the Annotation Layer (that includes text and hot links)

1 To place text on the image select the Text Tool and click at the point you want to place your text opening a text box

2 Type in your information clicking Enter for line breaks

3 When you are finished click the OK button to exit the text box

4 To reposition text simply click on the text (with the Text Tool active) to select it

5 Move the cursor over the text the cursor will now display as a four-way arrow

6 Click and drag the mouse to position the text as desired

Section 8 Advanced Features

56

1 To edit existing text use the Text Tool to double-click on the text to open the editing box

2 Enter additional text or use the Backspace key to delete text as necessary

Formatting Text Once created you may format the font size type style and color of your text

1 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Font or click on the Font button in the Takeoff Toolbar

2 Select the desired features (color options are disabled) and click the OK button

3 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Color or click on the Color button in the Takeoff Toolbar The Color dialog will open

4 Click on a color in the Basic Color palette or create a color and add to the Custom Colors palette (Be sure to click on the color in the Custom Colors palette to select it)

5 Click the OK button

Object Properties

Linear Objects

Linear objects may be set to connect at corners

A linear object may be set to trim automatically when crossing another linear object (Check the trim option under the advanced tab of the Condition dialog)

When you move a connected linear object objects automatically move and resize connected lines accordingly (quantities are then recalculated)

This feature requires that the connected linear object be moved using the center handles (does not apply when resizing the line from the ends)

Objects constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

Objects are measured from centerline to centerline

Section 8 Advanced Features

57

Area Objects When drawing an area use your escape key to undo the last line drawn You may reverse your

drawing of an area using the escape key

The area will not fill with color and pattern until the user double-clicks after the last line is set

Lines drawn to delineate an area object constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

After selecting an area to move or adjust position the mouse in the center to move the entire area position the mouse at the sides or corners to adjust the perimeter

Count Objects

All count objects are quantified by the physical number of objects per page and reported as EA for the UOM The quantity for the current Image View is (displayed in the Condition List) and the total quantity in your project is displayed in the Takeoff View and Worksheet View)

Square circle rectangle and triangle shaped count objects do not displace or subtract from other object quantities when placed on top of them However on the Advanced Tab for the count condition a connect property can be set (this is a check box) so that when a count object of this shape is put on top of a Linear type takeoff object it will move with the linear if said linear is moved

An opened-shaped count object must be placed within a linear object Opening shaped count objects may also be measured by linear foot or linear yard (EA SF and SY are also options) Opening shaped count items default to a width of 3rsquo 0rdquo at the time of creation This size can be changed The small medium and large size are not options on this type of condition anymore Check Backout on the Advanced tab for each Count object back out the footage (or yardage) of opening-shaped count objects in which they are placed

NOTE In order to see this Backout functionality (in quantity) for SY or SF deductions at least one of the

results for the Linear(s) this object will be placed on must be set to SY or SF and the count object must have a height quantity

Advanced Features of Conditions The Round Feature Under the Advanced tab of the linear and area Condition dialogues you may specify quantity rounding (in inches) For linear objects rounding applies to each linear object drawn For area objects rounding will apply to each segment of the area perimeter adjusting the perimeter and area calculations For example With a linear condition entering 12 in the Round field will round up each related linear object to the nearest 12 inches or one foot With this setting two walls of 1 4 would each round to 2 0 totaling 4 0

NOTE In the Takeoff Dock bar condition list and in the On-Screen Takeoff reports quantities will be displayed in whole numbers rounded up to the nearest foot However calculations are based on true quantities without rounding unless the Round Feature is engaged

Pitch Pitch may apply either to linear or area conditions It is measured in rise per linear foot Entering 12 indicates a 12 rise per 12 of linear distance (a pitch of 12 over 12) or an angle of 45deg

Section 8 Advanced Features

58

Advanced Features of Project Properties Selecting Multiple Pages

1 Select a single page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry

2 Drag the cursor down the column of numbers to select consecutive pages

3 Click on the blank button at the top of this column to select all pages in the Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

59

Changing Image Assigned to a Drawing 1 Select the page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry 2 Click the Change Image button The Change Image dialog box will appear

3 Navigate to the desired file and select by clicking on it

4 Click the Open button The electronic file assigned to the page will have been changed to reflect the new file choice

Changing Image File Path 1 Select pages as described above

2 Choose Change Folder

3 In the Change Folder dialog navigate to the appropriate folder

4 Click the OK button The file path will have been changed for the selected page entries

Delete a Page from Project Properties 1 Select the page you want to delete by clicking on its associated number (in the gray box at the

left of the entry)

2 Choose Delete Page

All Takeoff on the page will be deleted immediately and permanently

Section 8 Advanced Features

60

Advanced Features of Tool Options

Calculation Method On-Screen Takeoff has built-in calculation options to allow for faster work and faster saves until your takeoff is complete Calculation options are found by selecting Tools gt Options then clicking on the Calculation tab

Calculation method can be set to Automatic Automatic except Grids and Manual Manual will allow the program to operate more quickly while Automatic or Automatic except Grids allows the user to see quantity changes as takeoffs are made

In any mode you may press F9 to recalculate quantities for the On-Screen Takeoff current totals

Configuration Tab

When the ldquoPage Label (A01)rdquo radial button is chosen On-Screen Takeoff puts the numbered label on all the pages of in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar If the Page Descriptionrdquo radial button is chosen then a description of what takeoff is on that specific page will be shown in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar

This section of the configuration tab gives you options on how you want to export your information When the ldquoFolderSubfolder Namesrdquo radial button is chosen than on your file that you are exporting to will have all the conditions folders and subfolders In the Delimiter box you can choose the symbol that is needed to separate the information you are exporting Some files need semicolons () or colons () to make sure the information comes exported in is separated it the appropriate places

Section 8 Advanced Features

61

In previous versions of On-Screen Takeoff there are views that users need to have in order for them to display their information By either choosing ldquoOST 1xrdquo or ldquoOST 2xrdquo it will let the program know you want your columns of information exported in that specific format

When you have the Confirm Deletions radial button of ldquoYesrdquo chosen than every time you delete anything you will get a dialog box confirming your intentions of deletion

While working with your takeoff you have a choice to either view the legend of your conditions or hide it Choose whichever radial button that suits your needs

For those who prefer to use the Enter key to navigate in dialog boxes this option is just for that

Font Tab The Font tab is designed for you to make your own look and feel for the application At the bottom of this tab it will show you sample of the fonts and colors you have chosen

Renaming the Current Page You may change the name of the current page in the takeoff area of On-Screen Takeoff by selecting Edit gt Rename Page

This opens the Name Page dialog and you may simply type in a new name and click the Enter button The new name for the file will be reflected on the title bar for the page and in Project Properties

You also may access the Rename Page function by right-clicking in the takeoff area while in Image View and selecting the option from the pop-up menu that appears

Section 9

62

Saving and Exiting

This section will

Explain how to save projects

Show you how to safely exit the program

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

63

Saving Your Project

1 Select File gt Save 2 If your project has not previously been saved a Save dialog box will open to allow you to name

the file and choose the directory and folder in which to save your file 3 Once saved File gt Save will simply save the current version of the file

OR

4 Select File gt Save As then type in a new name for the file and save to the desired file path

The Auto-save Feature With the Auto-save feature On-Screen Takeoff automatically backs up your open project You may choose to have more than one level of backup files The first backup copy will have the extension b00 and successive files will be b01 b02 and so on If you have designated four levels of backup files after the fourth backup copy has been created (b03) the next file will be saved over the file with extension b00 Further backup saves will then rotate through the four backup files in the same way

1 Select Tools gt Options 2 In the Auto-save area (under the General tab) select the frequency of backup file creation (in

minutes) and the number of levels for the feature 3 You also may disengage the feature by clicking in the check box to clear it

The Auto-save feature automatically saves backup copies to the directory of the current project If you are working from a write-protected area such as a CD-ROM On-Screen Takeoff will place backup files in the On-Screen Takeoff folder

Exiting When you are finished using On-Screen Takeoff it is very easy to exit Exiting is very important because of security reasons If someone were to use your computer they could enter the application and view and manipulate information

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

64

On-Screen Takeoff closes the open project when you open another or create a new project or when you exit the program

1 Select File gt Exit

OR

2 You also may click at the upper right-hand corner of the application to exit

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

65

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer When you get your digitizer from GTCO you will need to connect it to your computer Follow the instructions outlined below to do this

Note For rollup digitizers the metal bar must be oriented to the top or right hand side

Connecting the Digitizer 1 Lay the digitizer out flat 2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer 3 Plug in the power adapter 4 Plug the interface (IO) cable into the digitizer 5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into an open serial port on computer

Note GTCO Technical support phone number is 410-381-6688 The electronic manual (on diskette) from GTCO contains more detailed installation and operation instructions for the GTCO digitizer model you have

Installing other Digitizer Drivers If you are using a GTCO Digitizer you will need to install the GTCO TabletWorks Drivers

If you are using a Digitizer not supported by GTCO Tablet Works 10 please contact the manufacturer of your digitizer for assistance with installation

Installing GTCO TabletWorks Drivers 1 Insert the On Center CD into the CD-ROM drive The CD Startup screen will open 2 Click on Install Software 3 Select Additional Software and Drivers 4 Select Digitizer Driver 5 Follow the instructions for installing TabletWorks 10

Adhering the Template The template is a small plastic sticker used to enable mouse function when using the digitizer with On-Screen Takeoff Place your template on your digitizer We suggest placing it in the bottom right corner of the digitizer about one inch inside the takeoff area

Note You may either peel off the back of the template and use the adhesive surface or you can tape the template down

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

66

Testing the Digitizer Drivers Before running OST you may test the digitizer by moving the stylus around on the digitizer pad it should move the mouse cursor (if mouse emulation is enabled)

If the digitizer does not move the mouse cursor on the screen

The superset codes may need to be reset Reset the superset codes by touching on the border of the digitizer with the stylus The digitizer should beep several times

The digitizer may not be communicating with the computer Be sure the COM port selected is correct Be sure the COM port selected is correct If you are not able to get the digitizer to move the mouse cursor you need to call GTCO technical support for help

Note The Mouse Emulation is not required for On-Screen Takeoff to work properly It is used only for the Template functionality if the digitizer is moving the cursor the wrong direction (up instead of sideways or vice-versa)

Click the L-shaped arrow symbol on the digitizer with the stylus

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

67

Appendix II Toolbar Items Main Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

68

Tool Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

69

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

70

Navigate Toolbar (Continued)

Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

71

Takeoff Toolbar (Continued)

Image Toolbar

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

72

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

This section will detail how to load plans from a F W Dodge CD-ROM into an On-Screen Takeoff project file ready for takeoffs

Dodge files may be added to the Project Properties dialog However loading the files in that way will load the files by number rather than name description If you want to load one page only from your Dodge CD You will have to rename the page to display the name rather than number of the file

To load plan files from a Dodge CD so that the files load sequentially by file number but are displayed by name rather than by number within your project follow the instructions below

Opening a Dodge project from a CD-ROM 1 Insert the CD into the drive 2 Choose File gt Custom 3 Choose Dodge Plans Project (plansdat) as the file type 4 Select the appropriate file type by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the Files of type

field 5 In the Look in field access your drive paths by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the

field then

Navigate to your CD-ROM drive Open the data folder and Open the Projects folder

6 Select the desired project and open its folder 7 Open the plansdat file 8 All the images will come in sequenced correctly for that job along with the full descriptions

(names) of each page If there is not a plans folder in the project folder then plans do not exist for that project on the CD Opening the plansdat file will yield an empty project

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

73

Appendix IV Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer The On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer is a limited version of On Center Softwarersquos commercial takeoff software If your status bar located at the very bottom of the main window says View Mode in the lower left-hand corner then you are using the Plan Viewer You can use the plan viewer to

View CD-based amp converted CAD drawings

View a previously created OST file and associated drawings

Download electronic plans online

Navigate through drawings

Quickly Takeoff linearsareas and counts

Zoom in to view the plan better

Print drawings directly from the viewer

Viewing an On-Screen Takeoff Project File

1 To open an OST file that was previously created with of On-Screen Takeoff 2 Select File gt Open 3 An Open dialog will appear if you do not see the OST file you are looking for select the

Look In drop down arrow 4 A drop down menu will appear listing the various folders drives and mapped drives located

on your computer select the correct drive or folder location and continue to browse to the location of your OST file

5 When you see your OST file double-click it to open it 6 Any takeoff and drawings should appear on the Image tab view

If you do not see the drawings but do see the colored takeoff layer the drawings may

not be located in the same place they were originally saved at Go to File gt Project Properties and check the Image File path for each listed page If the image file path is pointing to a CD drive make sure the CD is inside the CR-ROM

Downloading Electronic Plans If your Online Plan Service provides a special file format (OSX) required to use this feature of our plan viewer you can immediately downloaded all electronic plans of a project directly from our viewer

Most Plan Room web sites will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff when a request to download plans is made Your particular Plan Room may differ in operation so please contact the provider directly with questions on using the site

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

74

When you request to download or open a project file from a Plan Room you will usually have the open to open or save an OSX file Choosing open will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff Alternately you may choose to save the file to a local hard drive After you have saved the file either double-click it to launch On-Screen Takeoff or open the OSX file using On-Screen Takeoff by clicking File then Open and locating the file on your hard drive You will need to change the file type to OSX

After the OSX file is opened you will see an additional tab appear in the Conditions List window called Pages

The Pages tab shows the hierarchy of your project Gray file icons represent pages that have not been downloaded and blue icons represents pages that have been downloaded

To download a page simply double-click the page icon

If you wish to select a group of pages to download you can use the Ctrl or Shift key to multiple select them then click the Download button

If you wish to download all pages at once click the Download All button

Downloaded pages will now appear in the Project Properties dialog in the same order in which they appear in the Pages tab

Creating Quick Takeoffs With On-Screen Takeoff you can create quick takeoffs to measure quantities even if you dont have the full version of our program However using the Quick Takeoff functionality shows you just a fraction of what the full version can do

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar is located at the top of the image view It has three buttons designated for three types of takeoffs Linear Area and Count The Quantity drop down list will show secondary quantities for Linears and Areas The Units drop down allows you to select how you want your quantities displayed Feet Inches Yards Millimeters and Meters

NOTE Every time change the type of takeoff you are performing (switching from Area to Linear for example) the previous quantities and takeoff objects will disappear They will also disappear when you changes pages

NOTE You can use the Dimension Tool to basically measure the distance between two points or linears The distance will display on the status bar at the bottom of the application

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

75

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions General

Where is On-Screen Takeoff installed on my computer

Typically it is installed in CProgram FilesOn-Screen Takeoff

In Explorer how do I recognize On-Screen Takeoff file types

On-Screen Takeoff data is stored in a single file per job lsquojob name OSTrsquo On-Screen Takeoff templates are stored as lsquotemplate nameTPOrsquo

Can only one project at a time be open

Yes For that reason opening another project automatically closes the project on screen You will be asked to save any changes

Is only one scale allowed per page What about on drawings that have multiple detail sections on a page and each of those drawings have different scales

Yes For pages with drawings of different scales copy the drawing to another project page and set the appropriate scale

I cannot perform backout on an area that is along a linear

As a workaround use the On-Screen Takeoff layers feature to help you with this issue Electronic Images

How do I start a project from drawings that have been scanned and written to a CD-ROM

Open a new project Select File gt Project Properties and select Auto Add Navigate to your CD and the appropriate folder and select any image file in that location Click Open All files in the location will load into your project Recommended that images are copied from CD to hard drive for performance

If I get a disk of drawings in AutoCAD format (R13 or R14) can I read them in On-Screen Takeoff

Yes On-Screen Takeoff now reads DWG DXF and many other format that are saved with AutoCAD

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

76

When I click on the all pages button what is supposed to happen Currently nothing seems to change when I click on that button

The All Pages button is used to apply the Darken and Enhance Plans feature to all pages in the project (as opposed to only the current page on screen)

Is there a way to deduct a large skylight from an area condition

Yes with the related area condition selected in the Takeoff Dock bar unselect the Backout button on the Takeoff Toolbar then draw the Backout area The area quantity will be deducted from the related condition object and the linear measurement of the Backout perimeter will be added

Digitizer Issues

How do I connect a Digitizer to the computer

See Appendix I Connecting a Digitizer

The Place Template menu choice is disabled

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or the digitizer or the digitzer drivers are not installed

It wonrsquot let me select the Set Takeoff Area menu choice

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or no job is open a digitizer is not installed or the drivers are not installed

The digitizer stylus is not moving the cursor or crosshairs

Click S-0-1 superset on the digitizer

How do I convert my old GTCO Digitizer to work with On- Screen Takeofftrade

Call GTCO and they may be able to reconfigure your digitizer to be compatible with On-Screen Takeoff

Printing Issues Which Printers work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible printers include On-Screen Takeoff Hewlett Packard Epson and Canon printers If you are having printer difficulties please contact support and specify the type of printer along with other pertinent information Contact support at wwwoncentercomsupport or email supportoncentercom

Which Plotters work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible Plotters include Hewlett Packard DesignJet plotters and the EnCAD Cadjet II If you are having plotter difficulties please contact support and specify the type of plotter concerned

ViewingDisplay I can no longer see my condition list How do I get it back

The toolbars and Dock bars can be turned on and off through the View gt Toolbars menu options

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

77

This is also accessible by right-clicking in the toolbar area and selecting (or deselecting) a toolbar listed

I cannot view my folders in the condition list

Right-click in the Takeoff Dock barcondition list area and select Show Tree to display your folders

My Status Bar reads Viewer Mode and I am unable to draw conditions

On-Screen Takeoff needs to be Authorized Or you need to purchase an upgrade Click the Perform Advanced Takeoff button on the main toolbar

I hid a Dock bar and when I selected to view it again it appeared alongside the other Dock

bar instead of stacked on top of it How do I fix it

Pick up the Dock bar by clicking on the bar at the top and continuing to hold down the mouse button drag the Dock bar over the other one It will resize and appear stacked with the other

When I open image files from a CD the images are all upside down How do I get them right

side up

To flip pages from top to bottom follow the steps below 1 Click the All Pages button on the Image Toolbar (All Pages is engaged when the button

is not clicked) 2 Click the Flip Horizontal button on the Image Toolbar 3 Click the All Pages button again to disengage

Templates How do I create a Template

Follow the steps below 1 Create a typical project 2 Choose File gt Save As 3 Choose On-Screen Takeoff Template Files as the file type to save 4 Name the file This will save all of the condition setups as well as the layers for the

project

How do I create a new project from a template

Follow the steps below 1 Choose File gt New 2 Select a template from those listed in the New dialog This will open a new project with

conditions and layers saved from a previous project but no pages or takeoff

78

INDEX

Area Conditions 32

Area Objects 57

Auto Scrolling 20

Auto-save 63

Backout Mode 41

Calculation Method 60

Conditions 29

Configuration 60

Contents Tab 6

Continuous Mode 38

Count Conditions 33

Count Objects 57

Digitizer 10 65 76

Docking Toolbars 13

Dodge CD 72

Drawing 27 37

DropRun Count 55

Environment 18

Exiting 63

Exporting 49

Features 16

Font 61

Frequently Asked Questions 75

Grid 40

Help File 5

Hiding Toolbars 13

Hot Links 21

Image 19 59

Image files 9

Image Toolbar 12 71

Images 75

Index Tab 6

Layers 43

Linear Conditions 31

Linear Objects 56

Main Toolbar 12 67

Menus 14

Moving Toolbars 13

Navigate Toolbar 12 69

Navigating 20

On-Screen Takeofftrade 2

Page 59 61

Pages 20 25 28

Plan Viewer 73

Plans 26

Printing 47 76

Project Properties 25

Projects 22

Quick Start Video 18

Resizing Toolbars 13

Roping 54

Saving 63

Scale 28

Search Tab 7

Selecting Objects 42

Setup 8

Start On-Screen Takeofftrade 17

System Requirements 9

Takeoff 19 27

Takeoff Toolbar 70 71

Takeoff Toolbar 12

Template Files 23

TIF (Group4) 9

Tool Toolbar 12 68

Toolbar 67

Toolbars 12

View Toolbar 12 69

Viewing Toolbars 12

Worksheet 20

Zone Conditions 33

Zoom Toolbar 12 69

  • On-Screen Takeoff Lite
  • Table of Contents
  • Section 1 - Introduction
  • Section 2 - Setup
  • Section 3 - Toolbars and Menus
  • Section 4 - Features
  • Section 5 - Projects
  • Section 6 - Conditions and Takeoff
  • Section 7 - Printing and Exporting
  • Section 8 - Advanced Features
  • Section 9 - Saving and Exiting
  • Appendix I - Installing Your Digitizer
  • Appendix II - Toolbar Items
  • Appendix III - Loading Plans from a Dodge CD
  • Appendix IV - Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer
  • Appendix V - Frequently Asked Questions
  • Index

Section 5 Projects

28

Setting Scale for Specific Pages You may set the scale in each page view separately This will override the default scale setting in Project Properties for that page Setting the correct scale for the drawing before taking off quantities ensures accurate calculations Be careful to check the scale for each drawing in your project before doing takeoffs

1 Display the page you want to set select Edit gt Set Scale

2 Use the drop down arrow to select a scale that will be applied to that page

3 Click

OR

4 Access the pull-down scale settings on the Navigate toolbar

NOTE As you draw objects notice that the drawn object is similar in width to the object on your plans If it is not the scale set may not be correct

Calculating Scale You may calculate scale according to a known measurement between two points either with a digitizer or on electronic plans

1 Select Edit gt Calculate Scale using Image or Edit gt Calculate Scale using Digitizer

2 Follow the instructions in the related Calculate Scale dialog box You will be asked to click on the first and second points then to enter the dimension for that distance

3 The scale will be recalculated for the displayed page and the Scale display on the Navigate toolbar will show the new scale

Section 6

29

Conditions and Takeoff

This section will Draw Conditions to Takeoff Plan Quantities

What Zones will do to help your takeoff process

Discuss the ins and outs of Takeoffs

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

30

Creating Conditions

If you are starting a new project from scratch you will need to create conditions to takeoff quantities such as floor areas wall lengths and corner bead counts If you are using a template you will have several pre-designed conditions already listed on the Takeoff dock bar However you may want to change the characteristics of some conditions or create additional conditions for a particular project

1 Right Click within the Takeoff dock bar Select New gt Condition

Or

2 From the Takeoff dock bar Click (if the buttons are not showing right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select Show Buttons from the pop-up menu) The New Condition dialog appears

3 Select the condition type (Linear Area Count or Zone) from the pull-down menu accessed by the

down arrow next to the Type option

4 Press Tab or use the mouse (or stylus) to move to Name and enter a name for your condition

5 Specify the desired condition attributes See Condition Attributes for more detail

6 Click for condition to apply

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

31

Condition Attributes Each condition type will have related attributes to select or specify within the General and Advanced tabs of the New Condition dialog Once a condition has been used to takeoff a quantity from your plans certain attributes cannot be changed

All conditions allow the user to specify color and fill pattern for the object drawn

Linear Conditions

General Specify width and height by feet and inches Specify pitch in inches up to the nearest thousandth of an inch if applicable

Advanced Specify rounding for object quantities and droprun default length for electrical or plumbing drops at the ends of lines Select Connect to have lines connect at the corners where one line of the condition ends and another begins (and indicate Tolerance for the featurersquos activation as distance between the ends of two lines) Choose Trim to have lines automatically trim to a line being crossed Choose Curve to draw a curved line

Follow these examples for inputting feet and inches For 7 feet 6 inches type 706 for 13 feet 7 inches type 1307 For 20 feet type 2000

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

32

Area Conditions

General If needed you can specify the thickness (in inches) andor pitch (in inches)

Advanced Specify rounding for object quantities Choose to display an adjustable grid within the area and indicate matrix cell dimensions

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

33

Count Conditions

General

Specify height and indicate the size (in inches) and shape (square circle triangle rectangle or opening) of the count object as it will appear on screen

Advanced Count conditions have advanced attributes These options are available for all shapes except for openings

Zone Conditions Zones allow you to subdivide condition quantities making it easier to modify and complete jobs in phases They can be used at the end of a takeoff to isolate a group of condition quantities that are in different areas of the takeoff

Zones can also be used to break a takeoff into multi-phases and can even be used to isolate quantities while a job is in progress to group the amount of work that has been completed to date They can be applied to one or multiple pages in your plans automatically calculating the takeoff quantities for each zoned area

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

34

The zone feature is only available in Lite and Full Mode If you are in View Mode and would like

to use this feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade

Condition Notes A Note tab is provided for comments regarding the condition These notes will display on the Takeoff List report and will import into Quick Bid

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

35

Condition Results The Results tab of the New Condition is based on condition type Initial settings default to linear feet (LF) for linear conditions square feet (SF) for area conditions and count of items (EA) for count conditions and zones The first of the results fields will display for the condition items in the Takeoff dock bar area All results will display in worksheets and Takeoff List reports as well as in an Excel spreadsheet after being exported

Copying Conditions You may use the condition attributes from a condition yoursquove already created for any future conditions of the same type

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Click the Copy button from the toolbar

OR

3 Right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select copy

4 A new condition will appear in the list with the same condition attributes as the previous condition but with the quantities zeroed

Editing Conditions Once you have copied a condition you might want to change several attributes You can also edit an existing condition to fit any updated needs

1 Highlight the desired condition on the Takeoff dock bar

2 Click the Change button

OR

3 Double-click on the condition you wish to edit to bring up the Change Condition dialog

NOTE The Change Condition dialog differs from the New Condition dialog only in that if takeoffs

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

36

have been performed in your project with this condition you will not be able to change the type of condition or certain properties under the advanced tab of the dialog box

Deleting Conditions 1 Click on the condition in the Takeoff Dock bar area

2 Click the Delete button on the toolbar

OR

3 Right-click and select Delete from the pop-up menu

All takeoff associated with the deleted condition will be deleted immediately and permanently

Organizing Project Conditions Within your project you can create folders andor sub-folders for different types of conditions You may even want to create a folder containing conditions with reset values

To get started organizing your conditions make sure you are viewing the condition tree (right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select Show Tree)

Creating Folders and Sub-Folders 1 Right-click in the Takeoff Dock bar area

2 Select New gt Folder from the pop-up menu

Copying Folders

1 Click on the folder and click Copy on the toolbar

2 All copied conditions within the new folder will have values reset to zero

Renaming Folders

1 Click on the folder

2 Right-click and select Rename from the pop-up menu

3 Enter a name for your folder and click the Enter button

Changing Condition Order

You may move conditions up or down in the condition list of the Takeoff dock bar to suit your project needs

1 Select the condition you would like to move by clicking to highlight it

NOTE When you are ready to move the highlighted conditions be sure that you start

moving using the last condition chosen That condition will have a highlighted boarder

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

37

2 Drag and drop any the condition from one place to another in the list You may also move a condition to another folder on the list in this way

Drawing with Conditions Snap Angles Set up snap angles to prevent lines from appearing jagged Snap angles are commonly set at 15deg and shift snap angles at 0deg

1 Go to Tools gt Options Options dialog appears

2 Under the General tab make the desired settings

3 Click to save the settings As they are drawn lines will snap to the set degree

Drawing a Linear Object 1 Select a condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff dock bar

2 Move the cursor into the Image takeoff area of the screen you will see the cursor display as crosshairs

3 Click and hold left mouse button then drag mouse to draw a line

4 Release mouse button to set line

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

38

5 Repeat steps for further lines

Continuous Mode This feature allows you to draw an object that has connected lines

1 Click the icon from the Takeoff toolbar

OR

2 Go to Tools gt Continuous Mode

3 Follow steps 1-3 from Draw a Linear Object

4 Click at each point of intersection The object will be connected

5 Double-click after making the final point to set the lines

Drawing a Curve To draw a curved line the Curve option must be checked under the Advanced tab of the Condition dialog

1 Click where you want to begin the curve and drag in a straight line to the position for the other endpoint of the curve

2 Click on the line to select it Handles in the shapes of small squares will appear at either end of

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

39

the line and in the center of the line

3 Move the cursor over the center handles until the cursor becomes a two-way arrow

4 Click and drag in the direction of the curve bending the line as you move the cursor Release to set the curve (The line you began with will disappear)

Draw a circle by drawing two curved lines connected

Drawing an Area Object Area conditions are drawn similarly to continuous mode lines You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete your area takeoff

NOTE When drawing an area do not intersect the perimeter or line of the object you are drawing

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

3 The area will be filled with the pattern set for that condition

NOTE The simulated circle will be good enough for you to be able to make a bid

To create a circular area click from point to point with very short distances in between points simulating a circlersquos perimeter Double-click after setting the last point to set the area

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

40

Grid Options Grids give you an added advantage when installing materials such as tiles Use this feature to get a count for how many tiles are needed for an area

1 Double-click on an area condition in the Takeoff dock bar to open its Condition dialog

2 Click on the Advanced tab to show its options

3 Check the box next to Grid by clicking in it

4 Indicate the dimensions of the cell matrix in inches (For example 200 x 400)

5 Under Results tab choose each (EA) for one of the results fields This will tabulate a number of grid cells (including partial grid cells) in area

6 Click to save your settings

7 Use the Move Grid and Rotate Grid features in the Tools menu to manipulate the grid as desired

Grid Calculation

1 Go to Tools gt Options menu

1 Specify if On-Screen Takeoff automatically should Calculate Grid Position

2 If AreaGrid Size is selected On-Screen Takeoff will calculate the number of items needed to fill the grid based on grid demintions

3 Click to accept and close the dialog

To move a line at any angle (regardless of default setting) press the Shift key while moving the mouse

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

41

Backout Mode This feature allows you to take out part of an area and deduct that amount of square footage

1 Select Tools gt Backout Mode

2 Outline the are you want backed out as you would when drawing a regular area object (see Drawing an Area Object)

3 The outlined area will clear and quantities will be recalculated

NOTE The perimeter of the backout area will be added to the LF quantity for that condition

Drawing a Count Object Square triangle rectangle and circle shaped count objects can easily be placed on images

1 Select the condition

2 Click in the location where you want the object to appear

3 To place an opening-shaped count item like a door or window you must click over an existing linear object such as a wall

4 On the Results tab you can change the height properties to give you the result you need

5 If Backout is checked on the advanced tab for each count opening the opening-shaped count item will back out a corresponding section of the linear object

Opening shaped count items are sized at 3rsquo0rdquo by default

Drawing a Zone Zones are drawn in the same way as area objects and may be any polygonal shape You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete the zone perimeter

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

42

Selecting Objects

1 Use the Select Tool to select objects

You can also select all objects that correspond to a condition

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Right-click and choose Select All

3 All objects with this condition will be highlighted with squares as an outline

Moving and Resizing Objects Linear

1 To move or resize a linear object click anywhere on the line to select it

2 To move the line position your pointer over the center handles When the mouse is positioned over the handles you will see a two-way arrow You will only be able to move the line in the direction of the arrows

3 Drag the line to a new position

4 Clicking and dragging the handles on the ends of the line will allow you to lengthen or shorten your line

Area and Zone

1 To move an area object or zone in its entirety click and drag it to its new position

2 Grabbing a handle at a corner or intersection of the object will allow you to adjust and change its perimeter

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

43

Count 1 To move a square circle rectangle or triangle shaped count object click and drag

2 Click and drag an opening shaped count object along the length of the linear object to the desired position then release

NOTE An opening shaped count object may not be moved from its associated linear condition object however it may be moved up and down the length of the linear object

Layers On-Screen Takeoff allows you to sort and separate your takeoff objects within the same job and on the same page On-Screen Takeoff gives you this flexibility through the use of layers

By assigning different conditions to different layers (for example differentiating between floors ceilings and walls) you can choose to view all layers or turn off certain layers to display and print the remaining groups of conditions only You may also remove the background image of electronic plans add text and hot link symbols or print only your condition takeoffs

Layers are only available in Full Mode If you are in View or Lite Mode and would like to use this

feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade Default Layers

On-Screen Takeoff begins every project with three default layers Image Annotation and Default The Image layer holds the electronic plan files you may have in your project The Annotation layer possesses all text notations highlighting and hot links in the project The Default layer will appear in the Condition dialog when creating or editing a condition (listed in the takeoff dock bar) Conditions are assigned to the Default layer unless otherwise specified by the user

Creating Layers To assign a condition to a layer other than the default layer you must first create additional layers for your project

1 Select View gt Layers to open the Layers dialog

2 Click An unnamed layer will be added

3 Click within the empty box and type a name for your layer (for example Wall)

4 New layers are added as active layers The adjacent box under the Show column will be checked

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

44

Assigning a Layer to a Condition 1 Open the Condition dialog box by creating a new condition or editing an existing condition

2 Under the General tab click on the down arrow in the Layer field to display optional layers

3 Select the desired layer for the condition Only the Default layer and layers you have added will be displayed

4 Click

View and Hide Layers

1 Select View gt Layers

2 Under the Show column check the box to view or remove the check (by clicking on it) to hide the specific layer

3 Click to accept and close the Layers dialog

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

45

Assigning Text to a Layer When adding text to an image On-Screen Takeoff has the capability to assign the text to a specified layer

1 Select the Text Tool

2 Click at the point you want to place your text

3 Type in your text using the Enter key for line breaks

4 Click the drop down arrow next to the Layer field and select the desired layer

Section 7

46

Printing and Exporting

This section will

Printing options and procedures

Exporting data by copying and pasting

Exporting quantity results to Excel spreadsheets

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

47

Print Setup On-Screen Takeoff allows the user to print the image takeoff list and worksheet

1 Select File gt Print Setup The Print Setup dialog will open

2 Select a printer or leave the default selection listed (change from the default printer displayed by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the field)

3 Indicate page size and printer tray option (Source) Access page size options by clicking on the

down arrow at the right of the field

4 Choose Portrait or Landscape orientation

5 Click to accept and close the dialog

Printing Images The image area can include the electronic plans the takeoff objects added text and hot links To print a subset of these (for example just the takeoffs without the plans or the added text and hot link symbols) hide layers that you do not want to print (see Section 6 View and Hide Layers) When you are printing your images every page will show the scale of the takeoff you are printing

1 Click on the Image tab to display the area of your project

2 Select File gt Print (or Ctrl + P)

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

48

3 Select the desired view (What to print) and the Image Range

4 Click The second Print dialog will open

5 Change settings accordingly or click if you accept the default settings

Printing Takeoff Lists and Worksheets In Takeoff Lists and Worksheets you may hide columns to print only certain results or adjust column widths to fit the report within the page size selected

1 In Takeoff List or Worksheet view move your cursor to the right side of the columnrsquos title bar the cursor will display as a two-way arrow

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

49

2 Click and drag to adjust the width of the column Holding the mouse button you may

slide the title bar under the title bar to its left to hide the column completely

3 Select File gt Print or press Ctrl + P to access the Print dialog

4 Indicate desired printer and choose the number of copies

5 Click to print and close the dialog

When printing the condition list we suggest printing in landscape

To reset to the default column widths double-click on the right border of a column heading will reset the column to its right (or previously to its right before being hidden)

Print Preview 1 Select File gt Print Preview

2 Use and to vary your view 3 If viewing an image choose current full or scale view to see how it displays

4 For printed outputs that cover more than one page use and to view adjacent pages or click on the down arrow next to Page field and select the page you want displayed

Exporting Using the CopyPaste Feature You may copy all the data or sections from the worksheet and the takeoff list view in On-Screen Takeoff and paste it into another application When pasting into Excel the cell layout will be maintained

1 Highlight the areas you wish to paste Click and hold the left mouse button down as you drag the cursor over the area to be selected then releasing the mouse button

OR

2 Select the entire takeoff list quickly click on the left On-Screen Takeoff column header and hold and drag the cursor across the remaining column headings

The number of pages for the view selected will display in the lower left-hand corner The zoom percentage that applies to the view will be displayed in the lower right-hand corner next to page size of the drawing

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

50

3 In the worksheet view you may highlight rows by clicking on the numbered buttons to the left of each row clicking and dragging across column headings or clicking and dragging over individual cells in the worksheet

Click anywhere in the appropriate view to deselect the area

4 Once your selection is highlighted you may select Edit gt Copy or Ctrl C from the keyboard 5 On your monitor switch to the application into which you want to paste your selection 6 Select Edit gt Paste in the new application or simply press Ctrl + V to paste

The colored keys for conditions cannot be pasted

Using the Export Feature You may export condition quantities to specified cell location within an Excel worksheet file Cell target locations are assigned in the Results tab of the condition dialogs on the Export line relating to each quantity measurement type

On-Screen Takeoff will export takeoff quantity results for up to three different quantity types that you specify For instance you may want to know the number of square feet in a ceiling area as well as the number of linear feet in its perimeter

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

51

1 Bring up the Condition dialog by double-clicking on a condition in the takeoff dock bar or by

selecting the condition and clicking

2 Click on the Results tab to access its fields The default quantities for the condition type will display

3 For each results field click on the arrow to access the pull-down menu and select the appropriate quantity (for example SF LF EA etchellip)

4 Have your Excel spreadsheet opened and saved in a file

5 Specify the Excel spreadsheet cell locations where you want the results to go

6 For a cell in the first sheet of your spreadsheet type in the cell address (eg a1) Case is not important

7 For a cell on a successive sheet of your spreadsheet type in sheet the number followed by a comma and the cell address without any spaces (eg sheet2a1) Case is not important

8 Click

9 Select File gt Export gt Condition Qty to Excel

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

52

10 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

11 Click to export On-Screen Takeoff results to specified cell locations in the Excel file When you return to the Excel application you will see the values have been added to the specified cell locations in your spreadsheet

12 Save your Excel file

Exporting Worksheet to Excel

1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 From On-Screen Takeoff Select File gt Export gt Worksheet to Excel

4 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

5 Click When you return to the Excel application you will see the values from the Worksheet Tab have been added to your spreadsheet

6 Save your Excel file

Exporting Takeoff to CVS 1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 Click the Takeoff Tab in the project you want to export the information

4 Select File gt Export gt Takeoff to CSV

5 Browse to the location of the CSV spreadsheet file click file to select it

6 Click the Save

NOTE CSV files can be opened in Excel Lotus Access etc One may consider this option more of a ldquodumprdquo into a file

The Excel application must be active (it may be minimized on the application bar) with the target spreadsheet open in the application Otherwise an error will occur with the export operation that will affect both the On-Screen Takeofftrade file and the Excel spreadsheet

Section 8

53

Advanced Features

This section will

Some special features of working with condition objects in the takeoff area

Details of advanced options for conditions

Advanced features of the Project Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

54

Features to Use with Objects Roping Feature You can move copy or delete using this feature Using the Select tool (the pointer) you may select several objects at once by clicking and dragging an outline around the objects then releasing the mouse button Roping may select either objects completely within the outlined area (inclusive) or objects both within and touched by the outlined area (touching) Specify your roping preference under Tools gt Options

1 Click and hold the mouse button at a point on the screen near the objects to be selected and drag to surround the objects with an outline

2 Release the mouse button The objects will be selected

3 You may now

Move the group around on the page by clicking within the group dragging the mouse and releasing the button to place the objects

Delete the group of objects by clicking the Delete key or

Copy and paste by pressing Ctrl C to copy the group then Ctrl V to paste it The pasted copy of the grouped objects will appear slightly offset from the original objects

Section 8 Advanced Features

55

Applying a DropRun Count

Use the droprun feature when calculating quantities to take into account the drop or run of a linear condition such as electrical lines or plumbing pipes Drop or run lengths may be added separately to any linear condition on screen while a default droprun length may be indicated for a condition as a whole

1 Select the desired linear condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff Dock bar

2 Click the Change button in the toolbar to open the Change Condition dialog

3 Click the Advanced tab to access the advanced options and click inside the DropRun check box

4 Enter a default length to be applied to all of this condition Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches) You can leave the length blank and manually enter drop run on each segment drawn

5 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog

Edit DropRun Count

1 With the related linear condition in the Takeoff Dock bar highlighted or with the pointer tool selected

2 click on the desired linear object in the image takeoff area The Count button will become active

3 Click on the Count button (alternatively select Tools gt Count) The default droprun amount will show in the pop-up Count dialog (Default length will be zero if droprun has not been selected in this conditionrsquos properties)

4 Type in the desired length Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches)

5 Click the OK button The additional amount will be reflected in the corresponding quantity The new DropRun count will apply only to the object edited

Adding Text in Image View

On-Screen Takeoff allows you to place text comments around your quantity takeoffs that may be printed along with plan images and objects Text is automatically placed within the Annotation Layer (that includes text and hot links)

1 To place text on the image select the Text Tool and click at the point you want to place your text opening a text box

2 Type in your information clicking Enter for line breaks

3 When you are finished click the OK button to exit the text box

4 To reposition text simply click on the text (with the Text Tool active) to select it

5 Move the cursor over the text the cursor will now display as a four-way arrow

6 Click and drag the mouse to position the text as desired

Section 8 Advanced Features

56

1 To edit existing text use the Text Tool to double-click on the text to open the editing box

2 Enter additional text or use the Backspace key to delete text as necessary

Formatting Text Once created you may format the font size type style and color of your text

1 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Font or click on the Font button in the Takeoff Toolbar

2 Select the desired features (color options are disabled) and click the OK button

3 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Color or click on the Color button in the Takeoff Toolbar The Color dialog will open

4 Click on a color in the Basic Color palette or create a color and add to the Custom Colors palette (Be sure to click on the color in the Custom Colors palette to select it)

5 Click the OK button

Object Properties

Linear Objects

Linear objects may be set to connect at corners

A linear object may be set to trim automatically when crossing another linear object (Check the trim option under the advanced tab of the Condition dialog)

When you move a connected linear object objects automatically move and resize connected lines accordingly (quantities are then recalculated)

This feature requires that the connected linear object be moved using the center handles (does not apply when resizing the line from the ends)

Objects constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

Objects are measured from centerline to centerline

Section 8 Advanced Features

57

Area Objects When drawing an area use your escape key to undo the last line drawn You may reverse your

drawing of an area using the escape key

The area will not fill with color and pattern until the user double-clicks after the last line is set

Lines drawn to delineate an area object constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

After selecting an area to move or adjust position the mouse in the center to move the entire area position the mouse at the sides or corners to adjust the perimeter

Count Objects

All count objects are quantified by the physical number of objects per page and reported as EA for the UOM The quantity for the current Image View is (displayed in the Condition List) and the total quantity in your project is displayed in the Takeoff View and Worksheet View)

Square circle rectangle and triangle shaped count objects do not displace or subtract from other object quantities when placed on top of them However on the Advanced Tab for the count condition a connect property can be set (this is a check box) so that when a count object of this shape is put on top of a Linear type takeoff object it will move with the linear if said linear is moved

An opened-shaped count object must be placed within a linear object Opening shaped count objects may also be measured by linear foot or linear yard (EA SF and SY are also options) Opening shaped count items default to a width of 3rsquo 0rdquo at the time of creation This size can be changed The small medium and large size are not options on this type of condition anymore Check Backout on the Advanced tab for each Count object back out the footage (or yardage) of opening-shaped count objects in which they are placed

NOTE In order to see this Backout functionality (in quantity) for SY or SF deductions at least one of the

results for the Linear(s) this object will be placed on must be set to SY or SF and the count object must have a height quantity

Advanced Features of Conditions The Round Feature Under the Advanced tab of the linear and area Condition dialogues you may specify quantity rounding (in inches) For linear objects rounding applies to each linear object drawn For area objects rounding will apply to each segment of the area perimeter adjusting the perimeter and area calculations For example With a linear condition entering 12 in the Round field will round up each related linear object to the nearest 12 inches or one foot With this setting two walls of 1 4 would each round to 2 0 totaling 4 0

NOTE In the Takeoff Dock bar condition list and in the On-Screen Takeoff reports quantities will be displayed in whole numbers rounded up to the nearest foot However calculations are based on true quantities without rounding unless the Round Feature is engaged

Pitch Pitch may apply either to linear or area conditions It is measured in rise per linear foot Entering 12 indicates a 12 rise per 12 of linear distance (a pitch of 12 over 12) or an angle of 45deg

Section 8 Advanced Features

58

Advanced Features of Project Properties Selecting Multiple Pages

1 Select a single page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry

2 Drag the cursor down the column of numbers to select consecutive pages

3 Click on the blank button at the top of this column to select all pages in the Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

59

Changing Image Assigned to a Drawing 1 Select the page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry 2 Click the Change Image button The Change Image dialog box will appear

3 Navigate to the desired file and select by clicking on it

4 Click the Open button The electronic file assigned to the page will have been changed to reflect the new file choice

Changing Image File Path 1 Select pages as described above

2 Choose Change Folder

3 In the Change Folder dialog navigate to the appropriate folder

4 Click the OK button The file path will have been changed for the selected page entries

Delete a Page from Project Properties 1 Select the page you want to delete by clicking on its associated number (in the gray box at the

left of the entry)

2 Choose Delete Page

All Takeoff on the page will be deleted immediately and permanently

Section 8 Advanced Features

60

Advanced Features of Tool Options

Calculation Method On-Screen Takeoff has built-in calculation options to allow for faster work and faster saves until your takeoff is complete Calculation options are found by selecting Tools gt Options then clicking on the Calculation tab

Calculation method can be set to Automatic Automatic except Grids and Manual Manual will allow the program to operate more quickly while Automatic or Automatic except Grids allows the user to see quantity changes as takeoffs are made

In any mode you may press F9 to recalculate quantities for the On-Screen Takeoff current totals

Configuration Tab

When the ldquoPage Label (A01)rdquo radial button is chosen On-Screen Takeoff puts the numbered label on all the pages of in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar If the Page Descriptionrdquo radial button is chosen then a description of what takeoff is on that specific page will be shown in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar

This section of the configuration tab gives you options on how you want to export your information When the ldquoFolderSubfolder Namesrdquo radial button is chosen than on your file that you are exporting to will have all the conditions folders and subfolders In the Delimiter box you can choose the symbol that is needed to separate the information you are exporting Some files need semicolons () or colons () to make sure the information comes exported in is separated it the appropriate places

Section 8 Advanced Features

61

In previous versions of On-Screen Takeoff there are views that users need to have in order for them to display their information By either choosing ldquoOST 1xrdquo or ldquoOST 2xrdquo it will let the program know you want your columns of information exported in that specific format

When you have the Confirm Deletions radial button of ldquoYesrdquo chosen than every time you delete anything you will get a dialog box confirming your intentions of deletion

While working with your takeoff you have a choice to either view the legend of your conditions or hide it Choose whichever radial button that suits your needs

For those who prefer to use the Enter key to navigate in dialog boxes this option is just for that

Font Tab The Font tab is designed for you to make your own look and feel for the application At the bottom of this tab it will show you sample of the fonts and colors you have chosen

Renaming the Current Page You may change the name of the current page in the takeoff area of On-Screen Takeoff by selecting Edit gt Rename Page

This opens the Name Page dialog and you may simply type in a new name and click the Enter button The new name for the file will be reflected on the title bar for the page and in Project Properties

You also may access the Rename Page function by right-clicking in the takeoff area while in Image View and selecting the option from the pop-up menu that appears

Section 9

62

Saving and Exiting

This section will

Explain how to save projects

Show you how to safely exit the program

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

63

Saving Your Project

1 Select File gt Save 2 If your project has not previously been saved a Save dialog box will open to allow you to name

the file and choose the directory and folder in which to save your file 3 Once saved File gt Save will simply save the current version of the file

OR

4 Select File gt Save As then type in a new name for the file and save to the desired file path

The Auto-save Feature With the Auto-save feature On-Screen Takeoff automatically backs up your open project You may choose to have more than one level of backup files The first backup copy will have the extension b00 and successive files will be b01 b02 and so on If you have designated four levels of backup files after the fourth backup copy has been created (b03) the next file will be saved over the file with extension b00 Further backup saves will then rotate through the four backup files in the same way

1 Select Tools gt Options 2 In the Auto-save area (under the General tab) select the frequency of backup file creation (in

minutes) and the number of levels for the feature 3 You also may disengage the feature by clicking in the check box to clear it

The Auto-save feature automatically saves backup copies to the directory of the current project If you are working from a write-protected area such as a CD-ROM On-Screen Takeoff will place backup files in the On-Screen Takeoff folder

Exiting When you are finished using On-Screen Takeoff it is very easy to exit Exiting is very important because of security reasons If someone were to use your computer they could enter the application and view and manipulate information

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

64

On-Screen Takeoff closes the open project when you open another or create a new project or when you exit the program

1 Select File gt Exit

OR

2 You also may click at the upper right-hand corner of the application to exit

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

65

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer When you get your digitizer from GTCO you will need to connect it to your computer Follow the instructions outlined below to do this

Note For rollup digitizers the metal bar must be oriented to the top or right hand side

Connecting the Digitizer 1 Lay the digitizer out flat 2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer 3 Plug in the power adapter 4 Plug the interface (IO) cable into the digitizer 5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into an open serial port on computer

Note GTCO Technical support phone number is 410-381-6688 The electronic manual (on diskette) from GTCO contains more detailed installation and operation instructions for the GTCO digitizer model you have

Installing other Digitizer Drivers If you are using a GTCO Digitizer you will need to install the GTCO TabletWorks Drivers

If you are using a Digitizer not supported by GTCO Tablet Works 10 please contact the manufacturer of your digitizer for assistance with installation

Installing GTCO TabletWorks Drivers 1 Insert the On Center CD into the CD-ROM drive The CD Startup screen will open 2 Click on Install Software 3 Select Additional Software and Drivers 4 Select Digitizer Driver 5 Follow the instructions for installing TabletWorks 10

Adhering the Template The template is a small plastic sticker used to enable mouse function when using the digitizer with On-Screen Takeoff Place your template on your digitizer We suggest placing it in the bottom right corner of the digitizer about one inch inside the takeoff area

Note You may either peel off the back of the template and use the adhesive surface or you can tape the template down

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

66

Testing the Digitizer Drivers Before running OST you may test the digitizer by moving the stylus around on the digitizer pad it should move the mouse cursor (if mouse emulation is enabled)

If the digitizer does not move the mouse cursor on the screen

The superset codes may need to be reset Reset the superset codes by touching on the border of the digitizer with the stylus The digitizer should beep several times

The digitizer may not be communicating with the computer Be sure the COM port selected is correct Be sure the COM port selected is correct If you are not able to get the digitizer to move the mouse cursor you need to call GTCO technical support for help

Note The Mouse Emulation is not required for On-Screen Takeoff to work properly It is used only for the Template functionality if the digitizer is moving the cursor the wrong direction (up instead of sideways or vice-versa)

Click the L-shaped arrow symbol on the digitizer with the stylus

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

67

Appendix II Toolbar Items Main Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

68

Tool Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

69

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

70

Navigate Toolbar (Continued)

Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

71

Takeoff Toolbar (Continued)

Image Toolbar

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

72

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

This section will detail how to load plans from a F W Dodge CD-ROM into an On-Screen Takeoff project file ready for takeoffs

Dodge files may be added to the Project Properties dialog However loading the files in that way will load the files by number rather than name description If you want to load one page only from your Dodge CD You will have to rename the page to display the name rather than number of the file

To load plan files from a Dodge CD so that the files load sequentially by file number but are displayed by name rather than by number within your project follow the instructions below

Opening a Dodge project from a CD-ROM 1 Insert the CD into the drive 2 Choose File gt Custom 3 Choose Dodge Plans Project (plansdat) as the file type 4 Select the appropriate file type by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the Files of type

field 5 In the Look in field access your drive paths by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the

field then

Navigate to your CD-ROM drive Open the data folder and Open the Projects folder

6 Select the desired project and open its folder 7 Open the plansdat file 8 All the images will come in sequenced correctly for that job along with the full descriptions

(names) of each page If there is not a plans folder in the project folder then plans do not exist for that project on the CD Opening the plansdat file will yield an empty project

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

73

Appendix IV Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer The On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer is a limited version of On Center Softwarersquos commercial takeoff software If your status bar located at the very bottom of the main window says View Mode in the lower left-hand corner then you are using the Plan Viewer You can use the plan viewer to

View CD-based amp converted CAD drawings

View a previously created OST file and associated drawings

Download electronic plans online

Navigate through drawings

Quickly Takeoff linearsareas and counts

Zoom in to view the plan better

Print drawings directly from the viewer

Viewing an On-Screen Takeoff Project File

1 To open an OST file that was previously created with of On-Screen Takeoff 2 Select File gt Open 3 An Open dialog will appear if you do not see the OST file you are looking for select the

Look In drop down arrow 4 A drop down menu will appear listing the various folders drives and mapped drives located

on your computer select the correct drive or folder location and continue to browse to the location of your OST file

5 When you see your OST file double-click it to open it 6 Any takeoff and drawings should appear on the Image tab view

If you do not see the drawings but do see the colored takeoff layer the drawings may

not be located in the same place they were originally saved at Go to File gt Project Properties and check the Image File path for each listed page If the image file path is pointing to a CD drive make sure the CD is inside the CR-ROM

Downloading Electronic Plans If your Online Plan Service provides a special file format (OSX) required to use this feature of our plan viewer you can immediately downloaded all electronic plans of a project directly from our viewer

Most Plan Room web sites will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff when a request to download plans is made Your particular Plan Room may differ in operation so please contact the provider directly with questions on using the site

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

74

When you request to download or open a project file from a Plan Room you will usually have the open to open or save an OSX file Choosing open will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff Alternately you may choose to save the file to a local hard drive After you have saved the file either double-click it to launch On-Screen Takeoff or open the OSX file using On-Screen Takeoff by clicking File then Open and locating the file on your hard drive You will need to change the file type to OSX

After the OSX file is opened you will see an additional tab appear in the Conditions List window called Pages

The Pages tab shows the hierarchy of your project Gray file icons represent pages that have not been downloaded and blue icons represents pages that have been downloaded

To download a page simply double-click the page icon

If you wish to select a group of pages to download you can use the Ctrl or Shift key to multiple select them then click the Download button

If you wish to download all pages at once click the Download All button

Downloaded pages will now appear in the Project Properties dialog in the same order in which they appear in the Pages tab

Creating Quick Takeoffs With On-Screen Takeoff you can create quick takeoffs to measure quantities even if you dont have the full version of our program However using the Quick Takeoff functionality shows you just a fraction of what the full version can do

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar is located at the top of the image view It has three buttons designated for three types of takeoffs Linear Area and Count The Quantity drop down list will show secondary quantities for Linears and Areas The Units drop down allows you to select how you want your quantities displayed Feet Inches Yards Millimeters and Meters

NOTE Every time change the type of takeoff you are performing (switching from Area to Linear for example) the previous quantities and takeoff objects will disappear They will also disappear when you changes pages

NOTE You can use the Dimension Tool to basically measure the distance between two points or linears The distance will display on the status bar at the bottom of the application

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

75

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions General

Where is On-Screen Takeoff installed on my computer

Typically it is installed in CProgram FilesOn-Screen Takeoff

In Explorer how do I recognize On-Screen Takeoff file types

On-Screen Takeoff data is stored in a single file per job lsquojob name OSTrsquo On-Screen Takeoff templates are stored as lsquotemplate nameTPOrsquo

Can only one project at a time be open

Yes For that reason opening another project automatically closes the project on screen You will be asked to save any changes

Is only one scale allowed per page What about on drawings that have multiple detail sections on a page and each of those drawings have different scales

Yes For pages with drawings of different scales copy the drawing to another project page and set the appropriate scale

I cannot perform backout on an area that is along a linear

As a workaround use the On-Screen Takeoff layers feature to help you with this issue Electronic Images

How do I start a project from drawings that have been scanned and written to a CD-ROM

Open a new project Select File gt Project Properties and select Auto Add Navigate to your CD and the appropriate folder and select any image file in that location Click Open All files in the location will load into your project Recommended that images are copied from CD to hard drive for performance

If I get a disk of drawings in AutoCAD format (R13 or R14) can I read them in On-Screen Takeoff

Yes On-Screen Takeoff now reads DWG DXF and many other format that are saved with AutoCAD

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

76

When I click on the all pages button what is supposed to happen Currently nothing seems to change when I click on that button

The All Pages button is used to apply the Darken and Enhance Plans feature to all pages in the project (as opposed to only the current page on screen)

Is there a way to deduct a large skylight from an area condition

Yes with the related area condition selected in the Takeoff Dock bar unselect the Backout button on the Takeoff Toolbar then draw the Backout area The area quantity will be deducted from the related condition object and the linear measurement of the Backout perimeter will be added

Digitizer Issues

How do I connect a Digitizer to the computer

See Appendix I Connecting a Digitizer

The Place Template menu choice is disabled

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or the digitizer or the digitzer drivers are not installed

It wonrsquot let me select the Set Takeoff Area menu choice

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or no job is open a digitizer is not installed or the drivers are not installed

The digitizer stylus is not moving the cursor or crosshairs

Click S-0-1 superset on the digitizer

How do I convert my old GTCO Digitizer to work with On- Screen Takeofftrade

Call GTCO and they may be able to reconfigure your digitizer to be compatible with On-Screen Takeoff

Printing Issues Which Printers work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible printers include On-Screen Takeoff Hewlett Packard Epson and Canon printers If you are having printer difficulties please contact support and specify the type of printer along with other pertinent information Contact support at wwwoncentercomsupport or email supportoncentercom

Which Plotters work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible Plotters include Hewlett Packard DesignJet plotters and the EnCAD Cadjet II If you are having plotter difficulties please contact support and specify the type of plotter concerned

ViewingDisplay I can no longer see my condition list How do I get it back

The toolbars and Dock bars can be turned on and off through the View gt Toolbars menu options

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

77

This is also accessible by right-clicking in the toolbar area and selecting (or deselecting) a toolbar listed

I cannot view my folders in the condition list

Right-click in the Takeoff Dock barcondition list area and select Show Tree to display your folders

My Status Bar reads Viewer Mode and I am unable to draw conditions

On-Screen Takeoff needs to be Authorized Or you need to purchase an upgrade Click the Perform Advanced Takeoff button on the main toolbar

I hid a Dock bar and when I selected to view it again it appeared alongside the other Dock

bar instead of stacked on top of it How do I fix it

Pick up the Dock bar by clicking on the bar at the top and continuing to hold down the mouse button drag the Dock bar over the other one It will resize and appear stacked with the other

When I open image files from a CD the images are all upside down How do I get them right

side up

To flip pages from top to bottom follow the steps below 1 Click the All Pages button on the Image Toolbar (All Pages is engaged when the button

is not clicked) 2 Click the Flip Horizontal button on the Image Toolbar 3 Click the All Pages button again to disengage

Templates How do I create a Template

Follow the steps below 1 Create a typical project 2 Choose File gt Save As 3 Choose On-Screen Takeoff Template Files as the file type to save 4 Name the file This will save all of the condition setups as well as the layers for the

project

How do I create a new project from a template

Follow the steps below 1 Choose File gt New 2 Select a template from those listed in the New dialog This will open a new project with

conditions and layers saved from a previous project but no pages or takeoff

78

INDEX

Area Conditions 32

Area Objects 57

Auto Scrolling 20

Auto-save 63

Backout Mode 41

Calculation Method 60

Conditions 29

Configuration 60

Contents Tab 6

Continuous Mode 38

Count Conditions 33

Count Objects 57

Digitizer 10 65 76

Docking Toolbars 13

Dodge CD 72

Drawing 27 37

DropRun Count 55

Environment 18

Exiting 63

Exporting 49

Features 16

Font 61

Frequently Asked Questions 75

Grid 40

Help File 5

Hiding Toolbars 13

Hot Links 21

Image 19 59

Image files 9

Image Toolbar 12 71

Images 75

Index Tab 6

Layers 43

Linear Conditions 31

Linear Objects 56

Main Toolbar 12 67

Menus 14

Moving Toolbars 13

Navigate Toolbar 12 69

Navigating 20

On-Screen Takeofftrade 2

Page 59 61

Pages 20 25 28

Plan Viewer 73

Plans 26

Printing 47 76

Project Properties 25

Projects 22

Quick Start Video 18

Resizing Toolbars 13

Roping 54

Saving 63

Scale 28

Search Tab 7

Selecting Objects 42

Setup 8

Start On-Screen Takeofftrade 17

System Requirements 9

Takeoff 19 27

Takeoff Toolbar 70 71

Takeoff Toolbar 12

Template Files 23

TIF (Group4) 9

Tool Toolbar 12 68

Toolbar 67

Toolbars 12

View Toolbar 12 69

Viewing Toolbars 12

Worksheet 20

Zone Conditions 33

Zoom Toolbar 12 69

  • On-Screen Takeoff Lite
  • Table of Contents
  • Section 1 - Introduction
  • Section 2 - Setup
  • Section 3 - Toolbars and Menus
  • Section 4 - Features
  • Section 5 - Projects
  • Section 6 - Conditions and Takeoff
  • Section 7 - Printing and Exporting
  • Section 8 - Advanced Features
  • Section 9 - Saving and Exiting
  • Appendix I - Installing Your Digitizer
  • Appendix II - Toolbar Items
  • Appendix III - Loading Plans from a Dodge CD
  • Appendix IV - Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer
  • Appendix V - Frequently Asked Questions
  • Index

Section 6

29

Conditions and Takeoff

This section will Draw Conditions to Takeoff Plan Quantities

What Zones will do to help your takeoff process

Discuss the ins and outs of Takeoffs

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

30

Creating Conditions

If you are starting a new project from scratch you will need to create conditions to takeoff quantities such as floor areas wall lengths and corner bead counts If you are using a template you will have several pre-designed conditions already listed on the Takeoff dock bar However you may want to change the characteristics of some conditions or create additional conditions for a particular project

1 Right Click within the Takeoff dock bar Select New gt Condition

Or

2 From the Takeoff dock bar Click (if the buttons are not showing right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select Show Buttons from the pop-up menu) The New Condition dialog appears

3 Select the condition type (Linear Area Count or Zone) from the pull-down menu accessed by the

down arrow next to the Type option

4 Press Tab or use the mouse (or stylus) to move to Name and enter a name for your condition

5 Specify the desired condition attributes See Condition Attributes for more detail

6 Click for condition to apply

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

31

Condition Attributes Each condition type will have related attributes to select or specify within the General and Advanced tabs of the New Condition dialog Once a condition has been used to takeoff a quantity from your plans certain attributes cannot be changed

All conditions allow the user to specify color and fill pattern for the object drawn

Linear Conditions

General Specify width and height by feet and inches Specify pitch in inches up to the nearest thousandth of an inch if applicable

Advanced Specify rounding for object quantities and droprun default length for electrical or plumbing drops at the ends of lines Select Connect to have lines connect at the corners where one line of the condition ends and another begins (and indicate Tolerance for the featurersquos activation as distance between the ends of two lines) Choose Trim to have lines automatically trim to a line being crossed Choose Curve to draw a curved line

Follow these examples for inputting feet and inches For 7 feet 6 inches type 706 for 13 feet 7 inches type 1307 For 20 feet type 2000

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

32

Area Conditions

General If needed you can specify the thickness (in inches) andor pitch (in inches)

Advanced Specify rounding for object quantities Choose to display an adjustable grid within the area and indicate matrix cell dimensions

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

33

Count Conditions

General

Specify height and indicate the size (in inches) and shape (square circle triangle rectangle or opening) of the count object as it will appear on screen

Advanced Count conditions have advanced attributes These options are available for all shapes except for openings

Zone Conditions Zones allow you to subdivide condition quantities making it easier to modify and complete jobs in phases They can be used at the end of a takeoff to isolate a group of condition quantities that are in different areas of the takeoff

Zones can also be used to break a takeoff into multi-phases and can even be used to isolate quantities while a job is in progress to group the amount of work that has been completed to date They can be applied to one or multiple pages in your plans automatically calculating the takeoff quantities for each zoned area

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

34

The zone feature is only available in Lite and Full Mode If you are in View Mode and would like

to use this feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade

Condition Notes A Note tab is provided for comments regarding the condition These notes will display on the Takeoff List report and will import into Quick Bid

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

35

Condition Results The Results tab of the New Condition is based on condition type Initial settings default to linear feet (LF) for linear conditions square feet (SF) for area conditions and count of items (EA) for count conditions and zones The first of the results fields will display for the condition items in the Takeoff dock bar area All results will display in worksheets and Takeoff List reports as well as in an Excel spreadsheet after being exported

Copying Conditions You may use the condition attributes from a condition yoursquove already created for any future conditions of the same type

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Click the Copy button from the toolbar

OR

3 Right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select copy

4 A new condition will appear in the list with the same condition attributes as the previous condition but with the quantities zeroed

Editing Conditions Once you have copied a condition you might want to change several attributes You can also edit an existing condition to fit any updated needs

1 Highlight the desired condition on the Takeoff dock bar

2 Click the Change button

OR

3 Double-click on the condition you wish to edit to bring up the Change Condition dialog

NOTE The Change Condition dialog differs from the New Condition dialog only in that if takeoffs

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

36

have been performed in your project with this condition you will not be able to change the type of condition or certain properties under the advanced tab of the dialog box

Deleting Conditions 1 Click on the condition in the Takeoff Dock bar area

2 Click the Delete button on the toolbar

OR

3 Right-click and select Delete from the pop-up menu

All takeoff associated with the deleted condition will be deleted immediately and permanently

Organizing Project Conditions Within your project you can create folders andor sub-folders for different types of conditions You may even want to create a folder containing conditions with reset values

To get started organizing your conditions make sure you are viewing the condition tree (right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select Show Tree)

Creating Folders and Sub-Folders 1 Right-click in the Takeoff Dock bar area

2 Select New gt Folder from the pop-up menu

Copying Folders

1 Click on the folder and click Copy on the toolbar

2 All copied conditions within the new folder will have values reset to zero

Renaming Folders

1 Click on the folder

2 Right-click and select Rename from the pop-up menu

3 Enter a name for your folder and click the Enter button

Changing Condition Order

You may move conditions up or down in the condition list of the Takeoff dock bar to suit your project needs

1 Select the condition you would like to move by clicking to highlight it

NOTE When you are ready to move the highlighted conditions be sure that you start

moving using the last condition chosen That condition will have a highlighted boarder

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

37

2 Drag and drop any the condition from one place to another in the list You may also move a condition to another folder on the list in this way

Drawing with Conditions Snap Angles Set up snap angles to prevent lines from appearing jagged Snap angles are commonly set at 15deg and shift snap angles at 0deg

1 Go to Tools gt Options Options dialog appears

2 Under the General tab make the desired settings

3 Click to save the settings As they are drawn lines will snap to the set degree

Drawing a Linear Object 1 Select a condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff dock bar

2 Move the cursor into the Image takeoff area of the screen you will see the cursor display as crosshairs

3 Click and hold left mouse button then drag mouse to draw a line

4 Release mouse button to set line

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

38

5 Repeat steps for further lines

Continuous Mode This feature allows you to draw an object that has connected lines

1 Click the icon from the Takeoff toolbar

OR

2 Go to Tools gt Continuous Mode

3 Follow steps 1-3 from Draw a Linear Object

4 Click at each point of intersection The object will be connected

5 Double-click after making the final point to set the lines

Drawing a Curve To draw a curved line the Curve option must be checked under the Advanced tab of the Condition dialog

1 Click where you want to begin the curve and drag in a straight line to the position for the other endpoint of the curve

2 Click on the line to select it Handles in the shapes of small squares will appear at either end of

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

39

the line and in the center of the line

3 Move the cursor over the center handles until the cursor becomes a two-way arrow

4 Click and drag in the direction of the curve bending the line as you move the cursor Release to set the curve (The line you began with will disappear)

Draw a circle by drawing two curved lines connected

Drawing an Area Object Area conditions are drawn similarly to continuous mode lines You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete your area takeoff

NOTE When drawing an area do not intersect the perimeter or line of the object you are drawing

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

3 The area will be filled with the pattern set for that condition

NOTE The simulated circle will be good enough for you to be able to make a bid

To create a circular area click from point to point with very short distances in between points simulating a circlersquos perimeter Double-click after setting the last point to set the area

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

40

Grid Options Grids give you an added advantage when installing materials such as tiles Use this feature to get a count for how many tiles are needed for an area

1 Double-click on an area condition in the Takeoff dock bar to open its Condition dialog

2 Click on the Advanced tab to show its options

3 Check the box next to Grid by clicking in it

4 Indicate the dimensions of the cell matrix in inches (For example 200 x 400)

5 Under Results tab choose each (EA) for one of the results fields This will tabulate a number of grid cells (including partial grid cells) in area

6 Click to save your settings

7 Use the Move Grid and Rotate Grid features in the Tools menu to manipulate the grid as desired

Grid Calculation

1 Go to Tools gt Options menu

1 Specify if On-Screen Takeoff automatically should Calculate Grid Position

2 If AreaGrid Size is selected On-Screen Takeoff will calculate the number of items needed to fill the grid based on grid demintions

3 Click to accept and close the dialog

To move a line at any angle (regardless of default setting) press the Shift key while moving the mouse

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

41

Backout Mode This feature allows you to take out part of an area and deduct that amount of square footage

1 Select Tools gt Backout Mode

2 Outline the are you want backed out as you would when drawing a regular area object (see Drawing an Area Object)

3 The outlined area will clear and quantities will be recalculated

NOTE The perimeter of the backout area will be added to the LF quantity for that condition

Drawing a Count Object Square triangle rectangle and circle shaped count objects can easily be placed on images

1 Select the condition

2 Click in the location where you want the object to appear

3 To place an opening-shaped count item like a door or window you must click over an existing linear object such as a wall

4 On the Results tab you can change the height properties to give you the result you need

5 If Backout is checked on the advanced tab for each count opening the opening-shaped count item will back out a corresponding section of the linear object

Opening shaped count items are sized at 3rsquo0rdquo by default

Drawing a Zone Zones are drawn in the same way as area objects and may be any polygonal shape You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete the zone perimeter

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

42

Selecting Objects

1 Use the Select Tool to select objects

You can also select all objects that correspond to a condition

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Right-click and choose Select All

3 All objects with this condition will be highlighted with squares as an outline

Moving and Resizing Objects Linear

1 To move or resize a linear object click anywhere on the line to select it

2 To move the line position your pointer over the center handles When the mouse is positioned over the handles you will see a two-way arrow You will only be able to move the line in the direction of the arrows

3 Drag the line to a new position

4 Clicking and dragging the handles on the ends of the line will allow you to lengthen or shorten your line

Area and Zone

1 To move an area object or zone in its entirety click and drag it to its new position

2 Grabbing a handle at a corner or intersection of the object will allow you to adjust and change its perimeter

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

43

Count 1 To move a square circle rectangle or triangle shaped count object click and drag

2 Click and drag an opening shaped count object along the length of the linear object to the desired position then release

NOTE An opening shaped count object may not be moved from its associated linear condition object however it may be moved up and down the length of the linear object

Layers On-Screen Takeoff allows you to sort and separate your takeoff objects within the same job and on the same page On-Screen Takeoff gives you this flexibility through the use of layers

By assigning different conditions to different layers (for example differentiating between floors ceilings and walls) you can choose to view all layers or turn off certain layers to display and print the remaining groups of conditions only You may also remove the background image of electronic plans add text and hot link symbols or print only your condition takeoffs

Layers are only available in Full Mode If you are in View or Lite Mode and would like to use this

feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade Default Layers

On-Screen Takeoff begins every project with three default layers Image Annotation and Default The Image layer holds the electronic plan files you may have in your project The Annotation layer possesses all text notations highlighting and hot links in the project The Default layer will appear in the Condition dialog when creating or editing a condition (listed in the takeoff dock bar) Conditions are assigned to the Default layer unless otherwise specified by the user

Creating Layers To assign a condition to a layer other than the default layer you must first create additional layers for your project

1 Select View gt Layers to open the Layers dialog

2 Click An unnamed layer will be added

3 Click within the empty box and type a name for your layer (for example Wall)

4 New layers are added as active layers The adjacent box under the Show column will be checked

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

44

Assigning a Layer to a Condition 1 Open the Condition dialog box by creating a new condition or editing an existing condition

2 Under the General tab click on the down arrow in the Layer field to display optional layers

3 Select the desired layer for the condition Only the Default layer and layers you have added will be displayed

4 Click

View and Hide Layers

1 Select View gt Layers

2 Under the Show column check the box to view or remove the check (by clicking on it) to hide the specific layer

3 Click to accept and close the Layers dialog

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

45

Assigning Text to a Layer When adding text to an image On-Screen Takeoff has the capability to assign the text to a specified layer

1 Select the Text Tool

2 Click at the point you want to place your text

3 Type in your text using the Enter key for line breaks

4 Click the drop down arrow next to the Layer field and select the desired layer

Section 7

46

Printing and Exporting

This section will

Printing options and procedures

Exporting data by copying and pasting

Exporting quantity results to Excel spreadsheets

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

47

Print Setup On-Screen Takeoff allows the user to print the image takeoff list and worksheet

1 Select File gt Print Setup The Print Setup dialog will open

2 Select a printer or leave the default selection listed (change from the default printer displayed by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the field)

3 Indicate page size and printer tray option (Source) Access page size options by clicking on the

down arrow at the right of the field

4 Choose Portrait or Landscape orientation

5 Click to accept and close the dialog

Printing Images The image area can include the electronic plans the takeoff objects added text and hot links To print a subset of these (for example just the takeoffs without the plans or the added text and hot link symbols) hide layers that you do not want to print (see Section 6 View and Hide Layers) When you are printing your images every page will show the scale of the takeoff you are printing

1 Click on the Image tab to display the area of your project

2 Select File gt Print (or Ctrl + P)

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

48

3 Select the desired view (What to print) and the Image Range

4 Click The second Print dialog will open

5 Change settings accordingly or click if you accept the default settings

Printing Takeoff Lists and Worksheets In Takeoff Lists and Worksheets you may hide columns to print only certain results or adjust column widths to fit the report within the page size selected

1 In Takeoff List or Worksheet view move your cursor to the right side of the columnrsquos title bar the cursor will display as a two-way arrow

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

49

2 Click and drag to adjust the width of the column Holding the mouse button you may

slide the title bar under the title bar to its left to hide the column completely

3 Select File gt Print or press Ctrl + P to access the Print dialog

4 Indicate desired printer and choose the number of copies

5 Click to print and close the dialog

When printing the condition list we suggest printing in landscape

To reset to the default column widths double-click on the right border of a column heading will reset the column to its right (or previously to its right before being hidden)

Print Preview 1 Select File gt Print Preview

2 Use and to vary your view 3 If viewing an image choose current full or scale view to see how it displays

4 For printed outputs that cover more than one page use and to view adjacent pages or click on the down arrow next to Page field and select the page you want displayed

Exporting Using the CopyPaste Feature You may copy all the data or sections from the worksheet and the takeoff list view in On-Screen Takeoff and paste it into another application When pasting into Excel the cell layout will be maintained

1 Highlight the areas you wish to paste Click and hold the left mouse button down as you drag the cursor over the area to be selected then releasing the mouse button

OR

2 Select the entire takeoff list quickly click on the left On-Screen Takeoff column header and hold and drag the cursor across the remaining column headings

The number of pages for the view selected will display in the lower left-hand corner The zoom percentage that applies to the view will be displayed in the lower right-hand corner next to page size of the drawing

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

50

3 In the worksheet view you may highlight rows by clicking on the numbered buttons to the left of each row clicking and dragging across column headings or clicking and dragging over individual cells in the worksheet

Click anywhere in the appropriate view to deselect the area

4 Once your selection is highlighted you may select Edit gt Copy or Ctrl C from the keyboard 5 On your monitor switch to the application into which you want to paste your selection 6 Select Edit gt Paste in the new application or simply press Ctrl + V to paste

The colored keys for conditions cannot be pasted

Using the Export Feature You may export condition quantities to specified cell location within an Excel worksheet file Cell target locations are assigned in the Results tab of the condition dialogs on the Export line relating to each quantity measurement type

On-Screen Takeoff will export takeoff quantity results for up to three different quantity types that you specify For instance you may want to know the number of square feet in a ceiling area as well as the number of linear feet in its perimeter

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

51

1 Bring up the Condition dialog by double-clicking on a condition in the takeoff dock bar or by

selecting the condition and clicking

2 Click on the Results tab to access its fields The default quantities for the condition type will display

3 For each results field click on the arrow to access the pull-down menu and select the appropriate quantity (for example SF LF EA etchellip)

4 Have your Excel spreadsheet opened and saved in a file

5 Specify the Excel spreadsheet cell locations where you want the results to go

6 For a cell in the first sheet of your spreadsheet type in the cell address (eg a1) Case is not important

7 For a cell on a successive sheet of your spreadsheet type in sheet the number followed by a comma and the cell address without any spaces (eg sheet2a1) Case is not important

8 Click

9 Select File gt Export gt Condition Qty to Excel

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

52

10 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

11 Click to export On-Screen Takeoff results to specified cell locations in the Excel file When you return to the Excel application you will see the values have been added to the specified cell locations in your spreadsheet

12 Save your Excel file

Exporting Worksheet to Excel

1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 From On-Screen Takeoff Select File gt Export gt Worksheet to Excel

4 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

5 Click When you return to the Excel application you will see the values from the Worksheet Tab have been added to your spreadsheet

6 Save your Excel file

Exporting Takeoff to CVS 1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 Click the Takeoff Tab in the project you want to export the information

4 Select File gt Export gt Takeoff to CSV

5 Browse to the location of the CSV spreadsheet file click file to select it

6 Click the Save

NOTE CSV files can be opened in Excel Lotus Access etc One may consider this option more of a ldquodumprdquo into a file

The Excel application must be active (it may be minimized on the application bar) with the target spreadsheet open in the application Otherwise an error will occur with the export operation that will affect both the On-Screen Takeofftrade file and the Excel spreadsheet

Section 8

53

Advanced Features

This section will

Some special features of working with condition objects in the takeoff area

Details of advanced options for conditions

Advanced features of the Project Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

54

Features to Use with Objects Roping Feature You can move copy or delete using this feature Using the Select tool (the pointer) you may select several objects at once by clicking and dragging an outline around the objects then releasing the mouse button Roping may select either objects completely within the outlined area (inclusive) or objects both within and touched by the outlined area (touching) Specify your roping preference under Tools gt Options

1 Click and hold the mouse button at a point on the screen near the objects to be selected and drag to surround the objects with an outline

2 Release the mouse button The objects will be selected

3 You may now

Move the group around on the page by clicking within the group dragging the mouse and releasing the button to place the objects

Delete the group of objects by clicking the Delete key or

Copy and paste by pressing Ctrl C to copy the group then Ctrl V to paste it The pasted copy of the grouped objects will appear slightly offset from the original objects

Section 8 Advanced Features

55

Applying a DropRun Count

Use the droprun feature when calculating quantities to take into account the drop or run of a linear condition such as electrical lines or plumbing pipes Drop or run lengths may be added separately to any linear condition on screen while a default droprun length may be indicated for a condition as a whole

1 Select the desired linear condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff Dock bar

2 Click the Change button in the toolbar to open the Change Condition dialog

3 Click the Advanced tab to access the advanced options and click inside the DropRun check box

4 Enter a default length to be applied to all of this condition Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches) You can leave the length blank and manually enter drop run on each segment drawn

5 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog

Edit DropRun Count

1 With the related linear condition in the Takeoff Dock bar highlighted or with the pointer tool selected

2 click on the desired linear object in the image takeoff area The Count button will become active

3 Click on the Count button (alternatively select Tools gt Count) The default droprun amount will show in the pop-up Count dialog (Default length will be zero if droprun has not been selected in this conditionrsquos properties)

4 Type in the desired length Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches)

5 Click the OK button The additional amount will be reflected in the corresponding quantity The new DropRun count will apply only to the object edited

Adding Text in Image View

On-Screen Takeoff allows you to place text comments around your quantity takeoffs that may be printed along with plan images and objects Text is automatically placed within the Annotation Layer (that includes text and hot links)

1 To place text on the image select the Text Tool and click at the point you want to place your text opening a text box

2 Type in your information clicking Enter for line breaks

3 When you are finished click the OK button to exit the text box

4 To reposition text simply click on the text (with the Text Tool active) to select it

5 Move the cursor over the text the cursor will now display as a four-way arrow

6 Click and drag the mouse to position the text as desired

Section 8 Advanced Features

56

1 To edit existing text use the Text Tool to double-click on the text to open the editing box

2 Enter additional text or use the Backspace key to delete text as necessary

Formatting Text Once created you may format the font size type style and color of your text

1 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Font or click on the Font button in the Takeoff Toolbar

2 Select the desired features (color options are disabled) and click the OK button

3 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Color or click on the Color button in the Takeoff Toolbar The Color dialog will open

4 Click on a color in the Basic Color palette or create a color and add to the Custom Colors palette (Be sure to click on the color in the Custom Colors palette to select it)

5 Click the OK button

Object Properties

Linear Objects

Linear objects may be set to connect at corners

A linear object may be set to trim automatically when crossing another linear object (Check the trim option under the advanced tab of the Condition dialog)

When you move a connected linear object objects automatically move and resize connected lines accordingly (quantities are then recalculated)

This feature requires that the connected linear object be moved using the center handles (does not apply when resizing the line from the ends)

Objects constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

Objects are measured from centerline to centerline

Section 8 Advanced Features

57

Area Objects When drawing an area use your escape key to undo the last line drawn You may reverse your

drawing of an area using the escape key

The area will not fill with color and pattern until the user double-clicks after the last line is set

Lines drawn to delineate an area object constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

After selecting an area to move or adjust position the mouse in the center to move the entire area position the mouse at the sides or corners to adjust the perimeter

Count Objects

All count objects are quantified by the physical number of objects per page and reported as EA for the UOM The quantity for the current Image View is (displayed in the Condition List) and the total quantity in your project is displayed in the Takeoff View and Worksheet View)

Square circle rectangle and triangle shaped count objects do not displace or subtract from other object quantities when placed on top of them However on the Advanced Tab for the count condition a connect property can be set (this is a check box) so that when a count object of this shape is put on top of a Linear type takeoff object it will move with the linear if said linear is moved

An opened-shaped count object must be placed within a linear object Opening shaped count objects may also be measured by linear foot or linear yard (EA SF and SY are also options) Opening shaped count items default to a width of 3rsquo 0rdquo at the time of creation This size can be changed The small medium and large size are not options on this type of condition anymore Check Backout on the Advanced tab for each Count object back out the footage (or yardage) of opening-shaped count objects in which they are placed

NOTE In order to see this Backout functionality (in quantity) for SY or SF deductions at least one of the

results for the Linear(s) this object will be placed on must be set to SY or SF and the count object must have a height quantity

Advanced Features of Conditions The Round Feature Under the Advanced tab of the linear and area Condition dialogues you may specify quantity rounding (in inches) For linear objects rounding applies to each linear object drawn For area objects rounding will apply to each segment of the area perimeter adjusting the perimeter and area calculations For example With a linear condition entering 12 in the Round field will round up each related linear object to the nearest 12 inches or one foot With this setting two walls of 1 4 would each round to 2 0 totaling 4 0

NOTE In the Takeoff Dock bar condition list and in the On-Screen Takeoff reports quantities will be displayed in whole numbers rounded up to the nearest foot However calculations are based on true quantities without rounding unless the Round Feature is engaged

Pitch Pitch may apply either to linear or area conditions It is measured in rise per linear foot Entering 12 indicates a 12 rise per 12 of linear distance (a pitch of 12 over 12) or an angle of 45deg

Section 8 Advanced Features

58

Advanced Features of Project Properties Selecting Multiple Pages

1 Select a single page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry

2 Drag the cursor down the column of numbers to select consecutive pages

3 Click on the blank button at the top of this column to select all pages in the Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

59

Changing Image Assigned to a Drawing 1 Select the page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry 2 Click the Change Image button The Change Image dialog box will appear

3 Navigate to the desired file and select by clicking on it

4 Click the Open button The electronic file assigned to the page will have been changed to reflect the new file choice

Changing Image File Path 1 Select pages as described above

2 Choose Change Folder

3 In the Change Folder dialog navigate to the appropriate folder

4 Click the OK button The file path will have been changed for the selected page entries

Delete a Page from Project Properties 1 Select the page you want to delete by clicking on its associated number (in the gray box at the

left of the entry)

2 Choose Delete Page

All Takeoff on the page will be deleted immediately and permanently

Section 8 Advanced Features

60

Advanced Features of Tool Options

Calculation Method On-Screen Takeoff has built-in calculation options to allow for faster work and faster saves until your takeoff is complete Calculation options are found by selecting Tools gt Options then clicking on the Calculation tab

Calculation method can be set to Automatic Automatic except Grids and Manual Manual will allow the program to operate more quickly while Automatic or Automatic except Grids allows the user to see quantity changes as takeoffs are made

In any mode you may press F9 to recalculate quantities for the On-Screen Takeoff current totals

Configuration Tab

When the ldquoPage Label (A01)rdquo radial button is chosen On-Screen Takeoff puts the numbered label on all the pages of in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar If the Page Descriptionrdquo radial button is chosen then a description of what takeoff is on that specific page will be shown in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar

This section of the configuration tab gives you options on how you want to export your information When the ldquoFolderSubfolder Namesrdquo radial button is chosen than on your file that you are exporting to will have all the conditions folders and subfolders In the Delimiter box you can choose the symbol that is needed to separate the information you are exporting Some files need semicolons () or colons () to make sure the information comes exported in is separated it the appropriate places

Section 8 Advanced Features

61

In previous versions of On-Screen Takeoff there are views that users need to have in order for them to display their information By either choosing ldquoOST 1xrdquo or ldquoOST 2xrdquo it will let the program know you want your columns of information exported in that specific format

When you have the Confirm Deletions radial button of ldquoYesrdquo chosen than every time you delete anything you will get a dialog box confirming your intentions of deletion

While working with your takeoff you have a choice to either view the legend of your conditions or hide it Choose whichever radial button that suits your needs

For those who prefer to use the Enter key to navigate in dialog boxes this option is just for that

Font Tab The Font tab is designed for you to make your own look and feel for the application At the bottom of this tab it will show you sample of the fonts and colors you have chosen

Renaming the Current Page You may change the name of the current page in the takeoff area of On-Screen Takeoff by selecting Edit gt Rename Page

This opens the Name Page dialog and you may simply type in a new name and click the Enter button The new name for the file will be reflected on the title bar for the page and in Project Properties

You also may access the Rename Page function by right-clicking in the takeoff area while in Image View and selecting the option from the pop-up menu that appears

Section 9

62

Saving and Exiting

This section will

Explain how to save projects

Show you how to safely exit the program

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

63

Saving Your Project

1 Select File gt Save 2 If your project has not previously been saved a Save dialog box will open to allow you to name

the file and choose the directory and folder in which to save your file 3 Once saved File gt Save will simply save the current version of the file

OR

4 Select File gt Save As then type in a new name for the file and save to the desired file path

The Auto-save Feature With the Auto-save feature On-Screen Takeoff automatically backs up your open project You may choose to have more than one level of backup files The first backup copy will have the extension b00 and successive files will be b01 b02 and so on If you have designated four levels of backup files after the fourth backup copy has been created (b03) the next file will be saved over the file with extension b00 Further backup saves will then rotate through the four backup files in the same way

1 Select Tools gt Options 2 In the Auto-save area (under the General tab) select the frequency of backup file creation (in

minutes) and the number of levels for the feature 3 You also may disengage the feature by clicking in the check box to clear it

The Auto-save feature automatically saves backup copies to the directory of the current project If you are working from a write-protected area such as a CD-ROM On-Screen Takeoff will place backup files in the On-Screen Takeoff folder

Exiting When you are finished using On-Screen Takeoff it is very easy to exit Exiting is very important because of security reasons If someone were to use your computer they could enter the application and view and manipulate information

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

64

On-Screen Takeoff closes the open project when you open another or create a new project or when you exit the program

1 Select File gt Exit

OR

2 You also may click at the upper right-hand corner of the application to exit

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

65

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer When you get your digitizer from GTCO you will need to connect it to your computer Follow the instructions outlined below to do this

Note For rollup digitizers the metal bar must be oriented to the top or right hand side

Connecting the Digitizer 1 Lay the digitizer out flat 2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer 3 Plug in the power adapter 4 Plug the interface (IO) cable into the digitizer 5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into an open serial port on computer

Note GTCO Technical support phone number is 410-381-6688 The electronic manual (on diskette) from GTCO contains more detailed installation and operation instructions for the GTCO digitizer model you have

Installing other Digitizer Drivers If you are using a GTCO Digitizer you will need to install the GTCO TabletWorks Drivers

If you are using a Digitizer not supported by GTCO Tablet Works 10 please contact the manufacturer of your digitizer for assistance with installation

Installing GTCO TabletWorks Drivers 1 Insert the On Center CD into the CD-ROM drive The CD Startup screen will open 2 Click on Install Software 3 Select Additional Software and Drivers 4 Select Digitizer Driver 5 Follow the instructions for installing TabletWorks 10

Adhering the Template The template is a small plastic sticker used to enable mouse function when using the digitizer with On-Screen Takeoff Place your template on your digitizer We suggest placing it in the bottom right corner of the digitizer about one inch inside the takeoff area

Note You may either peel off the back of the template and use the adhesive surface or you can tape the template down

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

66

Testing the Digitizer Drivers Before running OST you may test the digitizer by moving the stylus around on the digitizer pad it should move the mouse cursor (if mouse emulation is enabled)

If the digitizer does not move the mouse cursor on the screen

The superset codes may need to be reset Reset the superset codes by touching on the border of the digitizer with the stylus The digitizer should beep several times

The digitizer may not be communicating with the computer Be sure the COM port selected is correct Be sure the COM port selected is correct If you are not able to get the digitizer to move the mouse cursor you need to call GTCO technical support for help

Note The Mouse Emulation is not required for On-Screen Takeoff to work properly It is used only for the Template functionality if the digitizer is moving the cursor the wrong direction (up instead of sideways or vice-versa)

Click the L-shaped arrow symbol on the digitizer with the stylus

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

67

Appendix II Toolbar Items Main Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

68

Tool Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

69

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

70

Navigate Toolbar (Continued)

Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

71

Takeoff Toolbar (Continued)

Image Toolbar

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

72

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

This section will detail how to load plans from a F W Dodge CD-ROM into an On-Screen Takeoff project file ready for takeoffs

Dodge files may be added to the Project Properties dialog However loading the files in that way will load the files by number rather than name description If you want to load one page only from your Dodge CD You will have to rename the page to display the name rather than number of the file

To load plan files from a Dodge CD so that the files load sequentially by file number but are displayed by name rather than by number within your project follow the instructions below

Opening a Dodge project from a CD-ROM 1 Insert the CD into the drive 2 Choose File gt Custom 3 Choose Dodge Plans Project (plansdat) as the file type 4 Select the appropriate file type by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the Files of type

field 5 In the Look in field access your drive paths by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the

field then

Navigate to your CD-ROM drive Open the data folder and Open the Projects folder

6 Select the desired project and open its folder 7 Open the plansdat file 8 All the images will come in sequenced correctly for that job along with the full descriptions

(names) of each page If there is not a plans folder in the project folder then plans do not exist for that project on the CD Opening the plansdat file will yield an empty project

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

73

Appendix IV Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer The On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer is a limited version of On Center Softwarersquos commercial takeoff software If your status bar located at the very bottom of the main window says View Mode in the lower left-hand corner then you are using the Plan Viewer You can use the plan viewer to

View CD-based amp converted CAD drawings

View a previously created OST file and associated drawings

Download electronic plans online

Navigate through drawings

Quickly Takeoff linearsareas and counts

Zoom in to view the plan better

Print drawings directly from the viewer

Viewing an On-Screen Takeoff Project File

1 To open an OST file that was previously created with of On-Screen Takeoff 2 Select File gt Open 3 An Open dialog will appear if you do not see the OST file you are looking for select the

Look In drop down arrow 4 A drop down menu will appear listing the various folders drives and mapped drives located

on your computer select the correct drive or folder location and continue to browse to the location of your OST file

5 When you see your OST file double-click it to open it 6 Any takeoff and drawings should appear on the Image tab view

If you do not see the drawings but do see the colored takeoff layer the drawings may

not be located in the same place they were originally saved at Go to File gt Project Properties and check the Image File path for each listed page If the image file path is pointing to a CD drive make sure the CD is inside the CR-ROM

Downloading Electronic Plans If your Online Plan Service provides a special file format (OSX) required to use this feature of our plan viewer you can immediately downloaded all electronic plans of a project directly from our viewer

Most Plan Room web sites will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff when a request to download plans is made Your particular Plan Room may differ in operation so please contact the provider directly with questions on using the site

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

74

When you request to download or open a project file from a Plan Room you will usually have the open to open or save an OSX file Choosing open will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff Alternately you may choose to save the file to a local hard drive After you have saved the file either double-click it to launch On-Screen Takeoff or open the OSX file using On-Screen Takeoff by clicking File then Open and locating the file on your hard drive You will need to change the file type to OSX

After the OSX file is opened you will see an additional tab appear in the Conditions List window called Pages

The Pages tab shows the hierarchy of your project Gray file icons represent pages that have not been downloaded and blue icons represents pages that have been downloaded

To download a page simply double-click the page icon

If you wish to select a group of pages to download you can use the Ctrl or Shift key to multiple select them then click the Download button

If you wish to download all pages at once click the Download All button

Downloaded pages will now appear in the Project Properties dialog in the same order in which they appear in the Pages tab

Creating Quick Takeoffs With On-Screen Takeoff you can create quick takeoffs to measure quantities even if you dont have the full version of our program However using the Quick Takeoff functionality shows you just a fraction of what the full version can do

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar is located at the top of the image view It has three buttons designated for three types of takeoffs Linear Area and Count The Quantity drop down list will show secondary quantities for Linears and Areas The Units drop down allows you to select how you want your quantities displayed Feet Inches Yards Millimeters and Meters

NOTE Every time change the type of takeoff you are performing (switching from Area to Linear for example) the previous quantities and takeoff objects will disappear They will also disappear when you changes pages

NOTE You can use the Dimension Tool to basically measure the distance between two points or linears The distance will display on the status bar at the bottom of the application

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

75

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions General

Where is On-Screen Takeoff installed on my computer

Typically it is installed in CProgram FilesOn-Screen Takeoff

In Explorer how do I recognize On-Screen Takeoff file types

On-Screen Takeoff data is stored in a single file per job lsquojob name OSTrsquo On-Screen Takeoff templates are stored as lsquotemplate nameTPOrsquo

Can only one project at a time be open

Yes For that reason opening another project automatically closes the project on screen You will be asked to save any changes

Is only one scale allowed per page What about on drawings that have multiple detail sections on a page and each of those drawings have different scales

Yes For pages with drawings of different scales copy the drawing to another project page and set the appropriate scale

I cannot perform backout on an area that is along a linear

As a workaround use the On-Screen Takeoff layers feature to help you with this issue Electronic Images

How do I start a project from drawings that have been scanned and written to a CD-ROM

Open a new project Select File gt Project Properties and select Auto Add Navigate to your CD and the appropriate folder and select any image file in that location Click Open All files in the location will load into your project Recommended that images are copied from CD to hard drive for performance

If I get a disk of drawings in AutoCAD format (R13 or R14) can I read them in On-Screen Takeoff

Yes On-Screen Takeoff now reads DWG DXF and many other format that are saved with AutoCAD

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

76

When I click on the all pages button what is supposed to happen Currently nothing seems to change when I click on that button

The All Pages button is used to apply the Darken and Enhance Plans feature to all pages in the project (as opposed to only the current page on screen)

Is there a way to deduct a large skylight from an area condition

Yes with the related area condition selected in the Takeoff Dock bar unselect the Backout button on the Takeoff Toolbar then draw the Backout area The area quantity will be deducted from the related condition object and the linear measurement of the Backout perimeter will be added

Digitizer Issues

How do I connect a Digitizer to the computer

See Appendix I Connecting a Digitizer

The Place Template menu choice is disabled

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or the digitizer or the digitzer drivers are not installed

It wonrsquot let me select the Set Takeoff Area menu choice

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or no job is open a digitizer is not installed or the drivers are not installed

The digitizer stylus is not moving the cursor or crosshairs

Click S-0-1 superset on the digitizer

How do I convert my old GTCO Digitizer to work with On- Screen Takeofftrade

Call GTCO and they may be able to reconfigure your digitizer to be compatible with On-Screen Takeoff

Printing Issues Which Printers work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible printers include On-Screen Takeoff Hewlett Packard Epson and Canon printers If you are having printer difficulties please contact support and specify the type of printer along with other pertinent information Contact support at wwwoncentercomsupport or email supportoncentercom

Which Plotters work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible Plotters include Hewlett Packard DesignJet plotters and the EnCAD Cadjet II If you are having plotter difficulties please contact support and specify the type of plotter concerned

ViewingDisplay I can no longer see my condition list How do I get it back

The toolbars and Dock bars can be turned on and off through the View gt Toolbars menu options

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

77

This is also accessible by right-clicking in the toolbar area and selecting (or deselecting) a toolbar listed

I cannot view my folders in the condition list

Right-click in the Takeoff Dock barcondition list area and select Show Tree to display your folders

My Status Bar reads Viewer Mode and I am unable to draw conditions

On-Screen Takeoff needs to be Authorized Or you need to purchase an upgrade Click the Perform Advanced Takeoff button on the main toolbar

I hid a Dock bar and when I selected to view it again it appeared alongside the other Dock

bar instead of stacked on top of it How do I fix it

Pick up the Dock bar by clicking on the bar at the top and continuing to hold down the mouse button drag the Dock bar over the other one It will resize and appear stacked with the other

When I open image files from a CD the images are all upside down How do I get them right

side up

To flip pages from top to bottom follow the steps below 1 Click the All Pages button on the Image Toolbar (All Pages is engaged when the button

is not clicked) 2 Click the Flip Horizontal button on the Image Toolbar 3 Click the All Pages button again to disengage

Templates How do I create a Template

Follow the steps below 1 Create a typical project 2 Choose File gt Save As 3 Choose On-Screen Takeoff Template Files as the file type to save 4 Name the file This will save all of the condition setups as well as the layers for the

project

How do I create a new project from a template

Follow the steps below 1 Choose File gt New 2 Select a template from those listed in the New dialog This will open a new project with

conditions and layers saved from a previous project but no pages or takeoff

78

INDEX

Area Conditions 32

Area Objects 57

Auto Scrolling 20

Auto-save 63

Backout Mode 41

Calculation Method 60

Conditions 29

Configuration 60

Contents Tab 6

Continuous Mode 38

Count Conditions 33

Count Objects 57

Digitizer 10 65 76

Docking Toolbars 13

Dodge CD 72

Drawing 27 37

DropRun Count 55

Environment 18

Exiting 63

Exporting 49

Features 16

Font 61

Frequently Asked Questions 75

Grid 40

Help File 5

Hiding Toolbars 13

Hot Links 21

Image 19 59

Image files 9

Image Toolbar 12 71

Images 75

Index Tab 6

Layers 43

Linear Conditions 31

Linear Objects 56

Main Toolbar 12 67

Menus 14

Moving Toolbars 13

Navigate Toolbar 12 69

Navigating 20

On-Screen Takeofftrade 2

Page 59 61

Pages 20 25 28

Plan Viewer 73

Plans 26

Printing 47 76

Project Properties 25

Projects 22

Quick Start Video 18

Resizing Toolbars 13

Roping 54

Saving 63

Scale 28

Search Tab 7

Selecting Objects 42

Setup 8

Start On-Screen Takeofftrade 17

System Requirements 9

Takeoff 19 27

Takeoff Toolbar 70 71

Takeoff Toolbar 12

Template Files 23

TIF (Group4) 9

Tool Toolbar 12 68

Toolbar 67

Toolbars 12

View Toolbar 12 69

Viewing Toolbars 12

Worksheet 20

Zone Conditions 33

Zoom Toolbar 12 69

  • On-Screen Takeoff Lite
  • Table of Contents
  • Section 1 - Introduction
  • Section 2 - Setup
  • Section 3 - Toolbars and Menus
  • Section 4 - Features
  • Section 5 - Projects
  • Section 6 - Conditions and Takeoff
  • Section 7 - Printing and Exporting
  • Section 8 - Advanced Features
  • Section 9 - Saving and Exiting
  • Appendix I - Installing Your Digitizer
  • Appendix II - Toolbar Items
  • Appendix III - Loading Plans from a Dodge CD
  • Appendix IV - Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer
  • Appendix V - Frequently Asked Questions
  • Index

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

30

Creating Conditions

If you are starting a new project from scratch you will need to create conditions to takeoff quantities such as floor areas wall lengths and corner bead counts If you are using a template you will have several pre-designed conditions already listed on the Takeoff dock bar However you may want to change the characteristics of some conditions or create additional conditions for a particular project

1 Right Click within the Takeoff dock bar Select New gt Condition

Or

2 From the Takeoff dock bar Click (if the buttons are not showing right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select Show Buttons from the pop-up menu) The New Condition dialog appears

3 Select the condition type (Linear Area Count or Zone) from the pull-down menu accessed by the

down arrow next to the Type option

4 Press Tab or use the mouse (or stylus) to move to Name and enter a name for your condition

5 Specify the desired condition attributes See Condition Attributes for more detail

6 Click for condition to apply

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

31

Condition Attributes Each condition type will have related attributes to select or specify within the General and Advanced tabs of the New Condition dialog Once a condition has been used to takeoff a quantity from your plans certain attributes cannot be changed

All conditions allow the user to specify color and fill pattern for the object drawn

Linear Conditions

General Specify width and height by feet and inches Specify pitch in inches up to the nearest thousandth of an inch if applicable

Advanced Specify rounding for object quantities and droprun default length for electrical or plumbing drops at the ends of lines Select Connect to have lines connect at the corners where one line of the condition ends and another begins (and indicate Tolerance for the featurersquos activation as distance between the ends of two lines) Choose Trim to have lines automatically trim to a line being crossed Choose Curve to draw a curved line

Follow these examples for inputting feet and inches For 7 feet 6 inches type 706 for 13 feet 7 inches type 1307 For 20 feet type 2000

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

32

Area Conditions

General If needed you can specify the thickness (in inches) andor pitch (in inches)

Advanced Specify rounding for object quantities Choose to display an adjustable grid within the area and indicate matrix cell dimensions

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

33

Count Conditions

General

Specify height and indicate the size (in inches) and shape (square circle triangle rectangle or opening) of the count object as it will appear on screen

Advanced Count conditions have advanced attributes These options are available for all shapes except for openings

Zone Conditions Zones allow you to subdivide condition quantities making it easier to modify and complete jobs in phases They can be used at the end of a takeoff to isolate a group of condition quantities that are in different areas of the takeoff

Zones can also be used to break a takeoff into multi-phases and can even be used to isolate quantities while a job is in progress to group the amount of work that has been completed to date They can be applied to one or multiple pages in your plans automatically calculating the takeoff quantities for each zoned area

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

34

The zone feature is only available in Lite and Full Mode If you are in View Mode and would like

to use this feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade

Condition Notes A Note tab is provided for comments regarding the condition These notes will display on the Takeoff List report and will import into Quick Bid

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

35

Condition Results The Results tab of the New Condition is based on condition type Initial settings default to linear feet (LF) for linear conditions square feet (SF) for area conditions and count of items (EA) for count conditions and zones The first of the results fields will display for the condition items in the Takeoff dock bar area All results will display in worksheets and Takeoff List reports as well as in an Excel spreadsheet after being exported

Copying Conditions You may use the condition attributes from a condition yoursquove already created for any future conditions of the same type

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Click the Copy button from the toolbar

OR

3 Right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select copy

4 A new condition will appear in the list with the same condition attributes as the previous condition but with the quantities zeroed

Editing Conditions Once you have copied a condition you might want to change several attributes You can also edit an existing condition to fit any updated needs

1 Highlight the desired condition on the Takeoff dock bar

2 Click the Change button

OR

3 Double-click on the condition you wish to edit to bring up the Change Condition dialog

NOTE The Change Condition dialog differs from the New Condition dialog only in that if takeoffs

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

36

have been performed in your project with this condition you will not be able to change the type of condition or certain properties under the advanced tab of the dialog box

Deleting Conditions 1 Click on the condition in the Takeoff Dock bar area

2 Click the Delete button on the toolbar

OR

3 Right-click and select Delete from the pop-up menu

All takeoff associated with the deleted condition will be deleted immediately and permanently

Organizing Project Conditions Within your project you can create folders andor sub-folders for different types of conditions You may even want to create a folder containing conditions with reset values

To get started organizing your conditions make sure you are viewing the condition tree (right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select Show Tree)

Creating Folders and Sub-Folders 1 Right-click in the Takeoff Dock bar area

2 Select New gt Folder from the pop-up menu

Copying Folders

1 Click on the folder and click Copy on the toolbar

2 All copied conditions within the new folder will have values reset to zero

Renaming Folders

1 Click on the folder

2 Right-click and select Rename from the pop-up menu

3 Enter a name for your folder and click the Enter button

Changing Condition Order

You may move conditions up or down in the condition list of the Takeoff dock bar to suit your project needs

1 Select the condition you would like to move by clicking to highlight it

NOTE When you are ready to move the highlighted conditions be sure that you start

moving using the last condition chosen That condition will have a highlighted boarder

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

37

2 Drag and drop any the condition from one place to another in the list You may also move a condition to another folder on the list in this way

Drawing with Conditions Snap Angles Set up snap angles to prevent lines from appearing jagged Snap angles are commonly set at 15deg and shift snap angles at 0deg

1 Go to Tools gt Options Options dialog appears

2 Under the General tab make the desired settings

3 Click to save the settings As they are drawn lines will snap to the set degree

Drawing a Linear Object 1 Select a condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff dock bar

2 Move the cursor into the Image takeoff area of the screen you will see the cursor display as crosshairs

3 Click and hold left mouse button then drag mouse to draw a line

4 Release mouse button to set line

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

38

5 Repeat steps for further lines

Continuous Mode This feature allows you to draw an object that has connected lines

1 Click the icon from the Takeoff toolbar

OR

2 Go to Tools gt Continuous Mode

3 Follow steps 1-3 from Draw a Linear Object

4 Click at each point of intersection The object will be connected

5 Double-click after making the final point to set the lines

Drawing a Curve To draw a curved line the Curve option must be checked under the Advanced tab of the Condition dialog

1 Click where you want to begin the curve and drag in a straight line to the position for the other endpoint of the curve

2 Click on the line to select it Handles in the shapes of small squares will appear at either end of

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

39

the line and in the center of the line

3 Move the cursor over the center handles until the cursor becomes a two-way arrow

4 Click and drag in the direction of the curve bending the line as you move the cursor Release to set the curve (The line you began with will disappear)

Draw a circle by drawing two curved lines connected

Drawing an Area Object Area conditions are drawn similarly to continuous mode lines You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete your area takeoff

NOTE When drawing an area do not intersect the perimeter or line of the object you are drawing

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

3 The area will be filled with the pattern set for that condition

NOTE The simulated circle will be good enough for you to be able to make a bid

To create a circular area click from point to point with very short distances in between points simulating a circlersquos perimeter Double-click after setting the last point to set the area

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

40

Grid Options Grids give you an added advantage when installing materials such as tiles Use this feature to get a count for how many tiles are needed for an area

1 Double-click on an area condition in the Takeoff dock bar to open its Condition dialog

2 Click on the Advanced tab to show its options

3 Check the box next to Grid by clicking in it

4 Indicate the dimensions of the cell matrix in inches (For example 200 x 400)

5 Under Results tab choose each (EA) for one of the results fields This will tabulate a number of grid cells (including partial grid cells) in area

6 Click to save your settings

7 Use the Move Grid and Rotate Grid features in the Tools menu to manipulate the grid as desired

Grid Calculation

1 Go to Tools gt Options menu

1 Specify if On-Screen Takeoff automatically should Calculate Grid Position

2 If AreaGrid Size is selected On-Screen Takeoff will calculate the number of items needed to fill the grid based on grid demintions

3 Click to accept and close the dialog

To move a line at any angle (regardless of default setting) press the Shift key while moving the mouse

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

41

Backout Mode This feature allows you to take out part of an area and deduct that amount of square footage

1 Select Tools gt Backout Mode

2 Outline the are you want backed out as you would when drawing a regular area object (see Drawing an Area Object)

3 The outlined area will clear and quantities will be recalculated

NOTE The perimeter of the backout area will be added to the LF quantity for that condition

Drawing a Count Object Square triangle rectangle and circle shaped count objects can easily be placed on images

1 Select the condition

2 Click in the location where you want the object to appear

3 To place an opening-shaped count item like a door or window you must click over an existing linear object such as a wall

4 On the Results tab you can change the height properties to give you the result you need

5 If Backout is checked on the advanced tab for each count opening the opening-shaped count item will back out a corresponding section of the linear object

Opening shaped count items are sized at 3rsquo0rdquo by default

Drawing a Zone Zones are drawn in the same way as area objects and may be any polygonal shape You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete the zone perimeter

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

42

Selecting Objects

1 Use the Select Tool to select objects

You can also select all objects that correspond to a condition

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Right-click and choose Select All

3 All objects with this condition will be highlighted with squares as an outline

Moving and Resizing Objects Linear

1 To move or resize a linear object click anywhere on the line to select it

2 To move the line position your pointer over the center handles When the mouse is positioned over the handles you will see a two-way arrow You will only be able to move the line in the direction of the arrows

3 Drag the line to a new position

4 Clicking and dragging the handles on the ends of the line will allow you to lengthen or shorten your line

Area and Zone

1 To move an area object or zone in its entirety click and drag it to its new position

2 Grabbing a handle at a corner or intersection of the object will allow you to adjust and change its perimeter

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

43

Count 1 To move a square circle rectangle or triangle shaped count object click and drag

2 Click and drag an opening shaped count object along the length of the linear object to the desired position then release

NOTE An opening shaped count object may not be moved from its associated linear condition object however it may be moved up and down the length of the linear object

Layers On-Screen Takeoff allows you to sort and separate your takeoff objects within the same job and on the same page On-Screen Takeoff gives you this flexibility through the use of layers

By assigning different conditions to different layers (for example differentiating between floors ceilings and walls) you can choose to view all layers or turn off certain layers to display and print the remaining groups of conditions only You may also remove the background image of electronic plans add text and hot link symbols or print only your condition takeoffs

Layers are only available in Full Mode If you are in View or Lite Mode and would like to use this

feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade Default Layers

On-Screen Takeoff begins every project with three default layers Image Annotation and Default The Image layer holds the electronic plan files you may have in your project The Annotation layer possesses all text notations highlighting and hot links in the project The Default layer will appear in the Condition dialog when creating or editing a condition (listed in the takeoff dock bar) Conditions are assigned to the Default layer unless otherwise specified by the user

Creating Layers To assign a condition to a layer other than the default layer you must first create additional layers for your project

1 Select View gt Layers to open the Layers dialog

2 Click An unnamed layer will be added

3 Click within the empty box and type a name for your layer (for example Wall)

4 New layers are added as active layers The adjacent box under the Show column will be checked

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

44

Assigning a Layer to a Condition 1 Open the Condition dialog box by creating a new condition or editing an existing condition

2 Under the General tab click on the down arrow in the Layer field to display optional layers

3 Select the desired layer for the condition Only the Default layer and layers you have added will be displayed

4 Click

View and Hide Layers

1 Select View gt Layers

2 Under the Show column check the box to view or remove the check (by clicking on it) to hide the specific layer

3 Click to accept and close the Layers dialog

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

45

Assigning Text to a Layer When adding text to an image On-Screen Takeoff has the capability to assign the text to a specified layer

1 Select the Text Tool

2 Click at the point you want to place your text

3 Type in your text using the Enter key for line breaks

4 Click the drop down arrow next to the Layer field and select the desired layer

Section 7

46

Printing and Exporting

This section will

Printing options and procedures

Exporting data by copying and pasting

Exporting quantity results to Excel spreadsheets

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

47

Print Setup On-Screen Takeoff allows the user to print the image takeoff list and worksheet

1 Select File gt Print Setup The Print Setup dialog will open

2 Select a printer or leave the default selection listed (change from the default printer displayed by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the field)

3 Indicate page size and printer tray option (Source) Access page size options by clicking on the

down arrow at the right of the field

4 Choose Portrait or Landscape orientation

5 Click to accept and close the dialog

Printing Images The image area can include the electronic plans the takeoff objects added text and hot links To print a subset of these (for example just the takeoffs without the plans or the added text and hot link symbols) hide layers that you do not want to print (see Section 6 View and Hide Layers) When you are printing your images every page will show the scale of the takeoff you are printing

1 Click on the Image tab to display the area of your project

2 Select File gt Print (or Ctrl + P)

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

48

3 Select the desired view (What to print) and the Image Range

4 Click The second Print dialog will open

5 Change settings accordingly or click if you accept the default settings

Printing Takeoff Lists and Worksheets In Takeoff Lists and Worksheets you may hide columns to print only certain results or adjust column widths to fit the report within the page size selected

1 In Takeoff List or Worksheet view move your cursor to the right side of the columnrsquos title bar the cursor will display as a two-way arrow

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

49

2 Click and drag to adjust the width of the column Holding the mouse button you may

slide the title bar under the title bar to its left to hide the column completely

3 Select File gt Print or press Ctrl + P to access the Print dialog

4 Indicate desired printer and choose the number of copies

5 Click to print and close the dialog

When printing the condition list we suggest printing in landscape

To reset to the default column widths double-click on the right border of a column heading will reset the column to its right (or previously to its right before being hidden)

Print Preview 1 Select File gt Print Preview

2 Use and to vary your view 3 If viewing an image choose current full or scale view to see how it displays

4 For printed outputs that cover more than one page use and to view adjacent pages or click on the down arrow next to Page field and select the page you want displayed

Exporting Using the CopyPaste Feature You may copy all the data or sections from the worksheet and the takeoff list view in On-Screen Takeoff and paste it into another application When pasting into Excel the cell layout will be maintained

1 Highlight the areas you wish to paste Click and hold the left mouse button down as you drag the cursor over the area to be selected then releasing the mouse button

OR

2 Select the entire takeoff list quickly click on the left On-Screen Takeoff column header and hold and drag the cursor across the remaining column headings

The number of pages for the view selected will display in the lower left-hand corner The zoom percentage that applies to the view will be displayed in the lower right-hand corner next to page size of the drawing

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

50

3 In the worksheet view you may highlight rows by clicking on the numbered buttons to the left of each row clicking and dragging across column headings or clicking and dragging over individual cells in the worksheet

Click anywhere in the appropriate view to deselect the area

4 Once your selection is highlighted you may select Edit gt Copy or Ctrl C from the keyboard 5 On your monitor switch to the application into which you want to paste your selection 6 Select Edit gt Paste in the new application or simply press Ctrl + V to paste

The colored keys for conditions cannot be pasted

Using the Export Feature You may export condition quantities to specified cell location within an Excel worksheet file Cell target locations are assigned in the Results tab of the condition dialogs on the Export line relating to each quantity measurement type

On-Screen Takeoff will export takeoff quantity results for up to three different quantity types that you specify For instance you may want to know the number of square feet in a ceiling area as well as the number of linear feet in its perimeter

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

51

1 Bring up the Condition dialog by double-clicking on a condition in the takeoff dock bar or by

selecting the condition and clicking

2 Click on the Results tab to access its fields The default quantities for the condition type will display

3 For each results field click on the arrow to access the pull-down menu and select the appropriate quantity (for example SF LF EA etchellip)

4 Have your Excel spreadsheet opened and saved in a file

5 Specify the Excel spreadsheet cell locations where you want the results to go

6 For a cell in the first sheet of your spreadsheet type in the cell address (eg a1) Case is not important

7 For a cell on a successive sheet of your spreadsheet type in sheet the number followed by a comma and the cell address without any spaces (eg sheet2a1) Case is not important

8 Click

9 Select File gt Export gt Condition Qty to Excel

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

52

10 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

11 Click to export On-Screen Takeoff results to specified cell locations in the Excel file When you return to the Excel application you will see the values have been added to the specified cell locations in your spreadsheet

12 Save your Excel file

Exporting Worksheet to Excel

1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 From On-Screen Takeoff Select File gt Export gt Worksheet to Excel

4 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

5 Click When you return to the Excel application you will see the values from the Worksheet Tab have been added to your spreadsheet

6 Save your Excel file

Exporting Takeoff to CVS 1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 Click the Takeoff Tab in the project you want to export the information

4 Select File gt Export gt Takeoff to CSV

5 Browse to the location of the CSV spreadsheet file click file to select it

6 Click the Save

NOTE CSV files can be opened in Excel Lotus Access etc One may consider this option more of a ldquodumprdquo into a file

The Excel application must be active (it may be minimized on the application bar) with the target spreadsheet open in the application Otherwise an error will occur with the export operation that will affect both the On-Screen Takeofftrade file and the Excel spreadsheet

Section 8

53

Advanced Features

This section will

Some special features of working with condition objects in the takeoff area

Details of advanced options for conditions

Advanced features of the Project Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

54

Features to Use with Objects Roping Feature You can move copy or delete using this feature Using the Select tool (the pointer) you may select several objects at once by clicking and dragging an outline around the objects then releasing the mouse button Roping may select either objects completely within the outlined area (inclusive) or objects both within and touched by the outlined area (touching) Specify your roping preference under Tools gt Options

1 Click and hold the mouse button at a point on the screen near the objects to be selected and drag to surround the objects with an outline

2 Release the mouse button The objects will be selected

3 You may now

Move the group around on the page by clicking within the group dragging the mouse and releasing the button to place the objects

Delete the group of objects by clicking the Delete key or

Copy and paste by pressing Ctrl C to copy the group then Ctrl V to paste it The pasted copy of the grouped objects will appear slightly offset from the original objects

Section 8 Advanced Features

55

Applying a DropRun Count

Use the droprun feature when calculating quantities to take into account the drop or run of a linear condition such as electrical lines or plumbing pipes Drop or run lengths may be added separately to any linear condition on screen while a default droprun length may be indicated for a condition as a whole

1 Select the desired linear condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff Dock bar

2 Click the Change button in the toolbar to open the Change Condition dialog

3 Click the Advanced tab to access the advanced options and click inside the DropRun check box

4 Enter a default length to be applied to all of this condition Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches) You can leave the length blank and manually enter drop run on each segment drawn

5 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog

Edit DropRun Count

1 With the related linear condition in the Takeoff Dock bar highlighted or with the pointer tool selected

2 click on the desired linear object in the image takeoff area The Count button will become active

3 Click on the Count button (alternatively select Tools gt Count) The default droprun amount will show in the pop-up Count dialog (Default length will be zero if droprun has not been selected in this conditionrsquos properties)

4 Type in the desired length Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches)

5 Click the OK button The additional amount will be reflected in the corresponding quantity The new DropRun count will apply only to the object edited

Adding Text in Image View

On-Screen Takeoff allows you to place text comments around your quantity takeoffs that may be printed along with plan images and objects Text is automatically placed within the Annotation Layer (that includes text and hot links)

1 To place text on the image select the Text Tool and click at the point you want to place your text opening a text box

2 Type in your information clicking Enter for line breaks

3 When you are finished click the OK button to exit the text box

4 To reposition text simply click on the text (with the Text Tool active) to select it

5 Move the cursor over the text the cursor will now display as a four-way arrow

6 Click and drag the mouse to position the text as desired

Section 8 Advanced Features

56

1 To edit existing text use the Text Tool to double-click on the text to open the editing box

2 Enter additional text or use the Backspace key to delete text as necessary

Formatting Text Once created you may format the font size type style and color of your text

1 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Font or click on the Font button in the Takeoff Toolbar

2 Select the desired features (color options are disabled) and click the OK button

3 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Color or click on the Color button in the Takeoff Toolbar The Color dialog will open

4 Click on a color in the Basic Color palette or create a color and add to the Custom Colors palette (Be sure to click on the color in the Custom Colors palette to select it)

5 Click the OK button

Object Properties

Linear Objects

Linear objects may be set to connect at corners

A linear object may be set to trim automatically when crossing another linear object (Check the trim option under the advanced tab of the Condition dialog)

When you move a connected linear object objects automatically move and resize connected lines accordingly (quantities are then recalculated)

This feature requires that the connected linear object be moved using the center handles (does not apply when resizing the line from the ends)

Objects constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

Objects are measured from centerline to centerline

Section 8 Advanced Features

57

Area Objects When drawing an area use your escape key to undo the last line drawn You may reverse your

drawing of an area using the escape key

The area will not fill with color and pattern until the user double-clicks after the last line is set

Lines drawn to delineate an area object constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

After selecting an area to move or adjust position the mouse in the center to move the entire area position the mouse at the sides or corners to adjust the perimeter

Count Objects

All count objects are quantified by the physical number of objects per page and reported as EA for the UOM The quantity for the current Image View is (displayed in the Condition List) and the total quantity in your project is displayed in the Takeoff View and Worksheet View)

Square circle rectangle and triangle shaped count objects do not displace or subtract from other object quantities when placed on top of them However on the Advanced Tab for the count condition a connect property can be set (this is a check box) so that when a count object of this shape is put on top of a Linear type takeoff object it will move with the linear if said linear is moved

An opened-shaped count object must be placed within a linear object Opening shaped count objects may also be measured by linear foot or linear yard (EA SF and SY are also options) Opening shaped count items default to a width of 3rsquo 0rdquo at the time of creation This size can be changed The small medium and large size are not options on this type of condition anymore Check Backout on the Advanced tab for each Count object back out the footage (or yardage) of opening-shaped count objects in which they are placed

NOTE In order to see this Backout functionality (in quantity) for SY or SF deductions at least one of the

results for the Linear(s) this object will be placed on must be set to SY or SF and the count object must have a height quantity

Advanced Features of Conditions The Round Feature Under the Advanced tab of the linear and area Condition dialogues you may specify quantity rounding (in inches) For linear objects rounding applies to each linear object drawn For area objects rounding will apply to each segment of the area perimeter adjusting the perimeter and area calculations For example With a linear condition entering 12 in the Round field will round up each related linear object to the nearest 12 inches or one foot With this setting two walls of 1 4 would each round to 2 0 totaling 4 0

NOTE In the Takeoff Dock bar condition list and in the On-Screen Takeoff reports quantities will be displayed in whole numbers rounded up to the nearest foot However calculations are based on true quantities without rounding unless the Round Feature is engaged

Pitch Pitch may apply either to linear or area conditions It is measured in rise per linear foot Entering 12 indicates a 12 rise per 12 of linear distance (a pitch of 12 over 12) or an angle of 45deg

Section 8 Advanced Features

58

Advanced Features of Project Properties Selecting Multiple Pages

1 Select a single page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry

2 Drag the cursor down the column of numbers to select consecutive pages

3 Click on the blank button at the top of this column to select all pages in the Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

59

Changing Image Assigned to a Drawing 1 Select the page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry 2 Click the Change Image button The Change Image dialog box will appear

3 Navigate to the desired file and select by clicking on it

4 Click the Open button The electronic file assigned to the page will have been changed to reflect the new file choice

Changing Image File Path 1 Select pages as described above

2 Choose Change Folder

3 In the Change Folder dialog navigate to the appropriate folder

4 Click the OK button The file path will have been changed for the selected page entries

Delete a Page from Project Properties 1 Select the page you want to delete by clicking on its associated number (in the gray box at the

left of the entry)

2 Choose Delete Page

All Takeoff on the page will be deleted immediately and permanently

Section 8 Advanced Features

60

Advanced Features of Tool Options

Calculation Method On-Screen Takeoff has built-in calculation options to allow for faster work and faster saves until your takeoff is complete Calculation options are found by selecting Tools gt Options then clicking on the Calculation tab

Calculation method can be set to Automatic Automatic except Grids and Manual Manual will allow the program to operate more quickly while Automatic or Automatic except Grids allows the user to see quantity changes as takeoffs are made

In any mode you may press F9 to recalculate quantities for the On-Screen Takeoff current totals

Configuration Tab

When the ldquoPage Label (A01)rdquo radial button is chosen On-Screen Takeoff puts the numbered label on all the pages of in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar If the Page Descriptionrdquo radial button is chosen then a description of what takeoff is on that specific page will be shown in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar

This section of the configuration tab gives you options on how you want to export your information When the ldquoFolderSubfolder Namesrdquo radial button is chosen than on your file that you are exporting to will have all the conditions folders and subfolders In the Delimiter box you can choose the symbol that is needed to separate the information you are exporting Some files need semicolons () or colons () to make sure the information comes exported in is separated it the appropriate places

Section 8 Advanced Features

61

In previous versions of On-Screen Takeoff there are views that users need to have in order for them to display their information By either choosing ldquoOST 1xrdquo or ldquoOST 2xrdquo it will let the program know you want your columns of information exported in that specific format

When you have the Confirm Deletions radial button of ldquoYesrdquo chosen than every time you delete anything you will get a dialog box confirming your intentions of deletion

While working with your takeoff you have a choice to either view the legend of your conditions or hide it Choose whichever radial button that suits your needs

For those who prefer to use the Enter key to navigate in dialog boxes this option is just for that

Font Tab The Font tab is designed for you to make your own look and feel for the application At the bottom of this tab it will show you sample of the fonts and colors you have chosen

Renaming the Current Page You may change the name of the current page in the takeoff area of On-Screen Takeoff by selecting Edit gt Rename Page

This opens the Name Page dialog and you may simply type in a new name and click the Enter button The new name for the file will be reflected on the title bar for the page and in Project Properties

You also may access the Rename Page function by right-clicking in the takeoff area while in Image View and selecting the option from the pop-up menu that appears

Section 9

62

Saving and Exiting

This section will

Explain how to save projects

Show you how to safely exit the program

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

63

Saving Your Project

1 Select File gt Save 2 If your project has not previously been saved a Save dialog box will open to allow you to name

the file and choose the directory and folder in which to save your file 3 Once saved File gt Save will simply save the current version of the file

OR

4 Select File gt Save As then type in a new name for the file and save to the desired file path

The Auto-save Feature With the Auto-save feature On-Screen Takeoff automatically backs up your open project You may choose to have more than one level of backup files The first backup copy will have the extension b00 and successive files will be b01 b02 and so on If you have designated four levels of backup files after the fourth backup copy has been created (b03) the next file will be saved over the file with extension b00 Further backup saves will then rotate through the four backup files in the same way

1 Select Tools gt Options 2 In the Auto-save area (under the General tab) select the frequency of backup file creation (in

minutes) and the number of levels for the feature 3 You also may disengage the feature by clicking in the check box to clear it

The Auto-save feature automatically saves backup copies to the directory of the current project If you are working from a write-protected area such as a CD-ROM On-Screen Takeoff will place backup files in the On-Screen Takeoff folder

Exiting When you are finished using On-Screen Takeoff it is very easy to exit Exiting is very important because of security reasons If someone were to use your computer they could enter the application and view and manipulate information

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

64

On-Screen Takeoff closes the open project when you open another or create a new project or when you exit the program

1 Select File gt Exit

OR

2 You also may click at the upper right-hand corner of the application to exit

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

65

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer When you get your digitizer from GTCO you will need to connect it to your computer Follow the instructions outlined below to do this

Note For rollup digitizers the metal bar must be oriented to the top or right hand side

Connecting the Digitizer 1 Lay the digitizer out flat 2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer 3 Plug in the power adapter 4 Plug the interface (IO) cable into the digitizer 5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into an open serial port on computer

Note GTCO Technical support phone number is 410-381-6688 The electronic manual (on diskette) from GTCO contains more detailed installation and operation instructions for the GTCO digitizer model you have

Installing other Digitizer Drivers If you are using a GTCO Digitizer you will need to install the GTCO TabletWorks Drivers

If you are using a Digitizer not supported by GTCO Tablet Works 10 please contact the manufacturer of your digitizer for assistance with installation

Installing GTCO TabletWorks Drivers 1 Insert the On Center CD into the CD-ROM drive The CD Startup screen will open 2 Click on Install Software 3 Select Additional Software and Drivers 4 Select Digitizer Driver 5 Follow the instructions for installing TabletWorks 10

Adhering the Template The template is a small plastic sticker used to enable mouse function when using the digitizer with On-Screen Takeoff Place your template on your digitizer We suggest placing it in the bottom right corner of the digitizer about one inch inside the takeoff area

Note You may either peel off the back of the template and use the adhesive surface or you can tape the template down

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

66

Testing the Digitizer Drivers Before running OST you may test the digitizer by moving the stylus around on the digitizer pad it should move the mouse cursor (if mouse emulation is enabled)

If the digitizer does not move the mouse cursor on the screen

The superset codes may need to be reset Reset the superset codes by touching on the border of the digitizer with the stylus The digitizer should beep several times

The digitizer may not be communicating with the computer Be sure the COM port selected is correct Be sure the COM port selected is correct If you are not able to get the digitizer to move the mouse cursor you need to call GTCO technical support for help

Note The Mouse Emulation is not required for On-Screen Takeoff to work properly It is used only for the Template functionality if the digitizer is moving the cursor the wrong direction (up instead of sideways or vice-versa)

Click the L-shaped arrow symbol on the digitizer with the stylus

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

67

Appendix II Toolbar Items Main Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

68

Tool Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

69

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

70

Navigate Toolbar (Continued)

Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

71

Takeoff Toolbar (Continued)

Image Toolbar

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

72

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

This section will detail how to load plans from a F W Dodge CD-ROM into an On-Screen Takeoff project file ready for takeoffs

Dodge files may be added to the Project Properties dialog However loading the files in that way will load the files by number rather than name description If you want to load one page only from your Dodge CD You will have to rename the page to display the name rather than number of the file

To load plan files from a Dodge CD so that the files load sequentially by file number but are displayed by name rather than by number within your project follow the instructions below

Opening a Dodge project from a CD-ROM 1 Insert the CD into the drive 2 Choose File gt Custom 3 Choose Dodge Plans Project (plansdat) as the file type 4 Select the appropriate file type by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the Files of type

field 5 In the Look in field access your drive paths by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the

field then

Navigate to your CD-ROM drive Open the data folder and Open the Projects folder

6 Select the desired project and open its folder 7 Open the plansdat file 8 All the images will come in sequenced correctly for that job along with the full descriptions

(names) of each page If there is not a plans folder in the project folder then plans do not exist for that project on the CD Opening the plansdat file will yield an empty project

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

73

Appendix IV Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer The On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer is a limited version of On Center Softwarersquos commercial takeoff software If your status bar located at the very bottom of the main window says View Mode in the lower left-hand corner then you are using the Plan Viewer You can use the plan viewer to

View CD-based amp converted CAD drawings

View a previously created OST file and associated drawings

Download electronic plans online

Navigate through drawings

Quickly Takeoff linearsareas and counts

Zoom in to view the plan better

Print drawings directly from the viewer

Viewing an On-Screen Takeoff Project File

1 To open an OST file that was previously created with of On-Screen Takeoff 2 Select File gt Open 3 An Open dialog will appear if you do not see the OST file you are looking for select the

Look In drop down arrow 4 A drop down menu will appear listing the various folders drives and mapped drives located

on your computer select the correct drive or folder location and continue to browse to the location of your OST file

5 When you see your OST file double-click it to open it 6 Any takeoff and drawings should appear on the Image tab view

If you do not see the drawings but do see the colored takeoff layer the drawings may

not be located in the same place they were originally saved at Go to File gt Project Properties and check the Image File path for each listed page If the image file path is pointing to a CD drive make sure the CD is inside the CR-ROM

Downloading Electronic Plans If your Online Plan Service provides a special file format (OSX) required to use this feature of our plan viewer you can immediately downloaded all electronic plans of a project directly from our viewer

Most Plan Room web sites will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff when a request to download plans is made Your particular Plan Room may differ in operation so please contact the provider directly with questions on using the site

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

74

When you request to download or open a project file from a Plan Room you will usually have the open to open or save an OSX file Choosing open will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff Alternately you may choose to save the file to a local hard drive After you have saved the file either double-click it to launch On-Screen Takeoff or open the OSX file using On-Screen Takeoff by clicking File then Open and locating the file on your hard drive You will need to change the file type to OSX

After the OSX file is opened you will see an additional tab appear in the Conditions List window called Pages

The Pages tab shows the hierarchy of your project Gray file icons represent pages that have not been downloaded and blue icons represents pages that have been downloaded

To download a page simply double-click the page icon

If you wish to select a group of pages to download you can use the Ctrl or Shift key to multiple select them then click the Download button

If you wish to download all pages at once click the Download All button

Downloaded pages will now appear in the Project Properties dialog in the same order in which they appear in the Pages tab

Creating Quick Takeoffs With On-Screen Takeoff you can create quick takeoffs to measure quantities even if you dont have the full version of our program However using the Quick Takeoff functionality shows you just a fraction of what the full version can do

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar is located at the top of the image view It has three buttons designated for three types of takeoffs Linear Area and Count The Quantity drop down list will show secondary quantities for Linears and Areas The Units drop down allows you to select how you want your quantities displayed Feet Inches Yards Millimeters and Meters

NOTE Every time change the type of takeoff you are performing (switching from Area to Linear for example) the previous quantities and takeoff objects will disappear They will also disappear when you changes pages

NOTE You can use the Dimension Tool to basically measure the distance between two points or linears The distance will display on the status bar at the bottom of the application

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

75

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions General

Where is On-Screen Takeoff installed on my computer

Typically it is installed in CProgram FilesOn-Screen Takeoff

In Explorer how do I recognize On-Screen Takeoff file types

On-Screen Takeoff data is stored in a single file per job lsquojob name OSTrsquo On-Screen Takeoff templates are stored as lsquotemplate nameTPOrsquo

Can only one project at a time be open

Yes For that reason opening another project automatically closes the project on screen You will be asked to save any changes

Is only one scale allowed per page What about on drawings that have multiple detail sections on a page and each of those drawings have different scales

Yes For pages with drawings of different scales copy the drawing to another project page and set the appropriate scale

I cannot perform backout on an area that is along a linear

As a workaround use the On-Screen Takeoff layers feature to help you with this issue Electronic Images

How do I start a project from drawings that have been scanned and written to a CD-ROM

Open a new project Select File gt Project Properties and select Auto Add Navigate to your CD and the appropriate folder and select any image file in that location Click Open All files in the location will load into your project Recommended that images are copied from CD to hard drive for performance

If I get a disk of drawings in AutoCAD format (R13 or R14) can I read them in On-Screen Takeoff

Yes On-Screen Takeoff now reads DWG DXF and many other format that are saved with AutoCAD

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

76

When I click on the all pages button what is supposed to happen Currently nothing seems to change when I click on that button

The All Pages button is used to apply the Darken and Enhance Plans feature to all pages in the project (as opposed to only the current page on screen)

Is there a way to deduct a large skylight from an area condition

Yes with the related area condition selected in the Takeoff Dock bar unselect the Backout button on the Takeoff Toolbar then draw the Backout area The area quantity will be deducted from the related condition object and the linear measurement of the Backout perimeter will be added

Digitizer Issues

How do I connect a Digitizer to the computer

See Appendix I Connecting a Digitizer

The Place Template menu choice is disabled

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or the digitizer or the digitzer drivers are not installed

It wonrsquot let me select the Set Takeoff Area menu choice

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or no job is open a digitizer is not installed or the drivers are not installed

The digitizer stylus is not moving the cursor or crosshairs

Click S-0-1 superset on the digitizer

How do I convert my old GTCO Digitizer to work with On- Screen Takeofftrade

Call GTCO and they may be able to reconfigure your digitizer to be compatible with On-Screen Takeoff

Printing Issues Which Printers work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible printers include On-Screen Takeoff Hewlett Packard Epson and Canon printers If you are having printer difficulties please contact support and specify the type of printer along with other pertinent information Contact support at wwwoncentercomsupport or email supportoncentercom

Which Plotters work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible Plotters include Hewlett Packard DesignJet plotters and the EnCAD Cadjet II If you are having plotter difficulties please contact support and specify the type of plotter concerned

ViewingDisplay I can no longer see my condition list How do I get it back

The toolbars and Dock bars can be turned on and off through the View gt Toolbars menu options

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

77

This is also accessible by right-clicking in the toolbar area and selecting (or deselecting) a toolbar listed

I cannot view my folders in the condition list

Right-click in the Takeoff Dock barcondition list area and select Show Tree to display your folders

My Status Bar reads Viewer Mode and I am unable to draw conditions

On-Screen Takeoff needs to be Authorized Or you need to purchase an upgrade Click the Perform Advanced Takeoff button on the main toolbar

I hid a Dock bar and when I selected to view it again it appeared alongside the other Dock

bar instead of stacked on top of it How do I fix it

Pick up the Dock bar by clicking on the bar at the top and continuing to hold down the mouse button drag the Dock bar over the other one It will resize and appear stacked with the other

When I open image files from a CD the images are all upside down How do I get them right

side up

To flip pages from top to bottom follow the steps below 1 Click the All Pages button on the Image Toolbar (All Pages is engaged when the button

is not clicked) 2 Click the Flip Horizontal button on the Image Toolbar 3 Click the All Pages button again to disengage

Templates How do I create a Template

Follow the steps below 1 Create a typical project 2 Choose File gt Save As 3 Choose On-Screen Takeoff Template Files as the file type to save 4 Name the file This will save all of the condition setups as well as the layers for the

project

How do I create a new project from a template

Follow the steps below 1 Choose File gt New 2 Select a template from those listed in the New dialog This will open a new project with

conditions and layers saved from a previous project but no pages or takeoff

78

INDEX

Area Conditions 32

Area Objects 57

Auto Scrolling 20

Auto-save 63

Backout Mode 41

Calculation Method 60

Conditions 29

Configuration 60

Contents Tab 6

Continuous Mode 38

Count Conditions 33

Count Objects 57

Digitizer 10 65 76

Docking Toolbars 13

Dodge CD 72

Drawing 27 37

DropRun Count 55

Environment 18

Exiting 63

Exporting 49

Features 16

Font 61

Frequently Asked Questions 75

Grid 40

Help File 5

Hiding Toolbars 13

Hot Links 21

Image 19 59

Image files 9

Image Toolbar 12 71

Images 75

Index Tab 6

Layers 43

Linear Conditions 31

Linear Objects 56

Main Toolbar 12 67

Menus 14

Moving Toolbars 13

Navigate Toolbar 12 69

Navigating 20

On-Screen Takeofftrade 2

Page 59 61

Pages 20 25 28

Plan Viewer 73

Plans 26

Printing 47 76

Project Properties 25

Projects 22

Quick Start Video 18

Resizing Toolbars 13

Roping 54

Saving 63

Scale 28

Search Tab 7

Selecting Objects 42

Setup 8

Start On-Screen Takeofftrade 17

System Requirements 9

Takeoff 19 27

Takeoff Toolbar 70 71

Takeoff Toolbar 12

Template Files 23

TIF (Group4) 9

Tool Toolbar 12 68

Toolbar 67

Toolbars 12

View Toolbar 12 69

Viewing Toolbars 12

Worksheet 20

Zone Conditions 33

Zoom Toolbar 12 69

  • On-Screen Takeoff Lite
  • Table of Contents
  • Section 1 - Introduction
  • Section 2 - Setup
  • Section 3 - Toolbars and Menus
  • Section 4 - Features
  • Section 5 - Projects
  • Section 6 - Conditions and Takeoff
  • Section 7 - Printing and Exporting
  • Section 8 - Advanced Features
  • Section 9 - Saving and Exiting
  • Appendix I - Installing Your Digitizer
  • Appendix II - Toolbar Items
  • Appendix III - Loading Plans from a Dodge CD
  • Appendix IV - Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer
  • Appendix V - Frequently Asked Questions
  • Index

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

31

Condition Attributes Each condition type will have related attributes to select or specify within the General and Advanced tabs of the New Condition dialog Once a condition has been used to takeoff a quantity from your plans certain attributes cannot be changed

All conditions allow the user to specify color and fill pattern for the object drawn

Linear Conditions

General Specify width and height by feet and inches Specify pitch in inches up to the nearest thousandth of an inch if applicable

Advanced Specify rounding for object quantities and droprun default length for electrical or plumbing drops at the ends of lines Select Connect to have lines connect at the corners where one line of the condition ends and another begins (and indicate Tolerance for the featurersquos activation as distance between the ends of two lines) Choose Trim to have lines automatically trim to a line being crossed Choose Curve to draw a curved line

Follow these examples for inputting feet and inches For 7 feet 6 inches type 706 for 13 feet 7 inches type 1307 For 20 feet type 2000

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

32

Area Conditions

General If needed you can specify the thickness (in inches) andor pitch (in inches)

Advanced Specify rounding for object quantities Choose to display an adjustable grid within the area and indicate matrix cell dimensions

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

33

Count Conditions

General

Specify height and indicate the size (in inches) and shape (square circle triangle rectangle or opening) of the count object as it will appear on screen

Advanced Count conditions have advanced attributes These options are available for all shapes except for openings

Zone Conditions Zones allow you to subdivide condition quantities making it easier to modify and complete jobs in phases They can be used at the end of a takeoff to isolate a group of condition quantities that are in different areas of the takeoff

Zones can also be used to break a takeoff into multi-phases and can even be used to isolate quantities while a job is in progress to group the amount of work that has been completed to date They can be applied to one or multiple pages in your plans automatically calculating the takeoff quantities for each zoned area

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

34

The zone feature is only available in Lite and Full Mode If you are in View Mode and would like

to use this feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade

Condition Notes A Note tab is provided for comments regarding the condition These notes will display on the Takeoff List report and will import into Quick Bid

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

35

Condition Results The Results tab of the New Condition is based on condition type Initial settings default to linear feet (LF) for linear conditions square feet (SF) for area conditions and count of items (EA) for count conditions and zones The first of the results fields will display for the condition items in the Takeoff dock bar area All results will display in worksheets and Takeoff List reports as well as in an Excel spreadsheet after being exported

Copying Conditions You may use the condition attributes from a condition yoursquove already created for any future conditions of the same type

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Click the Copy button from the toolbar

OR

3 Right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select copy

4 A new condition will appear in the list with the same condition attributes as the previous condition but with the quantities zeroed

Editing Conditions Once you have copied a condition you might want to change several attributes You can also edit an existing condition to fit any updated needs

1 Highlight the desired condition on the Takeoff dock bar

2 Click the Change button

OR

3 Double-click on the condition you wish to edit to bring up the Change Condition dialog

NOTE The Change Condition dialog differs from the New Condition dialog only in that if takeoffs

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

36

have been performed in your project with this condition you will not be able to change the type of condition or certain properties under the advanced tab of the dialog box

Deleting Conditions 1 Click on the condition in the Takeoff Dock bar area

2 Click the Delete button on the toolbar

OR

3 Right-click and select Delete from the pop-up menu

All takeoff associated with the deleted condition will be deleted immediately and permanently

Organizing Project Conditions Within your project you can create folders andor sub-folders for different types of conditions You may even want to create a folder containing conditions with reset values

To get started organizing your conditions make sure you are viewing the condition tree (right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select Show Tree)

Creating Folders and Sub-Folders 1 Right-click in the Takeoff Dock bar area

2 Select New gt Folder from the pop-up menu

Copying Folders

1 Click on the folder and click Copy on the toolbar

2 All copied conditions within the new folder will have values reset to zero

Renaming Folders

1 Click on the folder

2 Right-click and select Rename from the pop-up menu

3 Enter a name for your folder and click the Enter button

Changing Condition Order

You may move conditions up or down in the condition list of the Takeoff dock bar to suit your project needs

1 Select the condition you would like to move by clicking to highlight it

NOTE When you are ready to move the highlighted conditions be sure that you start

moving using the last condition chosen That condition will have a highlighted boarder

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

37

2 Drag and drop any the condition from one place to another in the list You may also move a condition to another folder on the list in this way

Drawing with Conditions Snap Angles Set up snap angles to prevent lines from appearing jagged Snap angles are commonly set at 15deg and shift snap angles at 0deg

1 Go to Tools gt Options Options dialog appears

2 Under the General tab make the desired settings

3 Click to save the settings As they are drawn lines will snap to the set degree

Drawing a Linear Object 1 Select a condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff dock bar

2 Move the cursor into the Image takeoff area of the screen you will see the cursor display as crosshairs

3 Click and hold left mouse button then drag mouse to draw a line

4 Release mouse button to set line

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

38

5 Repeat steps for further lines

Continuous Mode This feature allows you to draw an object that has connected lines

1 Click the icon from the Takeoff toolbar

OR

2 Go to Tools gt Continuous Mode

3 Follow steps 1-3 from Draw a Linear Object

4 Click at each point of intersection The object will be connected

5 Double-click after making the final point to set the lines

Drawing a Curve To draw a curved line the Curve option must be checked under the Advanced tab of the Condition dialog

1 Click where you want to begin the curve and drag in a straight line to the position for the other endpoint of the curve

2 Click on the line to select it Handles in the shapes of small squares will appear at either end of

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

39

the line and in the center of the line

3 Move the cursor over the center handles until the cursor becomes a two-way arrow

4 Click and drag in the direction of the curve bending the line as you move the cursor Release to set the curve (The line you began with will disappear)

Draw a circle by drawing two curved lines connected

Drawing an Area Object Area conditions are drawn similarly to continuous mode lines You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete your area takeoff

NOTE When drawing an area do not intersect the perimeter or line of the object you are drawing

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

3 The area will be filled with the pattern set for that condition

NOTE The simulated circle will be good enough for you to be able to make a bid

To create a circular area click from point to point with very short distances in between points simulating a circlersquos perimeter Double-click after setting the last point to set the area

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

40

Grid Options Grids give you an added advantage when installing materials such as tiles Use this feature to get a count for how many tiles are needed for an area

1 Double-click on an area condition in the Takeoff dock bar to open its Condition dialog

2 Click on the Advanced tab to show its options

3 Check the box next to Grid by clicking in it

4 Indicate the dimensions of the cell matrix in inches (For example 200 x 400)

5 Under Results tab choose each (EA) for one of the results fields This will tabulate a number of grid cells (including partial grid cells) in area

6 Click to save your settings

7 Use the Move Grid and Rotate Grid features in the Tools menu to manipulate the grid as desired

Grid Calculation

1 Go to Tools gt Options menu

1 Specify if On-Screen Takeoff automatically should Calculate Grid Position

2 If AreaGrid Size is selected On-Screen Takeoff will calculate the number of items needed to fill the grid based on grid demintions

3 Click to accept and close the dialog

To move a line at any angle (regardless of default setting) press the Shift key while moving the mouse

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

41

Backout Mode This feature allows you to take out part of an area and deduct that amount of square footage

1 Select Tools gt Backout Mode

2 Outline the are you want backed out as you would when drawing a regular area object (see Drawing an Area Object)

3 The outlined area will clear and quantities will be recalculated

NOTE The perimeter of the backout area will be added to the LF quantity for that condition

Drawing a Count Object Square triangle rectangle and circle shaped count objects can easily be placed on images

1 Select the condition

2 Click in the location where you want the object to appear

3 To place an opening-shaped count item like a door or window you must click over an existing linear object such as a wall

4 On the Results tab you can change the height properties to give you the result you need

5 If Backout is checked on the advanced tab for each count opening the opening-shaped count item will back out a corresponding section of the linear object

Opening shaped count items are sized at 3rsquo0rdquo by default

Drawing a Zone Zones are drawn in the same way as area objects and may be any polygonal shape You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete the zone perimeter

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

42

Selecting Objects

1 Use the Select Tool to select objects

You can also select all objects that correspond to a condition

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Right-click and choose Select All

3 All objects with this condition will be highlighted with squares as an outline

Moving and Resizing Objects Linear

1 To move or resize a linear object click anywhere on the line to select it

2 To move the line position your pointer over the center handles When the mouse is positioned over the handles you will see a two-way arrow You will only be able to move the line in the direction of the arrows

3 Drag the line to a new position

4 Clicking and dragging the handles on the ends of the line will allow you to lengthen or shorten your line

Area and Zone

1 To move an area object or zone in its entirety click and drag it to its new position

2 Grabbing a handle at a corner or intersection of the object will allow you to adjust and change its perimeter

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

43

Count 1 To move a square circle rectangle or triangle shaped count object click and drag

2 Click and drag an opening shaped count object along the length of the linear object to the desired position then release

NOTE An opening shaped count object may not be moved from its associated linear condition object however it may be moved up and down the length of the linear object

Layers On-Screen Takeoff allows you to sort and separate your takeoff objects within the same job and on the same page On-Screen Takeoff gives you this flexibility through the use of layers

By assigning different conditions to different layers (for example differentiating between floors ceilings and walls) you can choose to view all layers or turn off certain layers to display and print the remaining groups of conditions only You may also remove the background image of electronic plans add text and hot link symbols or print only your condition takeoffs

Layers are only available in Full Mode If you are in View or Lite Mode and would like to use this

feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade Default Layers

On-Screen Takeoff begins every project with three default layers Image Annotation and Default The Image layer holds the electronic plan files you may have in your project The Annotation layer possesses all text notations highlighting and hot links in the project The Default layer will appear in the Condition dialog when creating or editing a condition (listed in the takeoff dock bar) Conditions are assigned to the Default layer unless otherwise specified by the user

Creating Layers To assign a condition to a layer other than the default layer you must first create additional layers for your project

1 Select View gt Layers to open the Layers dialog

2 Click An unnamed layer will be added

3 Click within the empty box and type a name for your layer (for example Wall)

4 New layers are added as active layers The adjacent box under the Show column will be checked

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

44

Assigning a Layer to a Condition 1 Open the Condition dialog box by creating a new condition or editing an existing condition

2 Under the General tab click on the down arrow in the Layer field to display optional layers

3 Select the desired layer for the condition Only the Default layer and layers you have added will be displayed

4 Click

View and Hide Layers

1 Select View gt Layers

2 Under the Show column check the box to view or remove the check (by clicking on it) to hide the specific layer

3 Click to accept and close the Layers dialog

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

45

Assigning Text to a Layer When adding text to an image On-Screen Takeoff has the capability to assign the text to a specified layer

1 Select the Text Tool

2 Click at the point you want to place your text

3 Type in your text using the Enter key for line breaks

4 Click the drop down arrow next to the Layer field and select the desired layer

Section 7

46

Printing and Exporting

This section will

Printing options and procedures

Exporting data by copying and pasting

Exporting quantity results to Excel spreadsheets

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

47

Print Setup On-Screen Takeoff allows the user to print the image takeoff list and worksheet

1 Select File gt Print Setup The Print Setup dialog will open

2 Select a printer or leave the default selection listed (change from the default printer displayed by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the field)

3 Indicate page size and printer tray option (Source) Access page size options by clicking on the

down arrow at the right of the field

4 Choose Portrait or Landscape orientation

5 Click to accept and close the dialog

Printing Images The image area can include the electronic plans the takeoff objects added text and hot links To print a subset of these (for example just the takeoffs without the plans or the added text and hot link symbols) hide layers that you do not want to print (see Section 6 View and Hide Layers) When you are printing your images every page will show the scale of the takeoff you are printing

1 Click on the Image tab to display the area of your project

2 Select File gt Print (or Ctrl + P)

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

48

3 Select the desired view (What to print) and the Image Range

4 Click The second Print dialog will open

5 Change settings accordingly or click if you accept the default settings

Printing Takeoff Lists and Worksheets In Takeoff Lists and Worksheets you may hide columns to print only certain results or adjust column widths to fit the report within the page size selected

1 In Takeoff List or Worksheet view move your cursor to the right side of the columnrsquos title bar the cursor will display as a two-way arrow

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

49

2 Click and drag to adjust the width of the column Holding the mouse button you may

slide the title bar under the title bar to its left to hide the column completely

3 Select File gt Print or press Ctrl + P to access the Print dialog

4 Indicate desired printer and choose the number of copies

5 Click to print and close the dialog

When printing the condition list we suggest printing in landscape

To reset to the default column widths double-click on the right border of a column heading will reset the column to its right (or previously to its right before being hidden)

Print Preview 1 Select File gt Print Preview

2 Use and to vary your view 3 If viewing an image choose current full or scale view to see how it displays

4 For printed outputs that cover more than one page use and to view adjacent pages or click on the down arrow next to Page field and select the page you want displayed

Exporting Using the CopyPaste Feature You may copy all the data or sections from the worksheet and the takeoff list view in On-Screen Takeoff and paste it into another application When pasting into Excel the cell layout will be maintained

1 Highlight the areas you wish to paste Click and hold the left mouse button down as you drag the cursor over the area to be selected then releasing the mouse button

OR

2 Select the entire takeoff list quickly click on the left On-Screen Takeoff column header and hold and drag the cursor across the remaining column headings

The number of pages for the view selected will display in the lower left-hand corner The zoom percentage that applies to the view will be displayed in the lower right-hand corner next to page size of the drawing

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

50

3 In the worksheet view you may highlight rows by clicking on the numbered buttons to the left of each row clicking and dragging across column headings or clicking and dragging over individual cells in the worksheet

Click anywhere in the appropriate view to deselect the area

4 Once your selection is highlighted you may select Edit gt Copy or Ctrl C from the keyboard 5 On your monitor switch to the application into which you want to paste your selection 6 Select Edit gt Paste in the new application or simply press Ctrl + V to paste

The colored keys for conditions cannot be pasted

Using the Export Feature You may export condition quantities to specified cell location within an Excel worksheet file Cell target locations are assigned in the Results tab of the condition dialogs on the Export line relating to each quantity measurement type

On-Screen Takeoff will export takeoff quantity results for up to three different quantity types that you specify For instance you may want to know the number of square feet in a ceiling area as well as the number of linear feet in its perimeter

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

51

1 Bring up the Condition dialog by double-clicking on a condition in the takeoff dock bar or by

selecting the condition and clicking

2 Click on the Results tab to access its fields The default quantities for the condition type will display

3 For each results field click on the arrow to access the pull-down menu and select the appropriate quantity (for example SF LF EA etchellip)

4 Have your Excel spreadsheet opened and saved in a file

5 Specify the Excel spreadsheet cell locations where you want the results to go

6 For a cell in the first sheet of your spreadsheet type in the cell address (eg a1) Case is not important

7 For a cell on a successive sheet of your spreadsheet type in sheet the number followed by a comma and the cell address without any spaces (eg sheet2a1) Case is not important

8 Click

9 Select File gt Export gt Condition Qty to Excel

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

52

10 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

11 Click to export On-Screen Takeoff results to specified cell locations in the Excel file When you return to the Excel application you will see the values have been added to the specified cell locations in your spreadsheet

12 Save your Excel file

Exporting Worksheet to Excel

1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 From On-Screen Takeoff Select File gt Export gt Worksheet to Excel

4 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

5 Click When you return to the Excel application you will see the values from the Worksheet Tab have been added to your spreadsheet

6 Save your Excel file

Exporting Takeoff to CVS 1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 Click the Takeoff Tab in the project you want to export the information

4 Select File gt Export gt Takeoff to CSV

5 Browse to the location of the CSV spreadsheet file click file to select it

6 Click the Save

NOTE CSV files can be opened in Excel Lotus Access etc One may consider this option more of a ldquodumprdquo into a file

The Excel application must be active (it may be minimized on the application bar) with the target spreadsheet open in the application Otherwise an error will occur with the export operation that will affect both the On-Screen Takeofftrade file and the Excel spreadsheet

Section 8

53

Advanced Features

This section will

Some special features of working with condition objects in the takeoff area

Details of advanced options for conditions

Advanced features of the Project Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

54

Features to Use with Objects Roping Feature You can move copy or delete using this feature Using the Select tool (the pointer) you may select several objects at once by clicking and dragging an outline around the objects then releasing the mouse button Roping may select either objects completely within the outlined area (inclusive) or objects both within and touched by the outlined area (touching) Specify your roping preference under Tools gt Options

1 Click and hold the mouse button at a point on the screen near the objects to be selected and drag to surround the objects with an outline

2 Release the mouse button The objects will be selected

3 You may now

Move the group around on the page by clicking within the group dragging the mouse and releasing the button to place the objects

Delete the group of objects by clicking the Delete key or

Copy and paste by pressing Ctrl C to copy the group then Ctrl V to paste it The pasted copy of the grouped objects will appear slightly offset from the original objects

Section 8 Advanced Features

55

Applying a DropRun Count

Use the droprun feature when calculating quantities to take into account the drop or run of a linear condition such as electrical lines or plumbing pipes Drop or run lengths may be added separately to any linear condition on screen while a default droprun length may be indicated for a condition as a whole

1 Select the desired linear condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff Dock bar

2 Click the Change button in the toolbar to open the Change Condition dialog

3 Click the Advanced tab to access the advanced options and click inside the DropRun check box

4 Enter a default length to be applied to all of this condition Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches) You can leave the length blank and manually enter drop run on each segment drawn

5 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog

Edit DropRun Count

1 With the related linear condition in the Takeoff Dock bar highlighted or with the pointer tool selected

2 click on the desired linear object in the image takeoff area The Count button will become active

3 Click on the Count button (alternatively select Tools gt Count) The default droprun amount will show in the pop-up Count dialog (Default length will be zero if droprun has not been selected in this conditionrsquos properties)

4 Type in the desired length Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches)

5 Click the OK button The additional amount will be reflected in the corresponding quantity The new DropRun count will apply only to the object edited

Adding Text in Image View

On-Screen Takeoff allows you to place text comments around your quantity takeoffs that may be printed along with plan images and objects Text is automatically placed within the Annotation Layer (that includes text and hot links)

1 To place text on the image select the Text Tool and click at the point you want to place your text opening a text box

2 Type in your information clicking Enter for line breaks

3 When you are finished click the OK button to exit the text box

4 To reposition text simply click on the text (with the Text Tool active) to select it

5 Move the cursor over the text the cursor will now display as a four-way arrow

6 Click and drag the mouse to position the text as desired

Section 8 Advanced Features

56

1 To edit existing text use the Text Tool to double-click on the text to open the editing box

2 Enter additional text or use the Backspace key to delete text as necessary

Formatting Text Once created you may format the font size type style and color of your text

1 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Font or click on the Font button in the Takeoff Toolbar

2 Select the desired features (color options are disabled) and click the OK button

3 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Color or click on the Color button in the Takeoff Toolbar The Color dialog will open

4 Click on a color in the Basic Color palette or create a color and add to the Custom Colors palette (Be sure to click on the color in the Custom Colors palette to select it)

5 Click the OK button

Object Properties

Linear Objects

Linear objects may be set to connect at corners

A linear object may be set to trim automatically when crossing another linear object (Check the trim option under the advanced tab of the Condition dialog)

When you move a connected linear object objects automatically move and resize connected lines accordingly (quantities are then recalculated)

This feature requires that the connected linear object be moved using the center handles (does not apply when resizing the line from the ends)

Objects constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

Objects are measured from centerline to centerline

Section 8 Advanced Features

57

Area Objects When drawing an area use your escape key to undo the last line drawn You may reverse your

drawing of an area using the escape key

The area will not fill with color and pattern until the user double-clicks after the last line is set

Lines drawn to delineate an area object constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

After selecting an area to move or adjust position the mouse in the center to move the entire area position the mouse at the sides or corners to adjust the perimeter

Count Objects

All count objects are quantified by the physical number of objects per page and reported as EA for the UOM The quantity for the current Image View is (displayed in the Condition List) and the total quantity in your project is displayed in the Takeoff View and Worksheet View)

Square circle rectangle and triangle shaped count objects do not displace or subtract from other object quantities when placed on top of them However on the Advanced Tab for the count condition a connect property can be set (this is a check box) so that when a count object of this shape is put on top of a Linear type takeoff object it will move with the linear if said linear is moved

An opened-shaped count object must be placed within a linear object Opening shaped count objects may also be measured by linear foot or linear yard (EA SF and SY are also options) Opening shaped count items default to a width of 3rsquo 0rdquo at the time of creation This size can be changed The small medium and large size are not options on this type of condition anymore Check Backout on the Advanced tab for each Count object back out the footage (or yardage) of opening-shaped count objects in which they are placed

NOTE In order to see this Backout functionality (in quantity) for SY or SF deductions at least one of the

results for the Linear(s) this object will be placed on must be set to SY or SF and the count object must have a height quantity

Advanced Features of Conditions The Round Feature Under the Advanced tab of the linear and area Condition dialogues you may specify quantity rounding (in inches) For linear objects rounding applies to each linear object drawn For area objects rounding will apply to each segment of the area perimeter adjusting the perimeter and area calculations For example With a linear condition entering 12 in the Round field will round up each related linear object to the nearest 12 inches or one foot With this setting two walls of 1 4 would each round to 2 0 totaling 4 0

NOTE In the Takeoff Dock bar condition list and in the On-Screen Takeoff reports quantities will be displayed in whole numbers rounded up to the nearest foot However calculations are based on true quantities without rounding unless the Round Feature is engaged

Pitch Pitch may apply either to linear or area conditions It is measured in rise per linear foot Entering 12 indicates a 12 rise per 12 of linear distance (a pitch of 12 over 12) or an angle of 45deg

Section 8 Advanced Features

58

Advanced Features of Project Properties Selecting Multiple Pages

1 Select a single page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry

2 Drag the cursor down the column of numbers to select consecutive pages

3 Click on the blank button at the top of this column to select all pages in the Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

59

Changing Image Assigned to a Drawing 1 Select the page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry 2 Click the Change Image button The Change Image dialog box will appear

3 Navigate to the desired file and select by clicking on it

4 Click the Open button The electronic file assigned to the page will have been changed to reflect the new file choice

Changing Image File Path 1 Select pages as described above

2 Choose Change Folder

3 In the Change Folder dialog navigate to the appropriate folder

4 Click the OK button The file path will have been changed for the selected page entries

Delete a Page from Project Properties 1 Select the page you want to delete by clicking on its associated number (in the gray box at the

left of the entry)

2 Choose Delete Page

All Takeoff on the page will be deleted immediately and permanently

Section 8 Advanced Features

60

Advanced Features of Tool Options

Calculation Method On-Screen Takeoff has built-in calculation options to allow for faster work and faster saves until your takeoff is complete Calculation options are found by selecting Tools gt Options then clicking on the Calculation tab

Calculation method can be set to Automatic Automatic except Grids and Manual Manual will allow the program to operate more quickly while Automatic or Automatic except Grids allows the user to see quantity changes as takeoffs are made

In any mode you may press F9 to recalculate quantities for the On-Screen Takeoff current totals

Configuration Tab

When the ldquoPage Label (A01)rdquo radial button is chosen On-Screen Takeoff puts the numbered label on all the pages of in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar If the Page Descriptionrdquo radial button is chosen then a description of what takeoff is on that specific page will be shown in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar

This section of the configuration tab gives you options on how you want to export your information When the ldquoFolderSubfolder Namesrdquo radial button is chosen than on your file that you are exporting to will have all the conditions folders and subfolders In the Delimiter box you can choose the symbol that is needed to separate the information you are exporting Some files need semicolons () or colons () to make sure the information comes exported in is separated it the appropriate places

Section 8 Advanced Features

61

In previous versions of On-Screen Takeoff there are views that users need to have in order for them to display their information By either choosing ldquoOST 1xrdquo or ldquoOST 2xrdquo it will let the program know you want your columns of information exported in that specific format

When you have the Confirm Deletions radial button of ldquoYesrdquo chosen than every time you delete anything you will get a dialog box confirming your intentions of deletion

While working with your takeoff you have a choice to either view the legend of your conditions or hide it Choose whichever radial button that suits your needs

For those who prefer to use the Enter key to navigate in dialog boxes this option is just for that

Font Tab The Font tab is designed for you to make your own look and feel for the application At the bottom of this tab it will show you sample of the fonts and colors you have chosen

Renaming the Current Page You may change the name of the current page in the takeoff area of On-Screen Takeoff by selecting Edit gt Rename Page

This opens the Name Page dialog and you may simply type in a new name and click the Enter button The new name for the file will be reflected on the title bar for the page and in Project Properties

You also may access the Rename Page function by right-clicking in the takeoff area while in Image View and selecting the option from the pop-up menu that appears

Section 9

62

Saving and Exiting

This section will

Explain how to save projects

Show you how to safely exit the program

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

63

Saving Your Project

1 Select File gt Save 2 If your project has not previously been saved a Save dialog box will open to allow you to name

the file and choose the directory and folder in which to save your file 3 Once saved File gt Save will simply save the current version of the file

OR

4 Select File gt Save As then type in a new name for the file and save to the desired file path

The Auto-save Feature With the Auto-save feature On-Screen Takeoff automatically backs up your open project You may choose to have more than one level of backup files The first backup copy will have the extension b00 and successive files will be b01 b02 and so on If you have designated four levels of backup files after the fourth backup copy has been created (b03) the next file will be saved over the file with extension b00 Further backup saves will then rotate through the four backup files in the same way

1 Select Tools gt Options 2 In the Auto-save area (under the General tab) select the frequency of backup file creation (in

minutes) and the number of levels for the feature 3 You also may disengage the feature by clicking in the check box to clear it

The Auto-save feature automatically saves backup copies to the directory of the current project If you are working from a write-protected area such as a CD-ROM On-Screen Takeoff will place backup files in the On-Screen Takeoff folder

Exiting When you are finished using On-Screen Takeoff it is very easy to exit Exiting is very important because of security reasons If someone were to use your computer they could enter the application and view and manipulate information

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

64

On-Screen Takeoff closes the open project when you open another or create a new project or when you exit the program

1 Select File gt Exit

OR

2 You also may click at the upper right-hand corner of the application to exit

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

65

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer When you get your digitizer from GTCO you will need to connect it to your computer Follow the instructions outlined below to do this

Note For rollup digitizers the metal bar must be oriented to the top or right hand side

Connecting the Digitizer 1 Lay the digitizer out flat 2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer 3 Plug in the power adapter 4 Plug the interface (IO) cable into the digitizer 5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into an open serial port on computer

Note GTCO Technical support phone number is 410-381-6688 The electronic manual (on diskette) from GTCO contains more detailed installation and operation instructions for the GTCO digitizer model you have

Installing other Digitizer Drivers If you are using a GTCO Digitizer you will need to install the GTCO TabletWorks Drivers

If you are using a Digitizer not supported by GTCO Tablet Works 10 please contact the manufacturer of your digitizer for assistance with installation

Installing GTCO TabletWorks Drivers 1 Insert the On Center CD into the CD-ROM drive The CD Startup screen will open 2 Click on Install Software 3 Select Additional Software and Drivers 4 Select Digitizer Driver 5 Follow the instructions for installing TabletWorks 10

Adhering the Template The template is a small plastic sticker used to enable mouse function when using the digitizer with On-Screen Takeoff Place your template on your digitizer We suggest placing it in the bottom right corner of the digitizer about one inch inside the takeoff area

Note You may either peel off the back of the template and use the adhesive surface or you can tape the template down

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

66

Testing the Digitizer Drivers Before running OST you may test the digitizer by moving the stylus around on the digitizer pad it should move the mouse cursor (if mouse emulation is enabled)

If the digitizer does not move the mouse cursor on the screen

The superset codes may need to be reset Reset the superset codes by touching on the border of the digitizer with the stylus The digitizer should beep several times

The digitizer may not be communicating with the computer Be sure the COM port selected is correct Be sure the COM port selected is correct If you are not able to get the digitizer to move the mouse cursor you need to call GTCO technical support for help

Note The Mouse Emulation is not required for On-Screen Takeoff to work properly It is used only for the Template functionality if the digitizer is moving the cursor the wrong direction (up instead of sideways or vice-versa)

Click the L-shaped arrow symbol on the digitizer with the stylus

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

67

Appendix II Toolbar Items Main Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

68

Tool Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

69

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

70

Navigate Toolbar (Continued)

Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

71

Takeoff Toolbar (Continued)

Image Toolbar

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

72

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

This section will detail how to load plans from a F W Dodge CD-ROM into an On-Screen Takeoff project file ready for takeoffs

Dodge files may be added to the Project Properties dialog However loading the files in that way will load the files by number rather than name description If you want to load one page only from your Dodge CD You will have to rename the page to display the name rather than number of the file

To load plan files from a Dodge CD so that the files load sequentially by file number but are displayed by name rather than by number within your project follow the instructions below

Opening a Dodge project from a CD-ROM 1 Insert the CD into the drive 2 Choose File gt Custom 3 Choose Dodge Plans Project (plansdat) as the file type 4 Select the appropriate file type by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the Files of type

field 5 In the Look in field access your drive paths by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the

field then

Navigate to your CD-ROM drive Open the data folder and Open the Projects folder

6 Select the desired project and open its folder 7 Open the plansdat file 8 All the images will come in sequenced correctly for that job along with the full descriptions

(names) of each page If there is not a plans folder in the project folder then plans do not exist for that project on the CD Opening the plansdat file will yield an empty project

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

73

Appendix IV Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer The On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer is a limited version of On Center Softwarersquos commercial takeoff software If your status bar located at the very bottom of the main window says View Mode in the lower left-hand corner then you are using the Plan Viewer You can use the plan viewer to

View CD-based amp converted CAD drawings

View a previously created OST file and associated drawings

Download electronic plans online

Navigate through drawings

Quickly Takeoff linearsareas and counts

Zoom in to view the plan better

Print drawings directly from the viewer

Viewing an On-Screen Takeoff Project File

1 To open an OST file that was previously created with of On-Screen Takeoff 2 Select File gt Open 3 An Open dialog will appear if you do not see the OST file you are looking for select the

Look In drop down arrow 4 A drop down menu will appear listing the various folders drives and mapped drives located

on your computer select the correct drive or folder location and continue to browse to the location of your OST file

5 When you see your OST file double-click it to open it 6 Any takeoff and drawings should appear on the Image tab view

If you do not see the drawings but do see the colored takeoff layer the drawings may

not be located in the same place they were originally saved at Go to File gt Project Properties and check the Image File path for each listed page If the image file path is pointing to a CD drive make sure the CD is inside the CR-ROM

Downloading Electronic Plans If your Online Plan Service provides a special file format (OSX) required to use this feature of our plan viewer you can immediately downloaded all electronic plans of a project directly from our viewer

Most Plan Room web sites will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff when a request to download plans is made Your particular Plan Room may differ in operation so please contact the provider directly with questions on using the site

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

74

When you request to download or open a project file from a Plan Room you will usually have the open to open or save an OSX file Choosing open will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff Alternately you may choose to save the file to a local hard drive After you have saved the file either double-click it to launch On-Screen Takeoff or open the OSX file using On-Screen Takeoff by clicking File then Open and locating the file on your hard drive You will need to change the file type to OSX

After the OSX file is opened you will see an additional tab appear in the Conditions List window called Pages

The Pages tab shows the hierarchy of your project Gray file icons represent pages that have not been downloaded and blue icons represents pages that have been downloaded

To download a page simply double-click the page icon

If you wish to select a group of pages to download you can use the Ctrl or Shift key to multiple select them then click the Download button

If you wish to download all pages at once click the Download All button

Downloaded pages will now appear in the Project Properties dialog in the same order in which they appear in the Pages tab

Creating Quick Takeoffs With On-Screen Takeoff you can create quick takeoffs to measure quantities even if you dont have the full version of our program However using the Quick Takeoff functionality shows you just a fraction of what the full version can do

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar is located at the top of the image view It has three buttons designated for three types of takeoffs Linear Area and Count The Quantity drop down list will show secondary quantities for Linears and Areas The Units drop down allows you to select how you want your quantities displayed Feet Inches Yards Millimeters and Meters

NOTE Every time change the type of takeoff you are performing (switching from Area to Linear for example) the previous quantities and takeoff objects will disappear They will also disappear when you changes pages

NOTE You can use the Dimension Tool to basically measure the distance between two points or linears The distance will display on the status bar at the bottom of the application

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

75

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions General

Where is On-Screen Takeoff installed on my computer

Typically it is installed in CProgram FilesOn-Screen Takeoff

In Explorer how do I recognize On-Screen Takeoff file types

On-Screen Takeoff data is stored in a single file per job lsquojob name OSTrsquo On-Screen Takeoff templates are stored as lsquotemplate nameTPOrsquo

Can only one project at a time be open

Yes For that reason opening another project automatically closes the project on screen You will be asked to save any changes

Is only one scale allowed per page What about on drawings that have multiple detail sections on a page and each of those drawings have different scales

Yes For pages with drawings of different scales copy the drawing to another project page and set the appropriate scale

I cannot perform backout on an area that is along a linear

As a workaround use the On-Screen Takeoff layers feature to help you with this issue Electronic Images

How do I start a project from drawings that have been scanned and written to a CD-ROM

Open a new project Select File gt Project Properties and select Auto Add Navigate to your CD and the appropriate folder and select any image file in that location Click Open All files in the location will load into your project Recommended that images are copied from CD to hard drive for performance

If I get a disk of drawings in AutoCAD format (R13 or R14) can I read them in On-Screen Takeoff

Yes On-Screen Takeoff now reads DWG DXF and many other format that are saved with AutoCAD

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

76

When I click on the all pages button what is supposed to happen Currently nothing seems to change when I click on that button

The All Pages button is used to apply the Darken and Enhance Plans feature to all pages in the project (as opposed to only the current page on screen)

Is there a way to deduct a large skylight from an area condition

Yes with the related area condition selected in the Takeoff Dock bar unselect the Backout button on the Takeoff Toolbar then draw the Backout area The area quantity will be deducted from the related condition object and the linear measurement of the Backout perimeter will be added

Digitizer Issues

How do I connect a Digitizer to the computer

See Appendix I Connecting a Digitizer

The Place Template menu choice is disabled

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or the digitizer or the digitzer drivers are not installed

It wonrsquot let me select the Set Takeoff Area menu choice

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or no job is open a digitizer is not installed or the drivers are not installed

The digitizer stylus is not moving the cursor or crosshairs

Click S-0-1 superset on the digitizer

How do I convert my old GTCO Digitizer to work with On- Screen Takeofftrade

Call GTCO and they may be able to reconfigure your digitizer to be compatible with On-Screen Takeoff

Printing Issues Which Printers work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible printers include On-Screen Takeoff Hewlett Packard Epson and Canon printers If you are having printer difficulties please contact support and specify the type of printer along with other pertinent information Contact support at wwwoncentercomsupport or email supportoncentercom

Which Plotters work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible Plotters include Hewlett Packard DesignJet plotters and the EnCAD Cadjet II If you are having plotter difficulties please contact support and specify the type of plotter concerned

ViewingDisplay I can no longer see my condition list How do I get it back

The toolbars and Dock bars can be turned on and off through the View gt Toolbars menu options

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

77

This is also accessible by right-clicking in the toolbar area and selecting (or deselecting) a toolbar listed

I cannot view my folders in the condition list

Right-click in the Takeoff Dock barcondition list area and select Show Tree to display your folders

My Status Bar reads Viewer Mode and I am unable to draw conditions

On-Screen Takeoff needs to be Authorized Or you need to purchase an upgrade Click the Perform Advanced Takeoff button on the main toolbar

I hid a Dock bar and when I selected to view it again it appeared alongside the other Dock

bar instead of stacked on top of it How do I fix it

Pick up the Dock bar by clicking on the bar at the top and continuing to hold down the mouse button drag the Dock bar over the other one It will resize and appear stacked with the other

When I open image files from a CD the images are all upside down How do I get them right

side up

To flip pages from top to bottom follow the steps below 1 Click the All Pages button on the Image Toolbar (All Pages is engaged when the button

is not clicked) 2 Click the Flip Horizontal button on the Image Toolbar 3 Click the All Pages button again to disengage

Templates How do I create a Template

Follow the steps below 1 Create a typical project 2 Choose File gt Save As 3 Choose On-Screen Takeoff Template Files as the file type to save 4 Name the file This will save all of the condition setups as well as the layers for the

project

How do I create a new project from a template

Follow the steps below 1 Choose File gt New 2 Select a template from those listed in the New dialog This will open a new project with

conditions and layers saved from a previous project but no pages or takeoff

78

INDEX

Area Conditions 32

Area Objects 57

Auto Scrolling 20

Auto-save 63

Backout Mode 41

Calculation Method 60

Conditions 29

Configuration 60

Contents Tab 6

Continuous Mode 38

Count Conditions 33

Count Objects 57

Digitizer 10 65 76

Docking Toolbars 13

Dodge CD 72

Drawing 27 37

DropRun Count 55

Environment 18

Exiting 63

Exporting 49

Features 16

Font 61

Frequently Asked Questions 75

Grid 40

Help File 5

Hiding Toolbars 13

Hot Links 21

Image 19 59

Image files 9

Image Toolbar 12 71

Images 75

Index Tab 6

Layers 43

Linear Conditions 31

Linear Objects 56

Main Toolbar 12 67

Menus 14

Moving Toolbars 13

Navigate Toolbar 12 69

Navigating 20

On-Screen Takeofftrade 2

Page 59 61

Pages 20 25 28

Plan Viewer 73

Plans 26

Printing 47 76

Project Properties 25

Projects 22

Quick Start Video 18

Resizing Toolbars 13

Roping 54

Saving 63

Scale 28

Search Tab 7

Selecting Objects 42

Setup 8

Start On-Screen Takeofftrade 17

System Requirements 9

Takeoff 19 27

Takeoff Toolbar 70 71

Takeoff Toolbar 12

Template Files 23

TIF (Group4) 9

Tool Toolbar 12 68

Toolbar 67

Toolbars 12

View Toolbar 12 69

Viewing Toolbars 12

Worksheet 20

Zone Conditions 33

Zoom Toolbar 12 69

  • On-Screen Takeoff Lite
  • Table of Contents
  • Section 1 - Introduction
  • Section 2 - Setup
  • Section 3 - Toolbars and Menus
  • Section 4 - Features
  • Section 5 - Projects
  • Section 6 - Conditions and Takeoff
  • Section 7 - Printing and Exporting
  • Section 8 - Advanced Features
  • Section 9 - Saving and Exiting
  • Appendix I - Installing Your Digitizer
  • Appendix II - Toolbar Items
  • Appendix III - Loading Plans from a Dodge CD
  • Appendix IV - Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer
  • Appendix V - Frequently Asked Questions
  • Index

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

32

Area Conditions

General If needed you can specify the thickness (in inches) andor pitch (in inches)

Advanced Specify rounding for object quantities Choose to display an adjustable grid within the area and indicate matrix cell dimensions

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

33

Count Conditions

General

Specify height and indicate the size (in inches) and shape (square circle triangle rectangle or opening) of the count object as it will appear on screen

Advanced Count conditions have advanced attributes These options are available for all shapes except for openings

Zone Conditions Zones allow you to subdivide condition quantities making it easier to modify and complete jobs in phases They can be used at the end of a takeoff to isolate a group of condition quantities that are in different areas of the takeoff

Zones can also be used to break a takeoff into multi-phases and can even be used to isolate quantities while a job is in progress to group the amount of work that has been completed to date They can be applied to one or multiple pages in your plans automatically calculating the takeoff quantities for each zoned area

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

34

The zone feature is only available in Lite and Full Mode If you are in View Mode and would like

to use this feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade

Condition Notes A Note tab is provided for comments regarding the condition These notes will display on the Takeoff List report and will import into Quick Bid

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

35

Condition Results The Results tab of the New Condition is based on condition type Initial settings default to linear feet (LF) for linear conditions square feet (SF) for area conditions and count of items (EA) for count conditions and zones The first of the results fields will display for the condition items in the Takeoff dock bar area All results will display in worksheets and Takeoff List reports as well as in an Excel spreadsheet after being exported

Copying Conditions You may use the condition attributes from a condition yoursquove already created for any future conditions of the same type

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Click the Copy button from the toolbar

OR

3 Right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select copy

4 A new condition will appear in the list with the same condition attributes as the previous condition but with the quantities zeroed

Editing Conditions Once you have copied a condition you might want to change several attributes You can also edit an existing condition to fit any updated needs

1 Highlight the desired condition on the Takeoff dock bar

2 Click the Change button

OR

3 Double-click on the condition you wish to edit to bring up the Change Condition dialog

NOTE The Change Condition dialog differs from the New Condition dialog only in that if takeoffs

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

36

have been performed in your project with this condition you will not be able to change the type of condition or certain properties under the advanced tab of the dialog box

Deleting Conditions 1 Click on the condition in the Takeoff Dock bar area

2 Click the Delete button on the toolbar

OR

3 Right-click and select Delete from the pop-up menu

All takeoff associated with the deleted condition will be deleted immediately and permanently

Organizing Project Conditions Within your project you can create folders andor sub-folders for different types of conditions You may even want to create a folder containing conditions with reset values

To get started organizing your conditions make sure you are viewing the condition tree (right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select Show Tree)

Creating Folders and Sub-Folders 1 Right-click in the Takeoff Dock bar area

2 Select New gt Folder from the pop-up menu

Copying Folders

1 Click on the folder and click Copy on the toolbar

2 All copied conditions within the new folder will have values reset to zero

Renaming Folders

1 Click on the folder

2 Right-click and select Rename from the pop-up menu

3 Enter a name for your folder and click the Enter button

Changing Condition Order

You may move conditions up or down in the condition list of the Takeoff dock bar to suit your project needs

1 Select the condition you would like to move by clicking to highlight it

NOTE When you are ready to move the highlighted conditions be sure that you start

moving using the last condition chosen That condition will have a highlighted boarder

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

37

2 Drag and drop any the condition from one place to another in the list You may also move a condition to another folder on the list in this way

Drawing with Conditions Snap Angles Set up snap angles to prevent lines from appearing jagged Snap angles are commonly set at 15deg and shift snap angles at 0deg

1 Go to Tools gt Options Options dialog appears

2 Under the General tab make the desired settings

3 Click to save the settings As they are drawn lines will snap to the set degree

Drawing a Linear Object 1 Select a condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff dock bar

2 Move the cursor into the Image takeoff area of the screen you will see the cursor display as crosshairs

3 Click and hold left mouse button then drag mouse to draw a line

4 Release mouse button to set line

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

38

5 Repeat steps for further lines

Continuous Mode This feature allows you to draw an object that has connected lines

1 Click the icon from the Takeoff toolbar

OR

2 Go to Tools gt Continuous Mode

3 Follow steps 1-3 from Draw a Linear Object

4 Click at each point of intersection The object will be connected

5 Double-click after making the final point to set the lines

Drawing a Curve To draw a curved line the Curve option must be checked under the Advanced tab of the Condition dialog

1 Click where you want to begin the curve and drag in a straight line to the position for the other endpoint of the curve

2 Click on the line to select it Handles in the shapes of small squares will appear at either end of

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

39

the line and in the center of the line

3 Move the cursor over the center handles until the cursor becomes a two-way arrow

4 Click and drag in the direction of the curve bending the line as you move the cursor Release to set the curve (The line you began with will disappear)

Draw a circle by drawing two curved lines connected

Drawing an Area Object Area conditions are drawn similarly to continuous mode lines You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete your area takeoff

NOTE When drawing an area do not intersect the perimeter or line of the object you are drawing

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

3 The area will be filled with the pattern set for that condition

NOTE The simulated circle will be good enough for you to be able to make a bid

To create a circular area click from point to point with very short distances in between points simulating a circlersquos perimeter Double-click after setting the last point to set the area

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

40

Grid Options Grids give you an added advantage when installing materials such as tiles Use this feature to get a count for how many tiles are needed for an area

1 Double-click on an area condition in the Takeoff dock bar to open its Condition dialog

2 Click on the Advanced tab to show its options

3 Check the box next to Grid by clicking in it

4 Indicate the dimensions of the cell matrix in inches (For example 200 x 400)

5 Under Results tab choose each (EA) for one of the results fields This will tabulate a number of grid cells (including partial grid cells) in area

6 Click to save your settings

7 Use the Move Grid and Rotate Grid features in the Tools menu to manipulate the grid as desired

Grid Calculation

1 Go to Tools gt Options menu

1 Specify if On-Screen Takeoff automatically should Calculate Grid Position

2 If AreaGrid Size is selected On-Screen Takeoff will calculate the number of items needed to fill the grid based on grid demintions

3 Click to accept and close the dialog

To move a line at any angle (regardless of default setting) press the Shift key while moving the mouse

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

41

Backout Mode This feature allows you to take out part of an area and deduct that amount of square footage

1 Select Tools gt Backout Mode

2 Outline the are you want backed out as you would when drawing a regular area object (see Drawing an Area Object)

3 The outlined area will clear and quantities will be recalculated

NOTE The perimeter of the backout area will be added to the LF quantity for that condition

Drawing a Count Object Square triangle rectangle and circle shaped count objects can easily be placed on images

1 Select the condition

2 Click in the location where you want the object to appear

3 To place an opening-shaped count item like a door or window you must click over an existing linear object such as a wall

4 On the Results tab you can change the height properties to give you the result you need

5 If Backout is checked on the advanced tab for each count opening the opening-shaped count item will back out a corresponding section of the linear object

Opening shaped count items are sized at 3rsquo0rdquo by default

Drawing a Zone Zones are drawn in the same way as area objects and may be any polygonal shape You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete the zone perimeter

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

42

Selecting Objects

1 Use the Select Tool to select objects

You can also select all objects that correspond to a condition

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Right-click and choose Select All

3 All objects with this condition will be highlighted with squares as an outline

Moving and Resizing Objects Linear

1 To move or resize a linear object click anywhere on the line to select it

2 To move the line position your pointer over the center handles When the mouse is positioned over the handles you will see a two-way arrow You will only be able to move the line in the direction of the arrows

3 Drag the line to a new position

4 Clicking and dragging the handles on the ends of the line will allow you to lengthen or shorten your line

Area and Zone

1 To move an area object or zone in its entirety click and drag it to its new position

2 Grabbing a handle at a corner or intersection of the object will allow you to adjust and change its perimeter

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

43

Count 1 To move a square circle rectangle or triangle shaped count object click and drag

2 Click and drag an opening shaped count object along the length of the linear object to the desired position then release

NOTE An opening shaped count object may not be moved from its associated linear condition object however it may be moved up and down the length of the linear object

Layers On-Screen Takeoff allows you to sort and separate your takeoff objects within the same job and on the same page On-Screen Takeoff gives you this flexibility through the use of layers

By assigning different conditions to different layers (for example differentiating between floors ceilings and walls) you can choose to view all layers or turn off certain layers to display and print the remaining groups of conditions only You may also remove the background image of electronic plans add text and hot link symbols or print only your condition takeoffs

Layers are only available in Full Mode If you are in View or Lite Mode and would like to use this

feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade Default Layers

On-Screen Takeoff begins every project with three default layers Image Annotation and Default The Image layer holds the electronic plan files you may have in your project The Annotation layer possesses all text notations highlighting and hot links in the project The Default layer will appear in the Condition dialog when creating or editing a condition (listed in the takeoff dock bar) Conditions are assigned to the Default layer unless otherwise specified by the user

Creating Layers To assign a condition to a layer other than the default layer you must first create additional layers for your project

1 Select View gt Layers to open the Layers dialog

2 Click An unnamed layer will be added

3 Click within the empty box and type a name for your layer (for example Wall)

4 New layers are added as active layers The adjacent box under the Show column will be checked

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

44

Assigning a Layer to a Condition 1 Open the Condition dialog box by creating a new condition or editing an existing condition

2 Under the General tab click on the down arrow in the Layer field to display optional layers

3 Select the desired layer for the condition Only the Default layer and layers you have added will be displayed

4 Click

View and Hide Layers

1 Select View gt Layers

2 Under the Show column check the box to view or remove the check (by clicking on it) to hide the specific layer

3 Click to accept and close the Layers dialog

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

45

Assigning Text to a Layer When adding text to an image On-Screen Takeoff has the capability to assign the text to a specified layer

1 Select the Text Tool

2 Click at the point you want to place your text

3 Type in your text using the Enter key for line breaks

4 Click the drop down arrow next to the Layer field and select the desired layer

Section 7

46

Printing and Exporting

This section will

Printing options and procedures

Exporting data by copying and pasting

Exporting quantity results to Excel spreadsheets

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

47

Print Setup On-Screen Takeoff allows the user to print the image takeoff list and worksheet

1 Select File gt Print Setup The Print Setup dialog will open

2 Select a printer or leave the default selection listed (change from the default printer displayed by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the field)

3 Indicate page size and printer tray option (Source) Access page size options by clicking on the

down arrow at the right of the field

4 Choose Portrait or Landscape orientation

5 Click to accept and close the dialog

Printing Images The image area can include the electronic plans the takeoff objects added text and hot links To print a subset of these (for example just the takeoffs without the plans or the added text and hot link symbols) hide layers that you do not want to print (see Section 6 View and Hide Layers) When you are printing your images every page will show the scale of the takeoff you are printing

1 Click on the Image tab to display the area of your project

2 Select File gt Print (or Ctrl + P)

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

48

3 Select the desired view (What to print) and the Image Range

4 Click The second Print dialog will open

5 Change settings accordingly or click if you accept the default settings

Printing Takeoff Lists and Worksheets In Takeoff Lists and Worksheets you may hide columns to print only certain results or adjust column widths to fit the report within the page size selected

1 In Takeoff List or Worksheet view move your cursor to the right side of the columnrsquos title bar the cursor will display as a two-way arrow

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

49

2 Click and drag to adjust the width of the column Holding the mouse button you may

slide the title bar under the title bar to its left to hide the column completely

3 Select File gt Print or press Ctrl + P to access the Print dialog

4 Indicate desired printer and choose the number of copies

5 Click to print and close the dialog

When printing the condition list we suggest printing in landscape

To reset to the default column widths double-click on the right border of a column heading will reset the column to its right (or previously to its right before being hidden)

Print Preview 1 Select File gt Print Preview

2 Use and to vary your view 3 If viewing an image choose current full or scale view to see how it displays

4 For printed outputs that cover more than one page use and to view adjacent pages or click on the down arrow next to Page field and select the page you want displayed

Exporting Using the CopyPaste Feature You may copy all the data or sections from the worksheet and the takeoff list view in On-Screen Takeoff and paste it into another application When pasting into Excel the cell layout will be maintained

1 Highlight the areas you wish to paste Click and hold the left mouse button down as you drag the cursor over the area to be selected then releasing the mouse button

OR

2 Select the entire takeoff list quickly click on the left On-Screen Takeoff column header and hold and drag the cursor across the remaining column headings

The number of pages for the view selected will display in the lower left-hand corner The zoom percentage that applies to the view will be displayed in the lower right-hand corner next to page size of the drawing

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

50

3 In the worksheet view you may highlight rows by clicking on the numbered buttons to the left of each row clicking and dragging across column headings or clicking and dragging over individual cells in the worksheet

Click anywhere in the appropriate view to deselect the area

4 Once your selection is highlighted you may select Edit gt Copy or Ctrl C from the keyboard 5 On your monitor switch to the application into which you want to paste your selection 6 Select Edit gt Paste in the new application or simply press Ctrl + V to paste

The colored keys for conditions cannot be pasted

Using the Export Feature You may export condition quantities to specified cell location within an Excel worksheet file Cell target locations are assigned in the Results tab of the condition dialogs on the Export line relating to each quantity measurement type

On-Screen Takeoff will export takeoff quantity results for up to three different quantity types that you specify For instance you may want to know the number of square feet in a ceiling area as well as the number of linear feet in its perimeter

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

51

1 Bring up the Condition dialog by double-clicking on a condition in the takeoff dock bar or by

selecting the condition and clicking

2 Click on the Results tab to access its fields The default quantities for the condition type will display

3 For each results field click on the arrow to access the pull-down menu and select the appropriate quantity (for example SF LF EA etchellip)

4 Have your Excel spreadsheet opened and saved in a file

5 Specify the Excel spreadsheet cell locations where you want the results to go

6 For a cell in the first sheet of your spreadsheet type in the cell address (eg a1) Case is not important

7 For a cell on a successive sheet of your spreadsheet type in sheet the number followed by a comma and the cell address without any spaces (eg sheet2a1) Case is not important

8 Click

9 Select File gt Export gt Condition Qty to Excel

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

52

10 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

11 Click to export On-Screen Takeoff results to specified cell locations in the Excel file When you return to the Excel application you will see the values have been added to the specified cell locations in your spreadsheet

12 Save your Excel file

Exporting Worksheet to Excel

1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 From On-Screen Takeoff Select File gt Export gt Worksheet to Excel

4 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

5 Click When you return to the Excel application you will see the values from the Worksheet Tab have been added to your spreadsheet

6 Save your Excel file

Exporting Takeoff to CVS 1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 Click the Takeoff Tab in the project you want to export the information

4 Select File gt Export gt Takeoff to CSV

5 Browse to the location of the CSV spreadsheet file click file to select it

6 Click the Save

NOTE CSV files can be opened in Excel Lotus Access etc One may consider this option more of a ldquodumprdquo into a file

The Excel application must be active (it may be minimized on the application bar) with the target spreadsheet open in the application Otherwise an error will occur with the export operation that will affect both the On-Screen Takeofftrade file and the Excel spreadsheet

Section 8

53

Advanced Features

This section will

Some special features of working with condition objects in the takeoff area

Details of advanced options for conditions

Advanced features of the Project Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

54

Features to Use with Objects Roping Feature You can move copy or delete using this feature Using the Select tool (the pointer) you may select several objects at once by clicking and dragging an outline around the objects then releasing the mouse button Roping may select either objects completely within the outlined area (inclusive) or objects both within and touched by the outlined area (touching) Specify your roping preference under Tools gt Options

1 Click and hold the mouse button at a point on the screen near the objects to be selected and drag to surround the objects with an outline

2 Release the mouse button The objects will be selected

3 You may now

Move the group around on the page by clicking within the group dragging the mouse and releasing the button to place the objects

Delete the group of objects by clicking the Delete key or

Copy and paste by pressing Ctrl C to copy the group then Ctrl V to paste it The pasted copy of the grouped objects will appear slightly offset from the original objects

Section 8 Advanced Features

55

Applying a DropRun Count

Use the droprun feature when calculating quantities to take into account the drop or run of a linear condition such as electrical lines or plumbing pipes Drop or run lengths may be added separately to any linear condition on screen while a default droprun length may be indicated for a condition as a whole

1 Select the desired linear condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff Dock bar

2 Click the Change button in the toolbar to open the Change Condition dialog

3 Click the Advanced tab to access the advanced options and click inside the DropRun check box

4 Enter a default length to be applied to all of this condition Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches) You can leave the length blank and manually enter drop run on each segment drawn

5 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog

Edit DropRun Count

1 With the related linear condition in the Takeoff Dock bar highlighted or with the pointer tool selected

2 click on the desired linear object in the image takeoff area The Count button will become active

3 Click on the Count button (alternatively select Tools gt Count) The default droprun amount will show in the pop-up Count dialog (Default length will be zero if droprun has not been selected in this conditionrsquos properties)

4 Type in the desired length Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches)

5 Click the OK button The additional amount will be reflected in the corresponding quantity The new DropRun count will apply only to the object edited

Adding Text in Image View

On-Screen Takeoff allows you to place text comments around your quantity takeoffs that may be printed along with plan images and objects Text is automatically placed within the Annotation Layer (that includes text and hot links)

1 To place text on the image select the Text Tool and click at the point you want to place your text opening a text box

2 Type in your information clicking Enter for line breaks

3 When you are finished click the OK button to exit the text box

4 To reposition text simply click on the text (with the Text Tool active) to select it

5 Move the cursor over the text the cursor will now display as a four-way arrow

6 Click and drag the mouse to position the text as desired

Section 8 Advanced Features

56

1 To edit existing text use the Text Tool to double-click on the text to open the editing box

2 Enter additional text or use the Backspace key to delete text as necessary

Formatting Text Once created you may format the font size type style and color of your text

1 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Font or click on the Font button in the Takeoff Toolbar

2 Select the desired features (color options are disabled) and click the OK button

3 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Color or click on the Color button in the Takeoff Toolbar The Color dialog will open

4 Click on a color in the Basic Color palette or create a color and add to the Custom Colors palette (Be sure to click on the color in the Custom Colors palette to select it)

5 Click the OK button

Object Properties

Linear Objects

Linear objects may be set to connect at corners

A linear object may be set to trim automatically when crossing another linear object (Check the trim option under the advanced tab of the Condition dialog)

When you move a connected linear object objects automatically move and resize connected lines accordingly (quantities are then recalculated)

This feature requires that the connected linear object be moved using the center handles (does not apply when resizing the line from the ends)

Objects constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

Objects are measured from centerline to centerline

Section 8 Advanced Features

57

Area Objects When drawing an area use your escape key to undo the last line drawn You may reverse your

drawing of an area using the escape key

The area will not fill with color and pattern until the user double-clicks after the last line is set

Lines drawn to delineate an area object constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

After selecting an area to move or adjust position the mouse in the center to move the entire area position the mouse at the sides or corners to adjust the perimeter

Count Objects

All count objects are quantified by the physical number of objects per page and reported as EA for the UOM The quantity for the current Image View is (displayed in the Condition List) and the total quantity in your project is displayed in the Takeoff View and Worksheet View)

Square circle rectangle and triangle shaped count objects do not displace or subtract from other object quantities when placed on top of them However on the Advanced Tab for the count condition a connect property can be set (this is a check box) so that when a count object of this shape is put on top of a Linear type takeoff object it will move with the linear if said linear is moved

An opened-shaped count object must be placed within a linear object Opening shaped count objects may also be measured by linear foot or linear yard (EA SF and SY are also options) Opening shaped count items default to a width of 3rsquo 0rdquo at the time of creation This size can be changed The small medium and large size are not options on this type of condition anymore Check Backout on the Advanced tab for each Count object back out the footage (or yardage) of opening-shaped count objects in which they are placed

NOTE In order to see this Backout functionality (in quantity) for SY or SF deductions at least one of the

results for the Linear(s) this object will be placed on must be set to SY or SF and the count object must have a height quantity

Advanced Features of Conditions The Round Feature Under the Advanced tab of the linear and area Condition dialogues you may specify quantity rounding (in inches) For linear objects rounding applies to each linear object drawn For area objects rounding will apply to each segment of the area perimeter adjusting the perimeter and area calculations For example With a linear condition entering 12 in the Round field will round up each related linear object to the nearest 12 inches or one foot With this setting two walls of 1 4 would each round to 2 0 totaling 4 0

NOTE In the Takeoff Dock bar condition list and in the On-Screen Takeoff reports quantities will be displayed in whole numbers rounded up to the nearest foot However calculations are based on true quantities without rounding unless the Round Feature is engaged

Pitch Pitch may apply either to linear or area conditions It is measured in rise per linear foot Entering 12 indicates a 12 rise per 12 of linear distance (a pitch of 12 over 12) or an angle of 45deg

Section 8 Advanced Features

58

Advanced Features of Project Properties Selecting Multiple Pages

1 Select a single page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry

2 Drag the cursor down the column of numbers to select consecutive pages

3 Click on the blank button at the top of this column to select all pages in the Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

59

Changing Image Assigned to a Drawing 1 Select the page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry 2 Click the Change Image button The Change Image dialog box will appear

3 Navigate to the desired file and select by clicking on it

4 Click the Open button The electronic file assigned to the page will have been changed to reflect the new file choice

Changing Image File Path 1 Select pages as described above

2 Choose Change Folder

3 In the Change Folder dialog navigate to the appropriate folder

4 Click the OK button The file path will have been changed for the selected page entries

Delete a Page from Project Properties 1 Select the page you want to delete by clicking on its associated number (in the gray box at the

left of the entry)

2 Choose Delete Page

All Takeoff on the page will be deleted immediately and permanently

Section 8 Advanced Features

60

Advanced Features of Tool Options

Calculation Method On-Screen Takeoff has built-in calculation options to allow for faster work and faster saves until your takeoff is complete Calculation options are found by selecting Tools gt Options then clicking on the Calculation tab

Calculation method can be set to Automatic Automatic except Grids and Manual Manual will allow the program to operate more quickly while Automatic or Automatic except Grids allows the user to see quantity changes as takeoffs are made

In any mode you may press F9 to recalculate quantities for the On-Screen Takeoff current totals

Configuration Tab

When the ldquoPage Label (A01)rdquo radial button is chosen On-Screen Takeoff puts the numbered label on all the pages of in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar If the Page Descriptionrdquo radial button is chosen then a description of what takeoff is on that specific page will be shown in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar

This section of the configuration tab gives you options on how you want to export your information When the ldquoFolderSubfolder Namesrdquo radial button is chosen than on your file that you are exporting to will have all the conditions folders and subfolders In the Delimiter box you can choose the symbol that is needed to separate the information you are exporting Some files need semicolons () or colons () to make sure the information comes exported in is separated it the appropriate places

Section 8 Advanced Features

61

In previous versions of On-Screen Takeoff there are views that users need to have in order for them to display their information By either choosing ldquoOST 1xrdquo or ldquoOST 2xrdquo it will let the program know you want your columns of information exported in that specific format

When you have the Confirm Deletions radial button of ldquoYesrdquo chosen than every time you delete anything you will get a dialog box confirming your intentions of deletion

While working with your takeoff you have a choice to either view the legend of your conditions or hide it Choose whichever radial button that suits your needs

For those who prefer to use the Enter key to navigate in dialog boxes this option is just for that

Font Tab The Font tab is designed for you to make your own look and feel for the application At the bottom of this tab it will show you sample of the fonts and colors you have chosen

Renaming the Current Page You may change the name of the current page in the takeoff area of On-Screen Takeoff by selecting Edit gt Rename Page

This opens the Name Page dialog and you may simply type in a new name and click the Enter button The new name for the file will be reflected on the title bar for the page and in Project Properties

You also may access the Rename Page function by right-clicking in the takeoff area while in Image View and selecting the option from the pop-up menu that appears

Section 9

62

Saving and Exiting

This section will

Explain how to save projects

Show you how to safely exit the program

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

63

Saving Your Project

1 Select File gt Save 2 If your project has not previously been saved a Save dialog box will open to allow you to name

the file and choose the directory and folder in which to save your file 3 Once saved File gt Save will simply save the current version of the file

OR

4 Select File gt Save As then type in a new name for the file and save to the desired file path

The Auto-save Feature With the Auto-save feature On-Screen Takeoff automatically backs up your open project You may choose to have more than one level of backup files The first backup copy will have the extension b00 and successive files will be b01 b02 and so on If you have designated four levels of backup files after the fourth backup copy has been created (b03) the next file will be saved over the file with extension b00 Further backup saves will then rotate through the four backup files in the same way

1 Select Tools gt Options 2 In the Auto-save area (under the General tab) select the frequency of backup file creation (in

minutes) and the number of levels for the feature 3 You also may disengage the feature by clicking in the check box to clear it

The Auto-save feature automatically saves backup copies to the directory of the current project If you are working from a write-protected area such as a CD-ROM On-Screen Takeoff will place backup files in the On-Screen Takeoff folder

Exiting When you are finished using On-Screen Takeoff it is very easy to exit Exiting is very important because of security reasons If someone were to use your computer they could enter the application and view and manipulate information

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

64

On-Screen Takeoff closes the open project when you open another or create a new project or when you exit the program

1 Select File gt Exit

OR

2 You also may click at the upper right-hand corner of the application to exit

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

65

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer When you get your digitizer from GTCO you will need to connect it to your computer Follow the instructions outlined below to do this

Note For rollup digitizers the metal bar must be oriented to the top or right hand side

Connecting the Digitizer 1 Lay the digitizer out flat 2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer 3 Plug in the power adapter 4 Plug the interface (IO) cable into the digitizer 5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into an open serial port on computer

Note GTCO Technical support phone number is 410-381-6688 The electronic manual (on diskette) from GTCO contains more detailed installation and operation instructions for the GTCO digitizer model you have

Installing other Digitizer Drivers If you are using a GTCO Digitizer you will need to install the GTCO TabletWorks Drivers

If you are using a Digitizer not supported by GTCO Tablet Works 10 please contact the manufacturer of your digitizer for assistance with installation

Installing GTCO TabletWorks Drivers 1 Insert the On Center CD into the CD-ROM drive The CD Startup screen will open 2 Click on Install Software 3 Select Additional Software and Drivers 4 Select Digitizer Driver 5 Follow the instructions for installing TabletWorks 10

Adhering the Template The template is a small plastic sticker used to enable mouse function when using the digitizer with On-Screen Takeoff Place your template on your digitizer We suggest placing it in the bottom right corner of the digitizer about one inch inside the takeoff area

Note You may either peel off the back of the template and use the adhesive surface or you can tape the template down

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

66

Testing the Digitizer Drivers Before running OST you may test the digitizer by moving the stylus around on the digitizer pad it should move the mouse cursor (if mouse emulation is enabled)

If the digitizer does not move the mouse cursor on the screen

The superset codes may need to be reset Reset the superset codes by touching on the border of the digitizer with the stylus The digitizer should beep several times

The digitizer may not be communicating with the computer Be sure the COM port selected is correct Be sure the COM port selected is correct If you are not able to get the digitizer to move the mouse cursor you need to call GTCO technical support for help

Note The Mouse Emulation is not required for On-Screen Takeoff to work properly It is used only for the Template functionality if the digitizer is moving the cursor the wrong direction (up instead of sideways or vice-versa)

Click the L-shaped arrow symbol on the digitizer with the stylus

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

67

Appendix II Toolbar Items Main Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

68

Tool Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

69

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

70

Navigate Toolbar (Continued)

Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

71

Takeoff Toolbar (Continued)

Image Toolbar

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

72

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

This section will detail how to load plans from a F W Dodge CD-ROM into an On-Screen Takeoff project file ready for takeoffs

Dodge files may be added to the Project Properties dialog However loading the files in that way will load the files by number rather than name description If you want to load one page only from your Dodge CD You will have to rename the page to display the name rather than number of the file

To load plan files from a Dodge CD so that the files load sequentially by file number but are displayed by name rather than by number within your project follow the instructions below

Opening a Dodge project from a CD-ROM 1 Insert the CD into the drive 2 Choose File gt Custom 3 Choose Dodge Plans Project (plansdat) as the file type 4 Select the appropriate file type by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the Files of type

field 5 In the Look in field access your drive paths by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the

field then

Navigate to your CD-ROM drive Open the data folder and Open the Projects folder

6 Select the desired project and open its folder 7 Open the plansdat file 8 All the images will come in sequenced correctly for that job along with the full descriptions

(names) of each page If there is not a plans folder in the project folder then plans do not exist for that project on the CD Opening the plansdat file will yield an empty project

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

73

Appendix IV Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer The On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer is a limited version of On Center Softwarersquos commercial takeoff software If your status bar located at the very bottom of the main window says View Mode in the lower left-hand corner then you are using the Plan Viewer You can use the plan viewer to

View CD-based amp converted CAD drawings

View a previously created OST file and associated drawings

Download electronic plans online

Navigate through drawings

Quickly Takeoff linearsareas and counts

Zoom in to view the plan better

Print drawings directly from the viewer

Viewing an On-Screen Takeoff Project File

1 To open an OST file that was previously created with of On-Screen Takeoff 2 Select File gt Open 3 An Open dialog will appear if you do not see the OST file you are looking for select the

Look In drop down arrow 4 A drop down menu will appear listing the various folders drives and mapped drives located

on your computer select the correct drive or folder location and continue to browse to the location of your OST file

5 When you see your OST file double-click it to open it 6 Any takeoff and drawings should appear on the Image tab view

If you do not see the drawings but do see the colored takeoff layer the drawings may

not be located in the same place they were originally saved at Go to File gt Project Properties and check the Image File path for each listed page If the image file path is pointing to a CD drive make sure the CD is inside the CR-ROM

Downloading Electronic Plans If your Online Plan Service provides a special file format (OSX) required to use this feature of our plan viewer you can immediately downloaded all electronic plans of a project directly from our viewer

Most Plan Room web sites will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff when a request to download plans is made Your particular Plan Room may differ in operation so please contact the provider directly with questions on using the site

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

74

When you request to download or open a project file from a Plan Room you will usually have the open to open or save an OSX file Choosing open will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff Alternately you may choose to save the file to a local hard drive After you have saved the file either double-click it to launch On-Screen Takeoff or open the OSX file using On-Screen Takeoff by clicking File then Open and locating the file on your hard drive You will need to change the file type to OSX

After the OSX file is opened you will see an additional tab appear in the Conditions List window called Pages

The Pages tab shows the hierarchy of your project Gray file icons represent pages that have not been downloaded and blue icons represents pages that have been downloaded

To download a page simply double-click the page icon

If you wish to select a group of pages to download you can use the Ctrl or Shift key to multiple select them then click the Download button

If you wish to download all pages at once click the Download All button

Downloaded pages will now appear in the Project Properties dialog in the same order in which they appear in the Pages tab

Creating Quick Takeoffs With On-Screen Takeoff you can create quick takeoffs to measure quantities even if you dont have the full version of our program However using the Quick Takeoff functionality shows you just a fraction of what the full version can do

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar is located at the top of the image view It has three buttons designated for three types of takeoffs Linear Area and Count The Quantity drop down list will show secondary quantities for Linears and Areas The Units drop down allows you to select how you want your quantities displayed Feet Inches Yards Millimeters and Meters

NOTE Every time change the type of takeoff you are performing (switching from Area to Linear for example) the previous quantities and takeoff objects will disappear They will also disappear when you changes pages

NOTE You can use the Dimension Tool to basically measure the distance between two points or linears The distance will display on the status bar at the bottom of the application

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

75

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions General

Where is On-Screen Takeoff installed on my computer

Typically it is installed in CProgram FilesOn-Screen Takeoff

In Explorer how do I recognize On-Screen Takeoff file types

On-Screen Takeoff data is stored in a single file per job lsquojob name OSTrsquo On-Screen Takeoff templates are stored as lsquotemplate nameTPOrsquo

Can only one project at a time be open

Yes For that reason opening another project automatically closes the project on screen You will be asked to save any changes

Is only one scale allowed per page What about on drawings that have multiple detail sections on a page and each of those drawings have different scales

Yes For pages with drawings of different scales copy the drawing to another project page and set the appropriate scale

I cannot perform backout on an area that is along a linear

As a workaround use the On-Screen Takeoff layers feature to help you with this issue Electronic Images

How do I start a project from drawings that have been scanned and written to a CD-ROM

Open a new project Select File gt Project Properties and select Auto Add Navigate to your CD and the appropriate folder and select any image file in that location Click Open All files in the location will load into your project Recommended that images are copied from CD to hard drive for performance

If I get a disk of drawings in AutoCAD format (R13 or R14) can I read them in On-Screen Takeoff

Yes On-Screen Takeoff now reads DWG DXF and many other format that are saved with AutoCAD

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

76

When I click on the all pages button what is supposed to happen Currently nothing seems to change when I click on that button

The All Pages button is used to apply the Darken and Enhance Plans feature to all pages in the project (as opposed to only the current page on screen)

Is there a way to deduct a large skylight from an area condition

Yes with the related area condition selected in the Takeoff Dock bar unselect the Backout button on the Takeoff Toolbar then draw the Backout area The area quantity will be deducted from the related condition object and the linear measurement of the Backout perimeter will be added

Digitizer Issues

How do I connect a Digitizer to the computer

See Appendix I Connecting a Digitizer

The Place Template menu choice is disabled

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or the digitizer or the digitzer drivers are not installed

It wonrsquot let me select the Set Takeoff Area menu choice

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or no job is open a digitizer is not installed or the drivers are not installed

The digitizer stylus is not moving the cursor or crosshairs

Click S-0-1 superset on the digitizer

How do I convert my old GTCO Digitizer to work with On- Screen Takeofftrade

Call GTCO and they may be able to reconfigure your digitizer to be compatible with On-Screen Takeoff

Printing Issues Which Printers work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible printers include On-Screen Takeoff Hewlett Packard Epson and Canon printers If you are having printer difficulties please contact support and specify the type of printer along with other pertinent information Contact support at wwwoncentercomsupport or email supportoncentercom

Which Plotters work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible Plotters include Hewlett Packard DesignJet plotters and the EnCAD Cadjet II If you are having plotter difficulties please contact support and specify the type of plotter concerned

ViewingDisplay I can no longer see my condition list How do I get it back

The toolbars and Dock bars can be turned on and off through the View gt Toolbars menu options

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

77

This is also accessible by right-clicking in the toolbar area and selecting (or deselecting) a toolbar listed

I cannot view my folders in the condition list

Right-click in the Takeoff Dock barcondition list area and select Show Tree to display your folders

My Status Bar reads Viewer Mode and I am unable to draw conditions

On-Screen Takeoff needs to be Authorized Or you need to purchase an upgrade Click the Perform Advanced Takeoff button on the main toolbar

I hid a Dock bar and when I selected to view it again it appeared alongside the other Dock

bar instead of stacked on top of it How do I fix it

Pick up the Dock bar by clicking on the bar at the top and continuing to hold down the mouse button drag the Dock bar over the other one It will resize and appear stacked with the other

When I open image files from a CD the images are all upside down How do I get them right

side up

To flip pages from top to bottom follow the steps below 1 Click the All Pages button on the Image Toolbar (All Pages is engaged when the button

is not clicked) 2 Click the Flip Horizontal button on the Image Toolbar 3 Click the All Pages button again to disengage

Templates How do I create a Template

Follow the steps below 1 Create a typical project 2 Choose File gt Save As 3 Choose On-Screen Takeoff Template Files as the file type to save 4 Name the file This will save all of the condition setups as well as the layers for the

project

How do I create a new project from a template

Follow the steps below 1 Choose File gt New 2 Select a template from those listed in the New dialog This will open a new project with

conditions and layers saved from a previous project but no pages or takeoff

78

INDEX

Area Conditions 32

Area Objects 57

Auto Scrolling 20

Auto-save 63

Backout Mode 41

Calculation Method 60

Conditions 29

Configuration 60

Contents Tab 6

Continuous Mode 38

Count Conditions 33

Count Objects 57

Digitizer 10 65 76

Docking Toolbars 13

Dodge CD 72

Drawing 27 37

DropRun Count 55

Environment 18

Exiting 63

Exporting 49

Features 16

Font 61

Frequently Asked Questions 75

Grid 40

Help File 5

Hiding Toolbars 13

Hot Links 21

Image 19 59

Image files 9

Image Toolbar 12 71

Images 75

Index Tab 6

Layers 43

Linear Conditions 31

Linear Objects 56

Main Toolbar 12 67

Menus 14

Moving Toolbars 13

Navigate Toolbar 12 69

Navigating 20

On-Screen Takeofftrade 2

Page 59 61

Pages 20 25 28

Plan Viewer 73

Plans 26

Printing 47 76

Project Properties 25

Projects 22

Quick Start Video 18

Resizing Toolbars 13

Roping 54

Saving 63

Scale 28

Search Tab 7

Selecting Objects 42

Setup 8

Start On-Screen Takeofftrade 17

System Requirements 9

Takeoff 19 27

Takeoff Toolbar 70 71

Takeoff Toolbar 12

Template Files 23

TIF (Group4) 9

Tool Toolbar 12 68

Toolbar 67

Toolbars 12

View Toolbar 12 69

Viewing Toolbars 12

Worksheet 20

Zone Conditions 33

Zoom Toolbar 12 69

  • On-Screen Takeoff Lite
  • Table of Contents
  • Section 1 - Introduction
  • Section 2 - Setup
  • Section 3 - Toolbars and Menus
  • Section 4 - Features
  • Section 5 - Projects
  • Section 6 - Conditions and Takeoff
  • Section 7 - Printing and Exporting
  • Section 8 - Advanced Features
  • Section 9 - Saving and Exiting
  • Appendix I - Installing Your Digitizer
  • Appendix II - Toolbar Items
  • Appendix III - Loading Plans from a Dodge CD
  • Appendix IV - Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer
  • Appendix V - Frequently Asked Questions
  • Index

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

33

Count Conditions

General

Specify height and indicate the size (in inches) and shape (square circle triangle rectangle or opening) of the count object as it will appear on screen

Advanced Count conditions have advanced attributes These options are available for all shapes except for openings

Zone Conditions Zones allow you to subdivide condition quantities making it easier to modify and complete jobs in phases They can be used at the end of a takeoff to isolate a group of condition quantities that are in different areas of the takeoff

Zones can also be used to break a takeoff into multi-phases and can even be used to isolate quantities while a job is in progress to group the amount of work that has been completed to date They can be applied to one or multiple pages in your plans automatically calculating the takeoff quantities for each zoned area

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

34

The zone feature is only available in Lite and Full Mode If you are in View Mode and would like

to use this feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade

Condition Notes A Note tab is provided for comments regarding the condition These notes will display on the Takeoff List report and will import into Quick Bid

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

35

Condition Results The Results tab of the New Condition is based on condition type Initial settings default to linear feet (LF) for linear conditions square feet (SF) for area conditions and count of items (EA) for count conditions and zones The first of the results fields will display for the condition items in the Takeoff dock bar area All results will display in worksheets and Takeoff List reports as well as in an Excel spreadsheet after being exported

Copying Conditions You may use the condition attributes from a condition yoursquove already created for any future conditions of the same type

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Click the Copy button from the toolbar

OR

3 Right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select copy

4 A new condition will appear in the list with the same condition attributes as the previous condition but with the quantities zeroed

Editing Conditions Once you have copied a condition you might want to change several attributes You can also edit an existing condition to fit any updated needs

1 Highlight the desired condition on the Takeoff dock bar

2 Click the Change button

OR

3 Double-click on the condition you wish to edit to bring up the Change Condition dialog

NOTE The Change Condition dialog differs from the New Condition dialog only in that if takeoffs

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

36

have been performed in your project with this condition you will not be able to change the type of condition or certain properties under the advanced tab of the dialog box

Deleting Conditions 1 Click on the condition in the Takeoff Dock bar area

2 Click the Delete button on the toolbar

OR

3 Right-click and select Delete from the pop-up menu

All takeoff associated with the deleted condition will be deleted immediately and permanently

Organizing Project Conditions Within your project you can create folders andor sub-folders for different types of conditions You may even want to create a folder containing conditions with reset values

To get started organizing your conditions make sure you are viewing the condition tree (right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select Show Tree)

Creating Folders and Sub-Folders 1 Right-click in the Takeoff Dock bar area

2 Select New gt Folder from the pop-up menu

Copying Folders

1 Click on the folder and click Copy on the toolbar

2 All copied conditions within the new folder will have values reset to zero

Renaming Folders

1 Click on the folder

2 Right-click and select Rename from the pop-up menu

3 Enter a name for your folder and click the Enter button

Changing Condition Order

You may move conditions up or down in the condition list of the Takeoff dock bar to suit your project needs

1 Select the condition you would like to move by clicking to highlight it

NOTE When you are ready to move the highlighted conditions be sure that you start

moving using the last condition chosen That condition will have a highlighted boarder

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

37

2 Drag and drop any the condition from one place to another in the list You may also move a condition to another folder on the list in this way

Drawing with Conditions Snap Angles Set up snap angles to prevent lines from appearing jagged Snap angles are commonly set at 15deg and shift snap angles at 0deg

1 Go to Tools gt Options Options dialog appears

2 Under the General tab make the desired settings

3 Click to save the settings As they are drawn lines will snap to the set degree

Drawing a Linear Object 1 Select a condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff dock bar

2 Move the cursor into the Image takeoff area of the screen you will see the cursor display as crosshairs

3 Click and hold left mouse button then drag mouse to draw a line

4 Release mouse button to set line

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

38

5 Repeat steps for further lines

Continuous Mode This feature allows you to draw an object that has connected lines

1 Click the icon from the Takeoff toolbar

OR

2 Go to Tools gt Continuous Mode

3 Follow steps 1-3 from Draw a Linear Object

4 Click at each point of intersection The object will be connected

5 Double-click after making the final point to set the lines

Drawing a Curve To draw a curved line the Curve option must be checked under the Advanced tab of the Condition dialog

1 Click where you want to begin the curve and drag in a straight line to the position for the other endpoint of the curve

2 Click on the line to select it Handles in the shapes of small squares will appear at either end of

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

39

the line and in the center of the line

3 Move the cursor over the center handles until the cursor becomes a two-way arrow

4 Click and drag in the direction of the curve bending the line as you move the cursor Release to set the curve (The line you began with will disappear)

Draw a circle by drawing two curved lines connected

Drawing an Area Object Area conditions are drawn similarly to continuous mode lines You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete your area takeoff

NOTE When drawing an area do not intersect the perimeter or line of the object you are drawing

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

3 The area will be filled with the pattern set for that condition

NOTE The simulated circle will be good enough for you to be able to make a bid

To create a circular area click from point to point with very short distances in between points simulating a circlersquos perimeter Double-click after setting the last point to set the area

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

40

Grid Options Grids give you an added advantage when installing materials such as tiles Use this feature to get a count for how many tiles are needed for an area

1 Double-click on an area condition in the Takeoff dock bar to open its Condition dialog

2 Click on the Advanced tab to show its options

3 Check the box next to Grid by clicking in it

4 Indicate the dimensions of the cell matrix in inches (For example 200 x 400)

5 Under Results tab choose each (EA) for one of the results fields This will tabulate a number of grid cells (including partial grid cells) in area

6 Click to save your settings

7 Use the Move Grid and Rotate Grid features in the Tools menu to manipulate the grid as desired

Grid Calculation

1 Go to Tools gt Options menu

1 Specify if On-Screen Takeoff automatically should Calculate Grid Position

2 If AreaGrid Size is selected On-Screen Takeoff will calculate the number of items needed to fill the grid based on grid demintions

3 Click to accept and close the dialog

To move a line at any angle (regardless of default setting) press the Shift key while moving the mouse

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

41

Backout Mode This feature allows you to take out part of an area and deduct that amount of square footage

1 Select Tools gt Backout Mode

2 Outline the are you want backed out as you would when drawing a regular area object (see Drawing an Area Object)

3 The outlined area will clear and quantities will be recalculated

NOTE The perimeter of the backout area will be added to the LF quantity for that condition

Drawing a Count Object Square triangle rectangle and circle shaped count objects can easily be placed on images

1 Select the condition

2 Click in the location where you want the object to appear

3 To place an opening-shaped count item like a door or window you must click over an existing linear object such as a wall

4 On the Results tab you can change the height properties to give you the result you need

5 If Backout is checked on the advanced tab for each count opening the opening-shaped count item will back out a corresponding section of the linear object

Opening shaped count items are sized at 3rsquo0rdquo by default

Drawing a Zone Zones are drawn in the same way as area objects and may be any polygonal shape You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete the zone perimeter

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

42

Selecting Objects

1 Use the Select Tool to select objects

You can also select all objects that correspond to a condition

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Right-click and choose Select All

3 All objects with this condition will be highlighted with squares as an outline

Moving and Resizing Objects Linear

1 To move or resize a linear object click anywhere on the line to select it

2 To move the line position your pointer over the center handles When the mouse is positioned over the handles you will see a two-way arrow You will only be able to move the line in the direction of the arrows

3 Drag the line to a new position

4 Clicking and dragging the handles on the ends of the line will allow you to lengthen or shorten your line

Area and Zone

1 To move an area object or zone in its entirety click and drag it to its new position

2 Grabbing a handle at a corner or intersection of the object will allow you to adjust and change its perimeter

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

43

Count 1 To move a square circle rectangle or triangle shaped count object click and drag

2 Click and drag an opening shaped count object along the length of the linear object to the desired position then release

NOTE An opening shaped count object may not be moved from its associated linear condition object however it may be moved up and down the length of the linear object

Layers On-Screen Takeoff allows you to sort and separate your takeoff objects within the same job and on the same page On-Screen Takeoff gives you this flexibility through the use of layers

By assigning different conditions to different layers (for example differentiating between floors ceilings and walls) you can choose to view all layers or turn off certain layers to display and print the remaining groups of conditions only You may also remove the background image of electronic plans add text and hot link symbols or print only your condition takeoffs

Layers are only available in Full Mode If you are in View or Lite Mode and would like to use this

feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade Default Layers

On-Screen Takeoff begins every project with three default layers Image Annotation and Default The Image layer holds the electronic plan files you may have in your project The Annotation layer possesses all text notations highlighting and hot links in the project The Default layer will appear in the Condition dialog when creating or editing a condition (listed in the takeoff dock bar) Conditions are assigned to the Default layer unless otherwise specified by the user

Creating Layers To assign a condition to a layer other than the default layer you must first create additional layers for your project

1 Select View gt Layers to open the Layers dialog

2 Click An unnamed layer will be added

3 Click within the empty box and type a name for your layer (for example Wall)

4 New layers are added as active layers The adjacent box under the Show column will be checked

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

44

Assigning a Layer to a Condition 1 Open the Condition dialog box by creating a new condition or editing an existing condition

2 Under the General tab click on the down arrow in the Layer field to display optional layers

3 Select the desired layer for the condition Only the Default layer and layers you have added will be displayed

4 Click

View and Hide Layers

1 Select View gt Layers

2 Under the Show column check the box to view or remove the check (by clicking on it) to hide the specific layer

3 Click to accept and close the Layers dialog

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

45

Assigning Text to a Layer When adding text to an image On-Screen Takeoff has the capability to assign the text to a specified layer

1 Select the Text Tool

2 Click at the point you want to place your text

3 Type in your text using the Enter key for line breaks

4 Click the drop down arrow next to the Layer field and select the desired layer

Section 7

46

Printing and Exporting

This section will

Printing options and procedures

Exporting data by copying and pasting

Exporting quantity results to Excel spreadsheets

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

47

Print Setup On-Screen Takeoff allows the user to print the image takeoff list and worksheet

1 Select File gt Print Setup The Print Setup dialog will open

2 Select a printer or leave the default selection listed (change from the default printer displayed by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the field)

3 Indicate page size and printer tray option (Source) Access page size options by clicking on the

down arrow at the right of the field

4 Choose Portrait or Landscape orientation

5 Click to accept and close the dialog

Printing Images The image area can include the electronic plans the takeoff objects added text and hot links To print a subset of these (for example just the takeoffs without the plans or the added text and hot link symbols) hide layers that you do not want to print (see Section 6 View and Hide Layers) When you are printing your images every page will show the scale of the takeoff you are printing

1 Click on the Image tab to display the area of your project

2 Select File gt Print (or Ctrl + P)

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

48

3 Select the desired view (What to print) and the Image Range

4 Click The second Print dialog will open

5 Change settings accordingly or click if you accept the default settings

Printing Takeoff Lists and Worksheets In Takeoff Lists and Worksheets you may hide columns to print only certain results or adjust column widths to fit the report within the page size selected

1 In Takeoff List or Worksheet view move your cursor to the right side of the columnrsquos title bar the cursor will display as a two-way arrow

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

49

2 Click and drag to adjust the width of the column Holding the mouse button you may

slide the title bar under the title bar to its left to hide the column completely

3 Select File gt Print or press Ctrl + P to access the Print dialog

4 Indicate desired printer and choose the number of copies

5 Click to print and close the dialog

When printing the condition list we suggest printing in landscape

To reset to the default column widths double-click on the right border of a column heading will reset the column to its right (or previously to its right before being hidden)

Print Preview 1 Select File gt Print Preview

2 Use and to vary your view 3 If viewing an image choose current full or scale view to see how it displays

4 For printed outputs that cover more than one page use and to view adjacent pages or click on the down arrow next to Page field and select the page you want displayed

Exporting Using the CopyPaste Feature You may copy all the data or sections from the worksheet and the takeoff list view in On-Screen Takeoff and paste it into another application When pasting into Excel the cell layout will be maintained

1 Highlight the areas you wish to paste Click and hold the left mouse button down as you drag the cursor over the area to be selected then releasing the mouse button

OR

2 Select the entire takeoff list quickly click on the left On-Screen Takeoff column header and hold and drag the cursor across the remaining column headings

The number of pages for the view selected will display in the lower left-hand corner The zoom percentage that applies to the view will be displayed in the lower right-hand corner next to page size of the drawing

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

50

3 In the worksheet view you may highlight rows by clicking on the numbered buttons to the left of each row clicking and dragging across column headings or clicking and dragging over individual cells in the worksheet

Click anywhere in the appropriate view to deselect the area

4 Once your selection is highlighted you may select Edit gt Copy or Ctrl C from the keyboard 5 On your monitor switch to the application into which you want to paste your selection 6 Select Edit gt Paste in the new application or simply press Ctrl + V to paste

The colored keys for conditions cannot be pasted

Using the Export Feature You may export condition quantities to specified cell location within an Excel worksheet file Cell target locations are assigned in the Results tab of the condition dialogs on the Export line relating to each quantity measurement type

On-Screen Takeoff will export takeoff quantity results for up to three different quantity types that you specify For instance you may want to know the number of square feet in a ceiling area as well as the number of linear feet in its perimeter

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

51

1 Bring up the Condition dialog by double-clicking on a condition in the takeoff dock bar or by

selecting the condition and clicking

2 Click on the Results tab to access its fields The default quantities for the condition type will display

3 For each results field click on the arrow to access the pull-down menu and select the appropriate quantity (for example SF LF EA etchellip)

4 Have your Excel spreadsheet opened and saved in a file

5 Specify the Excel spreadsheet cell locations where you want the results to go

6 For a cell in the first sheet of your spreadsheet type in the cell address (eg a1) Case is not important

7 For a cell on a successive sheet of your spreadsheet type in sheet the number followed by a comma and the cell address without any spaces (eg sheet2a1) Case is not important

8 Click

9 Select File gt Export gt Condition Qty to Excel

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

52

10 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

11 Click to export On-Screen Takeoff results to specified cell locations in the Excel file When you return to the Excel application you will see the values have been added to the specified cell locations in your spreadsheet

12 Save your Excel file

Exporting Worksheet to Excel

1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 From On-Screen Takeoff Select File gt Export gt Worksheet to Excel

4 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

5 Click When you return to the Excel application you will see the values from the Worksheet Tab have been added to your spreadsheet

6 Save your Excel file

Exporting Takeoff to CVS 1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 Click the Takeoff Tab in the project you want to export the information

4 Select File gt Export gt Takeoff to CSV

5 Browse to the location of the CSV spreadsheet file click file to select it

6 Click the Save

NOTE CSV files can be opened in Excel Lotus Access etc One may consider this option more of a ldquodumprdquo into a file

The Excel application must be active (it may be minimized on the application bar) with the target spreadsheet open in the application Otherwise an error will occur with the export operation that will affect both the On-Screen Takeofftrade file and the Excel spreadsheet

Section 8

53

Advanced Features

This section will

Some special features of working with condition objects in the takeoff area

Details of advanced options for conditions

Advanced features of the Project Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

54

Features to Use with Objects Roping Feature You can move copy or delete using this feature Using the Select tool (the pointer) you may select several objects at once by clicking and dragging an outline around the objects then releasing the mouse button Roping may select either objects completely within the outlined area (inclusive) or objects both within and touched by the outlined area (touching) Specify your roping preference under Tools gt Options

1 Click and hold the mouse button at a point on the screen near the objects to be selected and drag to surround the objects with an outline

2 Release the mouse button The objects will be selected

3 You may now

Move the group around on the page by clicking within the group dragging the mouse and releasing the button to place the objects

Delete the group of objects by clicking the Delete key or

Copy and paste by pressing Ctrl C to copy the group then Ctrl V to paste it The pasted copy of the grouped objects will appear slightly offset from the original objects

Section 8 Advanced Features

55

Applying a DropRun Count

Use the droprun feature when calculating quantities to take into account the drop or run of a linear condition such as electrical lines or plumbing pipes Drop or run lengths may be added separately to any linear condition on screen while a default droprun length may be indicated for a condition as a whole

1 Select the desired linear condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff Dock bar

2 Click the Change button in the toolbar to open the Change Condition dialog

3 Click the Advanced tab to access the advanced options and click inside the DropRun check box

4 Enter a default length to be applied to all of this condition Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches) You can leave the length blank and manually enter drop run on each segment drawn

5 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog

Edit DropRun Count

1 With the related linear condition in the Takeoff Dock bar highlighted or with the pointer tool selected

2 click on the desired linear object in the image takeoff area The Count button will become active

3 Click on the Count button (alternatively select Tools gt Count) The default droprun amount will show in the pop-up Count dialog (Default length will be zero if droprun has not been selected in this conditionrsquos properties)

4 Type in the desired length Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches)

5 Click the OK button The additional amount will be reflected in the corresponding quantity The new DropRun count will apply only to the object edited

Adding Text in Image View

On-Screen Takeoff allows you to place text comments around your quantity takeoffs that may be printed along with plan images and objects Text is automatically placed within the Annotation Layer (that includes text and hot links)

1 To place text on the image select the Text Tool and click at the point you want to place your text opening a text box

2 Type in your information clicking Enter for line breaks

3 When you are finished click the OK button to exit the text box

4 To reposition text simply click on the text (with the Text Tool active) to select it

5 Move the cursor over the text the cursor will now display as a four-way arrow

6 Click and drag the mouse to position the text as desired

Section 8 Advanced Features

56

1 To edit existing text use the Text Tool to double-click on the text to open the editing box

2 Enter additional text or use the Backspace key to delete text as necessary

Formatting Text Once created you may format the font size type style and color of your text

1 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Font or click on the Font button in the Takeoff Toolbar

2 Select the desired features (color options are disabled) and click the OK button

3 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Color or click on the Color button in the Takeoff Toolbar The Color dialog will open

4 Click on a color in the Basic Color palette or create a color and add to the Custom Colors palette (Be sure to click on the color in the Custom Colors palette to select it)

5 Click the OK button

Object Properties

Linear Objects

Linear objects may be set to connect at corners

A linear object may be set to trim automatically when crossing another linear object (Check the trim option under the advanced tab of the Condition dialog)

When you move a connected linear object objects automatically move and resize connected lines accordingly (quantities are then recalculated)

This feature requires that the connected linear object be moved using the center handles (does not apply when resizing the line from the ends)

Objects constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

Objects are measured from centerline to centerline

Section 8 Advanced Features

57

Area Objects When drawing an area use your escape key to undo the last line drawn You may reverse your

drawing of an area using the escape key

The area will not fill with color and pattern until the user double-clicks after the last line is set

Lines drawn to delineate an area object constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

After selecting an area to move or adjust position the mouse in the center to move the entire area position the mouse at the sides or corners to adjust the perimeter

Count Objects

All count objects are quantified by the physical number of objects per page and reported as EA for the UOM The quantity for the current Image View is (displayed in the Condition List) and the total quantity in your project is displayed in the Takeoff View and Worksheet View)

Square circle rectangle and triangle shaped count objects do not displace or subtract from other object quantities when placed on top of them However on the Advanced Tab for the count condition a connect property can be set (this is a check box) so that when a count object of this shape is put on top of a Linear type takeoff object it will move with the linear if said linear is moved

An opened-shaped count object must be placed within a linear object Opening shaped count objects may also be measured by linear foot or linear yard (EA SF and SY are also options) Opening shaped count items default to a width of 3rsquo 0rdquo at the time of creation This size can be changed The small medium and large size are not options on this type of condition anymore Check Backout on the Advanced tab for each Count object back out the footage (or yardage) of opening-shaped count objects in which they are placed

NOTE In order to see this Backout functionality (in quantity) for SY or SF deductions at least one of the

results for the Linear(s) this object will be placed on must be set to SY or SF and the count object must have a height quantity

Advanced Features of Conditions The Round Feature Under the Advanced tab of the linear and area Condition dialogues you may specify quantity rounding (in inches) For linear objects rounding applies to each linear object drawn For area objects rounding will apply to each segment of the area perimeter adjusting the perimeter and area calculations For example With a linear condition entering 12 in the Round field will round up each related linear object to the nearest 12 inches or one foot With this setting two walls of 1 4 would each round to 2 0 totaling 4 0

NOTE In the Takeoff Dock bar condition list and in the On-Screen Takeoff reports quantities will be displayed in whole numbers rounded up to the nearest foot However calculations are based on true quantities without rounding unless the Round Feature is engaged

Pitch Pitch may apply either to linear or area conditions It is measured in rise per linear foot Entering 12 indicates a 12 rise per 12 of linear distance (a pitch of 12 over 12) or an angle of 45deg

Section 8 Advanced Features

58

Advanced Features of Project Properties Selecting Multiple Pages

1 Select a single page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry

2 Drag the cursor down the column of numbers to select consecutive pages

3 Click on the blank button at the top of this column to select all pages in the Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

59

Changing Image Assigned to a Drawing 1 Select the page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry 2 Click the Change Image button The Change Image dialog box will appear

3 Navigate to the desired file and select by clicking on it

4 Click the Open button The electronic file assigned to the page will have been changed to reflect the new file choice

Changing Image File Path 1 Select pages as described above

2 Choose Change Folder

3 In the Change Folder dialog navigate to the appropriate folder

4 Click the OK button The file path will have been changed for the selected page entries

Delete a Page from Project Properties 1 Select the page you want to delete by clicking on its associated number (in the gray box at the

left of the entry)

2 Choose Delete Page

All Takeoff on the page will be deleted immediately and permanently

Section 8 Advanced Features

60

Advanced Features of Tool Options

Calculation Method On-Screen Takeoff has built-in calculation options to allow for faster work and faster saves until your takeoff is complete Calculation options are found by selecting Tools gt Options then clicking on the Calculation tab

Calculation method can be set to Automatic Automatic except Grids and Manual Manual will allow the program to operate more quickly while Automatic or Automatic except Grids allows the user to see quantity changes as takeoffs are made

In any mode you may press F9 to recalculate quantities for the On-Screen Takeoff current totals

Configuration Tab

When the ldquoPage Label (A01)rdquo radial button is chosen On-Screen Takeoff puts the numbered label on all the pages of in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar If the Page Descriptionrdquo radial button is chosen then a description of what takeoff is on that specific page will be shown in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar

This section of the configuration tab gives you options on how you want to export your information When the ldquoFolderSubfolder Namesrdquo radial button is chosen than on your file that you are exporting to will have all the conditions folders and subfolders In the Delimiter box you can choose the symbol that is needed to separate the information you are exporting Some files need semicolons () or colons () to make sure the information comes exported in is separated it the appropriate places

Section 8 Advanced Features

61

In previous versions of On-Screen Takeoff there are views that users need to have in order for them to display their information By either choosing ldquoOST 1xrdquo or ldquoOST 2xrdquo it will let the program know you want your columns of information exported in that specific format

When you have the Confirm Deletions radial button of ldquoYesrdquo chosen than every time you delete anything you will get a dialog box confirming your intentions of deletion

While working with your takeoff you have a choice to either view the legend of your conditions or hide it Choose whichever radial button that suits your needs

For those who prefer to use the Enter key to navigate in dialog boxes this option is just for that

Font Tab The Font tab is designed for you to make your own look and feel for the application At the bottom of this tab it will show you sample of the fonts and colors you have chosen

Renaming the Current Page You may change the name of the current page in the takeoff area of On-Screen Takeoff by selecting Edit gt Rename Page

This opens the Name Page dialog and you may simply type in a new name and click the Enter button The new name for the file will be reflected on the title bar for the page and in Project Properties

You also may access the Rename Page function by right-clicking in the takeoff area while in Image View and selecting the option from the pop-up menu that appears

Section 9

62

Saving and Exiting

This section will

Explain how to save projects

Show you how to safely exit the program

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

63

Saving Your Project

1 Select File gt Save 2 If your project has not previously been saved a Save dialog box will open to allow you to name

the file and choose the directory and folder in which to save your file 3 Once saved File gt Save will simply save the current version of the file

OR

4 Select File gt Save As then type in a new name for the file and save to the desired file path

The Auto-save Feature With the Auto-save feature On-Screen Takeoff automatically backs up your open project You may choose to have more than one level of backup files The first backup copy will have the extension b00 and successive files will be b01 b02 and so on If you have designated four levels of backup files after the fourth backup copy has been created (b03) the next file will be saved over the file with extension b00 Further backup saves will then rotate through the four backup files in the same way

1 Select Tools gt Options 2 In the Auto-save area (under the General tab) select the frequency of backup file creation (in

minutes) and the number of levels for the feature 3 You also may disengage the feature by clicking in the check box to clear it

The Auto-save feature automatically saves backup copies to the directory of the current project If you are working from a write-protected area such as a CD-ROM On-Screen Takeoff will place backup files in the On-Screen Takeoff folder

Exiting When you are finished using On-Screen Takeoff it is very easy to exit Exiting is very important because of security reasons If someone were to use your computer they could enter the application and view and manipulate information

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

64

On-Screen Takeoff closes the open project when you open another or create a new project or when you exit the program

1 Select File gt Exit

OR

2 You also may click at the upper right-hand corner of the application to exit

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

65

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer When you get your digitizer from GTCO you will need to connect it to your computer Follow the instructions outlined below to do this

Note For rollup digitizers the metal bar must be oriented to the top or right hand side

Connecting the Digitizer 1 Lay the digitizer out flat 2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer 3 Plug in the power adapter 4 Plug the interface (IO) cable into the digitizer 5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into an open serial port on computer

Note GTCO Technical support phone number is 410-381-6688 The electronic manual (on diskette) from GTCO contains more detailed installation and operation instructions for the GTCO digitizer model you have

Installing other Digitizer Drivers If you are using a GTCO Digitizer you will need to install the GTCO TabletWorks Drivers

If you are using a Digitizer not supported by GTCO Tablet Works 10 please contact the manufacturer of your digitizer for assistance with installation

Installing GTCO TabletWorks Drivers 1 Insert the On Center CD into the CD-ROM drive The CD Startup screen will open 2 Click on Install Software 3 Select Additional Software and Drivers 4 Select Digitizer Driver 5 Follow the instructions for installing TabletWorks 10

Adhering the Template The template is a small plastic sticker used to enable mouse function when using the digitizer with On-Screen Takeoff Place your template on your digitizer We suggest placing it in the bottom right corner of the digitizer about one inch inside the takeoff area

Note You may either peel off the back of the template and use the adhesive surface or you can tape the template down

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

66

Testing the Digitizer Drivers Before running OST you may test the digitizer by moving the stylus around on the digitizer pad it should move the mouse cursor (if mouse emulation is enabled)

If the digitizer does not move the mouse cursor on the screen

The superset codes may need to be reset Reset the superset codes by touching on the border of the digitizer with the stylus The digitizer should beep several times

The digitizer may not be communicating with the computer Be sure the COM port selected is correct Be sure the COM port selected is correct If you are not able to get the digitizer to move the mouse cursor you need to call GTCO technical support for help

Note The Mouse Emulation is not required for On-Screen Takeoff to work properly It is used only for the Template functionality if the digitizer is moving the cursor the wrong direction (up instead of sideways or vice-versa)

Click the L-shaped arrow symbol on the digitizer with the stylus

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

67

Appendix II Toolbar Items Main Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

68

Tool Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

69

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

70

Navigate Toolbar (Continued)

Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

71

Takeoff Toolbar (Continued)

Image Toolbar

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

72

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

This section will detail how to load plans from a F W Dodge CD-ROM into an On-Screen Takeoff project file ready for takeoffs

Dodge files may be added to the Project Properties dialog However loading the files in that way will load the files by number rather than name description If you want to load one page only from your Dodge CD You will have to rename the page to display the name rather than number of the file

To load plan files from a Dodge CD so that the files load sequentially by file number but are displayed by name rather than by number within your project follow the instructions below

Opening a Dodge project from a CD-ROM 1 Insert the CD into the drive 2 Choose File gt Custom 3 Choose Dodge Plans Project (plansdat) as the file type 4 Select the appropriate file type by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the Files of type

field 5 In the Look in field access your drive paths by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the

field then

Navigate to your CD-ROM drive Open the data folder and Open the Projects folder

6 Select the desired project and open its folder 7 Open the plansdat file 8 All the images will come in sequenced correctly for that job along with the full descriptions

(names) of each page If there is not a plans folder in the project folder then plans do not exist for that project on the CD Opening the plansdat file will yield an empty project

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

73

Appendix IV Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer The On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer is a limited version of On Center Softwarersquos commercial takeoff software If your status bar located at the very bottom of the main window says View Mode in the lower left-hand corner then you are using the Plan Viewer You can use the plan viewer to

View CD-based amp converted CAD drawings

View a previously created OST file and associated drawings

Download electronic plans online

Navigate through drawings

Quickly Takeoff linearsareas and counts

Zoom in to view the plan better

Print drawings directly from the viewer

Viewing an On-Screen Takeoff Project File

1 To open an OST file that was previously created with of On-Screen Takeoff 2 Select File gt Open 3 An Open dialog will appear if you do not see the OST file you are looking for select the

Look In drop down arrow 4 A drop down menu will appear listing the various folders drives and mapped drives located

on your computer select the correct drive or folder location and continue to browse to the location of your OST file

5 When you see your OST file double-click it to open it 6 Any takeoff and drawings should appear on the Image tab view

If you do not see the drawings but do see the colored takeoff layer the drawings may

not be located in the same place they were originally saved at Go to File gt Project Properties and check the Image File path for each listed page If the image file path is pointing to a CD drive make sure the CD is inside the CR-ROM

Downloading Electronic Plans If your Online Plan Service provides a special file format (OSX) required to use this feature of our plan viewer you can immediately downloaded all electronic plans of a project directly from our viewer

Most Plan Room web sites will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff when a request to download plans is made Your particular Plan Room may differ in operation so please contact the provider directly with questions on using the site

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

74

When you request to download or open a project file from a Plan Room you will usually have the open to open or save an OSX file Choosing open will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff Alternately you may choose to save the file to a local hard drive After you have saved the file either double-click it to launch On-Screen Takeoff or open the OSX file using On-Screen Takeoff by clicking File then Open and locating the file on your hard drive You will need to change the file type to OSX

After the OSX file is opened you will see an additional tab appear in the Conditions List window called Pages

The Pages tab shows the hierarchy of your project Gray file icons represent pages that have not been downloaded and blue icons represents pages that have been downloaded

To download a page simply double-click the page icon

If you wish to select a group of pages to download you can use the Ctrl or Shift key to multiple select them then click the Download button

If you wish to download all pages at once click the Download All button

Downloaded pages will now appear in the Project Properties dialog in the same order in which they appear in the Pages tab

Creating Quick Takeoffs With On-Screen Takeoff you can create quick takeoffs to measure quantities even if you dont have the full version of our program However using the Quick Takeoff functionality shows you just a fraction of what the full version can do

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar is located at the top of the image view It has three buttons designated for three types of takeoffs Linear Area and Count The Quantity drop down list will show secondary quantities for Linears and Areas The Units drop down allows you to select how you want your quantities displayed Feet Inches Yards Millimeters and Meters

NOTE Every time change the type of takeoff you are performing (switching from Area to Linear for example) the previous quantities and takeoff objects will disappear They will also disappear when you changes pages

NOTE You can use the Dimension Tool to basically measure the distance between two points or linears The distance will display on the status bar at the bottom of the application

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

75

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions General

Where is On-Screen Takeoff installed on my computer

Typically it is installed in CProgram FilesOn-Screen Takeoff

In Explorer how do I recognize On-Screen Takeoff file types

On-Screen Takeoff data is stored in a single file per job lsquojob name OSTrsquo On-Screen Takeoff templates are stored as lsquotemplate nameTPOrsquo

Can only one project at a time be open

Yes For that reason opening another project automatically closes the project on screen You will be asked to save any changes

Is only one scale allowed per page What about on drawings that have multiple detail sections on a page and each of those drawings have different scales

Yes For pages with drawings of different scales copy the drawing to another project page and set the appropriate scale

I cannot perform backout on an area that is along a linear

As a workaround use the On-Screen Takeoff layers feature to help you with this issue Electronic Images

How do I start a project from drawings that have been scanned and written to a CD-ROM

Open a new project Select File gt Project Properties and select Auto Add Navigate to your CD and the appropriate folder and select any image file in that location Click Open All files in the location will load into your project Recommended that images are copied from CD to hard drive for performance

If I get a disk of drawings in AutoCAD format (R13 or R14) can I read them in On-Screen Takeoff

Yes On-Screen Takeoff now reads DWG DXF and many other format that are saved with AutoCAD

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

76

When I click on the all pages button what is supposed to happen Currently nothing seems to change when I click on that button

The All Pages button is used to apply the Darken and Enhance Plans feature to all pages in the project (as opposed to only the current page on screen)

Is there a way to deduct a large skylight from an area condition

Yes with the related area condition selected in the Takeoff Dock bar unselect the Backout button on the Takeoff Toolbar then draw the Backout area The area quantity will be deducted from the related condition object and the linear measurement of the Backout perimeter will be added

Digitizer Issues

How do I connect a Digitizer to the computer

See Appendix I Connecting a Digitizer

The Place Template menu choice is disabled

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or the digitizer or the digitzer drivers are not installed

It wonrsquot let me select the Set Takeoff Area menu choice

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or no job is open a digitizer is not installed or the drivers are not installed

The digitizer stylus is not moving the cursor or crosshairs

Click S-0-1 superset on the digitizer

How do I convert my old GTCO Digitizer to work with On- Screen Takeofftrade

Call GTCO and they may be able to reconfigure your digitizer to be compatible with On-Screen Takeoff

Printing Issues Which Printers work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible printers include On-Screen Takeoff Hewlett Packard Epson and Canon printers If you are having printer difficulties please contact support and specify the type of printer along with other pertinent information Contact support at wwwoncentercomsupport or email supportoncentercom

Which Plotters work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible Plotters include Hewlett Packard DesignJet plotters and the EnCAD Cadjet II If you are having plotter difficulties please contact support and specify the type of plotter concerned

ViewingDisplay I can no longer see my condition list How do I get it back

The toolbars and Dock bars can be turned on and off through the View gt Toolbars menu options

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

77

This is also accessible by right-clicking in the toolbar area and selecting (or deselecting) a toolbar listed

I cannot view my folders in the condition list

Right-click in the Takeoff Dock barcondition list area and select Show Tree to display your folders

My Status Bar reads Viewer Mode and I am unable to draw conditions

On-Screen Takeoff needs to be Authorized Or you need to purchase an upgrade Click the Perform Advanced Takeoff button on the main toolbar

I hid a Dock bar and when I selected to view it again it appeared alongside the other Dock

bar instead of stacked on top of it How do I fix it

Pick up the Dock bar by clicking on the bar at the top and continuing to hold down the mouse button drag the Dock bar over the other one It will resize and appear stacked with the other

When I open image files from a CD the images are all upside down How do I get them right

side up

To flip pages from top to bottom follow the steps below 1 Click the All Pages button on the Image Toolbar (All Pages is engaged when the button

is not clicked) 2 Click the Flip Horizontal button on the Image Toolbar 3 Click the All Pages button again to disengage

Templates How do I create a Template

Follow the steps below 1 Create a typical project 2 Choose File gt Save As 3 Choose On-Screen Takeoff Template Files as the file type to save 4 Name the file This will save all of the condition setups as well as the layers for the

project

How do I create a new project from a template

Follow the steps below 1 Choose File gt New 2 Select a template from those listed in the New dialog This will open a new project with

conditions and layers saved from a previous project but no pages or takeoff

78

INDEX

Area Conditions 32

Area Objects 57

Auto Scrolling 20

Auto-save 63

Backout Mode 41

Calculation Method 60

Conditions 29

Configuration 60

Contents Tab 6

Continuous Mode 38

Count Conditions 33

Count Objects 57

Digitizer 10 65 76

Docking Toolbars 13

Dodge CD 72

Drawing 27 37

DropRun Count 55

Environment 18

Exiting 63

Exporting 49

Features 16

Font 61

Frequently Asked Questions 75

Grid 40

Help File 5

Hiding Toolbars 13

Hot Links 21

Image 19 59

Image files 9

Image Toolbar 12 71

Images 75

Index Tab 6

Layers 43

Linear Conditions 31

Linear Objects 56

Main Toolbar 12 67

Menus 14

Moving Toolbars 13

Navigate Toolbar 12 69

Navigating 20

On-Screen Takeofftrade 2

Page 59 61

Pages 20 25 28

Plan Viewer 73

Plans 26

Printing 47 76

Project Properties 25

Projects 22

Quick Start Video 18

Resizing Toolbars 13

Roping 54

Saving 63

Scale 28

Search Tab 7

Selecting Objects 42

Setup 8

Start On-Screen Takeofftrade 17

System Requirements 9

Takeoff 19 27

Takeoff Toolbar 70 71

Takeoff Toolbar 12

Template Files 23

TIF (Group4) 9

Tool Toolbar 12 68

Toolbar 67

Toolbars 12

View Toolbar 12 69

Viewing Toolbars 12

Worksheet 20

Zone Conditions 33

Zoom Toolbar 12 69

  • On-Screen Takeoff Lite
  • Table of Contents
  • Section 1 - Introduction
  • Section 2 - Setup
  • Section 3 - Toolbars and Menus
  • Section 4 - Features
  • Section 5 - Projects
  • Section 6 - Conditions and Takeoff
  • Section 7 - Printing and Exporting
  • Section 8 - Advanced Features
  • Section 9 - Saving and Exiting
  • Appendix I - Installing Your Digitizer
  • Appendix II - Toolbar Items
  • Appendix III - Loading Plans from a Dodge CD
  • Appendix IV - Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer
  • Appendix V - Frequently Asked Questions
  • Index

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

34

The zone feature is only available in Lite and Full Mode If you are in View Mode and would like

to use this feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade

Condition Notes A Note tab is provided for comments regarding the condition These notes will display on the Takeoff List report and will import into Quick Bid

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

35

Condition Results The Results tab of the New Condition is based on condition type Initial settings default to linear feet (LF) for linear conditions square feet (SF) for area conditions and count of items (EA) for count conditions and zones The first of the results fields will display for the condition items in the Takeoff dock bar area All results will display in worksheets and Takeoff List reports as well as in an Excel spreadsheet after being exported

Copying Conditions You may use the condition attributes from a condition yoursquove already created for any future conditions of the same type

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Click the Copy button from the toolbar

OR

3 Right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select copy

4 A new condition will appear in the list with the same condition attributes as the previous condition but with the quantities zeroed

Editing Conditions Once you have copied a condition you might want to change several attributes You can also edit an existing condition to fit any updated needs

1 Highlight the desired condition on the Takeoff dock bar

2 Click the Change button

OR

3 Double-click on the condition you wish to edit to bring up the Change Condition dialog

NOTE The Change Condition dialog differs from the New Condition dialog only in that if takeoffs

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

36

have been performed in your project with this condition you will not be able to change the type of condition or certain properties under the advanced tab of the dialog box

Deleting Conditions 1 Click on the condition in the Takeoff Dock bar area

2 Click the Delete button on the toolbar

OR

3 Right-click and select Delete from the pop-up menu

All takeoff associated with the deleted condition will be deleted immediately and permanently

Organizing Project Conditions Within your project you can create folders andor sub-folders for different types of conditions You may even want to create a folder containing conditions with reset values

To get started organizing your conditions make sure you are viewing the condition tree (right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select Show Tree)

Creating Folders and Sub-Folders 1 Right-click in the Takeoff Dock bar area

2 Select New gt Folder from the pop-up menu

Copying Folders

1 Click on the folder and click Copy on the toolbar

2 All copied conditions within the new folder will have values reset to zero

Renaming Folders

1 Click on the folder

2 Right-click and select Rename from the pop-up menu

3 Enter a name for your folder and click the Enter button

Changing Condition Order

You may move conditions up or down in the condition list of the Takeoff dock bar to suit your project needs

1 Select the condition you would like to move by clicking to highlight it

NOTE When you are ready to move the highlighted conditions be sure that you start

moving using the last condition chosen That condition will have a highlighted boarder

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

37

2 Drag and drop any the condition from one place to another in the list You may also move a condition to another folder on the list in this way

Drawing with Conditions Snap Angles Set up snap angles to prevent lines from appearing jagged Snap angles are commonly set at 15deg and shift snap angles at 0deg

1 Go to Tools gt Options Options dialog appears

2 Under the General tab make the desired settings

3 Click to save the settings As they are drawn lines will snap to the set degree

Drawing a Linear Object 1 Select a condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff dock bar

2 Move the cursor into the Image takeoff area of the screen you will see the cursor display as crosshairs

3 Click and hold left mouse button then drag mouse to draw a line

4 Release mouse button to set line

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

38

5 Repeat steps for further lines

Continuous Mode This feature allows you to draw an object that has connected lines

1 Click the icon from the Takeoff toolbar

OR

2 Go to Tools gt Continuous Mode

3 Follow steps 1-3 from Draw a Linear Object

4 Click at each point of intersection The object will be connected

5 Double-click after making the final point to set the lines

Drawing a Curve To draw a curved line the Curve option must be checked under the Advanced tab of the Condition dialog

1 Click where you want to begin the curve and drag in a straight line to the position for the other endpoint of the curve

2 Click on the line to select it Handles in the shapes of small squares will appear at either end of

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

39

the line and in the center of the line

3 Move the cursor over the center handles until the cursor becomes a two-way arrow

4 Click and drag in the direction of the curve bending the line as you move the cursor Release to set the curve (The line you began with will disappear)

Draw a circle by drawing two curved lines connected

Drawing an Area Object Area conditions are drawn similarly to continuous mode lines You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete your area takeoff

NOTE When drawing an area do not intersect the perimeter or line of the object you are drawing

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

3 The area will be filled with the pattern set for that condition

NOTE The simulated circle will be good enough for you to be able to make a bid

To create a circular area click from point to point with very short distances in between points simulating a circlersquos perimeter Double-click after setting the last point to set the area

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

40

Grid Options Grids give you an added advantage when installing materials such as tiles Use this feature to get a count for how many tiles are needed for an area

1 Double-click on an area condition in the Takeoff dock bar to open its Condition dialog

2 Click on the Advanced tab to show its options

3 Check the box next to Grid by clicking in it

4 Indicate the dimensions of the cell matrix in inches (For example 200 x 400)

5 Under Results tab choose each (EA) for one of the results fields This will tabulate a number of grid cells (including partial grid cells) in area

6 Click to save your settings

7 Use the Move Grid and Rotate Grid features in the Tools menu to manipulate the grid as desired

Grid Calculation

1 Go to Tools gt Options menu

1 Specify if On-Screen Takeoff automatically should Calculate Grid Position

2 If AreaGrid Size is selected On-Screen Takeoff will calculate the number of items needed to fill the grid based on grid demintions

3 Click to accept and close the dialog

To move a line at any angle (regardless of default setting) press the Shift key while moving the mouse

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

41

Backout Mode This feature allows you to take out part of an area and deduct that amount of square footage

1 Select Tools gt Backout Mode

2 Outline the are you want backed out as you would when drawing a regular area object (see Drawing an Area Object)

3 The outlined area will clear and quantities will be recalculated

NOTE The perimeter of the backout area will be added to the LF quantity for that condition

Drawing a Count Object Square triangle rectangle and circle shaped count objects can easily be placed on images

1 Select the condition

2 Click in the location where you want the object to appear

3 To place an opening-shaped count item like a door or window you must click over an existing linear object such as a wall

4 On the Results tab you can change the height properties to give you the result you need

5 If Backout is checked on the advanced tab for each count opening the opening-shaped count item will back out a corresponding section of the linear object

Opening shaped count items are sized at 3rsquo0rdquo by default

Drawing a Zone Zones are drawn in the same way as area objects and may be any polygonal shape You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete the zone perimeter

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

42

Selecting Objects

1 Use the Select Tool to select objects

You can also select all objects that correspond to a condition

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Right-click and choose Select All

3 All objects with this condition will be highlighted with squares as an outline

Moving and Resizing Objects Linear

1 To move or resize a linear object click anywhere on the line to select it

2 To move the line position your pointer over the center handles When the mouse is positioned over the handles you will see a two-way arrow You will only be able to move the line in the direction of the arrows

3 Drag the line to a new position

4 Clicking and dragging the handles on the ends of the line will allow you to lengthen or shorten your line

Area and Zone

1 To move an area object or zone in its entirety click and drag it to its new position

2 Grabbing a handle at a corner or intersection of the object will allow you to adjust and change its perimeter

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

43

Count 1 To move a square circle rectangle or triangle shaped count object click and drag

2 Click and drag an opening shaped count object along the length of the linear object to the desired position then release

NOTE An opening shaped count object may not be moved from its associated linear condition object however it may be moved up and down the length of the linear object

Layers On-Screen Takeoff allows you to sort and separate your takeoff objects within the same job and on the same page On-Screen Takeoff gives you this flexibility through the use of layers

By assigning different conditions to different layers (for example differentiating between floors ceilings and walls) you can choose to view all layers or turn off certain layers to display and print the remaining groups of conditions only You may also remove the background image of electronic plans add text and hot link symbols or print only your condition takeoffs

Layers are only available in Full Mode If you are in View or Lite Mode and would like to use this

feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade Default Layers

On-Screen Takeoff begins every project with three default layers Image Annotation and Default The Image layer holds the electronic plan files you may have in your project The Annotation layer possesses all text notations highlighting and hot links in the project The Default layer will appear in the Condition dialog when creating or editing a condition (listed in the takeoff dock bar) Conditions are assigned to the Default layer unless otherwise specified by the user

Creating Layers To assign a condition to a layer other than the default layer you must first create additional layers for your project

1 Select View gt Layers to open the Layers dialog

2 Click An unnamed layer will be added

3 Click within the empty box and type a name for your layer (for example Wall)

4 New layers are added as active layers The adjacent box under the Show column will be checked

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

44

Assigning a Layer to a Condition 1 Open the Condition dialog box by creating a new condition or editing an existing condition

2 Under the General tab click on the down arrow in the Layer field to display optional layers

3 Select the desired layer for the condition Only the Default layer and layers you have added will be displayed

4 Click

View and Hide Layers

1 Select View gt Layers

2 Under the Show column check the box to view or remove the check (by clicking on it) to hide the specific layer

3 Click to accept and close the Layers dialog

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

45

Assigning Text to a Layer When adding text to an image On-Screen Takeoff has the capability to assign the text to a specified layer

1 Select the Text Tool

2 Click at the point you want to place your text

3 Type in your text using the Enter key for line breaks

4 Click the drop down arrow next to the Layer field and select the desired layer

Section 7

46

Printing and Exporting

This section will

Printing options and procedures

Exporting data by copying and pasting

Exporting quantity results to Excel spreadsheets

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

47

Print Setup On-Screen Takeoff allows the user to print the image takeoff list and worksheet

1 Select File gt Print Setup The Print Setup dialog will open

2 Select a printer or leave the default selection listed (change from the default printer displayed by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the field)

3 Indicate page size and printer tray option (Source) Access page size options by clicking on the

down arrow at the right of the field

4 Choose Portrait or Landscape orientation

5 Click to accept and close the dialog

Printing Images The image area can include the electronic plans the takeoff objects added text and hot links To print a subset of these (for example just the takeoffs without the plans or the added text and hot link symbols) hide layers that you do not want to print (see Section 6 View and Hide Layers) When you are printing your images every page will show the scale of the takeoff you are printing

1 Click on the Image tab to display the area of your project

2 Select File gt Print (or Ctrl + P)

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

48

3 Select the desired view (What to print) and the Image Range

4 Click The second Print dialog will open

5 Change settings accordingly or click if you accept the default settings

Printing Takeoff Lists and Worksheets In Takeoff Lists and Worksheets you may hide columns to print only certain results or adjust column widths to fit the report within the page size selected

1 In Takeoff List or Worksheet view move your cursor to the right side of the columnrsquos title bar the cursor will display as a two-way arrow

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

49

2 Click and drag to adjust the width of the column Holding the mouse button you may

slide the title bar under the title bar to its left to hide the column completely

3 Select File gt Print or press Ctrl + P to access the Print dialog

4 Indicate desired printer and choose the number of copies

5 Click to print and close the dialog

When printing the condition list we suggest printing in landscape

To reset to the default column widths double-click on the right border of a column heading will reset the column to its right (or previously to its right before being hidden)

Print Preview 1 Select File gt Print Preview

2 Use and to vary your view 3 If viewing an image choose current full or scale view to see how it displays

4 For printed outputs that cover more than one page use and to view adjacent pages or click on the down arrow next to Page field and select the page you want displayed

Exporting Using the CopyPaste Feature You may copy all the data or sections from the worksheet and the takeoff list view in On-Screen Takeoff and paste it into another application When pasting into Excel the cell layout will be maintained

1 Highlight the areas you wish to paste Click and hold the left mouse button down as you drag the cursor over the area to be selected then releasing the mouse button

OR

2 Select the entire takeoff list quickly click on the left On-Screen Takeoff column header and hold and drag the cursor across the remaining column headings

The number of pages for the view selected will display in the lower left-hand corner The zoom percentage that applies to the view will be displayed in the lower right-hand corner next to page size of the drawing

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

50

3 In the worksheet view you may highlight rows by clicking on the numbered buttons to the left of each row clicking and dragging across column headings or clicking and dragging over individual cells in the worksheet

Click anywhere in the appropriate view to deselect the area

4 Once your selection is highlighted you may select Edit gt Copy or Ctrl C from the keyboard 5 On your monitor switch to the application into which you want to paste your selection 6 Select Edit gt Paste in the new application or simply press Ctrl + V to paste

The colored keys for conditions cannot be pasted

Using the Export Feature You may export condition quantities to specified cell location within an Excel worksheet file Cell target locations are assigned in the Results tab of the condition dialogs on the Export line relating to each quantity measurement type

On-Screen Takeoff will export takeoff quantity results for up to three different quantity types that you specify For instance you may want to know the number of square feet in a ceiling area as well as the number of linear feet in its perimeter

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

51

1 Bring up the Condition dialog by double-clicking on a condition in the takeoff dock bar or by

selecting the condition and clicking

2 Click on the Results tab to access its fields The default quantities for the condition type will display

3 For each results field click on the arrow to access the pull-down menu and select the appropriate quantity (for example SF LF EA etchellip)

4 Have your Excel spreadsheet opened and saved in a file

5 Specify the Excel spreadsheet cell locations where you want the results to go

6 For a cell in the first sheet of your spreadsheet type in the cell address (eg a1) Case is not important

7 For a cell on a successive sheet of your spreadsheet type in sheet the number followed by a comma and the cell address without any spaces (eg sheet2a1) Case is not important

8 Click

9 Select File gt Export gt Condition Qty to Excel

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

52

10 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

11 Click to export On-Screen Takeoff results to specified cell locations in the Excel file When you return to the Excel application you will see the values have been added to the specified cell locations in your spreadsheet

12 Save your Excel file

Exporting Worksheet to Excel

1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 From On-Screen Takeoff Select File gt Export gt Worksheet to Excel

4 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

5 Click When you return to the Excel application you will see the values from the Worksheet Tab have been added to your spreadsheet

6 Save your Excel file

Exporting Takeoff to CVS 1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 Click the Takeoff Tab in the project you want to export the information

4 Select File gt Export gt Takeoff to CSV

5 Browse to the location of the CSV spreadsheet file click file to select it

6 Click the Save

NOTE CSV files can be opened in Excel Lotus Access etc One may consider this option more of a ldquodumprdquo into a file

The Excel application must be active (it may be minimized on the application bar) with the target spreadsheet open in the application Otherwise an error will occur with the export operation that will affect both the On-Screen Takeofftrade file and the Excel spreadsheet

Section 8

53

Advanced Features

This section will

Some special features of working with condition objects in the takeoff area

Details of advanced options for conditions

Advanced features of the Project Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

54

Features to Use with Objects Roping Feature You can move copy or delete using this feature Using the Select tool (the pointer) you may select several objects at once by clicking and dragging an outline around the objects then releasing the mouse button Roping may select either objects completely within the outlined area (inclusive) or objects both within and touched by the outlined area (touching) Specify your roping preference under Tools gt Options

1 Click and hold the mouse button at a point on the screen near the objects to be selected and drag to surround the objects with an outline

2 Release the mouse button The objects will be selected

3 You may now

Move the group around on the page by clicking within the group dragging the mouse and releasing the button to place the objects

Delete the group of objects by clicking the Delete key or

Copy and paste by pressing Ctrl C to copy the group then Ctrl V to paste it The pasted copy of the grouped objects will appear slightly offset from the original objects

Section 8 Advanced Features

55

Applying a DropRun Count

Use the droprun feature when calculating quantities to take into account the drop or run of a linear condition such as electrical lines or plumbing pipes Drop or run lengths may be added separately to any linear condition on screen while a default droprun length may be indicated for a condition as a whole

1 Select the desired linear condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff Dock bar

2 Click the Change button in the toolbar to open the Change Condition dialog

3 Click the Advanced tab to access the advanced options and click inside the DropRun check box

4 Enter a default length to be applied to all of this condition Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches) You can leave the length blank and manually enter drop run on each segment drawn

5 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog

Edit DropRun Count

1 With the related linear condition in the Takeoff Dock bar highlighted or with the pointer tool selected

2 click on the desired linear object in the image takeoff area The Count button will become active

3 Click on the Count button (alternatively select Tools gt Count) The default droprun amount will show in the pop-up Count dialog (Default length will be zero if droprun has not been selected in this conditionrsquos properties)

4 Type in the desired length Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches)

5 Click the OK button The additional amount will be reflected in the corresponding quantity The new DropRun count will apply only to the object edited

Adding Text in Image View

On-Screen Takeoff allows you to place text comments around your quantity takeoffs that may be printed along with plan images and objects Text is automatically placed within the Annotation Layer (that includes text and hot links)

1 To place text on the image select the Text Tool and click at the point you want to place your text opening a text box

2 Type in your information clicking Enter for line breaks

3 When you are finished click the OK button to exit the text box

4 To reposition text simply click on the text (with the Text Tool active) to select it

5 Move the cursor over the text the cursor will now display as a four-way arrow

6 Click and drag the mouse to position the text as desired

Section 8 Advanced Features

56

1 To edit existing text use the Text Tool to double-click on the text to open the editing box

2 Enter additional text or use the Backspace key to delete text as necessary

Formatting Text Once created you may format the font size type style and color of your text

1 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Font or click on the Font button in the Takeoff Toolbar

2 Select the desired features (color options are disabled) and click the OK button

3 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Color or click on the Color button in the Takeoff Toolbar The Color dialog will open

4 Click on a color in the Basic Color palette or create a color and add to the Custom Colors palette (Be sure to click on the color in the Custom Colors palette to select it)

5 Click the OK button

Object Properties

Linear Objects

Linear objects may be set to connect at corners

A linear object may be set to trim automatically when crossing another linear object (Check the trim option under the advanced tab of the Condition dialog)

When you move a connected linear object objects automatically move and resize connected lines accordingly (quantities are then recalculated)

This feature requires that the connected linear object be moved using the center handles (does not apply when resizing the line from the ends)

Objects constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

Objects are measured from centerline to centerline

Section 8 Advanced Features

57

Area Objects When drawing an area use your escape key to undo the last line drawn You may reverse your

drawing of an area using the escape key

The area will not fill with color and pattern until the user double-clicks after the last line is set

Lines drawn to delineate an area object constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

After selecting an area to move or adjust position the mouse in the center to move the entire area position the mouse at the sides or corners to adjust the perimeter

Count Objects

All count objects are quantified by the physical number of objects per page and reported as EA for the UOM The quantity for the current Image View is (displayed in the Condition List) and the total quantity in your project is displayed in the Takeoff View and Worksheet View)

Square circle rectangle and triangle shaped count objects do not displace or subtract from other object quantities when placed on top of them However on the Advanced Tab for the count condition a connect property can be set (this is a check box) so that when a count object of this shape is put on top of a Linear type takeoff object it will move with the linear if said linear is moved

An opened-shaped count object must be placed within a linear object Opening shaped count objects may also be measured by linear foot or linear yard (EA SF and SY are also options) Opening shaped count items default to a width of 3rsquo 0rdquo at the time of creation This size can be changed The small medium and large size are not options on this type of condition anymore Check Backout on the Advanced tab for each Count object back out the footage (or yardage) of opening-shaped count objects in which they are placed

NOTE In order to see this Backout functionality (in quantity) for SY or SF deductions at least one of the

results for the Linear(s) this object will be placed on must be set to SY or SF and the count object must have a height quantity

Advanced Features of Conditions The Round Feature Under the Advanced tab of the linear and area Condition dialogues you may specify quantity rounding (in inches) For linear objects rounding applies to each linear object drawn For area objects rounding will apply to each segment of the area perimeter adjusting the perimeter and area calculations For example With a linear condition entering 12 in the Round field will round up each related linear object to the nearest 12 inches or one foot With this setting two walls of 1 4 would each round to 2 0 totaling 4 0

NOTE In the Takeoff Dock bar condition list and in the On-Screen Takeoff reports quantities will be displayed in whole numbers rounded up to the nearest foot However calculations are based on true quantities without rounding unless the Round Feature is engaged

Pitch Pitch may apply either to linear or area conditions It is measured in rise per linear foot Entering 12 indicates a 12 rise per 12 of linear distance (a pitch of 12 over 12) or an angle of 45deg

Section 8 Advanced Features

58

Advanced Features of Project Properties Selecting Multiple Pages

1 Select a single page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry

2 Drag the cursor down the column of numbers to select consecutive pages

3 Click on the blank button at the top of this column to select all pages in the Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

59

Changing Image Assigned to a Drawing 1 Select the page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry 2 Click the Change Image button The Change Image dialog box will appear

3 Navigate to the desired file and select by clicking on it

4 Click the Open button The electronic file assigned to the page will have been changed to reflect the new file choice

Changing Image File Path 1 Select pages as described above

2 Choose Change Folder

3 In the Change Folder dialog navigate to the appropriate folder

4 Click the OK button The file path will have been changed for the selected page entries

Delete a Page from Project Properties 1 Select the page you want to delete by clicking on its associated number (in the gray box at the

left of the entry)

2 Choose Delete Page

All Takeoff on the page will be deleted immediately and permanently

Section 8 Advanced Features

60

Advanced Features of Tool Options

Calculation Method On-Screen Takeoff has built-in calculation options to allow for faster work and faster saves until your takeoff is complete Calculation options are found by selecting Tools gt Options then clicking on the Calculation tab

Calculation method can be set to Automatic Automatic except Grids and Manual Manual will allow the program to operate more quickly while Automatic or Automatic except Grids allows the user to see quantity changes as takeoffs are made

In any mode you may press F9 to recalculate quantities for the On-Screen Takeoff current totals

Configuration Tab

When the ldquoPage Label (A01)rdquo radial button is chosen On-Screen Takeoff puts the numbered label on all the pages of in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar If the Page Descriptionrdquo radial button is chosen then a description of what takeoff is on that specific page will be shown in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar

This section of the configuration tab gives you options on how you want to export your information When the ldquoFolderSubfolder Namesrdquo radial button is chosen than on your file that you are exporting to will have all the conditions folders and subfolders In the Delimiter box you can choose the symbol that is needed to separate the information you are exporting Some files need semicolons () or colons () to make sure the information comes exported in is separated it the appropriate places

Section 8 Advanced Features

61

In previous versions of On-Screen Takeoff there are views that users need to have in order for them to display their information By either choosing ldquoOST 1xrdquo or ldquoOST 2xrdquo it will let the program know you want your columns of information exported in that specific format

When you have the Confirm Deletions radial button of ldquoYesrdquo chosen than every time you delete anything you will get a dialog box confirming your intentions of deletion

While working with your takeoff you have a choice to either view the legend of your conditions or hide it Choose whichever radial button that suits your needs

For those who prefer to use the Enter key to navigate in dialog boxes this option is just for that

Font Tab The Font tab is designed for you to make your own look and feel for the application At the bottom of this tab it will show you sample of the fonts and colors you have chosen

Renaming the Current Page You may change the name of the current page in the takeoff area of On-Screen Takeoff by selecting Edit gt Rename Page

This opens the Name Page dialog and you may simply type in a new name and click the Enter button The new name for the file will be reflected on the title bar for the page and in Project Properties

You also may access the Rename Page function by right-clicking in the takeoff area while in Image View and selecting the option from the pop-up menu that appears

Section 9

62

Saving and Exiting

This section will

Explain how to save projects

Show you how to safely exit the program

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

63

Saving Your Project

1 Select File gt Save 2 If your project has not previously been saved a Save dialog box will open to allow you to name

the file and choose the directory and folder in which to save your file 3 Once saved File gt Save will simply save the current version of the file

OR

4 Select File gt Save As then type in a new name for the file and save to the desired file path

The Auto-save Feature With the Auto-save feature On-Screen Takeoff automatically backs up your open project You may choose to have more than one level of backup files The first backup copy will have the extension b00 and successive files will be b01 b02 and so on If you have designated four levels of backup files after the fourth backup copy has been created (b03) the next file will be saved over the file with extension b00 Further backup saves will then rotate through the four backup files in the same way

1 Select Tools gt Options 2 In the Auto-save area (under the General tab) select the frequency of backup file creation (in

minutes) and the number of levels for the feature 3 You also may disengage the feature by clicking in the check box to clear it

The Auto-save feature automatically saves backup copies to the directory of the current project If you are working from a write-protected area such as a CD-ROM On-Screen Takeoff will place backup files in the On-Screen Takeoff folder

Exiting When you are finished using On-Screen Takeoff it is very easy to exit Exiting is very important because of security reasons If someone were to use your computer they could enter the application and view and manipulate information

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

64

On-Screen Takeoff closes the open project when you open another or create a new project or when you exit the program

1 Select File gt Exit

OR

2 You also may click at the upper right-hand corner of the application to exit

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

65

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer When you get your digitizer from GTCO you will need to connect it to your computer Follow the instructions outlined below to do this

Note For rollup digitizers the metal bar must be oriented to the top or right hand side

Connecting the Digitizer 1 Lay the digitizer out flat 2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer 3 Plug in the power adapter 4 Plug the interface (IO) cable into the digitizer 5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into an open serial port on computer

Note GTCO Technical support phone number is 410-381-6688 The electronic manual (on diskette) from GTCO contains more detailed installation and operation instructions for the GTCO digitizer model you have

Installing other Digitizer Drivers If you are using a GTCO Digitizer you will need to install the GTCO TabletWorks Drivers

If you are using a Digitizer not supported by GTCO Tablet Works 10 please contact the manufacturer of your digitizer for assistance with installation

Installing GTCO TabletWorks Drivers 1 Insert the On Center CD into the CD-ROM drive The CD Startup screen will open 2 Click on Install Software 3 Select Additional Software and Drivers 4 Select Digitizer Driver 5 Follow the instructions for installing TabletWorks 10

Adhering the Template The template is a small plastic sticker used to enable mouse function when using the digitizer with On-Screen Takeoff Place your template on your digitizer We suggest placing it in the bottom right corner of the digitizer about one inch inside the takeoff area

Note You may either peel off the back of the template and use the adhesive surface or you can tape the template down

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

66

Testing the Digitizer Drivers Before running OST you may test the digitizer by moving the stylus around on the digitizer pad it should move the mouse cursor (if mouse emulation is enabled)

If the digitizer does not move the mouse cursor on the screen

The superset codes may need to be reset Reset the superset codes by touching on the border of the digitizer with the stylus The digitizer should beep several times

The digitizer may not be communicating with the computer Be sure the COM port selected is correct Be sure the COM port selected is correct If you are not able to get the digitizer to move the mouse cursor you need to call GTCO technical support for help

Note The Mouse Emulation is not required for On-Screen Takeoff to work properly It is used only for the Template functionality if the digitizer is moving the cursor the wrong direction (up instead of sideways or vice-versa)

Click the L-shaped arrow symbol on the digitizer with the stylus

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

67

Appendix II Toolbar Items Main Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

68

Tool Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

69

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

70

Navigate Toolbar (Continued)

Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

71

Takeoff Toolbar (Continued)

Image Toolbar

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

72

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

This section will detail how to load plans from a F W Dodge CD-ROM into an On-Screen Takeoff project file ready for takeoffs

Dodge files may be added to the Project Properties dialog However loading the files in that way will load the files by number rather than name description If you want to load one page only from your Dodge CD You will have to rename the page to display the name rather than number of the file

To load plan files from a Dodge CD so that the files load sequentially by file number but are displayed by name rather than by number within your project follow the instructions below

Opening a Dodge project from a CD-ROM 1 Insert the CD into the drive 2 Choose File gt Custom 3 Choose Dodge Plans Project (plansdat) as the file type 4 Select the appropriate file type by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the Files of type

field 5 In the Look in field access your drive paths by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the

field then

Navigate to your CD-ROM drive Open the data folder and Open the Projects folder

6 Select the desired project and open its folder 7 Open the plansdat file 8 All the images will come in sequenced correctly for that job along with the full descriptions

(names) of each page If there is not a plans folder in the project folder then plans do not exist for that project on the CD Opening the plansdat file will yield an empty project

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

73

Appendix IV Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer The On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer is a limited version of On Center Softwarersquos commercial takeoff software If your status bar located at the very bottom of the main window says View Mode in the lower left-hand corner then you are using the Plan Viewer You can use the plan viewer to

View CD-based amp converted CAD drawings

View a previously created OST file and associated drawings

Download electronic plans online

Navigate through drawings

Quickly Takeoff linearsareas and counts

Zoom in to view the plan better

Print drawings directly from the viewer

Viewing an On-Screen Takeoff Project File

1 To open an OST file that was previously created with of On-Screen Takeoff 2 Select File gt Open 3 An Open dialog will appear if you do not see the OST file you are looking for select the

Look In drop down arrow 4 A drop down menu will appear listing the various folders drives and mapped drives located

on your computer select the correct drive or folder location and continue to browse to the location of your OST file

5 When you see your OST file double-click it to open it 6 Any takeoff and drawings should appear on the Image tab view

If you do not see the drawings but do see the colored takeoff layer the drawings may

not be located in the same place they were originally saved at Go to File gt Project Properties and check the Image File path for each listed page If the image file path is pointing to a CD drive make sure the CD is inside the CR-ROM

Downloading Electronic Plans If your Online Plan Service provides a special file format (OSX) required to use this feature of our plan viewer you can immediately downloaded all electronic plans of a project directly from our viewer

Most Plan Room web sites will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff when a request to download plans is made Your particular Plan Room may differ in operation so please contact the provider directly with questions on using the site

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

74

When you request to download or open a project file from a Plan Room you will usually have the open to open or save an OSX file Choosing open will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff Alternately you may choose to save the file to a local hard drive After you have saved the file either double-click it to launch On-Screen Takeoff or open the OSX file using On-Screen Takeoff by clicking File then Open and locating the file on your hard drive You will need to change the file type to OSX

After the OSX file is opened you will see an additional tab appear in the Conditions List window called Pages

The Pages tab shows the hierarchy of your project Gray file icons represent pages that have not been downloaded and blue icons represents pages that have been downloaded

To download a page simply double-click the page icon

If you wish to select a group of pages to download you can use the Ctrl or Shift key to multiple select them then click the Download button

If you wish to download all pages at once click the Download All button

Downloaded pages will now appear in the Project Properties dialog in the same order in which they appear in the Pages tab

Creating Quick Takeoffs With On-Screen Takeoff you can create quick takeoffs to measure quantities even if you dont have the full version of our program However using the Quick Takeoff functionality shows you just a fraction of what the full version can do

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar is located at the top of the image view It has three buttons designated for three types of takeoffs Linear Area and Count The Quantity drop down list will show secondary quantities for Linears and Areas The Units drop down allows you to select how you want your quantities displayed Feet Inches Yards Millimeters and Meters

NOTE Every time change the type of takeoff you are performing (switching from Area to Linear for example) the previous quantities and takeoff objects will disappear They will also disappear when you changes pages

NOTE You can use the Dimension Tool to basically measure the distance between two points or linears The distance will display on the status bar at the bottom of the application

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

75

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions General

Where is On-Screen Takeoff installed on my computer

Typically it is installed in CProgram FilesOn-Screen Takeoff

In Explorer how do I recognize On-Screen Takeoff file types

On-Screen Takeoff data is stored in a single file per job lsquojob name OSTrsquo On-Screen Takeoff templates are stored as lsquotemplate nameTPOrsquo

Can only one project at a time be open

Yes For that reason opening another project automatically closes the project on screen You will be asked to save any changes

Is only one scale allowed per page What about on drawings that have multiple detail sections on a page and each of those drawings have different scales

Yes For pages with drawings of different scales copy the drawing to another project page and set the appropriate scale

I cannot perform backout on an area that is along a linear

As a workaround use the On-Screen Takeoff layers feature to help you with this issue Electronic Images

How do I start a project from drawings that have been scanned and written to a CD-ROM

Open a new project Select File gt Project Properties and select Auto Add Navigate to your CD and the appropriate folder and select any image file in that location Click Open All files in the location will load into your project Recommended that images are copied from CD to hard drive for performance

If I get a disk of drawings in AutoCAD format (R13 or R14) can I read them in On-Screen Takeoff

Yes On-Screen Takeoff now reads DWG DXF and many other format that are saved with AutoCAD

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

76

When I click on the all pages button what is supposed to happen Currently nothing seems to change when I click on that button

The All Pages button is used to apply the Darken and Enhance Plans feature to all pages in the project (as opposed to only the current page on screen)

Is there a way to deduct a large skylight from an area condition

Yes with the related area condition selected in the Takeoff Dock bar unselect the Backout button on the Takeoff Toolbar then draw the Backout area The area quantity will be deducted from the related condition object and the linear measurement of the Backout perimeter will be added

Digitizer Issues

How do I connect a Digitizer to the computer

See Appendix I Connecting a Digitizer

The Place Template menu choice is disabled

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or the digitizer or the digitzer drivers are not installed

It wonrsquot let me select the Set Takeoff Area menu choice

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or no job is open a digitizer is not installed or the drivers are not installed

The digitizer stylus is not moving the cursor or crosshairs

Click S-0-1 superset on the digitizer

How do I convert my old GTCO Digitizer to work with On- Screen Takeofftrade

Call GTCO and they may be able to reconfigure your digitizer to be compatible with On-Screen Takeoff

Printing Issues Which Printers work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible printers include On-Screen Takeoff Hewlett Packard Epson and Canon printers If you are having printer difficulties please contact support and specify the type of printer along with other pertinent information Contact support at wwwoncentercomsupport or email supportoncentercom

Which Plotters work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible Plotters include Hewlett Packard DesignJet plotters and the EnCAD Cadjet II If you are having plotter difficulties please contact support and specify the type of plotter concerned

ViewingDisplay I can no longer see my condition list How do I get it back

The toolbars and Dock bars can be turned on and off through the View gt Toolbars menu options

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

77

This is also accessible by right-clicking in the toolbar area and selecting (or deselecting) a toolbar listed

I cannot view my folders in the condition list

Right-click in the Takeoff Dock barcondition list area and select Show Tree to display your folders

My Status Bar reads Viewer Mode and I am unable to draw conditions

On-Screen Takeoff needs to be Authorized Or you need to purchase an upgrade Click the Perform Advanced Takeoff button on the main toolbar

I hid a Dock bar and when I selected to view it again it appeared alongside the other Dock

bar instead of stacked on top of it How do I fix it

Pick up the Dock bar by clicking on the bar at the top and continuing to hold down the mouse button drag the Dock bar over the other one It will resize and appear stacked with the other

When I open image files from a CD the images are all upside down How do I get them right

side up

To flip pages from top to bottom follow the steps below 1 Click the All Pages button on the Image Toolbar (All Pages is engaged when the button

is not clicked) 2 Click the Flip Horizontal button on the Image Toolbar 3 Click the All Pages button again to disengage

Templates How do I create a Template

Follow the steps below 1 Create a typical project 2 Choose File gt Save As 3 Choose On-Screen Takeoff Template Files as the file type to save 4 Name the file This will save all of the condition setups as well as the layers for the

project

How do I create a new project from a template

Follow the steps below 1 Choose File gt New 2 Select a template from those listed in the New dialog This will open a new project with

conditions and layers saved from a previous project but no pages or takeoff

78

INDEX

Area Conditions 32

Area Objects 57

Auto Scrolling 20

Auto-save 63

Backout Mode 41

Calculation Method 60

Conditions 29

Configuration 60

Contents Tab 6

Continuous Mode 38

Count Conditions 33

Count Objects 57

Digitizer 10 65 76

Docking Toolbars 13

Dodge CD 72

Drawing 27 37

DropRun Count 55

Environment 18

Exiting 63

Exporting 49

Features 16

Font 61

Frequently Asked Questions 75

Grid 40

Help File 5

Hiding Toolbars 13

Hot Links 21

Image 19 59

Image files 9

Image Toolbar 12 71

Images 75

Index Tab 6

Layers 43

Linear Conditions 31

Linear Objects 56

Main Toolbar 12 67

Menus 14

Moving Toolbars 13

Navigate Toolbar 12 69

Navigating 20

On-Screen Takeofftrade 2

Page 59 61

Pages 20 25 28

Plan Viewer 73

Plans 26

Printing 47 76

Project Properties 25

Projects 22

Quick Start Video 18

Resizing Toolbars 13

Roping 54

Saving 63

Scale 28

Search Tab 7

Selecting Objects 42

Setup 8

Start On-Screen Takeofftrade 17

System Requirements 9

Takeoff 19 27

Takeoff Toolbar 70 71

Takeoff Toolbar 12

Template Files 23

TIF (Group4) 9

Tool Toolbar 12 68

Toolbar 67

Toolbars 12

View Toolbar 12 69

Viewing Toolbars 12

Worksheet 20

Zone Conditions 33

Zoom Toolbar 12 69

  • On-Screen Takeoff Lite
  • Table of Contents
  • Section 1 - Introduction
  • Section 2 - Setup
  • Section 3 - Toolbars and Menus
  • Section 4 - Features
  • Section 5 - Projects
  • Section 6 - Conditions and Takeoff
  • Section 7 - Printing and Exporting
  • Section 8 - Advanced Features
  • Section 9 - Saving and Exiting
  • Appendix I - Installing Your Digitizer
  • Appendix II - Toolbar Items
  • Appendix III - Loading Plans from a Dodge CD
  • Appendix IV - Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer
  • Appendix V - Frequently Asked Questions
  • Index

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

35

Condition Results The Results tab of the New Condition is based on condition type Initial settings default to linear feet (LF) for linear conditions square feet (SF) for area conditions and count of items (EA) for count conditions and zones The first of the results fields will display for the condition items in the Takeoff dock bar area All results will display in worksheets and Takeoff List reports as well as in an Excel spreadsheet after being exported

Copying Conditions You may use the condition attributes from a condition yoursquove already created for any future conditions of the same type

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Click the Copy button from the toolbar

OR

3 Right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select copy

4 A new condition will appear in the list with the same condition attributes as the previous condition but with the quantities zeroed

Editing Conditions Once you have copied a condition you might want to change several attributes You can also edit an existing condition to fit any updated needs

1 Highlight the desired condition on the Takeoff dock bar

2 Click the Change button

OR

3 Double-click on the condition you wish to edit to bring up the Change Condition dialog

NOTE The Change Condition dialog differs from the New Condition dialog only in that if takeoffs

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

36

have been performed in your project with this condition you will not be able to change the type of condition or certain properties under the advanced tab of the dialog box

Deleting Conditions 1 Click on the condition in the Takeoff Dock bar area

2 Click the Delete button on the toolbar

OR

3 Right-click and select Delete from the pop-up menu

All takeoff associated with the deleted condition will be deleted immediately and permanently

Organizing Project Conditions Within your project you can create folders andor sub-folders for different types of conditions You may even want to create a folder containing conditions with reset values

To get started organizing your conditions make sure you are viewing the condition tree (right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select Show Tree)

Creating Folders and Sub-Folders 1 Right-click in the Takeoff Dock bar area

2 Select New gt Folder from the pop-up menu

Copying Folders

1 Click on the folder and click Copy on the toolbar

2 All copied conditions within the new folder will have values reset to zero

Renaming Folders

1 Click on the folder

2 Right-click and select Rename from the pop-up menu

3 Enter a name for your folder and click the Enter button

Changing Condition Order

You may move conditions up or down in the condition list of the Takeoff dock bar to suit your project needs

1 Select the condition you would like to move by clicking to highlight it

NOTE When you are ready to move the highlighted conditions be sure that you start

moving using the last condition chosen That condition will have a highlighted boarder

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

37

2 Drag and drop any the condition from one place to another in the list You may also move a condition to another folder on the list in this way

Drawing with Conditions Snap Angles Set up snap angles to prevent lines from appearing jagged Snap angles are commonly set at 15deg and shift snap angles at 0deg

1 Go to Tools gt Options Options dialog appears

2 Under the General tab make the desired settings

3 Click to save the settings As they are drawn lines will snap to the set degree

Drawing a Linear Object 1 Select a condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff dock bar

2 Move the cursor into the Image takeoff area of the screen you will see the cursor display as crosshairs

3 Click and hold left mouse button then drag mouse to draw a line

4 Release mouse button to set line

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

38

5 Repeat steps for further lines

Continuous Mode This feature allows you to draw an object that has connected lines

1 Click the icon from the Takeoff toolbar

OR

2 Go to Tools gt Continuous Mode

3 Follow steps 1-3 from Draw a Linear Object

4 Click at each point of intersection The object will be connected

5 Double-click after making the final point to set the lines

Drawing a Curve To draw a curved line the Curve option must be checked under the Advanced tab of the Condition dialog

1 Click where you want to begin the curve and drag in a straight line to the position for the other endpoint of the curve

2 Click on the line to select it Handles in the shapes of small squares will appear at either end of

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

39

the line and in the center of the line

3 Move the cursor over the center handles until the cursor becomes a two-way arrow

4 Click and drag in the direction of the curve bending the line as you move the cursor Release to set the curve (The line you began with will disappear)

Draw a circle by drawing two curved lines connected

Drawing an Area Object Area conditions are drawn similarly to continuous mode lines You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete your area takeoff

NOTE When drawing an area do not intersect the perimeter or line of the object you are drawing

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

3 The area will be filled with the pattern set for that condition

NOTE The simulated circle will be good enough for you to be able to make a bid

To create a circular area click from point to point with very short distances in between points simulating a circlersquos perimeter Double-click after setting the last point to set the area

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

40

Grid Options Grids give you an added advantage when installing materials such as tiles Use this feature to get a count for how many tiles are needed for an area

1 Double-click on an area condition in the Takeoff dock bar to open its Condition dialog

2 Click on the Advanced tab to show its options

3 Check the box next to Grid by clicking in it

4 Indicate the dimensions of the cell matrix in inches (For example 200 x 400)

5 Under Results tab choose each (EA) for one of the results fields This will tabulate a number of grid cells (including partial grid cells) in area

6 Click to save your settings

7 Use the Move Grid and Rotate Grid features in the Tools menu to manipulate the grid as desired

Grid Calculation

1 Go to Tools gt Options menu

1 Specify if On-Screen Takeoff automatically should Calculate Grid Position

2 If AreaGrid Size is selected On-Screen Takeoff will calculate the number of items needed to fill the grid based on grid demintions

3 Click to accept and close the dialog

To move a line at any angle (regardless of default setting) press the Shift key while moving the mouse

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

41

Backout Mode This feature allows you to take out part of an area and deduct that amount of square footage

1 Select Tools gt Backout Mode

2 Outline the are you want backed out as you would when drawing a regular area object (see Drawing an Area Object)

3 The outlined area will clear and quantities will be recalculated

NOTE The perimeter of the backout area will be added to the LF quantity for that condition

Drawing a Count Object Square triangle rectangle and circle shaped count objects can easily be placed on images

1 Select the condition

2 Click in the location where you want the object to appear

3 To place an opening-shaped count item like a door or window you must click over an existing linear object such as a wall

4 On the Results tab you can change the height properties to give you the result you need

5 If Backout is checked on the advanced tab for each count opening the opening-shaped count item will back out a corresponding section of the linear object

Opening shaped count items are sized at 3rsquo0rdquo by default

Drawing a Zone Zones are drawn in the same way as area objects and may be any polygonal shape You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete the zone perimeter

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

42

Selecting Objects

1 Use the Select Tool to select objects

You can also select all objects that correspond to a condition

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Right-click and choose Select All

3 All objects with this condition will be highlighted with squares as an outline

Moving and Resizing Objects Linear

1 To move or resize a linear object click anywhere on the line to select it

2 To move the line position your pointer over the center handles When the mouse is positioned over the handles you will see a two-way arrow You will only be able to move the line in the direction of the arrows

3 Drag the line to a new position

4 Clicking and dragging the handles on the ends of the line will allow you to lengthen or shorten your line

Area and Zone

1 To move an area object or zone in its entirety click and drag it to its new position

2 Grabbing a handle at a corner or intersection of the object will allow you to adjust and change its perimeter

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

43

Count 1 To move a square circle rectangle or triangle shaped count object click and drag

2 Click and drag an opening shaped count object along the length of the linear object to the desired position then release

NOTE An opening shaped count object may not be moved from its associated linear condition object however it may be moved up and down the length of the linear object

Layers On-Screen Takeoff allows you to sort and separate your takeoff objects within the same job and on the same page On-Screen Takeoff gives you this flexibility through the use of layers

By assigning different conditions to different layers (for example differentiating between floors ceilings and walls) you can choose to view all layers or turn off certain layers to display and print the remaining groups of conditions only You may also remove the background image of electronic plans add text and hot link symbols or print only your condition takeoffs

Layers are only available in Full Mode If you are in View or Lite Mode and would like to use this

feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade Default Layers

On-Screen Takeoff begins every project with three default layers Image Annotation and Default The Image layer holds the electronic plan files you may have in your project The Annotation layer possesses all text notations highlighting and hot links in the project The Default layer will appear in the Condition dialog when creating or editing a condition (listed in the takeoff dock bar) Conditions are assigned to the Default layer unless otherwise specified by the user

Creating Layers To assign a condition to a layer other than the default layer you must first create additional layers for your project

1 Select View gt Layers to open the Layers dialog

2 Click An unnamed layer will be added

3 Click within the empty box and type a name for your layer (for example Wall)

4 New layers are added as active layers The adjacent box under the Show column will be checked

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

44

Assigning a Layer to a Condition 1 Open the Condition dialog box by creating a new condition or editing an existing condition

2 Under the General tab click on the down arrow in the Layer field to display optional layers

3 Select the desired layer for the condition Only the Default layer and layers you have added will be displayed

4 Click

View and Hide Layers

1 Select View gt Layers

2 Under the Show column check the box to view or remove the check (by clicking on it) to hide the specific layer

3 Click to accept and close the Layers dialog

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

45

Assigning Text to a Layer When adding text to an image On-Screen Takeoff has the capability to assign the text to a specified layer

1 Select the Text Tool

2 Click at the point you want to place your text

3 Type in your text using the Enter key for line breaks

4 Click the drop down arrow next to the Layer field and select the desired layer

Section 7

46

Printing and Exporting

This section will

Printing options and procedures

Exporting data by copying and pasting

Exporting quantity results to Excel spreadsheets

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

47

Print Setup On-Screen Takeoff allows the user to print the image takeoff list and worksheet

1 Select File gt Print Setup The Print Setup dialog will open

2 Select a printer or leave the default selection listed (change from the default printer displayed by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the field)

3 Indicate page size and printer tray option (Source) Access page size options by clicking on the

down arrow at the right of the field

4 Choose Portrait or Landscape orientation

5 Click to accept and close the dialog

Printing Images The image area can include the electronic plans the takeoff objects added text and hot links To print a subset of these (for example just the takeoffs without the plans or the added text and hot link symbols) hide layers that you do not want to print (see Section 6 View and Hide Layers) When you are printing your images every page will show the scale of the takeoff you are printing

1 Click on the Image tab to display the area of your project

2 Select File gt Print (or Ctrl + P)

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

48

3 Select the desired view (What to print) and the Image Range

4 Click The second Print dialog will open

5 Change settings accordingly or click if you accept the default settings

Printing Takeoff Lists and Worksheets In Takeoff Lists and Worksheets you may hide columns to print only certain results or adjust column widths to fit the report within the page size selected

1 In Takeoff List or Worksheet view move your cursor to the right side of the columnrsquos title bar the cursor will display as a two-way arrow

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

49

2 Click and drag to adjust the width of the column Holding the mouse button you may

slide the title bar under the title bar to its left to hide the column completely

3 Select File gt Print or press Ctrl + P to access the Print dialog

4 Indicate desired printer and choose the number of copies

5 Click to print and close the dialog

When printing the condition list we suggest printing in landscape

To reset to the default column widths double-click on the right border of a column heading will reset the column to its right (or previously to its right before being hidden)

Print Preview 1 Select File gt Print Preview

2 Use and to vary your view 3 If viewing an image choose current full or scale view to see how it displays

4 For printed outputs that cover more than one page use and to view adjacent pages or click on the down arrow next to Page field and select the page you want displayed

Exporting Using the CopyPaste Feature You may copy all the data or sections from the worksheet and the takeoff list view in On-Screen Takeoff and paste it into another application When pasting into Excel the cell layout will be maintained

1 Highlight the areas you wish to paste Click and hold the left mouse button down as you drag the cursor over the area to be selected then releasing the mouse button

OR

2 Select the entire takeoff list quickly click on the left On-Screen Takeoff column header and hold and drag the cursor across the remaining column headings

The number of pages for the view selected will display in the lower left-hand corner The zoom percentage that applies to the view will be displayed in the lower right-hand corner next to page size of the drawing

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

50

3 In the worksheet view you may highlight rows by clicking on the numbered buttons to the left of each row clicking and dragging across column headings or clicking and dragging over individual cells in the worksheet

Click anywhere in the appropriate view to deselect the area

4 Once your selection is highlighted you may select Edit gt Copy or Ctrl C from the keyboard 5 On your monitor switch to the application into which you want to paste your selection 6 Select Edit gt Paste in the new application or simply press Ctrl + V to paste

The colored keys for conditions cannot be pasted

Using the Export Feature You may export condition quantities to specified cell location within an Excel worksheet file Cell target locations are assigned in the Results tab of the condition dialogs on the Export line relating to each quantity measurement type

On-Screen Takeoff will export takeoff quantity results for up to three different quantity types that you specify For instance you may want to know the number of square feet in a ceiling area as well as the number of linear feet in its perimeter

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

51

1 Bring up the Condition dialog by double-clicking on a condition in the takeoff dock bar or by

selecting the condition and clicking

2 Click on the Results tab to access its fields The default quantities for the condition type will display

3 For each results field click on the arrow to access the pull-down menu and select the appropriate quantity (for example SF LF EA etchellip)

4 Have your Excel spreadsheet opened and saved in a file

5 Specify the Excel spreadsheet cell locations where you want the results to go

6 For a cell in the first sheet of your spreadsheet type in the cell address (eg a1) Case is not important

7 For a cell on a successive sheet of your spreadsheet type in sheet the number followed by a comma and the cell address without any spaces (eg sheet2a1) Case is not important

8 Click

9 Select File gt Export gt Condition Qty to Excel

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

52

10 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

11 Click to export On-Screen Takeoff results to specified cell locations in the Excel file When you return to the Excel application you will see the values have been added to the specified cell locations in your spreadsheet

12 Save your Excel file

Exporting Worksheet to Excel

1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 From On-Screen Takeoff Select File gt Export gt Worksheet to Excel

4 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

5 Click When you return to the Excel application you will see the values from the Worksheet Tab have been added to your spreadsheet

6 Save your Excel file

Exporting Takeoff to CVS 1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 Click the Takeoff Tab in the project you want to export the information

4 Select File gt Export gt Takeoff to CSV

5 Browse to the location of the CSV spreadsheet file click file to select it

6 Click the Save

NOTE CSV files can be opened in Excel Lotus Access etc One may consider this option more of a ldquodumprdquo into a file

The Excel application must be active (it may be minimized on the application bar) with the target spreadsheet open in the application Otherwise an error will occur with the export operation that will affect both the On-Screen Takeofftrade file and the Excel spreadsheet

Section 8

53

Advanced Features

This section will

Some special features of working with condition objects in the takeoff area

Details of advanced options for conditions

Advanced features of the Project Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

54

Features to Use with Objects Roping Feature You can move copy or delete using this feature Using the Select tool (the pointer) you may select several objects at once by clicking and dragging an outline around the objects then releasing the mouse button Roping may select either objects completely within the outlined area (inclusive) or objects both within and touched by the outlined area (touching) Specify your roping preference under Tools gt Options

1 Click and hold the mouse button at a point on the screen near the objects to be selected and drag to surround the objects with an outline

2 Release the mouse button The objects will be selected

3 You may now

Move the group around on the page by clicking within the group dragging the mouse and releasing the button to place the objects

Delete the group of objects by clicking the Delete key or

Copy and paste by pressing Ctrl C to copy the group then Ctrl V to paste it The pasted copy of the grouped objects will appear slightly offset from the original objects

Section 8 Advanced Features

55

Applying a DropRun Count

Use the droprun feature when calculating quantities to take into account the drop or run of a linear condition such as electrical lines or plumbing pipes Drop or run lengths may be added separately to any linear condition on screen while a default droprun length may be indicated for a condition as a whole

1 Select the desired linear condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff Dock bar

2 Click the Change button in the toolbar to open the Change Condition dialog

3 Click the Advanced tab to access the advanced options and click inside the DropRun check box

4 Enter a default length to be applied to all of this condition Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches) You can leave the length blank and manually enter drop run on each segment drawn

5 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog

Edit DropRun Count

1 With the related linear condition in the Takeoff Dock bar highlighted or with the pointer tool selected

2 click on the desired linear object in the image takeoff area The Count button will become active

3 Click on the Count button (alternatively select Tools gt Count) The default droprun amount will show in the pop-up Count dialog (Default length will be zero if droprun has not been selected in this conditionrsquos properties)

4 Type in the desired length Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches)

5 Click the OK button The additional amount will be reflected in the corresponding quantity The new DropRun count will apply only to the object edited

Adding Text in Image View

On-Screen Takeoff allows you to place text comments around your quantity takeoffs that may be printed along with plan images and objects Text is automatically placed within the Annotation Layer (that includes text and hot links)

1 To place text on the image select the Text Tool and click at the point you want to place your text opening a text box

2 Type in your information clicking Enter for line breaks

3 When you are finished click the OK button to exit the text box

4 To reposition text simply click on the text (with the Text Tool active) to select it

5 Move the cursor over the text the cursor will now display as a four-way arrow

6 Click and drag the mouse to position the text as desired

Section 8 Advanced Features

56

1 To edit existing text use the Text Tool to double-click on the text to open the editing box

2 Enter additional text or use the Backspace key to delete text as necessary

Formatting Text Once created you may format the font size type style and color of your text

1 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Font or click on the Font button in the Takeoff Toolbar

2 Select the desired features (color options are disabled) and click the OK button

3 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Color or click on the Color button in the Takeoff Toolbar The Color dialog will open

4 Click on a color in the Basic Color palette or create a color and add to the Custom Colors palette (Be sure to click on the color in the Custom Colors palette to select it)

5 Click the OK button

Object Properties

Linear Objects

Linear objects may be set to connect at corners

A linear object may be set to trim automatically when crossing another linear object (Check the trim option under the advanced tab of the Condition dialog)

When you move a connected linear object objects automatically move and resize connected lines accordingly (quantities are then recalculated)

This feature requires that the connected linear object be moved using the center handles (does not apply when resizing the line from the ends)

Objects constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

Objects are measured from centerline to centerline

Section 8 Advanced Features

57

Area Objects When drawing an area use your escape key to undo the last line drawn You may reverse your

drawing of an area using the escape key

The area will not fill with color and pattern until the user double-clicks after the last line is set

Lines drawn to delineate an area object constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

After selecting an area to move or adjust position the mouse in the center to move the entire area position the mouse at the sides or corners to adjust the perimeter

Count Objects

All count objects are quantified by the physical number of objects per page and reported as EA for the UOM The quantity for the current Image View is (displayed in the Condition List) and the total quantity in your project is displayed in the Takeoff View and Worksheet View)

Square circle rectangle and triangle shaped count objects do not displace or subtract from other object quantities when placed on top of them However on the Advanced Tab for the count condition a connect property can be set (this is a check box) so that when a count object of this shape is put on top of a Linear type takeoff object it will move with the linear if said linear is moved

An opened-shaped count object must be placed within a linear object Opening shaped count objects may also be measured by linear foot or linear yard (EA SF and SY are also options) Opening shaped count items default to a width of 3rsquo 0rdquo at the time of creation This size can be changed The small medium and large size are not options on this type of condition anymore Check Backout on the Advanced tab for each Count object back out the footage (or yardage) of opening-shaped count objects in which they are placed

NOTE In order to see this Backout functionality (in quantity) for SY or SF deductions at least one of the

results for the Linear(s) this object will be placed on must be set to SY or SF and the count object must have a height quantity

Advanced Features of Conditions The Round Feature Under the Advanced tab of the linear and area Condition dialogues you may specify quantity rounding (in inches) For linear objects rounding applies to each linear object drawn For area objects rounding will apply to each segment of the area perimeter adjusting the perimeter and area calculations For example With a linear condition entering 12 in the Round field will round up each related linear object to the nearest 12 inches or one foot With this setting two walls of 1 4 would each round to 2 0 totaling 4 0

NOTE In the Takeoff Dock bar condition list and in the On-Screen Takeoff reports quantities will be displayed in whole numbers rounded up to the nearest foot However calculations are based on true quantities without rounding unless the Round Feature is engaged

Pitch Pitch may apply either to linear or area conditions It is measured in rise per linear foot Entering 12 indicates a 12 rise per 12 of linear distance (a pitch of 12 over 12) or an angle of 45deg

Section 8 Advanced Features

58

Advanced Features of Project Properties Selecting Multiple Pages

1 Select a single page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry

2 Drag the cursor down the column of numbers to select consecutive pages

3 Click on the blank button at the top of this column to select all pages in the Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

59

Changing Image Assigned to a Drawing 1 Select the page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry 2 Click the Change Image button The Change Image dialog box will appear

3 Navigate to the desired file and select by clicking on it

4 Click the Open button The electronic file assigned to the page will have been changed to reflect the new file choice

Changing Image File Path 1 Select pages as described above

2 Choose Change Folder

3 In the Change Folder dialog navigate to the appropriate folder

4 Click the OK button The file path will have been changed for the selected page entries

Delete a Page from Project Properties 1 Select the page you want to delete by clicking on its associated number (in the gray box at the

left of the entry)

2 Choose Delete Page

All Takeoff on the page will be deleted immediately and permanently

Section 8 Advanced Features

60

Advanced Features of Tool Options

Calculation Method On-Screen Takeoff has built-in calculation options to allow for faster work and faster saves until your takeoff is complete Calculation options are found by selecting Tools gt Options then clicking on the Calculation tab

Calculation method can be set to Automatic Automatic except Grids and Manual Manual will allow the program to operate more quickly while Automatic or Automatic except Grids allows the user to see quantity changes as takeoffs are made

In any mode you may press F9 to recalculate quantities for the On-Screen Takeoff current totals

Configuration Tab

When the ldquoPage Label (A01)rdquo radial button is chosen On-Screen Takeoff puts the numbered label on all the pages of in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar If the Page Descriptionrdquo radial button is chosen then a description of what takeoff is on that specific page will be shown in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar

This section of the configuration tab gives you options on how you want to export your information When the ldquoFolderSubfolder Namesrdquo radial button is chosen than on your file that you are exporting to will have all the conditions folders and subfolders In the Delimiter box you can choose the symbol that is needed to separate the information you are exporting Some files need semicolons () or colons () to make sure the information comes exported in is separated it the appropriate places

Section 8 Advanced Features

61

In previous versions of On-Screen Takeoff there are views that users need to have in order for them to display their information By either choosing ldquoOST 1xrdquo or ldquoOST 2xrdquo it will let the program know you want your columns of information exported in that specific format

When you have the Confirm Deletions radial button of ldquoYesrdquo chosen than every time you delete anything you will get a dialog box confirming your intentions of deletion

While working with your takeoff you have a choice to either view the legend of your conditions or hide it Choose whichever radial button that suits your needs

For those who prefer to use the Enter key to navigate in dialog boxes this option is just for that

Font Tab The Font tab is designed for you to make your own look and feel for the application At the bottom of this tab it will show you sample of the fonts and colors you have chosen

Renaming the Current Page You may change the name of the current page in the takeoff area of On-Screen Takeoff by selecting Edit gt Rename Page

This opens the Name Page dialog and you may simply type in a new name and click the Enter button The new name for the file will be reflected on the title bar for the page and in Project Properties

You also may access the Rename Page function by right-clicking in the takeoff area while in Image View and selecting the option from the pop-up menu that appears

Section 9

62

Saving and Exiting

This section will

Explain how to save projects

Show you how to safely exit the program

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

63

Saving Your Project

1 Select File gt Save 2 If your project has not previously been saved a Save dialog box will open to allow you to name

the file and choose the directory and folder in which to save your file 3 Once saved File gt Save will simply save the current version of the file

OR

4 Select File gt Save As then type in a new name for the file and save to the desired file path

The Auto-save Feature With the Auto-save feature On-Screen Takeoff automatically backs up your open project You may choose to have more than one level of backup files The first backup copy will have the extension b00 and successive files will be b01 b02 and so on If you have designated four levels of backup files after the fourth backup copy has been created (b03) the next file will be saved over the file with extension b00 Further backup saves will then rotate through the four backup files in the same way

1 Select Tools gt Options 2 In the Auto-save area (under the General tab) select the frequency of backup file creation (in

minutes) and the number of levels for the feature 3 You also may disengage the feature by clicking in the check box to clear it

The Auto-save feature automatically saves backup copies to the directory of the current project If you are working from a write-protected area such as a CD-ROM On-Screen Takeoff will place backup files in the On-Screen Takeoff folder

Exiting When you are finished using On-Screen Takeoff it is very easy to exit Exiting is very important because of security reasons If someone were to use your computer they could enter the application and view and manipulate information

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

64

On-Screen Takeoff closes the open project when you open another or create a new project or when you exit the program

1 Select File gt Exit

OR

2 You also may click at the upper right-hand corner of the application to exit

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

65

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer When you get your digitizer from GTCO you will need to connect it to your computer Follow the instructions outlined below to do this

Note For rollup digitizers the metal bar must be oriented to the top or right hand side

Connecting the Digitizer 1 Lay the digitizer out flat 2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer 3 Plug in the power adapter 4 Plug the interface (IO) cable into the digitizer 5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into an open serial port on computer

Note GTCO Technical support phone number is 410-381-6688 The electronic manual (on diskette) from GTCO contains more detailed installation and operation instructions for the GTCO digitizer model you have

Installing other Digitizer Drivers If you are using a GTCO Digitizer you will need to install the GTCO TabletWorks Drivers

If you are using a Digitizer not supported by GTCO Tablet Works 10 please contact the manufacturer of your digitizer for assistance with installation

Installing GTCO TabletWorks Drivers 1 Insert the On Center CD into the CD-ROM drive The CD Startup screen will open 2 Click on Install Software 3 Select Additional Software and Drivers 4 Select Digitizer Driver 5 Follow the instructions for installing TabletWorks 10

Adhering the Template The template is a small plastic sticker used to enable mouse function when using the digitizer with On-Screen Takeoff Place your template on your digitizer We suggest placing it in the bottom right corner of the digitizer about one inch inside the takeoff area

Note You may either peel off the back of the template and use the adhesive surface or you can tape the template down

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

66

Testing the Digitizer Drivers Before running OST you may test the digitizer by moving the stylus around on the digitizer pad it should move the mouse cursor (if mouse emulation is enabled)

If the digitizer does not move the mouse cursor on the screen

The superset codes may need to be reset Reset the superset codes by touching on the border of the digitizer with the stylus The digitizer should beep several times

The digitizer may not be communicating with the computer Be sure the COM port selected is correct Be sure the COM port selected is correct If you are not able to get the digitizer to move the mouse cursor you need to call GTCO technical support for help

Note The Mouse Emulation is not required for On-Screen Takeoff to work properly It is used only for the Template functionality if the digitizer is moving the cursor the wrong direction (up instead of sideways or vice-versa)

Click the L-shaped arrow symbol on the digitizer with the stylus

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

67

Appendix II Toolbar Items Main Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

68

Tool Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

69

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

70

Navigate Toolbar (Continued)

Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

71

Takeoff Toolbar (Continued)

Image Toolbar

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

72

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

This section will detail how to load plans from a F W Dodge CD-ROM into an On-Screen Takeoff project file ready for takeoffs

Dodge files may be added to the Project Properties dialog However loading the files in that way will load the files by number rather than name description If you want to load one page only from your Dodge CD You will have to rename the page to display the name rather than number of the file

To load plan files from a Dodge CD so that the files load sequentially by file number but are displayed by name rather than by number within your project follow the instructions below

Opening a Dodge project from a CD-ROM 1 Insert the CD into the drive 2 Choose File gt Custom 3 Choose Dodge Plans Project (plansdat) as the file type 4 Select the appropriate file type by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the Files of type

field 5 In the Look in field access your drive paths by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the

field then

Navigate to your CD-ROM drive Open the data folder and Open the Projects folder

6 Select the desired project and open its folder 7 Open the plansdat file 8 All the images will come in sequenced correctly for that job along with the full descriptions

(names) of each page If there is not a plans folder in the project folder then plans do not exist for that project on the CD Opening the plansdat file will yield an empty project

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

73

Appendix IV Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer The On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer is a limited version of On Center Softwarersquos commercial takeoff software If your status bar located at the very bottom of the main window says View Mode in the lower left-hand corner then you are using the Plan Viewer You can use the plan viewer to

View CD-based amp converted CAD drawings

View a previously created OST file and associated drawings

Download electronic plans online

Navigate through drawings

Quickly Takeoff linearsareas and counts

Zoom in to view the plan better

Print drawings directly from the viewer

Viewing an On-Screen Takeoff Project File

1 To open an OST file that was previously created with of On-Screen Takeoff 2 Select File gt Open 3 An Open dialog will appear if you do not see the OST file you are looking for select the

Look In drop down arrow 4 A drop down menu will appear listing the various folders drives and mapped drives located

on your computer select the correct drive or folder location and continue to browse to the location of your OST file

5 When you see your OST file double-click it to open it 6 Any takeoff and drawings should appear on the Image tab view

If you do not see the drawings but do see the colored takeoff layer the drawings may

not be located in the same place they were originally saved at Go to File gt Project Properties and check the Image File path for each listed page If the image file path is pointing to a CD drive make sure the CD is inside the CR-ROM

Downloading Electronic Plans If your Online Plan Service provides a special file format (OSX) required to use this feature of our plan viewer you can immediately downloaded all electronic plans of a project directly from our viewer

Most Plan Room web sites will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff when a request to download plans is made Your particular Plan Room may differ in operation so please contact the provider directly with questions on using the site

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

74

When you request to download or open a project file from a Plan Room you will usually have the open to open or save an OSX file Choosing open will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff Alternately you may choose to save the file to a local hard drive After you have saved the file either double-click it to launch On-Screen Takeoff or open the OSX file using On-Screen Takeoff by clicking File then Open and locating the file on your hard drive You will need to change the file type to OSX

After the OSX file is opened you will see an additional tab appear in the Conditions List window called Pages

The Pages tab shows the hierarchy of your project Gray file icons represent pages that have not been downloaded and blue icons represents pages that have been downloaded

To download a page simply double-click the page icon

If you wish to select a group of pages to download you can use the Ctrl or Shift key to multiple select them then click the Download button

If you wish to download all pages at once click the Download All button

Downloaded pages will now appear in the Project Properties dialog in the same order in which they appear in the Pages tab

Creating Quick Takeoffs With On-Screen Takeoff you can create quick takeoffs to measure quantities even if you dont have the full version of our program However using the Quick Takeoff functionality shows you just a fraction of what the full version can do

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar is located at the top of the image view It has three buttons designated for three types of takeoffs Linear Area and Count The Quantity drop down list will show secondary quantities for Linears and Areas The Units drop down allows you to select how you want your quantities displayed Feet Inches Yards Millimeters and Meters

NOTE Every time change the type of takeoff you are performing (switching from Area to Linear for example) the previous quantities and takeoff objects will disappear They will also disappear when you changes pages

NOTE You can use the Dimension Tool to basically measure the distance between two points or linears The distance will display on the status bar at the bottom of the application

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

75

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions General

Where is On-Screen Takeoff installed on my computer

Typically it is installed in CProgram FilesOn-Screen Takeoff

In Explorer how do I recognize On-Screen Takeoff file types

On-Screen Takeoff data is stored in a single file per job lsquojob name OSTrsquo On-Screen Takeoff templates are stored as lsquotemplate nameTPOrsquo

Can only one project at a time be open

Yes For that reason opening another project automatically closes the project on screen You will be asked to save any changes

Is only one scale allowed per page What about on drawings that have multiple detail sections on a page and each of those drawings have different scales

Yes For pages with drawings of different scales copy the drawing to another project page and set the appropriate scale

I cannot perform backout on an area that is along a linear

As a workaround use the On-Screen Takeoff layers feature to help you with this issue Electronic Images

How do I start a project from drawings that have been scanned and written to a CD-ROM

Open a new project Select File gt Project Properties and select Auto Add Navigate to your CD and the appropriate folder and select any image file in that location Click Open All files in the location will load into your project Recommended that images are copied from CD to hard drive for performance

If I get a disk of drawings in AutoCAD format (R13 or R14) can I read them in On-Screen Takeoff

Yes On-Screen Takeoff now reads DWG DXF and many other format that are saved with AutoCAD

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

76

When I click on the all pages button what is supposed to happen Currently nothing seems to change when I click on that button

The All Pages button is used to apply the Darken and Enhance Plans feature to all pages in the project (as opposed to only the current page on screen)

Is there a way to deduct a large skylight from an area condition

Yes with the related area condition selected in the Takeoff Dock bar unselect the Backout button on the Takeoff Toolbar then draw the Backout area The area quantity will be deducted from the related condition object and the linear measurement of the Backout perimeter will be added

Digitizer Issues

How do I connect a Digitizer to the computer

See Appendix I Connecting a Digitizer

The Place Template menu choice is disabled

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or the digitizer or the digitzer drivers are not installed

It wonrsquot let me select the Set Takeoff Area menu choice

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or no job is open a digitizer is not installed or the drivers are not installed

The digitizer stylus is not moving the cursor or crosshairs

Click S-0-1 superset on the digitizer

How do I convert my old GTCO Digitizer to work with On- Screen Takeofftrade

Call GTCO and they may be able to reconfigure your digitizer to be compatible with On-Screen Takeoff

Printing Issues Which Printers work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible printers include On-Screen Takeoff Hewlett Packard Epson and Canon printers If you are having printer difficulties please contact support and specify the type of printer along with other pertinent information Contact support at wwwoncentercomsupport or email supportoncentercom

Which Plotters work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible Plotters include Hewlett Packard DesignJet plotters and the EnCAD Cadjet II If you are having plotter difficulties please contact support and specify the type of plotter concerned

ViewingDisplay I can no longer see my condition list How do I get it back

The toolbars and Dock bars can be turned on and off through the View gt Toolbars menu options

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

77

This is also accessible by right-clicking in the toolbar area and selecting (or deselecting) a toolbar listed

I cannot view my folders in the condition list

Right-click in the Takeoff Dock barcondition list area and select Show Tree to display your folders

My Status Bar reads Viewer Mode and I am unable to draw conditions

On-Screen Takeoff needs to be Authorized Or you need to purchase an upgrade Click the Perform Advanced Takeoff button on the main toolbar

I hid a Dock bar and when I selected to view it again it appeared alongside the other Dock

bar instead of stacked on top of it How do I fix it

Pick up the Dock bar by clicking on the bar at the top and continuing to hold down the mouse button drag the Dock bar over the other one It will resize and appear stacked with the other

When I open image files from a CD the images are all upside down How do I get them right

side up

To flip pages from top to bottom follow the steps below 1 Click the All Pages button on the Image Toolbar (All Pages is engaged when the button

is not clicked) 2 Click the Flip Horizontal button on the Image Toolbar 3 Click the All Pages button again to disengage

Templates How do I create a Template

Follow the steps below 1 Create a typical project 2 Choose File gt Save As 3 Choose On-Screen Takeoff Template Files as the file type to save 4 Name the file This will save all of the condition setups as well as the layers for the

project

How do I create a new project from a template

Follow the steps below 1 Choose File gt New 2 Select a template from those listed in the New dialog This will open a new project with

conditions and layers saved from a previous project but no pages or takeoff

78

INDEX

Area Conditions 32

Area Objects 57

Auto Scrolling 20

Auto-save 63

Backout Mode 41

Calculation Method 60

Conditions 29

Configuration 60

Contents Tab 6

Continuous Mode 38

Count Conditions 33

Count Objects 57

Digitizer 10 65 76

Docking Toolbars 13

Dodge CD 72

Drawing 27 37

DropRun Count 55

Environment 18

Exiting 63

Exporting 49

Features 16

Font 61

Frequently Asked Questions 75

Grid 40

Help File 5

Hiding Toolbars 13

Hot Links 21

Image 19 59

Image files 9

Image Toolbar 12 71

Images 75

Index Tab 6

Layers 43

Linear Conditions 31

Linear Objects 56

Main Toolbar 12 67

Menus 14

Moving Toolbars 13

Navigate Toolbar 12 69

Navigating 20

On-Screen Takeofftrade 2

Page 59 61

Pages 20 25 28

Plan Viewer 73

Plans 26

Printing 47 76

Project Properties 25

Projects 22

Quick Start Video 18

Resizing Toolbars 13

Roping 54

Saving 63

Scale 28

Search Tab 7

Selecting Objects 42

Setup 8

Start On-Screen Takeofftrade 17

System Requirements 9

Takeoff 19 27

Takeoff Toolbar 70 71

Takeoff Toolbar 12

Template Files 23

TIF (Group4) 9

Tool Toolbar 12 68

Toolbar 67

Toolbars 12

View Toolbar 12 69

Viewing Toolbars 12

Worksheet 20

Zone Conditions 33

Zoom Toolbar 12 69

  • On-Screen Takeoff Lite
  • Table of Contents
  • Section 1 - Introduction
  • Section 2 - Setup
  • Section 3 - Toolbars and Menus
  • Section 4 - Features
  • Section 5 - Projects
  • Section 6 - Conditions and Takeoff
  • Section 7 - Printing and Exporting
  • Section 8 - Advanced Features
  • Section 9 - Saving and Exiting
  • Appendix I - Installing Your Digitizer
  • Appendix II - Toolbar Items
  • Appendix III - Loading Plans from a Dodge CD
  • Appendix IV - Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer
  • Appendix V - Frequently Asked Questions
  • Index

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

36

have been performed in your project with this condition you will not be able to change the type of condition or certain properties under the advanced tab of the dialog box

Deleting Conditions 1 Click on the condition in the Takeoff Dock bar area

2 Click the Delete button on the toolbar

OR

3 Right-click and select Delete from the pop-up menu

All takeoff associated with the deleted condition will be deleted immediately and permanently

Organizing Project Conditions Within your project you can create folders andor sub-folders for different types of conditions You may even want to create a folder containing conditions with reset values

To get started organizing your conditions make sure you are viewing the condition tree (right-click in the Takeoff dock bar area and select Show Tree)

Creating Folders and Sub-Folders 1 Right-click in the Takeoff Dock bar area

2 Select New gt Folder from the pop-up menu

Copying Folders

1 Click on the folder and click Copy on the toolbar

2 All copied conditions within the new folder will have values reset to zero

Renaming Folders

1 Click on the folder

2 Right-click and select Rename from the pop-up menu

3 Enter a name for your folder and click the Enter button

Changing Condition Order

You may move conditions up or down in the condition list of the Takeoff dock bar to suit your project needs

1 Select the condition you would like to move by clicking to highlight it

NOTE When you are ready to move the highlighted conditions be sure that you start

moving using the last condition chosen That condition will have a highlighted boarder

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

37

2 Drag and drop any the condition from one place to another in the list You may also move a condition to another folder on the list in this way

Drawing with Conditions Snap Angles Set up snap angles to prevent lines from appearing jagged Snap angles are commonly set at 15deg and shift snap angles at 0deg

1 Go to Tools gt Options Options dialog appears

2 Under the General tab make the desired settings

3 Click to save the settings As they are drawn lines will snap to the set degree

Drawing a Linear Object 1 Select a condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff dock bar

2 Move the cursor into the Image takeoff area of the screen you will see the cursor display as crosshairs

3 Click and hold left mouse button then drag mouse to draw a line

4 Release mouse button to set line

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

38

5 Repeat steps for further lines

Continuous Mode This feature allows you to draw an object that has connected lines

1 Click the icon from the Takeoff toolbar

OR

2 Go to Tools gt Continuous Mode

3 Follow steps 1-3 from Draw a Linear Object

4 Click at each point of intersection The object will be connected

5 Double-click after making the final point to set the lines

Drawing a Curve To draw a curved line the Curve option must be checked under the Advanced tab of the Condition dialog

1 Click where you want to begin the curve and drag in a straight line to the position for the other endpoint of the curve

2 Click on the line to select it Handles in the shapes of small squares will appear at either end of

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

39

the line and in the center of the line

3 Move the cursor over the center handles until the cursor becomes a two-way arrow

4 Click and drag in the direction of the curve bending the line as you move the cursor Release to set the curve (The line you began with will disappear)

Draw a circle by drawing two curved lines connected

Drawing an Area Object Area conditions are drawn similarly to continuous mode lines You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete your area takeoff

NOTE When drawing an area do not intersect the perimeter or line of the object you are drawing

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

3 The area will be filled with the pattern set for that condition

NOTE The simulated circle will be good enough for you to be able to make a bid

To create a circular area click from point to point with very short distances in between points simulating a circlersquos perimeter Double-click after setting the last point to set the area

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

40

Grid Options Grids give you an added advantage when installing materials such as tiles Use this feature to get a count for how many tiles are needed for an area

1 Double-click on an area condition in the Takeoff dock bar to open its Condition dialog

2 Click on the Advanced tab to show its options

3 Check the box next to Grid by clicking in it

4 Indicate the dimensions of the cell matrix in inches (For example 200 x 400)

5 Under Results tab choose each (EA) for one of the results fields This will tabulate a number of grid cells (including partial grid cells) in area

6 Click to save your settings

7 Use the Move Grid and Rotate Grid features in the Tools menu to manipulate the grid as desired

Grid Calculation

1 Go to Tools gt Options menu

1 Specify if On-Screen Takeoff automatically should Calculate Grid Position

2 If AreaGrid Size is selected On-Screen Takeoff will calculate the number of items needed to fill the grid based on grid demintions

3 Click to accept and close the dialog

To move a line at any angle (regardless of default setting) press the Shift key while moving the mouse

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

41

Backout Mode This feature allows you to take out part of an area and deduct that amount of square footage

1 Select Tools gt Backout Mode

2 Outline the are you want backed out as you would when drawing a regular area object (see Drawing an Area Object)

3 The outlined area will clear and quantities will be recalculated

NOTE The perimeter of the backout area will be added to the LF quantity for that condition

Drawing a Count Object Square triangle rectangle and circle shaped count objects can easily be placed on images

1 Select the condition

2 Click in the location where you want the object to appear

3 To place an opening-shaped count item like a door or window you must click over an existing linear object such as a wall

4 On the Results tab you can change the height properties to give you the result you need

5 If Backout is checked on the advanced tab for each count opening the opening-shaped count item will back out a corresponding section of the linear object

Opening shaped count items are sized at 3rsquo0rdquo by default

Drawing a Zone Zones are drawn in the same way as area objects and may be any polygonal shape You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete the zone perimeter

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

42

Selecting Objects

1 Use the Select Tool to select objects

You can also select all objects that correspond to a condition

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Right-click and choose Select All

3 All objects with this condition will be highlighted with squares as an outline

Moving and Resizing Objects Linear

1 To move or resize a linear object click anywhere on the line to select it

2 To move the line position your pointer over the center handles When the mouse is positioned over the handles you will see a two-way arrow You will only be able to move the line in the direction of the arrows

3 Drag the line to a new position

4 Clicking and dragging the handles on the ends of the line will allow you to lengthen or shorten your line

Area and Zone

1 To move an area object or zone in its entirety click and drag it to its new position

2 Grabbing a handle at a corner or intersection of the object will allow you to adjust and change its perimeter

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

43

Count 1 To move a square circle rectangle or triangle shaped count object click and drag

2 Click and drag an opening shaped count object along the length of the linear object to the desired position then release

NOTE An opening shaped count object may not be moved from its associated linear condition object however it may be moved up and down the length of the linear object

Layers On-Screen Takeoff allows you to sort and separate your takeoff objects within the same job and on the same page On-Screen Takeoff gives you this flexibility through the use of layers

By assigning different conditions to different layers (for example differentiating between floors ceilings and walls) you can choose to view all layers or turn off certain layers to display and print the remaining groups of conditions only You may also remove the background image of electronic plans add text and hot link symbols or print only your condition takeoffs

Layers are only available in Full Mode If you are in View or Lite Mode and would like to use this

feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade Default Layers

On-Screen Takeoff begins every project with three default layers Image Annotation and Default The Image layer holds the electronic plan files you may have in your project The Annotation layer possesses all text notations highlighting and hot links in the project The Default layer will appear in the Condition dialog when creating or editing a condition (listed in the takeoff dock bar) Conditions are assigned to the Default layer unless otherwise specified by the user

Creating Layers To assign a condition to a layer other than the default layer you must first create additional layers for your project

1 Select View gt Layers to open the Layers dialog

2 Click An unnamed layer will be added

3 Click within the empty box and type a name for your layer (for example Wall)

4 New layers are added as active layers The adjacent box under the Show column will be checked

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

44

Assigning a Layer to a Condition 1 Open the Condition dialog box by creating a new condition or editing an existing condition

2 Under the General tab click on the down arrow in the Layer field to display optional layers

3 Select the desired layer for the condition Only the Default layer and layers you have added will be displayed

4 Click

View and Hide Layers

1 Select View gt Layers

2 Under the Show column check the box to view or remove the check (by clicking on it) to hide the specific layer

3 Click to accept and close the Layers dialog

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

45

Assigning Text to a Layer When adding text to an image On-Screen Takeoff has the capability to assign the text to a specified layer

1 Select the Text Tool

2 Click at the point you want to place your text

3 Type in your text using the Enter key for line breaks

4 Click the drop down arrow next to the Layer field and select the desired layer

Section 7

46

Printing and Exporting

This section will

Printing options and procedures

Exporting data by copying and pasting

Exporting quantity results to Excel spreadsheets

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

47

Print Setup On-Screen Takeoff allows the user to print the image takeoff list and worksheet

1 Select File gt Print Setup The Print Setup dialog will open

2 Select a printer or leave the default selection listed (change from the default printer displayed by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the field)

3 Indicate page size and printer tray option (Source) Access page size options by clicking on the

down arrow at the right of the field

4 Choose Portrait or Landscape orientation

5 Click to accept and close the dialog

Printing Images The image area can include the electronic plans the takeoff objects added text and hot links To print a subset of these (for example just the takeoffs without the plans or the added text and hot link symbols) hide layers that you do not want to print (see Section 6 View and Hide Layers) When you are printing your images every page will show the scale of the takeoff you are printing

1 Click on the Image tab to display the area of your project

2 Select File gt Print (or Ctrl + P)

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

48

3 Select the desired view (What to print) and the Image Range

4 Click The second Print dialog will open

5 Change settings accordingly or click if you accept the default settings

Printing Takeoff Lists and Worksheets In Takeoff Lists and Worksheets you may hide columns to print only certain results or adjust column widths to fit the report within the page size selected

1 In Takeoff List or Worksheet view move your cursor to the right side of the columnrsquos title bar the cursor will display as a two-way arrow

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

49

2 Click and drag to adjust the width of the column Holding the mouse button you may

slide the title bar under the title bar to its left to hide the column completely

3 Select File gt Print or press Ctrl + P to access the Print dialog

4 Indicate desired printer and choose the number of copies

5 Click to print and close the dialog

When printing the condition list we suggest printing in landscape

To reset to the default column widths double-click on the right border of a column heading will reset the column to its right (or previously to its right before being hidden)

Print Preview 1 Select File gt Print Preview

2 Use and to vary your view 3 If viewing an image choose current full or scale view to see how it displays

4 For printed outputs that cover more than one page use and to view adjacent pages or click on the down arrow next to Page field and select the page you want displayed

Exporting Using the CopyPaste Feature You may copy all the data or sections from the worksheet and the takeoff list view in On-Screen Takeoff and paste it into another application When pasting into Excel the cell layout will be maintained

1 Highlight the areas you wish to paste Click and hold the left mouse button down as you drag the cursor over the area to be selected then releasing the mouse button

OR

2 Select the entire takeoff list quickly click on the left On-Screen Takeoff column header and hold and drag the cursor across the remaining column headings

The number of pages for the view selected will display in the lower left-hand corner The zoom percentage that applies to the view will be displayed in the lower right-hand corner next to page size of the drawing

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

50

3 In the worksheet view you may highlight rows by clicking on the numbered buttons to the left of each row clicking and dragging across column headings or clicking and dragging over individual cells in the worksheet

Click anywhere in the appropriate view to deselect the area

4 Once your selection is highlighted you may select Edit gt Copy or Ctrl C from the keyboard 5 On your monitor switch to the application into which you want to paste your selection 6 Select Edit gt Paste in the new application or simply press Ctrl + V to paste

The colored keys for conditions cannot be pasted

Using the Export Feature You may export condition quantities to specified cell location within an Excel worksheet file Cell target locations are assigned in the Results tab of the condition dialogs on the Export line relating to each quantity measurement type

On-Screen Takeoff will export takeoff quantity results for up to three different quantity types that you specify For instance you may want to know the number of square feet in a ceiling area as well as the number of linear feet in its perimeter

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

51

1 Bring up the Condition dialog by double-clicking on a condition in the takeoff dock bar or by

selecting the condition and clicking

2 Click on the Results tab to access its fields The default quantities for the condition type will display

3 For each results field click on the arrow to access the pull-down menu and select the appropriate quantity (for example SF LF EA etchellip)

4 Have your Excel spreadsheet opened and saved in a file

5 Specify the Excel spreadsheet cell locations where you want the results to go

6 For a cell in the first sheet of your spreadsheet type in the cell address (eg a1) Case is not important

7 For a cell on a successive sheet of your spreadsheet type in sheet the number followed by a comma and the cell address without any spaces (eg sheet2a1) Case is not important

8 Click

9 Select File gt Export gt Condition Qty to Excel

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

52

10 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

11 Click to export On-Screen Takeoff results to specified cell locations in the Excel file When you return to the Excel application you will see the values have been added to the specified cell locations in your spreadsheet

12 Save your Excel file

Exporting Worksheet to Excel

1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 From On-Screen Takeoff Select File gt Export gt Worksheet to Excel

4 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

5 Click When you return to the Excel application you will see the values from the Worksheet Tab have been added to your spreadsheet

6 Save your Excel file

Exporting Takeoff to CVS 1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 Click the Takeoff Tab in the project you want to export the information

4 Select File gt Export gt Takeoff to CSV

5 Browse to the location of the CSV spreadsheet file click file to select it

6 Click the Save

NOTE CSV files can be opened in Excel Lotus Access etc One may consider this option more of a ldquodumprdquo into a file

The Excel application must be active (it may be minimized on the application bar) with the target spreadsheet open in the application Otherwise an error will occur with the export operation that will affect both the On-Screen Takeofftrade file and the Excel spreadsheet

Section 8

53

Advanced Features

This section will

Some special features of working with condition objects in the takeoff area

Details of advanced options for conditions

Advanced features of the Project Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

54

Features to Use with Objects Roping Feature You can move copy or delete using this feature Using the Select tool (the pointer) you may select several objects at once by clicking and dragging an outline around the objects then releasing the mouse button Roping may select either objects completely within the outlined area (inclusive) or objects both within and touched by the outlined area (touching) Specify your roping preference under Tools gt Options

1 Click and hold the mouse button at a point on the screen near the objects to be selected and drag to surround the objects with an outline

2 Release the mouse button The objects will be selected

3 You may now

Move the group around on the page by clicking within the group dragging the mouse and releasing the button to place the objects

Delete the group of objects by clicking the Delete key or

Copy and paste by pressing Ctrl C to copy the group then Ctrl V to paste it The pasted copy of the grouped objects will appear slightly offset from the original objects

Section 8 Advanced Features

55

Applying a DropRun Count

Use the droprun feature when calculating quantities to take into account the drop or run of a linear condition such as electrical lines or plumbing pipes Drop or run lengths may be added separately to any linear condition on screen while a default droprun length may be indicated for a condition as a whole

1 Select the desired linear condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff Dock bar

2 Click the Change button in the toolbar to open the Change Condition dialog

3 Click the Advanced tab to access the advanced options and click inside the DropRun check box

4 Enter a default length to be applied to all of this condition Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches) You can leave the length blank and manually enter drop run on each segment drawn

5 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog

Edit DropRun Count

1 With the related linear condition in the Takeoff Dock bar highlighted or with the pointer tool selected

2 click on the desired linear object in the image takeoff area The Count button will become active

3 Click on the Count button (alternatively select Tools gt Count) The default droprun amount will show in the pop-up Count dialog (Default length will be zero if droprun has not been selected in this conditionrsquos properties)

4 Type in the desired length Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches)

5 Click the OK button The additional amount will be reflected in the corresponding quantity The new DropRun count will apply only to the object edited

Adding Text in Image View

On-Screen Takeoff allows you to place text comments around your quantity takeoffs that may be printed along with plan images and objects Text is automatically placed within the Annotation Layer (that includes text and hot links)

1 To place text on the image select the Text Tool and click at the point you want to place your text opening a text box

2 Type in your information clicking Enter for line breaks

3 When you are finished click the OK button to exit the text box

4 To reposition text simply click on the text (with the Text Tool active) to select it

5 Move the cursor over the text the cursor will now display as a four-way arrow

6 Click and drag the mouse to position the text as desired

Section 8 Advanced Features

56

1 To edit existing text use the Text Tool to double-click on the text to open the editing box

2 Enter additional text or use the Backspace key to delete text as necessary

Formatting Text Once created you may format the font size type style and color of your text

1 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Font or click on the Font button in the Takeoff Toolbar

2 Select the desired features (color options are disabled) and click the OK button

3 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Color or click on the Color button in the Takeoff Toolbar The Color dialog will open

4 Click on a color in the Basic Color palette or create a color and add to the Custom Colors palette (Be sure to click on the color in the Custom Colors palette to select it)

5 Click the OK button

Object Properties

Linear Objects

Linear objects may be set to connect at corners

A linear object may be set to trim automatically when crossing another linear object (Check the trim option under the advanced tab of the Condition dialog)

When you move a connected linear object objects automatically move and resize connected lines accordingly (quantities are then recalculated)

This feature requires that the connected linear object be moved using the center handles (does not apply when resizing the line from the ends)

Objects constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

Objects are measured from centerline to centerline

Section 8 Advanced Features

57

Area Objects When drawing an area use your escape key to undo the last line drawn You may reverse your

drawing of an area using the escape key

The area will not fill with color and pattern until the user double-clicks after the last line is set

Lines drawn to delineate an area object constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

After selecting an area to move or adjust position the mouse in the center to move the entire area position the mouse at the sides or corners to adjust the perimeter

Count Objects

All count objects are quantified by the physical number of objects per page and reported as EA for the UOM The quantity for the current Image View is (displayed in the Condition List) and the total quantity in your project is displayed in the Takeoff View and Worksheet View)

Square circle rectangle and triangle shaped count objects do not displace or subtract from other object quantities when placed on top of them However on the Advanced Tab for the count condition a connect property can be set (this is a check box) so that when a count object of this shape is put on top of a Linear type takeoff object it will move with the linear if said linear is moved

An opened-shaped count object must be placed within a linear object Opening shaped count objects may also be measured by linear foot or linear yard (EA SF and SY are also options) Opening shaped count items default to a width of 3rsquo 0rdquo at the time of creation This size can be changed The small medium and large size are not options on this type of condition anymore Check Backout on the Advanced tab for each Count object back out the footage (or yardage) of opening-shaped count objects in which they are placed

NOTE In order to see this Backout functionality (in quantity) for SY or SF deductions at least one of the

results for the Linear(s) this object will be placed on must be set to SY or SF and the count object must have a height quantity

Advanced Features of Conditions The Round Feature Under the Advanced tab of the linear and area Condition dialogues you may specify quantity rounding (in inches) For linear objects rounding applies to each linear object drawn For area objects rounding will apply to each segment of the area perimeter adjusting the perimeter and area calculations For example With a linear condition entering 12 in the Round field will round up each related linear object to the nearest 12 inches or one foot With this setting two walls of 1 4 would each round to 2 0 totaling 4 0

NOTE In the Takeoff Dock bar condition list and in the On-Screen Takeoff reports quantities will be displayed in whole numbers rounded up to the nearest foot However calculations are based on true quantities without rounding unless the Round Feature is engaged

Pitch Pitch may apply either to linear or area conditions It is measured in rise per linear foot Entering 12 indicates a 12 rise per 12 of linear distance (a pitch of 12 over 12) or an angle of 45deg

Section 8 Advanced Features

58

Advanced Features of Project Properties Selecting Multiple Pages

1 Select a single page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry

2 Drag the cursor down the column of numbers to select consecutive pages

3 Click on the blank button at the top of this column to select all pages in the Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

59

Changing Image Assigned to a Drawing 1 Select the page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry 2 Click the Change Image button The Change Image dialog box will appear

3 Navigate to the desired file and select by clicking on it

4 Click the Open button The electronic file assigned to the page will have been changed to reflect the new file choice

Changing Image File Path 1 Select pages as described above

2 Choose Change Folder

3 In the Change Folder dialog navigate to the appropriate folder

4 Click the OK button The file path will have been changed for the selected page entries

Delete a Page from Project Properties 1 Select the page you want to delete by clicking on its associated number (in the gray box at the

left of the entry)

2 Choose Delete Page

All Takeoff on the page will be deleted immediately and permanently

Section 8 Advanced Features

60

Advanced Features of Tool Options

Calculation Method On-Screen Takeoff has built-in calculation options to allow for faster work and faster saves until your takeoff is complete Calculation options are found by selecting Tools gt Options then clicking on the Calculation tab

Calculation method can be set to Automatic Automatic except Grids and Manual Manual will allow the program to operate more quickly while Automatic or Automatic except Grids allows the user to see quantity changes as takeoffs are made

In any mode you may press F9 to recalculate quantities for the On-Screen Takeoff current totals

Configuration Tab

When the ldquoPage Label (A01)rdquo radial button is chosen On-Screen Takeoff puts the numbered label on all the pages of in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar If the Page Descriptionrdquo radial button is chosen then a description of what takeoff is on that specific page will be shown in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar

This section of the configuration tab gives you options on how you want to export your information When the ldquoFolderSubfolder Namesrdquo radial button is chosen than on your file that you are exporting to will have all the conditions folders and subfolders In the Delimiter box you can choose the symbol that is needed to separate the information you are exporting Some files need semicolons () or colons () to make sure the information comes exported in is separated it the appropriate places

Section 8 Advanced Features

61

In previous versions of On-Screen Takeoff there are views that users need to have in order for them to display their information By either choosing ldquoOST 1xrdquo or ldquoOST 2xrdquo it will let the program know you want your columns of information exported in that specific format

When you have the Confirm Deletions radial button of ldquoYesrdquo chosen than every time you delete anything you will get a dialog box confirming your intentions of deletion

While working with your takeoff you have a choice to either view the legend of your conditions or hide it Choose whichever radial button that suits your needs

For those who prefer to use the Enter key to navigate in dialog boxes this option is just for that

Font Tab The Font tab is designed for you to make your own look and feel for the application At the bottom of this tab it will show you sample of the fonts and colors you have chosen

Renaming the Current Page You may change the name of the current page in the takeoff area of On-Screen Takeoff by selecting Edit gt Rename Page

This opens the Name Page dialog and you may simply type in a new name and click the Enter button The new name for the file will be reflected on the title bar for the page and in Project Properties

You also may access the Rename Page function by right-clicking in the takeoff area while in Image View and selecting the option from the pop-up menu that appears

Section 9

62

Saving and Exiting

This section will

Explain how to save projects

Show you how to safely exit the program

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

63

Saving Your Project

1 Select File gt Save 2 If your project has not previously been saved a Save dialog box will open to allow you to name

the file and choose the directory and folder in which to save your file 3 Once saved File gt Save will simply save the current version of the file

OR

4 Select File gt Save As then type in a new name for the file and save to the desired file path

The Auto-save Feature With the Auto-save feature On-Screen Takeoff automatically backs up your open project You may choose to have more than one level of backup files The first backup copy will have the extension b00 and successive files will be b01 b02 and so on If you have designated four levels of backup files after the fourth backup copy has been created (b03) the next file will be saved over the file with extension b00 Further backup saves will then rotate through the four backup files in the same way

1 Select Tools gt Options 2 In the Auto-save area (under the General tab) select the frequency of backup file creation (in

minutes) and the number of levels for the feature 3 You also may disengage the feature by clicking in the check box to clear it

The Auto-save feature automatically saves backup copies to the directory of the current project If you are working from a write-protected area such as a CD-ROM On-Screen Takeoff will place backup files in the On-Screen Takeoff folder

Exiting When you are finished using On-Screen Takeoff it is very easy to exit Exiting is very important because of security reasons If someone were to use your computer they could enter the application and view and manipulate information

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

64

On-Screen Takeoff closes the open project when you open another or create a new project or when you exit the program

1 Select File gt Exit

OR

2 You also may click at the upper right-hand corner of the application to exit

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

65

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer When you get your digitizer from GTCO you will need to connect it to your computer Follow the instructions outlined below to do this

Note For rollup digitizers the metal bar must be oriented to the top or right hand side

Connecting the Digitizer 1 Lay the digitizer out flat 2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer 3 Plug in the power adapter 4 Plug the interface (IO) cable into the digitizer 5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into an open serial port on computer

Note GTCO Technical support phone number is 410-381-6688 The electronic manual (on diskette) from GTCO contains more detailed installation and operation instructions for the GTCO digitizer model you have

Installing other Digitizer Drivers If you are using a GTCO Digitizer you will need to install the GTCO TabletWorks Drivers

If you are using a Digitizer not supported by GTCO Tablet Works 10 please contact the manufacturer of your digitizer for assistance with installation

Installing GTCO TabletWorks Drivers 1 Insert the On Center CD into the CD-ROM drive The CD Startup screen will open 2 Click on Install Software 3 Select Additional Software and Drivers 4 Select Digitizer Driver 5 Follow the instructions for installing TabletWorks 10

Adhering the Template The template is a small plastic sticker used to enable mouse function when using the digitizer with On-Screen Takeoff Place your template on your digitizer We suggest placing it in the bottom right corner of the digitizer about one inch inside the takeoff area

Note You may either peel off the back of the template and use the adhesive surface or you can tape the template down

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

66

Testing the Digitizer Drivers Before running OST you may test the digitizer by moving the stylus around on the digitizer pad it should move the mouse cursor (if mouse emulation is enabled)

If the digitizer does not move the mouse cursor on the screen

The superset codes may need to be reset Reset the superset codes by touching on the border of the digitizer with the stylus The digitizer should beep several times

The digitizer may not be communicating with the computer Be sure the COM port selected is correct Be sure the COM port selected is correct If you are not able to get the digitizer to move the mouse cursor you need to call GTCO technical support for help

Note The Mouse Emulation is not required for On-Screen Takeoff to work properly It is used only for the Template functionality if the digitizer is moving the cursor the wrong direction (up instead of sideways or vice-versa)

Click the L-shaped arrow symbol on the digitizer with the stylus

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

67

Appendix II Toolbar Items Main Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

68

Tool Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

69

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

70

Navigate Toolbar (Continued)

Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

71

Takeoff Toolbar (Continued)

Image Toolbar

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

72

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

This section will detail how to load plans from a F W Dodge CD-ROM into an On-Screen Takeoff project file ready for takeoffs

Dodge files may be added to the Project Properties dialog However loading the files in that way will load the files by number rather than name description If you want to load one page only from your Dodge CD You will have to rename the page to display the name rather than number of the file

To load plan files from a Dodge CD so that the files load sequentially by file number but are displayed by name rather than by number within your project follow the instructions below

Opening a Dodge project from a CD-ROM 1 Insert the CD into the drive 2 Choose File gt Custom 3 Choose Dodge Plans Project (plansdat) as the file type 4 Select the appropriate file type by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the Files of type

field 5 In the Look in field access your drive paths by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the

field then

Navigate to your CD-ROM drive Open the data folder and Open the Projects folder

6 Select the desired project and open its folder 7 Open the plansdat file 8 All the images will come in sequenced correctly for that job along with the full descriptions

(names) of each page If there is not a plans folder in the project folder then plans do not exist for that project on the CD Opening the plansdat file will yield an empty project

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

73

Appendix IV Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer The On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer is a limited version of On Center Softwarersquos commercial takeoff software If your status bar located at the very bottom of the main window says View Mode in the lower left-hand corner then you are using the Plan Viewer You can use the plan viewer to

View CD-based amp converted CAD drawings

View a previously created OST file and associated drawings

Download electronic plans online

Navigate through drawings

Quickly Takeoff linearsareas and counts

Zoom in to view the plan better

Print drawings directly from the viewer

Viewing an On-Screen Takeoff Project File

1 To open an OST file that was previously created with of On-Screen Takeoff 2 Select File gt Open 3 An Open dialog will appear if you do not see the OST file you are looking for select the

Look In drop down arrow 4 A drop down menu will appear listing the various folders drives and mapped drives located

on your computer select the correct drive or folder location and continue to browse to the location of your OST file

5 When you see your OST file double-click it to open it 6 Any takeoff and drawings should appear on the Image tab view

If you do not see the drawings but do see the colored takeoff layer the drawings may

not be located in the same place they were originally saved at Go to File gt Project Properties and check the Image File path for each listed page If the image file path is pointing to a CD drive make sure the CD is inside the CR-ROM

Downloading Electronic Plans If your Online Plan Service provides a special file format (OSX) required to use this feature of our plan viewer you can immediately downloaded all electronic plans of a project directly from our viewer

Most Plan Room web sites will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff when a request to download plans is made Your particular Plan Room may differ in operation so please contact the provider directly with questions on using the site

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

74

When you request to download or open a project file from a Plan Room you will usually have the open to open or save an OSX file Choosing open will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff Alternately you may choose to save the file to a local hard drive After you have saved the file either double-click it to launch On-Screen Takeoff or open the OSX file using On-Screen Takeoff by clicking File then Open and locating the file on your hard drive You will need to change the file type to OSX

After the OSX file is opened you will see an additional tab appear in the Conditions List window called Pages

The Pages tab shows the hierarchy of your project Gray file icons represent pages that have not been downloaded and blue icons represents pages that have been downloaded

To download a page simply double-click the page icon

If you wish to select a group of pages to download you can use the Ctrl or Shift key to multiple select them then click the Download button

If you wish to download all pages at once click the Download All button

Downloaded pages will now appear in the Project Properties dialog in the same order in which they appear in the Pages tab

Creating Quick Takeoffs With On-Screen Takeoff you can create quick takeoffs to measure quantities even if you dont have the full version of our program However using the Quick Takeoff functionality shows you just a fraction of what the full version can do

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar is located at the top of the image view It has three buttons designated for three types of takeoffs Linear Area and Count The Quantity drop down list will show secondary quantities for Linears and Areas The Units drop down allows you to select how you want your quantities displayed Feet Inches Yards Millimeters and Meters

NOTE Every time change the type of takeoff you are performing (switching from Area to Linear for example) the previous quantities and takeoff objects will disappear They will also disappear when you changes pages

NOTE You can use the Dimension Tool to basically measure the distance between two points or linears The distance will display on the status bar at the bottom of the application

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

75

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions General

Where is On-Screen Takeoff installed on my computer

Typically it is installed in CProgram FilesOn-Screen Takeoff

In Explorer how do I recognize On-Screen Takeoff file types

On-Screen Takeoff data is stored in a single file per job lsquojob name OSTrsquo On-Screen Takeoff templates are stored as lsquotemplate nameTPOrsquo

Can only one project at a time be open

Yes For that reason opening another project automatically closes the project on screen You will be asked to save any changes

Is only one scale allowed per page What about on drawings that have multiple detail sections on a page and each of those drawings have different scales

Yes For pages with drawings of different scales copy the drawing to another project page and set the appropriate scale

I cannot perform backout on an area that is along a linear

As a workaround use the On-Screen Takeoff layers feature to help you with this issue Electronic Images

How do I start a project from drawings that have been scanned and written to a CD-ROM

Open a new project Select File gt Project Properties and select Auto Add Navigate to your CD and the appropriate folder and select any image file in that location Click Open All files in the location will load into your project Recommended that images are copied from CD to hard drive for performance

If I get a disk of drawings in AutoCAD format (R13 or R14) can I read them in On-Screen Takeoff

Yes On-Screen Takeoff now reads DWG DXF and many other format that are saved with AutoCAD

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

76

When I click on the all pages button what is supposed to happen Currently nothing seems to change when I click on that button

The All Pages button is used to apply the Darken and Enhance Plans feature to all pages in the project (as opposed to only the current page on screen)

Is there a way to deduct a large skylight from an area condition

Yes with the related area condition selected in the Takeoff Dock bar unselect the Backout button on the Takeoff Toolbar then draw the Backout area The area quantity will be deducted from the related condition object and the linear measurement of the Backout perimeter will be added

Digitizer Issues

How do I connect a Digitizer to the computer

See Appendix I Connecting a Digitizer

The Place Template menu choice is disabled

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or the digitizer or the digitzer drivers are not installed

It wonrsquot let me select the Set Takeoff Area menu choice

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or no job is open a digitizer is not installed or the drivers are not installed

The digitizer stylus is not moving the cursor or crosshairs

Click S-0-1 superset on the digitizer

How do I convert my old GTCO Digitizer to work with On- Screen Takeofftrade

Call GTCO and they may be able to reconfigure your digitizer to be compatible with On-Screen Takeoff

Printing Issues Which Printers work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible printers include On-Screen Takeoff Hewlett Packard Epson and Canon printers If you are having printer difficulties please contact support and specify the type of printer along with other pertinent information Contact support at wwwoncentercomsupport or email supportoncentercom

Which Plotters work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible Plotters include Hewlett Packard DesignJet plotters and the EnCAD Cadjet II If you are having plotter difficulties please contact support and specify the type of plotter concerned

ViewingDisplay I can no longer see my condition list How do I get it back

The toolbars and Dock bars can be turned on and off through the View gt Toolbars menu options

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

77

This is also accessible by right-clicking in the toolbar area and selecting (or deselecting) a toolbar listed

I cannot view my folders in the condition list

Right-click in the Takeoff Dock barcondition list area and select Show Tree to display your folders

My Status Bar reads Viewer Mode and I am unable to draw conditions

On-Screen Takeoff needs to be Authorized Or you need to purchase an upgrade Click the Perform Advanced Takeoff button on the main toolbar

I hid a Dock bar and when I selected to view it again it appeared alongside the other Dock

bar instead of stacked on top of it How do I fix it

Pick up the Dock bar by clicking on the bar at the top and continuing to hold down the mouse button drag the Dock bar over the other one It will resize and appear stacked with the other

When I open image files from a CD the images are all upside down How do I get them right

side up

To flip pages from top to bottom follow the steps below 1 Click the All Pages button on the Image Toolbar (All Pages is engaged when the button

is not clicked) 2 Click the Flip Horizontal button on the Image Toolbar 3 Click the All Pages button again to disengage

Templates How do I create a Template

Follow the steps below 1 Create a typical project 2 Choose File gt Save As 3 Choose On-Screen Takeoff Template Files as the file type to save 4 Name the file This will save all of the condition setups as well as the layers for the

project

How do I create a new project from a template

Follow the steps below 1 Choose File gt New 2 Select a template from those listed in the New dialog This will open a new project with

conditions and layers saved from a previous project but no pages or takeoff

78

INDEX

Area Conditions 32

Area Objects 57

Auto Scrolling 20

Auto-save 63

Backout Mode 41

Calculation Method 60

Conditions 29

Configuration 60

Contents Tab 6

Continuous Mode 38

Count Conditions 33

Count Objects 57

Digitizer 10 65 76

Docking Toolbars 13

Dodge CD 72

Drawing 27 37

DropRun Count 55

Environment 18

Exiting 63

Exporting 49

Features 16

Font 61

Frequently Asked Questions 75

Grid 40

Help File 5

Hiding Toolbars 13

Hot Links 21

Image 19 59

Image files 9

Image Toolbar 12 71

Images 75

Index Tab 6

Layers 43

Linear Conditions 31

Linear Objects 56

Main Toolbar 12 67

Menus 14

Moving Toolbars 13

Navigate Toolbar 12 69

Navigating 20

On-Screen Takeofftrade 2

Page 59 61

Pages 20 25 28

Plan Viewer 73

Plans 26

Printing 47 76

Project Properties 25

Projects 22

Quick Start Video 18

Resizing Toolbars 13

Roping 54

Saving 63

Scale 28

Search Tab 7

Selecting Objects 42

Setup 8

Start On-Screen Takeofftrade 17

System Requirements 9

Takeoff 19 27

Takeoff Toolbar 70 71

Takeoff Toolbar 12

Template Files 23

TIF (Group4) 9

Tool Toolbar 12 68

Toolbar 67

Toolbars 12

View Toolbar 12 69

Viewing Toolbars 12

Worksheet 20

Zone Conditions 33

Zoom Toolbar 12 69

  • On-Screen Takeoff Lite
  • Table of Contents
  • Section 1 - Introduction
  • Section 2 - Setup
  • Section 3 - Toolbars and Menus
  • Section 4 - Features
  • Section 5 - Projects
  • Section 6 - Conditions and Takeoff
  • Section 7 - Printing and Exporting
  • Section 8 - Advanced Features
  • Section 9 - Saving and Exiting
  • Appendix I - Installing Your Digitizer
  • Appendix II - Toolbar Items
  • Appendix III - Loading Plans from a Dodge CD
  • Appendix IV - Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer
  • Appendix V - Frequently Asked Questions
  • Index

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

37

2 Drag and drop any the condition from one place to another in the list You may also move a condition to another folder on the list in this way

Drawing with Conditions Snap Angles Set up snap angles to prevent lines from appearing jagged Snap angles are commonly set at 15deg and shift snap angles at 0deg

1 Go to Tools gt Options Options dialog appears

2 Under the General tab make the desired settings

3 Click to save the settings As they are drawn lines will snap to the set degree

Drawing a Linear Object 1 Select a condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff dock bar

2 Move the cursor into the Image takeoff area of the screen you will see the cursor display as crosshairs

3 Click and hold left mouse button then drag mouse to draw a line

4 Release mouse button to set line

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

38

5 Repeat steps for further lines

Continuous Mode This feature allows you to draw an object that has connected lines

1 Click the icon from the Takeoff toolbar

OR

2 Go to Tools gt Continuous Mode

3 Follow steps 1-3 from Draw a Linear Object

4 Click at each point of intersection The object will be connected

5 Double-click after making the final point to set the lines

Drawing a Curve To draw a curved line the Curve option must be checked under the Advanced tab of the Condition dialog

1 Click where you want to begin the curve and drag in a straight line to the position for the other endpoint of the curve

2 Click on the line to select it Handles in the shapes of small squares will appear at either end of

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

39

the line and in the center of the line

3 Move the cursor over the center handles until the cursor becomes a two-way arrow

4 Click and drag in the direction of the curve bending the line as you move the cursor Release to set the curve (The line you began with will disappear)

Draw a circle by drawing two curved lines connected

Drawing an Area Object Area conditions are drawn similarly to continuous mode lines You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete your area takeoff

NOTE When drawing an area do not intersect the perimeter or line of the object you are drawing

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

3 The area will be filled with the pattern set for that condition

NOTE The simulated circle will be good enough for you to be able to make a bid

To create a circular area click from point to point with very short distances in between points simulating a circlersquos perimeter Double-click after setting the last point to set the area

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

40

Grid Options Grids give you an added advantage when installing materials such as tiles Use this feature to get a count for how many tiles are needed for an area

1 Double-click on an area condition in the Takeoff dock bar to open its Condition dialog

2 Click on the Advanced tab to show its options

3 Check the box next to Grid by clicking in it

4 Indicate the dimensions of the cell matrix in inches (For example 200 x 400)

5 Under Results tab choose each (EA) for one of the results fields This will tabulate a number of grid cells (including partial grid cells) in area

6 Click to save your settings

7 Use the Move Grid and Rotate Grid features in the Tools menu to manipulate the grid as desired

Grid Calculation

1 Go to Tools gt Options menu

1 Specify if On-Screen Takeoff automatically should Calculate Grid Position

2 If AreaGrid Size is selected On-Screen Takeoff will calculate the number of items needed to fill the grid based on grid demintions

3 Click to accept and close the dialog

To move a line at any angle (regardless of default setting) press the Shift key while moving the mouse

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

41

Backout Mode This feature allows you to take out part of an area and deduct that amount of square footage

1 Select Tools gt Backout Mode

2 Outline the are you want backed out as you would when drawing a regular area object (see Drawing an Area Object)

3 The outlined area will clear and quantities will be recalculated

NOTE The perimeter of the backout area will be added to the LF quantity for that condition

Drawing a Count Object Square triangle rectangle and circle shaped count objects can easily be placed on images

1 Select the condition

2 Click in the location where you want the object to appear

3 To place an opening-shaped count item like a door or window you must click over an existing linear object such as a wall

4 On the Results tab you can change the height properties to give you the result you need

5 If Backout is checked on the advanced tab for each count opening the opening-shaped count item will back out a corresponding section of the linear object

Opening shaped count items are sized at 3rsquo0rdquo by default

Drawing a Zone Zones are drawn in the same way as area objects and may be any polygonal shape You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete the zone perimeter

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

42

Selecting Objects

1 Use the Select Tool to select objects

You can also select all objects that correspond to a condition

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Right-click and choose Select All

3 All objects with this condition will be highlighted with squares as an outline

Moving and Resizing Objects Linear

1 To move or resize a linear object click anywhere on the line to select it

2 To move the line position your pointer over the center handles When the mouse is positioned over the handles you will see a two-way arrow You will only be able to move the line in the direction of the arrows

3 Drag the line to a new position

4 Clicking and dragging the handles on the ends of the line will allow you to lengthen or shorten your line

Area and Zone

1 To move an area object or zone in its entirety click and drag it to its new position

2 Grabbing a handle at a corner or intersection of the object will allow you to adjust and change its perimeter

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

43

Count 1 To move a square circle rectangle or triangle shaped count object click and drag

2 Click and drag an opening shaped count object along the length of the linear object to the desired position then release

NOTE An opening shaped count object may not be moved from its associated linear condition object however it may be moved up and down the length of the linear object

Layers On-Screen Takeoff allows you to sort and separate your takeoff objects within the same job and on the same page On-Screen Takeoff gives you this flexibility through the use of layers

By assigning different conditions to different layers (for example differentiating between floors ceilings and walls) you can choose to view all layers or turn off certain layers to display and print the remaining groups of conditions only You may also remove the background image of electronic plans add text and hot link symbols or print only your condition takeoffs

Layers are only available in Full Mode If you are in View or Lite Mode and would like to use this

feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade Default Layers

On-Screen Takeoff begins every project with three default layers Image Annotation and Default The Image layer holds the electronic plan files you may have in your project The Annotation layer possesses all text notations highlighting and hot links in the project The Default layer will appear in the Condition dialog when creating or editing a condition (listed in the takeoff dock bar) Conditions are assigned to the Default layer unless otherwise specified by the user

Creating Layers To assign a condition to a layer other than the default layer you must first create additional layers for your project

1 Select View gt Layers to open the Layers dialog

2 Click An unnamed layer will be added

3 Click within the empty box and type a name for your layer (for example Wall)

4 New layers are added as active layers The adjacent box under the Show column will be checked

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

44

Assigning a Layer to a Condition 1 Open the Condition dialog box by creating a new condition or editing an existing condition

2 Under the General tab click on the down arrow in the Layer field to display optional layers

3 Select the desired layer for the condition Only the Default layer and layers you have added will be displayed

4 Click

View and Hide Layers

1 Select View gt Layers

2 Under the Show column check the box to view or remove the check (by clicking on it) to hide the specific layer

3 Click to accept and close the Layers dialog

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

45

Assigning Text to a Layer When adding text to an image On-Screen Takeoff has the capability to assign the text to a specified layer

1 Select the Text Tool

2 Click at the point you want to place your text

3 Type in your text using the Enter key for line breaks

4 Click the drop down arrow next to the Layer field and select the desired layer

Section 7

46

Printing and Exporting

This section will

Printing options and procedures

Exporting data by copying and pasting

Exporting quantity results to Excel spreadsheets

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

47

Print Setup On-Screen Takeoff allows the user to print the image takeoff list and worksheet

1 Select File gt Print Setup The Print Setup dialog will open

2 Select a printer or leave the default selection listed (change from the default printer displayed by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the field)

3 Indicate page size and printer tray option (Source) Access page size options by clicking on the

down arrow at the right of the field

4 Choose Portrait or Landscape orientation

5 Click to accept and close the dialog

Printing Images The image area can include the electronic plans the takeoff objects added text and hot links To print a subset of these (for example just the takeoffs without the plans or the added text and hot link symbols) hide layers that you do not want to print (see Section 6 View and Hide Layers) When you are printing your images every page will show the scale of the takeoff you are printing

1 Click on the Image tab to display the area of your project

2 Select File gt Print (or Ctrl + P)

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

48

3 Select the desired view (What to print) and the Image Range

4 Click The second Print dialog will open

5 Change settings accordingly or click if you accept the default settings

Printing Takeoff Lists and Worksheets In Takeoff Lists and Worksheets you may hide columns to print only certain results or adjust column widths to fit the report within the page size selected

1 In Takeoff List or Worksheet view move your cursor to the right side of the columnrsquos title bar the cursor will display as a two-way arrow

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

49

2 Click and drag to adjust the width of the column Holding the mouse button you may

slide the title bar under the title bar to its left to hide the column completely

3 Select File gt Print or press Ctrl + P to access the Print dialog

4 Indicate desired printer and choose the number of copies

5 Click to print and close the dialog

When printing the condition list we suggest printing in landscape

To reset to the default column widths double-click on the right border of a column heading will reset the column to its right (or previously to its right before being hidden)

Print Preview 1 Select File gt Print Preview

2 Use and to vary your view 3 If viewing an image choose current full or scale view to see how it displays

4 For printed outputs that cover more than one page use and to view adjacent pages or click on the down arrow next to Page field and select the page you want displayed

Exporting Using the CopyPaste Feature You may copy all the data or sections from the worksheet and the takeoff list view in On-Screen Takeoff and paste it into another application When pasting into Excel the cell layout will be maintained

1 Highlight the areas you wish to paste Click and hold the left mouse button down as you drag the cursor over the area to be selected then releasing the mouse button

OR

2 Select the entire takeoff list quickly click on the left On-Screen Takeoff column header and hold and drag the cursor across the remaining column headings

The number of pages for the view selected will display in the lower left-hand corner The zoom percentage that applies to the view will be displayed in the lower right-hand corner next to page size of the drawing

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

50

3 In the worksheet view you may highlight rows by clicking on the numbered buttons to the left of each row clicking and dragging across column headings or clicking and dragging over individual cells in the worksheet

Click anywhere in the appropriate view to deselect the area

4 Once your selection is highlighted you may select Edit gt Copy or Ctrl C from the keyboard 5 On your monitor switch to the application into which you want to paste your selection 6 Select Edit gt Paste in the new application or simply press Ctrl + V to paste

The colored keys for conditions cannot be pasted

Using the Export Feature You may export condition quantities to specified cell location within an Excel worksheet file Cell target locations are assigned in the Results tab of the condition dialogs on the Export line relating to each quantity measurement type

On-Screen Takeoff will export takeoff quantity results for up to three different quantity types that you specify For instance you may want to know the number of square feet in a ceiling area as well as the number of linear feet in its perimeter

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

51

1 Bring up the Condition dialog by double-clicking on a condition in the takeoff dock bar or by

selecting the condition and clicking

2 Click on the Results tab to access its fields The default quantities for the condition type will display

3 For each results field click on the arrow to access the pull-down menu and select the appropriate quantity (for example SF LF EA etchellip)

4 Have your Excel spreadsheet opened and saved in a file

5 Specify the Excel spreadsheet cell locations where you want the results to go

6 For a cell in the first sheet of your spreadsheet type in the cell address (eg a1) Case is not important

7 For a cell on a successive sheet of your spreadsheet type in sheet the number followed by a comma and the cell address without any spaces (eg sheet2a1) Case is not important

8 Click

9 Select File gt Export gt Condition Qty to Excel

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

52

10 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

11 Click to export On-Screen Takeoff results to specified cell locations in the Excel file When you return to the Excel application you will see the values have been added to the specified cell locations in your spreadsheet

12 Save your Excel file

Exporting Worksheet to Excel

1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 From On-Screen Takeoff Select File gt Export gt Worksheet to Excel

4 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

5 Click When you return to the Excel application you will see the values from the Worksheet Tab have been added to your spreadsheet

6 Save your Excel file

Exporting Takeoff to CVS 1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 Click the Takeoff Tab in the project you want to export the information

4 Select File gt Export gt Takeoff to CSV

5 Browse to the location of the CSV spreadsheet file click file to select it

6 Click the Save

NOTE CSV files can be opened in Excel Lotus Access etc One may consider this option more of a ldquodumprdquo into a file

The Excel application must be active (it may be minimized on the application bar) with the target spreadsheet open in the application Otherwise an error will occur with the export operation that will affect both the On-Screen Takeofftrade file and the Excel spreadsheet

Section 8

53

Advanced Features

This section will

Some special features of working with condition objects in the takeoff area

Details of advanced options for conditions

Advanced features of the Project Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

54

Features to Use with Objects Roping Feature You can move copy or delete using this feature Using the Select tool (the pointer) you may select several objects at once by clicking and dragging an outline around the objects then releasing the mouse button Roping may select either objects completely within the outlined area (inclusive) or objects both within and touched by the outlined area (touching) Specify your roping preference under Tools gt Options

1 Click and hold the mouse button at a point on the screen near the objects to be selected and drag to surround the objects with an outline

2 Release the mouse button The objects will be selected

3 You may now

Move the group around on the page by clicking within the group dragging the mouse and releasing the button to place the objects

Delete the group of objects by clicking the Delete key or

Copy and paste by pressing Ctrl C to copy the group then Ctrl V to paste it The pasted copy of the grouped objects will appear slightly offset from the original objects

Section 8 Advanced Features

55

Applying a DropRun Count

Use the droprun feature when calculating quantities to take into account the drop or run of a linear condition such as electrical lines or plumbing pipes Drop or run lengths may be added separately to any linear condition on screen while a default droprun length may be indicated for a condition as a whole

1 Select the desired linear condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff Dock bar

2 Click the Change button in the toolbar to open the Change Condition dialog

3 Click the Advanced tab to access the advanced options and click inside the DropRun check box

4 Enter a default length to be applied to all of this condition Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches) You can leave the length blank and manually enter drop run on each segment drawn

5 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog

Edit DropRun Count

1 With the related linear condition in the Takeoff Dock bar highlighted or with the pointer tool selected

2 click on the desired linear object in the image takeoff area The Count button will become active

3 Click on the Count button (alternatively select Tools gt Count) The default droprun amount will show in the pop-up Count dialog (Default length will be zero if droprun has not been selected in this conditionrsquos properties)

4 Type in the desired length Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches)

5 Click the OK button The additional amount will be reflected in the corresponding quantity The new DropRun count will apply only to the object edited

Adding Text in Image View

On-Screen Takeoff allows you to place text comments around your quantity takeoffs that may be printed along with plan images and objects Text is automatically placed within the Annotation Layer (that includes text and hot links)

1 To place text on the image select the Text Tool and click at the point you want to place your text opening a text box

2 Type in your information clicking Enter for line breaks

3 When you are finished click the OK button to exit the text box

4 To reposition text simply click on the text (with the Text Tool active) to select it

5 Move the cursor over the text the cursor will now display as a four-way arrow

6 Click and drag the mouse to position the text as desired

Section 8 Advanced Features

56

1 To edit existing text use the Text Tool to double-click on the text to open the editing box

2 Enter additional text or use the Backspace key to delete text as necessary

Formatting Text Once created you may format the font size type style and color of your text

1 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Font or click on the Font button in the Takeoff Toolbar

2 Select the desired features (color options are disabled) and click the OK button

3 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Color or click on the Color button in the Takeoff Toolbar The Color dialog will open

4 Click on a color in the Basic Color palette or create a color and add to the Custom Colors palette (Be sure to click on the color in the Custom Colors palette to select it)

5 Click the OK button

Object Properties

Linear Objects

Linear objects may be set to connect at corners

A linear object may be set to trim automatically when crossing another linear object (Check the trim option under the advanced tab of the Condition dialog)

When you move a connected linear object objects automatically move and resize connected lines accordingly (quantities are then recalculated)

This feature requires that the connected linear object be moved using the center handles (does not apply when resizing the line from the ends)

Objects constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

Objects are measured from centerline to centerline

Section 8 Advanced Features

57

Area Objects When drawing an area use your escape key to undo the last line drawn You may reverse your

drawing of an area using the escape key

The area will not fill with color and pattern until the user double-clicks after the last line is set

Lines drawn to delineate an area object constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

After selecting an area to move or adjust position the mouse in the center to move the entire area position the mouse at the sides or corners to adjust the perimeter

Count Objects

All count objects are quantified by the physical number of objects per page and reported as EA for the UOM The quantity for the current Image View is (displayed in the Condition List) and the total quantity in your project is displayed in the Takeoff View and Worksheet View)

Square circle rectangle and triangle shaped count objects do not displace or subtract from other object quantities when placed on top of them However on the Advanced Tab for the count condition a connect property can be set (this is a check box) so that when a count object of this shape is put on top of a Linear type takeoff object it will move with the linear if said linear is moved

An opened-shaped count object must be placed within a linear object Opening shaped count objects may also be measured by linear foot or linear yard (EA SF and SY are also options) Opening shaped count items default to a width of 3rsquo 0rdquo at the time of creation This size can be changed The small medium and large size are not options on this type of condition anymore Check Backout on the Advanced tab for each Count object back out the footage (or yardage) of opening-shaped count objects in which they are placed

NOTE In order to see this Backout functionality (in quantity) for SY or SF deductions at least one of the

results for the Linear(s) this object will be placed on must be set to SY or SF and the count object must have a height quantity

Advanced Features of Conditions The Round Feature Under the Advanced tab of the linear and area Condition dialogues you may specify quantity rounding (in inches) For linear objects rounding applies to each linear object drawn For area objects rounding will apply to each segment of the area perimeter adjusting the perimeter and area calculations For example With a linear condition entering 12 in the Round field will round up each related linear object to the nearest 12 inches or one foot With this setting two walls of 1 4 would each round to 2 0 totaling 4 0

NOTE In the Takeoff Dock bar condition list and in the On-Screen Takeoff reports quantities will be displayed in whole numbers rounded up to the nearest foot However calculations are based on true quantities without rounding unless the Round Feature is engaged

Pitch Pitch may apply either to linear or area conditions It is measured in rise per linear foot Entering 12 indicates a 12 rise per 12 of linear distance (a pitch of 12 over 12) or an angle of 45deg

Section 8 Advanced Features

58

Advanced Features of Project Properties Selecting Multiple Pages

1 Select a single page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry

2 Drag the cursor down the column of numbers to select consecutive pages

3 Click on the blank button at the top of this column to select all pages in the Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

59

Changing Image Assigned to a Drawing 1 Select the page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry 2 Click the Change Image button The Change Image dialog box will appear

3 Navigate to the desired file and select by clicking on it

4 Click the Open button The electronic file assigned to the page will have been changed to reflect the new file choice

Changing Image File Path 1 Select pages as described above

2 Choose Change Folder

3 In the Change Folder dialog navigate to the appropriate folder

4 Click the OK button The file path will have been changed for the selected page entries

Delete a Page from Project Properties 1 Select the page you want to delete by clicking on its associated number (in the gray box at the

left of the entry)

2 Choose Delete Page

All Takeoff on the page will be deleted immediately and permanently

Section 8 Advanced Features

60

Advanced Features of Tool Options

Calculation Method On-Screen Takeoff has built-in calculation options to allow for faster work and faster saves until your takeoff is complete Calculation options are found by selecting Tools gt Options then clicking on the Calculation tab

Calculation method can be set to Automatic Automatic except Grids and Manual Manual will allow the program to operate more quickly while Automatic or Automatic except Grids allows the user to see quantity changes as takeoffs are made

In any mode you may press F9 to recalculate quantities for the On-Screen Takeoff current totals

Configuration Tab

When the ldquoPage Label (A01)rdquo radial button is chosen On-Screen Takeoff puts the numbered label on all the pages of in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar If the Page Descriptionrdquo radial button is chosen then a description of what takeoff is on that specific page will be shown in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar

This section of the configuration tab gives you options on how you want to export your information When the ldquoFolderSubfolder Namesrdquo radial button is chosen than on your file that you are exporting to will have all the conditions folders and subfolders In the Delimiter box you can choose the symbol that is needed to separate the information you are exporting Some files need semicolons () or colons () to make sure the information comes exported in is separated it the appropriate places

Section 8 Advanced Features

61

In previous versions of On-Screen Takeoff there are views that users need to have in order for them to display their information By either choosing ldquoOST 1xrdquo or ldquoOST 2xrdquo it will let the program know you want your columns of information exported in that specific format

When you have the Confirm Deletions radial button of ldquoYesrdquo chosen than every time you delete anything you will get a dialog box confirming your intentions of deletion

While working with your takeoff you have a choice to either view the legend of your conditions or hide it Choose whichever radial button that suits your needs

For those who prefer to use the Enter key to navigate in dialog boxes this option is just for that

Font Tab The Font tab is designed for you to make your own look and feel for the application At the bottom of this tab it will show you sample of the fonts and colors you have chosen

Renaming the Current Page You may change the name of the current page in the takeoff area of On-Screen Takeoff by selecting Edit gt Rename Page

This opens the Name Page dialog and you may simply type in a new name and click the Enter button The new name for the file will be reflected on the title bar for the page and in Project Properties

You also may access the Rename Page function by right-clicking in the takeoff area while in Image View and selecting the option from the pop-up menu that appears

Section 9

62

Saving and Exiting

This section will

Explain how to save projects

Show you how to safely exit the program

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

63

Saving Your Project

1 Select File gt Save 2 If your project has not previously been saved a Save dialog box will open to allow you to name

the file and choose the directory and folder in which to save your file 3 Once saved File gt Save will simply save the current version of the file

OR

4 Select File gt Save As then type in a new name for the file and save to the desired file path

The Auto-save Feature With the Auto-save feature On-Screen Takeoff automatically backs up your open project You may choose to have more than one level of backup files The first backup copy will have the extension b00 and successive files will be b01 b02 and so on If you have designated four levels of backup files after the fourth backup copy has been created (b03) the next file will be saved over the file with extension b00 Further backup saves will then rotate through the four backup files in the same way

1 Select Tools gt Options 2 In the Auto-save area (under the General tab) select the frequency of backup file creation (in

minutes) and the number of levels for the feature 3 You also may disengage the feature by clicking in the check box to clear it

The Auto-save feature automatically saves backup copies to the directory of the current project If you are working from a write-protected area such as a CD-ROM On-Screen Takeoff will place backup files in the On-Screen Takeoff folder

Exiting When you are finished using On-Screen Takeoff it is very easy to exit Exiting is very important because of security reasons If someone were to use your computer they could enter the application and view and manipulate information

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

64

On-Screen Takeoff closes the open project when you open another or create a new project or when you exit the program

1 Select File gt Exit

OR

2 You also may click at the upper right-hand corner of the application to exit

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

65

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer When you get your digitizer from GTCO you will need to connect it to your computer Follow the instructions outlined below to do this

Note For rollup digitizers the metal bar must be oriented to the top or right hand side

Connecting the Digitizer 1 Lay the digitizer out flat 2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer 3 Plug in the power adapter 4 Plug the interface (IO) cable into the digitizer 5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into an open serial port on computer

Note GTCO Technical support phone number is 410-381-6688 The electronic manual (on diskette) from GTCO contains more detailed installation and operation instructions for the GTCO digitizer model you have

Installing other Digitizer Drivers If you are using a GTCO Digitizer you will need to install the GTCO TabletWorks Drivers

If you are using a Digitizer not supported by GTCO Tablet Works 10 please contact the manufacturer of your digitizer for assistance with installation

Installing GTCO TabletWorks Drivers 1 Insert the On Center CD into the CD-ROM drive The CD Startup screen will open 2 Click on Install Software 3 Select Additional Software and Drivers 4 Select Digitizer Driver 5 Follow the instructions for installing TabletWorks 10

Adhering the Template The template is a small plastic sticker used to enable mouse function when using the digitizer with On-Screen Takeoff Place your template on your digitizer We suggest placing it in the bottom right corner of the digitizer about one inch inside the takeoff area

Note You may either peel off the back of the template and use the adhesive surface or you can tape the template down

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

66

Testing the Digitizer Drivers Before running OST you may test the digitizer by moving the stylus around on the digitizer pad it should move the mouse cursor (if mouse emulation is enabled)

If the digitizer does not move the mouse cursor on the screen

The superset codes may need to be reset Reset the superset codes by touching on the border of the digitizer with the stylus The digitizer should beep several times

The digitizer may not be communicating with the computer Be sure the COM port selected is correct Be sure the COM port selected is correct If you are not able to get the digitizer to move the mouse cursor you need to call GTCO technical support for help

Note The Mouse Emulation is not required for On-Screen Takeoff to work properly It is used only for the Template functionality if the digitizer is moving the cursor the wrong direction (up instead of sideways or vice-versa)

Click the L-shaped arrow symbol on the digitizer with the stylus

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

67

Appendix II Toolbar Items Main Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

68

Tool Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

69

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

70

Navigate Toolbar (Continued)

Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

71

Takeoff Toolbar (Continued)

Image Toolbar

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

72

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

This section will detail how to load plans from a F W Dodge CD-ROM into an On-Screen Takeoff project file ready for takeoffs

Dodge files may be added to the Project Properties dialog However loading the files in that way will load the files by number rather than name description If you want to load one page only from your Dodge CD You will have to rename the page to display the name rather than number of the file

To load plan files from a Dodge CD so that the files load sequentially by file number but are displayed by name rather than by number within your project follow the instructions below

Opening a Dodge project from a CD-ROM 1 Insert the CD into the drive 2 Choose File gt Custom 3 Choose Dodge Plans Project (plansdat) as the file type 4 Select the appropriate file type by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the Files of type

field 5 In the Look in field access your drive paths by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the

field then

Navigate to your CD-ROM drive Open the data folder and Open the Projects folder

6 Select the desired project and open its folder 7 Open the plansdat file 8 All the images will come in sequenced correctly for that job along with the full descriptions

(names) of each page If there is not a plans folder in the project folder then plans do not exist for that project on the CD Opening the plansdat file will yield an empty project

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

73

Appendix IV Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer The On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer is a limited version of On Center Softwarersquos commercial takeoff software If your status bar located at the very bottom of the main window says View Mode in the lower left-hand corner then you are using the Plan Viewer You can use the plan viewer to

View CD-based amp converted CAD drawings

View a previously created OST file and associated drawings

Download electronic plans online

Navigate through drawings

Quickly Takeoff linearsareas and counts

Zoom in to view the plan better

Print drawings directly from the viewer

Viewing an On-Screen Takeoff Project File

1 To open an OST file that was previously created with of On-Screen Takeoff 2 Select File gt Open 3 An Open dialog will appear if you do not see the OST file you are looking for select the

Look In drop down arrow 4 A drop down menu will appear listing the various folders drives and mapped drives located

on your computer select the correct drive or folder location and continue to browse to the location of your OST file

5 When you see your OST file double-click it to open it 6 Any takeoff and drawings should appear on the Image tab view

If you do not see the drawings but do see the colored takeoff layer the drawings may

not be located in the same place they were originally saved at Go to File gt Project Properties and check the Image File path for each listed page If the image file path is pointing to a CD drive make sure the CD is inside the CR-ROM

Downloading Electronic Plans If your Online Plan Service provides a special file format (OSX) required to use this feature of our plan viewer you can immediately downloaded all electronic plans of a project directly from our viewer

Most Plan Room web sites will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff when a request to download plans is made Your particular Plan Room may differ in operation so please contact the provider directly with questions on using the site

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

74

When you request to download or open a project file from a Plan Room you will usually have the open to open or save an OSX file Choosing open will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff Alternately you may choose to save the file to a local hard drive After you have saved the file either double-click it to launch On-Screen Takeoff or open the OSX file using On-Screen Takeoff by clicking File then Open and locating the file on your hard drive You will need to change the file type to OSX

After the OSX file is opened you will see an additional tab appear in the Conditions List window called Pages

The Pages tab shows the hierarchy of your project Gray file icons represent pages that have not been downloaded and blue icons represents pages that have been downloaded

To download a page simply double-click the page icon

If you wish to select a group of pages to download you can use the Ctrl or Shift key to multiple select them then click the Download button

If you wish to download all pages at once click the Download All button

Downloaded pages will now appear in the Project Properties dialog in the same order in which they appear in the Pages tab

Creating Quick Takeoffs With On-Screen Takeoff you can create quick takeoffs to measure quantities even if you dont have the full version of our program However using the Quick Takeoff functionality shows you just a fraction of what the full version can do

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar is located at the top of the image view It has three buttons designated for three types of takeoffs Linear Area and Count The Quantity drop down list will show secondary quantities for Linears and Areas The Units drop down allows you to select how you want your quantities displayed Feet Inches Yards Millimeters and Meters

NOTE Every time change the type of takeoff you are performing (switching from Area to Linear for example) the previous quantities and takeoff objects will disappear They will also disappear when you changes pages

NOTE You can use the Dimension Tool to basically measure the distance between two points or linears The distance will display on the status bar at the bottom of the application

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

75

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions General

Where is On-Screen Takeoff installed on my computer

Typically it is installed in CProgram FilesOn-Screen Takeoff

In Explorer how do I recognize On-Screen Takeoff file types

On-Screen Takeoff data is stored in a single file per job lsquojob name OSTrsquo On-Screen Takeoff templates are stored as lsquotemplate nameTPOrsquo

Can only one project at a time be open

Yes For that reason opening another project automatically closes the project on screen You will be asked to save any changes

Is only one scale allowed per page What about on drawings that have multiple detail sections on a page and each of those drawings have different scales

Yes For pages with drawings of different scales copy the drawing to another project page and set the appropriate scale

I cannot perform backout on an area that is along a linear

As a workaround use the On-Screen Takeoff layers feature to help you with this issue Electronic Images

How do I start a project from drawings that have been scanned and written to a CD-ROM

Open a new project Select File gt Project Properties and select Auto Add Navigate to your CD and the appropriate folder and select any image file in that location Click Open All files in the location will load into your project Recommended that images are copied from CD to hard drive for performance

If I get a disk of drawings in AutoCAD format (R13 or R14) can I read them in On-Screen Takeoff

Yes On-Screen Takeoff now reads DWG DXF and many other format that are saved with AutoCAD

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

76

When I click on the all pages button what is supposed to happen Currently nothing seems to change when I click on that button

The All Pages button is used to apply the Darken and Enhance Plans feature to all pages in the project (as opposed to only the current page on screen)

Is there a way to deduct a large skylight from an area condition

Yes with the related area condition selected in the Takeoff Dock bar unselect the Backout button on the Takeoff Toolbar then draw the Backout area The area quantity will be deducted from the related condition object and the linear measurement of the Backout perimeter will be added

Digitizer Issues

How do I connect a Digitizer to the computer

See Appendix I Connecting a Digitizer

The Place Template menu choice is disabled

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or the digitizer or the digitzer drivers are not installed

It wonrsquot let me select the Set Takeoff Area menu choice

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or no job is open a digitizer is not installed or the drivers are not installed

The digitizer stylus is not moving the cursor or crosshairs

Click S-0-1 superset on the digitizer

How do I convert my old GTCO Digitizer to work with On- Screen Takeofftrade

Call GTCO and they may be able to reconfigure your digitizer to be compatible with On-Screen Takeoff

Printing Issues Which Printers work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible printers include On-Screen Takeoff Hewlett Packard Epson and Canon printers If you are having printer difficulties please contact support and specify the type of printer along with other pertinent information Contact support at wwwoncentercomsupport or email supportoncentercom

Which Plotters work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible Plotters include Hewlett Packard DesignJet plotters and the EnCAD Cadjet II If you are having plotter difficulties please contact support and specify the type of plotter concerned

ViewingDisplay I can no longer see my condition list How do I get it back

The toolbars and Dock bars can be turned on and off through the View gt Toolbars menu options

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

77

This is also accessible by right-clicking in the toolbar area and selecting (or deselecting) a toolbar listed

I cannot view my folders in the condition list

Right-click in the Takeoff Dock barcondition list area and select Show Tree to display your folders

My Status Bar reads Viewer Mode and I am unable to draw conditions

On-Screen Takeoff needs to be Authorized Or you need to purchase an upgrade Click the Perform Advanced Takeoff button on the main toolbar

I hid a Dock bar and when I selected to view it again it appeared alongside the other Dock

bar instead of stacked on top of it How do I fix it

Pick up the Dock bar by clicking on the bar at the top and continuing to hold down the mouse button drag the Dock bar over the other one It will resize and appear stacked with the other

When I open image files from a CD the images are all upside down How do I get them right

side up

To flip pages from top to bottom follow the steps below 1 Click the All Pages button on the Image Toolbar (All Pages is engaged when the button

is not clicked) 2 Click the Flip Horizontal button on the Image Toolbar 3 Click the All Pages button again to disengage

Templates How do I create a Template

Follow the steps below 1 Create a typical project 2 Choose File gt Save As 3 Choose On-Screen Takeoff Template Files as the file type to save 4 Name the file This will save all of the condition setups as well as the layers for the

project

How do I create a new project from a template

Follow the steps below 1 Choose File gt New 2 Select a template from those listed in the New dialog This will open a new project with

conditions and layers saved from a previous project but no pages or takeoff

78

INDEX

Area Conditions 32

Area Objects 57

Auto Scrolling 20

Auto-save 63

Backout Mode 41

Calculation Method 60

Conditions 29

Configuration 60

Contents Tab 6

Continuous Mode 38

Count Conditions 33

Count Objects 57

Digitizer 10 65 76

Docking Toolbars 13

Dodge CD 72

Drawing 27 37

DropRun Count 55

Environment 18

Exiting 63

Exporting 49

Features 16

Font 61

Frequently Asked Questions 75

Grid 40

Help File 5

Hiding Toolbars 13

Hot Links 21

Image 19 59

Image files 9

Image Toolbar 12 71

Images 75

Index Tab 6

Layers 43

Linear Conditions 31

Linear Objects 56

Main Toolbar 12 67

Menus 14

Moving Toolbars 13

Navigate Toolbar 12 69

Navigating 20

On-Screen Takeofftrade 2

Page 59 61

Pages 20 25 28

Plan Viewer 73

Plans 26

Printing 47 76

Project Properties 25

Projects 22

Quick Start Video 18

Resizing Toolbars 13

Roping 54

Saving 63

Scale 28

Search Tab 7

Selecting Objects 42

Setup 8

Start On-Screen Takeofftrade 17

System Requirements 9

Takeoff 19 27

Takeoff Toolbar 70 71

Takeoff Toolbar 12

Template Files 23

TIF (Group4) 9

Tool Toolbar 12 68

Toolbar 67

Toolbars 12

View Toolbar 12 69

Viewing Toolbars 12

Worksheet 20

Zone Conditions 33

Zoom Toolbar 12 69

  • On-Screen Takeoff Lite
  • Table of Contents
  • Section 1 - Introduction
  • Section 2 - Setup
  • Section 3 - Toolbars and Menus
  • Section 4 - Features
  • Section 5 - Projects
  • Section 6 - Conditions and Takeoff
  • Section 7 - Printing and Exporting
  • Section 8 - Advanced Features
  • Section 9 - Saving and Exiting
  • Appendix I - Installing Your Digitizer
  • Appendix II - Toolbar Items
  • Appendix III - Loading Plans from a Dodge CD
  • Appendix IV - Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer
  • Appendix V - Frequently Asked Questions
  • Index

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

38

5 Repeat steps for further lines

Continuous Mode This feature allows you to draw an object that has connected lines

1 Click the icon from the Takeoff toolbar

OR

2 Go to Tools gt Continuous Mode

3 Follow steps 1-3 from Draw a Linear Object

4 Click at each point of intersection The object will be connected

5 Double-click after making the final point to set the lines

Drawing a Curve To draw a curved line the Curve option must be checked under the Advanced tab of the Condition dialog

1 Click where you want to begin the curve and drag in a straight line to the position for the other endpoint of the curve

2 Click on the line to select it Handles in the shapes of small squares will appear at either end of

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

39

the line and in the center of the line

3 Move the cursor over the center handles until the cursor becomes a two-way arrow

4 Click and drag in the direction of the curve bending the line as you move the cursor Release to set the curve (The line you began with will disappear)

Draw a circle by drawing two curved lines connected

Drawing an Area Object Area conditions are drawn similarly to continuous mode lines You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete your area takeoff

NOTE When drawing an area do not intersect the perimeter or line of the object you are drawing

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

3 The area will be filled with the pattern set for that condition

NOTE The simulated circle will be good enough for you to be able to make a bid

To create a circular area click from point to point with very short distances in between points simulating a circlersquos perimeter Double-click after setting the last point to set the area

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

40

Grid Options Grids give you an added advantage when installing materials such as tiles Use this feature to get a count for how many tiles are needed for an area

1 Double-click on an area condition in the Takeoff dock bar to open its Condition dialog

2 Click on the Advanced tab to show its options

3 Check the box next to Grid by clicking in it

4 Indicate the dimensions of the cell matrix in inches (For example 200 x 400)

5 Under Results tab choose each (EA) for one of the results fields This will tabulate a number of grid cells (including partial grid cells) in area

6 Click to save your settings

7 Use the Move Grid and Rotate Grid features in the Tools menu to manipulate the grid as desired

Grid Calculation

1 Go to Tools gt Options menu

1 Specify if On-Screen Takeoff automatically should Calculate Grid Position

2 If AreaGrid Size is selected On-Screen Takeoff will calculate the number of items needed to fill the grid based on grid demintions

3 Click to accept and close the dialog

To move a line at any angle (regardless of default setting) press the Shift key while moving the mouse

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

41

Backout Mode This feature allows you to take out part of an area and deduct that amount of square footage

1 Select Tools gt Backout Mode

2 Outline the are you want backed out as you would when drawing a regular area object (see Drawing an Area Object)

3 The outlined area will clear and quantities will be recalculated

NOTE The perimeter of the backout area will be added to the LF quantity for that condition

Drawing a Count Object Square triangle rectangle and circle shaped count objects can easily be placed on images

1 Select the condition

2 Click in the location where you want the object to appear

3 To place an opening-shaped count item like a door or window you must click over an existing linear object such as a wall

4 On the Results tab you can change the height properties to give you the result you need

5 If Backout is checked on the advanced tab for each count opening the opening-shaped count item will back out a corresponding section of the linear object

Opening shaped count items are sized at 3rsquo0rdquo by default

Drawing a Zone Zones are drawn in the same way as area objects and may be any polygonal shape You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete the zone perimeter

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

42

Selecting Objects

1 Use the Select Tool to select objects

You can also select all objects that correspond to a condition

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Right-click and choose Select All

3 All objects with this condition will be highlighted with squares as an outline

Moving and Resizing Objects Linear

1 To move or resize a linear object click anywhere on the line to select it

2 To move the line position your pointer over the center handles When the mouse is positioned over the handles you will see a two-way arrow You will only be able to move the line in the direction of the arrows

3 Drag the line to a new position

4 Clicking and dragging the handles on the ends of the line will allow you to lengthen or shorten your line

Area and Zone

1 To move an area object or zone in its entirety click and drag it to its new position

2 Grabbing a handle at a corner or intersection of the object will allow you to adjust and change its perimeter

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

43

Count 1 To move a square circle rectangle or triangle shaped count object click and drag

2 Click and drag an opening shaped count object along the length of the linear object to the desired position then release

NOTE An opening shaped count object may not be moved from its associated linear condition object however it may be moved up and down the length of the linear object

Layers On-Screen Takeoff allows you to sort and separate your takeoff objects within the same job and on the same page On-Screen Takeoff gives you this flexibility through the use of layers

By assigning different conditions to different layers (for example differentiating between floors ceilings and walls) you can choose to view all layers or turn off certain layers to display and print the remaining groups of conditions only You may also remove the background image of electronic plans add text and hot link symbols or print only your condition takeoffs

Layers are only available in Full Mode If you are in View or Lite Mode and would like to use this

feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade Default Layers

On-Screen Takeoff begins every project with three default layers Image Annotation and Default The Image layer holds the electronic plan files you may have in your project The Annotation layer possesses all text notations highlighting and hot links in the project The Default layer will appear in the Condition dialog when creating or editing a condition (listed in the takeoff dock bar) Conditions are assigned to the Default layer unless otherwise specified by the user

Creating Layers To assign a condition to a layer other than the default layer you must first create additional layers for your project

1 Select View gt Layers to open the Layers dialog

2 Click An unnamed layer will be added

3 Click within the empty box and type a name for your layer (for example Wall)

4 New layers are added as active layers The adjacent box under the Show column will be checked

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

44

Assigning a Layer to a Condition 1 Open the Condition dialog box by creating a new condition or editing an existing condition

2 Under the General tab click on the down arrow in the Layer field to display optional layers

3 Select the desired layer for the condition Only the Default layer and layers you have added will be displayed

4 Click

View and Hide Layers

1 Select View gt Layers

2 Under the Show column check the box to view or remove the check (by clicking on it) to hide the specific layer

3 Click to accept and close the Layers dialog

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

45

Assigning Text to a Layer When adding text to an image On-Screen Takeoff has the capability to assign the text to a specified layer

1 Select the Text Tool

2 Click at the point you want to place your text

3 Type in your text using the Enter key for line breaks

4 Click the drop down arrow next to the Layer field and select the desired layer

Section 7

46

Printing and Exporting

This section will

Printing options and procedures

Exporting data by copying and pasting

Exporting quantity results to Excel spreadsheets

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

47

Print Setup On-Screen Takeoff allows the user to print the image takeoff list and worksheet

1 Select File gt Print Setup The Print Setup dialog will open

2 Select a printer or leave the default selection listed (change from the default printer displayed by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the field)

3 Indicate page size and printer tray option (Source) Access page size options by clicking on the

down arrow at the right of the field

4 Choose Portrait or Landscape orientation

5 Click to accept and close the dialog

Printing Images The image area can include the electronic plans the takeoff objects added text and hot links To print a subset of these (for example just the takeoffs without the plans or the added text and hot link symbols) hide layers that you do not want to print (see Section 6 View and Hide Layers) When you are printing your images every page will show the scale of the takeoff you are printing

1 Click on the Image tab to display the area of your project

2 Select File gt Print (or Ctrl + P)

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

48

3 Select the desired view (What to print) and the Image Range

4 Click The second Print dialog will open

5 Change settings accordingly or click if you accept the default settings

Printing Takeoff Lists and Worksheets In Takeoff Lists and Worksheets you may hide columns to print only certain results or adjust column widths to fit the report within the page size selected

1 In Takeoff List or Worksheet view move your cursor to the right side of the columnrsquos title bar the cursor will display as a two-way arrow

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

49

2 Click and drag to adjust the width of the column Holding the mouse button you may

slide the title bar under the title bar to its left to hide the column completely

3 Select File gt Print or press Ctrl + P to access the Print dialog

4 Indicate desired printer and choose the number of copies

5 Click to print and close the dialog

When printing the condition list we suggest printing in landscape

To reset to the default column widths double-click on the right border of a column heading will reset the column to its right (or previously to its right before being hidden)

Print Preview 1 Select File gt Print Preview

2 Use and to vary your view 3 If viewing an image choose current full or scale view to see how it displays

4 For printed outputs that cover more than one page use and to view adjacent pages or click on the down arrow next to Page field and select the page you want displayed

Exporting Using the CopyPaste Feature You may copy all the data or sections from the worksheet and the takeoff list view in On-Screen Takeoff and paste it into another application When pasting into Excel the cell layout will be maintained

1 Highlight the areas you wish to paste Click and hold the left mouse button down as you drag the cursor over the area to be selected then releasing the mouse button

OR

2 Select the entire takeoff list quickly click on the left On-Screen Takeoff column header and hold and drag the cursor across the remaining column headings

The number of pages for the view selected will display in the lower left-hand corner The zoom percentage that applies to the view will be displayed in the lower right-hand corner next to page size of the drawing

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

50

3 In the worksheet view you may highlight rows by clicking on the numbered buttons to the left of each row clicking and dragging across column headings or clicking and dragging over individual cells in the worksheet

Click anywhere in the appropriate view to deselect the area

4 Once your selection is highlighted you may select Edit gt Copy or Ctrl C from the keyboard 5 On your monitor switch to the application into which you want to paste your selection 6 Select Edit gt Paste in the new application or simply press Ctrl + V to paste

The colored keys for conditions cannot be pasted

Using the Export Feature You may export condition quantities to specified cell location within an Excel worksheet file Cell target locations are assigned in the Results tab of the condition dialogs on the Export line relating to each quantity measurement type

On-Screen Takeoff will export takeoff quantity results for up to three different quantity types that you specify For instance you may want to know the number of square feet in a ceiling area as well as the number of linear feet in its perimeter

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

51

1 Bring up the Condition dialog by double-clicking on a condition in the takeoff dock bar or by

selecting the condition and clicking

2 Click on the Results tab to access its fields The default quantities for the condition type will display

3 For each results field click on the arrow to access the pull-down menu and select the appropriate quantity (for example SF LF EA etchellip)

4 Have your Excel spreadsheet opened and saved in a file

5 Specify the Excel spreadsheet cell locations where you want the results to go

6 For a cell in the first sheet of your spreadsheet type in the cell address (eg a1) Case is not important

7 For a cell on a successive sheet of your spreadsheet type in sheet the number followed by a comma and the cell address without any spaces (eg sheet2a1) Case is not important

8 Click

9 Select File gt Export gt Condition Qty to Excel

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

52

10 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

11 Click to export On-Screen Takeoff results to specified cell locations in the Excel file When you return to the Excel application you will see the values have been added to the specified cell locations in your spreadsheet

12 Save your Excel file

Exporting Worksheet to Excel

1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 From On-Screen Takeoff Select File gt Export gt Worksheet to Excel

4 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

5 Click When you return to the Excel application you will see the values from the Worksheet Tab have been added to your spreadsheet

6 Save your Excel file

Exporting Takeoff to CVS 1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 Click the Takeoff Tab in the project you want to export the information

4 Select File gt Export gt Takeoff to CSV

5 Browse to the location of the CSV spreadsheet file click file to select it

6 Click the Save

NOTE CSV files can be opened in Excel Lotus Access etc One may consider this option more of a ldquodumprdquo into a file

The Excel application must be active (it may be minimized on the application bar) with the target spreadsheet open in the application Otherwise an error will occur with the export operation that will affect both the On-Screen Takeofftrade file and the Excel spreadsheet

Section 8

53

Advanced Features

This section will

Some special features of working with condition objects in the takeoff area

Details of advanced options for conditions

Advanced features of the Project Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

54

Features to Use with Objects Roping Feature You can move copy or delete using this feature Using the Select tool (the pointer) you may select several objects at once by clicking and dragging an outline around the objects then releasing the mouse button Roping may select either objects completely within the outlined area (inclusive) or objects both within and touched by the outlined area (touching) Specify your roping preference under Tools gt Options

1 Click and hold the mouse button at a point on the screen near the objects to be selected and drag to surround the objects with an outline

2 Release the mouse button The objects will be selected

3 You may now

Move the group around on the page by clicking within the group dragging the mouse and releasing the button to place the objects

Delete the group of objects by clicking the Delete key or

Copy and paste by pressing Ctrl C to copy the group then Ctrl V to paste it The pasted copy of the grouped objects will appear slightly offset from the original objects

Section 8 Advanced Features

55

Applying a DropRun Count

Use the droprun feature when calculating quantities to take into account the drop or run of a linear condition such as electrical lines or plumbing pipes Drop or run lengths may be added separately to any linear condition on screen while a default droprun length may be indicated for a condition as a whole

1 Select the desired linear condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff Dock bar

2 Click the Change button in the toolbar to open the Change Condition dialog

3 Click the Advanced tab to access the advanced options and click inside the DropRun check box

4 Enter a default length to be applied to all of this condition Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches) You can leave the length blank and manually enter drop run on each segment drawn

5 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog

Edit DropRun Count

1 With the related linear condition in the Takeoff Dock bar highlighted or with the pointer tool selected

2 click on the desired linear object in the image takeoff area The Count button will become active

3 Click on the Count button (alternatively select Tools gt Count) The default droprun amount will show in the pop-up Count dialog (Default length will be zero if droprun has not been selected in this conditionrsquos properties)

4 Type in the desired length Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches)

5 Click the OK button The additional amount will be reflected in the corresponding quantity The new DropRun count will apply only to the object edited

Adding Text in Image View

On-Screen Takeoff allows you to place text comments around your quantity takeoffs that may be printed along with plan images and objects Text is automatically placed within the Annotation Layer (that includes text and hot links)

1 To place text on the image select the Text Tool and click at the point you want to place your text opening a text box

2 Type in your information clicking Enter for line breaks

3 When you are finished click the OK button to exit the text box

4 To reposition text simply click on the text (with the Text Tool active) to select it

5 Move the cursor over the text the cursor will now display as a four-way arrow

6 Click and drag the mouse to position the text as desired

Section 8 Advanced Features

56

1 To edit existing text use the Text Tool to double-click on the text to open the editing box

2 Enter additional text or use the Backspace key to delete text as necessary

Formatting Text Once created you may format the font size type style and color of your text

1 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Font or click on the Font button in the Takeoff Toolbar

2 Select the desired features (color options are disabled) and click the OK button

3 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Color or click on the Color button in the Takeoff Toolbar The Color dialog will open

4 Click on a color in the Basic Color palette or create a color and add to the Custom Colors palette (Be sure to click on the color in the Custom Colors palette to select it)

5 Click the OK button

Object Properties

Linear Objects

Linear objects may be set to connect at corners

A linear object may be set to trim automatically when crossing another linear object (Check the trim option under the advanced tab of the Condition dialog)

When you move a connected linear object objects automatically move and resize connected lines accordingly (quantities are then recalculated)

This feature requires that the connected linear object be moved using the center handles (does not apply when resizing the line from the ends)

Objects constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

Objects are measured from centerline to centerline

Section 8 Advanced Features

57

Area Objects When drawing an area use your escape key to undo the last line drawn You may reverse your

drawing of an area using the escape key

The area will not fill with color and pattern until the user double-clicks after the last line is set

Lines drawn to delineate an area object constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

After selecting an area to move or adjust position the mouse in the center to move the entire area position the mouse at the sides or corners to adjust the perimeter

Count Objects

All count objects are quantified by the physical number of objects per page and reported as EA for the UOM The quantity for the current Image View is (displayed in the Condition List) and the total quantity in your project is displayed in the Takeoff View and Worksheet View)

Square circle rectangle and triangle shaped count objects do not displace or subtract from other object quantities when placed on top of them However on the Advanced Tab for the count condition a connect property can be set (this is a check box) so that when a count object of this shape is put on top of a Linear type takeoff object it will move with the linear if said linear is moved

An opened-shaped count object must be placed within a linear object Opening shaped count objects may also be measured by linear foot or linear yard (EA SF and SY are also options) Opening shaped count items default to a width of 3rsquo 0rdquo at the time of creation This size can be changed The small medium and large size are not options on this type of condition anymore Check Backout on the Advanced tab for each Count object back out the footage (or yardage) of opening-shaped count objects in which they are placed

NOTE In order to see this Backout functionality (in quantity) for SY or SF deductions at least one of the

results for the Linear(s) this object will be placed on must be set to SY or SF and the count object must have a height quantity

Advanced Features of Conditions The Round Feature Under the Advanced tab of the linear and area Condition dialogues you may specify quantity rounding (in inches) For linear objects rounding applies to each linear object drawn For area objects rounding will apply to each segment of the area perimeter adjusting the perimeter and area calculations For example With a linear condition entering 12 in the Round field will round up each related linear object to the nearest 12 inches or one foot With this setting two walls of 1 4 would each round to 2 0 totaling 4 0

NOTE In the Takeoff Dock bar condition list and in the On-Screen Takeoff reports quantities will be displayed in whole numbers rounded up to the nearest foot However calculations are based on true quantities without rounding unless the Round Feature is engaged

Pitch Pitch may apply either to linear or area conditions It is measured in rise per linear foot Entering 12 indicates a 12 rise per 12 of linear distance (a pitch of 12 over 12) or an angle of 45deg

Section 8 Advanced Features

58

Advanced Features of Project Properties Selecting Multiple Pages

1 Select a single page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry

2 Drag the cursor down the column of numbers to select consecutive pages

3 Click on the blank button at the top of this column to select all pages in the Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

59

Changing Image Assigned to a Drawing 1 Select the page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry 2 Click the Change Image button The Change Image dialog box will appear

3 Navigate to the desired file and select by clicking on it

4 Click the Open button The electronic file assigned to the page will have been changed to reflect the new file choice

Changing Image File Path 1 Select pages as described above

2 Choose Change Folder

3 In the Change Folder dialog navigate to the appropriate folder

4 Click the OK button The file path will have been changed for the selected page entries

Delete a Page from Project Properties 1 Select the page you want to delete by clicking on its associated number (in the gray box at the

left of the entry)

2 Choose Delete Page

All Takeoff on the page will be deleted immediately and permanently

Section 8 Advanced Features

60

Advanced Features of Tool Options

Calculation Method On-Screen Takeoff has built-in calculation options to allow for faster work and faster saves until your takeoff is complete Calculation options are found by selecting Tools gt Options then clicking on the Calculation tab

Calculation method can be set to Automatic Automatic except Grids and Manual Manual will allow the program to operate more quickly while Automatic or Automatic except Grids allows the user to see quantity changes as takeoffs are made

In any mode you may press F9 to recalculate quantities for the On-Screen Takeoff current totals

Configuration Tab

When the ldquoPage Label (A01)rdquo radial button is chosen On-Screen Takeoff puts the numbered label on all the pages of in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar If the Page Descriptionrdquo radial button is chosen then a description of what takeoff is on that specific page will be shown in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar

This section of the configuration tab gives you options on how you want to export your information When the ldquoFolderSubfolder Namesrdquo radial button is chosen than on your file that you are exporting to will have all the conditions folders and subfolders In the Delimiter box you can choose the symbol that is needed to separate the information you are exporting Some files need semicolons () or colons () to make sure the information comes exported in is separated it the appropriate places

Section 8 Advanced Features

61

In previous versions of On-Screen Takeoff there are views that users need to have in order for them to display their information By either choosing ldquoOST 1xrdquo or ldquoOST 2xrdquo it will let the program know you want your columns of information exported in that specific format

When you have the Confirm Deletions radial button of ldquoYesrdquo chosen than every time you delete anything you will get a dialog box confirming your intentions of deletion

While working with your takeoff you have a choice to either view the legend of your conditions or hide it Choose whichever radial button that suits your needs

For those who prefer to use the Enter key to navigate in dialog boxes this option is just for that

Font Tab The Font tab is designed for you to make your own look and feel for the application At the bottom of this tab it will show you sample of the fonts and colors you have chosen

Renaming the Current Page You may change the name of the current page in the takeoff area of On-Screen Takeoff by selecting Edit gt Rename Page

This opens the Name Page dialog and you may simply type in a new name and click the Enter button The new name for the file will be reflected on the title bar for the page and in Project Properties

You also may access the Rename Page function by right-clicking in the takeoff area while in Image View and selecting the option from the pop-up menu that appears

Section 9

62

Saving and Exiting

This section will

Explain how to save projects

Show you how to safely exit the program

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

63

Saving Your Project

1 Select File gt Save 2 If your project has not previously been saved a Save dialog box will open to allow you to name

the file and choose the directory and folder in which to save your file 3 Once saved File gt Save will simply save the current version of the file

OR

4 Select File gt Save As then type in a new name for the file and save to the desired file path

The Auto-save Feature With the Auto-save feature On-Screen Takeoff automatically backs up your open project You may choose to have more than one level of backup files The first backup copy will have the extension b00 and successive files will be b01 b02 and so on If you have designated four levels of backup files after the fourth backup copy has been created (b03) the next file will be saved over the file with extension b00 Further backup saves will then rotate through the four backup files in the same way

1 Select Tools gt Options 2 In the Auto-save area (under the General tab) select the frequency of backup file creation (in

minutes) and the number of levels for the feature 3 You also may disengage the feature by clicking in the check box to clear it

The Auto-save feature automatically saves backup copies to the directory of the current project If you are working from a write-protected area such as a CD-ROM On-Screen Takeoff will place backup files in the On-Screen Takeoff folder

Exiting When you are finished using On-Screen Takeoff it is very easy to exit Exiting is very important because of security reasons If someone were to use your computer they could enter the application and view and manipulate information

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

64

On-Screen Takeoff closes the open project when you open another or create a new project or when you exit the program

1 Select File gt Exit

OR

2 You also may click at the upper right-hand corner of the application to exit

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

65

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer When you get your digitizer from GTCO you will need to connect it to your computer Follow the instructions outlined below to do this

Note For rollup digitizers the metal bar must be oriented to the top or right hand side

Connecting the Digitizer 1 Lay the digitizer out flat 2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer 3 Plug in the power adapter 4 Plug the interface (IO) cable into the digitizer 5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into an open serial port on computer

Note GTCO Technical support phone number is 410-381-6688 The electronic manual (on diskette) from GTCO contains more detailed installation and operation instructions for the GTCO digitizer model you have

Installing other Digitizer Drivers If you are using a GTCO Digitizer you will need to install the GTCO TabletWorks Drivers

If you are using a Digitizer not supported by GTCO Tablet Works 10 please contact the manufacturer of your digitizer for assistance with installation

Installing GTCO TabletWorks Drivers 1 Insert the On Center CD into the CD-ROM drive The CD Startup screen will open 2 Click on Install Software 3 Select Additional Software and Drivers 4 Select Digitizer Driver 5 Follow the instructions for installing TabletWorks 10

Adhering the Template The template is a small plastic sticker used to enable mouse function when using the digitizer with On-Screen Takeoff Place your template on your digitizer We suggest placing it in the bottom right corner of the digitizer about one inch inside the takeoff area

Note You may either peel off the back of the template and use the adhesive surface or you can tape the template down

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

66

Testing the Digitizer Drivers Before running OST you may test the digitizer by moving the stylus around on the digitizer pad it should move the mouse cursor (if mouse emulation is enabled)

If the digitizer does not move the mouse cursor on the screen

The superset codes may need to be reset Reset the superset codes by touching on the border of the digitizer with the stylus The digitizer should beep several times

The digitizer may not be communicating with the computer Be sure the COM port selected is correct Be sure the COM port selected is correct If you are not able to get the digitizer to move the mouse cursor you need to call GTCO technical support for help

Note The Mouse Emulation is not required for On-Screen Takeoff to work properly It is used only for the Template functionality if the digitizer is moving the cursor the wrong direction (up instead of sideways or vice-versa)

Click the L-shaped arrow symbol on the digitizer with the stylus

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

67

Appendix II Toolbar Items Main Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

68

Tool Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

69

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

70

Navigate Toolbar (Continued)

Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

71

Takeoff Toolbar (Continued)

Image Toolbar

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

72

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

This section will detail how to load plans from a F W Dodge CD-ROM into an On-Screen Takeoff project file ready for takeoffs

Dodge files may be added to the Project Properties dialog However loading the files in that way will load the files by number rather than name description If you want to load one page only from your Dodge CD You will have to rename the page to display the name rather than number of the file

To load plan files from a Dodge CD so that the files load sequentially by file number but are displayed by name rather than by number within your project follow the instructions below

Opening a Dodge project from a CD-ROM 1 Insert the CD into the drive 2 Choose File gt Custom 3 Choose Dodge Plans Project (plansdat) as the file type 4 Select the appropriate file type by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the Files of type

field 5 In the Look in field access your drive paths by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the

field then

Navigate to your CD-ROM drive Open the data folder and Open the Projects folder

6 Select the desired project and open its folder 7 Open the plansdat file 8 All the images will come in sequenced correctly for that job along with the full descriptions

(names) of each page If there is not a plans folder in the project folder then plans do not exist for that project on the CD Opening the plansdat file will yield an empty project

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

73

Appendix IV Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer The On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer is a limited version of On Center Softwarersquos commercial takeoff software If your status bar located at the very bottom of the main window says View Mode in the lower left-hand corner then you are using the Plan Viewer You can use the plan viewer to

View CD-based amp converted CAD drawings

View a previously created OST file and associated drawings

Download electronic plans online

Navigate through drawings

Quickly Takeoff linearsareas and counts

Zoom in to view the plan better

Print drawings directly from the viewer

Viewing an On-Screen Takeoff Project File

1 To open an OST file that was previously created with of On-Screen Takeoff 2 Select File gt Open 3 An Open dialog will appear if you do not see the OST file you are looking for select the

Look In drop down arrow 4 A drop down menu will appear listing the various folders drives and mapped drives located

on your computer select the correct drive or folder location and continue to browse to the location of your OST file

5 When you see your OST file double-click it to open it 6 Any takeoff and drawings should appear on the Image tab view

If you do not see the drawings but do see the colored takeoff layer the drawings may

not be located in the same place they were originally saved at Go to File gt Project Properties and check the Image File path for each listed page If the image file path is pointing to a CD drive make sure the CD is inside the CR-ROM

Downloading Electronic Plans If your Online Plan Service provides a special file format (OSX) required to use this feature of our plan viewer you can immediately downloaded all electronic plans of a project directly from our viewer

Most Plan Room web sites will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff when a request to download plans is made Your particular Plan Room may differ in operation so please contact the provider directly with questions on using the site

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

74

When you request to download or open a project file from a Plan Room you will usually have the open to open or save an OSX file Choosing open will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff Alternately you may choose to save the file to a local hard drive After you have saved the file either double-click it to launch On-Screen Takeoff or open the OSX file using On-Screen Takeoff by clicking File then Open and locating the file on your hard drive You will need to change the file type to OSX

After the OSX file is opened you will see an additional tab appear in the Conditions List window called Pages

The Pages tab shows the hierarchy of your project Gray file icons represent pages that have not been downloaded and blue icons represents pages that have been downloaded

To download a page simply double-click the page icon

If you wish to select a group of pages to download you can use the Ctrl or Shift key to multiple select them then click the Download button

If you wish to download all pages at once click the Download All button

Downloaded pages will now appear in the Project Properties dialog in the same order in which they appear in the Pages tab

Creating Quick Takeoffs With On-Screen Takeoff you can create quick takeoffs to measure quantities even if you dont have the full version of our program However using the Quick Takeoff functionality shows you just a fraction of what the full version can do

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar is located at the top of the image view It has three buttons designated for three types of takeoffs Linear Area and Count The Quantity drop down list will show secondary quantities for Linears and Areas The Units drop down allows you to select how you want your quantities displayed Feet Inches Yards Millimeters and Meters

NOTE Every time change the type of takeoff you are performing (switching from Area to Linear for example) the previous quantities and takeoff objects will disappear They will also disappear when you changes pages

NOTE You can use the Dimension Tool to basically measure the distance between two points or linears The distance will display on the status bar at the bottom of the application

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

75

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions General

Where is On-Screen Takeoff installed on my computer

Typically it is installed in CProgram FilesOn-Screen Takeoff

In Explorer how do I recognize On-Screen Takeoff file types

On-Screen Takeoff data is stored in a single file per job lsquojob name OSTrsquo On-Screen Takeoff templates are stored as lsquotemplate nameTPOrsquo

Can only one project at a time be open

Yes For that reason opening another project automatically closes the project on screen You will be asked to save any changes

Is only one scale allowed per page What about on drawings that have multiple detail sections on a page and each of those drawings have different scales

Yes For pages with drawings of different scales copy the drawing to another project page and set the appropriate scale

I cannot perform backout on an area that is along a linear

As a workaround use the On-Screen Takeoff layers feature to help you with this issue Electronic Images

How do I start a project from drawings that have been scanned and written to a CD-ROM

Open a new project Select File gt Project Properties and select Auto Add Navigate to your CD and the appropriate folder and select any image file in that location Click Open All files in the location will load into your project Recommended that images are copied from CD to hard drive for performance

If I get a disk of drawings in AutoCAD format (R13 or R14) can I read them in On-Screen Takeoff

Yes On-Screen Takeoff now reads DWG DXF and many other format that are saved with AutoCAD

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

76

When I click on the all pages button what is supposed to happen Currently nothing seems to change when I click on that button

The All Pages button is used to apply the Darken and Enhance Plans feature to all pages in the project (as opposed to only the current page on screen)

Is there a way to deduct a large skylight from an area condition

Yes with the related area condition selected in the Takeoff Dock bar unselect the Backout button on the Takeoff Toolbar then draw the Backout area The area quantity will be deducted from the related condition object and the linear measurement of the Backout perimeter will be added

Digitizer Issues

How do I connect a Digitizer to the computer

See Appendix I Connecting a Digitizer

The Place Template menu choice is disabled

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or the digitizer or the digitzer drivers are not installed

It wonrsquot let me select the Set Takeoff Area menu choice

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or no job is open a digitizer is not installed or the drivers are not installed

The digitizer stylus is not moving the cursor or crosshairs

Click S-0-1 superset on the digitizer

How do I convert my old GTCO Digitizer to work with On- Screen Takeofftrade

Call GTCO and they may be able to reconfigure your digitizer to be compatible with On-Screen Takeoff

Printing Issues Which Printers work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible printers include On-Screen Takeoff Hewlett Packard Epson and Canon printers If you are having printer difficulties please contact support and specify the type of printer along with other pertinent information Contact support at wwwoncentercomsupport or email supportoncentercom

Which Plotters work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible Plotters include Hewlett Packard DesignJet plotters and the EnCAD Cadjet II If you are having plotter difficulties please contact support and specify the type of plotter concerned

ViewingDisplay I can no longer see my condition list How do I get it back

The toolbars and Dock bars can be turned on and off through the View gt Toolbars menu options

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

77

This is also accessible by right-clicking in the toolbar area and selecting (or deselecting) a toolbar listed

I cannot view my folders in the condition list

Right-click in the Takeoff Dock barcondition list area and select Show Tree to display your folders

My Status Bar reads Viewer Mode and I am unable to draw conditions

On-Screen Takeoff needs to be Authorized Or you need to purchase an upgrade Click the Perform Advanced Takeoff button on the main toolbar

I hid a Dock bar and when I selected to view it again it appeared alongside the other Dock

bar instead of stacked on top of it How do I fix it

Pick up the Dock bar by clicking on the bar at the top and continuing to hold down the mouse button drag the Dock bar over the other one It will resize and appear stacked with the other

When I open image files from a CD the images are all upside down How do I get them right

side up

To flip pages from top to bottom follow the steps below 1 Click the All Pages button on the Image Toolbar (All Pages is engaged when the button

is not clicked) 2 Click the Flip Horizontal button on the Image Toolbar 3 Click the All Pages button again to disengage

Templates How do I create a Template

Follow the steps below 1 Create a typical project 2 Choose File gt Save As 3 Choose On-Screen Takeoff Template Files as the file type to save 4 Name the file This will save all of the condition setups as well as the layers for the

project

How do I create a new project from a template

Follow the steps below 1 Choose File gt New 2 Select a template from those listed in the New dialog This will open a new project with

conditions and layers saved from a previous project but no pages or takeoff

78

INDEX

Area Conditions 32

Area Objects 57

Auto Scrolling 20

Auto-save 63

Backout Mode 41

Calculation Method 60

Conditions 29

Configuration 60

Contents Tab 6

Continuous Mode 38

Count Conditions 33

Count Objects 57

Digitizer 10 65 76

Docking Toolbars 13

Dodge CD 72

Drawing 27 37

DropRun Count 55

Environment 18

Exiting 63

Exporting 49

Features 16

Font 61

Frequently Asked Questions 75

Grid 40

Help File 5

Hiding Toolbars 13

Hot Links 21

Image 19 59

Image files 9

Image Toolbar 12 71

Images 75

Index Tab 6

Layers 43

Linear Conditions 31

Linear Objects 56

Main Toolbar 12 67

Menus 14

Moving Toolbars 13

Navigate Toolbar 12 69

Navigating 20

On-Screen Takeofftrade 2

Page 59 61

Pages 20 25 28

Plan Viewer 73

Plans 26

Printing 47 76

Project Properties 25

Projects 22

Quick Start Video 18

Resizing Toolbars 13

Roping 54

Saving 63

Scale 28

Search Tab 7

Selecting Objects 42

Setup 8

Start On-Screen Takeofftrade 17

System Requirements 9

Takeoff 19 27

Takeoff Toolbar 70 71

Takeoff Toolbar 12

Template Files 23

TIF (Group4) 9

Tool Toolbar 12 68

Toolbar 67

Toolbars 12

View Toolbar 12 69

Viewing Toolbars 12

Worksheet 20

Zone Conditions 33

Zoom Toolbar 12 69

  • On-Screen Takeoff Lite
  • Table of Contents
  • Section 1 - Introduction
  • Section 2 - Setup
  • Section 3 - Toolbars and Menus
  • Section 4 - Features
  • Section 5 - Projects
  • Section 6 - Conditions and Takeoff
  • Section 7 - Printing and Exporting
  • Section 8 - Advanced Features
  • Section 9 - Saving and Exiting
  • Appendix I - Installing Your Digitizer
  • Appendix II - Toolbar Items
  • Appendix III - Loading Plans from a Dodge CD
  • Appendix IV - Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer
  • Appendix V - Frequently Asked Questions
  • Index

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

39

the line and in the center of the line

3 Move the cursor over the center handles until the cursor becomes a two-way arrow

4 Click and drag in the direction of the curve bending the line as you move the cursor Release to set the curve (The line you began with will disappear)

Draw a circle by drawing two curved lines connected

Drawing an Area Object Area conditions are drawn similarly to continuous mode lines You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete your area takeoff

NOTE When drawing an area do not intersect the perimeter or line of the object you are drawing

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

3 The area will be filled with the pattern set for that condition

NOTE The simulated circle will be good enough for you to be able to make a bid

To create a circular area click from point to point with very short distances in between points simulating a circlersquos perimeter Double-click after setting the last point to set the area

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

40

Grid Options Grids give you an added advantage when installing materials such as tiles Use this feature to get a count for how many tiles are needed for an area

1 Double-click on an area condition in the Takeoff dock bar to open its Condition dialog

2 Click on the Advanced tab to show its options

3 Check the box next to Grid by clicking in it

4 Indicate the dimensions of the cell matrix in inches (For example 200 x 400)

5 Under Results tab choose each (EA) for one of the results fields This will tabulate a number of grid cells (including partial grid cells) in area

6 Click to save your settings

7 Use the Move Grid and Rotate Grid features in the Tools menu to manipulate the grid as desired

Grid Calculation

1 Go to Tools gt Options menu

1 Specify if On-Screen Takeoff automatically should Calculate Grid Position

2 If AreaGrid Size is selected On-Screen Takeoff will calculate the number of items needed to fill the grid based on grid demintions

3 Click to accept and close the dialog

To move a line at any angle (regardless of default setting) press the Shift key while moving the mouse

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

41

Backout Mode This feature allows you to take out part of an area and deduct that amount of square footage

1 Select Tools gt Backout Mode

2 Outline the are you want backed out as you would when drawing a regular area object (see Drawing an Area Object)

3 The outlined area will clear and quantities will be recalculated

NOTE The perimeter of the backout area will be added to the LF quantity for that condition

Drawing a Count Object Square triangle rectangle and circle shaped count objects can easily be placed on images

1 Select the condition

2 Click in the location where you want the object to appear

3 To place an opening-shaped count item like a door or window you must click over an existing linear object such as a wall

4 On the Results tab you can change the height properties to give you the result you need

5 If Backout is checked on the advanced tab for each count opening the opening-shaped count item will back out a corresponding section of the linear object

Opening shaped count items are sized at 3rsquo0rdquo by default

Drawing a Zone Zones are drawn in the same way as area objects and may be any polygonal shape You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete the zone perimeter

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

42

Selecting Objects

1 Use the Select Tool to select objects

You can also select all objects that correspond to a condition

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Right-click and choose Select All

3 All objects with this condition will be highlighted with squares as an outline

Moving and Resizing Objects Linear

1 To move or resize a linear object click anywhere on the line to select it

2 To move the line position your pointer over the center handles When the mouse is positioned over the handles you will see a two-way arrow You will only be able to move the line in the direction of the arrows

3 Drag the line to a new position

4 Clicking and dragging the handles on the ends of the line will allow you to lengthen or shorten your line

Area and Zone

1 To move an area object or zone in its entirety click and drag it to its new position

2 Grabbing a handle at a corner or intersection of the object will allow you to adjust and change its perimeter

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

43

Count 1 To move a square circle rectangle or triangle shaped count object click and drag

2 Click and drag an opening shaped count object along the length of the linear object to the desired position then release

NOTE An opening shaped count object may not be moved from its associated linear condition object however it may be moved up and down the length of the linear object

Layers On-Screen Takeoff allows you to sort and separate your takeoff objects within the same job and on the same page On-Screen Takeoff gives you this flexibility through the use of layers

By assigning different conditions to different layers (for example differentiating between floors ceilings and walls) you can choose to view all layers or turn off certain layers to display and print the remaining groups of conditions only You may also remove the background image of electronic plans add text and hot link symbols or print only your condition takeoffs

Layers are only available in Full Mode If you are in View or Lite Mode and would like to use this

feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade Default Layers

On-Screen Takeoff begins every project with three default layers Image Annotation and Default The Image layer holds the electronic plan files you may have in your project The Annotation layer possesses all text notations highlighting and hot links in the project The Default layer will appear in the Condition dialog when creating or editing a condition (listed in the takeoff dock bar) Conditions are assigned to the Default layer unless otherwise specified by the user

Creating Layers To assign a condition to a layer other than the default layer you must first create additional layers for your project

1 Select View gt Layers to open the Layers dialog

2 Click An unnamed layer will be added

3 Click within the empty box and type a name for your layer (for example Wall)

4 New layers are added as active layers The adjacent box under the Show column will be checked

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

44

Assigning a Layer to a Condition 1 Open the Condition dialog box by creating a new condition or editing an existing condition

2 Under the General tab click on the down arrow in the Layer field to display optional layers

3 Select the desired layer for the condition Only the Default layer and layers you have added will be displayed

4 Click

View and Hide Layers

1 Select View gt Layers

2 Under the Show column check the box to view or remove the check (by clicking on it) to hide the specific layer

3 Click to accept and close the Layers dialog

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

45

Assigning Text to a Layer When adding text to an image On-Screen Takeoff has the capability to assign the text to a specified layer

1 Select the Text Tool

2 Click at the point you want to place your text

3 Type in your text using the Enter key for line breaks

4 Click the drop down arrow next to the Layer field and select the desired layer

Section 7

46

Printing and Exporting

This section will

Printing options and procedures

Exporting data by copying and pasting

Exporting quantity results to Excel spreadsheets

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

47

Print Setup On-Screen Takeoff allows the user to print the image takeoff list and worksheet

1 Select File gt Print Setup The Print Setup dialog will open

2 Select a printer or leave the default selection listed (change from the default printer displayed by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the field)

3 Indicate page size and printer tray option (Source) Access page size options by clicking on the

down arrow at the right of the field

4 Choose Portrait or Landscape orientation

5 Click to accept and close the dialog

Printing Images The image area can include the electronic plans the takeoff objects added text and hot links To print a subset of these (for example just the takeoffs without the plans or the added text and hot link symbols) hide layers that you do not want to print (see Section 6 View and Hide Layers) When you are printing your images every page will show the scale of the takeoff you are printing

1 Click on the Image tab to display the area of your project

2 Select File gt Print (or Ctrl + P)

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

48

3 Select the desired view (What to print) and the Image Range

4 Click The second Print dialog will open

5 Change settings accordingly or click if you accept the default settings

Printing Takeoff Lists and Worksheets In Takeoff Lists and Worksheets you may hide columns to print only certain results or adjust column widths to fit the report within the page size selected

1 In Takeoff List or Worksheet view move your cursor to the right side of the columnrsquos title bar the cursor will display as a two-way arrow

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

49

2 Click and drag to adjust the width of the column Holding the mouse button you may

slide the title bar under the title bar to its left to hide the column completely

3 Select File gt Print or press Ctrl + P to access the Print dialog

4 Indicate desired printer and choose the number of copies

5 Click to print and close the dialog

When printing the condition list we suggest printing in landscape

To reset to the default column widths double-click on the right border of a column heading will reset the column to its right (or previously to its right before being hidden)

Print Preview 1 Select File gt Print Preview

2 Use and to vary your view 3 If viewing an image choose current full or scale view to see how it displays

4 For printed outputs that cover more than one page use and to view adjacent pages or click on the down arrow next to Page field and select the page you want displayed

Exporting Using the CopyPaste Feature You may copy all the data or sections from the worksheet and the takeoff list view in On-Screen Takeoff and paste it into another application When pasting into Excel the cell layout will be maintained

1 Highlight the areas you wish to paste Click and hold the left mouse button down as you drag the cursor over the area to be selected then releasing the mouse button

OR

2 Select the entire takeoff list quickly click on the left On-Screen Takeoff column header and hold and drag the cursor across the remaining column headings

The number of pages for the view selected will display in the lower left-hand corner The zoom percentage that applies to the view will be displayed in the lower right-hand corner next to page size of the drawing

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

50

3 In the worksheet view you may highlight rows by clicking on the numbered buttons to the left of each row clicking and dragging across column headings or clicking and dragging over individual cells in the worksheet

Click anywhere in the appropriate view to deselect the area

4 Once your selection is highlighted you may select Edit gt Copy or Ctrl C from the keyboard 5 On your monitor switch to the application into which you want to paste your selection 6 Select Edit gt Paste in the new application or simply press Ctrl + V to paste

The colored keys for conditions cannot be pasted

Using the Export Feature You may export condition quantities to specified cell location within an Excel worksheet file Cell target locations are assigned in the Results tab of the condition dialogs on the Export line relating to each quantity measurement type

On-Screen Takeoff will export takeoff quantity results for up to three different quantity types that you specify For instance you may want to know the number of square feet in a ceiling area as well as the number of linear feet in its perimeter

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

51

1 Bring up the Condition dialog by double-clicking on a condition in the takeoff dock bar or by

selecting the condition and clicking

2 Click on the Results tab to access its fields The default quantities for the condition type will display

3 For each results field click on the arrow to access the pull-down menu and select the appropriate quantity (for example SF LF EA etchellip)

4 Have your Excel spreadsheet opened and saved in a file

5 Specify the Excel spreadsheet cell locations where you want the results to go

6 For a cell in the first sheet of your spreadsheet type in the cell address (eg a1) Case is not important

7 For a cell on a successive sheet of your spreadsheet type in sheet the number followed by a comma and the cell address without any spaces (eg sheet2a1) Case is not important

8 Click

9 Select File gt Export gt Condition Qty to Excel

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

52

10 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

11 Click to export On-Screen Takeoff results to specified cell locations in the Excel file When you return to the Excel application you will see the values have been added to the specified cell locations in your spreadsheet

12 Save your Excel file

Exporting Worksheet to Excel

1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 From On-Screen Takeoff Select File gt Export gt Worksheet to Excel

4 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

5 Click When you return to the Excel application you will see the values from the Worksheet Tab have been added to your spreadsheet

6 Save your Excel file

Exporting Takeoff to CVS 1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 Click the Takeoff Tab in the project you want to export the information

4 Select File gt Export gt Takeoff to CSV

5 Browse to the location of the CSV spreadsheet file click file to select it

6 Click the Save

NOTE CSV files can be opened in Excel Lotus Access etc One may consider this option more of a ldquodumprdquo into a file

The Excel application must be active (it may be minimized on the application bar) with the target spreadsheet open in the application Otherwise an error will occur with the export operation that will affect both the On-Screen Takeofftrade file and the Excel spreadsheet

Section 8

53

Advanced Features

This section will

Some special features of working with condition objects in the takeoff area

Details of advanced options for conditions

Advanced features of the Project Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

54

Features to Use with Objects Roping Feature You can move copy or delete using this feature Using the Select tool (the pointer) you may select several objects at once by clicking and dragging an outline around the objects then releasing the mouse button Roping may select either objects completely within the outlined area (inclusive) or objects both within and touched by the outlined area (touching) Specify your roping preference under Tools gt Options

1 Click and hold the mouse button at a point on the screen near the objects to be selected and drag to surround the objects with an outline

2 Release the mouse button The objects will be selected

3 You may now

Move the group around on the page by clicking within the group dragging the mouse and releasing the button to place the objects

Delete the group of objects by clicking the Delete key or

Copy and paste by pressing Ctrl C to copy the group then Ctrl V to paste it The pasted copy of the grouped objects will appear slightly offset from the original objects

Section 8 Advanced Features

55

Applying a DropRun Count

Use the droprun feature when calculating quantities to take into account the drop or run of a linear condition such as electrical lines or plumbing pipes Drop or run lengths may be added separately to any linear condition on screen while a default droprun length may be indicated for a condition as a whole

1 Select the desired linear condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff Dock bar

2 Click the Change button in the toolbar to open the Change Condition dialog

3 Click the Advanced tab to access the advanced options and click inside the DropRun check box

4 Enter a default length to be applied to all of this condition Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches) You can leave the length blank and manually enter drop run on each segment drawn

5 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog

Edit DropRun Count

1 With the related linear condition in the Takeoff Dock bar highlighted or with the pointer tool selected

2 click on the desired linear object in the image takeoff area The Count button will become active

3 Click on the Count button (alternatively select Tools gt Count) The default droprun amount will show in the pop-up Count dialog (Default length will be zero if droprun has not been selected in this conditionrsquos properties)

4 Type in the desired length Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches)

5 Click the OK button The additional amount will be reflected in the corresponding quantity The new DropRun count will apply only to the object edited

Adding Text in Image View

On-Screen Takeoff allows you to place text comments around your quantity takeoffs that may be printed along with plan images and objects Text is automatically placed within the Annotation Layer (that includes text and hot links)

1 To place text on the image select the Text Tool and click at the point you want to place your text opening a text box

2 Type in your information clicking Enter for line breaks

3 When you are finished click the OK button to exit the text box

4 To reposition text simply click on the text (with the Text Tool active) to select it

5 Move the cursor over the text the cursor will now display as a four-way arrow

6 Click and drag the mouse to position the text as desired

Section 8 Advanced Features

56

1 To edit existing text use the Text Tool to double-click on the text to open the editing box

2 Enter additional text or use the Backspace key to delete text as necessary

Formatting Text Once created you may format the font size type style and color of your text

1 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Font or click on the Font button in the Takeoff Toolbar

2 Select the desired features (color options are disabled) and click the OK button

3 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Color or click on the Color button in the Takeoff Toolbar The Color dialog will open

4 Click on a color in the Basic Color palette or create a color and add to the Custom Colors palette (Be sure to click on the color in the Custom Colors palette to select it)

5 Click the OK button

Object Properties

Linear Objects

Linear objects may be set to connect at corners

A linear object may be set to trim automatically when crossing another linear object (Check the trim option under the advanced tab of the Condition dialog)

When you move a connected linear object objects automatically move and resize connected lines accordingly (quantities are then recalculated)

This feature requires that the connected linear object be moved using the center handles (does not apply when resizing the line from the ends)

Objects constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

Objects are measured from centerline to centerline

Section 8 Advanced Features

57

Area Objects When drawing an area use your escape key to undo the last line drawn You may reverse your

drawing of an area using the escape key

The area will not fill with color and pattern until the user double-clicks after the last line is set

Lines drawn to delineate an area object constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

After selecting an area to move or adjust position the mouse in the center to move the entire area position the mouse at the sides or corners to adjust the perimeter

Count Objects

All count objects are quantified by the physical number of objects per page and reported as EA for the UOM The quantity for the current Image View is (displayed in the Condition List) and the total quantity in your project is displayed in the Takeoff View and Worksheet View)

Square circle rectangle and triangle shaped count objects do not displace or subtract from other object quantities when placed on top of them However on the Advanced Tab for the count condition a connect property can be set (this is a check box) so that when a count object of this shape is put on top of a Linear type takeoff object it will move with the linear if said linear is moved

An opened-shaped count object must be placed within a linear object Opening shaped count objects may also be measured by linear foot or linear yard (EA SF and SY are also options) Opening shaped count items default to a width of 3rsquo 0rdquo at the time of creation This size can be changed The small medium and large size are not options on this type of condition anymore Check Backout on the Advanced tab for each Count object back out the footage (or yardage) of opening-shaped count objects in which they are placed

NOTE In order to see this Backout functionality (in quantity) for SY or SF deductions at least one of the

results for the Linear(s) this object will be placed on must be set to SY or SF and the count object must have a height quantity

Advanced Features of Conditions The Round Feature Under the Advanced tab of the linear and area Condition dialogues you may specify quantity rounding (in inches) For linear objects rounding applies to each linear object drawn For area objects rounding will apply to each segment of the area perimeter adjusting the perimeter and area calculations For example With a linear condition entering 12 in the Round field will round up each related linear object to the nearest 12 inches or one foot With this setting two walls of 1 4 would each round to 2 0 totaling 4 0

NOTE In the Takeoff Dock bar condition list and in the On-Screen Takeoff reports quantities will be displayed in whole numbers rounded up to the nearest foot However calculations are based on true quantities without rounding unless the Round Feature is engaged

Pitch Pitch may apply either to linear or area conditions It is measured in rise per linear foot Entering 12 indicates a 12 rise per 12 of linear distance (a pitch of 12 over 12) or an angle of 45deg

Section 8 Advanced Features

58

Advanced Features of Project Properties Selecting Multiple Pages

1 Select a single page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry

2 Drag the cursor down the column of numbers to select consecutive pages

3 Click on the blank button at the top of this column to select all pages in the Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

59

Changing Image Assigned to a Drawing 1 Select the page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry 2 Click the Change Image button The Change Image dialog box will appear

3 Navigate to the desired file and select by clicking on it

4 Click the Open button The electronic file assigned to the page will have been changed to reflect the new file choice

Changing Image File Path 1 Select pages as described above

2 Choose Change Folder

3 In the Change Folder dialog navigate to the appropriate folder

4 Click the OK button The file path will have been changed for the selected page entries

Delete a Page from Project Properties 1 Select the page you want to delete by clicking on its associated number (in the gray box at the

left of the entry)

2 Choose Delete Page

All Takeoff on the page will be deleted immediately and permanently

Section 8 Advanced Features

60

Advanced Features of Tool Options

Calculation Method On-Screen Takeoff has built-in calculation options to allow for faster work and faster saves until your takeoff is complete Calculation options are found by selecting Tools gt Options then clicking on the Calculation tab

Calculation method can be set to Automatic Automatic except Grids and Manual Manual will allow the program to operate more quickly while Automatic or Automatic except Grids allows the user to see quantity changes as takeoffs are made

In any mode you may press F9 to recalculate quantities for the On-Screen Takeoff current totals

Configuration Tab

When the ldquoPage Label (A01)rdquo radial button is chosen On-Screen Takeoff puts the numbered label on all the pages of in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar If the Page Descriptionrdquo radial button is chosen then a description of what takeoff is on that specific page will be shown in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar

This section of the configuration tab gives you options on how you want to export your information When the ldquoFolderSubfolder Namesrdquo radial button is chosen than on your file that you are exporting to will have all the conditions folders and subfolders In the Delimiter box you can choose the symbol that is needed to separate the information you are exporting Some files need semicolons () or colons () to make sure the information comes exported in is separated it the appropriate places

Section 8 Advanced Features

61

In previous versions of On-Screen Takeoff there are views that users need to have in order for them to display their information By either choosing ldquoOST 1xrdquo or ldquoOST 2xrdquo it will let the program know you want your columns of information exported in that specific format

When you have the Confirm Deletions radial button of ldquoYesrdquo chosen than every time you delete anything you will get a dialog box confirming your intentions of deletion

While working with your takeoff you have a choice to either view the legend of your conditions or hide it Choose whichever radial button that suits your needs

For those who prefer to use the Enter key to navigate in dialog boxes this option is just for that

Font Tab The Font tab is designed for you to make your own look and feel for the application At the bottom of this tab it will show you sample of the fonts and colors you have chosen

Renaming the Current Page You may change the name of the current page in the takeoff area of On-Screen Takeoff by selecting Edit gt Rename Page

This opens the Name Page dialog and you may simply type in a new name and click the Enter button The new name for the file will be reflected on the title bar for the page and in Project Properties

You also may access the Rename Page function by right-clicking in the takeoff area while in Image View and selecting the option from the pop-up menu that appears

Section 9

62

Saving and Exiting

This section will

Explain how to save projects

Show you how to safely exit the program

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

63

Saving Your Project

1 Select File gt Save 2 If your project has not previously been saved a Save dialog box will open to allow you to name

the file and choose the directory and folder in which to save your file 3 Once saved File gt Save will simply save the current version of the file

OR

4 Select File gt Save As then type in a new name for the file and save to the desired file path

The Auto-save Feature With the Auto-save feature On-Screen Takeoff automatically backs up your open project You may choose to have more than one level of backup files The first backup copy will have the extension b00 and successive files will be b01 b02 and so on If you have designated four levels of backup files after the fourth backup copy has been created (b03) the next file will be saved over the file with extension b00 Further backup saves will then rotate through the four backup files in the same way

1 Select Tools gt Options 2 In the Auto-save area (under the General tab) select the frequency of backup file creation (in

minutes) and the number of levels for the feature 3 You also may disengage the feature by clicking in the check box to clear it

The Auto-save feature automatically saves backup copies to the directory of the current project If you are working from a write-protected area such as a CD-ROM On-Screen Takeoff will place backup files in the On-Screen Takeoff folder

Exiting When you are finished using On-Screen Takeoff it is very easy to exit Exiting is very important because of security reasons If someone were to use your computer they could enter the application and view and manipulate information

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

64

On-Screen Takeoff closes the open project when you open another or create a new project or when you exit the program

1 Select File gt Exit

OR

2 You also may click at the upper right-hand corner of the application to exit

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

65

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer When you get your digitizer from GTCO you will need to connect it to your computer Follow the instructions outlined below to do this

Note For rollup digitizers the metal bar must be oriented to the top or right hand side

Connecting the Digitizer 1 Lay the digitizer out flat 2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer 3 Plug in the power adapter 4 Plug the interface (IO) cable into the digitizer 5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into an open serial port on computer

Note GTCO Technical support phone number is 410-381-6688 The electronic manual (on diskette) from GTCO contains more detailed installation and operation instructions for the GTCO digitizer model you have

Installing other Digitizer Drivers If you are using a GTCO Digitizer you will need to install the GTCO TabletWorks Drivers

If you are using a Digitizer not supported by GTCO Tablet Works 10 please contact the manufacturer of your digitizer for assistance with installation

Installing GTCO TabletWorks Drivers 1 Insert the On Center CD into the CD-ROM drive The CD Startup screen will open 2 Click on Install Software 3 Select Additional Software and Drivers 4 Select Digitizer Driver 5 Follow the instructions for installing TabletWorks 10

Adhering the Template The template is a small plastic sticker used to enable mouse function when using the digitizer with On-Screen Takeoff Place your template on your digitizer We suggest placing it in the bottom right corner of the digitizer about one inch inside the takeoff area

Note You may either peel off the back of the template and use the adhesive surface or you can tape the template down

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

66

Testing the Digitizer Drivers Before running OST you may test the digitizer by moving the stylus around on the digitizer pad it should move the mouse cursor (if mouse emulation is enabled)

If the digitizer does not move the mouse cursor on the screen

The superset codes may need to be reset Reset the superset codes by touching on the border of the digitizer with the stylus The digitizer should beep several times

The digitizer may not be communicating with the computer Be sure the COM port selected is correct Be sure the COM port selected is correct If you are not able to get the digitizer to move the mouse cursor you need to call GTCO technical support for help

Note The Mouse Emulation is not required for On-Screen Takeoff to work properly It is used only for the Template functionality if the digitizer is moving the cursor the wrong direction (up instead of sideways or vice-versa)

Click the L-shaped arrow symbol on the digitizer with the stylus

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

67

Appendix II Toolbar Items Main Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

68

Tool Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

69

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

70

Navigate Toolbar (Continued)

Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

71

Takeoff Toolbar (Continued)

Image Toolbar

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

72

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

This section will detail how to load plans from a F W Dodge CD-ROM into an On-Screen Takeoff project file ready for takeoffs

Dodge files may be added to the Project Properties dialog However loading the files in that way will load the files by number rather than name description If you want to load one page only from your Dodge CD You will have to rename the page to display the name rather than number of the file

To load plan files from a Dodge CD so that the files load sequentially by file number but are displayed by name rather than by number within your project follow the instructions below

Opening a Dodge project from a CD-ROM 1 Insert the CD into the drive 2 Choose File gt Custom 3 Choose Dodge Plans Project (plansdat) as the file type 4 Select the appropriate file type by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the Files of type

field 5 In the Look in field access your drive paths by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the

field then

Navigate to your CD-ROM drive Open the data folder and Open the Projects folder

6 Select the desired project and open its folder 7 Open the plansdat file 8 All the images will come in sequenced correctly for that job along with the full descriptions

(names) of each page If there is not a plans folder in the project folder then plans do not exist for that project on the CD Opening the plansdat file will yield an empty project

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

73

Appendix IV Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer The On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer is a limited version of On Center Softwarersquos commercial takeoff software If your status bar located at the very bottom of the main window says View Mode in the lower left-hand corner then you are using the Plan Viewer You can use the plan viewer to

View CD-based amp converted CAD drawings

View a previously created OST file and associated drawings

Download electronic plans online

Navigate through drawings

Quickly Takeoff linearsareas and counts

Zoom in to view the plan better

Print drawings directly from the viewer

Viewing an On-Screen Takeoff Project File

1 To open an OST file that was previously created with of On-Screen Takeoff 2 Select File gt Open 3 An Open dialog will appear if you do not see the OST file you are looking for select the

Look In drop down arrow 4 A drop down menu will appear listing the various folders drives and mapped drives located

on your computer select the correct drive or folder location and continue to browse to the location of your OST file

5 When you see your OST file double-click it to open it 6 Any takeoff and drawings should appear on the Image tab view

If you do not see the drawings but do see the colored takeoff layer the drawings may

not be located in the same place they were originally saved at Go to File gt Project Properties and check the Image File path for each listed page If the image file path is pointing to a CD drive make sure the CD is inside the CR-ROM

Downloading Electronic Plans If your Online Plan Service provides a special file format (OSX) required to use this feature of our plan viewer you can immediately downloaded all electronic plans of a project directly from our viewer

Most Plan Room web sites will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff when a request to download plans is made Your particular Plan Room may differ in operation so please contact the provider directly with questions on using the site

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

74

When you request to download or open a project file from a Plan Room you will usually have the open to open or save an OSX file Choosing open will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff Alternately you may choose to save the file to a local hard drive After you have saved the file either double-click it to launch On-Screen Takeoff or open the OSX file using On-Screen Takeoff by clicking File then Open and locating the file on your hard drive You will need to change the file type to OSX

After the OSX file is opened you will see an additional tab appear in the Conditions List window called Pages

The Pages tab shows the hierarchy of your project Gray file icons represent pages that have not been downloaded and blue icons represents pages that have been downloaded

To download a page simply double-click the page icon

If you wish to select a group of pages to download you can use the Ctrl or Shift key to multiple select them then click the Download button

If you wish to download all pages at once click the Download All button

Downloaded pages will now appear in the Project Properties dialog in the same order in which they appear in the Pages tab

Creating Quick Takeoffs With On-Screen Takeoff you can create quick takeoffs to measure quantities even if you dont have the full version of our program However using the Quick Takeoff functionality shows you just a fraction of what the full version can do

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar is located at the top of the image view It has three buttons designated for three types of takeoffs Linear Area and Count The Quantity drop down list will show secondary quantities for Linears and Areas The Units drop down allows you to select how you want your quantities displayed Feet Inches Yards Millimeters and Meters

NOTE Every time change the type of takeoff you are performing (switching from Area to Linear for example) the previous quantities and takeoff objects will disappear They will also disappear when you changes pages

NOTE You can use the Dimension Tool to basically measure the distance between two points or linears The distance will display on the status bar at the bottom of the application

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

75

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions General

Where is On-Screen Takeoff installed on my computer

Typically it is installed in CProgram FilesOn-Screen Takeoff

In Explorer how do I recognize On-Screen Takeoff file types

On-Screen Takeoff data is stored in a single file per job lsquojob name OSTrsquo On-Screen Takeoff templates are stored as lsquotemplate nameTPOrsquo

Can only one project at a time be open

Yes For that reason opening another project automatically closes the project on screen You will be asked to save any changes

Is only one scale allowed per page What about on drawings that have multiple detail sections on a page and each of those drawings have different scales

Yes For pages with drawings of different scales copy the drawing to another project page and set the appropriate scale

I cannot perform backout on an area that is along a linear

As a workaround use the On-Screen Takeoff layers feature to help you with this issue Electronic Images

How do I start a project from drawings that have been scanned and written to a CD-ROM

Open a new project Select File gt Project Properties and select Auto Add Navigate to your CD and the appropriate folder and select any image file in that location Click Open All files in the location will load into your project Recommended that images are copied from CD to hard drive for performance

If I get a disk of drawings in AutoCAD format (R13 or R14) can I read them in On-Screen Takeoff

Yes On-Screen Takeoff now reads DWG DXF and many other format that are saved with AutoCAD

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

76

When I click on the all pages button what is supposed to happen Currently nothing seems to change when I click on that button

The All Pages button is used to apply the Darken and Enhance Plans feature to all pages in the project (as opposed to only the current page on screen)

Is there a way to deduct a large skylight from an area condition

Yes with the related area condition selected in the Takeoff Dock bar unselect the Backout button on the Takeoff Toolbar then draw the Backout area The area quantity will be deducted from the related condition object and the linear measurement of the Backout perimeter will be added

Digitizer Issues

How do I connect a Digitizer to the computer

See Appendix I Connecting a Digitizer

The Place Template menu choice is disabled

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or the digitizer or the digitzer drivers are not installed

It wonrsquot let me select the Set Takeoff Area menu choice

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or no job is open a digitizer is not installed or the drivers are not installed

The digitizer stylus is not moving the cursor or crosshairs

Click S-0-1 superset on the digitizer

How do I convert my old GTCO Digitizer to work with On- Screen Takeofftrade

Call GTCO and they may be able to reconfigure your digitizer to be compatible with On-Screen Takeoff

Printing Issues Which Printers work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible printers include On-Screen Takeoff Hewlett Packard Epson and Canon printers If you are having printer difficulties please contact support and specify the type of printer along with other pertinent information Contact support at wwwoncentercomsupport or email supportoncentercom

Which Plotters work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible Plotters include Hewlett Packard DesignJet plotters and the EnCAD Cadjet II If you are having plotter difficulties please contact support and specify the type of plotter concerned

ViewingDisplay I can no longer see my condition list How do I get it back

The toolbars and Dock bars can be turned on and off through the View gt Toolbars menu options

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

77

This is also accessible by right-clicking in the toolbar area and selecting (or deselecting) a toolbar listed

I cannot view my folders in the condition list

Right-click in the Takeoff Dock barcondition list area and select Show Tree to display your folders

My Status Bar reads Viewer Mode and I am unable to draw conditions

On-Screen Takeoff needs to be Authorized Or you need to purchase an upgrade Click the Perform Advanced Takeoff button on the main toolbar

I hid a Dock bar and when I selected to view it again it appeared alongside the other Dock

bar instead of stacked on top of it How do I fix it

Pick up the Dock bar by clicking on the bar at the top and continuing to hold down the mouse button drag the Dock bar over the other one It will resize and appear stacked with the other

When I open image files from a CD the images are all upside down How do I get them right

side up

To flip pages from top to bottom follow the steps below 1 Click the All Pages button on the Image Toolbar (All Pages is engaged when the button

is not clicked) 2 Click the Flip Horizontal button on the Image Toolbar 3 Click the All Pages button again to disengage

Templates How do I create a Template

Follow the steps below 1 Create a typical project 2 Choose File gt Save As 3 Choose On-Screen Takeoff Template Files as the file type to save 4 Name the file This will save all of the condition setups as well as the layers for the

project

How do I create a new project from a template

Follow the steps below 1 Choose File gt New 2 Select a template from those listed in the New dialog This will open a new project with

conditions and layers saved from a previous project but no pages or takeoff

78

INDEX

Area Conditions 32

Area Objects 57

Auto Scrolling 20

Auto-save 63

Backout Mode 41

Calculation Method 60

Conditions 29

Configuration 60

Contents Tab 6

Continuous Mode 38

Count Conditions 33

Count Objects 57

Digitizer 10 65 76

Docking Toolbars 13

Dodge CD 72

Drawing 27 37

DropRun Count 55

Environment 18

Exiting 63

Exporting 49

Features 16

Font 61

Frequently Asked Questions 75

Grid 40

Help File 5

Hiding Toolbars 13

Hot Links 21

Image 19 59

Image files 9

Image Toolbar 12 71

Images 75

Index Tab 6

Layers 43

Linear Conditions 31

Linear Objects 56

Main Toolbar 12 67

Menus 14

Moving Toolbars 13

Navigate Toolbar 12 69

Navigating 20

On-Screen Takeofftrade 2

Page 59 61

Pages 20 25 28

Plan Viewer 73

Plans 26

Printing 47 76

Project Properties 25

Projects 22

Quick Start Video 18

Resizing Toolbars 13

Roping 54

Saving 63

Scale 28

Search Tab 7

Selecting Objects 42

Setup 8

Start On-Screen Takeofftrade 17

System Requirements 9

Takeoff 19 27

Takeoff Toolbar 70 71

Takeoff Toolbar 12

Template Files 23

TIF (Group4) 9

Tool Toolbar 12 68

Toolbar 67

Toolbars 12

View Toolbar 12 69

Viewing Toolbars 12

Worksheet 20

Zone Conditions 33

Zoom Toolbar 12 69

  • On-Screen Takeoff Lite
  • Table of Contents
  • Section 1 - Introduction
  • Section 2 - Setup
  • Section 3 - Toolbars and Menus
  • Section 4 - Features
  • Section 5 - Projects
  • Section 6 - Conditions and Takeoff
  • Section 7 - Printing and Exporting
  • Section 8 - Advanced Features
  • Section 9 - Saving and Exiting
  • Appendix I - Installing Your Digitizer
  • Appendix II - Toolbar Items
  • Appendix III - Loading Plans from a Dodge CD
  • Appendix IV - Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer
  • Appendix V - Frequently Asked Questions
  • Index

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

40

Grid Options Grids give you an added advantage when installing materials such as tiles Use this feature to get a count for how many tiles are needed for an area

1 Double-click on an area condition in the Takeoff dock bar to open its Condition dialog

2 Click on the Advanced tab to show its options

3 Check the box next to Grid by clicking in it

4 Indicate the dimensions of the cell matrix in inches (For example 200 x 400)

5 Under Results tab choose each (EA) for one of the results fields This will tabulate a number of grid cells (including partial grid cells) in area

6 Click to save your settings

7 Use the Move Grid and Rotate Grid features in the Tools menu to manipulate the grid as desired

Grid Calculation

1 Go to Tools gt Options menu

1 Specify if On-Screen Takeoff automatically should Calculate Grid Position

2 If AreaGrid Size is selected On-Screen Takeoff will calculate the number of items needed to fill the grid based on grid demintions

3 Click to accept and close the dialog

To move a line at any angle (regardless of default setting) press the Shift key while moving the mouse

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

41

Backout Mode This feature allows you to take out part of an area and deduct that amount of square footage

1 Select Tools gt Backout Mode

2 Outline the are you want backed out as you would when drawing a regular area object (see Drawing an Area Object)

3 The outlined area will clear and quantities will be recalculated

NOTE The perimeter of the backout area will be added to the LF quantity for that condition

Drawing a Count Object Square triangle rectangle and circle shaped count objects can easily be placed on images

1 Select the condition

2 Click in the location where you want the object to appear

3 To place an opening-shaped count item like a door or window you must click over an existing linear object such as a wall

4 On the Results tab you can change the height properties to give you the result you need

5 If Backout is checked on the advanced tab for each count opening the opening-shaped count item will back out a corresponding section of the linear object

Opening shaped count items are sized at 3rsquo0rdquo by default

Drawing a Zone Zones are drawn in the same way as area objects and may be any polygonal shape You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete the zone perimeter

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

42

Selecting Objects

1 Use the Select Tool to select objects

You can also select all objects that correspond to a condition

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Right-click and choose Select All

3 All objects with this condition will be highlighted with squares as an outline

Moving and Resizing Objects Linear

1 To move or resize a linear object click anywhere on the line to select it

2 To move the line position your pointer over the center handles When the mouse is positioned over the handles you will see a two-way arrow You will only be able to move the line in the direction of the arrows

3 Drag the line to a new position

4 Clicking and dragging the handles on the ends of the line will allow you to lengthen or shorten your line

Area and Zone

1 To move an area object or zone in its entirety click and drag it to its new position

2 Grabbing a handle at a corner or intersection of the object will allow you to adjust and change its perimeter

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

43

Count 1 To move a square circle rectangle or triangle shaped count object click and drag

2 Click and drag an opening shaped count object along the length of the linear object to the desired position then release

NOTE An opening shaped count object may not be moved from its associated linear condition object however it may be moved up and down the length of the linear object

Layers On-Screen Takeoff allows you to sort and separate your takeoff objects within the same job and on the same page On-Screen Takeoff gives you this flexibility through the use of layers

By assigning different conditions to different layers (for example differentiating between floors ceilings and walls) you can choose to view all layers or turn off certain layers to display and print the remaining groups of conditions only You may also remove the background image of electronic plans add text and hot link symbols or print only your condition takeoffs

Layers are only available in Full Mode If you are in View or Lite Mode and would like to use this

feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade Default Layers

On-Screen Takeoff begins every project with three default layers Image Annotation and Default The Image layer holds the electronic plan files you may have in your project The Annotation layer possesses all text notations highlighting and hot links in the project The Default layer will appear in the Condition dialog when creating or editing a condition (listed in the takeoff dock bar) Conditions are assigned to the Default layer unless otherwise specified by the user

Creating Layers To assign a condition to a layer other than the default layer you must first create additional layers for your project

1 Select View gt Layers to open the Layers dialog

2 Click An unnamed layer will be added

3 Click within the empty box and type a name for your layer (for example Wall)

4 New layers are added as active layers The adjacent box under the Show column will be checked

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

44

Assigning a Layer to a Condition 1 Open the Condition dialog box by creating a new condition or editing an existing condition

2 Under the General tab click on the down arrow in the Layer field to display optional layers

3 Select the desired layer for the condition Only the Default layer and layers you have added will be displayed

4 Click

View and Hide Layers

1 Select View gt Layers

2 Under the Show column check the box to view or remove the check (by clicking on it) to hide the specific layer

3 Click to accept and close the Layers dialog

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

45

Assigning Text to a Layer When adding text to an image On-Screen Takeoff has the capability to assign the text to a specified layer

1 Select the Text Tool

2 Click at the point you want to place your text

3 Type in your text using the Enter key for line breaks

4 Click the drop down arrow next to the Layer field and select the desired layer

Section 7

46

Printing and Exporting

This section will

Printing options and procedures

Exporting data by copying and pasting

Exporting quantity results to Excel spreadsheets

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

47

Print Setup On-Screen Takeoff allows the user to print the image takeoff list and worksheet

1 Select File gt Print Setup The Print Setup dialog will open

2 Select a printer or leave the default selection listed (change from the default printer displayed by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the field)

3 Indicate page size and printer tray option (Source) Access page size options by clicking on the

down arrow at the right of the field

4 Choose Portrait or Landscape orientation

5 Click to accept and close the dialog

Printing Images The image area can include the electronic plans the takeoff objects added text and hot links To print a subset of these (for example just the takeoffs without the plans or the added text and hot link symbols) hide layers that you do not want to print (see Section 6 View and Hide Layers) When you are printing your images every page will show the scale of the takeoff you are printing

1 Click on the Image tab to display the area of your project

2 Select File gt Print (or Ctrl + P)

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

48

3 Select the desired view (What to print) and the Image Range

4 Click The second Print dialog will open

5 Change settings accordingly or click if you accept the default settings

Printing Takeoff Lists and Worksheets In Takeoff Lists and Worksheets you may hide columns to print only certain results or adjust column widths to fit the report within the page size selected

1 In Takeoff List or Worksheet view move your cursor to the right side of the columnrsquos title bar the cursor will display as a two-way arrow

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

49

2 Click and drag to adjust the width of the column Holding the mouse button you may

slide the title bar under the title bar to its left to hide the column completely

3 Select File gt Print or press Ctrl + P to access the Print dialog

4 Indicate desired printer and choose the number of copies

5 Click to print and close the dialog

When printing the condition list we suggest printing in landscape

To reset to the default column widths double-click on the right border of a column heading will reset the column to its right (or previously to its right before being hidden)

Print Preview 1 Select File gt Print Preview

2 Use and to vary your view 3 If viewing an image choose current full or scale view to see how it displays

4 For printed outputs that cover more than one page use and to view adjacent pages or click on the down arrow next to Page field and select the page you want displayed

Exporting Using the CopyPaste Feature You may copy all the data or sections from the worksheet and the takeoff list view in On-Screen Takeoff and paste it into another application When pasting into Excel the cell layout will be maintained

1 Highlight the areas you wish to paste Click and hold the left mouse button down as you drag the cursor over the area to be selected then releasing the mouse button

OR

2 Select the entire takeoff list quickly click on the left On-Screen Takeoff column header and hold and drag the cursor across the remaining column headings

The number of pages for the view selected will display in the lower left-hand corner The zoom percentage that applies to the view will be displayed in the lower right-hand corner next to page size of the drawing

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

50

3 In the worksheet view you may highlight rows by clicking on the numbered buttons to the left of each row clicking and dragging across column headings or clicking and dragging over individual cells in the worksheet

Click anywhere in the appropriate view to deselect the area

4 Once your selection is highlighted you may select Edit gt Copy or Ctrl C from the keyboard 5 On your monitor switch to the application into which you want to paste your selection 6 Select Edit gt Paste in the new application or simply press Ctrl + V to paste

The colored keys for conditions cannot be pasted

Using the Export Feature You may export condition quantities to specified cell location within an Excel worksheet file Cell target locations are assigned in the Results tab of the condition dialogs on the Export line relating to each quantity measurement type

On-Screen Takeoff will export takeoff quantity results for up to three different quantity types that you specify For instance you may want to know the number of square feet in a ceiling area as well as the number of linear feet in its perimeter

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

51

1 Bring up the Condition dialog by double-clicking on a condition in the takeoff dock bar or by

selecting the condition and clicking

2 Click on the Results tab to access its fields The default quantities for the condition type will display

3 For each results field click on the arrow to access the pull-down menu and select the appropriate quantity (for example SF LF EA etchellip)

4 Have your Excel spreadsheet opened and saved in a file

5 Specify the Excel spreadsheet cell locations where you want the results to go

6 For a cell in the first sheet of your spreadsheet type in the cell address (eg a1) Case is not important

7 For a cell on a successive sheet of your spreadsheet type in sheet the number followed by a comma and the cell address without any spaces (eg sheet2a1) Case is not important

8 Click

9 Select File gt Export gt Condition Qty to Excel

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

52

10 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

11 Click to export On-Screen Takeoff results to specified cell locations in the Excel file When you return to the Excel application you will see the values have been added to the specified cell locations in your spreadsheet

12 Save your Excel file

Exporting Worksheet to Excel

1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 From On-Screen Takeoff Select File gt Export gt Worksheet to Excel

4 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

5 Click When you return to the Excel application you will see the values from the Worksheet Tab have been added to your spreadsheet

6 Save your Excel file

Exporting Takeoff to CVS 1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 Click the Takeoff Tab in the project you want to export the information

4 Select File gt Export gt Takeoff to CSV

5 Browse to the location of the CSV spreadsheet file click file to select it

6 Click the Save

NOTE CSV files can be opened in Excel Lotus Access etc One may consider this option more of a ldquodumprdquo into a file

The Excel application must be active (it may be minimized on the application bar) with the target spreadsheet open in the application Otherwise an error will occur with the export operation that will affect both the On-Screen Takeofftrade file and the Excel spreadsheet

Section 8

53

Advanced Features

This section will

Some special features of working with condition objects in the takeoff area

Details of advanced options for conditions

Advanced features of the Project Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

54

Features to Use with Objects Roping Feature You can move copy or delete using this feature Using the Select tool (the pointer) you may select several objects at once by clicking and dragging an outline around the objects then releasing the mouse button Roping may select either objects completely within the outlined area (inclusive) or objects both within and touched by the outlined area (touching) Specify your roping preference under Tools gt Options

1 Click and hold the mouse button at a point on the screen near the objects to be selected and drag to surround the objects with an outline

2 Release the mouse button The objects will be selected

3 You may now

Move the group around on the page by clicking within the group dragging the mouse and releasing the button to place the objects

Delete the group of objects by clicking the Delete key or

Copy and paste by pressing Ctrl C to copy the group then Ctrl V to paste it The pasted copy of the grouped objects will appear slightly offset from the original objects

Section 8 Advanced Features

55

Applying a DropRun Count

Use the droprun feature when calculating quantities to take into account the drop or run of a linear condition such as electrical lines or plumbing pipes Drop or run lengths may be added separately to any linear condition on screen while a default droprun length may be indicated for a condition as a whole

1 Select the desired linear condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff Dock bar

2 Click the Change button in the toolbar to open the Change Condition dialog

3 Click the Advanced tab to access the advanced options and click inside the DropRun check box

4 Enter a default length to be applied to all of this condition Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches) You can leave the length blank and manually enter drop run on each segment drawn

5 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog

Edit DropRun Count

1 With the related linear condition in the Takeoff Dock bar highlighted or with the pointer tool selected

2 click on the desired linear object in the image takeoff area The Count button will become active

3 Click on the Count button (alternatively select Tools gt Count) The default droprun amount will show in the pop-up Count dialog (Default length will be zero if droprun has not been selected in this conditionrsquos properties)

4 Type in the desired length Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches)

5 Click the OK button The additional amount will be reflected in the corresponding quantity The new DropRun count will apply only to the object edited

Adding Text in Image View

On-Screen Takeoff allows you to place text comments around your quantity takeoffs that may be printed along with plan images and objects Text is automatically placed within the Annotation Layer (that includes text and hot links)

1 To place text on the image select the Text Tool and click at the point you want to place your text opening a text box

2 Type in your information clicking Enter for line breaks

3 When you are finished click the OK button to exit the text box

4 To reposition text simply click on the text (with the Text Tool active) to select it

5 Move the cursor over the text the cursor will now display as a four-way arrow

6 Click and drag the mouse to position the text as desired

Section 8 Advanced Features

56

1 To edit existing text use the Text Tool to double-click on the text to open the editing box

2 Enter additional text or use the Backspace key to delete text as necessary

Formatting Text Once created you may format the font size type style and color of your text

1 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Font or click on the Font button in the Takeoff Toolbar

2 Select the desired features (color options are disabled) and click the OK button

3 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Color or click on the Color button in the Takeoff Toolbar The Color dialog will open

4 Click on a color in the Basic Color palette or create a color and add to the Custom Colors palette (Be sure to click on the color in the Custom Colors palette to select it)

5 Click the OK button

Object Properties

Linear Objects

Linear objects may be set to connect at corners

A linear object may be set to trim automatically when crossing another linear object (Check the trim option under the advanced tab of the Condition dialog)

When you move a connected linear object objects automatically move and resize connected lines accordingly (quantities are then recalculated)

This feature requires that the connected linear object be moved using the center handles (does not apply when resizing the line from the ends)

Objects constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

Objects are measured from centerline to centerline

Section 8 Advanced Features

57

Area Objects When drawing an area use your escape key to undo the last line drawn You may reverse your

drawing of an area using the escape key

The area will not fill with color and pattern until the user double-clicks after the last line is set

Lines drawn to delineate an area object constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

After selecting an area to move or adjust position the mouse in the center to move the entire area position the mouse at the sides or corners to adjust the perimeter

Count Objects

All count objects are quantified by the physical number of objects per page and reported as EA for the UOM The quantity for the current Image View is (displayed in the Condition List) and the total quantity in your project is displayed in the Takeoff View and Worksheet View)

Square circle rectangle and triangle shaped count objects do not displace or subtract from other object quantities when placed on top of them However on the Advanced Tab for the count condition a connect property can be set (this is a check box) so that when a count object of this shape is put on top of a Linear type takeoff object it will move with the linear if said linear is moved

An opened-shaped count object must be placed within a linear object Opening shaped count objects may also be measured by linear foot or linear yard (EA SF and SY are also options) Opening shaped count items default to a width of 3rsquo 0rdquo at the time of creation This size can be changed The small medium and large size are not options on this type of condition anymore Check Backout on the Advanced tab for each Count object back out the footage (or yardage) of opening-shaped count objects in which they are placed

NOTE In order to see this Backout functionality (in quantity) for SY or SF deductions at least one of the

results for the Linear(s) this object will be placed on must be set to SY or SF and the count object must have a height quantity

Advanced Features of Conditions The Round Feature Under the Advanced tab of the linear and area Condition dialogues you may specify quantity rounding (in inches) For linear objects rounding applies to each linear object drawn For area objects rounding will apply to each segment of the area perimeter adjusting the perimeter and area calculations For example With a linear condition entering 12 in the Round field will round up each related linear object to the nearest 12 inches or one foot With this setting two walls of 1 4 would each round to 2 0 totaling 4 0

NOTE In the Takeoff Dock bar condition list and in the On-Screen Takeoff reports quantities will be displayed in whole numbers rounded up to the nearest foot However calculations are based on true quantities without rounding unless the Round Feature is engaged

Pitch Pitch may apply either to linear or area conditions It is measured in rise per linear foot Entering 12 indicates a 12 rise per 12 of linear distance (a pitch of 12 over 12) or an angle of 45deg

Section 8 Advanced Features

58

Advanced Features of Project Properties Selecting Multiple Pages

1 Select a single page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry

2 Drag the cursor down the column of numbers to select consecutive pages

3 Click on the blank button at the top of this column to select all pages in the Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

59

Changing Image Assigned to a Drawing 1 Select the page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry 2 Click the Change Image button The Change Image dialog box will appear

3 Navigate to the desired file and select by clicking on it

4 Click the Open button The electronic file assigned to the page will have been changed to reflect the new file choice

Changing Image File Path 1 Select pages as described above

2 Choose Change Folder

3 In the Change Folder dialog navigate to the appropriate folder

4 Click the OK button The file path will have been changed for the selected page entries

Delete a Page from Project Properties 1 Select the page you want to delete by clicking on its associated number (in the gray box at the

left of the entry)

2 Choose Delete Page

All Takeoff on the page will be deleted immediately and permanently

Section 8 Advanced Features

60

Advanced Features of Tool Options

Calculation Method On-Screen Takeoff has built-in calculation options to allow for faster work and faster saves until your takeoff is complete Calculation options are found by selecting Tools gt Options then clicking on the Calculation tab

Calculation method can be set to Automatic Automatic except Grids and Manual Manual will allow the program to operate more quickly while Automatic or Automatic except Grids allows the user to see quantity changes as takeoffs are made

In any mode you may press F9 to recalculate quantities for the On-Screen Takeoff current totals

Configuration Tab

When the ldquoPage Label (A01)rdquo radial button is chosen On-Screen Takeoff puts the numbered label on all the pages of in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar If the Page Descriptionrdquo radial button is chosen then a description of what takeoff is on that specific page will be shown in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar

This section of the configuration tab gives you options on how you want to export your information When the ldquoFolderSubfolder Namesrdquo radial button is chosen than on your file that you are exporting to will have all the conditions folders and subfolders In the Delimiter box you can choose the symbol that is needed to separate the information you are exporting Some files need semicolons () or colons () to make sure the information comes exported in is separated it the appropriate places

Section 8 Advanced Features

61

In previous versions of On-Screen Takeoff there are views that users need to have in order for them to display their information By either choosing ldquoOST 1xrdquo or ldquoOST 2xrdquo it will let the program know you want your columns of information exported in that specific format

When you have the Confirm Deletions radial button of ldquoYesrdquo chosen than every time you delete anything you will get a dialog box confirming your intentions of deletion

While working with your takeoff you have a choice to either view the legend of your conditions or hide it Choose whichever radial button that suits your needs

For those who prefer to use the Enter key to navigate in dialog boxes this option is just for that

Font Tab The Font tab is designed for you to make your own look and feel for the application At the bottom of this tab it will show you sample of the fonts and colors you have chosen

Renaming the Current Page You may change the name of the current page in the takeoff area of On-Screen Takeoff by selecting Edit gt Rename Page

This opens the Name Page dialog and you may simply type in a new name and click the Enter button The new name for the file will be reflected on the title bar for the page and in Project Properties

You also may access the Rename Page function by right-clicking in the takeoff area while in Image View and selecting the option from the pop-up menu that appears

Section 9

62

Saving and Exiting

This section will

Explain how to save projects

Show you how to safely exit the program

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

63

Saving Your Project

1 Select File gt Save 2 If your project has not previously been saved a Save dialog box will open to allow you to name

the file and choose the directory and folder in which to save your file 3 Once saved File gt Save will simply save the current version of the file

OR

4 Select File gt Save As then type in a new name for the file and save to the desired file path

The Auto-save Feature With the Auto-save feature On-Screen Takeoff automatically backs up your open project You may choose to have more than one level of backup files The first backup copy will have the extension b00 and successive files will be b01 b02 and so on If you have designated four levels of backup files after the fourth backup copy has been created (b03) the next file will be saved over the file with extension b00 Further backup saves will then rotate through the four backup files in the same way

1 Select Tools gt Options 2 In the Auto-save area (under the General tab) select the frequency of backup file creation (in

minutes) and the number of levels for the feature 3 You also may disengage the feature by clicking in the check box to clear it

The Auto-save feature automatically saves backup copies to the directory of the current project If you are working from a write-protected area such as a CD-ROM On-Screen Takeoff will place backup files in the On-Screen Takeoff folder

Exiting When you are finished using On-Screen Takeoff it is very easy to exit Exiting is very important because of security reasons If someone were to use your computer they could enter the application and view and manipulate information

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

64

On-Screen Takeoff closes the open project when you open another or create a new project or when you exit the program

1 Select File gt Exit

OR

2 You also may click at the upper right-hand corner of the application to exit

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

65

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer When you get your digitizer from GTCO you will need to connect it to your computer Follow the instructions outlined below to do this

Note For rollup digitizers the metal bar must be oriented to the top or right hand side

Connecting the Digitizer 1 Lay the digitizer out flat 2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer 3 Plug in the power adapter 4 Plug the interface (IO) cable into the digitizer 5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into an open serial port on computer

Note GTCO Technical support phone number is 410-381-6688 The electronic manual (on diskette) from GTCO contains more detailed installation and operation instructions for the GTCO digitizer model you have

Installing other Digitizer Drivers If you are using a GTCO Digitizer you will need to install the GTCO TabletWorks Drivers

If you are using a Digitizer not supported by GTCO Tablet Works 10 please contact the manufacturer of your digitizer for assistance with installation

Installing GTCO TabletWorks Drivers 1 Insert the On Center CD into the CD-ROM drive The CD Startup screen will open 2 Click on Install Software 3 Select Additional Software and Drivers 4 Select Digitizer Driver 5 Follow the instructions for installing TabletWorks 10

Adhering the Template The template is a small plastic sticker used to enable mouse function when using the digitizer with On-Screen Takeoff Place your template on your digitizer We suggest placing it in the bottom right corner of the digitizer about one inch inside the takeoff area

Note You may either peel off the back of the template and use the adhesive surface or you can tape the template down

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

66

Testing the Digitizer Drivers Before running OST you may test the digitizer by moving the stylus around on the digitizer pad it should move the mouse cursor (if mouse emulation is enabled)

If the digitizer does not move the mouse cursor on the screen

The superset codes may need to be reset Reset the superset codes by touching on the border of the digitizer with the stylus The digitizer should beep several times

The digitizer may not be communicating with the computer Be sure the COM port selected is correct Be sure the COM port selected is correct If you are not able to get the digitizer to move the mouse cursor you need to call GTCO technical support for help

Note The Mouse Emulation is not required for On-Screen Takeoff to work properly It is used only for the Template functionality if the digitizer is moving the cursor the wrong direction (up instead of sideways or vice-versa)

Click the L-shaped arrow symbol on the digitizer with the stylus

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

67

Appendix II Toolbar Items Main Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

68

Tool Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

69

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

70

Navigate Toolbar (Continued)

Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

71

Takeoff Toolbar (Continued)

Image Toolbar

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

72

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

This section will detail how to load plans from a F W Dodge CD-ROM into an On-Screen Takeoff project file ready for takeoffs

Dodge files may be added to the Project Properties dialog However loading the files in that way will load the files by number rather than name description If you want to load one page only from your Dodge CD You will have to rename the page to display the name rather than number of the file

To load plan files from a Dodge CD so that the files load sequentially by file number but are displayed by name rather than by number within your project follow the instructions below

Opening a Dodge project from a CD-ROM 1 Insert the CD into the drive 2 Choose File gt Custom 3 Choose Dodge Plans Project (plansdat) as the file type 4 Select the appropriate file type by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the Files of type

field 5 In the Look in field access your drive paths by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the

field then

Navigate to your CD-ROM drive Open the data folder and Open the Projects folder

6 Select the desired project and open its folder 7 Open the plansdat file 8 All the images will come in sequenced correctly for that job along with the full descriptions

(names) of each page If there is not a plans folder in the project folder then plans do not exist for that project on the CD Opening the plansdat file will yield an empty project

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

73

Appendix IV Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer The On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer is a limited version of On Center Softwarersquos commercial takeoff software If your status bar located at the very bottom of the main window says View Mode in the lower left-hand corner then you are using the Plan Viewer You can use the plan viewer to

View CD-based amp converted CAD drawings

View a previously created OST file and associated drawings

Download electronic plans online

Navigate through drawings

Quickly Takeoff linearsareas and counts

Zoom in to view the plan better

Print drawings directly from the viewer

Viewing an On-Screen Takeoff Project File

1 To open an OST file that was previously created with of On-Screen Takeoff 2 Select File gt Open 3 An Open dialog will appear if you do not see the OST file you are looking for select the

Look In drop down arrow 4 A drop down menu will appear listing the various folders drives and mapped drives located

on your computer select the correct drive or folder location and continue to browse to the location of your OST file

5 When you see your OST file double-click it to open it 6 Any takeoff and drawings should appear on the Image tab view

If you do not see the drawings but do see the colored takeoff layer the drawings may

not be located in the same place they were originally saved at Go to File gt Project Properties and check the Image File path for each listed page If the image file path is pointing to a CD drive make sure the CD is inside the CR-ROM

Downloading Electronic Plans If your Online Plan Service provides a special file format (OSX) required to use this feature of our plan viewer you can immediately downloaded all electronic plans of a project directly from our viewer

Most Plan Room web sites will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff when a request to download plans is made Your particular Plan Room may differ in operation so please contact the provider directly with questions on using the site

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

74

When you request to download or open a project file from a Plan Room you will usually have the open to open or save an OSX file Choosing open will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff Alternately you may choose to save the file to a local hard drive After you have saved the file either double-click it to launch On-Screen Takeoff or open the OSX file using On-Screen Takeoff by clicking File then Open and locating the file on your hard drive You will need to change the file type to OSX

After the OSX file is opened you will see an additional tab appear in the Conditions List window called Pages

The Pages tab shows the hierarchy of your project Gray file icons represent pages that have not been downloaded and blue icons represents pages that have been downloaded

To download a page simply double-click the page icon

If you wish to select a group of pages to download you can use the Ctrl or Shift key to multiple select them then click the Download button

If you wish to download all pages at once click the Download All button

Downloaded pages will now appear in the Project Properties dialog in the same order in which they appear in the Pages tab

Creating Quick Takeoffs With On-Screen Takeoff you can create quick takeoffs to measure quantities even if you dont have the full version of our program However using the Quick Takeoff functionality shows you just a fraction of what the full version can do

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar is located at the top of the image view It has three buttons designated for three types of takeoffs Linear Area and Count The Quantity drop down list will show secondary quantities for Linears and Areas The Units drop down allows you to select how you want your quantities displayed Feet Inches Yards Millimeters and Meters

NOTE Every time change the type of takeoff you are performing (switching from Area to Linear for example) the previous quantities and takeoff objects will disappear They will also disappear when you changes pages

NOTE You can use the Dimension Tool to basically measure the distance between two points or linears The distance will display on the status bar at the bottom of the application

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

75

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions General

Where is On-Screen Takeoff installed on my computer

Typically it is installed in CProgram FilesOn-Screen Takeoff

In Explorer how do I recognize On-Screen Takeoff file types

On-Screen Takeoff data is stored in a single file per job lsquojob name OSTrsquo On-Screen Takeoff templates are stored as lsquotemplate nameTPOrsquo

Can only one project at a time be open

Yes For that reason opening another project automatically closes the project on screen You will be asked to save any changes

Is only one scale allowed per page What about on drawings that have multiple detail sections on a page and each of those drawings have different scales

Yes For pages with drawings of different scales copy the drawing to another project page and set the appropriate scale

I cannot perform backout on an area that is along a linear

As a workaround use the On-Screen Takeoff layers feature to help you with this issue Electronic Images

How do I start a project from drawings that have been scanned and written to a CD-ROM

Open a new project Select File gt Project Properties and select Auto Add Navigate to your CD and the appropriate folder and select any image file in that location Click Open All files in the location will load into your project Recommended that images are copied from CD to hard drive for performance

If I get a disk of drawings in AutoCAD format (R13 or R14) can I read them in On-Screen Takeoff

Yes On-Screen Takeoff now reads DWG DXF and many other format that are saved with AutoCAD

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

76

When I click on the all pages button what is supposed to happen Currently nothing seems to change when I click on that button

The All Pages button is used to apply the Darken and Enhance Plans feature to all pages in the project (as opposed to only the current page on screen)

Is there a way to deduct a large skylight from an area condition

Yes with the related area condition selected in the Takeoff Dock bar unselect the Backout button on the Takeoff Toolbar then draw the Backout area The area quantity will be deducted from the related condition object and the linear measurement of the Backout perimeter will be added

Digitizer Issues

How do I connect a Digitizer to the computer

See Appendix I Connecting a Digitizer

The Place Template menu choice is disabled

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or the digitizer or the digitzer drivers are not installed

It wonrsquot let me select the Set Takeoff Area menu choice

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or no job is open a digitizer is not installed or the drivers are not installed

The digitizer stylus is not moving the cursor or crosshairs

Click S-0-1 superset on the digitizer

How do I convert my old GTCO Digitizer to work with On- Screen Takeofftrade

Call GTCO and they may be able to reconfigure your digitizer to be compatible with On-Screen Takeoff

Printing Issues Which Printers work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible printers include On-Screen Takeoff Hewlett Packard Epson and Canon printers If you are having printer difficulties please contact support and specify the type of printer along with other pertinent information Contact support at wwwoncentercomsupport or email supportoncentercom

Which Plotters work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible Plotters include Hewlett Packard DesignJet plotters and the EnCAD Cadjet II If you are having plotter difficulties please contact support and specify the type of plotter concerned

ViewingDisplay I can no longer see my condition list How do I get it back

The toolbars and Dock bars can be turned on and off through the View gt Toolbars menu options

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

77

This is also accessible by right-clicking in the toolbar area and selecting (or deselecting) a toolbar listed

I cannot view my folders in the condition list

Right-click in the Takeoff Dock barcondition list area and select Show Tree to display your folders

My Status Bar reads Viewer Mode and I am unable to draw conditions

On-Screen Takeoff needs to be Authorized Or you need to purchase an upgrade Click the Perform Advanced Takeoff button on the main toolbar

I hid a Dock bar and when I selected to view it again it appeared alongside the other Dock

bar instead of stacked on top of it How do I fix it

Pick up the Dock bar by clicking on the bar at the top and continuing to hold down the mouse button drag the Dock bar over the other one It will resize and appear stacked with the other

When I open image files from a CD the images are all upside down How do I get them right

side up

To flip pages from top to bottom follow the steps below 1 Click the All Pages button on the Image Toolbar (All Pages is engaged when the button

is not clicked) 2 Click the Flip Horizontal button on the Image Toolbar 3 Click the All Pages button again to disengage

Templates How do I create a Template

Follow the steps below 1 Create a typical project 2 Choose File gt Save As 3 Choose On-Screen Takeoff Template Files as the file type to save 4 Name the file This will save all of the condition setups as well as the layers for the

project

How do I create a new project from a template

Follow the steps below 1 Choose File gt New 2 Select a template from those listed in the New dialog This will open a new project with

conditions and layers saved from a previous project but no pages or takeoff

78

INDEX

Area Conditions 32

Area Objects 57

Auto Scrolling 20

Auto-save 63

Backout Mode 41

Calculation Method 60

Conditions 29

Configuration 60

Contents Tab 6

Continuous Mode 38

Count Conditions 33

Count Objects 57

Digitizer 10 65 76

Docking Toolbars 13

Dodge CD 72

Drawing 27 37

DropRun Count 55

Environment 18

Exiting 63

Exporting 49

Features 16

Font 61

Frequently Asked Questions 75

Grid 40

Help File 5

Hiding Toolbars 13

Hot Links 21

Image 19 59

Image files 9

Image Toolbar 12 71

Images 75

Index Tab 6

Layers 43

Linear Conditions 31

Linear Objects 56

Main Toolbar 12 67

Menus 14

Moving Toolbars 13

Navigate Toolbar 12 69

Navigating 20

On-Screen Takeofftrade 2

Page 59 61

Pages 20 25 28

Plan Viewer 73

Plans 26

Printing 47 76

Project Properties 25

Projects 22

Quick Start Video 18

Resizing Toolbars 13

Roping 54

Saving 63

Scale 28

Search Tab 7

Selecting Objects 42

Setup 8

Start On-Screen Takeofftrade 17

System Requirements 9

Takeoff 19 27

Takeoff Toolbar 70 71

Takeoff Toolbar 12

Template Files 23

TIF (Group4) 9

Tool Toolbar 12 68

Toolbar 67

Toolbars 12

View Toolbar 12 69

Viewing Toolbars 12

Worksheet 20

Zone Conditions 33

Zoom Toolbar 12 69

  • On-Screen Takeoff Lite
  • Table of Contents
  • Section 1 - Introduction
  • Section 2 - Setup
  • Section 3 - Toolbars and Menus
  • Section 4 - Features
  • Section 5 - Projects
  • Section 6 - Conditions and Takeoff
  • Section 7 - Printing and Exporting
  • Section 8 - Advanced Features
  • Section 9 - Saving and Exiting
  • Appendix I - Installing Your Digitizer
  • Appendix II - Toolbar Items
  • Appendix III - Loading Plans from a Dodge CD
  • Appendix IV - Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer
  • Appendix V - Frequently Asked Questions
  • Index

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

41

Backout Mode This feature allows you to take out part of an area and deduct that amount of square footage

1 Select Tools gt Backout Mode

2 Outline the are you want backed out as you would when drawing a regular area object (see Drawing an Area Object)

3 The outlined area will clear and quantities will be recalculated

NOTE The perimeter of the backout area will be added to the LF quantity for that condition

Drawing a Count Object Square triangle rectangle and circle shaped count objects can easily be placed on images

1 Select the condition

2 Click in the location where you want the object to appear

3 To place an opening-shaped count item like a door or window you must click over an existing linear object such as a wall

4 On the Results tab you can change the height properties to give you the result you need

5 If Backout is checked on the advanced tab for each count opening the opening-shaped count item will back out a corresponding section of the linear object

Opening shaped count items are sized at 3rsquo0rdquo by default

Drawing a Zone Zones are drawn in the same way as area objects and may be any polygonal shape You may trace any number of adjoining walls at different angles to complete the zone perimeter

1 Click at each point

2 Double-click when yoursquove returned to your starting point

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

42

Selecting Objects

1 Use the Select Tool to select objects

You can also select all objects that correspond to a condition

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Right-click and choose Select All

3 All objects with this condition will be highlighted with squares as an outline

Moving and Resizing Objects Linear

1 To move or resize a linear object click anywhere on the line to select it

2 To move the line position your pointer over the center handles When the mouse is positioned over the handles you will see a two-way arrow You will only be able to move the line in the direction of the arrows

3 Drag the line to a new position

4 Clicking and dragging the handles on the ends of the line will allow you to lengthen or shorten your line

Area and Zone

1 To move an area object or zone in its entirety click and drag it to its new position

2 Grabbing a handle at a corner or intersection of the object will allow you to adjust and change its perimeter

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

43

Count 1 To move a square circle rectangle or triangle shaped count object click and drag

2 Click and drag an opening shaped count object along the length of the linear object to the desired position then release

NOTE An opening shaped count object may not be moved from its associated linear condition object however it may be moved up and down the length of the linear object

Layers On-Screen Takeoff allows you to sort and separate your takeoff objects within the same job and on the same page On-Screen Takeoff gives you this flexibility through the use of layers

By assigning different conditions to different layers (for example differentiating between floors ceilings and walls) you can choose to view all layers or turn off certain layers to display and print the remaining groups of conditions only You may also remove the background image of electronic plans add text and hot link symbols or print only your condition takeoffs

Layers are only available in Full Mode If you are in View or Lite Mode and would like to use this

feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade Default Layers

On-Screen Takeoff begins every project with three default layers Image Annotation and Default The Image layer holds the electronic plan files you may have in your project The Annotation layer possesses all text notations highlighting and hot links in the project The Default layer will appear in the Condition dialog when creating or editing a condition (listed in the takeoff dock bar) Conditions are assigned to the Default layer unless otherwise specified by the user

Creating Layers To assign a condition to a layer other than the default layer you must first create additional layers for your project

1 Select View gt Layers to open the Layers dialog

2 Click An unnamed layer will be added

3 Click within the empty box and type a name for your layer (for example Wall)

4 New layers are added as active layers The adjacent box under the Show column will be checked

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

44

Assigning a Layer to a Condition 1 Open the Condition dialog box by creating a new condition or editing an existing condition

2 Under the General tab click on the down arrow in the Layer field to display optional layers

3 Select the desired layer for the condition Only the Default layer and layers you have added will be displayed

4 Click

View and Hide Layers

1 Select View gt Layers

2 Under the Show column check the box to view or remove the check (by clicking on it) to hide the specific layer

3 Click to accept and close the Layers dialog

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

45

Assigning Text to a Layer When adding text to an image On-Screen Takeoff has the capability to assign the text to a specified layer

1 Select the Text Tool

2 Click at the point you want to place your text

3 Type in your text using the Enter key for line breaks

4 Click the drop down arrow next to the Layer field and select the desired layer

Section 7

46

Printing and Exporting

This section will

Printing options and procedures

Exporting data by copying and pasting

Exporting quantity results to Excel spreadsheets

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

47

Print Setup On-Screen Takeoff allows the user to print the image takeoff list and worksheet

1 Select File gt Print Setup The Print Setup dialog will open

2 Select a printer or leave the default selection listed (change from the default printer displayed by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the field)

3 Indicate page size and printer tray option (Source) Access page size options by clicking on the

down arrow at the right of the field

4 Choose Portrait or Landscape orientation

5 Click to accept and close the dialog

Printing Images The image area can include the electronic plans the takeoff objects added text and hot links To print a subset of these (for example just the takeoffs without the plans or the added text and hot link symbols) hide layers that you do not want to print (see Section 6 View and Hide Layers) When you are printing your images every page will show the scale of the takeoff you are printing

1 Click on the Image tab to display the area of your project

2 Select File gt Print (or Ctrl + P)

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

48

3 Select the desired view (What to print) and the Image Range

4 Click The second Print dialog will open

5 Change settings accordingly or click if you accept the default settings

Printing Takeoff Lists and Worksheets In Takeoff Lists and Worksheets you may hide columns to print only certain results or adjust column widths to fit the report within the page size selected

1 In Takeoff List or Worksheet view move your cursor to the right side of the columnrsquos title bar the cursor will display as a two-way arrow

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

49

2 Click and drag to adjust the width of the column Holding the mouse button you may

slide the title bar under the title bar to its left to hide the column completely

3 Select File gt Print or press Ctrl + P to access the Print dialog

4 Indicate desired printer and choose the number of copies

5 Click to print and close the dialog

When printing the condition list we suggest printing in landscape

To reset to the default column widths double-click on the right border of a column heading will reset the column to its right (or previously to its right before being hidden)

Print Preview 1 Select File gt Print Preview

2 Use and to vary your view 3 If viewing an image choose current full or scale view to see how it displays

4 For printed outputs that cover more than one page use and to view adjacent pages or click on the down arrow next to Page field and select the page you want displayed

Exporting Using the CopyPaste Feature You may copy all the data or sections from the worksheet and the takeoff list view in On-Screen Takeoff and paste it into another application When pasting into Excel the cell layout will be maintained

1 Highlight the areas you wish to paste Click and hold the left mouse button down as you drag the cursor over the area to be selected then releasing the mouse button

OR

2 Select the entire takeoff list quickly click on the left On-Screen Takeoff column header and hold and drag the cursor across the remaining column headings

The number of pages for the view selected will display in the lower left-hand corner The zoom percentage that applies to the view will be displayed in the lower right-hand corner next to page size of the drawing

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

50

3 In the worksheet view you may highlight rows by clicking on the numbered buttons to the left of each row clicking and dragging across column headings or clicking and dragging over individual cells in the worksheet

Click anywhere in the appropriate view to deselect the area

4 Once your selection is highlighted you may select Edit gt Copy or Ctrl C from the keyboard 5 On your monitor switch to the application into which you want to paste your selection 6 Select Edit gt Paste in the new application or simply press Ctrl + V to paste

The colored keys for conditions cannot be pasted

Using the Export Feature You may export condition quantities to specified cell location within an Excel worksheet file Cell target locations are assigned in the Results tab of the condition dialogs on the Export line relating to each quantity measurement type

On-Screen Takeoff will export takeoff quantity results for up to three different quantity types that you specify For instance you may want to know the number of square feet in a ceiling area as well as the number of linear feet in its perimeter

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

51

1 Bring up the Condition dialog by double-clicking on a condition in the takeoff dock bar or by

selecting the condition and clicking

2 Click on the Results tab to access its fields The default quantities for the condition type will display

3 For each results field click on the arrow to access the pull-down menu and select the appropriate quantity (for example SF LF EA etchellip)

4 Have your Excel spreadsheet opened and saved in a file

5 Specify the Excel spreadsheet cell locations where you want the results to go

6 For a cell in the first sheet of your spreadsheet type in the cell address (eg a1) Case is not important

7 For a cell on a successive sheet of your spreadsheet type in sheet the number followed by a comma and the cell address without any spaces (eg sheet2a1) Case is not important

8 Click

9 Select File gt Export gt Condition Qty to Excel

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

52

10 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

11 Click to export On-Screen Takeoff results to specified cell locations in the Excel file When you return to the Excel application you will see the values have been added to the specified cell locations in your spreadsheet

12 Save your Excel file

Exporting Worksheet to Excel

1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 From On-Screen Takeoff Select File gt Export gt Worksheet to Excel

4 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

5 Click When you return to the Excel application you will see the values from the Worksheet Tab have been added to your spreadsheet

6 Save your Excel file

Exporting Takeoff to CVS 1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 Click the Takeoff Tab in the project you want to export the information

4 Select File gt Export gt Takeoff to CSV

5 Browse to the location of the CSV spreadsheet file click file to select it

6 Click the Save

NOTE CSV files can be opened in Excel Lotus Access etc One may consider this option more of a ldquodumprdquo into a file

The Excel application must be active (it may be minimized on the application bar) with the target spreadsheet open in the application Otherwise an error will occur with the export operation that will affect both the On-Screen Takeofftrade file and the Excel spreadsheet

Section 8

53

Advanced Features

This section will

Some special features of working with condition objects in the takeoff area

Details of advanced options for conditions

Advanced features of the Project Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

54

Features to Use with Objects Roping Feature You can move copy or delete using this feature Using the Select tool (the pointer) you may select several objects at once by clicking and dragging an outline around the objects then releasing the mouse button Roping may select either objects completely within the outlined area (inclusive) or objects both within and touched by the outlined area (touching) Specify your roping preference under Tools gt Options

1 Click and hold the mouse button at a point on the screen near the objects to be selected and drag to surround the objects with an outline

2 Release the mouse button The objects will be selected

3 You may now

Move the group around on the page by clicking within the group dragging the mouse and releasing the button to place the objects

Delete the group of objects by clicking the Delete key or

Copy and paste by pressing Ctrl C to copy the group then Ctrl V to paste it The pasted copy of the grouped objects will appear slightly offset from the original objects

Section 8 Advanced Features

55

Applying a DropRun Count

Use the droprun feature when calculating quantities to take into account the drop or run of a linear condition such as electrical lines or plumbing pipes Drop or run lengths may be added separately to any linear condition on screen while a default droprun length may be indicated for a condition as a whole

1 Select the desired linear condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff Dock bar

2 Click the Change button in the toolbar to open the Change Condition dialog

3 Click the Advanced tab to access the advanced options and click inside the DropRun check box

4 Enter a default length to be applied to all of this condition Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches) You can leave the length blank and manually enter drop run on each segment drawn

5 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog

Edit DropRun Count

1 With the related linear condition in the Takeoff Dock bar highlighted or with the pointer tool selected

2 click on the desired linear object in the image takeoff area The Count button will become active

3 Click on the Count button (alternatively select Tools gt Count) The default droprun amount will show in the pop-up Count dialog (Default length will be zero if droprun has not been selected in this conditionrsquos properties)

4 Type in the desired length Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches)

5 Click the OK button The additional amount will be reflected in the corresponding quantity The new DropRun count will apply only to the object edited

Adding Text in Image View

On-Screen Takeoff allows you to place text comments around your quantity takeoffs that may be printed along with plan images and objects Text is automatically placed within the Annotation Layer (that includes text and hot links)

1 To place text on the image select the Text Tool and click at the point you want to place your text opening a text box

2 Type in your information clicking Enter for line breaks

3 When you are finished click the OK button to exit the text box

4 To reposition text simply click on the text (with the Text Tool active) to select it

5 Move the cursor over the text the cursor will now display as a four-way arrow

6 Click and drag the mouse to position the text as desired

Section 8 Advanced Features

56

1 To edit existing text use the Text Tool to double-click on the text to open the editing box

2 Enter additional text or use the Backspace key to delete text as necessary

Formatting Text Once created you may format the font size type style and color of your text

1 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Font or click on the Font button in the Takeoff Toolbar

2 Select the desired features (color options are disabled) and click the OK button

3 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Color or click on the Color button in the Takeoff Toolbar The Color dialog will open

4 Click on a color in the Basic Color palette or create a color and add to the Custom Colors palette (Be sure to click on the color in the Custom Colors palette to select it)

5 Click the OK button

Object Properties

Linear Objects

Linear objects may be set to connect at corners

A linear object may be set to trim automatically when crossing another linear object (Check the trim option under the advanced tab of the Condition dialog)

When you move a connected linear object objects automatically move and resize connected lines accordingly (quantities are then recalculated)

This feature requires that the connected linear object be moved using the center handles (does not apply when resizing the line from the ends)

Objects constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

Objects are measured from centerline to centerline

Section 8 Advanced Features

57

Area Objects When drawing an area use your escape key to undo the last line drawn You may reverse your

drawing of an area using the escape key

The area will not fill with color and pattern until the user double-clicks after the last line is set

Lines drawn to delineate an area object constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

After selecting an area to move or adjust position the mouse in the center to move the entire area position the mouse at the sides or corners to adjust the perimeter

Count Objects

All count objects are quantified by the physical number of objects per page and reported as EA for the UOM The quantity for the current Image View is (displayed in the Condition List) and the total quantity in your project is displayed in the Takeoff View and Worksheet View)

Square circle rectangle and triangle shaped count objects do not displace or subtract from other object quantities when placed on top of them However on the Advanced Tab for the count condition a connect property can be set (this is a check box) so that when a count object of this shape is put on top of a Linear type takeoff object it will move with the linear if said linear is moved

An opened-shaped count object must be placed within a linear object Opening shaped count objects may also be measured by linear foot or linear yard (EA SF and SY are also options) Opening shaped count items default to a width of 3rsquo 0rdquo at the time of creation This size can be changed The small medium and large size are not options on this type of condition anymore Check Backout on the Advanced tab for each Count object back out the footage (or yardage) of opening-shaped count objects in which they are placed

NOTE In order to see this Backout functionality (in quantity) for SY or SF deductions at least one of the

results for the Linear(s) this object will be placed on must be set to SY or SF and the count object must have a height quantity

Advanced Features of Conditions The Round Feature Under the Advanced tab of the linear and area Condition dialogues you may specify quantity rounding (in inches) For linear objects rounding applies to each linear object drawn For area objects rounding will apply to each segment of the area perimeter adjusting the perimeter and area calculations For example With a linear condition entering 12 in the Round field will round up each related linear object to the nearest 12 inches or one foot With this setting two walls of 1 4 would each round to 2 0 totaling 4 0

NOTE In the Takeoff Dock bar condition list and in the On-Screen Takeoff reports quantities will be displayed in whole numbers rounded up to the nearest foot However calculations are based on true quantities without rounding unless the Round Feature is engaged

Pitch Pitch may apply either to linear or area conditions It is measured in rise per linear foot Entering 12 indicates a 12 rise per 12 of linear distance (a pitch of 12 over 12) or an angle of 45deg

Section 8 Advanced Features

58

Advanced Features of Project Properties Selecting Multiple Pages

1 Select a single page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry

2 Drag the cursor down the column of numbers to select consecutive pages

3 Click on the blank button at the top of this column to select all pages in the Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

59

Changing Image Assigned to a Drawing 1 Select the page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry 2 Click the Change Image button The Change Image dialog box will appear

3 Navigate to the desired file and select by clicking on it

4 Click the Open button The electronic file assigned to the page will have been changed to reflect the new file choice

Changing Image File Path 1 Select pages as described above

2 Choose Change Folder

3 In the Change Folder dialog navigate to the appropriate folder

4 Click the OK button The file path will have been changed for the selected page entries

Delete a Page from Project Properties 1 Select the page you want to delete by clicking on its associated number (in the gray box at the

left of the entry)

2 Choose Delete Page

All Takeoff on the page will be deleted immediately and permanently

Section 8 Advanced Features

60

Advanced Features of Tool Options

Calculation Method On-Screen Takeoff has built-in calculation options to allow for faster work and faster saves until your takeoff is complete Calculation options are found by selecting Tools gt Options then clicking on the Calculation tab

Calculation method can be set to Automatic Automatic except Grids and Manual Manual will allow the program to operate more quickly while Automatic or Automatic except Grids allows the user to see quantity changes as takeoffs are made

In any mode you may press F9 to recalculate quantities for the On-Screen Takeoff current totals

Configuration Tab

When the ldquoPage Label (A01)rdquo radial button is chosen On-Screen Takeoff puts the numbered label on all the pages of in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar If the Page Descriptionrdquo radial button is chosen then a description of what takeoff is on that specific page will be shown in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar

This section of the configuration tab gives you options on how you want to export your information When the ldquoFolderSubfolder Namesrdquo radial button is chosen than on your file that you are exporting to will have all the conditions folders and subfolders In the Delimiter box you can choose the symbol that is needed to separate the information you are exporting Some files need semicolons () or colons () to make sure the information comes exported in is separated it the appropriate places

Section 8 Advanced Features

61

In previous versions of On-Screen Takeoff there are views that users need to have in order for them to display their information By either choosing ldquoOST 1xrdquo or ldquoOST 2xrdquo it will let the program know you want your columns of information exported in that specific format

When you have the Confirm Deletions radial button of ldquoYesrdquo chosen than every time you delete anything you will get a dialog box confirming your intentions of deletion

While working with your takeoff you have a choice to either view the legend of your conditions or hide it Choose whichever radial button that suits your needs

For those who prefer to use the Enter key to navigate in dialog boxes this option is just for that

Font Tab The Font tab is designed for you to make your own look and feel for the application At the bottom of this tab it will show you sample of the fonts and colors you have chosen

Renaming the Current Page You may change the name of the current page in the takeoff area of On-Screen Takeoff by selecting Edit gt Rename Page

This opens the Name Page dialog and you may simply type in a new name and click the Enter button The new name for the file will be reflected on the title bar for the page and in Project Properties

You also may access the Rename Page function by right-clicking in the takeoff area while in Image View and selecting the option from the pop-up menu that appears

Section 9

62

Saving and Exiting

This section will

Explain how to save projects

Show you how to safely exit the program

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

63

Saving Your Project

1 Select File gt Save 2 If your project has not previously been saved a Save dialog box will open to allow you to name

the file and choose the directory and folder in which to save your file 3 Once saved File gt Save will simply save the current version of the file

OR

4 Select File gt Save As then type in a new name for the file and save to the desired file path

The Auto-save Feature With the Auto-save feature On-Screen Takeoff automatically backs up your open project You may choose to have more than one level of backup files The first backup copy will have the extension b00 and successive files will be b01 b02 and so on If you have designated four levels of backup files after the fourth backup copy has been created (b03) the next file will be saved over the file with extension b00 Further backup saves will then rotate through the four backup files in the same way

1 Select Tools gt Options 2 In the Auto-save area (under the General tab) select the frequency of backup file creation (in

minutes) and the number of levels for the feature 3 You also may disengage the feature by clicking in the check box to clear it

The Auto-save feature automatically saves backup copies to the directory of the current project If you are working from a write-protected area such as a CD-ROM On-Screen Takeoff will place backup files in the On-Screen Takeoff folder

Exiting When you are finished using On-Screen Takeoff it is very easy to exit Exiting is very important because of security reasons If someone were to use your computer they could enter the application and view and manipulate information

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

64

On-Screen Takeoff closes the open project when you open another or create a new project or when you exit the program

1 Select File gt Exit

OR

2 You also may click at the upper right-hand corner of the application to exit

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

65

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer When you get your digitizer from GTCO you will need to connect it to your computer Follow the instructions outlined below to do this

Note For rollup digitizers the metal bar must be oriented to the top or right hand side

Connecting the Digitizer 1 Lay the digitizer out flat 2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer 3 Plug in the power adapter 4 Plug the interface (IO) cable into the digitizer 5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into an open serial port on computer

Note GTCO Technical support phone number is 410-381-6688 The electronic manual (on diskette) from GTCO contains more detailed installation and operation instructions for the GTCO digitizer model you have

Installing other Digitizer Drivers If you are using a GTCO Digitizer you will need to install the GTCO TabletWorks Drivers

If you are using a Digitizer not supported by GTCO Tablet Works 10 please contact the manufacturer of your digitizer for assistance with installation

Installing GTCO TabletWorks Drivers 1 Insert the On Center CD into the CD-ROM drive The CD Startup screen will open 2 Click on Install Software 3 Select Additional Software and Drivers 4 Select Digitizer Driver 5 Follow the instructions for installing TabletWorks 10

Adhering the Template The template is a small plastic sticker used to enable mouse function when using the digitizer with On-Screen Takeoff Place your template on your digitizer We suggest placing it in the bottom right corner of the digitizer about one inch inside the takeoff area

Note You may either peel off the back of the template and use the adhesive surface or you can tape the template down

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

66

Testing the Digitizer Drivers Before running OST you may test the digitizer by moving the stylus around on the digitizer pad it should move the mouse cursor (if mouse emulation is enabled)

If the digitizer does not move the mouse cursor on the screen

The superset codes may need to be reset Reset the superset codes by touching on the border of the digitizer with the stylus The digitizer should beep several times

The digitizer may not be communicating with the computer Be sure the COM port selected is correct Be sure the COM port selected is correct If you are not able to get the digitizer to move the mouse cursor you need to call GTCO technical support for help

Note The Mouse Emulation is not required for On-Screen Takeoff to work properly It is used only for the Template functionality if the digitizer is moving the cursor the wrong direction (up instead of sideways or vice-versa)

Click the L-shaped arrow symbol on the digitizer with the stylus

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

67

Appendix II Toolbar Items Main Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

68

Tool Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

69

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

70

Navigate Toolbar (Continued)

Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

71

Takeoff Toolbar (Continued)

Image Toolbar

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

72

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

This section will detail how to load plans from a F W Dodge CD-ROM into an On-Screen Takeoff project file ready for takeoffs

Dodge files may be added to the Project Properties dialog However loading the files in that way will load the files by number rather than name description If you want to load one page only from your Dodge CD You will have to rename the page to display the name rather than number of the file

To load plan files from a Dodge CD so that the files load sequentially by file number but are displayed by name rather than by number within your project follow the instructions below

Opening a Dodge project from a CD-ROM 1 Insert the CD into the drive 2 Choose File gt Custom 3 Choose Dodge Plans Project (plansdat) as the file type 4 Select the appropriate file type by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the Files of type

field 5 In the Look in field access your drive paths by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the

field then

Navigate to your CD-ROM drive Open the data folder and Open the Projects folder

6 Select the desired project and open its folder 7 Open the plansdat file 8 All the images will come in sequenced correctly for that job along with the full descriptions

(names) of each page If there is not a plans folder in the project folder then plans do not exist for that project on the CD Opening the plansdat file will yield an empty project

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

73

Appendix IV Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer The On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer is a limited version of On Center Softwarersquos commercial takeoff software If your status bar located at the very bottom of the main window says View Mode in the lower left-hand corner then you are using the Plan Viewer You can use the plan viewer to

View CD-based amp converted CAD drawings

View a previously created OST file and associated drawings

Download electronic plans online

Navigate through drawings

Quickly Takeoff linearsareas and counts

Zoom in to view the plan better

Print drawings directly from the viewer

Viewing an On-Screen Takeoff Project File

1 To open an OST file that was previously created with of On-Screen Takeoff 2 Select File gt Open 3 An Open dialog will appear if you do not see the OST file you are looking for select the

Look In drop down arrow 4 A drop down menu will appear listing the various folders drives and mapped drives located

on your computer select the correct drive or folder location and continue to browse to the location of your OST file

5 When you see your OST file double-click it to open it 6 Any takeoff and drawings should appear on the Image tab view

If you do not see the drawings but do see the colored takeoff layer the drawings may

not be located in the same place they were originally saved at Go to File gt Project Properties and check the Image File path for each listed page If the image file path is pointing to a CD drive make sure the CD is inside the CR-ROM

Downloading Electronic Plans If your Online Plan Service provides a special file format (OSX) required to use this feature of our plan viewer you can immediately downloaded all electronic plans of a project directly from our viewer

Most Plan Room web sites will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff when a request to download plans is made Your particular Plan Room may differ in operation so please contact the provider directly with questions on using the site

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

74

When you request to download or open a project file from a Plan Room you will usually have the open to open or save an OSX file Choosing open will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff Alternately you may choose to save the file to a local hard drive After you have saved the file either double-click it to launch On-Screen Takeoff or open the OSX file using On-Screen Takeoff by clicking File then Open and locating the file on your hard drive You will need to change the file type to OSX

After the OSX file is opened you will see an additional tab appear in the Conditions List window called Pages

The Pages tab shows the hierarchy of your project Gray file icons represent pages that have not been downloaded and blue icons represents pages that have been downloaded

To download a page simply double-click the page icon

If you wish to select a group of pages to download you can use the Ctrl or Shift key to multiple select them then click the Download button

If you wish to download all pages at once click the Download All button

Downloaded pages will now appear in the Project Properties dialog in the same order in which they appear in the Pages tab

Creating Quick Takeoffs With On-Screen Takeoff you can create quick takeoffs to measure quantities even if you dont have the full version of our program However using the Quick Takeoff functionality shows you just a fraction of what the full version can do

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar is located at the top of the image view It has three buttons designated for three types of takeoffs Linear Area and Count The Quantity drop down list will show secondary quantities for Linears and Areas The Units drop down allows you to select how you want your quantities displayed Feet Inches Yards Millimeters and Meters

NOTE Every time change the type of takeoff you are performing (switching from Area to Linear for example) the previous quantities and takeoff objects will disappear They will also disappear when you changes pages

NOTE You can use the Dimension Tool to basically measure the distance between two points or linears The distance will display on the status bar at the bottom of the application

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

75

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions General

Where is On-Screen Takeoff installed on my computer

Typically it is installed in CProgram FilesOn-Screen Takeoff

In Explorer how do I recognize On-Screen Takeoff file types

On-Screen Takeoff data is stored in a single file per job lsquojob name OSTrsquo On-Screen Takeoff templates are stored as lsquotemplate nameTPOrsquo

Can only one project at a time be open

Yes For that reason opening another project automatically closes the project on screen You will be asked to save any changes

Is only one scale allowed per page What about on drawings that have multiple detail sections on a page and each of those drawings have different scales

Yes For pages with drawings of different scales copy the drawing to another project page and set the appropriate scale

I cannot perform backout on an area that is along a linear

As a workaround use the On-Screen Takeoff layers feature to help you with this issue Electronic Images

How do I start a project from drawings that have been scanned and written to a CD-ROM

Open a new project Select File gt Project Properties and select Auto Add Navigate to your CD and the appropriate folder and select any image file in that location Click Open All files in the location will load into your project Recommended that images are copied from CD to hard drive for performance

If I get a disk of drawings in AutoCAD format (R13 or R14) can I read them in On-Screen Takeoff

Yes On-Screen Takeoff now reads DWG DXF and many other format that are saved with AutoCAD

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

76

When I click on the all pages button what is supposed to happen Currently nothing seems to change when I click on that button

The All Pages button is used to apply the Darken and Enhance Plans feature to all pages in the project (as opposed to only the current page on screen)

Is there a way to deduct a large skylight from an area condition

Yes with the related area condition selected in the Takeoff Dock bar unselect the Backout button on the Takeoff Toolbar then draw the Backout area The area quantity will be deducted from the related condition object and the linear measurement of the Backout perimeter will be added

Digitizer Issues

How do I connect a Digitizer to the computer

See Appendix I Connecting a Digitizer

The Place Template menu choice is disabled

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or the digitizer or the digitzer drivers are not installed

It wonrsquot let me select the Set Takeoff Area menu choice

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or no job is open a digitizer is not installed or the drivers are not installed

The digitizer stylus is not moving the cursor or crosshairs

Click S-0-1 superset on the digitizer

How do I convert my old GTCO Digitizer to work with On- Screen Takeofftrade

Call GTCO and they may be able to reconfigure your digitizer to be compatible with On-Screen Takeoff

Printing Issues Which Printers work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible printers include On-Screen Takeoff Hewlett Packard Epson and Canon printers If you are having printer difficulties please contact support and specify the type of printer along with other pertinent information Contact support at wwwoncentercomsupport or email supportoncentercom

Which Plotters work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible Plotters include Hewlett Packard DesignJet plotters and the EnCAD Cadjet II If you are having plotter difficulties please contact support and specify the type of plotter concerned

ViewingDisplay I can no longer see my condition list How do I get it back

The toolbars and Dock bars can be turned on and off through the View gt Toolbars menu options

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

77

This is also accessible by right-clicking in the toolbar area and selecting (or deselecting) a toolbar listed

I cannot view my folders in the condition list

Right-click in the Takeoff Dock barcondition list area and select Show Tree to display your folders

My Status Bar reads Viewer Mode and I am unable to draw conditions

On-Screen Takeoff needs to be Authorized Or you need to purchase an upgrade Click the Perform Advanced Takeoff button on the main toolbar

I hid a Dock bar and when I selected to view it again it appeared alongside the other Dock

bar instead of stacked on top of it How do I fix it

Pick up the Dock bar by clicking on the bar at the top and continuing to hold down the mouse button drag the Dock bar over the other one It will resize and appear stacked with the other

When I open image files from a CD the images are all upside down How do I get them right

side up

To flip pages from top to bottom follow the steps below 1 Click the All Pages button on the Image Toolbar (All Pages is engaged when the button

is not clicked) 2 Click the Flip Horizontal button on the Image Toolbar 3 Click the All Pages button again to disengage

Templates How do I create a Template

Follow the steps below 1 Create a typical project 2 Choose File gt Save As 3 Choose On-Screen Takeoff Template Files as the file type to save 4 Name the file This will save all of the condition setups as well as the layers for the

project

How do I create a new project from a template

Follow the steps below 1 Choose File gt New 2 Select a template from those listed in the New dialog This will open a new project with

conditions and layers saved from a previous project but no pages or takeoff

78

INDEX

Area Conditions 32

Area Objects 57

Auto Scrolling 20

Auto-save 63

Backout Mode 41

Calculation Method 60

Conditions 29

Configuration 60

Contents Tab 6

Continuous Mode 38

Count Conditions 33

Count Objects 57

Digitizer 10 65 76

Docking Toolbars 13

Dodge CD 72

Drawing 27 37

DropRun Count 55

Environment 18

Exiting 63

Exporting 49

Features 16

Font 61

Frequently Asked Questions 75

Grid 40

Help File 5

Hiding Toolbars 13

Hot Links 21

Image 19 59

Image files 9

Image Toolbar 12 71

Images 75

Index Tab 6

Layers 43

Linear Conditions 31

Linear Objects 56

Main Toolbar 12 67

Menus 14

Moving Toolbars 13

Navigate Toolbar 12 69

Navigating 20

On-Screen Takeofftrade 2

Page 59 61

Pages 20 25 28

Plan Viewer 73

Plans 26

Printing 47 76

Project Properties 25

Projects 22

Quick Start Video 18

Resizing Toolbars 13

Roping 54

Saving 63

Scale 28

Search Tab 7

Selecting Objects 42

Setup 8

Start On-Screen Takeofftrade 17

System Requirements 9

Takeoff 19 27

Takeoff Toolbar 70 71

Takeoff Toolbar 12

Template Files 23

TIF (Group4) 9

Tool Toolbar 12 68

Toolbar 67

Toolbars 12

View Toolbar 12 69

Viewing Toolbars 12

Worksheet 20

Zone Conditions 33

Zoom Toolbar 12 69

  • On-Screen Takeoff Lite
  • Table of Contents
  • Section 1 - Introduction
  • Section 2 - Setup
  • Section 3 - Toolbars and Menus
  • Section 4 - Features
  • Section 5 - Projects
  • Section 6 - Conditions and Takeoff
  • Section 7 - Printing and Exporting
  • Section 8 - Advanced Features
  • Section 9 - Saving and Exiting
  • Appendix I - Installing Your Digitizer
  • Appendix II - Toolbar Items
  • Appendix III - Loading Plans from a Dodge CD
  • Appendix IV - Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer
  • Appendix V - Frequently Asked Questions
  • Index

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

42

Selecting Objects

1 Use the Select Tool to select objects

You can also select all objects that correspond to a condition

1 Click on a condition to select it

2 Right-click and choose Select All

3 All objects with this condition will be highlighted with squares as an outline

Moving and Resizing Objects Linear

1 To move or resize a linear object click anywhere on the line to select it

2 To move the line position your pointer over the center handles When the mouse is positioned over the handles you will see a two-way arrow You will only be able to move the line in the direction of the arrows

3 Drag the line to a new position

4 Clicking and dragging the handles on the ends of the line will allow you to lengthen or shorten your line

Area and Zone

1 To move an area object or zone in its entirety click and drag it to its new position

2 Grabbing a handle at a corner or intersection of the object will allow you to adjust and change its perimeter

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

43

Count 1 To move a square circle rectangle or triangle shaped count object click and drag

2 Click and drag an opening shaped count object along the length of the linear object to the desired position then release

NOTE An opening shaped count object may not be moved from its associated linear condition object however it may be moved up and down the length of the linear object

Layers On-Screen Takeoff allows you to sort and separate your takeoff objects within the same job and on the same page On-Screen Takeoff gives you this flexibility through the use of layers

By assigning different conditions to different layers (for example differentiating between floors ceilings and walls) you can choose to view all layers or turn off certain layers to display and print the remaining groups of conditions only You may also remove the background image of electronic plans add text and hot link symbols or print only your condition takeoffs

Layers are only available in Full Mode If you are in View or Lite Mode and would like to use this

feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade Default Layers

On-Screen Takeoff begins every project with three default layers Image Annotation and Default The Image layer holds the electronic plan files you may have in your project The Annotation layer possesses all text notations highlighting and hot links in the project The Default layer will appear in the Condition dialog when creating or editing a condition (listed in the takeoff dock bar) Conditions are assigned to the Default layer unless otherwise specified by the user

Creating Layers To assign a condition to a layer other than the default layer you must first create additional layers for your project

1 Select View gt Layers to open the Layers dialog

2 Click An unnamed layer will be added

3 Click within the empty box and type a name for your layer (for example Wall)

4 New layers are added as active layers The adjacent box under the Show column will be checked

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

44

Assigning a Layer to a Condition 1 Open the Condition dialog box by creating a new condition or editing an existing condition

2 Under the General tab click on the down arrow in the Layer field to display optional layers

3 Select the desired layer for the condition Only the Default layer and layers you have added will be displayed

4 Click

View and Hide Layers

1 Select View gt Layers

2 Under the Show column check the box to view or remove the check (by clicking on it) to hide the specific layer

3 Click to accept and close the Layers dialog

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

45

Assigning Text to a Layer When adding text to an image On-Screen Takeoff has the capability to assign the text to a specified layer

1 Select the Text Tool

2 Click at the point you want to place your text

3 Type in your text using the Enter key for line breaks

4 Click the drop down arrow next to the Layer field and select the desired layer

Section 7

46

Printing and Exporting

This section will

Printing options and procedures

Exporting data by copying and pasting

Exporting quantity results to Excel spreadsheets

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

47

Print Setup On-Screen Takeoff allows the user to print the image takeoff list and worksheet

1 Select File gt Print Setup The Print Setup dialog will open

2 Select a printer or leave the default selection listed (change from the default printer displayed by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the field)

3 Indicate page size and printer tray option (Source) Access page size options by clicking on the

down arrow at the right of the field

4 Choose Portrait or Landscape orientation

5 Click to accept and close the dialog

Printing Images The image area can include the electronic plans the takeoff objects added text and hot links To print a subset of these (for example just the takeoffs without the plans or the added text and hot link symbols) hide layers that you do not want to print (see Section 6 View and Hide Layers) When you are printing your images every page will show the scale of the takeoff you are printing

1 Click on the Image tab to display the area of your project

2 Select File gt Print (or Ctrl + P)

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

48

3 Select the desired view (What to print) and the Image Range

4 Click The second Print dialog will open

5 Change settings accordingly or click if you accept the default settings

Printing Takeoff Lists and Worksheets In Takeoff Lists and Worksheets you may hide columns to print only certain results or adjust column widths to fit the report within the page size selected

1 In Takeoff List or Worksheet view move your cursor to the right side of the columnrsquos title bar the cursor will display as a two-way arrow

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

49

2 Click and drag to adjust the width of the column Holding the mouse button you may

slide the title bar under the title bar to its left to hide the column completely

3 Select File gt Print or press Ctrl + P to access the Print dialog

4 Indicate desired printer and choose the number of copies

5 Click to print and close the dialog

When printing the condition list we suggest printing in landscape

To reset to the default column widths double-click on the right border of a column heading will reset the column to its right (or previously to its right before being hidden)

Print Preview 1 Select File gt Print Preview

2 Use and to vary your view 3 If viewing an image choose current full or scale view to see how it displays

4 For printed outputs that cover more than one page use and to view adjacent pages or click on the down arrow next to Page field and select the page you want displayed

Exporting Using the CopyPaste Feature You may copy all the data or sections from the worksheet and the takeoff list view in On-Screen Takeoff and paste it into another application When pasting into Excel the cell layout will be maintained

1 Highlight the areas you wish to paste Click and hold the left mouse button down as you drag the cursor over the area to be selected then releasing the mouse button

OR

2 Select the entire takeoff list quickly click on the left On-Screen Takeoff column header and hold and drag the cursor across the remaining column headings

The number of pages for the view selected will display in the lower left-hand corner The zoom percentage that applies to the view will be displayed in the lower right-hand corner next to page size of the drawing

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

50

3 In the worksheet view you may highlight rows by clicking on the numbered buttons to the left of each row clicking and dragging across column headings or clicking and dragging over individual cells in the worksheet

Click anywhere in the appropriate view to deselect the area

4 Once your selection is highlighted you may select Edit gt Copy or Ctrl C from the keyboard 5 On your monitor switch to the application into which you want to paste your selection 6 Select Edit gt Paste in the new application or simply press Ctrl + V to paste

The colored keys for conditions cannot be pasted

Using the Export Feature You may export condition quantities to specified cell location within an Excel worksheet file Cell target locations are assigned in the Results tab of the condition dialogs on the Export line relating to each quantity measurement type

On-Screen Takeoff will export takeoff quantity results for up to three different quantity types that you specify For instance you may want to know the number of square feet in a ceiling area as well as the number of linear feet in its perimeter

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

51

1 Bring up the Condition dialog by double-clicking on a condition in the takeoff dock bar or by

selecting the condition and clicking

2 Click on the Results tab to access its fields The default quantities for the condition type will display

3 For each results field click on the arrow to access the pull-down menu and select the appropriate quantity (for example SF LF EA etchellip)

4 Have your Excel spreadsheet opened and saved in a file

5 Specify the Excel spreadsheet cell locations where you want the results to go

6 For a cell in the first sheet of your spreadsheet type in the cell address (eg a1) Case is not important

7 For a cell on a successive sheet of your spreadsheet type in sheet the number followed by a comma and the cell address without any spaces (eg sheet2a1) Case is not important

8 Click

9 Select File gt Export gt Condition Qty to Excel

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

52

10 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

11 Click to export On-Screen Takeoff results to specified cell locations in the Excel file When you return to the Excel application you will see the values have been added to the specified cell locations in your spreadsheet

12 Save your Excel file

Exporting Worksheet to Excel

1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 From On-Screen Takeoff Select File gt Export gt Worksheet to Excel

4 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

5 Click When you return to the Excel application you will see the values from the Worksheet Tab have been added to your spreadsheet

6 Save your Excel file

Exporting Takeoff to CVS 1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 Click the Takeoff Tab in the project you want to export the information

4 Select File gt Export gt Takeoff to CSV

5 Browse to the location of the CSV spreadsheet file click file to select it

6 Click the Save

NOTE CSV files can be opened in Excel Lotus Access etc One may consider this option more of a ldquodumprdquo into a file

The Excel application must be active (it may be minimized on the application bar) with the target spreadsheet open in the application Otherwise an error will occur with the export operation that will affect both the On-Screen Takeofftrade file and the Excel spreadsheet

Section 8

53

Advanced Features

This section will

Some special features of working with condition objects in the takeoff area

Details of advanced options for conditions

Advanced features of the Project Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

54

Features to Use with Objects Roping Feature You can move copy or delete using this feature Using the Select tool (the pointer) you may select several objects at once by clicking and dragging an outline around the objects then releasing the mouse button Roping may select either objects completely within the outlined area (inclusive) or objects both within and touched by the outlined area (touching) Specify your roping preference under Tools gt Options

1 Click and hold the mouse button at a point on the screen near the objects to be selected and drag to surround the objects with an outline

2 Release the mouse button The objects will be selected

3 You may now

Move the group around on the page by clicking within the group dragging the mouse and releasing the button to place the objects

Delete the group of objects by clicking the Delete key or

Copy and paste by pressing Ctrl C to copy the group then Ctrl V to paste it The pasted copy of the grouped objects will appear slightly offset from the original objects

Section 8 Advanced Features

55

Applying a DropRun Count

Use the droprun feature when calculating quantities to take into account the drop or run of a linear condition such as electrical lines or plumbing pipes Drop or run lengths may be added separately to any linear condition on screen while a default droprun length may be indicated for a condition as a whole

1 Select the desired linear condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff Dock bar

2 Click the Change button in the toolbar to open the Change Condition dialog

3 Click the Advanced tab to access the advanced options and click inside the DropRun check box

4 Enter a default length to be applied to all of this condition Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches) You can leave the length blank and manually enter drop run on each segment drawn

5 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog

Edit DropRun Count

1 With the related linear condition in the Takeoff Dock bar highlighted or with the pointer tool selected

2 click on the desired linear object in the image takeoff area The Count button will become active

3 Click on the Count button (alternatively select Tools gt Count) The default droprun amount will show in the pop-up Count dialog (Default length will be zero if droprun has not been selected in this conditionrsquos properties)

4 Type in the desired length Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches)

5 Click the OK button The additional amount will be reflected in the corresponding quantity The new DropRun count will apply only to the object edited

Adding Text in Image View

On-Screen Takeoff allows you to place text comments around your quantity takeoffs that may be printed along with plan images and objects Text is automatically placed within the Annotation Layer (that includes text and hot links)

1 To place text on the image select the Text Tool and click at the point you want to place your text opening a text box

2 Type in your information clicking Enter for line breaks

3 When you are finished click the OK button to exit the text box

4 To reposition text simply click on the text (with the Text Tool active) to select it

5 Move the cursor over the text the cursor will now display as a four-way arrow

6 Click and drag the mouse to position the text as desired

Section 8 Advanced Features

56

1 To edit existing text use the Text Tool to double-click on the text to open the editing box

2 Enter additional text or use the Backspace key to delete text as necessary

Formatting Text Once created you may format the font size type style and color of your text

1 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Font or click on the Font button in the Takeoff Toolbar

2 Select the desired features (color options are disabled) and click the OK button

3 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Color or click on the Color button in the Takeoff Toolbar The Color dialog will open

4 Click on a color in the Basic Color palette or create a color and add to the Custom Colors palette (Be sure to click on the color in the Custom Colors palette to select it)

5 Click the OK button

Object Properties

Linear Objects

Linear objects may be set to connect at corners

A linear object may be set to trim automatically when crossing another linear object (Check the trim option under the advanced tab of the Condition dialog)

When you move a connected linear object objects automatically move and resize connected lines accordingly (quantities are then recalculated)

This feature requires that the connected linear object be moved using the center handles (does not apply when resizing the line from the ends)

Objects constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

Objects are measured from centerline to centerline

Section 8 Advanced Features

57

Area Objects When drawing an area use your escape key to undo the last line drawn You may reverse your

drawing of an area using the escape key

The area will not fill with color and pattern until the user double-clicks after the last line is set

Lines drawn to delineate an area object constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

After selecting an area to move or adjust position the mouse in the center to move the entire area position the mouse at the sides or corners to adjust the perimeter

Count Objects

All count objects are quantified by the physical number of objects per page and reported as EA for the UOM The quantity for the current Image View is (displayed in the Condition List) and the total quantity in your project is displayed in the Takeoff View and Worksheet View)

Square circle rectangle and triangle shaped count objects do not displace or subtract from other object quantities when placed on top of them However on the Advanced Tab for the count condition a connect property can be set (this is a check box) so that when a count object of this shape is put on top of a Linear type takeoff object it will move with the linear if said linear is moved

An opened-shaped count object must be placed within a linear object Opening shaped count objects may also be measured by linear foot or linear yard (EA SF and SY are also options) Opening shaped count items default to a width of 3rsquo 0rdquo at the time of creation This size can be changed The small medium and large size are not options on this type of condition anymore Check Backout on the Advanced tab for each Count object back out the footage (or yardage) of opening-shaped count objects in which they are placed

NOTE In order to see this Backout functionality (in quantity) for SY or SF deductions at least one of the

results for the Linear(s) this object will be placed on must be set to SY or SF and the count object must have a height quantity

Advanced Features of Conditions The Round Feature Under the Advanced tab of the linear and area Condition dialogues you may specify quantity rounding (in inches) For linear objects rounding applies to each linear object drawn For area objects rounding will apply to each segment of the area perimeter adjusting the perimeter and area calculations For example With a linear condition entering 12 in the Round field will round up each related linear object to the nearest 12 inches or one foot With this setting two walls of 1 4 would each round to 2 0 totaling 4 0

NOTE In the Takeoff Dock bar condition list and in the On-Screen Takeoff reports quantities will be displayed in whole numbers rounded up to the nearest foot However calculations are based on true quantities without rounding unless the Round Feature is engaged

Pitch Pitch may apply either to linear or area conditions It is measured in rise per linear foot Entering 12 indicates a 12 rise per 12 of linear distance (a pitch of 12 over 12) or an angle of 45deg

Section 8 Advanced Features

58

Advanced Features of Project Properties Selecting Multiple Pages

1 Select a single page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry

2 Drag the cursor down the column of numbers to select consecutive pages

3 Click on the blank button at the top of this column to select all pages in the Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

59

Changing Image Assigned to a Drawing 1 Select the page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry 2 Click the Change Image button The Change Image dialog box will appear

3 Navigate to the desired file and select by clicking on it

4 Click the Open button The electronic file assigned to the page will have been changed to reflect the new file choice

Changing Image File Path 1 Select pages as described above

2 Choose Change Folder

3 In the Change Folder dialog navigate to the appropriate folder

4 Click the OK button The file path will have been changed for the selected page entries

Delete a Page from Project Properties 1 Select the page you want to delete by clicking on its associated number (in the gray box at the

left of the entry)

2 Choose Delete Page

All Takeoff on the page will be deleted immediately and permanently

Section 8 Advanced Features

60

Advanced Features of Tool Options

Calculation Method On-Screen Takeoff has built-in calculation options to allow for faster work and faster saves until your takeoff is complete Calculation options are found by selecting Tools gt Options then clicking on the Calculation tab

Calculation method can be set to Automatic Automatic except Grids and Manual Manual will allow the program to operate more quickly while Automatic or Automatic except Grids allows the user to see quantity changes as takeoffs are made

In any mode you may press F9 to recalculate quantities for the On-Screen Takeoff current totals

Configuration Tab

When the ldquoPage Label (A01)rdquo radial button is chosen On-Screen Takeoff puts the numbered label on all the pages of in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar If the Page Descriptionrdquo radial button is chosen then a description of what takeoff is on that specific page will be shown in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar

This section of the configuration tab gives you options on how you want to export your information When the ldquoFolderSubfolder Namesrdquo radial button is chosen than on your file that you are exporting to will have all the conditions folders and subfolders In the Delimiter box you can choose the symbol that is needed to separate the information you are exporting Some files need semicolons () or colons () to make sure the information comes exported in is separated it the appropriate places

Section 8 Advanced Features

61

In previous versions of On-Screen Takeoff there are views that users need to have in order for them to display their information By either choosing ldquoOST 1xrdquo or ldquoOST 2xrdquo it will let the program know you want your columns of information exported in that specific format

When you have the Confirm Deletions radial button of ldquoYesrdquo chosen than every time you delete anything you will get a dialog box confirming your intentions of deletion

While working with your takeoff you have a choice to either view the legend of your conditions or hide it Choose whichever radial button that suits your needs

For those who prefer to use the Enter key to navigate in dialog boxes this option is just for that

Font Tab The Font tab is designed for you to make your own look and feel for the application At the bottom of this tab it will show you sample of the fonts and colors you have chosen

Renaming the Current Page You may change the name of the current page in the takeoff area of On-Screen Takeoff by selecting Edit gt Rename Page

This opens the Name Page dialog and you may simply type in a new name and click the Enter button The new name for the file will be reflected on the title bar for the page and in Project Properties

You also may access the Rename Page function by right-clicking in the takeoff area while in Image View and selecting the option from the pop-up menu that appears

Section 9

62

Saving and Exiting

This section will

Explain how to save projects

Show you how to safely exit the program

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

63

Saving Your Project

1 Select File gt Save 2 If your project has not previously been saved a Save dialog box will open to allow you to name

the file and choose the directory and folder in which to save your file 3 Once saved File gt Save will simply save the current version of the file

OR

4 Select File gt Save As then type in a new name for the file and save to the desired file path

The Auto-save Feature With the Auto-save feature On-Screen Takeoff automatically backs up your open project You may choose to have more than one level of backup files The first backup copy will have the extension b00 and successive files will be b01 b02 and so on If you have designated four levels of backup files after the fourth backup copy has been created (b03) the next file will be saved over the file with extension b00 Further backup saves will then rotate through the four backup files in the same way

1 Select Tools gt Options 2 In the Auto-save area (under the General tab) select the frequency of backup file creation (in

minutes) and the number of levels for the feature 3 You also may disengage the feature by clicking in the check box to clear it

The Auto-save feature automatically saves backup copies to the directory of the current project If you are working from a write-protected area such as a CD-ROM On-Screen Takeoff will place backup files in the On-Screen Takeoff folder

Exiting When you are finished using On-Screen Takeoff it is very easy to exit Exiting is very important because of security reasons If someone were to use your computer they could enter the application and view and manipulate information

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

64

On-Screen Takeoff closes the open project when you open another or create a new project or when you exit the program

1 Select File gt Exit

OR

2 You also may click at the upper right-hand corner of the application to exit

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

65

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer When you get your digitizer from GTCO you will need to connect it to your computer Follow the instructions outlined below to do this

Note For rollup digitizers the metal bar must be oriented to the top or right hand side

Connecting the Digitizer 1 Lay the digitizer out flat 2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer 3 Plug in the power adapter 4 Plug the interface (IO) cable into the digitizer 5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into an open serial port on computer

Note GTCO Technical support phone number is 410-381-6688 The electronic manual (on diskette) from GTCO contains more detailed installation and operation instructions for the GTCO digitizer model you have

Installing other Digitizer Drivers If you are using a GTCO Digitizer you will need to install the GTCO TabletWorks Drivers

If you are using a Digitizer not supported by GTCO Tablet Works 10 please contact the manufacturer of your digitizer for assistance with installation

Installing GTCO TabletWorks Drivers 1 Insert the On Center CD into the CD-ROM drive The CD Startup screen will open 2 Click on Install Software 3 Select Additional Software and Drivers 4 Select Digitizer Driver 5 Follow the instructions for installing TabletWorks 10

Adhering the Template The template is a small plastic sticker used to enable mouse function when using the digitizer with On-Screen Takeoff Place your template on your digitizer We suggest placing it in the bottom right corner of the digitizer about one inch inside the takeoff area

Note You may either peel off the back of the template and use the adhesive surface or you can tape the template down

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

66

Testing the Digitizer Drivers Before running OST you may test the digitizer by moving the stylus around on the digitizer pad it should move the mouse cursor (if mouse emulation is enabled)

If the digitizer does not move the mouse cursor on the screen

The superset codes may need to be reset Reset the superset codes by touching on the border of the digitizer with the stylus The digitizer should beep several times

The digitizer may not be communicating with the computer Be sure the COM port selected is correct Be sure the COM port selected is correct If you are not able to get the digitizer to move the mouse cursor you need to call GTCO technical support for help

Note The Mouse Emulation is not required for On-Screen Takeoff to work properly It is used only for the Template functionality if the digitizer is moving the cursor the wrong direction (up instead of sideways or vice-versa)

Click the L-shaped arrow symbol on the digitizer with the stylus

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

67

Appendix II Toolbar Items Main Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

68

Tool Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

69

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

70

Navigate Toolbar (Continued)

Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

71

Takeoff Toolbar (Continued)

Image Toolbar

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

72

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

This section will detail how to load plans from a F W Dodge CD-ROM into an On-Screen Takeoff project file ready for takeoffs

Dodge files may be added to the Project Properties dialog However loading the files in that way will load the files by number rather than name description If you want to load one page only from your Dodge CD You will have to rename the page to display the name rather than number of the file

To load plan files from a Dodge CD so that the files load sequentially by file number but are displayed by name rather than by number within your project follow the instructions below

Opening a Dodge project from a CD-ROM 1 Insert the CD into the drive 2 Choose File gt Custom 3 Choose Dodge Plans Project (plansdat) as the file type 4 Select the appropriate file type by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the Files of type

field 5 In the Look in field access your drive paths by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the

field then

Navigate to your CD-ROM drive Open the data folder and Open the Projects folder

6 Select the desired project and open its folder 7 Open the plansdat file 8 All the images will come in sequenced correctly for that job along with the full descriptions

(names) of each page If there is not a plans folder in the project folder then plans do not exist for that project on the CD Opening the plansdat file will yield an empty project

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

73

Appendix IV Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer The On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer is a limited version of On Center Softwarersquos commercial takeoff software If your status bar located at the very bottom of the main window says View Mode in the lower left-hand corner then you are using the Plan Viewer You can use the plan viewer to

View CD-based amp converted CAD drawings

View a previously created OST file and associated drawings

Download electronic plans online

Navigate through drawings

Quickly Takeoff linearsareas and counts

Zoom in to view the plan better

Print drawings directly from the viewer

Viewing an On-Screen Takeoff Project File

1 To open an OST file that was previously created with of On-Screen Takeoff 2 Select File gt Open 3 An Open dialog will appear if you do not see the OST file you are looking for select the

Look In drop down arrow 4 A drop down menu will appear listing the various folders drives and mapped drives located

on your computer select the correct drive or folder location and continue to browse to the location of your OST file

5 When you see your OST file double-click it to open it 6 Any takeoff and drawings should appear on the Image tab view

If you do not see the drawings but do see the colored takeoff layer the drawings may

not be located in the same place they were originally saved at Go to File gt Project Properties and check the Image File path for each listed page If the image file path is pointing to a CD drive make sure the CD is inside the CR-ROM

Downloading Electronic Plans If your Online Plan Service provides a special file format (OSX) required to use this feature of our plan viewer you can immediately downloaded all electronic plans of a project directly from our viewer

Most Plan Room web sites will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff when a request to download plans is made Your particular Plan Room may differ in operation so please contact the provider directly with questions on using the site

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

74

When you request to download or open a project file from a Plan Room you will usually have the open to open or save an OSX file Choosing open will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff Alternately you may choose to save the file to a local hard drive After you have saved the file either double-click it to launch On-Screen Takeoff or open the OSX file using On-Screen Takeoff by clicking File then Open and locating the file on your hard drive You will need to change the file type to OSX

After the OSX file is opened you will see an additional tab appear in the Conditions List window called Pages

The Pages tab shows the hierarchy of your project Gray file icons represent pages that have not been downloaded and blue icons represents pages that have been downloaded

To download a page simply double-click the page icon

If you wish to select a group of pages to download you can use the Ctrl or Shift key to multiple select them then click the Download button

If you wish to download all pages at once click the Download All button

Downloaded pages will now appear in the Project Properties dialog in the same order in which they appear in the Pages tab

Creating Quick Takeoffs With On-Screen Takeoff you can create quick takeoffs to measure quantities even if you dont have the full version of our program However using the Quick Takeoff functionality shows you just a fraction of what the full version can do

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar is located at the top of the image view It has three buttons designated for three types of takeoffs Linear Area and Count The Quantity drop down list will show secondary quantities for Linears and Areas The Units drop down allows you to select how you want your quantities displayed Feet Inches Yards Millimeters and Meters

NOTE Every time change the type of takeoff you are performing (switching from Area to Linear for example) the previous quantities and takeoff objects will disappear They will also disappear when you changes pages

NOTE You can use the Dimension Tool to basically measure the distance between two points or linears The distance will display on the status bar at the bottom of the application

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

75

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions General

Where is On-Screen Takeoff installed on my computer

Typically it is installed in CProgram FilesOn-Screen Takeoff

In Explorer how do I recognize On-Screen Takeoff file types

On-Screen Takeoff data is stored in a single file per job lsquojob name OSTrsquo On-Screen Takeoff templates are stored as lsquotemplate nameTPOrsquo

Can only one project at a time be open

Yes For that reason opening another project automatically closes the project on screen You will be asked to save any changes

Is only one scale allowed per page What about on drawings that have multiple detail sections on a page and each of those drawings have different scales

Yes For pages with drawings of different scales copy the drawing to another project page and set the appropriate scale

I cannot perform backout on an area that is along a linear

As a workaround use the On-Screen Takeoff layers feature to help you with this issue Electronic Images

How do I start a project from drawings that have been scanned and written to a CD-ROM

Open a new project Select File gt Project Properties and select Auto Add Navigate to your CD and the appropriate folder and select any image file in that location Click Open All files in the location will load into your project Recommended that images are copied from CD to hard drive for performance

If I get a disk of drawings in AutoCAD format (R13 or R14) can I read them in On-Screen Takeoff

Yes On-Screen Takeoff now reads DWG DXF and many other format that are saved with AutoCAD

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

76

When I click on the all pages button what is supposed to happen Currently nothing seems to change when I click on that button

The All Pages button is used to apply the Darken and Enhance Plans feature to all pages in the project (as opposed to only the current page on screen)

Is there a way to deduct a large skylight from an area condition

Yes with the related area condition selected in the Takeoff Dock bar unselect the Backout button on the Takeoff Toolbar then draw the Backout area The area quantity will be deducted from the related condition object and the linear measurement of the Backout perimeter will be added

Digitizer Issues

How do I connect a Digitizer to the computer

See Appendix I Connecting a Digitizer

The Place Template menu choice is disabled

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or the digitizer or the digitzer drivers are not installed

It wonrsquot let me select the Set Takeoff Area menu choice

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or no job is open a digitizer is not installed or the drivers are not installed

The digitizer stylus is not moving the cursor or crosshairs

Click S-0-1 superset on the digitizer

How do I convert my old GTCO Digitizer to work with On- Screen Takeofftrade

Call GTCO and they may be able to reconfigure your digitizer to be compatible with On-Screen Takeoff

Printing Issues Which Printers work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible printers include On-Screen Takeoff Hewlett Packard Epson and Canon printers If you are having printer difficulties please contact support and specify the type of printer along with other pertinent information Contact support at wwwoncentercomsupport or email supportoncentercom

Which Plotters work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible Plotters include Hewlett Packard DesignJet plotters and the EnCAD Cadjet II If you are having plotter difficulties please contact support and specify the type of plotter concerned

ViewingDisplay I can no longer see my condition list How do I get it back

The toolbars and Dock bars can be turned on and off through the View gt Toolbars menu options

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

77

This is also accessible by right-clicking in the toolbar area and selecting (or deselecting) a toolbar listed

I cannot view my folders in the condition list

Right-click in the Takeoff Dock barcondition list area and select Show Tree to display your folders

My Status Bar reads Viewer Mode and I am unable to draw conditions

On-Screen Takeoff needs to be Authorized Or you need to purchase an upgrade Click the Perform Advanced Takeoff button on the main toolbar

I hid a Dock bar and when I selected to view it again it appeared alongside the other Dock

bar instead of stacked on top of it How do I fix it

Pick up the Dock bar by clicking on the bar at the top and continuing to hold down the mouse button drag the Dock bar over the other one It will resize and appear stacked with the other

When I open image files from a CD the images are all upside down How do I get them right

side up

To flip pages from top to bottom follow the steps below 1 Click the All Pages button on the Image Toolbar (All Pages is engaged when the button

is not clicked) 2 Click the Flip Horizontal button on the Image Toolbar 3 Click the All Pages button again to disengage

Templates How do I create a Template

Follow the steps below 1 Create a typical project 2 Choose File gt Save As 3 Choose On-Screen Takeoff Template Files as the file type to save 4 Name the file This will save all of the condition setups as well as the layers for the

project

How do I create a new project from a template

Follow the steps below 1 Choose File gt New 2 Select a template from those listed in the New dialog This will open a new project with

conditions and layers saved from a previous project but no pages or takeoff

78

INDEX

Area Conditions 32

Area Objects 57

Auto Scrolling 20

Auto-save 63

Backout Mode 41

Calculation Method 60

Conditions 29

Configuration 60

Contents Tab 6

Continuous Mode 38

Count Conditions 33

Count Objects 57

Digitizer 10 65 76

Docking Toolbars 13

Dodge CD 72

Drawing 27 37

DropRun Count 55

Environment 18

Exiting 63

Exporting 49

Features 16

Font 61

Frequently Asked Questions 75

Grid 40

Help File 5

Hiding Toolbars 13

Hot Links 21

Image 19 59

Image files 9

Image Toolbar 12 71

Images 75

Index Tab 6

Layers 43

Linear Conditions 31

Linear Objects 56

Main Toolbar 12 67

Menus 14

Moving Toolbars 13

Navigate Toolbar 12 69

Navigating 20

On-Screen Takeofftrade 2

Page 59 61

Pages 20 25 28

Plan Viewer 73

Plans 26

Printing 47 76

Project Properties 25

Projects 22

Quick Start Video 18

Resizing Toolbars 13

Roping 54

Saving 63

Scale 28

Search Tab 7

Selecting Objects 42

Setup 8

Start On-Screen Takeofftrade 17

System Requirements 9

Takeoff 19 27

Takeoff Toolbar 70 71

Takeoff Toolbar 12

Template Files 23

TIF (Group4) 9

Tool Toolbar 12 68

Toolbar 67

Toolbars 12

View Toolbar 12 69

Viewing Toolbars 12

Worksheet 20

Zone Conditions 33

Zoom Toolbar 12 69

  • On-Screen Takeoff Lite
  • Table of Contents
  • Section 1 - Introduction
  • Section 2 - Setup
  • Section 3 - Toolbars and Menus
  • Section 4 - Features
  • Section 5 - Projects
  • Section 6 - Conditions and Takeoff
  • Section 7 - Printing and Exporting
  • Section 8 - Advanced Features
  • Section 9 - Saving and Exiting
  • Appendix I - Installing Your Digitizer
  • Appendix II - Toolbar Items
  • Appendix III - Loading Plans from a Dodge CD
  • Appendix IV - Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer
  • Appendix V - Frequently Asked Questions
  • Index

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

43

Count 1 To move a square circle rectangle or triangle shaped count object click and drag

2 Click and drag an opening shaped count object along the length of the linear object to the desired position then release

NOTE An opening shaped count object may not be moved from its associated linear condition object however it may be moved up and down the length of the linear object

Layers On-Screen Takeoff allows you to sort and separate your takeoff objects within the same job and on the same page On-Screen Takeoff gives you this flexibility through the use of layers

By assigning different conditions to different layers (for example differentiating between floors ceilings and walls) you can choose to view all layers or turn off certain layers to display and print the remaining groups of conditions only You may also remove the background image of electronic plans add text and hot link symbols or print only your condition takeoffs

Layers are only available in Full Mode If you are in View or Lite Mode and would like to use this

feature click from the main toolbar to purchase the upgrade Default Layers

On-Screen Takeoff begins every project with three default layers Image Annotation and Default The Image layer holds the electronic plan files you may have in your project The Annotation layer possesses all text notations highlighting and hot links in the project The Default layer will appear in the Condition dialog when creating or editing a condition (listed in the takeoff dock bar) Conditions are assigned to the Default layer unless otherwise specified by the user

Creating Layers To assign a condition to a layer other than the default layer you must first create additional layers for your project

1 Select View gt Layers to open the Layers dialog

2 Click An unnamed layer will be added

3 Click within the empty box and type a name for your layer (for example Wall)

4 New layers are added as active layers The adjacent box under the Show column will be checked

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

44

Assigning a Layer to a Condition 1 Open the Condition dialog box by creating a new condition or editing an existing condition

2 Under the General tab click on the down arrow in the Layer field to display optional layers

3 Select the desired layer for the condition Only the Default layer and layers you have added will be displayed

4 Click

View and Hide Layers

1 Select View gt Layers

2 Under the Show column check the box to view or remove the check (by clicking on it) to hide the specific layer

3 Click to accept and close the Layers dialog

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

45

Assigning Text to a Layer When adding text to an image On-Screen Takeoff has the capability to assign the text to a specified layer

1 Select the Text Tool

2 Click at the point you want to place your text

3 Type in your text using the Enter key for line breaks

4 Click the drop down arrow next to the Layer field and select the desired layer

Section 7

46

Printing and Exporting

This section will

Printing options and procedures

Exporting data by copying and pasting

Exporting quantity results to Excel spreadsheets

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

47

Print Setup On-Screen Takeoff allows the user to print the image takeoff list and worksheet

1 Select File gt Print Setup The Print Setup dialog will open

2 Select a printer or leave the default selection listed (change from the default printer displayed by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the field)

3 Indicate page size and printer tray option (Source) Access page size options by clicking on the

down arrow at the right of the field

4 Choose Portrait or Landscape orientation

5 Click to accept and close the dialog

Printing Images The image area can include the electronic plans the takeoff objects added text and hot links To print a subset of these (for example just the takeoffs without the plans or the added text and hot link symbols) hide layers that you do not want to print (see Section 6 View and Hide Layers) When you are printing your images every page will show the scale of the takeoff you are printing

1 Click on the Image tab to display the area of your project

2 Select File gt Print (or Ctrl + P)

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

48

3 Select the desired view (What to print) and the Image Range

4 Click The second Print dialog will open

5 Change settings accordingly or click if you accept the default settings

Printing Takeoff Lists and Worksheets In Takeoff Lists and Worksheets you may hide columns to print only certain results or adjust column widths to fit the report within the page size selected

1 In Takeoff List or Worksheet view move your cursor to the right side of the columnrsquos title bar the cursor will display as a two-way arrow

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

49

2 Click and drag to adjust the width of the column Holding the mouse button you may

slide the title bar under the title bar to its left to hide the column completely

3 Select File gt Print or press Ctrl + P to access the Print dialog

4 Indicate desired printer and choose the number of copies

5 Click to print and close the dialog

When printing the condition list we suggest printing in landscape

To reset to the default column widths double-click on the right border of a column heading will reset the column to its right (or previously to its right before being hidden)

Print Preview 1 Select File gt Print Preview

2 Use and to vary your view 3 If viewing an image choose current full or scale view to see how it displays

4 For printed outputs that cover more than one page use and to view adjacent pages or click on the down arrow next to Page field and select the page you want displayed

Exporting Using the CopyPaste Feature You may copy all the data or sections from the worksheet and the takeoff list view in On-Screen Takeoff and paste it into another application When pasting into Excel the cell layout will be maintained

1 Highlight the areas you wish to paste Click and hold the left mouse button down as you drag the cursor over the area to be selected then releasing the mouse button

OR

2 Select the entire takeoff list quickly click on the left On-Screen Takeoff column header and hold and drag the cursor across the remaining column headings

The number of pages for the view selected will display in the lower left-hand corner The zoom percentage that applies to the view will be displayed in the lower right-hand corner next to page size of the drawing

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

50

3 In the worksheet view you may highlight rows by clicking on the numbered buttons to the left of each row clicking and dragging across column headings or clicking and dragging over individual cells in the worksheet

Click anywhere in the appropriate view to deselect the area

4 Once your selection is highlighted you may select Edit gt Copy or Ctrl C from the keyboard 5 On your monitor switch to the application into which you want to paste your selection 6 Select Edit gt Paste in the new application or simply press Ctrl + V to paste

The colored keys for conditions cannot be pasted

Using the Export Feature You may export condition quantities to specified cell location within an Excel worksheet file Cell target locations are assigned in the Results tab of the condition dialogs on the Export line relating to each quantity measurement type

On-Screen Takeoff will export takeoff quantity results for up to three different quantity types that you specify For instance you may want to know the number of square feet in a ceiling area as well as the number of linear feet in its perimeter

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

51

1 Bring up the Condition dialog by double-clicking on a condition in the takeoff dock bar or by

selecting the condition and clicking

2 Click on the Results tab to access its fields The default quantities for the condition type will display

3 For each results field click on the arrow to access the pull-down menu and select the appropriate quantity (for example SF LF EA etchellip)

4 Have your Excel spreadsheet opened and saved in a file

5 Specify the Excel spreadsheet cell locations where you want the results to go

6 For a cell in the first sheet of your spreadsheet type in the cell address (eg a1) Case is not important

7 For a cell on a successive sheet of your spreadsheet type in sheet the number followed by a comma and the cell address without any spaces (eg sheet2a1) Case is not important

8 Click

9 Select File gt Export gt Condition Qty to Excel

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

52

10 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

11 Click to export On-Screen Takeoff results to specified cell locations in the Excel file When you return to the Excel application you will see the values have been added to the specified cell locations in your spreadsheet

12 Save your Excel file

Exporting Worksheet to Excel

1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 From On-Screen Takeoff Select File gt Export gt Worksheet to Excel

4 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

5 Click When you return to the Excel application you will see the values from the Worksheet Tab have been added to your spreadsheet

6 Save your Excel file

Exporting Takeoff to CVS 1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 Click the Takeoff Tab in the project you want to export the information

4 Select File gt Export gt Takeoff to CSV

5 Browse to the location of the CSV spreadsheet file click file to select it

6 Click the Save

NOTE CSV files can be opened in Excel Lotus Access etc One may consider this option more of a ldquodumprdquo into a file

The Excel application must be active (it may be minimized on the application bar) with the target spreadsheet open in the application Otherwise an error will occur with the export operation that will affect both the On-Screen Takeofftrade file and the Excel spreadsheet

Section 8

53

Advanced Features

This section will

Some special features of working with condition objects in the takeoff area

Details of advanced options for conditions

Advanced features of the Project Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

54

Features to Use with Objects Roping Feature You can move copy or delete using this feature Using the Select tool (the pointer) you may select several objects at once by clicking and dragging an outline around the objects then releasing the mouse button Roping may select either objects completely within the outlined area (inclusive) or objects both within and touched by the outlined area (touching) Specify your roping preference under Tools gt Options

1 Click and hold the mouse button at a point on the screen near the objects to be selected and drag to surround the objects with an outline

2 Release the mouse button The objects will be selected

3 You may now

Move the group around on the page by clicking within the group dragging the mouse and releasing the button to place the objects

Delete the group of objects by clicking the Delete key or

Copy and paste by pressing Ctrl C to copy the group then Ctrl V to paste it The pasted copy of the grouped objects will appear slightly offset from the original objects

Section 8 Advanced Features

55

Applying a DropRun Count

Use the droprun feature when calculating quantities to take into account the drop or run of a linear condition such as electrical lines or plumbing pipes Drop or run lengths may be added separately to any linear condition on screen while a default droprun length may be indicated for a condition as a whole

1 Select the desired linear condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff Dock bar

2 Click the Change button in the toolbar to open the Change Condition dialog

3 Click the Advanced tab to access the advanced options and click inside the DropRun check box

4 Enter a default length to be applied to all of this condition Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches) You can leave the length blank and manually enter drop run on each segment drawn

5 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog

Edit DropRun Count

1 With the related linear condition in the Takeoff Dock bar highlighted or with the pointer tool selected

2 click on the desired linear object in the image takeoff area The Count button will become active

3 Click on the Count button (alternatively select Tools gt Count) The default droprun amount will show in the pop-up Count dialog (Default length will be zero if droprun has not been selected in this conditionrsquos properties)

4 Type in the desired length Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches)

5 Click the OK button The additional amount will be reflected in the corresponding quantity The new DropRun count will apply only to the object edited

Adding Text in Image View

On-Screen Takeoff allows you to place text comments around your quantity takeoffs that may be printed along with plan images and objects Text is automatically placed within the Annotation Layer (that includes text and hot links)

1 To place text on the image select the Text Tool and click at the point you want to place your text opening a text box

2 Type in your information clicking Enter for line breaks

3 When you are finished click the OK button to exit the text box

4 To reposition text simply click on the text (with the Text Tool active) to select it

5 Move the cursor over the text the cursor will now display as a four-way arrow

6 Click and drag the mouse to position the text as desired

Section 8 Advanced Features

56

1 To edit existing text use the Text Tool to double-click on the text to open the editing box

2 Enter additional text or use the Backspace key to delete text as necessary

Formatting Text Once created you may format the font size type style and color of your text

1 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Font or click on the Font button in the Takeoff Toolbar

2 Select the desired features (color options are disabled) and click the OK button

3 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Color or click on the Color button in the Takeoff Toolbar The Color dialog will open

4 Click on a color in the Basic Color palette or create a color and add to the Custom Colors palette (Be sure to click on the color in the Custom Colors palette to select it)

5 Click the OK button

Object Properties

Linear Objects

Linear objects may be set to connect at corners

A linear object may be set to trim automatically when crossing another linear object (Check the trim option under the advanced tab of the Condition dialog)

When you move a connected linear object objects automatically move and resize connected lines accordingly (quantities are then recalculated)

This feature requires that the connected linear object be moved using the center handles (does not apply when resizing the line from the ends)

Objects constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

Objects are measured from centerline to centerline

Section 8 Advanced Features

57

Area Objects When drawing an area use your escape key to undo the last line drawn You may reverse your

drawing of an area using the escape key

The area will not fill with color and pattern until the user double-clicks after the last line is set

Lines drawn to delineate an area object constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

After selecting an area to move or adjust position the mouse in the center to move the entire area position the mouse at the sides or corners to adjust the perimeter

Count Objects

All count objects are quantified by the physical number of objects per page and reported as EA for the UOM The quantity for the current Image View is (displayed in the Condition List) and the total quantity in your project is displayed in the Takeoff View and Worksheet View)

Square circle rectangle and triangle shaped count objects do not displace or subtract from other object quantities when placed on top of them However on the Advanced Tab for the count condition a connect property can be set (this is a check box) so that when a count object of this shape is put on top of a Linear type takeoff object it will move with the linear if said linear is moved

An opened-shaped count object must be placed within a linear object Opening shaped count objects may also be measured by linear foot or linear yard (EA SF and SY are also options) Opening shaped count items default to a width of 3rsquo 0rdquo at the time of creation This size can be changed The small medium and large size are not options on this type of condition anymore Check Backout on the Advanced tab for each Count object back out the footage (or yardage) of opening-shaped count objects in which they are placed

NOTE In order to see this Backout functionality (in quantity) for SY or SF deductions at least one of the

results for the Linear(s) this object will be placed on must be set to SY or SF and the count object must have a height quantity

Advanced Features of Conditions The Round Feature Under the Advanced tab of the linear and area Condition dialogues you may specify quantity rounding (in inches) For linear objects rounding applies to each linear object drawn For area objects rounding will apply to each segment of the area perimeter adjusting the perimeter and area calculations For example With a linear condition entering 12 in the Round field will round up each related linear object to the nearest 12 inches or one foot With this setting two walls of 1 4 would each round to 2 0 totaling 4 0

NOTE In the Takeoff Dock bar condition list and in the On-Screen Takeoff reports quantities will be displayed in whole numbers rounded up to the nearest foot However calculations are based on true quantities without rounding unless the Round Feature is engaged

Pitch Pitch may apply either to linear or area conditions It is measured in rise per linear foot Entering 12 indicates a 12 rise per 12 of linear distance (a pitch of 12 over 12) or an angle of 45deg

Section 8 Advanced Features

58

Advanced Features of Project Properties Selecting Multiple Pages

1 Select a single page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry

2 Drag the cursor down the column of numbers to select consecutive pages

3 Click on the blank button at the top of this column to select all pages in the Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

59

Changing Image Assigned to a Drawing 1 Select the page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry 2 Click the Change Image button The Change Image dialog box will appear

3 Navigate to the desired file and select by clicking on it

4 Click the Open button The electronic file assigned to the page will have been changed to reflect the new file choice

Changing Image File Path 1 Select pages as described above

2 Choose Change Folder

3 In the Change Folder dialog navigate to the appropriate folder

4 Click the OK button The file path will have been changed for the selected page entries

Delete a Page from Project Properties 1 Select the page you want to delete by clicking on its associated number (in the gray box at the

left of the entry)

2 Choose Delete Page

All Takeoff on the page will be deleted immediately and permanently

Section 8 Advanced Features

60

Advanced Features of Tool Options

Calculation Method On-Screen Takeoff has built-in calculation options to allow for faster work and faster saves until your takeoff is complete Calculation options are found by selecting Tools gt Options then clicking on the Calculation tab

Calculation method can be set to Automatic Automatic except Grids and Manual Manual will allow the program to operate more quickly while Automatic or Automatic except Grids allows the user to see quantity changes as takeoffs are made

In any mode you may press F9 to recalculate quantities for the On-Screen Takeoff current totals

Configuration Tab

When the ldquoPage Label (A01)rdquo radial button is chosen On-Screen Takeoff puts the numbered label on all the pages of in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar If the Page Descriptionrdquo radial button is chosen then a description of what takeoff is on that specific page will be shown in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar

This section of the configuration tab gives you options on how you want to export your information When the ldquoFolderSubfolder Namesrdquo radial button is chosen than on your file that you are exporting to will have all the conditions folders and subfolders In the Delimiter box you can choose the symbol that is needed to separate the information you are exporting Some files need semicolons () or colons () to make sure the information comes exported in is separated it the appropriate places

Section 8 Advanced Features

61

In previous versions of On-Screen Takeoff there are views that users need to have in order for them to display their information By either choosing ldquoOST 1xrdquo or ldquoOST 2xrdquo it will let the program know you want your columns of information exported in that specific format

When you have the Confirm Deletions radial button of ldquoYesrdquo chosen than every time you delete anything you will get a dialog box confirming your intentions of deletion

While working with your takeoff you have a choice to either view the legend of your conditions or hide it Choose whichever radial button that suits your needs

For those who prefer to use the Enter key to navigate in dialog boxes this option is just for that

Font Tab The Font tab is designed for you to make your own look and feel for the application At the bottom of this tab it will show you sample of the fonts and colors you have chosen

Renaming the Current Page You may change the name of the current page in the takeoff area of On-Screen Takeoff by selecting Edit gt Rename Page

This opens the Name Page dialog and you may simply type in a new name and click the Enter button The new name for the file will be reflected on the title bar for the page and in Project Properties

You also may access the Rename Page function by right-clicking in the takeoff area while in Image View and selecting the option from the pop-up menu that appears

Section 9

62

Saving and Exiting

This section will

Explain how to save projects

Show you how to safely exit the program

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

63

Saving Your Project

1 Select File gt Save 2 If your project has not previously been saved a Save dialog box will open to allow you to name

the file and choose the directory and folder in which to save your file 3 Once saved File gt Save will simply save the current version of the file

OR

4 Select File gt Save As then type in a new name for the file and save to the desired file path

The Auto-save Feature With the Auto-save feature On-Screen Takeoff automatically backs up your open project You may choose to have more than one level of backup files The first backup copy will have the extension b00 and successive files will be b01 b02 and so on If you have designated four levels of backup files after the fourth backup copy has been created (b03) the next file will be saved over the file with extension b00 Further backup saves will then rotate through the four backup files in the same way

1 Select Tools gt Options 2 In the Auto-save area (under the General tab) select the frequency of backup file creation (in

minutes) and the number of levels for the feature 3 You also may disengage the feature by clicking in the check box to clear it

The Auto-save feature automatically saves backup copies to the directory of the current project If you are working from a write-protected area such as a CD-ROM On-Screen Takeoff will place backup files in the On-Screen Takeoff folder

Exiting When you are finished using On-Screen Takeoff it is very easy to exit Exiting is very important because of security reasons If someone were to use your computer they could enter the application and view and manipulate information

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

64

On-Screen Takeoff closes the open project when you open another or create a new project or when you exit the program

1 Select File gt Exit

OR

2 You also may click at the upper right-hand corner of the application to exit

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

65

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer When you get your digitizer from GTCO you will need to connect it to your computer Follow the instructions outlined below to do this

Note For rollup digitizers the metal bar must be oriented to the top or right hand side

Connecting the Digitizer 1 Lay the digitizer out flat 2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer 3 Plug in the power adapter 4 Plug the interface (IO) cable into the digitizer 5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into an open serial port on computer

Note GTCO Technical support phone number is 410-381-6688 The electronic manual (on diskette) from GTCO contains more detailed installation and operation instructions for the GTCO digitizer model you have

Installing other Digitizer Drivers If you are using a GTCO Digitizer you will need to install the GTCO TabletWorks Drivers

If you are using a Digitizer not supported by GTCO Tablet Works 10 please contact the manufacturer of your digitizer for assistance with installation

Installing GTCO TabletWorks Drivers 1 Insert the On Center CD into the CD-ROM drive The CD Startup screen will open 2 Click on Install Software 3 Select Additional Software and Drivers 4 Select Digitizer Driver 5 Follow the instructions for installing TabletWorks 10

Adhering the Template The template is a small plastic sticker used to enable mouse function when using the digitizer with On-Screen Takeoff Place your template on your digitizer We suggest placing it in the bottom right corner of the digitizer about one inch inside the takeoff area

Note You may either peel off the back of the template and use the adhesive surface or you can tape the template down

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

66

Testing the Digitizer Drivers Before running OST you may test the digitizer by moving the stylus around on the digitizer pad it should move the mouse cursor (if mouse emulation is enabled)

If the digitizer does not move the mouse cursor on the screen

The superset codes may need to be reset Reset the superset codes by touching on the border of the digitizer with the stylus The digitizer should beep several times

The digitizer may not be communicating with the computer Be sure the COM port selected is correct Be sure the COM port selected is correct If you are not able to get the digitizer to move the mouse cursor you need to call GTCO technical support for help

Note The Mouse Emulation is not required for On-Screen Takeoff to work properly It is used only for the Template functionality if the digitizer is moving the cursor the wrong direction (up instead of sideways or vice-versa)

Click the L-shaped arrow symbol on the digitizer with the stylus

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

67

Appendix II Toolbar Items Main Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

68

Tool Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

69

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

70

Navigate Toolbar (Continued)

Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

71

Takeoff Toolbar (Continued)

Image Toolbar

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

72

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

This section will detail how to load plans from a F W Dodge CD-ROM into an On-Screen Takeoff project file ready for takeoffs

Dodge files may be added to the Project Properties dialog However loading the files in that way will load the files by number rather than name description If you want to load one page only from your Dodge CD You will have to rename the page to display the name rather than number of the file

To load plan files from a Dodge CD so that the files load sequentially by file number but are displayed by name rather than by number within your project follow the instructions below

Opening a Dodge project from a CD-ROM 1 Insert the CD into the drive 2 Choose File gt Custom 3 Choose Dodge Plans Project (plansdat) as the file type 4 Select the appropriate file type by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the Files of type

field 5 In the Look in field access your drive paths by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the

field then

Navigate to your CD-ROM drive Open the data folder and Open the Projects folder

6 Select the desired project and open its folder 7 Open the plansdat file 8 All the images will come in sequenced correctly for that job along with the full descriptions

(names) of each page If there is not a plans folder in the project folder then plans do not exist for that project on the CD Opening the plansdat file will yield an empty project

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

73

Appendix IV Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer The On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer is a limited version of On Center Softwarersquos commercial takeoff software If your status bar located at the very bottom of the main window says View Mode in the lower left-hand corner then you are using the Plan Viewer You can use the plan viewer to

View CD-based amp converted CAD drawings

View a previously created OST file and associated drawings

Download electronic plans online

Navigate through drawings

Quickly Takeoff linearsareas and counts

Zoom in to view the plan better

Print drawings directly from the viewer

Viewing an On-Screen Takeoff Project File

1 To open an OST file that was previously created with of On-Screen Takeoff 2 Select File gt Open 3 An Open dialog will appear if you do not see the OST file you are looking for select the

Look In drop down arrow 4 A drop down menu will appear listing the various folders drives and mapped drives located

on your computer select the correct drive or folder location and continue to browse to the location of your OST file

5 When you see your OST file double-click it to open it 6 Any takeoff and drawings should appear on the Image tab view

If you do not see the drawings but do see the colored takeoff layer the drawings may

not be located in the same place they were originally saved at Go to File gt Project Properties and check the Image File path for each listed page If the image file path is pointing to a CD drive make sure the CD is inside the CR-ROM

Downloading Electronic Plans If your Online Plan Service provides a special file format (OSX) required to use this feature of our plan viewer you can immediately downloaded all electronic plans of a project directly from our viewer

Most Plan Room web sites will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff when a request to download plans is made Your particular Plan Room may differ in operation so please contact the provider directly with questions on using the site

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

74

When you request to download or open a project file from a Plan Room you will usually have the open to open or save an OSX file Choosing open will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff Alternately you may choose to save the file to a local hard drive After you have saved the file either double-click it to launch On-Screen Takeoff or open the OSX file using On-Screen Takeoff by clicking File then Open and locating the file on your hard drive You will need to change the file type to OSX

After the OSX file is opened you will see an additional tab appear in the Conditions List window called Pages

The Pages tab shows the hierarchy of your project Gray file icons represent pages that have not been downloaded and blue icons represents pages that have been downloaded

To download a page simply double-click the page icon

If you wish to select a group of pages to download you can use the Ctrl or Shift key to multiple select them then click the Download button

If you wish to download all pages at once click the Download All button

Downloaded pages will now appear in the Project Properties dialog in the same order in which they appear in the Pages tab

Creating Quick Takeoffs With On-Screen Takeoff you can create quick takeoffs to measure quantities even if you dont have the full version of our program However using the Quick Takeoff functionality shows you just a fraction of what the full version can do

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar is located at the top of the image view It has three buttons designated for three types of takeoffs Linear Area and Count The Quantity drop down list will show secondary quantities for Linears and Areas The Units drop down allows you to select how you want your quantities displayed Feet Inches Yards Millimeters and Meters

NOTE Every time change the type of takeoff you are performing (switching from Area to Linear for example) the previous quantities and takeoff objects will disappear They will also disappear when you changes pages

NOTE You can use the Dimension Tool to basically measure the distance between two points or linears The distance will display on the status bar at the bottom of the application

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

75

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions General

Where is On-Screen Takeoff installed on my computer

Typically it is installed in CProgram FilesOn-Screen Takeoff

In Explorer how do I recognize On-Screen Takeoff file types

On-Screen Takeoff data is stored in a single file per job lsquojob name OSTrsquo On-Screen Takeoff templates are stored as lsquotemplate nameTPOrsquo

Can only one project at a time be open

Yes For that reason opening another project automatically closes the project on screen You will be asked to save any changes

Is only one scale allowed per page What about on drawings that have multiple detail sections on a page and each of those drawings have different scales

Yes For pages with drawings of different scales copy the drawing to another project page and set the appropriate scale

I cannot perform backout on an area that is along a linear

As a workaround use the On-Screen Takeoff layers feature to help you with this issue Electronic Images

How do I start a project from drawings that have been scanned and written to a CD-ROM

Open a new project Select File gt Project Properties and select Auto Add Navigate to your CD and the appropriate folder and select any image file in that location Click Open All files in the location will load into your project Recommended that images are copied from CD to hard drive for performance

If I get a disk of drawings in AutoCAD format (R13 or R14) can I read them in On-Screen Takeoff

Yes On-Screen Takeoff now reads DWG DXF and many other format that are saved with AutoCAD

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

76

When I click on the all pages button what is supposed to happen Currently nothing seems to change when I click on that button

The All Pages button is used to apply the Darken and Enhance Plans feature to all pages in the project (as opposed to only the current page on screen)

Is there a way to deduct a large skylight from an area condition

Yes with the related area condition selected in the Takeoff Dock bar unselect the Backout button on the Takeoff Toolbar then draw the Backout area The area quantity will be deducted from the related condition object and the linear measurement of the Backout perimeter will be added

Digitizer Issues

How do I connect a Digitizer to the computer

See Appendix I Connecting a Digitizer

The Place Template menu choice is disabled

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or the digitizer or the digitzer drivers are not installed

It wonrsquot let me select the Set Takeoff Area menu choice

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or no job is open a digitizer is not installed or the drivers are not installed

The digitizer stylus is not moving the cursor or crosshairs

Click S-0-1 superset on the digitizer

How do I convert my old GTCO Digitizer to work with On- Screen Takeofftrade

Call GTCO and they may be able to reconfigure your digitizer to be compatible with On-Screen Takeoff

Printing Issues Which Printers work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible printers include On-Screen Takeoff Hewlett Packard Epson and Canon printers If you are having printer difficulties please contact support and specify the type of printer along with other pertinent information Contact support at wwwoncentercomsupport or email supportoncentercom

Which Plotters work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible Plotters include Hewlett Packard DesignJet plotters and the EnCAD Cadjet II If you are having plotter difficulties please contact support and specify the type of plotter concerned

ViewingDisplay I can no longer see my condition list How do I get it back

The toolbars and Dock bars can be turned on and off through the View gt Toolbars menu options

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

77

This is also accessible by right-clicking in the toolbar area and selecting (or deselecting) a toolbar listed

I cannot view my folders in the condition list

Right-click in the Takeoff Dock barcondition list area and select Show Tree to display your folders

My Status Bar reads Viewer Mode and I am unable to draw conditions

On-Screen Takeoff needs to be Authorized Or you need to purchase an upgrade Click the Perform Advanced Takeoff button on the main toolbar

I hid a Dock bar and when I selected to view it again it appeared alongside the other Dock

bar instead of stacked on top of it How do I fix it

Pick up the Dock bar by clicking on the bar at the top and continuing to hold down the mouse button drag the Dock bar over the other one It will resize and appear stacked with the other

When I open image files from a CD the images are all upside down How do I get them right

side up

To flip pages from top to bottom follow the steps below 1 Click the All Pages button on the Image Toolbar (All Pages is engaged when the button

is not clicked) 2 Click the Flip Horizontal button on the Image Toolbar 3 Click the All Pages button again to disengage

Templates How do I create a Template

Follow the steps below 1 Create a typical project 2 Choose File gt Save As 3 Choose On-Screen Takeoff Template Files as the file type to save 4 Name the file This will save all of the condition setups as well as the layers for the

project

How do I create a new project from a template

Follow the steps below 1 Choose File gt New 2 Select a template from those listed in the New dialog This will open a new project with

conditions and layers saved from a previous project but no pages or takeoff

78

INDEX

Area Conditions 32

Area Objects 57

Auto Scrolling 20

Auto-save 63

Backout Mode 41

Calculation Method 60

Conditions 29

Configuration 60

Contents Tab 6

Continuous Mode 38

Count Conditions 33

Count Objects 57

Digitizer 10 65 76

Docking Toolbars 13

Dodge CD 72

Drawing 27 37

DropRun Count 55

Environment 18

Exiting 63

Exporting 49

Features 16

Font 61

Frequently Asked Questions 75

Grid 40

Help File 5

Hiding Toolbars 13

Hot Links 21

Image 19 59

Image files 9

Image Toolbar 12 71

Images 75

Index Tab 6

Layers 43

Linear Conditions 31

Linear Objects 56

Main Toolbar 12 67

Menus 14

Moving Toolbars 13

Navigate Toolbar 12 69

Navigating 20

On-Screen Takeofftrade 2

Page 59 61

Pages 20 25 28

Plan Viewer 73

Plans 26

Printing 47 76

Project Properties 25

Projects 22

Quick Start Video 18

Resizing Toolbars 13

Roping 54

Saving 63

Scale 28

Search Tab 7

Selecting Objects 42

Setup 8

Start On-Screen Takeofftrade 17

System Requirements 9

Takeoff 19 27

Takeoff Toolbar 70 71

Takeoff Toolbar 12

Template Files 23

TIF (Group4) 9

Tool Toolbar 12 68

Toolbar 67

Toolbars 12

View Toolbar 12 69

Viewing Toolbars 12

Worksheet 20

Zone Conditions 33

Zoom Toolbar 12 69

  • On-Screen Takeoff Lite
  • Table of Contents
  • Section 1 - Introduction
  • Section 2 - Setup
  • Section 3 - Toolbars and Menus
  • Section 4 - Features
  • Section 5 - Projects
  • Section 6 - Conditions and Takeoff
  • Section 7 - Printing and Exporting
  • Section 8 - Advanced Features
  • Section 9 - Saving and Exiting
  • Appendix I - Installing Your Digitizer
  • Appendix II - Toolbar Items
  • Appendix III - Loading Plans from a Dodge CD
  • Appendix IV - Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer
  • Appendix V - Frequently Asked Questions
  • Index

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

44

Assigning a Layer to a Condition 1 Open the Condition dialog box by creating a new condition or editing an existing condition

2 Under the General tab click on the down arrow in the Layer field to display optional layers

3 Select the desired layer for the condition Only the Default layer and layers you have added will be displayed

4 Click

View and Hide Layers

1 Select View gt Layers

2 Under the Show column check the box to view or remove the check (by clicking on it) to hide the specific layer

3 Click to accept and close the Layers dialog

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

45

Assigning Text to a Layer When adding text to an image On-Screen Takeoff has the capability to assign the text to a specified layer

1 Select the Text Tool

2 Click at the point you want to place your text

3 Type in your text using the Enter key for line breaks

4 Click the drop down arrow next to the Layer field and select the desired layer

Section 7

46

Printing and Exporting

This section will

Printing options and procedures

Exporting data by copying and pasting

Exporting quantity results to Excel spreadsheets

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

47

Print Setup On-Screen Takeoff allows the user to print the image takeoff list and worksheet

1 Select File gt Print Setup The Print Setup dialog will open

2 Select a printer or leave the default selection listed (change from the default printer displayed by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the field)

3 Indicate page size and printer tray option (Source) Access page size options by clicking on the

down arrow at the right of the field

4 Choose Portrait or Landscape orientation

5 Click to accept and close the dialog

Printing Images The image area can include the electronic plans the takeoff objects added text and hot links To print a subset of these (for example just the takeoffs without the plans or the added text and hot link symbols) hide layers that you do not want to print (see Section 6 View and Hide Layers) When you are printing your images every page will show the scale of the takeoff you are printing

1 Click on the Image tab to display the area of your project

2 Select File gt Print (or Ctrl + P)

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

48

3 Select the desired view (What to print) and the Image Range

4 Click The second Print dialog will open

5 Change settings accordingly or click if you accept the default settings

Printing Takeoff Lists and Worksheets In Takeoff Lists and Worksheets you may hide columns to print only certain results or adjust column widths to fit the report within the page size selected

1 In Takeoff List or Worksheet view move your cursor to the right side of the columnrsquos title bar the cursor will display as a two-way arrow

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

49

2 Click and drag to adjust the width of the column Holding the mouse button you may

slide the title bar under the title bar to its left to hide the column completely

3 Select File gt Print or press Ctrl + P to access the Print dialog

4 Indicate desired printer and choose the number of copies

5 Click to print and close the dialog

When printing the condition list we suggest printing in landscape

To reset to the default column widths double-click on the right border of a column heading will reset the column to its right (or previously to its right before being hidden)

Print Preview 1 Select File gt Print Preview

2 Use and to vary your view 3 If viewing an image choose current full or scale view to see how it displays

4 For printed outputs that cover more than one page use and to view adjacent pages or click on the down arrow next to Page field and select the page you want displayed

Exporting Using the CopyPaste Feature You may copy all the data or sections from the worksheet and the takeoff list view in On-Screen Takeoff and paste it into another application When pasting into Excel the cell layout will be maintained

1 Highlight the areas you wish to paste Click and hold the left mouse button down as you drag the cursor over the area to be selected then releasing the mouse button

OR

2 Select the entire takeoff list quickly click on the left On-Screen Takeoff column header and hold and drag the cursor across the remaining column headings

The number of pages for the view selected will display in the lower left-hand corner The zoom percentage that applies to the view will be displayed in the lower right-hand corner next to page size of the drawing

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

50

3 In the worksheet view you may highlight rows by clicking on the numbered buttons to the left of each row clicking and dragging across column headings or clicking and dragging over individual cells in the worksheet

Click anywhere in the appropriate view to deselect the area

4 Once your selection is highlighted you may select Edit gt Copy or Ctrl C from the keyboard 5 On your monitor switch to the application into which you want to paste your selection 6 Select Edit gt Paste in the new application or simply press Ctrl + V to paste

The colored keys for conditions cannot be pasted

Using the Export Feature You may export condition quantities to specified cell location within an Excel worksheet file Cell target locations are assigned in the Results tab of the condition dialogs on the Export line relating to each quantity measurement type

On-Screen Takeoff will export takeoff quantity results for up to three different quantity types that you specify For instance you may want to know the number of square feet in a ceiling area as well as the number of linear feet in its perimeter

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

51

1 Bring up the Condition dialog by double-clicking on a condition in the takeoff dock bar or by

selecting the condition and clicking

2 Click on the Results tab to access its fields The default quantities for the condition type will display

3 For each results field click on the arrow to access the pull-down menu and select the appropriate quantity (for example SF LF EA etchellip)

4 Have your Excel spreadsheet opened and saved in a file

5 Specify the Excel spreadsheet cell locations where you want the results to go

6 For a cell in the first sheet of your spreadsheet type in the cell address (eg a1) Case is not important

7 For a cell on a successive sheet of your spreadsheet type in sheet the number followed by a comma and the cell address without any spaces (eg sheet2a1) Case is not important

8 Click

9 Select File gt Export gt Condition Qty to Excel

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

52

10 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

11 Click to export On-Screen Takeoff results to specified cell locations in the Excel file When you return to the Excel application you will see the values have been added to the specified cell locations in your spreadsheet

12 Save your Excel file

Exporting Worksheet to Excel

1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 From On-Screen Takeoff Select File gt Export gt Worksheet to Excel

4 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

5 Click When you return to the Excel application you will see the values from the Worksheet Tab have been added to your spreadsheet

6 Save your Excel file

Exporting Takeoff to CVS 1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 Click the Takeoff Tab in the project you want to export the information

4 Select File gt Export gt Takeoff to CSV

5 Browse to the location of the CSV spreadsheet file click file to select it

6 Click the Save

NOTE CSV files can be opened in Excel Lotus Access etc One may consider this option more of a ldquodumprdquo into a file

The Excel application must be active (it may be minimized on the application bar) with the target spreadsheet open in the application Otherwise an error will occur with the export operation that will affect both the On-Screen Takeofftrade file and the Excel spreadsheet

Section 8

53

Advanced Features

This section will

Some special features of working with condition objects in the takeoff area

Details of advanced options for conditions

Advanced features of the Project Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

54

Features to Use with Objects Roping Feature You can move copy or delete using this feature Using the Select tool (the pointer) you may select several objects at once by clicking and dragging an outline around the objects then releasing the mouse button Roping may select either objects completely within the outlined area (inclusive) or objects both within and touched by the outlined area (touching) Specify your roping preference under Tools gt Options

1 Click and hold the mouse button at a point on the screen near the objects to be selected and drag to surround the objects with an outline

2 Release the mouse button The objects will be selected

3 You may now

Move the group around on the page by clicking within the group dragging the mouse and releasing the button to place the objects

Delete the group of objects by clicking the Delete key or

Copy and paste by pressing Ctrl C to copy the group then Ctrl V to paste it The pasted copy of the grouped objects will appear slightly offset from the original objects

Section 8 Advanced Features

55

Applying a DropRun Count

Use the droprun feature when calculating quantities to take into account the drop or run of a linear condition such as electrical lines or plumbing pipes Drop or run lengths may be added separately to any linear condition on screen while a default droprun length may be indicated for a condition as a whole

1 Select the desired linear condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff Dock bar

2 Click the Change button in the toolbar to open the Change Condition dialog

3 Click the Advanced tab to access the advanced options and click inside the DropRun check box

4 Enter a default length to be applied to all of this condition Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches) You can leave the length blank and manually enter drop run on each segment drawn

5 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog

Edit DropRun Count

1 With the related linear condition in the Takeoff Dock bar highlighted or with the pointer tool selected

2 click on the desired linear object in the image takeoff area The Count button will become active

3 Click on the Count button (alternatively select Tools gt Count) The default droprun amount will show in the pop-up Count dialog (Default length will be zero if droprun has not been selected in this conditionrsquos properties)

4 Type in the desired length Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches)

5 Click the OK button The additional amount will be reflected in the corresponding quantity The new DropRun count will apply only to the object edited

Adding Text in Image View

On-Screen Takeoff allows you to place text comments around your quantity takeoffs that may be printed along with plan images and objects Text is automatically placed within the Annotation Layer (that includes text and hot links)

1 To place text on the image select the Text Tool and click at the point you want to place your text opening a text box

2 Type in your information clicking Enter for line breaks

3 When you are finished click the OK button to exit the text box

4 To reposition text simply click on the text (with the Text Tool active) to select it

5 Move the cursor over the text the cursor will now display as a four-way arrow

6 Click and drag the mouse to position the text as desired

Section 8 Advanced Features

56

1 To edit existing text use the Text Tool to double-click on the text to open the editing box

2 Enter additional text or use the Backspace key to delete text as necessary

Formatting Text Once created you may format the font size type style and color of your text

1 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Font or click on the Font button in the Takeoff Toolbar

2 Select the desired features (color options are disabled) and click the OK button

3 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Color or click on the Color button in the Takeoff Toolbar The Color dialog will open

4 Click on a color in the Basic Color palette or create a color and add to the Custom Colors palette (Be sure to click on the color in the Custom Colors palette to select it)

5 Click the OK button

Object Properties

Linear Objects

Linear objects may be set to connect at corners

A linear object may be set to trim automatically when crossing another linear object (Check the trim option under the advanced tab of the Condition dialog)

When you move a connected linear object objects automatically move and resize connected lines accordingly (quantities are then recalculated)

This feature requires that the connected linear object be moved using the center handles (does not apply when resizing the line from the ends)

Objects constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

Objects are measured from centerline to centerline

Section 8 Advanced Features

57

Area Objects When drawing an area use your escape key to undo the last line drawn You may reverse your

drawing of an area using the escape key

The area will not fill with color and pattern until the user double-clicks after the last line is set

Lines drawn to delineate an area object constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

After selecting an area to move or adjust position the mouse in the center to move the entire area position the mouse at the sides or corners to adjust the perimeter

Count Objects

All count objects are quantified by the physical number of objects per page and reported as EA for the UOM The quantity for the current Image View is (displayed in the Condition List) and the total quantity in your project is displayed in the Takeoff View and Worksheet View)

Square circle rectangle and triangle shaped count objects do not displace or subtract from other object quantities when placed on top of them However on the Advanced Tab for the count condition a connect property can be set (this is a check box) so that when a count object of this shape is put on top of a Linear type takeoff object it will move with the linear if said linear is moved

An opened-shaped count object must be placed within a linear object Opening shaped count objects may also be measured by linear foot or linear yard (EA SF and SY are also options) Opening shaped count items default to a width of 3rsquo 0rdquo at the time of creation This size can be changed The small medium and large size are not options on this type of condition anymore Check Backout on the Advanced tab for each Count object back out the footage (or yardage) of opening-shaped count objects in which they are placed

NOTE In order to see this Backout functionality (in quantity) for SY or SF deductions at least one of the

results for the Linear(s) this object will be placed on must be set to SY or SF and the count object must have a height quantity

Advanced Features of Conditions The Round Feature Under the Advanced tab of the linear and area Condition dialogues you may specify quantity rounding (in inches) For linear objects rounding applies to each linear object drawn For area objects rounding will apply to each segment of the area perimeter adjusting the perimeter and area calculations For example With a linear condition entering 12 in the Round field will round up each related linear object to the nearest 12 inches or one foot With this setting two walls of 1 4 would each round to 2 0 totaling 4 0

NOTE In the Takeoff Dock bar condition list and in the On-Screen Takeoff reports quantities will be displayed in whole numbers rounded up to the nearest foot However calculations are based on true quantities without rounding unless the Round Feature is engaged

Pitch Pitch may apply either to linear or area conditions It is measured in rise per linear foot Entering 12 indicates a 12 rise per 12 of linear distance (a pitch of 12 over 12) or an angle of 45deg

Section 8 Advanced Features

58

Advanced Features of Project Properties Selecting Multiple Pages

1 Select a single page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry

2 Drag the cursor down the column of numbers to select consecutive pages

3 Click on the blank button at the top of this column to select all pages in the Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

59

Changing Image Assigned to a Drawing 1 Select the page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry 2 Click the Change Image button The Change Image dialog box will appear

3 Navigate to the desired file and select by clicking on it

4 Click the Open button The electronic file assigned to the page will have been changed to reflect the new file choice

Changing Image File Path 1 Select pages as described above

2 Choose Change Folder

3 In the Change Folder dialog navigate to the appropriate folder

4 Click the OK button The file path will have been changed for the selected page entries

Delete a Page from Project Properties 1 Select the page you want to delete by clicking on its associated number (in the gray box at the

left of the entry)

2 Choose Delete Page

All Takeoff on the page will be deleted immediately and permanently

Section 8 Advanced Features

60

Advanced Features of Tool Options

Calculation Method On-Screen Takeoff has built-in calculation options to allow for faster work and faster saves until your takeoff is complete Calculation options are found by selecting Tools gt Options then clicking on the Calculation tab

Calculation method can be set to Automatic Automatic except Grids and Manual Manual will allow the program to operate more quickly while Automatic or Automatic except Grids allows the user to see quantity changes as takeoffs are made

In any mode you may press F9 to recalculate quantities for the On-Screen Takeoff current totals

Configuration Tab

When the ldquoPage Label (A01)rdquo radial button is chosen On-Screen Takeoff puts the numbered label on all the pages of in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar If the Page Descriptionrdquo radial button is chosen then a description of what takeoff is on that specific page will be shown in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar

This section of the configuration tab gives you options on how you want to export your information When the ldquoFolderSubfolder Namesrdquo radial button is chosen than on your file that you are exporting to will have all the conditions folders and subfolders In the Delimiter box you can choose the symbol that is needed to separate the information you are exporting Some files need semicolons () or colons () to make sure the information comes exported in is separated it the appropriate places

Section 8 Advanced Features

61

In previous versions of On-Screen Takeoff there are views that users need to have in order for them to display their information By either choosing ldquoOST 1xrdquo or ldquoOST 2xrdquo it will let the program know you want your columns of information exported in that specific format

When you have the Confirm Deletions radial button of ldquoYesrdquo chosen than every time you delete anything you will get a dialog box confirming your intentions of deletion

While working with your takeoff you have a choice to either view the legend of your conditions or hide it Choose whichever radial button that suits your needs

For those who prefer to use the Enter key to navigate in dialog boxes this option is just for that

Font Tab The Font tab is designed for you to make your own look and feel for the application At the bottom of this tab it will show you sample of the fonts and colors you have chosen

Renaming the Current Page You may change the name of the current page in the takeoff area of On-Screen Takeoff by selecting Edit gt Rename Page

This opens the Name Page dialog and you may simply type in a new name and click the Enter button The new name for the file will be reflected on the title bar for the page and in Project Properties

You also may access the Rename Page function by right-clicking in the takeoff area while in Image View and selecting the option from the pop-up menu that appears

Section 9

62

Saving and Exiting

This section will

Explain how to save projects

Show you how to safely exit the program

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

63

Saving Your Project

1 Select File gt Save 2 If your project has not previously been saved a Save dialog box will open to allow you to name

the file and choose the directory and folder in which to save your file 3 Once saved File gt Save will simply save the current version of the file

OR

4 Select File gt Save As then type in a new name for the file and save to the desired file path

The Auto-save Feature With the Auto-save feature On-Screen Takeoff automatically backs up your open project You may choose to have more than one level of backup files The first backup copy will have the extension b00 and successive files will be b01 b02 and so on If you have designated four levels of backup files after the fourth backup copy has been created (b03) the next file will be saved over the file with extension b00 Further backup saves will then rotate through the four backup files in the same way

1 Select Tools gt Options 2 In the Auto-save area (under the General tab) select the frequency of backup file creation (in

minutes) and the number of levels for the feature 3 You also may disengage the feature by clicking in the check box to clear it

The Auto-save feature automatically saves backup copies to the directory of the current project If you are working from a write-protected area such as a CD-ROM On-Screen Takeoff will place backup files in the On-Screen Takeoff folder

Exiting When you are finished using On-Screen Takeoff it is very easy to exit Exiting is very important because of security reasons If someone were to use your computer they could enter the application and view and manipulate information

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

64

On-Screen Takeoff closes the open project when you open another or create a new project or when you exit the program

1 Select File gt Exit

OR

2 You also may click at the upper right-hand corner of the application to exit

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

65

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer When you get your digitizer from GTCO you will need to connect it to your computer Follow the instructions outlined below to do this

Note For rollup digitizers the metal bar must be oriented to the top or right hand side

Connecting the Digitizer 1 Lay the digitizer out flat 2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer 3 Plug in the power adapter 4 Plug the interface (IO) cable into the digitizer 5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into an open serial port on computer

Note GTCO Technical support phone number is 410-381-6688 The electronic manual (on diskette) from GTCO contains more detailed installation and operation instructions for the GTCO digitizer model you have

Installing other Digitizer Drivers If you are using a GTCO Digitizer you will need to install the GTCO TabletWorks Drivers

If you are using a Digitizer not supported by GTCO Tablet Works 10 please contact the manufacturer of your digitizer for assistance with installation

Installing GTCO TabletWorks Drivers 1 Insert the On Center CD into the CD-ROM drive The CD Startup screen will open 2 Click on Install Software 3 Select Additional Software and Drivers 4 Select Digitizer Driver 5 Follow the instructions for installing TabletWorks 10

Adhering the Template The template is a small plastic sticker used to enable mouse function when using the digitizer with On-Screen Takeoff Place your template on your digitizer We suggest placing it in the bottom right corner of the digitizer about one inch inside the takeoff area

Note You may either peel off the back of the template and use the adhesive surface or you can tape the template down

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

66

Testing the Digitizer Drivers Before running OST you may test the digitizer by moving the stylus around on the digitizer pad it should move the mouse cursor (if mouse emulation is enabled)

If the digitizer does not move the mouse cursor on the screen

The superset codes may need to be reset Reset the superset codes by touching on the border of the digitizer with the stylus The digitizer should beep several times

The digitizer may not be communicating with the computer Be sure the COM port selected is correct Be sure the COM port selected is correct If you are not able to get the digitizer to move the mouse cursor you need to call GTCO technical support for help

Note The Mouse Emulation is not required for On-Screen Takeoff to work properly It is used only for the Template functionality if the digitizer is moving the cursor the wrong direction (up instead of sideways or vice-versa)

Click the L-shaped arrow symbol on the digitizer with the stylus

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

67

Appendix II Toolbar Items Main Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

68

Tool Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

69

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

70

Navigate Toolbar (Continued)

Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

71

Takeoff Toolbar (Continued)

Image Toolbar

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

72

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

This section will detail how to load plans from a F W Dodge CD-ROM into an On-Screen Takeoff project file ready for takeoffs

Dodge files may be added to the Project Properties dialog However loading the files in that way will load the files by number rather than name description If you want to load one page only from your Dodge CD You will have to rename the page to display the name rather than number of the file

To load plan files from a Dodge CD so that the files load sequentially by file number but are displayed by name rather than by number within your project follow the instructions below

Opening a Dodge project from a CD-ROM 1 Insert the CD into the drive 2 Choose File gt Custom 3 Choose Dodge Plans Project (plansdat) as the file type 4 Select the appropriate file type by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the Files of type

field 5 In the Look in field access your drive paths by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the

field then

Navigate to your CD-ROM drive Open the data folder and Open the Projects folder

6 Select the desired project and open its folder 7 Open the plansdat file 8 All the images will come in sequenced correctly for that job along with the full descriptions

(names) of each page If there is not a plans folder in the project folder then plans do not exist for that project on the CD Opening the plansdat file will yield an empty project

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

73

Appendix IV Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer The On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer is a limited version of On Center Softwarersquos commercial takeoff software If your status bar located at the very bottom of the main window says View Mode in the lower left-hand corner then you are using the Plan Viewer You can use the plan viewer to

View CD-based amp converted CAD drawings

View a previously created OST file and associated drawings

Download electronic plans online

Navigate through drawings

Quickly Takeoff linearsareas and counts

Zoom in to view the plan better

Print drawings directly from the viewer

Viewing an On-Screen Takeoff Project File

1 To open an OST file that was previously created with of On-Screen Takeoff 2 Select File gt Open 3 An Open dialog will appear if you do not see the OST file you are looking for select the

Look In drop down arrow 4 A drop down menu will appear listing the various folders drives and mapped drives located

on your computer select the correct drive or folder location and continue to browse to the location of your OST file

5 When you see your OST file double-click it to open it 6 Any takeoff and drawings should appear on the Image tab view

If you do not see the drawings but do see the colored takeoff layer the drawings may

not be located in the same place they were originally saved at Go to File gt Project Properties and check the Image File path for each listed page If the image file path is pointing to a CD drive make sure the CD is inside the CR-ROM

Downloading Electronic Plans If your Online Plan Service provides a special file format (OSX) required to use this feature of our plan viewer you can immediately downloaded all electronic plans of a project directly from our viewer

Most Plan Room web sites will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff when a request to download plans is made Your particular Plan Room may differ in operation so please contact the provider directly with questions on using the site

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

74

When you request to download or open a project file from a Plan Room you will usually have the open to open or save an OSX file Choosing open will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff Alternately you may choose to save the file to a local hard drive After you have saved the file either double-click it to launch On-Screen Takeoff or open the OSX file using On-Screen Takeoff by clicking File then Open and locating the file on your hard drive You will need to change the file type to OSX

After the OSX file is opened you will see an additional tab appear in the Conditions List window called Pages

The Pages tab shows the hierarchy of your project Gray file icons represent pages that have not been downloaded and blue icons represents pages that have been downloaded

To download a page simply double-click the page icon

If you wish to select a group of pages to download you can use the Ctrl or Shift key to multiple select them then click the Download button

If you wish to download all pages at once click the Download All button

Downloaded pages will now appear in the Project Properties dialog in the same order in which they appear in the Pages tab

Creating Quick Takeoffs With On-Screen Takeoff you can create quick takeoffs to measure quantities even if you dont have the full version of our program However using the Quick Takeoff functionality shows you just a fraction of what the full version can do

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar is located at the top of the image view It has three buttons designated for three types of takeoffs Linear Area and Count The Quantity drop down list will show secondary quantities for Linears and Areas The Units drop down allows you to select how you want your quantities displayed Feet Inches Yards Millimeters and Meters

NOTE Every time change the type of takeoff you are performing (switching from Area to Linear for example) the previous quantities and takeoff objects will disappear They will also disappear when you changes pages

NOTE You can use the Dimension Tool to basically measure the distance between two points or linears The distance will display on the status bar at the bottom of the application

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

75

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions General

Where is On-Screen Takeoff installed on my computer

Typically it is installed in CProgram FilesOn-Screen Takeoff

In Explorer how do I recognize On-Screen Takeoff file types

On-Screen Takeoff data is stored in a single file per job lsquojob name OSTrsquo On-Screen Takeoff templates are stored as lsquotemplate nameTPOrsquo

Can only one project at a time be open

Yes For that reason opening another project automatically closes the project on screen You will be asked to save any changes

Is only one scale allowed per page What about on drawings that have multiple detail sections on a page and each of those drawings have different scales

Yes For pages with drawings of different scales copy the drawing to another project page and set the appropriate scale

I cannot perform backout on an area that is along a linear

As a workaround use the On-Screen Takeoff layers feature to help you with this issue Electronic Images

How do I start a project from drawings that have been scanned and written to a CD-ROM

Open a new project Select File gt Project Properties and select Auto Add Navigate to your CD and the appropriate folder and select any image file in that location Click Open All files in the location will load into your project Recommended that images are copied from CD to hard drive for performance

If I get a disk of drawings in AutoCAD format (R13 or R14) can I read them in On-Screen Takeoff

Yes On-Screen Takeoff now reads DWG DXF and many other format that are saved with AutoCAD

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

76

When I click on the all pages button what is supposed to happen Currently nothing seems to change when I click on that button

The All Pages button is used to apply the Darken and Enhance Plans feature to all pages in the project (as opposed to only the current page on screen)

Is there a way to deduct a large skylight from an area condition

Yes with the related area condition selected in the Takeoff Dock bar unselect the Backout button on the Takeoff Toolbar then draw the Backout area The area quantity will be deducted from the related condition object and the linear measurement of the Backout perimeter will be added

Digitizer Issues

How do I connect a Digitizer to the computer

See Appendix I Connecting a Digitizer

The Place Template menu choice is disabled

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or the digitizer or the digitzer drivers are not installed

It wonrsquot let me select the Set Takeoff Area menu choice

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or no job is open a digitizer is not installed or the drivers are not installed

The digitizer stylus is not moving the cursor or crosshairs

Click S-0-1 superset on the digitizer

How do I convert my old GTCO Digitizer to work with On- Screen Takeofftrade

Call GTCO and they may be able to reconfigure your digitizer to be compatible with On-Screen Takeoff

Printing Issues Which Printers work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible printers include On-Screen Takeoff Hewlett Packard Epson and Canon printers If you are having printer difficulties please contact support and specify the type of printer along with other pertinent information Contact support at wwwoncentercomsupport or email supportoncentercom

Which Plotters work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible Plotters include Hewlett Packard DesignJet plotters and the EnCAD Cadjet II If you are having plotter difficulties please contact support and specify the type of plotter concerned

ViewingDisplay I can no longer see my condition list How do I get it back

The toolbars and Dock bars can be turned on and off through the View gt Toolbars menu options

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

77

This is also accessible by right-clicking in the toolbar area and selecting (or deselecting) a toolbar listed

I cannot view my folders in the condition list

Right-click in the Takeoff Dock barcondition list area and select Show Tree to display your folders

My Status Bar reads Viewer Mode and I am unable to draw conditions

On-Screen Takeoff needs to be Authorized Or you need to purchase an upgrade Click the Perform Advanced Takeoff button on the main toolbar

I hid a Dock bar and when I selected to view it again it appeared alongside the other Dock

bar instead of stacked on top of it How do I fix it

Pick up the Dock bar by clicking on the bar at the top and continuing to hold down the mouse button drag the Dock bar over the other one It will resize and appear stacked with the other

When I open image files from a CD the images are all upside down How do I get them right

side up

To flip pages from top to bottom follow the steps below 1 Click the All Pages button on the Image Toolbar (All Pages is engaged when the button

is not clicked) 2 Click the Flip Horizontal button on the Image Toolbar 3 Click the All Pages button again to disengage

Templates How do I create a Template

Follow the steps below 1 Create a typical project 2 Choose File gt Save As 3 Choose On-Screen Takeoff Template Files as the file type to save 4 Name the file This will save all of the condition setups as well as the layers for the

project

How do I create a new project from a template

Follow the steps below 1 Choose File gt New 2 Select a template from those listed in the New dialog This will open a new project with

conditions and layers saved from a previous project but no pages or takeoff

78

INDEX

Area Conditions 32

Area Objects 57

Auto Scrolling 20

Auto-save 63

Backout Mode 41

Calculation Method 60

Conditions 29

Configuration 60

Contents Tab 6

Continuous Mode 38

Count Conditions 33

Count Objects 57

Digitizer 10 65 76

Docking Toolbars 13

Dodge CD 72

Drawing 27 37

DropRun Count 55

Environment 18

Exiting 63

Exporting 49

Features 16

Font 61

Frequently Asked Questions 75

Grid 40

Help File 5

Hiding Toolbars 13

Hot Links 21

Image 19 59

Image files 9

Image Toolbar 12 71

Images 75

Index Tab 6

Layers 43

Linear Conditions 31

Linear Objects 56

Main Toolbar 12 67

Menus 14

Moving Toolbars 13

Navigate Toolbar 12 69

Navigating 20

On-Screen Takeofftrade 2

Page 59 61

Pages 20 25 28

Plan Viewer 73

Plans 26

Printing 47 76

Project Properties 25

Projects 22

Quick Start Video 18

Resizing Toolbars 13

Roping 54

Saving 63

Scale 28

Search Tab 7

Selecting Objects 42

Setup 8

Start On-Screen Takeofftrade 17

System Requirements 9

Takeoff 19 27

Takeoff Toolbar 70 71

Takeoff Toolbar 12

Template Files 23

TIF (Group4) 9

Tool Toolbar 12 68

Toolbar 67

Toolbars 12

View Toolbar 12 69

Viewing Toolbars 12

Worksheet 20

Zone Conditions 33

Zoom Toolbar 12 69

  • On-Screen Takeoff Lite
  • Table of Contents
  • Section 1 - Introduction
  • Section 2 - Setup
  • Section 3 - Toolbars and Menus
  • Section 4 - Features
  • Section 5 - Projects
  • Section 6 - Conditions and Takeoff
  • Section 7 - Printing and Exporting
  • Section 8 - Advanced Features
  • Section 9 - Saving and Exiting
  • Appendix I - Installing Your Digitizer
  • Appendix II - Toolbar Items
  • Appendix III - Loading Plans from a Dodge CD
  • Appendix IV - Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer
  • Appendix V - Frequently Asked Questions
  • Index

Section 6 Conditions and Takeoff

45

Assigning Text to a Layer When adding text to an image On-Screen Takeoff has the capability to assign the text to a specified layer

1 Select the Text Tool

2 Click at the point you want to place your text

3 Type in your text using the Enter key for line breaks

4 Click the drop down arrow next to the Layer field and select the desired layer

Section 7

46

Printing and Exporting

This section will

Printing options and procedures

Exporting data by copying and pasting

Exporting quantity results to Excel spreadsheets

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

47

Print Setup On-Screen Takeoff allows the user to print the image takeoff list and worksheet

1 Select File gt Print Setup The Print Setup dialog will open

2 Select a printer or leave the default selection listed (change from the default printer displayed by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the field)

3 Indicate page size and printer tray option (Source) Access page size options by clicking on the

down arrow at the right of the field

4 Choose Portrait or Landscape orientation

5 Click to accept and close the dialog

Printing Images The image area can include the electronic plans the takeoff objects added text and hot links To print a subset of these (for example just the takeoffs without the plans or the added text and hot link symbols) hide layers that you do not want to print (see Section 6 View and Hide Layers) When you are printing your images every page will show the scale of the takeoff you are printing

1 Click on the Image tab to display the area of your project

2 Select File gt Print (or Ctrl + P)

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

48

3 Select the desired view (What to print) and the Image Range

4 Click The second Print dialog will open

5 Change settings accordingly or click if you accept the default settings

Printing Takeoff Lists and Worksheets In Takeoff Lists and Worksheets you may hide columns to print only certain results or adjust column widths to fit the report within the page size selected

1 In Takeoff List or Worksheet view move your cursor to the right side of the columnrsquos title bar the cursor will display as a two-way arrow

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

49

2 Click and drag to adjust the width of the column Holding the mouse button you may

slide the title bar under the title bar to its left to hide the column completely

3 Select File gt Print or press Ctrl + P to access the Print dialog

4 Indicate desired printer and choose the number of copies

5 Click to print and close the dialog

When printing the condition list we suggest printing in landscape

To reset to the default column widths double-click on the right border of a column heading will reset the column to its right (or previously to its right before being hidden)

Print Preview 1 Select File gt Print Preview

2 Use and to vary your view 3 If viewing an image choose current full or scale view to see how it displays

4 For printed outputs that cover more than one page use and to view adjacent pages or click on the down arrow next to Page field and select the page you want displayed

Exporting Using the CopyPaste Feature You may copy all the data or sections from the worksheet and the takeoff list view in On-Screen Takeoff and paste it into another application When pasting into Excel the cell layout will be maintained

1 Highlight the areas you wish to paste Click and hold the left mouse button down as you drag the cursor over the area to be selected then releasing the mouse button

OR

2 Select the entire takeoff list quickly click on the left On-Screen Takeoff column header and hold and drag the cursor across the remaining column headings

The number of pages for the view selected will display in the lower left-hand corner The zoom percentage that applies to the view will be displayed in the lower right-hand corner next to page size of the drawing

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

50

3 In the worksheet view you may highlight rows by clicking on the numbered buttons to the left of each row clicking and dragging across column headings or clicking and dragging over individual cells in the worksheet

Click anywhere in the appropriate view to deselect the area

4 Once your selection is highlighted you may select Edit gt Copy or Ctrl C from the keyboard 5 On your monitor switch to the application into which you want to paste your selection 6 Select Edit gt Paste in the new application or simply press Ctrl + V to paste

The colored keys for conditions cannot be pasted

Using the Export Feature You may export condition quantities to specified cell location within an Excel worksheet file Cell target locations are assigned in the Results tab of the condition dialogs on the Export line relating to each quantity measurement type

On-Screen Takeoff will export takeoff quantity results for up to three different quantity types that you specify For instance you may want to know the number of square feet in a ceiling area as well as the number of linear feet in its perimeter

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

51

1 Bring up the Condition dialog by double-clicking on a condition in the takeoff dock bar or by

selecting the condition and clicking

2 Click on the Results tab to access its fields The default quantities for the condition type will display

3 For each results field click on the arrow to access the pull-down menu and select the appropriate quantity (for example SF LF EA etchellip)

4 Have your Excel spreadsheet opened and saved in a file

5 Specify the Excel spreadsheet cell locations where you want the results to go

6 For a cell in the first sheet of your spreadsheet type in the cell address (eg a1) Case is not important

7 For a cell on a successive sheet of your spreadsheet type in sheet the number followed by a comma and the cell address without any spaces (eg sheet2a1) Case is not important

8 Click

9 Select File gt Export gt Condition Qty to Excel

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

52

10 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

11 Click to export On-Screen Takeoff results to specified cell locations in the Excel file When you return to the Excel application you will see the values have been added to the specified cell locations in your spreadsheet

12 Save your Excel file

Exporting Worksheet to Excel

1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 From On-Screen Takeoff Select File gt Export gt Worksheet to Excel

4 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

5 Click When you return to the Excel application you will see the values from the Worksheet Tab have been added to your spreadsheet

6 Save your Excel file

Exporting Takeoff to CVS 1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 Click the Takeoff Tab in the project you want to export the information

4 Select File gt Export gt Takeoff to CSV

5 Browse to the location of the CSV spreadsheet file click file to select it

6 Click the Save

NOTE CSV files can be opened in Excel Lotus Access etc One may consider this option more of a ldquodumprdquo into a file

The Excel application must be active (it may be minimized on the application bar) with the target spreadsheet open in the application Otherwise an error will occur with the export operation that will affect both the On-Screen Takeofftrade file and the Excel spreadsheet

Section 8

53

Advanced Features

This section will

Some special features of working with condition objects in the takeoff area

Details of advanced options for conditions

Advanced features of the Project Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

54

Features to Use with Objects Roping Feature You can move copy or delete using this feature Using the Select tool (the pointer) you may select several objects at once by clicking and dragging an outline around the objects then releasing the mouse button Roping may select either objects completely within the outlined area (inclusive) or objects both within and touched by the outlined area (touching) Specify your roping preference under Tools gt Options

1 Click and hold the mouse button at a point on the screen near the objects to be selected and drag to surround the objects with an outline

2 Release the mouse button The objects will be selected

3 You may now

Move the group around on the page by clicking within the group dragging the mouse and releasing the button to place the objects

Delete the group of objects by clicking the Delete key or

Copy and paste by pressing Ctrl C to copy the group then Ctrl V to paste it The pasted copy of the grouped objects will appear slightly offset from the original objects

Section 8 Advanced Features

55

Applying a DropRun Count

Use the droprun feature when calculating quantities to take into account the drop or run of a linear condition such as electrical lines or plumbing pipes Drop or run lengths may be added separately to any linear condition on screen while a default droprun length may be indicated for a condition as a whole

1 Select the desired linear condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff Dock bar

2 Click the Change button in the toolbar to open the Change Condition dialog

3 Click the Advanced tab to access the advanced options and click inside the DropRun check box

4 Enter a default length to be applied to all of this condition Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches) You can leave the length blank and manually enter drop run on each segment drawn

5 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog

Edit DropRun Count

1 With the related linear condition in the Takeoff Dock bar highlighted or with the pointer tool selected

2 click on the desired linear object in the image takeoff area The Count button will become active

3 Click on the Count button (alternatively select Tools gt Count) The default droprun amount will show in the pop-up Count dialog (Default length will be zero if droprun has not been selected in this conditionrsquos properties)

4 Type in the desired length Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches)

5 Click the OK button The additional amount will be reflected in the corresponding quantity The new DropRun count will apply only to the object edited

Adding Text in Image View

On-Screen Takeoff allows you to place text comments around your quantity takeoffs that may be printed along with plan images and objects Text is automatically placed within the Annotation Layer (that includes text and hot links)

1 To place text on the image select the Text Tool and click at the point you want to place your text opening a text box

2 Type in your information clicking Enter for line breaks

3 When you are finished click the OK button to exit the text box

4 To reposition text simply click on the text (with the Text Tool active) to select it

5 Move the cursor over the text the cursor will now display as a four-way arrow

6 Click and drag the mouse to position the text as desired

Section 8 Advanced Features

56

1 To edit existing text use the Text Tool to double-click on the text to open the editing box

2 Enter additional text or use the Backspace key to delete text as necessary

Formatting Text Once created you may format the font size type style and color of your text

1 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Font or click on the Font button in the Takeoff Toolbar

2 Select the desired features (color options are disabled) and click the OK button

3 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Color or click on the Color button in the Takeoff Toolbar The Color dialog will open

4 Click on a color in the Basic Color palette or create a color and add to the Custom Colors palette (Be sure to click on the color in the Custom Colors palette to select it)

5 Click the OK button

Object Properties

Linear Objects

Linear objects may be set to connect at corners

A linear object may be set to trim automatically when crossing another linear object (Check the trim option under the advanced tab of the Condition dialog)

When you move a connected linear object objects automatically move and resize connected lines accordingly (quantities are then recalculated)

This feature requires that the connected linear object be moved using the center handles (does not apply when resizing the line from the ends)

Objects constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

Objects are measured from centerline to centerline

Section 8 Advanced Features

57

Area Objects When drawing an area use your escape key to undo the last line drawn You may reverse your

drawing of an area using the escape key

The area will not fill with color and pattern until the user double-clicks after the last line is set

Lines drawn to delineate an area object constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

After selecting an area to move or adjust position the mouse in the center to move the entire area position the mouse at the sides or corners to adjust the perimeter

Count Objects

All count objects are quantified by the physical number of objects per page and reported as EA for the UOM The quantity for the current Image View is (displayed in the Condition List) and the total quantity in your project is displayed in the Takeoff View and Worksheet View)

Square circle rectangle and triangle shaped count objects do not displace or subtract from other object quantities when placed on top of them However on the Advanced Tab for the count condition a connect property can be set (this is a check box) so that when a count object of this shape is put on top of a Linear type takeoff object it will move with the linear if said linear is moved

An opened-shaped count object must be placed within a linear object Opening shaped count objects may also be measured by linear foot or linear yard (EA SF and SY are also options) Opening shaped count items default to a width of 3rsquo 0rdquo at the time of creation This size can be changed The small medium and large size are not options on this type of condition anymore Check Backout on the Advanced tab for each Count object back out the footage (or yardage) of opening-shaped count objects in which they are placed

NOTE In order to see this Backout functionality (in quantity) for SY or SF deductions at least one of the

results for the Linear(s) this object will be placed on must be set to SY or SF and the count object must have a height quantity

Advanced Features of Conditions The Round Feature Under the Advanced tab of the linear and area Condition dialogues you may specify quantity rounding (in inches) For linear objects rounding applies to each linear object drawn For area objects rounding will apply to each segment of the area perimeter adjusting the perimeter and area calculations For example With a linear condition entering 12 in the Round field will round up each related linear object to the nearest 12 inches or one foot With this setting two walls of 1 4 would each round to 2 0 totaling 4 0

NOTE In the Takeoff Dock bar condition list and in the On-Screen Takeoff reports quantities will be displayed in whole numbers rounded up to the nearest foot However calculations are based on true quantities without rounding unless the Round Feature is engaged

Pitch Pitch may apply either to linear or area conditions It is measured in rise per linear foot Entering 12 indicates a 12 rise per 12 of linear distance (a pitch of 12 over 12) or an angle of 45deg

Section 8 Advanced Features

58

Advanced Features of Project Properties Selecting Multiple Pages

1 Select a single page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry

2 Drag the cursor down the column of numbers to select consecutive pages

3 Click on the blank button at the top of this column to select all pages in the Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

59

Changing Image Assigned to a Drawing 1 Select the page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry 2 Click the Change Image button The Change Image dialog box will appear

3 Navigate to the desired file and select by clicking on it

4 Click the Open button The electronic file assigned to the page will have been changed to reflect the new file choice

Changing Image File Path 1 Select pages as described above

2 Choose Change Folder

3 In the Change Folder dialog navigate to the appropriate folder

4 Click the OK button The file path will have been changed for the selected page entries

Delete a Page from Project Properties 1 Select the page you want to delete by clicking on its associated number (in the gray box at the

left of the entry)

2 Choose Delete Page

All Takeoff on the page will be deleted immediately and permanently

Section 8 Advanced Features

60

Advanced Features of Tool Options

Calculation Method On-Screen Takeoff has built-in calculation options to allow for faster work and faster saves until your takeoff is complete Calculation options are found by selecting Tools gt Options then clicking on the Calculation tab

Calculation method can be set to Automatic Automatic except Grids and Manual Manual will allow the program to operate more quickly while Automatic or Automatic except Grids allows the user to see quantity changes as takeoffs are made

In any mode you may press F9 to recalculate quantities for the On-Screen Takeoff current totals

Configuration Tab

When the ldquoPage Label (A01)rdquo radial button is chosen On-Screen Takeoff puts the numbered label on all the pages of in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar If the Page Descriptionrdquo radial button is chosen then a description of what takeoff is on that specific page will be shown in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar

This section of the configuration tab gives you options on how you want to export your information When the ldquoFolderSubfolder Namesrdquo radial button is chosen than on your file that you are exporting to will have all the conditions folders and subfolders In the Delimiter box you can choose the symbol that is needed to separate the information you are exporting Some files need semicolons () or colons () to make sure the information comes exported in is separated it the appropriate places

Section 8 Advanced Features

61

In previous versions of On-Screen Takeoff there are views that users need to have in order for them to display their information By either choosing ldquoOST 1xrdquo or ldquoOST 2xrdquo it will let the program know you want your columns of information exported in that specific format

When you have the Confirm Deletions radial button of ldquoYesrdquo chosen than every time you delete anything you will get a dialog box confirming your intentions of deletion

While working with your takeoff you have a choice to either view the legend of your conditions or hide it Choose whichever radial button that suits your needs

For those who prefer to use the Enter key to navigate in dialog boxes this option is just for that

Font Tab The Font tab is designed for you to make your own look and feel for the application At the bottom of this tab it will show you sample of the fonts and colors you have chosen

Renaming the Current Page You may change the name of the current page in the takeoff area of On-Screen Takeoff by selecting Edit gt Rename Page

This opens the Name Page dialog and you may simply type in a new name and click the Enter button The new name for the file will be reflected on the title bar for the page and in Project Properties

You also may access the Rename Page function by right-clicking in the takeoff area while in Image View and selecting the option from the pop-up menu that appears

Section 9

62

Saving and Exiting

This section will

Explain how to save projects

Show you how to safely exit the program

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

63

Saving Your Project

1 Select File gt Save 2 If your project has not previously been saved a Save dialog box will open to allow you to name

the file and choose the directory and folder in which to save your file 3 Once saved File gt Save will simply save the current version of the file

OR

4 Select File gt Save As then type in a new name for the file and save to the desired file path

The Auto-save Feature With the Auto-save feature On-Screen Takeoff automatically backs up your open project You may choose to have more than one level of backup files The first backup copy will have the extension b00 and successive files will be b01 b02 and so on If you have designated four levels of backup files after the fourth backup copy has been created (b03) the next file will be saved over the file with extension b00 Further backup saves will then rotate through the four backup files in the same way

1 Select Tools gt Options 2 In the Auto-save area (under the General tab) select the frequency of backup file creation (in

minutes) and the number of levels for the feature 3 You also may disengage the feature by clicking in the check box to clear it

The Auto-save feature automatically saves backup copies to the directory of the current project If you are working from a write-protected area such as a CD-ROM On-Screen Takeoff will place backup files in the On-Screen Takeoff folder

Exiting When you are finished using On-Screen Takeoff it is very easy to exit Exiting is very important because of security reasons If someone were to use your computer they could enter the application and view and manipulate information

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

64

On-Screen Takeoff closes the open project when you open another or create a new project or when you exit the program

1 Select File gt Exit

OR

2 You also may click at the upper right-hand corner of the application to exit

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

65

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer When you get your digitizer from GTCO you will need to connect it to your computer Follow the instructions outlined below to do this

Note For rollup digitizers the metal bar must be oriented to the top or right hand side

Connecting the Digitizer 1 Lay the digitizer out flat 2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer 3 Plug in the power adapter 4 Plug the interface (IO) cable into the digitizer 5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into an open serial port on computer

Note GTCO Technical support phone number is 410-381-6688 The electronic manual (on diskette) from GTCO contains more detailed installation and operation instructions for the GTCO digitizer model you have

Installing other Digitizer Drivers If you are using a GTCO Digitizer you will need to install the GTCO TabletWorks Drivers

If you are using a Digitizer not supported by GTCO Tablet Works 10 please contact the manufacturer of your digitizer for assistance with installation

Installing GTCO TabletWorks Drivers 1 Insert the On Center CD into the CD-ROM drive The CD Startup screen will open 2 Click on Install Software 3 Select Additional Software and Drivers 4 Select Digitizer Driver 5 Follow the instructions for installing TabletWorks 10

Adhering the Template The template is a small plastic sticker used to enable mouse function when using the digitizer with On-Screen Takeoff Place your template on your digitizer We suggest placing it in the bottom right corner of the digitizer about one inch inside the takeoff area

Note You may either peel off the back of the template and use the adhesive surface or you can tape the template down

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

66

Testing the Digitizer Drivers Before running OST you may test the digitizer by moving the stylus around on the digitizer pad it should move the mouse cursor (if mouse emulation is enabled)

If the digitizer does not move the mouse cursor on the screen

The superset codes may need to be reset Reset the superset codes by touching on the border of the digitizer with the stylus The digitizer should beep several times

The digitizer may not be communicating with the computer Be sure the COM port selected is correct Be sure the COM port selected is correct If you are not able to get the digitizer to move the mouse cursor you need to call GTCO technical support for help

Note The Mouse Emulation is not required for On-Screen Takeoff to work properly It is used only for the Template functionality if the digitizer is moving the cursor the wrong direction (up instead of sideways or vice-versa)

Click the L-shaped arrow symbol on the digitizer with the stylus

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

67

Appendix II Toolbar Items Main Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

68

Tool Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

69

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

70

Navigate Toolbar (Continued)

Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

71

Takeoff Toolbar (Continued)

Image Toolbar

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

72

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

This section will detail how to load plans from a F W Dodge CD-ROM into an On-Screen Takeoff project file ready for takeoffs

Dodge files may be added to the Project Properties dialog However loading the files in that way will load the files by number rather than name description If you want to load one page only from your Dodge CD You will have to rename the page to display the name rather than number of the file

To load plan files from a Dodge CD so that the files load sequentially by file number but are displayed by name rather than by number within your project follow the instructions below

Opening a Dodge project from a CD-ROM 1 Insert the CD into the drive 2 Choose File gt Custom 3 Choose Dodge Plans Project (plansdat) as the file type 4 Select the appropriate file type by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the Files of type

field 5 In the Look in field access your drive paths by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the

field then

Navigate to your CD-ROM drive Open the data folder and Open the Projects folder

6 Select the desired project and open its folder 7 Open the plansdat file 8 All the images will come in sequenced correctly for that job along with the full descriptions

(names) of each page If there is not a plans folder in the project folder then plans do not exist for that project on the CD Opening the plansdat file will yield an empty project

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

73

Appendix IV Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer The On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer is a limited version of On Center Softwarersquos commercial takeoff software If your status bar located at the very bottom of the main window says View Mode in the lower left-hand corner then you are using the Plan Viewer You can use the plan viewer to

View CD-based amp converted CAD drawings

View a previously created OST file and associated drawings

Download electronic plans online

Navigate through drawings

Quickly Takeoff linearsareas and counts

Zoom in to view the plan better

Print drawings directly from the viewer

Viewing an On-Screen Takeoff Project File

1 To open an OST file that was previously created with of On-Screen Takeoff 2 Select File gt Open 3 An Open dialog will appear if you do not see the OST file you are looking for select the

Look In drop down arrow 4 A drop down menu will appear listing the various folders drives and mapped drives located

on your computer select the correct drive or folder location and continue to browse to the location of your OST file

5 When you see your OST file double-click it to open it 6 Any takeoff and drawings should appear on the Image tab view

If you do not see the drawings but do see the colored takeoff layer the drawings may

not be located in the same place they were originally saved at Go to File gt Project Properties and check the Image File path for each listed page If the image file path is pointing to a CD drive make sure the CD is inside the CR-ROM

Downloading Electronic Plans If your Online Plan Service provides a special file format (OSX) required to use this feature of our plan viewer you can immediately downloaded all electronic plans of a project directly from our viewer

Most Plan Room web sites will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff when a request to download plans is made Your particular Plan Room may differ in operation so please contact the provider directly with questions on using the site

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

74

When you request to download or open a project file from a Plan Room you will usually have the open to open or save an OSX file Choosing open will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff Alternately you may choose to save the file to a local hard drive After you have saved the file either double-click it to launch On-Screen Takeoff or open the OSX file using On-Screen Takeoff by clicking File then Open and locating the file on your hard drive You will need to change the file type to OSX

After the OSX file is opened you will see an additional tab appear in the Conditions List window called Pages

The Pages tab shows the hierarchy of your project Gray file icons represent pages that have not been downloaded and blue icons represents pages that have been downloaded

To download a page simply double-click the page icon

If you wish to select a group of pages to download you can use the Ctrl or Shift key to multiple select them then click the Download button

If you wish to download all pages at once click the Download All button

Downloaded pages will now appear in the Project Properties dialog in the same order in which they appear in the Pages tab

Creating Quick Takeoffs With On-Screen Takeoff you can create quick takeoffs to measure quantities even if you dont have the full version of our program However using the Quick Takeoff functionality shows you just a fraction of what the full version can do

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar is located at the top of the image view It has three buttons designated for three types of takeoffs Linear Area and Count The Quantity drop down list will show secondary quantities for Linears and Areas The Units drop down allows you to select how you want your quantities displayed Feet Inches Yards Millimeters and Meters

NOTE Every time change the type of takeoff you are performing (switching from Area to Linear for example) the previous quantities and takeoff objects will disappear They will also disappear when you changes pages

NOTE You can use the Dimension Tool to basically measure the distance between two points or linears The distance will display on the status bar at the bottom of the application

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

75

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions General

Where is On-Screen Takeoff installed on my computer

Typically it is installed in CProgram FilesOn-Screen Takeoff

In Explorer how do I recognize On-Screen Takeoff file types

On-Screen Takeoff data is stored in a single file per job lsquojob name OSTrsquo On-Screen Takeoff templates are stored as lsquotemplate nameTPOrsquo

Can only one project at a time be open

Yes For that reason opening another project automatically closes the project on screen You will be asked to save any changes

Is only one scale allowed per page What about on drawings that have multiple detail sections on a page and each of those drawings have different scales

Yes For pages with drawings of different scales copy the drawing to another project page and set the appropriate scale

I cannot perform backout on an area that is along a linear

As a workaround use the On-Screen Takeoff layers feature to help you with this issue Electronic Images

How do I start a project from drawings that have been scanned and written to a CD-ROM

Open a new project Select File gt Project Properties and select Auto Add Navigate to your CD and the appropriate folder and select any image file in that location Click Open All files in the location will load into your project Recommended that images are copied from CD to hard drive for performance

If I get a disk of drawings in AutoCAD format (R13 or R14) can I read them in On-Screen Takeoff

Yes On-Screen Takeoff now reads DWG DXF and many other format that are saved with AutoCAD

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

76

When I click on the all pages button what is supposed to happen Currently nothing seems to change when I click on that button

The All Pages button is used to apply the Darken and Enhance Plans feature to all pages in the project (as opposed to only the current page on screen)

Is there a way to deduct a large skylight from an area condition

Yes with the related area condition selected in the Takeoff Dock bar unselect the Backout button on the Takeoff Toolbar then draw the Backout area The area quantity will be deducted from the related condition object and the linear measurement of the Backout perimeter will be added

Digitizer Issues

How do I connect a Digitizer to the computer

See Appendix I Connecting a Digitizer

The Place Template menu choice is disabled

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or the digitizer or the digitzer drivers are not installed

It wonrsquot let me select the Set Takeoff Area menu choice

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or no job is open a digitizer is not installed or the drivers are not installed

The digitizer stylus is not moving the cursor or crosshairs

Click S-0-1 superset on the digitizer

How do I convert my old GTCO Digitizer to work with On- Screen Takeofftrade

Call GTCO and they may be able to reconfigure your digitizer to be compatible with On-Screen Takeoff

Printing Issues Which Printers work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible printers include On-Screen Takeoff Hewlett Packard Epson and Canon printers If you are having printer difficulties please contact support and specify the type of printer along with other pertinent information Contact support at wwwoncentercomsupport or email supportoncentercom

Which Plotters work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible Plotters include Hewlett Packard DesignJet plotters and the EnCAD Cadjet II If you are having plotter difficulties please contact support and specify the type of plotter concerned

ViewingDisplay I can no longer see my condition list How do I get it back

The toolbars and Dock bars can be turned on and off through the View gt Toolbars menu options

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

77

This is also accessible by right-clicking in the toolbar area and selecting (or deselecting) a toolbar listed

I cannot view my folders in the condition list

Right-click in the Takeoff Dock barcondition list area and select Show Tree to display your folders

My Status Bar reads Viewer Mode and I am unable to draw conditions

On-Screen Takeoff needs to be Authorized Or you need to purchase an upgrade Click the Perform Advanced Takeoff button on the main toolbar

I hid a Dock bar and when I selected to view it again it appeared alongside the other Dock

bar instead of stacked on top of it How do I fix it

Pick up the Dock bar by clicking on the bar at the top and continuing to hold down the mouse button drag the Dock bar over the other one It will resize and appear stacked with the other

When I open image files from a CD the images are all upside down How do I get them right

side up

To flip pages from top to bottom follow the steps below 1 Click the All Pages button on the Image Toolbar (All Pages is engaged when the button

is not clicked) 2 Click the Flip Horizontal button on the Image Toolbar 3 Click the All Pages button again to disengage

Templates How do I create a Template

Follow the steps below 1 Create a typical project 2 Choose File gt Save As 3 Choose On-Screen Takeoff Template Files as the file type to save 4 Name the file This will save all of the condition setups as well as the layers for the

project

How do I create a new project from a template

Follow the steps below 1 Choose File gt New 2 Select a template from those listed in the New dialog This will open a new project with

conditions and layers saved from a previous project but no pages or takeoff

78

INDEX

Area Conditions 32

Area Objects 57

Auto Scrolling 20

Auto-save 63

Backout Mode 41

Calculation Method 60

Conditions 29

Configuration 60

Contents Tab 6

Continuous Mode 38

Count Conditions 33

Count Objects 57

Digitizer 10 65 76

Docking Toolbars 13

Dodge CD 72

Drawing 27 37

DropRun Count 55

Environment 18

Exiting 63

Exporting 49

Features 16

Font 61

Frequently Asked Questions 75

Grid 40

Help File 5

Hiding Toolbars 13

Hot Links 21

Image 19 59

Image files 9

Image Toolbar 12 71

Images 75

Index Tab 6

Layers 43

Linear Conditions 31

Linear Objects 56

Main Toolbar 12 67

Menus 14

Moving Toolbars 13

Navigate Toolbar 12 69

Navigating 20

On-Screen Takeofftrade 2

Page 59 61

Pages 20 25 28

Plan Viewer 73

Plans 26

Printing 47 76

Project Properties 25

Projects 22

Quick Start Video 18

Resizing Toolbars 13

Roping 54

Saving 63

Scale 28

Search Tab 7

Selecting Objects 42

Setup 8

Start On-Screen Takeofftrade 17

System Requirements 9

Takeoff 19 27

Takeoff Toolbar 70 71

Takeoff Toolbar 12

Template Files 23

TIF (Group4) 9

Tool Toolbar 12 68

Toolbar 67

Toolbars 12

View Toolbar 12 69

Viewing Toolbars 12

Worksheet 20

Zone Conditions 33

Zoom Toolbar 12 69

  • On-Screen Takeoff Lite
  • Table of Contents
  • Section 1 - Introduction
  • Section 2 - Setup
  • Section 3 - Toolbars and Menus
  • Section 4 - Features
  • Section 5 - Projects
  • Section 6 - Conditions and Takeoff
  • Section 7 - Printing and Exporting
  • Section 8 - Advanced Features
  • Section 9 - Saving and Exiting
  • Appendix I - Installing Your Digitizer
  • Appendix II - Toolbar Items
  • Appendix III - Loading Plans from a Dodge CD
  • Appendix IV - Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer
  • Appendix V - Frequently Asked Questions
  • Index

Section 7

46

Printing and Exporting

This section will

Printing options and procedures

Exporting data by copying and pasting

Exporting quantity results to Excel spreadsheets

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

47

Print Setup On-Screen Takeoff allows the user to print the image takeoff list and worksheet

1 Select File gt Print Setup The Print Setup dialog will open

2 Select a printer or leave the default selection listed (change from the default printer displayed by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the field)

3 Indicate page size and printer tray option (Source) Access page size options by clicking on the

down arrow at the right of the field

4 Choose Portrait or Landscape orientation

5 Click to accept and close the dialog

Printing Images The image area can include the electronic plans the takeoff objects added text and hot links To print a subset of these (for example just the takeoffs without the plans or the added text and hot link symbols) hide layers that you do not want to print (see Section 6 View and Hide Layers) When you are printing your images every page will show the scale of the takeoff you are printing

1 Click on the Image tab to display the area of your project

2 Select File gt Print (or Ctrl + P)

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

48

3 Select the desired view (What to print) and the Image Range

4 Click The second Print dialog will open

5 Change settings accordingly or click if you accept the default settings

Printing Takeoff Lists and Worksheets In Takeoff Lists and Worksheets you may hide columns to print only certain results or adjust column widths to fit the report within the page size selected

1 In Takeoff List or Worksheet view move your cursor to the right side of the columnrsquos title bar the cursor will display as a two-way arrow

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

49

2 Click and drag to adjust the width of the column Holding the mouse button you may

slide the title bar under the title bar to its left to hide the column completely

3 Select File gt Print or press Ctrl + P to access the Print dialog

4 Indicate desired printer and choose the number of copies

5 Click to print and close the dialog

When printing the condition list we suggest printing in landscape

To reset to the default column widths double-click on the right border of a column heading will reset the column to its right (or previously to its right before being hidden)

Print Preview 1 Select File gt Print Preview

2 Use and to vary your view 3 If viewing an image choose current full or scale view to see how it displays

4 For printed outputs that cover more than one page use and to view adjacent pages or click on the down arrow next to Page field and select the page you want displayed

Exporting Using the CopyPaste Feature You may copy all the data or sections from the worksheet and the takeoff list view in On-Screen Takeoff and paste it into another application When pasting into Excel the cell layout will be maintained

1 Highlight the areas you wish to paste Click and hold the left mouse button down as you drag the cursor over the area to be selected then releasing the mouse button

OR

2 Select the entire takeoff list quickly click on the left On-Screen Takeoff column header and hold and drag the cursor across the remaining column headings

The number of pages for the view selected will display in the lower left-hand corner The zoom percentage that applies to the view will be displayed in the lower right-hand corner next to page size of the drawing

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

50

3 In the worksheet view you may highlight rows by clicking on the numbered buttons to the left of each row clicking and dragging across column headings or clicking and dragging over individual cells in the worksheet

Click anywhere in the appropriate view to deselect the area

4 Once your selection is highlighted you may select Edit gt Copy or Ctrl C from the keyboard 5 On your monitor switch to the application into which you want to paste your selection 6 Select Edit gt Paste in the new application or simply press Ctrl + V to paste

The colored keys for conditions cannot be pasted

Using the Export Feature You may export condition quantities to specified cell location within an Excel worksheet file Cell target locations are assigned in the Results tab of the condition dialogs on the Export line relating to each quantity measurement type

On-Screen Takeoff will export takeoff quantity results for up to three different quantity types that you specify For instance you may want to know the number of square feet in a ceiling area as well as the number of linear feet in its perimeter

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

51

1 Bring up the Condition dialog by double-clicking on a condition in the takeoff dock bar or by

selecting the condition and clicking

2 Click on the Results tab to access its fields The default quantities for the condition type will display

3 For each results field click on the arrow to access the pull-down menu and select the appropriate quantity (for example SF LF EA etchellip)

4 Have your Excel spreadsheet opened and saved in a file

5 Specify the Excel spreadsheet cell locations where you want the results to go

6 For a cell in the first sheet of your spreadsheet type in the cell address (eg a1) Case is not important

7 For a cell on a successive sheet of your spreadsheet type in sheet the number followed by a comma and the cell address without any spaces (eg sheet2a1) Case is not important

8 Click

9 Select File gt Export gt Condition Qty to Excel

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

52

10 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

11 Click to export On-Screen Takeoff results to specified cell locations in the Excel file When you return to the Excel application you will see the values have been added to the specified cell locations in your spreadsheet

12 Save your Excel file

Exporting Worksheet to Excel

1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 From On-Screen Takeoff Select File gt Export gt Worksheet to Excel

4 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

5 Click When you return to the Excel application you will see the values from the Worksheet Tab have been added to your spreadsheet

6 Save your Excel file

Exporting Takeoff to CVS 1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 Click the Takeoff Tab in the project you want to export the information

4 Select File gt Export gt Takeoff to CSV

5 Browse to the location of the CSV spreadsheet file click file to select it

6 Click the Save

NOTE CSV files can be opened in Excel Lotus Access etc One may consider this option more of a ldquodumprdquo into a file

The Excel application must be active (it may be minimized on the application bar) with the target spreadsheet open in the application Otherwise an error will occur with the export operation that will affect both the On-Screen Takeofftrade file and the Excel spreadsheet

Section 8

53

Advanced Features

This section will

Some special features of working with condition objects in the takeoff area

Details of advanced options for conditions

Advanced features of the Project Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

54

Features to Use with Objects Roping Feature You can move copy or delete using this feature Using the Select tool (the pointer) you may select several objects at once by clicking and dragging an outline around the objects then releasing the mouse button Roping may select either objects completely within the outlined area (inclusive) or objects both within and touched by the outlined area (touching) Specify your roping preference under Tools gt Options

1 Click and hold the mouse button at a point on the screen near the objects to be selected and drag to surround the objects with an outline

2 Release the mouse button The objects will be selected

3 You may now

Move the group around on the page by clicking within the group dragging the mouse and releasing the button to place the objects

Delete the group of objects by clicking the Delete key or

Copy and paste by pressing Ctrl C to copy the group then Ctrl V to paste it The pasted copy of the grouped objects will appear slightly offset from the original objects

Section 8 Advanced Features

55

Applying a DropRun Count

Use the droprun feature when calculating quantities to take into account the drop or run of a linear condition such as electrical lines or plumbing pipes Drop or run lengths may be added separately to any linear condition on screen while a default droprun length may be indicated for a condition as a whole

1 Select the desired linear condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff Dock bar

2 Click the Change button in the toolbar to open the Change Condition dialog

3 Click the Advanced tab to access the advanced options and click inside the DropRun check box

4 Enter a default length to be applied to all of this condition Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches) You can leave the length blank and manually enter drop run on each segment drawn

5 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog

Edit DropRun Count

1 With the related linear condition in the Takeoff Dock bar highlighted or with the pointer tool selected

2 click on the desired linear object in the image takeoff area The Count button will become active

3 Click on the Count button (alternatively select Tools gt Count) The default droprun amount will show in the pop-up Count dialog (Default length will be zero if droprun has not been selected in this conditionrsquos properties)

4 Type in the desired length Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches)

5 Click the OK button The additional amount will be reflected in the corresponding quantity The new DropRun count will apply only to the object edited

Adding Text in Image View

On-Screen Takeoff allows you to place text comments around your quantity takeoffs that may be printed along with plan images and objects Text is automatically placed within the Annotation Layer (that includes text and hot links)

1 To place text on the image select the Text Tool and click at the point you want to place your text opening a text box

2 Type in your information clicking Enter for line breaks

3 When you are finished click the OK button to exit the text box

4 To reposition text simply click on the text (with the Text Tool active) to select it

5 Move the cursor over the text the cursor will now display as a four-way arrow

6 Click and drag the mouse to position the text as desired

Section 8 Advanced Features

56

1 To edit existing text use the Text Tool to double-click on the text to open the editing box

2 Enter additional text or use the Backspace key to delete text as necessary

Formatting Text Once created you may format the font size type style and color of your text

1 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Font or click on the Font button in the Takeoff Toolbar

2 Select the desired features (color options are disabled) and click the OK button

3 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Color or click on the Color button in the Takeoff Toolbar The Color dialog will open

4 Click on a color in the Basic Color palette or create a color and add to the Custom Colors palette (Be sure to click on the color in the Custom Colors palette to select it)

5 Click the OK button

Object Properties

Linear Objects

Linear objects may be set to connect at corners

A linear object may be set to trim automatically when crossing another linear object (Check the trim option under the advanced tab of the Condition dialog)

When you move a connected linear object objects automatically move and resize connected lines accordingly (quantities are then recalculated)

This feature requires that the connected linear object be moved using the center handles (does not apply when resizing the line from the ends)

Objects constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

Objects are measured from centerline to centerline

Section 8 Advanced Features

57

Area Objects When drawing an area use your escape key to undo the last line drawn You may reverse your

drawing of an area using the escape key

The area will not fill with color and pattern until the user double-clicks after the last line is set

Lines drawn to delineate an area object constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

After selecting an area to move or adjust position the mouse in the center to move the entire area position the mouse at the sides or corners to adjust the perimeter

Count Objects

All count objects are quantified by the physical number of objects per page and reported as EA for the UOM The quantity for the current Image View is (displayed in the Condition List) and the total quantity in your project is displayed in the Takeoff View and Worksheet View)

Square circle rectangle and triangle shaped count objects do not displace or subtract from other object quantities when placed on top of them However on the Advanced Tab for the count condition a connect property can be set (this is a check box) so that when a count object of this shape is put on top of a Linear type takeoff object it will move with the linear if said linear is moved

An opened-shaped count object must be placed within a linear object Opening shaped count objects may also be measured by linear foot or linear yard (EA SF and SY are also options) Opening shaped count items default to a width of 3rsquo 0rdquo at the time of creation This size can be changed The small medium and large size are not options on this type of condition anymore Check Backout on the Advanced tab for each Count object back out the footage (or yardage) of opening-shaped count objects in which they are placed

NOTE In order to see this Backout functionality (in quantity) for SY or SF deductions at least one of the

results for the Linear(s) this object will be placed on must be set to SY or SF and the count object must have a height quantity

Advanced Features of Conditions The Round Feature Under the Advanced tab of the linear and area Condition dialogues you may specify quantity rounding (in inches) For linear objects rounding applies to each linear object drawn For area objects rounding will apply to each segment of the area perimeter adjusting the perimeter and area calculations For example With a linear condition entering 12 in the Round field will round up each related linear object to the nearest 12 inches or one foot With this setting two walls of 1 4 would each round to 2 0 totaling 4 0

NOTE In the Takeoff Dock bar condition list and in the On-Screen Takeoff reports quantities will be displayed in whole numbers rounded up to the nearest foot However calculations are based on true quantities without rounding unless the Round Feature is engaged

Pitch Pitch may apply either to linear or area conditions It is measured in rise per linear foot Entering 12 indicates a 12 rise per 12 of linear distance (a pitch of 12 over 12) or an angle of 45deg

Section 8 Advanced Features

58

Advanced Features of Project Properties Selecting Multiple Pages

1 Select a single page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry

2 Drag the cursor down the column of numbers to select consecutive pages

3 Click on the blank button at the top of this column to select all pages in the Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

59

Changing Image Assigned to a Drawing 1 Select the page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry 2 Click the Change Image button The Change Image dialog box will appear

3 Navigate to the desired file and select by clicking on it

4 Click the Open button The electronic file assigned to the page will have been changed to reflect the new file choice

Changing Image File Path 1 Select pages as described above

2 Choose Change Folder

3 In the Change Folder dialog navigate to the appropriate folder

4 Click the OK button The file path will have been changed for the selected page entries

Delete a Page from Project Properties 1 Select the page you want to delete by clicking on its associated number (in the gray box at the

left of the entry)

2 Choose Delete Page

All Takeoff on the page will be deleted immediately and permanently

Section 8 Advanced Features

60

Advanced Features of Tool Options

Calculation Method On-Screen Takeoff has built-in calculation options to allow for faster work and faster saves until your takeoff is complete Calculation options are found by selecting Tools gt Options then clicking on the Calculation tab

Calculation method can be set to Automatic Automatic except Grids and Manual Manual will allow the program to operate more quickly while Automatic or Automatic except Grids allows the user to see quantity changes as takeoffs are made

In any mode you may press F9 to recalculate quantities for the On-Screen Takeoff current totals

Configuration Tab

When the ldquoPage Label (A01)rdquo radial button is chosen On-Screen Takeoff puts the numbered label on all the pages of in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar If the Page Descriptionrdquo radial button is chosen then a description of what takeoff is on that specific page will be shown in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar

This section of the configuration tab gives you options on how you want to export your information When the ldquoFolderSubfolder Namesrdquo radial button is chosen than on your file that you are exporting to will have all the conditions folders and subfolders In the Delimiter box you can choose the symbol that is needed to separate the information you are exporting Some files need semicolons () or colons () to make sure the information comes exported in is separated it the appropriate places

Section 8 Advanced Features

61

In previous versions of On-Screen Takeoff there are views that users need to have in order for them to display their information By either choosing ldquoOST 1xrdquo or ldquoOST 2xrdquo it will let the program know you want your columns of information exported in that specific format

When you have the Confirm Deletions radial button of ldquoYesrdquo chosen than every time you delete anything you will get a dialog box confirming your intentions of deletion

While working with your takeoff you have a choice to either view the legend of your conditions or hide it Choose whichever radial button that suits your needs

For those who prefer to use the Enter key to navigate in dialog boxes this option is just for that

Font Tab The Font tab is designed for you to make your own look and feel for the application At the bottom of this tab it will show you sample of the fonts and colors you have chosen

Renaming the Current Page You may change the name of the current page in the takeoff area of On-Screen Takeoff by selecting Edit gt Rename Page

This opens the Name Page dialog and you may simply type in a new name and click the Enter button The new name for the file will be reflected on the title bar for the page and in Project Properties

You also may access the Rename Page function by right-clicking in the takeoff area while in Image View and selecting the option from the pop-up menu that appears

Section 9

62

Saving and Exiting

This section will

Explain how to save projects

Show you how to safely exit the program

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

63

Saving Your Project

1 Select File gt Save 2 If your project has not previously been saved a Save dialog box will open to allow you to name

the file and choose the directory and folder in which to save your file 3 Once saved File gt Save will simply save the current version of the file

OR

4 Select File gt Save As then type in a new name for the file and save to the desired file path

The Auto-save Feature With the Auto-save feature On-Screen Takeoff automatically backs up your open project You may choose to have more than one level of backup files The first backup copy will have the extension b00 and successive files will be b01 b02 and so on If you have designated four levels of backup files after the fourth backup copy has been created (b03) the next file will be saved over the file with extension b00 Further backup saves will then rotate through the four backup files in the same way

1 Select Tools gt Options 2 In the Auto-save area (under the General tab) select the frequency of backup file creation (in

minutes) and the number of levels for the feature 3 You also may disengage the feature by clicking in the check box to clear it

The Auto-save feature automatically saves backup copies to the directory of the current project If you are working from a write-protected area such as a CD-ROM On-Screen Takeoff will place backup files in the On-Screen Takeoff folder

Exiting When you are finished using On-Screen Takeoff it is very easy to exit Exiting is very important because of security reasons If someone were to use your computer they could enter the application and view and manipulate information

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

64

On-Screen Takeoff closes the open project when you open another or create a new project or when you exit the program

1 Select File gt Exit

OR

2 You also may click at the upper right-hand corner of the application to exit

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

65

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer When you get your digitizer from GTCO you will need to connect it to your computer Follow the instructions outlined below to do this

Note For rollup digitizers the metal bar must be oriented to the top or right hand side

Connecting the Digitizer 1 Lay the digitizer out flat 2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer 3 Plug in the power adapter 4 Plug the interface (IO) cable into the digitizer 5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into an open serial port on computer

Note GTCO Technical support phone number is 410-381-6688 The electronic manual (on diskette) from GTCO contains more detailed installation and operation instructions for the GTCO digitizer model you have

Installing other Digitizer Drivers If you are using a GTCO Digitizer you will need to install the GTCO TabletWorks Drivers

If you are using a Digitizer not supported by GTCO Tablet Works 10 please contact the manufacturer of your digitizer for assistance with installation

Installing GTCO TabletWorks Drivers 1 Insert the On Center CD into the CD-ROM drive The CD Startup screen will open 2 Click on Install Software 3 Select Additional Software and Drivers 4 Select Digitizer Driver 5 Follow the instructions for installing TabletWorks 10

Adhering the Template The template is a small plastic sticker used to enable mouse function when using the digitizer with On-Screen Takeoff Place your template on your digitizer We suggest placing it in the bottom right corner of the digitizer about one inch inside the takeoff area

Note You may either peel off the back of the template and use the adhesive surface or you can tape the template down

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

66

Testing the Digitizer Drivers Before running OST you may test the digitizer by moving the stylus around on the digitizer pad it should move the mouse cursor (if mouse emulation is enabled)

If the digitizer does not move the mouse cursor on the screen

The superset codes may need to be reset Reset the superset codes by touching on the border of the digitizer with the stylus The digitizer should beep several times

The digitizer may not be communicating with the computer Be sure the COM port selected is correct Be sure the COM port selected is correct If you are not able to get the digitizer to move the mouse cursor you need to call GTCO technical support for help

Note The Mouse Emulation is not required for On-Screen Takeoff to work properly It is used only for the Template functionality if the digitizer is moving the cursor the wrong direction (up instead of sideways or vice-versa)

Click the L-shaped arrow symbol on the digitizer with the stylus

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

67

Appendix II Toolbar Items Main Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

68

Tool Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

69

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

70

Navigate Toolbar (Continued)

Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

71

Takeoff Toolbar (Continued)

Image Toolbar

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

72

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

This section will detail how to load plans from a F W Dodge CD-ROM into an On-Screen Takeoff project file ready for takeoffs

Dodge files may be added to the Project Properties dialog However loading the files in that way will load the files by number rather than name description If you want to load one page only from your Dodge CD You will have to rename the page to display the name rather than number of the file

To load plan files from a Dodge CD so that the files load sequentially by file number but are displayed by name rather than by number within your project follow the instructions below

Opening a Dodge project from a CD-ROM 1 Insert the CD into the drive 2 Choose File gt Custom 3 Choose Dodge Plans Project (plansdat) as the file type 4 Select the appropriate file type by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the Files of type

field 5 In the Look in field access your drive paths by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the

field then

Navigate to your CD-ROM drive Open the data folder and Open the Projects folder

6 Select the desired project and open its folder 7 Open the plansdat file 8 All the images will come in sequenced correctly for that job along with the full descriptions

(names) of each page If there is not a plans folder in the project folder then plans do not exist for that project on the CD Opening the plansdat file will yield an empty project

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

73

Appendix IV Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer The On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer is a limited version of On Center Softwarersquos commercial takeoff software If your status bar located at the very bottom of the main window says View Mode in the lower left-hand corner then you are using the Plan Viewer You can use the plan viewer to

View CD-based amp converted CAD drawings

View a previously created OST file and associated drawings

Download electronic plans online

Navigate through drawings

Quickly Takeoff linearsareas and counts

Zoom in to view the plan better

Print drawings directly from the viewer

Viewing an On-Screen Takeoff Project File

1 To open an OST file that was previously created with of On-Screen Takeoff 2 Select File gt Open 3 An Open dialog will appear if you do not see the OST file you are looking for select the

Look In drop down arrow 4 A drop down menu will appear listing the various folders drives and mapped drives located

on your computer select the correct drive or folder location and continue to browse to the location of your OST file

5 When you see your OST file double-click it to open it 6 Any takeoff and drawings should appear on the Image tab view

If you do not see the drawings but do see the colored takeoff layer the drawings may

not be located in the same place they were originally saved at Go to File gt Project Properties and check the Image File path for each listed page If the image file path is pointing to a CD drive make sure the CD is inside the CR-ROM

Downloading Electronic Plans If your Online Plan Service provides a special file format (OSX) required to use this feature of our plan viewer you can immediately downloaded all electronic plans of a project directly from our viewer

Most Plan Room web sites will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff when a request to download plans is made Your particular Plan Room may differ in operation so please contact the provider directly with questions on using the site

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

74

When you request to download or open a project file from a Plan Room you will usually have the open to open or save an OSX file Choosing open will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff Alternately you may choose to save the file to a local hard drive After you have saved the file either double-click it to launch On-Screen Takeoff or open the OSX file using On-Screen Takeoff by clicking File then Open and locating the file on your hard drive You will need to change the file type to OSX

After the OSX file is opened you will see an additional tab appear in the Conditions List window called Pages

The Pages tab shows the hierarchy of your project Gray file icons represent pages that have not been downloaded and blue icons represents pages that have been downloaded

To download a page simply double-click the page icon

If you wish to select a group of pages to download you can use the Ctrl or Shift key to multiple select them then click the Download button

If you wish to download all pages at once click the Download All button

Downloaded pages will now appear in the Project Properties dialog in the same order in which they appear in the Pages tab

Creating Quick Takeoffs With On-Screen Takeoff you can create quick takeoffs to measure quantities even if you dont have the full version of our program However using the Quick Takeoff functionality shows you just a fraction of what the full version can do

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar is located at the top of the image view It has three buttons designated for three types of takeoffs Linear Area and Count The Quantity drop down list will show secondary quantities for Linears and Areas The Units drop down allows you to select how you want your quantities displayed Feet Inches Yards Millimeters and Meters

NOTE Every time change the type of takeoff you are performing (switching from Area to Linear for example) the previous quantities and takeoff objects will disappear They will also disappear when you changes pages

NOTE You can use the Dimension Tool to basically measure the distance between two points or linears The distance will display on the status bar at the bottom of the application

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

75

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions General

Where is On-Screen Takeoff installed on my computer

Typically it is installed in CProgram FilesOn-Screen Takeoff

In Explorer how do I recognize On-Screen Takeoff file types

On-Screen Takeoff data is stored in a single file per job lsquojob name OSTrsquo On-Screen Takeoff templates are stored as lsquotemplate nameTPOrsquo

Can only one project at a time be open

Yes For that reason opening another project automatically closes the project on screen You will be asked to save any changes

Is only one scale allowed per page What about on drawings that have multiple detail sections on a page and each of those drawings have different scales

Yes For pages with drawings of different scales copy the drawing to another project page and set the appropriate scale

I cannot perform backout on an area that is along a linear

As a workaround use the On-Screen Takeoff layers feature to help you with this issue Electronic Images

How do I start a project from drawings that have been scanned and written to a CD-ROM

Open a new project Select File gt Project Properties and select Auto Add Navigate to your CD and the appropriate folder and select any image file in that location Click Open All files in the location will load into your project Recommended that images are copied from CD to hard drive for performance

If I get a disk of drawings in AutoCAD format (R13 or R14) can I read them in On-Screen Takeoff

Yes On-Screen Takeoff now reads DWG DXF and many other format that are saved with AutoCAD

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

76

When I click on the all pages button what is supposed to happen Currently nothing seems to change when I click on that button

The All Pages button is used to apply the Darken and Enhance Plans feature to all pages in the project (as opposed to only the current page on screen)

Is there a way to deduct a large skylight from an area condition

Yes with the related area condition selected in the Takeoff Dock bar unselect the Backout button on the Takeoff Toolbar then draw the Backout area The area quantity will be deducted from the related condition object and the linear measurement of the Backout perimeter will be added

Digitizer Issues

How do I connect a Digitizer to the computer

See Appendix I Connecting a Digitizer

The Place Template menu choice is disabled

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or the digitizer or the digitzer drivers are not installed

It wonrsquot let me select the Set Takeoff Area menu choice

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or no job is open a digitizer is not installed or the drivers are not installed

The digitizer stylus is not moving the cursor or crosshairs

Click S-0-1 superset on the digitizer

How do I convert my old GTCO Digitizer to work with On- Screen Takeofftrade

Call GTCO and they may be able to reconfigure your digitizer to be compatible with On-Screen Takeoff

Printing Issues Which Printers work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible printers include On-Screen Takeoff Hewlett Packard Epson and Canon printers If you are having printer difficulties please contact support and specify the type of printer along with other pertinent information Contact support at wwwoncentercomsupport or email supportoncentercom

Which Plotters work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible Plotters include Hewlett Packard DesignJet plotters and the EnCAD Cadjet II If you are having plotter difficulties please contact support and specify the type of plotter concerned

ViewingDisplay I can no longer see my condition list How do I get it back

The toolbars and Dock bars can be turned on and off through the View gt Toolbars menu options

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

77

This is also accessible by right-clicking in the toolbar area and selecting (or deselecting) a toolbar listed

I cannot view my folders in the condition list

Right-click in the Takeoff Dock barcondition list area and select Show Tree to display your folders

My Status Bar reads Viewer Mode and I am unable to draw conditions

On-Screen Takeoff needs to be Authorized Or you need to purchase an upgrade Click the Perform Advanced Takeoff button on the main toolbar

I hid a Dock bar and when I selected to view it again it appeared alongside the other Dock

bar instead of stacked on top of it How do I fix it

Pick up the Dock bar by clicking on the bar at the top and continuing to hold down the mouse button drag the Dock bar over the other one It will resize and appear stacked with the other

When I open image files from a CD the images are all upside down How do I get them right

side up

To flip pages from top to bottom follow the steps below 1 Click the All Pages button on the Image Toolbar (All Pages is engaged when the button

is not clicked) 2 Click the Flip Horizontal button on the Image Toolbar 3 Click the All Pages button again to disengage

Templates How do I create a Template

Follow the steps below 1 Create a typical project 2 Choose File gt Save As 3 Choose On-Screen Takeoff Template Files as the file type to save 4 Name the file This will save all of the condition setups as well as the layers for the

project

How do I create a new project from a template

Follow the steps below 1 Choose File gt New 2 Select a template from those listed in the New dialog This will open a new project with

conditions and layers saved from a previous project but no pages or takeoff

78

INDEX

Area Conditions 32

Area Objects 57

Auto Scrolling 20

Auto-save 63

Backout Mode 41

Calculation Method 60

Conditions 29

Configuration 60

Contents Tab 6

Continuous Mode 38

Count Conditions 33

Count Objects 57

Digitizer 10 65 76

Docking Toolbars 13

Dodge CD 72

Drawing 27 37

DropRun Count 55

Environment 18

Exiting 63

Exporting 49

Features 16

Font 61

Frequently Asked Questions 75

Grid 40

Help File 5

Hiding Toolbars 13

Hot Links 21

Image 19 59

Image files 9

Image Toolbar 12 71

Images 75

Index Tab 6

Layers 43

Linear Conditions 31

Linear Objects 56

Main Toolbar 12 67

Menus 14

Moving Toolbars 13

Navigate Toolbar 12 69

Navigating 20

On-Screen Takeofftrade 2

Page 59 61

Pages 20 25 28

Plan Viewer 73

Plans 26

Printing 47 76

Project Properties 25

Projects 22

Quick Start Video 18

Resizing Toolbars 13

Roping 54

Saving 63

Scale 28

Search Tab 7

Selecting Objects 42

Setup 8

Start On-Screen Takeofftrade 17

System Requirements 9

Takeoff 19 27

Takeoff Toolbar 70 71

Takeoff Toolbar 12

Template Files 23

TIF (Group4) 9

Tool Toolbar 12 68

Toolbar 67

Toolbars 12

View Toolbar 12 69

Viewing Toolbars 12

Worksheet 20

Zone Conditions 33

Zoom Toolbar 12 69

  • On-Screen Takeoff Lite
  • Table of Contents
  • Section 1 - Introduction
  • Section 2 - Setup
  • Section 3 - Toolbars and Menus
  • Section 4 - Features
  • Section 5 - Projects
  • Section 6 - Conditions and Takeoff
  • Section 7 - Printing and Exporting
  • Section 8 - Advanced Features
  • Section 9 - Saving and Exiting
  • Appendix I - Installing Your Digitizer
  • Appendix II - Toolbar Items
  • Appendix III - Loading Plans from a Dodge CD
  • Appendix IV - Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer
  • Appendix V - Frequently Asked Questions
  • Index

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

47

Print Setup On-Screen Takeoff allows the user to print the image takeoff list and worksheet

1 Select File gt Print Setup The Print Setup dialog will open

2 Select a printer or leave the default selection listed (change from the default printer displayed by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the field)

3 Indicate page size and printer tray option (Source) Access page size options by clicking on the

down arrow at the right of the field

4 Choose Portrait or Landscape orientation

5 Click to accept and close the dialog

Printing Images The image area can include the electronic plans the takeoff objects added text and hot links To print a subset of these (for example just the takeoffs without the plans or the added text and hot link symbols) hide layers that you do not want to print (see Section 6 View and Hide Layers) When you are printing your images every page will show the scale of the takeoff you are printing

1 Click on the Image tab to display the area of your project

2 Select File gt Print (or Ctrl + P)

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

48

3 Select the desired view (What to print) and the Image Range

4 Click The second Print dialog will open

5 Change settings accordingly or click if you accept the default settings

Printing Takeoff Lists and Worksheets In Takeoff Lists and Worksheets you may hide columns to print only certain results or adjust column widths to fit the report within the page size selected

1 In Takeoff List or Worksheet view move your cursor to the right side of the columnrsquos title bar the cursor will display as a two-way arrow

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

49

2 Click and drag to adjust the width of the column Holding the mouse button you may

slide the title bar under the title bar to its left to hide the column completely

3 Select File gt Print or press Ctrl + P to access the Print dialog

4 Indicate desired printer and choose the number of copies

5 Click to print and close the dialog

When printing the condition list we suggest printing in landscape

To reset to the default column widths double-click on the right border of a column heading will reset the column to its right (or previously to its right before being hidden)

Print Preview 1 Select File gt Print Preview

2 Use and to vary your view 3 If viewing an image choose current full or scale view to see how it displays

4 For printed outputs that cover more than one page use and to view adjacent pages or click on the down arrow next to Page field and select the page you want displayed

Exporting Using the CopyPaste Feature You may copy all the data or sections from the worksheet and the takeoff list view in On-Screen Takeoff and paste it into another application When pasting into Excel the cell layout will be maintained

1 Highlight the areas you wish to paste Click and hold the left mouse button down as you drag the cursor over the area to be selected then releasing the mouse button

OR

2 Select the entire takeoff list quickly click on the left On-Screen Takeoff column header and hold and drag the cursor across the remaining column headings

The number of pages for the view selected will display in the lower left-hand corner The zoom percentage that applies to the view will be displayed in the lower right-hand corner next to page size of the drawing

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

50

3 In the worksheet view you may highlight rows by clicking on the numbered buttons to the left of each row clicking and dragging across column headings or clicking and dragging over individual cells in the worksheet

Click anywhere in the appropriate view to deselect the area

4 Once your selection is highlighted you may select Edit gt Copy or Ctrl C from the keyboard 5 On your monitor switch to the application into which you want to paste your selection 6 Select Edit gt Paste in the new application or simply press Ctrl + V to paste

The colored keys for conditions cannot be pasted

Using the Export Feature You may export condition quantities to specified cell location within an Excel worksheet file Cell target locations are assigned in the Results tab of the condition dialogs on the Export line relating to each quantity measurement type

On-Screen Takeoff will export takeoff quantity results for up to three different quantity types that you specify For instance you may want to know the number of square feet in a ceiling area as well as the number of linear feet in its perimeter

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

51

1 Bring up the Condition dialog by double-clicking on a condition in the takeoff dock bar or by

selecting the condition and clicking

2 Click on the Results tab to access its fields The default quantities for the condition type will display

3 For each results field click on the arrow to access the pull-down menu and select the appropriate quantity (for example SF LF EA etchellip)

4 Have your Excel spreadsheet opened and saved in a file

5 Specify the Excel spreadsheet cell locations where you want the results to go

6 For a cell in the first sheet of your spreadsheet type in the cell address (eg a1) Case is not important

7 For a cell on a successive sheet of your spreadsheet type in sheet the number followed by a comma and the cell address without any spaces (eg sheet2a1) Case is not important

8 Click

9 Select File gt Export gt Condition Qty to Excel

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

52

10 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

11 Click to export On-Screen Takeoff results to specified cell locations in the Excel file When you return to the Excel application you will see the values have been added to the specified cell locations in your spreadsheet

12 Save your Excel file

Exporting Worksheet to Excel

1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 From On-Screen Takeoff Select File gt Export gt Worksheet to Excel

4 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

5 Click When you return to the Excel application you will see the values from the Worksheet Tab have been added to your spreadsheet

6 Save your Excel file

Exporting Takeoff to CVS 1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 Click the Takeoff Tab in the project you want to export the information

4 Select File gt Export gt Takeoff to CSV

5 Browse to the location of the CSV spreadsheet file click file to select it

6 Click the Save

NOTE CSV files can be opened in Excel Lotus Access etc One may consider this option more of a ldquodumprdquo into a file

The Excel application must be active (it may be minimized on the application bar) with the target spreadsheet open in the application Otherwise an error will occur with the export operation that will affect both the On-Screen Takeofftrade file and the Excel spreadsheet

Section 8

53

Advanced Features

This section will

Some special features of working with condition objects in the takeoff area

Details of advanced options for conditions

Advanced features of the Project Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

54

Features to Use with Objects Roping Feature You can move copy or delete using this feature Using the Select tool (the pointer) you may select several objects at once by clicking and dragging an outline around the objects then releasing the mouse button Roping may select either objects completely within the outlined area (inclusive) or objects both within and touched by the outlined area (touching) Specify your roping preference under Tools gt Options

1 Click and hold the mouse button at a point on the screen near the objects to be selected and drag to surround the objects with an outline

2 Release the mouse button The objects will be selected

3 You may now

Move the group around on the page by clicking within the group dragging the mouse and releasing the button to place the objects

Delete the group of objects by clicking the Delete key or

Copy and paste by pressing Ctrl C to copy the group then Ctrl V to paste it The pasted copy of the grouped objects will appear slightly offset from the original objects

Section 8 Advanced Features

55

Applying a DropRun Count

Use the droprun feature when calculating quantities to take into account the drop or run of a linear condition such as electrical lines or plumbing pipes Drop or run lengths may be added separately to any linear condition on screen while a default droprun length may be indicated for a condition as a whole

1 Select the desired linear condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff Dock bar

2 Click the Change button in the toolbar to open the Change Condition dialog

3 Click the Advanced tab to access the advanced options and click inside the DropRun check box

4 Enter a default length to be applied to all of this condition Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches) You can leave the length blank and manually enter drop run on each segment drawn

5 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog

Edit DropRun Count

1 With the related linear condition in the Takeoff Dock bar highlighted or with the pointer tool selected

2 click on the desired linear object in the image takeoff area The Count button will become active

3 Click on the Count button (alternatively select Tools gt Count) The default droprun amount will show in the pop-up Count dialog (Default length will be zero if droprun has not been selected in this conditionrsquos properties)

4 Type in the desired length Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches)

5 Click the OK button The additional amount will be reflected in the corresponding quantity The new DropRun count will apply only to the object edited

Adding Text in Image View

On-Screen Takeoff allows you to place text comments around your quantity takeoffs that may be printed along with plan images and objects Text is automatically placed within the Annotation Layer (that includes text and hot links)

1 To place text on the image select the Text Tool and click at the point you want to place your text opening a text box

2 Type in your information clicking Enter for line breaks

3 When you are finished click the OK button to exit the text box

4 To reposition text simply click on the text (with the Text Tool active) to select it

5 Move the cursor over the text the cursor will now display as a four-way arrow

6 Click and drag the mouse to position the text as desired

Section 8 Advanced Features

56

1 To edit existing text use the Text Tool to double-click on the text to open the editing box

2 Enter additional text or use the Backspace key to delete text as necessary

Formatting Text Once created you may format the font size type style and color of your text

1 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Font or click on the Font button in the Takeoff Toolbar

2 Select the desired features (color options are disabled) and click the OK button

3 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Color or click on the Color button in the Takeoff Toolbar The Color dialog will open

4 Click on a color in the Basic Color palette or create a color and add to the Custom Colors palette (Be sure to click on the color in the Custom Colors palette to select it)

5 Click the OK button

Object Properties

Linear Objects

Linear objects may be set to connect at corners

A linear object may be set to trim automatically when crossing another linear object (Check the trim option under the advanced tab of the Condition dialog)

When you move a connected linear object objects automatically move and resize connected lines accordingly (quantities are then recalculated)

This feature requires that the connected linear object be moved using the center handles (does not apply when resizing the line from the ends)

Objects constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

Objects are measured from centerline to centerline

Section 8 Advanced Features

57

Area Objects When drawing an area use your escape key to undo the last line drawn You may reverse your

drawing of an area using the escape key

The area will not fill with color and pattern until the user double-clicks after the last line is set

Lines drawn to delineate an area object constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

After selecting an area to move or adjust position the mouse in the center to move the entire area position the mouse at the sides or corners to adjust the perimeter

Count Objects

All count objects are quantified by the physical number of objects per page and reported as EA for the UOM The quantity for the current Image View is (displayed in the Condition List) and the total quantity in your project is displayed in the Takeoff View and Worksheet View)

Square circle rectangle and triangle shaped count objects do not displace or subtract from other object quantities when placed on top of them However on the Advanced Tab for the count condition a connect property can be set (this is a check box) so that when a count object of this shape is put on top of a Linear type takeoff object it will move with the linear if said linear is moved

An opened-shaped count object must be placed within a linear object Opening shaped count objects may also be measured by linear foot or linear yard (EA SF and SY are also options) Opening shaped count items default to a width of 3rsquo 0rdquo at the time of creation This size can be changed The small medium and large size are not options on this type of condition anymore Check Backout on the Advanced tab for each Count object back out the footage (or yardage) of opening-shaped count objects in which they are placed

NOTE In order to see this Backout functionality (in quantity) for SY or SF deductions at least one of the

results for the Linear(s) this object will be placed on must be set to SY or SF and the count object must have a height quantity

Advanced Features of Conditions The Round Feature Under the Advanced tab of the linear and area Condition dialogues you may specify quantity rounding (in inches) For linear objects rounding applies to each linear object drawn For area objects rounding will apply to each segment of the area perimeter adjusting the perimeter and area calculations For example With a linear condition entering 12 in the Round field will round up each related linear object to the nearest 12 inches or one foot With this setting two walls of 1 4 would each round to 2 0 totaling 4 0

NOTE In the Takeoff Dock bar condition list and in the On-Screen Takeoff reports quantities will be displayed in whole numbers rounded up to the nearest foot However calculations are based on true quantities without rounding unless the Round Feature is engaged

Pitch Pitch may apply either to linear or area conditions It is measured in rise per linear foot Entering 12 indicates a 12 rise per 12 of linear distance (a pitch of 12 over 12) or an angle of 45deg

Section 8 Advanced Features

58

Advanced Features of Project Properties Selecting Multiple Pages

1 Select a single page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry

2 Drag the cursor down the column of numbers to select consecutive pages

3 Click on the blank button at the top of this column to select all pages in the Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

59

Changing Image Assigned to a Drawing 1 Select the page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry 2 Click the Change Image button The Change Image dialog box will appear

3 Navigate to the desired file and select by clicking on it

4 Click the Open button The electronic file assigned to the page will have been changed to reflect the new file choice

Changing Image File Path 1 Select pages as described above

2 Choose Change Folder

3 In the Change Folder dialog navigate to the appropriate folder

4 Click the OK button The file path will have been changed for the selected page entries

Delete a Page from Project Properties 1 Select the page you want to delete by clicking on its associated number (in the gray box at the

left of the entry)

2 Choose Delete Page

All Takeoff on the page will be deleted immediately and permanently

Section 8 Advanced Features

60

Advanced Features of Tool Options

Calculation Method On-Screen Takeoff has built-in calculation options to allow for faster work and faster saves until your takeoff is complete Calculation options are found by selecting Tools gt Options then clicking on the Calculation tab

Calculation method can be set to Automatic Automatic except Grids and Manual Manual will allow the program to operate more quickly while Automatic or Automatic except Grids allows the user to see quantity changes as takeoffs are made

In any mode you may press F9 to recalculate quantities for the On-Screen Takeoff current totals

Configuration Tab

When the ldquoPage Label (A01)rdquo radial button is chosen On-Screen Takeoff puts the numbered label on all the pages of in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar If the Page Descriptionrdquo radial button is chosen then a description of what takeoff is on that specific page will be shown in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar

This section of the configuration tab gives you options on how you want to export your information When the ldquoFolderSubfolder Namesrdquo radial button is chosen than on your file that you are exporting to will have all the conditions folders and subfolders In the Delimiter box you can choose the symbol that is needed to separate the information you are exporting Some files need semicolons () or colons () to make sure the information comes exported in is separated it the appropriate places

Section 8 Advanced Features

61

In previous versions of On-Screen Takeoff there are views that users need to have in order for them to display their information By either choosing ldquoOST 1xrdquo or ldquoOST 2xrdquo it will let the program know you want your columns of information exported in that specific format

When you have the Confirm Deletions radial button of ldquoYesrdquo chosen than every time you delete anything you will get a dialog box confirming your intentions of deletion

While working with your takeoff you have a choice to either view the legend of your conditions or hide it Choose whichever radial button that suits your needs

For those who prefer to use the Enter key to navigate in dialog boxes this option is just for that

Font Tab The Font tab is designed for you to make your own look and feel for the application At the bottom of this tab it will show you sample of the fonts and colors you have chosen

Renaming the Current Page You may change the name of the current page in the takeoff area of On-Screen Takeoff by selecting Edit gt Rename Page

This opens the Name Page dialog and you may simply type in a new name and click the Enter button The new name for the file will be reflected on the title bar for the page and in Project Properties

You also may access the Rename Page function by right-clicking in the takeoff area while in Image View and selecting the option from the pop-up menu that appears

Section 9

62

Saving and Exiting

This section will

Explain how to save projects

Show you how to safely exit the program

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

63

Saving Your Project

1 Select File gt Save 2 If your project has not previously been saved a Save dialog box will open to allow you to name

the file and choose the directory and folder in which to save your file 3 Once saved File gt Save will simply save the current version of the file

OR

4 Select File gt Save As then type in a new name for the file and save to the desired file path

The Auto-save Feature With the Auto-save feature On-Screen Takeoff automatically backs up your open project You may choose to have more than one level of backup files The first backup copy will have the extension b00 and successive files will be b01 b02 and so on If you have designated four levels of backup files after the fourth backup copy has been created (b03) the next file will be saved over the file with extension b00 Further backup saves will then rotate through the four backup files in the same way

1 Select Tools gt Options 2 In the Auto-save area (under the General tab) select the frequency of backup file creation (in

minutes) and the number of levels for the feature 3 You also may disengage the feature by clicking in the check box to clear it

The Auto-save feature automatically saves backup copies to the directory of the current project If you are working from a write-protected area such as a CD-ROM On-Screen Takeoff will place backup files in the On-Screen Takeoff folder

Exiting When you are finished using On-Screen Takeoff it is very easy to exit Exiting is very important because of security reasons If someone were to use your computer they could enter the application and view and manipulate information

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

64

On-Screen Takeoff closes the open project when you open another or create a new project or when you exit the program

1 Select File gt Exit

OR

2 You also may click at the upper right-hand corner of the application to exit

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

65

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer When you get your digitizer from GTCO you will need to connect it to your computer Follow the instructions outlined below to do this

Note For rollup digitizers the metal bar must be oriented to the top or right hand side

Connecting the Digitizer 1 Lay the digitizer out flat 2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer 3 Plug in the power adapter 4 Plug the interface (IO) cable into the digitizer 5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into an open serial port on computer

Note GTCO Technical support phone number is 410-381-6688 The electronic manual (on diskette) from GTCO contains more detailed installation and operation instructions for the GTCO digitizer model you have

Installing other Digitizer Drivers If you are using a GTCO Digitizer you will need to install the GTCO TabletWorks Drivers

If you are using a Digitizer not supported by GTCO Tablet Works 10 please contact the manufacturer of your digitizer for assistance with installation

Installing GTCO TabletWorks Drivers 1 Insert the On Center CD into the CD-ROM drive The CD Startup screen will open 2 Click on Install Software 3 Select Additional Software and Drivers 4 Select Digitizer Driver 5 Follow the instructions for installing TabletWorks 10

Adhering the Template The template is a small plastic sticker used to enable mouse function when using the digitizer with On-Screen Takeoff Place your template on your digitizer We suggest placing it in the bottom right corner of the digitizer about one inch inside the takeoff area

Note You may either peel off the back of the template and use the adhesive surface or you can tape the template down

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

66

Testing the Digitizer Drivers Before running OST you may test the digitizer by moving the stylus around on the digitizer pad it should move the mouse cursor (if mouse emulation is enabled)

If the digitizer does not move the mouse cursor on the screen

The superset codes may need to be reset Reset the superset codes by touching on the border of the digitizer with the stylus The digitizer should beep several times

The digitizer may not be communicating with the computer Be sure the COM port selected is correct Be sure the COM port selected is correct If you are not able to get the digitizer to move the mouse cursor you need to call GTCO technical support for help

Note The Mouse Emulation is not required for On-Screen Takeoff to work properly It is used only for the Template functionality if the digitizer is moving the cursor the wrong direction (up instead of sideways or vice-versa)

Click the L-shaped arrow symbol on the digitizer with the stylus

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

67

Appendix II Toolbar Items Main Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

68

Tool Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

69

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

70

Navigate Toolbar (Continued)

Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

71

Takeoff Toolbar (Continued)

Image Toolbar

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

72

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

This section will detail how to load plans from a F W Dodge CD-ROM into an On-Screen Takeoff project file ready for takeoffs

Dodge files may be added to the Project Properties dialog However loading the files in that way will load the files by number rather than name description If you want to load one page only from your Dodge CD You will have to rename the page to display the name rather than number of the file

To load plan files from a Dodge CD so that the files load sequentially by file number but are displayed by name rather than by number within your project follow the instructions below

Opening a Dodge project from a CD-ROM 1 Insert the CD into the drive 2 Choose File gt Custom 3 Choose Dodge Plans Project (plansdat) as the file type 4 Select the appropriate file type by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the Files of type

field 5 In the Look in field access your drive paths by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the

field then

Navigate to your CD-ROM drive Open the data folder and Open the Projects folder

6 Select the desired project and open its folder 7 Open the plansdat file 8 All the images will come in sequenced correctly for that job along with the full descriptions

(names) of each page If there is not a plans folder in the project folder then plans do not exist for that project on the CD Opening the plansdat file will yield an empty project

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

73

Appendix IV Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer The On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer is a limited version of On Center Softwarersquos commercial takeoff software If your status bar located at the very bottom of the main window says View Mode in the lower left-hand corner then you are using the Plan Viewer You can use the plan viewer to

View CD-based amp converted CAD drawings

View a previously created OST file and associated drawings

Download electronic plans online

Navigate through drawings

Quickly Takeoff linearsareas and counts

Zoom in to view the plan better

Print drawings directly from the viewer

Viewing an On-Screen Takeoff Project File

1 To open an OST file that was previously created with of On-Screen Takeoff 2 Select File gt Open 3 An Open dialog will appear if you do not see the OST file you are looking for select the

Look In drop down arrow 4 A drop down menu will appear listing the various folders drives and mapped drives located

on your computer select the correct drive or folder location and continue to browse to the location of your OST file

5 When you see your OST file double-click it to open it 6 Any takeoff and drawings should appear on the Image tab view

If you do not see the drawings but do see the colored takeoff layer the drawings may

not be located in the same place they were originally saved at Go to File gt Project Properties and check the Image File path for each listed page If the image file path is pointing to a CD drive make sure the CD is inside the CR-ROM

Downloading Electronic Plans If your Online Plan Service provides a special file format (OSX) required to use this feature of our plan viewer you can immediately downloaded all electronic plans of a project directly from our viewer

Most Plan Room web sites will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff when a request to download plans is made Your particular Plan Room may differ in operation so please contact the provider directly with questions on using the site

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

74

When you request to download or open a project file from a Plan Room you will usually have the open to open or save an OSX file Choosing open will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff Alternately you may choose to save the file to a local hard drive After you have saved the file either double-click it to launch On-Screen Takeoff or open the OSX file using On-Screen Takeoff by clicking File then Open and locating the file on your hard drive You will need to change the file type to OSX

After the OSX file is opened you will see an additional tab appear in the Conditions List window called Pages

The Pages tab shows the hierarchy of your project Gray file icons represent pages that have not been downloaded and blue icons represents pages that have been downloaded

To download a page simply double-click the page icon

If you wish to select a group of pages to download you can use the Ctrl or Shift key to multiple select them then click the Download button

If you wish to download all pages at once click the Download All button

Downloaded pages will now appear in the Project Properties dialog in the same order in which they appear in the Pages tab

Creating Quick Takeoffs With On-Screen Takeoff you can create quick takeoffs to measure quantities even if you dont have the full version of our program However using the Quick Takeoff functionality shows you just a fraction of what the full version can do

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar is located at the top of the image view It has three buttons designated for three types of takeoffs Linear Area and Count The Quantity drop down list will show secondary quantities for Linears and Areas The Units drop down allows you to select how you want your quantities displayed Feet Inches Yards Millimeters and Meters

NOTE Every time change the type of takeoff you are performing (switching from Area to Linear for example) the previous quantities and takeoff objects will disappear They will also disappear when you changes pages

NOTE You can use the Dimension Tool to basically measure the distance between two points or linears The distance will display on the status bar at the bottom of the application

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

75

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions General

Where is On-Screen Takeoff installed on my computer

Typically it is installed in CProgram FilesOn-Screen Takeoff

In Explorer how do I recognize On-Screen Takeoff file types

On-Screen Takeoff data is stored in a single file per job lsquojob name OSTrsquo On-Screen Takeoff templates are stored as lsquotemplate nameTPOrsquo

Can only one project at a time be open

Yes For that reason opening another project automatically closes the project on screen You will be asked to save any changes

Is only one scale allowed per page What about on drawings that have multiple detail sections on a page and each of those drawings have different scales

Yes For pages with drawings of different scales copy the drawing to another project page and set the appropriate scale

I cannot perform backout on an area that is along a linear

As a workaround use the On-Screen Takeoff layers feature to help you with this issue Electronic Images

How do I start a project from drawings that have been scanned and written to a CD-ROM

Open a new project Select File gt Project Properties and select Auto Add Navigate to your CD and the appropriate folder and select any image file in that location Click Open All files in the location will load into your project Recommended that images are copied from CD to hard drive for performance

If I get a disk of drawings in AutoCAD format (R13 or R14) can I read them in On-Screen Takeoff

Yes On-Screen Takeoff now reads DWG DXF and many other format that are saved with AutoCAD

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

76

When I click on the all pages button what is supposed to happen Currently nothing seems to change when I click on that button

The All Pages button is used to apply the Darken and Enhance Plans feature to all pages in the project (as opposed to only the current page on screen)

Is there a way to deduct a large skylight from an area condition

Yes with the related area condition selected in the Takeoff Dock bar unselect the Backout button on the Takeoff Toolbar then draw the Backout area The area quantity will be deducted from the related condition object and the linear measurement of the Backout perimeter will be added

Digitizer Issues

How do I connect a Digitizer to the computer

See Appendix I Connecting a Digitizer

The Place Template menu choice is disabled

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or the digitizer or the digitzer drivers are not installed

It wonrsquot let me select the Set Takeoff Area menu choice

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or no job is open a digitizer is not installed or the drivers are not installed

The digitizer stylus is not moving the cursor or crosshairs

Click S-0-1 superset on the digitizer

How do I convert my old GTCO Digitizer to work with On- Screen Takeofftrade

Call GTCO and they may be able to reconfigure your digitizer to be compatible with On-Screen Takeoff

Printing Issues Which Printers work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible printers include On-Screen Takeoff Hewlett Packard Epson and Canon printers If you are having printer difficulties please contact support and specify the type of printer along with other pertinent information Contact support at wwwoncentercomsupport or email supportoncentercom

Which Plotters work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible Plotters include Hewlett Packard DesignJet plotters and the EnCAD Cadjet II If you are having plotter difficulties please contact support and specify the type of plotter concerned

ViewingDisplay I can no longer see my condition list How do I get it back

The toolbars and Dock bars can be turned on and off through the View gt Toolbars menu options

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

77

This is also accessible by right-clicking in the toolbar area and selecting (or deselecting) a toolbar listed

I cannot view my folders in the condition list

Right-click in the Takeoff Dock barcondition list area and select Show Tree to display your folders

My Status Bar reads Viewer Mode and I am unable to draw conditions

On-Screen Takeoff needs to be Authorized Or you need to purchase an upgrade Click the Perform Advanced Takeoff button on the main toolbar

I hid a Dock bar and when I selected to view it again it appeared alongside the other Dock

bar instead of stacked on top of it How do I fix it

Pick up the Dock bar by clicking on the bar at the top and continuing to hold down the mouse button drag the Dock bar over the other one It will resize and appear stacked with the other

When I open image files from a CD the images are all upside down How do I get them right

side up

To flip pages from top to bottom follow the steps below 1 Click the All Pages button on the Image Toolbar (All Pages is engaged when the button

is not clicked) 2 Click the Flip Horizontal button on the Image Toolbar 3 Click the All Pages button again to disengage

Templates How do I create a Template

Follow the steps below 1 Create a typical project 2 Choose File gt Save As 3 Choose On-Screen Takeoff Template Files as the file type to save 4 Name the file This will save all of the condition setups as well as the layers for the

project

How do I create a new project from a template

Follow the steps below 1 Choose File gt New 2 Select a template from those listed in the New dialog This will open a new project with

conditions and layers saved from a previous project but no pages or takeoff

78

INDEX

Area Conditions 32

Area Objects 57

Auto Scrolling 20

Auto-save 63

Backout Mode 41

Calculation Method 60

Conditions 29

Configuration 60

Contents Tab 6

Continuous Mode 38

Count Conditions 33

Count Objects 57

Digitizer 10 65 76

Docking Toolbars 13

Dodge CD 72

Drawing 27 37

DropRun Count 55

Environment 18

Exiting 63

Exporting 49

Features 16

Font 61

Frequently Asked Questions 75

Grid 40

Help File 5

Hiding Toolbars 13

Hot Links 21

Image 19 59

Image files 9

Image Toolbar 12 71

Images 75

Index Tab 6

Layers 43

Linear Conditions 31

Linear Objects 56

Main Toolbar 12 67

Menus 14

Moving Toolbars 13

Navigate Toolbar 12 69

Navigating 20

On-Screen Takeofftrade 2

Page 59 61

Pages 20 25 28

Plan Viewer 73

Plans 26

Printing 47 76

Project Properties 25

Projects 22

Quick Start Video 18

Resizing Toolbars 13

Roping 54

Saving 63

Scale 28

Search Tab 7

Selecting Objects 42

Setup 8

Start On-Screen Takeofftrade 17

System Requirements 9

Takeoff 19 27

Takeoff Toolbar 70 71

Takeoff Toolbar 12

Template Files 23

TIF (Group4) 9

Tool Toolbar 12 68

Toolbar 67

Toolbars 12

View Toolbar 12 69

Viewing Toolbars 12

Worksheet 20

Zone Conditions 33

Zoom Toolbar 12 69

  • On-Screen Takeoff Lite
  • Table of Contents
  • Section 1 - Introduction
  • Section 2 - Setup
  • Section 3 - Toolbars and Menus
  • Section 4 - Features
  • Section 5 - Projects
  • Section 6 - Conditions and Takeoff
  • Section 7 - Printing and Exporting
  • Section 8 - Advanced Features
  • Section 9 - Saving and Exiting
  • Appendix I - Installing Your Digitizer
  • Appendix II - Toolbar Items
  • Appendix III - Loading Plans from a Dodge CD
  • Appendix IV - Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer
  • Appendix V - Frequently Asked Questions
  • Index

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

48

3 Select the desired view (What to print) and the Image Range

4 Click The second Print dialog will open

5 Change settings accordingly or click if you accept the default settings

Printing Takeoff Lists and Worksheets In Takeoff Lists and Worksheets you may hide columns to print only certain results or adjust column widths to fit the report within the page size selected

1 In Takeoff List or Worksheet view move your cursor to the right side of the columnrsquos title bar the cursor will display as a two-way arrow

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

49

2 Click and drag to adjust the width of the column Holding the mouse button you may

slide the title bar under the title bar to its left to hide the column completely

3 Select File gt Print or press Ctrl + P to access the Print dialog

4 Indicate desired printer and choose the number of copies

5 Click to print and close the dialog

When printing the condition list we suggest printing in landscape

To reset to the default column widths double-click on the right border of a column heading will reset the column to its right (or previously to its right before being hidden)

Print Preview 1 Select File gt Print Preview

2 Use and to vary your view 3 If viewing an image choose current full or scale view to see how it displays

4 For printed outputs that cover more than one page use and to view adjacent pages or click on the down arrow next to Page field and select the page you want displayed

Exporting Using the CopyPaste Feature You may copy all the data or sections from the worksheet and the takeoff list view in On-Screen Takeoff and paste it into another application When pasting into Excel the cell layout will be maintained

1 Highlight the areas you wish to paste Click and hold the left mouse button down as you drag the cursor over the area to be selected then releasing the mouse button

OR

2 Select the entire takeoff list quickly click on the left On-Screen Takeoff column header and hold and drag the cursor across the remaining column headings

The number of pages for the view selected will display in the lower left-hand corner The zoom percentage that applies to the view will be displayed in the lower right-hand corner next to page size of the drawing

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

50

3 In the worksheet view you may highlight rows by clicking on the numbered buttons to the left of each row clicking and dragging across column headings or clicking and dragging over individual cells in the worksheet

Click anywhere in the appropriate view to deselect the area

4 Once your selection is highlighted you may select Edit gt Copy or Ctrl C from the keyboard 5 On your monitor switch to the application into which you want to paste your selection 6 Select Edit gt Paste in the new application or simply press Ctrl + V to paste

The colored keys for conditions cannot be pasted

Using the Export Feature You may export condition quantities to specified cell location within an Excel worksheet file Cell target locations are assigned in the Results tab of the condition dialogs on the Export line relating to each quantity measurement type

On-Screen Takeoff will export takeoff quantity results for up to three different quantity types that you specify For instance you may want to know the number of square feet in a ceiling area as well as the number of linear feet in its perimeter

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

51

1 Bring up the Condition dialog by double-clicking on a condition in the takeoff dock bar or by

selecting the condition and clicking

2 Click on the Results tab to access its fields The default quantities for the condition type will display

3 For each results field click on the arrow to access the pull-down menu and select the appropriate quantity (for example SF LF EA etchellip)

4 Have your Excel spreadsheet opened and saved in a file

5 Specify the Excel spreadsheet cell locations where you want the results to go

6 For a cell in the first sheet of your spreadsheet type in the cell address (eg a1) Case is not important

7 For a cell on a successive sheet of your spreadsheet type in sheet the number followed by a comma and the cell address without any spaces (eg sheet2a1) Case is not important

8 Click

9 Select File gt Export gt Condition Qty to Excel

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

52

10 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

11 Click to export On-Screen Takeoff results to specified cell locations in the Excel file When you return to the Excel application you will see the values have been added to the specified cell locations in your spreadsheet

12 Save your Excel file

Exporting Worksheet to Excel

1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 From On-Screen Takeoff Select File gt Export gt Worksheet to Excel

4 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

5 Click When you return to the Excel application you will see the values from the Worksheet Tab have been added to your spreadsheet

6 Save your Excel file

Exporting Takeoff to CVS 1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 Click the Takeoff Tab in the project you want to export the information

4 Select File gt Export gt Takeoff to CSV

5 Browse to the location of the CSV spreadsheet file click file to select it

6 Click the Save

NOTE CSV files can be opened in Excel Lotus Access etc One may consider this option more of a ldquodumprdquo into a file

The Excel application must be active (it may be minimized on the application bar) with the target spreadsheet open in the application Otherwise an error will occur with the export operation that will affect both the On-Screen Takeofftrade file and the Excel spreadsheet

Section 8

53

Advanced Features

This section will

Some special features of working with condition objects in the takeoff area

Details of advanced options for conditions

Advanced features of the Project Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

54

Features to Use with Objects Roping Feature You can move copy or delete using this feature Using the Select tool (the pointer) you may select several objects at once by clicking and dragging an outline around the objects then releasing the mouse button Roping may select either objects completely within the outlined area (inclusive) or objects both within and touched by the outlined area (touching) Specify your roping preference under Tools gt Options

1 Click and hold the mouse button at a point on the screen near the objects to be selected and drag to surround the objects with an outline

2 Release the mouse button The objects will be selected

3 You may now

Move the group around on the page by clicking within the group dragging the mouse and releasing the button to place the objects

Delete the group of objects by clicking the Delete key or

Copy and paste by pressing Ctrl C to copy the group then Ctrl V to paste it The pasted copy of the grouped objects will appear slightly offset from the original objects

Section 8 Advanced Features

55

Applying a DropRun Count

Use the droprun feature when calculating quantities to take into account the drop or run of a linear condition such as electrical lines or plumbing pipes Drop or run lengths may be added separately to any linear condition on screen while a default droprun length may be indicated for a condition as a whole

1 Select the desired linear condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff Dock bar

2 Click the Change button in the toolbar to open the Change Condition dialog

3 Click the Advanced tab to access the advanced options and click inside the DropRun check box

4 Enter a default length to be applied to all of this condition Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches) You can leave the length blank and manually enter drop run on each segment drawn

5 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog

Edit DropRun Count

1 With the related linear condition in the Takeoff Dock bar highlighted or with the pointer tool selected

2 click on the desired linear object in the image takeoff area The Count button will become active

3 Click on the Count button (alternatively select Tools gt Count) The default droprun amount will show in the pop-up Count dialog (Default length will be zero if droprun has not been selected in this conditionrsquos properties)

4 Type in the desired length Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches)

5 Click the OK button The additional amount will be reflected in the corresponding quantity The new DropRun count will apply only to the object edited

Adding Text in Image View

On-Screen Takeoff allows you to place text comments around your quantity takeoffs that may be printed along with plan images and objects Text is automatically placed within the Annotation Layer (that includes text and hot links)

1 To place text on the image select the Text Tool and click at the point you want to place your text opening a text box

2 Type in your information clicking Enter for line breaks

3 When you are finished click the OK button to exit the text box

4 To reposition text simply click on the text (with the Text Tool active) to select it

5 Move the cursor over the text the cursor will now display as a four-way arrow

6 Click and drag the mouse to position the text as desired

Section 8 Advanced Features

56

1 To edit existing text use the Text Tool to double-click on the text to open the editing box

2 Enter additional text or use the Backspace key to delete text as necessary

Formatting Text Once created you may format the font size type style and color of your text

1 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Font or click on the Font button in the Takeoff Toolbar

2 Select the desired features (color options are disabled) and click the OK button

3 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Color or click on the Color button in the Takeoff Toolbar The Color dialog will open

4 Click on a color in the Basic Color palette or create a color and add to the Custom Colors palette (Be sure to click on the color in the Custom Colors palette to select it)

5 Click the OK button

Object Properties

Linear Objects

Linear objects may be set to connect at corners

A linear object may be set to trim automatically when crossing another linear object (Check the trim option under the advanced tab of the Condition dialog)

When you move a connected linear object objects automatically move and resize connected lines accordingly (quantities are then recalculated)

This feature requires that the connected linear object be moved using the center handles (does not apply when resizing the line from the ends)

Objects constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

Objects are measured from centerline to centerline

Section 8 Advanced Features

57

Area Objects When drawing an area use your escape key to undo the last line drawn You may reverse your

drawing of an area using the escape key

The area will not fill with color and pattern until the user double-clicks after the last line is set

Lines drawn to delineate an area object constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

After selecting an area to move or adjust position the mouse in the center to move the entire area position the mouse at the sides or corners to adjust the perimeter

Count Objects

All count objects are quantified by the physical number of objects per page and reported as EA for the UOM The quantity for the current Image View is (displayed in the Condition List) and the total quantity in your project is displayed in the Takeoff View and Worksheet View)

Square circle rectangle and triangle shaped count objects do not displace or subtract from other object quantities when placed on top of them However on the Advanced Tab for the count condition a connect property can be set (this is a check box) so that when a count object of this shape is put on top of a Linear type takeoff object it will move with the linear if said linear is moved

An opened-shaped count object must be placed within a linear object Opening shaped count objects may also be measured by linear foot or linear yard (EA SF and SY are also options) Opening shaped count items default to a width of 3rsquo 0rdquo at the time of creation This size can be changed The small medium and large size are not options on this type of condition anymore Check Backout on the Advanced tab for each Count object back out the footage (or yardage) of opening-shaped count objects in which they are placed

NOTE In order to see this Backout functionality (in quantity) for SY or SF deductions at least one of the

results for the Linear(s) this object will be placed on must be set to SY or SF and the count object must have a height quantity

Advanced Features of Conditions The Round Feature Under the Advanced tab of the linear and area Condition dialogues you may specify quantity rounding (in inches) For linear objects rounding applies to each linear object drawn For area objects rounding will apply to each segment of the area perimeter adjusting the perimeter and area calculations For example With a linear condition entering 12 in the Round field will round up each related linear object to the nearest 12 inches or one foot With this setting two walls of 1 4 would each round to 2 0 totaling 4 0

NOTE In the Takeoff Dock bar condition list and in the On-Screen Takeoff reports quantities will be displayed in whole numbers rounded up to the nearest foot However calculations are based on true quantities without rounding unless the Round Feature is engaged

Pitch Pitch may apply either to linear or area conditions It is measured in rise per linear foot Entering 12 indicates a 12 rise per 12 of linear distance (a pitch of 12 over 12) or an angle of 45deg

Section 8 Advanced Features

58

Advanced Features of Project Properties Selecting Multiple Pages

1 Select a single page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry

2 Drag the cursor down the column of numbers to select consecutive pages

3 Click on the blank button at the top of this column to select all pages in the Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

59

Changing Image Assigned to a Drawing 1 Select the page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry 2 Click the Change Image button The Change Image dialog box will appear

3 Navigate to the desired file and select by clicking on it

4 Click the Open button The electronic file assigned to the page will have been changed to reflect the new file choice

Changing Image File Path 1 Select pages as described above

2 Choose Change Folder

3 In the Change Folder dialog navigate to the appropriate folder

4 Click the OK button The file path will have been changed for the selected page entries

Delete a Page from Project Properties 1 Select the page you want to delete by clicking on its associated number (in the gray box at the

left of the entry)

2 Choose Delete Page

All Takeoff on the page will be deleted immediately and permanently

Section 8 Advanced Features

60

Advanced Features of Tool Options

Calculation Method On-Screen Takeoff has built-in calculation options to allow for faster work and faster saves until your takeoff is complete Calculation options are found by selecting Tools gt Options then clicking on the Calculation tab

Calculation method can be set to Automatic Automatic except Grids and Manual Manual will allow the program to operate more quickly while Automatic or Automatic except Grids allows the user to see quantity changes as takeoffs are made

In any mode you may press F9 to recalculate quantities for the On-Screen Takeoff current totals

Configuration Tab

When the ldquoPage Label (A01)rdquo radial button is chosen On-Screen Takeoff puts the numbered label on all the pages of in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar If the Page Descriptionrdquo radial button is chosen then a description of what takeoff is on that specific page will be shown in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar

This section of the configuration tab gives you options on how you want to export your information When the ldquoFolderSubfolder Namesrdquo radial button is chosen than on your file that you are exporting to will have all the conditions folders and subfolders In the Delimiter box you can choose the symbol that is needed to separate the information you are exporting Some files need semicolons () or colons () to make sure the information comes exported in is separated it the appropriate places

Section 8 Advanced Features

61

In previous versions of On-Screen Takeoff there are views that users need to have in order for them to display their information By either choosing ldquoOST 1xrdquo or ldquoOST 2xrdquo it will let the program know you want your columns of information exported in that specific format

When you have the Confirm Deletions radial button of ldquoYesrdquo chosen than every time you delete anything you will get a dialog box confirming your intentions of deletion

While working with your takeoff you have a choice to either view the legend of your conditions or hide it Choose whichever radial button that suits your needs

For those who prefer to use the Enter key to navigate in dialog boxes this option is just for that

Font Tab The Font tab is designed for you to make your own look and feel for the application At the bottom of this tab it will show you sample of the fonts and colors you have chosen

Renaming the Current Page You may change the name of the current page in the takeoff area of On-Screen Takeoff by selecting Edit gt Rename Page

This opens the Name Page dialog and you may simply type in a new name and click the Enter button The new name for the file will be reflected on the title bar for the page and in Project Properties

You also may access the Rename Page function by right-clicking in the takeoff area while in Image View and selecting the option from the pop-up menu that appears

Section 9

62

Saving and Exiting

This section will

Explain how to save projects

Show you how to safely exit the program

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

63

Saving Your Project

1 Select File gt Save 2 If your project has not previously been saved a Save dialog box will open to allow you to name

the file and choose the directory and folder in which to save your file 3 Once saved File gt Save will simply save the current version of the file

OR

4 Select File gt Save As then type in a new name for the file and save to the desired file path

The Auto-save Feature With the Auto-save feature On-Screen Takeoff automatically backs up your open project You may choose to have more than one level of backup files The first backup copy will have the extension b00 and successive files will be b01 b02 and so on If you have designated four levels of backup files after the fourth backup copy has been created (b03) the next file will be saved over the file with extension b00 Further backup saves will then rotate through the four backup files in the same way

1 Select Tools gt Options 2 In the Auto-save area (under the General tab) select the frequency of backup file creation (in

minutes) and the number of levels for the feature 3 You also may disengage the feature by clicking in the check box to clear it

The Auto-save feature automatically saves backup copies to the directory of the current project If you are working from a write-protected area such as a CD-ROM On-Screen Takeoff will place backup files in the On-Screen Takeoff folder

Exiting When you are finished using On-Screen Takeoff it is very easy to exit Exiting is very important because of security reasons If someone were to use your computer they could enter the application and view and manipulate information

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

64

On-Screen Takeoff closes the open project when you open another or create a new project or when you exit the program

1 Select File gt Exit

OR

2 You also may click at the upper right-hand corner of the application to exit

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

65

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer When you get your digitizer from GTCO you will need to connect it to your computer Follow the instructions outlined below to do this

Note For rollup digitizers the metal bar must be oriented to the top or right hand side

Connecting the Digitizer 1 Lay the digitizer out flat 2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer 3 Plug in the power adapter 4 Plug the interface (IO) cable into the digitizer 5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into an open serial port on computer

Note GTCO Technical support phone number is 410-381-6688 The electronic manual (on diskette) from GTCO contains more detailed installation and operation instructions for the GTCO digitizer model you have

Installing other Digitizer Drivers If you are using a GTCO Digitizer you will need to install the GTCO TabletWorks Drivers

If you are using a Digitizer not supported by GTCO Tablet Works 10 please contact the manufacturer of your digitizer for assistance with installation

Installing GTCO TabletWorks Drivers 1 Insert the On Center CD into the CD-ROM drive The CD Startup screen will open 2 Click on Install Software 3 Select Additional Software and Drivers 4 Select Digitizer Driver 5 Follow the instructions for installing TabletWorks 10

Adhering the Template The template is a small plastic sticker used to enable mouse function when using the digitizer with On-Screen Takeoff Place your template on your digitizer We suggest placing it in the bottom right corner of the digitizer about one inch inside the takeoff area

Note You may either peel off the back of the template and use the adhesive surface or you can tape the template down

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

66

Testing the Digitizer Drivers Before running OST you may test the digitizer by moving the stylus around on the digitizer pad it should move the mouse cursor (if mouse emulation is enabled)

If the digitizer does not move the mouse cursor on the screen

The superset codes may need to be reset Reset the superset codes by touching on the border of the digitizer with the stylus The digitizer should beep several times

The digitizer may not be communicating with the computer Be sure the COM port selected is correct Be sure the COM port selected is correct If you are not able to get the digitizer to move the mouse cursor you need to call GTCO technical support for help

Note The Mouse Emulation is not required for On-Screen Takeoff to work properly It is used only for the Template functionality if the digitizer is moving the cursor the wrong direction (up instead of sideways or vice-versa)

Click the L-shaped arrow symbol on the digitizer with the stylus

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

67

Appendix II Toolbar Items Main Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

68

Tool Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

69

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

70

Navigate Toolbar (Continued)

Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

71

Takeoff Toolbar (Continued)

Image Toolbar

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

72

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

This section will detail how to load plans from a F W Dodge CD-ROM into an On-Screen Takeoff project file ready for takeoffs

Dodge files may be added to the Project Properties dialog However loading the files in that way will load the files by number rather than name description If you want to load one page only from your Dodge CD You will have to rename the page to display the name rather than number of the file

To load plan files from a Dodge CD so that the files load sequentially by file number but are displayed by name rather than by number within your project follow the instructions below

Opening a Dodge project from a CD-ROM 1 Insert the CD into the drive 2 Choose File gt Custom 3 Choose Dodge Plans Project (plansdat) as the file type 4 Select the appropriate file type by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the Files of type

field 5 In the Look in field access your drive paths by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the

field then

Navigate to your CD-ROM drive Open the data folder and Open the Projects folder

6 Select the desired project and open its folder 7 Open the plansdat file 8 All the images will come in sequenced correctly for that job along with the full descriptions

(names) of each page If there is not a plans folder in the project folder then plans do not exist for that project on the CD Opening the plansdat file will yield an empty project

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

73

Appendix IV Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer The On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer is a limited version of On Center Softwarersquos commercial takeoff software If your status bar located at the very bottom of the main window says View Mode in the lower left-hand corner then you are using the Plan Viewer You can use the plan viewer to

View CD-based amp converted CAD drawings

View a previously created OST file and associated drawings

Download electronic plans online

Navigate through drawings

Quickly Takeoff linearsareas and counts

Zoom in to view the plan better

Print drawings directly from the viewer

Viewing an On-Screen Takeoff Project File

1 To open an OST file that was previously created with of On-Screen Takeoff 2 Select File gt Open 3 An Open dialog will appear if you do not see the OST file you are looking for select the

Look In drop down arrow 4 A drop down menu will appear listing the various folders drives and mapped drives located

on your computer select the correct drive or folder location and continue to browse to the location of your OST file

5 When you see your OST file double-click it to open it 6 Any takeoff and drawings should appear on the Image tab view

If you do not see the drawings but do see the colored takeoff layer the drawings may

not be located in the same place they were originally saved at Go to File gt Project Properties and check the Image File path for each listed page If the image file path is pointing to a CD drive make sure the CD is inside the CR-ROM

Downloading Electronic Plans If your Online Plan Service provides a special file format (OSX) required to use this feature of our plan viewer you can immediately downloaded all electronic plans of a project directly from our viewer

Most Plan Room web sites will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff when a request to download plans is made Your particular Plan Room may differ in operation so please contact the provider directly with questions on using the site

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

74

When you request to download or open a project file from a Plan Room you will usually have the open to open or save an OSX file Choosing open will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff Alternately you may choose to save the file to a local hard drive After you have saved the file either double-click it to launch On-Screen Takeoff or open the OSX file using On-Screen Takeoff by clicking File then Open and locating the file on your hard drive You will need to change the file type to OSX

After the OSX file is opened you will see an additional tab appear in the Conditions List window called Pages

The Pages tab shows the hierarchy of your project Gray file icons represent pages that have not been downloaded and blue icons represents pages that have been downloaded

To download a page simply double-click the page icon

If you wish to select a group of pages to download you can use the Ctrl or Shift key to multiple select them then click the Download button

If you wish to download all pages at once click the Download All button

Downloaded pages will now appear in the Project Properties dialog in the same order in which they appear in the Pages tab

Creating Quick Takeoffs With On-Screen Takeoff you can create quick takeoffs to measure quantities even if you dont have the full version of our program However using the Quick Takeoff functionality shows you just a fraction of what the full version can do

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar is located at the top of the image view It has three buttons designated for three types of takeoffs Linear Area and Count The Quantity drop down list will show secondary quantities for Linears and Areas The Units drop down allows you to select how you want your quantities displayed Feet Inches Yards Millimeters and Meters

NOTE Every time change the type of takeoff you are performing (switching from Area to Linear for example) the previous quantities and takeoff objects will disappear They will also disappear when you changes pages

NOTE You can use the Dimension Tool to basically measure the distance between two points or linears The distance will display on the status bar at the bottom of the application

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

75

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions General

Where is On-Screen Takeoff installed on my computer

Typically it is installed in CProgram FilesOn-Screen Takeoff

In Explorer how do I recognize On-Screen Takeoff file types

On-Screen Takeoff data is stored in a single file per job lsquojob name OSTrsquo On-Screen Takeoff templates are stored as lsquotemplate nameTPOrsquo

Can only one project at a time be open

Yes For that reason opening another project automatically closes the project on screen You will be asked to save any changes

Is only one scale allowed per page What about on drawings that have multiple detail sections on a page and each of those drawings have different scales

Yes For pages with drawings of different scales copy the drawing to another project page and set the appropriate scale

I cannot perform backout on an area that is along a linear

As a workaround use the On-Screen Takeoff layers feature to help you with this issue Electronic Images

How do I start a project from drawings that have been scanned and written to a CD-ROM

Open a new project Select File gt Project Properties and select Auto Add Navigate to your CD and the appropriate folder and select any image file in that location Click Open All files in the location will load into your project Recommended that images are copied from CD to hard drive for performance

If I get a disk of drawings in AutoCAD format (R13 or R14) can I read them in On-Screen Takeoff

Yes On-Screen Takeoff now reads DWG DXF and many other format that are saved with AutoCAD

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

76

When I click on the all pages button what is supposed to happen Currently nothing seems to change when I click on that button

The All Pages button is used to apply the Darken and Enhance Plans feature to all pages in the project (as opposed to only the current page on screen)

Is there a way to deduct a large skylight from an area condition

Yes with the related area condition selected in the Takeoff Dock bar unselect the Backout button on the Takeoff Toolbar then draw the Backout area The area quantity will be deducted from the related condition object and the linear measurement of the Backout perimeter will be added

Digitizer Issues

How do I connect a Digitizer to the computer

See Appendix I Connecting a Digitizer

The Place Template menu choice is disabled

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or the digitizer or the digitzer drivers are not installed

It wonrsquot let me select the Set Takeoff Area menu choice

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or no job is open a digitizer is not installed or the drivers are not installed

The digitizer stylus is not moving the cursor or crosshairs

Click S-0-1 superset on the digitizer

How do I convert my old GTCO Digitizer to work with On- Screen Takeofftrade

Call GTCO and they may be able to reconfigure your digitizer to be compatible with On-Screen Takeoff

Printing Issues Which Printers work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible printers include On-Screen Takeoff Hewlett Packard Epson and Canon printers If you are having printer difficulties please contact support and specify the type of printer along with other pertinent information Contact support at wwwoncentercomsupport or email supportoncentercom

Which Plotters work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible Plotters include Hewlett Packard DesignJet plotters and the EnCAD Cadjet II If you are having plotter difficulties please contact support and specify the type of plotter concerned

ViewingDisplay I can no longer see my condition list How do I get it back

The toolbars and Dock bars can be turned on and off through the View gt Toolbars menu options

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

77

This is also accessible by right-clicking in the toolbar area and selecting (or deselecting) a toolbar listed

I cannot view my folders in the condition list

Right-click in the Takeoff Dock barcondition list area and select Show Tree to display your folders

My Status Bar reads Viewer Mode and I am unable to draw conditions

On-Screen Takeoff needs to be Authorized Or you need to purchase an upgrade Click the Perform Advanced Takeoff button on the main toolbar

I hid a Dock bar and when I selected to view it again it appeared alongside the other Dock

bar instead of stacked on top of it How do I fix it

Pick up the Dock bar by clicking on the bar at the top and continuing to hold down the mouse button drag the Dock bar over the other one It will resize and appear stacked with the other

When I open image files from a CD the images are all upside down How do I get them right

side up

To flip pages from top to bottom follow the steps below 1 Click the All Pages button on the Image Toolbar (All Pages is engaged when the button

is not clicked) 2 Click the Flip Horizontal button on the Image Toolbar 3 Click the All Pages button again to disengage

Templates How do I create a Template

Follow the steps below 1 Create a typical project 2 Choose File gt Save As 3 Choose On-Screen Takeoff Template Files as the file type to save 4 Name the file This will save all of the condition setups as well as the layers for the

project

How do I create a new project from a template

Follow the steps below 1 Choose File gt New 2 Select a template from those listed in the New dialog This will open a new project with

conditions and layers saved from a previous project but no pages or takeoff

78

INDEX

Area Conditions 32

Area Objects 57

Auto Scrolling 20

Auto-save 63

Backout Mode 41

Calculation Method 60

Conditions 29

Configuration 60

Contents Tab 6

Continuous Mode 38

Count Conditions 33

Count Objects 57

Digitizer 10 65 76

Docking Toolbars 13

Dodge CD 72

Drawing 27 37

DropRun Count 55

Environment 18

Exiting 63

Exporting 49

Features 16

Font 61

Frequently Asked Questions 75

Grid 40

Help File 5

Hiding Toolbars 13

Hot Links 21

Image 19 59

Image files 9

Image Toolbar 12 71

Images 75

Index Tab 6

Layers 43

Linear Conditions 31

Linear Objects 56

Main Toolbar 12 67

Menus 14

Moving Toolbars 13

Navigate Toolbar 12 69

Navigating 20

On-Screen Takeofftrade 2

Page 59 61

Pages 20 25 28

Plan Viewer 73

Plans 26

Printing 47 76

Project Properties 25

Projects 22

Quick Start Video 18

Resizing Toolbars 13

Roping 54

Saving 63

Scale 28

Search Tab 7

Selecting Objects 42

Setup 8

Start On-Screen Takeofftrade 17

System Requirements 9

Takeoff 19 27

Takeoff Toolbar 70 71

Takeoff Toolbar 12

Template Files 23

TIF (Group4) 9

Tool Toolbar 12 68

Toolbar 67

Toolbars 12

View Toolbar 12 69

Viewing Toolbars 12

Worksheet 20

Zone Conditions 33

Zoom Toolbar 12 69

  • On-Screen Takeoff Lite
  • Table of Contents
  • Section 1 - Introduction
  • Section 2 - Setup
  • Section 3 - Toolbars and Menus
  • Section 4 - Features
  • Section 5 - Projects
  • Section 6 - Conditions and Takeoff
  • Section 7 - Printing and Exporting
  • Section 8 - Advanced Features
  • Section 9 - Saving and Exiting
  • Appendix I - Installing Your Digitizer
  • Appendix II - Toolbar Items
  • Appendix III - Loading Plans from a Dodge CD
  • Appendix IV - Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer
  • Appendix V - Frequently Asked Questions
  • Index

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

49

2 Click and drag to adjust the width of the column Holding the mouse button you may

slide the title bar under the title bar to its left to hide the column completely

3 Select File gt Print or press Ctrl + P to access the Print dialog

4 Indicate desired printer and choose the number of copies

5 Click to print and close the dialog

When printing the condition list we suggest printing in landscape

To reset to the default column widths double-click on the right border of a column heading will reset the column to its right (or previously to its right before being hidden)

Print Preview 1 Select File gt Print Preview

2 Use and to vary your view 3 If viewing an image choose current full or scale view to see how it displays

4 For printed outputs that cover more than one page use and to view adjacent pages or click on the down arrow next to Page field and select the page you want displayed

Exporting Using the CopyPaste Feature You may copy all the data or sections from the worksheet and the takeoff list view in On-Screen Takeoff and paste it into another application When pasting into Excel the cell layout will be maintained

1 Highlight the areas you wish to paste Click and hold the left mouse button down as you drag the cursor over the area to be selected then releasing the mouse button

OR

2 Select the entire takeoff list quickly click on the left On-Screen Takeoff column header and hold and drag the cursor across the remaining column headings

The number of pages for the view selected will display in the lower left-hand corner The zoom percentage that applies to the view will be displayed in the lower right-hand corner next to page size of the drawing

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

50

3 In the worksheet view you may highlight rows by clicking on the numbered buttons to the left of each row clicking and dragging across column headings or clicking and dragging over individual cells in the worksheet

Click anywhere in the appropriate view to deselect the area

4 Once your selection is highlighted you may select Edit gt Copy or Ctrl C from the keyboard 5 On your monitor switch to the application into which you want to paste your selection 6 Select Edit gt Paste in the new application or simply press Ctrl + V to paste

The colored keys for conditions cannot be pasted

Using the Export Feature You may export condition quantities to specified cell location within an Excel worksheet file Cell target locations are assigned in the Results tab of the condition dialogs on the Export line relating to each quantity measurement type

On-Screen Takeoff will export takeoff quantity results for up to three different quantity types that you specify For instance you may want to know the number of square feet in a ceiling area as well as the number of linear feet in its perimeter

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

51

1 Bring up the Condition dialog by double-clicking on a condition in the takeoff dock bar or by

selecting the condition and clicking

2 Click on the Results tab to access its fields The default quantities for the condition type will display

3 For each results field click on the arrow to access the pull-down menu and select the appropriate quantity (for example SF LF EA etchellip)

4 Have your Excel spreadsheet opened and saved in a file

5 Specify the Excel spreadsheet cell locations where you want the results to go

6 For a cell in the first sheet of your spreadsheet type in the cell address (eg a1) Case is not important

7 For a cell on a successive sheet of your spreadsheet type in sheet the number followed by a comma and the cell address without any spaces (eg sheet2a1) Case is not important

8 Click

9 Select File gt Export gt Condition Qty to Excel

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

52

10 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

11 Click to export On-Screen Takeoff results to specified cell locations in the Excel file When you return to the Excel application you will see the values have been added to the specified cell locations in your spreadsheet

12 Save your Excel file

Exporting Worksheet to Excel

1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 From On-Screen Takeoff Select File gt Export gt Worksheet to Excel

4 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

5 Click When you return to the Excel application you will see the values from the Worksheet Tab have been added to your spreadsheet

6 Save your Excel file

Exporting Takeoff to CVS 1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 Click the Takeoff Tab in the project you want to export the information

4 Select File gt Export gt Takeoff to CSV

5 Browse to the location of the CSV spreadsheet file click file to select it

6 Click the Save

NOTE CSV files can be opened in Excel Lotus Access etc One may consider this option more of a ldquodumprdquo into a file

The Excel application must be active (it may be minimized on the application bar) with the target spreadsheet open in the application Otherwise an error will occur with the export operation that will affect both the On-Screen Takeofftrade file and the Excel spreadsheet

Section 8

53

Advanced Features

This section will

Some special features of working with condition objects in the takeoff area

Details of advanced options for conditions

Advanced features of the Project Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

54

Features to Use with Objects Roping Feature You can move copy or delete using this feature Using the Select tool (the pointer) you may select several objects at once by clicking and dragging an outline around the objects then releasing the mouse button Roping may select either objects completely within the outlined area (inclusive) or objects both within and touched by the outlined area (touching) Specify your roping preference under Tools gt Options

1 Click and hold the mouse button at a point on the screen near the objects to be selected and drag to surround the objects with an outline

2 Release the mouse button The objects will be selected

3 You may now

Move the group around on the page by clicking within the group dragging the mouse and releasing the button to place the objects

Delete the group of objects by clicking the Delete key or

Copy and paste by pressing Ctrl C to copy the group then Ctrl V to paste it The pasted copy of the grouped objects will appear slightly offset from the original objects

Section 8 Advanced Features

55

Applying a DropRun Count

Use the droprun feature when calculating quantities to take into account the drop or run of a linear condition such as electrical lines or plumbing pipes Drop or run lengths may be added separately to any linear condition on screen while a default droprun length may be indicated for a condition as a whole

1 Select the desired linear condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff Dock bar

2 Click the Change button in the toolbar to open the Change Condition dialog

3 Click the Advanced tab to access the advanced options and click inside the DropRun check box

4 Enter a default length to be applied to all of this condition Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches) You can leave the length blank and manually enter drop run on each segment drawn

5 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog

Edit DropRun Count

1 With the related linear condition in the Takeoff Dock bar highlighted or with the pointer tool selected

2 click on the desired linear object in the image takeoff area The Count button will become active

3 Click on the Count button (alternatively select Tools gt Count) The default droprun amount will show in the pop-up Count dialog (Default length will be zero if droprun has not been selected in this conditionrsquos properties)

4 Type in the desired length Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches)

5 Click the OK button The additional amount will be reflected in the corresponding quantity The new DropRun count will apply only to the object edited

Adding Text in Image View

On-Screen Takeoff allows you to place text comments around your quantity takeoffs that may be printed along with plan images and objects Text is automatically placed within the Annotation Layer (that includes text and hot links)

1 To place text on the image select the Text Tool and click at the point you want to place your text opening a text box

2 Type in your information clicking Enter for line breaks

3 When you are finished click the OK button to exit the text box

4 To reposition text simply click on the text (with the Text Tool active) to select it

5 Move the cursor over the text the cursor will now display as a four-way arrow

6 Click and drag the mouse to position the text as desired

Section 8 Advanced Features

56

1 To edit existing text use the Text Tool to double-click on the text to open the editing box

2 Enter additional text or use the Backspace key to delete text as necessary

Formatting Text Once created you may format the font size type style and color of your text

1 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Font or click on the Font button in the Takeoff Toolbar

2 Select the desired features (color options are disabled) and click the OK button

3 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Color or click on the Color button in the Takeoff Toolbar The Color dialog will open

4 Click on a color in the Basic Color palette or create a color and add to the Custom Colors palette (Be sure to click on the color in the Custom Colors palette to select it)

5 Click the OK button

Object Properties

Linear Objects

Linear objects may be set to connect at corners

A linear object may be set to trim automatically when crossing another linear object (Check the trim option under the advanced tab of the Condition dialog)

When you move a connected linear object objects automatically move and resize connected lines accordingly (quantities are then recalculated)

This feature requires that the connected linear object be moved using the center handles (does not apply when resizing the line from the ends)

Objects constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

Objects are measured from centerline to centerline

Section 8 Advanced Features

57

Area Objects When drawing an area use your escape key to undo the last line drawn You may reverse your

drawing of an area using the escape key

The area will not fill with color and pattern until the user double-clicks after the last line is set

Lines drawn to delineate an area object constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

After selecting an area to move or adjust position the mouse in the center to move the entire area position the mouse at the sides or corners to adjust the perimeter

Count Objects

All count objects are quantified by the physical number of objects per page and reported as EA for the UOM The quantity for the current Image View is (displayed in the Condition List) and the total quantity in your project is displayed in the Takeoff View and Worksheet View)

Square circle rectangle and triangle shaped count objects do not displace or subtract from other object quantities when placed on top of them However on the Advanced Tab for the count condition a connect property can be set (this is a check box) so that when a count object of this shape is put on top of a Linear type takeoff object it will move with the linear if said linear is moved

An opened-shaped count object must be placed within a linear object Opening shaped count objects may also be measured by linear foot or linear yard (EA SF and SY are also options) Opening shaped count items default to a width of 3rsquo 0rdquo at the time of creation This size can be changed The small medium and large size are not options on this type of condition anymore Check Backout on the Advanced tab for each Count object back out the footage (or yardage) of opening-shaped count objects in which they are placed

NOTE In order to see this Backout functionality (in quantity) for SY or SF deductions at least one of the

results for the Linear(s) this object will be placed on must be set to SY or SF and the count object must have a height quantity

Advanced Features of Conditions The Round Feature Under the Advanced tab of the linear and area Condition dialogues you may specify quantity rounding (in inches) For linear objects rounding applies to each linear object drawn For area objects rounding will apply to each segment of the area perimeter adjusting the perimeter and area calculations For example With a linear condition entering 12 in the Round field will round up each related linear object to the nearest 12 inches or one foot With this setting two walls of 1 4 would each round to 2 0 totaling 4 0

NOTE In the Takeoff Dock bar condition list and in the On-Screen Takeoff reports quantities will be displayed in whole numbers rounded up to the nearest foot However calculations are based on true quantities without rounding unless the Round Feature is engaged

Pitch Pitch may apply either to linear or area conditions It is measured in rise per linear foot Entering 12 indicates a 12 rise per 12 of linear distance (a pitch of 12 over 12) or an angle of 45deg

Section 8 Advanced Features

58

Advanced Features of Project Properties Selecting Multiple Pages

1 Select a single page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry

2 Drag the cursor down the column of numbers to select consecutive pages

3 Click on the blank button at the top of this column to select all pages in the Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

59

Changing Image Assigned to a Drawing 1 Select the page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry 2 Click the Change Image button The Change Image dialog box will appear

3 Navigate to the desired file and select by clicking on it

4 Click the Open button The electronic file assigned to the page will have been changed to reflect the new file choice

Changing Image File Path 1 Select pages as described above

2 Choose Change Folder

3 In the Change Folder dialog navigate to the appropriate folder

4 Click the OK button The file path will have been changed for the selected page entries

Delete a Page from Project Properties 1 Select the page you want to delete by clicking on its associated number (in the gray box at the

left of the entry)

2 Choose Delete Page

All Takeoff on the page will be deleted immediately and permanently

Section 8 Advanced Features

60

Advanced Features of Tool Options

Calculation Method On-Screen Takeoff has built-in calculation options to allow for faster work and faster saves until your takeoff is complete Calculation options are found by selecting Tools gt Options then clicking on the Calculation tab

Calculation method can be set to Automatic Automatic except Grids and Manual Manual will allow the program to operate more quickly while Automatic or Automatic except Grids allows the user to see quantity changes as takeoffs are made

In any mode you may press F9 to recalculate quantities for the On-Screen Takeoff current totals

Configuration Tab

When the ldquoPage Label (A01)rdquo radial button is chosen On-Screen Takeoff puts the numbered label on all the pages of in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar If the Page Descriptionrdquo radial button is chosen then a description of what takeoff is on that specific page will be shown in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar

This section of the configuration tab gives you options on how you want to export your information When the ldquoFolderSubfolder Namesrdquo radial button is chosen than on your file that you are exporting to will have all the conditions folders and subfolders In the Delimiter box you can choose the symbol that is needed to separate the information you are exporting Some files need semicolons () or colons () to make sure the information comes exported in is separated it the appropriate places

Section 8 Advanced Features

61

In previous versions of On-Screen Takeoff there are views that users need to have in order for them to display their information By either choosing ldquoOST 1xrdquo or ldquoOST 2xrdquo it will let the program know you want your columns of information exported in that specific format

When you have the Confirm Deletions radial button of ldquoYesrdquo chosen than every time you delete anything you will get a dialog box confirming your intentions of deletion

While working with your takeoff you have a choice to either view the legend of your conditions or hide it Choose whichever radial button that suits your needs

For those who prefer to use the Enter key to navigate in dialog boxes this option is just for that

Font Tab The Font tab is designed for you to make your own look and feel for the application At the bottom of this tab it will show you sample of the fonts and colors you have chosen

Renaming the Current Page You may change the name of the current page in the takeoff area of On-Screen Takeoff by selecting Edit gt Rename Page

This opens the Name Page dialog and you may simply type in a new name and click the Enter button The new name for the file will be reflected on the title bar for the page and in Project Properties

You also may access the Rename Page function by right-clicking in the takeoff area while in Image View and selecting the option from the pop-up menu that appears

Section 9

62

Saving and Exiting

This section will

Explain how to save projects

Show you how to safely exit the program

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

63

Saving Your Project

1 Select File gt Save 2 If your project has not previously been saved a Save dialog box will open to allow you to name

the file and choose the directory and folder in which to save your file 3 Once saved File gt Save will simply save the current version of the file

OR

4 Select File gt Save As then type in a new name for the file and save to the desired file path

The Auto-save Feature With the Auto-save feature On-Screen Takeoff automatically backs up your open project You may choose to have more than one level of backup files The first backup copy will have the extension b00 and successive files will be b01 b02 and so on If you have designated four levels of backup files after the fourth backup copy has been created (b03) the next file will be saved over the file with extension b00 Further backup saves will then rotate through the four backup files in the same way

1 Select Tools gt Options 2 In the Auto-save area (under the General tab) select the frequency of backup file creation (in

minutes) and the number of levels for the feature 3 You also may disengage the feature by clicking in the check box to clear it

The Auto-save feature automatically saves backup copies to the directory of the current project If you are working from a write-protected area such as a CD-ROM On-Screen Takeoff will place backup files in the On-Screen Takeoff folder

Exiting When you are finished using On-Screen Takeoff it is very easy to exit Exiting is very important because of security reasons If someone were to use your computer they could enter the application and view and manipulate information

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

64

On-Screen Takeoff closes the open project when you open another or create a new project or when you exit the program

1 Select File gt Exit

OR

2 You also may click at the upper right-hand corner of the application to exit

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

65

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer When you get your digitizer from GTCO you will need to connect it to your computer Follow the instructions outlined below to do this

Note For rollup digitizers the metal bar must be oriented to the top or right hand side

Connecting the Digitizer 1 Lay the digitizer out flat 2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer 3 Plug in the power adapter 4 Plug the interface (IO) cable into the digitizer 5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into an open serial port on computer

Note GTCO Technical support phone number is 410-381-6688 The electronic manual (on diskette) from GTCO contains more detailed installation and operation instructions for the GTCO digitizer model you have

Installing other Digitizer Drivers If you are using a GTCO Digitizer you will need to install the GTCO TabletWorks Drivers

If you are using a Digitizer not supported by GTCO Tablet Works 10 please contact the manufacturer of your digitizer for assistance with installation

Installing GTCO TabletWorks Drivers 1 Insert the On Center CD into the CD-ROM drive The CD Startup screen will open 2 Click on Install Software 3 Select Additional Software and Drivers 4 Select Digitizer Driver 5 Follow the instructions for installing TabletWorks 10

Adhering the Template The template is a small plastic sticker used to enable mouse function when using the digitizer with On-Screen Takeoff Place your template on your digitizer We suggest placing it in the bottom right corner of the digitizer about one inch inside the takeoff area

Note You may either peel off the back of the template and use the adhesive surface or you can tape the template down

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

66

Testing the Digitizer Drivers Before running OST you may test the digitizer by moving the stylus around on the digitizer pad it should move the mouse cursor (if mouse emulation is enabled)

If the digitizer does not move the mouse cursor on the screen

The superset codes may need to be reset Reset the superset codes by touching on the border of the digitizer with the stylus The digitizer should beep several times

The digitizer may not be communicating with the computer Be sure the COM port selected is correct Be sure the COM port selected is correct If you are not able to get the digitizer to move the mouse cursor you need to call GTCO technical support for help

Note The Mouse Emulation is not required for On-Screen Takeoff to work properly It is used only for the Template functionality if the digitizer is moving the cursor the wrong direction (up instead of sideways or vice-versa)

Click the L-shaped arrow symbol on the digitizer with the stylus

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

67

Appendix II Toolbar Items Main Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

68

Tool Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

69

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

70

Navigate Toolbar (Continued)

Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

71

Takeoff Toolbar (Continued)

Image Toolbar

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

72

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

This section will detail how to load plans from a F W Dodge CD-ROM into an On-Screen Takeoff project file ready for takeoffs

Dodge files may be added to the Project Properties dialog However loading the files in that way will load the files by number rather than name description If you want to load one page only from your Dodge CD You will have to rename the page to display the name rather than number of the file

To load plan files from a Dodge CD so that the files load sequentially by file number but are displayed by name rather than by number within your project follow the instructions below

Opening a Dodge project from a CD-ROM 1 Insert the CD into the drive 2 Choose File gt Custom 3 Choose Dodge Plans Project (plansdat) as the file type 4 Select the appropriate file type by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the Files of type

field 5 In the Look in field access your drive paths by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the

field then

Navigate to your CD-ROM drive Open the data folder and Open the Projects folder

6 Select the desired project and open its folder 7 Open the plansdat file 8 All the images will come in sequenced correctly for that job along with the full descriptions

(names) of each page If there is not a plans folder in the project folder then plans do not exist for that project on the CD Opening the plansdat file will yield an empty project

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

73

Appendix IV Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer The On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer is a limited version of On Center Softwarersquos commercial takeoff software If your status bar located at the very bottom of the main window says View Mode in the lower left-hand corner then you are using the Plan Viewer You can use the plan viewer to

View CD-based amp converted CAD drawings

View a previously created OST file and associated drawings

Download electronic plans online

Navigate through drawings

Quickly Takeoff linearsareas and counts

Zoom in to view the plan better

Print drawings directly from the viewer

Viewing an On-Screen Takeoff Project File

1 To open an OST file that was previously created with of On-Screen Takeoff 2 Select File gt Open 3 An Open dialog will appear if you do not see the OST file you are looking for select the

Look In drop down arrow 4 A drop down menu will appear listing the various folders drives and mapped drives located

on your computer select the correct drive or folder location and continue to browse to the location of your OST file

5 When you see your OST file double-click it to open it 6 Any takeoff and drawings should appear on the Image tab view

If you do not see the drawings but do see the colored takeoff layer the drawings may

not be located in the same place they were originally saved at Go to File gt Project Properties and check the Image File path for each listed page If the image file path is pointing to a CD drive make sure the CD is inside the CR-ROM

Downloading Electronic Plans If your Online Plan Service provides a special file format (OSX) required to use this feature of our plan viewer you can immediately downloaded all electronic plans of a project directly from our viewer

Most Plan Room web sites will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff when a request to download plans is made Your particular Plan Room may differ in operation so please contact the provider directly with questions on using the site

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

74

When you request to download or open a project file from a Plan Room you will usually have the open to open or save an OSX file Choosing open will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff Alternately you may choose to save the file to a local hard drive After you have saved the file either double-click it to launch On-Screen Takeoff or open the OSX file using On-Screen Takeoff by clicking File then Open and locating the file on your hard drive You will need to change the file type to OSX

After the OSX file is opened you will see an additional tab appear in the Conditions List window called Pages

The Pages tab shows the hierarchy of your project Gray file icons represent pages that have not been downloaded and blue icons represents pages that have been downloaded

To download a page simply double-click the page icon

If you wish to select a group of pages to download you can use the Ctrl or Shift key to multiple select them then click the Download button

If you wish to download all pages at once click the Download All button

Downloaded pages will now appear in the Project Properties dialog in the same order in which they appear in the Pages tab

Creating Quick Takeoffs With On-Screen Takeoff you can create quick takeoffs to measure quantities even if you dont have the full version of our program However using the Quick Takeoff functionality shows you just a fraction of what the full version can do

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar is located at the top of the image view It has three buttons designated for three types of takeoffs Linear Area and Count The Quantity drop down list will show secondary quantities for Linears and Areas The Units drop down allows you to select how you want your quantities displayed Feet Inches Yards Millimeters and Meters

NOTE Every time change the type of takeoff you are performing (switching from Area to Linear for example) the previous quantities and takeoff objects will disappear They will also disappear when you changes pages

NOTE You can use the Dimension Tool to basically measure the distance between two points or linears The distance will display on the status bar at the bottom of the application

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

75

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions General

Where is On-Screen Takeoff installed on my computer

Typically it is installed in CProgram FilesOn-Screen Takeoff

In Explorer how do I recognize On-Screen Takeoff file types

On-Screen Takeoff data is stored in a single file per job lsquojob name OSTrsquo On-Screen Takeoff templates are stored as lsquotemplate nameTPOrsquo

Can only one project at a time be open

Yes For that reason opening another project automatically closes the project on screen You will be asked to save any changes

Is only one scale allowed per page What about on drawings that have multiple detail sections on a page and each of those drawings have different scales

Yes For pages with drawings of different scales copy the drawing to another project page and set the appropriate scale

I cannot perform backout on an area that is along a linear

As a workaround use the On-Screen Takeoff layers feature to help you with this issue Electronic Images

How do I start a project from drawings that have been scanned and written to a CD-ROM

Open a new project Select File gt Project Properties and select Auto Add Navigate to your CD and the appropriate folder and select any image file in that location Click Open All files in the location will load into your project Recommended that images are copied from CD to hard drive for performance

If I get a disk of drawings in AutoCAD format (R13 or R14) can I read them in On-Screen Takeoff

Yes On-Screen Takeoff now reads DWG DXF and many other format that are saved with AutoCAD

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

76

When I click on the all pages button what is supposed to happen Currently nothing seems to change when I click on that button

The All Pages button is used to apply the Darken and Enhance Plans feature to all pages in the project (as opposed to only the current page on screen)

Is there a way to deduct a large skylight from an area condition

Yes with the related area condition selected in the Takeoff Dock bar unselect the Backout button on the Takeoff Toolbar then draw the Backout area The area quantity will be deducted from the related condition object and the linear measurement of the Backout perimeter will be added

Digitizer Issues

How do I connect a Digitizer to the computer

See Appendix I Connecting a Digitizer

The Place Template menu choice is disabled

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or the digitizer or the digitzer drivers are not installed

It wonrsquot let me select the Set Takeoff Area menu choice

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or no job is open a digitizer is not installed or the drivers are not installed

The digitizer stylus is not moving the cursor or crosshairs

Click S-0-1 superset on the digitizer

How do I convert my old GTCO Digitizer to work with On- Screen Takeofftrade

Call GTCO and they may be able to reconfigure your digitizer to be compatible with On-Screen Takeoff

Printing Issues Which Printers work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible printers include On-Screen Takeoff Hewlett Packard Epson and Canon printers If you are having printer difficulties please contact support and specify the type of printer along with other pertinent information Contact support at wwwoncentercomsupport or email supportoncentercom

Which Plotters work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible Plotters include Hewlett Packard DesignJet plotters and the EnCAD Cadjet II If you are having plotter difficulties please contact support and specify the type of plotter concerned

ViewingDisplay I can no longer see my condition list How do I get it back

The toolbars and Dock bars can be turned on and off through the View gt Toolbars menu options

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

77

This is also accessible by right-clicking in the toolbar area and selecting (or deselecting) a toolbar listed

I cannot view my folders in the condition list

Right-click in the Takeoff Dock barcondition list area and select Show Tree to display your folders

My Status Bar reads Viewer Mode and I am unable to draw conditions

On-Screen Takeoff needs to be Authorized Or you need to purchase an upgrade Click the Perform Advanced Takeoff button on the main toolbar

I hid a Dock bar and when I selected to view it again it appeared alongside the other Dock

bar instead of stacked on top of it How do I fix it

Pick up the Dock bar by clicking on the bar at the top and continuing to hold down the mouse button drag the Dock bar over the other one It will resize and appear stacked with the other

When I open image files from a CD the images are all upside down How do I get them right

side up

To flip pages from top to bottom follow the steps below 1 Click the All Pages button on the Image Toolbar (All Pages is engaged when the button

is not clicked) 2 Click the Flip Horizontal button on the Image Toolbar 3 Click the All Pages button again to disengage

Templates How do I create a Template

Follow the steps below 1 Create a typical project 2 Choose File gt Save As 3 Choose On-Screen Takeoff Template Files as the file type to save 4 Name the file This will save all of the condition setups as well as the layers for the

project

How do I create a new project from a template

Follow the steps below 1 Choose File gt New 2 Select a template from those listed in the New dialog This will open a new project with

conditions and layers saved from a previous project but no pages or takeoff

78

INDEX

Area Conditions 32

Area Objects 57

Auto Scrolling 20

Auto-save 63

Backout Mode 41

Calculation Method 60

Conditions 29

Configuration 60

Contents Tab 6

Continuous Mode 38

Count Conditions 33

Count Objects 57

Digitizer 10 65 76

Docking Toolbars 13

Dodge CD 72

Drawing 27 37

DropRun Count 55

Environment 18

Exiting 63

Exporting 49

Features 16

Font 61

Frequently Asked Questions 75

Grid 40

Help File 5

Hiding Toolbars 13

Hot Links 21

Image 19 59

Image files 9

Image Toolbar 12 71

Images 75

Index Tab 6

Layers 43

Linear Conditions 31

Linear Objects 56

Main Toolbar 12 67

Menus 14

Moving Toolbars 13

Navigate Toolbar 12 69

Navigating 20

On-Screen Takeofftrade 2

Page 59 61

Pages 20 25 28

Plan Viewer 73

Plans 26

Printing 47 76

Project Properties 25

Projects 22

Quick Start Video 18

Resizing Toolbars 13

Roping 54

Saving 63

Scale 28

Search Tab 7

Selecting Objects 42

Setup 8

Start On-Screen Takeofftrade 17

System Requirements 9

Takeoff 19 27

Takeoff Toolbar 70 71

Takeoff Toolbar 12

Template Files 23

TIF (Group4) 9

Tool Toolbar 12 68

Toolbar 67

Toolbars 12

View Toolbar 12 69

Viewing Toolbars 12

Worksheet 20

Zone Conditions 33

Zoom Toolbar 12 69

  • On-Screen Takeoff Lite
  • Table of Contents
  • Section 1 - Introduction
  • Section 2 - Setup
  • Section 3 - Toolbars and Menus
  • Section 4 - Features
  • Section 5 - Projects
  • Section 6 - Conditions and Takeoff
  • Section 7 - Printing and Exporting
  • Section 8 - Advanced Features
  • Section 9 - Saving and Exiting
  • Appendix I - Installing Your Digitizer
  • Appendix II - Toolbar Items
  • Appendix III - Loading Plans from a Dodge CD
  • Appendix IV - Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer
  • Appendix V - Frequently Asked Questions
  • Index

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

50

3 In the worksheet view you may highlight rows by clicking on the numbered buttons to the left of each row clicking and dragging across column headings or clicking and dragging over individual cells in the worksheet

Click anywhere in the appropriate view to deselect the area

4 Once your selection is highlighted you may select Edit gt Copy or Ctrl C from the keyboard 5 On your monitor switch to the application into which you want to paste your selection 6 Select Edit gt Paste in the new application or simply press Ctrl + V to paste

The colored keys for conditions cannot be pasted

Using the Export Feature You may export condition quantities to specified cell location within an Excel worksheet file Cell target locations are assigned in the Results tab of the condition dialogs on the Export line relating to each quantity measurement type

On-Screen Takeoff will export takeoff quantity results for up to three different quantity types that you specify For instance you may want to know the number of square feet in a ceiling area as well as the number of linear feet in its perimeter

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

51

1 Bring up the Condition dialog by double-clicking on a condition in the takeoff dock bar or by

selecting the condition and clicking

2 Click on the Results tab to access its fields The default quantities for the condition type will display

3 For each results field click on the arrow to access the pull-down menu and select the appropriate quantity (for example SF LF EA etchellip)

4 Have your Excel spreadsheet opened and saved in a file

5 Specify the Excel spreadsheet cell locations where you want the results to go

6 For a cell in the first sheet of your spreadsheet type in the cell address (eg a1) Case is not important

7 For a cell on a successive sheet of your spreadsheet type in sheet the number followed by a comma and the cell address without any spaces (eg sheet2a1) Case is not important

8 Click

9 Select File gt Export gt Condition Qty to Excel

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

52

10 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

11 Click to export On-Screen Takeoff results to specified cell locations in the Excel file When you return to the Excel application you will see the values have been added to the specified cell locations in your spreadsheet

12 Save your Excel file

Exporting Worksheet to Excel

1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 From On-Screen Takeoff Select File gt Export gt Worksheet to Excel

4 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

5 Click When you return to the Excel application you will see the values from the Worksheet Tab have been added to your spreadsheet

6 Save your Excel file

Exporting Takeoff to CVS 1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 Click the Takeoff Tab in the project you want to export the information

4 Select File gt Export gt Takeoff to CSV

5 Browse to the location of the CSV spreadsheet file click file to select it

6 Click the Save

NOTE CSV files can be opened in Excel Lotus Access etc One may consider this option more of a ldquodumprdquo into a file

The Excel application must be active (it may be minimized on the application bar) with the target spreadsheet open in the application Otherwise an error will occur with the export operation that will affect both the On-Screen Takeofftrade file and the Excel spreadsheet

Section 8

53

Advanced Features

This section will

Some special features of working with condition objects in the takeoff area

Details of advanced options for conditions

Advanced features of the Project Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

54

Features to Use with Objects Roping Feature You can move copy or delete using this feature Using the Select tool (the pointer) you may select several objects at once by clicking and dragging an outline around the objects then releasing the mouse button Roping may select either objects completely within the outlined area (inclusive) or objects both within and touched by the outlined area (touching) Specify your roping preference under Tools gt Options

1 Click and hold the mouse button at a point on the screen near the objects to be selected and drag to surround the objects with an outline

2 Release the mouse button The objects will be selected

3 You may now

Move the group around on the page by clicking within the group dragging the mouse and releasing the button to place the objects

Delete the group of objects by clicking the Delete key or

Copy and paste by pressing Ctrl C to copy the group then Ctrl V to paste it The pasted copy of the grouped objects will appear slightly offset from the original objects

Section 8 Advanced Features

55

Applying a DropRun Count

Use the droprun feature when calculating quantities to take into account the drop or run of a linear condition such as electrical lines or plumbing pipes Drop or run lengths may be added separately to any linear condition on screen while a default droprun length may be indicated for a condition as a whole

1 Select the desired linear condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff Dock bar

2 Click the Change button in the toolbar to open the Change Condition dialog

3 Click the Advanced tab to access the advanced options and click inside the DropRun check box

4 Enter a default length to be applied to all of this condition Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches) You can leave the length blank and manually enter drop run on each segment drawn

5 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog

Edit DropRun Count

1 With the related linear condition in the Takeoff Dock bar highlighted or with the pointer tool selected

2 click on the desired linear object in the image takeoff area The Count button will become active

3 Click on the Count button (alternatively select Tools gt Count) The default droprun amount will show in the pop-up Count dialog (Default length will be zero if droprun has not been selected in this conditionrsquos properties)

4 Type in the desired length Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches)

5 Click the OK button The additional amount will be reflected in the corresponding quantity The new DropRun count will apply only to the object edited

Adding Text in Image View

On-Screen Takeoff allows you to place text comments around your quantity takeoffs that may be printed along with plan images and objects Text is automatically placed within the Annotation Layer (that includes text and hot links)

1 To place text on the image select the Text Tool and click at the point you want to place your text opening a text box

2 Type in your information clicking Enter for line breaks

3 When you are finished click the OK button to exit the text box

4 To reposition text simply click on the text (with the Text Tool active) to select it

5 Move the cursor over the text the cursor will now display as a four-way arrow

6 Click and drag the mouse to position the text as desired

Section 8 Advanced Features

56

1 To edit existing text use the Text Tool to double-click on the text to open the editing box

2 Enter additional text or use the Backspace key to delete text as necessary

Formatting Text Once created you may format the font size type style and color of your text

1 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Font or click on the Font button in the Takeoff Toolbar

2 Select the desired features (color options are disabled) and click the OK button

3 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Color or click on the Color button in the Takeoff Toolbar The Color dialog will open

4 Click on a color in the Basic Color palette or create a color and add to the Custom Colors palette (Be sure to click on the color in the Custom Colors palette to select it)

5 Click the OK button

Object Properties

Linear Objects

Linear objects may be set to connect at corners

A linear object may be set to trim automatically when crossing another linear object (Check the trim option under the advanced tab of the Condition dialog)

When you move a connected linear object objects automatically move and resize connected lines accordingly (quantities are then recalculated)

This feature requires that the connected linear object be moved using the center handles (does not apply when resizing the line from the ends)

Objects constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

Objects are measured from centerline to centerline

Section 8 Advanced Features

57

Area Objects When drawing an area use your escape key to undo the last line drawn You may reverse your

drawing of an area using the escape key

The area will not fill with color and pattern until the user double-clicks after the last line is set

Lines drawn to delineate an area object constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

After selecting an area to move or adjust position the mouse in the center to move the entire area position the mouse at the sides or corners to adjust the perimeter

Count Objects

All count objects are quantified by the physical number of objects per page and reported as EA for the UOM The quantity for the current Image View is (displayed in the Condition List) and the total quantity in your project is displayed in the Takeoff View and Worksheet View)

Square circle rectangle and triangle shaped count objects do not displace or subtract from other object quantities when placed on top of them However on the Advanced Tab for the count condition a connect property can be set (this is a check box) so that when a count object of this shape is put on top of a Linear type takeoff object it will move with the linear if said linear is moved

An opened-shaped count object must be placed within a linear object Opening shaped count objects may also be measured by linear foot or linear yard (EA SF and SY are also options) Opening shaped count items default to a width of 3rsquo 0rdquo at the time of creation This size can be changed The small medium and large size are not options on this type of condition anymore Check Backout on the Advanced tab for each Count object back out the footage (or yardage) of opening-shaped count objects in which they are placed

NOTE In order to see this Backout functionality (in quantity) for SY or SF deductions at least one of the

results for the Linear(s) this object will be placed on must be set to SY or SF and the count object must have a height quantity

Advanced Features of Conditions The Round Feature Under the Advanced tab of the linear and area Condition dialogues you may specify quantity rounding (in inches) For linear objects rounding applies to each linear object drawn For area objects rounding will apply to each segment of the area perimeter adjusting the perimeter and area calculations For example With a linear condition entering 12 in the Round field will round up each related linear object to the nearest 12 inches or one foot With this setting two walls of 1 4 would each round to 2 0 totaling 4 0

NOTE In the Takeoff Dock bar condition list and in the On-Screen Takeoff reports quantities will be displayed in whole numbers rounded up to the nearest foot However calculations are based on true quantities without rounding unless the Round Feature is engaged

Pitch Pitch may apply either to linear or area conditions It is measured in rise per linear foot Entering 12 indicates a 12 rise per 12 of linear distance (a pitch of 12 over 12) or an angle of 45deg

Section 8 Advanced Features

58

Advanced Features of Project Properties Selecting Multiple Pages

1 Select a single page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry

2 Drag the cursor down the column of numbers to select consecutive pages

3 Click on the blank button at the top of this column to select all pages in the Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

59

Changing Image Assigned to a Drawing 1 Select the page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry 2 Click the Change Image button The Change Image dialog box will appear

3 Navigate to the desired file and select by clicking on it

4 Click the Open button The electronic file assigned to the page will have been changed to reflect the new file choice

Changing Image File Path 1 Select pages as described above

2 Choose Change Folder

3 In the Change Folder dialog navigate to the appropriate folder

4 Click the OK button The file path will have been changed for the selected page entries

Delete a Page from Project Properties 1 Select the page you want to delete by clicking on its associated number (in the gray box at the

left of the entry)

2 Choose Delete Page

All Takeoff on the page will be deleted immediately and permanently

Section 8 Advanced Features

60

Advanced Features of Tool Options

Calculation Method On-Screen Takeoff has built-in calculation options to allow for faster work and faster saves until your takeoff is complete Calculation options are found by selecting Tools gt Options then clicking on the Calculation tab

Calculation method can be set to Automatic Automatic except Grids and Manual Manual will allow the program to operate more quickly while Automatic or Automatic except Grids allows the user to see quantity changes as takeoffs are made

In any mode you may press F9 to recalculate quantities for the On-Screen Takeoff current totals

Configuration Tab

When the ldquoPage Label (A01)rdquo radial button is chosen On-Screen Takeoff puts the numbered label on all the pages of in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar If the Page Descriptionrdquo radial button is chosen then a description of what takeoff is on that specific page will be shown in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar

This section of the configuration tab gives you options on how you want to export your information When the ldquoFolderSubfolder Namesrdquo radial button is chosen than on your file that you are exporting to will have all the conditions folders and subfolders In the Delimiter box you can choose the symbol that is needed to separate the information you are exporting Some files need semicolons () or colons () to make sure the information comes exported in is separated it the appropriate places

Section 8 Advanced Features

61

In previous versions of On-Screen Takeoff there are views that users need to have in order for them to display their information By either choosing ldquoOST 1xrdquo or ldquoOST 2xrdquo it will let the program know you want your columns of information exported in that specific format

When you have the Confirm Deletions radial button of ldquoYesrdquo chosen than every time you delete anything you will get a dialog box confirming your intentions of deletion

While working with your takeoff you have a choice to either view the legend of your conditions or hide it Choose whichever radial button that suits your needs

For those who prefer to use the Enter key to navigate in dialog boxes this option is just for that

Font Tab The Font tab is designed for you to make your own look and feel for the application At the bottom of this tab it will show you sample of the fonts and colors you have chosen

Renaming the Current Page You may change the name of the current page in the takeoff area of On-Screen Takeoff by selecting Edit gt Rename Page

This opens the Name Page dialog and you may simply type in a new name and click the Enter button The new name for the file will be reflected on the title bar for the page and in Project Properties

You also may access the Rename Page function by right-clicking in the takeoff area while in Image View and selecting the option from the pop-up menu that appears

Section 9

62

Saving and Exiting

This section will

Explain how to save projects

Show you how to safely exit the program

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

63

Saving Your Project

1 Select File gt Save 2 If your project has not previously been saved a Save dialog box will open to allow you to name

the file and choose the directory and folder in which to save your file 3 Once saved File gt Save will simply save the current version of the file

OR

4 Select File gt Save As then type in a new name for the file and save to the desired file path

The Auto-save Feature With the Auto-save feature On-Screen Takeoff automatically backs up your open project You may choose to have more than one level of backup files The first backup copy will have the extension b00 and successive files will be b01 b02 and so on If you have designated four levels of backup files after the fourth backup copy has been created (b03) the next file will be saved over the file with extension b00 Further backup saves will then rotate through the four backup files in the same way

1 Select Tools gt Options 2 In the Auto-save area (under the General tab) select the frequency of backup file creation (in

minutes) and the number of levels for the feature 3 You also may disengage the feature by clicking in the check box to clear it

The Auto-save feature automatically saves backup copies to the directory of the current project If you are working from a write-protected area such as a CD-ROM On-Screen Takeoff will place backup files in the On-Screen Takeoff folder

Exiting When you are finished using On-Screen Takeoff it is very easy to exit Exiting is very important because of security reasons If someone were to use your computer they could enter the application and view and manipulate information

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

64

On-Screen Takeoff closes the open project when you open another or create a new project or when you exit the program

1 Select File gt Exit

OR

2 You also may click at the upper right-hand corner of the application to exit

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

65

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer When you get your digitizer from GTCO you will need to connect it to your computer Follow the instructions outlined below to do this

Note For rollup digitizers the metal bar must be oriented to the top or right hand side

Connecting the Digitizer 1 Lay the digitizer out flat 2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer 3 Plug in the power adapter 4 Plug the interface (IO) cable into the digitizer 5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into an open serial port on computer

Note GTCO Technical support phone number is 410-381-6688 The electronic manual (on diskette) from GTCO contains more detailed installation and operation instructions for the GTCO digitizer model you have

Installing other Digitizer Drivers If you are using a GTCO Digitizer you will need to install the GTCO TabletWorks Drivers

If you are using a Digitizer not supported by GTCO Tablet Works 10 please contact the manufacturer of your digitizer for assistance with installation

Installing GTCO TabletWorks Drivers 1 Insert the On Center CD into the CD-ROM drive The CD Startup screen will open 2 Click on Install Software 3 Select Additional Software and Drivers 4 Select Digitizer Driver 5 Follow the instructions for installing TabletWorks 10

Adhering the Template The template is a small plastic sticker used to enable mouse function when using the digitizer with On-Screen Takeoff Place your template on your digitizer We suggest placing it in the bottom right corner of the digitizer about one inch inside the takeoff area

Note You may either peel off the back of the template and use the adhesive surface or you can tape the template down

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

66

Testing the Digitizer Drivers Before running OST you may test the digitizer by moving the stylus around on the digitizer pad it should move the mouse cursor (if mouse emulation is enabled)

If the digitizer does not move the mouse cursor on the screen

The superset codes may need to be reset Reset the superset codes by touching on the border of the digitizer with the stylus The digitizer should beep several times

The digitizer may not be communicating with the computer Be sure the COM port selected is correct Be sure the COM port selected is correct If you are not able to get the digitizer to move the mouse cursor you need to call GTCO technical support for help

Note The Mouse Emulation is not required for On-Screen Takeoff to work properly It is used only for the Template functionality if the digitizer is moving the cursor the wrong direction (up instead of sideways or vice-versa)

Click the L-shaped arrow symbol on the digitizer with the stylus

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

67

Appendix II Toolbar Items Main Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

68

Tool Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

69

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

70

Navigate Toolbar (Continued)

Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

71

Takeoff Toolbar (Continued)

Image Toolbar

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

72

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

This section will detail how to load plans from a F W Dodge CD-ROM into an On-Screen Takeoff project file ready for takeoffs

Dodge files may be added to the Project Properties dialog However loading the files in that way will load the files by number rather than name description If you want to load one page only from your Dodge CD You will have to rename the page to display the name rather than number of the file

To load plan files from a Dodge CD so that the files load sequentially by file number but are displayed by name rather than by number within your project follow the instructions below

Opening a Dodge project from a CD-ROM 1 Insert the CD into the drive 2 Choose File gt Custom 3 Choose Dodge Plans Project (plansdat) as the file type 4 Select the appropriate file type by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the Files of type

field 5 In the Look in field access your drive paths by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the

field then

Navigate to your CD-ROM drive Open the data folder and Open the Projects folder

6 Select the desired project and open its folder 7 Open the plansdat file 8 All the images will come in sequenced correctly for that job along with the full descriptions

(names) of each page If there is not a plans folder in the project folder then plans do not exist for that project on the CD Opening the plansdat file will yield an empty project

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

73

Appendix IV Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer The On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer is a limited version of On Center Softwarersquos commercial takeoff software If your status bar located at the very bottom of the main window says View Mode in the lower left-hand corner then you are using the Plan Viewer You can use the plan viewer to

View CD-based amp converted CAD drawings

View a previously created OST file and associated drawings

Download electronic plans online

Navigate through drawings

Quickly Takeoff linearsareas and counts

Zoom in to view the plan better

Print drawings directly from the viewer

Viewing an On-Screen Takeoff Project File

1 To open an OST file that was previously created with of On-Screen Takeoff 2 Select File gt Open 3 An Open dialog will appear if you do not see the OST file you are looking for select the

Look In drop down arrow 4 A drop down menu will appear listing the various folders drives and mapped drives located

on your computer select the correct drive or folder location and continue to browse to the location of your OST file

5 When you see your OST file double-click it to open it 6 Any takeoff and drawings should appear on the Image tab view

If you do not see the drawings but do see the colored takeoff layer the drawings may

not be located in the same place they were originally saved at Go to File gt Project Properties and check the Image File path for each listed page If the image file path is pointing to a CD drive make sure the CD is inside the CR-ROM

Downloading Electronic Plans If your Online Plan Service provides a special file format (OSX) required to use this feature of our plan viewer you can immediately downloaded all electronic plans of a project directly from our viewer

Most Plan Room web sites will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff when a request to download plans is made Your particular Plan Room may differ in operation so please contact the provider directly with questions on using the site

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

74

When you request to download or open a project file from a Plan Room you will usually have the open to open or save an OSX file Choosing open will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff Alternately you may choose to save the file to a local hard drive After you have saved the file either double-click it to launch On-Screen Takeoff or open the OSX file using On-Screen Takeoff by clicking File then Open and locating the file on your hard drive You will need to change the file type to OSX

After the OSX file is opened you will see an additional tab appear in the Conditions List window called Pages

The Pages tab shows the hierarchy of your project Gray file icons represent pages that have not been downloaded and blue icons represents pages that have been downloaded

To download a page simply double-click the page icon

If you wish to select a group of pages to download you can use the Ctrl or Shift key to multiple select them then click the Download button

If you wish to download all pages at once click the Download All button

Downloaded pages will now appear in the Project Properties dialog in the same order in which they appear in the Pages tab

Creating Quick Takeoffs With On-Screen Takeoff you can create quick takeoffs to measure quantities even if you dont have the full version of our program However using the Quick Takeoff functionality shows you just a fraction of what the full version can do

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar is located at the top of the image view It has three buttons designated for three types of takeoffs Linear Area and Count The Quantity drop down list will show secondary quantities for Linears and Areas The Units drop down allows you to select how you want your quantities displayed Feet Inches Yards Millimeters and Meters

NOTE Every time change the type of takeoff you are performing (switching from Area to Linear for example) the previous quantities and takeoff objects will disappear They will also disappear when you changes pages

NOTE You can use the Dimension Tool to basically measure the distance between two points or linears The distance will display on the status bar at the bottom of the application

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

75

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions General

Where is On-Screen Takeoff installed on my computer

Typically it is installed in CProgram FilesOn-Screen Takeoff

In Explorer how do I recognize On-Screen Takeoff file types

On-Screen Takeoff data is stored in a single file per job lsquojob name OSTrsquo On-Screen Takeoff templates are stored as lsquotemplate nameTPOrsquo

Can only one project at a time be open

Yes For that reason opening another project automatically closes the project on screen You will be asked to save any changes

Is only one scale allowed per page What about on drawings that have multiple detail sections on a page and each of those drawings have different scales

Yes For pages with drawings of different scales copy the drawing to another project page and set the appropriate scale

I cannot perform backout on an area that is along a linear

As a workaround use the On-Screen Takeoff layers feature to help you with this issue Electronic Images

How do I start a project from drawings that have been scanned and written to a CD-ROM

Open a new project Select File gt Project Properties and select Auto Add Navigate to your CD and the appropriate folder and select any image file in that location Click Open All files in the location will load into your project Recommended that images are copied from CD to hard drive for performance

If I get a disk of drawings in AutoCAD format (R13 or R14) can I read them in On-Screen Takeoff

Yes On-Screen Takeoff now reads DWG DXF and many other format that are saved with AutoCAD

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

76

When I click on the all pages button what is supposed to happen Currently nothing seems to change when I click on that button

The All Pages button is used to apply the Darken and Enhance Plans feature to all pages in the project (as opposed to only the current page on screen)

Is there a way to deduct a large skylight from an area condition

Yes with the related area condition selected in the Takeoff Dock bar unselect the Backout button on the Takeoff Toolbar then draw the Backout area The area quantity will be deducted from the related condition object and the linear measurement of the Backout perimeter will be added

Digitizer Issues

How do I connect a Digitizer to the computer

See Appendix I Connecting a Digitizer

The Place Template menu choice is disabled

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or the digitizer or the digitzer drivers are not installed

It wonrsquot let me select the Set Takeoff Area menu choice

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or no job is open a digitizer is not installed or the drivers are not installed

The digitizer stylus is not moving the cursor or crosshairs

Click S-0-1 superset on the digitizer

How do I convert my old GTCO Digitizer to work with On- Screen Takeofftrade

Call GTCO and they may be able to reconfigure your digitizer to be compatible with On-Screen Takeoff

Printing Issues Which Printers work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible printers include On-Screen Takeoff Hewlett Packard Epson and Canon printers If you are having printer difficulties please contact support and specify the type of printer along with other pertinent information Contact support at wwwoncentercomsupport or email supportoncentercom

Which Plotters work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible Plotters include Hewlett Packard DesignJet plotters and the EnCAD Cadjet II If you are having plotter difficulties please contact support and specify the type of plotter concerned

ViewingDisplay I can no longer see my condition list How do I get it back

The toolbars and Dock bars can be turned on and off through the View gt Toolbars menu options

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

77

This is also accessible by right-clicking in the toolbar area and selecting (or deselecting) a toolbar listed

I cannot view my folders in the condition list

Right-click in the Takeoff Dock barcondition list area and select Show Tree to display your folders

My Status Bar reads Viewer Mode and I am unable to draw conditions

On-Screen Takeoff needs to be Authorized Or you need to purchase an upgrade Click the Perform Advanced Takeoff button on the main toolbar

I hid a Dock bar and when I selected to view it again it appeared alongside the other Dock

bar instead of stacked on top of it How do I fix it

Pick up the Dock bar by clicking on the bar at the top and continuing to hold down the mouse button drag the Dock bar over the other one It will resize and appear stacked with the other

When I open image files from a CD the images are all upside down How do I get them right

side up

To flip pages from top to bottom follow the steps below 1 Click the All Pages button on the Image Toolbar (All Pages is engaged when the button

is not clicked) 2 Click the Flip Horizontal button on the Image Toolbar 3 Click the All Pages button again to disengage

Templates How do I create a Template

Follow the steps below 1 Create a typical project 2 Choose File gt Save As 3 Choose On-Screen Takeoff Template Files as the file type to save 4 Name the file This will save all of the condition setups as well as the layers for the

project

How do I create a new project from a template

Follow the steps below 1 Choose File gt New 2 Select a template from those listed in the New dialog This will open a new project with

conditions and layers saved from a previous project but no pages or takeoff

78

INDEX

Area Conditions 32

Area Objects 57

Auto Scrolling 20

Auto-save 63

Backout Mode 41

Calculation Method 60

Conditions 29

Configuration 60

Contents Tab 6

Continuous Mode 38

Count Conditions 33

Count Objects 57

Digitizer 10 65 76

Docking Toolbars 13

Dodge CD 72

Drawing 27 37

DropRun Count 55

Environment 18

Exiting 63

Exporting 49

Features 16

Font 61

Frequently Asked Questions 75

Grid 40

Help File 5

Hiding Toolbars 13

Hot Links 21

Image 19 59

Image files 9

Image Toolbar 12 71

Images 75

Index Tab 6

Layers 43

Linear Conditions 31

Linear Objects 56

Main Toolbar 12 67

Menus 14

Moving Toolbars 13

Navigate Toolbar 12 69

Navigating 20

On-Screen Takeofftrade 2

Page 59 61

Pages 20 25 28

Plan Viewer 73

Plans 26

Printing 47 76

Project Properties 25

Projects 22

Quick Start Video 18

Resizing Toolbars 13

Roping 54

Saving 63

Scale 28

Search Tab 7

Selecting Objects 42

Setup 8

Start On-Screen Takeofftrade 17

System Requirements 9

Takeoff 19 27

Takeoff Toolbar 70 71

Takeoff Toolbar 12

Template Files 23

TIF (Group4) 9

Tool Toolbar 12 68

Toolbar 67

Toolbars 12

View Toolbar 12 69

Viewing Toolbars 12

Worksheet 20

Zone Conditions 33

Zoom Toolbar 12 69

  • On-Screen Takeoff Lite
  • Table of Contents
  • Section 1 - Introduction
  • Section 2 - Setup
  • Section 3 - Toolbars and Menus
  • Section 4 - Features
  • Section 5 - Projects
  • Section 6 - Conditions and Takeoff
  • Section 7 - Printing and Exporting
  • Section 8 - Advanced Features
  • Section 9 - Saving and Exiting
  • Appendix I - Installing Your Digitizer
  • Appendix II - Toolbar Items
  • Appendix III - Loading Plans from a Dodge CD
  • Appendix IV - Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer
  • Appendix V - Frequently Asked Questions
  • Index

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

51

1 Bring up the Condition dialog by double-clicking on a condition in the takeoff dock bar or by

selecting the condition and clicking

2 Click on the Results tab to access its fields The default quantities for the condition type will display

3 For each results field click on the arrow to access the pull-down menu and select the appropriate quantity (for example SF LF EA etchellip)

4 Have your Excel spreadsheet opened and saved in a file

5 Specify the Excel spreadsheet cell locations where you want the results to go

6 For a cell in the first sheet of your spreadsheet type in the cell address (eg a1) Case is not important

7 For a cell on a successive sheet of your spreadsheet type in sheet the number followed by a comma and the cell address without any spaces (eg sheet2a1) Case is not important

8 Click

9 Select File gt Export gt Condition Qty to Excel

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

52

10 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

11 Click to export On-Screen Takeoff results to specified cell locations in the Excel file When you return to the Excel application you will see the values have been added to the specified cell locations in your spreadsheet

12 Save your Excel file

Exporting Worksheet to Excel

1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 From On-Screen Takeoff Select File gt Export gt Worksheet to Excel

4 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

5 Click When you return to the Excel application you will see the values from the Worksheet Tab have been added to your spreadsheet

6 Save your Excel file

Exporting Takeoff to CVS 1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 Click the Takeoff Tab in the project you want to export the information

4 Select File gt Export gt Takeoff to CSV

5 Browse to the location of the CSV spreadsheet file click file to select it

6 Click the Save

NOTE CSV files can be opened in Excel Lotus Access etc One may consider this option more of a ldquodumprdquo into a file

The Excel application must be active (it may be minimized on the application bar) with the target spreadsheet open in the application Otherwise an error will occur with the export operation that will affect both the On-Screen Takeofftrade file and the Excel spreadsheet

Section 8

53

Advanced Features

This section will

Some special features of working with condition objects in the takeoff area

Details of advanced options for conditions

Advanced features of the Project Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

54

Features to Use with Objects Roping Feature You can move copy or delete using this feature Using the Select tool (the pointer) you may select several objects at once by clicking and dragging an outline around the objects then releasing the mouse button Roping may select either objects completely within the outlined area (inclusive) or objects both within and touched by the outlined area (touching) Specify your roping preference under Tools gt Options

1 Click and hold the mouse button at a point on the screen near the objects to be selected and drag to surround the objects with an outline

2 Release the mouse button The objects will be selected

3 You may now

Move the group around on the page by clicking within the group dragging the mouse and releasing the button to place the objects

Delete the group of objects by clicking the Delete key or

Copy and paste by pressing Ctrl C to copy the group then Ctrl V to paste it The pasted copy of the grouped objects will appear slightly offset from the original objects

Section 8 Advanced Features

55

Applying a DropRun Count

Use the droprun feature when calculating quantities to take into account the drop or run of a linear condition such as electrical lines or plumbing pipes Drop or run lengths may be added separately to any linear condition on screen while a default droprun length may be indicated for a condition as a whole

1 Select the desired linear condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff Dock bar

2 Click the Change button in the toolbar to open the Change Condition dialog

3 Click the Advanced tab to access the advanced options and click inside the DropRun check box

4 Enter a default length to be applied to all of this condition Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches) You can leave the length blank and manually enter drop run on each segment drawn

5 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog

Edit DropRun Count

1 With the related linear condition in the Takeoff Dock bar highlighted or with the pointer tool selected

2 click on the desired linear object in the image takeoff area The Count button will become active

3 Click on the Count button (alternatively select Tools gt Count) The default droprun amount will show in the pop-up Count dialog (Default length will be zero if droprun has not been selected in this conditionrsquos properties)

4 Type in the desired length Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches)

5 Click the OK button The additional amount will be reflected in the corresponding quantity The new DropRun count will apply only to the object edited

Adding Text in Image View

On-Screen Takeoff allows you to place text comments around your quantity takeoffs that may be printed along with plan images and objects Text is automatically placed within the Annotation Layer (that includes text and hot links)

1 To place text on the image select the Text Tool and click at the point you want to place your text opening a text box

2 Type in your information clicking Enter for line breaks

3 When you are finished click the OK button to exit the text box

4 To reposition text simply click on the text (with the Text Tool active) to select it

5 Move the cursor over the text the cursor will now display as a four-way arrow

6 Click and drag the mouse to position the text as desired

Section 8 Advanced Features

56

1 To edit existing text use the Text Tool to double-click on the text to open the editing box

2 Enter additional text or use the Backspace key to delete text as necessary

Formatting Text Once created you may format the font size type style and color of your text

1 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Font or click on the Font button in the Takeoff Toolbar

2 Select the desired features (color options are disabled) and click the OK button

3 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Color or click on the Color button in the Takeoff Toolbar The Color dialog will open

4 Click on a color in the Basic Color palette or create a color and add to the Custom Colors palette (Be sure to click on the color in the Custom Colors palette to select it)

5 Click the OK button

Object Properties

Linear Objects

Linear objects may be set to connect at corners

A linear object may be set to trim automatically when crossing another linear object (Check the trim option under the advanced tab of the Condition dialog)

When you move a connected linear object objects automatically move and resize connected lines accordingly (quantities are then recalculated)

This feature requires that the connected linear object be moved using the center handles (does not apply when resizing the line from the ends)

Objects constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

Objects are measured from centerline to centerline

Section 8 Advanced Features

57

Area Objects When drawing an area use your escape key to undo the last line drawn You may reverse your

drawing of an area using the escape key

The area will not fill with color and pattern until the user double-clicks after the last line is set

Lines drawn to delineate an area object constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

After selecting an area to move or adjust position the mouse in the center to move the entire area position the mouse at the sides or corners to adjust the perimeter

Count Objects

All count objects are quantified by the physical number of objects per page and reported as EA for the UOM The quantity for the current Image View is (displayed in the Condition List) and the total quantity in your project is displayed in the Takeoff View and Worksheet View)

Square circle rectangle and triangle shaped count objects do not displace or subtract from other object quantities when placed on top of them However on the Advanced Tab for the count condition a connect property can be set (this is a check box) so that when a count object of this shape is put on top of a Linear type takeoff object it will move with the linear if said linear is moved

An opened-shaped count object must be placed within a linear object Opening shaped count objects may also be measured by linear foot or linear yard (EA SF and SY are also options) Opening shaped count items default to a width of 3rsquo 0rdquo at the time of creation This size can be changed The small medium and large size are not options on this type of condition anymore Check Backout on the Advanced tab for each Count object back out the footage (or yardage) of opening-shaped count objects in which they are placed

NOTE In order to see this Backout functionality (in quantity) for SY or SF deductions at least one of the

results for the Linear(s) this object will be placed on must be set to SY or SF and the count object must have a height quantity

Advanced Features of Conditions The Round Feature Under the Advanced tab of the linear and area Condition dialogues you may specify quantity rounding (in inches) For linear objects rounding applies to each linear object drawn For area objects rounding will apply to each segment of the area perimeter adjusting the perimeter and area calculations For example With a linear condition entering 12 in the Round field will round up each related linear object to the nearest 12 inches or one foot With this setting two walls of 1 4 would each round to 2 0 totaling 4 0

NOTE In the Takeoff Dock bar condition list and in the On-Screen Takeoff reports quantities will be displayed in whole numbers rounded up to the nearest foot However calculations are based on true quantities without rounding unless the Round Feature is engaged

Pitch Pitch may apply either to linear or area conditions It is measured in rise per linear foot Entering 12 indicates a 12 rise per 12 of linear distance (a pitch of 12 over 12) or an angle of 45deg

Section 8 Advanced Features

58

Advanced Features of Project Properties Selecting Multiple Pages

1 Select a single page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry

2 Drag the cursor down the column of numbers to select consecutive pages

3 Click on the blank button at the top of this column to select all pages in the Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

59

Changing Image Assigned to a Drawing 1 Select the page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry 2 Click the Change Image button The Change Image dialog box will appear

3 Navigate to the desired file and select by clicking on it

4 Click the Open button The electronic file assigned to the page will have been changed to reflect the new file choice

Changing Image File Path 1 Select pages as described above

2 Choose Change Folder

3 In the Change Folder dialog navigate to the appropriate folder

4 Click the OK button The file path will have been changed for the selected page entries

Delete a Page from Project Properties 1 Select the page you want to delete by clicking on its associated number (in the gray box at the

left of the entry)

2 Choose Delete Page

All Takeoff on the page will be deleted immediately and permanently

Section 8 Advanced Features

60

Advanced Features of Tool Options

Calculation Method On-Screen Takeoff has built-in calculation options to allow for faster work and faster saves until your takeoff is complete Calculation options are found by selecting Tools gt Options then clicking on the Calculation tab

Calculation method can be set to Automatic Automatic except Grids and Manual Manual will allow the program to operate more quickly while Automatic or Automatic except Grids allows the user to see quantity changes as takeoffs are made

In any mode you may press F9 to recalculate quantities for the On-Screen Takeoff current totals

Configuration Tab

When the ldquoPage Label (A01)rdquo radial button is chosen On-Screen Takeoff puts the numbered label on all the pages of in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar If the Page Descriptionrdquo radial button is chosen then a description of what takeoff is on that specific page will be shown in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar

This section of the configuration tab gives you options on how you want to export your information When the ldquoFolderSubfolder Namesrdquo radial button is chosen than on your file that you are exporting to will have all the conditions folders and subfolders In the Delimiter box you can choose the symbol that is needed to separate the information you are exporting Some files need semicolons () or colons () to make sure the information comes exported in is separated it the appropriate places

Section 8 Advanced Features

61

In previous versions of On-Screen Takeoff there are views that users need to have in order for them to display their information By either choosing ldquoOST 1xrdquo or ldquoOST 2xrdquo it will let the program know you want your columns of information exported in that specific format

When you have the Confirm Deletions radial button of ldquoYesrdquo chosen than every time you delete anything you will get a dialog box confirming your intentions of deletion

While working with your takeoff you have a choice to either view the legend of your conditions or hide it Choose whichever radial button that suits your needs

For those who prefer to use the Enter key to navigate in dialog boxes this option is just for that

Font Tab The Font tab is designed for you to make your own look and feel for the application At the bottom of this tab it will show you sample of the fonts and colors you have chosen

Renaming the Current Page You may change the name of the current page in the takeoff area of On-Screen Takeoff by selecting Edit gt Rename Page

This opens the Name Page dialog and you may simply type in a new name and click the Enter button The new name for the file will be reflected on the title bar for the page and in Project Properties

You also may access the Rename Page function by right-clicking in the takeoff area while in Image View and selecting the option from the pop-up menu that appears

Section 9

62

Saving and Exiting

This section will

Explain how to save projects

Show you how to safely exit the program

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

63

Saving Your Project

1 Select File gt Save 2 If your project has not previously been saved a Save dialog box will open to allow you to name

the file and choose the directory and folder in which to save your file 3 Once saved File gt Save will simply save the current version of the file

OR

4 Select File gt Save As then type in a new name for the file and save to the desired file path

The Auto-save Feature With the Auto-save feature On-Screen Takeoff automatically backs up your open project You may choose to have more than one level of backup files The first backup copy will have the extension b00 and successive files will be b01 b02 and so on If you have designated four levels of backup files after the fourth backup copy has been created (b03) the next file will be saved over the file with extension b00 Further backup saves will then rotate through the four backup files in the same way

1 Select Tools gt Options 2 In the Auto-save area (under the General tab) select the frequency of backup file creation (in

minutes) and the number of levels for the feature 3 You also may disengage the feature by clicking in the check box to clear it

The Auto-save feature automatically saves backup copies to the directory of the current project If you are working from a write-protected area such as a CD-ROM On-Screen Takeoff will place backup files in the On-Screen Takeoff folder

Exiting When you are finished using On-Screen Takeoff it is very easy to exit Exiting is very important because of security reasons If someone were to use your computer they could enter the application and view and manipulate information

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

64

On-Screen Takeoff closes the open project when you open another or create a new project or when you exit the program

1 Select File gt Exit

OR

2 You also may click at the upper right-hand corner of the application to exit

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

65

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer When you get your digitizer from GTCO you will need to connect it to your computer Follow the instructions outlined below to do this

Note For rollup digitizers the metal bar must be oriented to the top or right hand side

Connecting the Digitizer 1 Lay the digitizer out flat 2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer 3 Plug in the power adapter 4 Plug the interface (IO) cable into the digitizer 5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into an open serial port on computer

Note GTCO Technical support phone number is 410-381-6688 The electronic manual (on diskette) from GTCO contains more detailed installation and operation instructions for the GTCO digitizer model you have

Installing other Digitizer Drivers If you are using a GTCO Digitizer you will need to install the GTCO TabletWorks Drivers

If you are using a Digitizer not supported by GTCO Tablet Works 10 please contact the manufacturer of your digitizer for assistance with installation

Installing GTCO TabletWorks Drivers 1 Insert the On Center CD into the CD-ROM drive The CD Startup screen will open 2 Click on Install Software 3 Select Additional Software and Drivers 4 Select Digitizer Driver 5 Follow the instructions for installing TabletWorks 10

Adhering the Template The template is a small plastic sticker used to enable mouse function when using the digitizer with On-Screen Takeoff Place your template on your digitizer We suggest placing it in the bottom right corner of the digitizer about one inch inside the takeoff area

Note You may either peel off the back of the template and use the adhesive surface or you can tape the template down

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

66

Testing the Digitizer Drivers Before running OST you may test the digitizer by moving the stylus around on the digitizer pad it should move the mouse cursor (if mouse emulation is enabled)

If the digitizer does not move the mouse cursor on the screen

The superset codes may need to be reset Reset the superset codes by touching on the border of the digitizer with the stylus The digitizer should beep several times

The digitizer may not be communicating with the computer Be sure the COM port selected is correct Be sure the COM port selected is correct If you are not able to get the digitizer to move the mouse cursor you need to call GTCO technical support for help

Note The Mouse Emulation is not required for On-Screen Takeoff to work properly It is used only for the Template functionality if the digitizer is moving the cursor the wrong direction (up instead of sideways or vice-versa)

Click the L-shaped arrow symbol on the digitizer with the stylus

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

67

Appendix II Toolbar Items Main Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

68

Tool Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

69

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

70

Navigate Toolbar (Continued)

Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

71

Takeoff Toolbar (Continued)

Image Toolbar

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

72

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

This section will detail how to load plans from a F W Dodge CD-ROM into an On-Screen Takeoff project file ready for takeoffs

Dodge files may be added to the Project Properties dialog However loading the files in that way will load the files by number rather than name description If you want to load one page only from your Dodge CD You will have to rename the page to display the name rather than number of the file

To load plan files from a Dodge CD so that the files load sequentially by file number but are displayed by name rather than by number within your project follow the instructions below

Opening a Dodge project from a CD-ROM 1 Insert the CD into the drive 2 Choose File gt Custom 3 Choose Dodge Plans Project (plansdat) as the file type 4 Select the appropriate file type by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the Files of type

field 5 In the Look in field access your drive paths by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the

field then

Navigate to your CD-ROM drive Open the data folder and Open the Projects folder

6 Select the desired project and open its folder 7 Open the plansdat file 8 All the images will come in sequenced correctly for that job along with the full descriptions

(names) of each page If there is not a plans folder in the project folder then plans do not exist for that project on the CD Opening the plansdat file will yield an empty project

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

73

Appendix IV Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer The On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer is a limited version of On Center Softwarersquos commercial takeoff software If your status bar located at the very bottom of the main window says View Mode in the lower left-hand corner then you are using the Plan Viewer You can use the plan viewer to

View CD-based amp converted CAD drawings

View a previously created OST file and associated drawings

Download electronic plans online

Navigate through drawings

Quickly Takeoff linearsareas and counts

Zoom in to view the plan better

Print drawings directly from the viewer

Viewing an On-Screen Takeoff Project File

1 To open an OST file that was previously created with of On-Screen Takeoff 2 Select File gt Open 3 An Open dialog will appear if you do not see the OST file you are looking for select the

Look In drop down arrow 4 A drop down menu will appear listing the various folders drives and mapped drives located

on your computer select the correct drive or folder location and continue to browse to the location of your OST file

5 When you see your OST file double-click it to open it 6 Any takeoff and drawings should appear on the Image tab view

If you do not see the drawings but do see the colored takeoff layer the drawings may

not be located in the same place they were originally saved at Go to File gt Project Properties and check the Image File path for each listed page If the image file path is pointing to a CD drive make sure the CD is inside the CR-ROM

Downloading Electronic Plans If your Online Plan Service provides a special file format (OSX) required to use this feature of our plan viewer you can immediately downloaded all electronic plans of a project directly from our viewer

Most Plan Room web sites will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff when a request to download plans is made Your particular Plan Room may differ in operation so please contact the provider directly with questions on using the site

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

74

When you request to download or open a project file from a Plan Room you will usually have the open to open or save an OSX file Choosing open will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff Alternately you may choose to save the file to a local hard drive After you have saved the file either double-click it to launch On-Screen Takeoff or open the OSX file using On-Screen Takeoff by clicking File then Open and locating the file on your hard drive You will need to change the file type to OSX

After the OSX file is opened you will see an additional tab appear in the Conditions List window called Pages

The Pages tab shows the hierarchy of your project Gray file icons represent pages that have not been downloaded and blue icons represents pages that have been downloaded

To download a page simply double-click the page icon

If you wish to select a group of pages to download you can use the Ctrl or Shift key to multiple select them then click the Download button

If you wish to download all pages at once click the Download All button

Downloaded pages will now appear in the Project Properties dialog in the same order in which they appear in the Pages tab

Creating Quick Takeoffs With On-Screen Takeoff you can create quick takeoffs to measure quantities even if you dont have the full version of our program However using the Quick Takeoff functionality shows you just a fraction of what the full version can do

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar is located at the top of the image view It has three buttons designated for three types of takeoffs Linear Area and Count The Quantity drop down list will show secondary quantities for Linears and Areas The Units drop down allows you to select how you want your quantities displayed Feet Inches Yards Millimeters and Meters

NOTE Every time change the type of takeoff you are performing (switching from Area to Linear for example) the previous quantities and takeoff objects will disappear They will also disappear when you changes pages

NOTE You can use the Dimension Tool to basically measure the distance between two points or linears The distance will display on the status bar at the bottom of the application

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

75

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions General

Where is On-Screen Takeoff installed on my computer

Typically it is installed in CProgram FilesOn-Screen Takeoff

In Explorer how do I recognize On-Screen Takeoff file types

On-Screen Takeoff data is stored in a single file per job lsquojob name OSTrsquo On-Screen Takeoff templates are stored as lsquotemplate nameTPOrsquo

Can only one project at a time be open

Yes For that reason opening another project automatically closes the project on screen You will be asked to save any changes

Is only one scale allowed per page What about on drawings that have multiple detail sections on a page and each of those drawings have different scales

Yes For pages with drawings of different scales copy the drawing to another project page and set the appropriate scale

I cannot perform backout on an area that is along a linear

As a workaround use the On-Screen Takeoff layers feature to help you with this issue Electronic Images

How do I start a project from drawings that have been scanned and written to a CD-ROM

Open a new project Select File gt Project Properties and select Auto Add Navigate to your CD and the appropriate folder and select any image file in that location Click Open All files in the location will load into your project Recommended that images are copied from CD to hard drive for performance

If I get a disk of drawings in AutoCAD format (R13 or R14) can I read them in On-Screen Takeoff

Yes On-Screen Takeoff now reads DWG DXF and many other format that are saved with AutoCAD

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

76

When I click on the all pages button what is supposed to happen Currently nothing seems to change when I click on that button

The All Pages button is used to apply the Darken and Enhance Plans feature to all pages in the project (as opposed to only the current page on screen)

Is there a way to deduct a large skylight from an area condition

Yes with the related area condition selected in the Takeoff Dock bar unselect the Backout button on the Takeoff Toolbar then draw the Backout area The area quantity will be deducted from the related condition object and the linear measurement of the Backout perimeter will be added

Digitizer Issues

How do I connect a Digitizer to the computer

See Appendix I Connecting a Digitizer

The Place Template menu choice is disabled

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or the digitizer or the digitzer drivers are not installed

It wonrsquot let me select the Set Takeoff Area menu choice

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or no job is open a digitizer is not installed or the drivers are not installed

The digitizer stylus is not moving the cursor or crosshairs

Click S-0-1 superset on the digitizer

How do I convert my old GTCO Digitizer to work with On- Screen Takeofftrade

Call GTCO and they may be able to reconfigure your digitizer to be compatible with On-Screen Takeoff

Printing Issues Which Printers work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible printers include On-Screen Takeoff Hewlett Packard Epson and Canon printers If you are having printer difficulties please contact support and specify the type of printer along with other pertinent information Contact support at wwwoncentercomsupport or email supportoncentercom

Which Plotters work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible Plotters include Hewlett Packard DesignJet plotters and the EnCAD Cadjet II If you are having plotter difficulties please contact support and specify the type of plotter concerned

ViewingDisplay I can no longer see my condition list How do I get it back

The toolbars and Dock bars can be turned on and off through the View gt Toolbars menu options

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

77

This is also accessible by right-clicking in the toolbar area and selecting (or deselecting) a toolbar listed

I cannot view my folders in the condition list

Right-click in the Takeoff Dock barcondition list area and select Show Tree to display your folders

My Status Bar reads Viewer Mode and I am unable to draw conditions

On-Screen Takeoff needs to be Authorized Or you need to purchase an upgrade Click the Perform Advanced Takeoff button on the main toolbar

I hid a Dock bar and when I selected to view it again it appeared alongside the other Dock

bar instead of stacked on top of it How do I fix it

Pick up the Dock bar by clicking on the bar at the top and continuing to hold down the mouse button drag the Dock bar over the other one It will resize and appear stacked with the other

When I open image files from a CD the images are all upside down How do I get them right

side up

To flip pages from top to bottom follow the steps below 1 Click the All Pages button on the Image Toolbar (All Pages is engaged when the button

is not clicked) 2 Click the Flip Horizontal button on the Image Toolbar 3 Click the All Pages button again to disengage

Templates How do I create a Template

Follow the steps below 1 Create a typical project 2 Choose File gt Save As 3 Choose On-Screen Takeoff Template Files as the file type to save 4 Name the file This will save all of the condition setups as well as the layers for the

project

How do I create a new project from a template

Follow the steps below 1 Choose File gt New 2 Select a template from those listed in the New dialog This will open a new project with

conditions and layers saved from a previous project but no pages or takeoff

78

INDEX

Area Conditions 32

Area Objects 57

Auto Scrolling 20

Auto-save 63

Backout Mode 41

Calculation Method 60

Conditions 29

Configuration 60

Contents Tab 6

Continuous Mode 38

Count Conditions 33

Count Objects 57

Digitizer 10 65 76

Docking Toolbars 13

Dodge CD 72

Drawing 27 37

DropRun Count 55

Environment 18

Exiting 63

Exporting 49

Features 16

Font 61

Frequently Asked Questions 75

Grid 40

Help File 5

Hiding Toolbars 13

Hot Links 21

Image 19 59

Image files 9

Image Toolbar 12 71

Images 75

Index Tab 6

Layers 43

Linear Conditions 31

Linear Objects 56

Main Toolbar 12 67

Menus 14

Moving Toolbars 13

Navigate Toolbar 12 69

Navigating 20

On-Screen Takeofftrade 2

Page 59 61

Pages 20 25 28

Plan Viewer 73

Plans 26

Printing 47 76

Project Properties 25

Projects 22

Quick Start Video 18

Resizing Toolbars 13

Roping 54

Saving 63

Scale 28

Search Tab 7

Selecting Objects 42

Setup 8

Start On-Screen Takeofftrade 17

System Requirements 9

Takeoff 19 27

Takeoff Toolbar 70 71

Takeoff Toolbar 12

Template Files 23

TIF (Group4) 9

Tool Toolbar 12 68

Toolbar 67

Toolbars 12

View Toolbar 12 69

Viewing Toolbars 12

Worksheet 20

Zone Conditions 33

Zoom Toolbar 12 69

  • On-Screen Takeoff Lite
  • Table of Contents
  • Section 1 - Introduction
  • Section 2 - Setup
  • Section 3 - Toolbars and Menus
  • Section 4 - Features
  • Section 5 - Projects
  • Section 6 - Conditions and Takeoff
  • Section 7 - Printing and Exporting
  • Section 8 - Advanced Features
  • Section 9 - Saving and Exiting
  • Appendix I - Installing Your Digitizer
  • Appendix II - Toolbar Items
  • Appendix III - Loading Plans from a Dodge CD
  • Appendix IV - Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer
  • Appendix V - Frequently Asked Questions
  • Index

Section 7 Printing and Exporting

52

10 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

11 Click to export On-Screen Takeoff results to specified cell locations in the Excel file When you return to the Excel application you will see the values have been added to the specified cell locations in your spreadsheet

12 Save your Excel file

Exporting Worksheet to Excel

1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 From On-Screen Takeoff Select File gt Export gt Worksheet to Excel

4 Browse to the location of the Excel spreadsheet file click file to select it

5 Click When you return to the Excel application you will see the values from the Worksheet Tab have been added to your spreadsheet

6 Save your Excel file

Exporting Takeoff to CVS 1 Assign condition quantities you want to export

2 Open saved Excel spreadsheet file to which you will be exporting

3 Click the Takeoff Tab in the project you want to export the information

4 Select File gt Export gt Takeoff to CSV

5 Browse to the location of the CSV spreadsheet file click file to select it

6 Click the Save

NOTE CSV files can be opened in Excel Lotus Access etc One may consider this option more of a ldquodumprdquo into a file

The Excel application must be active (it may be minimized on the application bar) with the target spreadsheet open in the application Otherwise an error will occur with the export operation that will affect both the On-Screen Takeofftrade file and the Excel spreadsheet

Section 8

53

Advanced Features

This section will

Some special features of working with condition objects in the takeoff area

Details of advanced options for conditions

Advanced features of the Project Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

54

Features to Use with Objects Roping Feature You can move copy or delete using this feature Using the Select tool (the pointer) you may select several objects at once by clicking and dragging an outline around the objects then releasing the mouse button Roping may select either objects completely within the outlined area (inclusive) or objects both within and touched by the outlined area (touching) Specify your roping preference under Tools gt Options

1 Click and hold the mouse button at a point on the screen near the objects to be selected and drag to surround the objects with an outline

2 Release the mouse button The objects will be selected

3 You may now

Move the group around on the page by clicking within the group dragging the mouse and releasing the button to place the objects

Delete the group of objects by clicking the Delete key or

Copy and paste by pressing Ctrl C to copy the group then Ctrl V to paste it The pasted copy of the grouped objects will appear slightly offset from the original objects

Section 8 Advanced Features

55

Applying a DropRun Count

Use the droprun feature when calculating quantities to take into account the drop or run of a linear condition such as electrical lines or plumbing pipes Drop or run lengths may be added separately to any linear condition on screen while a default droprun length may be indicated for a condition as a whole

1 Select the desired linear condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff Dock bar

2 Click the Change button in the toolbar to open the Change Condition dialog

3 Click the Advanced tab to access the advanced options and click inside the DropRun check box

4 Enter a default length to be applied to all of this condition Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches) You can leave the length blank and manually enter drop run on each segment drawn

5 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog

Edit DropRun Count

1 With the related linear condition in the Takeoff Dock bar highlighted or with the pointer tool selected

2 click on the desired linear object in the image takeoff area The Count button will become active

3 Click on the Count button (alternatively select Tools gt Count) The default droprun amount will show in the pop-up Count dialog (Default length will be zero if droprun has not been selected in this conditionrsquos properties)

4 Type in the desired length Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches)

5 Click the OK button The additional amount will be reflected in the corresponding quantity The new DropRun count will apply only to the object edited

Adding Text in Image View

On-Screen Takeoff allows you to place text comments around your quantity takeoffs that may be printed along with plan images and objects Text is automatically placed within the Annotation Layer (that includes text and hot links)

1 To place text on the image select the Text Tool and click at the point you want to place your text opening a text box

2 Type in your information clicking Enter for line breaks

3 When you are finished click the OK button to exit the text box

4 To reposition text simply click on the text (with the Text Tool active) to select it

5 Move the cursor over the text the cursor will now display as a four-way arrow

6 Click and drag the mouse to position the text as desired

Section 8 Advanced Features

56

1 To edit existing text use the Text Tool to double-click on the text to open the editing box

2 Enter additional text or use the Backspace key to delete text as necessary

Formatting Text Once created you may format the font size type style and color of your text

1 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Font or click on the Font button in the Takeoff Toolbar

2 Select the desired features (color options are disabled) and click the OK button

3 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Color or click on the Color button in the Takeoff Toolbar The Color dialog will open

4 Click on a color in the Basic Color palette or create a color and add to the Custom Colors palette (Be sure to click on the color in the Custom Colors palette to select it)

5 Click the OK button

Object Properties

Linear Objects

Linear objects may be set to connect at corners

A linear object may be set to trim automatically when crossing another linear object (Check the trim option under the advanced tab of the Condition dialog)

When you move a connected linear object objects automatically move and resize connected lines accordingly (quantities are then recalculated)

This feature requires that the connected linear object be moved using the center handles (does not apply when resizing the line from the ends)

Objects constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

Objects are measured from centerline to centerline

Section 8 Advanced Features

57

Area Objects When drawing an area use your escape key to undo the last line drawn You may reverse your

drawing of an area using the escape key

The area will not fill with color and pattern until the user double-clicks after the last line is set

Lines drawn to delineate an area object constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

After selecting an area to move or adjust position the mouse in the center to move the entire area position the mouse at the sides or corners to adjust the perimeter

Count Objects

All count objects are quantified by the physical number of objects per page and reported as EA for the UOM The quantity for the current Image View is (displayed in the Condition List) and the total quantity in your project is displayed in the Takeoff View and Worksheet View)

Square circle rectangle and triangle shaped count objects do not displace or subtract from other object quantities when placed on top of them However on the Advanced Tab for the count condition a connect property can be set (this is a check box) so that when a count object of this shape is put on top of a Linear type takeoff object it will move with the linear if said linear is moved

An opened-shaped count object must be placed within a linear object Opening shaped count objects may also be measured by linear foot or linear yard (EA SF and SY are also options) Opening shaped count items default to a width of 3rsquo 0rdquo at the time of creation This size can be changed The small medium and large size are not options on this type of condition anymore Check Backout on the Advanced tab for each Count object back out the footage (or yardage) of opening-shaped count objects in which they are placed

NOTE In order to see this Backout functionality (in quantity) for SY or SF deductions at least one of the

results for the Linear(s) this object will be placed on must be set to SY or SF and the count object must have a height quantity

Advanced Features of Conditions The Round Feature Under the Advanced tab of the linear and area Condition dialogues you may specify quantity rounding (in inches) For linear objects rounding applies to each linear object drawn For area objects rounding will apply to each segment of the area perimeter adjusting the perimeter and area calculations For example With a linear condition entering 12 in the Round field will round up each related linear object to the nearest 12 inches or one foot With this setting two walls of 1 4 would each round to 2 0 totaling 4 0

NOTE In the Takeoff Dock bar condition list and in the On-Screen Takeoff reports quantities will be displayed in whole numbers rounded up to the nearest foot However calculations are based on true quantities without rounding unless the Round Feature is engaged

Pitch Pitch may apply either to linear or area conditions It is measured in rise per linear foot Entering 12 indicates a 12 rise per 12 of linear distance (a pitch of 12 over 12) or an angle of 45deg

Section 8 Advanced Features

58

Advanced Features of Project Properties Selecting Multiple Pages

1 Select a single page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry

2 Drag the cursor down the column of numbers to select consecutive pages

3 Click on the blank button at the top of this column to select all pages in the Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

59

Changing Image Assigned to a Drawing 1 Select the page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry 2 Click the Change Image button The Change Image dialog box will appear

3 Navigate to the desired file and select by clicking on it

4 Click the Open button The electronic file assigned to the page will have been changed to reflect the new file choice

Changing Image File Path 1 Select pages as described above

2 Choose Change Folder

3 In the Change Folder dialog navigate to the appropriate folder

4 Click the OK button The file path will have been changed for the selected page entries

Delete a Page from Project Properties 1 Select the page you want to delete by clicking on its associated number (in the gray box at the

left of the entry)

2 Choose Delete Page

All Takeoff on the page will be deleted immediately and permanently

Section 8 Advanced Features

60

Advanced Features of Tool Options

Calculation Method On-Screen Takeoff has built-in calculation options to allow for faster work and faster saves until your takeoff is complete Calculation options are found by selecting Tools gt Options then clicking on the Calculation tab

Calculation method can be set to Automatic Automatic except Grids and Manual Manual will allow the program to operate more quickly while Automatic or Automatic except Grids allows the user to see quantity changes as takeoffs are made

In any mode you may press F9 to recalculate quantities for the On-Screen Takeoff current totals

Configuration Tab

When the ldquoPage Label (A01)rdquo radial button is chosen On-Screen Takeoff puts the numbered label on all the pages of in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar If the Page Descriptionrdquo radial button is chosen then a description of what takeoff is on that specific page will be shown in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar

This section of the configuration tab gives you options on how you want to export your information When the ldquoFolderSubfolder Namesrdquo radial button is chosen than on your file that you are exporting to will have all the conditions folders and subfolders In the Delimiter box you can choose the symbol that is needed to separate the information you are exporting Some files need semicolons () or colons () to make sure the information comes exported in is separated it the appropriate places

Section 8 Advanced Features

61

In previous versions of On-Screen Takeoff there are views that users need to have in order for them to display their information By either choosing ldquoOST 1xrdquo or ldquoOST 2xrdquo it will let the program know you want your columns of information exported in that specific format

When you have the Confirm Deletions radial button of ldquoYesrdquo chosen than every time you delete anything you will get a dialog box confirming your intentions of deletion

While working with your takeoff you have a choice to either view the legend of your conditions or hide it Choose whichever radial button that suits your needs

For those who prefer to use the Enter key to navigate in dialog boxes this option is just for that

Font Tab The Font tab is designed for you to make your own look and feel for the application At the bottom of this tab it will show you sample of the fonts and colors you have chosen

Renaming the Current Page You may change the name of the current page in the takeoff area of On-Screen Takeoff by selecting Edit gt Rename Page

This opens the Name Page dialog and you may simply type in a new name and click the Enter button The new name for the file will be reflected on the title bar for the page and in Project Properties

You also may access the Rename Page function by right-clicking in the takeoff area while in Image View and selecting the option from the pop-up menu that appears

Section 9

62

Saving and Exiting

This section will

Explain how to save projects

Show you how to safely exit the program

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

63

Saving Your Project

1 Select File gt Save 2 If your project has not previously been saved a Save dialog box will open to allow you to name

the file and choose the directory and folder in which to save your file 3 Once saved File gt Save will simply save the current version of the file

OR

4 Select File gt Save As then type in a new name for the file and save to the desired file path

The Auto-save Feature With the Auto-save feature On-Screen Takeoff automatically backs up your open project You may choose to have more than one level of backup files The first backup copy will have the extension b00 and successive files will be b01 b02 and so on If you have designated four levels of backup files after the fourth backup copy has been created (b03) the next file will be saved over the file with extension b00 Further backup saves will then rotate through the four backup files in the same way

1 Select Tools gt Options 2 In the Auto-save area (under the General tab) select the frequency of backup file creation (in

minutes) and the number of levels for the feature 3 You also may disengage the feature by clicking in the check box to clear it

The Auto-save feature automatically saves backup copies to the directory of the current project If you are working from a write-protected area such as a CD-ROM On-Screen Takeoff will place backup files in the On-Screen Takeoff folder

Exiting When you are finished using On-Screen Takeoff it is very easy to exit Exiting is very important because of security reasons If someone were to use your computer they could enter the application and view and manipulate information

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

64

On-Screen Takeoff closes the open project when you open another or create a new project or when you exit the program

1 Select File gt Exit

OR

2 You also may click at the upper right-hand corner of the application to exit

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

65

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer When you get your digitizer from GTCO you will need to connect it to your computer Follow the instructions outlined below to do this

Note For rollup digitizers the metal bar must be oriented to the top or right hand side

Connecting the Digitizer 1 Lay the digitizer out flat 2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer 3 Plug in the power adapter 4 Plug the interface (IO) cable into the digitizer 5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into an open serial port on computer

Note GTCO Technical support phone number is 410-381-6688 The electronic manual (on diskette) from GTCO contains more detailed installation and operation instructions for the GTCO digitizer model you have

Installing other Digitizer Drivers If you are using a GTCO Digitizer you will need to install the GTCO TabletWorks Drivers

If you are using a Digitizer not supported by GTCO Tablet Works 10 please contact the manufacturer of your digitizer for assistance with installation

Installing GTCO TabletWorks Drivers 1 Insert the On Center CD into the CD-ROM drive The CD Startup screen will open 2 Click on Install Software 3 Select Additional Software and Drivers 4 Select Digitizer Driver 5 Follow the instructions for installing TabletWorks 10

Adhering the Template The template is a small plastic sticker used to enable mouse function when using the digitizer with On-Screen Takeoff Place your template on your digitizer We suggest placing it in the bottom right corner of the digitizer about one inch inside the takeoff area

Note You may either peel off the back of the template and use the adhesive surface or you can tape the template down

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

66

Testing the Digitizer Drivers Before running OST you may test the digitizer by moving the stylus around on the digitizer pad it should move the mouse cursor (if mouse emulation is enabled)

If the digitizer does not move the mouse cursor on the screen

The superset codes may need to be reset Reset the superset codes by touching on the border of the digitizer with the stylus The digitizer should beep several times

The digitizer may not be communicating with the computer Be sure the COM port selected is correct Be sure the COM port selected is correct If you are not able to get the digitizer to move the mouse cursor you need to call GTCO technical support for help

Note The Mouse Emulation is not required for On-Screen Takeoff to work properly It is used only for the Template functionality if the digitizer is moving the cursor the wrong direction (up instead of sideways or vice-versa)

Click the L-shaped arrow symbol on the digitizer with the stylus

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

67

Appendix II Toolbar Items Main Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

68

Tool Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

69

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

70

Navigate Toolbar (Continued)

Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

71

Takeoff Toolbar (Continued)

Image Toolbar

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

72

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

This section will detail how to load plans from a F W Dodge CD-ROM into an On-Screen Takeoff project file ready for takeoffs

Dodge files may be added to the Project Properties dialog However loading the files in that way will load the files by number rather than name description If you want to load one page only from your Dodge CD You will have to rename the page to display the name rather than number of the file

To load plan files from a Dodge CD so that the files load sequentially by file number but are displayed by name rather than by number within your project follow the instructions below

Opening a Dodge project from a CD-ROM 1 Insert the CD into the drive 2 Choose File gt Custom 3 Choose Dodge Plans Project (plansdat) as the file type 4 Select the appropriate file type by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the Files of type

field 5 In the Look in field access your drive paths by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the

field then

Navigate to your CD-ROM drive Open the data folder and Open the Projects folder

6 Select the desired project and open its folder 7 Open the plansdat file 8 All the images will come in sequenced correctly for that job along with the full descriptions

(names) of each page If there is not a plans folder in the project folder then plans do not exist for that project on the CD Opening the plansdat file will yield an empty project

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

73

Appendix IV Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer The On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer is a limited version of On Center Softwarersquos commercial takeoff software If your status bar located at the very bottom of the main window says View Mode in the lower left-hand corner then you are using the Plan Viewer You can use the plan viewer to

View CD-based amp converted CAD drawings

View a previously created OST file and associated drawings

Download electronic plans online

Navigate through drawings

Quickly Takeoff linearsareas and counts

Zoom in to view the plan better

Print drawings directly from the viewer

Viewing an On-Screen Takeoff Project File

1 To open an OST file that was previously created with of On-Screen Takeoff 2 Select File gt Open 3 An Open dialog will appear if you do not see the OST file you are looking for select the

Look In drop down arrow 4 A drop down menu will appear listing the various folders drives and mapped drives located

on your computer select the correct drive or folder location and continue to browse to the location of your OST file

5 When you see your OST file double-click it to open it 6 Any takeoff and drawings should appear on the Image tab view

If you do not see the drawings but do see the colored takeoff layer the drawings may

not be located in the same place they were originally saved at Go to File gt Project Properties and check the Image File path for each listed page If the image file path is pointing to a CD drive make sure the CD is inside the CR-ROM

Downloading Electronic Plans If your Online Plan Service provides a special file format (OSX) required to use this feature of our plan viewer you can immediately downloaded all electronic plans of a project directly from our viewer

Most Plan Room web sites will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff when a request to download plans is made Your particular Plan Room may differ in operation so please contact the provider directly with questions on using the site

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

74

When you request to download or open a project file from a Plan Room you will usually have the open to open or save an OSX file Choosing open will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff Alternately you may choose to save the file to a local hard drive After you have saved the file either double-click it to launch On-Screen Takeoff or open the OSX file using On-Screen Takeoff by clicking File then Open and locating the file on your hard drive You will need to change the file type to OSX

After the OSX file is opened you will see an additional tab appear in the Conditions List window called Pages

The Pages tab shows the hierarchy of your project Gray file icons represent pages that have not been downloaded and blue icons represents pages that have been downloaded

To download a page simply double-click the page icon

If you wish to select a group of pages to download you can use the Ctrl or Shift key to multiple select them then click the Download button

If you wish to download all pages at once click the Download All button

Downloaded pages will now appear in the Project Properties dialog in the same order in which they appear in the Pages tab

Creating Quick Takeoffs With On-Screen Takeoff you can create quick takeoffs to measure quantities even if you dont have the full version of our program However using the Quick Takeoff functionality shows you just a fraction of what the full version can do

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar is located at the top of the image view It has three buttons designated for three types of takeoffs Linear Area and Count The Quantity drop down list will show secondary quantities for Linears and Areas The Units drop down allows you to select how you want your quantities displayed Feet Inches Yards Millimeters and Meters

NOTE Every time change the type of takeoff you are performing (switching from Area to Linear for example) the previous quantities and takeoff objects will disappear They will also disappear when you changes pages

NOTE You can use the Dimension Tool to basically measure the distance between two points or linears The distance will display on the status bar at the bottom of the application

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

75

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions General

Where is On-Screen Takeoff installed on my computer

Typically it is installed in CProgram FilesOn-Screen Takeoff

In Explorer how do I recognize On-Screen Takeoff file types

On-Screen Takeoff data is stored in a single file per job lsquojob name OSTrsquo On-Screen Takeoff templates are stored as lsquotemplate nameTPOrsquo

Can only one project at a time be open

Yes For that reason opening another project automatically closes the project on screen You will be asked to save any changes

Is only one scale allowed per page What about on drawings that have multiple detail sections on a page and each of those drawings have different scales

Yes For pages with drawings of different scales copy the drawing to another project page and set the appropriate scale

I cannot perform backout on an area that is along a linear

As a workaround use the On-Screen Takeoff layers feature to help you with this issue Electronic Images

How do I start a project from drawings that have been scanned and written to a CD-ROM

Open a new project Select File gt Project Properties and select Auto Add Navigate to your CD and the appropriate folder and select any image file in that location Click Open All files in the location will load into your project Recommended that images are copied from CD to hard drive for performance

If I get a disk of drawings in AutoCAD format (R13 or R14) can I read them in On-Screen Takeoff

Yes On-Screen Takeoff now reads DWG DXF and many other format that are saved with AutoCAD

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

76

When I click on the all pages button what is supposed to happen Currently nothing seems to change when I click on that button

The All Pages button is used to apply the Darken and Enhance Plans feature to all pages in the project (as opposed to only the current page on screen)

Is there a way to deduct a large skylight from an area condition

Yes with the related area condition selected in the Takeoff Dock bar unselect the Backout button on the Takeoff Toolbar then draw the Backout area The area quantity will be deducted from the related condition object and the linear measurement of the Backout perimeter will be added

Digitizer Issues

How do I connect a Digitizer to the computer

See Appendix I Connecting a Digitizer

The Place Template menu choice is disabled

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or the digitizer or the digitzer drivers are not installed

It wonrsquot let me select the Set Takeoff Area menu choice

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or no job is open a digitizer is not installed or the drivers are not installed

The digitizer stylus is not moving the cursor or crosshairs

Click S-0-1 superset on the digitizer

How do I convert my old GTCO Digitizer to work with On- Screen Takeofftrade

Call GTCO and they may be able to reconfigure your digitizer to be compatible with On-Screen Takeoff

Printing Issues Which Printers work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible printers include On-Screen Takeoff Hewlett Packard Epson and Canon printers If you are having printer difficulties please contact support and specify the type of printer along with other pertinent information Contact support at wwwoncentercomsupport or email supportoncentercom

Which Plotters work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible Plotters include Hewlett Packard DesignJet plotters and the EnCAD Cadjet II If you are having plotter difficulties please contact support and specify the type of plotter concerned

ViewingDisplay I can no longer see my condition list How do I get it back

The toolbars and Dock bars can be turned on and off through the View gt Toolbars menu options

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

77

This is also accessible by right-clicking in the toolbar area and selecting (or deselecting) a toolbar listed

I cannot view my folders in the condition list

Right-click in the Takeoff Dock barcondition list area and select Show Tree to display your folders

My Status Bar reads Viewer Mode and I am unable to draw conditions

On-Screen Takeoff needs to be Authorized Or you need to purchase an upgrade Click the Perform Advanced Takeoff button on the main toolbar

I hid a Dock bar and when I selected to view it again it appeared alongside the other Dock

bar instead of stacked on top of it How do I fix it

Pick up the Dock bar by clicking on the bar at the top and continuing to hold down the mouse button drag the Dock bar over the other one It will resize and appear stacked with the other

When I open image files from a CD the images are all upside down How do I get them right

side up

To flip pages from top to bottom follow the steps below 1 Click the All Pages button on the Image Toolbar (All Pages is engaged when the button

is not clicked) 2 Click the Flip Horizontal button on the Image Toolbar 3 Click the All Pages button again to disengage

Templates How do I create a Template

Follow the steps below 1 Create a typical project 2 Choose File gt Save As 3 Choose On-Screen Takeoff Template Files as the file type to save 4 Name the file This will save all of the condition setups as well as the layers for the

project

How do I create a new project from a template

Follow the steps below 1 Choose File gt New 2 Select a template from those listed in the New dialog This will open a new project with

conditions and layers saved from a previous project but no pages or takeoff

78

INDEX

Area Conditions 32

Area Objects 57

Auto Scrolling 20

Auto-save 63

Backout Mode 41

Calculation Method 60

Conditions 29

Configuration 60

Contents Tab 6

Continuous Mode 38

Count Conditions 33

Count Objects 57

Digitizer 10 65 76

Docking Toolbars 13

Dodge CD 72

Drawing 27 37

DropRun Count 55

Environment 18

Exiting 63

Exporting 49

Features 16

Font 61

Frequently Asked Questions 75

Grid 40

Help File 5

Hiding Toolbars 13

Hot Links 21

Image 19 59

Image files 9

Image Toolbar 12 71

Images 75

Index Tab 6

Layers 43

Linear Conditions 31

Linear Objects 56

Main Toolbar 12 67

Menus 14

Moving Toolbars 13

Navigate Toolbar 12 69

Navigating 20

On-Screen Takeofftrade 2

Page 59 61

Pages 20 25 28

Plan Viewer 73

Plans 26

Printing 47 76

Project Properties 25

Projects 22

Quick Start Video 18

Resizing Toolbars 13

Roping 54

Saving 63

Scale 28

Search Tab 7

Selecting Objects 42

Setup 8

Start On-Screen Takeofftrade 17

System Requirements 9

Takeoff 19 27

Takeoff Toolbar 70 71

Takeoff Toolbar 12

Template Files 23

TIF (Group4) 9

Tool Toolbar 12 68

Toolbar 67

Toolbars 12

View Toolbar 12 69

Viewing Toolbars 12

Worksheet 20

Zone Conditions 33

Zoom Toolbar 12 69

  • On-Screen Takeoff Lite
  • Table of Contents
  • Section 1 - Introduction
  • Section 2 - Setup
  • Section 3 - Toolbars and Menus
  • Section 4 - Features
  • Section 5 - Projects
  • Section 6 - Conditions and Takeoff
  • Section 7 - Printing and Exporting
  • Section 8 - Advanced Features
  • Section 9 - Saving and Exiting
  • Appendix I - Installing Your Digitizer
  • Appendix II - Toolbar Items
  • Appendix III - Loading Plans from a Dodge CD
  • Appendix IV - Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer
  • Appendix V - Frequently Asked Questions
  • Index

Section 8

53

Advanced Features

This section will

Some special features of working with condition objects in the takeoff area

Details of advanced options for conditions

Advanced features of the Project Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

54

Features to Use with Objects Roping Feature You can move copy or delete using this feature Using the Select tool (the pointer) you may select several objects at once by clicking and dragging an outline around the objects then releasing the mouse button Roping may select either objects completely within the outlined area (inclusive) or objects both within and touched by the outlined area (touching) Specify your roping preference under Tools gt Options

1 Click and hold the mouse button at a point on the screen near the objects to be selected and drag to surround the objects with an outline

2 Release the mouse button The objects will be selected

3 You may now

Move the group around on the page by clicking within the group dragging the mouse and releasing the button to place the objects

Delete the group of objects by clicking the Delete key or

Copy and paste by pressing Ctrl C to copy the group then Ctrl V to paste it The pasted copy of the grouped objects will appear slightly offset from the original objects

Section 8 Advanced Features

55

Applying a DropRun Count

Use the droprun feature when calculating quantities to take into account the drop or run of a linear condition such as electrical lines or plumbing pipes Drop or run lengths may be added separately to any linear condition on screen while a default droprun length may be indicated for a condition as a whole

1 Select the desired linear condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff Dock bar

2 Click the Change button in the toolbar to open the Change Condition dialog

3 Click the Advanced tab to access the advanced options and click inside the DropRun check box

4 Enter a default length to be applied to all of this condition Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches) You can leave the length blank and manually enter drop run on each segment drawn

5 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog

Edit DropRun Count

1 With the related linear condition in the Takeoff Dock bar highlighted or with the pointer tool selected

2 click on the desired linear object in the image takeoff area The Count button will become active

3 Click on the Count button (alternatively select Tools gt Count) The default droprun amount will show in the pop-up Count dialog (Default length will be zero if droprun has not been selected in this conditionrsquos properties)

4 Type in the desired length Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches)

5 Click the OK button The additional amount will be reflected in the corresponding quantity The new DropRun count will apply only to the object edited

Adding Text in Image View

On-Screen Takeoff allows you to place text comments around your quantity takeoffs that may be printed along with plan images and objects Text is automatically placed within the Annotation Layer (that includes text and hot links)

1 To place text on the image select the Text Tool and click at the point you want to place your text opening a text box

2 Type in your information clicking Enter for line breaks

3 When you are finished click the OK button to exit the text box

4 To reposition text simply click on the text (with the Text Tool active) to select it

5 Move the cursor over the text the cursor will now display as a four-way arrow

6 Click and drag the mouse to position the text as desired

Section 8 Advanced Features

56

1 To edit existing text use the Text Tool to double-click on the text to open the editing box

2 Enter additional text or use the Backspace key to delete text as necessary

Formatting Text Once created you may format the font size type style and color of your text

1 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Font or click on the Font button in the Takeoff Toolbar

2 Select the desired features (color options are disabled) and click the OK button

3 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Color or click on the Color button in the Takeoff Toolbar The Color dialog will open

4 Click on a color in the Basic Color palette or create a color and add to the Custom Colors palette (Be sure to click on the color in the Custom Colors palette to select it)

5 Click the OK button

Object Properties

Linear Objects

Linear objects may be set to connect at corners

A linear object may be set to trim automatically when crossing another linear object (Check the trim option under the advanced tab of the Condition dialog)

When you move a connected linear object objects automatically move and resize connected lines accordingly (quantities are then recalculated)

This feature requires that the connected linear object be moved using the center handles (does not apply when resizing the line from the ends)

Objects constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

Objects are measured from centerline to centerline

Section 8 Advanced Features

57

Area Objects When drawing an area use your escape key to undo the last line drawn You may reverse your

drawing of an area using the escape key

The area will not fill with color and pattern until the user double-clicks after the last line is set

Lines drawn to delineate an area object constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

After selecting an area to move or adjust position the mouse in the center to move the entire area position the mouse at the sides or corners to adjust the perimeter

Count Objects

All count objects are quantified by the physical number of objects per page and reported as EA for the UOM The quantity for the current Image View is (displayed in the Condition List) and the total quantity in your project is displayed in the Takeoff View and Worksheet View)

Square circle rectangle and triangle shaped count objects do not displace or subtract from other object quantities when placed on top of them However on the Advanced Tab for the count condition a connect property can be set (this is a check box) so that when a count object of this shape is put on top of a Linear type takeoff object it will move with the linear if said linear is moved

An opened-shaped count object must be placed within a linear object Opening shaped count objects may also be measured by linear foot or linear yard (EA SF and SY are also options) Opening shaped count items default to a width of 3rsquo 0rdquo at the time of creation This size can be changed The small medium and large size are not options on this type of condition anymore Check Backout on the Advanced tab for each Count object back out the footage (or yardage) of opening-shaped count objects in which they are placed

NOTE In order to see this Backout functionality (in quantity) for SY or SF deductions at least one of the

results for the Linear(s) this object will be placed on must be set to SY or SF and the count object must have a height quantity

Advanced Features of Conditions The Round Feature Under the Advanced tab of the linear and area Condition dialogues you may specify quantity rounding (in inches) For linear objects rounding applies to each linear object drawn For area objects rounding will apply to each segment of the area perimeter adjusting the perimeter and area calculations For example With a linear condition entering 12 in the Round field will round up each related linear object to the nearest 12 inches or one foot With this setting two walls of 1 4 would each round to 2 0 totaling 4 0

NOTE In the Takeoff Dock bar condition list and in the On-Screen Takeoff reports quantities will be displayed in whole numbers rounded up to the nearest foot However calculations are based on true quantities without rounding unless the Round Feature is engaged

Pitch Pitch may apply either to linear or area conditions It is measured in rise per linear foot Entering 12 indicates a 12 rise per 12 of linear distance (a pitch of 12 over 12) or an angle of 45deg

Section 8 Advanced Features

58

Advanced Features of Project Properties Selecting Multiple Pages

1 Select a single page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry

2 Drag the cursor down the column of numbers to select consecutive pages

3 Click on the blank button at the top of this column to select all pages in the Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

59

Changing Image Assigned to a Drawing 1 Select the page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry 2 Click the Change Image button The Change Image dialog box will appear

3 Navigate to the desired file and select by clicking on it

4 Click the Open button The electronic file assigned to the page will have been changed to reflect the new file choice

Changing Image File Path 1 Select pages as described above

2 Choose Change Folder

3 In the Change Folder dialog navigate to the appropriate folder

4 Click the OK button The file path will have been changed for the selected page entries

Delete a Page from Project Properties 1 Select the page you want to delete by clicking on its associated number (in the gray box at the

left of the entry)

2 Choose Delete Page

All Takeoff on the page will be deleted immediately and permanently

Section 8 Advanced Features

60

Advanced Features of Tool Options

Calculation Method On-Screen Takeoff has built-in calculation options to allow for faster work and faster saves until your takeoff is complete Calculation options are found by selecting Tools gt Options then clicking on the Calculation tab

Calculation method can be set to Automatic Automatic except Grids and Manual Manual will allow the program to operate more quickly while Automatic or Automatic except Grids allows the user to see quantity changes as takeoffs are made

In any mode you may press F9 to recalculate quantities for the On-Screen Takeoff current totals

Configuration Tab

When the ldquoPage Label (A01)rdquo radial button is chosen On-Screen Takeoff puts the numbered label on all the pages of in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar If the Page Descriptionrdquo radial button is chosen then a description of what takeoff is on that specific page will be shown in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar

This section of the configuration tab gives you options on how you want to export your information When the ldquoFolderSubfolder Namesrdquo radial button is chosen than on your file that you are exporting to will have all the conditions folders and subfolders In the Delimiter box you can choose the symbol that is needed to separate the information you are exporting Some files need semicolons () or colons () to make sure the information comes exported in is separated it the appropriate places

Section 8 Advanced Features

61

In previous versions of On-Screen Takeoff there are views that users need to have in order for them to display their information By either choosing ldquoOST 1xrdquo or ldquoOST 2xrdquo it will let the program know you want your columns of information exported in that specific format

When you have the Confirm Deletions radial button of ldquoYesrdquo chosen than every time you delete anything you will get a dialog box confirming your intentions of deletion

While working with your takeoff you have a choice to either view the legend of your conditions or hide it Choose whichever radial button that suits your needs

For those who prefer to use the Enter key to navigate in dialog boxes this option is just for that

Font Tab The Font tab is designed for you to make your own look and feel for the application At the bottom of this tab it will show you sample of the fonts and colors you have chosen

Renaming the Current Page You may change the name of the current page in the takeoff area of On-Screen Takeoff by selecting Edit gt Rename Page

This opens the Name Page dialog and you may simply type in a new name and click the Enter button The new name for the file will be reflected on the title bar for the page and in Project Properties

You also may access the Rename Page function by right-clicking in the takeoff area while in Image View and selecting the option from the pop-up menu that appears

Section 9

62

Saving and Exiting

This section will

Explain how to save projects

Show you how to safely exit the program

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

63

Saving Your Project

1 Select File gt Save 2 If your project has not previously been saved a Save dialog box will open to allow you to name

the file and choose the directory and folder in which to save your file 3 Once saved File gt Save will simply save the current version of the file

OR

4 Select File gt Save As then type in a new name for the file and save to the desired file path

The Auto-save Feature With the Auto-save feature On-Screen Takeoff automatically backs up your open project You may choose to have more than one level of backup files The first backup copy will have the extension b00 and successive files will be b01 b02 and so on If you have designated four levels of backup files after the fourth backup copy has been created (b03) the next file will be saved over the file with extension b00 Further backup saves will then rotate through the four backup files in the same way

1 Select Tools gt Options 2 In the Auto-save area (under the General tab) select the frequency of backup file creation (in

minutes) and the number of levels for the feature 3 You also may disengage the feature by clicking in the check box to clear it

The Auto-save feature automatically saves backup copies to the directory of the current project If you are working from a write-protected area such as a CD-ROM On-Screen Takeoff will place backup files in the On-Screen Takeoff folder

Exiting When you are finished using On-Screen Takeoff it is very easy to exit Exiting is very important because of security reasons If someone were to use your computer they could enter the application and view and manipulate information

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

64

On-Screen Takeoff closes the open project when you open another or create a new project or when you exit the program

1 Select File gt Exit

OR

2 You also may click at the upper right-hand corner of the application to exit

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

65

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer When you get your digitizer from GTCO you will need to connect it to your computer Follow the instructions outlined below to do this

Note For rollup digitizers the metal bar must be oriented to the top or right hand side

Connecting the Digitizer 1 Lay the digitizer out flat 2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer 3 Plug in the power adapter 4 Plug the interface (IO) cable into the digitizer 5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into an open serial port on computer

Note GTCO Technical support phone number is 410-381-6688 The electronic manual (on diskette) from GTCO contains more detailed installation and operation instructions for the GTCO digitizer model you have

Installing other Digitizer Drivers If you are using a GTCO Digitizer you will need to install the GTCO TabletWorks Drivers

If you are using a Digitizer not supported by GTCO Tablet Works 10 please contact the manufacturer of your digitizer for assistance with installation

Installing GTCO TabletWorks Drivers 1 Insert the On Center CD into the CD-ROM drive The CD Startup screen will open 2 Click on Install Software 3 Select Additional Software and Drivers 4 Select Digitizer Driver 5 Follow the instructions for installing TabletWorks 10

Adhering the Template The template is a small plastic sticker used to enable mouse function when using the digitizer with On-Screen Takeoff Place your template on your digitizer We suggest placing it in the bottom right corner of the digitizer about one inch inside the takeoff area

Note You may either peel off the back of the template and use the adhesive surface or you can tape the template down

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

66

Testing the Digitizer Drivers Before running OST you may test the digitizer by moving the stylus around on the digitizer pad it should move the mouse cursor (if mouse emulation is enabled)

If the digitizer does not move the mouse cursor on the screen

The superset codes may need to be reset Reset the superset codes by touching on the border of the digitizer with the stylus The digitizer should beep several times

The digitizer may not be communicating with the computer Be sure the COM port selected is correct Be sure the COM port selected is correct If you are not able to get the digitizer to move the mouse cursor you need to call GTCO technical support for help

Note The Mouse Emulation is not required for On-Screen Takeoff to work properly It is used only for the Template functionality if the digitizer is moving the cursor the wrong direction (up instead of sideways or vice-versa)

Click the L-shaped arrow symbol on the digitizer with the stylus

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

67

Appendix II Toolbar Items Main Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

68

Tool Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

69

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

70

Navigate Toolbar (Continued)

Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

71

Takeoff Toolbar (Continued)

Image Toolbar

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

72

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

This section will detail how to load plans from a F W Dodge CD-ROM into an On-Screen Takeoff project file ready for takeoffs

Dodge files may be added to the Project Properties dialog However loading the files in that way will load the files by number rather than name description If you want to load one page only from your Dodge CD You will have to rename the page to display the name rather than number of the file

To load plan files from a Dodge CD so that the files load sequentially by file number but are displayed by name rather than by number within your project follow the instructions below

Opening a Dodge project from a CD-ROM 1 Insert the CD into the drive 2 Choose File gt Custom 3 Choose Dodge Plans Project (plansdat) as the file type 4 Select the appropriate file type by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the Files of type

field 5 In the Look in field access your drive paths by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the

field then

Navigate to your CD-ROM drive Open the data folder and Open the Projects folder

6 Select the desired project and open its folder 7 Open the plansdat file 8 All the images will come in sequenced correctly for that job along with the full descriptions

(names) of each page If there is not a plans folder in the project folder then plans do not exist for that project on the CD Opening the plansdat file will yield an empty project

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

73

Appendix IV Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer The On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer is a limited version of On Center Softwarersquos commercial takeoff software If your status bar located at the very bottom of the main window says View Mode in the lower left-hand corner then you are using the Plan Viewer You can use the plan viewer to

View CD-based amp converted CAD drawings

View a previously created OST file and associated drawings

Download electronic plans online

Navigate through drawings

Quickly Takeoff linearsareas and counts

Zoom in to view the plan better

Print drawings directly from the viewer

Viewing an On-Screen Takeoff Project File

1 To open an OST file that was previously created with of On-Screen Takeoff 2 Select File gt Open 3 An Open dialog will appear if you do not see the OST file you are looking for select the

Look In drop down arrow 4 A drop down menu will appear listing the various folders drives and mapped drives located

on your computer select the correct drive or folder location and continue to browse to the location of your OST file

5 When you see your OST file double-click it to open it 6 Any takeoff and drawings should appear on the Image tab view

If you do not see the drawings but do see the colored takeoff layer the drawings may

not be located in the same place they were originally saved at Go to File gt Project Properties and check the Image File path for each listed page If the image file path is pointing to a CD drive make sure the CD is inside the CR-ROM

Downloading Electronic Plans If your Online Plan Service provides a special file format (OSX) required to use this feature of our plan viewer you can immediately downloaded all electronic plans of a project directly from our viewer

Most Plan Room web sites will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff when a request to download plans is made Your particular Plan Room may differ in operation so please contact the provider directly with questions on using the site

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

74

When you request to download or open a project file from a Plan Room you will usually have the open to open or save an OSX file Choosing open will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff Alternately you may choose to save the file to a local hard drive After you have saved the file either double-click it to launch On-Screen Takeoff or open the OSX file using On-Screen Takeoff by clicking File then Open and locating the file on your hard drive You will need to change the file type to OSX

After the OSX file is opened you will see an additional tab appear in the Conditions List window called Pages

The Pages tab shows the hierarchy of your project Gray file icons represent pages that have not been downloaded and blue icons represents pages that have been downloaded

To download a page simply double-click the page icon

If you wish to select a group of pages to download you can use the Ctrl or Shift key to multiple select them then click the Download button

If you wish to download all pages at once click the Download All button

Downloaded pages will now appear in the Project Properties dialog in the same order in which they appear in the Pages tab

Creating Quick Takeoffs With On-Screen Takeoff you can create quick takeoffs to measure quantities even if you dont have the full version of our program However using the Quick Takeoff functionality shows you just a fraction of what the full version can do

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar is located at the top of the image view It has three buttons designated for three types of takeoffs Linear Area and Count The Quantity drop down list will show secondary quantities for Linears and Areas The Units drop down allows you to select how you want your quantities displayed Feet Inches Yards Millimeters and Meters

NOTE Every time change the type of takeoff you are performing (switching from Area to Linear for example) the previous quantities and takeoff objects will disappear They will also disappear when you changes pages

NOTE You can use the Dimension Tool to basically measure the distance between two points or linears The distance will display on the status bar at the bottom of the application

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

75

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions General

Where is On-Screen Takeoff installed on my computer

Typically it is installed in CProgram FilesOn-Screen Takeoff

In Explorer how do I recognize On-Screen Takeoff file types

On-Screen Takeoff data is stored in a single file per job lsquojob name OSTrsquo On-Screen Takeoff templates are stored as lsquotemplate nameTPOrsquo

Can only one project at a time be open

Yes For that reason opening another project automatically closes the project on screen You will be asked to save any changes

Is only one scale allowed per page What about on drawings that have multiple detail sections on a page and each of those drawings have different scales

Yes For pages with drawings of different scales copy the drawing to another project page and set the appropriate scale

I cannot perform backout on an area that is along a linear

As a workaround use the On-Screen Takeoff layers feature to help you with this issue Electronic Images

How do I start a project from drawings that have been scanned and written to a CD-ROM

Open a new project Select File gt Project Properties and select Auto Add Navigate to your CD and the appropriate folder and select any image file in that location Click Open All files in the location will load into your project Recommended that images are copied from CD to hard drive for performance

If I get a disk of drawings in AutoCAD format (R13 or R14) can I read them in On-Screen Takeoff

Yes On-Screen Takeoff now reads DWG DXF and many other format that are saved with AutoCAD

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

76

When I click on the all pages button what is supposed to happen Currently nothing seems to change when I click on that button

The All Pages button is used to apply the Darken and Enhance Plans feature to all pages in the project (as opposed to only the current page on screen)

Is there a way to deduct a large skylight from an area condition

Yes with the related area condition selected in the Takeoff Dock bar unselect the Backout button on the Takeoff Toolbar then draw the Backout area The area quantity will be deducted from the related condition object and the linear measurement of the Backout perimeter will be added

Digitizer Issues

How do I connect a Digitizer to the computer

See Appendix I Connecting a Digitizer

The Place Template menu choice is disabled

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or the digitizer or the digitzer drivers are not installed

It wonrsquot let me select the Set Takeoff Area menu choice

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or no job is open a digitizer is not installed or the drivers are not installed

The digitizer stylus is not moving the cursor or crosshairs

Click S-0-1 superset on the digitizer

How do I convert my old GTCO Digitizer to work with On- Screen Takeofftrade

Call GTCO and they may be able to reconfigure your digitizer to be compatible with On-Screen Takeoff

Printing Issues Which Printers work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible printers include On-Screen Takeoff Hewlett Packard Epson and Canon printers If you are having printer difficulties please contact support and specify the type of printer along with other pertinent information Contact support at wwwoncentercomsupport or email supportoncentercom

Which Plotters work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible Plotters include Hewlett Packard DesignJet plotters and the EnCAD Cadjet II If you are having plotter difficulties please contact support and specify the type of plotter concerned

ViewingDisplay I can no longer see my condition list How do I get it back

The toolbars and Dock bars can be turned on and off through the View gt Toolbars menu options

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

77

This is also accessible by right-clicking in the toolbar area and selecting (or deselecting) a toolbar listed

I cannot view my folders in the condition list

Right-click in the Takeoff Dock barcondition list area and select Show Tree to display your folders

My Status Bar reads Viewer Mode and I am unable to draw conditions

On-Screen Takeoff needs to be Authorized Or you need to purchase an upgrade Click the Perform Advanced Takeoff button on the main toolbar

I hid a Dock bar and when I selected to view it again it appeared alongside the other Dock

bar instead of stacked on top of it How do I fix it

Pick up the Dock bar by clicking on the bar at the top and continuing to hold down the mouse button drag the Dock bar over the other one It will resize and appear stacked with the other

When I open image files from a CD the images are all upside down How do I get them right

side up

To flip pages from top to bottom follow the steps below 1 Click the All Pages button on the Image Toolbar (All Pages is engaged when the button

is not clicked) 2 Click the Flip Horizontal button on the Image Toolbar 3 Click the All Pages button again to disengage

Templates How do I create a Template

Follow the steps below 1 Create a typical project 2 Choose File gt Save As 3 Choose On-Screen Takeoff Template Files as the file type to save 4 Name the file This will save all of the condition setups as well as the layers for the

project

How do I create a new project from a template

Follow the steps below 1 Choose File gt New 2 Select a template from those listed in the New dialog This will open a new project with

conditions and layers saved from a previous project but no pages or takeoff

78

INDEX

Area Conditions 32

Area Objects 57

Auto Scrolling 20

Auto-save 63

Backout Mode 41

Calculation Method 60

Conditions 29

Configuration 60

Contents Tab 6

Continuous Mode 38

Count Conditions 33

Count Objects 57

Digitizer 10 65 76

Docking Toolbars 13

Dodge CD 72

Drawing 27 37

DropRun Count 55

Environment 18

Exiting 63

Exporting 49

Features 16

Font 61

Frequently Asked Questions 75

Grid 40

Help File 5

Hiding Toolbars 13

Hot Links 21

Image 19 59

Image files 9

Image Toolbar 12 71

Images 75

Index Tab 6

Layers 43

Linear Conditions 31

Linear Objects 56

Main Toolbar 12 67

Menus 14

Moving Toolbars 13

Navigate Toolbar 12 69

Navigating 20

On-Screen Takeofftrade 2

Page 59 61

Pages 20 25 28

Plan Viewer 73

Plans 26

Printing 47 76

Project Properties 25

Projects 22

Quick Start Video 18

Resizing Toolbars 13

Roping 54

Saving 63

Scale 28

Search Tab 7

Selecting Objects 42

Setup 8

Start On-Screen Takeofftrade 17

System Requirements 9

Takeoff 19 27

Takeoff Toolbar 70 71

Takeoff Toolbar 12

Template Files 23

TIF (Group4) 9

Tool Toolbar 12 68

Toolbar 67

Toolbars 12

View Toolbar 12 69

Viewing Toolbars 12

Worksheet 20

Zone Conditions 33

Zoom Toolbar 12 69

  • On-Screen Takeoff Lite
  • Table of Contents
  • Section 1 - Introduction
  • Section 2 - Setup
  • Section 3 - Toolbars and Menus
  • Section 4 - Features
  • Section 5 - Projects
  • Section 6 - Conditions and Takeoff
  • Section 7 - Printing and Exporting
  • Section 8 - Advanced Features
  • Section 9 - Saving and Exiting
  • Appendix I - Installing Your Digitizer
  • Appendix II - Toolbar Items
  • Appendix III - Loading Plans from a Dodge CD
  • Appendix IV - Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer
  • Appendix V - Frequently Asked Questions
  • Index

Section 8 Advanced Features

54

Features to Use with Objects Roping Feature You can move copy or delete using this feature Using the Select tool (the pointer) you may select several objects at once by clicking and dragging an outline around the objects then releasing the mouse button Roping may select either objects completely within the outlined area (inclusive) or objects both within and touched by the outlined area (touching) Specify your roping preference under Tools gt Options

1 Click and hold the mouse button at a point on the screen near the objects to be selected and drag to surround the objects with an outline

2 Release the mouse button The objects will be selected

3 You may now

Move the group around on the page by clicking within the group dragging the mouse and releasing the button to place the objects

Delete the group of objects by clicking the Delete key or

Copy and paste by pressing Ctrl C to copy the group then Ctrl V to paste it The pasted copy of the grouped objects will appear slightly offset from the original objects

Section 8 Advanced Features

55

Applying a DropRun Count

Use the droprun feature when calculating quantities to take into account the drop or run of a linear condition such as electrical lines or plumbing pipes Drop or run lengths may be added separately to any linear condition on screen while a default droprun length may be indicated for a condition as a whole

1 Select the desired linear condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff Dock bar

2 Click the Change button in the toolbar to open the Change Condition dialog

3 Click the Advanced tab to access the advanced options and click inside the DropRun check box

4 Enter a default length to be applied to all of this condition Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches) You can leave the length blank and manually enter drop run on each segment drawn

5 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog

Edit DropRun Count

1 With the related linear condition in the Takeoff Dock bar highlighted or with the pointer tool selected

2 click on the desired linear object in the image takeoff area The Count button will become active

3 Click on the Count button (alternatively select Tools gt Count) The default droprun amount will show in the pop-up Count dialog (Default length will be zero if droprun has not been selected in this conditionrsquos properties)

4 Type in the desired length Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches)

5 Click the OK button The additional amount will be reflected in the corresponding quantity The new DropRun count will apply only to the object edited

Adding Text in Image View

On-Screen Takeoff allows you to place text comments around your quantity takeoffs that may be printed along with plan images and objects Text is automatically placed within the Annotation Layer (that includes text and hot links)

1 To place text on the image select the Text Tool and click at the point you want to place your text opening a text box

2 Type in your information clicking Enter for line breaks

3 When you are finished click the OK button to exit the text box

4 To reposition text simply click on the text (with the Text Tool active) to select it

5 Move the cursor over the text the cursor will now display as a four-way arrow

6 Click and drag the mouse to position the text as desired

Section 8 Advanced Features

56

1 To edit existing text use the Text Tool to double-click on the text to open the editing box

2 Enter additional text or use the Backspace key to delete text as necessary

Formatting Text Once created you may format the font size type style and color of your text

1 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Font or click on the Font button in the Takeoff Toolbar

2 Select the desired features (color options are disabled) and click the OK button

3 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Color or click on the Color button in the Takeoff Toolbar The Color dialog will open

4 Click on a color in the Basic Color palette or create a color and add to the Custom Colors palette (Be sure to click on the color in the Custom Colors palette to select it)

5 Click the OK button

Object Properties

Linear Objects

Linear objects may be set to connect at corners

A linear object may be set to trim automatically when crossing another linear object (Check the trim option under the advanced tab of the Condition dialog)

When you move a connected linear object objects automatically move and resize connected lines accordingly (quantities are then recalculated)

This feature requires that the connected linear object be moved using the center handles (does not apply when resizing the line from the ends)

Objects constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

Objects are measured from centerline to centerline

Section 8 Advanced Features

57

Area Objects When drawing an area use your escape key to undo the last line drawn You may reverse your

drawing of an area using the escape key

The area will not fill with color and pattern until the user double-clicks after the last line is set

Lines drawn to delineate an area object constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

After selecting an area to move or adjust position the mouse in the center to move the entire area position the mouse at the sides or corners to adjust the perimeter

Count Objects

All count objects are quantified by the physical number of objects per page and reported as EA for the UOM The quantity for the current Image View is (displayed in the Condition List) and the total quantity in your project is displayed in the Takeoff View and Worksheet View)

Square circle rectangle and triangle shaped count objects do not displace or subtract from other object quantities when placed on top of them However on the Advanced Tab for the count condition a connect property can be set (this is a check box) so that when a count object of this shape is put on top of a Linear type takeoff object it will move with the linear if said linear is moved

An opened-shaped count object must be placed within a linear object Opening shaped count objects may also be measured by linear foot or linear yard (EA SF and SY are also options) Opening shaped count items default to a width of 3rsquo 0rdquo at the time of creation This size can be changed The small medium and large size are not options on this type of condition anymore Check Backout on the Advanced tab for each Count object back out the footage (or yardage) of opening-shaped count objects in which they are placed

NOTE In order to see this Backout functionality (in quantity) for SY or SF deductions at least one of the

results for the Linear(s) this object will be placed on must be set to SY or SF and the count object must have a height quantity

Advanced Features of Conditions The Round Feature Under the Advanced tab of the linear and area Condition dialogues you may specify quantity rounding (in inches) For linear objects rounding applies to each linear object drawn For area objects rounding will apply to each segment of the area perimeter adjusting the perimeter and area calculations For example With a linear condition entering 12 in the Round field will round up each related linear object to the nearest 12 inches or one foot With this setting two walls of 1 4 would each round to 2 0 totaling 4 0

NOTE In the Takeoff Dock bar condition list and in the On-Screen Takeoff reports quantities will be displayed in whole numbers rounded up to the nearest foot However calculations are based on true quantities without rounding unless the Round Feature is engaged

Pitch Pitch may apply either to linear or area conditions It is measured in rise per linear foot Entering 12 indicates a 12 rise per 12 of linear distance (a pitch of 12 over 12) or an angle of 45deg

Section 8 Advanced Features

58

Advanced Features of Project Properties Selecting Multiple Pages

1 Select a single page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry

2 Drag the cursor down the column of numbers to select consecutive pages

3 Click on the blank button at the top of this column to select all pages in the Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

59

Changing Image Assigned to a Drawing 1 Select the page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry 2 Click the Change Image button The Change Image dialog box will appear

3 Navigate to the desired file and select by clicking on it

4 Click the Open button The electronic file assigned to the page will have been changed to reflect the new file choice

Changing Image File Path 1 Select pages as described above

2 Choose Change Folder

3 In the Change Folder dialog navigate to the appropriate folder

4 Click the OK button The file path will have been changed for the selected page entries

Delete a Page from Project Properties 1 Select the page you want to delete by clicking on its associated number (in the gray box at the

left of the entry)

2 Choose Delete Page

All Takeoff on the page will be deleted immediately and permanently

Section 8 Advanced Features

60

Advanced Features of Tool Options

Calculation Method On-Screen Takeoff has built-in calculation options to allow for faster work and faster saves until your takeoff is complete Calculation options are found by selecting Tools gt Options then clicking on the Calculation tab

Calculation method can be set to Automatic Automatic except Grids and Manual Manual will allow the program to operate more quickly while Automatic or Automatic except Grids allows the user to see quantity changes as takeoffs are made

In any mode you may press F9 to recalculate quantities for the On-Screen Takeoff current totals

Configuration Tab

When the ldquoPage Label (A01)rdquo radial button is chosen On-Screen Takeoff puts the numbered label on all the pages of in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar If the Page Descriptionrdquo radial button is chosen then a description of what takeoff is on that specific page will be shown in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar

This section of the configuration tab gives you options on how you want to export your information When the ldquoFolderSubfolder Namesrdquo radial button is chosen than on your file that you are exporting to will have all the conditions folders and subfolders In the Delimiter box you can choose the symbol that is needed to separate the information you are exporting Some files need semicolons () or colons () to make sure the information comes exported in is separated it the appropriate places

Section 8 Advanced Features

61

In previous versions of On-Screen Takeoff there are views that users need to have in order for them to display their information By either choosing ldquoOST 1xrdquo or ldquoOST 2xrdquo it will let the program know you want your columns of information exported in that specific format

When you have the Confirm Deletions radial button of ldquoYesrdquo chosen than every time you delete anything you will get a dialog box confirming your intentions of deletion

While working with your takeoff you have a choice to either view the legend of your conditions or hide it Choose whichever radial button that suits your needs

For those who prefer to use the Enter key to navigate in dialog boxes this option is just for that

Font Tab The Font tab is designed for you to make your own look and feel for the application At the bottom of this tab it will show you sample of the fonts and colors you have chosen

Renaming the Current Page You may change the name of the current page in the takeoff area of On-Screen Takeoff by selecting Edit gt Rename Page

This opens the Name Page dialog and you may simply type in a new name and click the Enter button The new name for the file will be reflected on the title bar for the page and in Project Properties

You also may access the Rename Page function by right-clicking in the takeoff area while in Image View and selecting the option from the pop-up menu that appears

Section 9

62

Saving and Exiting

This section will

Explain how to save projects

Show you how to safely exit the program

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

63

Saving Your Project

1 Select File gt Save 2 If your project has not previously been saved a Save dialog box will open to allow you to name

the file and choose the directory and folder in which to save your file 3 Once saved File gt Save will simply save the current version of the file

OR

4 Select File gt Save As then type in a new name for the file and save to the desired file path

The Auto-save Feature With the Auto-save feature On-Screen Takeoff automatically backs up your open project You may choose to have more than one level of backup files The first backup copy will have the extension b00 and successive files will be b01 b02 and so on If you have designated four levels of backup files after the fourth backup copy has been created (b03) the next file will be saved over the file with extension b00 Further backup saves will then rotate through the four backup files in the same way

1 Select Tools gt Options 2 In the Auto-save area (under the General tab) select the frequency of backup file creation (in

minutes) and the number of levels for the feature 3 You also may disengage the feature by clicking in the check box to clear it

The Auto-save feature automatically saves backup copies to the directory of the current project If you are working from a write-protected area such as a CD-ROM On-Screen Takeoff will place backup files in the On-Screen Takeoff folder

Exiting When you are finished using On-Screen Takeoff it is very easy to exit Exiting is very important because of security reasons If someone were to use your computer they could enter the application and view and manipulate information

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

64

On-Screen Takeoff closes the open project when you open another or create a new project or when you exit the program

1 Select File gt Exit

OR

2 You also may click at the upper right-hand corner of the application to exit

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

65

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer When you get your digitizer from GTCO you will need to connect it to your computer Follow the instructions outlined below to do this

Note For rollup digitizers the metal bar must be oriented to the top or right hand side

Connecting the Digitizer 1 Lay the digitizer out flat 2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer 3 Plug in the power adapter 4 Plug the interface (IO) cable into the digitizer 5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into an open serial port on computer

Note GTCO Technical support phone number is 410-381-6688 The electronic manual (on diskette) from GTCO contains more detailed installation and operation instructions for the GTCO digitizer model you have

Installing other Digitizer Drivers If you are using a GTCO Digitizer you will need to install the GTCO TabletWorks Drivers

If you are using a Digitizer not supported by GTCO Tablet Works 10 please contact the manufacturer of your digitizer for assistance with installation

Installing GTCO TabletWorks Drivers 1 Insert the On Center CD into the CD-ROM drive The CD Startup screen will open 2 Click on Install Software 3 Select Additional Software and Drivers 4 Select Digitizer Driver 5 Follow the instructions for installing TabletWorks 10

Adhering the Template The template is a small plastic sticker used to enable mouse function when using the digitizer with On-Screen Takeoff Place your template on your digitizer We suggest placing it in the bottom right corner of the digitizer about one inch inside the takeoff area

Note You may either peel off the back of the template and use the adhesive surface or you can tape the template down

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

66

Testing the Digitizer Drivers Before running OST you may test the digitizer by moving the stylus around on the digitizer pad it should move the mouse cursor (if mouse emulation is enabled)

If the digitizer does not move the mouse cursor on the screen

The superset codes may need to be reset Reset the superset codes by touching on the border of the digitizer with the stylus The digitizer should beep several times

The digitizer may not be communicating with the computer Be sure the COM port selected is correct Be sure the COM port selected is correct If you are not able to get the digitizer to move the mouse cursor you need to call GTCO technical support for help

Note The Mouse Emulation is not required for On-Screen Takeoff to work properly It is used only for the Template functionality if the digitizer is moving the cursor the wrong direction (up instead of sideways or vice-versa)

Click the L-shaped arrow symbol on the digitizer with the stylus

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

67

Appendix II Toolbar Items Main Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

68

Tool Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

69

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

70

Navigate Toolbar (Continued)

Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

71

Takeoff Toolbar (Continued)

Image Toolbar

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

72

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

This section will detail how to load plans from a F W Dodge CD-ROM into an On-Screen Takeoff project file ready for takeoffs

Dodge files may be added to the Project Properties dialog However loading the files in that way will load the files by number rather than name description If you want to load one page only from your Dodge CD You will have to rename the page to display the name rather than number of the file

To load plan files from a Dodge CD so that the files load sequentially by file number but are displayed by name rather than by number within your project follow the instructions below

Opening a Dodge project from a CD-ROM 1 Insert the CD into the drive 2 Choose File gt Custom 3 Choose Dodge Plans Project (plansdat) as the file type 4 Select the appropriate file type by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the Files of type

field 5 In the Look in field access your drive paths by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the

field then

Navigate to your CD-ROM drive Open the data folder and Open the Projects folder

6 Select the desired project and open its folder 7 Open the plansdat file 8 All the images will come in sequenced correctly for that job along with the full descriptions

(names) of each page If there is not a plans folder in the project folder then plans do not exist for that project on the CD Opening the plansdat file will yield an empty project

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

73

Appendix IV Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer The On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer is a limited version of On Center Softwarersquos commercial takeoff software If your status bar located at the very bottom of the main window says View Mode in the lower left-hand corner then you are using the Plan Viewer You can use the plan viewer to

View CD-based amp converted CAD drawings

View a previously created OST file and associated drawings

Download electronic plans online

Navigate through drawings

Quickly Takeoff linearsareas and counts

Zoom in to view the plan better

Print drawings directly from the viewer

Viewing an On-Screen Takeoff Project File

1 To open an OST file that was previously created with of On-Screen Takeoff 2 Select File gt Open 3 An Open dialog will appear if you do not see the OST file you are looking for select the

Look In drop down arrow 4 A drop down menu will appear listing the various folders drives and mapped drives located

on your computer select the correct drive or folder location and continue to browse to the location of your OST file

5 When you see your OST file double-click it to open it 6 Any takeoff and drawings should appear on the Image tab view

If you do not see the drawings but do see the colored takeoff layer the drawings may

not be located in the same place they were originally saved at Go to File gt Project Properties and check the Image File path for each listed page If the image file path is pointing to a CD drive make sure the CD is inside the CR-ROM

Downloading Electronic Plans If your Online Plan Service provides a special file format (OSX) required to use this feature of our plan viewer you can immediately downloaded all electronic plans of a project directly from our viewer

Most Plan Room web sites will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff when a request to download plans is made Your particular Plan Room may differ in operation so please contact the provider directly with questions on using the site

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

74

When you request to download or open a project file from a Plan Room you will usually have the open to open or save an OSX file Choosing open will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff Alternately you may choose to save the file to a local hard drive After you have saved the file either double-click it to launch On-Screen Takeoff or open the OSX file using On-Screen Takeoff by clicking File then Open and locating the file on your hard drive You will need to change the file type to OSX

After the OSX file is opened you will see an additional tab appear in the Conditions List window called Pages

The Pages tab shows the hierarchy of your project Gray file icons represent pages that have not been downloaded and blue icons represents pages that have been downloaded

To download a page simply double-click the page icon

If you wish to select a group of pages to download you can use the Ctrl or Shift key to multiple select them then click the Download button

If you wish to download all pages at once click the Download All button

Downloaded pages will now appear in the Project Properties dialog in the same order in which they appear in the Pages tab

Creating Quick Takeoffs With On-Screen Takeoff you can create quick takeoffs to measure quantities even if you dont have the full version of our program However using the Quick Takeoff functionality shows you just a fraction of what the full version can do

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar is located at the top of the image view It has three buttons designated for three types of takeoffs Linear Area and Count The Quantity drop down list will show secondary quantities for Linears and Areas The Units drop down allows you to select how you want your quantities displayed Feet Inches Yards Millimeters and Meters

NOTE Every time change the type of takeoff you are performing (switching from Area to Linear for example) the previous quantities and takeoff objects will disappear They will also disappear when you changes pages

NOTE You can use the Dimension Tool to basically measure the distance between two points or linears The distance will display on the status bar at the bottom of the application

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

75

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions General

Where is On-Screen Takeoff installed on my computer

Typically it is installed in CProgram FilesOn-Screen Takeoff

In Explorer how do I recognize On-Screen Takeoff file types

On-Screen Takeoff data is stored in a single file per job lsquojob name OSTrsquo On-Screen Takeoff templates are stored as lsquotemplate nameTPOrsquo

Can only one project at a time be open

Yes For that reason opening another project automatically closes the project on screen You will be asked to save any changes

Is only one scale allowed per page What about on drawings that have multiple detail sections on a page and each of those drawings have different scales

Yes For pages with drawings of different scales copy the drawing to another project page and set the appropriate scale

I cannot perform backout on an area that is along a linear

As a workaround use the On-Screen Takeoff layers feature to help you with this issue Electronic Images

How do I start a project from drawings that have been scanned and written to a CD-ROM

Open a new project Select File gt Project Properties and select Auto Add Navigate to your CD and the appropriate folder and select any image file in that location Click Open All files in the location will load into your project Recommended that images are copied from CD to hard drive for performance

If I get a disk of drawings in AutoCAD format (R13 or R14) can I read them in On-Screen Takeoff

Yes On-Screen Takeoff now reads DWG DXF and many other format that are saved with AutoCAD

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

76

When I click on the all pages button what is supposed to happen Currently nothing seems to change when I click on that button

The All Pages button is used to apply the Darken and Enhance Plans feature to all pages in the project (as opposed to only the current page on screen)

Is there a way to deduct a large skylight from an area condition

Yes with the related area condition selected in the Takeoff Dock bar unselect the Backout button on the Takeoff Toolbar then draw the Backout area The area quantity will be deducted from the related condition object and the linear measurement of the Backout perimeter will be added

Digitizer Issues

How do I connect a Digitizer to the computer

See Appendix I Connecting a Digitizer

The Place Template menu choice is disabled

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or the digitizer or the digitzer drivers are not installed

It wonrsquot let me select the Set Takeoff Area menu choice

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or no job is open a digitizer is not installed or the drivers are not installed

The digitizer stylus is not moving the cursor or crosshairs

Click S-0-1 superset on the digitizer

How do I convert my old GTCO Digitizer to work with On- Screen Takeofftrade

Call GTCO and they may be able to reconfigure your digitizer to be compatible with On-Screen Takeoff

Printing Issues Which Printers work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible printers include On-Screen Takeoff Hewlett Packard Epson and Canon printers If you are having printer difficulties please contact support and specify the type of printer along with other pertinent information Contact support at wwwoncentercomsupport or email supportoncentercom

Which Plotters work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible Plotters include Hewlett Packard DesignJet plotters and the EnCAD Cadjet II If you are having plotter difficulties please contact support and specify the type of plotter concerned

ViewingDisplay I can no longer see my condition list How do I get it back

The toolbars and Dock bars can be turned on and off through the View gt Toolbars menu options

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

77

This is also accessible by right-clicking in the toolbar area and selecting (or deselecting) a toolbar listed

I cannot view my folders in the condition list

Right-click in the Takeoff Dock barcondition list area and select Show Tree to display your folders

My Status Bar reads Viewer Mode and I am unable to draw conditions

On-Screen Takeoff needs to be Authorized Or you need to purchase an upgrade Click the Perform Advanced Takeoff button on the main toolbar

I hid a Dock bar and when I selected to view it again it appeared alongside the other Dock

bar instead of stacked on top of it How do I fix it

Pick up the Dock bar by clicking on the bar at the top and continuing to hold down the mouse button drag the Dock bar over the other one It will resize and appear stacked with the other

When I open image files from a CD the images are all upside down How do I get them right

side up

To flip pages from top to bottom follow the steps below 1 Click the All Pages button on the Image Toolbar (All Pages is engaged when the button

is not clicked) 2 Click the Flip Horizontal button on the Image Toolbar 3 Click the All Pages button again to disengage

Templates How do I create a Template

Follow the steps below 1 Create a typical project 2 Choose File gt Save As 3 Choose On-Screen Takeoff Template Files as the file type to save 4 Name the file This will save all of the condition setups as well as the layers for the

project

How do I create a new project from a template

Follow the steps below 1 Choose File gt New 2 Select a template from those listed in the New dialog This will open a new project with

conditions and layers saved from a previous project but no pages or takeoff

78

INDEX

Area Conditions 32

Area Objects 57

Auto Scrolling 20

Auto-save 63

Backout Mode 41

Calculation Method 60

Conditions 29

Configuration 60

Contents Tab 6

Continuous Mode 38

Count Conditions 33

Count Objects 57

Digitizer 10 65 76

Docking Toolbars 13

Dodge CD 72

Drawing 27 37

DropRun Count 55

Environment 18

Exiting 63

Exporting 49

Features 16

Font 61

Frequently Asked Questions 75

Grid 40

Help File 5

Hiding Toolbars 13

Hot Links 21

Image 19 59

Image files 9

Image Toolbar 12 71

Images 75

Index Tab 6

Layers 43

Linear Conditions 31

Linear Objects 56

Main Toolbar 12 67

Menus 14

Moving Toolbars 13

Navigate Toolbar 12 69

Navigating 20

On-Screen Takeofftrade 2

Page 59 61

Pages 20 25 28

Plan Viewer 73

Plans 26

Printing 47 76

Project Properties 25

Projects 22

Quick Start Video 18

Resizing Toolbars 13

Roping 54

Saving 63

Scale 28

Search Tab 7

Selecting Objects 42

Setup 8

Start On-Screen Takeofftrade 17

System Requirements 9

Takeoff 19 27

Takeoff Toolbar 70 71

Takeoff Toolbar 12

Template Files 23

TIF (Group4) 9

Tool Toolbar 12 68

Toolbar 67

Toolbars 12

View Toolbar 12 69

Viewing Toolbars 12

Worksheet 20

Zone Conditions 33

Zoom Toolbar 12 69

  • On-Screen Takeoff Lite
  • Table of Contents
  • Section 1 - Introduction
  • Section 2 - Setup
  • Section 3 - Toolbars and Menus
  • Section 4 - Features
  • Section 5 - Projects
  • Section 6 - Conditions and Takeoff
  • Section 7 - Printing and Exporting
  • Section 8 - Advanced Features
  • Section 9 - Saving and Exiting
  • Appendix I - Installing Your Digitizer
  • Appendix II - Toolbar Items
  • Appendix III - Loading Plans from a Dodge CD
  • Appendix IV - Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer
  • Appendix V - Frequently Asked Questions
  • Index

Section 8 Advanced Features

55

Applying a DropRun Count

Use the droprun feature when calculating quantities to take into account the drop or run of a linear condition such as electrical lines or plumbing pipes Drop or run lengths may be added separately to any linear condition on screen while a default droprun length may be indicated for a condition as a whole

1 Select the desired linear condition from the Condition List in the Takeoff Dock bar

2 Click the Change button in the toolbar to open the Change Condition dialog

3 Click the Advanced tab to access the advanced options and click inside the DropRun check box

4 Enter a default length to be applied to all of this condition Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches) You can leave the length blank and manually enter drop run on each segment drawn

5 Click the OK button to accept and close the dialog

Edit DropRun Count

1 With the related linear condition in the Takeoff Dock bar highlighted or with the pointer tool selected

2 click on the desired linear object in the image takeoff area The Count button will become active

3 Click on the Count button (alternatively select Tools gt Count) The default droprun amount will show in the pop-up Count dialog (Default length will be zero if droprun has not been selected in this conditionrsquos properties)

4 Type in the desired length Entering 800 will be interpreted as 8 0 (You must enter both place markers for inches)

5 Click the OK button The additional amount will be reflected in the corresponding quantity The new DropRun count will apply only to the object edited

Adding Text in Image View

On-Screen Takeoff allows you to place text comments around your quantity takeoffs that may be printed along with plan images and objects Text is automatically placed within the Annotation Layer (that includes text and hot links)

1 To place text on the image select the Text Tool and click at the point you want to place your text opening a text box

2 Type in your information clicking Enter for line breaks

3 When you are finished click the OK button to exit the text box

4 To reposition text simply click on the text (with the Text Tool active) to select it

5 Move the cursor over the text the cursor will now display as a four-way arrow

6 Click and drag the mouse to position the text as desired

Section 8 Advanced Features

56

1 To edit existing text use the Text Tool to double-click on the text to open the editing box

2 Enter additional text or use the Backspace key to delete text as necessary

Formatting Text Once created you may format the font size type style and color of your text

1 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Font or click on the Font button in the Takeoff Toolbar

2 Select the desired features (color options are disabled) and click the OK button

3 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Color or click on the Color button in the Takeoff Toolbar The Color dialog will open

4 Click on a color in the Basic Color palette or create a color and add to the Custom Colors palette (Be sure to click on the color in the Custom Colors palette to select it)

5 Click the OK button

Object Properties

Linear Objects

Linear objects may be set to connect at corners

A linear object may be set to trim automatically when crossing another linear object (Check the trim option under the advanced tab of the Condition dialog)

When you move a connected linear object objects automatically move and resize connected lines accordingly (quantities are then recalculated)

This feature requires that the connected linear object be moved using the center handles (does not apply when resizing the line from the ends)

Objects constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

Objects are measured from centerline to centerline

Section 8 Advanced Features

57

Area Objects When drawing an area use your escape key to undo the last line drawn You may reverse your

drawing of an area using the escape key

The area will not fill with color and pattern until the user double-clicks after the last line is set

Lines drawn to delineate an area object constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

After selecting an area to move or adjust position the mouse in the center to move the entire area position the mouse at the sides or corners to adjust the perimeter

Count Objects

All count objects are quantified by the physical number of objects per page and reported as EA for the UOM The quantity for the current Image View is (displayed in the Condition List) and the total quantity in your project is displayed in the Takeoff View and Worksheet View)

Square circle rectangle and triangle shaped count objects do not displace or subtract from other object quantities when placed on top of them However on the Advanced Tab for the count condition a connect property can be set (this is a check box) so that when a count object of this shape is put on top of a Linear type takeoff object it will move with the linear if said linear is moved

An opened-shaped count object must be placed within a linear object Opening shaped count objects may also be measured by linear foot or linear yard (EA SF and SY are also options) Opening shaped count items default to a width of 3rsquo 0rdquo at the time of creation This size can be changed The small medium and large size are not options on this type of condition anymore Check Backout on the Advanced tab for each Count object back out the footage (or yardage) of opening-shaped count objects in which they are placed

NOTE In order to see this Backout functionality (in quantity) for SY or SF deductions at least one of the

results for the Linear(s) this object will be placed on must be set to SY or SF and the count object must have a height quantity

Advanced Features of Conditions The Round Feature Under the Advanced tab of the linear and area Condition dialogues you may specify quantity rounding (in inches) For linear objects rounding applies to each linear object drawn For area objects rounding will apply to each segment of the area perimeter adjusting the perimeter and area calculations For example With a linear condition entering 12 in the Round field will round up each related linear object to the nearest 12 inches or one foot With this setting two walls of 1 4 would each round to 2 0 totaling 4 0

NOTE In the Takeoff Dock bar condition list and in the On-Screen Takeoff reports quantities will be displayed in whole numbers rounded up to the nearest foot However calculations are based on true quantities without rounding unless the Round Feature is engaged

Pitch Pitch may apply either to linear or area conditions It is measured in rise per linear foot Entering 12 indicates a 12 rise per 12 of linear distance (a pitch of 12 over 12) or an angle of 45deg

Section 8 Advanced Features

58

Advanced Features of Project Properties Selecting Multiple Pages

1 Select a single page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry

2 Drag the cursor down the column of numbers to select consecutive pages

3 Click on the blank button at the top of this column to select all pages in the Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

59

Changing Image Assigned to a Drawing 1 Select the page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry 2 Click the Change Image button The Change Image dialog box will appear

3 Navigate to the desired file and select by clicking on it

4 Click the Open button The electronic file assigned to the page will have been changed to reflect the new file choice

Changing Image File Path 1 Select pages as described above

2 Choose Change Folder

3 In the Change Folder dialog navigate to the appropriate folder

4 Click the OK button The file path will have been changed for the selected page entries

Delete a Page from Project Properties 1 Select the page you want to delete by clicking on its associated number (in the gray box at the

left of the entry)

2 Choose Delete Page

All Takeoff on the page will be deleted immediately and permanently

Section 8 Advanced Features

60

Advanced Features of Tool Options

Calculation Method On-Screen Takeoff has built-in calculation options to allow for faster work and faster saves until your takeoff is complete Calculation options are found by selecting Tools gt Options then clicking on the Calculation tab

Calculation method can be set to Automatic Automatic except Grids and Manual Manual will allow the program to operate more quickly while Automatic or Automatic except Grids allows the user to see quantity changes as takeoffs are made

In any mode you may press F9 to recalculate quantities for the On-Screen Takeoff current totals

Configuration Tab

When the ldquoPage Label (A01)rdquo radial button is chosen On-Screen Takeoff puts the numbered label on all the pages of in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar If the Page Descriptionrdquo radial button is chosen then a description of what takeoff is on that specific page will be shown in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar

This section of the configuration tab gives you options on how you want to export your information When the ldquoFolderSubfolder Namesrdquo radial button is chosen than on your file that you are exporting to will have all the conditions folders and subfolders In the Delimiter box you can choose the symbol that is needed to separate the information you are exporting Some files need semicolons () or colons () to make sure the information comes exported in is separated it the appropriate places

Section 8 Advanced Features

61

In previous versions of On-Screen Takeoff there are views that users need to have in order for them to display their information By either choosing ldquoOST 1xrdquo or ldquoOST 2xrdquo it will let the program know you want your columns of information exported in that specific format

When you have the Confirm Deletions radial button of ldquoYesrdquo chosen than every time you delete anything you will get a dialog box confirming your intentions of deletion

While working with your takeoff you have a choice to either view the legend of your conditions or hide it Choose whichever radial button that suits your needs

For those who prefer to use the Enter key to navigate in dialog boxes this option is just for that

Font Tab The Font tab is designed for you to make your own look and feel for the application At the bottom of this tab it will show you sample of the fonts and colors you have chosen

Renaming the Current Page You may change the name of the current page in the takeoff area of On-Screen Takeoff by selecting Edit gt Rename Page

This opens the Name Page dialog and you may simply type in a new name and click the Enter button The new name for the file will be reflected on the title bar for the page and in Project Properties

You also may access the Rename Page function by right-clicking in the takeoff area while in Image View and selecting the option from the pop-up menu that appears

Section 9

62

Saving and Exiting

This section will

Explain how to save projects

Show you how to safely exit the program

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

63

Saving Your Project

1 Select File gt Save 2 If your project has not previously been saved a Save dialog box will open to allow you to name

the file and choose the directory and folder in which to save your file 3 Once saved File gt Save will simply save the current version of the file

OR

4 Select File gt Save As then type in a new name for the file and save to the desired file path

The Auto-save Feature With the Auto-save feature On-Screen Takeoff automatically backs up your open project You may choose to have more than one level of backup files The first backup copy will have the extension b00 and successive files will be b01 b02 and so on If you have designated four levels of backup files after the fourth backup copy has been created (b03) the next file will be saved over the file with extension b00 Further backup saves will then rotate through the four backup files in the same way

1 Select Tools gt Options 2 In the Auto-save area (under the General tab) select the frequency of backup file creation (in

minutes) and the number of levels for the feature 3 You also may disengage the feature by clicking in the check box to clear it

The Auto-save feature automatically saves backup copies to the directory of the current project If you are working from a write-protected area such as a CD-ROM On-Screen Takeoff will place backup files in the On-Screen Takeoff folder

Exiting When you are finished using On-Screen Takeoff it is very easy to exit Exiting is very important because of security reasons If someone were to use your computer they could enter the application and view and manipulate information

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

64

On-Screen Takeoff closes the open project when you open another or create a new project or when you exit the program

1 Select File gt Exit

OR

2 You also may click at the upper right-hand corner of the application to exit

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

65

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer When you get your digitizer from GTCO you will need to connect it to your computer Follow the instructions outlined below to do this

Note For rollup digitizers the metal bar must be oriented to the top or right hand side

Connecting the Digitizer 1 Lay the digitizer out flat 2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer 3 Plug in the power adapter 4 Plug the interface (IO) cable into the digitizer 5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into an open serial port on computer

Note GTCO Technical support phone number is 410-381-6688 The electronic manual (on diskette) from GTCO contains more detailed installation and operation instructions for the GTCO digitizer model you have

Installing other Digitizer Drivers If you are using a GTCO Digitizer you will need to install the GTCO TabletWorks Drivers

If you are using a Digitizer not supported by GTCO Tablet Works 10 please contact the manufacturer of your digitizer for assistance with installation

Installing GTCO TabletWorks Drivers 1 Insert the On Center CD into the CD-ROM drive The CD Startup screen will open 2 Click on Install Software 3 Select Additional Software and Drivers 4 Select Digitizer Driver 5 Follow the instructions for installing TabletWorks 10

Adhering the Template The template is a small plastic sticker used to enable mouse function when using the digitizer with On-Screen Takeoff Place your template on your digitizer We suggest placing it in the bottom right corner of the digitizer about one inch inside the takeoff area

Note You may either peel off the back of the template and use the adhesive surface or you can tape the template down

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

66

Testing the Digitizer Drivers Before running OST you may test the digitizer by moving the stylus around on the digitizer pad it should move the mouse cursor (if mouse emulation is enabled)

If the digitizer does not move the mouse cursor on the screen

The superset codes may need to be reset Reset the superset codes by touching on the border of the digitizer with the stylus The digitizer should beep several times

The digitizer may not be communicating with the computer Be sure the COM port selected is correct Be sure the COM port selected is correct If you are not able to get the digitizer to move the mouse cursor you need to call GTCO technical support for help

Note The Mouse Emulation is not required for On-Screen Takeoff to work properly It is used only for the Template functionality if the digitizer is moving the cursor the wrong direction (up instead of sideways or vice-versa)

Click the L-shaped arrow symbol on the digitizer with the stylus

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

67

Appendix II Toolbar Items Main Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

68

Tool Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

69

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

70

Navigate Toolbar (Continued)

Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

71

Takeoff Toolbar (Continued)

Image Toolbar

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

72

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

This section will detail how to load plans from a F W Dodge CD-ROM into an On-Screen Takeoff project file ready for takeoffs

Dodge files may be added to the Project Properties dialog However loading the files in that way will load the files by number rather than name description If you want to load one page only from your Dodge CD You will have to rename the page to display the name rather than number of the file

To load plan files from a Dodge CD so that the files load sequentially by file number but are displayed by name rather than by number within your project follow the instructions below

Opening a Dodge project from a CD-ROM 1 Insert the CD into the drive 2 Choose File gt Custom 3 Choose Dodge Plans Project (plansdat) as the file type 4 Select the appropriate file type by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the Files of type

field 5 In the Look in field access your drive paths by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the

field then

Navigate to your CD-ROM drive Open the data folder and Open the Projects folder

6 Select the desired project and open its folder 7 Open the plansdat file 8 All the images will come in sequenced correctly for that job along with the full descriptions

(names) of each page If there is not a plans folder in the project folder then plans do not exist for that project on the CD Opening the plansdat file will yield an empty project

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

73

Appendix IV Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer The On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer is a limited version of On Center Softwarersquos commercial takeoff software If your status bar located at the very bottom of the main window says View Mode in the lower left-hand corner then you are using the Plan Viewer You can use the plan viewer to

View CD-based amp converted CAD drawings

View a previously created OST file and associated drawings

Download electronic plans online

Navigate through drawings

Quickly Takeoff linearsareas and counts

Zoom in to view the plan better

Print drawings directly from the viewer

Viewing an On-Screen Takeoff Project File

1 To open an OST file that was previously created with of On-Screen Takeoff 2 Select File gt Open 3 An Open dialog will appear if you do not see the OST file you are looking for select the

Look In drop down arrow 4 A drop down menu will appear listing the various folders drives and mapped drives located

on your computer select the correct drive or folder location and continue to browse to the location of your OST file

5 When you see your OST file double-click it to open it 6 Any takeoff and drawings should appear on the Image tab view

If you do not see the drawings but do see the colored takeoff layer the drawings may

not be located in the same place they were originally saved at Go to File gt Project Properties and check the Image File path for each listed page If the image file path is pointing to a CD drive make sure the CD is inside the CR-ROM

Downloading Electronic Plans If your Online Plan Service provides a special file format (OSX) required to use this feature of our plan viewer you can immediately downloaded all electronic plans of a project directly from our viewer

Most Plan Room web sites will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff when a request to download plans is made Your particular Plan Room may differ in operation so please contact the provider directly with questions on using the site

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

74

When you request to download or open a project file from a Plan Room you will usually have the open to open or save an OSX file Choosing open will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff Alternately you may choose to save the file to a local hard drive After you have saved the file either double-click it to launch On-Screen Takeoff or open the OSX file using On-Screen Takeoff by clicking File then Open and locating the file on your hard drive You will need to change the file type to OSX

After the OSX file is opened you will see an additional tab appear in the Conditions List window called Pages

The Pages tab shows the hierarchy of your project Gray file icons represent pages that have not been downloaded and blue icons represents pages that have been downloaded

To download a page simply double-click the page icon

If you wish to select a group of pages to download you can use the Ctrl or Shift key to multiple select them then click the Download button

If you wish to download all pages at once click the Download All button

Downloaded pages will now appear in the Project Properties dialog in the same order in which they appear in the Pages tab

Creating Quick Takeoffs With On-Screen Takeoff you can create quick takeoffs to measure quantities even if you dont have the full version of our program However using the Quick Takeoff functionality shows you just a fraction of what the full version can do

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar is located at the top of the image view It has three buttons designated for three types of takeoffs Linear Area and Count The Quantity drop down list will show secondary quantities for Linears and Areas The Units drop down allows you to select how you want your quantities displayed Feet Inches Yards Millimeters and Meters

NOTE Every time change the type of takeoff you are performing (switching from Area to Linear for example) the previous quantities and takeoff objects will disappear They will also disappear when you changes pages

NOTE You can use the Dimension Tool to basically measure the distance between two points or linears The distance will display on the status bar at the bottom of the application

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

75

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions General

Where is On-Screen Takeoff installed on my computer

Typically it is installed in CProgram FilesOn-Screen Takeoff

In Explorer how do I recognize On-Screen Takeoff file types

On-Screen Takeoff data is stored in a single file per job lsquojob name OSTrsquo On-Screen Takeoff templates are stored as lsquotemplate nameTPOrsquo

Can only one project at a time be open

Yes For that reason opening another project automatically closes the project on screen You will be asked to save any changes

Is only one scale allowed per page What about on drawings that have multiple detail sections on a page and each of those drawings have different scales

Yes For pages with drawings of different scales copy the drawing to another project page and set the appropriate scale

I cannot perform backout on an area that is along a linear

As a workaround use the On-Screen Takeoff layers feature to help you with this issue Electronic Images

How do I start a project from drawings that have been scanned and written to a CD-ROM

Open a new project Select File gt Project Properties and select Auto Add Navigate to your CD and the appropriate folder and select any image file in that location Click Open All files in the location will load into your project Recommended that images are copied from CD to hard drive for performance

If I get a disk of drawings in AutoCAD format (R13 or R14) can I read them in On-Screen Takeoff

Yes On-Screen Takeoff now reads DWG DXF and many other format that are saved with AutoCAD

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

76

When I click on the all pages button what is supposed to happen Currently nothing seems to change when I click on that button

The All Pages button is used to apply the Darken and Enhance Plans feature to all pages in the project (as opposed to only the current page on screen)

Is there a way to deduct a large skylight from an area condition

Yes with the related area condition selected in the Takeoff Dock bar unselect the Backout button on the Takeoff Toolbar then draw the Backout area The area quantity will be deducted from the related condition object and the linear measurement of the Backout perimeter will be added

Digitizer Issues

How do I connect a Digitizer to the computer

See Appendix I Connecting a Digitizer

The Place Template menu choice is disabled

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or the digitizer or the digitzer drivers are not installed

It wonrsquot let me select the Set Takeoff Area menu choice

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or no job is open a digitizer is not installed or the drivers are not installed

The digitizer stylus is not moving the cursor or crosshairs

Click S-0-1 superset on the digitizer

How do I convert my old GTCO Digitizer to work with On- Screen Takeofftrade

Call GTCO and they may be able to reconfigure your digitizer to be compatible with On-Screen Takeoff

Printing Issues Which Printers work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible printers include On-Screen Takeoff Hewlett Packard Epson and Canon printers If you are having printer difficulties please contact support and specify the type of printer along with other pertinent information Contact support at wwwoncentercomsupport or email supportoncentercom

Which Plotters work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible Plotters include Hewlett Packard DesignJet plotters and the EnCAD Cadjet II If you are having plotter difficulties please contact support and specify the type of plotter concerned

ViewingDisplay I can no longer see my condition list How do I get it back

The toolbars and Dock bars can be turned on and off through the View gt Toolbars menu options

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

77

This is also accessible by right-clicking in the toolbar area and selecting (or deselecting) a toolbar listed

I cannot view my folders in the condition list

Right-click in the Takeoff Dock barcondition list area and select Show Tree to display your folders

My Status Bar reads Viewer Mode and I am unable to draw conditions

On-Screen Takeoff needs to be Authorized Or you need to purchase an upgrade Click the Perform Advanced Takeoff button on the main toolbar

I hid a Dock bar and when I selected to view it again it appeared alongside the other Dock

bar instead of stacked on top of it How do I fix it

Pick up the Dock bar by clicking on the bar at the top and continuing to hold down the mouse button drag the Dock bar over the other one It will resize and appear stacked with the other

When I open image files from a CD the images are all upside down How do I get them right

side up

To flip pages from top to bottom follow the steps below 1 Click the All Pages button on the Image Toolbar (All Pages is engaged when the button

is not clicked) 2 Click the Flip Horizontal button on the Image Toolbar 3 Click the All Pages button again to disengage

Templates How do I create a Template

Follow the steps below 1 Create a typical project 2 Choose File gt Save As 3 Choose On-Screen Takeoff Template Files as the file type to save 4 Name the file This will save all of the condition setups as well as the layers for the

project

How do I create a new project from a template

Follow the steps below 1 Choose File gt New 2 Select a template from those listed in the New dialog This will open a new project with

conditions and layers saved from a previous project but no pages or takeoff

78

INDEX

Area Conditions 32

Area Objects 57

Auto Scrolling 20

Auto-save 63

Backout Mode 41

Calculation Method 60

Conditions 29

Configuration 60

Contents Tab 6

Continuous Mode 38

Count Conditions 33

Count Objects 57

Digitizer 10 65 76

Docking Toolbars 13

Dodge CD 72

Drawing 27 37

DropRun Count 55

Environment 18

Exiting 63

Exporting 49

Features 16

Font 61

Frequently Asked Questions 75

Grid 40

Help File 5

Hiding Toolbars 13

Hot Links 21

Image 19 59

Image files 9

Image Toolbar 12 71

Images 75

Index Tab 6

Layers 43

Linear Conditions 31

Linear Objects 56

Main Toolbar 12 67

Menus 14

Moving Toolbars 13

Navigate Toolbar 12 69

Navigating 20

On-Screen Takeofftrade 2

Page 59 61

Pages 20 25 28

Plan Viewer 73

Plans 26

Printing 47 76

Project Properties 25

Projects 22

Quick Start Video 18

Resizing Toolbars 13

Roping 54

Saving 63

Scale 28

Search Tab 7

Selecting Objects 42

Setup 8

Start On-Screen Takeofftrade 17

System Requirements 9

Takeoff 19 27

Takeoff Toolbar 70 71

Takeoff Toolbar 12

Template Files 23

TIF (Group4) 9

Tool Toolbar 12 68

Toolbar 67

Toolbars 12

View Toolbar 12 69

Viewing Toolbars 12

Worksheet 20

Zone Conditions 33

Zoom Toolbar 12 69

  • On-Screen Takeoff Lite
  • Table of Contents
  • Section 1 - Introduction
  • Section 2 - Setup
  • Section 3 - Toolbars and Menus
  • Section 4 - Features
  • Section 5 - Projects
  • Section 6 - Conditions and Takeoff
  • Section 7 - Printing and Exporting
  • Section 8 - Advanced Features
  • Section 9 - Saving and Exiting
  • Appendix I - Installing Your Digitizer
  • Appendix II - Toolbar Items
  • Appendix III - Loading Plans from a Dodge CD
  • Appendix IV - Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer
  • Appendix V - Frequently Asked Questions
  • Index

Section 8 Advanced Features

56

1 To edit existing text use the Text Tool to double-click on the text to open the editing box

2 Enter additional text or use the Backspace key to delete text as necessary

Formatting Text Once created you may format the font size type style and color of your text

1 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Font or click on the Font button in the Takeoff Toolbar

2 Select the desired features (color options are disabled) and click the OK button

3 Click on the text to select it and select Tools gt Color or click on the Color button in the Takeoff Toolbar The Color dialog will open

4 Click on a color in the Basic Color palette or create a color and add to the Custom Colors palette (Be sure to click on the color in the Custom Colors palette to select it)

5 Click the OK button

Object Properties

Linear Objects

Linear objects may be set to connect at corners

A linear object may be set to trim automatically when crossing another linear object (Check the trim option under the advanced tab of the Condition dialog)

When you move a connected linear object objects automatically move and resize connected lines accordingly (quantities are then recalculated)

This feature requires that the connected linear object be moved using the center handles (does not apply when resizing the line from the ends)

Objects constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

Objects are measured from centerline to centerline

Section 8 Advanced Features

57

Area Objects When drawing an area use your escape key to undo the last line drawn You may reverse your

drawing of an area using the escape key

The area will not fill with color and pattern until the user double-clicks after the last line is set

Lines drawn to delineate an area object constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

After selecting an area to move or adjust position the mouse in the center to move the entire area position the mouse at the sides or corners to adjust the perimeter

Count Objects

All count objects are quantified by the physical number of objects per page and reported as EA for the UOM The quantity for the current Image View is (displayed in the Condition List) and the total quantity in your project is displayed in the Takeoff View and Worksheet View)

Square circle rectangle and triangle shaped count objects do not displace or subtract from other object quantities when placed on top of them However on the Advanced Tab for the count condition a connect property can be set (this is a check box) so that when a count object of this shape is put on top of a Linear type takeoff object it will move with the linear if said linear is moved

An opened-shaped count object must be placed within a linear object Opening shaped count objects may also be measured by linear foot or linear yard (EA SF and SY are also options) Opening shaped count items default to a width of 3rsquo 0rdquo at the time of creation This size can be changed The small medium and large size are not options on this type of condition anymore Check Backout on the Advanced tab for each Count object back out the footage (or yardage) of opening-shaped count objects in which they are placed

NOTE In order to see this Backout functionality (in quantity) for SY or SF deductions at least one of the

results for the Linear(s) this object will be placed on must be set to SY or SF and the count object must have a height quantity

Advanced Features of Conditions The Round Feature Under the Advanced tab of the linear and area Condition dialogues you may specify quantity rounding (in inches) For linear objects rounding applies to each linear object drawn For area objects rounding will apply to each segment of the area perimeter adjusting the perimeter and area calculations For example With a linear condition entering 12 in the Round field will round up each related linear object to the nearest 12 inches or one foot With this setting two walls of 1 4 would each round to 2 0 totaling 4 0

NOTE In the Takeoff Dock bar condition list and in the On-Screen Takeoff reports quantities will be displayed in whole numbers rounded up to the nearest foot However calculations are based on true quantities without rounding unless the Round Feature is engaged

Pitch Pitch may apply either to linear or area conditions It is measured in rise per linear foot Entering 12 indicates a 12 rise per 12 of linear distance (a pitch of 12 over 12) or an angle of 45deg

Section 8 Advanced Features

58

Advanced Features of Project Properties Selecting Multiple Pages

1 Select a single page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry

2 Drag the cursor down the column of numbers to select consecutive pages

3 Click on the blank button at the top of this column to select all pages in the Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

59

Changing Image Assigned to a Drawing 1 Select the page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry 2 Click the Change Image button The Change Image dialog box will appear

3 Navigate to the desired file and select by clicking on it

4 Click the Open button The electronic file assigned to the page will have been changed to reflect the new file choice

Changing Image File Path 1 Select pages as described above

2 Choose Change Folder

3 In the Change Folder dialog navigate to the appropriate folder

4 Click the OK button The file path will have been changed for the selected page entries

Delete a Page from Project Properties 1 Select the page you want to delete by clicking on its associated number (in the gray box at the

left of the entry)

2 Choose Delete Page

All Takeoff on the page will be deleted immediately and permanently

Section 8 Advanced Features

60

Advanced Features of Tool Options

Calculation Method On-Screen Takeoff has built-in calculation options to allow for faster work and faster saves until your takeoff is complete Calculation options are found by selecting Tools gt Options then clicking on the Calculation tab

Calculation method can be set to Automatic Automatic except Grids and Manual Manual will allow the program to operate more quickly while Automatic or Automatic except Grids allows the user to see quantity changes as takeoffs are made

In any mode you may press F9 to recalculate quantities for the On-Screen Takeoff current totals

Configuration Tab

When the ldquoPage Label (A01)rdquo radial button is chosen On-Screen Takeoff puts the numbered label on all the pages of in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar If the Page Descriptionrdquo radial button is chosen then a description of what takeoff is on that specific page will be shown in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar

This section of the configuration tab gives you options on how you want to export your information When the ldquoFolderSubfolder Namesrdquo radial button is chosen than on your file that you are exporting to will have all the conditions folders and subfolders In the Delimiter box you can choose the symbol that is needed to separate the information you are exporting Some files need semicolons () or colons () to make sure the information comes exported in is separated it the appropriate places

Section 8 Advanced Features

61

In previous versions of On-Screen Takeoff there are views that users need to have in order for them to display their information By either choosing ldquoOST 1xrdquo or ldquoOST 2xrdquo it will let the program know you want your columns of information exported in that specific format

When you have the Confirm Deletions radial button of ldquoYesrdquo chosen than every time you delete anything you will get a dialog box confirming your intentions of deletion

While working with your takeoff you have a choice to either view the legend of your conditions or hide it Choose whichever radial button that suits your needs

For those who prefer to use the Enter key to navigate in dialog boxes this option is just for that

Font Tab The Font tab is designed for you to make your own look and feel for the application At the bottom of this tab it will show you sample of the fonts and colors you have chosen

Renaming the Current Page You may change the name of the current page in the takeoff area of On-Screen Takeoff by selecting Edit gt Rename Page

This opens the Name Page dialog and you may simply type in a new name and click the Enter button The new name for the file will be reflected on the title bar for the page and in Project Properties

You also may access the Rename Page function by right-clicking in the takeoff area while in Image View and selecting the option from the pop-up menu that appears

Section 9

62

Saving and Exiting

This section will

Explain how to save projects

Show you how to safely exit the program

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

63

Saving Your Project

1 Select File gt Save 2 If your project has not previously been saved a Save dialog box will open to allow you to name

the file and choose the directory and folder in which to save your file 3 Once saved File gt Save will simply save the current version of the file

OR

4 Select File gt Save As then type in a new name for the file and save to the desired file path

The Auto-save Feature With the Auto-save feature On-Screen Takeoff automatically backs up your open project You may choose to have more than one level of backup files The first backup copy will have the extension b00 and successive files will be b01 b02 and so on If you have designated four levels of backup files after the fourth backup copy has been created (b03) the next file will be saved over the file with extension b00 Further backup saves will then rotate through the four backup files in the same way

1 Select Tools gt Options 2 In the Auto-save area (under the General tab) select the frequency of backup file creation (in

minutes) and the number of levels for the feature 3 You also may disengage the feature by clicking in the check box to clear it

The Auto-save feature automatically saves backup copies to the directory of the current project If you are working from a write-protected area such as a CD-ROM On-Screen Takeoff will place backup files in the On-Screen Takeoff folder

Exiting When you are finished using On-Screen Takeoff it is very easy to exit Exiting is very important because of security reasons If someone were to use your computer they could enter the application and view and manipulate information

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

64

On-Screen Takeoff closes the open project when you open another or create a new project or when you exit the program

1 Select File gt Exit

OR

2 You also may click at the upper right-hand corner of the application to exit

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

65

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer When you get your digitizer from GTCO you will need to connect it to your computer Follow the instructions outlined below to do this

Note For rollup digitizers the metal bar must be oriented to the top or right hand side

Connecting the Digitizer 1 Lay the digitizer out flat 2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer 3 Plug in the power adapter 4 Plug the interface (IO) cable into the digitizer 5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into an open serial port on computer

Note GTCO Technical support phone number is 410-381-6688 The electronic manual (on diskette) from GTCO contains more detailed installation and operation instructions for the GTCO digitizer model you have

Installing other Digitizer Drivers If you are using a GTCO Digitizer you will need to install the GTCO TabletWorks Drivers

If you are using a Digitizer not supported by GTCO Tablet Works 10 please contact the manufacturer of your digitizer for assistance with installation

Installing GTCO TabletWorks Drivers 1 Insert the On Center CD into the CD-ROM drive The CD Startup screen will open 2 Click on Install Software 3 Select Additional Software and Drivers 4 Select Digitizer Driver 5 Follow the instructions for installing TabletWorks 10

Adhering the Template The template is a small plastic sticker used to enable mouse function when using the digitizer with On-Screen Takeoff Place your template on your digitizer We suggest placing it in the bottom right corner of the digitizer about one inch inside the takeoff area

Note You may either peel off the back of the template and use the adhesive surface or you can tape the template down

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

66

Testing the Digitizer Drivers Before running OST you may test the digitizer by moving the stylus around on the digitizer pad it should move the mouse cursor (if mouse emulation is enabled)

If the digitizer does not move the mouse cursor on the screen

The superset codes may need to be reset Reset the superset codes by touching on the border of the digitizer with the stylus The digitizer should beep several times

The digitizer may not be communicating with the computer Be sure the COM port selected is correct Be sure the COM port selected is correct If you are not able to get the digitizer to move the mouse cursor you need to call GTCO technical support for help

Note The Mouse Emulation is not required for On-Screen Takeoff to work properly It is used only for the Template functionality if the digitizer is moving the cursor the wrong direction (up instead of sideways or vice-versa)

Click the L-shaped arrow symbol on the digitizer with the stylus

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

67

Appendix II Toolbar Items Main Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

68

Tool Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

69

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

70

Navigate Toolbar (Continued)

Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

71

Takeoff Toolbar (Continued)

Image Toolbar

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

72

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

This section will detail how to load plans from a F W Dodge CD-ROM into an On-Screen Takeoff project file ready for takeoffs

Dodge files may be added to the Project Properties dialog However loading the files in that way will load the files by number rather than name description If you want to load one page only from your Dodge CD You will have to rename the page to display the name rather than number of the file

To load plan files from a Dodge CD so that the files load sequentially by file number but are displayed by name rather than by number within your project follow the instructions below

Opening a Dodge project from a CD-ROM 1 Insert the CD into the drive 2 Choose File gt Custom 3 Choose Dodge Plans Project (plansdat) as the file type 4 Select the appropriate file type by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the Files of type

field 5 In the Look in field access your drive paths by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the

field then

Navigate to your CD-ROM drive Open the data folder and Open the Projects folder

6 Select the desired project and open its folder 7 Open the plansdat file 8 All the images will come in sequenced correctly for that job along with the full descriptions

(names) of each page If there is not a plans folder in the project folder then plans do not exist for that project on the CD Opening the plansdat file will yield an empty project

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

73

Appendix IV Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer The On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer is a limited version of On Center Softwarersquos commercial takeoff software If your status bar located at the very bottom of the main window says View Mode in the lower left-hand corner then you are using the Plan Viewer You can use the plan viewer to

View CD-based amp converted CAD drawings

View a previously created OST file and associated drawings

Download electronic plans online

Navigate through drawings

Quickly Takeoff linearsareas and counts

Zoom in to view the plan better

Print drawings directly from the viewer

Viewing an On-Screen Takeoff Project File

1 To open an OST file that was previously created with of On-Screen Takeoff 2 Select File gt Open 3 An Open dialog will appear if you do not see the OST file you are looking for select the

Look In drop down arrow 4 A drop down menu will appear listing the various folders drives and mapped drives located

on your computer select the correct drive or folder location and continue to browse to the location of your OST file

5 When you see your OST file double-click it to open it 6 Any takeoff and drawings should appear on the Image tab view

If you do not see the drawings but do see the colored takeoff layer the drawings may

not be located in the same place they were originally saved at Go to File gt Project Properties and check the Image File path for each listed page If the image file path is pointing to a CD drive make sure the CD is inside the CR-ROM

Downloading Electronic Plans If your Online Plan Service provides a special file format (OSX) required to use this feature of our plan viewer you can immediately downloaded all electronic plans of a project directly from our viewer

Most Plan Room web sites will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff when a request to download plans is made Your particular Plan Room may differ in operation so please contact the provider directly with questions on using the site

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

74

When you request to download or open a project file from a Plan Room you will usually have the open to open or save an OSX file Choosing open will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff Alternately you may choose to save the file to a local hard drive After you have saved the file either double-click it to launch On-Screen Takeoff or open the OSX file using On-Screen Takeoff by clicking File then Open and locating the file on your hard drive You will need to change the file type to OSX

After the OSX file is opened you will see an additional tab appear in the Conditions List window called Pages

The Pages tab shows the hierarchy of your project Gray file icons represent pages that have not been downloaded and blue icons represents pages that have been downloaded

To download a page simply double-click the page icon

If you wish to select a group of pages to download you can use the Ctrl or Shift key to multiple select them then click the Download button

If you wish to download all pages at once click the Download All button

Downloaded pages will now appear in the Project Properties dialog in the same order in which they appear in the Pages tab

Creating Quick Takeoffs With On-Screen Takeoff you can create quick takeoffs to measure quantities even if you dont have the full version of our program However using the Quick Takeoff functionality shows you just a fraction of what the full version can do

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar is located at the top of the image view It has three buttons designated for three types of takeoffs Linear Area and Count The Quantity drop down list will show secondary quantities for Linears and Areas The Units drop down allows you to select how you want your quantities displayed Feet Inches Yards Millimeters and Meters

NOTE Every time change the type of takeoff you are performing (switching from Area to Linear for example) the previous quantities and takeoff objects will disappear They will also disappear when you changes pages

NOTE You can use the Dimension Tool to basically measure the distance between two points or linears The distance will display on the status bar at the bottom of the application

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

75

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions General

Where is On-Screen Takeoff installed on my computer

Typically it is installed in CProgram FilesOn-Screen Takeoff

In Explorer how do I recognize On-Screen Takeoff file types

On-Screen Takeoff data is stored in a single file per job lsquojob name OSTrsquo On-Screen Takeoff templates are stored as lsquotemplate nameTPOrsquo

Can only one project at a time be open

Yes For that reason opening another project automatically closes the project on screen You will be asked to save any changes

Is only one scale allowed per page What about on drawings that have multiple detail sections on a page and each of those drawings have different scales

Yes For pages with drawings of different scales copy the drawing to another project page and set the appropriate scale

I cannot perform backout on an area that is along a linear

As a workaround use the On-Screen Takeoff layers feature to help you with this issue Electronic Images

How do I start a project from drawings that have been scanned and written to a CD-ROM

Open a new project Select File gt Project Properties and select Auto Add Navigate to your CD and the appropriate folder and select any image file in that location Click Open All files in the location will load into your project Recommended that images are copied from CD to hard drive for performance

If I get a disk of drawings in AutoCAD format (R13 or R14) can I read them in On-Screen Takeoff

Yes On-Screen Takeoff now reads DWG DXF and many other format that are saved with AutoCAD

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

76

When I click on the all pages button what is supposed to happen Currently nothing seems to change when I click on that button

The All Pages button is used to apply the Darken and Enhance Plans feature to all pages in the project (as opposed to only the current page on screen)

Is there a way to deduct a large skylight from an area condition

Yes with the related area condition selected in the Takeoff Dock bar unselect the Backout button on the Takeoff Toolbar then draw the Backout area The area quantity will be deducted from the related condition object and the linear measurement of the Backout perimeter will be added

Digitizer Issues

How do I connect a Digitizer to the computer

See Appendix I Connecting a Digitizer

The Place Template menu choice is disabled

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or the digitizer or the digitzer drivers are not installed

It wonrsquot let me select the Set Takeoff Area menu choice

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or no job is open a digitizer is not installed or the drivers are not installed

The digitizer stylus is not moving the cursor or crosshairs

Click S-0-1 superset on the digitizer

How do I convert my old GTCO Digitizer to work with On- Screen Takeofftrade

Call GTCO and they may be able to reconfigure your digitizer to be compatible with On-Screen Takeoff

Printing Issues Which Printers work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible printers include On-Screen Takeoff Hewlett Packard Epson and Canon printers If you are having printer difficulties please contact support and specify the type of printer along with other pertinent information Contact support at wwwoncentercomsupport or email supportoncentercom

Which Plotters work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible Plotters include Hewlett Packard DesignJet plotters and the EnCAD Cadjet II If you are having plotter difficulties please contact support and specify the type of plotter concerned

ViewingDisplay I can no longer see my condition list How do I get it back

The toolbars and Dock bars can be turned on and off through the View gt Toolbars menu options

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

77

This is also accessible by right-clicking in the toolbar area and selecting (or deselecting) a toolbar listed

I cannot view my folders in the condition list

Right-click in the Takeoff Dock barcondition list area and select Show Tree to display your folders

My Status Bar reads Viewer Mode and I am unable to draw conditions

On-Screen Takeoff needs to be Authorized Or you need to purchase an upgrade Click the Perform Advanced Takeoff button on the main toolbar

I hid a Dock bar and when I selected to view it again it appeared alongside the other Dock

bar instead of stacked on top of it How do I fix it

Pick up the Dock bar by clicking on the bar at the top and continuing to hold down the mouse button drag the Dock bar over the other one It will resize and appear stacked with the other

When I open image files from a CD the images are all upside down How do I get them right

side up

To flip pages from top to bottom follow the steps below 1 Click the All Pages button on the Image Toolbar (All Pages is engaged when the button

is not clicked) 2 Click the Flip Horizontal button on the Image Toolbar 3 Click the All Pages button again to disengage

Templates How do I create a Template

Follow the steps below 1 Create a typical project 2 Choose File gt Save As 3 Choose On-Screen Takeoff Template Files as the file type to save 4 Name the file This will save all of the condition setups as well as the layers for the

project

How do I create a new project from a template

Follow the steps below 1 Choose File gt New 2 Select a template from those listed in the New dialog This will open a new project with

conditions and layers saved from a previous project but no pages or takeoff

78

INDEX

Area Conditions 32

Area Objects 57

Auto Scrolling 20

Auto-save 63

Backout Mode 41

Calculation Method 60

Conditions 29

Configuration 60

Contents Tab 6

Continuous Mode 38

Count Conditions 33

Count Objects 57

Digitizer 10 65 76

Docking Toolbars 13

Dodge CD 72

Drawing 27 37

DropRun Count 55

Environment 18

Exiting 63

Exporting 49

Features 16

Font 61

Frequently Asked Questions 75

Grid 40

Help File 5

Hiding Toolbars 13

Hot Links 21

Image 19 59

Image files 9

Image Toolbar 12 71

Images 75

Index Tab 6

Layers 43

Linear Conditions 31

Linear Objects 56

Main Toolbar 12 67

Menus 14

Moving Toolbars 13

Navigate Toolbar 12 69

Navigating 20

On-Screen Takeofftrade 2

Page 59 61

Pages 20 25 28

Plan Viewer 73

Plans 26

Printing 47 76

Project Properties 25

Projects 22

Quick Start Video 18

Resizing Toolbars 13

Roping 54

Saving 63

Scale 28

Search Tab 7

Selecting Objects 42

Setup 8

Start On-Screen Takeofftrade 17

System Requirements 9

Takeoff 19 27

Takeoff Toolbar 70 71

Takeoff Toolbar 12

Template Files 23

TIF (Group4) 9

Tool Toolbar 12 68

Toolbar 67

Toolbars 12

View Toolbar 12 69

Viewing Toolbars 12

Worksheet 20

Zone Conditions 33

Zoom Toolbar 12 69

  • On-Screen Takeoff Lite
  • Table of Contents
  • Section 1 - Introduction
  • Section 2 - Setup
  • Section 3 - Toolbars and Menus
  • Section 4 - Features
  • Section 5 - Projects
  • Section 6 - Conditions and Takeoff
  • Section 7 - Printing and Exporting
  • Section 8 - Advanced Features
  • Section 9 - Saving and Exiting
  • Appendix I - Installing Your Digitizer
  • Appendix II - Toolbar Items
  • Appendix III - Loading Plans from a Dodge CD
  • Appendix IV - Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer
  • Appendix V - Frequently Asked Questions
  • Index

Section 8 Advanced Features

57

Area Objects When drawing an area use your escape key to undo the last line drawn You may reverse your

drawing of an area using the escape key

The area will not fill with color and pattern until the user double-clicks after the last line is set

Lines drawn to delineate an area object constrain to snap increments defined in the Tools gt Options menu (with the mouse 15deg by default incremental when shift key is held down)

After selecting an area to move or adjust position the mouse in the center to move the entire area position the mouse at the sides or corners to adjust the perimeter

Count Objects

All count objects are quantified by the physical number of objects per page and reported as EA for the UOM The quantity for the current Image View is (displayed in the Condition List) and the total quantity in your project is displayed in the Takeoff View and Worksheet View)

Square circle rectangle and triangle shaped count objects do not displace or subtract from other object quantities when placed on top of them However on the Advanced Tab for the count condition a connect property can be set (this is a check box) so that when a count object of this shape is put on top of a Linear type takeoff object it will move with the linear if said linear is moved

An opened-shaped count object must be placed within a linear object Opening shaped count objects may also be measured by linear foot or linear yard (EA SF and SY are also options) Opening shaped count items default to a width of 3rsquo 0rdquo at the time of creation This size can be changed The small medium and large size are not options on this type of condition anymore Check Backout on the Advanced tab for each Count object back out the footage (or yardage) of opening-shaped count objects in which they are placed

NOTE In order to see this Backout functionality (in quantity) for SY or SF deductions at least one of the

results for the Linear(s) this object will be placed on must be set to SY or SF and the count object must have a height quantity

Advanced Features of Conditions The Round Feature Under the Advanced tab of the linear and area Condition dialogues you may specify quantity rounding (in inches) For linear objects rounding applies to each linear object drawn For area objects rounding will apply to each segment of the area perimeter adjusting the perimeter and area calculations For example With a linear condition entering 12 in the Round field will round up each related linear object to the nearest 12 inches or one foot With this setting two walls of 1 4 would each round to 2 0 totaling 4 0

NOTE In the Takeoff Dock bar condition list and in the On-Screen Takeoff reports quantities will be displayed in whole numbers rounded up to the nearest foot However calculations are based on true quantities without rounding unless the Round Feature is engaged

Pitch Pitch may apply either to linear or area conditions It is measured in rise per linear foot Entering 12 indicates a 12 rise per 12 of linear distance (a pitch of 12 over 12) or an angle of 45deg

Section 8 Advanced Features

58

Advanced Features of Project Properties Selecting Multiple Pages

1 Select a single page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry

2 Drag the cursor down the column of numbers to select consecutive pages

3 Click on the blank button at the top of this column to select all pages in the Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

59

Changing Image Assigned to a Drawing 1 Select the page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry 2 Click the Change Image button The Change Image dialog box will appear

3 Navigate to the desired file and select by clicking on it

4 Click the Open button The electronic file assigned to the page will have been changed to reflect the new file choice

Changing Image File Path 1 Select pages as described above

2 Choose Change Folder

3 In the Change Folder dialog navigate to the appropriate folder

4 Click the OK button The file path will have been changed for the selected page entries

Delete a Page from Project Properties 1 Select the page you want to delete by clicking on its associated number (in the gray box at the

left of the entry)

2 Choose Delete Page

All Takeoff on the page will be deleted immediately and permanently

Section 8 Advanced Features

60

Advanced Features of Tool Options

Calculation Method On-Screen Takeoff has built-in calculation options to allow for faster work and faster saves until your takeoff is complete Calculation options are found by selecting Tools gt Options then clicking on the Calculation tab

Calculation method can be set to Automatic Automatic except Grids and Manual Manual will allow the program to operate more quickly while Automatic or Automatic except Grids allows the user to see quantity changes as takeoffs are made

In any mode you may press F9 to recalculate quantities for the On-Screen Takeoff current totals

Configuration Tab

When the ldquoPage Label (A01)rdquo radial button is chosen On-Screen Takeoff puts the numbered label on all the pages of in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar If the Page Descriptionrdquo radial button is chosen then a description of what takeoff is on that specific page will be shown in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar

This section of the configuration tab gives you options on how you want to export your information When the ldquoFolderSubfolder Namesrdquo radial button is chosen than on your file that you are exporting to will have all the conditions folders and subfolders In the Delimiter box you can choose the symbol that is needed to separate the information you are exporting Some files need semicolons () or colons () to make sure the information comes exported in is separated it the appropriate places

Section 8 Advanced Features

61

In previous versions of On-Screen Takeoff there are views that users need to have in order for them to display their information By either choosing ldquoOST 1xrdquo or ldquoOST 2xrdquo it will let the program know you want your columns of information exported in that specific format

When you have the Confirm Deletions radial button of ldquoYesrdquo chosen than every time you delete anything you will get a dialog box confirming your intentions of deletion

While working with your takeoff you have a choice to either view the legend of your conditions or hide it Choose whichever radial button that suits your needs

For those who prefer to use the Enter key to navigate in dialog boxes this option is just for that

Font Tab The Font tab is designed for you to make your own look and feel for the application At the bottom of this tab it will show you sample of the fonts and colors you have chosen

Renaming the Current Page You may change the name of the current page in the takeoff area of On-Screen Takeoff by selecting Edit gt Rename Page

This opens the Name Page dialog and you may simply type in a new name and click the Enter button The new name for the file will be reflected on the title bar for the page and in Project Properties

You also may access the Rename Page function by right-clicking in the takeoff area while in Image View and selecting the option from the pop-up menu that appears

Section 9

62

Saving and Exiting

This section will

Explain how to save projects

Show you how to safely exit the program

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

63

Saving Your Project

1 Select File gt Save 2 If your project has not previously been saved a Save dialog box will open to allow you to name

the file and choose the directory and folder in which to save your file 3 Once saved File gt Save will simply save the current version of the file

OR

4 Select File gt Save As then type in a new name for the file and save to the desired file path

The Auto-save Feature With the Auto-save feature On-Screen Takeoff automatically backs up your open project You may choose to have more than one level of backup files The first backup copy will have the extension b00 and successive files will be b01 b02 and so on If you have designated four levels of backup files after the fourth backup copy has been created (b03) the next file will be saved over the file with extension b00 Further backup saves will then rotate through the four backup files in the same way

1 Select Tools gt Options 2 In the Auto-save area (under the General tab) select the frequency of backup file creation (in

minutes) and the number of levels for the feature 3 You also may disengage the feature by clicking in the check box to clear it

The Auto-save feature automatically saves backup copies to the directory of the current project If you are working from a write-protected area such as a CD-ROM On-Screen Takeoff will place backup files in the On-Screen Takeoff folder

Exiting When you are finished using On-Screen Takeoff it is very easy to exit Exiting is very important because of security reasons If someone were to use your computer they could enter the application and view and manipulate information

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

64

On-Screen Takeoff closes the open project when you open another or create a new project or when you exit the program

1 Select File gt Exit

OR

2 You also may click at the upper right-hand corner of the application to exit

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

65

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer When you get your digitizer from GTCO you will need to connect it to your computer Follow the instructions outlined below to do this

Note For rollup digitizers the metal bar must be oriented to the top or right hand side

Connecting the Digitizer 1 Lay the digitizer out flat 2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer 3 Plug in the power adapter 4 Plug the interface (IO) cable into the digitizer 5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into an open serial port on computer

Note GTCO Technical support phone number is 410-381-6688 The electronic manual (on diskette) from GTCO contains more detailed installation and operation instructions for the GTCO digitizer model you have

Installing other Digitizer Drivers If you are using a GTCO Digitizer you will need to install the GTCO TabletWorks Drivers

If you are using a Digitizer not supported by GTCO Tablet Works 10 please contact the manufacturer of your digitizer for assistance with installation

Installing GTCO TabletWorks Drivers 1 Insert the On Center CD into the CD-ROM drive The CD Startup screen will open 2 Click on Install Software 3 Select Additional Software and Drivers 4 Select Digitizer Driver 5 Follow the instructions for installing TabletWorks 10

Adhering the Template The template is a small plastic sticker used to enable mouse function when using the digitizer with On-Screen Takeoff Place your template on your digitizer We suggest placing it in the bottom right corner of the digitizer about one inch inside the takeoff area

Note You may either peel off the back of the template and use the adhesive surface or you can tape the template down

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

66

Testing the Digitizer Drivers Before running OST you may test the digitizer by moving the stylus around on the digitizer pad it should move the mouse cursor (if mouse emulation is enabled)

If the digitizer does not move the mouse cursor on the screen

The superset codes may need to be reset Reset the superset codes by touching on the border of the digitizer with the stylus The digitizer should beep several times

The digitizer may not be communicating with the computer Be sure the COM port selected is correct Be sure the COM port selected is correct If you are not able to get the digitizer to move the mouse cursor you need to call GTCO technical support for help

Note The Mouse Emulation is not required for On-Screen Takeoff to work properly It is used only for the Template functionality if the digitizer is moving the cursor the wrong direction (up instead of sideways or vice-versa)

Click the L-shaped arrow symbol on the digitizer with the stylus

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

67

Appendix II Toolbar Items Main Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

68

Tool Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

69

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

70

Navigate Toolbar (Continued)

Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

71

Takeoff Toolbar (Continued)

Image Toolbar

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

72

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

This section will detail how to load plans from a F W Dodge CD-ROM into an On-Screen Takeoff project file ready for takeoffs

Dodge files may be added to the Project Properties dialog However loading the files in that way will load the files by number rather than name description If you want to load one page only from your Dodge CD You will have to rename the page to display the name rather than number of the file

To load plan files from a Dodge CD so that the files load sequentially by file number but are displayed by name rather than by number within your project follow the instructions below

Opening a Dodge project from a CD-ROM 1 Insert the CD into the drive 2 Choose File gt Custom 3 Choose Dodge Plans Project (plansdat) as the file type 4 Select the appropriate file type by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the Files of type

field 5 In the Look in field access your drive paths by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the

field then

Navigate to your CD-ROM drive Open the data folder and Open the Projects folder

6 Select the desired project and open its folder 7 Open the plansdat file 8 All the images will come in sequenced correctly for that job along with the full descriptions

(names) of each page If there is not a plans folder in the project folder then plans do not exist for that project on the CD Opening the plansdat file will yield an empty project

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

73

Appendix IV Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer The On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer is a limited version of On Center Softwarersquos commercial takeoff software If your status bar located at the very bottom of the main window says View Mode in the lower left-hand corner then you are using the Plan Viewer You can use the plan viewer to

View CD-based amp converted CAD drawings

View a previously created OST file and associated drawings

Download electronic plans online

Navigate through drawings

Quickly Takeoff linearsareas and counts

Zoom in to view the plan better

Print drawings directly from the viewer

Viewing an On-Screen Takeoff Project File

1 To open an OST file that was previously created with of On-Screen Takeoff 2 Select File gt Open 3 An Open dialog will appear if you do not see the OST file you are looking for select the

Look In drop down arrow 4 A drop down menu will appear listing the various folders drives and mapped drives located

on your computer select the correct drive or folder location and continue to browse to the location of your OST file

5 When you see your OST file double-click it to open it 6 Any takeoff and drawings should appear on the Image tab view

If you do not see the drawings but do see the colored takeoff layer the drawings may

not be located in the same place they were originally saved at Go to File gt Project Properties and check the Image File path for each listed page If the image file path is pointing to a CD drive make sure the CD is inside the CR-ROM

Downloading Electronic Plans If your Online Plan Service provides a special file format (OSX) required to use this feature of our plan viewer you can immediately downloaded all electronic plans of a project directly from our viewer

Most Plan Room web sites will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff when a request to download plans is made Your particular Plan Room may differ in operation so please contact the provider directly with questions on using the site

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

74

When you request to download or open a project file from a Plan Room you will usually have the open to open or save an OSX file Choosing open will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff Alternately you may choose to save the file to a local hard drive After you have saved the file either double-click it to launch On-Screen Takeoff or open the OSX file using On-Screen Takeoff by clicking File then Open and locating the file on your hard drive You will need to change the file type to OSX

After the OSX file is opened you will see an additional tab appear in the Conditions List window called Pages

The Pages tab shows the hierarchy of your project Gray file icons represent pages that have not been downloaded and blue icons represents pages that have been downloaded

To download a page simply double-click the page icon

If you wish to select a group of pages to download you can use the Ctrl or Shift key to multiple select them then click the Download button

If you wish to download all pages at once click the Download All button

Downloaded pages will now appear in the Project Properties dialog in the same order in which they appear in the Pages tab

Creating Quick Takeoffs With On-Screen Takeoff you can create quick takeoffs to measure quantities even if you dont have the full version of our program However using the Quick Takeoff functionality shows you just a fraction of what the full version can do

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar is located at the top of the image view It has three buttons designated for three types of takeoffs Linear Area and Count The Quantity drop down list will show secondary quantities for Linears and Areas The Units drop down allows you to select how you want your quantities displayed Feet Inches Yards Millimeters and Meters

NOTE Every time change the type of takeoff you are performing (switching from Area to Linear for example) the previous quantities and takeoff objects will disappear They will also disappear when you changes pages

NOTE You can use the Dimension Tool to basically measure the distance between two points or linears The distance will display on the status bar at the bottom of the application

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

75

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions General

Where is On-Screen Takeoff installed on my computer

Typically it is installed in CProgram FilesOn-Screen Takeoff

In Explorer how do I recognize On-Screen Takeoff file types

On-Screen Takeoff data is stored in a single file per job lsquojob name OSTrsquo On-Screen Takeoff templates are stored as lsquotemplate nameTPOrsquo

Can only one project at a time be open

Yes For that reason opening another project automatically closes the project on screen You will be asked to save any changes

Is only one scale allowed per page What about on drawings that have multiple detail sections on a page and each of those drawings have different scales

Yes For pages with drawings of different scales copy the drawing to another project page and set the appropriate scale

I cannot perform backout on an area that is along a linear

As a workaround use the On-Screen Takeoff layers feature to help you with this issue Electronic Images

How do I start a project from drawings that have been scanned and written to a CD-ROM

Open a new project Select File gt Project Properties and select Auto Add Navigate to your CD and the appropriate folder and select any image file in that location Click Open All files in the location will load into your project Recommended that images are copied from CD to hard drive for performance

If I get a disk of drawings in AutoCAD format (R13 or R14) can I read them in On-Screen Takeoff

Yes On-Screen Takeoff now reads DWG DXF and many other format that are saved with AutoCAD

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

76

When I click on the all pages button what is supposed to happen Currently nothing seems to change when I click on that button

The All Pages button is used to apply the Darken and Enhance Plans feature to all pages in the project (as opposed to only the current page on screen)

Is there a way to deduct a large skylight from an area condition

Yes with the related area condition selected in the Takeoff Dock bar unselect the Backout button on the Takeoff Toolbar then draw the Backout area The area quantity will be deducted from the related condition object and the linear measurement of the Backout perimeter will be added

Digitizer Issues

How do I connect a Digitizer to the computer

See Appendix I Connecting a Digitizer

The Place Template menu choice is disabled

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or the digitizer or the digitzer drivers are not installed

It wonrsquot let me select the Set Takeoff Area menu choice

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or no job is open a digitizer is not installed or the drivers are not installed

The digitizer stylus is not moving the cursor or crosshairs

Click S-0-1 superset on the digitizer

How do I convert my old GTCO Digitizer to work with On- Screen Takeofftrade

Call GTCO and they may be able to reconfigure your digitizer to be compatible with On-Screen Takeoff

Printing Issues Which Printers work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible printers include On-Screen Takeoff Hewlett Packard Epson and Canon printers If you are having printer difficulties please contact support and specify the type of printer along with other pertinent information Contact support at wwwoncentercomsupport or email supportoncentercom

Which Plotters work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible Plotters include Hewlett Packard DesignJet plotters and the EnCAD Cadjet II If you are having plotter difficulties please contact support and specify the type of plotter concerned

ViewingDisplay I can no longer see my condition list How do I get it back

The toolbars and Dock bars can be turned on and off through the View gt Toolbars menu options

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

77

This is also accessible by right-clicking in the toolbar area and selecting (or deselecting) a toolbar listed

I cannot view my folders in the condition list

Right-click in the Takeoff Dock barcondition list area and select Show Tree to display your folders

My Status Bar reads Viewer Mode and I am unable to draw conditions

On-Screen Takeoff needs to be Authorized Or you need to purchase an upgrade Click the Perform Advanced Takeoff button on the main toolbar

I hid a Dock bar and when I selected to view it again it appeared alongside the other Dock

bar instead of stacked on top of it How do I fix it

Pick up the Dock bar by clicking on the bar at the top and continuing to hold down the mouse button drag the Dock bar over the other one It will resize and appear stacked with the other

When I open image files from a CD the images are all upside down How do I get them right

side up

To flip pages from top to bottom follow the steps below 1 Click the All Pages button on the Image Toolbar (All Pages is engaged when the button

is not clicked) 2 Click the Flip Horizontal button on the Image Toolbar 3 Click the All Pages button again to disengage

Templates How do I create a Template

Follow the steps below 1 Create a typical project 2 Choose File gt Save As 3 Choose On-Screen Takeoff Template Files as the file type to save 4 Name the file This will save all of the condition setups as well as the layers for the

project

How do I create a new project from a template

Follow the steps below 1 Choose File gt New 2 Select a template from those listed in the New dialog This will open a new project with

conditions and layers saved from a previous project but no pages or takeoff

78

INDEX

Area Conditions 32

Area Objects 57

Auto Scrolling 20

Auto-save 63

Backout Mode 41

Calculation Method 60

Conditions 29

Configuration 60

Contents Tab 6

Continuous Mode 38

Count Conditions 33

Count Objects 57

Digitizer 10 65 76

Docking Toolbars 13

Dodge CD 72

Drawing 27 37

DropRun Count 55

Environment 18

Exiting 63

Exporting 49

Features 16

Font 61

Frequently Asked Questions 75

Grid 40

Help File 5

Hiding Toolbars 13

Hot Links 21

Image 19 59

Image files 9

Image Toolbar 12 71

Images 75

Index Tab 6

Layers 43

Linear Conditions 31

Linear Objects 56

Main Toolbar 12 67

Menus 14

Moving Toolbars 13

Navigate Toolbar 12 69

Navigating 20

On-Screen Takeofftrade 2

Page 59 61

Pages 20 25 28

Plan Viewer 73

Plans 26

Printing 47 76

Project Properties 25

Projects 22

Quick Start Video 18

Resizing Toolbars 13

Roping 54

Saving 63

Scale 28

Search Tab 7

Selecting Objects 42

Setup 8

Start On-Screen Takeofftrade 17

System Requirements 9

Takeoff 19 27

Takeoff Toolbar 70 71

Takeoff Toolbar 12

Template Files 23

TIF (Group4) 9

Tool Toolbar 12 68

Toolbar 67

Toolbars 12

View Toolbar 12 69

Viewing Toolbars 12

Worksheet 20

Zone Conditions 33

Zoom Toolbar 12 69

  • On-Screen Takeoff Lite
  • Table of Contents
  • Section 1 - Introduction
  • Section 2 - Setup
  • Section 3 - Toolbars and Menus
  • Section 4 - Features
  • Section 5 - Projects
  • Section 6 - Conditions and Takeoff
  • Section 7 - Printing and Exporting
  • Section 8 - Advanced Features
  • Section 9 - Saving and Exiting
  • Appendix I - Installing Your Digitizer
  • Appendix II - Toolbar Items
  • Appendix III - Loading Plans from a Dodge CD
  • Appendix IV - Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer
  • Appendix V - Frequently Asked Questions
  • Index

Section 8 Advanced Features

58

Advanced Features of Project Properties Selecting Multiple Pages

1 Select a single page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry

2 Drag the cursor down the column of numbers to select consecutive pages

3 Click on the blank button at the top of this column to select all pages in the Properties dialog

Section 8 Advanced Features

59

Changing Image Assigned to a Drawing 1 Select the page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry 2 Click the Change Image button The Change Image dialog box will appear

3 Navigate to the desired file and select by clicking on it

4 Click the Open button The electronic file assigned to the page will have been changed to reflect the new file choice

Changing Image File Path 1 Select pages as described above

2 Choose Change Folder

3 In the Change Folder dialog navigate to the appropriate folder

4 Click the OK button The file path will have been changed for the selected page entries

Delete a Page from Project Properties 1 Select the page you want to delete by clicking on its associated number (in the gray box at the

left of the entry)

2 Choose Delete Page

All Takeoff on the page will be deleted immediately and permanently

Section 8 Advanced Features

60

Advanced Features of Tool Options

Calculation Method On-Screen Takeoff has built-in calculation options to allow for faster work and faster saves until your takeoff is complete Calculation options are found by selecting Tools gt Options then clicking on the Calculation tab

Calculation method can be set to Automatic Automatic except Grids and Manual Manual will allow the program to operate more quickly while Automatic or Automatic except Grids allows the user to see quantity changes as takeoffs are made

In any mode you may press F9 to recalculate quantities for the On-Screen Takeoff current totals

Configuration Tab

When the ldquoPage Label (A01)rdquo radial button is chosen On-Screen Takeoff puts the numbered label on all the pages of in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar If the Page Descriptionrdquo radial button is chosen then a description of what takeoff is on that specific page will be shown in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar

This section of the configuration tab gives you options on how you want to export your information When the ldquoFolderSubfolder Namesrdquo radial button is chosen than on your file that you are exporting to will have all the conditions folders and subfolders In the Delimiter box you can choose the symbol that is needed to separate the information you are exporting Some files need semicolons () or colons () to make sure the information comes exported in is separated it the appropriate places

Section 8 Advanced Features

61

In previous versions of On-Screen Takeoff there are views that users need to have in order for them to display their information By either choosing ldquoOST 1xrdquo or ldquoOST 2xrdquo it will let the program know you want your columns of information exported in that specific format

When you have the Confirm Deletions radial button of ldquoYesrdquo chosen than every time you delete anything you will get a dialog box confirming your intentions of deletion

While working with your takeoff you have a choice to either view the legend of your conditions or hide it Choose whichever radial button that suits your needs

For those who prefer to use the Enter key to navigate in dialog boxes this option is just for that

Font Tab The Font tab is designed for you to make your own look and feel for the application At the bottom of this tab it will show you sample of the fonts and colors you have chosen

Renaming the Current Page You may change the name of the current page in the takeoff area of On-Screen Takeoff by selecting Edit gt Rename Page

This opens the Name Page dialog and you may simply type in a new name and click the Enter button The new name for the file will be reflected on the title bar for the page and in Project Properties

You also may access the Rename Page function by right-clicking in the takeoff area while in Image View and selecting the option from the pop-up menu that appears

Section 9

62

Saving and Exiting

This section will

Explain how to save projects

Show you how to safely exit the program

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

63

Saving Your Project

1 Select File gt Save 2 If your project has not previously been saved a Save dialog box will open to allow you to name

the file and choose the directory and folder in which to save your file 3 Once saved File gt Save will simply save the current version of the file

OR

4 Select File gt Save As then type in a new name for the file and save to the desired file path

The Auto-save Feature With the Auto-save feature On-Screen Takeoff automatically backs up your open project You may choose to have more than one level of backup files The first backup copy will have the extension b00 and successive files will be b01 b02 and so on If you have designated four levels of backup files after the fourth backup copy has been created (b03) the next file will be saved over the file with extension b00 Further backup saves will then rotate through the four backup files in the same way

1 Select Tools gt Options 2 In the Auto-save area (under the General tab) select the frequency of backup file creation (in

minutes) and the number of levels for the feature 3 You also may disengage the feature by clicking in the check box to clear it

The Auto-save feature automatically saves backup copies to the directory of the current project If you are working from a write-protected area such as a CD-ROM On-Screen Takeoff will place backup files in the On-Screen Takeoff folder

Exiting When you are finished using On-Screen Takeoff it is very easy to exit Exiting is very important because of security reasons If someone were to use your computer they could enter the application and view and manipulate information

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

64

On-Screen Takeoff closes the open project when you open another or create a new project or when you exit the program

1 Select File gt Exit

OR

2 You also may click at the upper right-hand corner of the application to exit

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

65

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer When you get your digitizer from GTCO you will need to connect it to your computer Follow the instructions outlined below to do this

Note For rollup digitizers the metal bar must be oriented to the top or right hand side

Connecting the Digitizer 1 Lay the digitizer out flat 2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer 3 Plug in the power adapter 4 Plug the interface (IO) cable into the digitizer 5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into an open serial port on computer

Note GTCO Technical support phone number is 410-381-6688 The electronic manual (on diskette) from GTCO contains more detailed installation and operation instructions for the GTCO digitizer model you have

Installing other Digitizer Drivers If you are using a GTCO Digitizer you will need to install the GTCO TabletWorks Drivers

If you are using a Digitizer not supported by GTCO Tablet Works 10 please contact the manufacturer of your digitizer for assistance with installation

Installing GTCO TabletWorks Drivers 1 Insert the On Center CD into the CD-ROM drive The CD Startup screen will open 2 Click on Install Software 3 Select Additional Software and Drivers 4 Select Digitizer Driver 5 Follow the instructions for installing TabletWorks 10

Adhering the Template The template is a small plastic sticker used to enable mouse function when using the digitizer with On-Screen Takeoff Place your template on your digitizer We suggest placing it in the bottom right corner of the digitizer about one inch inside the takeoff area

Note You may either peel off the back of the template and use the adhesive surface or you can tape the template down

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

66

Testing the Digitizer Drivers Before running OST you may test the digitizer by moving the stylus around on the digitizer pad it should move the mouse cursor (if mouse emulation is enabled)

If the digitizer does not move the mouse cursor on the screen

The superset codes may need to be reset Reset the superset codes by touching on the border of the digitizer with the stylus The digitizer should beep several times

The digitizer may not be communicating with the computer Be sure the COM port selected is correct Be sure the COM port selected is correct If you are not able to get the digitizer to move the mouse cursor you need to call GTCO technical support for help

Note The Mouse Emulation is not required for On-Screen Takeoff to work properly It is used only for the Template functionality if the digitizer is moving the cursor the wrong direction (up instead of sideways or vice-versa)

Click the L-shaped arrow symbol on the digitizer with the stylus

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

67

Appendix II Toolbar Items Main Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

68

Tool Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

69

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

70

Navigate Toolbar (Continued)

Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

71

Takeoff Toolbar (Continued)

Image Toolbar

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

72

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

This section will detail how to load plans from a F W Dodge CD-ROM into an On-Screen Takeoff project file ready for takeoffs

Dodge files may be added to the Project Properties dialog However loading the files in that way will load the files by number rather than name description If you want to load one page only from your Dodge CD You will have to rename the page to display the name rather than number of the file

To load plan files from a Dodge CD so that the files load sequentially by file number but are displayed by name rather than by number within your project follow the instructions below

Opening a Dodge project from a CD-ROM 1 Insert the CD into the drive 2 Choose File gt Custom 3 Choose Dodge Plans Project (plansdat) as the file type 4 Select the appropriate file type by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the Files of type

field 5 In the Look in field access your drive paths by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the

field then

Navigate to your CD-ROM drive Open the data folder and Open the Projects folder

6 Select the desired project and open its folder 7 Open the plansdat file 8 All the images will come in sequenced correctly for that job along with the full descriptions

(names) of each page If there is not a plans folder in the project folder then plans do not exist for that project on the CD Opening the plansdat file will yield an empty project

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

73

Appendix IV Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer The On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer is a limited version of On Center Softwarersquos commercial takeoff software If your status bar located at the very bottom of the main window says View Mode in the lower left-hand corner then you are using the Plan Viewer You can use the plan viewer to

View CD-based amp converted CAD drawings

View a previously created OST file and associated drawings

Download electronic plans online

Navigate through drawings

Quickly Takeoff linearsareas and counts

Zoom in to view the plan better

Print drawings directly from the viewer

Viewing an On-Screen Takeoff Project File

1 To open an OST file that was previously created with of On-Screen Takeoff 2 Select File gt Open 3 An Open dialog will appear if you do not see the OST file you are looking for select the

Look In drop down arrow 4 A drop down menu will appear listing the various folders drives and mapped drives located

on your computer select the correct drive or folder location and continue to browse to the location of your OST file

5 When you see your OST file double-click it to open it 6 Any takeoff and drawings should appear on the Image tab view

If you do not see the drawings but do see the colored takeoff layer the drawings may

not be located in the same place they were originally saved at Go to File gt Project Properties and check the Image File path for each listed page If the image file path is pointing to a CD drive make sure the CD is inside the CR-ROM

Downloading Electronic Plans If your Online Plan Service provides a special file format (OSX) required to use this feature of our plan viewer you can immediately downloaded all electronic plans of a project directly from our viewer

Most Plan Room web sites will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff when a request to download plans is made Your particular Plan Room may differ in operation so please contact the provider directly with questions on using the site

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

74

When you request to download or open a project file from a Plan Room you will usually have the open to open or save an OSX file Choosing open will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff Alternately you may choose to save the file to a local hard drive After you have saved the file either double-click it to launch On-Screen Takeoff or open the OSX file using On-Screen Takeoff by clicking File then Open and locating the file on your hard drive You will need to change the file type to OSX

After the OSX file is opened you will see an additional tab appear in the Conditions List window called Pages

The Pages tab shows the hierarchy of your project Gray file icons represent pages that have not been downloaded and blue icons represents pages that have been downloaded

To download a page simply double-click the page icon

If you wish to select a group of pages to download you can use the Ctrl or Shift key to multiple select them then click the Download button

If you wish to download all pages at once click the Download All button

Downloaded pages will now appear in the Project Properties dialog in the same order in which they appear in the Pages tab

Creating Quick Takeoffs With On-Screen Takeoff you can create quick takeoffs to measure quantities even if you dont have the full version of our program However using the Quick Takeoff functionality shows you just a fraction of what the full version can do

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar is located at the top of the image view It has three buttons designated for three types of takeoffs Linear Area and Count The Quantity drop down list will show secondary quantities for Linears and Areas The Units drop down allows you to select how you want your quantities displayed Feet Inches Yards Millimeters and Meters

NOTE Every time change the type of takeoff you are performing (switching from Area to Linear for example) the previous quantities and takeoff objects will disappear They will also disappear when you changes pages

NOTE You can use the Dimension Tool to basically measure the distance between two points or linears The distance will display on the status bar at the bottom of the application

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

75

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions General

Where is On-Screen Takeoff installed on my computer

Typically it is installed in CProgram FilesOn-Screen Takeoff

In Explorer how do I recognize On-Screen Takeoff file types

On-Screen Takeoff data is stored in a single file per job lsquojob name OSTrsquo On-Screen Takeoff templates are stored as lsquotemplate nameTPOrsquo

Can only one project at a time be open

Yes For that reason opening another project automatically closes the project on screen You will be asked to save any changes

Is only one scale allowed per page What about on drawings that have multiple detail sections on a page and each of those drawings have different scales

Yes For pages with drawings of different scales copy the drawing to another project page and set the appropriate scale

I cannot perform backout on an area that is along a linear

As a workaround use the On-Screen Takeoff layers feature to help you with this issue Electronic Images

How do I start a project from drawings that have been scanned and written to a CD-ROM

Open a new project Select File gt Project Properties and select Auto Add Navigate to your CD and the appropriate folder and select any image file in that location Click Open All files in the location will load into your project Recommended that images are copied from CD to hard drive for performance

If I get a disk of drawings in AutoCAD format (R13 or R14) can I read them in On-Screen Takeoff

Yes On-Screen Takeoff now reads DWG DXF and many other format that are saved with AutoCAD

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

76

When I click on the all pages button what is supposed to happen Currently nothing seems to change when I click on that button

The All Pages button is used to apply the Darken and Enhance Plans feature to all pages in the project (as opposed to only the current page on screen)

Is there a way to deduct a large skylight from an area condition

Yes with the related area condition selected in the Takeoff Dock bar unselect the Backout button on the Takeoff Toolbar then draw the Backout area The area quantity will be deducted from the related condition object and the linear measurement of the Backout perimeter will be added

Digitizer Issues

How do I connect a Digitizer to the computer

See Appendix I Connecting a Digitizer

The Place Template menu choice is disabled

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or the digitizer or the digitzer drivers are not installed

It wonrsquot let me select the Set Takeoff Area menu choice

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or no job is open a digitizer is not installed or the drivers are not installed

The digitizer stylus is not moving the cursor or crosshairs

Click S-0-1 superset on the digitizer

How do I convert my old GTCO Digitizer to work with On- Screen Takeofftrade

Call GTCO and they may be able to reconfigure your digitizer to be compatible with On-Screen Takeoff

Printing Issues Which Printers work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible printers include On-Screen Takeoff Hewlett Packard Epson and Canon printers If you are having printer difficulties please contact support and specify the type of printer along with other pertinent information Contact support at wwwoncentercomsupport or email supportoncentercom

Which Plotters work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible Plotters include Hewlett Packard DesignJet plotters and the EnCAD Cadjet II If you are having plotter difficulties please contact support and specify the type of plotter concerned

ViewingDisplay I can no longer see my condition list How do I get it back

The toolbars and Dock bars can be turned on and off through the View gt Toolbars menu options

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

77

This is also accessible by right-clicking in the toolbar area and selecting (or deselecting) a toolbar listed

I cannot view my folders in the condition list

Right-click in the Takeoff Dock barcondition list area and select Show Tree to display your folders

My Status Bar reads Viewer Mode and I am unable to draw conditions

On-Screen Takeoff needs to be Authorized Or you need to purchase an upgrade Click the Perform Advanced Takeoff button on the main toolbar

I hid a Dock bar and when I selected to view it again it appeared alongside the other Dock

bar instead of stacked on top of it How do I fix it

Pick up the Dock bar by clicking on the bar at the top and continuing to hold down the mouse button drag the Dock bar over the other one It will resize and appear stacked with the other

When I open image files from a CD the images are all upside down How do I get them right

side up

To flip pages from top to bottom follow the steps below 1 Click the All Pages button on the Image Toolbar (All Pages is engaged when the button

is not clicked) 2 Click the Flip Horizontal button on the Image Toolbar 3 Click the All Pages button again to disengage

Templates How do I create a Template

Follow the steps below 1 Create a typical project 2 Choose File gt Save As 3 Choose On-Screen Takeoff Template Files as the file type to save 4 Name the file This will save all of the condition setups as well as the layers for the

project

How do I create a new project from a template

Follow the steps below 1 Choose File gt New 2 Select a template from those listed in the New dialog This will open a new project with

conditions and layers saved from a previous project but no pages or takeoff

78

INDEX

Area Conditions 32

Area Objects 57

Auto Scrolling 20

Auto-save 63

Backout Mode 41

Calculation Method 60

Conditions 29

Configuration 60

Contents Tab 6

Continuous Mode 38

Count Conditions 33

Count Objects 57

Digitizer 10 65 76

Docking Toolbars 13

Dodge CD 72

Drawing 27 37

DropRun Count 55

Environment 18

Exiting 63

Exporting 49

Features 16

Font 61

Frequently Asked Questions 75

Grid 40

Help File 5

Hiding Toolbars 13

Hot Links 21

Image 19 59

Image files 9

Image Toolbar 12 71

Images 75

Index Tab 6

Layers 43

Linear Conditions 31

Linear Objects 56

Main Toolbar 12 67

Menus 14

Moving Toolbars 13

Navigate Toolbar 12 69

Navigating 20

On-Screen Takeofftrade 2

Page 59 61

Pages 20 25 28

Plan Viewer 73

Plans 26

Printing 47 76

Project Properties 25

Projects 22

Quick Start Video 18

Resizing Toolbars 13

Roping 54

Saving 63

Scale 28

Search Tab 7

Selecting Objects 42

Setup 8

Start On-Screen Takeofftrade 17

System Requirements 9

Takeoff 19 27

Takeoff Toolbar 70 71

Takeoff Toolbar 12

Template Files 23

TIF (Group4) 9

Tool Toolbar 12 68

Toolbar 67

Toolbars 12

View Toolbar 12 69

Viewing Toolbars 12

Worksheet 20

Zone Conditions 33

Zoom Toolbar 12 69

  • On-Screen Takeoff Lite
  • Table of Contents
  • Section 1 - Introduction
  • Section 2 - Setup
  • Section 3 - Toolbars and Menus
  • Section 4 - Features
  • Section 5 - Projects
  • Section 6 - Conditions and Takeoff
  • Section 7 - Printing and Exporting
  • Section 8 - Advanced Features
  • Section 9 - Saving and Exiting
  • Appendix I - Installing Your Digitizer
  • Appendix II - Toolbar Items
  • Appendix III - Loading Plans from a Dodge CD
  • Appendix IV - Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer
  • Appendix V - Frequently Asked Questions
  • Index

Section 8 Advanced Features

59

Changing Image Assigned to a Drawing 1 Select the page entry by clicking on the numbered gray button to the left of the entry 2 Click the Change Image button The Change Image dialog box will appear

3 Navigate to the desired file and select by clicking on it

4 Click the Open button The electronic file assigned to the page will have been changed to reflect the new file choice

Changing Image File Path 1 Select pages as described above

2 Choose Change Folder

3 In the Change Folder dialog navigate to the appropriate folder

4 Click the OK button The file path will have been changed for the selected page entries

Delete a Page from Project Properties 1 Select the page you want to delete by clicking on its associated number (in the gray box at the

left of the entry)

2 Choose Delete Page

All Takeoff on the page will be deleted immediately and permanently

Section 8 Advanced Features

60

Advanced Features of Tool Options

Calculation Method On-Screen Takeoff has built-in calculation options to allow for faster work and faster saves until your takeoff is complete Calculation options are found by selecting Tools gt Options then clicking on the Calculation tab

Calculation method can be set to Automatic Automatic except Grids and Manual Manual will allow the program to operate more quickly while Automatic or Automatic except Grids allows the user to see quantity changes as takeoffs are made

In any mode you may press F9 to recalculate quantities for the On-Screen Takeoff current totals

Configuration Tab

When the ldquoPage Label (A01)rdquo radial button is chosen On-Screen Takeoff puts the numbered label on all the pages of in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar If the Page Descriptionrdquo radial button is chosen then a description of what takeoff is on that specific page will be shown in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar

This section of the configuration tab gives you options on how you want to export your information When the ldquoFolderSubfolder Namesrdquo radial button is chosen than on your file that you are exporting to will have all the conditions folders and subfolders In the Delimiter box you can choose the symbol that is needed to separate the information you are exporting Some files need semicolons () or colons () to make sure the information comes exported in is separated it the appropriate places

Section 8 Advanced Features

61

In previous versions of On-Screen Takeoff there are views that users need to have in order for them to display their information By either choosing ldquoOST 1xrdquo or ldquoOST 2xrdquo it will let the program know you want your columns of information exported in that specific format

When you have the Confirm Deletions radial button of ldquoYesrdquo chosen than every time you delete anything you will get a dialog box confirming your intentions of deletion

While working with your takeoff you have a choice to either view the legend of your conditions or hide it Choose whichever radial button that suits your needs

For those who prefer to use the Enter key to navigate in dialog boxes this option is just for that

Font Tab The Font tab is designed for you to make your own look and feel for the application At the bottom of this tab it will show you sample of the fonts and colors you have chosen

Renaming the Current Page You may change the name of the current page in the takeoff area of On-Screen Takeoff by selecting Edit gt Rename Page

This opens the Name Page dialog and you may simply type in a new name and click the Enter button The new name for the file will be reflected on the title bar for the page and in Project Properties

You also may access the Rename Page function by right-clicking in the takeoff area while in Image View and selecting the option from the pop-up menu that appears

Section 9

62

Saving and Exiting

This section will

Explain how to save projects

Show you how to safely exit the program

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

63

Saving Your Project

1 Select File gt Save 2 If your project has not previously been saved a Save dialog box will open to allow you to name

the file and choose the directory and folder in which to save your file 3 Once saved File gt Save will simply save the current version of the file

OR

4 Select File gt Save As then type in a new name for the file and save to the desired file path

The Auto-save Feature With the Auto-save feature On-Screen Takeoff automatically backs up your open project You may choose to have more than one level of backup files The first backup copy will have the extension b00 and successive files will be b01 b02 and so on If you have designated four levels of backup files after the fourth backup copy has been created (b03) the next file will be saved over the file with extension b00 Further backup saves will then rotate through the four backup files in the same way

1 Select Tools gt Options 2 In the Auto-save area (under the General tab) select the frequency of backup file creation (in

minutes) and the number of levels for the feature 3 You also may disengage the feature by clicking in the check box to clear it

The Auto-save feature automatically saves backup copies to the directory of the current project If you are working from a write-protected area such as a CD-ROM On-Screen Takeoff will place backup files in the On-Screen Takeoff folder

Exiting When you are finished using On-Screen Takeoff it is very easy to exit Exiting is very important because of security reasons If someone were to use your computer they could enter the application and view and manipulate information

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

64

On-Screen Takeoff closes the open project when you open another or create a new project or when you exit the program

1 Select File gt Exit

OR

2 You also may click at the upper right-hand corner of the application to exit

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

65

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer When you get your digitizer from GTCO you will need to connect it to your computer Follow the instructions outlined below to do this

Note For rollup digitizers the metal bar must be oriented to the top or right hand side

Connecting the Digitizer 1 Lay the digitizer out flat 2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer 3 Plug in the power adapter 4 Plug the interface (IO) cable into the digitizer 5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into an open serial port on computer

Note GTCO Technical support phone number is 410-381-6688 The electronic manual (on diskette) from GTCO contains more detailed installation and operation instructions for the GTCO digitizer model you have

Installing other Digitizer Drivers If you are using a GTCO Digitizer you will need to install the GTCO TabletWorks Drivers

If you are using a Digitizer not supported by GTCO Tablet Works 10 please contact the manufacturer of your digitizer for assistance with installation

Installing GTCO TabletWorks Drivers 1 Insert the On Center CD into the CD-ROM drive The CD Startup screen will open 2 Click on Install Software 3 Select Additional Software and Drivers 4 Select Digitizer Driver 5 Follow the instructions for installing TabletWorks 10

Adhering the Template The template is a small plastic sticker used to enable mouse function when using the digitizer with On-Screen Takeoff Place your template on your digitizer We suggest placing it in the bottom right corner of the digitizer about one inch inside the takeoff area

Note You may either peel off the back of the template and use the adhesive surface or you can tape the template down

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

66

Testing the Digitizer Drivers Before running OST you may test the digitizer by moving the stylus around on the digitizer pad it should move the mouse cursor (if mouse emulation is enabled)

If the digitizer does not move the mouse cursor on the screen

The superset codes may need to be reset Reset the superset codes by touching on the border of the digitizer with the stylus The digitizer should beep several times

The digitizer may not be communicating with the computer Be sure the COM port selected is correct Be sure the COM port selected is correct If you are not able to get the digitizer to move the mouse cursor you need to call GTCO technical support for help

Note The Mouse Emulation is not required for On-Screen Takeoff to work properly It is used only for the Template functionality if the digitizer is moving the cursor the wrong direction (up instead of sideways or vice-versa)

Click the L-shaped arrow symbol on the digitizer with the stylus

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

67

Appendix II Toolbar Items Main Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

68

Tool Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

69

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

70

Navigate Toolbar (Continued)

Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

71

Takeoff Toolbar (Continued)

Image Toolbar

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

72

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

This section will detail how to load plans from a F W Dodge CD-ROM into an On-Screen Takeoff project file ready for takeoffs

Dodge files may be added to the Project Properties dialog However loading the files in that way will load the files by number rather than name description If you want to load one page only from your Dodge CD You will have to rename the page to display the name rather than number of the file

To load plan files from a Dodge CD so that the files load sequentially by file number but are displayed by name rather than by number within your project follow the instructions below

Opening a Dodge project from a CD-ROM 1 Insert the CD into the drive 2 Choose File gt Custom 3 Choose Dodge Plans Project (plansdat) as the file type 4 Select the appropriate file type by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the Files of type

field 5 In the Look in field access your drive paths by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the

field then

Navigate to your CD-ROM drive Open the data folder and Open the Projects folder

6 Select the desired project and open its folder 7 Open the plansdat file 8 All the images will come in sequenced correctly for that job along with the full descriptions

(names) of each page If there is not a plans folder in the project folder then plans do not exist for that project on the CD Opening the plansdat file will yield an empty project

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

73

Appendix IV Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer The On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer is a limited version of On Center Softwarersquos commercial takeoff software If your status bar located at the very bottom of the main window says View Mode in the lower left-hand corner then you are using the Plan Viewer You can use the plan viewer to

View CD-based amp converted CAD drawings

View a previously created OST file and associated drawings

Download electronic plans online

Navigate through drawings

Quickly Takeoff linearsareas and counts

Zoom in to view the plan better

Print drawings directly from the viewer

Viewing an On-Screen Takeoff Project File

1 To open an OST file that was previously created with of On-Screen Takeoff 2 Select File gt Open 3 An Open dialog will appear if you do not see the OST file you are looking for select the

Look In drop down arrow 4 A drop down menu will appear listing the various folders drives and mapped drives located

on your computer select the correct drive or folder location and continue to browse to the location of your OST file

5 When you see your OST file double-click it to open it 6 Any takeoff and drawings should appear on the Image tab view

If you do not see the drawings but do see the colored takeoff layer the drawings may

not be located in the same place they were originally saved at Go to File gt Project Properties and check the Image File path for each listed page If the image file path is pointing to a CD drive make sure the CD is inside the CR-ROM

Downloading Electronic Plans If your Online Plan Service provides a special file format (OSX) required to use this feature of our plan viewer you can immediately downloaded all electronic plans of a project directly from our viewer

Most Plan Room web sites will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff when a request to download plans is made Your particular Plan Room may differ in operation so please contact the provider directly with questions on using the site

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

74

When you request to download or open a project file from a Plan Room you will usually have the open to open or save an OSX file Choosing open will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff Alternately you may choose to save the file to a local hard drive After you have saved the file either double-click it to launch On-Screen Takeoff or open the OSX file using On-Screen Takeoff by clicking File then Open and locating the file on your hard drive You will need to change the file type to OSX

After the OSX file is opened you will see an additional tab appear in the Conditions List window called Pages

The Pages tab shows the hierarchy of your project Gray file icons represent pages that have not been downloaded and blue icons represents pages that have been downloaded

To download a page simply double-click the page icon

If you wish to select a group of pages to download you can use the Ctrl or Shift key to multiple select them then click the Download button

If you wish to download all pages at once click the Download All button

Downloaded pages will now appear in the Project Properties dialog in the same order in which they appear in the Pages tab

Creating Quick Takeoffs With On-Screen Takeoff you can create quick takeoffs to measure quantities even if you dont have the full version of our program However using the Quick Takeoff functionality shows you just a fraction of what the full version can do

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar is located at the top of the image view It has three buttons designated for three types of takeoffs Linear Area and Count The Quantity drop down list will show secondary quantities for Linears and Areas The Units drop down allows you to select how you want your quantities displayed Feet Inches Yards Millimeters and Meters

NOTE Every time change the type of takeoff you are performing (switching from Area to Linear for example) the previous quantities and takeoff objects will disappear They will also disappear when you changes pages

NOTE You can use the Dimension Tool to basically measure the distance between two points or linears The distance will display on the status bar at the bottom of the application

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

75

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions General

Where is On-Screen Takeoff installed on my computer

Typically it is installed in CProgram FilesOn-Screen Takeoff

In Explorer how do I recognize On-Screen Takeoff file types

On-Screen Takeoff data is stored in a single file per job lsquojob name OSTrsquo On-Screen Takeoff templates are stored as lsquotemplate nameTPOrsquo

Can only one project at a time be open

Yes For that reason opening another project automatically closes the project on screen You will be asked to save any changes

Is only one scale allowed per page What about on drawings that have multiple detail sections on a page and each of those drawings have different scales

Yes For pages with drawings of different scales copy the drawing to another project page and set the appropriate scale

I cannot perform backout on an area that is along a linear

As a workaround use the On-Screen Takeoff layers feature to help you with this issue Electronic Images

How do I start a project from drawings that have been scanned and written to a CD-ROM

Open a new project Select File gt Project Properties and select Auto Add Navigate to your CD and the appropriate folder and select any image file in that location Click Open All files in the location will load into your project Recommended that images are copied from CD to hard drive for performance

If I get a disk of drawings in AutoCAD format (R13 or R14) can I read them in On-Screen Takeoff

Yes On-Screen Takeoff now reads DWG DXF and many other format that are saved with AutoCAD

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

76

When I click on the all pages button what is supposed to happen Currently nothing seems to change when I click on that button

The All Pages button is used to apply the Darken and Enhance Plans feature to all pages in the project (as opposed to only the current page on screen)

Is there a way to deduct a large skylight from an area condition

Yes with the related area condition selected in the Takeoff Dock bar unselect the Backout button on the Takeoff Toolbar then draw the Backout area The area quantity will be deducted from the related condition object and the linear measurement of the Backout perimeter will be added

Digitizer Issues

How do I connect a Digitizer to the computer

See Appendix I Connecting a Digitizer

The Place Template menu choice is disabled

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or the digitizer or the digitzer drivers are not installed

It wonrsquot let me select the Set Takeoff Area menu choice

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or no job is open a digitizer is not installed or the drivers are not installed

The digitizer stylus is not moving the cursor or crosshairs

Click S-0-1 superset on the digitizer

How do I convert my old GTCO Digitizer to work with On- Screen Takeofftrade

Call GTCO and they may be able to reconfigure your digitizer to be compatible with On-Screen Takeoff

Printing Issues Which Printers work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible printers include On-Screen Takeoff Hewlett Packard Epson and Canon printers If you are having printer difficulties please contact support and specify the type of printer along with other pertinent information Contact support at wwwoncentercomsupport or email supportoncentercom

Which Plotters work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible Plotters include Hewlett Packard DesignJet plotters and the EnCAD Cadjet II If you are having plotter difficulties please contact support and specify the type of plotter concerned

ViewingDisplay I can no longer see my condition list How do I get it back

The toolbars and Dock bars can be turned on and off through the View gt Toolbars menu options

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

77

This is also accessible by right-clicking in the toolbar area and selecting (or deselecting) a toolbar listed

I cannot view my folders in the condition list

Right-click in the Takeoff Dock barcondition list area and select Show Tree to display your folders

My Status Bar reads Viewer Mode and I am unable to draw conditions

On-Screen Takeoff needs to be Authorized Or you need to purchase an upgrade Click the Perform Advanced Takeoff button on the main toolbar

I hid a Dock bar and when I selected to view it again it appeared alongside the other Dock

bar instead of stacked on top of it How do I fix it

Pick up the Dock bar by clicking on the bar at the top and continuing to hold down the mouse button drag the Dock bar over the other one It will resize and appear stacked with the other

When I open image files from a CD the images are all upside down How do I get them right

side up

To flip pages from top to bottom follow the steps below 1 Click the All Pages button on the Image Toolbar (All Pages is engaged when the button

is not clicked) 2 Click the Flip Horizontal button on the Image Toolbar 3 Click the All Pages button again to disengage

Templates How do I create a Template

Follow the steps below 1 Create a typical project 2 Choose File gt Save As 3 Choose On-Screen Takeoff Template Files as the file type to save 4 Name the file This will save all of the condition setups as well as the layers for the

project

How do I create a new project from a template

Follow the steps below 1 Choose File gt New 2 Select a template from those listed in the New dialog This will open a new project with

conditions and layers saved from a previous project but no pages or takeoff

78

INDEX

Area Conditions 32

Area Objects 57

Auto Scrolling 20

Auto-save 63

Backout Mode 41

Calculation Method 60

Conditions 29

Configuration 60

Contents Tab 6

Continuous Mode 38

Count Conditions 33

Count Objects 57

Digitizer 10 65 76

Docking Toolbars 13

Dodge CD 72

Drawing 27 37

DropRun Count 55

Environment 18

Exiting 63

Exporting 49

Features 16

Font 61

Frequently Asked Questions 75

Grid 40

Help File 5

Hiding Toolbars 13

Hot Links 21

Image 19 59

Image files 9

Image Toolbar 12 71

Images 75

Index Tab 6

Layers 43

Linear Conditions 31

Linear Objects 56

Main Toolbar 12 67

Menus 14

Moving Toolbars 13

Navigate Toolbar 12 69

Navigating 20

On-Screen Takeofftrade 2

Page 59 61

Pages 20 25 28

Plan Viewer 73

Plans 26

Printing 47 76

Project Properties 25

Projects 22

Quick Start Video 18

Resizing Toolbars 13

Roping 54

Saving 63

Scale 28

Search Tab 7

Selecting Objects 42

Setup 8

Start On-Screen Takeofftrade 17

System Requirements 9

Takeoff 19 27

Takeoff Toolbar 70 71

Takeoff Toolbar 12

Template Files 23

TIF (Group4) 9

Tool Toolbar 12 68

Toolbar 67

Toolbars 12

View Toolbar 12 69

Viewing Toolbars 12

Worksheet 20

Zone Conditions 33

Zoom Toolbar 12 69

  • On-Screen Takeoff Lite
  • Table of Contents
  • Section 1 - Introduction
  • Section 2 - Setup
  • Section 3 - Toolbars and Menus
  • Section 4 - Features
  • Section 5 - Projects
  • Section 6 - Conditions and Takeoff
  • Section 7 - Printing and Exporting
  • Section 8 - Advanced Features
  • Section 9 - Saving and Exiting
  • Appendix I - Installing Your Digitizer
  • Appendix II - Toolbar Items
  • Appendix III - Loading Plans from a Dodge CD
  • Appendix IV - Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer
  • Appendix V - Frequently Asked Questions
  • Index

Section 8 Advanced Features

60

Advanced Features of Tool Options

Calculation Method On-Screen Takeoff has built-in calculation options to allow for faster work and faster saves until your takeoff is complete Calculation options are found by selecting Tools gt Options then clicking on the Calculation tab

Calculation method can be set to Automatic Automatic except Grids and Manual Manual will allow the program to operate more quickly while Automatic or Automatic except Grids allows the user to see quantity changes as takeoffs are made

In any mode you may press F9 to recalculate quantities for the On-Screen Takeoff current totals

Configuration Tab

When the ldquoPage Label (A01)rdquo radial button is chosen On-Screen Takeoff puts the numbered label on all the pages of in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar If the Page Descriptionrdquo radial button is chosen then a description of what takeoff is on that specific page will be shown in your current page indicator in your Navigate Toolbar

This section of the configuration tab gives you options on how you want to export your information When the ldquoFolderSubfolder Namesrdquo radial button is chosen than on your file that you are exporting to will have all the conditions folders and subfolders In the Delimiter box you can choose the symbol that is needed to separate the information you are exporting Some files need semicolons () or colons () to make sure the information comes exported in is separated it the appropriate places

Section 8 Advanced Features

61

In previous versions of On-Screen Takeoff there are views that users need to have in order for them to display their information By either choosing ldquoOST 1xrdquo or ldquoOST 2xrdquo it will let the program know you want your columns of information exported in that specific format

When you have the Confirm Deletions radial button of ldquoYesrdquo chosen than every time you delete anything you will get a dialog box confirming your intentions of deletion

While working with your takeoff you have a choice to either view the legend of your conditions or hide it Choose whichever radial button that suits your needs

For those who prefer to use the Enter key to navigate in dialog boxes this option is just for that

Font Tab The Font tab is designed for you to make your own look and feel for the application At the bottom of this tab it will show you sample of the fonts and colors you have chosen

Renaming the Current Page You may change the name of the current page in the takeoff area of On-Screen Takeoff by selecting Edit gt Rename Page

This opens the Name Page dialog and you may simply type in a new name and click the Enter button The new name for the file will be reflected on the title bar for the page and in Project Properties

You also may access the Rename Page function by right-clicking in the takeoff area while in Image View and selecting the option from the pop-up menu that appears

Section 9

62

Saving and Exiting

This section will

Explain how to save projects

Show you how to safely exit the program

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

63

Saving Your Project

1 Select File gt Save 2 If your project has not previously been saved a Save dialog box will open to allow you to name

the file and choose the directory and folder in which to save your file 3 Once saved File gt Save will simply save the current version of the file

OR

4 Select File gt Save As then type in a new name for the file and save to the desired file path

The Auto-save Feature With the Auto-save feature On-Screen Takeoff automatically backs up your open project You may choose to have more than one level of backup files The first backup copy will have the extension b00 and successive files will be b01 b02 and so on If you have designated four levels of backup files after the fourth backup copy has been created (b03) the next file will be saved over the file with extension b00 Further backup saves will then rotate through the four backup files in the same way

1 Select Tools gt Options 2 In the Auto-save area (under the General tab) select the frequency of backup file creation (in

minutes) and the number of levels for the feature 3 You also may disengage the feature by clicking in the check box to clear it

The Auto-save feature automatically saves backup copies to the directory of the current project If you are working from a write-protected area such as a CD-ROM On-Screen Takeoff will place backup files in the On-Screen Takeoff folder

Exiting When you are finished using On-Screen Takeoff it is very easy to exit Exiting is very important because of security reasons If someone were to use your computer they could enter the application and view and manipulate information

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

64

On-Screen Takeoff closes the open project when you open another or create a new project or when you exit the program

1 Select File gt Exit

OR

2 You also may click at the upper right-hand corner of the application to exit

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

65

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer When you get your digitizer from GTCO you will need to connect it to your computer Follow the instructions outlined below to do this

Note For rollup digitizers the metal bar must be oriented to the top or right hand side

Connecting the Digitizer 1 Lay the digitizer out flat 2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer 3 Plug in the power adapter 4 Plug the interface (IO) cable into the digitizer 5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into an open serial port on computer

Note GTCO Technical support phone number is 410-381-6688 The electronic manual (on diskette) from GTCO contains more detailed installation and operation instructions for the GTCO digitizer model you have

Installing other Digitizer Drivers If you are using a GTCO Digitizer you will need to install the GTCO TabletWorks Drivers

If you are using a Digitizer not supported by GTCO Tablet Works 10 please contact the manufacturer of your digitizer for assistance with installation

Installing GTCO TabletWorks Drivers 1 Insert the On Center CD into the CD-ROM drive The CD Startup screen will open 2 Click on Install Software 3 Select Additional Software and Drivers 4 Select Digitizer Driver 5 Follow the instructions for installing TabletWorks 10

Adhering the Template The template is a small plastic sticker used to enable mouse function when using the digitizer with On-Screen Takeoff Place your template on your digitizer We suggest placing it in the bottom right corner of the digitizer about one inch inside the takeoff area

Note You may either peel off the back of the template and use the adhesive surface or you can tape the template down

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

66

Testing the Digitizer Drivers Before running OST you may test the digitizer by moving the stylus around on the digitizer pad it should move the mouse cursor (if mouse emulation is enabled)

If the digitizer does not move the mouse cursor on the screen

The superset codes may need to be reset Reset the superset codes by touching on the border of the digitizer with the stylus The digitizer should beep several times

The digitizer may not be communicating with the computer Be sure the COM port selected is correct Be sure the COM port selected is correct If you are not able to get the digitizer to move the mouse cursor you need to call GTCO technical support for help

Note The Mouse Emulation is not required for On-Screen Takeoff to work properly It is used only for the Template functionality if the digitizer is moving the cursor the wrong direction (up instead of sideways or vice-versa)

Click the L-shaped arrow symbol on the digitizer with the stylus

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

67

Appendix II Toolbar Items Main Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

68

Tool Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

69

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

70

Navigate Toolbar (Continued)

Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

71

Takeoff Toolbar (Continued)

Image Toolbar

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

72

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

This section will detail how to load plans from a F W Dodge CD-ROM into an On-Screen Takeoff project file ready for takeoffs

Dodge files may be added to the Project Properties dialog However loading the files in that way will load the files by number rather than name description If you want to load one page only from your Dodge CD You will have to rename the page to display the name rather than number of the file

To load plan files from a Dodge CD so that the files load sequentially by file number but are displayed by name rather than by number within your project follow the instructions below

Opening a Dodge project from a CD-ROM 1 Insert the CD into the drive 2 Choose File gt Custom 3 Choose Dodge Plans Project (plansdat) as the file type 4 Select the appropriate file type by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the Files of type

field 5 In the Look in field access your drive paths by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the

field then

Navigate to your CD-ROM drive Open the data folder and Open the Projects folder

6 Select the desired project and open its folder 7 Open the plansdat file 8 All the images will come in sequenced correctly for that job along with the full descriptions

(names) of each page If there is not a plans folder in the project folder then plans do not exist for that project on the CD Opening the plansdat file will yield an empty project

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

73

Appendix IV Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer The On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer is a limited version of On Center Softwarersquos commercial takeoff software If your status bar located at the very bottom of the main window says View Mode in the lower left-hand corner then you are using the Plan Viewer You can use the plan viewer to

View CD-based amp converted CAD drawings

View a previously created OST file and associated drawings

Download electronic plans online

Navigate through drawings

Quickly Takeoff linearsareas and counts

Zoom in to view the plan better

Print drawings directly from the viewer

Viewing an On-Screen Takeoff Project File

1 To open an OST file that was previously created with of On-Screen Takeoff 2 Select File gt Open 3 An Open dialog will appear if you do not see the OST file you are looking for select the

Look In drop down arrow 4 A drop down menu will appear listing the various folders drives and mapped drives located

on your computer select the correct drive or folder location and continue to browse to the location of your OST file

5 When you see your OST file double-click it to open it 6 Any takeoff and drawings should appear on the Image tab view

If you do not see the drawings but do see the colored takeoff layer the drawings may

not be located in the same place they were originally saved at Go to File gt Project Properties and check the Image File path for each listed page If the image file path is pointing to a CD drive make sure the CD is inside the CR-ROM

Downloading Electronic Plans If your Online Plan Service provides a special file format (OSX) required to use this feature of our plan viewer you can immediately downloaded all electronic plans of a project directly from our viewer

Most Plan Room web sites will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff when a request to download plans is made Your particular Plan Room may differ in operation so please contact the provider directly with questions on using the site

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

74

When you request to download or open a project file from a Plan Room you will usually have the open to open or save an OSX file Choosing open will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff Alternately you may choose to save the file to a local hard drive After you have saved the file either double-click it to launch On-Screen Takeoff or open the OSX file using On-Screen Takeoff by clicking File then Open and locating the file on your hard drive You will need to change the file type to OSX

After the OSX file is opened you will see an additional tab appear in the Conditions List window called Pages

The Pages tab shows the hierarchy of your project Gray file icons represent pages that have not been downloaded and blue icons represents pages that have been downloaded

To download a page simply double-click the page icon

If you wish to select a group of pages to download you can use the Ctrl or Shift key to multiple select them then click the Download button

If you wish to download all pages at once click the Download All button

Downloaded pages will now appear in the Project Properties dialog in the same order in which they appear in the Pages tab

Creating Quick Takeoffs With On-Screen Takeoff you can create quick takeoffs to measure quantities even if you dont have the full version of our program However using the Quick Takeoff functionality shows you just a fraction of what the full version can do

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar is located at the top of the image view It has three buttons designated for three types of takeoffs Linear Area and Count The Quantity drop down list will show secondary quantities for Linears and Areas The Units drop down allows you to select how you want your quantities displayed Feet Inches Yards Millimeters and Meters

NOTE Every time change the type of takeoff you are performing (switching from Area to Linear for example) the previous quantities and takeoff objects will disappear They will also disappear when you changes pages

NOTE You can use the Dimension Tool to basically measure the distance between two points or linears The distance will display on the status bar at the bottom of the application

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

75

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions General

Where is On-Screen Takeoff installed on my computer

Typically it is installed in CProgram FilesOn-Screen Takeoff

In Explorer how do I recognize On-Screen Takeoff file types

On-Screen Takeoff data is stored in a single file per job lsquojob name OSTrsquo On-Screen Takeoff templates are stored as lsquotemplate nameTPOrsquo

Can only one project at a time be open

Yes For that reason opening another project automatically closes the project on screen You will be asked to save any changes

Is only one scale allowed per page What about on drawings that have multiple detail sections on a page and each of those drawings have different scales

Yes For pages with drawings of different scales copy the drawing to another project page and set the appropriate scale

I cannot perform backout on an area that is along a linear

As a workaround use the On-Screen Takeoff layers feature to help you with this issue Electronic Images

How do I start a project from drawings that have been scanned and written to a CD-ROM

Open a new project Select File gt Project Properties and select Auto Add Navigate to your CD and the appropriate folder and select any image file in that location Click Open All files in the location will load into your project Recommended that images are copied from CD to hard drive for performance

If I get a disk of drawings in AutoCAD format (R13 or R14) can I read them in On-Screen Takeoff

Yes On-Screen Takeoff now reads DWG DXF and many other format that are saved with AutoCAD

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

76

When I click on the all pages button what is supposed to happen Currently nothing seems to change when I click on that button

The All Pages button is used to apply the Darken and Enhance Plans feature to all pages in the project (as opposed to only the current page on screen)

Is there a way to deduct a large skylight from an area condition

Yes with the related area condition selected in the Takeoff Dock bar unselect the Backout button on the Takeoff Toolbar then draw the Backout area The area quantity will be deducted from the related condition object and the linear measurement of the Backout perimeter will be added

Digitizer Issues

How do I connect a Digitizer to the computer

See Appendix I Connecting a Digitizer

The Place Template menu choice is disabled

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or the digitizer or the digitzer drivers are not installed

It wonrsquot let me select the Set Takeoff Area menu choice

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or no job is open a digitizer is not installed or the drivers are not installed

The digitizer stylus is not moving the cursor or crosshairs

Click S-0-1 superset on the digitizer

How do I convert my old GTCO Digitizer to work with On- Screen Takeofftrade

Call GTCO and they may be able to reconfigure your digitizer to be compatible with On-Screen Takeoff

Printing Issues Which Printers work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible printers include On-Screen Takeoff Hewlett Packard Epson and Canon printers If you are having printer difficulties please contact support and specify the type of printer along with other pertinent information Contact support at wwwoncentercomsupport or email supportoncentercom

Which Plotters work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible Plotters include Hewlett Packard DesignJet plotters and the EnCAD Cadjet II If you are having plotter difficulties please contact support and specify the type of plotter concerned

ViewingDisplay I can no longer see my condition list How do I get it back

The toolbars and Dock bars can be turned on and off through the View gt Toolbars menu options

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

77

This is also accessible by right-clicking in the toolbar area and selecting (or deselecting) a toolbar listed

I cannot view my folders in the condition list

Right-click in the Takeoff Dock barcondition list area and select Show Tree to display your folders

My Status Bar reads Viewer Mode and I am unable to draw conditions

On-Screen Takeoff needs to be Authorized Or you need to purchase an upgrade Click the Perform Advanced Takeoff button on the main toolbar

I hid a Dock bar and when I selected to view it again it appeared alongside the other Dock

bar instead of stacked on top of it How do I fix it

Pick up the Dock bar by clicking on the bar at the top and continuing to hold down the mouse button drag the Dock bar over the other one It will resize and appear stacked with the other

When I open image files from a CD the images are all upside down How do I get them right

side up

To flip pages from top to bottom follow the steps below 1 Click the All Pages button on the Image Toolbar (All Pages is engaged when the button

is not clicked) 2 Click the Flip Horizontal button on the Image Toolbar 3 Click the All Pages button again to disengage

Templates How do I create a Template

Follow the steps below 1 Create a typical project 2 Choose File gt Save As 3 Choose On-Screen Takeoff Template Files as the file type to save 4 Name the file This will save all of the condition setups as well as the layers for the

project

How do I create a new project from a template

Follow the steps below 1 Choose File gt New 2 Select a template from those listed in the New dialog This will open a new project with

conditions and layers saved from a previous project but no pages or takeoff

78

INDEX

Area Conditions 32

Area Objects 57

Auto Scrolling 20

Auto-save 63

Backout Mode 41

Calculation Method 60

Conditions 29

Configuration 60

Contents Tab 6

Continuous Mode 38

Count Conditions 33

Count Objects 57

Digitizer 10 65 76

Docking Toolbars 13

Dodge CD 72

Drawing 27 37

DropRun Count 55

Environment 18

Exiting 63

Exporting 49

Features 16

Font 61

Frequently Asked Questions 75

Grid 40

Help File 5

Hiding Toolbars 13

Hot Links 21

Image 19 59

Image files 9

Image Toolbar 12 71

Images 75

Index Tab 6

Layers 43

Linear Conditions 31

Linear Objects 56

Main Toolbar 12 67

Menus 14

Moving Toolbars 13

Navigate Toolbar 12 69

Navigating 20

On-Screen Takeofftrade 2

Page 59 61

Pages 20 25 28

Plan Viewer 73

Plans 26

Printing 47 76

Project Properties 25

Projects 22

Quick Start Video 18

Resizing Toolbars 13

Roping 54

Saving 63

Scale 28

Search Tab 7

Selecting Objects 42

Setup 8

Start On-Screen Takeofftrade 17

System Requirements 9

Takeoff 19 27

Takeoff Toolbar 70 71

Takeoff Toolbar 12

Template Files 23

TIF (Group4) 9

Tool Toolbar 12 68

Toolbar 67

Toolbars 12

View Toolbar 12 69

Viewing Toolbars 12

Worksheet 20

Zone Conditions 33

Zoom Toolbar 12 69

  • On-Screen Takeoff Lite
  • Table of Contents
  • Section 1 - Introduction
  • Section 2 - Setup
  • Section 3 - Toolbars and Menus
  • Section 4 - Features
  • Section 5 - Projects
  • Section 6 - Conditions and Takeoff
  • Section 7 - Printing and Exporting
  • Section 8 - Advanced Features
  • Section 9 - Saving and Exiting
  • Appendix I - Installing Your Digitizer
  • Appendix II - Toolbar Items
  • Appendix III - Loading Plans from a Dodge CD
  • Appendix IV - Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer
  • Appendix V - Frequently Asked Questions
  • Index

Section 8 Advanced Features

61

In previous versions of On-Screen Takeoff there are views that users need to have in order for them to display their information By either choosing ldquoOST 1xrdquo or ldquoOST 2xrdquo it will let the program know you want your columns of information exported in that specific format

When you have the Confirm Deletions radial button of ldquoYesrdquo chosen than every time you delete anything you will get a dialog box confirming your intentions of deletion

While working with your takeoff you have a choice to either view the legend of your conditions or hide it Choose whichever radial button that suits your needs

For those who prefer to use the Enter key to navigate in dialog boxes this option is just for that

Font Tab The Font tab is designed for you to make your own look and feel for the application At the bottom of this tab it will show you sample of the fonts and colors you have chosen

Renaming the Current Page You may change the name of the current page in the takeoff area of On-Screen Takeoff by selecting Edit gt Rename Page

This opens the Name Page dialog and you may simply type in a new name and click the Enter button The new name for the file will be reflected on the title bar for the page and in Project Properties

You also may access the Rename Page function by right-clicking in the takeoff area while in Image View and selecting the option from the pop-up menu that appears

Section 9

62

Saving and Exiting

This section will

Explain how to save projects

Show you how to safely exit the program

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

63

Saving Your Project

1 Select File gt Save 2 If your project has not previously been saved a Save dialog box will open to allow you to name

the file and choose the directory and folder in which to save your file 3 Once saved File gt Save will simply save the current version of the file

OR

4 Select File gt Save As then type in a new name for the file and save to the desired file path

The Auto-save Feature With the Auto-save feature On-Screen Takeoff automatically backs up your open project You may choose to have more than one level of backup files The first backup copy will have the extension b00 and successive files will be b01 b02 and so on If you have designated four levels of backup files after the fourth backup copy has been created (b03) the next file will be saved over the file with extension b00 Further backup saves will then rotate through the four backup files in the same way

1 Select Tools gt Options 2 In the Auto-save area (under the General tab) select the frequency of backup file creation (in

minutes) and the number of levels for the feature 3 You also may disengage the feature by clicking in the check box to clear it

The Auto-save feature automatically saves backup copies to the directory of the current project If you are working from a write-protected area such as a CD-ROM On-Screen Takeoff will place backup files in the On-Screen Takeoff folder

Exiting When you are finished using On-Screen Takeoff it is very easy to exit Exiting is very important because of security reasons If someone were to use your computer they could enter the application and view and manipulate information

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

64

On-Screen Takeoff closes the open project when you open another or create a new project or when you exit the program

1 Select File gt Exit

OR

2 You also may click at the upper right-hand corner of the application to exit

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

65

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer When you get your digitizer from GTCO you will need to connect it to your computer Follow the instructions outlined below to do this

Note For rollup digitizers the metal bar must be oriented to the top or right hand side

Connecting the Digitizer 1 Lay the digitizer out flat 2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer 3 Plug in the power adapter 4 Plug the interface (IO) cable into the digitizer 5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into an open serial port on computer

Note GTCO Technical support phone number is 410-381-6688 The electronic manual (on diskette) from GTCO contains more detailed installation and operation instructions for the GTCO digitizer model you have

Installing other Digitizer Drivers If you are using a GTCO Digitizer you will need to install the GTCO TabletWorks Drivers

If you are using a Digitizer not supported by GTCO Tablet Works 10 please contact the manufacturer of your digitizer for assistance with installation

Installing GTCO TabletWorks Drivers 1 Insert the On Center CD into the CD-ROM drive The CD Startup screen will open 2 Click on Install Software 3 Select Additional Software and Drivers 4 Select Digitizer Driver 5 Follow the instructions for installing TabletWorks 10

Adhering the Template The template is a small plastic sticker used to enable mouse function when using the digitizer with On-Screen Takeoff Place your template on your digitizer We suggest placing it in the bottom right corner of the digitizer about one inch inside the takeoff area

Note You may either peel off the back of the template and use the adhesive surface or you can tape the template down

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

66

Testing the Digitizer Drivers Before running OST you may test the digitizer by moving the stylus around on the digitizer pad it should move the mouse cursor (if mouse emulation is enabled)

If the digitizer does not move the mouse cursor on the screen

The superset codes may need to be reset Reset the superset codes by touching on the border of the digitizer with the stylus The digitizer should beep several times

The digitizer may not be communicating with the computer Be sure the COM port selected is correct Be sure the COM port selected is correct If you are not able to get the digitizer to move the mouse cursor you need to call GTCO technical support for help

Note The Mouse Emulation is not required for On-Screen Takeoff to work properly It is used only for the Template functionality if the digitizer is moving the cursor the wrong direction (up instead of sideways or vice-versa)

Click the L-shaped arrow symbol on the digitizer with the stylus

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

67

Appendix II Toolbar Items Main Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

68

Tool Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

69

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

70

Navigate Toolbar (Continued)

Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

71

Takeoff Toolbar (Continued)

Image Toolbar

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

72

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

This section will detail how to load plans from a F W Dodge CD-ROM into an On-Screen Takeoff project file ready for takeoffs

Dodge files may be added to the Project Properties dialog However loading the files in that way will load the files by number rather than name description If you want to load one page only from your Dodge CD You will have to rename the page to display the name rather than number of the file

To load plan files from a Dodge CD so that the files load sequentially by file number but are displayed by name rather than by number within your project follow the instructions below

Opening a Dodge project from a CD-ROM 1 Insert the CD into the drive 2 Choose File gt Custom 3 Choose Dodge Plans Project (plansdat) as the file type 4 Select the appropriate file type by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the Files of type

field 5 In the Look in field access your drive paths by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the

field then

Navigate to your CD-ROM drive Open the data folder and Open the Projects folder

6 Select the desired project and open its folder 7 Open the plansdat file 8 All the images will come in sequenced correctly for that job along with the full descriptions

(names) of each page If there is not a plans folder in the project folder then plans do not exist for that project on the CD Opening the plansdat file will yield an empty project

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

73

Appendix IV Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer The On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer is a limited version of On Center Softwarersquos commercial takeoff software If your status bar located at the very bottom of the main window says View Mode in the lower left-hand corner then you are using the Plan Viewer You can use the plan viewer to

View CD-based amp converted CAD drawings

View a previously created OST file and associated drawings

Download electronic plans online

Navigate through drawings

Quickly Takeoff linearsareas and counts

Zoom in to view the plan better

Print drawings directly from the viewer

Viewing an On-Screen Takeoff Project File

1 To open an OST file that was previously created with of On-Screen Takeoff 2 Select File gt Open 3 An Open dialog will appear if you do not see the OST file you are looking for select the

Look In drop down arrow 4 A drop down menu will appear listing the various folders drives and mapped drives located

on your computer select the correct drive or folder location and continue to browse to the location of your OST file

5 When you see your OST file double-click it to open it 6 Any takeoff and drawings should appear on the Image tab view

If you do not see the drawings but do see the colored takeoff layer the drawings may

not be located in the same place they were originally saved at Go to File gt Project Properties and check the Image File path for each listed page If the image file path is pointing to a CD drive make sure the CD is inside the CR-ROM

Downloading Electronic Plans If your Online Plan Service provides a special file format (OSX) required to use this feature of our plan viewer you can immediately downloaded all electronic plans of a project directly from our viewer

Most Plan Room web sites will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff when a request to download plans is made Your particular Plan Room may differ in operation so please contact the provider directly with questions on using the site

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

74

When you request to download or open a project file from a Plan Room you will usually have the open to open or save an OSX file Choosing open will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff Alternately you may choose to save the file to a local hard drive After you have saved the file either double-click it to launch On-Screen Takeoff or open the OSX file using On-Screen Takeoff by clicking File then Open and locating the file on your hard drive You will need to change the file type to OSX

After the OSX file is opened you will see an additional tab appear in the Conditions List window called Pages

The Pages tab shows the hierarchy of your project Gray file icons represent pages that have not been downloaded and blue icons represents pages that have been downloaded

To download a page simply double-click the page icon

If you wish to select a group of pages to download you can use the Ctrl or Shift key to multiple select them then click the Download button

If you wish to download all pages at once click the Download All button

Downloaded pages will now appear in the Project Properties dialog in the same order in which they appear in the Pages tab

Creating Quick Takeoffs With On-Screen Takeoff you can create quick takeoffs to measure quantities even if you dont have the full version of our program However using the Quick Takeoff functionality shows you just a fraction of what the full version can do

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar is located at the top of the image view It has three buttons designated for three types of takeoffs Linear Area and Count The Quantity drop down list will show secondary quantities for Linears and Areas The Units drop down allows you to select how you want your quantities displayed Feet Inches Yards Millimeters and Meters

NOTE Every time change the type of takeoff you are performing (switching from Area to Linear for example) the previous quantities and takeoff objects will disappear They will also disappear when you changes pages

NOTE You can use the Dimension Tool to basically measure the distance between two points or linears The distance will display on the status bar at the bottom of the application

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

75

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions General

Where is On-Screen Takeoff installed on my computer

Typically it is installed in CProgram FilesOn-Screen Takeoff

In Explorer how do I recognize On-Screen Takeoff file types

On-Screen Takeoff data is stored in a single file per job lsquojob name OSTrsquo On-Screen Takeoff templates are stored as lsquotemplate nameTPOrsquo

Can only one project at a time be open

Yes For that reason opening another project automatically closes the project on screen You will be asked to save any changes

Is only one scale allowed per page What about on drawings that have multiple detail sections on a page and each of those drawings have different scales

Yes For pages with drawings of different scales copy the drawing to another project page and set the appropriate scale

I cannot perform backout on an area that is along a linear

As a workaround use the On-Screen Takeoff layers feature to help you with this issue Electronic Images

How do I start a project from drawings that have been scanned and written to a CD-ROM

Open a new project Select File gt Project Properties and select Auto Add Navigate to your CD and the appropriate folder and select any image file in that location Click Open All files in the location will load into your project Recommended that images are copied from CD to hard drive for performance

If I get a disk of drawings in AutoCAD format (R13 or R14) can I read them in On-Screen Takeoff

Yes On-Screen Takeoff now reads DWG DXF and many other format that are saved with AutoCAD

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

76

When I click on the all pages button what is supposed to happen Currently nothing seems to change when I click on that button

The All Pages button is used to apply the Darken and Enhance Plans feature to all pages in the project (as opposed to only the current page on screen)

Is there a way to deduct a large skylight from an area condition

Yes with the related area condition selected in the Takeoff Dock bar unselect the Backout button on the Takeoff Toolbar then draw the Backout area The area quantity will be deducted from the related condition object and the linear measurement of the Backout perimeter will be added

Digitizer Issues

How do I connect a Digitizer to the computer

See Appendix I Connecting a Digitizer

The Place Template menu choice is disabled

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or the digitizer or the digitzer drivers are not installed

It wonrsquot let me select the Set Takeoff Area menu choice

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or no job is open a digitizer is not installed or the drivers are not installed

The digitizer stylus is not moving the cursor or crosshairs

Click S-0-1 superset on the digitizer

How do I convert my old GTCO Digitizer to work with On- Screen Takeofftrade

Call GTCO and they may be able to reconfigure your digitizer to be compatible with On-Screen Takeoff

Printing Issues Which Printers work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible printers include On-Screen Takeoff Hewlett Packard Epson and Canon printers If you are having printer difficulties please contact support and specify the type of printer along with other pertinent information Contact support at wwwoncentercomsupport or email supportoncentercom

Which Plotters work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible Plotters include Hewlett Packard DesignJet plotters and the EnCAD Cadjet II If you are having plotter difficulties please contact support and specify the type of plotter concerned

ViewingDisplay I can no longer see my condition list How do I get it back

The toolbars and Dock bars can be turned on and off through the View gt Toolbars menu options

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

77

This is also accessible by right-clicking in the toolbar area and selecting (or deselecting) a toolbar listed

I cannot view my folders in the condition list

Right-click in the Takeoff Dock barcondition list area and select Show Tree to display your folders

My Status Bar reads Viewer Mode and I am unable to draw conditions

On-Screen Takeoff needs to be Authorized Or you need to purchase an upgrade Click the Perform Advanced Takeoff button on the main toolbar

I hid a Dock bar and when I selected to view it again it appeared alongside the other Dock

bar instead of stacked on top of it How do I fix it

Pick up the Dock bar by clicking on the bar at the top and continuing to hold down the mouse button drag the Dock bar over the other one It will resize and appear stacked with the other

When I open image files from a CD the images are all upside down How do I get them right

side up

To flip pages from top to bottom follow the steps below 1 Click the All Pages button on the Image Toolbar (All Pages is engaged when the button

is not clicked) 2 Click the Flip Horizontal button on the Image Toolbar 3 Click the All Pages button again to disengage

Templates How do I create a Template

Follow the steps below 1 Create a typical project 2 Choose File gt Save As 3 Choose On-Screen Takeoff Template Files as the file type to save 4 Name the file This will save all of the condition setups as well as the layers for the

project

How do I create a new project from a template

Follow the steps below 1 Choose File gt New 2 Select a template from those listed in the New dialog This will open a new project with

conditions and layers saved from a previous project but no pages or takeoff

78

INDEX

Area Conditions 32

Area Objects 57

Auto Scrolling 20

Auto-save 63

Backout Mode 41

Calculation Method 60

Conditions 29

Configuration 60

Contents Tab 6

Continuous Mode 38

Count Conditions 33

Count Objects 57

Digitizer 10 65 76

Docking Toolbars 13

Dodge CD 72

Drawing 27 37

DropRun Count 55

Environment 18

Exiting 63

Exporting 49

Features 16

Font 61

Frequently Asked Questions 75

Grid 40

Help File 5

Hiding Toolbars 13

Hot Links 21

Image 19 59

Image files 9

Image Toolbar 12 71

Images 75

Index Tab 6

Layers 43

Linear Conditions 31

Linear Objects 56

Main Toolbar 12 67

Menus 14

Moving Toolbars 13

Navigate Toolbar 12 69

Navigating 20

On-Screen Takeofftrade 2

Page 59 61

Pages 20 25 28

Plan Viewer 73

Plans 26

Printing 47 76

Project Properties 25

Projects 22

Quick Start Video 18

Resizing Toolbars 13

Roping 54

Saving 63

Scale 28

Search Tab 7

Selecting Objects 42

Setup 8

Start On-Screen Takeofftrade 17

System Requirements 9

Takeoff 19 27

Takeoff Toolbar 70 71

Takeoff Toolbar 12

Template Files 23

TIF (Group4) 9

Tool Toolbar 12 68

Toolbar 67

Toolbars 12

View Toolbar 12 69

Viewing Toolbars 12

Worksheet 20

Zone Conditions 33

Zoom Toolbar 12 69

  • On-Screen Takeoff Lite
  • Table of Contents
  • Section 1 - Introduction
  • Section 2 - Setup
  • Section 3 - Toolbars and Menus
  • Section 4 - Features
  • Section 5 - Projects
  • Section 6 - Conditions and Takeoff
  • Section 7 - Printing and Exporting
  • Section 8 - Advanced Features
  • Section 9 - Saving and Exiting
  • Appendix I - Installing Your Digitizer
  • Appendix II - Toolbar Items
  • Appendix III - Loading Plans from a Dodge CD
  • Appendix IV - Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer
  • Appendix V - Frequently Asked Questions
  • Index

Section 9

62

Saving and Exiting

This section will

Explain how to save projects

Show you how to safely exit the program

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

63

Saving Your Project

1 Select File gt Save 2 If your project has not previously been saved a Save dialog box will open to allow you to name

the file and choose the directory and folder in which to save your file 3 Once saved File gt Save will simply save the current version of the file

OR

4 Select File gt Save As then type in a new name for the file and save to the desired file path

The Auto-save Feature With the Auto-save feature On-Screen Takeoff automatically backs up your open project You may choose to have more than one level of backup files The first backup copy will have the extension b00 and successive files will be b01 b02 and so on If you have designated four levels of backup files after the fourth backup copy has been created (b03) the next file will be saved over the file with extension b00 Further backup saves will then rotate through the four backup files in the same way

1 Select Tools gt Options 2 In the Auto-save area (under the General tab) select the frequency of backup file creation (in

minutes) and the number of levels for the feature 3 You also may disengage the feature by clicking in the check box to clear it

The Auto-save feature automatically saves backup copies to the directory of the current project If you are working from a write-protected area such as a CD-ROM On-Screen Takeoff will place backup files in the On-Screen Takeoff folder

Exiting When you are finished using On-Screen Takeoff it is very easy to exit Exiting is very important because of security reasons If someone were to use your computer they could enter the application and view and manipulate information

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

64

On-Screen Takeoff closes the open project when you open another or create a new project or when you exit the program

1 Select File gt Exit

OR

2 You also may click at the upper right-hand corner of the application to exit

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

65

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer When you get your digitizer from GTCO you will need to connect it to your computer Follow the instructions outlined below to do this

Note For rollup digitizers the metal bar must be oriented to the top or right hand side

Connecting the Digitizer 1 Lay the digitizer out flat 2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer 3 Plug in the power adapter 4 Plug the interface (IO) cable into the digitizer 5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into an open serial port on computer

Note GTCO Technical support phone number is 410-381-6688 The electronic manual (on diskette) from GTCO contains more detailed installation and operation instructions for the GTCO digitizer model you have

Installing other Digitizer Drivers If you are using a GTCO Digitizer you will need to install the GTCO TabletWorks Drivers

If you are using a Digitizer not supported by GTCO Tablet Works 10 please contact the manufacturer of your digitizer for assistance with installation

Installing GTCO TabletWorks Drivers 1 Insert the On Center CD into the CD-ROM drive The CD Startup screen will open 2 Click on Install Software 3 Select Additional Software and Drivers 4 Select Digitizer Driver 5 Follow the instructions for installing TabletWorks 10

Adhering the Template The template is a small plastic sticker used to enable mouse function when using the digitizer with On-Screen Takeoff Place your template on your digitizer We suggest placing it in the bottom right corner of the digitizer about one inch inside the takeoff area

Note You may either peel off the back of the template and use the adhesive surface or you can tape the template down

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

66

Testing the Digitizer Drivers Before running OST you may test the digitizer by moving the stylus around on the digitizer pad it should move the mouse cursor (if mouse emulation is enabled)

If the digitizer does not move the mouse cursor on the screen

The superset codes may need to be reset Reset the superset codes by touching on the border of the digitizer with the stylus The digitizer should beep several times

The digitizer may not be communicating with the computer Be sure the COM port selected is correct Be sure the COM port selected is correct If you are not able to get the digitizer to move the mouse cursor you need to call GTCO technical support for help

Note The Mouse Emulation is not required for On-Screen Takeoff to work properly It is used only for the Template functionality if the digitizer is moving the cursor the wrong direction (up instead of sideways or vice-versa)

Click the L-shaped arrow symbol on the digitizer with the stylus

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

67

Appendix II Toolbar Items Main Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

68

Tool Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

69

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

70

Navigate Toolbar (Continued)

Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

71

Takeoff Toolbar (Continued)

Image Toolbar

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

72

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

This section will detail how to load plans from a F W Dodge CD-ROM into an On-Screen Takeoff project file ready for takeoffs

Dodge files may be added to the Project Properties dialog However loading the files in that way will load the files by number rather than name description If you want to load one page only from your Dodge CD You will have to rename the page to display the name rather than number of the file

To load plan files from a Dodge CD so that the files load sequentially by file number but are displayed by name rather than by number within your project follow the instructions below

Opening a Dodge project from a CD-ROM 1 Insert the CD into the drive 2 Choose File gt Custom 3 Choose Dodge Plans Project (plansdat) as the file type 4 Select the appropriate file type by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the Files of type

field 5 In the Look in field access your drive paths by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the

field then

Navigate to your CD-ROM drive Open the data folder and Open the Projects folder

6 Select the desired project and open its folder 7 Open the plansdat file 8 All the images will come in sequenced correctly for that job along with the full descriptions

(names) of each page If there is not a plans folder in the project folder then plans do not exist for that project on the CD Opening the plansdat file will yield an empty project

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

73

Appendix IV Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer The On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer is a limited version of On Center Softwarersquos commercial takeoff software If your status bar located at the very bottom of the main window says View Mode in the lower left-hand corner then you are using the Plan Viewer You can use the plan viewer to

View CD-based amp converted CAD drawings

View a previously created OST file and associated drawings

Download electronic plans online

Navigate through drawings

Quickly Takeoff linearsareas and counts

Zoom in to view the plan better

Print drawings directly from the viewer

Viewing an On-Screen Takeoff Project File

1 To open an OST file that was previously created with of On-Screen Takeoff 2 Select File gt Open 3 An Open dialog will appear if you do not see the OST file you are looking for select the

Look In drop down arrow 4 A drop down menu will appear listing the various folders drives and mapped drives located

on your computer select the correct drive or folder location and continue to browse to the location of your OST file

5 When you see your OST file double-click it to open it 6 Any takeoff and drawings should appear on the Image tab view

If you do not see the drawings but do see the colored takeoff layer the drawings may

not be located in the same place they were originally saved at Go to File gt Project Properties and check the Image File path for each listed page If the image file path is pointing to a CD drive make sure the CD is inside the CR-ROM

Downloading Electronic Plans If your Online Plan Service provides a special file format (OSX) required to use this feature of our plan viewer you can immediately downloaded all electronic plans of a project directly from our viewer

Most Plan Room web sites will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff when a request to download plans is made Your particular Plan Room may differ in operation so please contact the provider directly with questions on using the site

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

74

When you request to download or open a project file from a Plan Room you will usually have the open to open or save an OSX file Choosing open will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff Alternately you may choose to save the file to a local hard drive After you have saved the file either double-click it to launch On-Screen Takeoff or open the OSX file using On-Screen Takeoff by clicking File then Open and locating the file on your hard drive You will need to change the file type to OSX

After the OSX file is opened you will see an additional tab appear in the Conditions List window called Pages

The Pages tab shows the hierarchy of your project Gray file icons represent pages that have not been downloaded and blue icons represents pages that have been downloaded

To download a page simply double-click the page icon

If you wish to select a group of pages to download you can use the Ctrl or Shift key to multiple select them then click the Download button

If you wish to download all pages at once click the Download All button

Downloaded pages will now appear in the Project Properties dialog in the same order in which they appear in the Pages tab

Creating Quick Takeoffs With On-Screen Takeoff you can create quick takeoffs to measure quantities even if you dont have the full version of our program However using the Quick Takeoff functionality shows you just a fraction of what the full version can do

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar is located at the top of the image view It has three buttons designated for three types of takeoffs Linear Area and Count The Quantity drop down list will show secondary quantities for Linears and Areas The Units drop down allows you to select how you want your quantities displayed Feet Inches Yards Millimeters and Meters

NOTE Every time change the type of takeoff you are performing (switching from Area to Linear for example) the previous quantities and takeoff objects will disappear They will also disappear when you changes pages

NOTE You can use the Dimension Tool to basically measure the distance between two points or linears The distance will display on the status bar at the bottom of the application

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

75

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions General

Where is On-Screen Takeoff installed on my computer

Typically it is installed in CProgram FilesOn-Screen Takeoff

In Explorer how do I recognize On-Screen Takeoff file types

On-Screen Takeoff data is stored in a single file per job lsquojob name OSTrsquo On-Screen Takeoff templates are stored as lsquotemplate nameTPOrsquo

Can only one project at a time be open

Yes For that reason opening another project automatically closes the project on screen You will be asked to save any changes

Is only one scale allowed per page What about on drawings that have multiple detail sections on a page and each of those drawings have different scales

Yes For pages with drawings of different scales copy the drawing to another project page and set the appropriate scale

I cannot perform backout on an area that is along a linear

As a workaround use the On-Screen Takeoff layers feature to help you with this issue Electronic Images

How do I start a project from drawings that have been scanned and written to a CD-ROM

Open a new project Select File gt Project Properties and select Auto Add Navigate to your CD and the appropriate folder and select any image file in that location Click Open All files in the location will load into your project Recommended that images are copied from CD to hard drive for performance

If I get a disk of drawings in AutoCAD format (R13 or R14) can I read them in On-Screen Takeoff

Yes On-Screen Takeoff now reads DWG DXF and many other format that are saved with AutoCAD

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

76

When I click on the all pages button what is supposed to happen Currently nothing seems to change when I click on that button

The All Pages button is used to apply the Darken and Enhance Plans feature to all pages in the project (as opposed to only the current page on screen)

Is there a way to deduct a large skylight from an area condition

Yes with the related area condition selected in the Takeoff Dock bar unselect the Backout button on the Takeoff Toolbar then draw the Backout area The area quantity will be deducted from the related condition object and the linear measurement of the Backout perimeter will be added

Digitizer Issues

How do I connect a Digitizer to the computer

See Appendix I Connecting a Digitizer

The Place Template menu choice is disabled

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or the digitizer or the digitzer drivers are not installed

It wonrsquot let me select the Set Takeoff Area menu choice

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or no job is open a digitizer is not installed or the drivers are not installed

The digitizer stylus is not moving the cursor or crosshairs

Click S-0-1 superset on the digitizer

How do I convert my old GTCO Digitizer to work with On- Screen Takeofftrade

Call GTCO and they may be able to reconfigure your digitizer to be compatible with On-Screen Takeoff

Printing Issues Which Printers work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible printers include On-Screen Takeoff Hewlett Packard Epson and Canon printers If you are having printer difficulties please contact support and specify the type of printer along with other pertinent information Contact support at wwwoncentercomsupport or email supportoncentercom

Which Plotters work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible Plotters include Hewlett Packard DesignJet plotters and the EnCAD Cadjet II If you are having plotter difficulties please contact support and specify the type of plotter concerned

ViewingDisplay I can no longer see my condition list How do I get it back

The toolbars and Dock bars can be turned on and off through the View gt Toolbars menu options

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

77

This is also accessible by right-clicking in the toolbar area and selecting (or deselecting) a toolbar listed

I cannot view my folders in the condition list

Right-click in the Takeoff Dock barcondition list area and select Show Tree to display your folders

My Status Bar reads Viewer Mode and I am unable to draw conditions

On-Screen Takeoff needs to be Authorized Or you need to purchase an upgrade Click the Perform Advanced Takeoff button on the main toolbar

I hid a Dock bar and when I selected to view it again it appeared alongside the other Dock

bar instead of stacked on top of it How do I fix it

Pick up the Dock bar by clicking on the bar at the top and continuing to hold down the mouse button drag the Dock bar over the other one It will resize and appear stacked with the other

When I open image files from a CD the images are all upside down How do I get them right

side up

To flip pages from top to bottom follow the steps below 1 Click the All Pages button on the Image Toolbar (All Pages is engaged when the button

is not clicked) 2 Click the Flip Horizontal button on the Image Toolbar 3 Click the All Pages button again to disengage

Templates How do I create a Template

Follow the steps below 1 Create a typical project 2 Choose File gt Save As 3 Choose On-Screen Takeoff Template Files as the file type to save 4 Name the file This will save all of the condition setups as well as the layers for the

project

How do I create a new project from a template

Follow the steps below 1 Choose File gt New 2 Select a template from those listed in the New dialog This will open a new project with

conditions and layers saved from a previous project but no pages or takeoff

78

INDEX

Area Conditions 32

Area Objects 57

Auto Scrolling 20

Auto-save 63

Backout Mode 41

Calculation Method 60

Conditions 29

Configuration 60

Contents Tab 6

Continuous Mode 38

Count Conditions 33

Count Objects 57

Digitizer 10 65 76

Docking Toolbars 13

Dodge CD 72

Drawing 27 37

DropRun Count 55

Environment 18

Exiting 63

Exporting 49

Features 16

Font 61

Frequently Asked Questions 75

Grid 40

Help File 5

Hiding Toolbars 13

Hot Links 21

Image 19 59

Image files 9

Image Toolbar 12 71

Images 75

Index Tab 6

Layers 43

Linear Conditions 31

Linear Objects 56

Main Toolbar 12 67

Menus 14

Moving Toolbars 13

Navigate Toolbar 12 69

Navigating 20

On-Screen Takeofftrade 2

Page 59 61

Pages 20 25 28

Plan Viewer 73

Plans 26

Printing 47 76

Project Properties 25

Projects 22

Quick Start Video 18

Resizing Toolbars 13

Roping 54

Saving 63

Scale 28

Search Tab 7

Selecting Objects 42

Setup 8

Start On-Screen Takeofftrade 17

System Requirements 9

Takeoff 19 27

Takeoff Toolbar 70 71

Takeoff Toolbar 12

Template Files 23

TIF (Group4) 9

Tool Toolbar 12 68

Toolbar 67

Toolbars 12

View Toolbar 12 69

Viewing Toolbars 12

Worksheet 20

Zone Conditions 33

Zoom Toolbar 12 69

  • On-Screen Takeoff Lite
  • Table of Contents
  • Section 1 - Introduction
  • Section 2 - Setup
  • Section 3 - Toolbars and Menus
  • Section 4 - Features
  • Section 5 - Projects
  • Section 6 - Conditions and Takeoff
  • Section 7 - Printing and Exporting
  • Section 8 - Advanced Features
  • Section 9 - Saving and Exiting
  • Appendix I - Installing Your Digitizer
  • Appendix II - Toolbar Items
  • Appendix III - Loading Plans from a Dodge CD
  • Appendix IV - Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer
  • Appendix V - Frequently Asked Questions
  • Index

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

63

Saving Your Project

1 Select File gt Save 2 If your project has not previously been saved a Save dialog box will open to allow you to name

the file and choose the directory and folder in which to save your file 3 Once saved File gt Save will simply save the current version of the file

OR

4 Select File gt Save As then type in a new name for the file and save to the desired file path

The Auto-save Feature With the Auto-save feature On-Screen Takeoff automatically backs up your open project You may choose to have more than one level of backup files The first backup copy will have the extension b00 and successive files will be b01 b02 and so on If you have designated four levels of backup files after the fourth backup copy has been created (b03) the next file will be saved over the file with extension b00 Further backup saves will then rotate through the four backup files in the same way

1 Select Tools gt Options 2 In the Auto-save area (under the General tab) select the frequency of backup file creation (in

minutes) and the number of levels for the feature 3 You also may disengage the feature by clicking in the check box to clear it

The Auto-save feature automatically saves backup copies to the directory of the current project If you are working from a write-protected area such as a CD-ROM On-Screen Takeoff will place backup files in the On-Screen Takeoff folder

Exiting When you are finished using On-Screen Takeoff it is very easy to exit Exiting is very important because of security reasons If someone were to use your computer they could enter the application and view and manipulate information

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

64

On-Screen Takeoff closes the open project when you open another or create a new project or when you exit the program

1 Select File gt Exit

OR

2 You also may click at the upper right-hand corner of the application to exit

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

65

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer When you get your digitizer from GTCO you will need to connect it to your computer Follow the instructions outlined below to do this

Note For rollup digitizers the metal bar must be oriented to the top or right hand side

Connecting the Digitizer 1 Lay the digitizer out flat 2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer 3 Plug in the power adapter 4 Plug the interface (IO) cable into the digitizer 5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into an open serial port on computer

Note GTCO Technical support phone number is 410-381-6688 The electronic manual (on diskette) from GTCO contains more detailed installation and operation instructions for the GTCO digitizer model you have

Installing other Digitizer Drivers If you are using a GTCO Digitizer you will need to install the GTCO TabletWorks Drivers

If you are using a Digitizer not supported by GTCO Tablet Works 10 please contact the manufacturer of your digitizer for assistance with installation

Installing GTCO TabletWorks Drivers 1 Insert the On Center CD into the CD-ROM drive The CD Startup screen will open 2 Click on Install Software 3 Select Additional Software and Drivers 4 Select Digitizer Driver 5 Follow the instructions for installing TabletWorks 10

Adhering the Template The template is a small plastic sticker used to enable mouse function when using the digitizer with On-Screen Takeoff Place your template on your digitizer We suggest placing it in the bottom right corner of the digitizer about one inch inside the takeoff area

Note You may either peel off the back of the template and use the adhesive surface or you can tape the template down

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

66

Testing the Digitizer Drivers Before running OST you may test the digitizer by moving the stylus around on the digitizer pad it should move the mouse cursor (if mouse emulation is enabled)

If the digitizer does not move the mouse cursor on the screen

The superset codes may need to be reset Reset the superset codes by touching on the border of the digitizer with the stylus The digitizer should beep several times

The digitizer may not be communicating with the computer Be sure the COM port selected is correct Be sure the COM port selected is correct If you are not able to get the digitizer to move the mouse cursor you need to call GTCO technical support for help

Note The Mouse Emulation is not required for On-Screen Takeoff to work properly It is used only for the Template functionality if the digitizer is moving the cursor the wrong direction (up instead of sideways or vice-versa)

Click the L-shaped arrow symbol on the digitizer with the stylus

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

67

Appendix II Toolbar Items Main Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

68

Tool Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

69

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

70

Navigate Toolbar (Continued)

Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

71

Takeoff Toolbar (Continued)

Image Toolbar

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

72

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

This section will detail how to load plans from a F W Dodge CD-ROM into an On-Screen Takeoff project file ready for takeoffs

Dodge files may be added to the Project Properties dialog However loading the files in that way will load the files by number rather than name description If you want to load one page only from your Dodge CD You will have to rename the page to display the name rather than number of the file

To load plan files from a Dodge CD so that the files load sequentially by file number but are displayed by name rather than by number within your project follow the instructions below

Opening a Dodge project from a CD-ROM 1 Insert the CD into the drive 2 Choose File gt Custom 3 Choose Dodge Plans Project (plansdat) as the file type 4 Select the appropriate file type by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the Files of type

field 5 In the Look in field access your drive paths by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the

field then

Navigate to your CD-ROM drive Open the data folder and Open the Projects folder

6 Select the desired project and open its folder 7 Open the plansdat file 8 All the images will come in sequenced correctly for that job along with the full descriptions

(names) of each page If there is not a plans folder in the project folder then plans do not exist for that project on the CD Opening the plansdat file will yield an empty project

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

73

Appendix IV Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer The On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer is a limited version of On Center Softwarersquos commercial takeoff software If your status bar located at the very bottom of the main window says View Mode in the lower left-hand corner then you are using the Plan Viewer You can use the plan viewer to

View CD-based amp converted CAD drawings

View a previously created OST file and associated drawings

Download electronic plans online

Navigate through drawings

Quickly Takeoff linearsareas and counts

Zoom in to view the plan better

Print drawings directly from the viewer

Viewing an On-Screen Takeoff Project File

1 To open an OST file that was previously created with of On-Screen Takeoff 2 Select File gt Open 3 An Open dialog will appear if you do not see the OST file you are looking for select the

Look In drop down arrow 4 A drop down menu will appear listing the various folders drives and mapped drives located

on your computer select the correct drive or folder location and continue to browse to the location of your OST file

5 When you see your OST file double-click it to open it 6 Any takeoff and drawings should appear on the Image tab view

If you do not see the drawings but do see the colored takeoff layer the drawings may

not be located in the same place they were originally saved at Go to File gt Project Properties and check the Image File path for each listed page If the image file path is pointing to a CD drive make sure the CD is inside the CR-ROM

Downloading Electronic Plans If your Online Plan Service provides a special file format (OSX) required to use this feature of our plan viewer you can immediately downloaded all electronic plans of a project directly from our viewer

Most Plan Room web sites will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff when a request to download plans is made Your particular Plan Room may differ in operation so please contact the provider directly with questions on using the site

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

74

When you request to download or open a project file from a Plan Room you will usually have the open to open or save an OSX file Choosing open will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff Alternately you may choose to save the file to a local hard drive After you have saved the file either double-click it to launch On-Screen Takeoff or open the OSX file using On-Screen Takeoff by clicking File then Open and locating the file on your hard drive You will need to change the file type to OSX

After the OSX file is opened you will see an additional tab appear in the Conditions List window called Pages

The Pages tab shows the hierarchy of your project Gray file icons represent pages that have not been downloaded and blue icons represents pages that have been downloaded

To download a page simply double-click the page icon

If you wish to select a group of pages to download you can use the Ctrl or Shift key to multiple select them then click the Download button

If you wish to download all pages at once click the Download All button

Downloaded pages will now appear in the Project Properties dialog in the same order in which they appear in the Pages tab

Creating Quick Takeoffs With On-Screen Takeoff you can create quick takeoffs to measure quantities even if you dont have the full version of our program However using the Quick Takeoff functionality shows you just a fraction of what the full version can do

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar is located at the top of the image view It has three buttons designated for three types of takeoffs Linear Area and Count The Quantity drop down list will show secondary quantities for Linears and Areas The Units drop down allows you to select how you want your quantities displayed Feet Inches Yards Millimeters and Meters

NOTE Every time change the type of takeoff you are performing (switching from Area to Linear for example) the previous quantities and takeoff objects will disappear They will also disappear when you changes pages

NOTE You can use the Dimension Tool to basically measure the distance between two points or linears The distance will display on the status bar at the bottom of the application

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

75

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions General

Where is On-Screen Takeoff installed on my computer

Typically it is installed in CProgram FilesOn-Screen Takeoff

In Explorer how do I recognize On-Screen Takeoff file types

On-Screen Takeoff data is stored in a single file per job lsquojob name OSTrsquo On-Screen Takeoff templates are stored as lsquotemplate nameTPOrsquo

Can only one project at a time be open

Yes For that reason opening another project automatically closes the project on screen You will be asked to save any changes

Is only one scale allowed per page What about on drawings that have multiple detail sections on a page and each of those drawings have different scales

Yes For pages with drawings of different scales copy the drawing to another project page and set the appropriate scale

I cannot perform backout on an area that is along a linear

As a workaround use the On-Screen Takeoff layers feature to help you with this issue Electronic Images

How do I start a project from drawings that have been scanned and written to a CD-ROM

Open a new project Select File gt Project Properties and select Auto Add Navigate to your CD and the appropriate folder and select any image file in that location Click Open All files in the location will load into your project Recommended that images are copied from CD to hard drive for performance

If I get a disk of drawings in AutoCAD format (R13 or R14) can I read them in On-Screen Takeoff

Yes On-Screen Takeoff now reads DWG DXF and many other format that are saved with AutoCAD

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

76

When I click on the all pages button what is supposed to happen Currently nothing seems to change when I click on that button

The All Pages button is used to apply the Darken and Enhance Plans feature to all pages in the project (as opposed to only the current page on screen)

Is there a way to deduct a large skylight from an area condition

Yes with the related area condition selected in the Takeoff Dock bar unselect the Backout button on the Takeoff Toolbar then draw the Backout area The area quantity will be deducted from the related condition object and the linear measurement of the Backout perimeter will be added

Digitizer Issues

How do I connect a Digitizer to the computer

See Appendix I Connecting a Digitizer

The Place Template menu choice is disabled

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or the digitizer or the digitzer drivers are not installed

It wonrsquot let me select the Set Takeoff Area menu choice

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or no job is open a digitizer is not installed or the drivers are not installed

The digitizer stylus is not moving the cursor or crosshairs

Click S-0-1 superset on the digitizer

How do I convert my old GTCO Digitizer to work with On- Screen Takeofftrade

Call GTCO and they may be able to reconfigure your digitizer to be compatible with On-Screen Takeoff

Printing Issues Which Printers work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible printers include On-Screen Takeoff Hewlett Packard Epson and Canon printers If you are having printer difficulties please contact support and specify the type of printer along with other pertinent information Contact support at wwwoncentercomsupport or email supportoncentercom

Which Plotters work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible Plotters include Hewlett Packard DesignJet plotters and the EnCAD Cadjet II If you are having plotter difficulties please contact support and specify the type of plotter concerned

ViewingDisplay I can no longer see my condition list How do I get it back

The toolbars and Dock bars can be turned on and off through the View gt Toolbars menu options

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

77

This is also accessible by right-clicking in the toolbar area and selecting (or deselecting) a toolbar listed

I cannot view my folders in the condition list

Right-click in the Takeoff Dock barcondition list area and select Show Tree to display your folders

My Status Bar reads Viewer Mode and I am unable to draw conditions

On-Screen Takeoff needs to be Authorized Or you need to purchase an upgrade Click the Perform Advanced Takeoff button on the main toolbar

I hid a Dock bar and when I selected to view it again it appeared alongside the other Dock

bar instead of stacked on top of it How do I fix it

Pick up the Dock bar by clicking on the bar at the top and continuing to hold down the mouse button drag the Dock bar over the other one It will resize and appear stacked with the other

When I open image files from a CD the images are all upside down How do I get them right

side up

To flip pages from top to bottom follow the steps below 1 Click the All Pages button on the Image Toolbar (All Pages is engaged when the button

is not clicked) 2 Click the Flip Horizontal button on the Image Toolbar 3 Click the All Pages button again to disengage

Templates How do I create a Template

Follow the steps below 1 Create a typical project 2 Choose File gt Save As 3 Choose On-Screen Takeoff Template Files as the file type to save 4 Name the file This will save all of the condition setups as well as the layers for the

project

How do I create a new project from a template

Follow the steps below 1 Choose File gt New 2 Select a template from those listed in the New dialog This will open a new project with

conditions and layers saved from a previous project but no pages or takeoff

78

INDEX

Area Conditions 32

Area Objects 57

Auto Scrolling 20

Auto-save 63

Backout Mode 41

Calculation Method 60

Conditions 29

Configuration 60

Contents Tab 6

Continuous Mode 38

Count Conditions 33

Count Objects 57

Digitizer 10 65 76

Docking Toolbars 13

Dodge CD 72

Drawing 27 37

DropRun Count 55

Environment 18

Exiting 63

Exporting 49

Features 16

Font 61

Frequently Asked Questions 75

Grid 40

Help File 5

Hiding Toolbars 13

Hot Links 21

Image 19 59

Image files 9

Image Toolbar 12 71

Images 75

Index Tab 6

Layers 43

Linear Conditions 31

Linear Objects 56

Main Toolbar 12 67

Menus 14

Moving Toolbars 13

Navigate Toolbar 12 69

Navigating 20

On-Screen Takeofftrade 2

Page 59 61

Pages 20 25 28

Plan Viewer 73

Plans 26

Printing 47 76

Project Properties 25

Projects 22

Quick Start Video 18

Resizing Toolbars 13

Roping 54

Saving 63

Scale 28

Search Tab 7

Selecting Objects 42

Setup 8

Start On-Screen Takeofftrade 17

System Requirements 9

Takeoff 19 27

Takeoff Toolbar 70 71

Takeoff Toolbar 12

Template Files 23

TIF (Group4) 9

Tool Toolbar 12 68

Toolbar 67

Toolbars 12

View Toolbar 12 69

Viewing Toolbars 12

Worksheet 20

Zone Conditions 33

Zoom Toolbar 12 69

  • On-Screen Takeoff Lite
  • Table of Contents
  • Section 1 - Introduction
  • Section 2 - Setup
  • Section 3 - Toolbars and Menus
  • Section 4 - Features
  • Section 5 - Projects
  • Section 6 - Conditions and Takeoff
  • Section 7 - Printing and Exporting
  • Section 8 - Advanced Features
  • Section 9 - Saving and Exiting
  • Appendix I - Installing Your Digitizer
  • Appendix II - Toolbar Items
  • Appendix III - Loading Plans from a Dodge CD
  • Appendix IV - Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer
  • Appendix V - Frequently Asked Questions
  • Index

Section 9 Saving and Exiting

64

On-Screen Takeoff closes the open project when you open another or create a new project or when you exit the program

1 Select File gt Exit

OR

2 You also may click at the upper right-hand corner of the application to exit

NOTE If your latest changes to a project file have not been saved On-Screen Takeoff will ask you whether you would like to save the file and gives you the option of canceling the operation

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

65

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer When you get your digitizer from GTCO you will need to connect it to your computer Follow the instructions outlined below to do this

Note For rollup digitizers the metal bar must be oriented to the top or right hand side

Connecting the Digitizer 1 Lay the digitizer out flat 2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer 3 Plug in the power adapter 4 Plug the interface (IO) cable into the digitizer 5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into an open serial port on computer

Note GTCO Technical support phone number is 410-381-6688 The electronic manual (on diskette) from GTCO contains more detailed installation and operation instructions for the GTCO digitizer model you have

Installing other Digitizer Drivers If you are using a GTCO Digitizer you will need to install the GTCO TabletWorks Drivers

If you are using a Digitizer not supported by GTCO Tablet Works 10 please contact the manufacturer of your digitizer for assistance with installation

Installing GTCO TabletWorks Drivers 1 Insert the On Center CD into the CD-ROM drive The CD Startup screen will open 2 Click on Install Software 3 Select Additional Software and Drivers 4 Select Digitizer Driver 5 Follow the instructions for installing TabletWorks 10

Adhering the Template The template is a small plastic sticker used to enable mouse function when using the digitizer with On-Screen Takeoff Place your template on your digitizer We suggest placing it in the bottom right corner of the digitizer about one inch inside the takeoff area

Note You may either peel off the back of the template and use the adhesive surface or you can tape the template down

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

66

Testing the Digitizer Drivers Before running OST you may test the digitizer by moving the stylus around on the digitizer pad it should move the mouse cursor (if mouse emulation is enabled)

If the digitizer does not move the mouse cursor on the screen

The superset codes may need to be reset Reset the superset codes by touching on the border of the digitizer with the stylus The digitizer should beep several times

The digitizer may not be communicating with the computer Be sure the COM port selected is correct Be sure the COM port selected is correct If you are not able to get the digitizer to move the mouse cursor you need to call GTCO technical support for help

Note The Mouse Emulation is not required for On-Screen Takeoff to work properly It is used only for the Template functionality if the digitizer is moving the cursor the wrong direction (up instead of sideways or vice-versa)

Click the L-shaped arrow symbol on the digitizer with the stylus

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

67

Appendix II Toolbar Items Main Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

68

Tool Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

69

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

70

Navigate Toolbar (Continued)

Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

71

Takeoff Toolbar (Continued)

Image Toolbar

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

72

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

This section will detail how to load plans from a F W Dodge CD-ROM into an On-Screen Takeoff project file ready for takeoffs

Dodge files may be added to the Project Properties dialog However loading the files in that way will load the files by number rather than name description If you want to load one page only from your Dodge CD You will have to rename the page to display the name rather than number of the file

To load plan files from a Dodge CD so that the files load sequentially by file number but are displayed by name rather than by number within your project follow the instructions below

Opening a Dodge project from a CD-ROM 1 Insert the CD into the drive 2 Choose File gt Custom 3 Choose Dodge Plans Project (plansdat) as the file type 4 Select the appropriate file type by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the Files of type

field 5 In the Look in field access your drive paths by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the

field then

Navigate to your CD-ROM drive Open the data folder and Open the Projects folder

6 Select the desired project and open its folder 7 Open the plansdat file 8 All the images will come in sequenced correctly for that job along with the full descriptions

(names) of each page If there is not a plans folder in the project folder then plans do not exist for that project on the CD Opening the plansdat file will yield an empty project

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

73

Appendix IV Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer The On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer is a limited version of On Center Softwarersquos commercial takeoff software If your status bar located at the very bottom of the main window says View Mode in the lower left-hand corner then you are using the Plan Viewer You can use the plan viewer to

View CD-based amp converted CAD drawings

View a previously created OST file and associated drawings

Download electronic plans online

Navigate through drawings

Quickly Takeoff linearsareas and counts

Zoom in to view the plan better

Print drawings directly from the viewer

Viewing an On-Screen Takeoff Project File

1 To open an OST file that was previously created with of On-Screen Takeoff 2 Select File gt Open 3 An Open dialog will appear if you do not see the OST file you are looking for select the

Look In drop down arrow 4 A drop down menu will appear listing the various folders drives and mapped drives located

on your computer select the correct drive or folder location and continue to browse to the location of your OST file

5 When you see your OST file double-click it to open it 6 Any takeoff and drawings should appear on the Image tab view

If you do not see the drawings but do see the colored takeoff layer the drawings may

not be located in the same place they were originally saved at Go to File gt Project Properties and check the Image File path for each listed page If the image file path is pointing to a CD drive make sure the CD is inside the CR-ROM

Downloading Electronic Plans If your Online Plan Service provides a special file format (OSX) required to use this feature of our plan viewer you can immediately downloaded all electronic plans of a project directly from our viewer

Most Plan Room web sites will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff when a request to download plans is made Your particular Plan Room may differ in operation so please contact the provider directly with questions on using the site

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

74

When you request to download or open a project file from a Plan Room you will usually have the open to open or save an OSX file Choosing open will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff Alternately you may choose to save the file to a local hard drive After you have saved the file either double-click it to launch On-Screen Takeoff or open the OSX file using On-Screen Takeoff by clicking File then Open and locating the file on your hard drive You will need to change the file type to OSX

After the OSX file is opened you will see an additional tab appear in the Conditions List window called Pages

The Pages tab shows the hierarchy of your project Gray file icons represent pages that have not been downloaded and blue icons represents pages that have been downloaded

To download a page simply double-click the page icon

If you wish to select a group of pages to download you can use the Ctrl or Shift key to multiple select them then click the Download button

If you wish to download all pages at once click the Download All button

Downloaded pages will now appear in the Project Properties dialog in the same order in which they appear in the Pages tab

Creating Quick Takeoffs With On-Screen Takeoff you can create quick takeoffs to measure quantities even if you dont have the full version of our program However using the Quick Takeoff functionality shows you just a fraction of what the full version can do

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar is located at the top of the image view It has three buttons designated for three types of takeoffs Linear Area and Count The Quantity drop down list will show secondary quantities for Linears and Areas The Units drop down allows you to select how you want your quantities displayed Feet Inches Yards Millimeters and Meters

NOTE Every time change the type of takeoff you are performing (switching from Area to Linear for example) the previous quantities and takeoff objects will disappear They will also disappear when you changes pages

NOTE You can use the Dimension Tool to basically measure the distance between two points or linears The distance will display on the status bar at the bottom of the application

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

75

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions General

Where is On-Screen Takeoff installed on my computer

Typically it is installed in CProgram FilesOn-Screen Takeoff

In Explorer how do I recognize On-Screen Takeoff file types

On-Screen Takeoff data is stored in a single file per job lsquojob name OSTrsquo On-Screen Takeoff templates are stored as lsquotemplate nameTPOrsquo

Can only one project at a time be open

Yes For that reason opening another project automatically closes the project on screen You will be asked to save any changes

Is only one scale allowed per page What about on drawings that have multiple detail sections on a page and each of those drawings have different scales

Yes For pages with drawings of different scales copy the drawing to another project page and set the appropriate scale

I cannot perform backout on an area that is along a linear

As a workaround use the On-Screen Takeoff layers feature to help you with this issue Electronic Images

How do I start a project from drawings that have been scanned and written to a CD-ROM

Open a new project Select File gt Project Properties and select Auto Add Navigate to your CD and the appropriate folder and select any image file in that location Click Open All files in the location will load into your project Recommended that images are copied from CD to hard drive for performance

If I get a disk of drawings in AutoCAD format (R13 or R14) can I read them in On-Screen Takeoff

Yes On-Screen Takeoff now reads DWG DXF and many other format that are saved with AutoCAD

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

76

When I click on the all pages button what is supposed to happen Currently nothing seems to change when I click on that button

The All Pages button is used to apply the Darken and Enhance Plans feature to all pages in the project (as opposed to only the current page on screen)

Is there a way to deduct a large skylight from an area condition

Yes with the related area condition selected in the Takeoff Dock bar unselect the Backout button on the Takeoff Toolbar then draw the Backout area The area quantity will be deducted from the related condition object and the linear measurement of the Backout perimeter will be added

Digitizer Issues

How do I connect a Digitizer to the computer

See Appendix I Connecting a Digitizer

The Place Template menu choice is disabled

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or the digitizer or the digitzer drivers are not installed

It wonrsquot let me select the Set Takeoff Area menu choice

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or no job is open a digitizer is not installed or the drivers are not installed

The digitizer stylus is not moving the cursor or crosshairs

Click S-0-1 superset on the digitizer

How do I convert my old GTCO Digitizer to work with On- Screen Takeofftrade

Call GTCO and they may be able to reconfigure your digitizer to be compatible with On-Screen Takeoff

Printing Issues Which Printers work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible printers include On-Screen Takeoff Hewlett Packard Epson and Canon printers If you are having printer difficulties please contact support and specify the type of printer along with other pertinent information Contact support at wwwoncentercomsupport or email supportoncentercom

Which Plotters work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible Plotters include Hewlett Packard DesignJet plotters and the EnCAD Cadjet II If you are having plotter difficulties please contact support and specify the type of plotter concerned

ViewingDisplay I can no longer see my condition list How do I get it back

The toolbars and Dock bars can be turned on and off through the View gt Toolbars menu options

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

77

This is also accessible by right-clicking in the toolbar area and selecting (or deselecting) a toolbar listed

I cannot view my folders in the condition list

Right-click in the Takeoff Dock barcondition list area and select Show Tree to display your folders

My Status Bar reads Viewer Mode and I am unable to draw conditions

On-Screen Takeoff needs to be Authorized Or you need to purchase an upgrade Click the Perform Advanced Takeoff button on the main toolbar

I hid a Dock bar and when I selected to view it again it appeared alongside the other Dock

bar instead of stacked on top of it How do I fix it

Pick up the Dock bar by clicking on the bar at the top and continuing to hold down the mouse button drag the Dock bar over the other one It will resize and appear stacked with the other

When I open image files from a CD the images are all upside down How do I get them right

side up

To flip pages from top to bottom follow the steps below 1 Click the All Pages button on the Image Toolbar (All Pages is engaged when the button

is not clicked) 2 Click the Flip Horizontal button on the Image Toolbar 3 Click the All Pages button again to disengage

Templates How do I create a Template

Follow the steps below 1 Create a typical project 2 Choose File gt Save As 3 Choose On-Screen Takeoff Template Files as the file type to save 4 Name the file This will save all of the condition setups as well as the layers for the

project

How do I create a new project from a template

Follow the steps below 1 Choose File gt New 2 Select a template from those listed in the New dialog This will open a new project with

conditions and layers saved from a previous project but no pages or takeoff

78

INDEX

Area Conditions 32

Area Objects 57

Auto Scrolling 20

Auto-save 63

Backout Mode 41

Calculation Method 60

Conditions 29

Configuration 60

Contents Tab 6

Continuous Mode 38

Count Conditions 33

Count Objects 57

Digitizer 10 65 76

Docking Toolbars 13

Dodge CD 72

Drawing 27 37

DropRun Count 55

Environment 18

Exiting 63

Exporting 49

Features 16

Font 61

Frequently Asked Questions 75

Grid 40

Help File 5

Hiding Toolbars 13

Hot Links 21

Image 19 59

Image files 9

Image Toolbar 12 71

Images 75

Index Tab 6

Layers 43

Linear Conditions 31

Linear Objects 56

Main Toolbar 12 67

Menus 14

Moving Toolbars 13

Navigate Toolbar 12 69

Navigating 20

On-Screen Takeofftrade 2

Page 59 61

Pages 20 25 28

Plan Viewer 73

Plans 26

Printing 47 76

Project Properties 25

Projects 22

Quick Start Video 18

Resizing Toolbars 13

Roping 54

Saving 63

Scale 28

Search Tab 7

Selecting Objects 42

Setup 8

Start On-Screen Takeofftrade 17

System Requirements 9

Takeoff 19 27

Takeoff Toolbar 70 71

Takeoff Toolbar 12

Template Files 23

TIF (Group4) 9

Tool Toolbar 12 68

Toolbar 67

Toolbars 12

View Toolbar 12 69

Viewing Toolbars 12

Worksheet 20

Zone Conditions 33

Zoom Toolbar 12 69

  • On-Screen Takeoff Lite
  • Table of Contents
  • Section 1 - Introduction
  • Section 2 - Setup
  • Section 3 - Toolbars and Menus
  • Section 4 - Features
  • Section 5 - Projects
  • Section 6 - Conditions and Takeoff
  • Section 7 - Printing and Exporting
  • Section 8 - Advanced Features
  • Section 9 - Saving and Exiting
  • Appendix I - Installing Your Digitizer
  • Appendix II - Toolbar Items
  • Appendix III - Loading Plans from a Dodge CD
  • Appendix IV - Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer
  • Appendix V - Frequently Asked Questions
  • Index

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

65

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer When you get your digitizer from GTCO you will need to connect it to your computer Follow the instructions outlined below to do this

Note For rollup digitizers the metal bar must be oriented to the top or right hand side

Connecting the Digitizer 1 Lay the digitizer out flat 2 Connect the Stylus to the digitizer 3 Plug in the power adapter 4 Plug the interface (IO) cable into the digitizer 5 Plug the other end of the interface cable into an open serial port on computer

Note GTCO Technical support phone number is 410-381-6688 The electronic manual (on diskette) from GTCO contains more detailed installation and operation instructions for the GTCO digitizer model you have

Installing other Digitizer Drivers If you are using a GTCO Digitizer you will need to install the GTCO TabletWorks Drivers

If you are using a Digitizer not supported by GTCO Tablet Works 10 please contact the manufacturer of your digitizer for assistance with installation

Installing GTCO TabletWorks Drivers 1 Insert the On Center CD into the CD-ROM drive The CD Startup screen will open 2 Click on Install Software 3 Select Additional Software and Drivers 4 Select Digitizer Driver 5 Follow the instructions for installing TabletWorks 10

Adhering the Template The template is a small plastic sticker used to enable mouse function when using the digitizer with On-Screen Takeoff Place your template on your digitizer We suggest placing it in the bottom right corner of the digitizer about one inch inside the takeoff area

Note You may either peel off the back of the template and use the adhesive surface or you can tape the template down

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

66

Testing the Digitizer Drivers Before running OST you may test the digitizer by moving the stylus around on the digitizer pad it should move the mouse cursor (if mouse emulation is enabled)

If the digitizer does not move the mouse cursor on the screen

The superset codes may need to be reset Reset the superset codes by touching on the border of the digitizer with the stylus The digitizer should beep several times

The digitizer may not be communicating with the computer Be sure the COM port selected is correct Be sure the COM port selected is correct If you are not able to get the digitizer to move the mouse cursor you need to call GTCO technical support for help

Note The Mouse Emulation is not required for On-Screen Takeoff to work properly It is used only for the Template functionality if the digitizer is moving the cursor the wrong direction (up instead of sideways or vice-versa)

Click the L-shaped arrow symbol on the digitizer with the stylus

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

67

Appendix II Toolbar Items Main Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

68

Tool Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

69

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

70

Navigate Toolbar (Continued)

Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

71

Takeoff Toolbar (Continued)

Image Toolbar

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

72

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

This section will detail how to load plans from a F W Dodge CD-ROM into an On-Screen Takeoff project file ready for takeoffs

Dodge files may be added to the Project Properties dialog However loading the files in that way will load the files by number rather than name description If you want to load one page only from your Dodge CD You will have to rename the page to display the name rather than number of the file

To load plan files from a Dodge CD so that the files load sequentially by file number but are displayed by name rather than by number within your project follow the instructions below

Opening a Dodge project from a CD-ROM 1 Insert the CD into the drive 2 Choose File gt Custom 3 Choose Dodge Plans Project (plansdat) as the file type 4 Select the appropriate file type by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the Files of type

field 5 In the Look in field access your drive paths by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the

field then

Navigate to your CD-ROM drive Open the data folder and Open the Projects folder

6 Select the desired project and open its folder 7 Open the plansdat file 8 All the images will come in sequenced correctly for that job along with the full descriptions

(names) of each page If there is not a plans folder in the project folder then plans do not exist for that project on the CD Opening the plansdat file will yield an empty project

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

73

Appendix IV Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer The On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer is a limited version of On Center Softwarersquos commercial takeoff software If your status bar located at the very bottom of the main window says View Mode in the lower left-hand corner then you are using the Plan Viewer You can use the plan viewer to

View CD-based amp converted CAD drawings

View a previously created OST file and associated drawings

Download electronic plans online

Navigate through drawings

Quickly Takeoff linearsareas and counts

Zoom in to view the plan better

Print drawings directly from the viewer

Viewing an On-Screen Takeoff Project File

1 To open an OST file that was previously created with of On-Screen Takeoff 2 Select File gt Open 3 An Open dialog will appear if you do not see the OST file you are looking for select the

Look In drop down arrow 4 A drop down menu will appear listing the various folders drives and mapped drives located

on your computer select the correct drive or folder location and continue to browse to the location of your OST file

5 When you see your OST file double-click it to open it 6 Any takeoff and drawings should appear on the Image tab view

If you do not see the drawings but do see the colored takeoff layer the drawings may

not be located in the same place they were originally saved at Go to File gt Project Properties and check the Image File path for each listed page If the image file path is pointing to a CD drive make sure the CD is inside the CR-ROM

Downloading Electronic Plans If your Online Plan Service provides a special file format (OSX) required to use this feature of our plan viewer you can immediately downloaded all electronic plans of a project directly from our viewer

Most Plan Room web sites will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff when a request to download plans is made Your particular Plan Room may differ in operation so please contact the provider directly with questions on using the site

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

74

When you request to download or open a project file from a Plan Room you will usually have the open to open or save an OSX file Choosing open will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff Alternately you may choose to save the file to a local hard drive After you have saved the file either double-click it to launch On-Screen Takeoff or open the OSX file using On-Screen Takeoff by clicking File then Open and locating the file on your hard drive You will need to change the file type to OSX

After the OSX file is opened you will see an additional tab appear in the Conditions List window called Pages

The Pages tab shows the hierarchy of your project Gray file icons represent pages that have not been downloaded and blue icons represents pages that have been downloaded

To download a page simply double-click the page icon

If you wish to select a group of pages to download you can use the Ctrl or Shift key to multiple select them then click the Download button

If you wish to download all pages at once click the Download All button

Downloaded pages will now appear in the Project Properties dialog in the same order in which they appear in the Pages tab

Creating Quick Takeoffs With On-Screen Takeoff you can create quick takeoffs to measure quantities even if you dont have the full version of our program However using the Quick Takeoff functionality shows you just a fraction of what the full version can do

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar is located at the top of the image view It has three buttons designated for three types of takeoffs Linear Area and Count The Quantity drop down list will show secondary quantities for Linears and Areas The Units drop down allows you to select how you want your quantities displayed Feet Inches Yards Millimeters and Meters

NOTE Every time change the type of takeoff you are performing (switching from Area to Linear for example) the previous quantities and takeoff objects will disappear They will also disappear when you changes pages

NOTE You can use the Dimension Tool to basically measure the distance between two points or linears The distance will display on the status bar at the bottom of the application

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

75

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions General

Where is On-Screen Takeoff installed on my computer

Typically it is installed in CProgram FilesOn-Screen Takeoff

In Explorer how do I recognize On-Screen Takeoff file types

On-Screen Takeoff data is stored in a single file per job lsquojob name OSTrsquo On-Screen Takeoff templates are stored as lsquotemplate nameTPOrsquo

Can only one project at a time be open

Yes For that reason opening another project automatically closes the project on screen You will be asked to save any changes

Is only one scale allowed per page What about on drawings that have multiple detail sections on a page and each of those drawings have different scales

Yes For pages with drawings of different scales copy the drawing to another project page and set the appropriate scale

I cannot perform backout on an area that is along a linear

As a workaround use the On-Screen Takeoff layers feature to help you with this issue Electronic Images

How do I start a project from drawings that have been scanned and written to a CD-ROM

Open a new project Select File gt Project Properties and select Auto Add Navigate to your CD and the appropriate folder and select any image file in that location Click Open All files in the location will load into your project Recommended that images are copied from CD to hard drive for performance

If I get a disk of drawings in AutoCAD format (R13 or R14) can I read them in On-Screen Takeoff

Yes On-Screen Takeoff now reads DWG DXF and many other format that are saved with AutoCAD

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

76

When I click on the all pages button what is supposed to happen Currently nothing seems to change when I click on that button

The All Pages button is used to apply the Darken and Enhance Plans feature to all pages in the project (as opposed to only the current page on screen)

Is there a way to deduct a large skylight from an area condition

Yes with the related area condition selected in the Takeoff Dock bar unselect the Backout button on the Takeoff Toolbar then draw the Backout area The area quantity will be deducted from the related condition object and the linear measurement of the Backout perimeter will be added

Digitizer Issues

How do I connect a Digitizer to the computer

See Appendix I Connecting a Digitizer

The Place Template menu choice is disabled

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or the digitizer or the digitzer drivers are not installed

It wonrsquot let me select the Set Takeoff Area menu choice

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or no job is open a digitizer is not installed or the drivers are not installed

The digitizer stylus is not moving the cursor or crosshairs

Click S-0-1 superset on the digitizer

How do I convert my old GTCO Digitizer to work with On- Screen Takeofftrade

Call GTCO and they may be able to reconfigure your digitizer to be compatible with On-Screen Takeoff

Printing Issues Which Printers work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible printers include On-Screen Takeoff Hewlett Packard Epson and Canon printers If you are having printer difficulties please contact support and specify the type of printer along with other pertinent information Contact support at wwwoncentercomsupport or email supportoncentercom

Which Plotters work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible Plotters include Hewlett Packard DesignJet plotters and the EnCAD Cadjet II If you are having plotter difficulties please contact support and specify the type of plotter concerned

ViewingDisplay I can no longer see my condition list How do I get it back

The toolbars and Dock bars can be turned on and off through the View gt Toolbars menu options

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

77

This is also accessible by right-clicking in the toolbar area and selecting (or deselecting) a toolbar listed

I cannot view my folders in the condition list

Right-click in the Takeoff Dock barcondition list area and select Show Tree to display your folders

My Status Bar reads Viewer Mode and I am unable to draw conditions

On-Screen Takeoff needs to be Authorized Or you need to purchase an upgrade Click the Perform Advanced Takeoff button on the main toolbar

I hid a Dock bar and when I selected to view it again it appeared alongside the other Dock

bar instead of stacked on top of it How do I fix it

Pick up the Dock bar by clicking on the bar at the top and continuing to hold down the mouse button drag the Dock bar over the other one It will resize and appear stacked with the other

When I open image files from a CD the images are all upside down How do I get them right

side up

To flip pages from top to bottom follow the steps below 1 Click the All Pages button on the Image Toolbar (All Pages is engaged when the button

is not clicked) 2 Click the Flip Horizontal button on the Image Toolbar 3 Click the All Pages button again to disengage

Templates How do I create a Template

Follow the steps below 1 Create a typical project 2 Choose File gt Save As 3 Choose On-Screen Takeoff Template Files as the file type to save 4 Name the file This will save all of the condition setups as well as the layers for the

project

How do I create a new project from a template

Follow the steps below 1 Choose File gt New 2 Select a template from those listed in the New dialog This will open a new project with

conditions and layers saved from a previous project but no pages or takeoff

78

INDEX

Area Conditions 32

Area Objects 57

Auto Scrolling 20

Auto-save 63

Backout Mode 41

Calculation Method 60

Conditions 29

Configuration 60

Contents Tab 6

Continuous Mode 38

Count Conditions 33

Count Objects 57

Digitizer 10 65 76

Docking Toolbars 13

Dodge CD 72

Drawing 27 37

DropRun Count 55

Environment 18

Exiting 63

Exporting 49

Features 16

Font 61

Frequently Asked Questions 75

Grid 40

Help File 5

Hiding Toolbars 13

Hot Links 21

Image 19 59

Image files 9

Image Toolbar 12 71

Images 75

Index Tab 6

Layers 43

Linear Conditions 31

Linear Objects 56

Main Toolbar 12 67

Menus 14

Moving Toolbars 13

Navigate Toolbar 12 69

Navigating 20

On-Screen Takeofftrade 2

Page 59 61

Pages 20 25 28

Plan Viewer 73

Plans 26

Printing 47 76

Project Properties 25

Projects 22

Quick Start Video 18

Resizing Toolbars 13

Roping 54

Saving 63

Scale 28

Search Tab 7

Selecting Objects 42

Setup 8

Start On-Screen Takeofftrade 17

System Requirements 9

Takeoff 19 27

Takeoff Toolbar 70 71

Takeoff Toolbar 12

Template Files 23

TIF (Group4) 9

Tool Toolbar 12 68

Toolbar 67

Toolbars 12

View Toolbar 12 69

Viewing Toolbars 12

Worksheet 20

Zone Conditions 33

Zoom Toolbar 12 69

  • On-Screen Takeoff Lite
  • Table of Contents
  • Section 1 - Introduction
  • Section 2 - Setup
  • Section 3 - Toolbars and Menus
  • Section 4 - Features
  • Section 5 - Projects
  • Section 6 - Conditions and Takeoff
  • Section 7 - Printing and Exporting
  • Section 8 - Advanced Features
  • Section 9 - Saving and Exiting
  • Appendix I - Installing Your Digitizer
  • Appendix II - Toolbar Items
  • Appendix III - Loading Plans from a Dodge CD
  • Appendix IV - Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer
  • Appendix V - Frequently Asked Questions
  • Index

Appendix I Installing Your Digitizer

66

Testing the Digitizer Drivers Before running OST you may test the digitizer by moving the stylus around on the digitizer pad it should move the mouse cursor (if mouse emulation is enabled)

If the digitizer does not move the mouse cursor on the screen

The superset codes may need to be reset Reset the superset codes by touching on the border of the digitizer with the stylus The digitizer should beep several times

The digitizer may not be communicating with the computer Be sure the COM port selected is correct Be sure the COM port selected is correct If you are not able to get the digitizer to move the mouse cursor you need to call GTCO technical support for help

Note The Mouse Emulation is not required for On-Screen Takeoff to work properly It is used only for the Template functionality if the digitizer is moving the cursor the wrong direction (up instead of sideways or vice-versa)

Click the L-shaped arrow symbol on the digitizer with the stylus

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

67

Appendix II Toolbar Items Main Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

68

Tool Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

69

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

70

Navigate Toolbar (Continued)

Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

71

Takeoff Toolbar (Continued)

Image Toolbar

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

72

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

This section will detail how to load plans from a F W Dodge CD-ROM into an On-Screen Takeoff project file ready for takeoffs

Dodge files may be added to the Project Properties dialog However loading the files in that way will load the files by number rather than name description If you want to load one page only from your Dodge CD You will have to rename the page to display the name rather than number of the file

To load plan files from a Dodge CD so that the files load sequentially by file number but are displayed by name rather than by number within your project follow the instructions below

Opening a Dodge project from a CD-ROM 1 Insert the CD into the drive 2 Choose File gt Custom 3 Choose Dodge Plans Project (plansdat) as the file type 4 Select the appropriate file type by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the Files of type

field 5 In the Look in field access your drive paths by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the

field then

Navigate to your CD-ROM drive Open the data folder and Open the Projects folder

6 Select the desired project and open its folder 7 Open the plansdat file 8 All the images will come in sequenced correctly for that job along with the full descriptions

(names) of each page If there is not a plans folder in the project folder then plans do not exist for that project on the CD Opening the plansdat file will yield an empty project

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

73

Appendix IV Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer The On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer is a limited version of On Center Softwarersquos commercial takeoff software If your status bar located at the very bottom of the main window says View Mode in the lower left-hand corner then you are using the Plan Viewer You can use the plan viewer to

View CD-based amp converted CAD drawings

View a previously created OST file and associated drawings

Download electronic plans online

Navigate through drawings

Quickly Takeoff linearsareas and counts

Zoom in to view the plan better

Print drawings directly from the viewer

Viewing an On-Screen Takeoff Project File

1 To open an OST file that was previously created with of On-Screen Takeoff 2 Select File gt Open 3 An Open dialog will appear if you do not see the OST file you are looking for select the

Look In drop down arrow 4 A drop down menu will appear listing the various folders drives and mapped drives located

on your computer select the correct drive or folder location and continue to browse to the location of your OST file

5 When you see your OST file double-click it to open it 6 Any takeoff and drawings should appear on the Image tab view

If you do not see the drawings but do see the colored takeoff layer the drawings may

not be located in the same place they were originally saved at Go to File gt Project Properties and check the Image File path for each listed page If the image file path is pointing to a CD drive make sure the CD is inside the CR-ROM

Downloading Electronic Plans If your Online Plan Service provides a special file format (OSX) required to use this feature of our plan viewer you can immediately downloaded all electronic plans of a project directly from our viewer

Most Plan Room web sites will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff when a request to download plans is made Your particular Plan Room may differ in operation so please contact the provider directly with questions on using the site

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

74

When you request to download or open a project file from a Plan Room you will usually have the open to open or save an OSX file Choosing open will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff Alternately you may choose to save the file to a local hard drive After you have saved the file either double-click it to launch On-Screen Takeoff or open the OSX file using On-Screen Takeoff by clicking File then Open and locating the file on your hard drive You will need to change the file type to OSX

After the OSX file is opened you will see an additional tab appear in the Conditions List window called Pages

The Pages tab shows the hierarchy of your project Gray file icons represent pages that have not been downloaded and blue icons represents pages that have been downloaded

To download a page simply double-click the page icon

If you wish to select a group of pages to download you can use the Ctrl or Shift key to multiple select them then click the Download button

If you wish to download all pages at once click the Download All button

Downloaded pages will now appear in the Project Properties dialog in the same order in which they appear in the Pages tab

Creating Quick Takeoffs With On-Screen Takeoff you can create quick takeoffs to measure quantities even if you dont have the full version of our program However using the Quick Takeoff functionality shows you just a fraction of what the full version can do

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar is located at the top of the image view It has three buttons designated for three types of takeoffs Linear Area and Count The Quantity drop down list will show secondary quantities for Linears and Areas The Units drop down allows you to select how you want your quantities displayed Feet Inches Yards Millimeters and Meters

NOTE Every time change the type of takeoff you are performing (switching from Area to Linear for example) the previous quantities and takeoff objects will disappear They will also disappear when you changes pages

NOTE You can use the Dimension Tool to basically measure the distance between two points or linears The distance will display on the status bar at the bottom of the application

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

75

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions General

Where is On-Screen Takeoff installed on my computer

Typically it is installed in CProgram FilesOn-Screen Takeoff

In Explorer how do I recognize On-Screen Takeoff file types

On-Screen Takeoff data is stored in a single file per job lsquojob name OSTrsquo On-Screen Takeoff templates are stored as lsquotemplate nameTPOrsquo

Can only one project at a time be open

Yes For that reason opening another project automatically closes the project on screen You will be asked to save any changes

Is only one scale allowed per page What about on drawings that have multiple detail sections on a page and each of those drawings have different scales

Yes For pages with drawings of different scales copy the drawing to another project page and set the appropriate scale

I cannot perform backout on an area that is along a linear

As a workaround use the On-Screen Takeoff layers feature to help you with this issue Electronic Images

How do I start a project from drawings that have been scanned and written to a CD-ROM

Open a new project Select File gt Project Properties and select Auto Add Navigate to your CD and the appropriate folder and select any image file in that location Click Open All files in the location will load into your project Recommended that images are copied from CD to hard drive for performance

If I get a disk of drawings in AutoCAD format (R13 or R14) can I read them in On-Screen Takeoff

Yes On-Screen Takeoff now reads DWG DXF and many other format that are saved with AutoCAD

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

76

When I click on the all pages button what is supposed to happen Currently nothing seems to change when I click on that button

The All Pages button is used to apply the Darken and Enhance Plans feature to all pages in the project (as opposed to only the current page on screen)

Is there a way to deduct a large skylight from an area condition

Yes with the related area condition selected in the Takeoff Dock bar unselect the Backout button on the Takeoff Toolbar then draw the Backout area The area quantity will be deducted from the related condition object and the linear measurement of the Backout perimeter will be added

Digitizer Issues

How do I connect a Digitizer to the computer

See Appendix I Connecting a Digitizer

The Place Template menu choice is disabled

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or the digitizer or the digitzer drivers are not installed

It wonrsquot let me select the Set Takeoff Area menu choice

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or no job is open a digitizer is not installed or the drivers are not installed

The digitizer stylus is not moving the cursor or crosshairs

Click S-0-1 superset on the digitizer

How do I convert my old GTCO Digitizer to work with On- Screen Takeofftrade

Call GTCO and they may be able to reconfigure your digitizer to be compatible with On-Screen Takeoff

Printing Issues Which Printers work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible printers include On-Screen Takeoff Hewlett Packard Epson and Canon printers If you are having printer difficulties please contact support and specify the type of printer along with other pertinent information Contact support at wwwoncentercomsupport or email supportoncentercom

Which Plotters work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible Plotters include Hewlett Packard DesignJet plotters and the EnCAD Cadjet II If you are having plotter difficulties please contact support and specify the type of plotter concerned

ViewingDisplay I can no longer see my condition list How do I get it back

The toolbars and Dock bars can be turned on and off through the View gt Toolbars menu options

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

77

This is also accessible by right-clicking in the toolbar area and selecting (or deselecting) a toolbar listed

I cannot view my folders in the condition list

Right-click in the Takeoff Dock barcondition list area and select Show Tree to display your folders

My Status Bar reads Viewer Mode and I am unable to draw conditions

On-Screen Takeoff needs to be Authorized Or you need to purchase an upgrade Click the Perform Advanced Takeoff button on the main toolbar

I hid a Dock bar and when I selected to view it again it appeared alongside the other Dock

bar instead of stacked on top of it How do I fix it

Pick up the Dock bar by clicking on the bar at the top and continuing to hold down the mouse button drag the Dock bar over the other one It will resize and appear stacked with the other

When I open image files from a CD the images are all upside down How do I get them right

side up

To flip pages from top to bottom follow the steps below 1 Click the All Pages button on the Image Toolbar (All Pages is engaged when the button

is not clicked) 2 Click the Flip Horizontal button on the Image Toolbar 3 Click the All Pages button again to disengage

Templates How do I create a Template

Follow the steps below 1 Create a typical project 2 Choose File gt Save As 3 Choose On-Screen Takeoff Template Files as the file type to save 4 Name the file This will save all of the condition setups as well as the layers for the

project

How do I create a new project from a template

Follow the steps below 1 Choose File gt New 2 Select a template from those listed in the New dialog This will open a new project with

conditions and layers saved from a previous project but no pages or takeoff

78

INDEX

Area Conditions 32

Area Objects 57

Auto Scrolling 20

Auto-save 63

Backout Mode 41

Calculation Method 60

Conditions 29

Configuration 60

Contents Tab 6

Continuous Mode 38

Count Conditions 33

Count Objects 57

Digitizer 10 65 76

Docking Toolbars 13

Dodge CD 72

Drawing 27 37

DropRun Count 55

Environment 18

Exiting 63

Exporting 49

Features 16

Font 61

Frequently Asked Questions 75

Grid 40

Help File 5

Hiding Toolbars 13

Hot Links 21

Image 19 59

Image files 9

Image Toolbar 12 71

Images 75

Index Tab 6

Layers 43

Linear Conditions 31

Linear Objects 56

Main Toolbar 12 67

Menus 14

Moving Toolbars 13

Navigate Toolbar 12 69

Navigating 20

On-Screen Takeofftrade 2

Page 59 61

Pages 20 25 28

Plan Viewer 73

Plans 26

Printing 47 76

Project Properties 25

Projects 22

Quick Start Video 18

Resizing Toolbars 13

Roping 54

Saving 63

Scale 28

Search Tab 7

Selecting Objects 42

Setup 8

Start On-Screen Takeofftrade 17

System Requirements 9

Takeoff 19 27

Takeoff Toolbar 70 71

Takeoff Toolbar 12

Template Files 23

TIF (Group4) 9

Tool Toolbar 12 68

Toolbar 67

Toolbars 12

View Toolbar 12 69

Viewing Toolbars 12

Worksheet 20

Zone Conditions 33

Zoom Toolbar 12 69

  • On-Screen Takeoff Lite
  • Table of Contents
  • Section 1 - Introduction
  • Section 2 - Setup
  • Section 3 - Toolbars and Menus
  • Section 4 - Features
  • Section 5 - Projects
  • Section 6 - Conditions and Takeoff
  • Section 7 - Printing and Exporting
  • Section 8 - Advanced Features
  • Section 9 - Saving and Exiting
  • Appendix I - Installing Your Digitizer
  • Appendix II - Toolbar Items
  • Appendix III - Loading Plans from a Dodge CD
  • Appendix IV - Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer
  • Appendix V - Frequently Asked Questions
  • Index

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

67

Appendix II Toolbar Items Main Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

68

Tool Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

69

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

70

Navigate Toolbar (Continued)

Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

71

Takeoff Toolbar (Continued)

Image Toolbar

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

72

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

This section will detail how to load plans from a F W Dodge CD-ROM into an On-Screen Takeoff project file ready for takeoffs

Dodge files may be added to the Project Properties dialog However loading the files in that way will load the files by number rather than name description If you want to load one page only from your Dodge CD You will have to rename the page to display the name rather than number of the file

To load plan files from a Dodge CD so that the files load sequentially by file number but are displayed by name rather than by number within your project follow the instructions below

Opening a Dodge project from a CD-ROM 1 Insert the CD into the drive 2 Choose File gt Custom 3 Choose Dodge Plans Project (plansdat) as the file type 4 Select the appropriate file type by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the Files of type

field 5 In the Look in field access your drive paths by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the

field then

Navigate to your CD-ROM drive Open the data folder and Open the Projects folder

6 Select the desired project and open its folder 7 Open the plansdat file 8 All the images will come in sequenced correctly for that job along with the full descriptions

(names) of each page If there is not a plans folder in the project folder then plans do not exist for that project on the CD Opening the plansdat file will yield an empty project

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

73

Appendix IV Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer The On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer is a limited version of On Center Softwarersquos commercial takeoff software If your status bar located at the very bottom of the main window says View Mode in the lower left-hand corner then you are using the Plan Viewer You can use the plan viewer to

View CD-based amp converted CAD drawings

View a previously created OST file and associated drawings

Download electronic plans online

Navigate through drawings

Quickly Takeoff linearsareas and counts

Zoom in to view the plan better

Print drawings directly from the viewer

Viewing an On-Screen Takeoff Project File

1 To open an OST file that was previously created with of On-Screen Takeoff 2 Select File gt Open 3 An Open dialog will appear if you do not see the OST file you are looking for select the

Look In drop down arrow 4 A drop down menu will appear listing the various folders drives and mapped drives located

on your computer select the correct drive or folder location and continue to browse to the location of your OST file

5 When you see your OST file double-click it to open it 6 Any takeoff and drawings should appear on the Image tab view

If you do not see the drawings but do see the colored takeoff layer the drawings may

not be located in the same place they were originally saved at Go to File gt Project Properties and check the Image File path for each listed page If the image file path is pointing to a CD drive make sure the CD is inside the CR-ROM

Downloading Electronic Plans If your Online Plan Service provides a special file format (OSX) required to use this feature of our plan viewer you can immediately downloaded all electronic plans of a project directly from our viewer

Most Plan Room web sites will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff when a request to download plans is made Your particular Plan Room may differ in operation so please contact the provider directly with questions on using the site

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

74

When you request to download or open a project file from a Plan Room you will usually have the open to open or save an OSX file Choosing open will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff Alternately you may choose to save the file to a local hard drive After you have saved the file either double-click it to launch On-Screen Takeoff or open the OSX file using On-Screen Takeoff by clicking File then Open and locating the file on your hard drive You will need to change the file type to OSX

After the OSX file is opened you will see an additional tab appear in the Conditions List window called Pages

The Pages tab shows the hierarchy of your project Gray file icons represent pages that have not been downloaded and blue icons represents pages that have been downloaded

To download a page simply double-click the page icon

If you wish to select a group of pages to download you can use the Ctrl or Shift key to multiple select them then click the Download button

If you wish to download all pages at once click the Download All button

Downloaded pages will now appear in the Project Properties dialog in the same order in which they appear in the Pages tab

Creating Quick Takeoffs With On-Screen Takeoff you can create quick takeoffs to measure quantities even if you dont have the full version of our program However using the Quick Takeoff functionality shows you just a fraction of what the full version can do

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar is located at the top of the image view It has three buttons designated for three types of takeoffs Linear Area and Count The Quantity drop down list will show secondary quantities for Linears and Areas The Units drop down allows you to select how you want your quantities displayed Feet Inches Yards Millimeters and Meters

NOTE Every time change the type of takeoff you are performing (switching from Area to Linear for example) the previous quantities and takeoff objects will disappear They will also disappear when you changes pages

NOTE You can use the Dimension Tool to basically measure the distance between two points or linears The distance will display on the status bar at the bottom of the application

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

75

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions General

Where is On-Screen Takeoff installed on my computer

Typically it is installed in CProgram FilesOn-Screen Takeoff

In Explorer how do I recognize On-Screen Takeoff file types

On-Screen Takeoff data is stored in a single file per job lsquojob name OSTrsquo On-Screen Takeoff templates are stored as lsquotemplate nameTPOrsquo

Can only one project at a time be open

Yes For that reason opening another project automatically closes the project on screen You will be asked to save any changes

Is only one scale allowed per page What about on drawings that have multiple detail sections on a page and each of those drawings have different scales

Yes For pages with drawings of different scales copy the drawing to another project page and set the appropriate scale

I cannot perform backout on an area that is along a linear

As a workaround use the On-Screen Takeoff layers feature to help you with this issue Electronic Images

How do I start a project from drawings that have been scanned and written to a CD-ROM

Open a new project Select File gt Project Properties and select Auto Add Navigate to your CD and the appropriate folder and select any image file in that location Click Open All files in the location will load into your project Recommended that images are copied from CD to hard drive for performance

If I get a disk of drawings in AutoCAD format (R13 or R14) can I read them in On-Screen Takeoff

Yes On-Screen Takeoff now reads DWG DXF and many other format that are saved with AutoCAD

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

76

When I click on the all pages button what is supposed to happen Currently nothing seems to change when I click on that button

The All Pages button is used to apply the Darken and Enhance Plans feature to all pages in the project (as opposed to only the current page on screen)

Is there a way to deduct a large skylight from an area condition

Yes with the related area condition selected in the Takeoff Dock bar unselect the Backout button on the Takeoff Toolbar then draw the Backout area The area quantity will be deducted from the related condition object and the linear measurement of the Backout perimeter will be added

Digitizer Issues

How do I connect a Digitizer to the computer

See Appendix I Connecting a Digitizer

The Place Template menu choice is disabled

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or the digitizer or the digitzer drivers are not installed

It wonrsquot let me select the Set Takeoff Area menu choice

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or no job is open a digitizer is not installed or the drivers are not installed

The digitizer stylus is not moving the cursor or crosshairs

Click S-0-1 superset on the digitizer

How do I convert my old GTCO Digitizer to work with On- Screen Takeofftrade

Call GTCO and they may be able to reconfigure your digitizer to be compatible with On-Screen Takeoff

Printing Issues Which Printers work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible printers include On-Screen Takeoff Hewlett Packard Epson and Canon printers If you are having printer difficulties please contact support and specify the type of printer along with other pertinent information Contact support at wwwoncentercomsupport or email supportoncentercom

Which Plotters work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible Plotters include Hewlett Packard DesignJet plotters and the EnCAD Cadjet II If you are having plotter difficulties please contact support and specify the type of plotter concerned

ViewingDisplay I can no longer see my condition list How do I get it back

The toolbars and Dock bars can be turned on and off through the View gt Toolbars menu options

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

77

This is also accessible by right-clicking in the toolbar area and selecting (or deselecting) a toolbar listed

I cannot view my folders in the condition list

Right-click in the Takeoff Dock barcondition list area and select Show Tree to display your folders

My Status Bar reads Viewer Mode and I am unable to draw conditions

On-Screen Takeoff needs to be Authorized Or you need to purchase an upgrade Click the Perform Advanced Takeoff button on the main toolbar

I hid a Dock bar and when I selected to view it again it appeared alongside the other Dock

bar instead of stacked on top of it How do I fix it

Pick up the Dock bar by clicking on the bar at the top and continuing to hold down the mouse button drag the Dock bar over the other one It will resize and appear stacked with the other

When I open image files from a CD the images are all upside down How do I get them right

side up

To flip pages from top to bottom follow the steps below 1 Click the All Pages button on the Image Toolbar (All Pages is engaged when the button

is not clicked) 2 Click the Flip Horizontal button on the Image Toolbar 3 Click the All Pages button again to disengage

Templates How do I create a Template

Follow the steps below 1 Create a typical project 2 Choose File gt Save As 3 Choose On-Screen Takeoff Template Files as the file type to save 4 Name the file This will save all of the condition setups as well as the layers for the

project

How do I create a new project from a template

Follow the steps below 1 Choose File gt New 2 Select a template from those listed in the New dialog This will open a new project with

conditions and layers saved from a previous project but no pages or takeoff

78

INDEX

Area Conditions 32

Area Objects 57

Auto Scrolling 20

Auto-save 63

Backout Mode 41

Calculation Method 60

Conditions 29

Configuration 60

Contents Tab 6

Continuous Mode 38

Count Conditions 33

Count Objects 57

Digitizer 10 65 76

Docking Toolbars 13

Dodge CD 72

Drawing 27 37

DropRun Count 55

Environment 18

Exiting 63

Exporting 49

Features 16

Font 61

Frequently Asked Questions 75

Grid 40

Help File 5

Hiding Toolbars 13

Hot Links 21

Image 19 59

Image files 9

Image Toolbar 12 71

Images 75

Index Tab 6

Layers 43

Linear Conditions 31

Linear Objects 56

Main Toolbar 12 67

Menus 14

Moving Toolbars 13

Navigate Toolbar 12 69

Navigating 20

On-Screen Takeofftrade 2

Page 59 61

Pages 20 25 28

Plan Viewer 73

Plans 26

Printing 47 76

Project Properties 25

Projects 22

Quick Start Video 18

Resizing Toolbars 13

Roping 54

Saving 63

Scale 28

Search Tab 7

Selecting Objects 42

Setup 8

Start On-Screen Takeofftrade 17

System Requirements 9

Takeoff 19 27

Takeoff Toolbar 70 71

Takeoff Toolbar 12

Template Files 23

TIF (Group4) 9

Tool Toolbar 12 68

Toolbar 67

Toolbars 12

View Toolbar 12 69

Viewing Toolbars 12

Worksheet 20

Zone Conditions 33

Zoom Toolbar 12 69

  • On-Screen Takeoff Lite
  • Table of Contents
  • Section 1 - Introduction
  • Section 2 - Setup
  • Section 3 - Toolbars and Menus
  • Section 4 - Features
  • Section 5 - Projects
  • Section 6 - Conditions and Takeoff
  • Section 7 - Printing and Exporting
  • Section 8 - Advanced Features
  • Section 9 - Saving and Exiting
  • Appendix I - Installing Your Digitizer
  • Appendix II - Toolbar Items
  • Appendix III - Loading Plans from a Dodge CD
  • Appendix IV - Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer
  • Appendix V - Frequently Asked Questions
  • Index

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

68

Tool Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

69

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

70

Navigate Toolbar (Continued)

Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

71

Takeoff Toolbar (Continued)

Image Toolbar

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

72

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

This section will detail how to load plans from a F W Dodge CD-ROM into an On-Screen Takeoff project file ready for takeoffs

Dodge files may be added to the Project Properties dialog However loading the files in that way will load the files by number rather than name description If you want to load one page only from your Dodge CD You will have to rename the page to display the name rather than number of the file

To load plan files from a Dodge CD so that the files load sequentially by file number but are displayed by name rather than by number within your project follow the instructions below

Opening a Dodge project from a CD-ROM 1 Insert the CD into the drive 2 Choose File gt Custom 3 Choose Dodge Plans Project (plansdat) as the file type 4 Select the appropriate file type by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the Files of type

field 5 In the Look in field access your drive paths by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the

field then

Navigate to your CD-ROM drive Open the data folder and Open the Projects folder

6 Select the desired project and open its folder 7 Open the plansdat file 8 All the images will come in sequenced correctly for that job along with the full descriptions

(names) of each page If there is not a plans folder in the project folder then plans do not exist for that project on the CD Opening the plansdat file will yield an empty project

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

73

Appendix IV Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer The On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer is a limited version of On Center Softwarersquos commercial takeoff software If your status bar located at the very bottom of the main window says View Mode in the lower left-hand corner then you are using the Plan Viewer You can use the plan viewer to

View CD-based amp converted CAD drawings

View a previously created OST file and associated drawings

Download electronic plans online

Navigate through drawings

Quickly Takeoff linearsareas and counts

Zoom in to view the plan better

Print drawings directly from the viewer

Viewing an On-Screen Takeoff Project File

1 To open an OST file that was previously created with of On-Screen Takeoff 2 Select File gt Open 3 An Open dialog will appear if you do not see the OST file you are looking for select the

Look In drop down arrow 4 A drop down menu will appear listing the various folders drives and mapped drives located

on your computer select the correct drive or folder location and continue to browse to the location of your OST file

5 When you see your OST file double-click it to open it 6 Any takeoff and drawings should appear on the Image tab view

If you do not see the drawings but do see the colored takeoff layer the drawings may

not be located in the same place they were originally saved at Go to File gt Project Properties and check the Image File path for each listed page If the image file path is pointing to a CD drive make sure the CD is inside the CR-ROM

Downloading Electronic Plans If your Online Plan Service provides a special file format (OSX) required to use this feature of our plan viewer you can immediately downloaded all electronic plans of a project directly from our viewer

Most Plan Room web sites will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff when a request to download plans is made Your particular Plan Room may differ in operation so please contact the provider directly with questions on using the site

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

74

When you request to download or open a project file from a Plan Room you will usually have the open to open or save an OSX file Choosing open will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff Alternately you may choose to save the file to a local hard drive After you have saved the file either double-click it to launch On-Screen Takeoff or open the OSX file using On-Screen Takeoff by clicking File then Open and locating the file on your hard drive You will need to change the file type to OSX

After the OSX file is opened you will see an additional tab appear in the Conditions List window called Pages

The Pages tab shows the hierarchy of your project Gray file icons represent pages that have not been downloaded and blue icons represents pages that have been downloaded

To download a page simply double-click the page icon

If you wish to select a group of pages to download you can use the Ctrl or Shift key to multiple select them then click the Download button

If you wish to download all pages at once click the Download All button

Downloaded pages will now appear in the Project Properties dialog in the same order in which they appear in the Pages tab

Creating Quick Takeoffs With On-Screen Takeoff you can create quick takeoffs to measure quantities even if you dont have the full version of our program However using the Quick Takeoff functionality shows you just a fraction of what the full version can do

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar is located at the top of the image view It has three buttons designated for three types of takeoffs Linear Area and Count The Quantity drop down list will show secondary quantities for Linears and Areas The Units drop down allows you to select how you want your quantities displayed Feet Inches Yards Millimeters and Meters

NOTE Every time change the type of takeoff you are performing (switching from Area to Linear for example) the previous quantities and takeoff objects will disappear They will also disappear when you changes pages

NOTE You can use the Dimension Tool to basically measure the distance between two points or linears The distance will display on the status bar at the bottom of the application

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

75

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions General

Where is On-Screen Takeoff installed on my computer

Typically it is installed in CProgram FilesOn-Screen Takeoff

In Explorer how do I recognize On-Screen Takeoff file types

On-Screen Takeoff data is stored in a single file per job lsquojob name OSTrsquo On-Screen Takeoff templates are stored as lsquotemplate nameTPOrsquo

Can only one project at a time be open

Yes For that reason opening another project automatically closes the project on screen You will be asked to save any changes

Is only one scale allowed per page What about on drawings that have multiple detail sections on a page and each of those drawings have different scales

Yes For pages with drawings of different scales copy the drawing to another project page and set the appropriate scale

I cannot perform backout on an area that is along a linear

As a workaround use the On-Screen Takeoff layers feature to help you with this issue Electronic Images

How do I start a project from drawings that have been scanned and written to a CD-ROM

Open a new project Select File gt Project Properties and select Auto Add Navigate to your CD and the appropriate folder and select any image file in that location Click Open All files in the location will load into your project Recommended that images are copied from CD to hard drive for performance

If I get a disk of drawings in AutoCAD format (R13 or R14) can I read them in On-Screen Takeoff

Yes On-Screen Takeoff now reads DWG DXF and many other format that are saved with AutoCAD

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

76

When I click on the all pages button what is supposed to happen Currently nothing seems to change when I click on that button

The All Pages button is used to apply the Darken and Enhance Plans feature to all pages in the project (as opposed to only the current page on screen)

Is there a way to deduct a large skylight from an area condition

Yes with the related area condition selected in the Takeoff Dock bar unselect the Backout button on the Takeoff Toolbar then draw the Backout area The area quantity will be deducted from the related condition object and the linear measurement of the Backout perimeter will be added

Digitizer Issues

How do I connect a Digitizer to the computer

See Appendix I Connecting a Digitizer

The Place Template menu choice is disabled

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or the digitizer or the digitzer drivers are not installed

It wonrsquot let me select the Set Takeoff Area menu choice

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or no job is open a digitizer is not installed or the drivers are not installed

The digitizer stylus is not moving the cursor or crosshairs

Click S-0-1 superset on the digitizer

How do I convert my old GTCO Digitizer to work with On- Screen Takeofftrade

Call GTCO and they may be able to reconfigure your digitizer to be compatible with On-Screen Takeoff

Printing Issues Which Printers work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible printers include On-Screen Takeoff Hewlett Packard Epson and Canon printers If you are having printer difficulties please contact support and specify the type of printer along with other pertinent information Contact support at wwwoncentercomsupport or email supportoncentercom

Which Plotters work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible Plotters include Hewlett Packard DesignJet plotters and the EnCAD Cadjet II If you are having plotter difficulties please contact support and specify the type of plotter concerned

ViewingDisplay I can no longer see my condition list How do I get it back

The toolbars and Dock bars can be turned on and off through the View gt Toolbars menu options

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

77

This is also accessible by right-clicking in the toolbar area and selecting (or deselecting) a toolbar listed

I cannot view my folders in the condition list

Right-click in the Takeoff Dock barcondition list area and select Show Tree to display your folders

My Status Bar reads Viewer Mode and I am unable to draw conditions

On-Screen Takeoff needs to be Authorized Or you need to purchase an upgrade Click the Perform Advanced Takeoff button on the main toolbar

I hid a Dock bar and when I selected to view it again it appeared alongside the other Dock

bar instead of stacked on top of it How do I fix it

Pick up the Dock bar by clicking on the bar at the top and continuing to hold down the mouse button drag the Dock bar over the other one It will resize and appear stacked with the other

When I open image files from a CD the images are all upside down How do I get them right

side up

To flip pages from top to bottom follow the steps below 1 Click the All Pages button on the Image Toolbar (All Pages is engaged when the button

is not clicked) 2 Click the Flip Horizontal button on the Image Toolbar 3 Click the All Pages button again to disengage

Templates How do I create a Template

Follow the steps below 1 Create a typical project 2 Choose File gt Save As 3 Choose On-Screen Takeoff Template Files as the file type to save 4 Name the file This will save all of the condition setups as well as the layers for the

project

How do I create a new project from a template

Follow the steps below 1 Choose File gt New 2 Select a template from those listed in the New dialog This will open a new project with

conditions and layers saved from a previous project but no pages or takeoff

78

INDEX

Area Conditions 32

Area Objects 57

Auto Scrolling 20

Auto-save 63

Backout Mode 41

Calculation Method 60

Conditions 29

Configuration 60

Contents Tab 6

Continuous Mode 38

Count Conditions 33

Count Objects 57

Digitizer 10 65 76

Docking Toolbars 13

Dodge CD 72

Drawing 27 37

DropRun Count 55

Environment 18

Exiting 63

Exporting 49

Features 16

Font 61

Frequently Asked Questions 75

Grid 40

Help File 5

Hiding Toolbars 13

Hot Links 21

Image 19 59

Image files 9

Image Toolbar 12 71

Images 75

Index Tab 6

Layers 43

Linear Conditions 31

Linear Objects 56

Main Toolbar 12 67

Menus 14

Moving Toolbars 13

Navigate Toolbar 12 69

Navigating 20

On-Screen Takeofftrade 2

Page 59 61

Pages 20 25 28

Plan Viewer 73

Plans 26

Printing 47 76

Project Properties 25

Projects 22

Quick Start Video 18

Resizing Toolbars 13

Roping 54

Saving 63

Scale 28

Search Tab 7

Selecting Objects 42

Setup 8

Start On-Screen Takeofftrade 17

System Requirements 9

Takeoff 19 27

Takeoff Toolbar 70 71

Takeoff Toolbar 12

Template Files 23

TIF (Group4) 9

Tool Toolbar 12 68

Toolbar 67

Toolbars 12

View Toolbar 12 69

Viewing Toolbars 12

Worksheet 20

Zone Conditions 33

Zoom Toolbar 12 69

  • On-Screen Takeoff Lite
  • Table of Contents
  • Section 1 - Introduction
  • Section 2 - Setup
  • Section 3 - Toolbars and Menus
  • Section 4 - Features
  • Section 5 - Projects
  • Section 6 - Conditions and Takeoff
  • Section 7 - Printing and Exporting
  • Section 8 - Advanced Features
  • Section 9 - Saving and Exiting
  • Appendix I - Installing Your Digitizer
  • Appendix II - Toolbar Items
  • Appendix III - Loading Plans from a Dodge CD
  • Appendix IV - Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer
  • Appendix V - Frequently Asked Questions
  • Index

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

69

Zoom Toolbar

View Toolbar

Navigate Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

70

Navigate Toolbar (Continued)

Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

71

Takeoff Toolbar (Continued)

Image Toolbar

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

72

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

This section will detail how to load plans from a F W Dodge CD-ROM into an On-Screen Takeoff project file ready for takeoffs

Dodge files may be added to the Project Properties dialog However loading the files in that way will load the files by number rather than name description If you want to load one page only from your Dodge CD You will have to rename the page to display the name rather than number of the file

To load plan files from a Dodge CD so that the files load sequentially by file number but are displayed by name rather than by number within your project follow the instructions below

Opening a Dodge project from a CD-ROM 1 Insert the CD into the drive 2 Choose File gt Custom 3 Choose Dodge Plans Project (plansdat) as the file type 4 Select the appropriate file type by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the Files of type

field 5 In the Look in field access your drive paths by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the

field then

Navigate to your CD-ROM drive Open the data folder and Open the Projects folder

6 Select the desired project and open its folder 7 Open the plansdat file 8 All the images will come in sequenced correctly for that job along with the full descriptions

(names) of each page If there is not a plans folder in the project folder then plans do not exist for that project on the CD Opening the plansdat file will yield an empty project

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

73

Appendix IV Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer The On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer is a limited version of On Center Softwarersquos commercial takeoff software If your status bar located at the very bottom of the main window says View Mode in the lower left-hand corner then you are using the Plan Viewer You can use the plan viewer to

View CD-based amp converted CAD drawings

View a previously created OST file and associated drawings

Download electronic plans online

Navigate through drawings

Quickly Takeoff linearsareas and counts

Zoom in to view the plan better

Print drawings directly from the viewer

Viewing an On-Screen Takeoff Project File

1 To open an OST file that was previously created with of On-Screen Takeoff 2 Select File gt Open 3 An Open dialog will appear if you do not see the OST file you are looking for select the

Look In drop down arrow 4 A drop down menu will appear listing the various folders drives and mapped drives located

on your computer select the correct drive or folder location and continue to browse to the location of your OST file

5 When you see your OST file double-click it to open it 6 Any takeoff and drawings should appear on the Image tab view

If you do not see the drawings but do see the colored takeoff layer the drawings may

not be located in the same place they were originally saved at Go to File gt Project Properties and check the Image File path for each listed page If the image file path is pointing to a CD drive make sure the CD is inside the CR-ROM

Downloading Electronic Plans If your Online Plan Service provides a special file format (OSX) required to use this feature of our plan viewer you can immediately downloaded all electronic plans of a project directly from our viewer

Most Plan Room web sites will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff when a request to download plans is made Your particular Plan Room may differ in operation so please contact the provider directly with questions on using the site

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

74

When you request to download or open a project file from a Plan Room you will usually have the open to open or save an OSX file Choosing open will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff Alternately you may choose to save the file to a local hard drive After you have saved the file either double-click it to launch On-Screen Takeoff or open the OSX file using On-Screen Takeoff by clicking File then Open and locating the file on your hard drive You will need to change the file type to OSX

After the OSX file is opened you will see an additional tab appear in the Conditions List window called Pages

The Pages tab shows the hierarchy of your project Gray file icons represent pages that have not been downloaded and blue icons represents pages that have been downloaded

To download a page simply double-click the page icon

If you wish to select a group of pages to download you can use the Ctrl or Shift key to multiple select them then click the Download button

If you wish to download all pages at once click the Download All button

Downloaded pages will now appear in the Project Properties dialog in the same order in which they appear in the Pages tab

Creating Quick Takeoffs With On-Screen Takeoff you can create quick takeoffs to measure quantities even if you dont have the full version of our program However using the Quick Takeoff functionality shows you just a fraction of what the full version can do

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar is located at the top of the image view It has three buttons designated for three types of takeoffs Linear Area and Count The Quantity drop down list will show secondary quantities for Linears and Areas The Units drop down allows you to select how you want your quantities displayed Feet Inches Yards Millimeters and Meters

NOTE Every time change the type of takeoff you are performing (switching from Area to Linear for example) the previous quantities and takeoff objects will disappear They will also disappear when you changes pages

NOTE You can use the Dimension Tool to basically measure the distance between two points or linears The distance will display on the status bar at the bottom of the application

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

75

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions General

Where is On-Screen Takeoff installed on my computer

Typically it is installed in CProgram FilesOn-Screen Takeoff

In Explorer how do I recognize On-Screen Takeoff file types

On-Screen Takeoff data is stored in a single file per job lsquojob name OSTrsquo On-Screen Takeoff templates are stored as lsquotemplate nameTPOrsquo

Can only one project at a time be open

Yes For that reason opening another project automatically closes the project on screen You will be asked to save any changes

Is only one scale allowed per page What about on drawings that have multiple detail sections on a page and each of those drawings have different scales

Yes For pages with drawings of different scales copy the drawing to another project page and set the appropriate scale

I cannot perform backout on an area that is along a linear

As a workaround use the On-Screen Takeoff layers feature to help you with this issue Electronic Images

How do I start a project from drawings that have been scanned and written to a CD-ROM

Open a new project Select File gt Project Properties and select Auto Add Navigate to your CD and the appropriate folder and select any image file in that location Click Open All files in the location will load into your project Recommended that images are copied from CD to hard drive for performance

If I get a disk of drawings in AutoCAD format (R13 or R14) can I read them in On-Screen Takeoff

Yes On-Screen Takeoff now reads DWG DXF and many other format that are saved with AutoCAD

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

76

When I click on the all pages button what is supposed to happen Currently nothing seems to change when I click on that button

The All Pages button is used to apply the Darken and Enhance Plans feature to all pages in the project (as opposed to only the current page on screen)

Is there a way to deduct a large skylight from an area condition

Yes with the related area condition selected in the Takeoff Dock bar unselect the Backout button on the Takeoff Toolbar then draw the Backout area The area quantity will be deducted from the related condition object and the linear measurement of the Backout perimeter will be added

Digitizer Issues

How do I connect a Digitizer to the computer

See Appendix I Connecting a Digitizer

The Place Template menu choice is disabled

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or the digitizer or the digitzer drivers are not installed

It wonrsquot let me select the Set Takeoff Area menu choice

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or no job is open a digitizer is not installed or the drivers are not installed

The digitizer stylus is not moving the cursor or crosshairs

Click S-0-1 superset on the digitizer

How do I convert my old GTCO Digitizer to work with On- Screen Takeofftrade

Call GTCO and they may be able to reconfigure your digitizer to be compatible with On-Screen Takeoff

Printing Issues Which Printers work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible printers include On-Screen Takeoff Hewlett Packard Epson and Canon printers If you are having printer difficulties please contact support and specify the type of printer along with other pertinent information Contact support at wwwoncentercomsupport or email supportoncentercom

Which Plotters work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible Plotters include Hewlett Packard DesignJet plotters and the EnCAD Cadjet II If you are having plotter difficulties please contact support and specify the type of plotter concerned

ViewingDisplay I can no longer see my condition list How do I get it back

The toolbars and Dock bars can be turned on and off through the View gt Toolbars menu options

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

77

This is also accessible by right-clicking in the toolbar area and selecting (or deselecting) a toolbar listed

I cannot view my folders in the condition list

Right-click in the Takeoff Dock barcondition list area and select Show Tree to display your folders

My Status Bar reads Viewer Mode and I am unable to draw conditions

On-Screen Takeoff needs to be Authorized Or you need to purchase an upgrade Click the Perform Advanced Takeoff button on the main toolbar

I hid a Dock bar and when I selected to view it again it appeared alongside the other Dock

bar instead of stacked on top of it How do I fix it

Pick up the Dock bar by clicking on the bar at the top and continuing to hold down the mouse button drag the Dock bar over the other one It will resize and appear stacked with the other

When I open image files from a CD the images are all upside down How do I get them right

side up

To flip pages from top to bottom follow the steps below 1 Click the All Pages button on the Image Toolbar (All Pages is engaged when the button

is not clicked) 2 Click the Flip Horizontal button on the Image Toolbar 3 Click the All Pages button again to disengage

Templates How do I create a Template

Follow the steps below 1 Create a typical project 2 Choose File gt Save As 3 Choose On-Screen Takeoff Template Files as the file type to save 4 Name the file This will save all of the condition setups as well as the layers for the

project

How do I create a new project from a template

Follow the steps below 1 Choose File gt New 2 Select a template from those listed in the New dialog This will open a new project with

conditions and layers saved from a previous project but no pages or takeoff

78

INDEX

Area Conditions 32

Area Objects 57

Auto Scrolling 20

Auto-save 63

Backout Mode 41

Calculation Method 60

Conditions 29

Configuration 60

Contents Tab 6

Continuous Mode 38

Count Conditions 33

Count Objects 57

Digitizer 10 65 76

Docking Toolbars 13

Dodge CD 72

Drawing 27 37

DropRun Count 55

Environment 18

Exiting 63

Exporting 49

Features 16

Font 61

Frequently Asked Questions 75

Grid 40

Help File 5

Hiding Toolbars 13

Hot Links 21

Image 19 59

Image files 9

Image Toolbar 12 71

Images 75

Index Tab 6

Layers 43

Linear Conditions 31

Linear Objects 56

Main Toolbar 12 67

Menus 14

Moving Toolbars 13

Navigate Toolbar 12 69

Navigating 20

On-Screen Takeofftrade 2

Page 59 61

Pages 20 25 28

Plan Viewer 73

Plans 26

Printing 47 76

Project Properties 25

Projects 22

Quick Start Video 18

Resizing Toolbars 13

Roping 54

Saving 63

Scale 28

Search Tab 7

Selecting Objects 42

Setup 8

Start On-Screen Takeofftrade 17

System Requirements 9

Takeoff 19 27

Takeoff Toolbar 70 71

Takeoff Toolbar 12

Template Files 23

TIF (Group4) 9

Tool Toolbar 12 68

Toolbar 67

Toolbars 12

View Toolbar 12 69

Viewing Toolbars 12

Worksheet 20

Zone Conditions 33

Zoom Toolbar 12 69

  • On-Screen Takeoff Lite
  • Table of Contents
  • Section 1 - Introduction
  • Section 2 - Setup
  • Section 3 - Toolbars and Menus
  • Section 4 - Features
  • Section 5 - Projects
  • Section 6 - Conditions and Takeoff
  • Section 7 - Printing and Exporting
  • Section 8 - Advanced Features
  • Section 9 - Saving and Exiting
  • Appendix I - Installing Your Digitizer
  • Appendix II - Toolbar Items
  • Appendix III - Loading Plans from a Dodge CD
  • Appendix IV - Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer
  • Appendix V - Frequently Asked Questions
  • Index

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

70

Navigate Toolbar (Continued)

Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

71

Takeoff Toolbar (Continued)

Image Toolbar

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

72

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

This section will detail how to load plans from a F W Dodge CD-ROM into an On-Screen Takeoff project file ready for takeoffs

Dodge files may be added to the Project Properties dialog However loading the files in that way will load the files by number rather than name description If you want to load one page only from your Dodge CD You will have to rename the page to display the name rather than number of the file

To load plan files from a Dodge CD so that the files load sequentially by file number but are displayed by name rather than by number within your project follow the instructions below

Opening a Dodge project from a CD-ROM 1 Insert the CD into the drive 2 Choose File gt Custom 3 Choose Dodge Plans Project (plansdat) as the file type 4 Select the appropriate file type by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the Files of type

field 5 In the Look in field access your drive paths by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the

field then

Navigate to your CD-ROM drive Open the data folder and Open the Projects folder

6 Select the desired project and open its folder 7 Open the plansdat file 8 All the images will come in sequenced correctly for that job along with the full descriptions

(names) of each page If there is not a plans folder in the project folder then plans do not exist for that project on the CD Opening the plansdat file will yield an empty project

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

73

Appendix IV Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer The On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer is a limited version of On Center Softwarersquos commercial takeoff software If your status bar located at the very bottom of the main window says View Mode in the lower left-hand corner then you are using the Plan Viewer You can use the plan viewer to

View CD-based amp converted CAD drawings

View a previously created OST file and associated drawings

Download electronic plans online

Navigate through drawings

Quickly Takeoff linearsareas and counts

Zoom in to view the plan better

Print drawings directly from the viewer

Viewing an On-Screen Takeoff Project File

1 To open an OST file that was previously created with of On-Screen Takeoff 2 Select File gt Open 3 An Open dialog will appear if you do not see the OST file you are looking for select the

Look In drop down arrow 4 A drop down menu will appear listing the various folders drives and mapped drives located

on your computer select the correct drive or folder location and continue to browse to the location of your OST file

5 When you see your OST file double-click it to open it 6 Any takeoff and drawings should appear on the Image tab view

If you do not see the drawings but do see the colored takeoff layer the drawings may

not be located in the same place they were originally saved at Go to File gt Project Properties and check the Image File path for each listed page If the image file path is pointing to a CD drive make sure the CD is inside the CR-ROM

Downloading Electronic Plans If your Online Plan Service provides a special file format (OSX) required to use this feature of our plan viewer you can immediately downloaded all electronic plans of a project directly from our viewer

Most Plan Room web sites will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff when a request to download plans is made Your particular Plan Room may differ in operation so please contact the provider directly with questions on using the site

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

74

When you request to download or open a project file from a Plan Room you will usually have the open to open or save an OSX file Choosing open will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff Alternately you may choose to save the file to a local hard drive After you have saved the file either double-click it to launch On-Screen Takeoff or open the OSX file using On-Screen Takeoff by clicking File then Open and locating the file on your hard drive You will need to change the file type to OSX

After the OSX file is opened you will see an additional tab appear in the Conditions List window called Pages

The Pages tab shows the hierarchy of your project Gray file icons represent pages that have not been downloaded and blue icons represents pages that have been downloaded

To download a page simply double-click the page icon

If you wish to select a group of pages to download you can use the Ctrl or Shift key to multiple select them then click the Download button

If you wish to download all pages at once click the Download All button

Downloaded pages will now appear in the Project Properties dialog in the same order in which they appear in the Pages tab

Creating Quick Takeoffs With On-Screen Takeoff you can create quick takeoffs to measure quantities even if you dont have the full version of our program However using the Quick Takeoff functionality shows you just a fraction of what the full version can do

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar is located at the top of the image view It has three buttons designated for three types of takeoffs Linear Area and Count The Quantity drop down list will show secondary quantities for Linears and Areas The Units drop down allows you to select how you want your quantities displayed Feet Inches Yards Millimeters and Meters

NOTE Every time change the type of takeoff you are performing (switching from Area to Linear for example) the previous quantities and takeoff objects will disappear They will also disappear when you changes pages

NOTE You can use the Dimension Tool to basically measure the distance between two points or linears The distance will display on the status bar at the bottom of the application

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

75

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions General

Where is On-Screen Takeoff installed on my computer

Typically it is installed in CProgram FilesOn-Screen Takeoff

In Explorer how do I recognize On-Screen Takeoff file types

On-Screen Takeoff data is stored in a single file per job lsquojob name OSTrsquo On-Screen Takeoff templates are stored as lsquotemplate nameTPOrsquo

Can only one project at a time be open

Yes For that reason opening another project automatically closes the project on screen You will be asked to save any changes

Is only one scale allowed per page What about on drawings that have multiple detail sections on a page and each of those drawings have different scales

Yes For pages with drawings of different scales copy the drawing to another project page and set the appropriate scale

I cannot perform backout on an area that is along a linear

As a workaround use the On-Screen Takeoff layers feature to help you with this issue Electronic Images

How do I start a project from drawings that have been scanned and written to a CD-ROM

Open a new project Select File gt Project Properties and select Auto Add Navigate to your CD and the appropriate folder and select any image file in that location Click Open All files in the location will load into your project Recommended that images are copied from CD to hard drive for performance

If I get a disk of drawings in AutoCAD format (R13 or R14) can I read them in On-Screen Takeoff

Yes On-Screen Takeoff now reads DWG DXF and many other format that are saved with AutoCAD

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

76

When I click on the all pages button what is supposed to happen Currently nothing seems to change when I click on that button

The All Pages button is used to apply the Darken and Enhance Plans feature to all pages in the project (as opposed to only the current page on screen)

Is there a way to deduct a large skylight from an area condition

Yes with the related area condition selected in the Takeoff Dock bar unselect the Backout button on the Takeoff Toolbar then draw the Backout area The area quantity will be deducted from the related condition object and the linear measurement of the Backout perimeter will be added

Digitizer Issues

How do I connect a Digitizer to the computer

See Appendix I Connecting a Digitizer

The Place Template menu choice is disabled

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or the digitizer or the digitzer drivers are not installed

It wonrsquot let me select the Set Takeoff Area menu choice

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or no job is open a digitizer is not installed or the drivers are not installed

The digitizer stylus is not moving the cursor or crosshairs

Click S-0-1 superset on the digitizer

How do I convert my old GTCO Digitizer to work with On- Screen Takeofftrade

Call GTCO and they may be able to reconfigure your digitizer to be compatible with On-Screen Takeoff

Printing Issues Which Printers work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible printers include On-Screen Takeoff Hewlett Packard Epson and Canon printers If you are having printer difficulties please contact support and specify the type of printer along with other pertinent information Contact support at wwwoncentercomsupport or email supportoncentercom

Which Plotters work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible Plotters include Hewlett Packard DesignJet plotters and the EnCAD Cadjet II If you are having plotter difficulties please contact support and specify the type of plotter concerned

ViewingDisplay I can no longer see my condition list How do I get it back

The toolbars and Dock bars can be turned on and off through the View gt Toolbars menu options

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

77

This is also accessible by right-clicking in the toolbar area and selecting (or deselecting) a toolbar listed

I cannot view my folders in the condition list

Right-click in the Takeoff Dock barcondition list area and select Show Tree to display your folders

My Status Bar reads Viewer Mode and I am unable to draw conditions

On-Screen Takeoff needs to be Authorized Or you need to purchase an upgrade Click the Perform Advanced Takeoff button on the main toolbar

I hid a Dock bar and when I selected to view it again it appeared alongside the other Dock

bar instead of stacked on top of it How do I fix it

Pick up the Dock bar by clicking on the bar at the top and continuing to hold down the mouse button drag the Dock bar over the other one It will resize and appear stacked with the other

When I open image files from a CD the images are all upside down How do I get them right

side up

To flip pages from top to bottom follow the steps below 1 Click the All Pages button on the Image Toolbar (All Pages is engaged when the button

is not clicked) 2 Click the Flip Horizontal button on the Image Toolbar 3 Click the All Pages button again to disengage

Templates How do I create a Template

Follow the steps below 1 Create a typical project 2 Choose File gt Save As 3 Choose On-Screen Takeoff Template Files as the file type to save 4 Name the file This will save all of the condition setups as well as the layers for the

project

How do I create a new project from a template

Follow the steps below 1 Choose File gt New 2 Select a template from those listed in the New dialog This will open a new project with

conditions and layers saved from a previous project but no pages or takeoff

78

INDEX

Area Conditions 32

Area Objects 57

Auto Scrolling 20

Auto-save 63

Backout Mode 41

Calculation Method 60

Conditions 29

Configuration 60

Contents Tab 6

Continuous Mode 38

Count Conditions 33

Count Objects 57

Digitizer 10 65 76

Docking Toolbars 13

Dodge CD 72

Drawing 27 37

DropRun Count 55

Environment 18

Exiting 63

Exporting 49

Features 16

Font 61

Frequently Asked Questions 75

Grid 40

Help File 5

Hiding Toolbars 13

Hot Links 21

Image 19 59

Image files 9

Image Toolbar 12 71

Images 75

Index Tab 6

Layers 43

Linear Conditions 31

Linear Objects 56

Main Toolbar 12 67

Menus 14

Moving Toolbars 13

Navigate Toolbar 12 69

Navigating 20

On-Screen Takeofftrade 2

Page 59 61

Pages 20 25 28

Plan Viewer 73

Plans 26

Printing 47 76

Project Properties 25

Projects 22

Quick Start Video 18

Resizing Toolbars 13

Roping 54

Saving 63

Scale 28

Search Tab 7

Selecting Objects 42

Setup 8

Start On-Screen Takeofftrade 17

System Requirements 9

Takeoff 19 27

Takeoff Toolbar 70 71

Takeoff Toolbar 12

Template Files 23

TIF (Group4) 9

Tool Toolbar 12 68

Toolbar 67

Toolbars 12

View Toolbar 12 69

Viewing Toolbars 12

Worksheet 20

Zone Conditions 33

Zoom Toolbar 12 69

  • On-Screen Takeoff Lite
  • Table of Contents
  • Section 1 - Introduction
  • Section 2 - Setup
  • Section 3 - Toolbars and Menus
  • Section 4 - Features
  • Section 5 - Projects
  • Section 6 - Conditions and Takeoff
  • Section 7 - Printing and Exporting
  • Section 8 - Advanced Features
  • Section 9 - Saving and Exiting
  • Appendix I - Installing Your Digitizer
  • Appendix II - Toolbar Items
  • Appendix III - Loading Plans from a Dodge CD
  • Appendix IV - Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer
  • Appendix V - Frequently Asked Questions
  • Index

Appendix II Toolbar Item Details

71

Takeoff Toolbar (Continued)

Image Toolbar

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

72

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

This section will detail how to load plans from a F W Dodge CD-ROM into an On-Screen Takeoff project file ready for takeoffs

Dodge files may be added to the Project Properties dialog However loading the files in that way will load the files by number rather than name description If you want to load one page only from your Dodge CD You will have to rename the page to display the name rather than number of the file

To load plan files from a Dodge CD so that the files load sequentially by file number but are displayed by name rather than by number within your project follow the instructions below

Opening a Dodge project from a CD-ROM 1 Insert the CD into the drive 2 Choose File gt Custom 3 Choose Dodge Plans Project (plansdat) as the file type 4 Select the appropriate file type by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the Files of type

field 5 In the Look in field access your drive paths by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the

field then

Navigate to your CD-ROM drive Open the data folder and Open the Projects folder

6 Select the desired project and open its folder 7 Open the plansdat file 8 All the images will come in sequenced correctly for that job along with the full descriptions

(names) of each page If there is not a plans folder in the project folder then plans do not exist for that project on the CD Opening the plansdat file will yield an empty project

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

73

Appendix IV Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer The On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer is a limited version of On Center Softwarersquos commercial takeoff software If your status bar located at the very bottom of the main window says View Mode in the lower left-hand corner then you are using the Plan Viewer You can use the plan viewer to

View CD-based amp converted CAD drawings

View a previously created OST file and associated drawings

Download electronic plans online

Navigate through drawings

Quickly Takeoff linearsareas and counts

Zoom in to view the plan better

Print drawings directly from the viewer

Viewing an On-Screen Takeoff Project File

1 To open an OST file that was previously created with of On-Screen Takeoff 2 Select File gt Open 3 An Open dialog will appear if you do not see the OST file you are looking for select the

Look In drop down arrow 4 A drop down menu will appear listing the various folders drives and mapped drives located

on your computer select the correct drive or folder location and continue to browse to the location of your OST file

5 When you see your OST file double-click it to open it 6 Any takeoff and drawings should appear on the Image tab view

If you do not see the drawings but do see the colored takeoff layer the drawings may

not be located in the same place they were originally saved at Go to File gt Project Properties and check the Image File path for each listed page If the image file path is pointing to a CD drive make sure the CD is inside the CR-ROM

Downloading Electronic Plans If your Online Plan Service provides a special file format (OSX) required to use this feature of our plan viewer you can immediately downloaded all electronic plans of a project directly from our viewer

Most Plan Room web sites will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff when a request to download plans is made Your particular Plan Room may differ in operation so please contact the provider directly with questions on using the site

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

74

When you request to download or open a project file from a Plan Room you will usually have the open to open or save an OSX file Choosing open will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff Alternately you may choose to save the file to a local hard drive After you have saved the file either double-click it to launch On-Screen Takeoff or open the OSX file using On-Screen Takeoff by clicking File then Open and locating the file on your hard drive You will need to change the file type to OSX

After the OSX file is opened you will see an additional tab appear in the Conditions List window called Pages

The Pages tab shows the hierarchy of your project Gray file icons represent pages that have not been downloaded and blue icons represents pages that have been downloaded

To download a page simply double-click the page icon

If you wish to select a group of pages to download you can use the Ctrl or Shift key to multiple select them then click the Download button

If you wish to download all pages at once click the Download All button

Downloaded pages will now appear in the Project Properties dialog in the same order in which they appear in the Pages tab

Creating Quick Takeoffs With On-Screen Takeoff you can create quick takeoffs to measure quantities even if you dont have the full version of our program However using the Quick Takeoff functionality shows you just a fraction of what the full version can do

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar is located at the top of the image view It has three buttons designated for three types of takeoffs Linear Area and Count The Quantity drop down list will show secondary quantities for Linears and Areas The Units drop down allows you to select how you want your quantities displayed Feet Inches Yards Millimeters and Meters

NOTE Every time change the type of takeoff you are performing (switching from Area to Linear for example) the previous quantities and takeoff objects will disappear They will also disappear when you changes pages

NOTE You can use the Dimension Tool to basically measure the distance between two points or linears The distance will display on the status bar at the bottom of the application

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

75

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions General

Where is On-Screen Takeoff installed on my computer

Typically it is installed in CProgram FilesOn-Screen Takeoff

In Explorer how do I recognize On-Screen Takeoff file types

On-Screen Takeoff data is stored in a single file per job lsquojob name OSTrsquo On-Screen Takeoff templates are stored as lsquotemplate nameTPOrsquo

Can only one project at a time be open

Yes For that reason opening another project automatically closes the project on screen You will be asked to save any changes

Is only one scale allowed per page What about on drawings that have multiple detail sections on a page and each of those drawings have different scales

Yes For pages with drawings of different scales copy the drawing to another project page and set the appropriate scale

I cannot perform backout on an area that is along a linear

As a workaround use the On-Screen Takeoff layers feature to help you with this issue Electronic Images

How do I start a project from drawings that have been scanned and written to a CD-ROM

Open a new project Select File gt Project Properties and select Auto Add Navigate to your CD and the appropriate folder and select any image file in that location Click Open All files in the location will load into your project Recommended that images are copied from CD to hard drive for performance

If I get a disk of drawings in AutoCAD format (R13 or R14) can I read them in On-Screen Takeoff

Yes On-Screen Takeoff now reads DWG DXF and many other format that are saved with AutoCAD

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

76

When I click on the all pages button what is supposed to happen Currently nothing seems to change when I click on that button

The All Pages button is used to apply the Darken and Enhance Plans feature to all pages in the project (as opposed to only the current page on screen)

Is there a way to deduct a large skylight from an area condition

Yes with the related area condition selected in the Takeoff Dock bar unselect the Backout button on the Takeoff Toolbar then draw the Backout area The area quantity will be deducted from the related condition object and the linear measurement of the Backout perimeter will be added

Digitizer Issues

How do I connect a Digitizer to the computer

See Appendix I Connecting a Digitizer

The Place Template menu choice is disabled

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or the digitizer or the digitzer drivers are not installed

It wonrsquot let me select the Set Takeoff Area menu choice

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or no job is open a digitizer is not installed or the drivers are not installed

The digitizer stylus is not moving the cursor or crosshairs

Click S-0-1 superset on the digitizer

How do I convert my old GTCO Digitizer to work with On- Screen Takeofftrade

Call GTCO and they may be able to reconfigure your digitizer to be compatible with On-Screen Takeoff

Printing Issues Which Printers work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible printers include On-Screen Takeoff Hewlett Packard Epson and Canon printers If you are having printer difficulties please contact support and specify the type of printer along with other pertinent information Contact support at wwwoncentercomsupport or email supportoncentercom

Which Plotters work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible Plotters include Hewlett Packard DesignJet plotters and the EnCAD Cadjet II If you are having plotter difficulties please contact support and specify the type of plotter concerned

ViewingDisplay I can no longer see my condition list How do I get it back

The toolbars and Dock bars can be turned on and off through the View gt Toolbars menu options

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

77

This is also accessible by right-clicking in the toolbar area and selecting (or deselecting) a toolbar listed

I cannot view my folders in the condition list

Right-click in the Takeoff Dock barcondition list area and select Show Tree to display your folders

My Status Bar reads Viewer Mode and I am unable to draw conditions

On-Screen Takeoff needs to be Authorized Or you need to purchase an upgrade Click the Perform Advanced Takeoff button on the main toolbar

I hid a Dock bar and when I selected to view it again it appeared alongside the other Dock

bar instead of stacked on top of it How do I fix it

Pick up the Dock bar by clicking on the bar at the top and continuing to hold down the mouse button drag the Dock bar over the other one It will resize and appear stacked with the other

When I open image files from a CD the images are all upside down How do I get them right

side up

To flip pages from top to bottom follow the steps below 1 Click the All Pages button on the Image Toolbar (All Pages is engaged when the button

is not clicked) 2 Click the Flip Horizontal button on the Image Toolbar 3 Click the All Pages button again to disengage

Templates How do I create a Template

Follow the steps below 1 Create a typical project 2 Choose File gt Save As 3 Choose On-Screen Takeoff Template Files as the file type to save 4 Name the file This will save all of the condition setups as well as the layers for the

project

How do I create a new project from a template

Follow the steps below 1 Choose File gt New 2 Select a template from those listed in the New dialog This will open a new project with

conditions and layers saved from a previous project but no pages or takeoff

78

INDEX

Area Conditions 32

Area Objects 57

Auto Scrolling 20

Auto-save 63

Backout Mode 41

Calculation Method 60

Conditions 29

Configuration 60

Contents Tab 6

Continuous Mode 38

Count Conditions 33

Count Objects 57

Digitizer 10 65 76

Docking Toolbars 13

Dodge CD 72

Drawing 27 37

DropRun Count 55

Environment 18

Exiting 63

Exporting 49

Features 16

Font 61

Frequently Asked Questions 75

Grid 40

Help File 5

Hiding Toolbars 13

Hot Links 21

Image 19 59

Image files 9

Image Toolbar 12 71

Images 75

Index Tab 6

Layers 43

Linear Conditions 31

Linear Objects 56

Main Toolbar 12 67

Menus 14

Moving Toolbars 13

Navigate Toolbar 12 69

Navigating 20

On-Screen Takeofftrade 2

Page 59 61

Pages 20 25 28

Plan Viewer 73

Plans 26

Printing 47 76

Project Properties 25

Projects 22

Quick Start Video 18

Resizing Toolbars 13

Roping 54

Saving 63

Scale 28

Search Tab 7

Selecting Objects 42

Setup 8

Start On-Screen Takeofftrade 17

System Requirements 9

Takeoff 19 27

Takeoff Toolbar 70 71

Takeoff Toolbar 12

Template Files 23

TIF (Group4) 9

Tool Toolbar 12 68

Toolbar 67

Toolbars 12

View Toolbar 12 69

Viewing Toolbars 12

Worksheet 20

Zone Conditions 33

Zoom Toolbar 12 69

  • On-Screen Takeoff Lite
  • Table of Contents
  • Section 1 - Introduction
  • Section 2 - Setup
  • Section 3 - Toolbars and Menus
  • Section 4 - Features
  • Section 5 - Projects
  • Section 6 - Conditions and Takeoff
  • Section 7 - Printing and Exporting
  • Section 8 - Advanced Features
  • Section 9 - Saving and Exiting
  • Appendix I - Installing Your Digitizer
  • Appendix II - Toolbar Items
  • Appendix III - Loading Plans from a Dodge CD
  • Appendix IV - Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer
  • Appendix V - Frequently Asked Questions
  • Index

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

72

Appendix III Loading Plans from a Dodge CD

This section will detail how to load plans from a F W Dodge CD-ROM into an On-Screen Takeoff project file ready for takeoffs

Dodge files may be added to the Project Properties dialog However loading the files in that way will load the files by number rather than name description If you want to load one page only from your Dodge CD You will have to rename the page to display the name rather than number of the file

To load plan files from a Dodge CD so that the files load sequentially by file number but are displayed by name rather than by number within your project follow the instructions below

Opening a Dodge project from a CD-ROM 1 Insert the CD into the drive 2 Choose File gt Custom 3 Choose Dodge Plans Project (plansdat) as the file type 4 Select the appropriate file type by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the Files of type

field 5 In the Look in field access your drive paths by clicking on the down arrow at the right of the

field then

Navigate to your CD-ROM drive Open the data folder and Open the Projects folder

6 Select the desired project and open its folder 7 Open the plansdat file 8 All the images will come in sequenced correctly for that job along with the full descriptions

(names) of each page If there is not a plans folder in the project folder then plans do not exist for that project on the CD Opening the plansdat file will yield an empty project

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

73

Appendix IV Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer The On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer is a limited version of On Center Softwarersquos commercial takeoff software If your status bar located at the very bottom of the main window says View Mode in the lower left-hand corner then you are using the Plan Viewer You can use the plan viewer to

View CD-based amp converted CAD drawings

View a previously created OST file and associated drawings

Download electronic plans online

Navigate through drawings

Quickly Takeoff linearsareas and counts

Zoom in to view the plan better

Print drawings directly from the viewer

Viewing an On-Screen Takeoff Project File

1 To open an OST file that was previously created with of On-Screen Takeoff 2 Select File gt Open 3 An Open dialog will appear if you do not see the OST file you are looking for select the

Look In drop down arrow 4 A drop down menu will appear listing the various folders drives and mapped drives located

on your computer select the correct drive or folder location and continue to browse to the location of your OST file

5 When you see your OST file double-click it to open it 6 Any takeoff and drawings should appear on the Image tab view

If you do not see the drawings but do see the colored takeoff layer the drawings may

not be located in the same place they were originally saved at Go to File gt Project Properties and check the Image File path for each listed page If the image file path is pointing to a CD drive make sure the CD is inside the CR-ROM

Downloading Electronic Plans If your Online Plan Service provides a special file format (OSX) required to use this feature of our plan viewer you can immediately downloaded all electronic plans of a project directly from our viewer

Most Plan Room web sites will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff when a request to download plans is made Your particular Plan Room may differ in operation so please contact the provider directly with questions on using the site

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

74

When you request to download or open a project file from a Plan Room you will usually have the open to open or save an OSX file Choosing open will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff Alternately you may choose to save the file to a local hard drive After you have saved the file either double-click it to launch On-Screen Takeoff or open the OSX file using On-Screen Takeoff by clicking File then Open and locating the file on your hard drive You will need to change the file type to OSX

After the OSX file is opened you will see an additional tab appear in the Conditions List window called Pages

The Pages tab shows the hierarchy of your project Gray file icons represent pages that have not been downloaded and blue icons represents pages that have been downloaded

To download a page simply double-click the page icon

If you wish to select a group of pages to download you can use the Ctrl or Shift key to multiple select them then click the Download button

If you wish to download all pages at once click the Download All button

Downloaded pages will now appear in the Project Properties dialog in the same order in which they appear in the Pages tab

Creating Quick Takeoffs With On-Screen Takeoff you can create quick takeoffs to measure quantities even if you dont have the full version of our program However using the Quick Takeoff functionality shows you just a fraction of what the full version can do

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar is located at the top of the image view It has three buttons designated for three types of takeoffs Linear Area and Count The Quantity drop down list will show secondary quantities for Linears and Areas The Units drop down allows you to select how you want your quantities displayed Feet Inches Yards Millimeters and Meters

NOTE Every time change the type of takeoff you are performing (switching from Area to Linear for example) the previous quantities and takeoff objects will disappear They will also disappear when you changes pages

NOTE You can use the Dimension Tool to basically measure the distance between two points or linears The distance will display on the status bar at the bottom of the application

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

75

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions General

Where is On-Screen Takeoff installed on my computer

Typically it is installed in CProgram FilesOn-Screen Takeoff

In Explorer how do I recognize On-Screen Takeoff file types

On-Screen Takeoff data is stored in a single file per job lsquojob name OSTrsquo On-Screen Takeoff templates are stored as lsquotemplate nameTPOrsquo

Can only one project at a time be open

Yes For that reason opening another project automatically closes the project on screen You will be asked to save any changes

Is only one scale allowed per page What about on drawings that have multiple detail sections on a page and each of those drawings have different scales

Yes For pages with drawings of different scales copy the drawing to another project page and set the appropriate scale

I cannot perform backout on an area that is along a linear

As a workaround use the On-Screen Takeoff layers feature to help you with this issue Electronic Images

How do I start a project from drawings that have been scanned and written to a CD-ROM

Open a new project Select File gt Project Properties and select Auto Add Navigate to your CD and the appropriate folder and select any image file in that location Click Open All files in the location will load into your project Recommended that images are copied from CD to hard drive for performance

If I get a disk of drawings in AutoCAD format (R13 or R14) can I read them in On-Screen Takeoff

Yes On-Screen Takeoff now reads DWG DXF and many other format that are saved with AutoCAD

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

76

When I click on the all pages button what is supposed to happen Currently nothing seems to change when I click on that button

The All Pages button is used to apply the Darken and Enhance Plans feature to all pages in the project (as opposed to only the current page on screen)

Is there a way to deduct a large skylight from an area condition

Yes with the related area condition selected in the Takeoff Dock bar unselect the Backout button on the Takeoff Toolbar then draw the Backout area The area quantity will be deducted from the related condition object and the linear measurement of the Backout perimeter will be added

Digitizer Issues

How do I connect a Digitizer to the computer

See Appendix I Connecting a Digitizer

The Place Template menu choice is disabled

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or the digitizer or the digitzer drivers are not installed

It wonrsquot let me select the Set Takeoff Area menu choice

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or no job is open a digitizer is not installed or the drivers are not installed

The digitizer stylus is not moving the cursor or crosshairs

Click S-0-1 superset on the digitizer

How do I convert my old GTCO Digitizer to work with On- Screen Takeofftrade

Call GTCO and they may be able to reconfigure your digitizer to be compatible with On-Screen Takeoff

Printing Issues Which Printers work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible printers include On-Screen Takeoff Hewlett Packard Epson and Canon printers If you are having printer difficulties please contact support and specify the type of printer along with other pertinent information Contact support at wwwoncentercomsupport or email supportoncentercom

Which Plotters work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible Plotters include Hewlett Packard DesignJet plotters and the EnCAD Cadjet II If you are having plotter difficulties please contact support and specify the type of plotter concerned

ViewingDisplay I can no longer see my condition list How do I get it back

The toolbars and Dock bars can be turned on and off through the View gt Toolbars menu options

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

77

This is also accessible by right-clicking in the toolbar area and selecting (or deselecting) a toolbar listed

I cannot view my folders in the condition list

Right-click in the Takeoff Dock barcondition list area and select Show Tree to display your folders

My Status Bar reads Viewer Mode and I am unable to draw conditions

On-Screen Takeoff needs to be Authorized Or you need to purchase an upgrade Click the Perform Advanced Takeoff button on the main toolbar

I hid a Dock bar and when I selected to view it again it appeared alongside the other Dock

bar instead of stacked on top of it How do I fix it

Pick up the Dock bar by clicking on the bar at the top and continuing to hold down the mouse button drag the Dock bar over the other one It will resize and appear stacked with the other

When I open image files from a CD the images are all upside down How do I get them right

side up

To flip pages from top to bottom follow the steps below 1 Click the All Pages button on the Image Toolbar (All Pages is engaged when the button

is not clicked) 2 Click the Flip Horizontal button on the Image Toolbar 3 Click the All Pages button again to disengage

Templates How do I create a Template

Follow the steps below 1 Create a typical project 2 Choose File gt Save As 3 Choose On-Screen Takeoff Template Files as the file type to save 4 Name the file This will save all of the condition setups as well as the layers for the

project

How do I create a new project from a template

Follow the steps below 1 Choose File gt New 2 Select a template from those listed in the New dialog This will open a new project with

conditions and layers saved from a previous project but no pages or takeoff

78

INDEX

Area Conditions 32

Area Objects 57

Auto Scrolling 20

Auto-save 63

Backout Mode 41

Calculation Method 60

Conditions 29

Configuration 60

Contents Tab 6

Continuous Mode 38

Count Conditions 33

Count Objects 57

Digitizer 10 65 76

Docking Toolbars 13

Dodge CD 72

Drawing 27 37

DropRun Count 55

Environment 18

Exiting 63

Exporting 49

Features 16

Font 61

Frequently Asked Questions 75

Grid 40

Help File 5

Hiding Toolbars 13

Hot Links 21

Image 19 59

Image files 9

Image Toolbar 12 71

Images 75

Index Tab 6

Layers 43

Linear Conditions 31

Linear Objects 56

Main Toolbar 12 67

Menus 14

Moving Toolbars 13

Navigate Toolbar 12 69

Navigating 20

On-Screen Takeofftrade 2

Page 59 61

Pages 20 25 28

Plan Viewer 73

Plans 26

Printing 47 76

Project Properties 25

Projects 22

Quick Start Video 18

Resizing Toolbars 13

Roping 54

Saving 63

Scale 28

Search Tab 7

Selecting Objects 42

Setup 8

Start On-Screen Takeofftrade 17

System Requirements 9

Takeoff 19 27

Takeoff Toolbar 70 71

Takeoff Toolbar 12

Template Files 23

TIF (Group4) 9

Tool Toolbar 12 68

Toolbar 67

Toolbars 12

View Toolbar 12 69

Viewing Toolbars 12

Worksheet 20

Zone Conditions 33

Zoom Toolbar 12 69

  • On-Screen Takeoff Lite
  • Table of Contents
  • Section 1 - Introduction
  • Section 2 - Setup
  • Section 3 - Toolbars and Menus
  • Section 4 - Features
  • Section 5 - Projects
  • Section 6 - Conditions and Takeoff
  • Section 7 - Printing and Exporting
  • Section 8 - Advanced Features
  • Section 9 - Saving and Exiting
  • Appendix I - Installing Your Digitizer
  • Appendix II - Toolbar Items
  • Appendix III - Loading Plans from a Dodge CD
  • Appendix IV - Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer
  • Appendix V - Frequently Asked Questions
  • Index

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

73

Appendix IV Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer The On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer is a limited version of On Center Softwarersquos commercial takeoff software If your status bar located at the very bottom of the main window says View Mode in the lower left-hand corner then you are using the Plan Viewer You can use the plan viewer to

View CD-based amp converted CAD drawings

View a previously created OST file and associated drawings

Download electronic plans online

Navigate through drawings

Quickly Takeoff linearsareas and counts

Zoom in to view the plan better

Print drawings directly from the viewer

Viewing an On-Screen Takeoff Project File

1 To open an OST file that was previously created with of On-Screen Takeoff 2 Select File gt Open 3 An Open dialog will appear if you do not see the OST file you are looking for select the

Look In drop down arrow 4 A drop down menu will appear listing the various folders drives and mapped drives located

on your computer select the correct drive or folder location and continue to browse to the location of your OST file

5 When you see your OST file double-click it to open it 6 Any takeoff and drawings should appear on the Image tab view

If you do not see the drawings but do see the colored takeoff layer the drawings may

not be located in the same place they were originally saved at Go to File gt Project Properties and check the Image File path for each listed page If the image file path is pointing to a CD drive make sure the CD is inside the CR-ROM

Downloading Electronic Plans If your Online Plan Service provides a special file format (OSX) required to use this feature of our plan viewer you can immediately downloaded all electronic plans of a project directly from our viewer

Most Plan Room web sites will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff when a request to download plans is made Your particular Plan Room may differ in operation so please contact the provider directly with questions on using the site

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

74

When you request to download or open a project file from a Plan Room you will usually have the open to open or save an OSX file Choosing open will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff Alternately you may choose to save the file to a local hard drive After you have saved the file either double-click it to launch On-Screen Takeoff or open the OSX file using On-Screen Takeoff by clicking File then Open and locating the file on your hard drive You will need to change the file type to OSX

After the OSX file is opened you will see an additional tab appear in the Conditions List window called Pages

The Pages tab shows the hierarchy of your project Gray file icons represent pages that have not been downloaded and blue icons represents pages that have been downloaded

To download a page simply double-click the page icon

If you wish to select a group of pages to download you can use the Ctrl or Shift key to multiple select them then click the Download button

If you wish to download all pages at once click the Download All button

Downloaded pages will now appear in the Project Properties dialog in the same order in which they appear in the Pages tab

Creating Quick Takeoffs With On-Screen Takeoff you can create quick takeoffs to measure quantities even if you dont have the full version of our program However using the Quick Takeoff functionality shows you just a fraction of what the full version can do

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar is located at the top of the image view It has three buttons designated for three types of takeoffs Linear Area and Count The Quantity drop down list will show secondary quantities for Linears and Areas The Units drop down allows you to select how you want your quantities displayed Feet Inches Yards Millimeters and Meters

NOTE Every time change the type of takeoff you are performing (switching from Area to Linear for example) the previous quantities and takeoff objects will disappear They will also disappear when you changes pages

NOTE You can use the Dimension Tool to basically measure the distance between two points or linears The distance will display on the status bar at the bottom of the application

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

75

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions General

Where is On-Screen Takeoff installed on my computer

Typically it is installed in CProgram FilesOn-Screen Takeoff

In Explorer how do I recognize On-Screen Takeoff file types

On-Screen Takeoff data is stored in a single file per job lsquojob name OSTrsquo On-Screen Takeoff templates are stored as lsquotemplate nameTPOrsquo

Can only one project at a time be open

Yes For that reason opening another project automatically closes the project on screen You will be asked to save any changes

Is only one scale allowed per page What about on drawings that have multiple detail sections on a page and each of those drawings have different scales

Yes For pages with drawings of different scales copy the drawing to another project page and set the appropriate scale

I cannot perform backout on an area that is along a linear

As a workaround use the On-Screen Takeoff layers feature to help you with this issue Electronic Images

How do I start a project from drawings that have been scanned and written to a CD-ROM

Open a new project Select File gt Project Properties and select Auto Add Navigate to your CD and the appropriate folder and select any image file in that location Click Open All files in the location will load into your project Recommended that images are copied from CD to hard drive for performance

If I get a disk of drawings in AutoCAD format (R13 or R14) can I read them in On-Screen Takeoff

Yes On-Screen Takeoff now reads DWG DXF and many other format that are saved with AutoCAD

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

76

When I click on the all pages button what is supposed to happen Currently nothing seems to change when I click on that button

The All Pages button is used to apply the Darken and Enhance Plans feature to all pages in the project (as opposed to only the current page on screen)

Is there a way to deduct a large skylight from an area condition

Yes with the related area condition selected in the Takeoff Dock bar unselect the Backout button on the Takeoff Toolbar then draw the Backout area The area quantity will be deducted from the related condition object and the linear measurement of the Backout perimeter will be added

Digitizer Issues

How do I connect a Digitizer to the computer

See Appendix I Connecting a Digitizer

The Place Template menu choice is disabled

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or the digitizer or the digitzer drivers are not installed

It wonrsquot let me select the Set Takeoff Area menu choice

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or no job is open a digitizer is not installed or the drivers are not installed

The digitizer stylus is not moving the cursor or crosshairs

Click S-0-1 superset on the digitizer

How do I convert my old GTCO Digitizer to work with On- Screen Takeofftrade

Call GTCO and they may be able to reconfigure your digitizer to be compatible with On-Screen Takeoff

Printing Issues Which Printers work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible printers include On-Screen Takeoff Hewlett Packard Epson and Canon printers If you are having printer difficulties please contact support and specify the type of printer along with other pertinent information Contact support at wwwoncentercomsupport or email supportoncentercom

Which Plotters work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible Plotters include Hewlett Packard DesignJet plotters and the EnCAD Cadjet II If you are having plotter difficulties please contact support and specify the type of plotter concerned

ViewingDisplay I can no longer see my condition list How do I get it back

The toolbars and Dock bars can be turned on and off through the View gt Toolbars menu options

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

77

This is also accessible by right-clicking in the toolbar area and selecting (or deselecting) a toolbar listed

I cannot view my folders in the condition list

Right-click in the Takeoff Dock barcondition list area and select Show Tree to display your folders

My Status Bar reads Viewer Mode and I am unable to draw conditions

On-Screen Takeoff needs to be Authorized Or you need to purchase an upgrade Click the Perform Advanced Takeoff button on the main toolbar

I hid a Dock bar and when I selected to view it again it appeared alongside the other Dock

bar instead of stacked on top of it How do I fix it

Pick up the Dock bar by clicking on the bar at the top and continuing to hold down the mouse button drag the Dock bar over the other one It will resize and appear stacked with the other

When I open image files from a CD the images are all upside down How do I get them right

side up

To flip pages from top to bottom follow the steps below 1 Click the All Pages button on the Image Toolbar (All Pages is engaged when the button

is not clicked) 2 Click the Flip Horizontal button on the Image Toolbar 3 Click the All Pages button again to disengage

Templates How do I create a Template

Follow the steps below 1 Create a typical project 2 Choose File gt Save As 3 Choose On-Screen Takeoff Template Files as the file type to save 4 Name the file This will save all of the condition setups as well as the layers for the

project

How do I create a new project from a template

Follow the steps below 1 Choose File gt New 2 Select a template from those listed in the New dialog This will open a new project with

conditions and layers saved from a previous project but no pages or takeoff

78

INDEX

Area Conditions 32

Area Objects 57

Auto Scrolling 20

Auto-save 63

Backout Mode 41

Calculation Method 60

Conditions 29

Configuration 60

Contents Tab 6

Continuous Mode 38

Count Conditions 33

Count Objects 57

Digitizer 10 65 76

Docking Toolbars 13

Dodge CD 72

Drawing 27 37

DropRun Count 55

Environment 18

Exiting 63

Exporting 49

Features 16

Font 61

Frequently Asked Questions 75

Grid 40

Help File 5

Hiding Toolbars 13

Hot Links 21

Image 19 59

Image files 9

Image Toolbar 12 71

Images 75

Index Tab 6

Layers 43

Linear Conditions 31

Linear Objects 56

Main Toolbar 12 67

Menus 14

Moving Toolbars 13

Navigate Toolbar 12 69

Navigating 20

On-Screen Takeofftrade 2

Page 59 61

Pages 20 25 28

Plan Viewer 73

Plans 26

Printing 47 76

Project Properties 25

Projects 22

Quick Start Video 18

Resizing Toolbars 13

Roping 54

Saving 63

Scale 28

Search Tab 7

Selecting Objects 42

Setup 8

Start On-Screen Takeofftrade 17

System Requirements 9

Takeoff 19 27

Takeoff Toolbar 70 71

Takeoff Toolbar 12

Template Files 23

TIF (Group4) 9

Tool Toolbar 12 68

Toolbar 67

Toolbars 12

View Toolbar 12 69

Viewing Toolbars 12

Worksheet 20

Zone Conditions 33

Zoom Toolbar 12 69

  • On-Screen Takeoff Lite
  • Table of Contents
  • Section 1 - Introduction
  • Section 2 - Setup
  • Section 3 - Toolbars and Menus
  • Section 4 - Features
  • Section 5 - Projects
  • Section 6 - Conditions and Takeoff
  • Section 7 - Printing and Exporting
  • Section 8 - Advanced Features
  • Section 9 - Saving and Exiting
  • Appendix I - Installing Your Digitizer
  • Appendix II - Toolbar Items
  • Appendix III - Loading Plans from a Dodge CD
  • Appendix IV - Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer
  • Appendix V - Frequently Asked Questions
  • Index

Appendix IV Using the Plan Viewer

74

When you request to download or open a project file from a Plan Room you will usually have the open to open or save an OSX file Choosing open will automatically open On-Screen Takeoff Alternately you may choose to save the file to a local hard drive After you have saved the file either double-click it to launch On-Screen Takeoff or open the OSX file using On-Screen Takeoff by clicking File then Open and locating the file on your hard drive You will need to change the file type to OSX

After the OSX file is opened you will see an additional tab appear in the Conditions List window called Pages

The Pages tab shows the hierarchy of your project Gray file icons represent pages that have not been downloaded and blue icons represents pages that have been downloaded

To download a page simply double-click the page icon

If you wish to select a group of pages to download you can use the Ctrl or Shift key to multiple select them then click the Download button

If you wish to download all pages at once click the Download All button

Downloaded pages will now appear in the Project Properties dialog in the same order in which they appear in the Pages tab

Creating Quick Takeoffs With On-Screen Takeoff you can create quick takeoffs to measure quantities even if you dont have the full version of our program However using the Quick Takeoff functionality shows you just a fraction of what the full version can do

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar is located at the top of the image view It has three buttons designated for three types of takeoffs Linear Area and Count The Quantity drop down list will show secondary quantities for Linears and Areas The Units drop down allows you to select how you want your quantities displayed Feet Inches Yards Millimeters and Meters

NOTE Every time change the type of takeoff you are performing (switching from Area to Linear for example) the previous quantities and takeoff objects will disappear They will also disappear when you changes pages

NOTE You can use the Dimension Tool to basically measure the distance between two points or linears The distance will display on the status bar at the bottom of the application

The Quick Takeoff Toolbar

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

75

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions General

Where is On-Screen Takeoff installed on my computer

Typically it is installed in CProgram FilesOn-Screen Takeoff

In Explorer how do I recognize On-Screen Takeoff file types

On-Screen Takeoff data is stored in a single file per job lsquojob name OSTrsquo On-Screen Takeoff templates are stored as lsquotemplate nameTPOrsquo

Can only one project at a time be open

Yes For that reason opening another project automatically closes the project on screen You will be asked to save any changes

Is only one scale allowed per page What about on drawings that have multiple detail sections on a page and each of those drawings have different scales

Yes For pages with drawings of different scales copy the drawing to another project page and set the appropriate scale

I cannot perform backout on an area that is along a linear

As a workaround use the On-Screen Takeoff layers feature to help you with this issue Electronic Images

How do I start a project from drawings that have been scanned and written to a CD-ROM

Open a new project Select File gt Project Properties and select Auto Add Navigate to your CD and the appropriate folder and select any image file in that location Click Open All files in the location will load into your project Recommended that images are copied from CD to hard drive for performance

If I get a disk of drawings in AutoCAD format (R13 or R14) can I read them in On-Screen Takeoff

Yes On-Screen Takeoff now reads DWG DXF and many other format that are saved with AutoCAD

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

76

When I click on the all pages button what is supposed to happen Currently nothing seems to change when I click on that button

The All Pages button is used to apply the Darken and Enhance Plans feature to all pages in the project (as opposed to only the current page on screen)

Is there a way to deduct a large skylight from an area condition

Yes with the related area condition selected in the Takeoff Dock bar unselect the Backout button on the Takeoff Toolbar then draw the Backout area The area quantity will be deducted from the related condition object and the linear measurement of the Backout perimeter will be added

Digitizer Issues

How do I connect a Digitizer to the computer

See Appendix I Connecting a Digitizer

The Place Template menu choice is disabled

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or the digitizer or the digitzer drivers are not installed

It wonrsquot let me select the Set Takeoff Area menu choice

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or no job is open a digitizer is not installed or the drivers are not installed

The digitizer stylus is not moving the cursor or crosshairs

Click S-0-1 superset on the digitizer

How do I convert my old GTCO Digitizer to work with On- Screen Takeofftrade

Call GTCO and they may be able to reconfigure your digitizer to be compatible with On-Screen Takeoff

Printing Issues Which Printers work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible printers include On-Screen Takeoff Hewlett Packard Epson and Canon printers If you are having printer difficulties please contact support and specify the type of printer along with other pertinent information Contact support at wwwoncentercomsupport or email supportoncentercom

Which Plotters work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible Plotters include Hewlett Packard DesignJet plotters and the EnCAD Cadjet II If you are having plotter difficulties please contact support and specify the type of plotter concerned

ViewingDisplay I can no longer see my condition list How do I get it back

The toolbars and Dock bars can be turned on and off through the View gt Toolbars menu options

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

77

This is also accessible by right-clicking in the toolbar area and selecting (or deselecting) a toolbar listed

I cannot view my folders in the condition list

Right-click in the Takeoff Dock barcondition list area and select Show Tree to display your folders

My Status Bar reads Viewer Mode and I am unable to draw conditions

On-Screen Takeoff needs to be Authorized Or you need to purchase an upgrade Click the Perform Advanced Takeoff button on the main toolbar

I hid a Dock bar and when I selected to view it again it appeared alongside the other Dock

bar instead of stacked on top of it How do I fix it

Pick up the Dock bar by clicking on the bar at the top and continuing to hold down the mouse button drag the Dock bar over the other one It will resize and appear stacked with the other

When I open image files from a CD the images are all upside down How do I get them right

side up

To flip pages from top to bottom follow the steps below 1 Click the All Pages button on the Image Toolbar (All Pages is engaged when the button

is not clicked) 2 Click the Flip Horizontal button on the Image Toolbar 3 Click the All Pages button again to disengage

Templates How do I create a Template

Follow the steps below 1 Create a typical project 2 Choose File gt Save As 3 Choose On-Screen Takeoff Template Files as the file type to save 4 Name the file This will save all of the condition setups as well as the layers for the

project

How do I create a new project from a template

Follow the steps below 1 Choose File gt New 2 Select a template from those listed in the New dialog This will open a new project with

conditions and layers saved from a previous project but no pages or takeoff

78

INDEX

Area Conditions 32

Area Objects 57

Auto Scrolling 20

Auto-save 63

Backout Mode 41

Calculation Method 60

Conditions 29

Configuration 60

Contents Tab 6

Continuous Mode 38

Count Conditions 33

Count Objects 57

Digitizer 10 65 76

Docking Toolbars 13

Dodge CD 72

Drawing 27 37

DropRun Count 55

Environment 18

Exiting 63

Exporting 49

Features 16

Font 61

Frequently Asked Questions 75

Grid 40

Help File 5

Hiding Toolbars 13

Hot Links 21

Image 19 59

Image files 9

Image Toolbar 12 71

Images 75

Index Tab 6

Layers 43

Linear Conditions 31

Linear Objects 56

Main Toolbar 12 67

Menus 14

Moving Toolbars 13

Navigate Toolbar 12 69

Navigating 20

On-Screen Takeofftrade 2

Page 59 61

Pages 20 25 28

Plan Viewer 73

Plans 26

Printing 47 76

Project Properties 25

Projects 22

Quick Start Video 18

Resizing Toolbars 13

Roping 54

Saving 63

Scale 28

Search Tab 7

Selecting Objects 42

Setup 8

Start On-Screen Takeofftrade 17

System Requirements 9

Takeoff 19 27

Takeoff Toolbar 70 71

Takeoff Toolbar 12

Template Files 23

TIF (Group4) 9

Tool Toolbar 12 68

Toolbar 67

Toolbars 12

View Toolbar 12 69

Viewing Toolbars 12

Worksheet 20

Zone Conditions 33

Zoom Toolbar 12 69

  • On-Screen Takeoff Lite
  • Table of Contents
  • Section 1 - Introduction
  • Section 2 - Setup
  • Section 3 - Toolbars and Menus
  • Section 4 - Features
  • Section 5 - Projects
  • Section 6 - Conditions and Takeoff
  • Section 7 - Printing and Exporting
  • Section 8 - Advanced Features
  • Section 9 - Saving and Exiting
  • Appendix I - Installing Your Digitizer
  • Appendix II - Toolbar Items
  • Appendix III - Loading Plans from a Dodge CD
  • Appendix IV - Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer
  • Appendix V - Frequently Asked Questions
  • Index

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

75

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions General

Where is On-Screen Takeoff installed on my computer

Typically it is installed in CProgram FilesOn-Screen Takeoff

In Explorer how do I recognize On-Screen Takeoff file types

On-Screen Takeoff data is stored in a single file per job lsquojob name OSTrsquo On-Screen Takeoff templates are stored as lsquotemplate nameTPOrsquo

Can only one project at a time be open

Yes For that reason opening another project automatically closes the project on screen You will be asked to save any changes

Is only one scale allowed per page What about on drawings that have multiple detail sections on a page and each of those drawings have different scales

Yes For pages with drawings of different scales copy the drawing to another project page and set the appropriate scale

I cannot perform backout on an area that is along a linear

As a workaround use the On-Screen Takeoff layers feature to help you with this issue Electronic Images

How do I start a project from drawings that have been scanned and written to a CD-ROM

Open a new project Select File gt Project Properties and select Auto Add Navigate to your CD and the appropriate folder and select any image file in that location Click Open All files in the location will load into your project Recommended that images are copied from CD to hard drive for performance

If I get a disk of drawings in AutoCAD format (R13 or R14) can I read them in On-Screen Takeoff

Yes On-Screen Takeoff now reads DWG DXF and many other format that are saved with AutoCAD

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

76

When I click on the all pages button what is supposed to happen Currently nothing seems to change when I click on that button

The All Pages button is used to apply the Darken and Enhance Plans feature to all pages in the project (as opposed to only the current page on screen)

Is there a way to deduct a large skylight from an area condition

Yes with the related area condition selected in the Takeoff Dock bar unselect the Backout button on the Takeoff Toolbar then draw the Backout area The area quantity will be deducted from the related condition object and the linear measurement of the Backout perimeter will be added

Digitizer Issues

How do I connect a Digitizer to the computer

See Appendix I Connecting a Digitizer

The Place Template menu choice is disabled

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or the digitizer or the digitzer drivers are not installed

It wonrsquot let me select the Set Takeoff Area menu choice

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or no job is open a digitizer is not installed or the drivers are not installed

The digitizer stylus is not moving the cursor or crosshairs

Click S-0-1 superset on the digitizer

How do I convert my old GTCO Digitizer to work with On- Screen Takeofftrade

Call GTCO and they may be able to reconfigure your digitizer to be compatible with On-Screen Takeoff

Printing Issues Which Printers work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible printers include On-Screen Takeoff Hewlett Packard Epson and Canon printers If you are having printer difficulties please contact support and specify the type of printer along with other pertinent information Contact support at wwwoncentercomsupport or email supportoncentercom

Which Plotters work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible Plotters include Hewlett Packard DesignJet plotters and the EnCAD Cadjet II If you are having plotter difficulties please contact support and specify the type of plotter concerned

ViewingDisplay I can no longer see my condition list How do I get it back

The toolbars and Dock bars can be turned on and off through the View gt Toolbars menu options

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

77

This is also accessible by right-clicking in the toolbar area and selecting (or deselecting) a toolbar listed

I cannot view my folders in the condition list

Right-click in the Takeoff Dock barcondition list area and select Show Tree to display your folders

My Status Bar reads Viewer Mode and I am unable to draw conditions

On-Screen Takeoff needs to be Authorized Or you need to purchase an upgrade Click the Perform Advanced Takeoff button on the main toolbar

I hid a Dock bar and when I selected to view it again it appeared alongside the other Dock

bar instead of stacked on top of it How do I fix it

Pick up the Dock bar by clicking on the bar at the top and continuing to hold down the mouse button drag the Dock bar over the other one It will resize and appear stacked with the other

When I open image files from a CD the images are all upside down How do I get them right

side up

To flip pages from top to bottom follow the steps below 1 Click the All Pages button on the Image Toolbar (All Pages is engaged when the button

is not clicked) 2 Click the Flip Horizontal button on the Image Toolbar 3 Click the All Pages button again to disengage

Templates How do I create a Template

Follow the steps below 1 Create a typical project 2 Choose File gt Save As 3 Choose On-Screen Takeoff Template Files as the file type to save 4 Name the file This will save all of the condition setups as well as the layers for the

project

How do I create a new project from a template

Follow the steps below 1 Choose File gt New 2 Select a template from those listed in the New dialog This will open a new project with

conditions and layers saved from a previous project but no pages or takeoff

78

INDEX

Area Conditions 32

Area Objects 57

Auto Scrolling 20

Auto-save 63

Backout Mode 41

Calculation Method 60

Conditions 29

Configuration 60

Contents Tab 6

Continuous Mode 38

Count Conditions 33

Count Objects 57

Digitizer 10 65 76

Docking Toolbars 13

Dodge CD 72

Drawing 27 37

DropRun Count 55

Environment 18

Exiting 63

Exporting 49

Features 16

Font 61

Frequently Asked Questions 75

Grid 40

Help File 5

Hiding Toolbars 13

Hot Links 21

Image 19 59

Image files 9

Image Toolbar 12 71

Images 75

Index Tab 6

Layers 43

Linear Conditions 31

Linear Objects 56

Main Toolbar 12 67

Menus 14

Moving Toolbars 13

Navigate Toolbar 12 69

Navigating 20

On-Screen Takeofftrade 2

Page 59 61

Pages 20 25 28

Plan Viewer 73

Plans 26

Printing 47 76

Project Properties 25

Projects 22

Quick Start Video 18

Resizing Toolbars 13

Roping 54

Saving 63

Scale 28

Search Tab 7

Selecting Objects 42

Setup 8

Start On-Screen Takeofftrade 17

System Requirements 9

Takeoff 19 27

Takeoff Toolbar 70 71

Takeoff Toolbar 12

Template Files 23

TIF (Group4) 9

Tool Toolbar 12 68

Toolbar 67

Toolbars 12

View Toolbar 12 69

Viewing Toolbars 12

Worksheet 20

Zone Conditions 33

Zoom Toolbar 12 69

  • On-Screen Takeoff Lite
  • Table of Contents
  • Section 1 - Introduction
  • Section 2 - Setup
  • Section 3 - Toolbars and Menus
  • Section 4 - Features
  • Section 5 - Projects
  • Section 6 - Conditions and Takeoff
  • Section 7 - Printing and Exporting
  • Section 8 - Advanced Features
  • Section 9 - Saving and Exiting
  • Appendix I - Installing Your Digitizer
  • Appendix II - Toolbar Items
  • Appendix III - Loading Plans from a Dodge CD
  • Appendix IV - Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer
  • Appendix V - Frequently Asked Questions
  • Index

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

76

When I click on the all pages button what is supposed to happen Currently nothing seems to change when I click on that button

The All Pages button is used to apply the Darken and Enhance Plans feature to all pages in the project (as opposed to only the current page on screen)

Is there a way to deduct a large skylight from an area condition

Yes with the related area condition selected in the Takeoff Dock bar unselect the Backout button on the Takeoff Toolbar then draw the Backout area The area quantity will be deducted from the related condition object and the linear measurement of the Backout perimeter will be added

Digitizer Issues

How do I connect a Digitizer to the computer

See Appendix I Connecting a Digitizer

The Place Template menu choice is disabled

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or the digitizer or the digitzer drivers are not installed

It wonrsquot let me select the Set Takeoff Area menu choice

On-Screen Takeoff may need to be authorized or no job is open a digitizer is not installed or the drivers are not installed

The digitizer stylus is not moving the cursor or crosshairs

Click S-0-1 superset on the digitizer

How do I convert my old GTCO Digitizer to work with On- Screen Takeofftrade

Call GTCO and they may be able to reconfigure your digitizer to be compatible with On-Screen Takeoff

Printing Issues Which Printers work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible printers include On-Screen Takeoff Hewlett Packard Epson and Canon printers If you are having printer difficulties please contact support and specify the type of printer along with other pertinent information Contact support at wwwoncentercomsupport or email supportoncentercom

Which Plotters work with On-Screen Takeoff

Compatible Plotters include Hewlett Packard DesignJet plotters and the EnCAD Cadjet II If you are having plotter difficulties please contact support and specify the type of plotter concerned

ViewingDisplay I can no longer see my condition list How do I get it back

The toolbars and Dock bars can be turned on and off through the View gt Toolbars menu options

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

77

This is also accessible by right-clicking in the toolbar area and selecting (or deselecting) a toolbar listed

I cannot view my folders in the condition list

Right-click in the Takeoff Dock barcondition list area and select Show Tree to display your folders

My Status Bar reads Viewer Mode and I am unable to draw conditions

On-Screen Takeoff needs to be Authorized Or you need to purchase an upgrade Click the Perform Advanced Takeoff button on the main toolbar

I hid a Dock bar and when I selected to view it again it appeared alongside the other Dock

bar instead of stacked on top of it How do I fix it

Pick up the Dock bar by clicking on the bar at the top and continuing to hold down the mouse button drag the Dock bar over the other one It will resize and appear stacked with the other

When I open image files from a CD the images are all upside down How do I get them right

side up

To flip pages from top to bottom follow the steps below 1 Click the All Pages button on the Image Toolbar (All Pages is engaged when the button

is not clicked) 2 Click the Flip Horizontal button on the Image Toolbar 3 Click the All Pages button again to disengage

Templates How do I create a Template

Follow the steps below 1 Create a typical project 2 Choose File gt Save As 3 Choose On-Screen Takeoff Template Files as the file type to save 4 Name the file This will save all of the condition setups as well as the layers for the

project

How do I create a new project from a template

Follow the steps below 1 Choose File gt New 2 Select a template from those listed in the New dialog This will open a new project with

conditions and layers saved from a previous project but no pages or takeoff

78

INDEX

Area Conditions 32

Area Objects 57

Auto Scrolling 20

Auto-save 63

Backout Mode 41

Calculation Method 60

Conditions 29

Configuration 60

Contents Tab 6

Continuous Mode 38

Count Conditions 33

Count Objects 57

Digitizer 10 65 76

Docking Toolbars 13

Dodge CD 72

Drawing 27 37

DropRun Count 55

Environment 18

Exiting 63

Exporting 49

Features 16

Font 61

Frequently Asked Questions 75

Grid 40

Help File 5

Hiding Toolbars 13

Hot Links 21

Image 19 59

Image files 9

Image Toolbar 12 71

Images 75

Index Tab 6

Layers 43

Linear Conditions 31

Linear Objects 56

Main Toolbar 12 67

Menus 14

Moving Toolbars 13

Navigate Toolbar 12 69

Navigating 20

On-Screen Takeofftrade 2

Page 59 61

Pages 20 25 28

Plan Viewer 73

Plans 26

Printing 47 76

Project Properties 25

Projects 22

Quick Start Video 18

Resizing Toolbars 13

Roping 54

Saving 63

Scale 28

Search Tab 7

Selecting Objects 42

Setup 8

Start On-Screen Takeofftrade 17

System Requirements 9

Takeoff 19 27

Takeoff Toolbar 70 71

Takeoff Toolbar 12

Template Files 23

TIF (Group4) 9

Tool Toolbar 12 68

Toolbar 67

Toolbars 12

View Toolbar 12 69

Viewing Toolbars 12

Worksheet 20

Zone Conditions 33

Zoom Toolbar 12 69

  • On-Screen Takeoff Lite
  • Table of Contents
  • Section 1 - Introduction
  • Section 2 - Setup
  • Section 3 - Toolbars and Menus
  • Section 4 - Features
  • Section 5 - Projects
  • Section 6 - Conditions and Takeoff
  • Section 7 - Printing and Exporting
  • Section 8 - Advanced Features
  • Section 9 - Saving and Exiting
  • Appendix I - Installing Your Digitizer
  • Appendix II - Toolbar Items
  • Appendix III - Loading Plans from a Dodge CD
  • Appendix IV - Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer
  • Appendix V - Frequently Asked Questions
  • Index

Appendix V Frequently Asked Questions

77

This is also accessible by right-clicking in the toolbar area and selecting (or deselecting) a toolbar listed

I cannot view my folders in the condition list

Right-click in the Takeoff Dock barcondition list area and select Show Tree to display your folders

My Status Bar reads Viewer Mode and I am unable to draw conditions

On-Screen Takeoff needs to be Authorized Or you need to purchase an upgrade Click the Perform Advanced Takeoff button on the main toolbar

I hid a Dock bar and when I selected to view it again it appeared alongside the other Dock

bar instead of stacked on top of it How do I fix it

Pick up the Dock bar by clicking on the bar at the top and continuing to hold down the mouse button drag the Dock bar over the other one It will resize and appear stacked with the other

When I open image files from a CD the images are all upside down How do I get them right

side up

To flip pages from top to bottom follow the steps below 1 Click the All Pages button on the Image Toolbar (All Pages is engaged when the button

is not clicked) 2 Click the Flip Horizontal button on the Image Toolbar 3 Click the All Pages button again to disengage

Templates How do I create a Template

Follow the steps below 1 Create a typical project 2 Choose File gt Save As 3 Choose On-Screen Takeoff Template Files as the file type to save 4 Name the file This will save all of the condition setups as well as the layers for the

project

How do I create a new project from a template

Follow the steps below 1 Choose File gt New 2 Select a template from those listed in the New dialog This will open a new project with

conditions and layers saved from a previous project but no pages or takeoff

78

INDEX

Area Conditions 32

Area Objects 57

Auto Scrolling 20

Auto-save 63

Backout Mode 41

Calculation Method 60

Conditions 29

Configuration 60

Contents Tab 6

Continuous Mode 38

Count Conditions 33

Count Objects 57

Digitizer 10 65 76

Docking Toolbars 13

Dodge CD 72

Drawing 27 37

DropRun Count 55

Environment 18

Exiting 63

Exporting 49

Features 16

Font 61

Frequently Asked Questions 75

Grid 40

Help File 5

Hiding Toolbars 13

Hot Links 21

Image 19 59

Image files 9

Image Toolbar 12 71

Images 75

Index Tab 6

Layers 43

Linear Conditions 31

Linear Objects 56

Main Toolbar 12 67

Menus 14

Moving Toolbars 13

Navigate Toolbar 12 69

Navigating 20

On-Screen Takeofftrade 2

Page 59 61

Pages 20 25 28

Plan Viewer 73

Plans 26

Printing 47 76

Project Properties 25

Projects 22

Quick Start Video 18

Resizing Toolbars 13

Roping 54

Saving 63

Scale 28

Search Tab 7

Selecting Objects 42

Setup 8

Start On-Screen Takeofftrade 17

System Requirements 9

Takeoff 19 27

Takeoff Toolbar 70 71

Takeoff Toolbar 12

Template Files 23

TIF (Group4) 9

Tool Toolbar 12 68

Toolbar 67

Toolbars 12

View Toolbar 12 69

Viewing Toolbars 12

Worksheet 20

Zone Conditions 33

Zoom Toolbar 12 69

  • On-Screen Takeoff Lite
  • Table of Contents
  • Section 1 - Introduction
  • Section 2 - Setup
  • Section 3 - Toolbars and Menus
  • Section 4 - Features
  • Section 5 - Projects
  • Section 6 - Conditions and Takeoff
  • Section 7 - Printing and Exporting
  • Section 8 - Advanced Features
  • Section 9 - Saving and Exiting
  • Appendix I - Installing Your Digitizer
  • Appendix II - Toolbar Items
  • Appendix III - Loading Plans from a Dodge CD
  • Appendix IV - Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer
  • Appendix V - Frequently Asked Questions
  • Index

78

INDEX

Area Conditions 32

Area Objects 57

Auto Scrolling 20

Auto-save 63

Backout Mode 41

Calculation Method 60

Conditions 29

Configuration 60

Contents Tab 6

Continuous Mode 38

Count Conditions 33

Count Objects 57

Digitizer 10 65 76

Docking Toolbars 13

Dodge CD 72

Drawing 27 37

DropRun Count 55

Environment 18

Exiting 63

Exporting 49

Features 16

Font 61

Frequently Asked Questions 75

Grid 40

Help File 5

Hiding Toolbars 13

Hot Links 21

Image 19 59

Image files 9

Image Toolbar 12 71

Images 75

Index Tab 6

Layers 43

Linear Conditions 31

Linear Objects 56

Main Toolbar 12 67

Menus 14

Moving Toolbars 13

Navigate Toolbar 12 69

Navigating 20

On-Screen Takeofftrade 2

Page 59 61

Pages 20 25 28

Plan Viewer 73

Plans 26

Printing 47 76

Project Properties 25

Projects 22

Quick Start Video 18

Resizing Toolbars 13

Roping 54

Saving 63

Scale 28

Search Tab 7

Selecting Objects 42

Setup 8

Start On-Screen Takeofftrade 17

System Requirements 9

Takeoff 19 27

Takeoff Toolbar 70 71

Takeoff Toolbar 12

Template Files 23

TIF (Group4) 9

Tool Toolbar 12 68

Toolbar 67

Toolbars 12

View Toolbar 12 69

Viewing Toolbars 12

Worksheet 20

Zone Conditions 33

Zoom Toolbar 12 69

  • On-Screen Takeoff Lite
  • Table of Contents
  • Section 1 - Introduction
  • Section 2 - Setup
  • Section 3 - Toolbars and Menus
  • Section 4 - Features
  • Section 5 - Projects
  • Section 6 - Conditions and Takeoff
  • Section 7 - Printing and Exporting
  • Section 8 - Advanced Features
  • Section 9 - Saving and Exiting
  • Appendix I - Installing Your Digitizer
  • Appendix II - Toolbar Items
  • Appendix III - Loading Plans from a Dodge CD
  • Appendix IV - Using On-Screen Takeoff Plan Viewer
  • Appendix V - Frequently Asked Questions
  • Index